A History 

of the

Rectangular

Survey System

PDF Version

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

Pdf Version modified from scans by;

NATIONAL TECHNICAL 

INFORMATIONSERVICE 

SPRINGFIELD, VA 22161 
The United States of America, 

To A L L to whom thefe prefents fhall come, Greeting: 

NOW YE, That for the confideration of K 

d&- Dollars, we have granted, and hereby do 

- the Lot numberedd- -7 

in the Townfhip, 

lumbered in the Range dCd- excepting 

Ind refevving one third Part ofall Gold, Silver, Lead and Copper Mines within the 

Fame, for future Sale or DifpoRtion : To have to 

A5 - Heirs and AfEgns for ever. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, We, the Commiffioners ofthe Board of' neafury 

have, in conformity to an Act of Congrefs ofthe Lid United States, of the 

Twenty-firR day ofApril, in the Year of our Lord, one Thoufand Seven 

Hundred and Eighty-feven, hereunto Feet our Hands and affixcd the Seal of 

the Treafury, this- day of Ad 

in the Year of our Lord, One Thoufand Seven Hundred and 

pnd of the Independence of the United States ufAmel;ca& 
Pi3 92 - 1 564 2 1 
.. 

11 
A HISTORY 

OF THE 

RECTANGULAR 

SURVEY SYSTEM 

... 

111 
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

James G. Watt, Secretary 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

Robert F. Burford, Director 

Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data 

White, C. Albert, 1926- 

A history of the rectangular survey system. 

Bibliography: p. 

Supt. of Docs. no.: I53.2:Su7/2 

1. Surveying-Public lands-United StatesHistory. 2. Surveying-Law and legislationUnited States. I. Title. 

TA521 .W47 333’ ,00973 82-451 0 

AACR2 

First printing 1983 

Second printing 1991 

For sale by Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office 

Washington, D.C. 20402 

Stock Number 024-001 1-001 78-6 

iv 
United States Department of the Interior 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20240 

IN REPLY REFER TO: 

January 1983 

Dear Reader: 

With its beginning more than two hundred years ago, the United States 

Rectangular Survey System is typically, and yet somewhat uniquely, a 

record of the American frontier spirit blended with the concept of 

government for the people. 

C. Albert White, U.S. Cadastral Surveyor, presents in this document a 

meticulous accounting of the vast story of public land surveying and 

registration. This classic research contribution is a detailed reference 

which will undoubtedly be well used by historians, land use specialists, 

surveyors, and attorneys for contemporary d ecisionmaking , understand ing , and judgments. 

Mr. White began his surveying career with the General Land Office in 1946. 

Subsequently, as both a Bureau of Land Management (BLM) and a private 

surveyor, he applied his diligent abilities to a wide range of activities 

including investigation of the durability of bearing trees, training, 

instrumentation, and refinements as well as performing hundreds of "Ground 

Pounding" land surveys. 

Al White represents the U.S. surveyor of the mid-century of 1900's - a 

bridge and integrator of the wisdom and experience of his predecessors to 

the expanding uses of latest cost effective technology in cadastral surveying. 

Bernard W. Hostrok 

Surveyor General 

V 
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 

The assistance of many persons was necessary to complete 

this work, and it would be impossible to thank them all by 

listing them here. However, acknowledgement and thanks 

are expressed to the U.S. Forest Service, National Advanced 

Resource Technology Center for their support and efforts in 

preparing a preliminary edition; to Away With Words for 

their excellent efforts in typing and editing; the Branch of 

Survey and Mapping Development, Denver Service Center, 

Bureau of Land Management for preparing numerous 

drawings and illustrations and administering the production of this publication. 

Special thanks go to Jerry Edler and Herman Weiss of the 

Denver Service Center, Branch of Survey and Mapping 

Development. 

The Washington Office, Division of Cadastral Survey, 

Bureau of Land Management provided enthusiastic support, 

and this publication has been made possible through that 

staffs special advice and cooperation. 

vi 
INTRODUCTION 

When first assigned to do an outline of the history of the 

development of the public land surveys and the social and 

economic conditions leading to the first land ordinance, my 

approach was the “usual” one: show the “changes” in the 

Instructions to Deputy Surveyors and the Manuals of Surveying Instructions. 

I soon came upon nagging questions: Why were the original townships numbered north from the Ohio River? Why 

were the sections first called lots? Why was the scheme 

changed to “sections?” How did the present system of 

numbering the sections come about? Why did the Act of 

February 11,1805, call for the intersection method of subdividing the “two-mile blocks” and extend later to the subdivision of sections? Why were lakes of “25 acres and upward” 

meandered? 

The reader should by now understand the perplexities 

which were not answered by either the Instructions or the 

Manuals. These developments did not happen by accident; 

they had to have reasons and roots. But how to find the 

answers and were the answers even available? 

I turned to my good friend Tom Tillman for advice and 

assistance, which was immediately given. He told me of the 

existence of Microcopy No. 478, which contained the letters 

from the Surveyor General Northwest of the Ohio (sent) to 

the Secretary of the Treasury and the Commissioner of the 

General Land Office; and of Sherman’s book, Peters’ book, 

and many others. He generously loaned me his collection of 

papers, and eventually told me how to obtain the Annual 

Reports of the Commissioners. We also discussed the format: 

by subject, or as a chronology? Chronology won because in the 

development, everything is cause and effect. One subject 

depends upon the other and cannot be divorced into neat little 

categories. The book is thus written in order of occurrence, 

wherever practical. Occasionally, as in legal cases, the subject is carried from inception to conclusion, but those instances are rare. 

The book was started from January through April of 1976. 

I “retired” on April 30,1976, and did not return to the Bureau 

of Land Management until August 1977. When asked to 

instruct the history of rectangular surveying at the Cadastral Surveying course (held in Arizona in 19801, I suggested 

that the book might be completed as a reference for the 

course. Permission was generously granted and I resumed 

work on the book. 

The National Archives loaned me Microcopy No. 27, which 

contains the letters sent to the Surveyors General, 1796- 

1901, as well as thousands of letters to Congressmen, surveyors and citizens. The Multnomah County Library, Portland, Oregon, most generously allowed me to borrow the 

Serial Sets, the volumes of Senate and House Documents, 

which contained the Annual Reports of the Secretary of the 

Interior and Commissioner of the General Land Office. Various offices of the Bureau of Land Management supplied me 

with copies of requested plats and field notes. Mr. Richard 

Crawford of the National Archives in Washington, D.C., supplied me with vital copies of certain documents. All of these 

are herein combined into one. Innumerable miscellaneous 

textbooks, encyclopedias, publications by other authors, 

newspapers, library and historical society references, and 

articles printed by the American Congress on Surveying and 

Mapping were used as references in the preparation of this 

book. Reference was frequently made to the original field 

notes and plats of the public land surveys. 

The intended use of this book is not that of a novel but as a 

reference for rules and policies, as well as the laws on which 

they are based. A subject is kept alive until finally laid to rest 

such as subdivision of sections or the survey of dried-up lakes. 

When a final decision is made, the subject is usually dropped. 

Some arguments have never been resolved: the use of line 

trees in establishing one sixteenth corners, the use of witness 

corners in restoring a true corner point, and the restoration of 

State boundaries which mark the boundaries of public lands. 

If the problem has never been finally resolved, the answers 

will not be found in this book. The book will not give the 

reader answers, only the precedence of what has gone before 

and why. Mineral surveys are not included. 

After 1851, the copies of letters from the Commissioner to 

the Surveyors General were kept in separate volumes; that 

is, the letters to the Surveyor General of Oregon were kept in 

the Oregon Book, to California in the California Book, and so 

on. Microcopy No. 27 contains only the letters to the Surveyors General in the States of Minnesota, Iowa, Missouri, 

Arkansas and Louisiana, and the public land States lying 

east thereof plus the letters to Surveyors and other citizens in 

the same area. Letters and Instructions pertaining to Oklahoma and Kansas after 1875 are also on Microcopy No. 27. 

The many volumes of letters to Surveyors General west of 

Iowa have not been filmed and were therefore not available to 

me in preparing this book. Those volumes would undoubtably furnish additional information, as would all the other 

records pertaining to the public land surveys now stored in 

the National Archives. But I had to stop somewhere and use 

what I had, filling in the blanks with other sources. 

The Appendix to this book includes the original Instructions to the Deputy Surveyors, circulars, important letters, 

and at least the pertinent parts of the Manuals of Surveying 

Instructions. 

It is hoped that this book will be of value to all Surveyors 

dealing with the public land survey system, not just government surveyors. May it be some value to you all. 

C. Albert White 

vii 
... 

vlll 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Page 

CHAPTERI POLITICAL AND ECONOMICEVENTSLEADING TOTHE PASSAGE OFTHE FIRST 

LAND ORDINANCE......................................................................... 1 

English Claims to America ................................................................... 2 

Land Tenure Systems ........................................................................ 5 

Types of Government ........................................................................ 8

Locating Claims ............................................................................. 9

The Western Lands .......................................................................... 9

Events During and Following the Revolutionary War ........................................... 10 

Land Ordinance of 1785 ..................................................................... 11 

The Northwest Ordinance of 1787............................................................. 15 

Summary ................................................................................... 16 

CHAPTER I1 DEVELOPMENT OF THE RECTANGULAR SYSTEM OF SURVEYS ......................... 17 

The Period 1785-1796...................................................................... 18 

The Period 1796-1812 ...................................................................... 29 

The Period 1812-1836...................................................................... 59 

The Period 1836-1849...................................................................... 96 

CHAPTER I11 THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE WITHIN THE DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR ..........113

The Period 1849-1910 ..................................................................... 114 

CHAPTER IV THE DIRECT SYSTEM TO END OF THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE ........................ 187

The Period 1910-1946..................................................................... 188 

CHAPTER V SURVEYORS GENERAL OF THE PUBLIC LANDS STATES................................. 193

Commissioners of the General Land Office ................................................... 194

Offices of Surveyors General by State .......................................................195 - 224

APPENDIX TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Page 

I. Letter and Instructions t o District Surveyors or Subdividing Sections, JaredMansfield, 

August 20, 1804.............................................................................. 231 

II. General Instructions t o Deputy Surveyors, Jared Mansfield, 1804.................................. 237 

III. Letter Instructions to Deputy Surveyors, Thomas Freeman, June 1811 ............................. 239 

IV . 

V . 

Letter; Josiah Meigs to Thomas Freeman, Surveyor General of Mississippi, March 13, 1815......... .241

Letter; Thomas Freeman to Josiah Meigs, April 29, 1815.......................................... 241

VI. Letter; Edward Tiffin to Josiah Meigs about Rector Instructions, July 26, 1815...................... 242 

VII. Instructions for General (William)Rector, July 1815.............................................. 243

VIII. Instructions for Deputy Surveyors, from Edward Tiffin, July 1815.................................. 245 

IX. Letter; Thomas Freeman to Silas Dinsmore, September 15, 1819................................... 251

X. Letter; Edward Tiffin to George Graham, September 22, 1823..................................... 255

ix 
XI. 

XI1 . 

XI11 . 

XIV . 

xv. 

XVI . 

XVII . 

XVIII . 

XIX . 

xx. 

XXI . 

XXII . 

XXIII . 

XXIV . 

xxv. 

XXVI . 

XXVII . 

XXVIII . 

XXIX . 

xxx. 

XXXI . 

XXXII . 

XXXIII . 

XXXIV . 

xxxv. 

XXXVI . 

XXXVII . 

XXXVIII . 

XXXIX . 

XL . 

XLI . 

Letter; Instructions to Edward R. Downing from John Dinsmore, March 1830....................... 256 

Letter of Instructions to Surveyors General, from Elijah Hayward, July 28, 1831.................... 257

Letter; Elijah Hayward to Gideon Fitz, October 24, 1831.......................................... 261

Instructions for Surveying in the State of Mississippi by Gideon Fitz, December 1831................263

Specimen Field Notes for State of Mississippi, by Gideon Fitz, May 1832........................... 275 

Circular to Surveyors General. about lotting sections, from Elijah Hayward, May 8, 1832. ...........281

Instruction to Deputy Surveyors in Arkansas, 1833............................................... 283

General Instructions to Deputies for Ohio, Indiana and Michigan, 1833............................. 291

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors in Illinois and Missouri, 1834............................ 301

Letter; Robert Lytle to Erastus Farnum, about subdividing sections, October 30, 1835...............312

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors in Arkansas, 1837...................................... 313

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors in Florida, 1842........................................ 321

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors in Arkansas, 1843...................................... 329

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors in Wisconsin and Iowa, 1846............................ 339

Special Instructions to John Mullett from Lucius Lyon, April 22, 1848............................. 356

Special Instructions t o Guy Carleton from Lucius Lyon, July 14, 1849.............................. 357

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors for Ohio, Indiana and Michigan, 1850.................... 359

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors in Florida, 1850........................................ 381

General Intructions to Deputy Surveyors in Wisconsin and Iowa, 1851............................. 385

Instructions t o Deputy Surveyors in Illinois and Missouri, 1856.................................... 401

Manual of Surveying Instructions t o the Surveyor General of Oregon, 1851......................... 433

Manual of Surveying Instructions, 1855.......................................................... 457

Instructions to Surveyors General. Amendments to 1855 Manual, June 1, 1864..................... 501

Circular; t o Surveyors General about Lot Numbering, July 28, 1866............................... 506

Circular No. 22, about Island Surveys, June 10, 1868............................................. 507

Circular; about Surveying Lake Beds, July 13, 1874.............................................. 508 

Circular; about Acceptance and Filing of Plats; April 17, 1879..................................... 509 

Letter Circular; Subdivision of Sections and Restoring Lost Corners, November 1, 1879............. 509

Manual of Surveying Instructions, 1881.......................................................... 511

Circular Booklet; Restoration of Lost and Obliterated Corners, March 13, 1883...................... 545

Circular No. 119; Subdivision of Sections, June 2, 1887........................................... 553 

X 
XLII. Manual of Surveying Instructions, 1890.......................................................... 555

XLIII. Manual of Surveying Instructions, 1894.......................................................... 595

XLIV . Circular; Restoration of Lost or Obliterated Corners and Subdivision of Sections. 

October 16, 1896............................................................................. 683

XLV. Manual of Surveying Instructions, 1902.......................................................... 693 

XLVI . Circular Booklet; Restoration of Lost or Obliterated Corners and Subdivision of Sections. 

June 1,1909................................................................................. 753

XLVII. Letter of Instructions; Topography, August 15, 1910.............................................. 765 

xi 
xii 
CHAPTER I 

POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC EVENTS 

LEADING TO 

THE PASSAGE OF THE FIRST LAND ORDINANCE 
ENGLISH CLAIMS TO AMERICA 

By 1550, the Spanish had explored most of the eastern 

coast of North America and the French had exploredthe Gulf 

of St. Lawrence. The French and Spanish claimed all these 

lands, basing the claims on the right of discovery and conquest. The English had made very few explorations in the 

New World and had very little knowledge of the land, geography, and native inhabitants. But when England broke her 

close religious and political ties with Spain in the late sixteenth century, she repudiated the Spanish claim that prior 

discovery established the full right of possession. England 

took the stand that occupancy and use was the final test of 

ownership. Although she knew that the continent was occupied and in use by the native Indians, the Indians were 

consideredinferior; they were non-Christian savageswith no 

rights in land tenure under English law and customs. 

It was on the basis of occupancy and use that England 

eventually took possession of the eastern coast of North 

America between 31° and 49° north latitude. The occupancy 

and use doctrine originally granted lands in the colonies and 

this has continued through the history ofthe United Statesto 

the present. 

Colonization 

All title to land in England was from the King who could 

grant lands ashe saw fit under any conditionshe felt met his 

needs and desires and those of the grantee. The King or 

Queen was the sovereign, but due to wars with Spain and 

France, the English sovereign was not financially able to 

bear the high cost of establishing colonies in America. If 

colonization were to take place, it had to be accomplished 

with private capital. 

Generally, there were three classes of people in England 

who would participate in colonization: 

(1) The very rich merchants, traders and aristocrats. This 

group could furnish the capital expense and outlay if they 

could expect a good return on their investments. Few 

would ever actually make the trip to America themselves. 

(2) The middle-class. This group could finance the cost of 

ocean passage, provide themselves with tools, etc. But 

they needed a reasonable expectation of a better life and 

ability t o build an estate in the new land. 

(3) The verypoortenants, unemployed,paupers and seruants. 

These people had little to lose and everything t o gain if 

they could migrate but had no means to do so. 

The solution t o colonization was the groups of wealthy 

people formed companies, bought stock in a company, and 

undertook the expense of sending the third class of people to 

America. In return, the Crown granted such a company a 

charter for lands in America, which was largely a high risk 

investment; it eventually led to large land-speculating companies which still exist in one form or another in the United 

States. 

TheVirginiaCharters 

In 1606,the LondonCompanywas formedby a large group 

of investors. They were granted the right t o settle the land 

between 34° and 41" north latitude. The Plymouth Company 

was granted settlement rights between 38° and 45°north 

latitude. Thus the foundation was laid for 200 years of land 

disputes regarding overlapping claims. 

Under these chartersthe land was not granted outright to 

the company. Both colonial government and land distribution were subject t o royal control. 

In 1609,the two charterswere relinquished and new charters were granted. The Virginia Company was granted land 

extending from 200 miles south and 200 miles north of Old 

Point Comfort (400 miles of seacoast) "extending west and 

northwest to the south sea" (Pacific Ocean). It was on this 

charter that Virginia was eventually to claim Kentucky and 

the Northwest Territory. 

The Plymouth Company failed in its initial attempt at 

settlement and made no further efforts, so the charter was 

forfeited.In 1620,a charter was granted to the New England 

Council which covered the lands between 40° and 48° north 

latitude and from "sea to sea." Again the grants overlapped 

(seeFig. l), but were not considered important because what 

the King granted the King could also take away, within 

limits, and the lands could only be held by actual settlement. 

The boundaries were later changed, in part, by grants and 

charters to other colonies. 

NewEngland 

The 1620 charter gave the New EnglandCouncilfull power 

t o grant lands and issue patents.In 1622,theCouncil granted 

the territory that is now New Hampshire and Maine to John 

Mason and Ferdinand0 Gorges, who divided the lands in 

1635; Mason's portion became New Hampshire. Gorges' 

grandson sold Maine t o John Usher, a Boston merchant, in 

1677 for 1,250 pounds and Usher immediately deeded the 

land to Massachusetts. 

In 1629, the Massachusetts Bay Company was given a 

charter to all of the land between parallels of latitude three 

miles north of the Merrimac River and three miles south of 

the Charles River. This charter was annulled in 1684, and 

the second charter of the Massachusetts Bay Company was 

issued in 1691;it incorporated the Plymouth Colony on Cape 

Cod and Maine. 

The boundaries were well defined and describe the present 

Commonwealth of Massachusetts. But that state waslater to 

claim western landsin what is now Pennsylvania, Michigan, 

Illinois, and Wisconsin on the basis of the 1629 charter. 

Maine remained a part of Massachusetts until 1820(seeFig. 

2). 

In 1662, the settled towns in Connecticut were consolidated and a charter granted to that colony,which was bounded on the east by Narragansett Bay, on the north by Massachusetts and on the south by the Atlantic Ocean,including 

all islands along the coast, and extending t o "the South Sea" 

(PacificOcean) to the west. It was on the basis of this grant 

that Connecticut was to claim and receive lands in what is 

now the State of Ohio (see Fig. 2). 

Rhode Island was settled by Roger Williams and his followers in 1636 without benefit of a charter or grant; Williams 

purchased the lands from the Indians and claimed it on that 

basis. The Rhode Island settlement and Providence Plantations were considered squatters by Massachusetts Bay. A 

charter was granted in 1663 for the lands which are now 

essentially marked by the present boundaries of Rhode Island, although it took nearly 100 years to settle the boundary 

2 


disputes with Connecticut and Massachusetts. Rhode Island 

never had any claim to western lands. 

The present state of Vermont was claimed by both New 

Hampshire and New York, was never an individual colony, 

and, after settlement of boundary disputes, was admitted to 

the Union in 1791. All vacant lands within her boundaries 

became the property of the State. 

New York 

The Dutch settled and claimed the lands along the Delaware and Hudson Rivers based on the right of discovery and 

Henry Hudson’s explorations. They settled on Manhattan 

Island in 1624 and eventually granted lands including the 

large patroon estates along the Hudson. Sweden established 

settlements in the Delaware Bay area in 1638 and later. 

England claimed these same lands, and in 1664 granted the 

lands between the Connecticut and Delaware Rivers to the 

Duke of York. The Dutch and Swedes had granted lands to 

their citizens, and the English honored these “foreign” patents after evicting the foreign governments. This policy of 

honoring all bona fide patents or claims issued by previous 

governments was to continue throughout all of the later land 

acquisitions by the United States. 

The grant to the Duke of York included lands also granted 

to Connecticut, Massachusetts and New Hampshire, and 

many boundary disputes resulted. York’s claim to lands in 

what is now western New York were based on his jurisdiction 

over the Six (Indian) Nations. 

The territory which is now the State of New Jersey was 

deeded to George Carteret and John Berkeley by the Duke of 

York in 1664. They honored the previous settlers’ claims, set 

up a government, and sold lands. New Jersey had no western 

land claims. 

Maryland 

In 1632, Lord Baltimore was granted the territory south of 

40° north latitude, south to a line drawn easterly to the 

Atlantic from Watkins Point in Virginia, and from the ocean 

to the headwaters of the Potomac River and lying north of 

that river. Lord Baltimore was later to lose a substantial part 

of this grant to what are now the States of Delaware and New 

Jersey. Since Maryland had no western lands, this reduction 

in area was to rankle Maryland through the Revolutionary 

War period and cause numerous boundary disputes. 

Pennsylvania 

In 1681, William Penn was granted the lands south of 43” 

north latitude (actually the 42nd parallel), extending west 

from the Delaware River 5° of longitude. The southern 

boundary was to be determined by a circle of 12 miles radius 

around New Castle in Delaware connecting with 40°north 

latitude, which was the north boundary of Maryland. New 

Castle was much too far south of 40° latitude, and this resulted in the famous boundary dispute between Penn and 

Lord Baltimore, which was settled by court decision and 

adjudication. The soutKern boundary of Pennsylvania is the 

Mason-Dixon Line, surveyed along a parallel of approximately 3V43’15‘’ north latitude, which deprived Maryland 

of a rather large area along her northern border. Because of 

the definite western boundary, Pennsylvania could claim no 

western lands. But Penn’s grant included land claimed by 

Connecticut in the “Wyoming Valley” in northeastern Pennsylvania. Several battles were fought over jurisdiction in 

that area and wasn’t settled until 1782. 

Delaware 

The “Three Lower Counties” were first settled by the 

Swedes, taken over by the Dutch, granted to the Duke of 

York, and then sold to William Penn in 1682. Penn granted a 

separate charter to the Delaware counties in 1701. The grant 

to Maryland (Lord Baltimore) for these same lands was 

ignored. Delaware had no claim to any western lands. 

The Carolinas 

In 1663, Charles I1 made a grant ofthe charter of Carolina 

to theEarl of Clarendon and seven other proprietors covering 

the lands between 31°and 36° north latitude. A second charter in 1665 covered the lands between 29° and 36“31‘ north 

latitude. Both charters extended fromthe Atlantic to Pacific 

Oceans. In 1729, the English government purchased the

proprietors’ rights in North Carolina and divided the colony 

into two parts. The boundaries of North Carolina were described as being: “On the north, the south boundary of Virginia (about 36’30’ north latitude), and on the south, by 

35’34’ north latitude and extending to the Pacific Ocean.” 

Presumably South Carolina contained the remainder; thus 

both North and South Carolina had claims under the charters to lands extending to the Pacific Ocean (see Fig. 3).

Georgia

Georgia was part of the Carolinas but was not being settled 

by those colonies. In 1732, King George I1 granted a charter 

to James Oglethorpe and a board of trustees for the lands 

between the Savannah and Altamaha Rivers and extending 

from the headwaters of those streams along parallels of latitude “to the South Seas.” In 1764, the boundaries were expanded southerly to St. Mary’s River (along the seacoast), up 

that stream to its headwater, west to the confluence of the 

Flint and Chattahoochee Rivers, up the Chattahoochee to 31” 

north latitude, and then along that parallel to the Mississippi 

River. Thus Georgia laid claim to what is now most of the 

States of Alabama and Mississippi (see Fig. 3). 

An examination of Figs. 1,2, and 3 reveals that all of the 

land east of the Mississippi River and north of 31” north 

latitude was claimed by one or more of the colonies under one 

charter or another at the beginning of the Revolutionary 

War. It was these claims and the lands involved that led to 

the need for the first land ordinance. 

LAND TENURE SYSTEMS 

The colonial governments, proprietors and companies had 

several systems for disposing of land and methods by which 

legal title to the land was held. Many of these customs and 

restrictions came to be a source of irritation to most people 

with the result that most were abolished after the Revolutionary War. 

Grants 

In the first instance, colonial land was granted to a settlement agency. The main “catch” was that in order to hold the 

land, settlers had to be placed on the land. The settlement 

agency could then grant the land to others under a wide 

variety of systems and acreages. Large grants were also 

made to individuals directly by the King. In some instances, 

5 

Figure 4. A New England Township (courtesy of New Hampshire Historical Society) 
the grantee set up large manors or feudal-type estates. 

Shareholders in the settlement companies received large 

areas based on the number of shares they had purchased. 

Land grants were made to support schools, colleges and 

churches. 

Headrights 

In the southern colonies, each man was granted 50,100, or 

more acres as a headright. He was required to settle on the 

land, clear part of it, and make a farm. Under this system 

every settler soon began to believe that he was entitled to 

land, one way or another. The practice soon developed of 

granting a headright to each person, an additional headright 

to the person who may have paid for passage, another to the 

captain of the ship who carried him across the ocean, etc. 

Thus if a man in London paid the expenses of 50 people to 

settle, each of those 50 people received a headright and the 

benefactor received a like amount; large land holdings were 

acquired in this manner. 

Land Sales 

Direct land sales took place at an early date in all of the 

colonies except New England. A man could request the right 

to purchase land and, if approved, would pay a stipulated 

price. Acreages ranged from 100 to 1,000 to perhaps 150,000 

acres or more. The prices varied with location or quality but 

ranged from as little as three pence up to perhaps one pound 

per acre. Large land-speculating companies usually paid the 

least; however, selling land was not an established governmental policy. 

New England Towns 

The New England colonies of Connecticut, Massachusetts, 

and Rhode Island were corporate colonies where the land was 

held and disposed of directly by a corporation. The people had 

close religious ties, the land was of comparatively poor quality, and the climate severe. A group of 30 or more men with 

families would join together and apply to the corporation for a 

land grant; if approved, they initially surveyed the “town.” 

The exterior boundaries were usually a rectangle of 6 to 10 

miles square. The graup then divided the land among the 

members according to each man’s needs and issued title to 

the allotted-lands. Land couldn’t be sold without the group’s 

permission. These New England townships are said to be the 

origin of our present-day rectangular township system. The 

big advantage was that of common boundaries, with no 

“gaps” or “gores” of land left between ownerships; other 

advantages were survey before occupancy and near certainty 

of boundary locations. New York, New Hampshire, and other 

colonies sometimes used a modified rectangular township 

system for disposing of land to the colonists. Later many 

townships were surveyed in Maine, six miles square in cardinal directions, six miles square non-cardinal, and rectangularly shaped lying in various directions. Fig. 4 is a 

township in New Hamsphire surveyed in 1752 to 1753 and 

illustrates a typical layout. 

FreeandCommon Socage 

Most patents or deeds to land were in “free and common 

socage,” which meant that the patentee held a fee title but 

the land was subject to certain restrictions, such as the requirements for settling, clearing and payment of quitrent. 

Technically, the same type of title passed in New England 

but quitrent was usually not collected or even required. 

Quitrent 

One big source of irritation to the small land owner was 

quitrents. When land was granted to the settler he was usually free of quitrent from 7 to 20 years. But once he was producing an income he had to pay a small quitrent, perhaps only a 

few pennies per acre, to the grantor. Regardless of how many 

times the land might be sold, it was subject to quitrent, in 

theory, forever. The small owners hated paying quitrent and 

frequently refused to do so. Since the collection of quitrent 

was difficult and costly, the original grantor or his heirs could 

do little to collect it. Quitrent was not a tax as such, but was 

more in the nature of a perpetual lien against the land. 

Primogeniture 

An old English practice of inheritance by the oldest son was 

brought to America; primogeniture means that the oldest son 

inherits the entire estate. He may have a moral obligation to 

support his younger brothers and sisters but they could not 

inherit from him. This restriction in titles was distasteful to 

the younger children and the small land owners, but it was a 

means of keeping large estates and manors intact because 

the inheritance could not be sold and creditors could not 

foreclose. 

Entails 

If land granted to a man was entailed it meant that only his 

lineal descendants could own it thereafter. His heirs could 

not sell or transfer the land to someone else. If there were no 

heirs, the land reverted to the original grantor or his heirs; 

thus, the man and his heirs were not free to sell the estate. 

TYPES OF GOVERNMENT 

Three different types of government existed in the colonies 

immediately prior to the Revolutionary War under which 

land was sold, granted, and surveyed. These types were royal, 

proprietary, and corporate colonies, all of which were subject 

to at least some restrictions by the King and Parliament of 

England. 

Royal Colonies 

Prior to the Revolution, New Hampshire, New York, New 

Jersey, Virginia, North and South Carolina and Georgia 

were Royal Colonies. The King appointed a governor who 

took the place of the King in local affairs and who appointed 

the council (similar to the Senate); the local citizenry elected 

a lower house or assembly. The assembly had the power to 

approve or levy taxes and approve the laws made by the 

governor and council. The governor depended on taxes for his 

support, so the colonial assembly had considerable control 

over the governor’s actions. 

Proprietary Colonies 

Delaware, Maryland and Pennsylvania were Proprietary 

Colonies. The proprietor took the place of the King, set up the 

system of government, and appointed the governor. Otherwise the system of local government was in the hands of the 

local assemblies, similar to the Royal Colonies. 

Corporate Colonies 

Connecticut, Massachusetts and Rhode Island were gov8 
erned by the corporation under their charters. Rhode Island 

and Connecticut retained these charters and governed under 

them until after the Revolution. Massachusetts was forced to 

accept a Royal governor. He governed under a general assembly and had full power to grant lands, issued patents and 

make laws. This action by the King was partially responsible 

for the dissension which led to war. 

Each of the colonies elected a colonial assembly, set up 

local and county governments, made laws, and had local 

courts, not dissimilar from what now exists in the United 

States, but they did not elect the governor and had no representatives except lobbyists in the English parliament. 

LOCATING CLAIMS 

Each colony apparently had a little different method of 

locating claims to the land, except for the New England 

towns. 

Treaty and Purchase From the Indians 

The Indians occupied the land not as individuals but as a 

tribe or whole group. They did not “own” land as the English 

understood ownership. But the English recognized the aboriginal rights of the Indians, at least to some extent. They 

were careful to purchase the Indians’ rights, usually at very 

low prices in the form of trade goods. For specified areas, 

these purchases and treaties with the natives were made by 

the government or settlement agency. It was illegal for a 

private citizen to purchase land directly from the Indians, but 

that rule was frequently broken. Land-speculating companies made large purchases of Indian land at very low prices 

and then attempted to obtain a grant and patent based on a 

claim of Indian title, which in any case, had to be acquired 

before deeds or patents were issued to the settlers. 

Land Grants 

An individual desiring to purchase or obtain lands would 

apply for a grant in the appropriate land office and had to 

state the desired general land location and the number of 

acres. If approved, a warrant would be issued for the grant. A 

land-speculating company would usually have some political 

pull and the warrant would be for so many thousand acres 

located between certain rivers or other natural features. A 

military warrant was issued for a given number of acres, 50 

to 400 or more, as a reward for fighting in some war, Indian 

battle, or for militia service. Military warrants were often 

sold at very low prices to land speculators who could then 

claim land under those warrants. 

Location and Survey 

The warrant holder would present it to the surveyor general, county surveyor, or whomever was in charge of surveying, 

who would then go to the land, check to see that the tract was 

not already claimed by or surveyed for someone else, survey 

out the tract by metes and bounds, and prepare the plat and 

certificate. The claimant paid for the survey, and after payment or arranging for payment of the land (about 60 cents to 

$1 per acre in the 1770’s), a patent or deed was issued and 

recorded. 

Survey descriptions were often vague and were tied to 

trees, rocks, creek junctions, or stone mounds. The lines were 

often not run or blazed. If after survey the land was not 

immediately occupied, another man might think it vacant 

and make his claim on the same land. This whole system led 

to many overlapping claims, boundary disputes, and clouded 

titles which the courts were swamped with. 

The New England town system of prior rectangular survey, careful marking and surveying the lots within the town, 

walking the bounds each year to preserve the boundary 

marks, and careful platting and recording was far superior to 

the indiscriminate location methods used in the other colonies. It also prevented the taking of only the good land, 

leaving the poorer land unused. The New England townships 

also provided for roads and highways, gave a definite lot to 

schools and churches, and had other advantages. 

Squatters andPreemption 

It was supposed to be illegal for a man to occupy land 

without permission or by some type of grant, but the practice 

of squatting on the land, building a cabin and clearing 

ground for crops was widespread, especially west of the 

mountains in Kentucky and Tennessee. The Indians often 

took offense at the practice and massacred the squatters, 

which would then cause retaliation by the white man and 

result in an Indian war. Although the colonial governments 

tried to stop the practice, they did not succeed, and the squatter usually ended up getting legal title by patent; in other 

words, the squatter, by being there first, preempted the right 

to the land by occupancy and use. The squatter was largely 

responsible for the prior survey and sale provisions in the 

first land ordinance. 

THE WESTERN LANDS 

As has already been noted, Virginia claimed all of the land 

west of the Allegheny Mountains and north of 36“30’ north 

latitude including part of western Pennsylvania. Connecticut and Massachusetts contended otherwise, as did New 

York. Much of Kentucky was already occupied with scattered 

settlements under grants and titles issued by Virginia. There 

were very few, if any, settlers in the area north of the Ohio 

River. 

Based on her original charter, Massachusetts laid claim to 

the area north of her southern boundary extending west past 

Pennsylvania (see Fig. 2). 

Connecticut claimed lands in Pennsylvania and continuing west across what is now Ohio, Indiana and Illinois, 

an extension of her northern and southern boundaries. 

North Carolina claimed and had some settlers in what is 

now the state of Tennessee. South Carolina had claim to a 

narrow strip 10 to 15 miles wide lying south of Tennessee, 

while Georgia had a good claim to all of the lands lying west 

of that State. 

These then were the western lands. How would they be 

settled, who was to have jurisdiction and how were new 

States to be added to the Union at the end of the war? None of 

the colonies had a clear and undisputed title. The English 

Proclamation of 1763 had outlawed any settlement or further 

land grants west of the Allegheny Mountains. This proclamation outraged the colonies who claimed lands to the west, and 

they largely ignored the proclamation as being illegal. To 

further compound the outrage, Parliament passed the 

Quebec Act in 1774, which added all of the land north of the 

Ohio River and west of the mountains to the Province of 

Quebec. It is not too clear that the land-claiming colonies had 

9 
a really valid claim; the King and Parliament had issued the 

original charters and grants on which the colonies laid claim 

to the western lands, then through the 1763 Proclamation 

and Quebec Act they rescinded those grants. But that point 

was made moot by the war and subsequent independence 

from English rule. 

EVENTS DURING AND FOLLOWING THE 

REVOLUTIONARY WAR 

Land Confiscation 

Immediately following the Declaration of Independence on 

July 4,1776, the newly declared States confiscated the lands 

of those people who remained loyal to the English Crown, and 

declared such lands State property. Each state also declared 

all “Crown Lands” and the unpatented proprietors’ lands 

State property. In this manner, the new States became owners of millions of acres of public domain within their own 

boundaries and under their jurisdiction. These confiscations 

included the “Crown Lands” in the western territory to which 

the States laid claim. They later sold the lands within their 

borders to pay debts and raise revenue. Much of the land was 

used to pay the soldiers who fought in the war. 

Military Bounty Warrants 

It was a common practice to grant lands as a reward for 

military service in the colonies, in the form of a warrant for a 

stated number of acres, ranging from as little as 20 acres for 

common soldiers to several hundred acres for officers. After 

the Declaration of Independence, each of the States granted 

bounty lands to her soldiers for military service. The Continental Congress had no land but still offered bounties of 100 

acres for soldiers and over 500 acres for officers, which were 

given to Revolutionary soldiers and to men who deserted 

from the British army. Land warrants could not be sold until 

after the close of the war. Military bounty land warrants 

were issued for several million acres of land. 

Currency Depreciation 

The Continental Congress had no power to levy taxes and 

had no direct method of raising funds to pay for the war. The 

Congress issued bills of credit, somewhat similar to promissory notes, in the form of currency. Congress asked the 

States to levy taxes and redeem these bills, but the States 

failed to do so, and in addition, issued their own paper money. 

Since the Continentals were not backed with silver and were 

not redeemable, they soon depreciated in value. In 1780, one 

silver dollar was worth 40 continental dollars, and by 1782, 

the continental paper dollar was nearly worthless and speculators bought them for almost nothing, hoping that Congress 

would eventually redeem them for at least part of their face 

value. Much of this money was converted to securities, or 

bonds, and the bonds were later used to purchase public lands 

in the Ohio country. 

Treaty With England 

At the close of the Revolutionary War, the treaty to end the 

conflict was negotiated with England, Spain, and France. 

England was inclined to favor the United States at the expense of French and Spanish territorial claims. The final 

treaty was signed on September 3,1783, and gave the United 

States jurisdiction over all the territory east of the Mississippi River, south of the Great Lakes and north of Spanish 

Florida (31” north latitude). The United States also acquired 

full navigation rights on the Mississippi River; however, 

because New Orleans was held by Spain, navigation of the 

Mississippi was restricted and impeded settlement in the 

Ohio country until after 1800. 

Land Cessions 

The Continental Congress had made several requests, 

without success, of landed colonies to relinquish their claims 

to western lands. The western lands question was a hot political issue; the seven States with western land claims were 

opposed by the six States with definite boundaries. Maryland 

led the battle and refused to ratify the Articles of Confederation until the landed States ceded their claims. Maryland had 

been reduced by the Pennsylvania boundary settlement and 

by the Delaware counties; she especially disliked Virginia 

and that State claimed an enormous area. The smaller States 

feared the power of the larger States and the greater power 

they would have if allowed to retain their western land 

claims. 

New York had a dubious claim to lands based on her 

sovereignty over the Six Nations. Since the Indians claimed 

lands in New York and to the west and southwest in Ohio, 

New York claimed those Indians lands. New York broke the 

deadlock in Congress by ceding her land claims to the Congress on February 19, 1780. 

Connecticut followed New York’s lead and ceded her 

claims on October 10,1780, but reserved a total of 3,800,000 

acres between 41° and 42° north latitude, extending 120 

miles west from the west boundary of Pennsylvania. These 

lands were called the Connecticut Western Reserve and the 

“Firelands.” Connecticut lost her claim to lands in the Wyoming Valley in Pennsylvania. 

On January 2, 1781, Virginia agreed to cede most of her 

claims north of the Ohio River. In doing so, Virginia relinquished all of her claims northwest of the Ohio River except 

an area between the Scioto and Little Miami Rivers. This 

area, known as the Virginia Military Reserve, was used to 

pay military land bounties issued to soldiers by Virginia. 

Virginia retained Kentucky and also stipulated that 150,000 

acres in Ohio be granted to George Rogers Clarke and his 

regiment, and that private land grants already made in Ohio 

by Virginia and France be confirmed. 

Eight states, New Hampshire, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, Pennsylvania, Virginia and 

South Carolina, had ratified the Articles of Confederation. 

When Virginia agreed to cede her claims, Maryland ratified 

on March 1, 1781, and thus completed the necessary twothirds to put the Articles into effect. 

Massachusetts and North Carolina ceded their claims in 

1784. North Carolina ceded all of her lands in what is now 

Tennessee, except lands needed to satisfy her land grants and 

military bounties. After those reservations were satisfied, so 

little land remained that in 1841 Congress gave any remaining land to the State of Tennessee, so for all intents and 

purposes, Tennessee was not a public land State. 

South Carolina did not cede her claims until 1787. Georgia 

was the last state to cede; her cession was ratified in 1802. 

After the New York, Connecticut, Virginia, and Massachusetts cessions and ratification of the Articles of Confed10 
eration, the Congress of the Confederation had land but no 

money. The immediate question was how to sell the land to 

raise revenue to pay off the massive debts incurred during 

the war. 

courts made the rectangular system and prior survey sound 

attractive even to many of the conservative group. 

Hamilton was in favor of indiscriminate location, the old 

metes and bounds system. This group thought that prior 

Land Companies 

The land-speculating companies began early to petition 

the Congress for land grants. Wealthy and influential men 

held stock in these companies and also held large amounts of 

continental currency and treasury notes. These companies 

put forth various schemes to buy millions of acres, first in 

Kentucky and Tennessee, and then later in Ohio and Indiana. Since land companies had been very active and a large 

part of the land-settling system in the colonies, they were 

very persuasive in their plans for land grants and settlement 

in the Northwest Territory. The Ohio Company of Associates 

was the company that finally succeeded. 

Need for Revenue 

Congress under the Confederation was deeply in debt to 

France and other creditors. Millions of dollars in continental 

bills and treasury notes were outstanding and Congress had 

no power to levy taxes on the land or States. 

The Northwest Territory loomed as the only asset the new 

country had which might be turned into hard money. If the 

vast public domain could be sold to settlers, it could return 

millions of dollars to the treasury and solve the pressing 

immediate need for money. The big question was how the sale 

of the western lands could be accomplished. 

Small Farms Versus Large Grants 

Politically there were two factions in the debate: 

(1) On one side were the advocates of sale to individual 

settlers in small parcels. The small farmers, frontiersmen, and merchants argued that an essential part of a 

democracy was the right to own property. They could not 

afford to buy land in large tracts, and if it were sold in 

huge blocks to wealthy men, the small man would be 

squeezed out or forced to pay high prices and interest. 

(2) The conservative group, generally made up of wealthy 

southern aristocrats and plantation owners, did not 

think the democracy advocates were capable of settling 

the land intelligently or capable of handling land ownership. The conservatives were in favor of large grants at 

low prices to companies or wealthy men who would then 

handle the business end of settlement, such as surveying 

and patenting. 

Generally the democracy advocates were from New England and other northern States. The spokesmen for this group 

were John Adams and Thomas Jefferson. The conservatives 

were led by Alexander Hamilton and John Jay. 

The Jefferson group advocated a system of rectangular 

survey before any sale or settlement, with land to be sold at 

auction with a minimum price and in small parcels, giving 

everyone a fair chance to acquire land. They argued that 

survey before sale was necessary to prevent overlapping 

claims and to simplify deeds and registering. A rectangular 

system would survey all the land, with no gaps or gores, make 

the buyer take the poor land along with the good land, and 

make every man’s land have a common boundary with his 

neighbor. The thousands of boundary disputes already in the 

survey would never work and that people would settle and 

occupy the land faster if left free to do so. It had not been the 

general governmental policy in the colonies to sell land as a 

source of revenue prior to the war. The people were familiar 

with the free settlement system and would occupy and hold 

the territory faster if allowed free location. 

In 1784, a committee headed by Jefferson drafted an ordinance which called for prior survey of tracts ten geographical 

miles square, which were called hundreds; they would be 

subdivided into lots one mile square. The lines would run due 

north and south, east and west and settlement would be by 

hundreds or by lots. This plan did not call for reservations for 

schools or churches. It is generally believed that Jefferson 

drafted the original ordinance. This draft was debated at 

length and was then referred to a committee composed of one 

man from each State. Jefferson was in Europe and Grayson 

from Virginia was named to replace him. This new committee made some alterations; they reduced the tract size to a 

seven-(statute) mile-square township with 49 lots. One lot in 

each township was reserved for schools, one lot for religious 

purposes and four lots to Congress for future disposal. One 

third of any gold, silver, lead, or copper which might be found 

was also reserved. The townships would be sold whole at 

auction for a minimum of $1 per acre, minus the reservations 

of six lots. 

This plan drew objections. The sale of whole townships 

would place most of it in the hands of land speculators and 

would also encourage widespared and scattered settlement 

affording little protection from the Indians. In debate the size 

of land sales was reduced to 640 acres, although attempts 

were made to get the size down to 320 acres. Many other 

points were debated and the final result was passage of the 

Lcnd Ordinance on May 20, 1785. 

LAND ORDINANCE OF 1785 

The following is the text of the Land Ordinance as finally 

approved by Congress: 

AN ORDINANCE FOR ASCERTAINING 

THE MODE OF DISPOSING OF LANDS 

IN THE WESTERN TERRITORY 

Passed May 20,1785. 

“Be it ordained by the United States in Congress 

assembled, that the territory ceded by individual states 

to the United States, which had been purchased of the 

Indian inhabitants, shall be disposed of in the following 

manner: 

“A surveyor from each state shall be appointed by 

Congress or a committee of the states, who shall take an 

oath for the faithful discharge of his duty, before the 

geographer of the United States, who is hereby empowered and directed to administer the same; and the like 

oath shall be administered to each chain carrier, by the 

surveyor under whom he acts. 

“The geographer, under whose direction the surveyors shall act, shall occasionally form such regula11 
tions for their conduct, as he shall. deem necessary; and 

shall have authority to suspend them for misconduct in 

ofice, and shall make report of the same to Congress, or 

to the committee of the states; and he shall make report 

in case of sickness, death, or resignation of any surveyor. 

“The surveyors, as they are respectively qualified, 

shall proceed to divide the said territory into townships 

of 6 miles square, by lines running due north and south, 

and others crossing these at right angles, as near as may 

be, unless where the boundaries of the late Indian 

purchases may render the same impracticable, and then 

they shall depart from this rule no further than such 

particular circumstance may require. And each surveyor shall be allowed and paid at the rate of two dollars 

for every mile, in length, he shall run, including the 

wages of chain carriers, markers, and every other expense attending the same. 

“The first line, runing due north and south as 

aforesaid, shall begin on the river Ohio, at a point that 

shall be found to be due north from the western termination of a line, which has been run as the southern boundary of the state of Pennsylvania; and the first line, 

running east and west, shall begin at the same point, 

and shall extend throughout the whole territory; provided, that nothing herein shall be construed, as fixing 

the western boundary of the state of Pennsylvania. The 

geographer shall designate the townships, or fractional 

parts of townships, by numbers progressively from 

south to north; always beginning each range with No. 1; 

and the ranges shall be distinguished by their progressive numbers to the westward. The first range, extending from the Ohio to the lake Erie, being marked No. 1. 

The geographer shall personally attend to the running 

of the first east and west line; and shall take the latitude 

of the extremes of the first north and south line, and of 

the mouths of the principal rivers. 

“The lines shall be measured with a chain; shall be 

plainly marked by chaps on the trees, and exactly described on a plat; whereon shall be noted by the surveyor, as their proper distances, all mines, salt-springs, 

salt-licks, and mill-seats, that shall come to his knowledge; and all water-courses, mountains and other remarkable and permanent things, over and near which 

such lines shall pass, and also the quality of the lands. 

“The plats of the townships respectively, shall be 

marked by subdivisions into lots of one mile square, or 

640 acres, in the same direction as the external lines, 

and numbered from 1 to 36; always beginning the succeeding range of the lots with the number next to that 

with which the preceding one concluded. And where, 

from the causes before-mentioned, only a fractional part 

of a township shall be surveyed, the lots, protracted 

thereon, shall bear the same numbers as if the township 

had been entire. And the surveyors, in running the 

external lines of the townships, shall, at the interval of 

every mile, mark corners for the lots which are adjacent, 

always designating the same in a different manner from 

those of the townships. 

“The geographer and surveyors shall pay the utmost 

attention to the variation of the magnetic needle; and 

shall run and note all lines by the true meridian, certifying, with every plat, what was the variation at the times 

of running the lines thereon noted. 

“As soon as 7 ranges of townships, and fractional 

parts of townships, in the direction from south to north, 

shall have been surveyed, the geographer shall transmit plats thereof to the board of treasury, who shall 

record the same, with the report, in well bound books to 

be kept for that purpose. And the geographer shall 

make similar returns, from time to time, of every 7 

ranges as they may be surveyed. The secretary at war 

shall have recourse thereto, and shall take by lot therefrom, a number of townships, and fractional parts of 

townships, as well from those to be sold entire, as from 

those to be sold in lots, as will be equal to one-seventh 

part of the whole of such 7 ranges, as nearly as may be, 

for the use of the late continental army; and he shall 

make a similar draught, from time to time, until a 

sufficient quantity is drawn to satisfy the same, to be 

applied in manner hereinafter directed. The board of 

treasury shall, from time to time, cause the remaining 

numbers, as well those to be sold entire, as those to be 

sold in lots, to be drawn for, in the name of the thirteen 

states respectively, according to the quotas in the last 

preceding requisition on all the states; provided, that in 

case more land than its proportion is allotted for sale in 

any state, at any distribution, a deduction be made 

therefor at the next. 

“The board of treasury shall transmit a copy of the 

original plats, previously noting thereon, the 

townships, and fractional parts of townships, which 

shall have fallen to the several states, by the distribution aforesaid, to the commissioners of the loan-office of 

the several states, who, after giving notice of not less 

than two nor more than six months, by causing advertisements to be posted up at the courthouses, or other 

noted places in every county, and to be inserted in one 

newspaper, published in the states of their residence 

respectively, shall proceed to sell the townships, or fractional parts of townships, at public vendue; in the following manner, viz: The township, or fractional part of a 

township, No. 1, in the second range, shall be sold by 

lots; and No. 2, in the same range, entire; and so in 

alternate order through the whole of the second range; 

and the third range shall be sold in the same manner as 

the first, and the fourth in the same manner as the 

second, and thus alternately throughout all the ranges; 

provided, that none of the lands, within the said territory, be sold under the price of one dollar the acre, to be 

paid in specie, or loan-office certificates, reduced to specie value, by the scale of depreciation, or certificates of 

liquidated debts of the United States, including interest, besides the expense of the survey and other 

charges thereon, which are hereby rated at 36 dollars 

the township, in specie, or certificates as aforesaid, and 

so in the same proportion for a fractional part of a 

township, or of a lot, to be paid at the time of sales; on 

failure of which payment, the said lands shall again be 

offered for sale. 

12 
“There shall be reserved for the United States out of 

every township the four lots, being numbered 8,11,26, 

29, and out of every fractional part of a township, so 

many lots of the same numbers as shall be found thereon, for future sale. There shall be reserved the lot No. 

16, of every township, for the maintenance of public 

schools, within the said township; also one-third part of 

all gold, silver, lead and copper mines, to be sold, or 

otherwise disposed of as Congress shall hereafter direct. 

[Here follow the terms of the deed to be given when a 

township or a lot is sold.] 

“Which deeds shall be recorded in proper books, by 

the commissioner of the loan office, and shall be certified to have been recorded, previously to their being 

delivered to the purchaser, and shall be good and valid 

to convey the lands in the same described. 

“The commissioners of the loan-offices respectively, 

shall transmit to the board of treasury every three 

months, an account of the townships, fractional parts of 

townships, and lots committed to their charge; specifying therein the names of the persons to whom sold, and 

the sums of money or certificates received for the same; 

and shall cause all certificates by them received, to be 

struck through with a circular punch; and shall be duly 

charged in the books of the treasury, with the amount of 

the money or certificates, distinguishing the same, by 

them received as aforesaid. 

“If any township, or fractional part of a township or 

lot, remains unsold for 18 months after the plat shall 

have been received, by the commissioners of the loanoffice, the same shall be returned to the board of treasury, and shall be sold in such manner as Congress may 

hereafter direct. 

“And whereas Congress, by their resolutions of 

September 16th and 18th, in theyear 1776, and the 12th 

of August, 1780, stipulated grants of land to certain 

officers and soldiers of the late continental army, and by 

the resolution of the 22nd September, 1780, stipulated 

grants of land to certain officers in the hospital department of the late continental army; for complying therefore with such engagements, Be it ordained, That the 

secretary at war, from the returns in his ofice, or such 

other sufficient evidence as the nature of the case may 

admit, determine who are objects of the above resolutions and engagements, and the quantity of land to 

which such persons or their representatives are respectively entitled, and cause the townships, or fractional 

parts of townships, hereinbefore reserved for the use of 

the late continental army, to be drawn for in such manner as he shall deem expedient, to answer the purpose of 

an impartial distribution. He shall, from time to time, 

transmit certificates to the commissioners of the loanoffices of the different states, to the lines of which the 

military claimants have respectively belonged, specifying the name and rank of the party, the terms of his 

engagement and time of his service, and the division, 

brigade, regiment or company to which he belonged, the 

quantity of land he is entitled to, and the township, or 

fractional part of a township, and range out of which his 

portion is to be taken. 

“The commissioners of the loan-offices shall execute 

deeds for such undivided proportions in manner and 

form herein before-mentioned, varying only in such a 

degree as to make the same conformable to the certificate from the secretary at war. 

“Where any military claimants of bounty in lands 

shall not have belonged to the line of any particular 

state, similar certificates shall be sent to the board of 

treasury, who shall execute deeds to the parties for the 

same. 

“The secretary at war, from the proper returns, shall 

transmit to the board of treasury, a certificate, specifying the name and rank of the several claimants of the 

hospital department of the late continental army, 

together with the quantity of land each claimant is 

entitled to, and the township, or fractional part of a 

township, and range out of which his portion is to be 

taken; and thereupon the board of treasury shall proceed to execute deeds to such claimants. 

“The board of treasury, and the commissioners of the 

loan-offices in the states, shall, within 18 months, return receipts to the secretary at war, for all deeds which 

have been delivered, as also all the original deeds which 

remain in their hands for want of applicants, having 

been first recorded; which deeds so returned, shall be 

preserved in the office, until the parties or their representatives require the same. 

“And be it further ordained, That three townships 

adjacent to lake Erie be reserved, to be hereafter disposed of in Congress, for the use of the officers, men, and 

others, refugees from Canada, and the refugees from 

Nova Scotia, who are or may be entitled to grants of 

land under resolutions of Congress now existing or 

which may hereafter be made respecting them, and for 

such other purposes as Congress may hereafter direct. 

“And be it further ordained, That the towns of 

Gnadenhutten, Schoenbrun and Salem, on the Muskingum, and so much of the lands adjoining to the said 

towns, with the buildings and improvements thereon, 

shall be reserved for the sole use of the Christian Indians, who were formerly settled there, or the remains of 

that society, as may, in the judgment of the geographer, 

be sufficient for them to cultivate. 

“Saving and reserving always, to all officers and soldiers entitled to lands on the northwest side of the Ohio, 

by donation or bounty from the commonwealth of Virginia, and to all persons claiming under them, all rights 

to which they are so entitled, under the deed of cession 

executed by the delegates for the state of Virginia on the 

first day of March, 1784, and the act of Congress accepting the same: and to the end, that the said rights may be 

fully and effectually secured, according to the true intent and meaning of the said deed of cession and act 

aforesaid, Be it ordained, that no part of the land included between the rivers called Little Miami and 

Scioto, on the northwest side of the river Ohio, be sold, 

or in any manner alienated, until there shall first have 

been laid off and appropriated for the said officers and 

soldiers, and persons claiming under them, the lands 

they are entitled to, agreeably to the said deed of cession 

and act of Congress accepting the same. 

“Done by the United States in Congress assembled, 

13 
the 20th day of May, in the year of our Lord, 1785, and of 

our sovereignty and independence the ninth. 

“RICHARD H. LEE, President.” 

“CHARLES THOMPSON, Secretary.” 

An examination and evaluation of the Land Ordinance 

reveal the basics of the system and some reasons for them. 

(1) Only the land that had been purchased from the Indians 

was to be surveyed. This provision would appease the 

Indians, follow the practice of purchase traditional in 

the colonies, and since only Congress could buy land 

from the Indians, would prevent private claims based on 

private purchases. 

(2) A surveyor from each State was to take an oath before 

the Geographer of the United States. The western lands 

had been won in a war fought by all the States, each of 

which had a common interest in the territory and would 

participate in the surveying. Many fradulent surveys 

had been made during colonial times causing land disputes. The oath of faithful discharge of duty would hopefully cause honest work to be done. A Geographer of the 

United States, representing the federal authority to 

supervise the work, would be in charge of the surveyors. 

(3) The townships were to be six miles square (reduced from 

seven) with north and south lines crossed at right 

angles, as near as possible. It must have been recognized 

that surveying was not an exact science. Indian boundaries were also recognized as a limiting factor. 

(4) The survey was to begin on the Ohio River (presumably 

the north bank) due north of the western termination of 

the south boundary of Pennsylvania, which was the 

southwest corner of that state. The west boundary of 

Pennsylvania was not surveyed to the north bank of the 

Ohio until later in 1785. The first line was to run due 

“east and west,” however, it could only run due west for 

there was no public land in Pennsylvania. The Geographer was to personally run the first line, running 

west, which would insure that a proper and correct line 

would be surveyed as the base for the townships to the 

south. Though not called a base line, the Geographer’s 

Line (the boundary of the seven ranges) was just that in 

actual fact. The line was to “extend throughout the 

whole territory.” Taken literally that would be all the 

way to the Mississippi River. The first range was to 

extend from the Ohio to Lake Erie. 

(5) The lines were to be measured with a chain, which 

didn’t necessarily mean that a Gunter’s link chain had 

to be used, just that the chain was the unit of measure. 

The chain unit was used throughout all of the colonies to 

measure land, but Jefferson had originally advocated a 

geographic mile (approximately 6,080 feet) be used. 

This would have made a lot about 849 acres, a very 

oddball figure, so the unit of measure was made part of 

the Ordinance to make it clear that the accustomed 

80-chain mile was to be used. 

(6) The lines were to “be plainly marked by chaps on the 

trees.” In the metes and bounds system of indiscriminate location, the surveys were often very difficult to find 

and poorly identified. This was remedied by law; the 

lines were to be clearly and plainly blazed (the monument of the survey itself) so that the survey could be 

found on the ground. 

(7) All major items of topography, including land quality, 

were to be noted at their proper distances. Topographic 

features, such as streams and mountains, would help to 

locate the survey. Mines, salt licks, salt springs, millseats and soil quality would greatly aid in knowing the 

value of the land for settlement. The lands were to be 

sold at auction hundreds of miles away, so it was necessary to know just what was being sold or bought. 

(8) The plats of each township were to be divided into 36 

lots, now called sections, with number one in the southeast corner of a full township and number 36 in the 

northwest corner. The interior lines of the townships 

were not surveyed on the ground, only protracted on the 

plat, which must have been purely an economy measure 

to keep the surveying cost to a minimum. 

(9) After seven ranges were surveyed, the Geographer was 

to return the plats to the Board of Treasury because the 

whole purpose of the land sale was to raise money for the 

Treasury. The Secretary of War was to have recourse to 

the plats and draw from the hat one-seventh of the 

townships for use by the Continental Army. This made 

provision for granting lands to ex-soldiers to satisfy the 

military land warrants issued to them. Many warrants 

had been sold; thus it is unknown just how many actual 

veterans received land in those townships. 

(10) After one-seventh of the townships for soldiers were 

drawn, the remaining townships were to be distributed 

to the States by lot or drawing. The plats were to be sent 

to each State where they were to be sold at public auction to the highest bidder at not less than $1 per acre. 

The first township in the first range was to be sold whole 

as one solid tract. The second township in the same 

range was to be sold by lot, the next township whole, and 

so on. This sale method would in theory satisfy the 

proponents of both the land speculators and the New 

England town system settlement. A religious group 

could band together and buy a whole township, subdivide it and settle on the land, forming their own community, or the land speculator could buy a whole 

township and sell the land to settlers, hopeful of a profit. 

An individual could also be satisfied by letting him 

purchase a lot for himself. The sales held in each State 

could give everybody a chance to buy without travelling 

all the way to Ohio, New York, or some other central 

point in those days of poor roads. The minimum price of 

$1 per acre was also the going price of land in many of 

the colonies just prior to the war. 

(11) The price was to be paid in specie (hard-coined money) 

or in depreciated loan office certificates reduced to specie value or certificates of liquidated debts (treasury 

bonds) including interest, which assured a return for 

those who held continental dollars. Certificate of debt 

(bond) holders could get the face value plus interest for 

them. And the government could get out of debt. 

In addition to the $1 per acre minimum price, the 

expenses incurred were fixed at $36 per township. Survey and sale expenses were also to be paid by the buyers. 

14 
The $36 figure may not have covered the expenses but 

was obviously $1 per lot, so a buyer of a single lot would 

have to pay a minimum of $641 for it. 

The money was to be paid immediately with no credit 

given. If a man bid on a section and then couldn’t pay for 

it, the section was reoffered for sale. 

Four lots were to be reserved for future sale. The reason 

Congress made this reservation is not immediately 

known, but it may have been to provide for government 

seats or for future educational or even religious grants. 

In the original draft of the ordinance, one lot in each 

township was reserved for religious purposes. Giving 

religious grants was the orindary practice in colonial 

days, but these grants were deleted in the Ordinance as 

passed. 

Lot 16 in each township was reserved for use in maintaining public schools and was located as near to the 

center of the township as possible. If a township was 

purchased and settled by a group and a school was built 

on this land, it would be centrally located, but, most 

importantly, governmental support of public schools 

was established. In colonial days grants were made for 

education, but the schools were usually available only 

to the affluent population. Now the common man would 

theoretically have access to an education. 

The last reservation was for one-third of gold, silver, 

lead or copper found in the township and was almost 

automatic. The King had always reserved one-fifth of 

all gold and silver in his land grants, then the proprietor 

or settlement company reserved another one-fifth. 

Since no significant amounts of gold or silver had been 

discovered in the colonies, this reservation was a hedge 

against the possibility that it might be found somewhere. 

The final paragraph of the Ordinance explicitly spells 

out that the Continental Army was to receive their 

lands. Years had gone by without the Army being able 

to cash in their land warrants and they were getting 

restless over the delay. The paragraph puts the anxiety 

to final rest. 

It should be realized that this Ordinance was passed by a 

Congress which had limited powers under the Articles of 

Confederation. It left much to be desired in regard to how the 

surveys were to be executed, how field notes were to be 

written, how plats were to be constructed, how corners were 

to be monumented, and how townships were to be subdivided 

into lots of 640 acres. But it was a good basic start. Thomas 

Hutchins, the Geographer, was involved in land companies 

and was an experienced surveyor, and the details of executing the field operations were left to him to work out. Also, 

many Congressmen did not favor the rectangular system and 

prior survey. Some flexibility was necessary to bend with the 

political tide if experience proved faults in the system; fortunately, no great faults were found. 

THE NORTHWEST ORDINANCE OF 1787 

It wasn’t sufficient to pass a law for the surveying and sale 

of land without providing for government in the territory 

being settled. In 1784 a committee headed by Jefferson suggested in a report that the Northwest Territory be divided 

into states approximately 150 by 200 miles in area, but this 

report was never passed into law. 

The Ohio Company of Associates, a land-speculating company led by Manasseh Cutler, Samuel Parsons, and Rufus 

Putnam, was pressing Congress for a land grant in Ohio. 

These men succeeded in getting Congress to pass the Northwest Ordinance which provided for establishing governments in the territories and was the basis for establishing 

territorial governments and later Statehood. It is basically 

still in effect. Some items of principal importance in the 

Northwest Ordinance of July 13,1787 are: 

(1) It outlawed primogeniture and entails in land tenure by 

providing for inheritance by all the children and the 

widow. Land could be freely sold. In effect, it outlawed 

any feudal type of land tenure including quitrents. 

(2) It provided for appointment of territorial governors, secretaries, and judges. Each man appointed had to have a 

freehold estate of a specified number of acres in the territory which would prevent outsiders from being government officials. A provision was made for territorial legislatures and their election. These members also had to be 

residents and landowners, as did an elector. These provisions placed the local government and territorial affairs 

in the hands of the residents. 

(3) After providing for territorial government and laws, the 

Ordinance spelled out fundamental rights and policies in 

the form of Articles, similar to the Constitution, which 

was being drafted at that time. 

ARTICLE 1: 

ARTICLE 2: 

ARTICLE 3: 

ARTICLE 4: 

ARTICLE 5: 

ARTICLE 6: 

Complete religious freedom. 

Habeas Corpus, bail, trial by jury, property 

rights. 

Public schools, protection and rights of the 

Indians. 

States to be formed must become part of the 

United States, settlers subject to pay their 

share of the Federal debt, no property taxes 

on Federal land, nonresidents cannot be 

taxed higher than residents, navigable 

streams are public highways and forever free 

to everyone without taxes or duties for using 

them. 

Northwest Territory to be divided into three 

to five new States with Congress fixing the 

boundaries. When a territory contained 

50,000 free inhabitants, it could be admitted 

as a new State. 

Slavery and involuntary servitude outlawed 

in the Northwest Territory. 

Although the Northwest Ordinance contains nothing pertaining to surveying, it did outlaw entail estates, established 

fee simple estates as a national land tenure policy, provided 

government and protection of property rights, and provided 

for the establishment of new territories and States. These 

policies encouraged rapid settlement which in turn created 

the need for surveys and land offices. In the years to come, 

surveyors would be very busy men indeed. 

15 
SUMMARY 

The Land Ordinance of 1785 and the Northwest Ordinance 

of 1787 did not contain any radical departures from the practices used in the colonies. Instead they incorporated and 

consolidated the better features of the old system and outlawed some of the practices which the people as a whole had 

come to dislike. 

Primogeniture and entails were abolished. Quitrents had 

been outlawed, with a few exceptions, by the colonial assemblies soon after 1776, and most people had stopped paying 

them anyway. These practices were on the way out of society 

and independence just hastened the process. 

Land reform was uppermost in the minds of the majority of 

the population. Large land grants to favored people or nobility had to go one way or another, and the sentiment was 

against “land speculators and land jobbers.” The direct sale of 

land was designed to correct some of the old abuses. Prior 

survey and sale was a departure from most established practice. The headright system had given land to the little guy 

but was now abolished. Squatters were to be a problem and as 

a result, eventually led to preemption. The headright system 

was reinstated in the form of the Homestead Acts in 1860’s. 

The Revolutionary War had drawn the new States into a 

closer common bond and made possible the cession of the 

western lands to a central government. The Congress took 

the place of the Crown and the Congressmen immediately 

exercised the power to dispose of the new public domain for 

the common good. The rectangular system was not dreamed 

up out of the whole cloth. The New England towns had proven 

to be a superior method of land disposal even though the 

system was based on close religious ties. All it took was some 

adjustments to make the system adaptable to millions upon 

millions of acres of wilderness. Along with the Northwest 

Ordinance, the Land Ordinance firmly established a system 

of land tenure, land acquisition and government which has 

proved very successful. For the most part, it ended the territorial and private boundary disputes, which alone would 

have made the effort all worthwhile. 

16 
CHAPTER II 

DEVELOPMENT 

OF THE RECTANGULAR SYSTEM 

OF SURVEYS 

17 
THE PERIOD 1785-1796 

The Seven Ranges 

Viewed from a present-day level of technology, the surveys 

under the Land Ordinance were crude and inaccurate. 

However, they laid a basis for a system of surveys that could 

be improved and refined as better equipment and funding 

became available. A brief resume is included to show the 

need for changes in the system afterward. 

Thomas Hutchins was the Geographer and was reappointed for a three-year term in 1784. He was a capable man 

and had worked on the survey of the south boundary of 

Pennsylvania, along with Andrew Ellicott, and David Rittenhouse. That boundary was surveyed using a transit (tangent) 

line and offsets made to the parallel of latitude prior to 

monumentation. There can be no doubt that Hutchins knew 

how to accurately survey a parallel of latitude, with the 

instruments, time, and funds for such work. 

Thirteen surveyors, one from each State, had been 

appointed to assist Hutchins in the survey of the first Seven 

Ranges. Only eight surveyors showed up in Pittsburgh in 

September 1785, all with varying experience and ability. 

These men were: 

(1) Edward Dowse - New Hampshire. Little is known about 

him. He was not from New Hampshire, but was available 

in New York and accepted the appointment of the New 

Hampshire delegates. 

(2) Benjamin Tupper - Massachusetts. That state originally appointed Rufus Putnam, but Putnam was one of the 

original founders of the Ohio Company of Associates and 

had just accepted the position of Surveyor General of 

Massachusetts for lands in Maine. Putnam requested 

that Tupper go in his place. Tupper was really an advance 

scout for the Ohio Company and little is known of his true 

ability as a surveyor. 

Isaac Sherman - Connecticut. That state had chosen 

Samuel Parsons but, like Putnam, Parsons was also involved in the Ohio Company. Isaac was the son of Roger 

Sherman and it is said that his primary motive for going 

West was to gather intelligence about the Connecticut 

Western Reserve. Little is known of his qualifications in 

land surveying. 

Absalom Martin - New Jersey. He was an experienced 

surveyor but his motive was to scout the country for 

prospective land speculators. Martin actually worked 

more or less for John Cleves Symmes who was from New 

Jersey. This aided Symmes when he later purchased a 

large - area of land between the Miami Rivers. 

(5) William Morris - New York. He was a mathematician 

and surveyor and was the only one of the original group 

who was on a par with Hutchins in his ability to execute 

accurate surveys. 

(6) Alexander Parker - Virginia. He was an old county 

surveyor and frontiersman who knew his way around the 

woods. 

(7) James Simpson - Maryland. He actually came from 

New York and his qualifications are unknown. 

(8) Robert Johnston - Georgia. He actually came from Baltimore. Hutchins referred to him as “Doctor” Johnston 

and it is said that he was a wealthy man, presumably 

with some knowledge of surveying. 

So it was a very mixed group of men who gathered on the 

north bank of the Ohio River in September 1785. 

The boundary commission, headed by Andrew Ellicott, had 

established a wood post at or near the high water line on the 

north bank of the Ohio River and on the west boundary of 

Pennsylvania on August 20, 1785. That boundary was run 

with a transit and on a true astronomic meridian. Hutchins 

and his group began the rectangular surveys at the 

aforementioned post on September 30,1785. The only known 

instruments that Hutchins possessed were a sextant, common compasses, and circumferentors. It would have been an 

easy task to determine the compass variation accurately 

because a true meridian was available and there is little 

doubt that Hutchins made such use of the existing line. He 

undoubtedly used a sextant to determine the latitude of the 

beginning point by observations of Polaris and the sun as 

they crossed the meridian. Hutchins reported the latitude as 

being 40”38’02”. The actual latitude is about 40”38’27”, an 

error of 25 seconds. There is no record that Hutchins ever 

attempted to determine the latitude of the western end of 

what is now called the “Geographer’s Line” or of the southern 

end of the first north-south line, as prescribed in the Land 

Ordinance. 

Between September 30 and October 8,1785, Hutchins, the 

other 8 surveyors, and a crew of about 30 chainmen and 

axemen ran 4 miles of line west from the beginning point. 

The line was run with a compass or circumferentor, with 

orientation at each point by using the compass needle, and 

measured with a two-pole Gunter’s chain held horizontally. 

A post was set at the end of each mile. Bearing trees were 

taken and scribed using either a carpenter’s race knife or 

cooper’s (barrel maker’s) knife. At the rate of $2 per mile, the 

crew only earned $8 for nine day’s work. On October 8,1785, 

Hutchins stopped work because he had word of Indian trouble 

at Tuscarawas, 50 miles to the west. Though Hutchins made 

an elaborate report of these four miles of line to the Congress, 

it was nevertheless a very poor showing for the year. 

Hutchins complained of the difficulty of surveying by referring to the true meridian at a rate of $2 per mile. On May 9 

and 12, 1786, Congress passed resolutions suspending the 

true meridian requirement and instructed Hutchins to resume work, limiting the surveys to seven ranges south of the 

Geographer’s Line. The Connecticut Reserve was located 

north of 41” north latitude, so it was decided to limit the 

surveys (in the May 12 resolution) to the townships south of 

the Geographer’s Line. 

When surveying resumed on August 9,1786, six of the old 

group returned, i.e., Tupper, Sherman, Morris, Martin, 

Simpson, and Johnston. The new men added were Winthrop 

Sargent (replacing Edward Dowse for New Hampshire), 

Charles Smith (replacing Parker for Virginia), Ebenezer 

Sproat for Rhode Island, Adam Hoops for Pennsylvania, 

Israel Ludlow for South Carolina, and Samuel Montgomery 

for North Carolina. Sargent and Ludlow were the most notable men; and along with Martin and Sproat, they were to 

continue surveying in Ohio for many years to come. Sargent 

became Secretary of the Ohio Company. 

With a contingent of 12 surveyors (Delaware never did 

18 
send a surveyor) and full crews, the work resumed with vigor. 

Hutchins ran the Geographer’s Line on to the west. As soon 

as six miles were completed, Absalom Martin began the first 

range line, running south to the Ohio River. As each 

township corner was reached, another surveyor started running a range line south. In this manner, Hoops, Sherman, 

Sproat, Sargent, and Simpson, in that order began the range 

lines. Morris drew the seventh range. When Hutchins started 

into the eighth range, trouble with the Indians began again. 

Although Sargent finished a large part of the fifth range, he 

had to stop work by the end of October because of the Indians. 

Hutchins had the other six surveyors busy running the eastwest township lines, but by mid-November 1786, only four 

full ranges of township boundaries were completed. The surveyors spent about two and one-half months writing field 

notes and drawing plats of these surveys. On January 27, 

1787, Hutchins left Ohio for New York to present to the 

Board of Treasury the plats and descriptive notes of these 

four ranges. 

Work was resumed by Ludlow and Martin in April 1787, 

closely followed by Simpson. Ludlow finished the west boundary, to the Ohio River, of the seventh range in about two 

weeks. In spite of thefts and some harassment by the Indians, 

Simpson and Martin completed the fifth and sixth ranges 

soon after Ludlow finished. Although the field work was 

completed in June 1787, and all of the records were in New 

York by September, the Board of Treasury did not receive the 

final plats and notes until July 1788. 

Results of the First Surveys 

There is no written record of instructions to the surveyors 

from Thomas Hutchins. Any instructions given them were 

probably verbal because Hutchins was on the ground with 

them in 1785 and 1786. The field note records show that as a 

general pattern, the range lines were run southerly from the 

Geographer’s Line using a common compass or a circumferentor. There is no indication that any attempt was made to 

correct the compass needle for the magnetic variation. As a 

result, the range lines have an actual bearing of about S. 2” 

W., with a maximum bearing of about S. 3” W. The east-west 

township lines deviate about the same amount from cardinal 

and intersect the range lines at approximately a right angle. 

The west end of the Geographer’s Line is about one mile 

south in latitude of the beginning point, an average deviation 

from due west of 1’21’. The magnetic variation at the time in 

this general area of Ohio was about 30’ to 1” east. 

Only the lot and township corners around the exterior 

boundaries were monumented. The corners were marked 

using either wood posts or a corner tree, witnessed by two 

bearing trees. The bearing trees were blazed and scribed with 

bearings and distances given to the trees from the corner. 

(See Fig. 5 for monumentation, numbering system, and the 

reserved lands within the original Seven Ranges.) The Ohio 

River was meandered between township and range lines as 

the situation dictated. The ranges were numbered west from 

the Pennsylvania boundary. The townships were numbered 

north from the Ohio River, In retrospect, this system of 

numbering the townships was very confusing and cumbersome. For example, Township 2, Seventh Range, is located 

west of Township 1, Sixth Range. Until Ludlow reached the 

Ohio River on the west boundary of the seventh range, he did 

not know the township number (16) of the township at the 

northwest corner of the seventh range. This use of a natural 

boundary was unsatisfactory even in 1786 and 1787, but it 

would be 20 years before the system was corrected to the 

system used today. 

Another large flaw of procedure in the original Seven 

Ranges was the manner of surveying the township boundaries. The range lines were to be run due south, but because of 

the Ohio River, they had to be run in a stairstep pattern to 

offset west from the river and continue south. The township 

lines were to cross the range lines at “right angles, as near as 

may be,” according to the Land Ordinance. The surveyors 

were apparently all individuals with individual concepts of 

how to comply with the ‘‘six miles square” and “right angle” 

requirements. Nothing in the Ordinance specifically stated 

the township corners had to be common to all four townships; 

although that seems to be unnecessary, it should have been 

self-evident. But the surveyors ran east or west on a township 

line and measured six miles and set a township corner, even 

though one already existed on the north-south range line. 

The result of this was anywhere from one to four corners 

supposedly standing for what in theory should have been a 

common corner of all four townships. Some examples of these 

corner situations are illustrated in Fig. 6. The idea of random 

and true line for township lines apparently was not considered, probably because of the expense of that procedure. At $2 

per mile the cost and time to run random and true on the 

east-west lines was out of the question. 

The line measuring was done with a common two-pole 

Gunter’s chain. Hutchins instructed that the lines be measured horizontally, but the terrain was very rough, hilly, and 

covered with timber. Speed was of the greatest importance. 

The resulting measurements were very crude and some of the 

problems created by large errors in measurement will be 

discussed later in this book. (See Fig. 7 for a general view of 

the Seven Ranges.) 

The plats were delivered to the Board of Treasury and 

contained the descriptive notes of the township, corner monumentation, and bearing trees. These descriptive notes were 

not the field notes; they were a listing of each corner showing 

how the corner was monumented (post or tree), the bearing 

trees, and the soil type, terrain and quality of land along each 

mile surveyed. The use of descriptive notes was continued 

until the early 1900’s. 

Congress was impatient and put the first four ranges up for 

sale in 1787. The first lands were sold at an auction in New 

York City between September 21 and October 9,1787. Some 

108,431 acres were sold for $176,090. But 35,457 acres were 

later forfeited, leaving a net sale of 72,974 acres for which 

$117, 108 in public securities was received. The total cost of 

surveying the Seven Ranges during 1785 through 1787 including the Geographer’s salary and all other claims made by 

the surveyors, was $14,876.45. Congress was very disappointed with the showing and no further surveys were 

made by the government during the existence of the Congress of the Confederation. 

The first patent was issued at New York City on March 4, 

1788, to John Martin and is simply for Lot 20, Township 7, 

Range 4. He paid $640 for that section. Since that lot is 

located within the township, no corners of the patent existed 

on the ground. Although the lot boundaries were protracted 

19 

d. 

b. I C 

e. 

9- 

Figure 6. Examples of Township Corner Monumentation in the Original Seven Ranges. 
Marietta 

ju 

I Beginning point 

of rut-veying, 1785 

Figure 7. The Original Seven Ranges. 
LAND ORDINANCE - 1785 
on the plats to show the location of the lots, it was up to 

Martin to have it actually located by survey. Lot 26, reserved 

by Congress, bordered Lot 20 on the west. No rules existed for 

the subdivision of the townships. The easiest course was to 

stub in from the nearest corner on the township line, the 

method used in most such cases, which revealed a large flaw 

in the original procedures under the Ordinance. 

The Ohio Company of Associates 

The first organizers of the Ohio Company were General 

Rufus Putnam and Benjamin Tupper, who advertised for 

prospective investors in Massachusetts in 1786 and 1787. 

After $250,000 had been subscribed and the company organized, they sent a committee of three to apply to Congress for 

a private land purchase in Ohio. The petition was presented 

to Congress in July 1787 by Putnam, Samuel Parsons, and 

Manasseh Cutler, who proposed to purchase 1,500,000 acres, 

survey it, and sell the land to settlers. With some debate and 

negotiations, a contract was signed by Cutler and Winthrop 

Sargent on October 27, 1787. Sargent was Secretary of the 

Ohio Company and had surveyed in the Seven Ranges. The 

purchase price of $1 per acre was reduced to 67 cents by 

allowance for poor land. The payments were made in military 

warrants and public securities (bonds and certificates) which 

had greatly depreciated in value. It is estimated that the 

Ohio Company actually paid less than 12 cents per acre, if 

reduced to specie. The terms of the contract called for 

$500,000 down, a like amount when the surveys were completed and the balance in six equal payments, with patent to 

issue after one million dollars had been paid. The details of 

the Ohio Company Purchase need not be gone into here, but 

eventually the company received about 964,000 acres and 

Congress donated another 100,000 acres to encourage settlement on the frontier and hold the land against the Indians. 

The lands were to be surveyed into townships and lots in 

accordance with the Land Ordinance; the costs of the survey, 

etc., were borne by the company. The east boundary of the 

purchase was the west boundary of the Seven Ranges; the 

new surveys were to be an extension of the Seven Ranges 

surveys. Lot 16 in each township was reserved for schools, 

Lots 8,11, and 26 were reserved to Congress, and Lot 29 was 

reserved for the support of religion (see Fig. 8). The religion 

reservation had been deleted in the Land Ordinance but was 

restored in the contract with the Ohio Company and later in 

the Symmes Purchase. The only obligation of the government was to survey the north boundary of the purchase, to be 

an east-west line, from the Seven Ranges to the Scioto River, 

which would enclose the one and one-half million acres (plus 

enough to cover the reserved lands) north of the Ohio River. 

Rufus Putnam was made Superintendent of Surveys for 

the Ohio Company. He and his contingent arrived at the 

mouth of the Muskingum River on April 7,1788, where they 

founded the town of Marietta. They soon began the surveys of 

the township and range lines. 

In the fall of 1788, Thomas Hutchins, Absalom Martin, and 

Israel Ludlow began the survey of the exterior boundaries of 

the Ohio Company Purchase. Hutchins determined the latitude at the mouth of the Scioto River, meandered up the Ohio 

for 12 miles and then left for Pittsburg and other work. 

Hutchins died April 28,1789, without ever returning to Ohio. 

The Congress did not appoint a new Geographer. Ludlow 

continued the meanders of the Ohio River up to the southwest 

corner of the Seven Ranges, while Martin meandered up the 

east bank of the Scioto. Martin halted work in late 1788. In 

1789, Ludlow ran the limiting north boundary of the purchase west from what is now the northeast corner of the 

Donation Tract to the Scioto and then meandered downstream to connect with the Martin meanders. It isn’t known 

how Ludlow monumented the northern line, but it is certain 

that he blazed it. The area encompassed by this “Ludlow line” 

and the Ohio, Scioto, and Seven Ranges was computed and 

found to contain sufficient land to satisfy the Ohio Company 

and the proposed Scioto Company purchases; however, the 

Scioto Company never came to be. 

Putnam employed Martin, Ludlow, Ebenezer Sproat, John 

Matthews, Anselm Tupper, all of whom had worked on the 

Seven Ranges, and others to conduct the surveys. At first the 

surveyors were in business for themselves, charging individual surveying fees, as was the custom in the States at that 

time, but this proved unsatisfactory at best, and Putnam 

began a contract system. The contracts were for the survey of 

given townships and subdivisions at a stated price per mile. 

Putnam would eventually continue the contract system 

whem he became Surveyor General of the United States. 

The township boundaries and section lines were surveyed 

in the same general manner as the Seven Ranges. The lines 

were run with a compass without correction for magnetic 

variation in the free style used in the original Thirteen 

States. Measurements were made with the only measuring 

tool available, the Gunter’s chain. Corners were 

monumented with wood posts or corner trees, with bearing 

trees to witness them, and the lines were blazed. But the 

work was executed with the objectives of speed and low cost 

and was no better than could be expected under the circumstances. The range lines have bearings of up to N. 4” E.-S. 4” 

W., with the township lines about the same amount from 

cardinal directions. Distances between section corners may 

exceed, or be less than, 80 chains by as much as 5 chains, in 

actual measure. 

The Ohio Company had over 800 subscribers or stockholders. Using a complicated formula derived by the company, each stockholder was entitled to receive a total of 

1,173.37 acres of land in 7 different sizes of tracts. The sixth 

and seventh tracts were for 640 acres and 262 acres, respectively. To meet the odd acreage of 262 acres, a given township 

would be divided according to the plan shown in Fig. 9. By 

that division, 22 shareholders would receive their 640-acre 

and 262-acre allotments in the township. Remembering that 

5 lots were reserved, Lots 8,11,16,26, and 29, and taking out 

9 lots to be divided into nearly 262-acre fractions, 22 lots and 

22 fractions were accommodated for 22 stockholders’ sixth 

and seventh tracts. The stockholder might receive a deed for 

Lot 1 and Fraction No. 1 in the township. Approximately 37 

townships were surveyed in this manner. Other townships 

were subdivided into 160-acre quarter sections and the remainder into small tracts and town lots. Theoretically, each 

stockholder eventually received title to his full share one way 

or another. 

Thus, the Ohio Company Purchase was the proving ground 

for subdivisions of a township at that stage of development. 

Plats were made of these townships but no field notes are 

known to exist. Tie company was not required to file plats 

24 

Figure 10. The Symmes Purchase and Between the Miamis Survey. 
and field notes with the Board of Treasury. In later years 

when the government sold the reserved lands, the lack of 

these records created some difficulties for the Surveyors 

General when they were required to locate the reserved lots 

within these townships. 

The Donation Tract 

The Ohio Company had originally proposed to donate 100 

acres of land to anyone who would settle within the purchase 

and aid in protecting the lands against the Indians. But the 

cost of government and other factors caused financial problems and the company presented these hardships to Congress 

in 1792; in April, Congress authorized the President to donate 100,000 acres to the company in trust. The Donation 

Tract was bounded on the north by the “Ludlow line,” on the 

south by the lands patented to the company in the “First 

Purchase,” on the east by the Seven Ranges, and extended far 

enough west (approximately 21 miles) to include the 100,000 

acres. These lands were donated without charge to male 

settlers in lots of 100 acres and were never subdivided into 

townships; it indirectly created fractional townships in 

ranges 8 through 12 of the Ohio River Base surveys. 

The only other large tract of significance within the boundaries of the purchase was the two townships reserved for a 

college. Townships 8 and 9, Range 14, were donated for that 

purpose and were not subdivided into lots under the Land 

Ordinance. 

The Ohio Company completed most of its business by January 1796 and went completely out of business in 1849. 

The Symmes Purchase 

John Cleves Symmes, from New Jersey, contributed much 

of his private resources in support of the Continental Army 

during the Revolution. He held a large quantity of certificates of indebtedness and wanted to turn them into something of value, namely, real estate. Symmes proposed to 

purchase the lands between the Great and Little Miami Rivers in southwestern Ohio for about the same terms given the 

Ohio Company, except that only one township was reserved 

for an academy. Although Symmes jumped the gun and began settlement before a contract was concluded, which made 

Congress angry, he finally got a contract for one million acres 

on October 15, 1788. The east boundary of the tract was 

supposed to be parallel to the Great Miami, beginning at a 

point 20 miles up the Ohio from the mouth of that stream. It 

was impossible to determine a boundary of that description so 

Symmes began in late 1788 to survey all the lands between 

both Miami rivers. Symmes’ principal surveyor, Israel Ludlow, ran an east-west base line between the Miamis through 

what is now Fractional Range 2, setting corners every mile. 

Symmes directed the assistant surveyors to run lines north 

and south on a magnetic meridian from each of Ludlow’s mile 

posts, setting corners at one-mile intervals on the meridional 

lines but not to tie across with east-west lines. The purchasers would have to pay for surveying the east-west lines. 

By this scheme, Symmes would only pay the cost of surveying 

half the section lines but all four corners would have been 

established by him. The townships were not numbered in 

reference to Ludlow’s base line, but it ran east-west and the 

ranges were thus numbered north from the Ohio River. The 

first townships on the Ohio are fractional and are called 

2 

“Fractional Range 1.” The second row is called “Fractional 

Range 2,” with the third and first full townships called just 

“Range 1,” followed by Range 2, Range 3, and so on. The 

townships are numbered east from the Great Miami River. 

The Between the Miamis surveys are the only place in the 

United States where ranges are numbered north-south and 

the townships are numbered in an east-west direction (see 

Fig. 10). 

Gross distortions resulted when the purchasers hired surveyors to run the east-west lines to form the north and south 

boundaries of the sections tying between the corners established on the meridional lines. The supposed northwest corner of a section might be 15 to 20 chains or more, north or 

south of the northeast corner of the same section. The longitudinal distances between corners were also grossly in error. 

A purchaser of-a full section might have 100 acres more or 

less than he was to pay for. This type of distortion was clearly 

in violation of the Land Ordinance which said that the eastwest lines should cross the north-south lines at “right angles 

as near as may be.” The numbering of the ranges north-south 

was also technically in violation of the Ordinance. Even 

though many purchasers already occupied their lands 

according to the original corners, Symmes ordered his surveyors to carefully rerun the meridian line which intersected 

the Ohio opposite the mouth of the Licking River in Kentucky and set new corners every mile. He called this new line 

a “standard.” The purchasers were to then run east-west 

lines from the new corners on the standard and set their 

section corners at intersections with the old meridional lines, 

which created even more conflicts and problems. Eventually 

the Ohio Supreme Court ruled that the original corners controlled, regardless of the distortions. 

Symmes began to run into financial difficulties and 

couldn’t pay for the lands he had contracted to purchase. He 

also had his surveyors at work north of the land he had paid 

for and was in effect selling land he did not own. Symmes 

eventually received patent to the lands as far north as the 

north boundary of Range 111. The government in later years 

honored the claims of purchasers north of that line and 

patented the lands to them under the Act of March 2,1799,l 

Stat. 728, and supplemental acts. 

The Symmes Purchase was so badly managed and the 

surveys so poor that it effectively killed any further large 

land sales by Congress. It brought out the need for proper 

surveys, executed by the government, and the fixing in position, by law, of survey corners and lines once claims were 

made based on them. Though Symmes had used a base line to 

begin the surveys, it was not used to control township and 

range numbers. The use of natural boundaries such as the 

Ohio and Great Miami Rivers was obviously defective, but for 

the time being the surveys were locked into what already was 

the practice. But even as bad as the surveys in the Symmes 

Purchase were, they proved to be far superior to the metes 

and bounds system and indiscriminate locations. There are 

no known field notes and very few plats of the surveys within 

Symmes Purchase, as most of the records were destroyed 

when Symmes’ house burned at North Bend, Ohio, in 1810. In 

later years, the Surveyor General was able to find some 

scattered records which were in the hands of local and county 

surveyors. 
The Virginia Military Tract 

When Congress accepted the Virginia Cession on March 1, 

1784, a condition in the deed of cession was that the lands 

north of the Ohio and between the Scioto and Little Miami 

rivers were reserved to satisfy Virginia military warrants if 

there was not enough good land in Kentucky to fulfill requirements. The area reserved was to be all the land lying 

between the Little Miami and Scioto Rivers, north of the Ohio 

River, and lying east of a line drawn from the souce of the 

Little Miami to the source of the Scioto. Virginia had granted 

from 100 acres for a soldier or sailor with less than three 

year’s service to 15,000 acres for a Major General. That state 

had no idea how much land was needed nor how much was 

available in Kentucky at that time. Although some locations 

were made in the tract as early as 1787, they were declared 

illegal and the area was not officially opened to entry until 

August 10, 1790. 

The military warrants could be located by the original 

holder or after 1794, he could assign or sell his warrant to 

someone else. Heirs of the original warrant holder or agents 

could do the same. Often several warrants were bought by 

one person and turned in for land in the tract. 

Basically the system used in the Virginia Military Tract to 

survey and convey land was the following: a surveying district was set up usually with natural boundaries, a land 

office, and a district surveyor. The district surveyors were 

predecessors of the county surveyors. Upon proof of service in 

the war, the soldier would be issued a warrant for the stipulated number of acres. He would then go on the land, select a 

parcel he liked, and come up with a crude description of its 

location. He would then visit the land office and present his 

warrant and description. If no conflicting claim appeared 

likely, the land office would issue him a numbered certificate 

of entry. Next, he took the entry to the district surveyor who, 

together with the land office, assigned it a survey number. 

The surveyor went out and surveyed the tract, usually enclosing the number of acres called for in the warrant, 

although there was nothing in the laws to require that all of 

the land in a warrant be surveyed in one contiguous parcel. 

After survey, the surveyor would prepare a description and 

plat of the survey, showing its survey number, etc., and 

would make out the certificate of survey. The claimant paid 

the expenses of the survey and then presented his certificate 

of survey, description, etc., to the land office. If all appeared 

in order, a patent would be issued by the Board of Treasury 

and later the General Land Office in Washington. Title to the 

Virginia Military Tract remained in the Federal government 

until patent was issued, although the surveying and land 

offices were under the supervision of Virginia. 

This then was the procedure in the simplest of cases, often 

it was much more complicated. There was no method used to 

tie the surveys together and at any giver, time it was impossible to find just where one survey was located in relation to 

others in the same vicinity. The overlaps and gaps or gores 

were everywhere. The irregularities and errors were sometimes astounding. C. E. Sherman reports (Original Ohio 

Land Subdivisions, page 32,1925) that Survey No. 15890 in 

Scioto County was originally returned as containing 458.5 

acres, but accurate resurveys by the year 1925 showed that 

Survey No. 15890 actually encompassed over 1,662 acres. 

This is surely an extreme case, but even the worst of the 

rectangular surveys of that time did not approach such gross 

errors. 

The patents for the locations within the Virginia Military 

Tract are frequently long and complex. One survey contained 

118 separate courses and left an unclaimed parcel enclosed 

within its boundaries (cited by W. E. Peters in his book Ohio 

Lands and Their Subdivision, 2nd ed., 1918). In copying all 

those courses for a patent, description mistakes could easily 

occur and probably did. 

Surveys were made and patents issued for lands in the 

tract well into the mid-1800’s. Congress passed a multitude of 

laws concerning lands in the tract, including those pertaining to the boundary line between the headwaters of the Little 

Miami and Scioto rivers (discussed later), but the final act 

was passed on February 18,1871,16 Stat. 416. That act gives 

to the State of Ohio all the unclaimed and unsettled lands 

within the Virginia Military District, thought to be about 

76,735 acres, without description or benefit of survey. It is 

entirely possible that some small parcels still exist that are 

not yet identified. 

Other Events During 1785-1796 

As has been seen so far, Congress received very little revenue from the public land sales in the Seven Ranges. Settlers 

just weren’t willing to pay $1 per acre, cash, for lands that 

were almost totally unprotected from Indian attack and then 

pay for a survey to locate the boundaries before they could 

start clearing. Instead, they chose to buy from the Ohio Company or Symmes at a lower price on credit at 6 percent 

interest with the cost of survey, if any, much less and with 

some measure of protection. In selling large tracts to two 

private companies, Congress had set up stiff competition 

which it could not meet. 

On January 20,1790, the House of Representatives called 

on Alexander Hamilton, Secretary of the Treasury, for a plan 

of disposing of the public lands. Hamilton submitted his 

report on July 20, 1790, in which he recommended establishing a General Land Office at the seat of government with 

subordinate offices or local land offices in the area where land 

sales would take place, that is, in Ohio and in the Mississippi 

country south of Tennessee. His plan called for a Surveyor 

General and Deputy Surveyor’s General, sale in lots of 100 

acres and upward, sale to land companies, a price of 30 cents 

per acre payable in gold or silver or in public securities, and 2 

year’s credit at 6 percent interest, for the townships to be 

surveyed 10 miles square (but no mention is made of sections, 

just that lots of different sizes would be located within the 

townships), and that all surveys would be at the expense of 

the purchasers or grantees. Hamilton’s plan was quite detailed as to methods of handling the sales, etc. Fortunately 

the Congress did not accept all of Hamilton’s ideas and in fact 

did not act affirmatively on any of Hamilton’s recommendations for nearly six more years. 

Another factor that deterred further activity in surveying 

and land sales was the Indians. The Territorial Governor, 

Arthur St. Clair, had tried negotiating with the Indians 

without much luck. In June 1790, he decided to go to war, but 

suffered heavy losses. St. Clair tried again in 1791, and again 

was soundly defeated by the Indians. In 1793, General “Mad 

Anthony” Wayne was given command of the Army in the 

territory and opened a skillful campaign in 1794. The Indians 

28 
lost the decisive battle at Fallen Timbers in August 1794. 

The result was a treaty, signed at Greenville, Ohio, on A u - 

gust 3,1795,7 Stat. 49, which gave title to the United States 

for about three-fourths of the present state of Ohio and a 

small part of Indiana. The Greenville Treaty boundaries will 

be discussed later in this book. 

Analysis of the Period 

Although many details were still to be worked out, this 

period proved beyond a doubt that the rectangular system of 

townships and ranges was far superior to the indiscriminate 

location method of disposing of large land areas. The complete simplicity of land description cannot be overstressed. 

Compare the first patent description, “Lot No. 20, Township 

7, Range 4,” against the complexity of a many-sided metes 

and bounds location. There is only one possible location for 

that section in all of the Ohio River Base surveys which can 

be easily and quickly spotted on any map of sufficient scale. 

Theoretically, it can also be divided by aliquot part description down to a parcel the size of this page and that small piece 

could only be situated in one place in the whole country. This 

huge advantage must have been obvious to anyone concerned 

with land surveys and sales, even Alexander Hamilton. It 

would be a few years and arguments later before the six-milesquare township was fixed as the final unit. Ten-mile 

townships were never adopted but five-mile townships would 

be used for special reasons only. 

The details of execution, monumentation, subdivision, and 

sales were still in an evolutionary stage in 1796, but the 

foundation was laid. Indian title had been extinguished, the 

country was at peace at home and abroad, the economy was 

looking up, the Ohio Company and Symmes had about run 

their course and the public lands were there with settlers 

ready and willing to buy, given the chance. The time was ripe 

for the next step. 

THE PERIOD 1796 - 1812 

Act of May 18,1796 

Congress debated but failed to pass legislation on the public lands question from 1789-1792. A scandal involving the 

Ohio Company, the questionble activities of Symmes, and the 

final defeat of the Indians caused action in January 1796. 

Finally the Act of May 18,1796,l Stat. 464, was approved, a 

milestone in any history of the public land surveys, and at the 

time was the instructions for the conduct of those surveys. An 

analysis of the act by section is appropriate here. 

Sec. 1. 

Sec. 2. 

A Surveyor General shall be appointed. He shall 

engage skillful surveyors as his deputies. He shall 

survey the lands northwest of the Ohio River and 

above the mouth of the Kentucky River (in Kentucky) in which Indian title has been extinguished 

(Greenville Treaty). He shall frame regulations 

and instructions for his deputies and they shall 

take an oath (to do proper work) and he may remove (fire) them for negligence or misconduct. 

(Hopefully this would give the Surveyor General 

the power to achieve properly executed surveys.) 

The lands not already surveyed or patented (in the 

Seven Ranges, Ohio Company, Symmes Purchase) 

and lands not being appropriated for military 

bounties (Virginia Tract and U.S. Military Reserve) are to be divided into townships six miles 

square by north-south lines run according to true 

meridian (restoring that requirment) and by lines 

crossing them at right angles (east-west), except 

where the Indian boundary or navigable rivers 

make full townships impossible. (Only the Greenville treaty line, Ohio, Scioto, Great and Little 

Miami Rivers and private land claims created 

fractional townships as referred to in the act.) The 

corners of the townships and the section corners 

will be distinctly and differently marked. (The 

appropriate numbers, township, range, and section so that a purchaser could find his land.) Onehalf of the townships, taken alternately, shall be 

subdivided into sections (first use of that term), by 

running through the townships parallel lines at 

the end of every two miles, with section corners at 

every mile on all lines surveyed. (This was another 

economy measure.) The sections will be numbered 

beginning with number one in the northeast corner 

of the township, proceeding west and east alternately (the method still in use, but no one knows 

why the new numbering system was adopted). 

Bearing trees will be taken at each corner and all 

lines will be plainly blazed (the common practice). The lines will be measured with chains containing two perches of 16% feet each, subdivided 

into 25 equal links, adjusted to a standard to be 

kept for that purpose. (This specifically calls for a 

Gunter’s chain and leaves no doubt that accurate 

measurements are to be made.) The Surveyors are 

to keep detailed field notes (vital for mapping information) and return them to the Surveyor 

General for permanent records. The Surveyor 

General will make three plats; one for his office, 

one for use at the place of sale, and one for the 

Secretary of Treasury; he will make out a description of the township for the use of the officers 

making sales, and will give a description on the 

plat of the lands and the corner monumentation. 

(The field note books were kept by the Surveyor 

General and only descriptive notes went to 

Washington and the land offices.) 

Sec. 3. Reservations: 36 contiguous sections surrounding 

a salt spring east of the Scioto are reserved (this 

spring is located in section 29, T. 7, R. 18, and the 

36 sections are in Tps. 6 and 7, R. 19, and Tps. 6 

and 7, R. 18, where Jackson, Ohio, is now located). 

If other salt springs are found, the section containing it is also reserved (salt was a vital element to 

the settlers and no one was allowed to monopolize 

it). The four sections at the center of each township 

are resreved (sections 15,16,21, and 22) except in 

fractional townships which are less than threefourths of full size, but the salt reservation applies. 

(No mention is made of a section 16 school reservation.) 
Sec. 4. 

Sec. 5. 

Sec. 6. 

Sec. 7. 

Sec. 8. 

Sec. 9. 

When seven ranges are surveyed (1) Below the 

Great Miami, (2) between the Scioto and Ohio 

Company Purchase, (3) between the Connecticut 

Reserve and the Seven Ranges, and the plats returned, etc., the sales will be held at Cincinnati 

and Pittsburg. (This wording had the effect of 

establishing surveying districts.) The townships 

subdivided will be offered for sale in sections, and 

those not subdivided will be sold at Washington in 

quarter townships. The minimum price is raised to 

two dollars per acre (raised from the old price of 

$1). 

Provides for notice and advertising of the sales. 

This section is complex and directs that the unsold 

lands in the Seven Ranges, including lands drawn 

by the Army, and the lands sold but unpaid for, 

thereby forfeited, and the townships that were to 

be sold entire under the Land Ordinance are to be 

sold. The whole townships are to be sold in quarter 

township blocks in Philadelphia, reserving the 

four sections at the center of the township. The 

townships that were to be sold by sections under 

the Ordinance are to be sold at Pittsburg, again 

reserving the four sections in the center of the 

township. But the reserved lots in the townships 

already sold under the Ordinance are still reserved, which was very confusing because of forfeited lands, scattering of plats and records of sale, 

etc. It was really hard to tell whether the old reserves were abolished or the new four-section reserve was added to the old in certain townships. 

This section turned out to be a mistake and wasn’t 

corrected until 1820. It provides for credit purchases under a complicated formula. The highest 

bidder is to pay 1/20th of the purchase price as 

down payment, to be forfeited if one-half the price 

including the 1/20 is not paid within 30 days. If he 

pays the half, he then has one year to pay the other 

half. If he doesn’t pay the remaining half within 

one year, he forfeits the half he has paid and the 

government forecloses. If and when he pays the 

full amount, he will receive a patent which is to be 

signed by the President and Secretary of State, the 

latter to record the patent. Thus, the Secretary of 

the Treasury was in charge of credit sales but the 

Secretary of State recorded the patent. Credit 

sales, forfeitures, and scattering of records caused 

problems and confusion for the next 40 years or 

more. 

Provides for recordkeeping by both the Territorial 

Governor (St. Clair) and the Secretary of the 

Treasury. 

The wording of this section probably caused more 

litigation and misunderstanding than any other 

section of the act. It follows, in full: 

“And be it further enacted, That all navigable 

Sec. 10. 

Sec. 11. 

Sec. 12. 

rivers, within the territory to be disposed of 

by virtue of this act, shall be deemed to be, 

and remain public highways: And that in all 

cases, where the opposite banks of any 

stream, not navigable, shall belong to different persons, the stream and the bed thereof 

shall become common to both.” 

What isn’t spelled out is: What is a navigable 

river, i.e., how is navigability determined? Nonnavigable streams have a common ownership, i.e., 

if there are different patentees on opposite banks 

they own the bed in common. But nothing is said 

about non-navigable lakes, and that caused many 

problems during the 1800’s. This important section of the act is now codified in 43 U.S.C. 931. 

Provides for the Surveyor General’s salary (but no 

office help) and that the President of the United 

States may fix the compensation of the assistant 

surveyors, chain carriers and axe men: provided 

that the whole expense of surveying shall not exceed $3 per mile for every mile actually run or 

surveyed. This seems to imply that assistant surveyors and crew members would be hired on a 

salary, but if so, how would it be possible to assure 

that the cost of surveying would not exceed $3 per 

mile? The increase to $3 (the Land Ordinance 

called for $2) would not assure speed on the part of 

the surveyors. 

Provides for the fees to be paid the Treasurer or 

receiver for handling the sales. 

Requires that the Surveyor General, assistant surveyors, and chainmen must take an oath to faithfully perform their duties. The receiver is to furnish a bond as security. These stipulations were an 

effort to assure honesty in the surveys and money 

handling. 

Act of June 1,1796,l Stat. 490 

Passage of this act was anticipated in the Act of May 18, 

1796. The title is a little misleading, “An Act regulating the 

grants of land appropriated for Military Services, and for the 

Society of the United Brethren, for propagating the Gospel 

among the Heathen.” 

In the Land Ordinance, the Army was to select townships 

to satisfy the military bounties granted to the Revolutionary 

War soldiers by the Continental Congress. None were 

selected; instead, the Congress agreed to set aside a specific 

tract to be used to satisfy those outstanding warrants, i.e., the 

U.S. Military Reserve. 

The “United Brethren” were the Moravian missionaries 

who had established missions on the Tuscarawas branch of 

the Muskingum River and had converted many Indians to 

Christianity. These missions were settled Indian towns within the Military Reserve. The missionaries had a strong influence on the Indians and had brought a measure of peace in 

the area before the Greenville Treaty. Congress granted 

4,000 acres for each town to the Moravians in appreciation, 

30 
which were outright land grants to be held in trust by the 

Moravians for the Indians. 

Sec. 1. The Surveyor General isto survey the boundaries 

of the Military Reserve. Beginning at a point on 

the west boundary of the Seven Ranges, 50 miles 

south of the northwest corner of those townships 

(T. 16,R. 71, thence due west to the Scioto River, 

thence up that river to the Greenville Treaty line, 

thence northeasterly on the treaty line to the Tuscarawas and up that stream to an intersection 

with a line run due west fromthe northwest corner 

of the Seven Ranges, thence due east along that 

line to the northwest corner of the Seven Ranges. 

The Greenville Treaty line had not been surveyed and 

what Congress didn't know wasthat a line run due west from 

thenorthwest corner ofthe SevenRangeswould intersect the 

Tuscarawas at very nearly the same place as did the treaty 

line, i.e., "at the Tuscarawas crossing." 

The first section of the act goes on to provide that the 

Military Reserve would be surveyed into townships five 

miles square, with corners every two and one-half miles on 

the exterior boundaries, in the same manner as the Act of 

May 18,1796.It also calls for salt spring reserves, similar to 

the preceeding act. 

The five-mile township was used because it would contain 

16,000 acres. All of the military warrants were in multiples 

of 100acres. A 23,040-acre township isn't evenly divisible by 

100. The salt spring reserve provision was undoubtably an 

oversight, as the Military Reserve had no sections. Only one 

salt reserve was ever made; that wasthe northeast quarter of 

T. 5, R. 18 (4,000 acres instead of 640). 

Sec. 2. The land was to be granted in quarter townships. 

The plan, which never worked, was that a group of 

warrant holders would get together and select a 

4,000-acre quarter township to satisfy their collective warrants. 

Sec. 3. This section of the act provides for selections and 

time limits. 

Sec. 4. All selections were to be completed by January 1, 

1800, but that never came to be. 

Sec. 5. States that the Surveyor General is required to 

survey the three Moravian towns of 4,000 acres 

each. 

Sec. 6. Repeats Sec. 9 of the Act of May 18,1796,making 

all navigable streams public highways. 

Although these two actswere passed two weeks apart,they 

could be considered one overall law. Together, they provide 

for survey and sale of most ofthe lands south ofthe Connecticut Reserve and south and east of the Greenville Treaty 

boundaries, except the area between the Miami Rivers and 

those in the Virginia Military Tract. Themain features ofthe 

acts are: 

(1)A Surveyor General is in charge of all the surveying and 

31 

platting, with rather liberal authority to execute the 

work under his own regulations and instructions. 

The surveys are to be run by the true meridian; all the 

township lines are to be surveyed and every other section 

line within alternate six-mile townships, with corners at 

every mile. 

The five-mile townships are to be monumented every two 

and one-half miles, but the townships will be divided into 

quarters by protraction and sale. 

The maximum price for surveys israised to $3 per mile. 

Sales are to be made with credit allowed, at a minimum 

price of $2 per acre, up from $1. 

The four reserved sections are grouped in the center of 

the township except the additional salt reserves, and the 

gold, silver, copper, and lead reserves are dropped, as is 

the Sec. 16 school reserve. 

The system of numbering the sections within a six-mile 

township is changed to the method still in use. 

Most of the land sales are to be held much closer to the 

land being sold. 

Figs. 11and 12 depict the survey lines to be run, monumentation, protractions, and reservations under the provisions of these acts of Congress. These laws were a great step 

forward; it was unfortunate that only half the six-mile 

townships were to be subdivided at all, and those only in 

two-mile blocks. 

TheGreenvilleTreaty 

The Greenville (or Greeneville) Treaty signed at Greenville, Ohio, on August 3, 1795, 7 Stat. 49, was to affect the 

continuation of the land surveysfor over 20 years and therefore must be included in any history of the public land surveys. 

In 1794,General Wayne had defeated the Indians in battle 

and therefore could force them to comply with previous 

treaties. Twelve Indian tribes subscribed to the provisions of 

the treaty. The boundaries of the main body of land ceded 

were: beginning at the mouth ofthe CuyahogaRiver where it 

entered Lake Erie and where Cleveland, Ohio,isnow located, 

thence up that river to the portage between the Cuyahoga 

and Tuscarawas branch of the Muskingum (theportage trail 

is now a street in Akron, Ohio), thence along the portage to 

the Tuscarawas, thence down that branch to the crossing 

place above Fort Lawrence (this crossing place was where the 

Sandusky Indian Trail crossed the Tuscarawas),thence on a 

straightlinewesterly (aboutS.70°W.) to the beginningofthe 

portage near where Lorimies Store had stood (this portage 

was between the Great Miami and St. Mary's Rivers; Lorimies Store, a trading post, had been burned by the Indians), 

thence westerly (about N. 81° W.) to Fort Recovery, thence 

southwesterly (about S. 11" W.) to the Ohio River at a point 

opposite the mouth of the Kentucky River. All lands south 

and east of that described boundary were ceded to the United 

States. North and west ofthe line the government received 16 

other small reserves, from 2 to 12 miles square, the most 

notable of which is the 12-mile square reserve on the Miami 

River (Maumee River) of Lake Erie near where Toledo, Ohio, 

is now located. Though not spelled out in the 1796 acts of 

Congress, it would become the duty of the Surveyor General 

to survey the treaty line and the 16 reserves. 

4 

3 

3 

N 

d 

2 

4000 a 

Figure 12. Survey of 5 Mile Townships in the U.S. Military Reserve under the Act of June 1,1796. 

3 

4000 a 

I 

4000 a 

4 

4000 a 

A 

0 

0 

cv 

v 
TheConnecticutWesternReserve 

In her deed of cession dated September 13,1786,Connecticut retained the strip of land lying north of 41" north latitude 

and extending 120 miles west from the west boundary of 

Pennsylvania. Connecticut owned those lands and until 1800 

had political jurisdiction over them. 

During the Revolutionary War, the British burned the 

towns of New Haven, Greenwich, Norwalk, Fairfield, and 

New London in Connecticut. The sufferers of these depredations appealed for relief and assistance in compensation for 

their losses. In 1792, the Connecticut Legislature granted 

this group 500,000acres atthe west end ofthe reserve, which 

was called the "Firelands." In 1796, Connecticut sold the 

remaining three million acres of the reserve to the ConnecticutLand Company,but the Indian title to the reserve had not 

been extinguished at that time. Clear title was not obtained 

until the Greenville Treaty in 1795 and the Treaty of Fort 

Industry in 1805. 

Surveyswere begun by the company in 1796.In that year, 

Seth Pease, a company surveyor, ran the south boundary 

along the 41st parallel west to the Cuyahoga River. The 

Connecticut Land Company then subdivided their landsinto 

five-mile-squaretownships, which were then subdivided into 

lots of various acreages and sizes. Most of the lots are rectangular, notsquare in shape. After the Treaty of FortIndustry, the south boundary of the reserve was continued to a 

total of 120 miles. The Firelands were also subdivided into 

five-mile-square townships; these were subdivided into quarter townships with the southeast quarter numbered 1, the 

northeast quarter numbered 2, the northwest quarter numbered 3, and the southwest quarter numbered 4. The 

townships in the entire Connecticut Reserve, including the 

Firelands, are numbered north fromthe south boundary and 

west fromthe Pennsylvania line. Thusthe south boundary is 

a base line and the east boundary a meridian of reference. 

The surveys in the Connecticut Company (eastern) part of 

the Reserve run very near the true meridian. All of the 

meridional township lines in the Firelands, the 20th thru 

24th range, were deliberately run north parallel to the Pennsylvania line which would theoretically yield a true bearing 

of about N. 1° 30' W. In fact, the meridional lines in the 

Firelands are closer t o N. 2° 30' W. The west and south 

boundaries of the reserve were later investigated and 

checked by Jared Mansfield, the second Surveyor General, 

and these errorswere discovered,but no attempt wasmade to 

correctthe boundaries. Mansfield recommendedthat they be 

left as is regardless of the errors because trying t o correct 

them would cause a great deal of trouble and litigation. Fig. 

13showsthe layout ofthe ConnecticutReserve, adapted from 

C. E. Sherman (Original Ohio Land Subdivisions, opposite 

page 80,1925).Thisis onemore incident of private surveyors 

determining the boundaries of the public lands. 

PublicLandSurveysResume-1797 

RufusPutnam, appointed SurveyorGeneral under the new 

law on November 5, 1796, was born in Sutton, Massachusetts, on April 9,1738. As a young man he was apprenticed as a millwright,was self-educated andjoined the Army 

during the French and Indian War in 1757. In 1760, he 

returned to Massachusetts, settled in Braintree, married, 

raised nine children, practiced surveying, and built mills as 

well asfarming. He rejoined the Army during the Revolution 

as aLt.Colonel andwas promotedtoBrigadier General in the 

Army Engineers. He was Surveyor General in Maine after 

the war and also helped organize the Ohio Company. He 

directed the surveys ofthat company,became ajudge in 1790 

and Brigadier General in the regular Army in 1792,fighting 

the Indians in the Northwest Territory. President Washington wanted Simon DeWitt (who had been Geographer along 

with Hutchins before 1785)to be Surveyor General but DeWitt declined and the job went to Putnam. Though Putnam 

was not well educated, was deficient in mathematics, and 

wasto allowpoor surveyst o be executed, he was probably the 

best man for the job. He knew the country, was highly respected in the territory, and could draw a large number of 

experienced surveyors in a short time to execute the work. 

On January 25, 1797, Putnam wrote to Oliver Wolcott, 

Secretary of the Treasury, requesting instructions for conducting the surveys; he suggested a contract system with 

deputy surveyors but needed authority for contracting and 

how to conduct the financing. Wolcott replied on March 11, 

1797, giving Putnam authority to obligate the government 

through contracts. Funds for payment of the deputies, for 

which he had t o account, were allotted to Putnam, and copies 

of the contracts were to be sent to Wolcott. 

Putnam established his office in Marietta, Ohio, in March 

1797.With these details worked out, Putnam's first order of 

business was the Greenville Treaty line and the boundaries 

of the Military Reserve. Early in 1797, he contracted with 

Israel Ludlow to survey the Greenville Treaty line. And the 

contract system of public land surveys, which endured until 

1910,was underway. 

After delays waiting for an Indian and an Army escort, 

Ludlow began the Treaty line in June 1797.He ran a random 

line from Lorimies Store northeasterly toward Fort Lawrence, which intersected the Tuscarawas at 153 miles, 20 

miles south of the crossing place. Ludlow then calculated a 

true line back and ran S. 70°50' W. He blazed the line and set 

a post every mile. This true line intersected Lorimies Creek, 

23% chains upstream north from the intended place. Ludlow 

reported these facts to Putnam and hoped that the Indians 

wouldn't complain about the 23% chain miss. Ludlow temporarily suspended the survey of the treaty line. No attempt 

was made to correct back for the 23% chain miss and that jog 

was left in the treaty line. But more importantly, it is the first 

known record of a major survey line of the public land surveys 

being run random and true. Although the Greenville Treaty 

line from the Tuscarawas Crossing to Lorimies Creek is far 

from being a straight line and was certainly not a rhumb line, 

it was a first major step in establishing some measure of 

limits of closure. 

Military Reserve Surveys 

Putnam divided the U.S. Military Reserve into five districts and made the west boundary of the Seven Ranges a 

meridian line and south boundary of the reserve a base line. 

The townships were numbered north from the south boundary and west from the Seven Ranges. Townships 1 through 4, 

north, ranges 1 through 6, west, were the southeast survey 

district. The remaining townships in ranges 1 through 6 were 

the northeast district. Townships 1 through 4, ranges 7 

through 12, were the south middle district; the remaining 

34 
BF P 

t 

a 

- 

Z 

a 

> 

4 

* 

v, 

z 

z 

w 

a 

/ - 

FIRELANDS ~CONNECTICUT LAND COMPANY 

I 

1 

I 

townships in ranges 7 through 12, the north middle district; 

and all of the townships west of range 12 were the western 

district. 

On May 9, 1797, Putnam contracted with Zachius Biggs 

and Absalom Martin for the survey of the north boundary of 

the reserve, which extended from the northwest corner of the 

Seven Ranges, west to the Muskingum River (Tuscarawas 

Branch), and for the survey of the east boundary (along the 

Seven Ranges), and the south boundary, west from the Seven 

Ranges to the Scioto River. Lastly, the contract called for 

Martin and Biggs to survey the township and range lines in 

the northeast and southeast districts. Putnam ordered these 

men to run the meridional lines parallel to the west boundary 

of the Seven Ranges and to run the latitudinal lines at right 

angles or perpendicular to the meridional lines. His reasoning was to avoid the “many slips of land” that would result 

along the Seven Ranges and Ohio Company Purchase surveys if he tried to run all the new survey lines according to the 

true meridian. The true meridian requirement in the new 

law was ignored in surveys in the Military Reserve and in the 

Ohio River Base surveys south of the reserve and east of the 

Scioto River. 

Biggs completed his work in late 1797, but Martin did not 

finish until 1798. Putnam finally received Martin’s notes and 

plats on November 13, 1798. The contract price for these 

boundaries and township lines was $3.00 and $2.50 per mile, 

respectively. 

On May 30,1797, Putnam swore in his son, William Rufus 

Putnam, as a deputy surveyor. They traveled up the Muskingum and surveyed the three Moravian tracts called for in 

the Act of June 1, 1796. He sent the plats of Shoenbrun, 

Gnadenhutten, and Salem to the Secretary of the Treasury, 

Oliver Wolcott, on July 22,1797, which were the first official 

returns of surveys made under the new law. Putnam surveyed those towns immediately so that the boundaries would 

be marked for Martin and Biggs when they ran the township 

boundaries in the northeast district. 

On July 12, 1797, Putnam contracted with George and 

John G. Jackson for the survey of the township lines in the 

south middle district. John Jackson was a minor from Virginia. On July 22, 1797, Putnam contracted with John 

Mathews for the surveys in the north middle district. These 

men proceeded with those contracts immediately. When Ludlow completed the first leg of the Greenville Treaty line in 

September, he contracted for the western district of the Military Reserve and completed it by March 1798. Ludlow complained to Putnam of the tedious chore of preparing the 

township plats and field notes. The field surveyors had to 

prepare a fair plat and field notes of their surveys. Putnam 

hired his son William as a clerk at a $500-per-year salary to 

prepare the plats to be sent to the Treasury and land office 

and also to do all of the other clerical work required. Putnam 

reported that all of the surveys in the U.S. Military District 

were completed on February 2, 1799. When some of these 

townships were later subdivided and patented, they were 

subdivided in the manner indicated in Fig. 14. 

Putnam later complained of the poorly executed work in 

the four eastern districts and praised Ludlow’s work in the 

western district. The surveys in the 12 eastern ranges were 

indeed very poorly executed and were to create many problems in the years to come. 

The Six-Mile-Square Townships 

In 1798, Putnam contracted with six deputy surveyors for 

the surveys of the six-mile-square townships and necessary 

subdivisions of them. Alternate townships were to be subdivided into two-mile squares. All the townships south of the 

Military Reserve, east of the Scioto and west and north of the 

Ohio Company Purchase were surveyed parallel to the Ohio 

Company Purchase and the Seven Ranges. The true bearings 

of the lines in that large block. are up to N. 4“ E. Putnam 

divided the area into six surveying districts, with each surveyor assigned to a certain block of townships. As the districts closed against each other, very large jogs occurred in 

the township or range lines. Putnam received much criticism 

for these and the Military Reserve surveys, but his letters 

indicate that he considered this system of continuing the 

existing pattern a lesser evil than if he had tried rectifying 

the pattern to the true meridian. 

In early 1798, Putnam contracted with Israel Ludlow for 

the surveys west of the Great Miami and for the remainder of 

the Greenville Treaty line which was virgin territory with no 

existing surveys. Putnam ordered Ludlow to run a true meridian line due north from the mouth of the Great Miami 

River and to survey two ranges of townships before completing the Greenville Treaty line. Ludlow ran the meridian line 

due north and tied into Fort Recovery, then meandered down 

the Ohio River to a point opposite the mouth of the Kentucky 

River. He also surveyed some of the townships west of the 

Miami in 1798, all of which were numbered north from the 

Great Miami and east from the meridian line. In 1802, that 

line became the state boundary between Ohio and Indiana. In 

1799, Ludlow completed the Greenville Treaty line from 

Lorimies Store, not from the end of the line he had run from 

the Tuscarawas, to Fort Recovery and, after computing a true 

line from there, to the Ohio River. By the end of 1800, Ludlow 

completed the township boundaries and required subdivisions west of the Great Miami south and east of the treaty 

line. The townships in that area are all numbered north from 

the G3eat Miami and Ohio Rivers. The ranges are numbered 

east and west from the meridian line (state boundary). 

Although the remainder of the state line (run north from Fort 

Recovery) was later called the First Principal Meridian, the 

portion run by Ludlow in 1798 is not designated by that 

name. The surveys west of the Great Miami in Ohio and 

Indiana were generally well executed. An attempt was made 

to run the true meridian; the lines do not diverge more than 

about N. 1” W. Putnam and Ludlow had thus perhaps unwittingly established the beginnings of the present system of 

identifying townships and ranges. 

On July 27,1799, Putnam contracted for the survey of the 

townships north of the Seven Ranges and Military Tract, 

south of the Connecticut Reserve and east of the Muskingum 

or Tuscarawas. Ebenezer Buckingham was assigned the 

western district, Zachius Biggs had the central district, and 

John Bever had the eastern district of three ranges. These 

were six-mile-square townships and were numbered in a 

continuation of the Ohio River Base or Seven Ranges system 

-with two exceptions. Numbering west from the Pennsylvania boundary was continued through the seventh range. The 

eighth range was numbered range 8 but was numbered north 

skipping the area within the Military Reserve. The most 

northerly township against the south boundary of the reserve 

37 
was township 8. Township 9 would theoretically be within 

the reserve, but the number 9 was given the township immediately north of the reserve. Hence T. 9, R. 8 is immediately west of T. 17, R. 7, then comes T. 9, R. 9 which is fractional 

against the Tuscarawas branch. It was later made a full 

township. T. 10, R. 9 was fractional and T. 11, R. 9 also 

slightly fractional. At that point the Tuscarawas is flowing 

about S. 45” E. and Buckingham numbered the two fractional 

townships in range 10, north from the Tuscarawas branch of 

the Muskingum. Though later surveyed into complete 

townships, those two are identified as Townships 1 and 2 N. 

range 10 W. of the Muskingum River Base. The only known 

instructions that Buckingham had from Putnam are contained in the contract, and the contract does not indicate that 

this procedure was to be used to number the townships (see 

Fig. 15). 

All three contracts require that the range lines were to be 

surveyed parallel to the Pennsylvania boundary. Putnam 

was obviously confronted with a dilemma. The law required 

the lines be run by the true meridian and to be six-miles 

square. The convergency of meridians just would not allow 

the six-mile-square provision. Putnam was not proficient 

enough in mathematics to be able to devise a system to 

correct for convergency, and even if he had been, neither he 

nor his deputies had precise instruments with which accurate surveys could be executed. And the maximum price of $3 

per mile for surveys would not have covered the expenses 

involved. Putnam attempted to hold to the six-mile-square 

requirement and ignored the true meridian provision. The 

townships north of the Seven Ranges were completed in 

November 1799, the sections are numbered according to the 

Act of 1796. 

As a result of the lack of an overall plan and adequate map 

control, an anomalous township identification occurred 

along the Scioto River in Ranges 21 and 22. The boundaries of 

these ranges were surveyed by John Mathews, Thomas 

Worthington, Elias Langham, and Ebenezer Buckingham in 

1799. A large easterly bend in the Scioto River prevents a 

continuous extension northward of the range lines from the 

Ohio River. It apparently seemed logical at the time to number the townships north from the Scioto, but the surveyors 

did not get together and decide on a plan; apparently each 

devised his own numbering for the townships in his contract. 

The result is a confusing duplication of township numbers in 

Ranges 21 and 22, as shown in Fig. 16. These are the 

townships referred to in the 1973 Manual of Surveying Instructions, Section 3-7, as the Scioto River Base surveys. 

They are another indication of the speed with which the 

surveys were being made, without adequate supervision, 

planning or control. 

By the beginning of 1800, Putnam and his deputies had 

completed almost all the surveys provided for in the Acts of 

May 18 and June 1,1796. This huge task had been accomplished in just three years. It had taken the same amount of 

time to survey the first seven ranges. Corners had been set at 

one-mile intervals on all the boundaries of the six-milesquare townships, alternate townships were subdivided into 

two-mile-square blocks with one-mile monumentation, the 

Military Reserve was surveyed, and the Greenville Treaty 

line run. The Congress had demanded speed and economy 

and they got it. If the surveys were somewhat crude and the 

plats not too well made, at least the work was done. During 

those three years, Putnam had pleaded for an additional 

clerk to help out with the ofice work but did not receive 

approval to hire one. He was swamped with work and had no 

real chance to check any of the surveys in the field. Though he 

was disappointed with some of the field work, except that of 

Ludlow, he was powerless to do much about it, however, his 

troubles were just beginning. Congress passed the Act of 

March2,1799,1 Stat. 728, to provide for surveys and preemption sales to certain settlers on the lands north of the Symmes 

Purchase between the Miami Rivers. Some surveys there 

were already wretchedly executed and Putnam hadn’t yet 

started work in that area with government surveyors. 

Act of March 1,1800,2 Stat. 14 

Under the plan anticipated by the Act of June 1,1796, the 

Secretary of the Treasury was to combine land warrants and 

patent off the US. Military Reserve in quarter township 

blocks, with individual lots to cover each warrant protracted 

on the plats. This plan didn’t succeed for several reasons and 

it was also discovered that the townships were far from 

square, contained more or less than 16,000 acres, and some of 

the quarter township corners were far from being at midpoint 

between township corners. The Act of March 1, 1800, was 

intended to solve some of these problems. Sec. 1 of the act 

declares that all corners established in the Military Reserve 

are the true corners regardless of the errors. It directs that 

the townships are to be subdivided into quarters by running 

straight lines from one quarter-township corner to the opposite quarter-township corner, the way a normal section is 

subdivided today. It also fixes the quantity or area returned 

in each quarter township by the Surveyor General as the 

legal quantity. Sec. 3 of the act excludes navigable rivers 

from being included in the quantity of land charged to a 

warrant lot, which has also been continued through to the 

present. As nearly as possible, lots of 50 or 100 or more acres 

were to be protracted with parallel lines within the quarter 

townships. The 100-acre lots were supposed to be 40 chains 

long and 25 chains wide, usually lying east-west, if the actual 

original survey and subdivision allowed an orderly layout. 

This act attempted to deal with the large errors in the original surveys; most importantly, it fixed the original corners in 

position, established a precedent for subdividing, and held 

the areas to be what the Surveyor General reported. The 

purpose was to stop potential litigation. 

The Act of May 7,1800, 2 Stat. 58, divided the Northwest 

Territory into the Ohio Territory and the Indiana Territory. 

The territorial boundary was the Greenville Treaty line from 

the Ohio to Fort Recovery and then due north to Canada, but 

Sec. 5 of the act provided that when a State was erected, the 

boundary would run due north from the mouth of the Great 

Miami, i.e., Ludlow’s meridian line, which came to be in 

1802. 

The Act of May 10,1800,2 Stat. 73 

This act is an amendment of the Act ofMay 18,1796, but in 

reality is the next major step in the evolution of the rectangular system of surveys. Credit sales and lack of adequate 

surveys were already causing problems. Settlers couldn’t 

afford to buy quarter townships or even full sections. Some 

had tried, making down payments, but then couldn’t meet 

the ensuing payments and they had to forfeit. With most of 

38 
RESERVE 

10 6 

II I 

SEVEN RANGES 

Figure 15. Townships 1 and 2, Range 10, Muskingum River Base. 

the section lines only protracted on paper, the purchaser still 

had to pay to have his boundaries surveyed on the ground, 

and each surveyor took the shortest route, stubbing in from 

the township boundaries. With large errors existing in the 

original surveys, boundary disputes were multiplying, which 

was the very thing the rectangular system was supposed to 

prevent. Also, remote places of sale and poor recordkeeping 

discouraged potential buyers. The Congress took the next 

step and put into effect another of the recommendations 

made by Hamilton in 1790. 

Secs. 1 

Sec. 2. 

Sec. 3. 

“Sec 

and 6. These sections established local land offices 

and the offices known as the Register and Receiver. The Register handled the sales, entries, etc., 

and the Receiver was responsible for the payments. Both the Register and the Receiver were 

paid on a fee basis. 

Four land offices were established: at Cincinnati, Chillicothe, Marietta, and Steubenville, with 

designated areas of responsibility. All were situated fairly near the lands that were up for sale and 

buyers had only relatively short distances to 

travel to the place of sale. 

The Surveyor General is required to furnish copies 

of the survey plats to the land offices, called the 

“land office copies” and were used to sell the land, 

record entries, and for the public to examine. A 

copy of the plat was also sent to the Secretary of 

the Treasury. The “three plat system” -the original plat kept by the Surveyor General, one copy to 

the land office and another copy sent to Washington, D.C. - remains in effect to this day. 

This section affected the Surveyor General the 

most because it called for the subdivision of certain townships into sections and half sections. The 

following is a complete copy of this section of the 

act: 

3 And be it further enacted, That the survevorgeneral shall cause the townships west of the Muskingum, which by the above mentioned act are directed to be 

sold in quarter townships, to be subdivided into half 

sections of three hundred and twenty acres each, as 

nearly as may be, by running parallel lines through the 

same from east to west, and from south to north, at the 

distance of one mile from each other, and marking corners, at the distance of each half mile on the lines 

running from east to west, and at the distance of each 

mile on those running from south to north, and making 

the marks, notes, and descriptions, prescribed to the 

surveyors by the above-mentioned act: And the interior 

lines of townships intersected by the Muskingum, and 

of all the townships lying east of that river, which have 

not been heretofore actually subdivided into sections, 

shall also be run and marked in the manner prescribed 

by the said act, for running and marking the interior 

lines of townships directed to be sold in sections of six 

hundred and forty acres each. And in all cases where the 

exterior lines of the townships, thus to be subdivided 

into sections or half sections, shall exceed or shall not 

extend six miles, the excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or deducted from the western 

and northern ranges of sections or half sections in such 

township, according as the error may be in running the 

lines from east to west, or from south to north; the 

sections and half sections bounded on the northern and 

western lines of such townships shall be sold as containing only the quantity expressed in the returns and plats 

respectively, and all others as containing the complete 

legal quantity. And the President of the United States 

shall fix the compensation of the deputy surveyors, 

chain carriers, and axemen: Provided, the whole expense of the surveying and marking the lines, shall not 

exceed $3.00 for every mile that shall be actually run, 

surveyed and marked.” 

To understand this section of the act requires some background explanation and analysis: 

The Act of May 18, 1796, directed that only half the 

townships were to be subdivided in two-mile-square blocks, 

the other unsubdivided half was to be sold by quarter 

townships without any interior subdivisional lines being surveyed. The unsubdivided townships lying west of the Muskingum were now to be subdivided into sections and protracted 

half sections, by running parallel lines every mile from east 

to west and from south to north, with all section corners 

established and quarter corners on only the east-west section 

lines. The parallel lines provision was included because it 

was well known that the range lines were actually surveyed 

parallel to the west boundary of the Seven Ranges and Ohio 

Company Purchase boundaries, and not by the true meridian. The townships intersected by the Muskingum and all 

townships east of that river, which were designated for sale 

by sections but were subdivided by alternate section lines, 

were also to be subdivided in the same manner, by parallel 

section lines. The excess or deficiency of land was to be placed 

in the sections along the north and west boundaries of the 

township being subdivided. All sections except those against 

the west and north boundaries were declared to contain the 

full legal quantity, i.e., 640 acres. The Surveyor General had 

to return the area of the northern and western sections, based 

on the distances obtained in the field; those sections were sold 

containing the acreage returned on the plats. Thus the plats 

returned by the Surveyor General were the sole basis of the 

acreage in a section, and the amount to be paid was at the rate 

of $2 per acre. Regardless of what a later survey might have 

found the acreage to be, the plat returned by the Surveyor 

General determined the legal quantity, no refunds were 

made, nor any additional charges made. 

The last sentence of this section is perplexing. The President was to fix the compensation of the deputy surveyors, 

chain carriers, and axemen, but the whole cost could not 

exceed $3 per mile. This was a repeat of the same statement 

in the Act of May 18, 1796. But the surveys were being 

executed by deputy surveyors under contracts with the Surveyor General and the President had not and never would fix 

their compensation. This clause may have been repeated to 

allow for direct hire of the surveyors on a salary if the contract system failed to do a proper job. 

This act did not apply to the five-mile townships in the 

41 
Military Reserve. Fig. 17 indicates the theoretical subdivisions and monumentation within the affected townships, 

with all section lines surveyed. 

The theory was good; survey all the section lines, fix by law 

the acreage to be paid for, sell half sections at $2 or more per 

acre on credit, and everyone should have been satisfied, 

however, the problem was in the surveys. The township lines 

had already been surveyed and most of the adjoining 

townships had been partially subdivided. If lands had 

already been sold in the adjoining townships, the corners 

there couldn’t be corrected. Congress had already fixed the 

corners by law in the Military Reserve and in the lands north 

of the Symmes Purchase so that precedent was established. 

Putnam took the only course of action he could think of; he 

had his surveyors run north parallel to the east boundary and 

west parallel to the south boundary of the township, setting a 

second or even third set of corners on the exterior boundaries 

of the township. Where it was possible to correct the old 

corners, they did so, but most of the townships subdivided 

under this act have double corners entirely around the exterior boundaries. 

This system would not work, however, in most of the 

townships in the Seven Ranges. In those townships, many 

individual sections had been sold at random without benefit 

of government-surveyed section lines. Local surveyors had 

located the sections by running lines in from the exterior 

boundaries. The purchasers occupied and possessed the land 

based on the corners thus established. The Act of May 10, 

1800, couldn’t be complied with, without radically changing 

the established location of the alienated sections. Putnam 

suggested solutions based on honoring the existing corners, 

but neither he nor the Secretary of the Treasury could completely defy the present law and Congress did not act on this 

situation until Sec. 7 of the Act of May 1, 1802; 2 Stat. 179. 

Another unanswered question was: Where should the 

quarter-section corner on the east-west lines of the sections 

along the west boundary of the township be placed? Should 

they be set at 40 chains, which is the practice today, or at 

midpoint between section corners? During the remainder of 

Putnam’s term in office, they were set both ways, some at 40 

chains with the excess or deficiency in the last half mile, 

while others where the mile was near normal, were set at 

midpoint. The acreage was shown on the plat for each half 

section. 

Sec. 5 requires the purchasers to pay a surveying fee of $6 

per section. It does not say who is to receive the money, so 

presumably it was paid into the Treasury. 

Sec. 15 of the act authorized the Surveyor General to lease 

the reserved sections within the townships. It isn’t known 

why Congress added that burden on the Surveyor General 

instead of on the Registers and Receivers of the land offices. 

On October 8,1800, Wolcott wrote to Putnam authorizing 

the hire of an additional clerk at $500 per year; the letter also 

gave Putnam a few instructions about the surveys, but very 

little. The problems were left for Putnam’s solutions. 

Act of February 18,1801,2 Stat. 100 

This act directs the Surveyor General to subdivide into half 

sections the fractional townships in Ranges 16 through 22, 

situated against the qouth boundary of the Military Reserve. 

The lands were grailted to refugees from Nova Scotia who 

had aided the Americans during the Revolution. It left unanswered how the sections were to be subdivided when the 

section was fractional against the military boundary, which 

caused some problems. Normal townships were subdivided in 

the manner as indicated in the Act of May 10,1800, as shown 

in Fig. 17. 

Act of May 1,1802; 2 Stat. 179 

The original contract with John Cleves Symmes was for 

one million acres of land. Symmes could not pay for that 

much land and eventually received patent to only the area as 

far north as the north boundary of Range 3, minus the Congressional reserves. Much of the surveying in the Symmes 

Purchase, including the north-south standard line, had been 

done by Israel Ludlow. Symmes had sold lands north of his 

patent boundary. The purchasers had made a down payment 

to Symmes and occupied the land based on questionable 

surveys, and they claimed they had entered into purchase 

contracts with Symmes in good faith and should receive title 

to their lands. 

Congress passed the Act of March 2, 1799, 1 Stat. 728, 

granting these settlers a right of preemption on their claims 

and allowing them credit toward the purchase price of $2 per 

acre for the reasonable amounts they had paid for surveys. 

They were to apply to the Surveyor General for a government 

survey of their lands. Upon receiving the application, the 

Surveyor General was to survey the outlines of the tract or 

tracts and determine the acreage to be paid for. 

Putnam did not receive any applications for surveys under 

that act. In 1801 when the Secretary of the Treasury, Albert 

Gallatin, inquired about the matter, Putnam replied on October 6,1801, and January 7,1802, that he had not done any 

work between the Miami Rivers, that no one had applied, and 

that the boundary of the Virginia Military Tract was undetermined. The Virginia warrant holders were locating claims 

north of the source of the Little Miami. Putnam didn’t know 

where that boundary should be. On March 11,1802, he told 

the Secretary that Ludlow had informed him the north 

boundary of the Symmes’ patent had never been surveyed 

and that Putnam didn’t know what Symmes had actually 

received. 

On May 1, 1802, Congress passed the act which extended 

preemption to the settlers between the Miami Rivers, “either 

within or without the limits of Ludlow’s survey.” The Ludlow’s survey referred to was the work done by Ludlow for 

Symmes. On April 30, 1802, Congress had passed the Ohio 

Enabling Act and they wanted all the lands owned by the 

government outside the Greenville Treaty line surveyed. 

The passage of these acts was anticipated by Putnam. On 

May 3,1802, he contracted with Israel Ludlow, Levi Whipple, 

and Levi Barber for the survey of the townships between the 

Miami Rivers and the boundary line of the Virginia Tract. 

Ludlow began the survey of the Virginia Tract boundary at a 

spring acknowledged to be the source of the Little Miami. He 

ran a line on a magnetic bearing of N. 20” W. about 42 miles 

to an intersection with the Greenville Treaty line. (If Ludlow’s line was extended, it would fall a considerable distance 

east of the source of the Scioto.) 

Ludlow also corrected some of the surveys and established 

the north boundary of the Symmes Purchase. The section 

lines established by or for the settlers in the two ranges of 

42 
I - 

1 

Frac. 

I 

I 

I 

I 1 A T 

I 

I 

12 

640 Ac 

I 

A 

T 

I 

I 

13 

I 

I 

I 

I 

24 

I 

I 

I 

I 

25 

I 

I 

T 4 

I 

I 

36 

640 Ac 

I 

d 

4) 

A 

T 0 

A 

T 0 

- 
\ 

\ 

Fr. 

SCALE IN MILES 

Figure 18. Between the Miamis. 
townships north of the Symmes Purchase were honored by 

the surveyors but their new lines straightened up the work 

between Ranges 6 and 7. They did not try to run the township 

lines by the true meridian; instead they continued the pattern established by Symmes and also continued the section 

numbering according to the Land Ordinance of 1785. They 

closed the townships north of the Little Miami against Ludlow’s boundary line of the Virginia Tract. The sections in 

Ranges 4, 5 and 6 are greatly distorted due to the settlers 

locations and the law which honored them in place (see Fig. 

18). 

The claimants in the Virginia Military Tract didn’t honor 

the Ludlow boundary and filed claims west of it. On March 

23,1804,2 Stat. 274, Congress declared the Ludlow boundary 

as the boundary of the Virginia Tract, provided that Virginia 

recognized the line within two years. Virginia didn’t and 

even claimed the boundary should be a line from the mouth of 

the Little Miami to the source of the Scioto, which was ridiculous. In 1812, Congress and Virginia commissioned Charles 

Roberts to survey a line from the source of the Little Miami to 

the source of the Scioto. He ran his line on a magnetic bearing 

of N. 24“ 30’ W., from the same spring that Ludlow had used 

as the source of the Little Miami. Roberts extended his line 

about 11 miles past the Greenvile Treaty line, missed the 

source of the Scioto, turned N. 75” 05’ E. and ran about two 

miles to what he considered the source of the Scioto. Roberts 

did not correct his line back to the Little Miami, so his 

random line was his actual boundary line. 

Claims between the Roberts and Ludlow line were filed by 

both Virginia warrant holders and by public land purchasers. 

On April 11, 1818, Congress passed an act declaring the 

Ludlow line the boundary. In 1824, the US. Supreme Court 

held that the Roberts line was correct. The Federal government ended the matter by purchasing the Virginia claims 

west of the Ludlow line, south of the Greenville Treaty line. 

North of the Treaty line the Roberts line is the boundary of 

the Virginia Military Tract. This conflict brought out quite 

clearly that indefinite natural boundaries were a source of 

trouble. 

Sec. 6 of the Act of May I, 1802, provided for the survey of 

the Vincennes Tract on the Wabash River in the Indiana 

territory to be surveyed according to the Act of May 10,1800, 

i.e., all section lines surveyed with quarter corners on the 

east-west lines; and raised the maximum price to $4 per mile 

for surveying. It also said that the surveys were to be made by 

persons appointed by the President of the United States, not 

by the Surveyor General, and that two plats would be furnished by the surveyors. It can only be guessed why the 

Surveyor General didn’t have jurisdiction over the Vincennes surveys. Thomas Jefferson had become President in 

1801 and was a Democrat-Republican, whereas Putnam was 

a Federalist of the Washington-John Adams administrations. The surveys under Putnam had been executed rapidly 

and cheaply but were generally poorly executed. Indiana was 

new country and Congress and Jefferson wanted a better job 

done there but didn’t feel that Putnam could do that job; he 

was, after all, 64 years old and “set in his ways.” 

Sec. 7 of the act deals with the problem in the Seven 

Ranges. The lines of any section sold before May 1,1800, were 

to be surveyed in a manner consistent with the lines already 

located on the ground. Those sections sold after May 1,1800, 

are to be where the Surveyor General locates them and, if the 

purchaser doesn’t like it, within six months he could withdraw his application and apply it to some other vacant section. Gallatin had written to Putnam on September 25,1801, 

explaining that settlers in the Seven Ranges would be injured in many instances if those Seven Ranges townships 

were surveyed according to the third section of the Act of May 

10,1800. The surveys in the Seven Ranges were distorted and 

fragmentarily subdivided. Putnam and Gallatin discussed 

the situation and the result was Sec. 7 of the Act of May 1, 

1802. An illustration of the problem to be solved is shown by a 

sketch plat sent to Gallatin by Putnam on June 10,1802. Fig. 

19 is a sketch of Putnam’s plat of Township 6, Range 3, in the 

Seven Ranges. Lots 1 through 6 had been sold at New York 

and located on a meridional line run north from the corner of 

Lots 1 and 7 on the south boundary. The east-west lines had 

been run west from corners on the east boundary. Lots 7,13, 

23, and 24, sold at New York, were located in a similar 

manner. By holding the lots sold at New York fixed as 

already surveyed, holding the original corners on exterior 

boundaries, and then correcting for the large errors in the 

boundaries, Putnam came up with the plan illustrated. The 

purchasers of lots sold at Steubenville after May 1, 1800, 

could take those lots or not as they should choose. This instance is given here to illustrate a very early example of what 

is today called an “Independent Resurvey,” whereby a 

claimant’s location in good faith is honored and the remaining public lands surveyed as nearly as possible on a normal 

rectangular plan. 

Congress passed the Appropriation Act of May 1, 1802, 

which included money to hire a clerk in the Surveyor General’s office, $39,296.90 for surveys, and survey of the Vincennes Tract. Putnam did not begin the surveys in Indiana; 

for his remaining year in office he confined surveying activities to township subdivisions and surveys in Ohio, which was 

admitted to the Union on November 29,1802. The first governor of the new state was Edward Tiffin, who would become 

Surveyor General in 1814. Gallatin notified Putnam by letter 

dated September 21, 1803, of his dismissal from office and 

named his replacement, Jared Mansfield. Putnam later complained that the change was for political reasons and he was 

no doubt partially correct, but he had done his job, was 65 

years of age, and a new man was needed to extend the rectangular surveys into the vast country to the west in the 

Louisiana Purchase just acquired from France. There can be 

little doubt that Thomas Jefferson wanted someone who 

could direct the surveys on the accurate rectangular plan he 

had advocated since 1784. Jefferson and Mansfield were old 

friends and Mansfield was capable. 

Before closing out Putnam’s term of office, three other acts 

of Congress passed during his tenure are important to mention. 

Act of March 3,1803,2 Stat. 210 

This act granted Section 16 in each township to the state of 

Ohio for support of schools. Lieu lands were granted for those 

already sold or otherwise reserved. The Section 16 school 

grant was to continue to be made to each State until 1850. 

Surveys in Mississippi 

The Act of March 3,1803,2 Stat. 225 made land grants and 

donations to settlers in the lands south of Tennessee, includ45 

ing the Mississippi Territory, which had been created by the 

Act ofApril 7,1798,l Stat. 549. It provided for the establishment of two land offices, Registers and Receivers, a board of 

land commissioners to handle private land claims, and how 

the claims were to be recognized. Sec. 10 of this act established the office of Surveyor of Lands South of Tennessee. The 

public land surveys were to be made the same as in Ohio, 

allowing a maximum of $4 per mile for surveying by deputy 

surveyors, and private land claims were to be surveyed by 

deputy surveyors paid by the claimants. 

Isaac Briggs, was appointed “Surveyor of the Lands South 

of Tennessee” about April 1, 1803. Gallatin wrote to Briggs 

on April 8th, directing him to begin the surveys in Mississippi and to purchase instruments. He was to run a meridian 

line from a monument on the south boundary of the United 

States and lay off townships to the east and west thereof in 

ranges numbered east and west and townships numbered 

north from the boundary. These townships could only extend 

north to the then Indian boundary. Briggs established his 

office at Washington, Mississippi Territory, in August 1803. 

In 1799-1800, Andrew Ellicott had surveyed the Line of 

Demarcation between the United States and Spanish Florida 

along the 31st parallel; he began the line at the Mississippi 

River and ran east. The first 21 miles were carefully surveyed. Ellicott then ran a compass line and at various intervals made latitude observations, measured a falling to the 

true parallel, and then corrected the compass line back, moving his mile posts to the true line. The Ellicott line was the 

south boundary of the United States referred to by Gallatin. 

On July 25, 1803, Gallatin wrote instructions to Briggs 

concerning the private land claims. The following is part of 

that letter: 

“Sir, 

Although by my letter of the 8th April, ult. you were 

generally instructed to divide the whole of the two 

tracts to which the Indian title has been extinguished 

into Ranges & Townships, yet, as that mode may present some difficulties which might induce you to prefer 

another, I have thought it necessary to repeat particularly that a deviation from that plan would be attended 

with great confusion in the several offices connected 

with yours and particularly in this Department. But, 

although the whole country shall without exception be 

divided into regular Ranges & Townships, the lands for 

which Certificates shall have been granted by the Commissioners must nevertheless be surveyed in conformity to such Certificates. It will only result that a person 

will often have a part of his tract in one and the remainder in another Township & that the tract will be returned by you as consisting of two or more Sections 

lying contiguous but in different Townships. But as a 

single patent will nevertheless issue for the whole tract, 

neither inconvenience nor additional expense will be 

experienced by the party. The outlines of all of the 

Townships must, however, be surveyed at the expense 

of the United States, though running amongst lands for 

the expense of surveying which Individuals must pay, 

and. . .” 

The use of the term “Sections” to designate the private land 

claims was unfortunate because all the private land claims in 

the lands south of Tennessee were labeled and called sections 

thereafter. As a result, a township may contain over 100 

sections; this caused a great deal of confusion, which will be 

seen later. 

On December 12,1803, Briggs reported to Gallatin that he 

had started a meridian line at Washington, Mississippi, and 

had two deputies extend the line due south; they intersected 

Ellicott’s line near the 19th-mile post. They then remeasured 

a part of Ellicott’s line and found unacceptable errors in the 

distance between mile posts. Briggs then had two meridian 

lines surveyed due north, one from the 18th-mile post and 

another from a point “6 miles and 12 perches” east of that 

mile post. He proposed to use the line which ran over the 

smoothest country as his “Basis Meridian.” Gallatin replied 

that he was sorry to hear Ellicott’s measurements were so 

poor and gave Briggs permission to use his best judgment, 

but Briggs did little or nothing with the rectangular surveys 

during the next two years. 

Act of March 3,1803,2 Stat. 236 

Sec. 5 of this act directs that all of the unappropriated lands 

in the US. Military Tract were to be subdivided into sections 

according to the Act of May 10, 1800. Putnam had his surveyors subdivide those five-mile townships into 25 sections, 

with number 1 in the northeast corner and number 25 in the 

southwest corner in the manner used since 1796. Few of the 

townships were whole, most had military warrant lots within 

them, and in some, quarter townships had been taken up, the 

result being many half sections were against the alienated 

lands (see Fig. 14). 

1803 -Jared Mansfield Takes Office as 

Surveyor General 

Jared Mansfield was born on May 23,1759, at New Haven, 

Connecticut. He was expelled from Yale in 1777 for misconduct but was later readmitted and received a degree in 1787. 

He taught school thereafter and was rector of an advanced 

school in New Haven from 1796-1802. In 1802, he wrote his 

Essays, Mathematical and Physical in the subjects of algebra, 

geometry, calculus, and astronomy, which brought him immediate notoriety. He was appointed acting Professor of 

Mathematics at the Military Academy at West Point and 

served in that position until his appointment to the office of 

Surveyor General in July 1803; along with his new job he 

received the rank of Lt. Colonel in the army. He visited New 

Haven and then travelled to Ohio, arriving in Marietta 

where he officially took the oath of office on November 3, 

1803. In July, he had written to the Secretary of the Treasury, Albert Gallatin, inquiring on how to acquire from London, England, a list of instruments including an astronomical clock, astronomic zenith sector, astronomic quadrant, 

transits, sextants, and other items. He repeated these requests again in December and in later years and eventually 

purchased a few of the instruments at his own expense. Jefferson and Gallatin had in Mansfield a well-educated man 

and an acknowledged mathematician. It was during Mansfield’s tenure of office that the rectangular system of surveys 

was developed into a system closely approaching that in use 

today. 

Act of March 26,1804,2 Stat. 277 

This was the first major act affecting the public land sur47 
veys after the surveys were extended to the Mississippi Territory and Briggs and Mansfield took office. 

Sec. 1. 

Sec. 2. 

Sec. 3. 

Sec. 4. 

Sec. 5. 

Sec. 6. 

Extends the Surveyor General’s authority to all 

the lands north of the Ohio and east of the Mississippi River, to which Indian title had been extinguished or “shall hereafter be extinguished.” At 

that time, west of Ohio, only the Vincennes Tract 

and a few thousand acres of French claims had 

been cleared of Indian title by the Fort Wayne 

Treaty of June 7,1803,7 Stat. 74. But the Federal 

government made no pretense that all the lands 

would not eventually be acquired from the Indians 

and everybody knew it, except maybe the Indians 

themselves. The Surveyor General was also made 

responsible for surveying the Indian boundary 

lines “as have not yet been surveyed.” Thomas 

Freeman had already surveyed the boundaries of 

the Vincennes Tract in 1803. The Surveyor General was to determine with the approval of the President, using astronomical observation, the positions of such places as were necessary for the “Correctness of the Surveys.” This was clearly aimed at 

Mansfield‘s abilities in astronomy; unfortunately, 

Mansfield didn’t have his astronomical instruments, and Congress did not bother supplying 

them. 

Establishes three new land offices at Vincennes, 

Detroit, and Kaskaskia and Registers and Receivers to man them. Those three communities were 

the centers of the French settlements and therefore the location of most of the private land claims 

north of the Ohio River. 

Deals with the French claims, evidences, etc. 

Makes the Registers and Receivers land commissioners to handle the claims. 

Makes the reservation of section 16 for schools, 

three townships for a college, and salt springs. It 

also provides for land sales and patenting procedures. 

Provides “that all the navigable rivers, creeks, and 

waters, within the Indiana territory, shall be 

deemed to be, and remain public highways.” The 

addition of “creeks and waters” in this act is perplexing. It was not in the Acts of May 18, I796 and 

March 3, 1803. Does it mean that all creeks and 

waters are declared navigable, or does it mean 

that all navigable creeks and waters, including 

lakes, are public highways? Probably the latter. 

But who is to determine whether a creek is navigable? The result was that all streams large 

enough to be used as a means of travel through the 

territory were meandered by the surveyors, creating many more fractional sections than had been 

created in Ohio. 

Secs. 7 and 8. Deal with the lands and preemptions between the Miami Rivers sold by John Cleves 

Symmes. 

Sec. 9. Provides for sale of fractional sections. 

Sec. 10. Provides that the public lands will be offered for 

sale in half sections or in quarter sections. If sold 

in half sections, the dividing line is to be run “due 

north and south; and the half sections shall be 

divided into quarter sections by lines running due 

east and west.” The purchaser is to pay for the 

subdivision of any section bought by quarter or 

half section. The problem with these provisions 

was the due north and south and due east and west 

wording. If the section boundaries weren’t “due” 

north and south or “due” east and west, subdividing in that manner would be an impossibility. And 

no quarter corners had been established on any of 

the north-south section lines. How are the quarter 

corners on those lines to be established and who is 

to pay for the cost of that work? About half the 

six-mile-square townships in Ohio had been subdivided by alternate section lines. If a man bought a 

quarter section in one of those townships, how was 

it to be surveyed? 

Sec. 12. This section placed the reserved sections up for 

sale. These were the three or four sections in each 

township reserved by Congress for future disposal. 

All the other public lands both north of the Ohio 

and south of Tennessee were directed to be sold in 

quarter sections. Congress used the expressions 

“north of the Ohio” and %outh of Tennessee” because at that time there was an undetermined 

amount of public land in Tennessee; by this wording, the public lands in Tennessee were excluded 

from these laws. 

Sec. 13. This section is complex and divides responsibility 

for the surveys. The entire section follows with 

certain points emphasized: 

“Sec. 13. And be it further enacted, That whenever any 

of the public lands shall have been surveyed in the manner directed by law, they shall be divided by the Secretary and the Treasury into convenient surveying districts, and a deputy surveyor shall, with the approbation 

of the said secretary, be appointed by the surveyorgeneral for each district, who shall take an oath or 

affirmation truly and faithfully to perform the duties of 

his office; and whose duty it shall be to run and mark 

such lines as may be necessary for subdividing the lands 

surveyed as aforesaid, into sections, half sections or 

quarter sections, as the case may be; to ascertain the true 

contents of such subdivisions; and to record in a book to 

be kept for that purpose, the surveys thus made.. The 

surveyor-general shall furnish each deputy surveyor 

with a copy of the plat of townships and fractional parts 

of townships contained in his district, describing the 

subdivisions thereof, and the marks of the corners. Each 

48 
deputy surveyor shall be entitled to receive from the 

purchaser of any tract of land, of which a line or lines 

shall have been run and marked, by him at the rate of 

three dollars for every mile thus surveyed and marked, 

before he shall deliver to him a copy of the plat of such 

tract stating its contents. The fees payable by virtue of 

former laws for surveying expenses shall, after the first 

day of July next, be no longer demandable from, and 

paid by the purchasers. And no final certificate shall 

thereafter be given by the register of any land-office to 

the purchaser of any tract of land, all the lines of which 

shall not have been run, and the contents ascertained by 

the surveyor-general or his assistants, unless such purchaser shall lodge with the said register a plat of such 

tract, certified by the district surveyor.’’ 

An analysis of the section is necessary. After the surveys 

have been made according to law, the lands surveyed will be 

divided into surveying districts and a district surveyor will 

be appointed, who is to subdivide the lands in his district into 

sections, half sections, and quarter sections. Nearly half the 

six-mile townships in Ohio had only the alternate section 

lines surveyed, but plats had been made showing the remaining section lines protracted and each section containing 640 

acres. The act now says the district surveyor will subdivide 

and determine the true contents of the subdivision. Whose 

plat is to be believed, that by the Surveyor General or that by 

the district surveyor? In no two cases would they ever agree. 

The district surveyor will receive a fee of $3 per mile, fixed 

rate, from the purchaser, before he gives the purchaser a plat. 

Magnanimously, Congress then says the purchaser doesn’t 

have to pay the old surveying fee of $6 per section or $3 per 

half section. Then the act says that the Register is not to issue 

a final certificate to any purchaser until all his boundary 

lines have been surveyed and the contents ascertained by the 

Surveyor General (who has already said a section contained 

640 acres) or by the district surveyor. 

Sec. 14 through 17. Pertains to salaries, fees, patents, etc., 

not affecting the surveys. 

Sec. 18. Appropriates $20,000 to carry the act into effect. 

Mansfield met the challenge head-on; he divided the lands 

in each land office district into surveying districts of 25 to 36 

townships and appointed a district surveyor for each. He 

instructed them to subdivide the “four section” blocks into 

sections by running true lines from the south section corner 

to the north section corner and likewise from east to west. 

Where the true lines intersected, the unset section corner 

was to be established. This was the same method used to 

subdivide the five-mile townships in the Military Tract into 

quarter townships. All quarter-section corners were to be 

established at midpoint between section corners, and sections were to be subdivided in the same way. Fig. 20 is an 

illustration of Mansfield’s instructions. All lines were to be 

run on a random, then were to return establishing the true 

line and necessary corners. If a section was to be subdivided 

into quarters, the necessary old lines would be retraced and 

quarter-section corners established at midpoint. 

The purchasers complained bitterly. For example, referring to Fig. 20: if a man bought the northwest quarter of 

Section 34, he could not get a final certificate until he paid the 

district surveyor for running six miles of line or even eight 

miles if the surveyor charged him for the two miles of retracements. The government had already paid once for having 

those miles run, so why should the purchaser pay again? And 

what if another purchaser had applied for the east half of 

Section 34? Would he have to pay for five, maybe six, miles of 

surveying which had already been paid for by the purchaser 

of the northwest quarter? The available records don’t reveal 

the answers to those questions and complaints about surveying fees, except to state that the district surveyor could 

not charge twice for the same lines. 

On July 26,1804, Gallatin wrote instructions to Mansfield 

about the rates to be charged. The rates varied from $1.50 up 

to $18.00 for the first interior quarter-section corner within a 

four-section block. 

Mansfield did insist, however, that the contents of a section 

or quarter section had to be based on the surveys and plats 

made by the Surveyor General, regardless of what area the 

district surveyor might find in the field. He insisted that if his 

plats returned 640 acres in a section, then a quarter-section 

contained 160 acres regardless of what errors were found in 

the original surveys. Mansfield thought it impractical, if not 

impossible, to resurvey and recalculate the areas of the sections in all the old surveys, though he did leave some latitude 

for such procedure in exceptional and specific cases. Mansfield was so firm in this stand that his views soon became law. 

On August 20, 1804, Mansfield sent to Gallatin a copy of 

his Plan ofInstructions for the District Surveyors, which were 

for subdividing, etc. On September 11, he informed Gallatin 

of his impending trip to Vincennes where he would personally supervise the beginning of the rectangular surveys in that 

tract. On September 29, he wrote to Gallatin and mentioned 

his Plan of Instructions for the Deputy Surveyors. 

In 1972, Thomas A. Tillman, editor of the 1973 Manual of 

Surveying Instructions, identified a copy of Mansfield‘s 

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors among archival 

records on file in the Michigan Historical Commission Archives. Mansfield had hired his nephew, John Mansfield, as 

one of his clerks. The undated and unsigned copy of General 

Instructions are in John Mansfield’s distinctive and beautiful 

handwriting. Perhaps Mansfield had his nephew prepare 

several copies of those instructions, with the dates and signature to be filled in when they were actually given to a deputy, 

probably when a contract was signed. So Jared Mansfield was 

responsible for the first known written instructions to the 

deputy surveyors, which eventually evolved into the Manual 

of Surveying Instructions. 

Mansfield personally attended to and directed the establishment of the Second Principal Meridian and Base Line in 

Indiana. He had his own sextant, with which he determined 

the latitude and longitude of the mouth of the Great Miami, 

the west boundary of Ohio. At Vincennes he made astronomic 

observations of the corners of the Vincennes Tract and found 

that Freeman had run the north boundary on a magnetic 

bearing of N. 78” W. instead of true bearing and that the 

average magnetic declination was 6“ 45’ E. Therefore the 

boundaries, as described in the Fort Wayne Treaty, were that 

much in error. 

49 

The following is extracted from a letter written by Mansfield to Gallatin on October 26, 1804, while he was working 

on the Vincennes surveys: 

"This estimate (of survey cost) is made from a plan 

which I had drawn for the survey ofthe Tract, according 

to Mr. Freeman's map. The courses of hislines, were put 

downwith a variation of 12°fromthe true meridian. On 

examination, they were found to deviate 12° from the 

magnetical meridian, instead of the true.Thismistaken 

amount of the Variation ofthe Compass,which by accurate observations isfoundto be 6'45' East, has deranged 

my first plan, and obligedme to form a new one,whereby the number ofRanges andTownshipsare altered,the 

Quantity of Territory being the same;but varied in the 

designation of its parts. 

The whole expense is estimated at the maximum 

price of $3 per mile; but asI pay only $2% to the Deputy 

Surveyors, if no additional expenses arise, for the correctness ofthe work, there would be saved to the United 

States $2654, and that in a country where surveying is 

the most difficult, and expensive to the Deputies. As 

some compensation for their reduced wages, I have engaged to pay them, if they should have occasion for 

money, asfast astheir work may be correctly executed. 

At present I have no credit with the Receivers, but for 

the balance of that of last year, at Chillicothe, amounting perhaps to $1200. 

I send you enclosed a copy of my last plan for surveying this territory. You will perceive, that I have not 

consideredthis as an isolated tract;but have had regard 

to its connection with the old surveys (in Ohio) and the 

surrounding country, according to one general and uniform system. For this purpose I have ascertained a meridian, which I conceive to be at a proper distance from 

the one,which formsthe Western boundary of the State 

of Ohio, and which lies near the Eastern extremity of 

theTract, as alliredive, fromwhich theRanges on each 

side of it may be counted. Thisin the General Map, may 

be called the 2nd Meridian. One meridian, viz. that 

which is the Western Boundary of the State of Ohio, 

would have been sufficient if the surveys could have 

been made in regular progression fromitWestward; but 

itwould be impossible,in this discontinued Tract, without more data than I am in possession of, to determine 

its exact position in relation to the surveyed country,so 

as to estimate the intermediate ranges which may 

actually arise. Hence the necessity of a new series of 

ranges and townships. 

When the lines drawn according to this plan, are 

extended, the fractional townships and sections will 

vanish; but there will be no inconvenience; as I conceive, in selling them as fractional, if the boundaries 

run by Mr. Freeman be distinctly marked. 

The territory between this and the Ohio, in the opinion of everyone a most excellent, and valuable tract, 

may be surveyed by mearly extending the lines of our 

present survey to the River. 

The townships would not then, as heretofore, be numbered fromthe Ohio,but from theBaseZine, whichIhave 

caused to be run for the purpose of surveying here. This 

I account an advantage, as it would present an uniformity of numbers in the adjacent townships of different ranges, and the mind would at once derive fromthe 

general plan, a correct idea of their position, as well as 

of the meanders of the River." 

Fig. 21 is an outline sketch of the Vincennes Tract, the 

Second Principal Meridian and Baseline. The first rectangular surveys in the tract were made by Ebenezer Buckingham. 

The beginning point of Mansfield's new numbering system 

was located outside the Vincennes Tract and was not physically established until those lands were acquired from the 

Indians. The townships were numbered north and south from 

the baseline, east to the Greenville Treaty line and Ohio 

boundary (which was designated the First Principal Meridian), and west through Range 14. 

Mansfield's plan of closing the fractional townships 

against the tract boundary was followed, but the lines were 

continued and extended outside the tract when the Indian 

lands were acquired. That plan was not always adhered to, 

however, and some jogs occurred at Old Indian treaty boundaries. 

While at Vincennes, Mansfield also found large areas of 

open prairie country. He proposed that these areas either not 

be surveyed for the time being, as settlers wouldn't buy 

without trees to build cabins, or that the corners be 

monumented with stones or posts and mounds of earth. This 

method of monumentation was later made the usual practice. 

Mansfield also instituted the practice of surveying the 

private land claims, but extending the section and township 

lines on through them, instead of stopping the rectangular 

system lines at the claim boundaries. This method gave continuity to the surveys and made the calculation of fractional 

areas easier and more accurate. 

Gallatin approved of Mansfield's new baseline and meridian numbering system. In November 1804, he ordered Mansfield to run a Third Principal Meridian due north from the 

mouth of the Ohio River for the base of surveys in the new 

acquisition from the Sac and Fox Indians (November 3, 

1804), the lands ceded by the Kaskaskia tribe on August 13, 

1803, and the French claims at Kaskaskia, on the Mississippi 

River below St. Louis. The Third Principal Meridian surveys 

were begun in 1805. Mansfield intended to extend the baseline of the Second Principal Meridian west to the Mississippi 

River but, due to unceded Indian lands, that work could not 

be done directly. While the baselines of the Second and Third 

Principal Meridians are almost on the same latitude, the 

surveys had to be run in a roundabout and piecemeal manner 

and relative positions calcuated, which were partly based on 

the Indian boundary surveys and partly on astronomic 

observations. 

Mansfield returned to Marietta in December 1804, having 

spent nearly two full months at Vincennes personally attending to the establishment of the rectangular surveys in that 

area. 

Act of March 26,1804,Z Stat. 283 

This act divided the Louisiana Purchase into the Territory 

of Orleans and District of Louisiana. The land south of the 

Mississippi Territory and south of the 33rd parallel, west of 

the Mississippi River were named Orleans Territory. The 

51 
I 

I 

Figure 21. Vincennes Tract and Second Principal Meridian. 
TENNESSEE 

DISTRICT OF 

Gutf 

Figure 22. Territories of Mississippi and Orleans, 1804. 
remainder of the vast purchase was called the District of 

Louisiana. See. 14 of the act provides in part: 

“And that if any citizen of the United States, or other 

person, shall make settlement on any lands belonging 

to the United States, within the limits of Louisiana, or 

shall survey, or attempt to survey, such lands, or to 

designate boundaries by marking trees, or otherwise 

such offender, shall,, . , forfeit a sum not exceeding one 

thousand dollars, and suffer imprisonment not exceeding twelve months. . . ” 

These stiff penalties were supposed to halt squatters’ activities and to prevent the marking out of false private land 

claims. In fact, they did neither and false land claims would 

be a big problem for the land commissioners and deputy 

surveyors for years to come. 

Act of March 27,1804,2 Stat. 303 

This act added the Georgia cession lands to the Territory of 

Mississippi and extended the public land surveys to the additional territory. 

Fig. 22 indicates the boundaries of the Mississippi and 

Orleans Territories as they were claimed by the United 

States after passage of this act. 

Act of January 11,1805,2 Stat. 309 

This act divided the Indiana Territory and created the 

Territory of Michigan; the south boundary of the Michigan 

Territory is described as a line drawn east from the extreme 

southern end of Lake Michigan until the said line intersected 

Lake Erie. The State of Ohio would later protest that line and 

create a boundary dispute wherein Michigan and Ohio nearly went to war. The so-called “Toledo Strip” eventually went 

to Ohio and part of the Michigan Meridian surveys are therefore in Ohio. 

Act of February 11,1805,2 Stat. 313 

The provisions of this act of Congress, now codified in Title 

43 of the United States Code, are still the statute law of the 

land and brought the public land surveys to the basic system 

still in use, even though some of the provisions are obsolete. 

The entire act as taken from Volume 11, Statutes at Large, 

follows: 

Chap. XIV-An Act concerning the mode of 

surveying the Public Lands of the 

United States. (a) 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of 

Representatives of the United States of America 

in Congress assembled, That the surveyorgeneral shall cause all those lands north of the 

river Ohio, which by virtue of the act, intitled “An 

act providing for the sale of lands of the United 

States, in the territory northwest of the river 

Ohio, and above the mouth of the Kentucky 

river,” were subdivided, by running through the 

townships, parallel lines each way, at the end of 

every two miles, and by marking a corner on each 

ofthe said lines, at the end ofevery mile; to be 

subdivided into sections, by running straight 

lines from the mile corners thus marked, to the 

opposite corresponding corners, and by marking 

on each ofthe said lines, intermediate corners as 

nearly as possible equidistant from the corners of 

the sections on the same. And the said 

STATUTE 11. 

Feb. 11.1805 

Act ofMay 18,1796 

Ch. 29. Mode of 

surveying public lands 

north of the Ohio. 

Corners to be marked. 

surveyor-general shall also cause the boundaries 

of all the half sections, which had been purchased 

previous to the first day of July last, and on which 

the surveying fees had been paid, according to 

law, by the purchaser, to be surveyed and marked, 

by running straight lines from the half-mile 

corners, heretofore marked, to the opposite 

corresponding corners; and intermediate corners 

shall, at the same time, be marked on each ofthe 

said dividinglines, as nearly as possible 

equidistant from the corners of the half section on 

the same line: Provided, that the whole expense of 

surveying and marking the lines, shall not exceed 

three dollars for every mile which has not yet been 

surveyed, and which shall be actually run, 

surveyed, and marked by virtue ofthis section. 

And the expense of making the subdivisions, 

directed by this section, shall be defrayed out of 

the monies appropriated, or which may be 

hereafter appropriated, for completing the 

surveys of the public lands ofthe United States. 

Sec. 2. And be it further enacted, That the 

boundaries and contents of the several sections 

half sections, and quarter sections of the public 

lands ofthe United States, shall be ascertained in 

conformity with the following principles, any act 

or acts to the contrary notwithstanding: 

returned by the surveyor-general, or by the 

surveyor of the land south of the state of 

Tennessee, respectively, shall be established as 

the proper corners of sections, or subdivision of 

sections, which they were intended to designate; 

and the corners ofhalf and quarter sections, not 

marked on the said surveys, shall be placed as 

nearly as possible equidistant from those two 

corners which stand on the same line. 

2d. The boundary lines, actuallyrun and 

marked in the surveys returned by the 

surveyor-general, or by the surveyor of the land 

south of the state of Tennessee, respectively, shall 

be established as the proper boundary lines of the 

sections, or subdivisions, for which they were 

intended, and the length of such lines, as returned 

by either ofthe surveyors aforesaid, shall be held 

and considered as the true length thereof. And the 

boundary lines, which shall not have been 

actually run, and marked aforesaid, shall be 

ascertained, by running straight lines from the 

established corners to the opposite corresponding 

corners; but in those portions of the fractional 

townships, where no such opposite corresponding 

corners have been or can be fixed, the said 

boundary lines shall be ascertained, by running 

from the established corners, due north and south, 

or east and west lines, as the case may be, to the 

water-course, Indian boundary line, or other 

external boundary of such fractional township. 

3d. Each section, or subdivision of section, the 

contents whereof shall have been, or by virtue of 

the first section of this act, shall be returned by 

the surveyor-general, or by the surveyor of the 

public lands south ofthe state ofTennessee, 

respectively, shall be held and considered as 

containing the exact quantity, expressed in such 

return or returns: and the halfsections and 

quarter sections, the contents whereof shall not 

have been thus returned, shall be held and 

considered as containing the one half, or the one 

fourth part respectively, of the returned contents 

of the section ofwhich they make part. 

Sec. 3. And be it further enacted, That so much 

ofthis act entituled “An act making provision for 

1st. All the corners marked in the surveys, 

Half sections 

purchased before July 

1,1804, to be surveyed 

and marked. 

Whole expense of 

survey not to exceed 

three dollars per mile. 

How the expense of 

making the surveys is 

to be paid. 

Principles upon which 

the boundaries and 

contents of the public 

lands are to be 

ascertained. 

Boundary lines run 

and marked by the 

surveyor south of the 

Tennessee River to be 

the proper boundaries 

of sections. 

Boundary lines not 

actually run to be 

ascertained. 

Surveys to be returned. 

Part of a former act 

repealed. 

54 
the disposal of lands in the Indiana territory, and 

for other purposes,” as provides the mode of 

ascertaining the true contents of sections or 

subdivisions of sections, and prevents the issue of 

final certificates, unless the said contents shall 

have been ascertained, and a plot certified by the 

district surveyor, lodged with the register, be, and 

the same is hereby repealed. 

Act of March 26,1804, 

Ch. 35. 

APPROVED, February 11,1805 

Sec. 1. Enacts into law the method of subdividing the 

two-mile blocks and subdivision of sections which 

Jared Mansfield had issued to his district surveyors. The question of who is to pay for these 

surveys is answered - the government will. 

Sec. 2. (1) The first clause fixes the corners established 

by the Surveyor General in position regardless 

of any errors and requires that any corners of 

the half or quarter section not established in 

the original survey must be established at 

midpoint and on line. 

(2) The second clause fixes the lines actually run 

and marked as the true boundary lines, even if 

they were crooked, of the section or section 

subdivision. It establishes the length of the 

lines returned by the Surveyor General as 

being the true length. This provision is the 

basis of single and double proportion as the 

proper method of restoring lost corners and 

also fixes the method of subdividing sections, 

either whole or fractional. 

(3) The third clause establishes the quantity or 

area of land returned as the true quantity and 

that a half section or quarter section of a full 

640-acre section contains 320 or 160 acres. It 

provides for different areas in fractional sections or in the sections along the north and 

west boundaries of a township. But they will 

contain the quantity as returned by the Surveyor General. Mansfield had advocated these 

principles throughout 1804 and they are now 

law. 

Sec. 3. Repeals the provision that district surveyors could 

ascertain the area of land in a section or section 

subdivision and the necessity of such a survey 

before a final certificate could be issued, which 

returned full authority and responsibility to the 

Surveyor General. The ill-thought-out provision 

in the Act of March 26, 1804, Sec. 13, lasted less 

than a year; Mansfield had never honored it anyway. 

The most important parts of this act are: 

All section lines will be surveyed and all quarter corners 

on those lines established. 

The corners set by the Surveyor General are unchangeable. 

The lines marked by the Surveyor General are unchangeable. 

The lengths of the section lines are unchangeable. 

(5) The quantity or area of a section or fractional section is 

unchangeable. Of course, the Surveyor General, i.e., the 

government, could correct or change a survey up until 

such time as private rights were acquired based on the 

survey; however, that fact was established by case law in 

the courts. 

Act of March 2,1805,2 Stat. 324 

Sections 7 and 8 of this act extend the authority of the 

surveyor of the lands south of Tennessee to cover all the 

Mississippi and Orleans Territories, and the system of rectangular surveys is extended to cover all the lands in those 

territories. On March 3, 1805, 2 Stat. 331, the District of 

Louisiana was changed to the Territory of Louisiana. 

Act of March 3,1805,2 Stat. 343 

This act extends the public land surveys to the lands in the 

Indiana Territory in Illinois and Indiana ceded by the Kaskaskias and the Sac and Fox Indians in 1803 and 1804, and to 

the lands south and east of the Vincennes Tract ceded in 

November 1804. Indian cessions would be very frequent during the ensuing years, and laws were passed extending the 

land surveys to them. The rectangular surveys would proceed 

in an orderly fashion only so far as Indian cessions would 

allow. Many of the Indian boundary lines in these early 

cessions were surveyed by surveyors under contract with the 

Surveyors General. 

1805 - A Busy Year 

During 1805, the rectangular surveys were extended in 

Ohio and Indiana. As already noted, the Third Principal 

Meridian was run north from the mouth of the Ohio River 

and the Second Principal Meridian surveys extended into 

Illinois to determine the Third Principal Meridian Baseline. 

In letters to Gallatin from Isaac Briggs dated February 10, 

1804, and December 31,1804, Briggs complained of the low 

maximum price for surveys ($4 per mile) and that his deputies had been ruined trying to survey at that price. 

Apparently these deputies were Charles DeFrance and 

George Davis who helped him run the two trial meridian 

lines of the Washington Meridian in 1803. Between 1803 and 

1805, Briggs had done nothing more with the rectangular 

surveys in the lands south of Tennessee; however, some private land claims may have been surveyed. 

On February 20,1805, Gallatin wrote to Briggs urging him 

to get the rectangular surveys underway. On March 13,1805, 

Gallatin again wrote to Briggs, referring to the Act ofFebruary 5, 1805. That letter follows: 

Sir, 

“I have the honour to enclose an Act concerning the 

mode of surveying the public lands of the United States, 

which although principally intended to palliate the 

errors made in the surveys north of the Ohio, contains 

certain general principles, in relation to the mode of 

establishing corners and running interior lines, which 

apply to all of the public lands. 

Permit me earnestly to repeat my request that you 

would take immediate measures for running the 

township lines 8z for executing generally all of the surveys within the tracts lying in the Mississippi Territory 

to which the Indian Title has been extinguished. The 

Legislature has fixed the price at four dollars per mile; 

55 
that price will not be enhanced; and although very great 

correctness cannot be attained for that price in that part 

of the Country; it is our duty to carry the law into effect, 

and all that can be expected is that the surveys will be 

as correct as can be done at that rate. You will also 

perceive from the enclosed act that the principal object 

which Congress has in view is that the corners and 

boundaries of the sections & subdivision of sections 

should be definitively fixed; and that ascertainment of 

the precise contents of each is not considered as equally 

important. Indeed it is not so material either for the 

United States or for the individuals, that purchasers 

should actually hold a few acres more or less than their 

surveys may call for, as it is that they should know with 

precision, and so as to avoid any litigation, what are the 

certain boundaries of their tract. It is true that you will 

not be able to complete your work in that scientifick 

manner which was desireable, & that it will not be 

possessed of that merit, in a geographical point of view, 

which your abilities enable you to give it. But those are 

only secondary though very desireable objects: and it is 

of primary importance that the land should be surveyed 

and divided, as well as it can be done, so as at least to 

connect the whole work, to ascertain the claims 

affirmed by the Commissioners, and enable Government to dispose of the vacant lands. I hope, therefore, 

considering the time which during your absence has 

been already lost, that you will not fail to take the 

necessary measures for carrying, without any further 

delay, the law into effect.” 

As can be seen, Gallatin was telling Briggs to “get on with 

the job and don’t worry about the accuracy.” Judging from the 

resulting quality of the work, that is what Briggs had his 

deputies do. 

On March 16, 1805, Isaac Lriggs reported that he had 

engaged Gideon Fitz and John Dinsmore to make surveys in 

Washington County, now in Alabama; these would have been 

the first surveys from the St. Stephens Meridian. It isn’t 

known for certain who selected the initial point, but it is a 

stone monument set by Andrew Ellicott on the west side of 

the Mobile River on the Line of Demarcation approximately 

206 miles east of the Mississippi River. The St. Stephens 

Meridian was run north from that point. Ellicott’s Line of 

Demarcation is the baseline. The field notes and plats of 

these surveys were destroyed when the Surveyor General’s 

office at Florence, Alabama, burned in 1827; the existing 

records are copies, and it is uncertain whether Fitz or Dinsmore started the St. Stephens Meridian surveys, but they 

were started in 1805, and Fitz surveyed T. 1 N., R. 1 W., St. 

Stephens Meridian. 

On April 3, 1805, Mansfield wrote to Gallatin and discussed the Act ofFebruary 11,1805. His primary concern was 

the subdivision of fractional sections - the second clause of 

Sec. 2 of the act said that fractional sections were to be 

subdivided by running due north and south or east and west 

from the quarter-section corners to an intersection with the 

boundary, which made the section fractional. He advocated 

that this procedure wasn’t proper unless the section boundaries were on a true cardinal bearing and that the subdivisional lines would have to be run parallel to the established 

5 

section boundaries or mean courses would have to be adopted. 

This method of subdivision was adopted by Mansfield as 

following the intent of the law and is the present-day practice. 

On May 10, 1805, Mansfield reported that he had moved 

his office and records to Cincinnati, asked whether the Indian 

boundaries had been surveyed yet, and stated that he needed 

the astronomic instruments he had ordered two years before. 

On May 24, he wrote to Gallatin advocating that a new 

baseline be run west from near the mouth of the Wabash 

River (this plan wasn’t accepted), and that surveys should be 

made by only one surveyor in a given district because mixing 

up the surveyors resulted in poor relationships or closures of 

the section lines. This last suggestion was made a standard 

practice for many years. 

On June 12, 1805, Gallatin authorized Briggs to make 

necessary private land claim surveys prior to the Commissioners granting a certificate to the claimant. Briggs was to 

tie the claims together and tie in the township lines at the 

same time if possible. This was putting the cart before the 

horse, in a sense, because if the claim wasn’t confirmed, who 

would pay for the survey? 

On July 2,1805, Gallatin instructed Briggs on the survey 

of private land claims in the Orleans Territory, which is now 

mainly the State of Louisiana, and instructed him to establish a baseline and meridian along the 31st parallel, west 

from the Mississippi River to the longitude of Natchitoches, 

and south of the Red River to the “seashore,” the Gulf of 

Mexico. This was the Louisiana Meridian survey’s baseline 

and meridian. The initial point was to be “some distance west 

of the Mississippi River.” Briggs took no immediate action in 

that matter. 

On July 4,1805,7 Stat. 87, the Treaty of Fort Industry was 

concluded with the Indians, ceding all the lands in the entire 

Connecticut Reserve and south of the reserve to the Greenville Treaty line. The Connecticut Company then extended 

the survey of the 41st parallel westward. 

In 1805, Mansfield had the Twelve-Mile Square Reserve of 

the Greenville Treaty on the Miami of the Lake (Maumee 

River) surveyed by Deputy Surveyor Elias Glover. This reserve was surveyed into four regular townships, independent 

of any other survey system, which were numbered clockwise 

with number one in the southwest corner of the tract. The 

private land claims within these townships were not surveyed until 1816. 

In September 1805, Mansfield wrote to Gallatin stating 

that purchasers complained loudly if, upon survey, a quarter 

section was less than 160 acres but said nothing if it contained more. He suggested that the patents be issued with a 

statement that the quarter section contained 160 acres, more 

or less, without warrant as to the exact acreage, which was 

not adopted directly. On credit patents, acreage was not 

given at all. On cash entry patents, the statement “containing __ acres as shown on the official plat of survey” was 

added to the description. 

As previously noted, Isaac Briggs surveyed the Washington Meridian in 1803, however, the record isn’t clear as to 

who actually surveyed the Meridian line (the field notes 

indicate Charles DeFrance), but the initial point was near the 

24-mile post on Ellicott’s Line of Demarcation. In late 1805, 

Briggs contracted with Deputy Surveyors George Davis and 

i6 
Gideon Fitz for the first township surveys of the Washington 

Meridian. 

Fitz surveyed west and north from the initial point, while 

Davis did the work to the east and north. The field notes of T. 

1 N., R. 5 E., Washington Meridian, executed by Davis, were 

approved December 23,1805, by Isaac Briggs. The field notes 

of T. 1 N., R. 1 E., also by Davis, were approved January 20, 

1806, by Seth Pease. The conclusion is that Pease, who had 

surveyed in the Connecticut Reserve, had replaced Briggs as 

Surveyor of the Lands South of Tennessee. 

The surveyors in the south were hampered in the initiation 

and extension of the rectangular system because of the many 

private land claims. They had difficulties in getting descriptions of those claims from the Board of Land Commissioners, 

comprised of the Register of the Land Office and two other 

appointees. 

Act of February 28,1806,2 Stat. 352 

This act extends the authority of the Surveyor General to 

include the entire Territory of Louisiana and states that he is 

to appoint a principal deputy surveyor who is to be responsible for the surveys and supervision of the appointed deputy 

surveyors in that territory. The principal deputy was to be 

paid on a fee bas‘is of 25 cents per mile for examinations, 

while the deputy surveyors were to be paid not more than $3 

per mile for the fieldwork. The commissioners of private land 

claims were to tell the principal deputy what private claims 

were to be surveyed. 

Mansfield recommended and finally appointed Silas Bent 

to be Principal Deputy in the Louisiana Territory, now comprised of Missouri and Arkansas, and other States. Bent 

established his office in St. Louis; in the ensuing years he had 

great difficulty with the land commissioners and the private 

land claim surveys. 

Under the wording of this act, Mansfield appointed both 

the principal deputy surveyor and the deputy surveyors, 

paying them at a stated rate-per-mile surveyed. For private 

land claims, the deputies received $3 per mile, paid by the 

claimant, which was a modification of the more rigid contract 

system used by his predecessor, Rufus Putnam. The District 

Surveyors were appointed by Mansfield; however, they received their entire payment from the settler who hired their 

services but could not charge more than $3 per mile. 

Acts of April 21,1806,2 Stat. 391-396 

The first of these acts provides for the appointment of two 

principal deputy surveyors in the Orleans Territory, one 

for each of the two land office districts in that territory. 

These principal deputies were to receive a salary of $500 

per year, plus fees of 25 cents per mile for recording and 

examining private land claim surveys. 

The second act provides for private land claim surveys in 

the Vincennes and Kaskaskia districts. 

The third act provides for regular clerk hire by the Surveyor General. 

The Orleans Territory was divided into two land districts: 

(1) The portion lying east of the Atchafalaya River and 

Grand Lake, including the island of New Orleans, was 

called the Eastern District, with a land office at New 

Orleans. 

(2) The remainder of the territory was called the Western 

District, with the land office at Opelousas. Briggs 

appointed Gideon Fitz Principal Deputy of the Western 

District. 

TheYears 1806-1807 

In 1806, Mansfield began the surveys of lands between the 

Connecticut Reserve and U.S. Military Tract. He investigated the south boundary of the Connecticut Reserve as surveyed and found it slightly erroneous in both alinement and 

measurement. Rather than disrupt land titles and surveys 

within the reserve with a resurvey, he accepted that boundary line and used it as a northerly baseline for the surveys 

south of it. The township lines were surveyed from north to 

south, with the fractional townships against the north 

boundary of the Military Tract. The Townships were numbered north from the Ohio River and ranges west from the 

Pennsylvania boundary. Mansfield reported these surveys 

completed in August 1807. 

Silas Bent, the Principal Deputy at St. Louis, was having 

problems with the private land claims, especially the spurious type. The Act of March 26,1804,2 Stat. 283, was aimed 

at discouraging the practice of marking out false claims by 

providing for stiff penalties. Most of the claims were based on 

French or Spanish titles and grants made before 1803. 

Since the claimant only had to prove his claim and pay for 

surveying and a few other small fees, a private claim was 

almost free land. Unscrupulous individuals were making 

tommyhawk claims by blazing lines on trees and claiming 

the land within the blazes. Bent wrote to Mansfield that he 

was proving or disproving the date of the blazes by the annual 

ring count on the overgrowth, which he believed was the most 

infallible method of dating a claim to prove its authenticity. 

This method of dating a line blaze wasn’t new; Alexander 

Holmes had used it in 1799 when retracing the north boundary of the Seven Ranges in Ranges 1 and 2 to identify bearing 

trees blazed in 1785 and 1786. Mansfield reported these facts 

to Gallatin on October 22, 1806, and annual ring count has 

been used since to determine the age of a blaze on a tree. 

On May 22, 1807, Mansfield wrote a lengthy report to 

Gallatin pertaining to the surveys in the Vincennes District 

and report that the surveys there had been performed by 

different surveyors in rough country; as the lines progressed 

the sections “had begun to be twisted from true squares to the 

figure of a “rombus” (rhombus, meaning a parallelogram, 

from Latin). To correct these errors, he had his best surveyor 

run another east-west baseline between townships 4 and 5 

south from which the range lines were to be run south to the 

Ohio River. He went on to explain that due to sickness, 

lateness of season and other factors, this procedure was not 

entirely successful. 

This second east and west line 24 miles south of the baseline was the first known use of a correction line, or what is 

now known as a “Standard Parallel.” Mansfields stated intent for using the procedure was to correct for both the accumulating distortion in the surveys and for the widening of the 

ranges due to convergency of meridians. 

The report goes on to state that for the most part, the 

township corners had been made to coincide (they were com57 
mon), the lines were all run with proper allowance for magnetic variation, and that a new baseline (standard parallel) 

should be run every 30 or 40 miles to correct for convergency 

of meridians. The report goes on to state in part: 

cott’s line on the east bank of the Mississippi River, shot the 

line across, and began the survey of the Louisiana Baseline in 

late 1806. The first post was designated “48 mile,” the next 

“47 mile” and so forth. The zero-mile post was 48 miles west of - 

“As many entire sections and entire quarter sections 

have been laid off in each township, as could be made 

limiting the whole to 36 sections, and the division of the 

entire sections into quarters is made by placing the 

Quarter Section corners equidistant from the corners of 

the sections, so that the actual subdivision may be 

effected even by the purchasers of Quarters without any 

danger of interference. 

The contents of the subdivisions could not be conveniently place on the map; but as the sections are generally of the legal quantity, or of 640 acres, I have thought 

it best to make out a list of those only which varied from 

this quantity, especially as the Quarters of the latter 

are generally unequal divisions of the whole section, 

and ought particularly to be noted; whereas those of the 

former are uniformly equal parts of an entire section, or 

160 acres each.” 

From this wording it would appear that Mansfield was 

placing the excess or deficiency in the last half mile, going 

into the west and north boundaries of the township, and was 

trying to devise a simple method of platting, still showing the 

quantity in the fractional quarter sections, i.e., by making a 

list. This method was adopted and the plats of that period 

contained a list of the fractional parts of sections and their 

areas. The list method continued until 1832. 

On May 8, 1806, Gallatin again wrote to Isaac Briggs, 

instructing him to start the rectangular surveys in the western part of the Orleans Territory. The following extract is 

from that letter: 

“You will use every possible endeavor to have as much 

of the public lands in the western district of the Territory of Orleans surveyed during this year as is practicable. It is the wish of the legislature that the public lands 

in that quarter should be offered for sale; and, I will add, 

that that object is intimately connected with the welfare, and even the safety of that newly acquired territory; for it is the only portion where any great increase 

of American population can take place, and I need not 

comment on the importance of this object. It may, indeed, in this instance be found necessary to sacrifice the 

scientific correctness which would otherwise be desirable to the dispatch which is indispensably necessary.” 

The letter again instructed Briggs to use the 31st parallel 

of latitude as the baseline west of the Mississippi River and a 

meridian line far enough west of the Mississippi that it would 

not be interfered with by the river. The baseline was to 

extend only as far west as the meridian of Natchitoches to 

prevent any interference with the Spanish claims of territory 

further west. 

Gideon Fitz was the Principal Deputy of the Western District of Orleans so he may have entered into the contracts. At 

any rate, contracts were given to Deputy Surveyor John Cook 

for the baseline and Thomas Owings for the meridian, south 

from the baseline to the Gulf of Mexico. Cook began at Ellithe river, which was reached in 1807. Cook ran the baseline 

west for 84 miles. Owings then began the meridian survey at 

the initial point and ran south. John Dinsmore, another 

deputy, began at the initial point and ran the meridian north 

for 86 miles. 

During 1807, some 18 other deputies were at work and 

surveyed approximately 100 townships from the Cook, Owings, and Dinsmore lines. They immediately discovered gross 

errors in the Cook baseline and Owings meridian line. In 

1808, extensive resurveys were done. The baseline was resurveyed east from the initial point. The length from the river 

was found to be only 47 miles and ended up approximately 

1,200 yards north of where Cook had crossed the Mississippi 

River. Owings’ work on the meridian line was just as bad; 

apparently Cook and Owings had taken literally the remark 

in Gallatin’s letters that it might be ‘hecessary to sacrifice 

the scientific correctness” in favor of speed. 

It was many years and many thousands of dollars later 

before the mess created by Cook and Owings was straightened out, if it ever really was. In the 1873 Commissioner’s 

Report, the problems created still had not been cleared up, 

and it is from that report where most of this information was 

obtained. 

On March 30, 1807, Gallatin instructed Seth Pease, the 

new Surveyor of the Lands South of Tennessee, to begin the 

rectangular surveys in the Chickasaw Cession, in what is 

now Alabama. The baseline was to be the 35th parallel, the 

south boundary of the State of Tennessee. The initial point on 

the state boundary was at the vertex of a triangular-shaped 

tract in the cession. The records indicate that this initial 

point was established by Deputy Surveyor Thomas Freeman 

in late 1807. Freeman ran the Huntsville Meridian south. 

The baseline is the south boundary of Tennessee. All 

townships of the Huntsville Meridian system are numbered 

south, and east or west of the meridian. 

The Act of March 3,1807,2 Stat. 445, again attempted to 

deal with the spurious marking of private land claims in the 

Orleans and Louisiana Territories. It also strictly prohibited 

squatting on the public lands and provided for the U.S. Marshal and even military force if necessary to remove squatters. 

Congress passed several antisquatter laws, none of which 

proved to be entirely effective. Squatting continued and Congress later in effect allowed it by passing selective preemption acts for the existing squatters, saying each time that the 

practice was thereafter prohibited, and then in a year or two, 

passing another limited preemption act. 

The Years 1808-1812 

During this period, no major advancements were made in 

the development of the rectangular system of land surveys. 

The Surveyors General, Principal Deputies and the field 

surveyors were engaged in extending the existing rectangular systems and surveying some Indian boundaries as cessions occurred. But a large percentage of their efforts went 

into surveying the private land claims. Congress enacted 

only a few laws during these years which affected the rectangular system and then only indirectly. 

58 
The Act of February 3,1809, 2 Stat. 514, divided the Indiana Territory. The new Indiana Territory included the area 

which is now basically the State of Indiana. The new Illinois 

Territory included all the remaining public lands east of the 

Mississippi River, in what remained of the old “Northwest 

Territory.” 

The Act of April 30, 1810, 2 Stat. 590, provided for land 

sales and land office districts in Indiana Territory. Sec. 6 of 

the act directs that a tract of land in Illinois Territory on the 

Ohio River, including Shawneetown, be laid off into town 

lots, streets, and avenues under the direction of the Surveyor 

General. Minimum price of the town lots was to be $8 each, no 

more than two sections were to be subdivided, and the town 

lots were not to exceed one quarter acre each. This is the first 

known townsite fully surveyed by the Surveyor General. 

Mansfield had Shawneetown surveyed in 1810. This act put 

the government into the townsite survey business, which has 

continued on an intermittent basis up to the present time. 

Thomas Freeman was appointed Surveyor of the Lands 

South of Tennessee by President Madison. His commission 

was forwarded to him by Gallatin on September 10, 1810. 

TheActofMarch3,1811,2 Stat. 662, was a deviation away 

from the rectangular system. It applied only to lands “adjacent to any river, lake, creek, bayou, or water course,” in the 

Orleans Territory. The two principal deputy surveyors were 

authorized and instructed to lay out tracts along those waters 

with 58 poles frontage and 465 poles in depth. This deviation 

from the rectangular system of surveying and sale of public 

lands was in deference to the French settlers who opposed the 

regular rectangular system of surveys and wanted to buy 

land by their traditional method of five arpents frontage and 

40 arpents depth, or 200-square arpens in area. This provision (Sec. 2) for deviation of the mode of surveying was extended by Sec. 5 of the act which allowed a limited preemption of an additional 40 arpents in depth to the rear of the 

confirmed French claims. The Surveyor of the Lands South of 

Tennessee, Thomas Freeman, at Washington, Mississippi, 

issued instructions for the survey of these tracts to his Principal Deputies in June 1811. Fig. 23 is a sketch indicating the 

general method to be used. The surveyors were to run lines at 

right angles to the general course of the water course, keep 

the side lines as nearly parallel as possible and vary their 

length to provide common corners, and avoid gaps or gores. 

The actual acreage in a tract would be given but it should be 

close to 200 arpens in area. The tracts were to be numbered 

consecutively from some prominent landmark or established 

corner of the rectangular net. 

It isn’t known how many of these “French Tracts” were 

surveyed in what is now the State of Louisiana; only an 

examination of the township plats in that state would reveal 

the number. The method did not appeal to the surveyors and 

did not become a widespread practice because of the extra 

planning involved and fragmentation of the sections in the 

rectangular system. Fig. 24 is a copy of T. 9 N., R. 10 E., 

Louisiana Meridian showing an actual situation. All the 

French Tracts and private land claims were given section 

numbers. 

The Act of February 20, 1811, 2 Stat. 641, enabled the 

Orleans Territory to become the State of Louisiana. After 

formation of a government, that State was admitted to the 

Union April 30, 1812. The Surveyor of the Lands South of 

Tennessee and his principal deputies continued the surveys 

there. 

Act of April 25,1812,2 Stat. 716 

This act created a new government bureau within the 

Treasury Department called the General Land Office (GLO). 

The chief officer was called the Commissioner of the General 

Land Office “to superintend, execute, and perform all such 

acts and things, touching or respecting the public lands of the 

United States,. . . ” A chief clerk was to be appointed who 

would take the place of the Commissioner in case that position became vacant. The Commissioner was to countersign 

patents and a multitude of other administrative duties. One 

flaw in the act was that it did not give clear authority to the 

Commissioner over the Surveyor General. Because of that 

omission, the Surveyors General would continue to operate 

in a semi-autonomous fashion for the next 25 years or more, 

making their own rules for the execution of the public land 

surveys, often only at the insistence of the Commissioner. 

But whatever it lacked, the act established a bureau responsible for the land surveys and sales, which Alexander 

Hamilton had suggested 22 years earlier. It also got the War 

Department and the State Department out of the land business. 

THE PERIOD 1812 - 1836 

Tiffin Takes Office 

Edward Tiffin was appointed Commissioner of the GLO on 

May 7, 1812. Tiffin was born June 19, 1766, at Carlisle, 

England, and emigrated to Virginia in 1784. He studied 

medicine at Jefferson Medical College in Philadelphia and 

began his medical practice there. He moved to Chillicothe, 

Ohio, in 1798 and set up his medical practice, but in 1799, he 

was elected to the Territorial Legislature, and in 1803, was 

elected the first governor of the new State. After four years in 

that position, he accepted an appointment to serve in the U.S. 

Senate, which he resigned from in 1809 and returned to his 

medical practice. In 1812, President Madison persuaded him 

to take the appointment as the first Commissioner of the 

GLO . Tiffin was confronted with the monumental task of organizing the new bureau and bringing order to the widely 

scattered and chaotic condition of land records, patents, 

plats, payments, and private land claims. He is credited with 

bringing all of the records together, as much as was possible, 

and getting them into a businesslike condition. 

On May 20,1812, 2 Stat. 741, Congress directed that the 

Surveyor General was to survey the western and northern 

boundary of the State of Ohio, the Indians permitting. This 

work was not attempted until 1815. 

On June 4, 1812, 2 Stat. 743, Congress passed the act 

creating the Missouri Territory which was basically a name 

change. The new territory included all the lands in the original Louisiana Purchase of 1803, minus the new State of 

Louisiana. 

The Act of June 13, 1812, 2 Stat. 748, directed that the 

principal deputy surveyor in the Missouri Territory was to 

survey the town lots in 11 different villages and towns in that 

territory, which included St. Louis and New Madrid. The 

expenses were to be paid by the government at $3 per mile. 

i9 
I 

14.50 chs = 4.985 arpents 

116.25 chs = 39.962arpents 

Figure 23. Instructions for Surveying Riverfront Tracts in Orleans Territory. 
The principal deputy was also to survey into townships those 

lands in the territory on which the Indian title had been 

extinguished. This act thus expanded the rectangular surveys west of the Mississippi in addition to the limited expansion in Louisiana, but the rectangular surveys were not immediately expanded. 

On June 12,1812, Congress declared war with Great BriWhen the British did burn the building, the records were 

saved. 

The War of 1812 officially ended within a few months with 

the Treaty of Ghent on December 24, 1814, but for the next 

two years, the GLO was housed in private homes rented for 

office space. When a new building replace the old, it too was 

constructed of wood, just as flammable as the previous one. 

tain, the War of 1812, which temporarily halted most surveying activities. During the next two years, the rectangular 

surveys were executed in Indiana and Illinois, and private 

land claims were surveyed but at a reduced rate. 

Jared Mansfield accepted an appointment to return to 

West Point and the Corp of Engineers in the fall of 1812. John 

Mansfield, his nephew and clerk, had joined the Army so 

Mansfield hired a new clerk, James Tifson, to replace John on 

October 14,1812. Mansfield put the Cincinnati office in order 

and left for New Haven, but became sick with fever on the 

journey. The Surveyor General position was vacant for about 

a month. 

Josiah Meigs - Surveyor General 

On November 24, 1812, Josiah Meigs was appointed Surveyor General of Ohio, Michigan, Illinois, Indiana, and Missiouri. Meigs was born August 21, 1757, at Middletown, 

Connecticut, and graduated from Yale in 1778. He then 

taught school and was admitted to the bar to practice law at 

New Haven, Connecticut, in 1784. He established a newspaper, the New Haven Gazette, and ardently supported Thomas Jefferson and the Federal Constitution. He was 

appointed professor of mathematics and natural philosophy 

in October 1794 and served in that capacity until his appointment as Surveyor General. 

Meigs took office without benefit of a briefing by his predecessor Mansfield; he was thus uncertain of his duties and 

authority. He apparently continued the system set up by 

Mansfield of appointing district surveyors and appointing 

deputy surveyors under contracts at a fixed price per mile 

and in platting procedures. 

Around August 20,1813, Meigs appointed William Rector 

to replace Silas Bent as Principal Deputy in the Missouri 

Territory. Rector and his brother Nelson had executed many 

of the rectangular surveys in Indiana and Illinois. William 

Rector had established the Third Principal Meridian in 1805 

and was a surveyor of excellent reputation. Rector immediately suggested establishing a fourth meridian in the 

Missouri country and he wanted to run the new meridian 

north from the mouth of the Arkansas River and the baseline 

west from the mouth of the Ohio River. He needed a rectangular net to tie in the many private land claims surveyed at St. 

Louis, New Madrid, and elsewhere in the region. Bent had no 

means of correlating these detached claims and Rector 

wanted them tied together, using the rectangular surveys for 

that purpose. Rector was not authorized to begin those surveys until 1815. 

On August 24, 1814 the British captured Washington, 

D.C., and proceeded to burn the public buildings in the city. 

The GLO was housed in a frame building. Edward Tiffin 

foresaw the possibility of such action by the enemy and had 

his clerks and anyone he could muster remove the land office 

records and stash them in private homes around the city. 

Meigs and Tiffin Exchange Jobs 

Tiffin wanted to return to Ohio and Meigs was not all that 

knowledgeable about land surveying. They got together and, 

with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury, exchanged offices in the fall of 1814. Meigs was officially 

appointed Commissioner of the GLO on Odober 11,1814; the 

physical exchange took place by November of that year. This 

exchange was to prove most fortunate; Tiffin would prove to 

be a superb Surveyor General, possibly outranking Mansfield in ability and capacity for the job. His first action was to 

move the office of Surveyor General to Chillicothe, Ohio, his 

home before going to Washington, D.C. Tiffin would remain 

Surveyor General for over 14 years, and the rectangular 

system of surveys would become quite fully developed during 

his tenure. 

1815-A Busy Year 

On February 4, 1815, 3 Stat. 201, Congress directed that 

the lands one mile on each side of the road from the Connecticut Reserve to the Maumee River were to be surveyed parallel and at right angles to the road. Later in the year, Tiffin 

contracted to have those surveys executed but the Indians 

would not allow the surveyors to do the work. The lands were 

never surveyed in accordance with the act. 

On December 16,181 1, a major earthquake struck the area 

around New Madrid in the Missouri Territory. Several major 

aftershocks followed, during 1812. Apparently, one aftershock hit New Madrid on November 10, 1812 and nearly 

destroyed the town. On February 17,1815,3 Stat. 211, Congress passed an act allowing any person whose lands had 

been damaged to take up public lands elsewhere in a like 

amount to that damaged. No one was allowed to take up more 

land than was already confirmed to him unless he held less 

than 160 acres, in which case he could take up to 160 acres; 

thus an owner of a small city lot in New Madrid could take 

160 acres. The limit to any one person was 640 acres: The 

Principal Deputy Surveyor was to survey the lands claimed 

under this act, but there were no rectangular surveys as yet 

in the area, and the claimants could stake their claims 

wherever they wanted to. This act proved to be a monumental 

headache for Rector. It has been said that each city lot in New 

Madrid was parlayed into 160 acres and up to 640 acres in 

some cases. The New Madrid claims impeded progress of the 

rectangular surveys for many years to come. 

Gallatin had reduced the national debt to about 80 million 

dollars but the War of 1812 had increased it to approximately 

125 million. Congress had designated a large block of land 

northwest of Detroit to satisfy military warrants for the 

recent war. Congress again looked to the public lands as a 

source of revenue, but the lands had to be surveyed first. 

Expansion of the land surveys was a first order of business in 

Michigan, Illinois, and Missouri. 

On March 9, 1815, Tiffin proposed to Meigs that the sur61 

i 

/' 

,. 

< 

, 

i 
STATE OF OHIO 

Figure 25. Plan for Surveys in Michigan Territory. 
veys in Michigan be started immediately according to the 

plan shown in Fig. 25. The plan was nearly identical to one 

proposed by Mansfield earlier. Tiffin also proposed that the 

Third Principal Meridian in Illinois be extended north to the 

then Indian boundary, extended as a blank line without 

marking across the Indian lands until it crossed the Illinois 

River, then back into public lands and on north, numbering 

the townships continuously from the baseline, but a new 

baseline should be run west from the Illinois River. This plan 

is shown in Fig. 26, which also includes the proposal for 

Missouri. In Missouri, Tiffin proposed to have a baseline 

surveyed west from the confluence of the St. Francis and 

Mississippi Rivers to the Arkansas River, to number the 

ranges west from the beginning point, and to survey two 

million acres between the St. Francis and Arkansas Rivers. 

These two plans and their sketch (Fig. 26) indicate the very 

rudimentary knowledge available at that time of the positions of natural features in the territories. 

Meigs did not comment on the Michigan plan and Tiffin 

took his silence as approval. But Meigs proposed that a 

Fourth Principal Meridian be run north from the mouth of 

the Illinois River, not knowing that it would remain east of 

the river for a long distance, and that a Fifth Principal Meridian be surveyed north from the mouth of the Arkansas River. 

Tiffin readily agreed to those proposals. 

On April 18 and 28,1815, Tiffin contracted with Alexander 

Holmes for the survey of the Michigan Baseline, with Benjamin Hough for the survey of the Michigan Meridian, and 

with each man to survey the exterior boundaries of four 

ranges of townships in Michigan. 

By a treaty signed at Detroit on November 17,1807,7 Stat. 

105, four Indian tribes had ceded lands north of the Maumee 

River and east of a line which extended due north from Fort 

Defiance in Ohio, which included lands around Detroit and 

much of the land in eastern Michigan. 

The Michigan Meridian was run due north from Fort Defiance, and the baseline was surveyed due west from a point 

on Lake St. Clair. It isn’t known why the baseline was begun 

at that point. The initial point of the Michigan Meridian was 

established where the two lines intersect. The surveys were 

begun in late May or early June 1815. Holmes and Hough 

each ran two parties, using assistance surveyors, and were 

paid $2.50 per mile. Tiffin contracted for the survey of 46 

other townships in Michigan during the summer of 1815. 

In May 1815, Tiffin let contracts for the survey of the 

Fourth Principal Meridian and Baseline in Illinois. Because 

of the swamps, flies, and fever, the surveys were not started 

until November 1, 1815. The meridian was begun at the 

confluence of the Mississippi and Illinois Rivers and run 

north on a “blank line” for some 72 miles until it crossed to 

the west side of the Illinois River. From that point, the meridian was run due north and the baseline due west to the 

Mississippi River. The field notes of the blank line were 

signed by J. Missinger, Enoch Moore, and J. Milton Moore, 

Deputy Surveyors, and indicate that the initial point was 

established November 12, 1815. 

Had Tifin and Meigs known the true course of the Illinois 

River, it is extremely doubtful that they would have used the 

mouth of that stream as a beginning point for the meridian. 

Tiffin contracted for the survey of 72 other townships, “north 

of the Illinois River,” adjacent to that river and the Mississippi during the summer of 1815 and used the township surveys 

to determine the true course of those streams. Due to the lack 

of astronomic instruments and men to use them, the 

township surveys were recognized at a very early date as the 

best possible means of making accurate maps of the country. 

Tiffin used the tactic immediately by contracting for exterior 

township boundary surveys first and later letting contracts 

for the section lines. 

On April 29, 1815, Thomas Freeman, Surveyor of the 

Lands South of Tennessee, wrote to Meigs concerning the 

surveys in the Natchez District of the Mississippi Territory. 

In a letter to Freeman dated March 13, 1815, Meigs was 

“astonished” to hear that the deputy surveyors had not 

marked bearing trees at the survey corners in approximately 

30 townships. Isaac Briggs, the first Surveyor of the Lands 

South of Tennessee, had not instructed them to mark trees, 

only to set posts at the corners and to mark the post. The last 

portion of Freeman’s letter follows: 

Extract from Mr. Briggs Instructions to his deputies 

whilst Superintending the Survey of the public lands 

south of Tennessee- 

“The lines must be carefully measured and We22 

Marked A Tree standing exactly in the Line, should 

have a Blaze & four Notches for a Township Line - a 

Blaze and three Notches for a Section Line on each side 

of it in the direction of the Line. All Trees within a short 

distance on each side of your Line should be simply 

Blazed on the side facing your line.-Plant a strong 

substantial post at every corner of a Township, and a 

smaller one at every mile. 

“The West side of each Township post, exhibits the 

Number of the Township-The East side, the number of 

Miles from the line of Demarcation-The South side 

The Number of Miles from the Basis-Meridian-and the 

North side-whether it be East or West of the said 

meridian- 

“The East side of of every post whether it be the corner 

Township or Section, exhibits the Number of Miles on 

the Meridian; and the south side the Number of Miles on 

the parallel of Latitude.” 

From the above extract it appears that the numbering 

of sections in the field was not contemplated-which 

has arisen perhaps from the impossibility of correctly 

numbering the sections in a Township containing private claims, as the survey progresses.-Each private 

claim whether large or small has a separate Number, so 

that a Township may contain any number of sections 

from 10 to 100, which cannot be ascertained until the 

survey of the Township is completed, and a map of it 

made. The surveyor will then be compel’d, to retravel 

over his lines, with his map, and transfer the proper 

Sectional N” from it to the corner Trees, or posts, of 

sections-This is a severe duty which the surveyors 

complain of but it cannot be avoided. 

I fear I have extended this letter to a troublesome 

length on this subject not now very interesting”- 

I am very respectfully Sir your Ob Serv 

Tho Freeman 

65 
Figure 26. Tiffin’s Plan for Meridians and Baselines in Missouri and Illinois. 
The policy of identifying the private land claims as sections 

was unusual and unnecessary. It isn’t known just how long 

that mode of identifying private claims continued. In the 

north, the claims were given numbers but separately identified from the rectangular sections. The lack of a definite 

policy and common instructions for all public land surveys 

was evident and needed correction. The problem and 

numbering method is shown in Figs. 27 and 28, copies of T. 7 

N., R. 2 W., Washingtin Meridian, Mississippi, and T. 4 S., R. 

1 W., St. Stephens Meridian, Alabama. 

Tiffin’s Instructions 

General William Rector was the Principal Deputy in Missouri, with his office at St. Louis. He was under the supervision of Tiffin but was responsible for contracting and executing surveys in his territory. On July 26,1815, Tiffin wrote to 

Meigs enclosing a copy of the instructions he had prepared for 

Rector’s guidance. These instructions follow: 

Instructions for General Rector Principal Deputy Surveyor for the Territory of Missouri 

1st. 

2nd. 

2d. 

3d. 

4th. 

5th. 

6th. 

You are required to have surveyed two million 

acres of land between the Rivers St. Francis, and 

Arkansas, which have been appropriated by an 

Act of Congress for Military bounties - (to which 

I refer you) - The annexed plan, on which these 

rivers are laid down with the lands lying between 

them in Ranges and Townships will show you the 

mode in which it is intended to have these surveys executed. 

Let a standard line be accurately run from the 

confluence of the Arkansas with the Mississippi 

due north according to the true meridian so far, 

that a base line run due west from the mouth of 

the River St. Francis to the Mississippi will intersect it as laid down on the plan. 

Lay off the lands south of this base or east and 

west line into Ranges and Townships of six miles 

square by running the north and south lines 

according to the true merdian and the east and 

west lines at right angles as near as may be, down 

to the Rivers Mississippi and Arkansas, and 

number them both Ranges and Townships as exhibited on the plan. 

Let then Townships be subdivided as has been 

heretofore practiced into Sections, establishing 

corners for quarter sections corners in the usual 

mode. 

Furnish every surveyor you employ with one of 

the duplications enclosed, and see that both himself, his chain, and axemen are duly sworn before 

they proceed to work and return a copy of their 

sworn oaths to this office. 

Furnish every surveyor with a plan of the whole 

military district and a copy of the instructions 

enclosed, that each man may be able to comprehend the plan how the surveys are to be executed 

and know how to attend to his compass and chain, 

to mark his corners accurately and make his returns in a proper manner. 

When work is done and returned to your office, 

you are to check and see that it is done agreeable 

7th. 

8th. 

9th. 

to law and the instructions given and return it 

certified to the Office of the Surveyor General to 

wit - a copy of the field notes of every Township 

or fractional Township, and two sets of plats and 

descriptions laid down on paper of a uniform size 

with an inch space on the margin, so that all the 

plats when finished may be bound in a book. 

You are furnished with a copy of a form of contract, so that you may enter into contracts with 

the deputies, assuring always to have a duplicate 

signed, one ofwhich is to be returned to this office 

when entered into. 

All the surveys contracted for in the Michigan 

and Illinois Territories have been at 250 cents 

per mile. It is thoroughly expected you will be 

able to get the military lands done in Missouri at 

the same rate, but if as you suggested, this should 

be impracticable, you are authorized to give 3 

dollars per mile, but only in case of necessity - 

being satisfied you will guard the interests of the 

United States from imposition, in as much as by 

doing so, you are advancing your own interests. 

When any deputy surveyor has finished his contract, made his returns to your office and is certified and returned to this office, the accounts will 

be paid off in such manner as may be most convenient of the Treasury DepartmentSigned E T 

This instruction is given here to illustrate the method and 

procedures that were in use at the time. 

The Instructions forDeputy Surveyors written by Tiffin are 

given in the Appendix to this book. He sent a copy of them to 

Meigs, which Meigs acknowledged on August 3,1815. Tiffin’s 

instructions were much more complete than those by Mansfield in 1804 and they were issued to all surveyors under his 

authority. It is believed they were sent to the surveyors in 

Mississippi and Louisiana by Meigs and that they may have 

been used to guide the surveys south of Tennessee for a short 

period of time. 

Rector was temporarily ill with the fever, and contracts for 

the survey of the Fifth Principal Meridian were delayed. On 

October 27, 1815, Deputy Surveyor Joseph C. Brown began 

the survey of the baseline at the confluence of the Mississippi 

and St. Francis Rivers and ran it due west. On the same date, 

Prospect C. Robbins began the survey of the meridian at the 

confluence of the Arkansas and Mississippi Rivers and ran it 

due north. Robbins intersected the baseline in the 58th mile, 

approximately 26 miles west of the Mississippi River, on 

November 10,1815. There he established the initial point of 

the Fifth Principal Meridian, which controls the rectangular 

surveys in all of Arkansas, Missouri, Iowa, North Dakota, 

and in most of Minnesota and half of South Dakota. 

One other letter should be mentioned here. The lakes in 

Michigan became a problem for Alexander Holmes; he requested instructions from Tiffin who passed it on to Meigs. 

Meigs replied on June 26, 1815, as follows; 

“Your letter of the 16th conveying a letter from Mr. 

Holmes dated the 8th Ins’t. is before me; in my opinion 

the lakes incountered by Mr. Holmes, of five or six miles 

67 

\ 

-_ .- 

\ 

- .. 3 I. 
Figure 28. Alabama Township with Tract Numbers. Sections Retain Identity. 

in circumference, should be meandered, and the adjacent lands returned as fractional.” 

Up to that time, lakes hadn’t been meandered; they were 

included in the lands surveyed, except the Great Lakes, 

which were clearly navigable. 

The Years 1816-1820 

The Appropriations Act of April 16, 1816, 3 Stat. 277, 

provided funds for the survey of th Ohio-Michigan boundary, 

which had been authorized in 1812 but never executed. In the 

fall of 1816, Tiffin contracted with William Harris for the 

survey, which was done in the summer of 1817. The Ohio 

Enabling Act had described the line as due east from the 

southern extremity of Lake Michigan, but Ohio’s constitution called for a line from the northern cape of Miami Bay to 

 the southern end of Lake Michigan. Harris ran a random line 

due east from the south end of Lake Michigan to Lake Erie, 

intersecting that lake south of Miami Bay. He then ran back 

on a true line from the northern cape in Miami Bay on a 

bearing of S. 87” 42’ W., marking and monumenting the line 

in accordance with the Ohio constitution. Tiffin, the first 

governor of Ohio, naturally watched out of the State’s interests. The governor of Michigan protested loudly to President Monroe who ordered a new survey. Tiffin then contracted with John A. Fulton at $5 per mile to survey a line 

due east from the south end of Lake Michigan (Harris’ random line) until the line hit Lake Erie. Fulton surveyed and 

marked the line in 1818, but Congress did not approve either 

line. Tiffin later had the Michigan Meridian surveys closed 

against the Fulton or southerly line. The dispute wasn’t 

resolved until 1836, long after the rectangular surveys were 

completed in the area. The northern or Harris line was finally adopted. In compensation for her loss, Michigan received 

the Upper Peninsula. The land between the Harris and Fulton lines became known as the “Toledo Strip.” 

On April 19,1816,3 Stat. 289, Congress passed the Indiana 

Enabling Act. That State formed a constitution and government and was admitted to the Union on December 11,1816. 

On April 29, 1816, 3 Stat. 325, Congress established the 

office of “surveyor of the lands of the United States in the 

territories of Illinois and Missouri,” in other words, a Surveyor General for those two territories. The first Surveyor 

General was William Rector. It isn’t known why Illinois was 

taken away from Tiffin, except that Rector was at St. Louis 

and therefore immediately adjacent to the surveys in Illinois 

and better able to supervise the surveys there. Rector had 

been well trained by Mansfield and Tiffin so was capable of 

handling the added work. It took Tiffin about two years to get 

all his contracts in Illinois settled and transfer the Illinois 

records to Rector. 

The Act of February 22, 181 7, 3 Stat. 346, provided that 

“from and after the first day of September next, the 

sections designated by number two, five, twenty, twenty-three, thirty and thirty-three, in each and every 

township of the public lands,. . . shall be offered for sale 

either in quarter sections, or half quarter sections,. . . and in the case of the division of a quarter section, the 

partition shall be by a line running due north and 

south,. . . ” 

Here again Congress used the term “by a line running due 

north and south.’’ Since the half-quarter section line was not 

surveyed by the government it had slight effect on the Surveyors General. Tiffin followed the principle set down by 

Mansfield whenever he had to deal with a division line; i.e., 

set the one-sixteenth corners at midpoint and run a straight 

line to connect them, ignoring the due north-south statement 

in the law. 

On March 1,1817, 3 Stat. 348, Congress passed the Mississippi Enabling Act, with the boundaries of the new State described as they exist today. Mississippi was admitted to the 

Union on December 10, 1817. 

On March 3,181 7,3 Stat. 371, Congress created the Territory of Alabama, with boundaries as they are today, from 

what was left of the former Mississippi Territory. 

On the same date, March 3, 181 7, 3 Stat. 375, Congress 

enacted a law authorizing the appointment of a “Surveyor of 

the Lands of the United States in the Mississippi Territory, 

lying north of an east and west line, to be drawn from the 

river Mississippi, through Fort Williams, to the western 

boundary line of the state of Georgia-.” This act is a perplexity because technically the Mississippi Territory now no longer existed except on paper. The previous two acts had split 

the territory north-south into a new State and the Territory 

of Alabama. It is believed that no Surveyor General was ever 

appointed under this act. 

On March 17,1817, Meigs forwarded a commission to John 

Coffee, appointing him Surveyor General “of the northern 

part of Mississippi Territory.” Coffee established his office at 

Hunstville, Alabama; it was moved to Florence, Alabama, in I 

1823. 

On April 20, 1818, 3 Stat. 466, Congress passed an act 

which states: “That the powers and duties of the surveyor of 

the lands in the northern part of the late Mississippi territory, shall extend to the whole of the Alabama territory, and 

that only.” So the error made a year earlier was corrected. In 

Sec. 3 of this act, it states, “That all lands lying between the 

basis meridian, and the first standard meridian, in the Alabama district, be attached to the land district east of the Pearl 

River.” That put some lands west of the St. Stephens Meridian, which were actually located in Alabama, in a land district in Mississippi instead of in Alabama. But the basis 

meridian referred to must have been the St. Stephens Meridian and the first standard meridian must have been what is 

ncw called a guide meridian. The term “standard meridian” 

had been used by Tiffin in the northwest territory to describe 

a principal meridian but guide meridians had not been used 

there as yet. The term “basis parallel” was being used in the 

south to describe a baseline. 

On March 2,1819,3 Stat. 489, Congress passed the Alabama Enabling Act, which directed that the Surveyor of the 

Lands South of Tennessee (Freeman) and the Surveyor 

General of Alabama (Coffee) were to survey the boundary 

between Alabama and Mississippi. This state boundary was 

surveyed in 1820, the northern part by contract with Coffee 

and the southern part by contract with Freeman. 

Also on March 2, 1819, 3 Stat. 493, Congress created the 

Territory of Arkansas, which included most of what is now 

Oklahoma, and began the process of dividing the vast Missouri Territory into separate states. 

Through treaties with the Indians at Fort Meigs, September 29, 1817, and at St. Mary’s, Ohio, in September and 

72 

October 1818, the United States acquired title t,o nearly all 

the lands in northern Indiana and northwestern Ohio. These 

lands were ordered surveyed. On March 20,1819, Tiffin submitted to Meigs his plans and proposals for these surveys. 

The plan for northwestern Ohio was simple enough: run a 

baseline due west from the southwest corner of the Connecticut Reserve to the west boundary of the state, surveyed by 

Harris in 1817, which was already known as the First Principal Meridian. Return east on this line setting the quarter 

section, section and township corners, numbering the ranges 

east from the meridian. Survey the range lines north and 

south from the baseline, numbering the townships north and 

south from that line, closing the lines against the old surveys, 

and against the Michigan state boundary to the north. Tiffin 

asked Meigs which state boundary, by Harris or by Fulton, he 

should use. By a letter dated April 3, 1819, Meigs ordered 

that the Fulton line be used and the surveys were closed 

against the southerly line. The plan was accepted and Tiffin 

contracted for the surveys, completing almost all the 

townships in northwestern Ohio during 1819 and 1820. They 

are all numbered east from the state boundary and north and 

south from the baseline, except for the four townships in the 

old Twelve-Mile Square, previously surveyed. Fig. 29 indicates the complete system of surveys as finally completed in 

Ohio. 

Tiffin’s plan for Indiana was slightly different in some 

important aspects. The Indiana plan follows: 

Plan for surveying the United States land in State of 

Indiana purchased from the Indians by the Treaty of St. 

Marys in 1818 - 

First lay off the Indian reservations in conformity 

with the Treaty. Then, in consequence of the approximation of the Range lines, which have been run north 

from the Base line connected with the second principal 

meridian, the width of most of the ranges has been 

considerably diminished at their northern extremity, 

by continuing these range lines through the purchase. 

This diminution in the width of the ranges will be much 

increased so as to contravene that provision of the land 

laws of the United States, which requires that townships 

be made “Six Miles Square”. To alleviate this difficulty, 

and to comply as nearly as practicable with the provision of the law, it is proposed, after continuing the 

“Second Meridian” to the northern limit of the purchase 

to run a line of correction from the meridian due East 

and West, between Townships Sixteen and Seventeen to 

be continued west to the state line between Indiana and 

Illinois and east to the SE corner of Township No. 17 N 

Range 11 E. - the Township corners on this line of 

correction will be placed at the distance of six miles from 

each other; and from these corners the range lines will 

be continued through that part of the purchase lying 

north of them. The Range lines of the old surveys will be 

continued through that part of the purchase lying south 

of the correction line and closed on said line wherever 

they may intersect it. 

In consequence of the old surveys in the eastern side 

of the state, extending north of the proposed line of 

correction, it will be necessary to run that part of this 

line which lies east of the 11th Range E. between 

Townships No. 22 and 23 to the Eastern line of the State 

of Indiana founded upon the Baseline and the second 

principal meridian, will be, of course ultimately extended into all of the unsurveyed lands in that State; as 

the simplest and most convenient system that can be 

devised. But before the surveys can be closed to the 

western boundary of the state, it will be necessary that, 

that line be surveyed; as it constitutes the western limit 

of the surveying department assigned to the Surveyor 

General of the United States. 

Should there be any other additional surveys decided 

to be made in Michigan Territory, south of the district 

lately surveyed there - It is proposed to continue the 

system already adopted for that Territory, and close the 

surveys there upon the north boundary of Ohio. 

Plan annexed 

Edward Tiffin, S.G1. 

Tiffin’s plan was fully adopted, except that of closing the 

Second Principal Meridian surveys against the west boundary of Indiana. That omission proved troublesome and costly, 

which will be seen later. But most importantly, this is the 

first known use of the term “correction line” and its use to 

correct for convergency of meridians. Mansfield had used a 

correction line of sorts south of the baseline but its primary 

purpose was to correct errors due to poorly executed surveys. 

The term “correction line” took hold, and it is still used by 

most of the population in the public land States to describe 

what we now call a standard parallel. The principle of using a 

correction line to correct for convergency caught on and was 

used thereafter in the rectangular system, but it would not be 

until 1851 that a prescribed distance between correction 

lines would come about. Each Surveyor General used distances of from 48 to 60 miles depending on his opinion of 

necessity. 

Before leaving the year 1819, one other act of Congress 

should be mentioned. On March 3, 1819, 3 Stat. 523, Congress directed President Monroe to take possession of Florida 

and establish a government there, in accordance with the 

Treaty with Spain concluded February 22,1819; which added 

a large and troublesome area to the public lands requiring 

survey. The territorial government was actually established 

March 30,1822, 3 Stat. 654. But on March 20, 1819, Meigs 

wrote to Thomas Freeman, the Surveyor General at 

Washington, Mississippi, instructing him to begin the rectangular surveys in the former Spanish possession. On 

September 15, 1819, Freeman issued instructions to Silas 

Dinsmore, Principal Deputy Surveyor of the new land district east of the island of-New Orleans, for the survey of what 

is now known as the St. .Helena Meridian. Freeman instructed Dinsmore to use the initial point of the Washington 

Meridian, on the Line of Demarcation (31st parallel) and 

extend the Basis Meridian due south, and to survey “Standard Meridians” and “Standard Parallels” at 24 mile intervals to control the township boundaries within the system. 

The township and section lines were to be surveyed south, 

placing the errors in either section 31 or section 36, which 

was the reverse order from the normal procedure. This was 

the first full use of the term “Standard Parallel”. The “Standard Meridian” is now known as a Guide Meridian. The 24 

74 
mile interval between them was not universally adopted 

until 1855. The instructions to Dinsmore are given in the 

Appendix. The St. Helena Meridian surveys were begun in 

1819 and the survey of west Florida was underway. The 

United States had claimed but did not have undisputed title 

to the area until the Treaty with Spain. All valid land claims 

(private claims) under the former government were honored. 

On March 6, 1820, 3 Stat. 545, Congress passed the Missouri Enabling Act. The boundaries of the new State were 

approximately as they are today. The remainder of the Missouri Territory continued to bear that name, even after the 

State of Missouri was admitted on August 10, 1821. The 

Surveyor General of Illinois, Missouri, and Arkansas would 

be in charge of all the lands north of the State of Louisiana in 

the old Louisiana Purchase. 

On April 24,1820, 3 Stat. 566, Congress took a giant step 

forward regarding the public lands-they abolished the credit system of purchase, reduced the price to $1.25 per acre 

(down from $2) and offered all the nonreserved public lands 

for sale in 80-acre, half-quarter sections. The first section of 

the act affected the Surveyors General the most. The entire 

section follows: 

CHAP. LI-An act making further provision for the 

sale of public lands. 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America, in Congress 

assembled, That from and after the first day of July 

next, all the public lands of the United States, the sale of 

which is, or may be authorized by law, shall, when 

offered at public sale, to the highest bidder, be offered in 

half quarter sections; and when offered at private sale, 

may be purchased, at the option of the purchaser, either 

in entire sections, half sections, quarter sections, or half 

quarter sections; and in every case of the division of a 

quarter section, the line for the division thereof shall 

run north and south, and the corners and contents of 

half quarter sections which may thereafter be sold, 

shall be ascertained in the manner, and on the principles directed and prescribed by the second section of an 

act entitled, “An act concerning the mode of surveying 

the public lands of the United States,” passed on the 

eleventh day of February, eighteen hundred and five; 

and fractional sections, containing one hundred and 

sixty acres, or upwards, shall, in a like manner, as 

nearly as practicable, be sub-divided into half quarter 

sections, under such rules and regulations as may be 

prescribed by the Secretary of Treasury; but fractional 

sections, containing less than one hundred and sixty 

aces, shall not be divided, but shall be sold entire: Provided, That this section shall not be construed to alter 

any special provision made by law for the sale of land in 

town lots. 

Of particular note are the emphasized portions of the act. 

The due north and south provision of previous acts was 

dropped, which made into law the practice of the Surveyor 

General ignoring the due wording as being impossible. Also, 

fractional sections were to be subdivided into quarters and 

eighties if they contained more than 160 acres. The act left it 

up to the Secretary to prescribe the manner of subdividing 

quarter sections along the north and west boundaries and 

along meander lines. 

The abolition of credit was necessary as an administrative 

matter. Purchasers were bidding high prices for land (in the 

cotton plantation country of the South, reportedly as high as 

$18 per acre in 18181, making the down payment and perhaps 

one or two other payments, and then failing to pay the balance. The GLO was in the mortgage banking business and 

didn’t want to be. Lands not paid for reverted to the government and could be offered for sale again. 

The whole system was a massive headache. Congress later 

enacted special legislation relieving the purchasers who 

couldn’t pay, which affected the Surveyors General, and will 

be discussed shortly. 

Tiffin’s Last Years, 1820-1829 

On June 10,1820, the Secretary of the Treasury, through 

Meigs, issued a circular of instructions to the Surveyors 

General, directing them to protract on the plats the 80-acre 

subdivision in all the fractional sections according to the Act 

of April 24. Tiffin remarked that this was a lot of work but 

apparently proceeded to protract all the half-quarter sections 

lying north and south in the fractional sections, including the 

sections along the north and west boundaries of the 

townships. The work took a long time because of the volume. 

Tiffin did not have actual lines of protraction placed on the 

plats, instead the areas of the half-quarter sections and remaining fractions were listed on the margin of the plats. 

Whatever it was that Tiffin did, it was not acceptable. On 

November 9,1821, Meigs issued a Circular to the SurveyorsGeneral which read: 

“Sir: By the first section of the act of April 24,1820, all 

the public lands of the United States shall be offered at 

Public Sale in half-quarter sections; and fractional sections containing one hundred and sixty acres or upward 

shall, as nearly as practicable, be divided into half quarter sections, under such rules and regulations as may be 

prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury; but fractional sections containing less than one hundred and 

sixty acres shall not be divided, etc. By the Act of May 

10, 1800, Sec. 3, the excess or deficiency of regular 

sections or quarter sections in any township is to be 

thrown on the North and West sides of the township, 

making fractional sections more or less than one hundred and sixty acres. In subdividing such fractional 

sections to form a half quarter section, viz., 80 acres, the 

Secretary of the Treasury directs that the subdivisional 

line for such fractions as lie on the North side of a 

township shall be an East and West line, forming the 

half quarter section on the South side of the fraction; 

and for such fractions as lie on the West side, the subdividing line shall be a meridian, forming the half quarter 

section on the East side of the fraction. This mode of 

subdivision will preserve the compactness of the tracts, 

with the general divisions, and will not interfere with 

the rule adopted relative to fractions formed by a 

stream, river, etc.” 

The following postscript was added to the copy sent to 

Rector in St. Louis: 

75 
“P.S. to Gen’l Rector 

This mode of subdividing is precisely the one adopted 

by yourself, but as it has not heretofore been generally 

adopted the object of this circular you will preceive is to 

approve of your plan and make it a general one.” 

It is unknown what “the rule adopted relative to fractions 

formed by a stream, a river, etc.” was. An 1825 plat, approved 

by Tiffin, divided the sections along the north and west 

boundaries as described in the quoted circular. The township 

also contained lakes (discussed later). Fig. 30 is a sketch of a 

portion of the township. Lot numbers were not used. The 

areas of the fractional parts of a section were listed on the 

margin of the plat, such as; the N Y2 NE l/4 Sec. 3,74.52 acres; 

N l/2 NW Y4 Sec. 4,76.94 acres; SW l/4 Sec. 9,106.25 acres; E Y2 

NE l/4 Sec. 9,93.11 acres (even though the fraction was also a 

part of the SE Y4, Sec. 9); W Y2, Sec. 27,320 acres, and so on. 

The dashed lines and areas shown in the sketch were not 

shown on the plat. Fractional parts along the west side of the 

township were listed in the same manner as that used for 

Secs. 1 through 5. 

In January 1821, Meigs directed the Surveyor General at 

Washington, Mississippi (Freeman), to begin the surveys in 

the recent Choctaw cession. They were to begin on the south 

boundary of that cession and extend northerly. The field 

notes indicate that the initial point of the Choctaw Meridian 

and Baseline in Mississippi was established in 1821. The 

exterior boundaries of T. 1 N., R. 1 W., were surveyed by 

Charles M. Lawson, Deputy Surveyor, and the subdivisional 

lines of that township were surveyed by Gideon Fitz, Deputy 

Surveyor. The notes were examined and approved, on 

September 30, 1822, by Levin Wailes, “Surveyor of the 

United States Lands South of Tennessee.” Thomas Freeman 

was in charge when the surveys were begun in 1821. Levin 

Wailes was appointed to the position by letter dated January 

10, 1822. 

On March 2, 1821, 3 Stat. 612, Congress passed an act 

granting relief to credit purchasers who hadn’t paid for all 

the land they had bought. The first section of the act follows: 

CHAP XI1.-An act for the relief of the purchasers of 

public lands prior to the first day of July, 

eighteen hundred and twenty (b) 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America, in Congress 

assembled, That in all cases where lands have been 

purchased from the United States, prior to the first day 

of July, eighteen hundred and twenty, it shall be lawful 

for any such purchaser, or other person or persons, 

being the legal holder of any certificate or certificates of 

land, on or before the thirtieth day of September, eighteen hundred and twenty-one, to file, with the register 

of the land office, where any tract of land has been 

purchased, a relinquishment, in writing, of any section, 

half section, quarter section, half quarter section, or 

legal subdivision of any fractional section, of land so 

purchased, upon which the whole purchase money has 

not been paid, and all sums paid on account of the part 

relinquished, shall be applied to the discharge of any 

installments which may be, or shall hereafter become, 

due and payable upon such lands, so purchased, as shall 

not have been relinquished, and shall be so applied and 

credited as to complete the payment on some one or 

more half-quarter sections where the payments by 

transfer are sufficient for that purpose: Provided, That 

all divisions and subdivisions, contemplated by this act, 

shall be made in conformity with the first section of an 

act making further provision for the sale ofpublic lands, 

passed the twenty-fourth day of April, one thousand 

eight hundred and twenty: And, provided also, That the 

right of relinquishment hereby given shall, in no case, 

authorize the party relinquishing to claim any repayment from the United States: And, provided, also, That 

where any purchaser has purchased, at the same time, 

two or more quarter sections, he shall not be permitted 

to relinquish less than a quarter section. 

The act seems clear enough-only units of either a full 

section, half section, quarter section, half-quarter section or 

legal subdivision of a fractional section (the fractional parts 

left after full half-quarter sections have been removed) could 

be relinquished. The problem was that the purchasers 

wanted to retain all the land they had paid for at $2 per acre 

and some Registers of the Land Offices went along with them. 

In December 1822, Tiffin received a request from the Register at Vincennes to prepare plats with lot numbers on fractional sections along the Wabash and Ohio Rivers, in T. 7 S., 

R. 14 W., Second Principal Meridian. The Register had 

accepted relinquishments on tracts, NOT by legal subdivision. Fig. 31 indicates the problem as shown in sketches 

prepared by Samuel Williams, Tiffin’s chief clerk, on December 12, 1822. 

Although Tiffin protested the action of the Register in 

making what he considered illegal relinquishments, and by 

law he was right, he had to prepare what are now called 

Supplemental Plats for all the sections where such relinquishments took place. Some plats had been prepared earlier 

on the preemption tracts in the Between the Miami Rivers 

townships north of the Symmes Purchase, in which lot or 

tract numbers had been used to designate areas not in conformity with regular section subdivisions. And, of course, 

private land claims had separate numbers to define them and 

their areas. But the relinquishment tracts were on sections 

already surveyed and protracted in a regular and legal manner. Tiffin had to change them to a different lotting, which is 

just what a supplemental plat does today. Fig. 32 is a sketch 

of three different sections which show lotting and lot numbers required because of relinquishments. Apparently only 

those sections containing improper relinquishments were 

lotted in this manner. In those sections containing proper 

relinquishments, the lots were not numbered. 

It was about this time that the Surveyors General were 

ordered to prepare all the plats instead of the deputy surveyors doing it. Platting had become too complex to be left up 

to the field surveyors. 

The Act ofMay 8,1822,3 Stat. 709, authorized the appointment of a Surveyor General for Florida but failed to provide 

funding. On July 9,1824, Robert Butler was appointed to the 

position and established the office at Tallahassee. The 

Appropriation Act of February 25,1825,4 Stat. 85, provided 

regular funds for the ofice, which were continued thereafter. 

On September 11, 1822, John McLean became the Com76 

FRAC'L SEC. No. 17, TOWNSHIP No. 7 S., RANGE No. 14 W. 

FRAC'L SEC. No.36, TOWNSHIP No. 7 S., RANGE No. 14 W. 

Figure 31. Improper Relinquishments in Indiana. 

missioner of the GLO, replacing Meigs, but retained the 

office for only a few months. Continuity in the business of the 

GLO was maintained by the chief clerk, John Moore. Two 

men, who were not surveyors, maintained the regular order 

of business in the Surveyor General’s office and in the GLO 

for many years. Tiffin had hired Samuel Williams as his chief 

clerk who remained in that position until 1845. Josiah Meigs 

hired John Moore, who was chief clerk until about 1850 and 

who wrote the first Manuals of Surveying Instructions. 

George Graham replaced McLean as Commissioner of the 

GLO on June 26, 1823. 

In Circulars to the Surveyors General dated August 4, and 

August 14, 1823, Graham ordered that a listing be made at 

the bottom of each plat showing the township, range, date of 

survey, number of miles surveyed, number of fractional sections caused by private land claims and navigable rivers, and 

the name of the Deputy Surveyor who did the work. This 

information was to be within ruled lines of columns and 

boxes. The response was gradual and it was not until the 

1830’s that these circulars were complied with; the practice 

continued until about 1946. 

On August 15,1823, Graham wrote the following letter to 

Wailes at Washington, Mississippi: 

Levin Wailes, Esq. August 15, 1823 

Washington, Miss. 

Sir: Your letter of the 19th ult. transmitting Cert’s of 

the Commissioners for the Dist. West of the Pearl R. on 

claims confirmed, markd B.N. and 170 together with a 

copy of the plat of Township No. 14, R. 5 East in the 

Choctaw D. West of the Pearl R. districts, have been 

received. 

In relation to the falsity of the survey of fract. 

Township 14 of Range 5 E. I have not the means of 

comparison by reference to the original survey as I find 

it was among those returned to you for further examination on 26th May last. 

I find that under the original survey the fractional 

township alluded to the two fractional sections No. 1 

and 2. have been sold and one of them completely paid 

for-. 

Fraction No. 1. cont’g 370 acres was sold to Jas. 

McKee on the 28 Aug’t 1816 and had been placed on 

further Credit under the Act of 2d March 1821 for the 

relief of the purchasers of Public Lands. 

Fraction No. 2. cont’g 440 acres was sold to Isham 

Arthur, on the 16 Oct. 1816 and had been completely 

paid for under the provisions of the above cited act. No 

patent has however yet been issued on the latter tract. 

As there has evidently been a fraud committed on the 

Gov’t by the Deputy Surveyor who surveyed the 

Township originally, and the purchasers of the two fractions created by the Supposed course of the Big Black 

River may set up a pretended claim to the Land contained in what will now be the fractions agreeably to the 

resurvey extended by the river. I am desirous, if possible, of ascertaining what are the views of the purchasers 

as to the boundaries of the fractions on the South side at 

the time of purchase-. Were they aware that the Big 

Black River was considerably North of the position as 

laid down in the original false Survey and did they 

suppose from the circumstances that the purchase of 

what were represented to be the quantities contained in 

those fractions would give them any title to all of the 

Land as represented by the actual Survey? If you can 

conveniently have access to the purchasers I will thank 

you to make some inquiry into the particulars and to 

explain to Mr. Grayson, the Register, who will probably 

be unable to aid you-. There is evidently something 

strangely wrong in this business and the truth should 

be thoroughly inquired into. 

In all cases where you are satisfied that it is of importance to the public interest to have resurveys made, you 

are hereby authorized to do so-. You will please to 

inform me in your next, of the name of the Deputy 

Surveyor who made the original (false) Survey of fractional Township 14. R. 5 East and if living, the place of 

his present residence.- 

IamG. Graham 

P.S. 

What affect will this resurvey have upon the fract. 

Sect. North of the Big Black River. 

The township concerned is T. 14 N., R. 5 E., Washington 

Meridian, through which the Big Black River meanders 

south of Vicksburg, Mississippi. The results are unknown 

and whether or not Wailes had the township resurveyed 

before or after the above letter was written. 

It is the first instance found where a fraudulent meander 

was found following a survey and entry of the lands. Obviously, the Big Black River was much further north in fact than 

was shown on the original plat and it might prove interesting 

to know how the problem was finally dealt with. However, it 

should be noted that Graham gave Wailes blanket permission to execute resurveys whenever he was %atisfied that it 

is of importance to the public interest to have resurveys 

made.” 

Graham had been in office only two months and probably 

didn’t realize the ramifications of such authority being given 

a Surveyor General, especially if lands had been already 

entered or patented. This type of resurvey would cause many 

problems and litigation in the years ahead, the most famous 

of which is probably the case of Cragin us. Powell, 128 US. 

691, a Louisiana case decided by the U.S. Supreme Court in 

1888. 

The Big Black River situation came up again in 1826; on 

September 28, 1826, Graham approved instructions written 

by George Davis, then Surveyor General, for the resurvey of 

T. 14 N., R. 4 E. The original survey there showed the Big 

Black River in a grossly different position than where it was 

actually located in relationship to the section lines. 

On September 9, 1823, Graham wrote to Tiffin, questioning the form of contracts used and the method of 

monumenting corners in open country. The following paragraph is extracted from Tiffin’s reply dated September 22, 

1823. 

“The omission in the form of contracts with deputy 

surveyors which you advert, is supplied in the Instructions given them. You will observe by the contract that 

it binds the deputy to execute his surveys “agreeably 

80 
with the laws of the United States, and such instructions as he may receive from the said Edward Tiffin, 

Surveyor General”. To every surveyor is given in writing ample and detailed instructions regarding every 

part of his duty, and which instructions contain the 

following rule: “In case any corner should fall in a 

prairie or other place where there may be no trees for 

bearings within a convenient distance, you will, at the 

mark of such corner raise around the post a mound of 

earth or pile of stones, not less than two and a half feet 

high and two and a half feet diameter at the base.” 

This clause about corner monumentation in praires does 

not appear in the instructions issued by Tiffin in 1815. Conjecturably, Tiffin must have added that statement to his 

instructions between 1815 and 1823. This method of monumentation in prairies was proposed by Mansfield, for the 

Vincennes Tract surveys in 1804. But no copy of General 

Instructions to the deputy surveyors, by either Mansfield or 

Tiffin, have ever been found, which contain that particular 

method of monumentation. 

By letter dated October 7,1823, Graham ordered Coffee at 

Florence, Alabama, and Wailes at Washington, Mississippi 

to have accurate connections made of the township and section lines against the State line between Alabama and Mississippi, showing the fractions of sections made fractional by 

the State line, and they were to do so in all cases in the future. 

The St. Stephens Meridian survey system is located in both 

states. The township and section lines had been run before 

the State boundary was surveyed in 1820 under contract with 

Freeman and the State boundary survey hadn’t tied in the 

section lines. Obviously, a problem ensued: What part of a 

section should be taxed by the State of Alabama and what 

part by Mississippi? It wasn’t until after the Illinois-Indiana 

line caused similar and expensive problems that the rectangular surveys were held in abeyance until after a State 

boundary was surveyed. 

Island surveys first came up in 1824. On January 29,1824, 

Graham wrote the following letter to Tiffin: 

Sir: 

Application has been made to this office for having 

the islands situated in the Miami River within the reservation of twelve miles square at Fort Meigs surveyed. 

One in particular situate in township No. 1. which is 

estimated to contain fifty acres, is said to be particularly 

valuable. I will thank you to attend to the subject of 

these islands and cause such of them to be surveyed as 

may in your opinion be valuable. 

There is also represented to be islands situated in the 

large ponds or lakes interspersed throughout certain 

parts of the Detroit District, which have not been surveyed, it is presumed because they were not thought to 

be worth the expense of surveying. Particular enquiry 

has been made by a resident at Detroit in relation to one 

of these islands, called Apple Island, situate in Lake No. 

2. ofTownship No. 2 N., Range No. 9 E. and is estimated 

to contain about forty acres. 

There is also discovered on the Map other Islands 

similarly situated. I merely wish to call your attention 

to this subject of the islands, in the Detroit District that 

when a favorable opportunity occurs you may take measures to cause such of them be be surveyed as from the 

best information you can collect, may be worth the expense. Your letter of the 20th inst. has been received. 

I am 

Geo. Graham 

This treatment of islands always remained. Unless an island was quite large, it was seldom surveyed during the 

regular, original rectangular surveys. Most islands were 

small and the cost of surveying, platting, and sale was 

greater than the monetary return to the government at $1.25 

per acre. But the GLO always did and still does consider 

islands public land until surveyed, platted, and sold. As will 

be seen later, they were surveyed upon application by a 

prospective buyer at the applicant’s expense. 

The numbering of sections and private land claims as sections within a township was the subject of a letter to Wailes 

on January 30,1824, and to Silas Dinsmore on May 7,1824. 

The letter to Dinsmore follows: 

Silas Dinsmore Surveying Department 

Prin’l Dep. S. Land General Land Ofice 

New Orleans 7 May 1824 

Sir, 

I have this day returned to the Register and Receiver 

of the Land Office at Jackson & your plat of the survey 

made for Charles Hale for Claim No. 40 in Report No. 3 

of the Commissioners with a request that they would 

send it to you in order that it might be corrected. You 

describe the land as being Section 39, in Township 2 of 

Range 3 E. and being the north half of sec. 22 in 

Township 2 of Range 3 East by which it appears that 

although you give the private claim a Sectional Number, you also describe it as being part of what would 

have been its proper sectional numbers of these said 

lands now private claims in the Township- If this is the 

manner in which you mean to designate the private and 

public lands in your Surveying District1 hasten to 

inform you that in all cases when there are private 

claims in a Township, you must give each Tract a number as a section without any reference to what would be 

its number if the Township was divided into 36 regular 

sections- so that if there results part of the Township 

being regular, Sections No. 1 to 6 should also include 3 

private claims; that tier of sections would be numbered 

from 1 to 9 and what would be regularly numbered, if 

there were no private claims, as Section No. 7 will be 

numbered as No. 10, and this difference in the numbers 

of Sections must be continued through the Township by 

which, if there were no other private claims in the 

Township, the Section in the S.E. corner of the 

Township will be designated as No. 39. You will please 

correct the plat accordingly and also describe it in the 

description contained in the body of this survey, by the 

courses and distances of each line, and size, etc. of the 

bearing trees. You will forward the Plat to the Register 

and Receiver in order that it may accompany their Certificate 

I am, very respectfully 

your Obed’t Servent 

Geo. Graham 

81 
P.S. I also enclose an extract of a letter from Mr. Gallatin to Sur. Gen’l Briggs, dated 26 July 1803 of a copy 

which was sent to the Reg. & Rec. at St. Helena in Aug’t 

last with a request that they would furnish you with a 

copy of it in relation to the numbering of the private 

claims. 

The matter being discussed was the numbering system 

illustrated by Fig. 24. What Dinsmore did was basically what 

was being done in Michigan and Missouri, but more nearly 

what is the practice today. Dinsmore left all the normal 

section numbers intact within the township and then gave 

any private land claims that cropped up a tract number, 

beginning with Tract 37. There certainly was no provision in 

the land laws allowing a deviation of the section numbering 

system called for in the Act of May 18,1796. 

On June 1, 1824, Graham notified Levin Wailes of his 

dismissal from office and the appointment of George Davis to 

replace him as “Surveyor of the Lands South of Tennessee.” 

Also on June 1,1824, Graham notified William Rector at St. 

Louis of his dismissal from office, which was then held down 

by William Milburn, chief clerk. William McRee was 

appointed to replace Rector but couldn’t go to St. Louis immediately. General William Clark was appointed Acting 

Surveyor General in October and conducted the business 

until McRee finally arrived and assumed the duties of Surveyor General of Illinois and Missouri around May 17,1825. 

The Act ofMay24,1824,4 Stat. 34, provided for an optional 

change in the mode of surveying lands fronting on water 

courses. The complete act follows: 

CHAP. CXL1.-An Act changing the mode of surveying 

the public lands, on any river, lake, 

bayou, or water-course. 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America, in Congress 

assembled, That, whenever, in the opinion of the President of the United States, a departure from the ordinary 

mode of surveying land on any river, lake, bayou, or 

water-course, would promote the public interest, he 

may direct the surveyor general, in whose district such 

land is situated, and where the change is intended to be 

made, under such rules and regulations as the President may prescribe, to cause the lands thus situated, to 

be surveyed in tracts of two acres in width, fronting on 

any river, lake, bayou, or water-course, and running 

back the depth of forty acres; which tracts of land, so 

surveyed, shall be offered for sale entire, instead of in 

half-quarter sections, and in the usual manner and on 

the same terms, in all respects, as the other public lands 

of the United States. 

This act is a modification of the Act ofMarch 3,181 1, which 

applied only in the Orleans Territory. The 1811 act was for 

tracts of 14.50 chains front (about 5 arpents) and 116.25 

chains depth (about 40 arpents). TheActof1824 applied to all 

the public lands. The Ywo acres in width” was nearly 6.33 

chains. A waterfront tract, surveyed according to this act, 

would contain 80 acres, and was used extensively in 

Louisiana but only sparingly in the north. A few years later, 

a man in Michigan made application to purchase a tract to be 

APPROVED, May 24,1824 

surveyed according to this method; his application was rejected. 

In Louisiana, many of the lands, even those within the 

rectangular surveys, fronting on bayous were surveyed by 

this method. The act was repealed December 16, 1930, 46 

Stat. 1029. 

On July 9,1824, Commissioner Graham wrote to Robert A. 

Butler at Nashville, Tennessee, forwarding his appointment 

to the position of Surveyor General of Florida. Graham instructed Butler to begin the surveys “adjacent to the seat of 

government, which is located in Gadsden County, and within 

which tract of country it is understood that there are a few if 

any private claims.” Graham went on to instruct Butler to 

establish the initial point of the Tallahassee Meridian at the 

southeast corner of the section selected by the Governor of 

Florida as the seat of government under provisions of the Act 

ofMuy4,1824. Butler established the point later in 1824. T. 1 

N., R. 1 E., was later patented to General Marquis de Lafayette for his services to the United States during the Revolutionary War. The Tallahassee Meridian controls all the rectangular surveys in Florida and a narrow strip in Alabama. 

In 1825, another problem came up: the thousands of small 

lakes in Michigan. Meigs had instructed Tiffin to meander 

lakes which were “5 or 6 miles in circumference,” but the 

smaller lakes were not meandered; they were included in the 

land area of a section and sold as land if a settler chose to buy 

on those terms. Most settlers would not buy land containing a 

lake, thereby paying $1.25 per acre for areas they couldn’t 

farm. 

The Register at Detroit wrote to Tiffin on March 24,1825. 

His letter stated the problem and contains the following 

excerpt: “These lakes can be of no manner of use to anyone, 

and the manner in which the survey has been made is a 

virtual exclusion from market. . . ” The Register requested 

that small lakes be meandered and excluded from the land 

area calculations. 

Tiffin recommended to Graham that action be taken. 

Graham was absent so John Moore passed the request on to 

the Secretary of the Treasury, recommending that the ponds 

and lakes be meandered and the sections lotted. Moore said 

the lakes and ponds were 40 acres and upward in area but 

recommended that the decision on what to meander should be 

left to the discretion of Tiffin. Apparently approval was 

given, because Tiffin had his deputy surveyors meander all 

small lakes which were of “sufficient magnitude” and “would 

not admit to be drained.” In many surveyed townships, he 

sent the surveyors back to meander lakes and then corrected 

the plats to exclude them from area calculations. The fractional parts were listed with their areas on the plats, but were 

not given lot numbers. After 1825, small lakes of 40 acres or 

larger were meandered and very often the larger marshes 

and swamps were excluded by meandering; the motive being 

to promote land sales. Settlers didn’t want to pay for land 

they couldn’t farm. Once again a decision was made without 

benefit of a precise law and the whole matter would later 

cause much litigation. 

In 1826, the problem of erroneous surveys in Michigan first 

appeared. Complaints were received of improper corner 

markings and distorted section lines in the townships north 

ofthe baseline in ranges 10 and 11 west. Those townships had 

been surveyed in 1817 by Joseph Wampler. Tiffin reported to 

82 
Graham that Wampler had become ill during the surveys, 

which were then taken over by Wampler’s assistant surveyor. Tiffin thought it possible some errors might exist but 

that most of the complaints were unjustified and were only an 

effort to discredit Wampler. Tiffin explained that he no 

longer allowed the deputies to use assistant surveyors for any 

reason. Tiffin’s explanation was accepted. But what wasn’t 

known was the existence of iron ore deposits in the Michigan 

Peninsula. This fact and the inability of Tiffin to ever examine any of the field work led to many bad surveys in 

Michigan. The surveyors were either careless, dishonest, or 

both. In the 1840’s and early 1850’~~ 341 townships were 

resurveyed. Most of them were in the Lower Peninsula north 

of Saginaw Bay and about 25 townships were in the Upper 

Peninsula. Tiffin was made aware of the erroneous and 

fraudulent surveys in 1826 but had no power to correct the 

situation. He had no funds for corrective work and had to 

depend upon the honesty of his deputies. Most of the bad 

surveys, needing resurvey, were made after Tiffin left office. 

The accusations against Wampler may not have had any real 

merit other than the fact that his surveys were somewhat 

wild. Ohio was a rich State and Michigan a Territory. The 

Toledo Strip boundary issue, the Fulton-Harris lines, was a 

hot matter. The Surveyors were foreigners from Ohio. There 

was much political agitation to have the surveys made by 

Michigan men and to have a Surveyor General in Michigan. 

So whether Wampler was anything less than an honest surveyor is very questionable. 

On January 20, 1826, Graham wrote to George Davis at 

Washington, Mississippi, concerning fractional sections and 

subdivisions of them. The following is extracted from that 

letter: 

Sir, 

“In relation to the subdivision of fract. sections which 

formed the subject of your two letters of the 9th and 

19th, ult. I reply, that prior to the act ofcongress passed 

on the 24th of April 1820. . . fractional sections were 

not liable to be subdivided. It is here proper to premise 

that the technical meaning of a ‘Tractional section” is a 

tract of land not bounded by sectional lines on all sides, 

in consequence of the intervention of a navigable 

stream or some other boundary recognized by law, and 

containing a less quantity than six hundred & forty 

acres. 

Tracts of land bounded on all sides by sectional lines 

& containing a less quantity than six hundred & forty 

acres are not fractional sections known to the law, & 

therefore are not to be treated as such. 

The act of Congress passed on the 24th Apr. 1820 

provides for the subdivision of quarter sections into half 

quarter sections, by lines running North & South, and 

also provides that the corners & contents of half quarter 

sections which are to be sold after the 30th June 1820, 

shall be ascertained in the manner & on the principles 

directed and prescribed by the 2nd Section of an act. . . passed on the 11th day of Feb. 1805. . . It was never contemplated by the Act of 24th Apr. 

1820, that the lines dividing quarter sections, into half 

quarter sections, should be actually surveyed, at the 

expense of the United States.. . . ” 

The letter then goes on to repeat the requirements of the 

circular of June 10, 1820, and also directs Davis to make an 

80-acre subdivision by either a north-south or east-west line 

in fractional sections against water boundaries wherever a 

full 80 can be had and to leave the remainder as a fractional 

lot. The result was that there were many more small fractions left after the full half-quarter section was designated, 

such as the “E l/z SW l/4 Sec. 19” (80 acres) and “Fract. W l/z 

SW l/4 Sec. 19” containing perhaps 38 acres or perhaps only 

five acres. Graham’s definition of fractional section was used 

by the commissioners thereafter, as was the lotting procedure, until 1832. 

In 1827, the subject of island surveys began to become a 

matter of greater importance. In May 1827, Tiffin contracted 

for the survey of Bois Blanc Island in Lake Huron, “in the 

strait of Michilimackinac.” The rectangular system was not 

yet extended that far north, and Tiffin thought it impractical 

to attempt surveying the island into townships and sections. 

He thought the island was about 20 miles long and 2 to 3 

miles wide. He instructed Lucius Lyon to survey the island 

into lots according to the Act of May 24, 1824, i.e., lots of 2 

acres frontage and 40 acres depth. Tiffin’s special instructions for the survey were extensive and detailed. Actually, 

the island was surveyed with a baseline down the middle and 

rectangular sections laid off perpendicular to the baseline; 

the tracts were given section numbers. 

On March 2, 1827, 4 Stat. 236, Congress had authorized 

Tiffin to have the north boundary of Indiana surveyed, to be 

paid for from public land survey funds. Tiffin contracted with 

E. P. Kendrick, a former clerk in his office, for that boundary 

survey, which Kendrick did in the fall of 1827. The rectangular surveys were then closed against that State boundary. 

In December 1827, the Surveyor General’s office at Florence, Alabama, burned with the loss of the plats and field 

notes of the surveys that were made under that office, a 

catastrophe which could have been foreseen. The Symmes 

Purchase records had burned in 1810, and the British had 

burned the GLO building in 1814, so fire was always a possibility. The Surveyor General of Alabama had sent copies of 

some of the field notes to Washington, and, of course, copies of 

all plats including the descriptive notes of the surveyed 

townships. The commissioner was able to make copies of 

those records, but the field notes of most of the townships 

were lost; they had to be resurveyed to obtain the field notes. 

In 1833, Commissioner Elijah Hayward reported these 

facts to the Congress and recommended that copies of all field 

notes be sent to Washington. In 1834 and ensuing years, 

Congress appropriated funds to pay for clerks to copy all field 

note books in each Surveyor General’s office. These copies 

were sent to Washington, and copies of both the plats and 

field notes have been sent to Washington ever since. The 

descriptive notes of the townships continued to be sent to the 

land offices, along with their plats, at least until 1910. The 

only remnant remaining of the old descriptive notes is the 

General Description at the end of the present-day field notes 

and the summaries at the end of the miles of original surveys. 

The townships in Alabama which had been completely sold 

before 1827 were not resurveyed. As a result, no field notes 

exist to this day for many townships in that state. Although 

the term “resurvey” was used, not very many of the Alabama 

townships were actually resurveyed as that term was under83 
P 

"J 

-.- 

____ __ . .. . .- 

/I I 

36 

i 

1,. . . - 

! 

3 

14 

R 

?3 

a. 

_ - 

Figure 33. Alabama Township - Original Plat 
". 

'T 

t'e 

-- 


stood at that time. In fact, the commissioner later directed 

that the term resurvey should not be used, rather that the 

work to be done was a retracing of the original survey solely 

for the purpose of replacing the field notes lost in the fire. 

This retracing continued at least into the late 1840’s. The 

surveyor reran the old lines, returned the distances to 

topography and distances as he found them to be between the 

corners, and described the corners and bearing trees. So 

although actually a retracement, the work was more on the 

order of a dependent resurvey as we use that expression 

today. Figs. 33 and 34 are copies of the plats of T. 7 N., R. 5 E., 

St. Stephens Meridian. The original survey was made during 

Thomas Freeman’s tenure and the retracement survey was 

made in 1848. The differences are apparent. Almost all the 

townships retraced were in the St. Stephens Meridian network. 

The Illinois-Indiana boundary began causing problems in 

1827. In 1818, Tiffin proposed closing the Second Principal 

Meridian surveys against the State boundary. In 1819, that 

boundary north from the Wabash was surveyed by John 

McDonald. On October 12,1824, Tiffin reported that he was 

leaving the tenth range west undone until he had more information. He believed that Rector had extended the Indiana 

surveys over into Illinois, which proved to be true. Apparently the problem was one of jurisdiction and land sales. 

The Illinois-Indiana boundary passes through R. 10 W. of 

the Second Principal Meridian; the range was surveyed as 

being full with no regard for the State boundary. The Surveyor General of Illinois, Missouri, and Arkansas, William 

McRee, in 1827, was responsible for Illinois, and Tiffin was 

responsible for Indiana. 

Land sales had to be identified by State as well as by 

township, range, and section. The State boundary was surveyed. But where was it in relationship to the rectangular 

surveys? And who was to find out, Tiffin or McRee? Where 

was the funding? The surveys had already been executed and 

paid for once. 

Congress finally appropriated funds in 1833 for the division of the tenth range as divided by the State boundary. 

Each Surveyor General contracted for the work on his side of 

the line. The whole problem caused the Surveyors General to 

be very cautious in later years. They held the rectangular 

surveys in abeyance until the State boundaries were surveyed and then closed against the established boundary. 

This is not to say that problems never occurred again; 

similar boundary problems occurred later in Florida and 

more recently in California-Nevada, but they were due to 

boundary changes or disputes. The Illinois-Indiana boundary 

established the policy of the State boundary survey preceding 

the rectangular surveys. 

Letters dated April 24, 1828, notified George Davis of his 

termination and the appointment of James P. Turner to replace him as Surveyor of the Land South of Tennessee, at 

Washington, Mississippi. Turner had been Principal Deputy 

at St. Helena, Louisiana, prior to his appointment to be 

Surveyor General; but on September 24, 1829, William S. 

Hamilton was appointed to replace Turner. Hamilton declined the job, and Joseph Dunbar was notified of his appointment to the position on December 23, 1829. 

By the Act ofMay23,1828,4 Stat. 289, Congress appropriated $25,000 for removal of the Great Raft in the Red River, a 

navigable stream, in Louisiana and Arkansas. This great log 

jam had been in progress for centuries; as flood waters deposited logs against the upper end, the main channel was blocked. It flooded the surrounding country, creating large shallow 

lakes and swamps. Most of the lakes were meandered during 

the original surveys. The log jams impeded and/or made 

navigation of the river impossible. With removal of the Great 

Raft over a period of many years these lakes were drained, 

causing many complex problems in the adjoining surveys 

because of State sovereignty over beds of navigable waters, 

riparian rights, omitted lands, fraudulent or erroneous 

meanders, and dried up lake surveys. 

On May 26,1829, Edward Tiffin was notified to surrender 

his office to William Lytle. Tiffin was in ill health; William 

Lytle was officially commissioned Survey General of Ohio, 

Indiana, and the Territory of Michigan on July 3,1829. Tiffin 

died at his home in Chillicothe, Ohio, on August 9,1829; thus 

ended the career of a doctor-turned-politician who was never 

a surveyor, but who had so ably guided the rectangular system of land surveying during a developing period that his 

name is still well known by all surveyors who work with that 

system. Jared Mansfield died on February 3, 1830; thus 

passed the two men who had such a profound influence on 

bringing the system into full bloom. 

The Years After Tiffin, 1829-1836 

The first action Lytle took was to move the Surveyor 

General’s office to Cincinnati where it remained until moved 

to Detroit. During his short tenure in office, Lytle made no 

significant improvements in the rectangular system. 

On May 29, 1830, 4 Stat. 417, Congress provided for the 

protection of any persons engaged in surveying the public 

lands or private land claims. If any forcible opposition was 

offered to any deputy surveyor, the President could order the 

marshal of the district to provide protection. This act is now 

codified in 43 U.S.C. 774. 

Also on May 29, 1830, 4 Stat. 420, Congress granted a 

limited preemption to existing settlers or squatters on the 

public lands. The squatters were the persons “offering forcible opposition” to the public land surveys. By granting 

preemption, Congress temporarily removed the reason to 

oppose the surveys. 

In July 1830, Graham was removed from office and John 

Moore became Acting Commissioner. On September 30, 

1830, Elijah Hayward replaced Graham as Commissioner of 

the GLO. Andrew Jackson had become President of the 

United States, and his administration is attributed with the 

slogan “To the victor goes the spoils.” Jackson introduced the 

spoils system in government in which most government officials were appointed on the basis ofpolitical affiliation rather 

than ability. Hayward was the first commissioner to serve 

under the system and soon let his power be known. 

By letter dated October 26,1830, Hayward ordered Butler 

in Florida to have the island of Key West surveyed. He was to 

meander the island, both at high tide and at low tide, show 

the area between both lines as well as the area of the island, 

and survey a private land claim on the island. Hayward 

thought that not knowing the location of Key West by 

township and range wouldn’t make any difference. 

By another letter of some date, Hayward ordered Butler to 

survey only the exterior boundaries of townships that didn’t 

88 
contain good land. If a township did contain good land, the 

whole township, not just part of it, would be subdivided. 

Connections were to be accurately made to all private claims, 

and swamps and ponds were to be distinctly shown on the 

plat, both by letters and colors. Nearly identical instructions 

were sent to Lytle in Cincinnati. 

Surveying Key West without tying to the rectangular net 

was not a new idea. Tiffin proposed the same procedure for 

Bois Blanc Island. But the idea of showing swamps by both 

lettering and coloring the swamp area was something new. 

On February 25, 1831, Gideon Fitz was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General at Washington, Mississippi, replacing Dunbar. 

On March 3, 1831, 4 Stat. 492, Congress authorized the 

establishment of the office of Surveyor General in Donaldsonville, Louisiana. H. Browse Triste was commissioned to 

that position on June 15, 1831, and soon opened the office. 

The lands south of Tennessee were now divided into the 

surveying districts of Alabama, Mississippi, Florida, and 

Louisiana, but Fitz still carried the title of Surveyor of the 

Lands South of Tennessee. He soon became just the Surveyor 

General of Mississippi in the correspondence. 

On March 18, 1831, William Lytle died at Cincinnati. 

Samuel Williams filled in until April 13,1831, when Micajah 

T. Williams took office as Surveyor General of Ohio, Indiana, 

and Michigan Territory. 

On April 10, 1831, Fitz reported that Turner had let a 

contract for a township resurvey north of the Red River in 

Louisiana. Also the original surveyor had set off the magnetic declination as 9” W. instead of 9” E.; therefore, all lines had 

been originally run 17” or 18” off cardinal, causing a need for 

resurvey. When the deputy submitted his field notes of the 

resurvey, Fitz wanted to know if he had authority to pay for 

the resurvey and authority to order resurveys generally. 

Hayward answered the inquiry on July 26,1831, telling Fitz 

to send diagrams showing the differences between the two 

surveys and to have the second survey “critically examined” 

to see that all original corners had been destroyed and to send 

the evidences to Hayward for a decision. The letter then went 

on to say, in part: 

“In the absence of any specific provisions of law on the 

subject of resurveys, it is exceedingly difficult to say to 

what extent the Executive can exercise a discretionary 

power. That authority does exist in the Department to 

correct errors in Surveying public lands, I am fully 

satisfied of, and would not hesitate to exercise said 

authority within reasonable limits where the necessity 

for so doing in order to subserve the public interests was 

so apparent as to being the object within the undoubted 

jurisdiction and legitimate authority of the Department. But on the other hand, where the errors are of a 

character & magnitude exceeding that which should 

exist in the ordinary course of business. . . where they 

have grown out of gross ignorance, or willful neglect of 

those in whom confidence has been reposed for the due 

execution of the public service, then, according to my 

views of duty, the subject is beyond the limits of the 

Executives discretion & requires the express interference of the national legislature, and probably an increased appropriation of public money to meet the exigency. 

Therefore, before the Department can determine the 

extent of its authority to order resurveys, it will require 

from you the most satisfactory and detailed information 

both as to the extent of the required resurveys and the 

Specific causes which render the same necessary. Under 

any circumstances such report would be required, 

whether the Department should act on the subject, or 

application be made to the Congress to authorize a remedy. 

In your Report on this subject you will carefully discriminate between the correction of erroneous surveys, 

and the necessity for retracing old lines where the 

marks & figures have been obliterated by age, or destroyed by accident, or design. 

In conclusion I have to state that no person is hereafter to be employed as a Deputy Surveyor without 

giving bond and Security for the faithful discharge of 

his duty in double the amount of the value of the 

contract. . . and no person is to be employed as a Deputy 

Surveyor who has not given practical evidence of his 

Skill in Surveying, and who cannot produce the most 

satisfactory evidence of his moral integrity. Without a 

rigid attention to the requisites the public interest will 

be compromised. 

I am 

It would appear that what Hayward was saying is that in 

retracing old lines or on minor resurveys, the Surveyor 

General had authority to do them. But on anything major, 

such as a whole township or in case of gross errors, the facts 

should be reported to the Commissioner who would decide 

whether to approve a resurvey on his own authority or submit the matter to Congress for approval and funding. Quite 

clearly Hayward was trying to deal with a complex problem 

and establish some sort of policy on resurveys. Nothing in the 

statutes even considered resurveys as a blanket item. Surely 

the Commissioner could order a corrective resurvey of public 

lands, if funding was available, up until such time as entries 

were made or patents issued based on the original survey. 

But very seldom did gross errors or fraud show up until after 

settlers were in the area and couldn’t find the survey corners 

or otherwise discovered wild survey lines. As a general policy 

the lands weren’t open till surveyed and opened to entry and 

sale; by the time errors were discovered entries had already 

been made. 

On July 27, 1831, Hayward directed Fitz to begin the 

surveys in the Chickasaw Cession in northern Mississippi. 

The Choctaw surveys were to be extended via a guide meridian between ranges 10 and 11 east, of the Choctaw base. 

When it reached the north boundary of T. 14 N., a guide 

baseline (standard parallel) was to be run east and west 

between townships 14 and 15 north. The townships and 

ranges would all refer to the Choctaw system. Had these 

orders been followed, there would not have been a Chickasaw 

Meridian System in Mississippi. 

On July 28,1831, Hayward sent very long instructions to 

Fitz, directing Fitz in the manner in which the public land 

E. Hayward 

89 
surveys would be made and ordered Fitz to prepare instructions for the deputies. Nearly the same letter was sent as a 

circular on September 23, 1831, to the other Surveyors 

General: William McRee, St. Louis; John Coffee, Florence, 

Alabama; Micajah T. Williams, Cincinnati; Robert Butler, 

Florida, and H. Browse Triste, Louisiana. The circular was 

also sent to James S. Conway on July 6, 1832, after he was 

appointed Surveyor General at Little Rock, Arkansas. 

Gideon Fitz was the first to respond to Hayward’s order. In 

December 1831, Fitz issued his Instructions for Surveying in 

the State of Mississippi. Fitz directed that the townships be 

subdivided in a manner which resulted in the half-mile posts, 

supposedly quarter-section corners. By the method of running the lines, many of the half-mile posts were not quartersection corners because they were not established according 

to the law. Fitz also introduced bark scribing of bearing trees 

and numerous other changes in methods. His instructions 

are reproduced in the Appendix. 

The Surveyor General of Arkansas Territory, James S. 

Conway, prepared his Instructions to Deputy Surveyors, in 

1833. Those instructions followed the pattern of the instructions issued by Tiffin in 1815. Over the next 20 years, surveying instructions were issued by nearly all the Surveyors 

General in one form or another; some used the same instructions issued by a fellow Surveyor General. Instructions were 

issued for Ohio, Indiana, and Michigan, 1833; Illinois and 

Missouri, 1834; Arkansas, 1837, Florida, 1842; Arkansas, 

1843; Wisconsin and Iowa, 1846; Ohio, Indiana, and Michigan, 1850; Florida, 1850; Wisconsin and Iowa, 1851; and 

Illinois and Missouri, 1856. Hayward’s order to issue written 

instructions to the deputy surveyors started the whole series 

of instructions which evolved into a standard Manual of 

Surveying Instructions, applicable to all, in 1855. But during 

the period, each Surveyor General had his individual concept 

of how the surveys should be performed in his area of authority; most stayed within the letter of the law, as they interpreted that law. 

In monumentation, platting, distance between correction 

lines, field notes, tree markings, and similar items there 

were differences. Each set of these instructions should be 

examined for the differences (see Appendix). 

By letter dated August 18, 1831, Hayward instructed 

Micajah T. Williams at Cincinatti and McRee at St. Louis to 

extend the Fourth Principal Meridian north to the north 

boundary of Illinois and on the same direction into what is 

now Wisconsin. The north boundary of Illinois was surveyed 

by Lucius Lyon in 1831-32. The meridian was extended to the 

Illinois boundary in 1831, and an initial point was established. The baseline for the new surveys in Wisconsin was the 

north boundary of Illinois. In 1832, Lucius Lyon, Deputy 

Surveyor, ran the extended Fourth Principal Meridian into 

Wisconsin and surveyed T. 1 N., R. 1 W., in what is now that 

State. All of the townships in Wisconsin are numbered north 

from its south boundary and east or west of the Fourth Principal Meridian, which was not, however, extended as a separate line. Rather, it was surveyed as township boundaries as 

the surveys progressed. An unusual fact about the Wisconsin 

surveys is the spacing of the correction lines. On August 12, 

1880, Commissioner James A. Williamson wrote the following letter in part to Rose C. Smart, at Oshkosh, Wisconsin: 

Madam, 

“Your communication of the 4th instant, making inquiry about the 5th Correction line in Wisconsin has 

been received. 

In the early period of surveying operations, and while 

the same were still in the hands, and under the control 

of the Surveyor General, correction lines were made at 

every ten townships in certain surveying districts, of 

which Wisconsin was one, as approximating an even 

number of townships, to the length of a degree of latitude. They were run in such a manner that a true length 

of eighty chains was to be found midway between any 

two correction lines, -which necessitated the marking 

of a reduced length for a township on the south side and 

an increased length on the north side of the correction 

line, to accomodate the convergence. 

The fifth correction in Wisconsin was placed at (6) six 

townships, because if laid at ten (10) townships, it would 

have shortened the possible actual measurement to 

much-by reason of its running into Lake Superior and 

thus have defeated the very object for which it was 

intended. . . ” 

From the letter it appears that the township boundaries in 

Wisconsin may have been surveyed increasing or decreasing 

the six-mile length, depending upon where the boundary was 

in relation to the correction line or standard parallel. Only an 

examination of the field notes would reveal the true situation; if so, this was another early method of trying to deal 

with convergency. 

On April 5, 1832, 4 Stat. 503, Congress passed the last 

major act affecting the system of rectangular surveys which 

provides for the sale of public lands in units down to quarterquarter sections, the one-sixteen section of 40 acres or a lot. 

The entire act follows: 

CHAP. LXV.-An Act supplementary to the several 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America, in Congress 

assembled, That from and after the first day May next, 

all the public lands ofthe United States, when offered at 

private sale, may be purchased at the option of the 

purchaser, either in entire sections, half sections, quarter sections, half-quarter sections, or quarter-quarter 

sections; and in every case of a division of a half-quarter 

section, the line for division thereof shall run east and 

west, and the corners and contents of quarter-quarter 

sections, which may thereafter be sold, shall be ascertained as nearly as may be, in the manner, and on the 

principles, directed and prescribed by the second section 

of an act, entitled “An act concerning the mode of surveying the public lands of the United States,” Passed on 

the eleventh day of February, eighteen hundred and 

five; and fractional sections, containing fewer or more 

than one hundred and sixty acres, shall in a like manner, as nearly as may be practicable, be subdivided into 

quarter-quarter sections, under such rules and regulations as may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury: Provided, That this act shall not be construed to 

laws for the sale of public lands. (a) 

90 

_. . - 

Figure 36. T.30N., RBW., Second Principal Meridian, Indiana. Example of Proper Platting - 1836. 
'I ', 

,^. 

?4 

'7 

I? 

1/ 3i 

D 

. .- 

! 

i 
alter any special provision made by law for the sale of 

land in town lots: And provided also, That no person 

shall be permitted to enter more than one half-quarter 

section of land under this act, in quarter-quarter sections, in his own name or in the name of any other 

person, and in no case, unless he intends it for cultivation, or for the use of his improvement. And the person 

making application to make an entry under this act 

shall file his and her affidavit, under such regulations 

as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe, that he 

or she makes the entry in his or her own name, for his or 

her own benefit, and not in trust for another: Provided, 

further, That all actual settlers, being housekeepers 

upon the public lands, shall have the right of preemption to enter, within six months after the passage of 

this act, not exceeding the quantity of one half-quarter 

section, under the provisions ofthis act, to include his or 

their improvements, under such regulations as have 

been, or may be prescribed by the Secretary of the 

Treasury; and in cases where two persons shall live 

upon the same quarter section, subject to be entered 

under the provisions of this act, each shall have the 

right to enter that quarter-quarter section which includes his improvements. 

Since passage of this act, the 40-acre aliquot part or fractional lot has been the smallest legal subdivision and it is the 

basis of the present-day platting system. The requirement 

that, “in every case of a division of a half-quarter section, the 

line of the division thereof shall run east and west,” was 

directly opposite the Act of April 24,1820. Apparently that 

provision applied only to land sales, not to the survey plats. It 

should be remembered that these section subdivisional lines 

were not ordinarily surveyed by the government. That job 

was left to the District Surveyors and later to the county 

surveyors. The subdivision of the quarter section had to be 

done according to the Act of February 11, 805, i.e., midpoint 

and intersection of centerlines. 

On May 8,1832, Hayward issued a circular (see Appendix) 

to the Surveyors General, prescribing the methods and procedures to be used in platting the townships in accordance with 

this act. Fig. 35 is a sketch of a township in Michigan, surveyed and platted after passage of the 1832 act. 

On December 30, 1836, Commissioner Ethan A. Brown 

chastised Surveyor General Henry S. Foote at Jackson, Mississippi, about his platting procedures, sent him a copy of the 

circular of May 8,1832, and a copy of the plat of T. 30 N., R. 8 

W., Second Principal Meridian, Indiana, and said that the 

Indiana plat (Fig. 36) was an excellent example of proper 

platting. The plat not only shows the proper lotting but also 

the swamps, marshes, and ponds, and the listing at the bottom per the circular of August 4,1823, and the letter sent to 

Butler and Lytle on October 26, 1830, which directed the 

showing of swamps. 

On June 15, 1832, Hayward wrote to McRee in St. Louis 

notifying him that Elias T. Langham had been appointed to 

replace McRee as Surveyor General of Missouri and Illinois. 

McRee had been nominated to survey the boundary between 

the United States and Mexico. 

The Act of June 15,1832,4 Stat. 531, created the Office of 

APPROVED, April 5, 1832. 

Surveyor General €or the Territory of Arkansas. James S. 

Conway was was officially commissioned on June 30, 1832, 

and established his office at Little Rock. 

By letters of May 2 and June 25,1832, Hayward instructed 

John Coffee at Florence, Alabama, to survey the lands in the 

recent Creek Cession in Alabama. The area to be surveyed 

was near the middle of the State with the St. Stephens Meridian surveys to the south and Huntsville Meridian system to 

the north. Coffee was to run a guide meridian north between 

ranges 21 and 22 east, St. Stephens Meridian to the north 

boundary of T. 24 N., then run a guide baseline east to near 

the State line but not too close against that line until the 

Alabama-Georgia boundary was finally decided. The guide 

baseline was to be run west eventually to the Mississippi 

boundary. All St. Stephens surveys to the south would close 

upon this guide baseline. The Huntsville system was to have 

a guide meridian run south between ranges 7 and 8 east to 

the above guide baseline and be closed there. Coffee didn’t 

want to do it that way but Hayward prevailed. Thus, a 

straight east-west line was surveyed to close the two rectangular systems within the single State. Similar methods 

were to be later used in California and Colorado. 

The Act of July 9,1832, 4 Stat. 564, created the Office of 

Commissioner of Indian Affairs under the Secretary of War, 

where it remained until 1849. The office was necessary in 

order to have someone in charge of the complexities involved 

with the many Indian treaties and the moving of the Choctaw, Chickasaw, Creek, Cherokee, Seminole, and other Indian tribes to the Indian Territory, which is now part of Oklahoma. 

The Act of Murch2,1833,4 Stat. 663, ordered the Office of 

Surveyor of the Lands South of Tennessee moved to Jackson, 

Mississippi, effective April 1, 1833. Thereafter the holder of 

that office was called the Surveyor of Mississippi. Fitz moved 

the office to Jackson in July 1833. 

A letter dated April 10, 1833, was addressed to “John Bell, 

Esq., Sur. Gen., etc. for the Chickasaw Cession (care of John 

Coffee, S. Gen. at Florence, Ala).” The letter directed Bell, a 

Deputy Surveyor working for Coffee, to begin the surveys in 

the recent Chickasaw Cession in northern Mississippi. He set 

up a separate office for those surveys at Pontotoc, Mississippi, 

located within the Chickasaw cession. In later letters, he was 

sometimes addressed as “John Bell, Sur. Gen., Pontotoc, 

Miss.” although he was more a Principal Deputy, working 

more or less independently from the office at Jackson. 

The Mississippi field notes indicate that the initial point of 

the Chickasaw Meridian was established August 28,1833, on 

the east bank of the Wolf River and on the south boundary of 

Tennessee, by John Thomson, Deputy Surveyor. The notes 

indicate that the State boundary used was run by “General 

Winchester.” From that point, the basis meridian for the 

Chickasaw surveys was extended due south. The plat of T. 1 

S., R. 1 W., indicates that the east boundary was surveyed by 

Thomson, the south and west boundaries by John Ralston, 

and the subdivisional lines by John Hudspeth. The plat was 

approved in 1834 by John Bell, “Surveyor of Lands in Mississippi ceded by the Chickasaws.” Thus, Mississippi contains 

all or part of six different meridian systems, second only to 

Ohio for the distinction of having the most complexities in the 

public lands surveys. 

94 
On June 8, 1833, Hayward wrote the following letter to 

Sir, 

In relation to the revision by Mr. Hervey Parke of the 

Survey of Town. 1 S., of Range 7 E. in the Territory of 

Michigan, I have to remark, that insasmuch as nearly 

the whole of the land in said township has been sold, and 

a portion thereof patented, it is not perceived how this 

office can now apply any remedy for the erroneous survey. 

If, however, the purchasers in that township will all 

enter into a formal agreement that the vacant lines 

shall be run out, and that quarter Sectional corners 

shall be established, where there are now none, adopting the Section corners and marked lines where they are 

found, and to abide by the result of a resurvey, and will 

moreover agree to pay for the excesses of land that may 

be found in any quarter Section (the Government being 

bound to refund in cases where deficiencies shall be 

discovered if a resurvey be ordered) and all be willing to 

surrender the patents which have, or will be issued on 

the existing survey, then, and under no other circumstances, can the subject be considered by the Department. 

Micajah T. Williams, Surveyor General at Cincinnati: 

I am 

If ever a resurvey caused argument, T. 1 S., R. 7 E., Michigan was that township. The actual resurvey was not made 

until 1844 and will be discussed in its proper order in history. 

It is extremely questionable whether Hayward had any authority whatever to commit the government to a refund if 

quarter sections were less than 160 acres. That statement 

was a direct contravention of the Act of February 11,1805, 

which made the contents returned by the Surveyor General 

the true contents regardless of what a later survey might 

find. 

James W. Weakley was officially commissioned by letter 

dated July 20, 1833, to be Surveyor General of Alabama, 

replacing “the late General Coffee.” Coffee died July 7,1833. 

On February 24, 1834, Henry T. Williams was notified of 

his official commission to be Surveyor General of Louisiana, 

replacing H. Browse Triste. 

On June 3, 1834, Hayward wrote to Fitz in Mississippi 

concerning platting procedures. The following remarks are 

extracted from that letter: 

“When a tract of Country is surveyed, I am decidedly in 

favor of giving the private claims therein Sectional 

numbers, as has been done in the Southern States 

generally; but when, as in the cases in question, the 

claims are laid down after the land has been surveyed 

into regular Sections as public lands, then I think it will 

be proper to adopt the course now pursued in Carver’s 

Surveys, of designating the portions thereof in the different regular Sections, as Lots, having particular 

numbers. . .,’ 

Carver was the deputy who had executed the survey of 

some private claims in a surveyed township. The renumbering of all the sections seemed unreasonable to Fitz so he 

E. Hayward 

designated the private claims as lots and Hayward gave his 

conditional approval. Presumably the fractions of the sections lying outside the claims would have been given lot 

numbers. Why they didn’t give the claim a tract number as a 

whole unit instead of perhaps four lot numbers is unexplained. 

The Act ofJune28,1834,4 Stat. 701, attached all the lands 

west of the Mississippi, east of the Missouri River, and north 

of the State of Missouri to the Territory of Michigan. At that 

point, the Michigan Territory included all of what is now the 

States of Michigan, Wisconsin, Iowa, Minnesota, and about 

half of North and South Dakota. 

On July 8,1834, Hayward notified R. M. Williamson ofhis 

appointment to replace Gideon Fitz as Surveyor General at 

Jackson, Mississippi. Williamson took charge of the Mississippi office on August 16,1834. On March 23,1835, Hayward 

notified Williamson that his appointment had been rejected 

by the Senate. Surveyors General were appointed by the 

President but the appointment had to be confirmed by the 

Senate. Hayward ordered Williamson to close the office, that 

he should box up all the records and documents, turn them 

over to the Register of the Jackson Land Office, and discharge 

his clerks. That office remained closed until 1836. 

On April 23, 1835, Robert T. Lytle, William Lytle’s son, 

replaced Micajah T. Williams as Surveyor General at Cincinnati. 

On July 24,1835, Ethan Allen Brown was appointed Commissioner of the GLO, replacing Elijah Hayward. Brown was 

an extremely capable and intelligent man who had the respect of all who knew him. 

On September 21, 1835, Lytle wrote to Brown about the 

problems encountered with surveying some of the old twomile blocks in Ohio. Brown replied on October 29,1835. The 

following is extracted from that letter: 

“I concur in your representation of the expediency of 

subdividing “the two mile blocks”, as they are called, in 

certain townships in the northern part of the Cincinnati 

land district, and which are designated in your predecessor’s letter of 29th November last: -but entertain 

apprehension of much embarrassment resulting to the 

purchasers and Settlers on those lands from a Survey of 

the lines intermediate between the two mile distances 

already Surveyed, unless, indeed, they have made their 

improvements under the advice of County Surveyors, so 

as to be their appropriate limits when an official Survey 

shall be made. 

It is readily to be conceived that any Survey on the 

principles established by law, which would materia2Zy 

interfere with the improvements, (whether fields in cultivation, fences, dwellings or out houses of the present 

owners) would be regarded by all parties interested as a 

great evil. The want of precise information as to the 

effect that a Survey would have on the improvements 

existing, is the reason why an order has not heretofore 

been issued from this Department. 

Under these circumstances I would desire a Report 

from the Surveyor of the County as the manner in which 

the Settlers have made their improvements-and 

which I request you will furnish as soon as convenient. 

Inasmuch as most of the lands referred to have been 

95 
sold many years ago, and no doubt are now in the hands 

of agriculturalists, it may be ascertained to be impracticable to apply the ordinary principles of Surveying the 

public lands to these tracts without producing great 

confusion and embarrassment to the Settlers in dividing their improvements among tracts different from 

those designated by the original entry. 

Rather than Subject this meritorious class of our 

citizens to anticipated embarrassment of such a character, I would prefer an application to Congress for such 

(dispensation) of, or departure from, the ordinary mode 

of Surveying as would Secure to each individual the 

boundaries of the particular tract or quantity of land 

which he had under cultivation, and believed to be his 

own, although the quantity might either rather exceed, 

or be a little less than than for which payment was made 

to the United States, and leaving any excess or deficiencies to be Settled and arranged according to the circumstances of the case. -In this way each individual 

would Secure his farm, and no injury whatever result to 

the public survey. 

I therefore have to refer the whole subject back for 

your further consideration and report. 

Very respectfully 

Ethan A. Brown 

This letter is significant because Brown was attempting to 

come to grips with the “bona fide rights of claimants.” The 

exteriors of the two-mile blocks had been surveyed by the 

government but not subdivided by actual survey into four 

sections. Entries were made and the lands occupied, but some 

public land still remained. If the settlers had these sections 

surveyed and subdivided according to law, shouldn’t the 

county surveyors’ work stand, even if the lines might be 

located in a slightly different place by a government survey 

at this time? Even if the blocks hadn’t been subdivided by a 

surveyor, the people had improvements established probably 

in good faith. Should conditions acceptable to the settlers be 

now disturbed by a government survey made strictly according to the law? Brown realized that he probably did not have 

authority to give away any rights of the government; therefore, such authority would have to be given by an act of 

Congress. Just as Hayward, Brown’s predecessor, tried to 

deal with the touchy matter of resurveys on April 10,1831, 

Brown was trying to come to a decision on the matter of 

occupancy in good faith based on a valid entry and patent. 

Unfortunately, no evidence was found on how the problem 

was resolved. 

The year 1835 would prove to be a landmark year in the 

execution of the rectangular public land surveys. William A. 

Burt invented his “True Meridian Finding” instrument, 

since known as Burt’s Solar Compass. Burt had contracted 

for public land surveys in Michigan beginning in 1833 and 

found that iron ore deposits made needle compass surveying 

nearly impossible. He invented his solar attachment and in 

1835, had it built by William J. Young of Philadelphia. It was 

patented on February 25, 1836. He used it on surveys in 

Michigan in 1835 and thereafter. The Burt Solar Compass 

made possible the accurate extension of the rectangular system of surveying in the iron ore regions and throughout the 

western United States. 

The Act of April 20,1836,5 Stat. 10, created the Territory 

of Wisconsin, most of the old Michigan Territory lying west of 

the present boundaries of the State of Michigan. The Surveyor General at Cincinnati remained responsible for the 

public land surveys in the new territory. 

On May 6,1836, Edward Cross was notified of his appointment to be Surveyor General at Little Rock, replacing Conway. 

On May 14, 1836, Daniel Dunklin was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Illinois and Missouri 

at St. Louis, replacing Langham. 

On June 3, 1836, Henry S. Foote was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of the Lands South of 

Tennessee. The letter ordered him to retrieve the records and 

reopen the office at Jackson, Mississippi. 

The Act of June 15, 1836, 5 Stat. 49, provided for the 

admission of Michigan to the Union. The south boundary was 

fixed as the Harris or northerly line, surveyed in 1817. Michigan was admitted January 26, 1837. 

Also on June 15,1836,5 Stat. 50, the State of Arkansas was 

admitted to the Union, reduced to the area within her present 

boundaries. 

The Act of July 4, 1836, 5 Stat. 107, drafted by Brown, 

reorganized the GLO. It says, in part: 

“That from and after the passage of this act, the executive duties. . . appertaining to the Surveying and sale of 

the public lands. . . shall be subject to the Supervision 

and Control of the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office. . .,’ 

Sec. 2 of the act authorizes appointment of a “Principal 

Clerk of the Public Lands” and a ‘Principal Clerk of Private 

Land Claims.” The third section provides for a: 

“Principal Clerk of the Surveys, whose duty it shall be 

to direct and superintend the making of surveys, the 

returns thereof, and all matters relating thereto, which 

are done through the offices of the Surveyor 

General;. . . ” 

Secs. 4 and 5 of the act provide for a Recorder of the GLO 

and a Solicitor to provide the Commissioner with legal 

advice. It makes clear that the Commissioner was the boss, 

although the Principal Clerk of Surveys handled most of the 

surveying problems. 

John Moore was appointed to the position. Most of the 

instructions and letters to the Surveyors General and the 

public relating to surveys were written by the Principal 

Clerk and signed by the commissioner. 

This act brought the public land surveys under a tighter 

control by the officials in Washington who did not institute 

any drastic reforms immediately. But the act did let everyone 

know who as in authority, and made into law those reforms 

which Elijah Hayward had made unilaterally. The Surveyors 

General continued in a semi-autonomous role, even though 

the Commissioner had more control. 

THE PERIOD 1836 - 1849 

The public land sales were at a peak in 1836. In 1883, 

Donaldson reported that the revenue from public land sales 

in 1836 exceeded 25 million dollars. Many of the States were 

96 
deeply in debt, caused primarily by canal-building projects. 

Attempts were being made in Congress to have the public 

lands ceded to the individual states or to sell them to the 

State at very nominal prices. None of those proposals succeeded. These same efforts are being made today with the 

so-called “Sagebrush Rebellion.” It was also a period of rapid 

expansion in settlement of the West. 

On October 21, 1836, James Whitcomb was appointed 

Commissioner ofthe GLO. Brown retired on October 31. John 

Moore was Acting Commissioner until Whitcomb took 

charge about December 12, 1836. 

The subject of accretions came up in a letter dated March 6, 

1837, to Daniel Dunklin at St. Louis. The previous Surveyor 

General, Langham, had let a contract to a “Mr. Talcott” for 

the survey of accretions formed in a lake located in sections 

10 and 15, T. 39 N., R. 14 E., Third Principal Meridian, 

Illinois. The accretions may have been lands formed by reliction. Talcott had surveyed the accretions as additional lots in 

front of the meander line of lots already platted in the original survey. The following statement is extracted from Whitcomb’s letter: 

“How your predecessor could issue instructions for the 

survey under these circumstances, and what appears 

still more inexplicable, how he could permit such separate fractions to be annexed to the sections, contrary to 

the surveying laws and general instructions from this 

office, which do not recognize of subdivisions like those 

presented by this plat remains yet to be explained. You 

will at once see the propriety of continuing to withhold 

your approval of this survey and of course the payment 

of Mr. Talcott’s account should he apply for it, until such 

time as this business can be thoroughly examined.” 

From the very beinning of the rectangular surveys the 

survey of accretions in front of patented lands was not 

allowed. The so-called “Batture Case,” New Orleans us. 

United States, 35 U.S. 661, had been decided in the U.S. 

Supreme Court in 1836. That case dealt with the ownership 

of levees and accretions fronting the City of New Orleans; the 

Federal government claimed those lands and so did the City, 

however, the Federal government lost the case. In the decision, the following often-quoted statement was made: 

“The question is well settled at common law that the 

person whose land is bounded by a stream of water 

which changes its course gradually by alluvial formations, shall still hold by the same boundary, including 

the accumulated soil. No other rule can be applied on 

just principles. Every proprietor whose land is thus 

bounded is subject to loss by the same means which may 

add to his territory; and as he is without remedy for his 

loss, in this way, he cannot be held accountable for his 

gain. 

This rule is no less just when applied to public, than to 

private rights. The case under consideration will illustrate the principle.” 

The Batture Case was almost a test case because as a policy 

based on common law, the government didn’t try to claim 

accretions to patented land. 

Reliction and avulsions were another matter, as will be 

seen later. The GLO did claim relicted lakes and on occasion, 

the dried-up beds of rivers left vacant by avulsion. 

Whitcomb wrote instructions to Lytle in Cincinnati on 

May 8,1837, for the extension of the rectangular surveys in 

northern Michigan. Lytle was to contract for the completion 

of all townships south of Thunder Bay and south of a line 

drawn west from the source of the Thunder Bay River. He 

was to extend the Michigan Meridian north across the Strait 

of Michilimackinac onto the northern peninsula. A Standard 

Parallel was to be run due east and west from a township 

corner about midway between Thunder Bay River and the 

strait. Another Standard Parallel was to be surveyed due 

east and west from a township corner on the Meridian, in 

such place that it would remain north of Lake Michigan and 

south of Lake Superior. All of the exterior boundaries of the 

townships were to then be surveyed, but to stay back from the 

Wisconsin-Michigan boundary until it could be surveyed. 

Only those townships containing “valuable land” that people 

would “readily purchase” were to be subdivided. The Surveyors were to report the townships containing valuable land 

when they did the exteriors. 

What is significant about this letter is the first clear use of 

the term “Standard Parallel.” Before this time, the use of the 

terms “Correction Line, Basis Guide Line,” and others had 

been used. During Ethan Allen Brown’s short tenure, the 

policy of subdividing only the valuable townships had been 

established and Whitcomb continued it. This was purely an 

economy measure to make best use of the money available to 

survey those lands that people would quickly purchase. 

The surveys in Michigan weren’t extended immediately. In 

October 1837, Robert Lytle became ill. Samuel Williams 

acted as Surveyor General at Cincinnati until Ezekial S. 

Haines was appointed and assumed his duties on June 15, 

1838. 

On May 22, 1838, Volney E. Howard was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General at Jackson, Mississippi, 

as Henry S. Foote had resigned. 

On June 12, 1838, 5 Stat. 235, the Iowa Territory was 

divided from the Territory of Wisconsin. The new territory 

included all the lands in the former territory lying west of the 

Mississippi River. On the same date, June 12,1838, 5 Stat. 

243, Congress authorized the appointment of a Surveyor 

General for the Wisconsin Territory with no mention of Iowa. 

Albert G. Ellis was appointed Surveyor General on July 3, 

1838, and established his of‘fice at Dubuque, Iowa, in February 1839; he was actually in charge of surveys in both Iowa 

and Wisconsin. 

In November 1839, Haines at Cincinnati turned over the 

Wisconsin records to Ellis. Some private land claim surveys 

had been made in Iowa, beginning in 1832. The Fourth Principal Meridian had been extended into Wisconsin in 1831. 

William Burt had extended the Fifth Principal Meridian via 

offsets into Iowa in 1836 and 1837. All Ellis had to do was 

extend and expand the existing surveys in Wisconsin and 

Iowa whenever the expansion was authorized. No new principal meridians and baselines were established until 1851. 

Another act passed on June 12,1838,5 Stat. 244, directed 

the Surveyor General of Ohio, Indiana, and Michigan to have 

the State boundary between Michigan and Wisconsin on the 

Upper Peninsula surveyed. But the boundary couldn’t be 

surveyed as described in the Act of June 15,1836,5 Stat. 49. 

97 
Nothing was done about the boundary until 1847. 

On July 20, 1838, Whitcomb sent a circular letter to all 

Surveyors General inquiring whether they were using “Tract 

Books” to record the entries and sales being sent to them by 

the Registers and Receivers, and whether it was necessary to 

continue the practice. This is the first mention of tract books 

in the correspondence. There can be no doubt that the Registers and Receivers used tract books at an early date to record 

entries, sales, and patents when they first came into use. 

That the Surveyors General kept them is very doubtful, but 

the use of tract books was continued in the land offices until 

the change to Master Title Plats in the 1960’s. 

By letter dated August 16, 1838, signed by John Moore, 

Richard D. C. Collins was appointed Surveyor General at 

Little Rock, Arkansas, “until the end of the next session of 

the Senate.” On November 7, 1838, David Fulton was notified of his appointment as Surveyor General of Arkansas. 

The Appropriations Act of March 3,1839,5 Stat. 449, broke 

the then traditional limit of $3 or $4 per mile for the execution of the public land surveys. It provided that up to $8 per 

mile could be paid in Louisiana, and was caused by the 

inability of the Surveyor General in Louisiana to get deputies 

to do the work for $4 per mile. From 1839 until the beginning 

of the direct system in 1910, the maximum allowance per 

mile varied, reaching as high as $20 per mile in Utah, and up 

to $25 per mile in the West Coast forests. 

On February 5,1839, Haines wrote to Whitcomb, replying 

to an inquiry made on January 15,1839, about islands in the 

Grand River, in T. 8 N., R. 16 W., Michigan Meridian. The 

situation was that the part of the township south of the river 

had been surveyed in 1832 by William Mullet and the south 

bank of the river meandered. Lands were sold in the fractional sections bounded on the north by the river. In 1837, the 

township was completed; the section lines were extended 

across the river to complete the sections, the north bank was 

meandered, and islands in the river were surveyed, lotted, 

and areas returned on the 1837 plat. The islands were advertised for sale; the purchaser of adjacent lands south of the 

river claimed the islands belonged to him out to the center of 

the river. Haines rejected that allegation, sent up an enlarged plat of the islands to Whitcomb, and in his letter made 

the following statement: 

“It has been the invariable practice of this office, where 

islands have not actually been embraced within the 

survey of fractional sections fronting them to consider 

and hold such islands as reserved from survey,-the 

property of The United States, and subject at any future 

time to be surveyed and sold by the Government. Instances of the survey and sale of islands in our navigable rivers, are of very frequent occurrence. And where 

they are clearly shown to be excluded from the fractional sections by the original surveys, the property of The 

United States, in those islands, and the right of the 

Government to survey and dispose of them, has never 

been, so far as I am informed, disputed.” 

On February 15, Whitcomb replied, accepting Haines’ report and agreed with him in every respect. The policy of the 

government concerning such unsurveyed islands as stated by 

Haines in 1839 is still the same today-they remain the 

property of the United States until surveyed and sold. 

On March 14, 1839, William Milburn was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Missouri and Illinois 

at St. Louis to replace Dunklin who had resigned. 

A letter to David Fulton in Little Rock dated April 25, 

1839, dealt with the size of the plats. Fulton’s draftsmen were 

making the plats on paper 19 x 27 inches and leaving off the 

letters around the outside margin. Whitcomb instructed him 

that the standard plat size was 16 x 21 inches and that they 

had to put the alphabetical letters, Aa, Bb, Cc, etc., around 

the exterior of the townships because those letters were used 

to index the descriptive notes. 

A circular letter of October 1, 1839, requested all Surveyors General to report their place of birth to the Commissioner. What prompted the request for such information is 

unknown, but the Surveyors General had to report their 

birthplace from then on, and in later years, the birthplaces of 

the clerks and draftsmen. 

By letter dated February 5, 1840, George W. Jones was 

notified of his appointment to replace Ellis as Surveyor 

General of Wisconsin and Iowa. 

InMarch 1840, thelandownersinT. 33N.,R. llE., Second 

Principal Meridian, Noble County, Indiana, petitioned Commissioner Whitcomb for a resurvey of their lands and alleged 

that the original survey was grossly in error and fraudulent. 

Whitcomb addressed the following letter to Haines on 

March 28, 1840: 

Sir, 

I herewith enclose a copy, marked A, of a petition 

which reached this Office through the Hon. Wm. 

Rariden, from the citizens of Noble County, Indiana, 

relative to certain alleged irregularities and errors in 

the original Survey of the Section lines in township 33 

North Range 11 East of the 2nd prin. mer. and praying 

for a resurvey of the same. 

It being designed as soon as practicable to take up the 

whole subject relating to the subject of lost corners, 

errors in the original Surveys, etc. with a view of obtaining the opinion of the Attorney General on the several 

points involved and of determining on Such general 

rules as shall be found applicable to the different cases 

before any definite action is had. I will thank you at 

your earliest convenience to report such facts to this 

Office as may be in your possession relative to the original survey of the township in question accompanied 

by your views as to the proper course to be pursued and 

to explain what has been the practice of your office 

under the surveying laws in such cases and likewise in 

those referred to me in the following communications 

from your ofice, to wit: 

of the 23rd May, 1834 & 20 & 22nd December 1837,12th 

June & 13th July 1838 and 20th August 1839, all relating (with their enclosures) to alleged defective surveys 

in Ohio, Michigan and Indiana. 

I deem it proper to state that according to the present 

impressions of this Office as to the power of the Department for making resurveys, and the manner in which 

the same shall be made, the following General positions 

are I think tenable subject however to such modifications as further enquiry into the subject may render 

proper and necessary. 

98 
1st. 

2nd. 

3rd. 

4th. 

5th. 

6th. 

That errors in the Surveys of lands patented 

cannot be corrected without the Authority of 

Congress and a special appropriation. 

That errors in the calculations of the contents, 

measurements, or boundaries returned on the 

plats of Survey admit of examination and correction if discovered in time, that is before the 

patents for the lands are issued, and in making 

the corrections when examinations in the field 

notes become necessary, the original marks 

must govern the Survey more especially in retracing the boundaries of any adjoining tracts 

which may have been patented. 

That when the original marks have been 

obliterated or cannot be found in the field, it will 

be competent for the Department on the fact 

being made known, to have them restored so far 

only as the lands have not been patented and in 

such cases, the nearest original marks must be 

taken and worked from in conformity with the 

plat and field notes of the old Survey. 

That in the case where double corners may have 

been inadvertently marked in the field by suffering an incorrect mark to remain, the true 

corner to be identified by measuring according 

to the field notes of survey from the nearest 

original marks. 

That in case of a disagreement between the 

measurements returned on the plat and the 

actual distance found by measuring in the field 

between two adjacent original marks as for instance from a mile to a half mile corner the 

excess or deficiency to be equally divided. 

That in the case of an accretion or diminuation 

occasioned by the change of the bed of a navigable river or other Water a resurvey may be 

ordered at any time before the land is patented. 

I am Sir Very respectfully 

Your Obt. Servant 

Jas. Whitcomb 

In Haines’ reply, he agreed that although the original field 

notes and plat returned a complete survey and monumentation, the survey was no doubt fraudulent. Haines pointed out 

that the lands were all sold and that a resurvey ought not be 

made without the consent of the proprietors of those lands. 

He cited the Act of February 11,1805, which fixed the corners, lines, and areas as returned by the Surveyor General. 

Haines believed that such a correction survey could not be 

made unless government lands were involved but left the 

decision up to Whitcomb. 

This exchange and Whitcomb‘s list of general positions are 

significant because they were a first attempt to lay down 

some rules to govern resurveys and restoration of lost or 

obliterated corners. They clearly state the Department’s 

position on doing resurveys of public lands before the lands 

were patented. 

The Act of June 12, 1840, 5 Stat. 384, provided for the 

discontinuance of the Surveyor General’s Ofice and transfer 

of records to the State whenever the public land surveys were 

completed within a State. 

On February 19, 1841, Haines sent Whitcomb a plan for 

the extension of the rectangular surveys into the Upper 

Peninsula of Michigan. The line between ranges 3 and 4 west 

was to be extended across the Straits of Mackinaw to the line 

between townships 42 and 43 north. The fourth correction 

line would then be extended east and west to control the 

surveys on the peninsula. The plan was approved and on 

April 1,1841, Haines contracted with William A. Burt for the 

survey of the township boundaries and then reported that 

Burt was chosen for the surveys because the lines would be 

run with the solar compass. Haines recommended that the 

instrument be used on all surveys in Upper Michigan including section lines. 

On March 26,1841, Whitcomb wrote to Haines saying that 

Surveyor General Fulton in Arkansas was having trouble 

with “local attraction” to such a degree on the Sabine River 

that he had to relinquish the contracts for approximately 

1,000 miles of lines. Fulton had heard from Judge Burt about 

Burt’s “Sun Compass” and wanted to know of its availability. 

Whitcomb asked Haines for a full report on the instrument. 

But on April 17, 1841, William Pelham was notified of his 

appointment to replace Fulton at Little Rock, Arkansas. 

On April 20,1841, Benjamin A. Ludlow was notified of his 

appointment to replace Volney E. Howard as Surveyor 

General at Jackson, Mississippi. 

On April 27, 1841, Silas Reed was notified of his appointment to replace William Milburn at St. Louis, Missouri. 

On May 4, 1841, notification went to James Wilson at 

Keene, New Hampshire, that he was appointed Surveyor 

General of Wisconsin and Iowa, replacing Geo. W. Jones at 

Dubuque, Iowa. 

On June 8, 1841, Whitcomb wrote to Ludlow giving him 

the “what for” for having let contracts for resurveys in Mississippi and for “advancing” money to the deputies before the 

work was done. Whitcomb reiterated the policy of prior 

approval for resurveys, especially of townships already 

opened to market, and that deputies couldn’t be paid until 

after the surveys had been completed, examined, and 

approved. 

The Surveyors General at that time only had to send a copy 

of the contract to the commissioner; no prior approval of 

contracts per se was required. But there was a terrible lack of 

communication between the Commissioner and Surveyors 

General. Whitcom had quite clearly told Haines of the existing policy on resurveys but did not send that same policy 

decision to the other Surveyors General. 

Circulars, official departmental policy decisions, and regulations were routinely used. Why an important policy, such 

as resurveys, was not distributed is not known. 

On June 25,1841, Francis D. Newcomb was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Louisiana, replacing 

Henry T. Williams. Newcomb was discharged in 1845 and 

was tried in 1846 on charges of fraud in connection with 

fraudulent surveys and illegal payments to deputy surveyors. 

On July 3, 1841, Elisha M. Huntington was appointed 

Commissioner of the GLO. On July 7,1841, Huntington sent 

Haines’ report on the Burt Solar Compass to all Surveyors 

General and recommended the instrument should be put to 

use in all the surveying districts. It wasn’t, however. 

On September 4, 1841, 5 Stat. 453, Congress passed the 

99 
General Preemption Act and provided for distribution of proceeds from the public land sales to the public land States. 

The public land sales had brought large sums of money into 

the Treasury, producing a surplus. The government was out 

of debt and had money in the bank. The act provided that 10 

percent of the net proceeds of public land sales would be 

distributed to the states involved and also granted each public land State 500,000 acres of land “for internal improvement.” The lands granted were to be selected in not less than 

half-section units. 

Settlers were granted the right of preemption on surveyed 

public lands, by legal subdivisions, not exceeding 160 acres or 

a quarter section. If two or more persons claimed preemption 

on the same quarter section, the one first occupying the land 

had first right. The settler had to pay for the land at a fixed 

price of $1.25 per acre. 

The surveyed land provision of the act was changed to 

either surveyed or unsurveyed lands in 1842, but purchase 

and patent could not take place until after the lands were 

surveyed. Selection could only be by legal subdivisions. 

On September 7, 1841, J. C. Brown was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General at St. Louis, Missouri, 

replacing Silas Reed. Brown didn’t last long because on 

March 18,1842, a letter went to Silas Reed reappointing him 

to the position, so Reed was out of the job for only six months. 

On October 28, 1841, John Moore, Acting Commissioner, 

wrote to Weakley at Florence, Alabama, about the retracement of lines in southern Alabama to replace the notes lost in 

the 1827 fire. Moore stressed that the work was a retracing of 

the old lines, not a survey as such, that all old corners had to 

be honored, and that the old marks on bearing trees were not 

to be altered, but that the letter “R’ might be added to show 

that the tree had been recorded during the retracing. 

Also on October 28,1841, William Burt reported to Haines 

in Cincinnati that he had completed his cgntract. He had 

surveyed 1,100 miles of line and had made topographic, 

geological, and weather observations in the Upper Peninsula 

of Michigan. Apparently Burt was to make these observations as part of his contract; he would then have been the 

forerunner of what would one day become the United States 

Geological Survey (USGS). 

On March 21, 1842, Valentine Y. Conway was notified of 

his appointment to be Surveyor General at Tallahassee, Florida, replacing Butler, who had held the job since its establishment in 1824. 

On February 21, 1842, Huntington sent a “Joint Resolution of the Legislature of the State of Michigan” to Ezekial S. 

Haines, in which it was alleged that in approximately 80 

townships, north of Saginaw Bay, in Michigan there were 

“great imperfections.” The resolution requested that resurveys be made by the government. A deputy who had surveyed 

some of the townships admitted that they weren’t done 

according to law and instructions. Haines was raked over the 

coals and told to make a full report of the situation and 

explain why he had let fraudulent surveys be made. 

Haines replied on March 4, recommending that an experienced deputy be contracted with to investigate the surveys on 

the ground and report the conditions so that a decision could 

be made based on facts. Any township found defective should 

then be resurveyed at the expense of the original deputy or 

his sureties. In reality, Haines had no way to enforce the last 

suggestion. 

On April 2, 1842, Huntington again wrote to Haines, 

approving of his suggestions and ordered the investigations 

made. He expressly cautioned Haines that no old corners 

could be disturbed, that those corners had to stand wherever 

lands were entered or patented. Huntington wanted the investigative report quickly so that he could “withdraw from 

market” those townships which were defective but in which 

no entries had been made. 

These investigations of the Saginaw Bay townships continued at least into 1843. They were originally surveyed by 

J. A. Rousseau in 1837, 1838 and 1839; by W. R. Coon in 

1839; G. W. Reilly in 1838 and 1839; and G. W. Gist in 1839. 

The main block was located in townships 15 through 26 

north, range 2 east, and east thereof to Lake Huron and 

Saginaw Bay. The bulk of the investigations and reports 

were made by William A. Burt. The cost of the resurveys, 

which were largely retracements, was paid by special appropriations made by Congress. These resurveys were begun in 

1844 and the solar compass was the required instrument to 

be used, which was spelled out in each contract. 

On May 19, 1842, Thomas H. Blake was appointed to replace Huntington as Commissioner of the GLO. 

On July 22, 1842, William Johnston replaced Haines as 

Surveyor General of Ohio, Indiana, and Michigan. 

On April 4, 1843, Blake issued the Annual Instructions to 

Wilson at Dubuque, which were much more elaborate than 

those issued by previous Commissioners to the Surveyors 

General. Wilson was instructed to extend the surveys in 

Wisconsin and Iowa, contracting only for exterior boundaries, and then for the subdivisions of those townships that 

contained land which would readily sell when put on the 

market. Blake stressed that contracts should be no larger 

than what a deputy could complete in one field season, which 

was approximately 15 townships. 

It was about this time in the history of surveys that the 

policy was firmly established of letting contracts to one deputy for the survey of exterior township lines and to another 

deputy for the subdivisions. The theory was that the subdividing deputy would be controlled by the previous survey and 

the subdivisions would be a check of the correctness of the 

boundary work, thus preventing frauds and gross errors from 

snowballing. But this idea didn’t work; the deputies didn’t 

blow the whistle on each other. 

On June 5, 1843, Alexander Downing was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of the Lands South of 

Tennessee, at Jackson, Mississippi, replacing Ludlow. 

Two letters went to Silas Reed, Surveyor General of Illinois 

and Missouri in 1843, dealing with false meanders which 

were a real problem, especially where lands were already 

patented along them. A letter to Reed dated July 12, 1843, 

follows: 

Sir, 

I have to acknowledge the receipt of your communication of the 21st Ult., accompanied by a diagram, explaining certain errors just discovered in the original 

survey made by Chas. W. Pelham, in 1832 of fract. 

township 22 N., of R. 20 W. of the 5th principal merid100 
ian, Mo., south of white River by which it would seem 

that the river in said survey is represented a considerable distance South of its true position, leaving a body of 

unsurveyed land south of the river, & requesting instructions from this office, since a part of the lands 

situated on the river have been sold by the existing plat. 

In reply I have to state, that it will not be expedient or 

proper to change the old Section lines and marks of the 

Survey South of the river, according to which the titles 

to the lands sold have become vested. You will therefore 

direct your Deputy to retrace the original Section lines 

as far as necessary, and return correct measurements 

thereof, from which you will calculate the true cdntents; 

he will likewise extend the section lines to the true river 

through the unsurveyed portion, after which you will 

transmit correct maps to this office & to the Register. 

As regards the half, the quarter, & the quarter quarter sections which have been sold with the false river as 

one of the boundaries, you will return them on the new 

plats without regard to the false meanders only preserving the same subdivision lines, extended if necessary. 

Your Ob. Serv. 

I am very respectfully 

Thos. H. Blake 

Commissioner 

The Batture Case was having its effect. Blake was ruling 

that once lands were patented fronting along a meander line, 

the patentee held riparian rights on the river regardless of 

the fact that it was in a false position. The surveyor General 

could only correct the survey of those lands which were still 

owned by the government. But the last paragraph is significant; it says that the section and section subdivision lines of 

the sold lands are to be extended to the true meander line. 

Blake was treating the false meander line as an error rather 

than as fraudulent in the philosophy described in Sections 7 

through 94 of the Manual of Surveying Instructions, 1973. 

But the dividing lines were extended to the true meander line 

because the idea of partition lines hadn’t yet been very well 

developed. In fact, many local and State court decisions then 

and later were based on the same idea-to extend the lines to 

the true water boundary. 

On November 7,1843, Reed made his annual report to the 

Commissioner, part of which dealt with false meanders. On 

December 5, 1843, Blake replied in the following segment: 

“That part of your report particularly attracted my 

attention, in which you speak of the ‘Surveys of unfinished lines in Illinois and Missouri”. You state, that 

“the Surveyors up to 1832, or thereabouts, on leaving 

the uplands and descending into the extensive bottoms 

which skirt those rivers, were frequently in the habit of 

meeting with marshy grounds, small lakes or sloughs 

connected with the stream, of stopping short of its true 

bank, and making their meanders as though they were 

upon the real bank of the river”. “In many instances 

they have left unsurveyed a rich, dry, and well timbered 

strip of land, of from one half to three quarters of a mile, 

between the river bank and these low grounds.” This 

strip you state, has been surveyed for a considerable 

distance on the right bank of the Illinois, and left bank 

of the Mississippi. On the 18th March last, you were 

advised, that unfinished surveys could be completed, 

where it was perfectly clear that title to the land was 

still in the United States, but that “great caution must 

be observed not to survey lands, the title to which is no 

longer in the U. States.” I presume that the surveys to 

which you refer, have been made strictly in accordance 

with this suggestion, otherwise, much difficulty may 

grow out of them, as every owner of a tract of land 

represented upon the township plats as bounded by a 

river is entitled to the river front, whether the original 

survey of his tract extended to the river or not.” 

Very respectfully 

Your Ob’t Serv. 

Thos. H. Blake 

Commissioner 

There were clearly two different problems to be confronted. 

The first was erroneous meanders, those in which the original surveyor had probably just guessed at where the meander lines were between actual section line crossings but had 

set meander corners on the true bank on the section lines. 

The second was a meander line run in fact, but along the edge 

of the river bottom, edge of the upland, or edge of the flood 

plain, leaving a large area between the meander line and 

true bank of the river. These lands were in fact what we call 

today “omitted lands,” omitted from the original survey due 

to a fraudulent or grossly erroneous meander line. The two 

situations are similar but not exactly the same. However, the 

concept of omitted lands hadn’t been developed yet and Blake 

treated them all in the same manner as accretion, again due 

to his interpretation of the Batture decision. Ironically, 

grossly erroneous and/or fraudulent meandering by the Deputy Surveyors did not cease in 1832! 

On October 3,1843, Blake notified Newcomb in Louisiana 

to move the Surveyor General’s office from Donaldsonville to 

Baton Rouge, according to an order from the President. Newcomb moved the office, but the act creating that office stated 

that the Surveyor General was to be located in Donaldsonville; therefore, the move was technically illegal. Political 

flack ensued; the US. Attorney General rendered an opinion 

that the move couldn’t be made. On March 14, 1844, Newcomb was ordered to return the office to Donaldsonville, 

Louisiana, and he complied; the office remained there until 

1861. 

In February 1844, Valentine Conway was ordered to and 

moved the Florida office to St. Augustine, Florida. He had 

been ordered to move the office in October 1843, but failed to 

comply. 

TheActofMay23,1844,5 Stat. 657, was a general townsite 

law for lands occupied as a townsite. Townsite entry had to be 

made before the lands were put up for public sale and could 

not exceed 320 acres, taken by legal subdivision. The lands 

could be entered by appropriate authorities to be held in trust 

for the occupants. 

The Act ofJune 12,1844,5 Stat. 662, abolished the Office of 

Solicitor of the GLO and directed that his duties be performed 

by the Recorder. 

The Appropriations Act of June 17,1844,5 Stat. 681, contained the following clause, under Surveys of Public Lands: 

101 
“For surveying, with reference to mines and minerals, 

in that portion of Michigan south of Lake Superior, at a 

rate not exceeding five dollars per mile,. . . twenty 

thousand dollars .,’ 

On June 25, 1844, the Commissioner entered into a contract with Douglass Houghton, a Michigan State Geologist, 

for the rectangular survey of the township lines in Upper 

Michigan, from range 23 west and westward and north of the 

fourth correction line. The surveys were to be made “with 

reference to mines and minerals” and included 4,000 miles of 

township and section lines. 

Surveyor General Johnston wrote the Special Instructions 

for these surveys. One provision was that the range lines 

along the correction line were to be 6 miles and 50 links 

apart, reflecting the policy already described that was used in 

Wisconsin to correct for convergency. 

Houghton’s arrangement with the Commissioner was 

actually to obtain knowledge of the mineral deposits, or in 

actuality a geological survey in conjunction with his work as 

a geologist for the State of Michigan. Houghton arranged a 

subcontract with William A. Burt and John Mullett for the 

survey of the township and section lines, while he did the 

geologic examinations. Apparently the rectangular surveys 

were being used as a means of paying for a geological survey 

at a slightly higher than normal rate per mile. 

While Burt surveyed the township lines, Houghton and 

Mullet surveyed section lines and did their geology work as 

they progressed. The solar compass was used on all of this 

work. By the fall of 1845, over 40 townships had been surveyed in this manner. Unfortunately, Houghton and two of 

his boatmen drowned in a storm which wrecked his boat on 

October 13, 1845. The fatal accident occurred near Eagle 

River on Point Keweenaw, the most northerly protrusion of 

Upper Michigan into Lake Superior. 

Lucius Lyon had replaced William Johnston.as Surveyor 

General at Cincinnati, June 30, 1845. Lyon reported the 

Houghton death to the Commissioner on October 30,1845. In 

his following report dated November 10,1845, Lyon made the 

following statement: 

“The Solar Compass has been used with great satisfaction in all of the surveys of public lands in this State 

(Michigan) for some years past, and its introduction into 

general use would unquestionably promote the accuracy of the public surveys in all parts of the United 

States.” 

The surveys in Upper Michigan, “with reference to mines 

and minerals,” were later carried on under contract with 

other deputy surveyors. 

On September 20, 1844, a circular letter was sent to all 

Surveyors General directing them that thereafter all payments of contracts would be made directly to the deputies by 

the Treasury Department. After a contract was completed, 

the Surveyor General had to certify the correctness of the 

account and send it directly to the Treasury for payment. 

The Commissioner didn’t have enough manpower to handle all the account checking. If the billing was made directly 

to the Treasury, handling would be eliminated, which was 

purely an economy measure. The problem was that the 

Treasury people weren’t surveyors and Treasury frequently 

paid the accounts without any knowledge of what they were 

paying for. It didn’t take long for fraudulent accounts to be 

sent to the Treasury for payment. Newcomb in Louisiana 

iumped on the fraud possibilities almost immediately. The 

submitting of accounts direct to the Treasury was soon rescinded and were again submitted through the Commissioner. 

A significant letter of that decade was sent to William 

Johnston on September 26, 1844, which contained clear instructions for the Dependent Resurvey of T. 1 s., R. 7 E., 

Michigan Meridian, laying down rules of double proportion 

for the restoration of lost corners. The entire letter follows: 

General Land Office 

September 26, 1844 

William Johnston, Esq. 

S. Gen’l, Cincinnati 

Ohio 

Sir: 

I request your attention to the immediate resurvey of 

Township One South, of Range Seven East, in Michigan. The errors in the survey of this Township were 

made the subject of a letter from this to your Office, on 

the 8th June 1833, and again on the 9th May 1834 a 

petition signed by fifty one of the inhabitants of this 

Township was forwarded to the Surveyor General, with 

directions to have the matter adjusted in accordance 

with the principles laid down in the letter of 8th June 

1833. 

If the agreement by the settlers required by the Letter 

of 8th June 1833 has been obtained, it is well, but I do 

not consider it indispensable to the operations required 

of this and your Office. The land must be resurveyed, 

and for this service you will employ a Deputy in whose 

experience, skill and integrity you have the most implicit confidence, and if possible, one enjoying also the 

confidence of the Settlers in this Township. You will 

furnish the Deputy with the original field notes, of the 

survey of this Township, and direct him to make a 

thorough search for the old lines and corners, all of 

which, that can be clearly identified, will be reestablished. The lines and corners which cannot be 

found, must be established in Strict Conformity with 

the field notes, where practicable-working from the 

nearest original marks which can be found. But where it 

shall appear on running lines where neither the old 

lines nor corners can be found, that they will differ in 

length from those laid down in the field notes, the excess 

or deficiency must be apportioned among the Sections in 

just proportions; - for instance, - suppose that all of 

the lines of Sections 25 to 36, inclusive, of this Township 

are found in the field, and no other lines or corners, and 

the measurements in the original field notes show that 

each Section contained exactly 640 acres, or 80 chains 

square; - In running the trial or guide line from the 

North corner between Sections 25 to 26, due North to 

the North corner between Sections 1 and 2, it is found 

that this line, instead of being 320 chains long, is 340; - 

then the boundary of each Section on it, instead of being 

returned in the field notes as 80 chains, should be returned as 85. Where the boundaries of the Sections on 

102 
any such line are of different lengths, the length to be 

given to the boundary of either of those Sections, must 

be in proportion to the length of that boundary laid 

down in the field notes so, as the length of the entire last 

line now found by measurement, is to the entire length 

of the last line given by the field notes. The same course 

exactly will be pursued with the East and West lines, 

and the discrepancies will in like manner be apportioned, with this difference only, that where the true 

length of the Section boundaries on these lines, will, by 

a few links, either cross or fall short of the guide meridians laid down as before directed, those meridians 

should not be altered from a due North and South line 

on account of such a slight variation, - but where the 

variation will be important, the North and South lines 

must diverge from a straight line, till the extreme 

points, ascertained as above directed, of the East and 

West boundaries, of a Section, unite with those of the 

North & South boundaries and at the junction of their 

points the Section corners will be established in a 

permanent and durable manner, and the Section boundaries will be run and marked in straight lines between 

the corners thus established, taking care perfectly to 

eradicate all the trial or guidelines which may have 

been run, and in this way, whatever discrepancies exist 

will be equitably divided among the different Sections. 

In fixing the last half mile posts; the Deputy must in 

like manner, apportion the discrepancies among the 

quarter Sections, where the field notes show that the 

half mile stakes were placed exactly equidistant between the Section corners, they must be so placed between the Section corners found as above directed: - 

but where it would appear from the field notes, that the 

half mile stakes were not placed exactly equidistant 

between the Section corners, the discrepancies found 

must be apportioned as above directed. The original 

field notes will not be corrected, but any matter of correction must be entered in a new field book, which, 

when the work is finally completed, should be bound 

with the original field notes, and proper and distinct 

references made in red ink from the original to the 

corrected field notes, and vice versa. Ample and satisfactory security should be required of the Deputy for the 

faithful performance of his contract, and the Duplicate 

of his Bond, with a copy of his instructions, should be 

forwarded to this office. Corrected plats will also be 

forwarded to this office, and the District Office, when 

the work is completed. As the vested rights of a number 

of individuals may be affected by this resurvey, you 

cannot too earnestly urge upon the Deputy, the necessity for the utmost care and exactitude in executing it, - 

and in being governed by all the marks of the original 

survey, that can be clearly identified. 

Very respectfully 

Your Obt Serv 

Tho. H. Blake 

Commissioner 

The principles laid down by this letter were those described 

in the “5th General Position” in the letter from Whitcomb to 

Haines on March 28,1840, pertaining to the proposed resurvey of T. 33 N., R. 11 E., Second Principal Meridian, Noble 

County, Indiana. They also spelled out the principle mentioned in the letter of June 8,1833, from Hayward to Micajah 

T. Williams when the petition was first made for the resurvey 

of T. 1 S., R. 7 E., Michigan. The wording of this letter for the 

method of double proportion is almost identical to that used 

in the 1930 and subsequent Manuals. 

T. 1 S., R. 7 E., Michigan, was resurveyed by Hervey Parke 

in 1845. The plat of the original survey made by Wampler in 

181 9is shown in Fig. 37. The 1845 resurvey plat is shown in 

Fig. 38. New areas were returned on the plat approved 

November 27, 1845 (see Fig. 39). 

The Act ofMarch 3, 1845, 5 Stat. 742, enabled Iowa and 

Florida to become States. After boundary adjustments, Iowa 

was admitted by the Act of December 28,1846, 9 Stat. 117, 

with her present boundaries. That left a large part of Minnesota and the Dakotas unattached to any territory for almost 

three years. Florida, which had formed a government in 1838 

and 1839 and petitioned for admission, was also officially 

admitted under this act. 

The Appropriations Act of March 3, 1845, 5 Stat. 752, 

provided for the employment of assistant surveyors to supervise the survey of private land claims in Florida and resurveys in Louisiana. Funds were appropriated for extensive 

resurveys to correct erroneous and defective surveys in 

Louisiana, Illinois, Missouri, and Michigan. 

Money was also provided for resurveys in Alabama to supply replacement for the field notes that were burned in 1827. 

This act also directed that the Surveyor General’s office be 

moved from Cincinnati to Detroit and the records be turned 

over to the States of Ohio and Indiana. 

On March 27,1845, Charles A. Bradford, at Pontotoc, Mississippi, was notified of his appointment to be Surveyor 

General of Mississippi, replacing Downing. 

On February 17, 1845, Conway in Florida reported an 

overlap of townships to the Commissioner along with a diagram of the situation. The Commissioner’s reply, dated April 

8, 1845, is complex and difficult to analyze without the original and corrective survey plats. Basically, it appears that a 

Deputy Wrightman surveyed Tps. 14 S., Rs. 17 through R. 20 

E. The southern boundary of those townships was a basis 

parallel or standard parallel. Wrightman also surveyed Tps. 

15 through T. 20 S., R. 19 E., and T. 20 S., R. 18 E. Deputy 

Clements had surveyed Tps. 15 through T. 19 S., R. 20 E., at a 

later date. Both the Wrightman and Clements surveys had 

been approved by Conway in 1843 and 1844, but no lands had 

been sold, for some unknown reason. Fortunately, Conway 

contracted with Deputy A. Worrall to retrace Clements’ 

work. Worrall found that Clements’ survey overlapped the 

Wrightman survey by approximately one and one-half miles 

in longitude and quarter mile in latitude. Commissioner 

Blake was very indignant about the whole thing and chastised Conway in strong language. 

He instructed Conway to contract with a deputy to investigate the whole matter thoroughly and, if as reported, the 

Clements’ surveys were to be terminated and closed against 

the Wrightman senior survey. All traces of Clements’ work 

which overlapped into Wrightman’s were to be destroyed 

after Clements’ lines were retraced and closed against 

Wrightman, leaving fractional sections in Clements’ work. 

103 


I^ . I 

I 

50. N 

! I 

I 4 

Figure 38. T.lS., R.7E., Michigan. Dependent Resurvey - 1845. 

,I 

Figure 39. T.lS., R.7E., Michigan. New Areas for Resurvey. 
I -___. 

I- 
Sections 6,7,18,19,30, and 31 in R. 20 E. would cease to exist 

and sections 5, 8, 17, 20, 29, and 32 would be fractions. 

Holding the senior survey and terminating the junior overlapping survey against it is still the general policy today 

wherever land ownership and patenting history permit that 

action. 

On Aprii 16, 1845, James Shields, a Democrat, became 

Commissioner of the GLO, the same Shields who had challenged an obscure lawyer and surveyor named Abraham 

Lincoln to a duel. Fortunately Lincoln talked him out of it. 

By letter of April 21, 1845, Johnston was directed to close 

the office in Cincinnati and move it to Detroit, Michigan. He 

was to turn over the Ohio Survey reqords to the State of Ohio. 

The Detroit office was opened sometime during May or June 

1845. 

On May 12, 1845,. George W. Jones was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Wisconsin and Iowa 

at Dubuque. 

On May 13,1845, Frederick R. Conway was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Illinois and Missouri 

at St. Louis, replacing Silas Reed. Also on May 13, 1845, 

Pierre T. Landry was notified of his appointment as Surveyor 

General of Louisiana. 

On May 26,1845, Lucius Lyon was notified of his appointment to be Surveyor General of Ohio and Michigan and thus 

ended the office known as “Surveyor General of the United 

States,” which no longer existed in fact. Lyon did not take 

over the office in Detroit until June 30, 1845. 

On July 24, 1845, Lyon was ordered to transfer the Ohio 

records if all the public lands in that State, especially islands, 

had been surveyed. The public land surveys hadn’t really 

been thoroughly completed, but Samuel Williams, Chief 

Clerk, had been working on the records for some time, getting 

them indexed and boxed up; he turned the surveys over to the 

State of Ohio on August 11, 1845. Lyon reported that there 

were still many problems, uncompleted surveys, and field 

notes remaining. Sam Williams, who had been Chief Clerk 

for approximately 30 years, retired and did not move to Detroit. 

On August 14, 1845, Robert Butler was notified of his 

appointment as Surveyor General of Florida, effective October 1 and until the end of the next session of Congress, 

replacing Valentine Y. Conway. Butler was appointed to a 

four-year term in January 1846. 

On December 15, 1845, Lucius Lyoz was instructed to 

contract for the resurvey ofT. 33 N., R. 11 E., Second Principal Meridian, Noble County, Indiana. The resurvey was to be 

made according to the instructions for the resurvey of T. 1 S., 

R. 7 E., Michigan, which had been approved in June by 

Johnston. The citizens of Noble County finally got their survey after waiting only six years. The township was dependently resurveyed using double proportionate procedures. 

During the latter half of the 1840’~~ more and more examinations in the field were made by Deputy Surveyors 

under instructions from the Surveyors General. Those examinations would prove to be largely fiction; just as a subdividing deputy seldom squealed on a fellow surveyor who did 

exterior boundaries, an examining deputy would seldom 

squeal on the deputy he was examining for the simple reason 

that next season, that same person might be hired to examine 

his work. 

The Act of July 11,1846,9 Stat. 37, provided for sale of the 

leased mineral lead lands in Illinois, Arkansas, Wisconsin, 

and Iowa. These early efforts to lease the mineral lands had 

proved to be more costly than the revenue derived from the 

leases. 

The Wisconsin Enabling Act was approved on August 6, 

1846,9 Stat. 56. The Appropriations Act ofAugust 10,1846,9 

Stat. 85, authorized the survey of the Wisconsin-Michigan 

boundary from the source of the Brule River to the source of 

the Montreal River by Surveyor General Lyon but allowed 

only $1,000 for the job. On September 15,1846, Acting Commissioner James H. Piper instructed Lyon to have that 

boundary survey executed. Lyon had trouble getting anyone 

to do the work at the price. William A. Burt finally agreed to 

do it while surveying township boundaries in the region 

during the 1847 surveying season, using his solar compass. 

This is the first state boundary known to have seen surveyed 

entirely with a solar compass. Burt then closed his township 

lines against his State line. 

After adjustment of the western boundary, Wisconsin was 

admitted to the Union on May 29, 1848, 9 Stat. 233. 

The Act ofAugust 8,1846,9 Stat. 79, equalized the salary 

of the Surveyors General and required that each deputy 

surveyor must “on the return of his surveys, take and subscribe an oath or affirmation that those surveys have been 

faithfully and correctly executed, according to law and the 

instructions of the Surveyor General. . . ” It provided for stiff 

penalties if a deputy surveyor was caught doing defective or 

fraudulent work. Congress was paying heavily for corrective 

resurveys and was trying to make sure honest work was 

performed. 

The Appropriations Act of August 10, 1846, 9 Stat. 85, 

provided $30,000 for surveying the “copper region of Michigan, Wisconsin, and Iowa, with reference to mines and 

minerals.” This act enabled the Wisconsin and Iowa territories to be added to the geological surveys. Annual Instructions 

went to Lucius Lyon on August 21 and to George W. Jones in 

Dubuque on August 31, 1846. Similar instructions went to 

the other Surveyors General. 

Jones was instructed to extend the Fourth Principal Meridian north to Lake Superior, double chaining the meridian. 

All township boundariesand section lines were to be run with 

extra care, the meridional lines run due north and south. The 

east-west section lines were to all be run random and true, 

thus eliminating double corners around the township exteriors except on correction lines. The level of Lake Superior 

was to be used as the datum from which all levels or elevations were to be based. A profile of each section line was to be 

made, with a horizontal scale of 3 inches equal to one mile 

and a vertical scale of 660 feet equal to 1 inch. How the levels 

were to be determined isn’t clear, perhaps by aneroid barometer which was invented in France in 1843. The elevation of 

all hills, valleys, prairies, etc., were to be determined; all 

topography, minerals, and geologic formations were to be 

shown on the maps. The field notes were to be thoroughly and 

carefully kept, with at least two pages devoted to each mile. 

These instructions are quite long and very detailed. The 

surveyors were allowed $6 per mile for all this detailed work. 

The most significant item was the elimination of double 

corners around the exterior boundaries of the townships. 

Jones prepared his 1846 Instructions to the Deputy Surveyors 

110 
following these annual instructions and incorporated the 

new requirement. Of course, this idea had already been in use 

to some extent prior to 1846, especially in Iowa. The elimination of double corners around the exterior boundaries as a 

policy was a big step toward improving the rectangular system as it was executed in the field. 

On September 14, 1846, Lyon was instructed to make a 

personal inspection of T. 1 S., R. 7 E., Michigan, and determine the extent to which settlers had been cut off from their 

improvements by the recent resurvey. Lyon was to determine 

the value of any losses and make a report, which would be the 

basis for an act of relief by Congress to reimburse them. The 

resurvey of that township was controversial; many surveyors 

did not believe that double proportion was an acceptable or 

proper method of restoring lost corners. Though double proportion was a sound principle, most surveyors wanted to 

square up the erroneous lines which was really an impossibility and contrary to law. 

On January 6,1847, Richard M. Young became Commissioner of the GLO, replacing Shields, who became a Brigadier 

General in the Army and went off to fight in the Mexican 

War. James H. Piper had been Acting Commissioner since 

mid-1846. Young took over on March 1, 1847. 

The Act of March 1,1847,9 Stat. 146, provided for further 

geological surveys in Michigan and for the sale of the mineral 

lands in quarter sections at the minimum price of $5 per acre. 

This was four times the price of agricultural lands, but still a 

very low price for the rich deposits of iron ore. 

On July 28,1847, Young wrote to Charles E. Morse, Deputy Surveyor in Little Rock. Morse had had an argument with 

Surveyor General Pelham about surveying in a township 

where the east boundary, done on a previous survey, was 

crooked. Pelham had told Morse to retrace the boundary but 

run the sections lines due north and then close the first tier of 

sections against the boundary; Morse didn’t agree. Part of 

Young’s letter follows: 

“In the case cited by you, where the East boundary of 

a Township is crooked or Serpentine, I consider the 

decision of the Sur. Gen’l correct, that the Meridional 

subdivisional lines should run due North and the areas 

of the subdivision of the Eastern tier of Sections should 

be calculated, whether excessive or deficient, and entered on the plat. 

This course is much better than running parallel 

lines, or by a mean variation, as it limits the evil to a 

single tier of sections when by either of the other 

methods it would be carried through the Township. 

Hence there would be no danger of the work being 

rejected if executed in accordance with the instructions 

of the Sur. Gen’l. 

From the remark at the close of your letter that such a 

line cannot be resurveyed or straightened, I deem it 

proper to suggest that where the lands in a Township 

are in the Market and in surveying the adjacent 

Township, it is found that your bearings and measurements do not accord with those returned of it, it may be 

retraced, and the Deputy would be paid for that Service, 

but the line should be exactly remarked and the corners 

precisely re-established.” 

Morse was being told to run what is now called a “Sectional 

Guide Meridian” that would limit the errors to one range of 

sections and not allow any other sections to be distorted by 

trying to run parallel to a defective east boundary. 

The policy was a good one and should have been continued 

thereafter, but it wasn’t. The authority for this deviation was 

the Reorganization Act of 1836. 

For many years, attempts had been made to have the large 

swamp land and marsh areas turned over to the States. In 

September 1847, the Surveyors General were ordered to submit estimates of the amount of swamp lands that had been 

surveyed. It must be assumed that those estimates were 

based on the plats and field notes, because those records were 

the only source of such information available to the Surveyors General. 

On April 22,1848, Lucius Lyon issued Special Instructions 

to John Mullet, Deputy Surveyor, for the subdivision of 15 

townships near Green Bay in northern Michigan. Mullet was 

instructed to run the section lines between the northern tier 

and western range of sections random and true, thus avoiding double corners around the exterior boundaries of the 

townships. This practice was put into increased use, and the 

1851 Oregon Manual made it official by spelling out that 

closing corners were to be used nowhere except on standard 

parallels. 

The Act of June 28,1848,9 Stat. 242, authorized the Commissioner of the GLO to have surveyed the islands and keys 

in south Florida, which couldn’t conveniently be surveyed in 

the normal rectangular manner, “in such mode and manner” 

as the Commissioner saw fit. Thus, Congress was again 

allowing a departure from the rectangular system in a special case. The Commissioner had no intention of changing the 

system-just the technical procedure of doing the surveys on 

the ground. After neogtiations, Special Instructions were 

issued to Professor A. D. Bache of the US. Coast Survey 

(USCS) on October 28, 1848, for the survey of the Florida 

Keys. Basically, the plan was to tie the USCS triangulation 

net to the township surveys in southeastern Florida, triangulate out onto the Keys, and tie them all into the net. The next 

steps were to calculate or protract the position of the 

township and section lines onto the islands. Where each 

section line crossed an island, it would be marked with meander corners. Section corners were to be established if they fell 

on an island and section lines run quite normally. The islands 

were to be meandered, plats made, and field notes written, all 

according to law. It should have worked, but it didn’t. Over 

the next several years, the USCS mapped the Keys, but very 

few corners or meander corners were established; they were 

not meandered. Although a large amount of money was expended, the Commissioner received no plats, just some good 

maps. The USCS didn’t understand the difference between a 

map and a plat for the conveyance of land by legal descriptions. The splitting of the responsibility for the surveys between two different government agencies with different missions didn’t work then, and for all practical purposes, never 

did work. 

The USCS completed their work in 1858. The last of the 

plats as surveyed by the USCS were delimvered to the GLO in 

November 1870. 

On August 14,1848,9 Stat. 323, Congress established the 

Territory of Oregon, which included all the lands west of the 

Continental Divide, between 42” and 49” north latitude. This 

111 
heralded the inevitable expansion of the public land surveys 

to the Pacific Coast, the Manifest Destiny. Oregon received 

sections 16 and 36 in support of public schools. 

On August 28, 1848, letters went to Weakley at Florence, 

Alabama; Bradford at Jackson, Mississippi; and Pelham at 

Little Rock, Arkansas, instructing them to close those Surveyor General Offices and turn the survey records over to the 

respective States by June 30, 1849. 

The Florence, Alabama, office was finally closed about 

October 29, 1849, and the records transmitted to the State 

sometime by early 1850. The Jackson, Mississippi, office was 

also closed in October 1849, and the survey records turned 

over to that State in the same month. The order to Pelham in 

Little Rock was later rescinded and that office remained 

operating for many more years. 

On September 29, 1848, Lyon in Detroit was ordered to 

close out the Indiana surveys and turn over the records. The 

Indiana records were transmitted to that State sometime in 

1850. 

Also on September 29, 1848, Conway in St. Louis was 

ordered to close out the Illinois surveys and turn over the 

records, but the Illinois Legislature failed to pass the required act for their custody. The Commissioner wrote annual 

letters to the Illinois governor for years requesting the legislation. Finally, on March 27, 1869, the Illinois Legislature 

passed the required act and the records were turned over to 

that State in July 1869. 

On January 16, 1849, Caleb H. Booth was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Wisconsin and Iowa, 

replacing George W. Jones. 

The Act of March 2, 1849, 9 Stat. 352, granted all the 

swamp lands that were subject to overflow and unfit for 

cultivation to the State of Louisiana. Under the terms of the 

act, any river front tracts surveyed in accordance with the 

Acts of March 3, 1811, and May 20, 1824, were exempt, as 

were lands already patented. Every legal subdivision (40- 

acre, one-sixteenth section or fractional lot), the greater part 

of which was swamp or overflowed, was granted to the State. 

The purpose was to aid the State in the diking, drainage, and 

reclamation of those lands. The wording of the act was defective because it didn’t spell out criteria for determining what 

was “swamp and overflowed unfit for cultivation.” Those 

decisions were the source of much contention and litigation 

in later years. 

On May 30,1849, Young instructed Boyd to confer with the 

governor of Louisiana because the State had to pay the expenses of determining the swamp lands and preparing the 

list. Boyd was to contract with deputies who would go in the 

field, examine every tract, meander the swamp or overflowed 

lands if necessary, and prepare plats. Young suggested that 

$6 per day in the field and $4 per day for office work would be 

a fair rate of pay; apparently the State didn’t agree with that 

procedure and costs. 

On April 11,1850, Young again instructed Robert W. Boyd 

that where lands were “notoriously” known to be swamp and 

overflowed, those lands could be listed. If the field notes 

indicated entering or leaving a swamp, lines could be drawn 

connecting those topographic calls and thus determining the 

swamp area. In townships notoriously known to be swamp, 

the section lines could just be protracted without a field 

survey of them and the whole township could be listed. Only 

those lands that were overflowed at “normal stages” of a river 

could be listed. The whole cost had to be paid by the State, 

which could appoint an agent to work with the Surveyor 

General if it chose to. 

The Act of March 3,1849,9 Stat. 403, created the Territory 

of Minnesota, which included the lands north of Iowa, west of 

Wisconsin and east of the Missiouri and White Earth Rivers. 

This large area had been technically unorganized since 

Iowa’s admission to the Union. Minnesota was granted sections 16 and 36 for schools and all States thereafter received 

those two sections for school lands. The Surveyor General of 

Wisconsin and Iowa at Dubuque was in charge of the public 

land surveys and was instructed on July 9,1849, to keep the 

Minnesota records separate from those of Iowa and Wisconsin. 

Also on March 3, 1849, 9 Stat. 395, Congress established 

the Department of the Interior, which brought together 

under the Secretary of the Interior the Patent Office, the 

GLO, Indian Affairs, Public Buildings, and several other 

functions of government. The first Secretary of the Interior 

was Thomas Ewing from Ohio. No major changes were made 

in operating the GLO, whose new commissioner, Justin Butterfield, was appointed on July 1, 1849. 

The public lands had ceased to be a major source of revenue. Expansion to the West and the gold discovered in 

California in 1848 was of more importance than revenue 

from the land sales, so it was only fitting that the GLO should 

be under the new department instead of under the Treasury. 

112 
CHAPTER III

THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE 

WITHIN THE 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

113 
THE PERIOD 1849 - 1910 

The first major act of Congress affecting the public land 

surveys under the new Department was passed on September 

9,1850,9 Stat. 452, admitting California to the Union, which 

was never organized as a territory. The new State received 

sections 16 and 36 in each township as well as other grants. 

Also on September 9, 1850, 9 Stat. 453, the Territory of 

Utah was established, which included the lands between 

California and the Continental Divide and between 37” and 

42” north latitude. 

On September 20,1850, 9 Stat. 466, Congress passed the 

first major act granting land to subsidize the construction of 

railroads. Lands had previously been granted to aid in construction of roads and canals. The railroad was the NEW 

method of transportation. The act granted the evennumbered sections, 6 and/or 15 miles each side ofthe right-ofway in Illinois, Mississippi, and Alabama for constructing 

the Chicago and Mobile Railroad, which later became the 

Illinois Central. Most of the lands had already been surveyed 

so this large grant did not in itself immediately affect the 

surveyors. 

The Act of September 27, 1850, 9 Stat. 496, created the 

Office of Surveyor General in Oregon and extended the rectangular system to that Territory. It also allowed the “geodetic method” for executing the surveys. 

This geodetic method was meant to be surveying by use of 

an alidade and plane table, making a topographic map at the 

same time as the survey of township and section lines. The 

method was never used, except that a special set of geodetic 

notes were made along the Willamette Meridian. A transit 

was used to cut in peaks and other topography so that the 

surveys could first be made in the best agricultural areas. 

The act also granted donations of 320 acres to a single man 

and 640 acres to a man and wife who were settlers in the 

Oregon Territory. The boundaries of these Donation Land 

Claims (DLC’s) were supposed to follow section subdivision 

lines wherever possible. Similar donations had been made to 

settlers in Florida in 1848 and 1849. Most of the DLC’s were 

taken up in what is now the State of Oregon; fewer were 

taken in Washington. After the State boundary between 

Oregon and California was officially surveyed, one claim was 

found to be partly in California, but was honored anyway. 

On October 11,1850, William Gooding was appointed Surveyor General of Oregon; he refused the job. On November 

26,1850, John B. Preston in Chicago, Illinois, was notified of 

his appointment to the position. Preston travelled to 

Washington, D.C., and was briefed in March 1851. He 

gathered equipment, four solar compasses which were diverted from Michigan, transit, sextant, and chains. Preston 

travelled over the Isthmus of Panama, where he wrote to 

Butterfield on April 30, and arrived in Oregon City in May, 

where he established his office. He made a reconnaissance of 

the Columbia and Willamette Rivers, established the initial 

point for the Willamette Meridian in the hills west of Portland at the end of May, and let contracts for the initial 

surveys. This meridian controls all the surveys in Oregon 

and Washington. The meridian line, running south, was surveyed by James E. Freeman from Wisconsin. The meridian 

running north and the baseline east to the Cascade Mountains and west to the Coast Range were surveyed by William 

Ives. Freeman was from Wisconsin and Ives from Michigan. 

All of the early surveys were made with a solar compass. 

The Appropriations Act of September28,1850,9 Stat. 515, 

states in part: “That hereafter the meridian of the observatory at Washington shall be adopted and used as the American meridian for all astronomical purposes, and the meridian of Greenwich, England shall be adopted for all nautical 

purposes.” The Washington Meridian was used to describe 

State, territorial, and Indian boundaries until repealed August22,1912,37 Stat. 342. The Washington Meridian is 77” 

03‘ 02.3” in longitude west of Greenwich. 

Another major act was passed on September 28, 1850, 9 

Stat. 519; the so-called Swamp Lands Act. The Act of March 

2, 1849, 9 Stat. 352, had granted the swamp lands in 

Louisiana to that State only. The 1850 act extended the grant 

to Arkansas and all other States then in the Union and 

granted all “legal subdivisions” (sixteenth, section or fractional lot), the greater part of which was “wet and unfit for 

cultivation.” If less than half the legal subdivision was 

swamp land, no part of it was granted. The Swamp Lands Act 

was extended to Minnesota and Oregon on March 12,1860, 

12 Stat. 3. It placed a large burden on the Deputy Surveyors 

and Surveyors General. They were not always able or inclined to carry it out faithfully within the intent of the law. 

As already briefly described, the act was difficult to administer; the States involved were supposed to pay the costs inherent with the determinations, and making up of the lists. 

Various methods were to eventually develop; for example, 

Florida set up a “Board of Internal Improvement” by an act of 

its legislature on January 24,1851. This board was to handle 

the swamp lands, make examinations, determinations, and 

lists. Arkansas set up a “Board of Swamp Land Commissioners” with basically the same function. Illinois and Missouri 

appointed commissioners for the purpose. In some cases, the 

plats were used to determine the swamp and overflowed 

lands, in others the field notes. 

The Secretary of the Interior and Commissioner insisted 

that this was a land grant of public lands and that title could 

not be passed to the States until the lands were surveyed and 

properly identified. Yet, on July 12, 1858, Commissioner 

Thomas A. Hendricks admonished Warner Lewis, the Surveyor General at Dubuque, for having surveyed an island 

which was mostly swamp even though Wisconsin paid for the 

survey of it. Hendricks told Lewis he had no authority to 

survey such lands because they would pass to the State anyway. It is a strong probability that many swamp lands were 

granted to some States, especially, Louisiana and the Everglades in Florida, without being actually surveyed. The lists 

made up by the State Surveyor General of California were in 

certain cases proven fraudulent. 

Although the swamp and overflowed lands were a massive 

headache, they did not have any effect on the system of 

rectangular surveys, only the information to be obtained 

while doing those surveys in the field. The present rules for 

swamp and overflowed lands are well described in the 1973 

Manual of Surveying Instructions, Sections 7-95 through 7- 

99; only incidental mention will be made of them hereafter in 

this book. 

On December 13, 1850, the Territory of New Mexico was 

114 
created by Presidential Proclamation, which included what 

is now Arizona, New Mexico, and part of Nevada. 

The Appropriations Act of March 3, 1851, 9 Stat. 598, 

provided for a Surveyor General of California; on March 24, 

1851, Samuel D. King was appointed to the position. King 

also travelled to Washington, D.C., for briefing and received 

three solar compasses, transit, and other equipment. King 

followed Preston across the Isthmus and arrived in San Francisco on June 19, 1851, where he established his office. He 

contracted with Leander Ransom on July 8, 1851, for the 

establishment of the Mount Diablo Meridian. Ransom 

reached the summit of Mount Diablo on Thursday, July 17, 

1851, and excavated or drilled a hole in the “haycock shaped” 

solid rock of the highest pinnacle on the mountain to mark 

the initial point of the Mount Diablo Meridian, but he 

couldn’t measure and run line off the mountain peak. He got 

on line south of the initial point approximately 12 miles from 

it, and through a series of offset lines running east and north, 

established the corner of townships 1 north and 1 south, 

ranges 2 and 3 east. He then ran the baseline west toward the 

initial point and the surveys in California were underway. 

The Act ofMarch3,1851,9 Stat. 631, provided for appointment of commissioners to handle the multitude of private 

land claims in California. After the commissioners verified 

the claims, the surveys were to be made under the supervision of the Surveyor General. 

The most signficant action taken in 1851 affecting the 

rectangular system of surveys also occurred on March 3; the 

first Manual of Surveying Instructions was officially issued. 

It was written to the Surveyor General of Public Lands in 

Oregon and was prepared by John M. Moore, Principal Clerk 

of Surveys. It isn’t certain just what Moore’s true position was 

at that time. A private act of Congress dated February 1, 

1849, 9 Stat. 759, titled “An Act to Compensate JohnM. 

Moore,” refers to Moore as “late Chief Clerk in the General 

Land Office.” Moore became Chief Clerk about 1815; he may 

have retired but was hired to write the 1851 and 1855 Manuals because of his vast knowledge of the public surveys. There 

can be very little doubt that Moore actually wrote most of the 

opinions on and instructions for the surveys to the Surveyors 

General and others, even though they were signed by the 

current Commissioner or himself as Acting Commissioner 

during his employment as Chief Clerk. 

John Preston and Samuel King were issued a supply of the 

1851 Oregon Manuals for their use in Oregon and California, 

so it was immediately entirely applicable in those States. On 

March 13,1851, a supply was sent to Boyd at Donaldsonville, 

Louisiana, with instructions to construct mounds at corners 

in accordance with the Manual. On July 16, 1851, a supply 

was sent to Lorenzo Gibson at Little Rock with similar instructions. On April 23, 1851, Manuals were sent to George 

B. Sargent at Dubuque, Iowa, with instructions to run his 

range lines north to intersections with the correction lines 

and establish closing corners according to the Manual. 

On October 8,1851, Sargent was instructed to resurvey T. 

90 N., R. 3 W., Fifth Principal Meridian, Iowa. The original 

surveys had been made in 1836 and 1837, many of the corners 

were missing, and in places, mounds called for at corners 

where “timber abounds.” Most of the township was sold, but 

the residents petitioned for a resurvey. The township was to 

be resurveyed, all found corners honored and held, and all 

missing corners restored by double proportion. Sargent was 

to tie in all improvements and lines of occupancy as a basis for 

“an exchange of deeds” by the settlers if they desired, where 

the resurvey put improvements onto someone else’s land. 

In the 1851 Annual Reports, Charles Noble in Detroit 

recommended hiring an “Inspector of Surveys” to help prevent frauds and grossly erroneous surveys. Sargent in Dubuque reported that he was withholding a small percentage 

(10 percent) of each contract to pay for examiners of surveys; 

thus, the deputy was indirectly paying for the examination of 

his work. 

On March 8,1852, Noble was instructed to hire an examiner of surveys on a per-diem basis. That letter also started to 

classify the different types of resurveys being made in Michigan. Part of that letter follows: 

“The surveys about to be undertaken will be designed 

to remedy two classes of defects and frauds. 

F I R S T C L A S S . Incomplete Surveys. -Where a portion 

only of the lines in a township is found to have been 

actually surveyed-and wherein some lines have been 

run and some corners established, which lines and corners can now be found. That portion of such original 

surveys which shall have been determined to be thus 

available, by retracing the same, is to remain undisturbed, and be respected whether there have been sales 

made therein, or not - and the residue of such 

townships must be surveyed, as if originally, but made 

to connect in all particulars with the former. 

SECOND CLASS. Fraudulent Surveys - Where there 

is no evidence found in the field of any good intent on the 

part of the Deputy Surveyor to comply with the terms of 

his contract - No system being manifest in the field 

work, and an entire absence of marks and monuments 

whereby to designate the corners, and where no lines 

are traceable-. 

In this class of cases the lines will have to be run and 

corners established, as if originally, and all the old 

irregular lines and corners must be most carefully and 

thoroughly obliterated, but their connections with the 

true survey must be taken and exhibited in the notes so 

that they may be represented on the township plats and 

thus be never likely to mislead - but in cases where, 

amongst such irregular surveys, there has been any 

tract of land sold which is settled upon and occupied 

according to the irregular lines of the original survey, if 

the same are found, they are to be particularly respected, provided the occupant insists on having the 

samepreserved; but, in case he shall not so insist, then,. 

with his expressed written consent, duly attested, the 

Deputy Surveyor may disregard such old irregular 

lines, and establish new regular lines as the boundaries 

of such section - But when an old irregular section 

corner is insisted on being maintained by the occupant 

of the tract, such, as a necessary consequence, will have 

also to be respected as governing the boundary of the 

adjacent sections, the lines of which will close on such 

corner. The marks on all such “bearing trees” as are not 

adopted, must be most effectually and indelibly, obliterated - and the new “bearing trees” will of course be 

marked with the usual initials, N. B. T.” 

115 
The letter goes on to say that the examinations of the 

resurveys should begin toward the end of the fieldwork so 

that the two operations would be completed about the same 

time for comparison and not cause delays. In future years, the 

gap between the fieldwork completion and then the examination would sometimes be several years. 

Most importantly, though, Butterfield was trying to classify resurveys. In his first class, he is describing a combination of what we call a dependent resurvey and a completion 

survey. Where actually originally surveyed, such as a half 

township, the corners were held fixed, and the other half was 

treated as never having been returned as surveyed at all. The 

difference is that he was connecting the new work to the old, 

and not closing against it, as surveying is done today. 

In the second class, he is describing what now is called an 

independent resurvey, with the exception that today, the 

occupants’ land is surveyed as a tract and is given a tract 

number, then the new work is closed against the tract. Butterfield is connecting the new work to the old tract, which 

would in all probability cause some heavy distortion in the 

connecting lines. The true independent resurvey as it is now 

known was not instituted until 1897. 

In March 1852 the Minnesota-Iowa boundary was surveyed; it was to be along the parallel of 43” 30’ north latitude, 

from the Mississippi River to the Big Sioux River. The initial 

point on the Mississippi, monumented with an iron post, was 

established by Thomas J. Lee of the Topographical Bureau of 

the US. Army by astronomic observations in the fall of 1849. 

Sargent at Dubuque had been instructed to survey the line 

but never got a contract going. In March, Sargent finally 

contracted with Captain Andrew Talcott, an astronomic surveyor, for the work. Talcott sent a crew under Deputy Surveyor, James Marsh, ahead of him to run a random line with 

a Burt solar compass. Talcott’s crews then came along running the line with a transit on a tangent line. They extended 

the range line between T. 100 N., R. 3 and R. 4 W. in Iowa to 

an intersection with the boundary. From this point on, corners were to be established at every half mile to stand and be 

marked as quarter section, section and township corners on 

the south boundary of T. 101 N., in Minnesota. At every 48 

miles, an astronomic station was set up, the true parallel of 

43” 30’ north latitude determined, and a falling measured to 

it from the tangent line. Corner moves were then computed 

for moving the temporary points on the tangent over to a true 

parallel of latitude and permanent quarter and section corners monumented. Thus the south boundary of Minnesota 

was established as a standard parallel for the rectangular net 

as well as a State boundary. It was later used as an auxiliary 

baseline of the Fifth Principal Meridian controlling the surveys west of the Mississippi River in Minnesota. The random 

line run by Marsh was used as a check on the astronomic 

positions and corner moves. As it turned out, the line run by 

Marsh, an experienced surveyor, agreed all the way and all 

the astronomic observations and calculations would not have 

been necessary. The Minnesota-Iowa boundary was surveyed 

between April 1 and September 6, 1852. 

On July 10, 1852, Sargent was instructed to adopt the 

Oregon Manual to govern the surveys in Minnesota. He was 

to get the Minnesota surveys under way by running guide 

meridians and standard parallels in accordance with the 

Manual. The letter also instructs him to use standard parallels and “check” meridians in Iowa and Wisconsin and thus 

avoid double corners wherever possible. On May 16, 1853, 

nearly identical instructions went to Warner Lewis, the new 

Surveyor General. 

The Deficiencies Appropriations Act of July 21, 1852, 10 

Stat. 15, provided that no further geological surveys would be 

made by the government unless authorized by law, which 

halted the geological surveys in the Michigan-Wisconsin 

country. 

On August 19,1852, Merriwether L. Clark at St. Louis was 

instructed to contract for the resurvey of T. 8 N., R. 5 E. and T. 

14 N., R. 2 E., Fourth Principal Meridian; and T. 15 N., R. 4 

E., Third Principal Meridian, in Illinois. He was to hold all 

original corners in place and execute the surveys in accordance with the letter of October 8,1851 (double proportion - 

T. 90 N., R. 3 W., Iowa). All improvements were to be shown 

as the basis of the “exchange of deeds.” 

Up until this time, double proportion was the method used 

to resurvey a “sold” township in Michigan, Indiana, Iowa, 

and Illinois. 

The Appropriations Act of August 31, 1852, 10 Stat. 76, 

made provision for the survey of several large islands off the 

coast of California, including Santa Cruz, San Miguel, Santa 

Rosa, San Bernardino (San Clemente), Santa Catalina, San 

Nicolas, and Santa Barbara. The surveys were to be executed 

by the USCS under instructions from the GLO, with plats 

and field notes to be returned to the GLO. On April 1,1853, 

Commissioner John Wilson instructed A. D. Bache of the 

USCS to tie in a corner of the rectangular system on the 

mainland, triangulate to the islands, run section lines, and 

meander the islands, similar to what was supposed to be done 

in the Florida Keys. But again, no rectangular surveys were 

made, or none have ever been found if there were any. Funds 

for these surveys were again appropriated in 1853 and in 

later years, but no plats were ever sent to the GLO. The 

islands were never surveyed as part of the rectangular system. 

On September 16,1852, John Wilson, who had been Acting 

Commissioner during much of Butterfield’s tenure in office, 

replace him as Commissioner of the GLO. 

On October 4, 1852, King in California contracted with 

Henry Washington to establish the initial point and survey of 

the baseline of the San Bernardino Meridian. Washington 

climbed to the “top of San Bernardino Mountain” on November 8 and erected a monument and flagged it, but he couldn’t 

run line or measure from that initial point. On November 17, 

he began from a point S. 45” W. from the monument, ran west 

7 miles, 47 chains, thence north 5 miles, 42.80 chains, to a 

point due west of the monument. By his computations, he was 

then 13 miles, 9.80 chains west of the initial point; from there 

he began his surveys of the baseline. Other surveys many 

years later ended up with two other “initial points” in addition to Washington’s. 

Henry Washington was an experienced surveyor who had 

worked extensively in Florida and Louisiana prior to emigrating to California. His work was excellent, but having to 

establish an initial point on a remote mountain peak was a 

handicap not even he could fully overcome. 

TheActofJunuury22,1853,10 Stat. 152, amended the Act 

of June 12, 1840, and again provided for transferring the 

plats and field notes to the State when the public land sur116 
veys were completed, on the provision that the State had to 

designate an office to accept the records and provided free 

access to them. All transfers of the survey records to State 

control since 1853 have been made under this law. After 

closure of a Surveyor General’s office, the Commissioner of 

the GLO became “ex-officio” Surveyor General. 

The Act of March 2,1853, 10 Stat. 172, created the Territory of Washington, beginning the breakup of the Oregon 

Territory. The new territory included all the country west of 

the Continental Divide, north of the Columbia River and the 

46th parallel of latitude. 

The Act of March 3, 1853, 10 Stat. 244, is probably responsible for the partial surveys of townships and the problems which that practice has caused ever since. The title “An 

Act to provide for the survey of the Public Lands in California, the granting of Pre-emption Rights therein, and other 

purposes,’’ may be misleading because most of the provisions 

were put into practice elsewhere under the wording of the 

appropriations acts. 

The act provides for the duties of the Surveyor General in 

California. He is to execute the public land surveys and 

survey the confirmed private land claims and has all the 

authority that had been given to the Surveyor General in 

Louisiana. The provision in Sec. 3 of the act states: “That 

none other than the township lines shall be surveyed when 

lands are mineral or are deemed unfit for cultivation; and no 

allowance shall be made for such lines as are not actually run 

and marked in the field, and where necessary to run.” 

The mineral lands had been excluded from the Donation 

Land Claims in Oregon. Now the mineral lands were being 

excluded from the surveys in California as were lands 

“deemed unfit for cultivation.” The deputy surveyors were 

being placed in the land classification business, the result 

being that only the more easily surveyed lines not known to 

contain gold or other valuable minerals were run in the field. 

The surveyors were being paid by the mile and picked the 

gravy; they ran only those lines they found to be necessary in 

surveying the section lines. These partially subdivided 

townships with protracted outlying quarter-sections have 

caused many problems in the present-day resurveys. 

Sec. 4 of the act allowed for use of the geodetic method of 

surveying and it also allowed for a departure from the rectangular mode of surveying and subdividing the public lands. 

There is no known instance in which those two provisions 

were used. Except for the private land claims (Spanish and 

Mexican grants) and later the mineral surveys, all of the 

public lands in California were surveyed by the rectangular 

system. 

Sec. 6 of the act provided for preemption on the surveyed or 

unsurveyed public lands, except private claims, school or 

other state lands, and the mineral lands. Thus the mineral 

lands in California were excluded from both survey and 

preemption. 

On October 6, 1853, Colonel Henry Washington established the initial point of the Humboldt Meridian on the 

summit of Mount Pierce in north-western California. Once 

again, a nearly inaccessible mountain peak was used for 

erecting the initial monument. Washington began the survey of the Humboldt Meridian from a point on line north of 

the initial point, but because of the ruggedness of the terrain, 

dense brush and timber, very few surveys were made in the 

Humboldt system until many years later. The Surveyor 

General couldn’t get deputies to contract for surveys there at 

the price allowed by law, which was $15 per mile. 

On October 17,1853, Wilson instructed Lewis in Dubuque 

and John Loughborough in St. Louis to survey some islands 

in the Mississippi River and “other navigable streams” during the ensuing winter months, on the ice. Wilson thought it 

much easier to do it that way and they could get the work 

done for $6 per mile as a result. Of course, everyone knew 

that the regular township and section lines and meanders of 

lakes were often being surveyed in the winter in Michigan, 

Wisconsin, and Iowa. If the snow wasn’t too deep, it was much 

easier to get around when the ground was frozen. But this is 

the first instance in which the practice was given official 

sanction by the Commissioner. 

In the Annual Reports of 1853, George Milbourne in Little 

Rock and Loughborough in St. Louis reported that Arkansas, 

Illinois, and Missouri had refused to accept the field notes as 

a basis of swamp land lists. They also reported that levees 

had been or were being-built along the Mississippi River. 

Levees and cut-offs were being made along the Red River in 

Arkansas, which would shorten that river by some 92 miles. 

Ditches were being dug to drain the lands, thus changing 

their character; after drainage took place, it wasn’t very easy 

to tell what was swamp land before drainage. Manmade 

avulsions would throw ownerships on the other side of the 

river. 

On December 31, 1853, Wilson wrote to Loughborough on 

the subject of resurveys. The settlers in T. 48 N., R. 5 E., Fifth 

Principal Meridian, had petitioned for a resurvey. Private 

land claims were involved; apparently there was no government land remaining. Wilson refused to approve a resurvey 

on several grounds. He thought the Act ofFebruary 11,1805, 

was specific because the measurements and areas returned 

by the Surveyor General on the original plat were final. Only 

in extreme cases should the government become involved in 

boundary disputes and then, only with specific approval by 

Congress, along with funding. He thought that unless Congress passed a law relative to resurveys and how they should 

be done, the problem should be left up to a “competent and 

trusty” surveyor, who could prove that a resurvey was really 

necessary, in which case the settlers could petition Congress 

for the resurvey. He concluded the letter by saying, “With the 

foregoing remarks I dismiss the subject for the present. . . ” 

From then on, very few resurveys were made unless public 

lands were largely involved; instead, the work was diverted 

to the County and other local Surveyors. These men began 

almost immediately to write letters to the Commissioner 

requesting advice on how to do resurveys, restore “lost” corners, and subdivide sections. There were no official instructions for resurveys, such as the Manual was for surveys. Due 

to the history of the many corrective resurveys, many County 

Surveyors tried to and often did move original corners to 

their “proper” position, particularly quarter-section corners. 

Various methods were used to restore lost corners; confusion 

and litigation soon followed. 

The Act of May 30,1854, 10 Stat. 277, created the territories of Nebraska and Kansas. The Nebraska Territory included the vast area north of 40” north latitude between the 

Continental Divide and the Missouri and White Earth Rivers. The Kansas Territory was approximately the area be117 
tween 37” and 40” north latitude between the State of Missouri and the Continental Divide. 

The Act of July 17,1854,lO Stat. 305, extended the Donation Land Claims to Washington Territory and estabished 

the office of Surveyor General there. 

On August 12, 1854, James Tilton was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Washington. His 

instructions were sent on August 31; to continue with the 

surveys west of the Cascades and the Willamette Meridian 

network. He was to get manuals from Gardner in Oregon and 

use the same platting style. Tilton was especially warned to 

“secure” his office against fire. “No explosive fluid is ever to 

be used in lighting the office, and the hearth of the fireplace 

or stove should be so guarded as to the possibility of fire 

coming into contact with the floor.” 

After the Florence fire in 1827, orders were issued to all 

Surveyors General to rent separate buildings for their offices, 

not connected to or closely adjoining any other building. No 

one was allowed to live in the same building that the Surveyor General’s office occupied. Several plans were devised 

for constructing fireproof buildings and metal-encased vaults 

to house the records, but none of those plans were ever 

funded. The Surveyor General had to rent space at the lowest 

reasonable rate, which was about $500 per year. The warning 

to Tilton was prophetic. He opened his office in Olympia by 

March 1855. From Charles K. Gardner in Oregon he got the 

Washington plats, field notes and supplies, and continued the 

established survey operations in Washington. 

The Act ofJuly22,1854,10 Stat. 308, established the office 

of Surveyor General in New Mexico and another for the 

territories of Kansas and Nebraska. It also granted Donation 

Land Claims, similar to the Oregon donations, to actual 

settlers in New Mexico. It isn’t immediately known how 

many such claims were taken up in New Mexico which included what is now Arizona. In 1880, Donaldson reported 135 

such claims, which were to be taken by legal subdivisions. 

The Surveyor General of New Mexico was given double 

duty-he had to examine and determine the validity of private land claims under Spanish and Mexican grants. In 

effect, he was Land Commissioner as well as Surveyor General. 

On August 5, 1854, William Pelham was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of New Mexico. He was 

a good choice because he had been Surveyor General of 

Arkansas from 1841 through 1849 and was experienced with 

the system and private land claims. Further instructions 

were sent on August 21, 1854; Pelham was to establish a 

meridian and baseline to govern the New Mexico Territory 

surveys. He was to fully acquaint himself with the Spanish 

laws and court decisions relating to them, and collect the 

documents on which the claims were based. It was a horrendous job that Pelham never fully accomplished, but he 

jumped in with both feet. He arrived in Santa Fe on December 28, 1854, and immediately opened his office; on his way 

he made a reconnaissance of the Rio Grande Valley. In his 

1855 Annual Report, Pelham said, 

“Agreeable to your instructions I selected a hill about 

six miles below the mouth of the Puerco River, which is 

two hundred feet high and of a rocky formation. This 

hill is nearly round, and is washed at its base by the Rio 

Grande. I have therefore established this hill as the 

initial point, and have caused a suitable monument to 

be erected on its summit.” 

On March 9, 1855, Pelham contracted with John W. Garretson for the survey of the New Mexico Principal Meridian 

and baseline. In April, Garretson actually erected the initial 

monument and began the surveys of the meridian from it; 

this meridian system controls all the surveys in New Mexico 

and southwestern Colorado. The New Mexico surveys were to 

be done in accordance with the Oregon Manual. 

John Calhoun was appointed Surveyor General of Nebraska and Kansas. Wilson sent him instructions on August 26, 

1854. The parallel of 40” north latitude was to be surveyed 

west from the Missouri River as a baseline of the Sixth 

Principal Meridian for a distance of 108 miles or, 18 

townships, where the initial point of the Sixth Principal 

Meridian was to be established. A “durable” monument was 

to be established on the Missouri River as the southeast 

corner of T. 1 N., R. 18 E., Sixth Principal Meridian. From 

this baseline, the township boundaries were to be surveyed 

north and south in accordance with the Oregon Manual. 

Since 40” north latitude was the boundary between the two 

territories and later the State line, it was to be carefully 

surveyed and monumented. 

Calhoun established his office in Fort Leavenworth, Kansas Territory, and on November 2, 1854, contracted with J.P. 

Johnson for the survey of the 108 miles of baseline. He 

contracted with Charles A. Manners for erecting the durable 

monument on the Missouri River and examination of Johnston’s work. A castiron post was set 52.55 chains west of the 

river to keep it from washing away, Johnson’s survey upon 

examination proved to be “grossly in error.” In April 1855, 

Calhoun contracted with Manners for the resurvey or correction of the baseline, which Manners did in July of that year. 

However, because of the delay caused by the corrective survey, 

the first guide meridian of the Sixth Principal Meridian 

was established 60 miles west of the river instead of 

108 miles. Manners surveyed the meridian line north into 

Nebraska and other deputies went to work on the township 

lines in Kansas and Nebraska in August 1855. Work progressed rapidly in the open prairies of those territories, hampered only by the Indians. 

The Act ofAugust4,1854,10 Stat. 575, added the Gadsden 

Purchase to the Territory of New Mexico and many more 

private land claims. 

Surveyor General Gardner of Oregon complained in his 

annual report of the problems he was having with the Donation Land Claims (DLC), which were supposed to be taken as 

nearly as possible by legal subdivisions of sections. But in 

fact, the occupied claim lines laid in all directions, or if 

generally east and west, they didn’t conform to the subdivision lines. Not very many settlers were coming in and filing 

their claims so Gardner didn’t know where they were located. 

The township and section line surveys were being held up as 

a result. If Gardner surveyed the claims as staked on the 

ground, many small fractions would be left within a section. 

As it turned out, the solution was quite simple. Gardner 

and his successors surveyed all of the township and section 

lines first without regard to the claims, but made notes of 

where the lines apparently entered and left an occupied 

118 
claim. Later, as the claims were actually filed and verified, 

the DLC boundaries were surveyed and tied to the existing 

rectangular surveys. The first claim surveyed in a township 

was designated No. 37, the second No. 38, and so on. When all 

claims in a township were surveyed, a DLC plat was made. 

The fractions remaining in a section were lotted with a lot 

number and area, which could then be sold by the land office. 

A separate set of field notes were made, called simply the 

“DLC Notes.” It eventually worked out quite well; one interesting item, however, did occur. In 1859, Surveyor General William W. Chapman reported that he had surveyed a 

DLC which laid across a navigable river, the Umpqua, without meandering the river through it, and returned the portion within the river as part of the total area of the DLC. 

Thus, the bed of a navigable river was patented; it is presumed that this could pose an interesting legal problem of 

ownership, especially if accretion was involved. 

The DLC plats in Oregon were basically on the same plan 

as the system used in Florida, except that the claims were not 

called sections. An 1849 Fldrida plat is shown in Fig. 40. 

An Oregon DLC plat of T. 23 S., R. 7 W., Willamette 

Meridian, is shown in Fig. 41. Comparison of these plats 

readily reveal the similarities. 

The Appropriations Act of March 3, 1855, 10 Stat. 643, 

provided funds for the Surveyor General and for surveys of 

Utah Territory. David H. Burr was appointed Surveyor 

General and established his office in Salt Lake City on July 

27, 1855; he designated the southeast corner of the “Temple 

Block” as the initial point for the Salt Lake Meridian. The 

survey of the baseline and meridian was begun by Deputy 

Surveyor Frederick H. Burr in 1856. By the end of September, he had surveyed the baseline four miles east and 36 miles 

west and the meridian had been run 84 miles north and 72 

miles south. Not much more was done before 1857. 

The same appropriations act provided funds for the survey 

of the “Outlines of Indian Reservations” in Kansas and Nebraska. During the later part of 1855 and most of 1856, 

Calhoun had most of his deputies working on the exterior 

boundaries of Indian reservations so that he could avoid them 

in the regular rectangular work. In the ensuing years, more 

and more reservation boundaries were surveyed in Nebraska, Kansas, and Minnesota territories, but the responsibility 

was divided between Indian Affairs and the GLO for nearly 

ten more years. 

The 1855 Manual of Surveying Instructions, an expansion 

of the Oregon Manual of 1851, again prepared by John M. 

Moore, Principal Clerk of Surveys, was officially issued on 

February 22,1855. It established the present system of baselines, principal meridians, spacing of standard parallels, and 

guide meridians. 

Although technical details of monumentation, rectangular 

and closing limits, equipment, and the like have evolved 

since that time, the basic system of rectangular surveys has 

remained the same since this manual was issued. The 1855 

Manual, Diagram B, shows the unusual numbering of lots 

bordering on the north and west boundaries of the township. 

Those we now call lots 1 and 2 are labeled No. 2, and those we 

now call lots 3 and 4, are also labeled No. 2. It is unknown 

why this method of designating those lots was used; it was a 

change from that used after 1832 and it continued until 1866. 

Fig. 42 is a copy of Diagram B, from the 1855 Manual. 

The 1855 Manual by inference indicates that only navigable streams were to be meandered on both banks. Perhaps 

only one bank of a non-navigable river was to be meandered; 

only the field notes of a particular township surveyed during 

the period would reveal the true policy adopted. This manual 

does indicate that a true line across meandered streams was 

only surveyed on township boundaries and meridional section lines. On latitudinal lines (east-west section lines) the 

line was run west from a section corner to the meandered 

stream and east from the section corner (a mile to the west), 

to the meandered stream and meander corners established, 

with a tie made across the stream. This practice almost invariably created a kink in the section line crossing the 

stream. For other details, the Manual should be consulted, 

including the specimen field notes. 

Thomas A. Hendricks was appointed Commissioner of the 

GLO on August 8, 1855; he was the first commissioner who 

apparently had no background or qualifications for the job. 

He was born near Zanesville, Ohio, on September 7, 1819, 

and graduated from South Hanover College, Indiana in 1841. 

He was elected successively to both houses of the Indiana 

Legislature and to the US. House ofRepresentatives in 1851. 

Hendricks was a politician of the Democratic Party with no 

real background in surveying and the land laws. He later 

became a US. Senator, Governor of Indiana, and ran for 

President in 1868,1876,1880, and 1884, when he was elected 

Vice President and died in 1885. Some of the rulings and 

letters during Hendrick’s tenure were not always correct. 

On February 6,1856, Hendricks replied to Leander Chapman at Detroit regarding the proper method of restoring the 

lost quarter corners on the east and west boundaries of section 4, T. 34 N., R. 10 E., Second Principal Meridian, Indiana. 

The original survey had returned the east line as 79.96 

chains and the west line as 79.90 chains. The County Surveyor had found those lines to measure 72.84 chains and 

73.71 chains respectively, between found section corners. 

The local Circuit Court had ruled that because the 1800 law 

said the excess or deficiency was to be placed in the last half 

mile going into the north and west boundaries, the quarter 

corners should be restored exactly 40 chains north of the 

southeast and southwest corners of Section 4. That, of course, 

put all the error in the last or north half mile. Chapman and 

the County Surveyor disagreed with the decision by the court 

and asked Hendricks’ opinion. He replied that the Act of 

February 11,1805, controlled because the lengths of the lines 

returned on the plat were by law the true length, and therefore the lost quarter corners should be restored by single 

proportionate measure. This would place the east quarter 

corner at 36.44 chains north and the west quarter corner at 

36.90 chains north of the section corners. 

This letter is included here to illustrate the type of questions or problems which began flooding the Commissioner’s 

office after the suspension of resurveys in 1853. It also illustrates the gross misunderstanding of the various surveying 

laws by many surveyors and even the courts. There were no 

rules for restoring lost corners by Congress; they had to be 

developed as they had been in part by the Commissioner and 

the courts. The Commissioner rendered these rulings without any legal authority to do so; they could only be opinions 

unless public lands were involved. However, the reader 

should always keep in mind that the Commissioner was a 

119 

'Z. 

3 

L, i 

iE No 7 WEST WILLAMETTE MERIDIAN OREGON 

I 

i 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 


very busy man with many activities under his supervision. 

The opinions written were probably written by the Principal 

Clerk of Surveys; unless litigation was pending, they were 

probably signed by the Commissioner without careful analysis. 

In the spring of 1856, John Loughborough, Surveyor 

General of Illinois and Missouri, prepared his Instructions to 

Deputy Surveyors. He sent a draft of these instructions to 

Hendricks for approval and requested permission to have 

them printed. Hendricks approved and requested Loughborough to send him 200 copies when they came off the press, 

which Loughborough did later in the year. These Instructions were basically in agreement with the 1855 official 

Manual, but in conflict in the limits of closure for a township 

(Manual, 3% chains; Instructions, 5 chains). Also, the Manual required lines into the north and west boundaries to be run 

random and true with closing corners only on standard parallels. The Instructions called for closing (double) corners 

against the north and west boundaries, which was the “old 

practice” before 1846. Much more importantly, however, was 

the appendix to Loughborough’s Instructions, pages 47 

through 64, which outlined an opinion on the proper method 

of restoring lost corners and subdividing sections. Basically, 

section corners are to be restored by single proportion between found corners to the north and south of the missing 

corners, but there is some hedging and, depending upon interpretation, suggests a double proportion under certain circumstances. Under Item [231 on page 55, the following statement is made, “None of the Acts of Congress, in relation to the 

Public Lands, make any special provision in respect to the 

manner in which the subdivisions of Sections should be made 

by Deputy Surveyors.” This seems incredible in view of the 

fact that all Surveyors General were supplied with copies of 

the acts of Congress, including the Act ofFebruary 11,1805, 

and the Act of April 5,1832, which most certainly states how 

sections are to be subdivided. These Instructions should be 

studied in their entirety to fully understand what the suggested methods of subdividing sections were. The most controversial was that the center quarter-section corner should 

be established at midpoint on the east-west centerline and 

the center of the quarter sections (NE %6) should be established in the same manner. 

After receiving the 200 copies of Loughborough’s Instructions, Hendricks began immediately to send a copy to County 

Surveyors who generally inquired about how to subdivide 

sections; he referred them to pages 47-62 of the Instructions. 

This policy continued until about 1863 when the supply of the 

1856 Instructions became exhausted. The policy of restoring 

lost section corners primarily by single proportion between 

found corners to the north and south was continued until 

1882. The argument for the method was usually given about 

as follows: It is well known that the meridional section lines 

are actually run in the field, due north, with quarter and 

section corners established at 40 and 80 chains. These lines 

are always run. It is also well known that most deputies do 

not run the east-west section lines all the way, instead they 

stub out from a section corner just 40 chains and set the 

quarter corners on the east-west lines, but return field notes 

with the quarter corner as being at midpoint and on a true 

line. Therefore, a quarter corner to the east or west would not 

be a proper basis for restoring a lost section corner in its 

original position. The same basic argument was used for 

establishing the center quarter corner at midpoint on the 

east-west centerline and connecting the north and south centerlines therefrom to the original quarter corners on the 

north and south sides of the section. The method outlined was 

believed to make a more equitable division of the section into 

quarter sections, and on down into one-sixteenth sections. 

Looking at the subject from a point of equity, the argument 

has some understandable merit, but to scholars of the law, as 

enacted by Congress, the method of subdividing sections was 

erroneous. It was this whole argument that prompted the 

now famous letter of opinion written by Abraham Lincoln on 

January 6, 1859, in which he said the center quarter corner 

should be placed at the intersection of straight centerlines 

connecting the original quarter-section corners. 

On January 6,1857, Loughborough was instructed to prepare the Illinois and Missouri records for transmittal to the 

State authorities and close the St. Louis office by June 30, 

1857. The surveys in those States were still not complete and 

no State legislation had been passed for acceptance of the 

records. The order was not implemented. 

The Legislative, Executive, and Judicial Appropriations 

Act ofMarch 3,1857,11 Stat. 206, under “Surveyors General 

and their Clerks.” directs the Secretary of the Interior to 

cause the “Surveyor General northwest of the Ohio” (at Detroit, Michigan) to be moved to St. Paul, Minnesota. On 

March 27, 1857, Charles L. Emerson was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Minnesota at Detroit; 

he actually replaced Chapman on April 12,1857, and closed 

the Detroit office on May 11. He opened the Minnesota office 

in St. Paul on May 23, 1857 and he transferred most of the 

Michigan records to the State at that time. After bringing all 

arrears up to snuff, he completed transfer of the Michigan 

records in May 1858. He received the Minnesota survey records from Lewis in Dubuque and continued the Minnesota 

surveys without any particular trouble. 

In July 1857, David H. Burr, Surveyor General of Utah, 

was run out of Salt Lake City by militant Mormans. John C. 

Hays from California was appointed to officially fill the 

vacant post but apparently never went to Utah. Burr eventually sent his son to Salt Lake City, who turned over the 

Utah records to the Territorial Governor on April 5, 1858. 

The Utah office remained vacant until September 29,1859, 

when Samuel C. Stambaugh took over the post; but he quit in 

1861 and for all practical purposes, no rectangular surveys 

were made in Utah until 1869. 

The 1857Annual Report indicated that some 17,000 miles 

of survey lines had been run in Kansas and 7,000 miles in 

Nebraska, which is indicative of the speed in which those 

plains were being surveyed. 

On May 25, 1857, Hendricks gave approval and instructions to William J. McCulloh, Surveyor General of Louisiana, 

for the survey of dried-up “Spanish Lake” in townships 9 and 

10 north, range 9 west, Louisiana Meridian. The lake had 

been meandered during the original survey but had dried up 

due to drainage, and the plat was approved October 27,1857. 

This is the first of the dried-up lake surveys that were discovered. 

The Commissioner considered all non-navigable lakes to 

be public land subject to survey and disposal the same as any 

other unsurveyed public land. Prior to 1825, only the very 

126 
large lakes were meandered; after 1825, lakes of 40 acres and 

upward in size were meandered, and these only, because 

settlers didn’t want to pay for land they couldn’t farm. So the 

lakes were meandered and left unsold, but were still public 

land subject to survey and disposal when and if they dried up, 

or if the government chose to survey and sell them. Surveying a body of water wasn’t very practical until after it 

dried up, for whatever reason. The States tried to claim lakes 

under the Swamp Lands Act, but the claims were rejected 

because they weren’t “swamp land,” nor “overflowed,” under 

the meaning of those acts. The position was that shallow 

lakes, ponds, and marshes were to be surveyed whenever the 

Commissioner chose to approve a survey, because they were 

not navigable and were not streams as defined by Sec. 9 of the 

Act of May 18,1796. Therefore, the abutting owners could not 

own them in common to the center of the stream. Since the 

government had merely meandered them to segregate them 

from lands being sold, the adjoiners could not and did not 

have any riparian rights. 

In retrospect, knowing the basis of the elimination of these 

small lakes from land sales, the argument was valid. Ironically, the 1851 and 1855 Manuals had lowered the size of 

lakes to be meandered to 25 acres, but then cautioned that 

“shallow ponds, readily to be drained, or likely to dry up, are 

not to be meandered.” Perhaps John Moore harbored doubts 

about the validity of the contention that dried-up meandered 

lakes would remain public land. The survey of some of the 

more important dried-up lakes will be mentioned herein as 

they occurred. With very few exceptions, only lakes that were 

completely dried up were surveyed. 

Minnesota was admitted to the Union on May €1,1858,11 

Stat. 285, with its present boundaries. 

The Acts of May 18, 1858, 11 Stat. 289-290, pertain to 

California. The first act makes authenticated copies of the 

Surveyor General’s records admissable as evidence in a court 

of law. The second act makes it a crime to falsify documents to 

establish land claims, which was precipitated by persons 

faking papers and documents in attempts to enlarge or establish claims under Spanish or Mexican laws. 

The Act of May29,1858,11 Stat. 293, extended the public 

land laws and surveys to the lands east of the Cascade Mountains in Washington and Oregon territories. In late 1858, 

David P. Thompson, Deputy Surveyor, extended the Willamette Baseline across the mountains to the southeast corner ofT. 1 N., R. 32 E., and ran the Columbia Guide Meridian 

north for 25 miles. The large area east of the Cascades was 

finally being opened for survey and settlement. 

The 1858 Annual Report indicates that 20,000 miles had 

been surveyed during the year in Kansas-Nebraska, the solar compass was being used on all surveys in New Mexico, 

and all land offices had been ordered to police the public 

timber lands and stop the stealing of timber, especially pine, 

from the public domain. Timber thefts were particularly 

great in Wisconsin, Minnesota, and parts of Florida. 

On July 23,1858, Hendricks issued Special Instructions to 

a County Surveyor in Michigan for the survey of some islands 

in Thunder Bay. The letter contains the following statement: 

“I would inform you in reply, that upon the terms proposed you can proceed to survey those islands and for 

your guidance in the work I herewith enclose a copy of 

the Instructions that were issued some years ago to the 

United States Deputy Surveyors in the District of Illinois and Missouri and which instructions are applicable 

to all of the other Surveying Districts.” 

The Instructions referred to are those by Loughborough in 

1856. The 1855 Manual contained some instructions and 

field note examples for the survey of islands. The 1856 Instructions, page 33 [851 and [86], are better written and 

easier to understand concerning island surveys, but the letter does not mention the 1855 Manual and implies that the 

1856 Instructions are applicable in full to all surveying districts. Perhaps it was meant to be only so in relation to island 

surveys. Incidentally, the authority for this survey was revoked because the County Surveyor wanted half interest 

ownership of the islands from the applicants in payment for 

doing the survey. The Commissioner considered such 

arrangements illegal. 

On August 12,1858, Hendricks wrote to a man in Ohio who 

reported a hiatus, 40 to 50 rods wide, between T. 10 N., Rs. 1 

and 2 E., Michigan Meridian, and wanted the strip surveyed 

so he could buy it. The man reported two separate and distinct range lines. Hendricks refused the request on the 

grounds that the original survey plats did not show any 

unsurveyed strip; therefore there was none. 

On February 7, 1859, Surveyor General Henry M. Rector 

in Little Rock, Arkansas, resigned. The Little Rock office was 

closed on March 12,1859, and the records were turned over to 

the Register and Receiver of the Land Office for safekeeping. 

In 1876, many of the Arkansas records were in the Washington office being properly filed and organized; the remainder 

were in Little Rock. Donaldson reported that the Register 

turned over the Arkansas records to the State in 1861 during 

the Civil War. 

Oregon was admitted to the Union on February 14,1859, 

11 Stat. 383, with its present boundaries. 

In August 1859, the west boundary of Minnesota was surveyed south from Big Stone Lake by Chauncey Snow and 

Henry Hutton to the Iowa line, under contract with the Commissioner. Iron posts were used in places on that boundary. 

In 1859, the parallel of 43” 30’ latitude, the south boundary 

of Minnesota, was extended west into the Dakota Territory, 

under contract with the Surveyor General of Wisconsin and 

Iowa, and township boundaries north of that line were surveyed, which began the surveys in a virgin area. 

On October 18, 1859, Samuel A. Smith, a politician, became Commissioner of the GLO, replacing Hendricks. In the 

1859 Annual Report, Smith discussed the proposed Homestead Law being debated in Congress. Rumors of this law, 

which Smith opposed, were greatly reducing land sales. 

On February 23, 1860, Joseph S. Wilson, who had been 

Chief Clerk in the GLO until his appointment, replaced 

Smith as Commissioner of the GLO. 

The Swamp Lands Act was extended to the states of Minnesota and Oregon by the Act of March 12, 1860, 12 Stat. 3. 

None of the states admitted after this date are “swamp land 

states.” 

On October 27, 1860, Wilson wrote the following letter in 

regard to dried-up lakes: 

127 
a 

Figure 43. T.28N., R.22W., Fourth Principal Meridian, Minnesota Plat Approved February 24, 1854. 

A, C. Root, Esq. 

Lyons, Iowa 

Sir: 

I have to acknowledge the receipt ofyours of Oct. 22nd 

in which you state that a small Lake in Township 83 

North, of Range five East, at the time of the Government Survey has since been drained owing to ditches 

made by the adjoining land owners (yourself being one) 

and that being desirous to enter it you apply to this 

office for instructions how to proceed in order to do so. 

In reply I have to state, that whenever one or more 

persons living adjacent to a lake or pond, which by 

nature or other causes, such as evaporation, etc. becomes dry, wish to purchase the whole or any part of it, 

and with that view, desire it to be surveyed, he or they 

must file an application in writing, accompanied by an 

affidavit of at least two respectable persons, that they 

have made a personal inspection of the premises, and 

setting forth the facts of the disappearance of the water 

and the arable character of the land, and that the applicant has given notice to the coterminous proprietors, of 

his proposed application to the Surveyor General for the 

extension of the lines of the Public Surveys. 

At any time after two months from the filing of said 

application, should no objection be made, the Surveyor 

General may extend the lines over the tract in question, 

and this Office will authorize the Register and Receiver 

to open the lands to sale or location. 

No Survey however can be ordered, unless the water 

has wholly and permanently disappeared. 

Very Respectfully 

Your Ob’t Servant 

Jos. S. Wilson 

Commissioner 

This letter is nearly identical to following letters of the 

period concerning the survey of dried-up lakes. Some letters 

pointed out that a survey did not give the applicant any 

special rights and that the land temporarily enured to the 

benefit of abutting owners until the lake was totally and 

permanently dried up. In the closed States, application was 

made directly to the Commissioner who would then contract 

for the survey, if it had been approved. 

The survey of the lake in T. 83 N., R. 5 E., was apparently 

not made until many years later. An 1879 letter listed the 

plat of it as having been approved March 21, 1876. 

On December 19,1860, Wilson authorized Emerson in St. 

Paul to have surveyed a drained and dried-up lake in sections 

4,5,8, and 9, T. 28 N., R. 22 W., Fourth Principal Meridian, 

Minnesota. The lake was meandered in the original survey of 

1853. The survey was made by C. W. Iddings, Deputy Surveyor, and the plat approved by Emerson on January 4,1861. 

These plats are shown in Figs. 43 and 44. The land in the 

former lake is now part of an airport in South St. Paul, 

Minnesota. 

The 1860AnnuaZ Report indicated that most of the surveys 

in Iowa were completed and that the surveys in Dakota were 

progressing rapidly, but with no land office, sales could not be 

made. Wilson also reported that many unauthorized and 

illegal surveys were being made in Carson Valley, Nevada by 

“County Surveyors.” In 1860, Nevada was still not actually 

organized into a surveying district and many miners took it 

on themselves to have the land surveyed. 

Kansas was admitted to the Union on January29,1861,12 

Stat. 126, with its present boundaries. 

The preliminaries to the Civil War were felt in February 

1861. South Carolina had seceded from the Union on December 20, 1860; this action was followed in January by the 

secession of the other Southern States including Florida and 

Louisiana. 

On February 6,1861, the Surveyor General of Louisiana, 

William J. McCulloh, notified Wilson that he had resigned 

his position and had turned over the Louisiana records to 

State authorities. 

On February 10,1861, Francis L. Dancy, Surveyor General 

of Florida, sent similar notification. The “bond book” lists 

Dancy as officially resigning on March 4,1861. However, in 

April, he actually approved a survey that had been made in 

April. After the war, the deputy tried to collect on the contract without any luck. The survey was also never honored 

and was done over in the 1870’s. 

The Civil War started on April 12,1861, and ended April 9, 

1865. The surveys suffered due to reduced appropriations and 

consolidation of offices but did proceed at a slower pace. 

The Act of February 28,1861,12 Stat. 172, organized the 

Territory of Colorado, with the same boundaries as that State 

now has. Colorado Territory was created out of lands that had 

been in the territories of Utah, New Mexico, Kansas, and 

Nebraska. The act established the office of Surveyor General 

for the new territory, and Francis M. Case, appointed the first 

Surveyor General of Colorado on April 5, 1861, established 

his office in Denver on June 17, 1861. The baseline of the 

Sixth Principal Meridian had been extended along the 40th 

parallel to the summit of the Rocky Mountains under the 

Surveyor General of Kansas and Nebraska, Ward B. Burnett, 

in 1859, so Case had only to contract for expansion of the 

existing rectangular system. 

The Act of March 2,1861, 12 Stat. 209, created both the 

Territory of Nevada and the office of Surveyor General. 

Nevada consisted of lands taken from Utah. John W. North 

was appointed Surveyor General on March 28, 1861, and 

established his office at Carson City on June 22,1861. North 

contracted with Butler Ives for the extension of the Mount 

Diablo Meridian into Nevada from California. Ives ran the 

second, third and fourth standard parallels into Nevada and 

executed other rectangular surveys around the Carson Valley area in 1861. No new meridian and baseline was created. 

All of Nevada is on the Mount Diablo system. 

Also on March 2,1861, 12 Stat. 239, the Dakota Territory 

and the office of Surveyor General were created; the Dakota 

Territory included all the Nebraska Territory between Minnesota and the Rocky Mountains and between 43” and 49” 

north latitude. George D. Hill was appointed the first Surveyor General of Dakota Territory and he took office on June 

27,1861. He established his office at Yankton, South Dakota, 

on July 1, 1861. No new meridians or baselines were established at the time. The south boundary of Minnesota was 

extended west as a Standard Parallel of the Fifth Principal 

Meridian and used as an auxiliary baseline for extending the 

surveys in the Dakotas. 

On March 16,1861, James M. Edmunds replaced Wilson as 

130 

Commissioner of the GLO. Wilson returned to the position of 

Chief Clerk in the GLO. 

On June 20, 1861, Edmunds notified William Cuddy, the 

new Surveyor General in St. Louis, that no appropriation had 

been made for the operation of his office and it would probably have to close by the end of June. On September 15, 

Cuddy was notified that $6,800 was allotted to him “for 

preparing the records to be turned over to the States.” Cuddy 

operated for the next two years on “slush fund” moneys. 

On February 17, 1862, the Supreme Court of the United 

States rendered the final decision in the case of Johnston us. 

Jones, 66 U.S. 117, which involved a dispute over the division 

and ownership of lands formed by accretion along the waterfront in Chicago, Illinois. The court ruled that the accretion 

should be divided along the new waterline in proportion to 

the original holding along the old. The case is the basis of the 

“apportionment of frontage” rule, the method used today 

when applicable. The rule is well described in Sections 7-58 

and 7-59 of the 1973 Manual. 

On March 3,1862, John A. Clark, Surveyor General of New 

Mexico, fled from Santa Fe because it had been invaded by 

Texas soldiers of the Confederacy. Clark packed up most of 

the records, except some of the Spanish Archives, and sent 

them to Fort Union. He returned to Santa Fe on May 20, 

1862, and found almost everything in good order; the Texans 

had taken most of the furniture but had left the records 

unmolested. 

By Sec. 4 of the Act ofMarch 14,1862,12 Stat. 369, Nevada 

was made part of the California surveying district under the 

Surveyor General in San Francisco. The office in Carson City 

was closed after operating only six months. Confusion in the 

Nevada surveys followed. 

The Act of May 15,1862,12 Stat. 387, created the Department of Agriculture, which would one day take administrative control of large areas of the public lands, and, in some 

cases, survey parts of those lands. 

The Homestead Law was enacted by Congress on May 20, 

1862,12 Stat. 392. The law applied to persons over 21 years of 

age, “who has never borne arms against the United States 

Government or given aid and comfort to its enemies.” The 

homesteader could acquire patent to 160 acres, upon proof of 

settlement and cultivation, conforming to legal subdivisions, 

after the lands had been surveyed. An original township 

survey in Nevada in 1948 was executed to allow patent on a 

homestead, filed on in 1923. The homestead patent could not 

issue until the land was officially surveyed. Patent to surveyed homesteads could be accelerated by a cash entry payment of $1.25 or $2.50 per acre. Although the Homestead 

Law was amended many times in later years, the basic law 

remained the same; 160 acres of agricultural land was given 

to anyone who would settle on it and plant a crop there. The 

law greatly increased the need for extension of the rectangular public land surveys. 

The A c t o f May 30,1862,12 Stat. 409, was entitled “An Act 

to reduce the Expenses of Survey and Sale of the Public Lands 

in the United States.” 

Sec. 1 of the act states that contracts for surveys would not 

be binding on the United States until approved by the Commissioner of the GLO. Great delays in execution of the fieldwork resulted because of the lapse in time between a contract 

being negotiated by a Surveyor General, transmittal to and 

approval by Washington, return to the Surveyor General, 

and then finally a party outfitted and sent to the field. The 

fieldwork was usually executed the following field season, 

perhaps a year or more after the initial signing of the contract. But all subsequent contracts were approved in 

Washington until the contract system was abolished in 1910. 

Sec. 2 of the act made the 1855 Manual of Surveying Instructions part of every contract. The Manual, Special Instructions of the Surveyor General, when not in conflict with 

the Manual, and Instructions from the Commissioner, were 

also made part of the contracts. Thus, in theory at least, the 

conflicts between the 1855 Manual and the 1856 Instructions 

for Illinois and Missouri, were eliminated by law. The 1855 

Manual was the controlling document and the Surveyors 

General could not issue instructions in conflict with it. But, 

as previously noted, the 1855 Manual contained no instructions for restoration of lost corners and subdivision of sections. Those rules continued to be formulated by the Commissioner with little consistency. 

Sec. 3 gave the Commissioner full power to establish surveying fees within the maximum allowed and also required 

that the cost of surveying and platting private land claims be 

paid by the claimant before a patent could be issued. 

Sec. 4 combined Utah and Colorado into one surveying 

district under the Surveyor General of Colorado; it also combined Nevada and California, as previously noted. 

Sec. 8 gave the Surveyor General of New Mexico the additional duties of Register and Receiver. He was then in effect 

the entire land office in that large territory. 

Sec. 10 of the act provided for the first of the “deposit 

Settlers wishing to speed up the surveys could 

apply and deposit a sum sufficient to pay the cost. The Surveyor General could then survey the township at the expense 

of the settlers; however, not many settlers chose to pay the 

costs this would incur. 

The Act ofJune 14,1862,12 Stat. 427, was entit1ed“An Act 

to protect the Property of Indians who have adopted the 

habits of civilized life.” The act provided for protection of 

those Indians who had received an allotment of tribal lands 

according to treaty stipulations. The Indian agent was to 

protect the allottee from trespass, etc. Nothing was said 

about how the agent was to determine the boundaries of an 

allotment and thus prove a trespass occurred. The method of 

surveying allotment boundaries was not spelled out by statute until the Act of April 8, 1864. 

The Act of July 1,1862,12 Stat. 489, added another duty to 

the hard-pressed Surveyors General. The act was the huge 

railroad land grant to subsidize the construction of the Union 

Pacific and Central Pacific Railroads from the Missouri River 

to the Pacific Ocean. A right-of-way 200 feet in width on each 

side of the track and all odd-numbered sections for 10 miles 

each side of the track were granted. The grant did not apply to 

mineral lands. If necessary, the railroad was given the right 

of eminent domain (they could condemn private lands). Sec. 7 

of the act required that the lands be surveyed as soon as any 

portion of track was completed. 

This act and subsequent, similar, railroad grants placed a 

heavy burden on the surveyors. It also caused the partial 

survey of many townships. The act is very long and complex, 

prohibiting a synopsis here. For full details of this and other 

railroad grants, the acts themselves should be reviewed. 

132 
October 8, 1862, Thomas A. Townsend, the Surveyor 

General at Dubuque, suddenly died. James M. Edmunds 

directed Isaac N. Higbee, the Chief Clerk to operate the 

office, but Higbee could not approve surveys or enter into 

contracts. The law did not allow for an “acting” Surveyor 

General. Higbee conducted the business until Henry A. 

Wiltse was appointed to the post on January 29, 1863. 

The Act ofFebruary24,1863,12 Stat. 664, established the 

Territory of Arizona and the office of Surveyor General. All of 

the New Mexico Territory lying west of the present ArizonaNew Mexico boundary, including part of present Nevada, 

was included in Arizona Territory. Levi Bashford was 

appointed Surveyor General in August 1863 and opened an 

office in Tucson on January 25, 1864. Apparently he never 

executed any surveys for there is no record of any. The 

Appropriations Act of July 2, 1864, 13 Stat. 344, attached 

Arizona to New Mexico under Clark at Santa Fe. Bashford 

was terminated and closed the office on July 4, 1864. The 

same act attached Nevada and Idaho to the Colorado surveying district and made Montana part of the the Dakota 

surveying district. 

Some confusion may have resulted. Colorado was so remote 

from Nevada that John Pierce in Denver could hardly contract for surveys there. Plats of Nevada surveys were 

approved by Lauren Upson, Surveyor General of California, 

from 1864 to 1866. 

The Act of March 3,1863,12 Stat. 754, required the President to reserve lands for townsites on rivers, harbors, and 

other prospective centers of population. The townsites were 

to be surveyed by the government into “urban and suburban 

lots of suitable size.” This act was the origin of the so-called 

“Presidential Townsite”, now codified in 43 U.S.C. 711 -712. 

The first townsite surveyed and lots sold under this act was 

the Townsite ofPort Angeles in the present State of Washington. 

The Act of March 3, 1863, 12 Stat. 808, established the 

Territory of Idaho, and included the area which is now the 

States of Idaho, Montana, and Wyoming. No provision was 

made for surveys. 

On March 24,1863, Edmunds replied to John Cross, County Surveyor of Page County, Iowa, on how to subdivide sections. Edmunds stated that the center quarter corner should 

be at the intersection of centerlines run between original 

quarter-section corners, with the exception of sections on 

exterior boundaries or where the sections were otherwise not 

normal. This letter was the first step away from the method 

used according to the 1856 Instructions. 

On June 29, 1863, the following letter was written, probably by J. H. Hawes, who was the Principal Clerk of Surveys, 

in regard to the restoration of lost corners. 

General Land Office 

D. W. Maxon, Esq., June 29th, 1863. 

Cedar Creek, Washington, Co., Wis. 

Sir: 

Your letter ofthe 12th inst., asking for information as 

to the proper mode of establishing lost corners of the 

public surveys, etc., is received. As stated in my communication of the 2d inst., this ofice does not assume to 

exercise any control over the surveying operations of 

county surveyors. 

For the information of surveyors who may be called 

upon to re-establish lost corners of the public surveys or 

subdivide sections, the following general principles, 

based upon the laws of Congress and the regulations of 

the land department in accordance therewith, may be 

stated: 

1st. Section and quarter section corners as established by the government survey, must, by law of Congress, stand as the true corners. 

2d. Missing corners must be re-established at the 

identical point where the original posts were planted by 

the U.S. deputy surveyors. 

3d. The legal presumption is, in the absence of any 

evidence to the contrary, that lost section and quarter 

section posts were originally established at the. distances indicated in the field notes. 

4th. Half quarter section corners must be established 

equidistant from the section and quarter section posts. 

The first proposition above is in accordance with a law 

of Congress approved February llth, 1805. To divide a 

section into quarters a right line should be run from the 

quarter section posts in one section line to the corresponding quarter section post in the opposite section 

line, even though one or more of these posts may have 

been established nearer to one section corner than the 

other, thereby giving to one quarter section more than 

160 acres and to another less. 

The second proposition grows out of the first, and is in 

accordance with the laws of Congress. It is the duty of 

the surveyor to re-establish missing posts in the exact 

locality where they were originally placed in the government survey. The proof of locality first sought to be 

obtained should be the “witness trees,” or any other 

means of identification contained in the field notes, and 

next, clear and unquestionable testimony of any other 

kind. If no bearing trees, or other evidences in the field 

notes or elsewhere exist, by which the locality of the 

missing posts can be identified or determined in the 

field, then, as stated under the third head, the legal 

presumption is, that the missing section or quarter section corners were originally established in conformity 

with the distances expressed in the field notes, and the 

surveyor should so re-establish them. 

Extinct quarter section corners, except on fractional 

section lines, when they cannot be identified as above, 

should be re-established equidistant between the section corners, in a right line between the nearest noted 

“line trees” each side of it, if there are any, but if none 

are found, then in a right line between the section 

corners. Extinct quarter section posts on section lines 

which close on the north and west, boundaries of 

townships, should be re-established, according to the 

original measurement there of, at 40 chains from the 

last interior section corner. 

Extinct section corners may be re-established by running a right line between the nearest noted “line trees” 

north and south and east and west of the lost corner, if 

there be any such trees within the distance of the 

nearest quarter section, or section corners; but if no 

“line trees” be found, then between the nearest quarter 

section or section corners, and at the point of intersec133 
tion of the two lines thus run, establish the section 

corner, with new bearings, to the nearest and most 

desirable objects. 

The quarter mile posts are not established in government surveys, but are, by law, understood to be equidistant from the section and quarter section corners, as 

stated under the fourth head, and should be so established by the county surveyor. 

It may be remarked, that where the measurement of 

any section line by the county surveyor does not correspond with the original measurement recorded in the 

field notes, lost corners should be re-established at proportional distances from each other between the known 

corners. 

A proper application of the principles embraced herein will enable the practical surveyor to subdivide the 

public lands and re-establish the lost corners of the 

public surveys, in conformity with law and the regulations and usages of the land department. 

There are some anomalous cases, such, for instance, 

as double corners on the north and west boundary lines 

of townships, an explanation of which must be omitted 

owing to the length of this communication. The general 

principles which should govern the county surveyor are, 

however, indicated with sufficient clearness to guide 

him in the rightful performance of his duties. 

Very respectfully, etc., 

Jas. M. Edmunds, Commissioner. 

The letter illustrates the problem of restoring lost corners 

and the value placed on “line trees”, which were held to 

control the direction of a section line but not to control distance or proportion along that line. A lost quarter corner was 

restored at proportionate distance between the section corners. 

The letter says that section corners should be restored by 

direct evidence first, and in accordance with the proportioned 

field notes second. Then it goes on to say the corner may be 

re-established at the intersection of east-west and northsouth lines determined by line trees, quarter corners, or other 

section corners. The intersection method was enacted into 

law by the Missouri State Legislature (Missouri Statutes, 

Sec. 60.290) and was upheld by decisions of the State courts. 

However, the law could only apply to private lands in that 

state, not to public lands. This State statute was changed in 

1979 and the laws there are now in close conformity with the 

1973 Manual. 

The Indian Reservation problem became more acute in 

1863. Mark W. Delahay, Surveyor General at Leavenworth, 

Kansas, complained of the hodge-podge system to Secretary 

of the Interior J. P. Usher, who sent the complaint down to 

Edmunds for reply. Edmunds explained on July 30, 1863, 

that Indian boundaries were surveyed under various acts of 

Congress, some with Indian Office money and under Indian 

Office supervision, some by order of the President, some by 

order of the Secretary, and others by the Commissioner and! 

or a Surveyor General. There was no consistency in the 

methods of surveys or field notes and plats if any. Edmunds 

recommended a single law placing all the Indian surveys 

under the supervision of the Commissioner, it was passed a 

year later. 

On August 10, 1863, Special Instructions were issued to 

J. H. Hawes, Principal Clerk of Surveys in the GLO, for the 

survey of Fort Howard Military Reserve at Green Bay, Wisconsin, and the Fort Crawford Reserve at Prairie du Chein on 

the Mississippi River. These old reserves were to be surveyed 

and disposed of under the public land laws, just two of many 

Military Reserve surveys which were to follow over the next 

70 years or more. Those two surveys by Hawes were also 

made by a direct employee, not under a contract. 

A letter dated September 3, 1863, written to Frank Dorr, 

County Surveyor, West Liberty, Iowa, advised him to double 

proportion the lost southeast corner of Sec. 28. 

On October 26,1863, Edmunds ordered Cuddy at St. Louis 

to close his office and turn over the Illinois and Missouri 

records to the Recorder of Land Titles in St. Louis; it was 

closed October 31, 1863. The Missouri records were finally 

transmitted to State authorities in August 1874. The Illinois 

records were transferred to State authorities in July 1869. 

In the 1863 Annual Report, Edmunds stated that island 

surveys were too expensive in relation to the money derived 

from the sale of small islands. Therefore, regulations were 

adopted requiring the applicant to pay for the survey. 

On January 4, 1864, Edmunds replied to a man in Illinois 

who had requested a copy of the 1856 Instructions. He said 

these Instructions were no longer in accord with the rules and 

regulations of the Department but it was the only one available. They were now out of stock, more were to be printed, and 

he would send a copy when available. No copies of the 1856 

Instructions were ever sent. In July 1871, a reprint of the 

1855 Manual was made and copies were sent to all people who 

had requested instructions up to that time. 

The Act of March 21,1864,13 Stat. 30, enabled Nevada to 

become a State. It was admitted by Presidential Proclamation on October 31, 1864, and was enlarged to its present 

boundaries by the Act of May 5,1866, 14 Stat. 43. 

The Colorado Enabling Act was also approved on March 

21, 1864,13 Stat. 32. The residents couldn’t agree on a form of 

government. Congress approved the final enabling act on 

March 3,1875, 18 Stat. 474, and Colorado was admitted by 

Presidential Proclamation on August 1, 1876. The surveys 

had been in progress since 1861. 

The following letter was sent to Warren Beckwith on 

March 30, 1864, in response to his inquiry about the proper 

method of subdividing a section: 

General Land Office 

WARREN BECKWITH, Esq., March 30th, 1864. 

Geneva, Wis. 

Sir: 

I am in receipt of your communication of the 23d inst., 

inquiring as to the proper mode of subdividing sections 

into legal subdivisions. The law of Congress approved 

Feb. 11th) 1805 (U.S. Statutes, page 313, Little & 

Brown’s edition), gives explicit directions how this shall 

be done. This law has not since been repealed or modified, and hence the true and only lawful mode of subdividing sections is the one described therein. 

By this law the following definite and fixed rules are 

enunciated, to wit: 

1st. All corners once established in the field, and 

approved and returned by the proper officers, shall 

134 
stand as the true corners they were intended to designate, even though the intervals do not correspond with 

the measurements in the field notes. 

2d. All boundary lines of legal subdivisions which 

shall not have been actually run and marked in the 

field, shall be ascertained by running straight lines 

from the established corner to the opposite corresponding corner. 

It will be seen from the foregoing rules that the correct mode of dividing sections is by running straight 

lines from quarter post to opposite quarter posts, the 

common center being determined by the intersection of 

the lines so run. Great care should be taken in running 

such subdivisional boundaries to first identify the existing corners as the true original corners established 

by the US. surveyor. 

Very respectfully, etc., 

Joseph S. Wilson, 

Acting Commissioner. 

An identical letter was sent to L. M. Dyer at White Hull, 

Green County, Illinois, on April 13,1864. Although signed by 

Chief Clerk Wilson, they were no doubt written by J. H. 

Hawes, Principal Clerk of Surveys. 

The Act ofApril 8,1864,13 Stat. 39, was entitled “An Act to 

provide for the better Organization of Indian Affairs in California.” The main part of the act deals with Indian reservations and affairs in that State. But Sec. 6 of the act states: 

“That hereafter, when it shall become necessary to survey an Indian or other reservations, or any lands, the 

same shall be surveyed under the direction and control 

of the general land-office, and as nearly as may be in 

conformity to the rules and regulations under which 

other public lands are surveyed.” 

This section is now codified in 25 U.S.C. 176. 

The act clearly places the survey of Indian and other reservations under the regulations and methods of the regular 

public land surveys. After passage of the act, the boundary 

surveys were made under contracts with the Surveyors 

General or under contract with the Commissioner of the 

GLO. When township, sections, and section subdivisional 

lines were surveyed within reservations, it was nearly always by contract with a Surveyor General, except for those 

made in the Indian Territory (Oklahoma). 

On April 28,1864, Edmunds wrote to the Chairman of the 

Committee on Public Lands. He was proud of a departure 

from the rectangular system in mountains and valleys, done 

in accordance with Sec. 4 of the Act of March 3,1853,lO Stat. 

244, which allowed such departure; he recommended the 

idea. 

Edward F. Beale in California had contracted for the survey of lands around Honey Lake in California and in the 

Humboldt River Valley in Nevada. These were deemed to be 

“lands fit for agriculture” and were also along the route of the 

Pacific Railroad. Mineral lands and lands “unfit for cultivation” were precluded by law from the surveys. Desert mountains certainly were unfit for cultivation and may have contained minerals as well. How were the surveys to be extended 

into Honey Lake and Humboldt Valley? Using the provisions 

of Sec. 4 of the 1853 law, Beale told the deputies to run an 

offset by traverse lines. The Fourth Standard Parallel North 

was extended into Honey Lake by 52 miles of traverse along 

the eastern base of the Sierra Nevada. The Sixth Standard 

Parallel North was extended easterly for 115 miles by 

traverse around the base of the mountains into Humboldt 

Valley. But, no corners were established along those traverse 

lines. Ironically, the Commissioner would not allow a $1,725 

payment for those 167 miles of “line” because of no corners 

being set to monument them. That didn’t make the deputies 

very happy, nor the new Surveyor General, Lauren Upson. 

Had corners been established, perhaps payment would have 

been allowed. 

No instance is known in which traversing the base of 

mountains was later used in California and Nevada, but the 

method was used in New Mexico, at least in 1873. There a 

“meander line” (actually a traverse) was run along the base 

of the mountains and fractional lots returned against the 

meanders as though the mountains were similar to a lake. 

Where the section lines intersected the base of the mountains, “Fractional Section Corners” (marked FS) were set and 

the meanders run between them. Careful research has not 

found a law specifically approving this procedure; perhaps 

the Committee on Public Lands didn’t consider it necessary 

or if a law was recommended, Congress declined to enact it. 

The Act ofMay26,/864,13 Stat. 85, established the Territory of Montana, greatly reducing the Idaho Territory, and 

authorized appointment of a Surveyor General for Montana. 

But on July 2,1864, Montana was attached to the surveying 

district of Dakota. No Surveyor General was appointed until 

1867. 

On June 1, 1864, Commissioner Edmunds issued instructions to the Surveyors General relating to the surveys that 

updated the 1855 Manual in many respects. 

The main changes by item number were: 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 

18. 

20. 

Small islands were to be surveyed at cost to the applicant and procedures were given for obtaining such 

survey. 

Notes and procedures were to be kept for determining 

“swamp lands.” 

Non-navigable rivers were to be meandered along only 

one bank, the right bank if possible. 

Increase the size of lakes to be meandered to 40 acres; 

long narrow lakes were not to be meandered and payment was not to be allowed for measuring across or 

offsetting around a lake. 

Correcting back on true line is to be by bearing instead 

of a change in variation. 

Prescribes closing limits and limits on length of section lines in clearer form than the 1855 Manual. 

These instructions or manual modifications were reissued 

in 1871 in the same form and are included in the Appendix for 

full review. 

The Act of July 1,1864,13 Stat. 343, placed the coal lands 

that had been reserved since 1841 on sale by legal subdivision at a minimum price of $20 per acre. Sec. 2 and the 

remainder of the act are general townsite laws pertaining to 

townsites on the surveyed or unsurveyed public lands. Townsites up to 640 acres with boundaries conforming to the rectangular surveys were authorized. It is probable that most of 

the townsites on public lands were made under this act. It is 

codified in 43 U.S.C. 713-717. 

135 
The Act of July 2,1864, 13 Stat. 356, extended the Union 

Pacific Railroad land grant to all the odd-numbered sections, 

for 20 miles on each side of the right-of-way, up from the 

previous 10 miles. 

Also on July 2,1864,13 Stat. 365, Congress granted lands 

to subsidize construction of the Northern Pacific Railroad. 

The grant was for a right-of-way 200 feet on each side of the 

track and all odd-numbered sections for 20 miles on each side 

of the right-of-way. 

In the 1864 Annual Report, Edmunds requested a law 

allowing for traverses along the base of mountains, as detailed above. He reported that the Big Tree Grove and 

Yosemite Valley in California had been granted to the State 

by Act of June 30,1864,13 Stat. 325, and that the Act of May 

5,1864,13 Stat. 63, provided for the survey of certain Indian 

reservations in Utah into allotments. The Yosemite Valley 

would eventually be returned to government ownership as 

part of Yosemite National Park. The move to conservation 

and preservation of the natural wonders had begun in earnest. 

In January 1865, Nathan Butler in Indiana asked advice 

on the proper method of subdividing a section into quarterquarter sections. On January 20, 1865, the following reply 

was sent: 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

January 20, 1865 

Nathan Butler, Esq. 

Fort Wayne, Ind. 

Sir: 

In answer to your letter of the 11th inst., I have to 

state that to subdivide a quarter section in accordance 

principles established by law of Congress for the survey 

of the public lands, the proper mode is to run a straight 

line from a point equidistant between the 1/4 post and 

section corner to a point equidistant between the opposite l/4 post and section corner, such lines to be run 

either east and west or north and south as the case may 

be, when it is desired to bisect the quarter section, and 

both north and south and east and west when it is 

desired to divide the quarter section into four legal 

subdivisions. 

It must be observed however, if the section is on the 

north boundary of the Township the east and west line 

bisecting the north half of the section must be run from 

a point 20 chains north of the 1/4 post in the east boundary of the section to a point 20 chains north of the 9’4 post 

in the west boundary; so too if the section is on the west 

boundary of a Township the north-and-south line 

bisecting the west half of the section must be run from a 

point 20 chains west of the l/4 post in the south boundary 

line to a point 20 chains west of the ?4 post in the north 

section line. 

It is proper to remark that if in the above cases the 

distance from the 1/4 post to the section corner is found 

by the surveyors measurement to be more or less than 

the distance stated in the government survey, the subdivision point should be fixed proportionately between 

the corners. For illustration, if the distance between the 

l/4 post and section corner is stated in the government 

survey to be 41.14 chains and by the surveyors measurement it is 40.76 chains then: 

as 41.14:20::40.76: the true starting point north or 

west of the 1/4 post. 

The lawful mode of subdividing a section into quarters is by running a straight line from 1/4 post to Y4 post. 

Very respectfully 

Your Obt. Ser’t 

J. M. Edmunds 

Commissioner 

Butler wrote back on February 6, 1865, disagreeing with 

the above method, suggesting that the quarter section should 

be subdivided in the same manner as the section itself was 

subdivided into quarter sections. He received the following 

letter in response: 

Department of the Interior 

Nathan Butler, Esq. General Land Office 

Fort Wayne, Ind. February 16,1865 

Sir: 

I have your letter of the 6th inst., referring to the 

mode of subdividing a quarter section into quarters. The 

mode you suggest is not, in the opinion of this office, the 

proper one. The principles which should govern in dividing sections into legal subdivisions are laid down in the 

law of February 11, 1805. The rule there gih ,n is, that 

“the boundary lines, which shall not have been actually 

run and marked, shall be ascertained by running 

straight lines from the established corners to the opposite corresponding corners”. 

While this rule has more especial reference to the 

division of the section into quarters, .it is based upon 

certain principles enumerated in another part of the 

same law, and the subdivision of a section into quarters 

under this rule involves percisely the same points of 

objection and inequality that occur in the subdivision of 

the quarter section. 

The law nowhere provides for the establishing of corners in the interior of a section, but it does point out 

specifically how the section, quarter section and quarter 

quarter section corners shall be established on the exterior lines of the sections and it also directs that the 

quarter section shall be bounded by straight lines running from 1/4 post to 1/4 post. This rule is equally applicable where one 1/4 post is not precisely in place; the 

division in that case must give to one quarter more and 

to the other less than the 160 acres contemplated in the 

law. I think the same principles should be applied to the 

subdivision of a quarter section. The quarter mile posts 

should be established equidistant from the section and 

quarter section corners as the law specifically directs, 

and straight lines should be run from one post to its 

opposite corresponding post, through the section and 

those lines will be the true and lawful boundaries of the 

40 acre subdivisions. 

The objection which you suggest, that the owner of an 

adjoining quarter section might object to the surveyor 

crossing his lands if it were tenable, would in certain 

cases also prevent the subdivision of a section into quarters in accordance with the law above cited. As for 

instance, where one party has purchased the north half 

of a section, and two other parties owning the S. E. and 

136 
S. W. quarters, desire the boundary line between them 

established. The law in this case is plain, the line must 

be run from the 1/4 post in the north boundary, and to 

establish this line in pursuance of the law the surveyor 

must cross the north half of the section. 

In the opinion of this office the corners established on 

the section lines should govern the subdivision of sections, and the boundaries of all legal subdivisions 

should be determine by running straight lines through 

the section from one corner to its opposite corresponding 

corner. 

Your application. . . . 

Very respectfully 

Your Ob’t Ser’t 

J. M. Edmunds 

Commissioner 

Although signed by Edmunds, these letters were undoubtedly written by J. H. Hawes, Principal Clerk of Surveys. In them, Hawes correctly quoted and pointed out the 

principles given by the Act of February 11,1805, which specifically dealt with the subdivision of the old two-mile blocks 

into individual sections and the subdivision of sections into 

half or quarter sections, the smallest legal subdivision at that 

time. What Hawes completely overlooked was the Act of 

April 5,1832, which specifically stated that the “contents of 

quarter-quarter sections, which may thereafter (after May 

1st) be sold, shall be ascertained as nearly as may be, in the 

manner, and on the principles, directed and prescribed by the 

second section” of the Act of 1805. The quarter sections are 

also to be subdivided in the same manner as the sections were 

subdivided. Butler was advocating the proper method of subdividing a quarter section on different grounds-equity and 

economy (only one mile of survey instead of two miles to 

subdivide a given quarter section). Although equity and 

economy are good reasons, even though the result be the 

same, they were not the basis for the law, which was written 

to settle boundary disputes by statute and end contentions. 

Yet, as we see in this exchange, only 30 or 60 years later, 

different individuals interpreted the law as they chose to 

view it, rather than look to its roots for the answers. This 

improper method of subdividing a normal quarter section 

pervailed, as a general policy until 1871. 

By Sec. 3 of the Appropriations Act of March 2,1865, 13 

Stat. 460, Nevada was reattached to the surveying district of 

California. Upson was instructed to extend the surveys along 

the line of the Pacific Railroad but received no money for the 

work. 

In the latter part of March 1865, John A. Clark, Surveyor 

General of New Mexico, took an inspection trip through Arizona. He visited the area southwest of Phoenix at the junction 

of the Gila and Salt Rivers. On a conical hill just south of the 

junction and south of the Gila River, a boundary monument 

had been erected by the Mexican Boundary Commission in 

1851, which marked the U.S.-Mexico boundary prior to the 

Gadsden Purchase in 1853. Clark reported on May 24,1865, 

that he had adopted this monument as the initial point for the 

Gila and Salt River Meridian in Arizona, but he had no funds, 

so no surveys were run from that monument until two years 

later. 

On April 10 and April 20, 1865, John Pierce in Denver 

C 

I 

I 

-- 3- 

D 

80 00 

contracted with Joseph Clark, Deputy Surveyor, for the survey of the exterior boundaries and subdivisional lines of the 

Spanish Fork, Cow Creek, San Pete, and Deep Creek Indian 

reservations in Utah. Clark began these surveys in July 1865 

and completed them in October 1866. He first ran the exterior 

boundaries, setting a monument every 20 chains, then subdivided them into 40-acre tracts, again setting monuments 

every 20 chains, the first of the Indian Allotment surveys 

that were discovered. The reservations were not subdivided 

into regular sections first, however, and in fact were not tied 

to the rectangular surveys until three years later. Clark 

reported that all the rectangular corners had been destroyed 

by either time, weather, or the settlers. 

On July 30, 1865, Anson G. Henry, Surveyor General of 

Washington Territory, drowned when the steamship Brother 

Jonathan struck the Point St. George Reef near Crescent 

City, California, and sank. One hundred and ten people including Henry were lost. The Olympia Office was operated by 

Edward Giddings, Chief Clerk, until Selucius Garfield was 

appointed and filled the vacancy in April 1866. 

In the 1865 Annual Report, Edmunds reported that since 

no appropriation for surveys had been made, very few were 

done except those in the Indian reservations, and what few 

had been made, were done with leftover funds. He also reported that the California-Nevada boundary had been surveyed north from Lake Bigler, now Tahoe, and southeast for 

102 miles along the oblique line, but that these boundary 

lines were not acceptable to the GLO. The line north from 

Lake Tahoe is still in dispute. 

On April 9,1866, the following instructions were sent to H. 

M. Cankin at Greenville, Michigan, in reply to his request 

about the proper method to be used in restoring lost corners. 

These instructions were a stock answer being used at that 

time in reply to such requests. 

1 8 

a 

GI 

d- 2- b .- I -- 

I 0 

N 

z 

OI 8 OI 8 * d 

C E 

80 10 80 10 

“The following examples will illustrate some of the 

more difficult of the rules for restoring corners. 

Example 1. - Required to restore the missing section 

corners B, C, D, E, and the quarter sections corners a, b, 

c, d. Fig. I. 

137 
Mode. - In this example it will be observed that two 

sets of section corners were established on the north 

boundary of the township. From the original field notes 

it appears that the section line between sections 1 and 2 

intersected the township line 20 links west of the corner 

established when said township line was run. Therefore 

plant the corner B 20 links west of such corner; then 

proceed to the corner A and run a random line north, 

setting temporary posts at 40 chains, 80 chains, and 120 

chains, noting the excess or deficiency on the last half 

mile, and the falling east or west of the newly erected 

corner. 

Calculate a course that will run a true line from B to 

A, and if the distance by the present measurement be 

more or less than that stated in the original field notes, 

plant the permanent quarter section corner b at a proportional distance: 

Thus; the original distance from A to B was 161 

chains and 20 links: suppose the distance by the resurvey to be 162 chains 10 links, thenAs 161.20:162.10::41.20 (B to b, original measurement) = 41.43. The permanent quarter section corner b 

should therefore be re-established 41 chains 43 links 

south from B. 

The distance by present measurement from b to A will 

of course be (162.10-41.43 =) 120 chains and 67 links. 

The remaining corners B and a must likewise be restored at proportionate intervals, but as these intervals 

were equal in the original survey they will be equal in 

the resurvey; therefore, by dividing the remaining distance into three equal parts we shall have the correct 

distance at which these corners should be reestablished, to wit: 120.67 +- 3 = 40.22% = the true 

distance from b to E and also from E to a and a to A. 

Proceed in the same manner to restore the corners C, 

D, d, after which plant the quarter section corner c 

equidistant between the section corners D and E. 

In the foregoing example it will be observed that the 

boundary lines of the sections are of uniform length east 

and west. Were these lines ofvarious lengths, say from 5 

to 75 links, the mode described in the preceding example would not be correct, for it will be remembered that 

all corners are to be restored at proportional distances. 

This is as true in regard to east and west lines as it is of 

north and south lines; there is no difference in this 

respect. When, therefore, there is any material difference in the intervals between the section corners east 

and west, as is frequently the case, the distances must 

be made proportional east and west as well as north and 

south, even though at the expense of regularity in the 

configuration. The mode of proceeding in such cases will 

be better understood by reference to the following illustration: 

Example 2. - Required to restore the section corners 

D and E and all the quarter section corners. Fig. 11. 

Mode. - It appears from the field notes of the United 

States survey that the original intervals between these 

section corners were unequal, therefore they cannot be 

restored equidistant, but the proportional distances 

Fig. 2 

B 

must be preserved. To this end the county surveyor 

should remeasure the section lines A B, C F, and G H. 

This done he will have the data from which to make the 

necessary calculations to enable him to re-establish the 

lines and corners correctly. 

Suppose the result of the remeasurements to be as 

fo1lows:A B, 162.20 chains; CF, 160.80 chains; and GH, 

242.40 chains. Now the distance fromA to B is set down 

in the original field notes at 161 chains 25 links. Therefore, 

As 161.25:162.20::80.00 = 80.47 =the true length of 

the line A E, according to present measurement, and 

162.20- 80.47 =81.73 chs. from E to B. So also - 

As 161.20:160.80::80.00:79.80 chs. F to D. 

And 160.80-79.80 = 81.00 chs. D to C. 

The distance from G to H as indicated in the original 

AS 240.22:242.40::80.20:80.923/4 chs. E to G. 

and 242.50-(80.923/4 + 80.84 = 1 161.763/4 = 80.63% 

chs. D to H. 

Having provided the above data, proceed to A and 

remeasure the south boundary of section 12. Having 

calculated a course that will run from A to E, plant the 

Y4 section corner at 40.86% chs., and the section corner 

E at 81.73 chs. Then run a random line to G, planting 

the 1/4 section corner at 40.463/s chs., and correct back on 

a true line. 

The original distance from E to the 1/4 section corner 

north of it was, of course, 40 chs. The distance from E to 

B, by present measurement, is 81.73 chs. Then, 

field notes, was 240.22 chs. Then, 

240.22:242.40::80.12:80.84 chs. D to E. 

As 81.25:81.73::40.00:40.231/2. 

Calculate a course which will run from E to B, and 

establish the quarter section corner 40.23% chs. north 

from E. 

Return to F and proceed in the same manner to restore the corners on the section line from F to C. 

By this mode, the quarter section corners betweenE B 

and D C will have been established at proportionate 

distances between the respective section corners, and 

138 
all the other l/4 section corners equidistant between 

their respective section corners, in conformity with the 

As can be seen, in Example 1 the restoration is by single 

proportionate measurement along a straight north-south 

line between found corners, treating the closing corner at “B” 

as found. This method is justified inexplicably because the 

east-west section lines were originally the same length. Example 2 is a strict double proportionate restoration of the lost 

corners between the found original corners based on the 

original record. This general policy, outlined in these instructions on restoration of lost section corners, would remain in 

effect until about 1880. 

On June 19,1866, Henry Wiltse at Dubuque was ordered to 

close his office by June 30 and turn over the Wisconsin records to the State and Iowa records to William Johnson, the 

Custodian in Dubuque, for safekeeping. The Dubuque office 

was closed and the Wisconsin survey records and plats were 

turned over to that State on August 1, 1866. After Iowa 

passed the necessary legislation, the records were turned 

over to its authorities in March 1868. Subsequent surveys in 

Iowa were executed under the Surveyor General of Nebraska 

until 1886. 

The Act of June 29,1866,14 Stat. 77, authorized appointment of a Surveyor General for Idaho. Lafayette Cartee, who 

had been a deputy surveyor in Oregon for many years, was 

appointed and established his office in Boise City on November 7, 1866. The initial point for the Boise Meridian, which 

controls all the rectangular surveys in Idaho, was established 

in April 1867 on a rocky butte about 19 miles southwest of 

Boise. Deputy Surveyors Peter W. Bell and Allen M. Thompson began the survey of the baseline and meridian from that 

point. 

The Act of July 4, 1866, 14 Stat. 85, reestablished the 

Surveyor General for Nevada; William B. Thornburgh was 

appointed and opened his office in Carson City on November 

27,1866. The act allowed for a departure from the rectangular system for the surveys in Nevada if the situation warranted the change. This may have been authorizing the use of 

traverse lines to get the surveys into remote areas; if so, there 

is no indication that it was used. The act also withdrew all 

mineral lands from survey and entry under the public land 

surveys. 

A change in the method of subdividing sections was made 

on July 6, 1866, as will be seen by the following letter: 

law.), 

H. S. Hoover, Esq. 

Waverly, Bremer Co. 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

Iowa July 6, 1866 

Sir: 

In your letter of the 16th ultimo you inquire how 

sections of the public lands should be subdivided. As you 

do not refer to any particular section, I assume that your 

inquiry does not relate to peculiar or anomalous sections but to the regular sections containing 640 acres. 

The law prescribes the following rules for subdividing 

sections: - 

The section and quarter section corners established 

by the U.S. Deputy must stand as the true corners. To 

divide the sections into halves or quarters straight lines 

must be run from the established corners to opposite 

corresponding corners, the intersection of the lines so 

run will be the legal center of the section. The quarters 

may be again divided into half quarters or quarter quarters by straight lines run from points equidistant from 

the center of the section and the quarter section post to 

their corresponding opposite points equidistant between the section corners, and intersection of lines thus 

run will be the legal center point of the quarter section. 

Very Respectfully 

Your Ob’t Ser’t 

J. M. Edmunds 

Commissioner 

This is the exact method that was prescribed by law and. the 

same method that is used today, but it didn’t stay that way, as 

will be seen. 

The Act of July25,1866,14 Stat. 239, granted lands to the 

Oregon and California Railroad. All odd-numbered sections, 

ten miles on each side of the right-of-way, were granted with 

indemnity selection to an additional ten miles. Actually the 

railroad received all odd.-numbered sections for 20 miles each 

side of the railroad, which were not already claimed or mineral in character. The railroad defaulted on conditions of the 

grant and the unsold lands in the grant were revested to the 

United States in 1916. These Oregon and California (“0. 8z 

C.”) lands are administered by the BLM and constitute a 

large part of the dependent resurveys presently executed in 

the State of Oregon. 

Also on July 25,1866,14 Stat. 242, Congress passed an act 

granting to Adolph Sutro a right-of-way and up to two sections of land (to be paid for at $1.25 per acre) to construct an 

exploration and drainage tunnel to the Comstock Lode at 

Virginia City, Nevada. The long silence on the mineral lands 

was being broken. 

The Act of July 26, 1866, 14 Stat. 251, was the first lode 

mining law. Prior to this law, all mineral lands were sold by 

legal subdivisions of the rectangular system. This act provided for a right-of-way for the construction of ditches and 

canals across the public domain and for metes and bounds 

surveys of lode mining claims up to 200 feet in length. The 

Surveyors General were made responsible for the surveying 

and platting of the claims; the costs were to be paid by the 

claimant. 

Sec. 4 of the act is perplexing, and reads in part: 

“That when such location and entry of a mine shall be 

upon unsurveyed lands, it shall and may be lawful, after 

the extension thereto of the public surveys, to adjust the 

surveys to limits of the premises according to the location and possession and plat aforesaid, and the Surveyor-General may, in extending the surveys, vary the 

same from a rectangular form to suit the circumstances 

of the country and the local rules, laws, and customs of 

miners. . . ” 

This could be interpreted to mean that the rectangular 

surveys could be varied and adjusted to fit with the mining 

claims; if it did, it isn’t known how such an adjustment could 

have been accomplished. 

There is no known record of a Surveyor General attempting to utilize the provision during the six-year life of the act. 

139 
When the rectangular surveys were extended through a mining claim area, it was done in the normal manner without 

regard to the claims themselves, which were then segregated 

from the sections. 

Sec. 8 of the act reads: 

“That the right-of-way for the construction of highways 

over public lands, not reserved for public uses, is hereby 

granted.” 

This section is the basis of many thousands of miles of roads 

and highways built across the public domain. All that really 

had to be done to acquire a highway right-of-way under this 

act was to build one. Subsequent patents were automatically 

subject to an existing highway across the land. If a State or 

territory passed legislation accepting the grant and specified 

the location and width of a right-of-way for highways, all 

subsequent patents were subject to it. For example, in 1871 

the Dakota Territory declared by law a road right-of-way 66 

feet in width along all section lines. All subsequent patents 

were taken subject to that reservation. Sec. 8 of this important act is now codified in 43 U.S.C. 932. 

Sec. 9 made reservation for construction of ditches and 

canals across public lands. Miners were allowed to construct 

ditches to bring water to their claims. Further legislation on 

ditches and canals came in 1890. 

Secs. 10 and 11 of the act allowed preemption and homestead on the agricultural lands in the known mineral areas if 

the lands were shown to be nonmineral bearing. This provision would later require mineral segregation surveys. 

Sec. 16 of the act extends the rectangular system over the 

mineral lands, which had been excluded from survey since 

1853. 

The Act of July 28,1866,14 Stat. 339, legalized the metric 

system of measurements in the United States; however, as of 

1980, the metric unit has not been used in the Public Land 

Surveys in this country. 

Another Act ofJuly28,1866,14 Stat. 344, directed that the 

Surveyor General’s office for Iowa and Wisconsin at Dubuque, Iowa, should be closed and moved to Nebraska with a 

new surveying district to include Nebraska and Iowa. The 

closure had already occurred, as previously noted. Phineas 

W. Hitchcock was appointed the new Surveyor General on 

April 4,1867; he got the furniture from Johnson in Dubuque 

and established his office in Plattsmouth, Nebraska, in June. 

Kansas became a separate surveying district and the Surveyor General remained at Leavenworth. 

On July 28, 1866, Edmunds issued a Circular to all Surveyors General which amended Diagram B of the 1855 

Manual. The system of lot numbering was changed to that 

still used today; the odd system of having two Lots 1 and two 

Lots 2 in a section was eliminated. 

On September 1, 1866, Joseph S. Wilson again became 

Commissioner of the GLO; he was the only Commissioner 

ever to serve two separate terms in that office. 

On December 1,1866, Wilson sent a Special Agent to New 

Orleans with instructions to recover the Louisiana records 

from the State authorities, inventory them, and prepare lists. 

On December 11, 1866, Wilson ordered Thornburgh to 

move the Nevada Office from Carson City to Virginia City. 

Perhaps Thornburgh refused, because on May 27, 1867, 

Anson P. K. Safford became Surveyor General of Nevada and 

made that move. 

In January 1867, William H. Pierce, Deputy Surveyor, 

began the survey of the Gila and Salt River Baseline in 

Arizona, starting from the initial monument selected by 

Clark. The surveys of township and range lines were extended from the baseline by Wilfred F. and George P. Ingalls, 

under contract with the Surveyor General of California. The 

Arizona surveys were finally under way. 

The Act ofFebruary 9,1867,14 Stat. 391, enabled Nebraska to become a state and was admitted by Presidential Proclamation on March 1, 1867, 14 Stat. 820. 

The Act of February 25,1867,14 Stat. 409, granted lands 

for three miles on each side of a military road which was to be 

constructed from The Dalles, Oregon, to Boise, Idaho. Again 

as in the railroad grants, the Surveyor General had to survey 

the section lines as soon as possible after any portion of the 

road was completed. This was just one of many such wagon 

road grants. 

The Appropriations Acts of March 2,1867,14 Stat. 440 and 

457, provided funds for, and authorized, topographical and 

geological surveys to be made in Nebraska, and between the 

Rocky Mountains and the Sierra Nevada in California. These 

geological surveys were made under supervision of the GLO 

and were made by expeditions under the direction of Ferdinand V. Hayden. In 1869, further explorations were authorized, which were conducted by John Wesley Powell from 

1869-1875. The Hayden and Powell surveys were the forerunners of the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS). By this act, 

Arizona was attached to the California surveying district. 

The Act of March 2,1867, 14 Stat. 542, again authorized 

the appointment of a Surveyor General for Montana Territory and made it a separate district; Soloman Meredith was 

appointed on April 18, 1867, and subsequently established 

the office at Helena. Commissioner Wilson had directed 

Meredith to establish a Principal Meridian on Beaver Head 

Rock about 12 miles north of Dillon, Montana. Instead, Meredith established the initial point on a limestone hill, 800 feet 

high, about 12 miles southwest of the junction of the three 

forks of the Missouri River. The Principal Meridian and 

Baseline surveys were begun by Benjamin F. Marsh in August 1867. The Principal Meridian in Montana has no given 

name or number; it is identified just as the Principal Meridian, Montana, and controls all of the rectangular surveys 

within that State and none other. 

Another Act of March 2,1867, 14 Stat. 541, was another 

law for townsites on the public lands. It is the basis of what is 

now called a Trustee Townsite, and is codified in 43 U.S.C. 

718-721. The maximum of 2,560 acres could be taken up by 

legal subdivision as a townsite under this act. 

On March 13,1867, Wilson dispatched a Special Agent to 

Florida with instructions to gather and inventory the Spanish Archives on private land claims. On August 5, he ordered 

the agent to get the Surveyor General’s records from the 

State Register, inventory and list them, and then turn them 

over to the US. Attorney for safekeeping. 

On March 30, 1867, the United States purchased Alaska 

from Russia, adding that huge territory to the public domain. 

A slight softening of the former hard stand on dried-up 

lakes occurred in 1867, as indicated by the following letter: 

140 
T. N. Stevens, Esq. Department of the Interior 

Greenville, General Land Office 

Michigan June 4, 1867 

Sir: 

I am in receipt of your letter of the 21st Ulto. 

in reference to a lake originally meandered, and subsequently partially drained, situated in sections 1,2 and 

11 of T. 9 N., R. 9 West, Michigan. 

In reply I have to state that where lakes originally 

meandered become dry land, by any cause, the land no 

longer subject to overflow, and suitable for cultivation, 

it is regarded as public land over which the lines of the 

public surveys should be extended and the same disposed of as other public lands. 

But where such lakes become partially drained by 

evaporation or other causes the land from which the 

water has receded inures to the respective riparian 

proprietors for their use and occupancy. 

In reference to the common boundary of lots 2 in 

sections 1 and 2 if the water between them had entirely 

disappeared the extension of the section line between 

those two sections would constitute the common bound- 

,.h I C 19 

T T 

ary of such lots; but as there yet remains a portion 

between the lots covered by water the margin of the 

slough or stream constitutes the boundary of those lots, 

and the remaining portion covered by water maintains 

its original status as meandered water. 

So long, therefore, as any portion of the lake as originally meandered remains covered by water or subject to 

periodical overflow the lines of the public surveys cannot be extended over it nor the land disposed of by the 

government. 

I am Sir - 

Very Respectfully 

Your Ob’t Ser’t 

Jos. S. Wilson 

Commissioner 

This has been recognized as a “Catch 22” policy. The riparian adjoiner has temporary riparian rights, can use the land 

exposed by reliction, but when it all dries up, he loses it to the 

government. It would be to his advantage to make sure the 

lake never did completely dry up, even if he had to dig a pond 

CORNER IDENTI FlCATlON ON INDIAN RESERVATIONS 

1 9 A5 -10 

T T 1 

e .a If 

T T 

Id lo 

T T T 

I 1 

14 “7 13 

-= Surveyed lines 

-.C- = Corners at equidistant position 

I, 2,a,b = Identifying designation 

= Section and 1/4 corners 

141 
Figure 46. Warpeton and Sissiton Reservation with "Three Mile" Subdivisions. 
BOUTH DAEOTA 

"'i 
to retain some water. But this was the first admission by the 

GLO that owners adjoining a non-navigable lake may have 

riparian rights. This “temporary use” policy remained in 

effect to the end. 

After Wilson became Commissioner for the second time, J. 

H. Hawes left the GLO. In 1867, he began writing his Manual 

of United States Surveying and had it published in 1868. 

Several inquiries were received in the GLO about the book 

requesting a copy of it. Each inquiry received a reply which 

denied at first any knowledge of the work and that it was not 

an official publication and was not recognized as having any 

authenticity. Actually, the Hawes Manual is an excellent 

reference to the policies in effect while Hawes was Principal 

Clerk of Surveys. Several of the same letters used in this book 

were printed in Hawes’ Manual. 

The 1867 Annual Report indicated that after passage of the 

Lode Mining Law in 1866, the mineral States were organized 

into Mineral Districts by the Surveyors General. These were 

not miners’ mining districts, they were simply geographic 

areas set up by the Surveyor General for filing and recording 

purposes, and appointment or commissioning of Mineral Surveyors. Nevada was organized into eight mineral districts; 

California was divided into nine districts. 

On June 10, 1868, Commissioner Wilson issued Circular 

No. 22, detailing the process to be used in surveying small, 

unsurveyed islands which had been omitted in the original 

surveys. No change in policy was made; the islands were 

deemed public land subject to survey and disposal. The applicant had to deposit the money necessary to pay for the survey 

under the Deposit Survey Law of May 30,1862, but received 

no rights to the island because of such payment. These instructions are given in the Appendix. 

On July 13, 1868, L. M. Frierson of Booneville, Missouri, 

applied for the survey of an island in the Missouri River. 

Frierson alleged that the island had always beenin existence 

but that at low water it was attached to the mainland which 

was patented. Wilson denied the application and ruled that 

the island inured to the riparian owner because of the accretion which caused the connection. This decision is indicative 

of the misunderstanding and confusion which prevailed with 

respect to riparian rights. 

The Act of July 25, 1868, 15 Stat. 178, established the 

Territory of Wyoming. The territorial boundaries were the 

same as the present State boundaries. 

On August 22, 1868, Wilson entered into a contract with 

and issued Special Instructions to Theodore H. Barrett, a 

surveyor from St. Cloud, Minnesota. Barrett was to survey 

the exterior boundaries, township and section lines, and subdivision of sections of the Sissiton and Warpeton Indian Reservation, located west of Lake Traverse in the Dakota Territory, now South Dakota. Barrett surveyed the exterior 

boundaries of the reservation first, then subdivided it into 

regular townships and sections of the Fifth Principal Meridian. Barrett then subdivided the sections into 40-acre allotments by the so-called “Three Mile Method”, as instructed by 

the Commissioner, which simply means that he ran the north 

one-sixteenth line, the east-west centerline and south onesixteenth line across the section (three miles total) and set 

the one-sixteenth section corners and center quarter corner 

at equidistant positions. None of the north-south lines 

through the section were surveyed. In every other respect the 

surveys were made in accordance with the public land laws 

on surveying. 

This Three Mile Method of subdividing sections was used 

only on Indian reservations. All reservations subdivided into 

allotments were done by this method and variations of it 

until about 1920. When subdivided into 40-acre allotments, 

the one sixteenth corners were usually referred to as %s 

corner.” If subdivided into 20-acre allotments the one-sixtyfourth corners were usually called “v32 corner.” The Bureau 

of Indian Affairs (BIA) allotting agents devised a number and 

letter designation for the corners around the exterior boundaries and interior corners of a section. Fig. 45 is a sketch 

showing the system used to designate the corners and the 

lines surveyed. Fig. 46 is the plat ofT. 119 N., R. 52 W., Fifth 

Principal Meridian, Dakota, as surveyed by Barrett. 

Be aware that if interior corners of sections subdivided in 

this manner are now lost and are to be restored during a 

resurvey, they must be restored by proportionate measurement in the same manner that they were originally established, not by the rules of subdivision of sections as required 

by the 1973 Manual. More discussion of Indian allotments 

will appear as they occurred, especially after 1887. 

On July 28, 1868, John A. Clark was commissioned Surveyor General of Utah and opened the office in Salt Lake 

City. Benjamin C. Cutler replaced Clark as Surveyor General at Santa Fe on August 26,1868. But Clark only stayed in 

Salt Lake City until July 1869, at which time Courtland C. 

Clements took charge of the Utah office. 

On November 18,1868, Wilson replied to an inquiry from 

Silas Reed at Stanton, Missouri, on how to subdivide a section 

two. The north quarter corner of the section had not been 

established in the original survey and the north boundary of 

the township had double corners. Wilson advised Reed to 

survey the east-west centerline between the original quarter 

corners (normal) and run the north-south centerline due 

north from the south quarter corner to an intersection with 

the north boundary of the township and establish the north 

quarter corner at said point of intersection. Where the centerlines had been run and would intersect is where the center of 

the section would be established. Most other letters written 

in 1868 on the same subject received similar replies. 

On December 24,1868, in reply to W. P. Hobson of Savannah, Missouri, Wilson stated that whenever a meandered 

stream “entirely forsakes the former bed” then the land left 

exposed and the streambed were public land and subject to 

survey and sale. This was a case of avulsion of a stream, not 

the drying up (reliction) of a lake, and the expressed opinion 

was obviously contrary to law. 

Wilson held very strong and somewhat biased opinions on 

riparian rights. The 1868 Annual Report contains more than 

ten pages on riparian rights in which Wilson very strongly 

stresses his stand on the subject; it also indicates that driedup lake surveys were made at cost to the applicant, the money 

was to be deposited before the survey would be ordered. 

A letter dated March 11, 1869, addressed to Myron 

McLaren, Mt. Pieasant, Michigan, advised McLaren to establish the quarter-quarter (one-sixteenth) corners of sections 

against the north and west boundaries of the township (north 

one-sixteenth and west one-sixteenth) “at precisely 20 chains 

from the 1/4 posts,” placing the excess or deficiency in the last 

quarter mile. All others should be placed at equidistant posi144 
tion between the quarter corners and section corners. Proportioning was not considered in that opinion. 

In a letter to George W. Cooley of Minneapolis, Minnesota, 

dated March 25, 1869, Cooley was advised to establish the 

north quarter corner of a section two at midpoint between the 

closing corners at the northeast and northwest corners of the 

section. The east-west centerline should be run on true line 

between the east and west quarter corners. The north-south 

centerline was to be run due south from the established 

quarter corner on the north boundary to an intersection with 

the east-west centerline where the center quarter corner 

would be established. (Apparently the quarter corner of sections 2 and 11 did not existperhaps it was in a lake.) This 

was the first letter found that advocates the proper presentday method of establishing a north quarter corner between 

closing corners. Hawes’ Manual judiciously avoided the subject. 

During 1868 and 1869, an increasing number of letters 

arrived in the GLO from people complaining about County 

Surveyors and others who were moving the original quarter 

section corners from their original location to a position midpoint and on line between the section corners. In each reply, 

the Commissioner stated that the practice was objectionable 

and illegal, but that he had no jurisdiction over County Surveyors; he recommended that the complainant refer the matter to a court of competent jurisdiction. Most of this “corner 

moving” took place in the Plains States west of the Mississippi River. 

On April 26, 1869, M. L. Stearns was notified of his 

appointment to be Surveyor General of Florida and was 

ordered to open his office in Tallahasse. In his Annual Instructions of June 22, 1868, Wilson told him to get the Surveyor General’s records and Spanish Archives from the U.S. 

Attorney and go into business. 

On June 8, 1869, John Lynch was notified of his appointment to be Surveyor General of Louisiana. His Instructions 

dated July 12th ordered him to open the office in New 

Orleans. Thus, the Florida and Louisiana offices were back in 

business after an eight-year hiatus due to the Civil War. 

A letter dated July 21,1869, to Jeremiah Stumm of Rushville, Illinois, directed him that to subdivide section 30, he 

should run the north-south centerline between original quarter corners and run the east-west centerline due west to an 

intersection with the west boundary where the west quarter 

corner would be established. The center quarter corner would 

thus be at the intersection of the centerlines. 

A letter dated July 26, 1869, to Hiram Barney, in Menominee, Michigan, advised him on the proper method of subdividing a fractional section two, which contained a lake. Barney was to retrace the section lines to determine the variation of his compass, then run the east-west centerline east on 

a mean bearing to the lake and the north-south center north 

on a mean bearing to the lake. This was the first letter found 

during this period that introduced the concept of mean bearing over the due north, south, east, and west wording of the 

law. 

In August 1869, the boundary survey of the Navajo Indian 

Reservation was begun by Ehud N. Darling under contract 

with Commissioner Wilson. Darling had surveyed the Colorado-New Mexico Boundary in 1867 and many other Indian 

reservations also. Darling designated the southeast corner of 

the Navajo Indian Reservation as the initial point of the 

Navajo Baseline and the east boundary was used as the 

reference meridian. The Navajo Reservation was surveyed 

and subdivided as a separate rectangular survey system in 

Arizona and New Mexico. The New Mexico portion of these 

surveys was cancelled by letter dated June 17,1936. Officially, New Mexico is surveyed entirely on the New Mexico 

Principal Meridian system, whereas Arizona retains surveys 

on the Navajo Baseline. 

On July 8, 1869, D. M. Chapman of Bushnell, Illinois, 

requested advice on the proper method of subdividing section 

1, T. 5 N., R. 2 W., Fourth Principal Meridian. The reply 

dated September 6 instructed him to establish the onesixteenth corners at midpoint between quarters corners and 

section corners, except the north one-sixteenth corners which 

were to be proportioned. He was to adjust his variation to 

retrace the section lines during that process; then run the 

east one-sixteenth line, north-south centerline, and west onesixteenth lines due north to an intersection with the north 

boundary. Next, run the north one-sixteenth east-west centerline and south one-sixteenth lines across the section to the 

opposite corresponding corners. Where all of these lines intersected would be the position of the interior one-sixteenth 

corners and center quarter corner. 

Several other letters during August and September sent to 

County Surveyors instructed them to restore lost section 

corners by single proportionate measurement on a “right 

line” between the found corners to the north and south of the 

missing section corners. Double proportioning was not mentioned as a proper method. 

In the 1869 Annual Report, Wilson mentions the survey of 

an avulsion of the Missouri River. The centerline of the 

abandoned channel had been surveyed and then the lands in 

the old bed had been surveyed and platted. He also reported 

that the Union Pacific and Central Pacific Railroads had 

hooked up at Promontory Point, Utah, on May 10, 1869, 

which would greatly increase settlement of the West and 

increase the need for surveys. 

The Act of February 2, 1870, 16 Stat. 64, authorized 

appointment of a Surveyor General in Wyoming. Silas Reed 

from Missouri was appointed Surveyor General in March and 

established his office in Cheyenne. The first surveys in 

Wyoming were actually made by accident. In 1867, William 

Ashley had surveyed the Eighth Guide Meridian West under 

contract with the Surveyor General in Colorado. Ashley extended the guide meridian some three miles into Wyoming, 

thinking he was still in Colorado. The boundary between 

Colorado and Wyoming was not surveyed until 1873. 

In June 1870, under a contract with Reed, Edwin James 

extended the Eighth Guide Meridian West northerly further 

into Wyoming. He also surveyed a portion of the Third Standard Parallel North, and the rectangular surveys in Wyoming were underway. All of the first surveys are numbered 

from the Sixth Principal Meridian, as are most surveys of the 

rectangular system in that State. 

The Act of May 4,1870,16 Stat. 96, provided for a commission to revise the Statutes of the United States. After three 

years of work, the statute laws including the public land laws 

were codified and published as the Revised Statutes in 1874. 

On May 21, 1870, a letter went to G. S. Killiam, County 

Surveyor, at Fort Dodge, Iowa, with regard to restoring lost 

145 
meander corners. Wilson stated that in the case cited by 

Killiam (not described), the proper method would be to run a 

straight line between the found section corners and restore 

the lost meander corners on that line at intersection with the 

banks of the river. This method would also be applicable in all 

similar cases; however, proportioning of the lost meander 

corners was not considered. 

The following letter was a major break in the right direction in regard to corners on the north and west boundaries of 

the township, even though it wasn’t abided by in later letters: 

C. C. Carpenter, Esq. 

Register of the State 

Land Office May 26, 1870 

Des Moines, Iowa 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

Sir: 

I am in receipt of your letter of the 18th instant 

desiring information in regard to the proper method of 

establishing the quarter corners on the northern tier of 

sections in a township where there is a double set of 

section corners on the township line. . . In reply, I have to say that the quarter corners should 

be established at points equidistant between the N. E. 

and N. W. corners of the sections, except in section six 

where the quarter corner should be placed at precisely 

forty chains (original measurement) west of the N. E. 

corner of the section. 

Very respectfully, 

Your Obt. Servant 

Jos. S. Wilson 

Commissioner 

The letter is simply stated and is of course the correct 

method to follow in most “normal” situations. Another letter 

dated May 31,1870, sent to a surveyor in Illinois gave exactly 

the same rule for establishing the quarter corners on the west 

boundary of a township, which was also correct for a normal 

situation. 

The matter of omitted lands between the meander line and 

actual shoreline and subsequent reliction came to a head in 

June 1870. In a letter to T. W. Ferry, Congressman from 

Michigan, Wilson described the situation: 

Hon. T. W. Ferry 

House of Representatives 

General Land Office 

June 10, 1870 

Sir: 

By reference to our letter, to you, of March 15th 

last, relating to the protest of Rev. H. C. Van Raalte, of 

Holland, Michigan, against the survey, by George 

Lander, of the same place, of a tract of alleged unsurveyed land in, what would be if surveyed, the S. W. frl. 

1/4 of Sec. 20, T. 5 N., R. 15 W. at the head of Black Lake, 

Michigan, who asks that an order issue to John F. Finkham, surveyor, of Grand Rapids, Michigan, for the proper survey of the same in order that it may be brought 

into market and sold according to law. I have the honor 

to say that additional evidence having been furnished 

by Mr. Van Raalte in reference to the case, this office is 

now prepared to examine the same, and submit the 

following: - 

The N. W. frl. l/4 of Sec. 29, Tp. and Range aforesaid, 

was purchased at private entry in 1836, by Samuel 

McHyes and patented to him in 1839, and in 1847 was 

purchased by the Rev. H. C. Van Raalte. 

It appears however, that during the progress of the 

resurvey of the City of Holland, located in the above 

named tract of land, in the year 1860, a small tract of 

alleged unsurveyed land was discovered in, what would 

be if surveyed, the S. W. l/4 of Sec. 20, immediately 

North of the tract purchased by Mr. Van Raalte, and 

between the government meander line and the water of 

the Lake. 

Some time subsequent to the resurvey, the aforesaid 

George Lander, proposed to preempt this tract of alleged 

unsurveyed land and filed his application for survey of 

the same, in this office, September 3rd 1869, in regard to 

which, protest was entered by the Rev. H. C. Van Raalte 

upon the ground of riparian ownership. 

The application for survey is accompanied by the affdavits of three persons, Civil Engineers, to the effect 

that the said tract of land is North of the government 

meander line - is high and dry land, from 1 to 15 feet 

above the level of the Lake - is of gravel formation on 

which the stumps of trees are yet standing, from 1 to 2 

feet in diameter and that they are certain that no part of 

the high, dry land is accretion or could be so considered 

in any sense of the word. 

It appears however, upon examination of the original 

field notes on file in this office, that, at the time of the 

survey, in 1832, no dry land was found between the 

meander line and the bed of the Lake: and, as the survey 

was made in the season when the waters of Lakes, and 

other bodies of water, are much higher than at ordinary 

stages, it is fair to presume that the survey was made in 

accordance with instructions from this office and in the 

proper manner, as certified by the Surveyor General. 

Taking into consideration all of the facts in the case it 

appears that Mr. Van Raalte purchased all of the surveyed land in the N. W. frl. 1/4 of Sec. 29, T. 5 N., R. 15 

W., in good faith, and to the border of the Lake: and it 

would seem that his long and undisputed occupancy of 

the same as well as, his disposal of certain portions of it 

to different parties, including the supposed unsurveyed 

tract, ought to be protected against the uncertain 

tenure of subsequent claimants. 

From all the evidence adduced in this case, it appears 

that the waters at the head of Black Lake have receded 

and formed into well defined channels, leaving a considerable tract of high and dry as well as swamp land 

South of what is now Black River, in the N. W. l/4 of Sec. 

29, and S. W. 1/4 of Sec. 20, T. 5 N., R. 15 W., so formed by 

the operation of natural or other causes, and it is now 

the policy of the government, under the recent ruling of 

the Hon. Secretary of the Interior in an analagous case, 

that when any considerable body of high land is formed 

in this manner, to have the lines of the public surveys 

extended over the premises. 

Application for the survey of the same having been 

made by Mr. Landers, and John F. Finkham, Surveyor, 

of Grand Rapids, Mich., having made a proposition in 

writing specifying the amount for which he is willing to 

execute the survey and certificate of deposit having 

been made for the amount required with a U.S. Deposi146 
tory to the credit of the U.S. on account of the appropriation for surveying the public lands, the Commissioner 

will forward at the earliest day practicable the necessary instructions for survey in accordance with the public land system. 

Lands of this class when surveyed become subject to 

the operation of the homestead and preemption laws, or 

after due notice by the local land officers, pursuant to 

instructions from the Commissioner as contemplated by 

Sec. 5, Act of Aug. 3, 1846, may be sold for cash to the 

highest bidder and if not disposed of in this way will 

then become subject to private cash entry, warrant, or 

scrip location 

I have the honor to be 

Very respectfully 

Jos. S. Wilson 

Commissioner 

Copies of the decision were sent to George Landers and the 

Rev. Van Raalte, but no “order” to Finkham was ever sent. In 

June 1871, (then) Senator Ferry again inquired about the 

matter. Willis Drummond replied that Lander must have 

misunderstood the decision (very understandable) and sent a 

copy of the decision to Lander. Lander then again requested 

the survey on September 4,1871, but once again no order was 

issued. On February 14, 1872, in reply to another inquiry 

from Ferry, Drummond declined to order the survey. He 

explained that there were many cases pending before the 

Department in which the survey of lands, where the water 

had receded, were contested on the grounds of riparian 

rights. Drummond had recommended to the Committee on 

Public Lands that Congress pass legislation on the matter of 

dried-up lakes and relicted lands. Drummond thought that 

this class of lands should be granted to the States (similar to 

the swamp land grants). As far as can be determined, no 

survey was ever made, and there was no indication that 

Lander ever got his deposit back. 

Oddly enough, in the above letter a policy change was 

made-to survey relicted land even though the water had not 

completely disappeared. The letter was also contrary to common sense. Wilson decides that Van Raalte had riparian 

rights to a small strip of omitted land, between the meander 

line and actual shore of the lake, but that he had no riparian 

rights to the relicted land in front of the old shoreline, even 

though there was water remaining, the Black River, which 

was a stream, not a lake. 

One other item of interest seems appropriate at this time. 

Before any dried-up lake or island survey could be made, the 

applicant had to “prove” to the Commissioner that the application was legitimate, such as the fact the island was 

actually omitted and not formed by accretion or avulsion 

after the original survey, or that a lake was all dried up, not 

just partly so. To submit such proof, a map was frequently 

made by a local or County Surveyor at the request of the 

applicant, and this map would be sent to the Commissioner 

along with all of the affidavits. Nine times out of ten, the 

applicant would suggest that the survey be made by the 

Surveyor who made the map for him. If the Commissioner 

approved the application, he would then contract with the 

Surveyor for the “official” survey and field notes. In this 

manner a great many County Surveyors and others became 

“U.S. Deputy Surveyors” and that title carried considerable 

prestige among the local citizenry. If another application for 

an island survey was made in the same county by someone 

else, he would most likely hire the same “Deputy Surveyor” 

to make the map to accompany the application; this map 

would be nicely drawn, very similar to an official survey plat, 

and signed by “John A. Doe, Deputy Surveyor.” 

After examining all the evidence presented, the Commissioner might reject the application and often sent the materials submitted back to the applicant. Years later, the map, 

signed by “John A. Doe, Deputy Surveyor” would show up in 

some litigation as being a “plat” of the survey of the island, 

showing that so-and-so had title to it or at least color-of-title. 

Sometimes it takes an abnormal amount of research and 

digging to find out where these phony “plats” originated 

because the original parties are long dead, but when the 

origin is found, it can settle a dispute in short order; the main 

clue is that these “plats” were not approved by the Commissioner or a Surveyor General. Also, do not be confused by a 

marginal notation such as “Rec’d with Sur. Gen’ls letter, 

June 10, 1873.” 

The Act of July 9,1870,16 Stat. 217, added sections 12 thru 

17 to the Mining Act of July 26, 1866. By this act, placer 

claims were added to the mining law. Placer claims could not 

exceed 160 acres, were to conform to the rectangular surveys, 

could be legal subdivisions of 40 acres, or in 10-acre aliquot 

parts. Sec. 16 of this act repealed part of the Act of March 3, 

1853, and directed that the rectangular system should extend 

over all public lands, regardless of their mineral content, but 

that “waste or useless lands” were not to be surveyed. 

Sec. 16 concludes with these words and is now codified in 43 

U.S.C. 766: 

“Provided, That all subdividing of surveyed lands into 

lots less than one hundred and sixty acres may be done 

by county and local surveyors at the expense of the 

claimants: And provided further, That nothing herein 

contained shall require the survey of waste or useless 

lands.” 

This act officially allowed county and local surveyors to 

subdivide public lands, when in actual practice they had been 

subdividing sections since before 1830. It isn’t known when 

the “District Surveyors” had ceased being appointed by the 

Surveyors General. This act actually gave official notice of 

something that had been routine for a long time, and especially so after 1853. 

The stipulation that wastelands not be surveyed caused 

further “piecemeal” township surveys. Many townships in 

the West are incomplete because of this elimination of “waste 

or useless lands” from the regular extension of the rectangular system. 

By the Act of July 11,1870,16 Stat. 230, Arizona was made 

a separate surveying district. John Wasson was commissioned Surveyor General on July 12 but notification did not 

reach him until November 5,1870, when he opened his office 

in Tucson. He travelled to California, brought back the Arizona records, and began contracting for surveys in that territory in March 1871. 

On July 25, 1870, the Secretary of the Interior contracted 

with Ehud N. Darling and Theodore H. Barrett for the survey 

of the Chickasaw lands in the Indian Territory (now Oklaho147 
ma) in accordance with the Treaty of April 28, 1866, concluded with the Choctaw and Chickasaw Indians, which required that the lands be surveyed and subdivided into 160- 

acre tracts. 

On July 30,1870, Wilson issued Special Instructions for the 

surveys. Darling was assigned to survey the Indian Meridian 

and the Baseline in the eastern part of the Chickasaw lands; 

Barrett was to survey the baseline in the western part. As 

instructed, Darling established the initial point between two 

small streams a short distance southeast of Fort Arbuckle, 

which he monumented with a marked stone. Darling then 

surveyed the baseline east to the boundary between the 

Chickasaws and Choctaws. He surveyed the ChoctawChickasaw boundary north to the Canadian River starting at 

the confluence of Island Bayou and the Red River, and the 

meridian between the Red and Canadian Rivers. He surveyed his area into townships and sections, then subdivided 

the sections by running the centerlines between quarter corners, establishing the center quarter section corners at the 

intersection of centerlines. 

Barrett surveyed the baseline west to 98” west longitude, 

then subdivided the western part of the Chickasaw lands the 

same as Darling did the eastern half. Barrett found gross 

errors in the 1858 survey of the 98th Meridian, which had 

been surveyed as the west boundary of the Chickasaw lands; 

he did that work over so he could close against the boundary. 

This was the first time found in which a “complete” survey 

was made ofthe sections from the establishment of the initial 

point through to the proper method of subdividing the sections into quarter sections. It was not done on public lands 

because Indian reservations were not “public lands” under 

the land laws. 

In December 1870, Darling and Barrett were given contracts to survey the Indian lands between the 96th and 98th 

Meridians from the Canadian River north to the Kansas 

boundary; the Indian Territory surveys were under way. 

To illustrate the inconsistency going out of the GLO at the 

time, the following letters are mentioned. 

On August 22, 1870, H. W. Dickson, of Hillsboro, Illinois, 

asked advice in subdividing section 6, T. 7 N., R. 3 W., Third 

Principal Meridian, a normal section (not fractional). Dickson wanted to establish the north quarter corner 40 chains 

west of the northeast corner and the west quarter corner 40 

chains north of the southwest corner of section 6, then run the 

centerlines accordingly. Wilson told him on August 31 that 

method was wrong; instead he should run due north from the 

South quarter corner and due west from the east quarter 

corner to an intersection with the exterior boundaries; where 

the lines crossed would be the legal center of the section. 

On November 5,1870, J. D. Carleton, ofPort Huron, Michigan, was instructed to subdivide a fractional section by running from the estabished quarter section corners due north, 

south, east or west, as the case may be, to the water boundary, 

without regard to the direction of the original section lines. 

On November 9,1870, E. C. Martin, of Pontiac, Michigan, 

was instructed to set the north quarter corner of a section 6, 

exactly 40 chains west of the northeast corner of section 6, 

even though the original plat returned the length ofthe north 

boundary of section 6 as 80.50 chains and Martin had found it 

to measure only 69.30 chains. 

Also on November 9,1870, E. C. Hutchinson, of St. Louis, 

Missouri, was instructed to establish the north quarter corner of section 4 by running due north from the quarter corner 

of sections 4 and 9 to an intersection with the north boundary 

of the section. 

On February 4, 1871, Willis Drummond was appointed 

Commissioner of the GLO. Generally speaking, Drummond 

continued Wilson’s policies in regard to corner restorations 

but changed the policy on subdivision of sections and driedup lakes. 

The Act of February 18, 1871, 16 Stat. 416, ceded to the 

State of Ohio all of the unsold and unsurveyed lands in the 

Virginia Military Tract. No attempt was made to identify the 

lands ceded. 

On February 27,1871, the Surveyor General of Minnesota 

was instructed to have the sections in the White Earth Indian 

Reservation subdivided by the Three Mile Method and mark 

the quarter-quarter section corners cc1/16.77 

TheAct ofMarch3,1871,16 Stat. 581, added Sec. 11 to the 

deposit survey part of the Act of May 30,1862, 12 Stat. 409. 

This section follows: 

“Sec. 11. And be it further enacted, That in all cases 

where settlers shall make deposits in accordance with 

this act, to the credit of the United States, for public 

surveys, such amounts so deposited shall go in part 

payment for their lands situated in the townships, and 

the surveying of which is paid for out of said deposits 

and effect shall be given to this act by regulations to be 

prescribed by the commissioner of the general land 

office.” 

APPROVED, March 3, 1871 

Very few “deposit surveys” had been made of townships 

and sections under the 1862 act because the cost of survey 

was in addition to the cost of the land. This amendment 

greatly increased deposit surveys because the deposits were 

actually a credit account toward land payment when patent 

issued. But the credit or deposit could only be used for land in 

the township applied for; it could not be used elsewhere and 

was not refundable if the depositor changed his mind and 

moved elsewhere. The whole deposit survey idea was an 

economy measure (at least to the well intentioned) in which 

the settlers put up the “front money” for the surveys instead 

of using appropriations from the Treasury, but the cost of 

survey for a whole township was too great for only one or two 

settlers to bear. Then too, the “waste and useless lands, unfit 

for cultivation” were not supposed to be surveyed, so many of 

the deposit surveys at this stage were made of only the “good 

parts” of the township, which reduced the cost and made the 

surveying easier for the contracting deputies. That left many 

townships only partly done and compounded the problem of 

“completion” surveys in later years. The Western States, 

especially Nevada and Utah, had many fragmentary surveys 

executed in the early 1870’s. 

On March 13, 1871, Drummond replied to John Taffe, a 

member of Congress, who stated that Carl Meyer of Yankton, 

South Dakota, had invented a metal “Surveyor’s Mark.” Taffe wanted it used in monumenting the public surveys. Cast 

iron monuments had been used on State boundaries and 

other special situations but not as a general practice in 

monumenting the public land surveys. Many corners in the 

Plains States and western deserts disappeared almost before 

148 
the surveyor got out of sight, so the argument for a metal 

monument was sound enough. Drummond declined the suggestion on the grounds of cost, procurement, freight, and 

burden to the surveyors. 

In letters dated March 18, 1871, to Theodore W. Robbins, 

Big Rapids, Michigan, and to Asa H. Guy, County Surveyor, 

Georgetown, Illinois, they were directed to establish the 

quarter corners along the north and west boundaries of the 

townships at midpoint between the controlling section corners except section 6. This reversed the due north and due 

west method propounded in November only four months earlier. 

On March 27, 1871, W. McChesney, Sagetown, Illinois, 

was advised to establish the west quarter corner and north 

quarter corner of a section 6, at 40 chains “original measure” 

(proportioned) north of the southwest corner and west of the 

northeast corner of the section, which is basically the same 

method used today. 

In the late 1860’s and early 1870’s, including Drummond’s 

administration, the surveyors were usually advised to restore obliterated monuments at the intersection of record 

bearings, when the record bearings and distances to found 

original bearing trees did not match. 

On May 6, 1871, Drummond issued a Circular to all Surveyors General, detailing the procedures, estimating, and 

accounts for deposit surveys. These instructions did not affect 

any methods or procedures in the field execution of the rectangular surveys, except as already noted. 

The following letter on how to subdivide a section describes 

the method used to the present day: 

S.M. Delamaker, Esq. Department of the Interior 

Logansport, Indiana General Land Office 

Washington, D.C.June 23,1871 

Your letter of the 15th instant addressed to the 

Hon. Secretary of the Interior, requesting information 

in regard to the proper manner of subdividing a full 

section of the public lands into quarter-quarters, has 

been referred to this office. 

In reply I have to say that the sections should be first 

subdivided into quarters by running straight lines from 

the quarter corners to the opposite corresponding corners. The point of intersection of these lines will be the 

corner commm to the several quarter sections. 

To subdivide the quarter sections, quarter-quarter 

corners should be placed at points equidistant, on 

straight lines, between the corners already established, 

and each quarter subdivided by running straight lines 

from these quarter-quarter corners to the opposite corresponding corners, establishing the common center at 

the intersection of the lines so run. 

Sir: 

Very Respectfully 

Willis Drummond 

Commissioner 

On October 3,1871, Edgar Henry, Monticello, Indiana, was 

advised that to restore the lost corner of sections 3 and 4 on 

the north boundary of a township, he should run due north 

from the original quarter corner of sections 3 and 4 and 

establish the lost closing corner at the point of intersection. 

On November 11, 1871, S. J. Carter, Deputy County Surveyor, Brunswick, Missouri, was instructed to restore lost 

section corners at single proportionate distance on straight 

line between found corners to the north and south, and run 

the east-west section lines straight between the section corners thus restored, placing those quarter corners at midpoint. 

Drummond used that policy of restoring lost section corners 

throughout his tenure in office. 

In the 1871 Annual Report, Drummond reported that the 

Nez Perce Indian Reservation in Idaho had been partially 

subdivided into 20-acre allotments. Many other Indian reservations (too many to name here) had been subdivided into 

20-, 40- and 80-acre allotments, all done by the Three Mile 

Method. Fig. 47 indicates the method used to subdivide a 

section into 20-acre allotments and to number the “lots.” 

Variations of this basic system were used in the different 

surveying districts. An example is shown by Fig. 48, a sketch 

taken from the Special Instructions, Contract No. 381, 

Washington, dated in 1892. In that contract, the Deputy 

Surveyor was instructed to mark the monuments and bearing trees as lot corners instead of the usual one-eighth or 

one-thirty second corner designations. 

The following letter will indicate the policy generally 

adopted in dealing with meander corners: 

Geo. W. Cooley, Esq. 

U.S. Deputy Surveyor 

Minneapolis, Minnsota Washington, D.C. 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

Sir: January 3, 1872 

I am in receipt of your letter of the 23rd Ult. 

making inquiries concerning the re-establishment of 

the meander corners on the 4th Standard Parallel in 

Secs. 31 and 32, Tp. 117 N., R. 21 W., 5th P.M., Minn. 

and stating that the bearing trees on the west side of the 

lake do not agree with the field notes. 

In reply I have to state that it will be necessary to 

re-establish the section corner to sections 31 and 32 on 

the Standard Parallel equidistant between the Southeast corner of Section 32 and the Southwest corner of 

Section 31 and establish the meander corner on the east 

side of the lake on the thus established Standard at a 

distance proportionate to the original measurement. 

The meander corner on the west side of said lake 

should be similarly established, giving due weight to 

the position of the bearing trees which you have found 

standing. 

Very Respectfully 

Your Obt Servant 

Willis Drummond 

Commissioner 

As a general statement, meander corners were not used as 

a basis of proportioning lost section or quarter-section corners or other meander corners. They were treated in much 

the same manner as line trees, controlling the direction of a 

line but not the proportioning along the line. No explanation 

of that philosophy was found; as will be seen, it was not a hard 

and fast rule; exceptions were made. 

In January 1872, R. C. Hathaway, County Surveyor, Oconomowoc, Wisconsin, sent a survey “plat” and application for 

15.69 acres of omitted land lying between the meander line 

and actual shoreline of “Lake LaBelle,” in the northeast 

149 
n 

.c n 

v n 

v A 

w n 

Y 

n 

v n 

8 5 4 3 

.. .. .. 

.. Set.*. 10 .. 

24 23 I 22 21 20 I9 18 17 

. .. 

25 28 29 30 31 32 I 26 1 27 

+ = Original corner 

o = Corners at equidistant positions 

= Allotment corners at equidistant positions 

Figure 47. Method of Subdividing Sections on Indian Reservations. 

quarter of section 30, T. 8 N., R. 17 E., Fourth Principal 

Meridian. Hathaway wanted to purchase the land. Drummond bluntly rejected the application, said the survey by 

Hathaway was illegal, and that the government would not 

survey such small parcels of land until such time as the lake 

entirely dried up. (The whole lake covered over two sections 

of area.) 

The following letter is of special interest: 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

Washington, D.C., Feby 15, 1872 

Hon. H. C. Burchard 

House of Representatives 

Sir: 

I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt, by 

reference from you, of a letter from Mr. M. Montelins 

dated Cedarville, Stephenson County, Illinois, 29th 

ultimo, desiring information in regard to the proper 

method of establishing the centers of sections, and in 

reply, I have to say as follows: - 

This office has not authority to issue instructions for 

the subdivisions of lands which have been disposed of by 

the government and when called upon for an opinion in 

the matter, can only point out the manner in which the 

law requires said subdivisions to be made. 

Under the provisions of the Act of Congress, approved 

February 11,1805, the course to be pursued in subdivision of Sections is to run straight lines from the estabished quarter section corners - U.S. Surveys -to the 

opposite corresponding corners, and the point of intersection of these lines will be the corner common to the 

several quarter sections. 

The “Instructions to the Deputy Surveyors of the 

United States for the District of Illinois and Missouri”, 

issued in the year 1856, contains directions for the subdivision of Sections, which, though not in strict accordance with the requirements of the Act above referred 

to, is the method which has been adopted by many 

County Surveyors in Illinois. 

In some cases the Surveyor General Subdivided the 

Sections upon the original plats by the rule laid down in 

said “Instructions” and the lands have been sold according to such subdivision. 

Many purchasers of lands subdivided upon the plats 

by the Surveyor General, or subdivided by County Surveyors according to the rule given in the “Instructions” 

have held possession for many years, and have fenced 

their lands and made other improvements in such manner that, a change in the lines, in order to make them 

conform to the strict letter of the law, would often work 

great hardship and it has been the policy of this office, to 

recommend in such cases the maintenance of the subdivision lines as established in the field. 

Mr. M’s. letter to you is herewith returned. 

I am Sir 

Very Respectfully 

your Obt Servant 

Willis Drummond 

Commissioner 

So far as is known, this policy on “instructions for the 

subdivisions of lands” is still in force today in the BLM. The 

opinion expressed with regard to the 1856 Instructions is also 

abided by if and when any public lands are affected by those 

improperly executed section subdivisions. The BLM does not 

presume to tell anyone what they should or should not do on 

privately owned lands not affecting public lands. Any opinions expressed are still an opinion and advisory only. 

The Act ofMarch 1,1872,17 Stat. 32, created Yellowstone 

National Park, the first of the national parks. The boundaries of the parks were surveyed by the GLO. 

On May 1,1872, Drummond replied to M. J. Alexander of 

Marshall, Missouri, in regard to establishing the north quarter corner of section 2, T. 50 N., R. 21 W., Fifth Principal 

Meridian. The original plat showed that the subject quarter 

corner had been theoretically established or protracted at a 

point 39.11 chains west of the northeast corner and 41.19 

chains east of the northwest corner of the section. Alexander 

was advised to establish it in that position by proportionate 

measurement to protect the subdivisions shown on the original plat, which is the same policy used today. 

The Act ofMay 10,1872,17 Stat. 91, is the general Mining 

Law, still in effect-the basis of the mineral surveys made on 

the public lands. Although mineral surveys are not made by 

employees of the BLM, mineral surveyors are appointed by 

the BLM. While executing a mineral survey, the surveyors 

are technically government employees but their fees are paid 

by the claimant. A mineral surveyor acts in about the same 

capacity as did the “District Surveyors” appointed by Jared 

Mansfield in Ohio. 

The 1872 Mining Law covers both lode and placer claims 

and millsites. Lode claims are surveyed, usually without 

regard to the rectangular system, though they are usually 

tied to a rectangular corner; they are then segregated out of 

the sections in which they are located, leaving many oddshaped fractional lots. Millsites are usually surveyed in a 

similar manner. Placer claims are now usually taken by legal 

subdivision or aliquot parts of legal subdivisions of a section, 

although thousands of “gulch” placers were also surveyed. 

The BLM issues orders for mineral surveys and approves 

the field notes and constructs the mineral survey plats. Field 

surveyors are often confronted with the Dependent Resurvey 

of mining claims but not the original survey. Mining claims 

themselves have no influence on the system and extension of 

the rectangular surveys. An unsurveyed but marked mining 

claim location may be segregated from unentered public 

lands for administrative purposes. 

On September 3,1872, Drummond entered into a contract 

with and issued Special Instructions to Orrin T. Morrill, U.S. 

Surveyor, for the survey of township boundaries, section 

lines, and section subdivisions on the Pottawatomie Indian 

Reservation in the Indian Territory. The east boundary of the 

reservation had been surveyed in 1871 by Nathaniel Robbins 

as the west boundary of the Seminole Reservation. The north 

boundary of the Pottawatomie was the north fork of the 

Canadian River; the south boundary was the Canadian River. The west boundary was in the late stages of being surveyed by Barrett and Darling, who were also surveying the 

Second Standard Parallel North through the approximate 

center of the Pottawatomie Reservation, running east from 

the Indian Meridian. 

150 
Morrill was instructed to survey the Pottawatomie lands 

using the Second Standard Parallel as an “auxiliary” baseline for his work. The following paragraph from the Special 

Instructions are given verbatim: 

“The Second Standard Parallel is coincident with the 

line between townships eight and nine North of the 

Base line, it will serve you as an auxiliary base for 

running your district into townships lying both North 

and South thereform; you will close your meridional 

lines starting from the parallel North from the Standard corners and South from the closing corners which 

you will have established at proper convergency of the 

meridians.” 

Morrill was to subdivide the sections into 40-acre tracts 

using the Three Mile Method of subdividing sections. To 

accomplish that, he had to establish one-sixteenth section 

corners at equidistant positions between the section and 

quarter-section corners. Morrill was instructed to retrace the 

Second Standard Parallel, which had already been surveyed, 

and establish the one-sixteenth corners thereon, as shown on 

a diagram accompanying his Special Instructions. 

Morrill had to retrace the Standard to set not only the 

one-sixteenth corners, but also the “closing corners” for the 

townships and sections to the south of the standard. This 

process was not dissimilar from that used on standard parallels, south of the baseline, under the 1851 Oregon Manual. 

But the closing corners established in that manner, even 

though called “closing corners”, are not in fact true closing 

corners. They are generally treated today as junior corners 

supposedly established on a senior line. Morrill ran south 

from them to the Canadian River. The Barrett-Darling survey of the Second Standard Parallel was a senior survey but 

would not have resulted in an approved plat, per se. The 

Standard Parallel was probably approved as part of the plats 

of the surveys of the townships as returned by Morrill. Therefore, if the presumption is true, both the standard corners and 

the junior corners established by Morrill would control alignment and distance along the Standard Parallel in any subsequent dependent resurvey. The field notes and plats would 

have to be carefully examined to establish the true status of 

the corners along that line. 

On November 3, 1872, Morrill was instructed to write the 

field notes of his work in accordance with specimen field 

notes sent to him of the Warpeton and Sissiton Reservation in 

Dakota. As previously noted, that reservation was the first 

one subdivided by the Three Mile Method. 

The Act of February 18,1873, 17 Stat. 465, declared that 

the coal lands, and iron ore lands in Michigan, Wisconsin, 

and Minnesota were not subject to the 1872 Mining Law. 

In a letter to John Melendy, County Surveyor, Shawnee, 

Wisconsin, dated July 12, 1873, Melendy was advised to 

restore the lost quarter corner on the east boundary of section 

24, T. 27 N., R. 15 E., Fourth Principal Meridian, at proportionate distance between the found original meander corner to the north and the original southeast corner of section 

24. Thus, the meander corner was used to control the restoration of the lost quarter corner. A nearly identical letter went 

to a man in Kansas on June 5, 1877. This advice was a 

reversal of the opinion expressed to George Cooley on January 3, 1872. 

The following letter concerned the proper method of subdividing a section 2: 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

Frank Dorr Washington, D.C., Sept. 12, 1873 

Waupaca, Wisconsin 

Sir: 

In reply to your letter of the 1st instant, relative 

to the proper manner of establishing the quarterquarter corner north of the centre of Section 2, T. 24 N., 

R. 14 E., 4th P.M., Wisconsin, I have to say as follows:- 

The said corner should be established at a distance of 

twenty chains original measurement north of the centre 

of the section-This rule will, of course, necessitate the 

adoption of a proportional measurement if the chaining 

does not agree with the original distance. 

The original length of the quarter line from the center of 

the section to the township line is the mean between the 

lengths of the East and West boundaries of the North 

halfof the section or 45.85 chains, this being the length 

adopted in calculating the areas of the lots in said section. 

My letter of the 30th January, 1872, relative to the S. E. 

1/4 of the N. W. l/4 of said section 2, addressed to Mr. E. P. 

Perry, was based upon the presumption that the County 

Surveyor’s chain was of the same length as that of the 

U.S. Deputy Surveyor. 

Very Respectfully 

Willis Drummond 

Commissioner 

Frank Dorr was the County Surveyor. E. P. Perry was the 

owner of the SE Y4, NW Y4, section 2. The distance from the 

center quarter corner to the north quarter corner was 44.00 

chains by Dorr’s measurement. When proportioned, the center-north one-sixteenth was 0.81 chains south of a full 20 

chains, which “deprived” Perry of land that he had “improved 

and rendered valuable.” Perry retained a law firm to represent him in the dispute; they wrote to the Commissioner on 

November 28, 1873, for an explanation. Drummond replied 

on December 5, 1873, and stuck by his above decision. 

This exchange established the principle of subdividing sections against the north and west boundaries to suit the areas 

as calculated on the original plat. 

A somewhat similar but different problem came up at this 

same time. On November 22, 1872, M. J. Alexander, Marshall, Missouri, had this situation: in the original survey ofT. 

51 N., R. 19 W., Fifth Principal Meridian, the length of the 

south boundaries of sections 1, 12, 13, 24, and 25 had been 

returned as something greater than 81 chains in length, 

possibly 81.50 chains. That length was “out of limits;” it may 

have been caused by a crooked east boundary. (See subject of 

letter to Charles E. Morse, July 28, 1847, in Arkansas.) 

However, the original surveyor had placed the quarter section corners at midpoint in the field and returned them as 

such in the field notes. But in constructing the plat of the 

township, the draftsman had shown the quarter corners to be 

at 40 chains from the west and had placed all of the excess in 

the east half of the sections in calculating the areas. 

Apparently the quarter corners were lost and needed restor151 
ing and Alexander was to subdivide those sections. He 

wanted to know what controlled, the plat or the field notes? 

Drummond advised him that the field notes controlled; the 

corners would have to be at equidistant points and the sections subdivided accordingly. Apparently there were no lots 

along the east boundary, just quarter sections containing 

more than 160 acres shown on the plat. 

If confronted with that problem today, and if the east 

halves of the sections had been protracted into lots against 

the east boundary, the BLM would also restore the quarter 

corners at midpoint if lost, but would then establish the east 

one-sixteenth section corners in a position proportionate to 

the distances used to calculate the areas on the plat. 

On February 19,1873,18 Stat. 16, Congress passed a special act, granting to Holt County, Missouri, for school purposes, the former bed of Tarkio Lake, located in the east half 

of T. 60 N.,R. 39 W., Fifth Principal Meridian. The lake had 

been meandered during the original survey in 1846. The 

county court designated Stephen C. Collins as a competent 

surveyor to execute the survey of the dried-up lake. On 

March 19, 1874, Drummond issued Special Instructions to 

Collins for the survey, which was to simply extend the section 

lines out from the meander corners, a normal completion 

survey. The survey of Tarkio Lake was approved June 26, 

1874. 

Tarkio Lake was a dried-up, meandered lake, and the lands 

bordering it had been patented. The government claimed 

ownership through the long-standing policy on dried up 

lakes, but dried-up lake surveys had been on a back burner 

since at least January 1872 (as indicated in the Black Lake 

case). By granting Tarkio Lake to Holt County, Congress was 

giving tacit recognition to government ownership of relicted 

lake beds, or at least that is how the Commissioner reacted to 

the act. More dried-up lake surveys followed. 

In a letter dated March 23, 1874, Drummond advised F. 

Marky, the County Surveyor in Chillicothe, Missouri, to restore the northeast corner of section 4, T. 56 N., R. 25 W., 

Fifth Principal Meridian, by double proportion. When Marky 

restored the corners along the north boundary of the 

township on a straight line between found corners, the distance from the found quarter corner of sections 4 and 5, to the 

restored township line was very short, but the distance to the 

next found corner to the north was too long. Drummond 

advised him to restore the corners along the township line by 

proportion (east-west) but to determine the alignment of the 

township line by proportioning between found original corners to the north and south. This method is still provided for 

in the 1973 Manual, Sec. 5-37, in special cases, with conclusive proof. 

In a letter to “Hunter and Page,” Chicago, Illinois, dated 

March 24, 1874, in regard to the proper method of establishing the north quarter corner of section 6, T. 38 N., R. 12 

E., Third Principal Meridian, they were advised to establish 

the corner at a point which would “suit the areas expressed on 

the official plat” at proportionate distance between the northeast and northwest corners of the section. (This opinion was 

corrected on April 18, 1874, for other reasons.) 

In a letter dated April 14, 1874, sent to P.M. Brown, the 

County Surveyor in Smith’s Creek, Michigan, in regard to 

establishing quarter corners.along the west boundary of a 

township, the phrase “should be placed at the points indicated by the calculation of the areas of the quarter sections 

adjoining the range line” was used. These two phrases, identical in meaning, were used increasingly from then on when 

replying to similar inquiries. They have evolved over the 

years to the often-used phrase “protect the plat.” 

On July 1,1874, Samuel S. Burdett became Commissioner 

of the GLO. 

The following letter had to do with “off-line” closing corners: 

Charles J. Wright Department of the Interior 

Deputy Co. Surveyor General Land Office 

Fergus Falls, Minn. Washington, D.C., 

June 24, 1874 

Sir: In reply to your letter ofthe 13th instant, alleging 

that the closing corners on the Standard Parallel between Tps. 132 and 133 N., R. 41 W., 5th P.M. are from 

two to four rods north of the Standard, I have to say that 

an examination of the field notes and plats in this office 

does not verify your statement, but in any event the 

Standard Parallel must be considered the true boundary between the townships referred to. 

Very Respectfully 

W. W. Curtis 

Acting Commissioner 

This policy on “off-line” closing corners has never wavered. 

On July 13,1874, Burdett issued a Circular (see Appendix) 

on policy in regard to the survey of the beds of dried-up lakes. 

Such lake beds or relicted lands along the shore, exceeding 40 

acres, would be surveyed at the expense ofthe applicant, with 

a deposit, with the necessary proofs. 

The Wolf Lake-George Lake situation became active in 

September 1874. On September 2, Burdett wrote to J. H. 

Hardin, Chicago, Illinois, concerning the navigability of Wolf 

Lake located in fractional T. 37 N., R. 15 E., Third Principal 

Meridian, Illinois. The original survey had been made in 

1834 and 1835 and had meandered a lake shown as “Navigable Lake” on the plat. Lands bordering the lake had been 

patented in 1841. Lake George was part of the same lake but 

was located in T. 37 N., R. 9 W., and T. 38 N., Rs. 9 and 10 W., 

Second Principal Meridian, Indiana. (The state boundary 

crossed the lake.) Apparently the lake had receded and 

claims were being made on the relicted lands. Burdett correctly told Hardin that just because the plat called it a 

“Navigable Lake,” that label didn’t make it navigable in fact. 

Also on September 2, Burdett issued instructions to Elisha 

S. Bennet of La Porte, Indiana, to investigate the conditions 

of the lake and make a report on the matter, basically as 

required by the Circular ofJuly 13. Bennet must have made a 

rapid investigation because on September 8, 1874, Special 

Instructions went to Alexander Wolcott, County Surveyor, 

Cook County, Chicago, Illinois, instructing him to extend the 

lines of the public surveys over Wolf Lake, which Wolcott did. 

In letters to Hardin and others on November 30, 1874, Burdett informed them that the survey by Wolcott had been 

approved by him on November 28. The plats were sent to the 

land office on January 7,1875. In 1875, George Lake on the 

Indiana side was also surveyed and approved January 12, 

1876. Hardin and others protested the surveys to the Secre152 
tary, who upheld the survey. At some later date, the government patented part of the surveyed relicted lands in Wolf 

Lake to Conrad Jordan and another part to Jabez G. Smale. 

Hardin sued on grounds of riparian rights, as did Charles H. 

Mitchell, another upland owner, and the whole matter entered the judicial process. (The Pistakee Lake case, in Lake 

County, Illinois, was hot at the same time and involved 

similar circumstances.) 

The Hardin us. Jordan case first went to court in 1883, and 

Hardin’s claim to the lake bed based on riparian rights was 

upheld. The case went through the appeals process and came 

before the U.S. Supreme Court in January 1891. The Supreme Court rendered a lengthy decision on May 11, 1891 

(see Hardin us. Jordan, 140 U.S. 371) and ruled that Hardin 

did have riparian rights to the relicted lands in Wolf Lake. 

The Mitchell us. Smale case (140 U.S. 406) was argued 

before the Supreme Court at the same time. The only difference was that the original meander line of 1834 - 1835 had 

cut off a small tongue of land projecting out into the lake; this 

narrow strip of omitted land was quite small in area. The 

court ruled that this small area did not deprive Mitchell of his 

riparian rights to the lake. This decision (by which the area of 

the omitted land is judged in relation to the area of upland 

lots patented) is still the basic test used by the BLM to 

determine whether lands are omitted and therefore subject to 

survey. But a later case was more clear on the subject. 

This was 1874 and the final decisions weren’t made until 

1891; business had to go on in the interim. 

On October 30, 1874, N. P. Stilson, Jefferson, Iowa, wrote 

to the Secretary of the Interior, requesting advice on establishing the quarter section corner of sections 2 and 11, T. 83 

N., R. 30 W., Fifth Principal Meridian. The original surveyor, 

in running the line between sections 2 and 11, had set a 

witness corner at 34.92 chains, a second witness corner at 

50.38 chains, with a total length of the line as 79.76 chains. 

Both witness corners were found, as were the section corners. 

Where should the quarter corner be established? Burdett 

replied on November 14 that Stilson should establish the 

quarter corner on line between the witness corners but at 

midpoint between the section corners. Proportioning between the witness corners was not considered by Burdett. 

The 1874 Annual Report contained long lists and publications of the many Departmental decisions and decisions of 

the GLO concerning the public lands, mining claims, and 

private land claims. The Annual Report was being used to 

publish those decisions much in the same manner as the 

Land Decisions (LD’s) and Interior Decisions (ID’S) which 

came later. This practice continued in the annual reports for 

subsequent years. 

The 1874 report also indicated that Charles F. Smith, Deputy Surveyor, had nearly completed the rectangular surveys 

of the Florida Keys. Smith had started that project in 1872 

and apparently completed the work in 1876. 

In a letter dated January 23, 1875, Andrew Porter, Petoskey, Michigan, was advised that to subdivide fractional section 6, T. 34 N., R. 5 W., Michigan, made fractional by Little 

Traverse Bay, he should run the east-west centerline between quarter corners, and to run the north-south centerline 

from the quarter corner of sections 6 and 7, north, “parallel 

with the east boundary of the section, to the Bay.” This was 

another step away from the due north doctrine. 

On February 17, 1875, a letter was sent to M. P. Brittain, 

County Surveyor, Summit, Alabama, in response to his request regarding the proper method of subdividing sections. 

The letter was practically verbatim the instructions issued as 

a Circular on November 1,1879, under the heading “Subdivision of Sections.” In response to similar inquiries during 

ensuing years, the letter to Brittain was copied verbatim 

until issuance of the 1879 Circular. 

The Act of March 3, 1875, 18 Stat. 366, provided for the 

closing of the Office of Surveyor General of Kansas. The office 

at Lawrence, Kansas, was closed June 30, 1876, and the 

records turned over to the State. Thus, in just 21 years (a 

rapid rate) the State of Kansas had been surveyed. But, 

already a large percentage of the corners were obliterated 

and resurveys would be necessary. 

In one of the numerous letters to Hiram W. Barney, WoneWOC, Wisconsin (this one dated March 8, 18751, the “instructions” to Brittain on subdividing sections were extended to 

include the “anomalous” or elongated sections in a township. 

The quarter-quarter corners on the centerlines were to be 

established at proportionate positions to suit “the calculation 

of the areas expressed on the plats,” adopting mean lengths. 

On April 12, 1875, C. W. Shoemaker, Surveyor in Waterville, Ohio, requested advice on establishing the west onesixteenth corner between sections 6 and 7, T. 7 N., R. 8 E., 

First Principal Meridian, Ohio. He had found the original 

quarter corner, but the closing corner (double corners along 

the range line) of sections 6 and 7 was off-line. Where would 

the one-sixteenth corner be placed? Did the off-line closing 

corner control or the true range line? Burdett advised him on 

April 22 that the off-line closing corner controlled the proportionate position of the west one-sixteenth corner (i.e., it 

controlled the original measurement) but did not control the 

direction of the range line. The true southwest corner of 

section 6 would be at the true point of intersection of the lines. 

As far as it can be determined, this principle has never been 

abrogated by any opinions or decisions of the GLO and BLM, 

nor by any known court decision. 

In the Annual Instructions of April 14,1875, the Surveyors 

General were instructed to direct their deputies to build 

mounds of earth and dig pits at all corners monumented with 

stones. These instructions were later referred to as a circular. 

The method is shown in the 1881 Manual (Diagram C, sheet 

1; see Appendix). 

On June 28, 1875, M. S. McCord, County Surveyor in 

Nashville, Illinois, sent copies of “rules for the Subdivision of 

Sections” which McCord said had been “issued by the Secretary of State of Michigan, with the approval of the GLO.” 

McCord asked if these rules were indeed in accordance with 

the view of the GLO. Burdett replied on July 6,1875, that the 

rules were “in the main, correct,” but went on to give the 

“following approved rules for the Subdivision of Sections and 

the restoration of lost corners.” The rules that followed were 

the complete Circular issued on November 1, 1879; it was 

actually in effect nearly three and one-half years before the 

formal issuance. It did, of course, propound the single proportion north-south policy of restoring lost section corners, 

which had been in effect since the early 1860’s, and would 

remain so until 1882. 

On July 7, 1875, James S. Miller, U.S. Surveyor under a 

contract with Commissioner Burdett, dated October 2,1874, 

153 
established the initial point of the Wind River Meridian and 

Baseline in Wyoming, which was established to control the 

surveys in the Shoshone Indian Reservation. Miller surveyed 

the exterior boundaries, township, and subdivisional lines. 

This system of surveys covers a small area in west-central 

Wyoming; the remainder of the State is surveyed with reference to the Sixth Principal Meridian. 

On August 30,1875, Charles L. Dubois, a Deputy Surveyor 

under a contract dated August 12, 1875, with the Surveyor 

General of Utah, established the initial point of the Uintah 

Meridian and Baseline, a meridian set up for the surveys in 

the Uintah Indian Reservation. Dubois had executed many of 

the surveys in the Indian Territory. The rectangular surveys, 

based on this initial point, are confined to a relatively small 

area in the northeastern part of Utah. 

In the 1875 Annual Report, Commissioner Burdett reported that the GLO had been organized into 11 separate 

divisions, each identified by a letter of the alphabet. The 

divisions, assigned different duties and responsibilities in 

the operations of the GLO, were as follows: 

Division 

A - Chief Clerk (Communications, general business) 

B - Recorder (Patents and related business) 

C - Public Lands (Tract books, disposals, etc.) 

D - Private Land Claims (Matters relating to private 

E - Surveying (Surveyors General, public land surF - Railroads (Railroad grants, wagon roads, etc.) 

G - Pre-emption (Preemptions, townsites, Indian 

K -Swamp Lands (Administration of swamp land 

L - Drafting (Plats, maps, etc.) 

M - Accounts (Registers and Receivers, payments) 

N - Minerals (Administration of mineral lands and 

The duties of the division “E” were given in detail as 

Division E. 

In charge of the principal clerk of surveys. This division 

is charged with the supervision of all work relating to 

the public surveys. Instructions to the surveyorsgeneral relative to the extension of surveys or the examination and correction of erroneous surveys are here 

prepared. All contracts for surveys by deputy surveyors 

are here examined and passed upon, and the adjustment 

of accounts for surveying service made and submitted to 

the Treasury Department for payment. All returns of 

surveys are referred to this division for examination as 

to correctness, and after approval are filed in the division. All records and correspondence relating to Indian, 

military, light-house, live oak, or other reservations are 

in charge of this division. 

To this division are also referred matters pertaining to 

the establishemnt of boundary lines, by astronomical 

surveys, between States and Territories of the United 

States. 

The plats and field-notes of all surveys are retained on 

claims) 

veys) 

lands) 

grants) 

laws) 

follows: 

the files of this division, in charge of a principal 

draughtsman, who supervises all work of draughting or 

copying plats of surveys, and who compiles and prepares 

the official map of the United States. There are in this 

division more than 50,000 plats or maps of township and 

other surveys. 

If a division corresponded, the letter would be identified by 

the alphabetical designation of the division, such as, “Letter 

E, dated June 4, 1881.” In later years, there were minor 

reorganizations of the divisions. Eventually, Divisions “P’ 

and “0” were added. The surveying division was always “E.” 

Burdett also requested funds for the purchase of iron posts 

or quarried stone monuments to mark the public surveys. 

The loss of corners in the Plains States and California was 

very great. He thought the monuments should be set at 

alternate section corners or at least, at every township corner 

to preserve the surveys. 

In a letter to Richard S. Hall, Oconto, Wisconsin, dated 

February 9, 1876, Hall was advised to restore lost closing 

corners along the north boundary of a township at proportionate distance from the corners controlling the township 

line. Prior to this time, surveyors had been advised to place 

the closing corners at record distance (usually a short distance) from the controlling or regular corners. 

On June 24, 1876, James A. Williamson was appointed 

Commissioner of the GLO. 

The Civil Appropriations Act ofJuly 31,1876,19 Stat. 102, 

provided that the initial points of the rectangular surveys 

could be established by triangulation; however, none were so 

determined in the continguous 48 States. The act also 

abolished the Office of Surveyor General in Kansas, which 

was closed June 30, 1876. 

The Act of July 31,1876, 19 Stat. 121, required that railroads had to pay for the costs of surveying the lands to be 

conveyed under their grants. An accurate account had to be 

kept of the costs of survey and patent could not issue until the 

cost was paid into the Treasury. The Commissioner had been 

charging the railroads, the railroad companies appealed, and 

the law was passed, backing up the Commissioner. 

Commissioner Williamson issued his first Annual Instructions to the Surveyors General on August 23, 1876, which 

were very lengthy; they made several changes in policy and 

procedures. In succeeding years, they were referred to in 

much the same manner as were circulars. 

Among other things, the instructions listed the order of 

priority in the surveys in accordance with the Appropriations 

Act: 

(1) Agricultural land 

(2) Irrigable land 

(3) Timber land 

(4) Coal land 

(5) Exterior boundaries of townships 

(6) Private land claims 

The deputies were not to begin any survey until after the 

contract had been approved by the Commissioner. Triangulations made to establish a remote township corner would not 

be paid for, effectively stopping the permission given in the 

Appropriations Act. The township lines were to be extended 

in the normal manner, from south to north. If at all possible, a 

whole township must be surveyed, not just a part of it. The 

154 
Circular of June 1,1864, was modified. Both banks of navigable streams were to be meandered. All former or old corners started from or tied to were to be fully described in the 

field notes. The Special Instructions for any contract were to 

be sent to the Commissioner along with the contract for 

approval. 

In a letter to a man in Minnesota, dated September 28, 

1876, Williamson stated that the survey of dried-up lakes 

had been suspended in April 1876 and that island surveys in 

“closed” States (those with no Surveyor General) were also 

suspended, pending legislation on the matters by Congress. 

The Wolf Lake case was having its effect. 

In the 1876 Annual Report, Williamson complained that 

the entire Washington staff of the GLO had been reduced to 

only 145 people, who were all overworked and underpaid, and 

who had no space to work in. People and files were occupying 

hall space. During the year, 59,192 letters had been received 

and 54,127 letters written, which filled 42,315 pages of folio 

records. 

Williamson also commented that he couldn’t see any good 

reason why dried-up lake beds should be allowed to go to the 

adjacent owners and he urged legislation on the matter. 

On February 17,1877, in a letter to William Vincent, the 

County Surveyor in Manistee, Michigan, Williamson stated 

that riparian rights in a lake could only be determined by a 

proper court, which was a clear backing-off on the lakes issue. 

The Act of February 16, 1877, 19 Stat. 231, appropriated 

$2,500 for and directed the Commissioner to have resurveyed 

Tps. 18 and 19 N., R. 1 W., Michigan, because they had never 

been “properly surveyed.” 

These resurveys were made by T. Gale Merrill, Deputy 

Surveyor, under contract dated March 3, 1877. Work began 

April 16,1877, and was completed July 17,1877. The resurveys were approved August 3, 1877. During the resurveys, 

many of the original corners were found and adopted by 

Merrill who then restored the lost corners by the current 

single proportion, north-south rules. The areas on the plats 

were changed to fit the returns of the resurvey, which caused 

some problem as the following letter indicates: 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

Washington, D.C., 

E. G. Goddard June 24, 1878 

East Saginaw, Michigan 

Sir: 

I have received your letter dated the 14th instant, 

requesting information as to the subdivision of Section 

6, Tp. 18 N., Range 1 West, Michigan, especially as to 

the N. E. Y4 of N. W. l/4 and N. W. 1/4 of the N. E. 1/4 which 

you say was purchased from the State by you prior to the 

resurvey of said Township in 1877. 

By the original plat the tracts referred to were represented as containing 80.72 acres, while by the resurvey 

they contain but 69.73 acres, and you ask in view of the 

fact that the lands were purchased by the original plat, 

how the section is to be subdivided. 

In reply I have to say that evidence having been 

submitted to Congress that the survey of the section line 

in said township was never made, a law was passed 

authorizing a resurvey which was therfore made and 

approved, and the resurvey will govern both as to 

boundaries and areas of tracts. 

Enclosed herewith is a diagram of said Sec. 6, showing the areas of tracts therein together with the length 

of the lines. The land having been purchased by you 

from the State, you will have to look to the State for 

indemnity for the deficiency. 

Very Respectfully 

J. A. Williamson 

Commissioner 

Resurveys caused many headaches and misunderstandings, so few, if any, had been done for over 20 years. Now the 

citizens were again pressing for resurveys, claiming that the 

original surveys were fraudulent or “grossly” in error, which 

was not always true, with the costs to be borne by the government, and with the idea that a government resurvey would be 

“official,” ending arguments. In doing a dependent resurvey 

today, the BLM would never return a new area on patented 

lands, but this wasn’t true 100 years ago. It isn’t known when 

the practice of assigning new areas on the plats of resurveys 

for patented lands ceased. 

The Act of March 3, 1877, 19 Stat. 377, is known as the 

“Desert Land Act.” It allowed homesteading of up to 640 

acres of irrigable desert land and dealt with water rights. To 

“prove up” on a desert homestead, the settler had to bring 

water to the land and irrigate and farm a portion of it; this 

proved difficult to do. Many of the so-called “wastelands” 

would now demand surveys. 

On March 9, 1877, Williamson informed a man in Michigan that islands formed in a navigable lake following statehood belonged to the State under Federal Court rulings on 

that subject. 

On December 17,1877, Williamson replied to E. R. Robinson, County Surveyor in Boyne Falls, Michigan, in response 

to an inquiry about how to resurvey the meander line along a 

lake. The pertinent portion of that letter follows: 

“ . . . you state that having commenced at the meander 

corner on the East line of Sec. 32, T. 33 N., R. 6 W., you 

ran as the field notes require, N. 77” W., for a distance 

less than one call, and found the departure of the meander line from the lake beach so great as to cause dissatisfaction to the interested parties, and ask how the difficulty is to be remedied. 

The examination in the field made in this case or the 

data furnished by you is insufficient to lead to a solution 

of the question. 

Upon examination of the field notes, it is found by 

computation that the meander line will close on the 

meander corner on the North line of Sec. 32 within 

reasonable limits. 

Having by reference (if possible) to a known line of the 

meander survey adjusted your compass and chain to 

correspond with the same, you will retrace the meander 

line in the same direction in which it was originally run 

from the corner on the direction in which it was originally run from the corner on the East line of Sec. 32, 

through its various bearings and distances to a known 

point on the line, and if necessary to the meander corner 

155 
on the North line of Sec. 32. (which if lost can be restored 

from the adjacent section corners). 

Having ascertained the difference in the falling of the 

terminal point of your survey as compared with the 

actual identified point on the meander line you will 

then proceed to establish the corner or corners, which 

may be required, by well known rules of proportion. 

Williamson described the principles still followed in retracing and adjusting a meander line. It is unknown what the 

“well known rules of proportion” were that Robinson was 

supposed to use. The Circular of March 13,1883, on Restoration of Lost and Obliterated Corners (13, p. 11 and 12) describes proportioning the length of the courses in proportion 

to the length of the closing error and to proportion the angles 

to a closure. Hodgman’s Manual describes a “Compass Rule” 

adjustment for balancing a survey in computing areas (p. 

138) but describes (by BLM parlance) the “Grant Boundary 

Method” in adjusting the misclosure in the resurvey of an 

irregular-shaped tract (p. 96-99). The text Elements of Surveying by Charles Davies, published in 1870, describes the 

compass rule for adjusting the closing error in area computation (p. 94-95) but then makes an arbitrary adjustment in 

actual fact. The compass rule method is said to have been 

devised by Bowditch about 1805, but the letters, circulars 

and instructions up to the 1880’s make no mention of it. The 

1930 and subsequent Manuals of Surveying Instructions use 

the compass rule for adjusting a nonriparian meander line, 

which is also used to adjust misclosures in making area 

computations. 

In the 1877 Annual Report, both the Secretary of the Interior and Commissioner of the GLO recommended the closing of all the Offices of Surveyors General, appointing one 

Surveyor General to be located in Washington, D.C., abolishing the contract system, and having the surveys executed 

by paid employees appointed by the Surveyor General. The 

Commissioner again recommended legislation granting 

dried-up lakes and small islands to the States. 

During the 1870’s, several inventors devised iron post survey monuments to mark the survey corners and tried to sell 

them to the GLO. All received polite replies to the effect that 

it was a good idea, but funding, freight costs, and burden to 

the deputies were too great. 

On January 4,1878, in a letter to James M. Gillan, County 

Surveyor, in Appleton, Wisconsin, Gillan was advised to restore the lost quarter corner between sections 9 and 16 at 

midpoint between the section corners and on line with a line 

tree that was originally two and one-half chains east of the 

now lost quarter corner. 

On March 27, 1878, F. Markey, County Surveyor, Chillicothe, Missouri, was advised that under the particular circumstances, he should restore the lost corner of sections 1,2, 

11and 12,T. 56 N., R. 25 W., Fifth Principal Meridian, at a 

double proportionate position between the found corners to 

the north, south, east, and west of the lost corner. So, the 

single proportion north-south policy was not a hard and fast 

rule. 

The Act ofJune 3,1878,20 Stat. 88, allowed timber cutting 

on mineral lands in nine of the Western States and territories. The timber was to be used only on those lands. 

In accordance with your request. . . ” 

The Act of June 3, 1878, 20 Stat. 89, provided for sale of 

160-acre tracts of timber lands in Oregon, California, Nevada, and WashingtonTerritory at $2.50 per acre. The act was a 

mistake and later led to large timber land frauds. 

On March 2,1831, Congress had passed legislation making 

it a felony to steal timber from public lands, but left it to the 

local land offices to enforce the law. Timber trespass, or 

“depredation,” as it was called, was becoming a common 

practice and something had to be done. The Commissioner of 

the GLO began appointing special agents to catch and prosecute timber trespassers and Congress provided funds for protecting the timber. But Deputy Surveyors were required in 

many cases to make resurveys to prove that the timber was 

taken from the public lands. The whole thing eventually led 

to setting aside of the Forest Reserves, requiring more surveys. 

On July 30,1878, Williamson wrote to a photolithographic 

company in Washington, D.C., requesting a cost estimate on 

tracing and restoring the plats on file in the GLO and making 

litho copies of them. Every time a copy of a plat had to be sent 

to anyone, a draftsman would place a thin tracing paper over 

it and trace off all of the lines, dimensions, areas, etc. After 

repeated tracings, the “original” plat had been literally cut to 

pieces and many of the figures undiscernible. Apparently the 

company gave a favorable estimate because for several years 

thereafter, copying, restorations, and photolithographic 

copies of the plats were paid for. In the first instance, the GLO 

plat was a copy of the originals which were retained by the 

Surveyors General. Quite often the copy was not an exact 

duplicate of the original; discrepancies did occur. The badly 

deteriorated copy was copied or restored and beyond doubt, 

did not always result in an exact or correct duplicate. So it is 

not unusual to find discrepancies between the original plats 

and the “Washington copy.” 

On August 13,1878, Charles Scott, Deputy Surveyor under 

contract with the Surveyor General of Dakota, established 

the Black Hills Baseline in South Dakota. The initial point 

for this system was the 69th mile post on the DakotaWyoming boundary, surveyed by Rollin J. Reeves in 1877. 

The South Dakota boundary is the Black Hills Meridian. All 

ranges in the system are numbered east from the boundary 

and north or south of the baseline. The Black Hills Meridian 

and Baseline control the surveys in most of western South 

Dakota, and the Fifth and Sixth Principal Meridians control 

the remainder. 

The following letter was sent in reply to an inquiry of the 

correct method of subdivision of an elongated section: 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

Washington, D.C., 

J. M. McEwen, Esq. January 13, 1879 

Wausau, Wisconsin 

Sir: 

In reply to your letter of the 6th instant, requesting 

information in regard to the proper method of subdividing Section 19, Township 28 North, Range 9 East, 4th 

P.M. Wisconsin, I have to state as follows: 

Upon examination of the field notes, I find that in 

surveying this section (which contains more than twice 

the usual quantity of land) the Surveyor established 

156 
supplementary corners at every twenty chains between 

the quarter posts on the north and south boundaries of 

the section and the range line. The proper method of 

proceeding will therefor be: - 

1st. Run Straight lines between the estabished quarter 

section corners - U.S. Surveys - establishing a corner 

at the intersection of the said lines, which corner will be 

common to the four quarter sections. 

2nd. Run Straight lines from the supplementary corners 

on the south boundary to the corresponding corners on 

the north boundary and establish corners at the intersections with the line previously run between the 

East and West quarter posts, also at the points equidistant between the supplementary corners and the corners thus established on the east-and-west quarter line. 

3rd. Establish quarter-quarter corners for the east half 

of the section, at points equidistant between the section 

and quarter-section corners and between the quarter 

corners and the corner common to the four quarter sections and subdivide the Northeast and Southeast quarters by straight lines running between the corners thus 

established. 

4th. On the west boundary of the section the corners 

common to lots 6 and 7 and 18 and 19 should be established at points equidistant between section and quarter section corners. 

As the supplementary corners established on the 

north and south boundaries of the section at 7.85 and 

5.43 chains respectively, east of the range line were 

disregarded in constructing the plat by which the lands 

were sold no notice will be taken of them in subdividing. 

Very Respectfully, 

J. A. Williamson 

Commissioner 

Fig. 49 is a reasonable facsimile of the original plat of 

section 19 (approved February 15, 1854) showing the pertinent facts. While the method of subdividing the northwest 

quarter and southwest quarter of the section is not the procedure that would be used today, it undoubtedly seemed 

reasonable in 1879. An almost identical reply went to a man 

in Missouri on May 15, 1879, in regard to subdividing a 

section similarly elongated except it was against the north 

boundary of the township. Both letters were contrary to the 

method used today and contrary to the opinion as expressed 

in the letter to Barney on March 8, 1875. 

In a letter to Orlando H. Brewster, Surveyor General of 

Louisiana dated January 17,1879, Williamson rejected payment to a Deputy Surveyor for the retracement of 281 chains 

of the south boundary of a township. The Deputy had retraced 

three and one-half miles to find a “starting corner” but had 

not reestablished the “lost” corners. Williamson said he 

would have approved payment had the Deputy set those 

corners. 

By the Act of March 3, 1879, 20 Stat. 352, Congress 

amended the deposit survey laws. The entire act follows: 

CHAP. 170.-An act to amend section twenty four hundred and three of the Revised Statutes of the United 

States, in relation to deposits for surveys. 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States ofAmerica in Congress assembled, That section twenty-four hundred and three of the 

Revised Statutes of the United States be, and is hereby, 

amended so as to read as follows: 

SEC. 2403. Where settlers make deposits in accordance with the provisions of section twenty-four hundred and one, the amount so deposited shall go in part 

payment for their land situated in the townships, the 

surveying of which is paid for out of such deposits; or the 

certificates issued for such deposits may be assigned by 

indorsement, and be received in payment for any public 

lands of the United States entered by settlers under the 

pre-emption and homestead laws of the United States, 

and not otherwise. 

Approved, March 3, 1879. 

Some “deposit survey” frauds had been perpetrated under 

the old deposit system and the Commissioner had issued 

stringent rules regarding them, requiring that the Surveyors 

General have positive proof of actual settlement before 

accepting deposits and issuing contracts for deposit surveys. 

Williamson and succeeding Commissioners issued strict 

orders in that regard to no avail. The deposit survey frauds, 

usually referred to as the “Benson Syndicate Frauds,” began 

almost immediately on a grand scale. 

John A. Benson entered the public land surveys picture as 

a Deputy Surveyor by a contract dated September 9,1873, for 

the survey ofthe subdivisional lines ofT. 26 N., Rs. 1 and 2 E., 

Mount Diablo Meridian, California. He held other contracts 

in succeeding years, and it is believed he did reasonably good 

work until 1879. 

After passage of the deposit survey amendment, Benson 

organized his “syndicate”, abetted by clerks in the Surveyor 

General’s office, with the financial backing of a San Francisco bank. Certainly the Surveyor General would have had to 

be turning his head also. Although much has been written 

about the Benson Syndicate Frauds the swindle worked basically in the following manner: 

Benson hired deputy surveyors, clerks, and draftsmen to 

work the system. Using bank funds to get operating, he filed 

applications for deposit surveys in innumerable townships in 

remote parts of the State. 

The “settlers” were nearly all fictitious; although actual 

persons often appeared, signed the sworn affidavits, and 

made the deposits, they had no idea where the land was 

located on which they were filing. Some street bum may have 

been used and paid for his participation with a bottle of 

whiskey or wine and sometimes even a few dollars cash. Of 

course, the deposit certificate would be immediately assigned 

to Benson; it was almost like a certified check and could be 

used to pay for public lands anywhere, not just the lands 

applied for as before the amendment. 

Benson gathered his gang of deputies, many of them actual 

Deputies who had held legitimate contracts before this time, 

but many were not surveyors at all and some were wholly 

fictitious. Contracts would then be let to them for the survey 

of a township or block of townships for which the phony 

applications and deposits had been made. But, more likely 

than not, no survey would be actually made in the field. If any 

surveying was done it would only be a skeleton job-a few 

township boundaries or parts of them or a few “section lines” 

157 

surveyed by traversing along accessible trails, ridge tops, 

along river canyons, and “stubbing in” corners in calculated 

positions. These “stub jobs” were usually done in areas where 

actual settlers and miners were located, which gave them the 

appearance that a survey was being made, however crude 

and poorly done. But on the whole, no Deputy went to the 

field at all. 

While the Deputy was supposed to be or actually was in the 

field, the field notes of these surveys were being written up, 

and plats prepared in a “boiler room” in San Francisco by the 

support personnel or deputies of the syndicate. If any field 

work was done, it would be incorporated into the record. The 

remainder of the topographic calls would be sketched in from 

any source available, USGS maps and the like. Much of the 

California coast had been or was being mapped by the U.S. 

Coast Survey (USCS), and there is no doubt that their triangulation stations and other data were used to full advantage. 

The rates per mile for these surveys were always the highest rate allowed by law. Often supplemental contracts were 

let for the survey of intervening townships and township 

lines to enable the Deputy to extend the survey lines to a 

deposit survey township. Although allowed by Congress, the 

Commissioner did not allow triangulation as a method for 

extending the lines. The government ended up paying from 

the regular appropriations for many thousands of miles of 

fictitious or fraudulent work. 

The deposit certificates were sold to timber companies, 

land speculators, and possibly even to legitimate settlers, 

perhaps at a small discount, who in turn used them at full 

face value to pay for public lands which they wanted to 

acquire. Most of the Redwoods area of northwestern California were purchased with deposit certificates or cash under 

the Timber Lands Act of June 3,1878. 

The Benson Syndicate Frauds extended to several other 

Western States. No direct evidence exists that Benson operated the swindle in other States, but the Annual Report of 

1887 reported that the syndicate also extended into Nevada, 

Oregon, Colorado, Arizona, New Mexico, Idaho, Montana, 

Utah, and Washington. It is probable that after California, 

Colorado suffered the worst. 

The fraudulent surveys scheme operated until about 1885 

during the tenure of Commissioner William A. J. Sparks. 

During this five-year period, most the surveys contracted for 

were under the deposit system. The annual appropriations 

for all the surveying districts for surveys was only $300,000 

per year. Congress was very tight with the funding and as a 

result, got what they paid for, but the scheme could not have 

worked without collusion on the part of trusted government 

employees, underpaid or otherwise, all the way up to the GLO 

in Washington. 

The Act of March 3, 1879, 20 Stat. 394, created a Public 

Lands Commission to study the public land laws and make 

recommendations to Congress on legislation to improve the 

system or to formulate policies. Thomas Donaldson, a former 

Registrar of the Boise, Idaho, Land Office, was appointed to 

the Commission. He prepared the first report in 1880; it was 

revised twice, the last time in 1883. The third revision, current to December l, 1883, is titled The Public Domain, Its 

History, with Statistics, by Thomas Donaldson. The copy 

which this writer used for reference material was originally 

printed in 1884. While “Donaldson” contains many inaccuracies, it is a good reference for most of the history of the public 

land laws and operations up to the end of 1883. 

The Civil Appropriations Act of March 3, 1879, 20 Stat. 

377, created the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS), a new 

bureau within the Department of the Interior. Among other 

duties, the USGS was made responsible for the classification 

of the public lands and examination of the geologic structure, 

mineral lands, and other resources; eventually it would execute some of the rectangular surveys of the public lands. 

On April 2,1879, Williamson replied to M. Spear, Deputy 

County Surveyor in Roscoe, Kansas, in regard to his request 

for a resurvey of Tps. 6-8 S., Rs. 23-25 W., Sixth Principal 

Meridian, or 9 townships. Spear was told to investigate thoroughly to see if any corners existed and how the topography 

fit. If the surveys were indeed fraudulent, the owners could 

have deposited under the deposit law the estimated cost of 

resurveying the townships, and Williamson would have 

appointed a Deputy to execute the work. If not fraudulent, 

the County Surveyor should do the work, based on the original corners, receiving payment from the settlers. An identical letter was sent on April 7 in regard to a similar request for 

T. 17 S., R. 9 W. The Surveyor General’s office in Kansas had 

only been closed three years, and none of the surveys could 

have been more than 25 years old, but resurveys were 

already being requested. 

On April 17, 1879, Commissioner Williamson issued a 

Circular that said the plats of the rectangular surveys did not 

become official until accepted by the Commissioner of the 

GLO. Prior to this time, the plats became official when 

approved by the Surveyor General. Under this order, the 

triplicate plat was not officially filed in the local land offices 

until after official acceptance of the survey in Washington. 

This acceptance date was usually noted on the margin of the 

plat but was not evidenced by certification on the face of the 

plat until July 1, 1925. Both approval and acceptance dates 

were shown on the plats from 1925 until June 30,1948; since 

1948, only the acceptance date has been shown. 

A letter to Raphael Pumpelty, Oswego, New York, dated 

May 19,1879, was a portent of things to come. Pumpelty had 

requested survey of some land (where isn’t known, but not in 

New York) containing standing timber which laid between 

the original meander line and a lake. The letter said in part: 

“. . . and stating that the tract of land referred to in 

your former letter is not of recent formation but was 

omitted by an error in the original survey - which fact 

is shown by the existence of trees outside the meander 

line. I have to state that in my opinion the tract is 

Government land.” 

Williamson declined to take any steps pending legislation 

by Congress. This statement on omitted lands outside a 

meander line was a reversal of Wilson’s stand on the same 

issue at Black Lake in 1870, but no action was taken. 

In a letter to E. K. Robinson, Boyne Falls, Michigan, dated 

September 27,1879, Acting Commissioner J. M. Armstrong, 

advised him to proportion the record distances to the original 

bearing trees, to reestablish the corner point at a quarter 

corner, because the record didn’t agree with the actual position of the trees. This advise was a reversal of the former 

policy of restoring the corner point at intersection of the 

record bearings. 

159 
On November 1, 1879, Acting Commissioner Armstrong 

issued a Circular letter on the Subdivision of Sections and 

Re-establishment of Lost Corners (previously referred to). 

The Circular (see Appendix) was printed for the purpose of 

replying to requests for opinions on the subjects, which had 

previously been written out each time. The restoration of lost 

interior section corners was by the single proportion, north 

and south method. 

In the 1879 Annual Report, Williamson again requested 

adopting the use of iron posts to be set at alternate section 

corners in areas where “durable stones” and bearing trees 

were not available. (He gave one story to the “inventors” but 

a different version to Congress.) 

On January 20,1880, Armstrong issued a general Circular 

for public consumption to the effect that no more island or 

lake surveys would be made, pending legislation from Congress, which never happened. 

On January 23, 1880, Armstrong advised G. C. Kothe, 

Salina, Kansas, to establish a quarter corner, which fell in a 

river, at record bearing and distance, East, 1.46 chains from 

the original witness corner located on the left bank of the 

river (not at midpoint between section corners, the former 

policy). 

On January 30,1880, Armstrong advised Thomas A. Bagley, County Surveyor, Medicine Lodge, Kansas, to restore a 

lost township corner at proportionate distance between found 

corners to the north and south of the lost corner. 

On February 11,1880, 21 Stat. 301, Congress approved a 

resolution to have printed annually the American Ephemeris 

and Nautical Almanac. This large volume eventually led in 

1910 to the condensed version, modified and published for use 

by the surveyors of the public lands, about as we know it 

today. The American Ephemeris is still published. 

On February 19,1880, Armstrong replied to John M. Morrow, Ellsworth, Kansas, on the subject of offlline closing 

corners, found to be south of the Third Standard Parallel 

South. The letter concluded with these words: “Purchasers of 

lands in sections adjoining the Standard on the south, will 

hold to the Standard notwithstanding the fact that a portion 

of the closing corners were originally established south of 

said line.” 

On March 9, 1880, Thomas H. Holley, County Surveyor, 

Fulton, Missouri, was advised that he should probably restore a lost township corner by double proportion between 

found corners to the north, south, east, and west, because it 

was ten and one-half miles between found corners along the 

range line. 

The Act of June 16,1880,21 Stat. 287, granted two million 

acres of land to be selected by the State to Nevada in lieu of 

the “school land” sections 16 and 36 granted at Statehood. 

Nevada selected large blocks of these lieu lands in the better 

agricultural valleys of the State. There are no “school sections” in the townships in Nevada. 

The Annual Instructions, issued June 26, 1880, required 

that all Surveyors General establish a meridian station at or 

near their offices and that all solar compasses and needle 

compasses used by Deputies had to be checked and adjusted 

on that station. This practice continued until recent years. 

On July 22,1880, Williamson advised B. F. Lee, Authority, 

Kansas, that closing corners found as much as three rods 

off-line, north of the southern boundary of Kansas, would 

control the section lines in Kansas but the owners would hold 

to the State boundary. This policy on off-line closing corners 

has never changed. 

On September 3, 1880, Williamson instructed J. B. Bausman, “Examiner of Surveys and Special Agent” (he was a 

clerk in the GLO), to investigate a case of omitted lands 

between the record meander line and the actual shore ofLake 

Benton in section 8, T. 109 N., R. 45 W., Fifth Principal 

Meridian, Minnesota. The tract had been surveyed by J. 

Gilbert Bryon, County Surveyor of Lincoln County, and a 

plat and field notes sent to the Commissioner for approval. 

Williamson told Bausman to make a thorough investigation 

of the facts. Bausman reported that the tract was in fact 

omitted lands and that the County Surveyor had made a 

proper survey of it. On March 7,1881, Williamson forwarded 

the County Surveyor’s plat and field notes to Jacob H. Stewart, Surveyor General at St. Paul, instructing him to construct a proper plat of the tract, to approve the plat and 

Bryon’s field notes, and to send the duplicate plat to 

Washington. Stewart complied and the plat was accepted 

April 12, 1881, thus the surveys were done and a County 

Surveyor’s work was used to do it. 

On September 25,1880, Stewart was instructed to investigate omitted lands along the Minnesota River in T. 121 N., R. 

46 W., Fifth Principal Meridian, and if they were high and 

dry and “large” in area, he was authorized to have them 

surveyed. 

On or about October 19, 1880, Daniel G. Major, surveyor 

and astronomer, under contract with Commissioner Williamson, established the initial point of the Ute Meridian and 

Baseline in the vicinity of Grand Junction, Colorado. This 

small system was established to survey the Ute Indian Reservation lands. The work was paid for from Indian Service 

appropriations for the survey of Indian allotments, but 

actually only a few townships were surveyed on this system. 

It was dropped in 1881 or 1882, and the Sixth Principal 

Meridian and New Mexico Principal Meridian surveys were 

extended over the Ute Reservation instead. 

In October, 1880, and on November 27 and December 11, 

1880, James L. White, Surveyor, Ocala, Marion County, 

Florida, wrote to Commissioner Williamson asking advice on 

the proper procedure to be used to subdivide section 9, T. 15 

S., R. 23 E., Tallahassee Meridian. The section had been 

surveyed originally by Lewis M. Prevost, Jr., Deputy Surveyor, in 1843. The Silver Spring (River) crossed the northern half of section 9 and Prevost had used a traverse and 

triangulation to cross Silver Spring when surveying the east 

and west boundaries of the section. White found that the part 

of section 9 lying north of Silver Spring was actually offset 

about 4.25 chs. east in relationship to the corners south of 

Silver Spring, and asked how he should subdivide the section. 

In his reply of December 3,1880, Williamson cited the Act of 

February 11,1805, and advised the straight line intersection 

method of establishing the center one-quarter corner. Upon 

receipt of this letter, White then sent to Williamson a sketch 

of the section showing the distortion. On January 12, 1881, 

Williamson reversed his opinion, and advised White to establish the center one-quarter corner at midpoint on the eastwest center line and then connect the two halves of the 

north-south center line to it. That procedure would result in a 

deflection in the north-south center line at the center one160 
quarter corner, i.e., a broken north-south center line. Williamson stated that the intent of theAct of February 11,1805 

was to divide a section into four equal parts, as nearly as may 

be, but that the law did not contemplate such an irregularity 

as existed in section 9; thus, to comply with the intent of the 

law, White should subdivide the section with the method 

described. 

The author has seen numerous instances of gross distortion, especially in sections against the north and west boundaries of the townships, where the one-quarter section corners 

had been “stubbed OU~” during the original survey and no 

actual connection made through, from the last one-quarter 

corners to the section corners on the exterior boundaries. In 

such cases, the principle outlined by Williamson could have 

been, or perhaps, should have been applied. When Mansfield 

proposed the law of 1805, he did not contemplate gross distortions and fictitious closing; therefore, he did not provide for 

them in the Act. Williamson pointed out what the intent of 

the law was at the time it was written and passed by Congress. 

The omitted-lands problem came up again in early 1881 

but in a different form. 

In 1834 and 1835, Ambrose Rice, Deputy Surveyor, surveyed fractional T. 9 S., R. 9 E., Michigan Meridian, in Ohio, 

made fractional by Maumee Bay of Lake Erie and a large 

marsh. The marsh was meandered and the sections adjoining 

it were lotted. On the northeast side of the marsh was located 

a sandy beach area, similar to an outer reef. Rice extended a 

township line across the marsh to the reef and surveyed three 

small islands which were part of it between the marsh and 

open lake. On the original plat, the marsh was labelled “Impassable Marsh covered with Water.” The field notes described it as a “flag marsh.” The fractional sections abutting 

the marsh on the south were patented in 1844. In 1852, the 

State of Ohio filed claim to the marsh under the Swamp 

Lands Act. The claim was denied on the grounds that the 

marsh was not swamp land under the terms of the act. In 

early 1881, applications were made for the survey and purchase of the marsh. 

On April 2,1881, Williamson issued Special Instructions to 

John B. Marston, County Surveyor, Toledo, Ohio, for the 

extension of the rectangular surveys over the marsh, which 

Marston executed during April and May. This is the first 

survey in which a steel tape was used to measure the lines. 

(Steel tapes were being used by mineral surveyors but not by 

Deputy Surveyors.) The plats were approved in June 1881. 

Lands within the surveyed marsh (and possibly the sand 

islands too) were patented in 1882. The successor in title to 

the fractional lots (south of the marsh, patented in 1844) was 

Gertrude J. Niles. The successor in title to the lands surveyed 

by Marston within the marsh was the Cedar Point Club. 

Niles claimed ownership of the marsh on the grounds of 

riparian rights and sought to eject the Cedar Point Club. The 

matter went to court. The Sixth Circuit Court of Appeals 

upheld Cedar Point Club’s title on February 8, 1898 (see 

Niles us. Cedarpoint Club, 85 Fed. Rep. 45). Niles appealed to 

the US. Supreme Court, which upheld the Circuit Court 

decision on December 4, 1899 (see 175 U.S. 299). 

On May 3, 1881, a new Manual of Surveying Instructions 

was issued. Though referred to as the 1881 Manual, it was not 

really a manual and was never enacted into law as was the 

1855 Manual. The tome is titled Instructions of the Commissioner of the General Land Office. In 1880, a meeting was held 

in San Francisco with attendance by the Surveyors General; 

today such a meeting is called a cadastral workshop. At this 

meeting, a commission was appointed to revise the 1855 

Manual; they met in Cheyenne, Wyoming, and prepared 

these instructions. Perhaps Commissioner Williamson 

wasn’t too impressed or felt he didn’t have legal authority to 

issue a new Manual in view of the wording of the Act of May 

30,1862. This conclusion is based partly on the wording in 

the penultimate paragraph of the introductory chapter of this 

Manual. These intructions made no really basic changes in 

the 1855 Manual; they deal primarily with housekeeping 

details, note keeping, contracts forms, citation of the laws, 

and closing limits. Closing limits are defined and tightened 

somewhat. Also included is the Circular letter printed on 

November 1, 1879, which includes the proportion northsouth method for restoring a lost section corner. These instructions did not change the 1855 Manual and were not in 

violation of any statute law, but they were nothing more. 

They were not widely accepted by the Surveyors General; the 

consensus was that they were garbage. The 1881 Manual was 

never enacted into law by Congress (see Appendix). 

In July 1881, island surveys were resumed on a limited 

basis via the deposit system. They have continued to be made 

ever since. 

On June 17,1881, Noah C. McFarland was appointed Commissioner of the GLO and took charge July 6. He was a very 

capable man and the opinions emanating from the GLO soon 

began to reflect that fact. 

On August 26, 1881, McFarland issued Special Instructions to Richard 0. Chaney and William W. Smith, US. 

Surveyors, for the survey of the “Public Land Strip,” now the 

Oklahoma Panhandle. The strip was bounded on the north by 

the Kansas-Colorado boundary (37” north latitude), bounded 

south by the Texas boundary (36”30’ north latitude), on the 

west by the New Mexico boundary (103” west longitude), and 

on the east by the Indian Territory boundary (100” west 

longitude). Chaney and Smith were to establish an astronomic station southeast of Las Animas, Colorado, and extend 

a telegraph line to it for time signals and determine within 

three seconds the 103” west longitude. From that station, 

they were to extend a line due south to 37” north latitude, set 

a monument, continue the line due south to 36’30’ north 

latitude, and there establish the initial point of the Cimarron 

Principal Meridian and Baseline. The initial ,point, at the 

northwest corner of Texas, was to be monumented with a 

stone 6 feet long and 12 inches square. The baseline was to be 

surveyed due east, using a tangent line and offsets therefrom, 

to 100” west longitude, with quarter corners and section 

corners thereon. At the end of each two miles, a “Bausman’s 

Patent U.S. Land Monument,” an iron post, was to be set, 

with the other corners to be monumented with stones. The 

Principal Meridian was to be surveyed back, due north along 

103” west longitude, to the south boundary of Colorado, similarly monumented. Double chaining and frequent astronomic observations were required. A Standard Parallel was 

to be surveyed due east from the meridian, 24 miles north of 

the baseline. Bausman monuments were to be set at alternate section corners on all township, range, and section lines. 

This was an elaborate survey and the only initial point ever 

161 
established at a precisely predetermined point by latitude 

and longitude; it was also the last one ever established in the 

contiguous 48 States. 

Chaney and Smith complied with instructions. The field 

notes indicate they ran the meridian line south between I 

October 19 and November 16,1881. On the latter date, they ’ 

established the initial point and surveyed the baseline between November 21 and Christmas Day. The remainder of 

the surveys followed. All of the townships are numbered 

north and east from the initial point. The Principal Meridian 

is part of the east boundary of New Mexico. Due to the later 

boundary disputes with Texas and a resurvey, the baseline 

does not exactly follow the Texas boundary. 

In a letter to P. T. Curran, Wausau, Wisconsin, dated 

December 24, 1881, McFarland flatly stated that line trees 

control the direction of a line but not the proportions along it. 

He also stated that a lost quarter corner should be restored at 

midpoint between section corners. 

In a reply to James E. Rankin, Elk Rapids, Michigan, dated 

December 29, 1881, McFarland stated that meander lines 

along the navigable Great Lakes did not mark the boundary-the water did. He also stated that small, inconsiderable 

areas between the meander line and water’s edge went to the 

riparian owner; everyone knew that meander lines were run 

in a manner that would leave such small strips. 

In the 1881 Annual Report, McFarland asked for repeal of 

the deposit survey systems, explaining how the deposit 

frauds worked. He asked for $10,000 to purchase iron post 

survey monuments. Both McFarland and the Secretary of the 

Interior asked for examiners of surveys to be direct employees of the Commissioner instead of most examinations 

being made under the Surveyors General. The words used are 

the following: 

“It is an absurdity to suppose that truthful and honest 

returns of examinations in every paticular will be made 

by deputy surveyors, upon whom surveyors general are 

more than oridinarily dependent for examiners, when it 

is considered that the examining deputy will at some 

time, if not already under obligations, have this own 

work examined by the very deputy whose work he has, if 

honest, condemned. The temptation of overlooking defects, either in the survey of lines or the marking of the 

same, has proven too great to be resisted by them. It is 

safe to say that not one per cent of the number of examinations are satisfactory to this office in the results 

obtained.” 

The Secretary also requested that patents be issued to 

individual Indians for lands within a reservation which they 

had improved and occupied. 

In a letter to H. L. Humphrey of the House of Representatives, dated January 19,1882, McFarland approved the idea 

of including the words “and resurveys” in the appropriations 

bill. The wording was used in the Appropriations Act of July 

7,1884, 23 Stat. 194, and generally thereafter. 

In a reply to J. H. Davenport, County Surveyor, Cherokee, 

Iowa, dated March 4,1882, McFarland stated that as a general rule, a lost section corner should be restored between the 

found corners to the north and south of it, but in this (unspecified) situation the lost corner should be restored by double 

proportion. This was the first real break in the north-south 

proportion policy of the 1881 Manual. 

On May 23, 1882, in reply to J. D. Lonsdale, Dale City, 

Iowa, McFarland discussed magnetic variation and then the 

proper method of restoring the lost corner of sections 27,28, 

33, and 34, T. 79 N., R. 30 W., Fifth Principal Meridian, 

concluding with these words: 

“The lost corner in question, should in the opinion of 

this office, be established, first, on the north and south 

line, between nearest corners, proportionate measurement; and if the difference in such location should exceed one chain (the legal allowance) then to correct the 

position of the point thus found by measurement of the 

east and west lines intersecting at the point sought to be 

established.” 

So the “closing limits” of a section were being used to 

determine whether a corner should be single or double proportioned. This closing limit concept was carried into the 

location of quarter section corners as well when their location 

was in doubt. 

The surveys in Kansas, Nebraska, Dakotas, and eastern 

Colorado had progressed very rapidly. Many were, no doubt, 

executed by the “buggy wheel” method of chaining. In those 

open prairies, there is more than ample evidence that the 

original surveys where possible were surveyed by loading 

down a buckboard wagon with stones or stakes. A cloth was 

tied to a spoke of a wheel. One man drove the team, another 

kept line with a compass, and a third counted the revolutions 

of the flagged wheel. When the requisite number of revolutions was counted, to measure a half mile, the counter threw 

out a stone or stake. The more honest surveyors actually 

halted the wagon and set the monument “as per instructions.” Obviously, the line so run would not be straight. The 

distances to topographic calls were also determined in the 

same way. If the east-west section lines were run, they were 

either stubbed out or run in the above described manner. 

Apparently, the stones used were a soft sandstone or conglomerate from which the marks soon weathered away, making them difficult if not impossible to identify if other stones 

were in the area. Or the stones just melted from the action of 

rain, ice, and snow into an unidentifiable pile of sandy rubble. 

Most of the settlers and the local surveyors honored these 

corners where they found them in accordance with the law; 

some did not. Many letters came into the GLO from settlers 

complaining that a neighbor and often some surveyor had 

moved a corner or corners to straighten up the section lines. 

The moved corner was usually a quarter corner on an eastwest line. The Commissioner would invariably reply that the 

original position was correct according to law, that to correct 

the situation it should be returned to the original position, 

and that since he had no authority over private lands, the 

complainant should submit the matter to the local courts for 

resolution. 

But the “floating” corner was a different problem. Inquiries were made in this tone: “I ran the section line between 

the section corners and found this crumbled rock lying on the 

ground, two chains east and one chain north of midpoint - 

What should I do?” The stock reply was that if the rock was 

identified as the original, and it had not been moved by 

162 
“designing persons,” then it had to stand in place. But if it 

was more than one chain out of position (i.e,, more than one 

chain out of midpoint or more than one chain off-line), and 

could not be positively identified as being in the original 

position, then the quarter corner should be treated as lost and 

be restored at midpoint and on line. This, of course, was the 

answer on regular lines, not those against the north and west 

boundaries of the township, in which case appropriate modifications were made. The whole rationale of the one-chain 

criteria was the Manual closing limits of a section. 

The repeated requests for funds to purchase iron post 

monuments were made to correct the described problem. But 

so far, the only place they had been used was the Public Land 

Strip (Cimarron Meridian surveys). 

In a letter dated June 2, 1882, C. B. Magruder, County 

Surveyor, Rockledge, Florida, was advised to establish a onesixteenth corner on a section line at proportionate position 

between a quarter corner and meander corner. This method 

(principle) was probably followed until about the 1930’s when 

a hiatus in the policy took place. 

On September 6,1882, Special Instructions, were issued to 

Jacob R. Meyers, County Surveyor, West Branch, Michigan, 

for the extension of the public land surveys over approximately 100 acres of omitted lands between the original and 

actual meander line of “Peach Lake” in section 15, T. 22 N., R. 

2 E., Michigan. The land was from 5 to 200 feet in elevation 

above the lake level. The survey was made and approved. 

Patent was issued to Lots 7,8,9, and 10 (the omitted land) to 

W. R. Meyers. The owner of Lot 2 (adjoining the original 

meander line) sued for possession of the land patented to 

Meyers. The local court ruled in 1883 in favor of the owner of 

Lot 2 and ejected Meyers. The outcome of the case is unknown. The original plat and omitted lands survey are shown 

in Figs. 50 and 51. 

The survey of nonexistent lakes began in 1882. Evidence 

was produced to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that a 

tract of land in sections 22 and 23, T. 40 N., R. 4 W., Wisconsin, which had been meandered and shown on the original 

plat as being a lake, was in fact high, dry land and no lake 

had ever existed where shown. The Commissioner had plats 

constructed, protracting the section line across the lake and 

the section subdivision lines, completing the survey. The 

original plat of this survey was sent to Wisconsin authorities 

on November 11, 1882. Pertinent portions of the original 

survey and completion (protractions) are shown in sketches 

(see Figs. 52 and 53). 

On December 9, 1882, P. T. Curran, Deputy County Surveyor, Wausau, Wisconsin, was advised to restore the lost 

corner of sections 3,4, 9, and 10, T. 30 N., R. 6 E., by double 

proportionate methods. No mention is made of single proportion north and south, nor the one-chain test. 

On January 16, 1883, the Secretary of the Interior ruled 

that island surveys could no longer be made under the deposit 

survey system. Those surveys, when made, had to be paid for 

from the regular appropriations for public land surveys, a 

special examination had to be made to determine that the 

island had been in existence since before statehood or the 

original survey, and adjacent land owners had to be notified 

30 days prior to the survey that a survey was going to be made 

of it. Those are still the basic rules today. 

The Appropriations Act of March 3, 1883, 22 Stat. 603, 

provided $15,000 for the resurvey of poorly or fraudulently 

surveyed townships in Kansas. 

On March 19, 1883, McFarland issued a Circular to all 

Surveyors General that in the future, all Supplemental Diagrams (plats) had to be made on the regular township-sized 

paper. Up until this Circular, supplemental plats had been 

made any size, from a few inches square up to the uniform 

township plat size. 

On March 13,1883 the first full Circular was issued by the 

GLO, titled Restoration of Lost and Obliterated Corners. 

These instructions are published in 1 LD 339 or 671. By this 

Circular, the single proportion north-south method of restoring a lost interior section was forever put to rest. Double 

proportioning, based on the law, was adopted and still remains. The subdivision of sections was not included; that part 

remained in the 1879 Circular. The Restoration ofLost and 

Obliterated Corners Circular was reissued in identical form 

in 1885 and on September 25, 1891. It was sent to all the 

Surveyors General on May 7,1883, with instructions that it 

superseded the 1881 Manual, especially p. 40 (see Appendix). 

In June 1883, the Department of the Interior began publishing the more important Land Decisions, relating to the 

public lands administration and surveys. These volumes are 

numbered consecutively and are referred to as the “LDs.” 

Reference is by volume and page, such as 1 LD 339,Z LD 115, 

etc. For several years previous to this, the more important 

LD’s were printed in the Annual Reports. 

In the Annual Instructions to the Surveyors General (sent 

out in June 18831, McFarland directed that in the future all 

calls of topography entered in the field notes would be given 

along the true line, not the random line as was the practice in 

many districts. Tangent lines could not be run for more than 

12 miles and offsets to the true line had to be carefully made. 

McFarland prohibited the use of open sight or needle compasses in the survey of Standard Parallels and other “principal” lines (presumably township lines). Bearing trees marked 

south of the Standard Parallel at Standard Corners must be 

marked to refer to the sections north of the standard, not 

south of it as was the former practice. He again reminded 

them that the Special Instructions for every survey had to 

accompany the contract when sent to him for approval. These 

Annual Instructions were almost a manual in themselves. 

On July 31,1883, McFarland issued Special Instructions to 

Henry C. F. Hackbush, Deputy Surveyor, Leavenworth, 

Kansas, for the resurvey of Tps. 6 through T. 10 S., Rs. 23 and 

24 W., Sixth Principal Meridian. Part of those instructions 

reads as follows: 

“According to the best evidence obtainable it appears 

that the returns of the original subdivisional survey of 

said townships were fraudulent, and that, in fact, no 

subdivisional lines were run and marked in the field by 

the U.S., hence the survey to be made by you although 

termed a resurvey will, in fact, be a survey de nouo, and 

you will disregard any corners which you may find in 

the interior of said townships.” 

The instructions directed Hackbush to dependently restore 

all lost corners on the exterior boundaries of these ten 

townships in accordance with the Manual and Circular of 

March 13, 1883, then survey the interior section lines as 

though it was an original survey. Those ten townships con163 
Figure 50. T.22N., R.2E., Michigan. Plat Approved July 28,1846. 

ii 

r' .SK.:'7 

I I 



tained settlers on patented lands, so anyone can visualize the 

complaints that could have arisen, but no evidence was found 

that they did. 

On September 6,1883, McFarland rejected applications for 

survey and entry on large areas of omitted lands bordering 

meandered lakes in Florida. He said they were large in area, 

high and dry, but “under present circumstance^'^ he would 

not permit the survey of them. 

At 2 a.m., Wednesday, September 12, 1883, the Surveyor 

General’s office in Olympia, Washington, burst into flame 

and burned; none of the plats, field notes and records were 

saved. The fire department deduced that the cause was a 

smoldering cigar butt thrown into a waste basket or trash 

can, which finally burst into flame and destroyed the building. The warning to Tilton about fire protection when he took 

office in 1854 had not included cigar butts! All the field notes 

and plats were replaced over the next few years from the 

Washington, D.C., copies. The only records irretrievably lost 

were internal records and the field notes of surveys just 

brought in from the field and in the process of being copied 

and platted, which had to be done over. As a result, the 

Washington field notes are all in legal sized books. 

On December 13, 1883, in reply to Surveyor General 

Malachi Martin of Florida, McFarland refused to consider a 

survey of a reported hiatus between Tps. 19 S., Rs. 21 and 22 

E. Martin reported two separate township lines were 

monumented on the ground. McFarland said the plats and 

field notes called for only one line and therefore there could 

be no hiatus. The naivete with regard to hiatuses would last 

another 15 years. 

In the 1883 Annual Report, McFarland asked for a general 

authority to execute resurveys and recommended establishing a civil government in Alaska. He also asked that fire 

extinguishers be supplied to all Surveyors General and that 

their offices be equipped with fireproof vaults. 

The Act of March 13, 1884, 23 Stat. 4, established the 

standard time of the 75th Meridian as the standard time to be 

used in Washington, D.C. The railroads had already gone to a 

standard time system and this action recognized the standard time by the government; in a few years it prevailed 

throughout the country. This system was a real help to the 

surveyors in timing their observations and regulating their 

clocks. 

On April 30,1884, Special Instructions were issued to Henry Hackbush for the resurvey of seven townships and parts of 

two other townships in Kansas. Unlike the previous contract, 

Hackbush was to dependently resurvey these townships, 

accept all found corners, and restore lost corners in accordance with the Circular of March 13,1883. Nearly identical 

instructions went to William Tweeddale, Topeka, Kansas on 

May 9,1884, who was to restore all township boundaries and 

dependently resurvey the subdivisional lines in 16 

townships. If he found no corners at all within a township, he 

was to subdivide that township as though it were an original 

survey. Tweeddale interpreted that provision very liberally 

and actually did original surveys within townships that really did have original corners in them. The residents complained, an examiner was sent out who found Tweeddale’s 

work improper in many places, and the corrections of the 

work dragged on for several years. 

The Act of May 17, 1884, 23 Stat. 24, established a civil 

government in the District of Alaska and a Land Office at 

Sitka. No provision was made for surveys, but U.S. Marshal 

Munson C. Hillyer was made ex officio Surveyor General 

with his office at Sitka. The mining laws were also extended 

to Alaska in pursurance with this act. 

The following Circular letter was sent to all Surveyofs 

General on May 31, 1884: 

Department of the Interior 

Washington D.C., May 31, 1884 

Sir: 

This office has received information that it is the 

practice of Deputy Surveyors to furnish, for a compensation, copies of their plats and notes to settlers and 

others, who apply for them in advance of their approval 

by the Surveyor General and acceptance by this office. 

The practice is objectionable and you are hereby 

directed to notify all Deputy Surveyors in your district 

that in the future they must not furnish plats or field 

notes to any parties whatever, prior to the final acceptance of their surveys by this office. 

Approved Very Respectfully 

H.M. Teller N. C. McFarland 

31 May 1884 Secretary Commissioner 

As far as is known, that Circular has never been rescinded. 

No cadastral engineer could for any reason give to anyone 

any information regarding a survey being made, which irritated many local and County Surveyors who wanted information, and the request was refused. Over the years, there was a 

relaxation of this regulation and the office would furnish a 

limited amount of information, always stamped “Unofficial 

Records.” Since passage of the Freedom oflnformation Act in 

1973, more relaxation of this Circular has been made. 

The Act of July 5, 1884, 23 Stat. 103, placed all of the 

abandoned military reservations under the Secretary of the 

Interior and provided for the survey and disposal of those 

lands. Surveying abandoned military reservations would become a heavy workload for the surveyors in ensuing years. 

The Act of February 24,1871,16 Stat. 430, had provided for 

the survey of certain military reservations in the West; with 

the 1884 act, all surveys were to be handled by the GLO. 

The Civil Appropriations Act of July 7,1884,23 Stat. 194, 

provided $5,000 for the purchase of iron posts to be used to 

monument survey corners on nontimbered lands; $50,000 

was provided for examinations of surveys and $300,000 for 

surveys, not to exceed $9, $7 and $5 in ordinary country, and 

$13, $11 and $7, in heavily timbered and brushy country; 

$75,000 was appropriated for timber protection and $10,000 

for resurveys. 

In the Annual Instructions dated July 25,1884, McFarland 

made some significant changes: 

CIRCULAR General Land Office 

The $50,000 for examinations would be expended by the 

Commissioner only. 

All resurveys would be made under contract with the 

Commissioner. 

The iron posts would be distributed as the Commissioner 

saw fit, but would be used at all mineral monuments 

established in the future. 

Both banks of all non-navigable streams, three chains, or 

169 
greater in right angle width would be meandered. Those 

already meandered on only one bank would have the 

areas of lots abutting them calculated on the basis of a 

uniform width. 

Slope chaining would be adopted in steep terrain, with 

the slope angle determined by the vertical arc of the 

surveying instrument, and reduced to horizontal with 

the tables provided (sets of tables were sent). 

The angle and elevation of all slopes over 3” would be 

given in the field notes. 

All improvements and lines of occupation of nonreservation Indians would be noted and entered in the 

field notes. 

No deputy could be given a contract for both the subdivisions and the exterior boundaries of a given township. If 

he did the exteriors, he could not have a contract for the 

interiors and vice-versa. 

On March 26,1885, William A. J. Sparks, an attorney, was 

appointed Commissioner of the GLO; he resigned November 

17, 1887. 

In his Annual Instructions of September 15,1885, Sparks 

directed that in the future, all survey contracts would be 

examined; any found faulty would be rejected until corrected 

in every respect. The $15,000 appropriation for resurveys 

would be used only with his express permission. Retracements of old lines to effect a closure would not be paid for 

because that work was a necessary part of any contract. The 

result was that many retracements were just a paper job and 

were never done. When a survey was to be made, an invitation for bids had to be advertised and the contract let to the 

lowest competent bidder. 

In the 1885Annual Report, Commissioner Sparks reported 

that an average of six examiners had been on duty in the field 

in the previous three years. Many faulty and incomplete 

surveys were found. To prevent further fraudulent .work in 

the field and acceptance of fictitious surveys by the government, Sparks directed the suspension of all examinations of 

the plats and field notes in his office on surveys already 

contracted for and supposedly executed until after the surveys were examined in the field. Some of the surveys were 

later cancelled and some that had been suspended, were 

never officially cancelled or reinstated. In any case, the examination program did not completely eliminate fictitious or 

fraudulent surveys, though they were reduced. The Surveyor 

General of Washington reported on bad surveys found in his 

district and suggested that all surveyors should be government employees paid at a regular salary. This Annual Report 

contains a lengthy report on the fraudulent surveys, how the 

frauds worked, and reports on land frauds. 

The Appropriations Act of 1886 provided only $50,000 for 

surveys in all the districts, except Nevada, which received 

$30,000. Appropriations in 1887 were also $50,000. The 

country was in a depression and the fraudulent survey scandals induced Congress to cut appropriations to the bone. Most 

States did no original work at all except on Indian reservations. Some resurveys of the fraudulent work were done, but 

they weren’t really resurveys. When a township was found to 

be fraudulent, the work was done over as an original survey. 

The rationale was that a survey not done in fact, was not a 

survey at all. The result was many hiatuses and overlaps. 

The 1886 Annual Report contains long lists of fraudulent, 

cancelled, and suspended townships. With no work being 

done, the Surveyor General of Louisiana sent a lengthy report on the bad surveys and ensuing problems in that State. 

The Surveyor General of Colorado suggested that the USGS 

(i.e., government employees) should be used to execute the 

rectangular surveys at the same time they did the topographic mapping, a convincing argument. 

The Act ofFebruary 8,1887,24 Stat. 388, is known as the 

“General Allotment Act of 1887” or “Dawes Act.” It provided 

for patenting of allotments to Indians either living on or off a 

reservation. In all probability, most of the Indian allotment 

patents were made under the provisions of this act. 

The survey of most of the Indian reservation boundaries 

had been made by surveyors under contract with the Surveyors General, beginning with Ludlow’s survey of the 

Greenville Treaty boundary in 1797. 

The Act of April 8,1864, had placed the survey of Indian 

lands under the GLO. Each Indian treaty, Presidential Proclamation, Executive Order, or resolution pertaining to the 

lands of specific Indian tribes, might have contained some 

provision for the survey and the division of those lands, and 

now patent to individual Indians. For example, an Executive 

Order issued by President Grover Cleveland on May 1,1886 

reads as follows: 

“It is hereby ordered that all that portion of country in 

Washington Territory, withdrawn from sale and settlement, and set apart for the permanent use and occupancy of Chief Moses and his people, and such other friendly 

Indians as might elect to settle thereon, with his consent and that of the Secretary of the Interior, by Executive Orders dated April 19, 1879 and March 8, 1880, 

respectively, and not restored to the public domain by 

Executive Order, dated February 23,1883, be, and the 

same is, hereby, restored to the public domain, subject 

to the limitations, as to disposition, imposed by the act 

of Congress, approved July 4, 1884, (23 Stat. pages 79 

and 80) ratifying and confirming the agreement entered 

into July 7,1883, between the Secretary of the Interior, 

and the Commissioner of Indian Affairs, and Chief 

Moses and other Indians of the Columbia and Colville 

Reservations, in Washington Territory. 

And it is hereby further ordered that the tracts of land 

in Washington Territory, surveyed for and alloted to 

Sar-sarp-kin, and other Indians, in accordance with the 

provisions of said act of July 4,1884, which allotments 

were approved by the Acting Secretary of the Interior, 

April 12,1886, be and the same are hereby set apart for 

the exclusive use and occupation of said Indians; the 

field notes of said allotments being as follows:” 

The field notes of 20 or more allotments were then given. 

This Executive Order is the sole known source of the field 

notes of these allotments; most of which were for rectangular 

tracts, about 160 acres in area, lying in all directions and in 

no way conforming to the rectangular surveys. It isn’t known 

who surveyed the allotments nor when, but they were shown 

on the rectangular survey plats and the sections around them 

were lotted in fractional lottings when the rectangular surveys were extended through the area. 

170 
There are innumerable instances of individual Indian 

allotments surveyed in this manner. Most were surveyed by 

the GLO, but many were surveyed by land surveyors under 

the direction of the Commissioner of Indian Affairs. 

Most of the Indian reservations in the West were surveyed 

into townships and sections, following the 1864 act. Many of 

those were subdivided into 20-acre or 40-acre allotments by 

subdividing the sections containing agricultural lands or at 

least lands that were thought WL to be farmed. Those subdivision of section surveys did not follow the present legal method 

of subdividing a section. Most sections were subdivided by 

establishing the north and south one-sixteenth section corners on the east and west boundaries of the section at midpoint between the quarter corners and section corners. The 

sixteenth section corners were called “Ys corners.” The sixtyfourth and one-sixteenth corners on the north and south 

boundaries of the section (called Ws and 1/3z” corners) were 

established in a similar manner, i.e., at equidistant positions. 

The section would then be subdivided by running a true line 

from the north sixteenth corner on one section line to the 

north sixteenth corner on the opposite section line, establishing the Vs and ‘/32” corners at equidistant positions. The 

same process was used on the east and west centerline between quarter corners and on the south sixteenth section 

line. The 20-acre allotments were numbered 1 to 32, with 

number 1 in the northeast corner and 32 in the southeast 

corner of the section. This procedure has previously been 

referred to as the Three Mile Method (see Fig. 47). 

Sometimes the centerlines of the sections would be surveyed properly and then the quarter sections subdivided in 

the manner described. Unless the section was a perfect 

square, with all quarter section corners exactly at midpoint 

and on a line between section corners, this procedure would 

not result in a legal subdivision of the section. 

Remember that these surveys usually resulted in a technically correct procedure. Boundary lines based on these 

subdivisions and monuments are just as binding on all parties as are other monuments of an officially approved survey; 

however, exceptions might be made. For example, assume a 

section was subdivided into allotments, but for some reason 

the whole northeast quarter was patented as the “NE Y4 of 

section 10” (ignoring the allotments 1-4 and 13-16) and the 

remainder of the section was patented by allotment numbers. 

Later, the “NE l/4 NE Y4 of section lo”, is reacquired by the 

government. Would the three allotment corners within the 

northeast quarter control the reconveyance? They would not 

because they were not used in the original patent nor in 

describing the reconveyance. But the allotment corners on 

the exteriors of the whole northeast quarter would control 

the boundaries of that quarter section and its legal subdivisions. Of course, much would depend upon the method, order, 

description, and chain of title within and around the section. 

No general rule could be advanced; each section must be dealt 

with on an individual basis. In fact many allotments were 

surveyed by the Indian Service (later the BIA) and the BLM 

has no record of them. Much of the Dawes Act is now codified 

in 25 U.S.C. 331, et seq. 

On June 2, 1887, Sparks issued a new Circular on the 

proper method of subdivision of sections, which was a slight 

expansion of the Circular of November 1, 1879, and eliminated the improper restoration of lost corners given in the 

latter Circular. 

On August 9, 1887, Deputy Mineral Surveyar George W. 

Garside, a Deputy Surveyor in Nevada who went to Juneau 

because of the depression and lack of work, surveyed the 

Aurora Lode, Mineral Survey No. 41, near Juneau, Alaska. 

This survey was approved by Barton Atkins, ex officio Surveyor General of Alaska, on September 9,1887, and was the 

first official survey approved in Alaska. 

On October 12, 1887, Special Instructions were issued to 

Henry Hackbush for the survey and subdivisions of the Ottowa and Modoc Indian Reservations in the Indian Territory. 

The Ottawa Reservation was surveyed into allotments by the 

Three Mile Method. The Modoc Reservation was subdivided 

into 24-acre allotments, each 20 chains east and west by 12 

chains north and south. 

No appropriation was made in 1886 for the Surveyor 

General of Nebraska for the fiscal year 1886-1887. The office 

was closed the end of June 1886 and the records stored in 

Lincoln until legislation was passed by the State for their 

safekeeping. 

On March 27,1888, Strother M. Stockslager, an attorney, 

was appointed Commissioner of the GLO. 

On February 6, 1889, in a letter to Calhoun Fluker, Surveyor General of Louisiana, Stockslager directed that the 

distances to bearing trees should be measured to the centers 

of the trees, the first mention of this requirement, which was 

soon incorporated into the 1890 Manual (then in preparation). Prior to this time most of the surveyors used their own 

judgment or habits in measuring to bearing trees from a 

corner. Some just guessed the distance, another might measure to the face of the blaze or to a chaining notch cut in the 

tree between the upper and lower parts of the blaze or at the 

bottom of the lower blaze. Some measured horizontal distance, others the slope distance; there were no consistent 

rules. The 1890 Manual would also require that Arabic numbers be used. Some surveyors did not have timber scribes 

which were constructed for making circular scribing and 

therefore used Roman numerals in scribing trees. 

The Act of February 22, 1889, 25 Stat. 676, divided the 

Dakota Territory into North and South Dakota and enabled 

those two territories and the Montana and Washington Territories to become States. North and South Dakota were 

admitted to the Union on November 2, 1889, Montana on 

November 8, and Washington on November 11,1889, all with 

their present boundaries. In just ten days, the country had 

gained four new States. 

By theActofMarch1,1889,25 Stat. 735, theMuscogeeand 

Creek Indians in the Indian Territory ceded over three million acres to the United States. By the Appropriations Act of 

March 2, 1889, 25 Stat. 1004, the Seminole Indians ceded 

over two million acres. By Presidential Proclamation on 

March 23,1889, those lands were declared open to settlement 

effective 12 o’clock noon, April 22, 1889. Two land offices 

were opened in preparation, one at Guthrie, the other at King 

Fisher Stage Station. People lined up for miles. On the opening gun at noon on April 22 thousands rushed to stake and lay 

claim to a quarter section of land, town lots, etc. This was the 

first and largest of several Oklahoma Land Rushes, lands 

that had been all previously surveyed. 

171 
By the Act of March 2,1889, 25 Stat. 854, Congress withdrew all of the public lands (except in Missouri and a few 

other exceptions) from further private entry. 

By the end of 1889, the Commissioner of the GLO was 

practically running the “Surveying Service,’’ telling the Surveyors General what to do and when. By early 1890, a diagram showing the surveys to be executed had to be included 

with every set of Special Instructions issued. 

On September 16,1889, Lewis A. Groff, a former judge, was 

appointed Commissioner of the GLO. 

On January 1,1890, the Manual of Surveying Instructions, 

1890, was officially issued. The new Manual updated and 

revised the 1881 issue and required the use of a solar instrument on all major survey lines. The Act of October 1,1890,26 

Stat. 650, made the new Manual part of every contract by 

law. This Manual is quite an improvement over the 1881 

Manual but contained some insignificant errata. The lists of 

errata were sent to the Surveyors General, along with a copy 

of a corrected Manual on October 2, 1890. 

The Act of April 10, 1890, 26 Stat. 53, authorized the 

appointment of a Surveyor General in both North and South 

Dakota. Erastus S. Williams was appointed Surveyor General of North Dakota and opened his office in Bismark on July 

16,1890. The Dakota office in Huron, under Boetius H. Sullivan, became the office of Surveyor General of South Dakota. 

The Act of May 2,1890,26 Stat. 81, created the territory of 

Oklahoma, which included the Public Land Strip (Cimarron 

Meridian surveys) but not the Indian Territory. An unusual 

feature of this act was that it reserved a roadway, four rods 

wide, along every section line in the territory. The public 

lands in the territory were also opened to entry. Another item 

of interest is that the Registrar and Receivers in some of the 

Oklahoma land offices issued patents for diagonal quarter 

sections. Instead of the “east half’ or “west half’ of a quarter, 

they were issued for the “diagonal NE l/2 of the NE l/‘ of 

section -, containing 80 acres.” The southwest boundary 

of such patent would run from the north quarter corner to the 

east quarter corner of the section. It is unknown why the 

patents were issued in that manner. 

The Act of July 3,1890,26 Stat. 215, admitted the State of 

Idaho to the Union. 

On July 10,1890,26 Stat. 222, the State of Wyoming was 

admitted. Colorado and Wyoming are the only two States 

whose boundaries are entirely described by lines of longitude 

and parallels of latitude, the same number of degrees in each. 

Colorado contains 104,247 square miles, whereas Wyoming 

contains 97,914 square miles, which shows the effect of convergency of meridians. The two States are the only ones 

which are laid out similar to the original plan put forth by 

Thomas Jefferson. 

The Appropriations Act of July 11, 1890, 26 Stat. 228, at 

261-262, provided funds for Surveyors General in 16 States 

and territories, which were Arizona, California, Colorado, 

North Dakota, South Dakota, Minnesota, Florida, Idaho, 

Louisiana, Montana, Nevada, New Mexico, Oregon, Utah, 

Washington, and Wyoming. 

The Act ofAugust 30,1890,26 Stat. 391, made a reservation of right-of-way for ditches and canals on all lands west of 

the One Hundredth Meridian. All patents for public lands 

west of that meridian issued subsequent to this act contain a 

reservation for ditches and canals, to provide for irrigation. 

The Act of September 25, 1890, 26 Stat. 467, directed the 

Secretary of the Interior to have surveyed the Seventh Standard Parallel North of the Fifth Principal Meridian, which 

was the State boundary between North and South Dakota. 

Thus, a line of the regular rectangular survey system again 

became a State boundary and was surveyed in 1891 and 1892 

by Charles H. Bates. The line was monumented with quarried stones, 7 feet long, 10 inches square, set halfway into the 

ground. 

The Act of October 1, 1890, 26 Stat. 650, set aside and 

established Forest Reserves in the State of California. These 

first reserves were placed under the authority of the Secretary of the Interior as were the reserves to follow, the beginning of what would become the National Forests. 

The Act of March 3, 1891, 26 Stat. 854, provided for the 

survey of Small Holding Claims in New Mexico and Arizona, 

which did not follow the rectangular system and were surveyed as numbered metes and bounds tracts, somewhat similar to any other private claim. 

The Act of March 3,1891,26 Stat. 1095, repealed the old 

timber culture laws and amended the Desert Land Act of 

March 3,1877. It required irrigation before patent could be 

issued on desert homesteads and also repealed the preemption laws, stopped the sale of public lands at public sale 

(except military reservations and other lands of a special 

nature), provided for Trustee Townsites in Alaska, provided 

for Trade and Manufacturing sites in Alaska, withdrew the 

coal lands and other lands containing precious metals (except 

mining claims), and native lands in Alaska from entry. Sec. 

18 to 21 of the act grants rights-of-way for ditches, canals, 

and reservoirs on the public lands. Plats of these rights-ofway had to be filed with the land office, showing the locations. 

These plats are frequently incorrect and do cause some problems when the sections are resurveyed. Sec. 24 of the act 

provides that the President may set aside Forest Reserves by 

Presidential Proclamation. 

The first Forest Reserve set aside by President Benjamin 

Harrison was in Wyoming by proclamatin dated March 30, 

1891, 26 Stat. 1565. It adjoins Yellowstone National Park. 

Harrison subsequently reserved over 13 million acres of 

forest lands by proclamation in 1891 and 1892, all in the 

States and territories west of the Mississippi River. All of the 

Forest Reserves were under the Secretary of the Interior and 

in turn the GLO. 

Later administrations reserved many more millions of 

acres. President Grover Cleveland withdrew nearly 27 million acres, McKinley seven million, and President Theodore 

Roosevelt withdrew over 18 million acres for forests. 

On March 31,1891, Thomas H. Carter was appointed Commissioner of the GLO. 

Between October 26 and November 7, 1891, Charles W. 

Garside, Deputy Surveyor, surveyed a Trade and Manufacturing Site claimed by the Alaska Oil and Guano Company 

on Kenasnow Island (now Killisnoo Island) south of Angoon, 

Alaska. This claim was designated “U.S. Survey No. 5,” and 

was the first of the Alaska Special Surveys now commonly 

referred to as “U.S. Surveys.” It was approved by Orville T. 

Porter, ex officio Surveyor General of Alaska in November 

1892 and was accepted April 23, 1893. 

Between April 11 and June 2, 1892, George W. Garside, 

Deputy Surveyor, surveyed the Juneau Townsite, designated 

172 
“U.S. Survey No. 7.” That special survey was also approved 

by Porter in November 1892 but was accepted on February 

14, 1893. Therefore, U.S. Survey No. 5 was the first U.S. 

survey executed on the ground, but the Juneau Townsite was 

the first of these special surveys to become officially accepted 

by the Commissioner of the GLO. These metes and bounds 

surveys of isolated tracts, designated as “U.S. Surveys,” in a 

serial numbering system, are used only in Alaska. 

On October 7, 1892, Acting Commissioner William M. 

Stone, in a letter to the Surveyor General of Minnesota, 

rejected applications for the survey of omitted lands bordering Cedar Island Lake or Ely Lake in T. 57 N., R. 17 W., 

Fourth Principal Meridian. The original survey had been 

made by Henry S. Howe in 1876 and the plat approved August 7,1876. The meanders of the lake were grossly in error 

or fraudulent. The omitted lands contained about 1,000 

acres, high above the actual shore of the lake (which was not 

relicted). Stone cited Hardin us. Jordan and John P. Hoel, 13 

L.D. 511,588 (a relicted lake case) as basis for his rejection of 

the application, made by G. A. Burns and others. 

Burns appealed Stone’s decision to the Secretary of the 

Interior who reversed the Commissioner’s decision on January 19, 1895; G. A. Burns, et al, 20 L.D. 28. On October 31, 

1895, Commissioner Silas W. Lamoreaux ordered the Surveyor General to have the survey made. That order was 

appealed by the upland owners on the basis of riparian rights. 

Their appeal was denied October 29, 1896, 23 L.D. 430. A 

contract was given to Thomas H. Croswell for the survey. The 

upland owners got an injunction halting the survey. The 

matter went through the courts and the decision of the 

Secretary in favor of Burns was eventually upheld. The survey was finally made by Edward L. Faison, Examiner of 

Surveys, in 1903 and 1904. The plat was approved by Eli S. 

Warner, Surveyor General of Minnesota, on June 29, 1905, 

nearly 13 years after the case first began. The plats of this 

survey are shown in Figs. 54 and 55. 

On November 18,1892, William M. Stone became Commissioner. Five months later, on March 28, 1893, Silas M. 

Lamoreaux was appointed Commissioner of the GLO. 

The 1892 Annual Report lists thousands of Indian allotment patents. The USGS selection of sites for reservoirs and 

irrigation ditches was far advanced. A Surveyor General was 

urgently needed in Alaska. Steel tapes, 66 feet (one chain) in 

length, were being used on the public land surveys. 

On April 27, 1893, a Circular was issued which flatly 

prohibited any deputy from being an examiner of surveys. If 

money was allocated to a Surveyor General for examinations, 

the work had to be executed by a special examiner, the Surveyor General, or a clerk from his office. 

In the 1893 Annual Report, the Surveyor General of California strongly warned against resurveys of townships in 

which the lands were already patented. The first Annual 

Report of the ex offcio Surveyor General of Alaska, Orville T. 

Porter, was also printed; most of the work in Alaska was 

mining claim surveys. 

The 1894 Manual of Surveying Instructions was officially 

issued on June 30, 1894. The most notable revision in the 

procedures made in this manual was the elimination of the 

magnetic needle in the execution of the rectangular land 

surveys. The 1894 Manual was made part of every contract 

by the Act of August 15,1894, 28 Stat. 285. 

The Act of July 16, 1894, 28 Stat. 107, enabled Utah to 

become a State; it was granted sections 2,16,32,36 in every 

township for schools and was admitted to the Union on January 4, 1896. 

The Act of August 9, 1894, 28 Stat. 275, provided for the 

resurvey of Grant and Hooker counties in the State of Nebraska; $16,000 was appropriated on August 18,1894, to pay 

for the work. The enabling act states in part: 

“Provided, That nothing herein contained shall be so 

construed as to impair the present bona fide claim of any 

actual occupant of any said lands to the lands so occupied.” 

These were the first townships surveyed in the manner 

which is today called an “Independent Resurvey.” The work 

involved 171 miles of standard parallels, 405 miles of 

township lines, 2,490 miles of section lines and the exterior 

boundaries of all lands patented. Each owner was requested 

to point out to the surveyor the corners of his lands, as he 

knew them to be. The only requirement was that the tract 

when resurveyed had to be rectangular and could not contain 

more area than the lands he had patented. If twq or more 

claims conflicted, the owners were asked to resolve their 

differences. If they couldn’t agree, the claims were surveyed 

and shown in conflict. Each owner’s tract was given a number 

beginning with Tract 37, then Tract 38, and so on. The same 

number was used only once in a township, nearly identical to 

the method used in the Donation Land Claim surveys in 

Oregon during the 1850’s. The corners of each tract were 

monumented, then the township, range and section lines 

were surveyed, just like an original survey. Closing corners 

were set at the intersection of any tract boundary and a 

section line with lottings of the fractional sections against 

the tracts. The Commissioner was extremely proud of this 

procedure for it stopped complaints. 

The Independent Resurveys of Grant and Hooker counties 

were completed in 1899. The plat of one township is shown in 

Fig. 56. 

In the 1894 Annual Report, request was made by both the 

Secretary of the Interior and Commissioner Lamoreaux that 

a bill be passed approving the execution of surveys to be made 

by the USGS or Civil Service employees. 

The request was granted by the Indian Appropriations Act 

of March 2, 1895, 28 Stat. 876, in which $200,000 was 

appropriated for surveys in the Indian Territory by the 

USGS. These surveys were made in the Seminole, Creek, 

Choctaw, and Chickasaw lands, along with a topographic 

survey, starting in April 1895. At first they tried doing topographic work and rectangular surveys simultaneously, but 

this didn’t work out very well. The following year they had 

separate operations and things went smoothly. Iron post 

monuments were set at each township corner, with stone 

monuments at all other corners. These surveys were completed in June 1898 with great success. Plats and field notes 

were prepared and approved by the Director of the Geological 

Survey and accepted by the Commissioner about the same as 

a survey by a Surveyor General would be. There was never a 

Surveyor General for Oklahoma; all the surveys there were 

done under the Commissioner. 

On January 30, 1895, Special Instructions were issued to 

Josiah Gideon for the survey of a hiatus between Tps. 13 S., 

173 


Figure 55. Cedar Island Lake - Omitted Lands Survey. 
I I/ 
Figure 56. Grant and Hooker Counties, Nebraska. Independent Resurvey. 

Figure 57. Hiatus-T.l3S., R.lO%W., Willamette Meridian, Oregon. Approved July 14,1899. 
f 29s-38€ FLORIDA 

Figure 58. T.29S., R.38E., Tallahassee Meridian, Florida. Original Plat - December 8, 1859. 
I 

I 

x 

k 

I 

N 

.rPr.l9 

.*.30. 

Sec. 3Z. 

n 

# 

0 

Ser. 20. 

6 

Sec 2.9 

Sec.32. 

0 

! I 

Figure 59. T.29S., R.38S., Florida Survey of Omitted Lands - 1896. 
of the %!illahassee Meridian, Florida. 

C C 6 A, a A 

I 

I 

...._..... 

' .v *. 2. sea I. d. 

is \ . . . . . . . .* 

.. 

.. 

i 

'i , 

\ 

F 

-c 

i i 
Rs. 10 and 11 W., Willamette Meridian, in Oregon. Two 

separate range lines were monumented by surveys executed 

in 1874 and 1892. This is the first known hiatus actually 

surveyed, though several had been reported over the years 

with all being rejected. Gideon had some problems with this 

survey, designated T. 13 S., R. 101/2 W. He finally completed 

it in March 1899 and the survey was approved July 14. The 

plat is shown in Fig. 57. Many hiatus surveys have been 

made since then. 

On June 3, 1895, the Supreme Court rendered the final 

decision in the case ofHorne us. Smith, 159 U.S. 40. That case 

involved omitted lands along the Indian River in sections 23 

and 26, T. 29 S., R. 38 E., in Florida. 

On January 17, 1888, Commissioner Stockslager rejected 

the application by Charles A. and Robert T. Smith for the 

survey of a large body of land lying between the original 

meander line and the actual bank of the Indian River. The 

Commissioner thought they might be “accretions” or “swamp 

and overflowed” lands, and in either case would not be 

patentable to the Smiths, and on those grounds rejected their 

application. The Smiths actually occupied the land. 

The “riparian” owner of the fractional lots in sections 23 

and 26 was Charles W. Horne, who sued in an action of 

ejectment to kick the Smiths out and the case ended up in the 

Supreme Court. In the cited decision, the Court upheld the 

Smiths’ claim that it was omitted land belonging to the government. The omitted area was 700 acres, while the fractional lots owned by Horne contained about 170 acres. Thus, a 

private suit proved government ownership. 

On September 5, 1895, E. F. Best, Acting Commissioner, 

directed Surveyor General of Florida, William H. Milton, to 

have the lands surveyed. The survey was made by R. B. 

Burchfiel in December 1895, approved May 18, 1896, and 

accepted by the Commissioner on May 26,1896. The original 

plat and omitted lands survey plat are shown in Figs. 58 and 

59. This case solidified the government’s stand on omitted 

lands and many have been executed over the past 80 years. 

The Act of February 20,1896, 29 Stat. 11, opened certain 

Forest Reserves in Colorado to mining claim entry. Subsequent acts of Congress have opened nearly all the forest lands 

to valid mining claims. 

The Indian Department Appropriations Act of June 10, 

1896,29 Stat. 321, appropriated $200,000 for continuation of 

the rectangular surveys in the Indian Territory of Oklahoma. 

The act also provided for prosecution and fine of any person 

convicted of destroying or defacing survey monuments or 

trees marking a survey. The provision for a $250 fine for 

destroying survey corners and bearing trees were enacted 

into statutory law in 1909. 

The Civil Appropriations Act of June 11,1896,29 Stat. 413, 

435, stipulated that the USGS was to establish at least two 

bench marks in each township west of the One Hundred and 

Third Meridian and that they should be established near the 

township corners if practicable and monumented with iron 

posts or stones. 

On October 16,1896, the first full Circular titled Restoration of Lost or Obliterated Corners and Subdivision of Sections was issued. It combined all previous circulars covering 

the same subjects and has been reissued periodically ever 

since in that format. 

The Act of February 11,1897,29 Stat. 526, permitted the 

patenting of oil lands under the placer claim provisions of the 

mining law. 

Binger Hermann from Oregon was appointed Commissioner of the GLO on March 25,1897. On May 26,1897, Hermann 

issued a Circular letter to all Surveyors General. In the 

future, plats would be made of all township exteriors, standard parallels, and guide meridians when surveyed. The old 

practice was to show them along with the township subdivisions when those were surveyed. 

The Civil Appropriations Act of June 4,1897, 30 Stat. 11, 

34-36, is also known as the Forest Reserve Act of 1897. It is 

long and complex; among other items, it provided for the 

survey of the Forest Reserve boundaries, township and subdivisional lines by the USGS, and the protection of the reserves 

by the Secretary of the Interior. 

The surveyors employed by the USGS were government 

employees under the Civil Service system, established in 

1883 (22 Stat. 403). The GLO had gained a bad reputation for 

surveying due to the Benson Syndicate Scandals and the 

timber land frauds. It was thought that government employees could and would do an honest job of surveying the 

valuable timber lands in the Forest Reserves. The law required them to make the rectangular surveys in compliance 

with the existing laws and regulations, i.e., the Manual of 

Surveying Instructions. The plats and field notes were 

approved by the Commissioner of the GLO. It might be said 

that these rectangular surveys in the Forest Reserves were 

the origin of the direct system of surveying. In 1898, in the 

Black Hills Reserve, surveys were being made by Frank M. 

Johnson, A. L. Coleman, M. P. McCoy, William H. Thorn, and 

J. Scott Harrison, all employees of the USGS. Frank M. 

Johnson became the first Supervisor of Surveys when the 

direct system began in 1910. In 1900, Johnson was a Special 

Examiner of Surveys in Colorado. The rectangular surveys of 

the townships were generally well executed. However, the 

survey of the Forest Reserve boundaries were usually 

monumented with three-inch iron posts. In some places (California), the USGS surveyors did not execute the boundary 

work correctly, ignored the original surveys, or followed 

some other incorrect procedure. In those cases, the surveys 

were never approved or accepted by the GLO. Monuments 

may exist on the ground but have no legal force or effect 

except as they indicate the position of the original approved 

surveys. 

The survey of townships adjacent to the boundaries of the 

Forest Reserves by the USGS continued until 1899. After 

that, they surveyed only the boundaries of the reserves, continuing until 1905. 

Under the protection provisions of the Forest Reserve Act, 

Binger Hermann reorganized “Division P’ of the GLO into a 

Division of Forestry; it became “Division “R’ on March 1, 

1901. Five years later in 1903, the Division of Forestry employed 326 Forest Rangers, 41 Forest Supervisors, and 6 

Forest Superintendents; the most notable was Gifford Pinchot, Special Forest Agent. These men managed and protected the forest reserves and watersheds and supervised 

timber sales. All were government employees, appointed in 

accordance with the Act of July 7,1898, 30 Stat. 673. 

On June 29,1897, a Circular letter to the Surveyors General directed them that in the future, bearing trees at all quarter-section corners would be marked with the section number 

184 
included, such as 1/4 S 16 BT, not just 1/4 S BT as in the old 

practice. 

The Act of July 24, 1897, 30 Stat. 215, provided for the 

appointment of a Surveyor General in the District of Alaska; 

William L. Distin was appointed and established his office at 

Sitka, November 5,1897. Distin moved the office to Juneau 

in the fall of 1906 where it remained until abolished. 

The Act of April 29,1898, 30 Stat. 367, is known as the 

“Arkansas Compromise Act.” Arkansas relinquished her 

claim to all of the remaining unclaimed swamp lands in that 

State. 

The Act of May 14,1898,30 Stat. 409, extended the homestead law to Alaska but restricted the claims to 80 rods along 

navigable waters, with a shore space of 80 rods between 

claims; granted right-of-way to railroads; defined navigable 

waters and tidelands; and provided for 80-acre trade and 

manufacturing sites. 

The following item was reported by the Surveyor General 

of North Dakota in his 1898 Annual Report: 

“August 8, 1898, at 7.30 p.m., fire broke out in the 

Northern Pacific Railway Company’s freight house, 

and, owing to the character of the building and the wind 

prevailing at the time, the fire was beyond control in a 

very few minutes, and spread rapidly to the main business portion of the city. This office was situated on the 

third floor of the First National Bank building, and it 

was impossible to save but a small portion of the records.” 

Williams then went on to list the few records saved. Once 

again the Washington copies were called on to replace the 

burned records at considerable expense. 

The Civil Appropriations Act of March 3, 1899, 30 Stat. 

1074, restricted the USGS surveys in the Forest Reserves to 

the survey of the boundaries of those reserves. The survey of 

all regular township and section line surveys within the 

reserves was returned to the GLO. The act also provided for 

metes and bounds Homestead Entry Surveys (HES) in the 

Black Hills Reserve in South Dakota on lands classified as 

agricultural, a departure from the rectangular system. 

Actually, settlers had been taking up homesteads in the 

Black Hills under the Placer Mining Law. 

By this act, the rectangular system of surveys was extended to the District of Alaska; none were made until 1905. 

The Act ofJune 6,1900,31 Stat. 327, extended the mining 

laws of the United States to Alaska. 

On January 1,1902, the Manual of SurveyingInstructions, 

1902, was officially issued and was made part of all surveying 

contracts by the Act of April 26, 1902, 32 Stat. 120. 

The Act of June 17, 1902, 32 Stat. 388, provided for the 

reclamation and irrigation of arid lands in the West. Under 

this act and amendments which followed, the Bureau of Reclamation was established in the Department of the Interior; 

eventually, it would execute some rectangular surveys and 

resurveys on lands under their authority. The first employees of the Reclamation Service were men from the hydrographic branch of the Geological Survey. 

The Act of July 1,1902,32 Stat. 728 and January 10,1903, 

32 Stat. 767, authorized the resurvey of 25 townships in San 

Diego County, California, and 84 townships in Wyoming 

without requiring a petition by the settlers. Up to this time 

the Congress had provided funds for resurveys in most of the 

appropriations acts. These resurveys were usually at the 

request of settlers who couldn’t find the corners. Congress 

was generally moving toward the necessary legislation 

allowing resurveys. The resurveys provided for, when executed, were done almost as original surveys and caused 

much contention. 

On January 26,1903, Binger Hermann was removed from 

office and William A. Richards was appointed Commissioner 

of the GLO. Hermann was involved in timber land frauds in 

the West and it was alleged that he burned 43 letter books of 

correspondence before he left office; he was later elected 

Congressman from Oregon. On February 13, 1905, Hermann, Senator Mitchell from Oregon, and several other men 

were indicated on charges of land frauds involving 150,000 

acres of timber lands in the Blue Mountain Forest Reserve in 

Oregon. 

The Act of March 3,1903, 32 Stat. 1028, enlarged homesteads in Alaska to 320 acres to be surveyed in a rectangular 

form if no rectangular system surveys existed near the 

homestead. There were no rectangular surveys at that time 

in Alaska. 

The Act of February 1,1905, 33 Stat. 628, transferred the 

Forest Reserves to the Department of Agriculture and established the bureau known as the Forest Service within that 

department. Thus, the GLO was the origin of the USGS, 

Bureau of Reclamation, and the Forest Service. 

The Act of April 16, 1906, 34 Stat. 116, provided for Reclamation Townsites on lands administered by that Bureau. 

On April 17, 1905, Alfred B. Lewis, Deputy Surveyor, 

under Contract No. 3 with the Surveyor General of Alaska, 

William L. Distin, set a stone monument on the north side of 

Stuck Mountain for the initial point of the Copper River 

Meridian. The point was near the Military Trail and telegraph lines which later became the Richardson Highway. 

Lewis then surveyed some 72 miles of the Copper River 

Meridian, 18 miles of the baseline, and the exterior boundaries of several townships. These surveys were approved by 

Distin on January 28, 1908, and the rectangular surveys 

were underway in Alaska. The first township subdivided in 

Alaska was T. 3 N., R. 1 W., Copper River Meridian, around 

the community of Copper Center in the Copper River Valley. 

That survey was made by Thomas A. Haigh, Deputy Surveyor, in 1910. The returns were approved by Distin on April 

11,1912. These surveys were hard to contract for at the low 

prices allowed by law. 

At 5:16 a.m., April 18,1906, the great San Francisco earthquake hit that city, with a subsequent fire that burned for 

days. The Surveyor General’s office and all his records, plats, 

maps, etc. were destroyed. The rectangular plats and field 

notes were once again replaced over several years from the 

Washington copies. Many of the mineral survey records 

were, however, destroyed forever. There were thousands of 

claims and most of their records were recovered through the 

claimants and land offices but, California still suffers many 

difficulties with mining claims because of the loss. The San 

Francisco fire was the last of the series, beginning with 

Symmes in Ohio. The GLO (and BLM) have never provided 

safe, fireproof storage for these vital records where the reliability of an original document versus a copy is so important. Ironically, many of the “Washington copies” are now 

185 
housed in a flammable wooden structure in Denver, Colorado. 

The Act ofApriZ28,1904,33 Stat. 545, declared the corners 

of mineral surveys the best evidence of the true position of a 

mining claim. In other words, the mineral survey corners 

assumed the same legal status as the rectangular survey 

corners, they were unchangeable, and the Surveyor General 

had to honor them. 

The Act of May 17,1906,34 Stat. 267, enabled Oklahoma, 

Arizona and New Mexico to become States. Oklahoma 

formed a government and was admitted to the Union on 

November 16, 1907. 

The Act of June 11,1906,34 Stat. 233, provided for Homestead Entry Surveys on agricultural lands within most of the 

Forest Reserves. The previous act had applied only to the 

Black Hills. Under this act the lands classified by the Forest 

Service as best suited for agriculture were surveyed by metes 

and bounds. These surveys were made by Forest Service 

surveyors under instructions from the Surveyors General 

and were approved by and filed in the GLO in about the same 

manner as any other survey. Homesteads in the Black Hills 

Reserve were denied riparian rights under an unusual provision, Sec. 3 of the act. This act was repealed October23,1962, 

76 Stat. 1157. 

On January 28,1907, Richard A. Ballinger was appointed 

Commissioner of the GLO. 

The Act of March 2,1907,34 Stat. 1232, directed the Surveyor General of Alaska to furnish survey numbers to the 

land offices at Nome and Fairbanks. The numbers were those 

used in the official surveys known as the “U.S. Surveys” of 

metes and bounds claims in that State. 

On January 14, 1908, Fred Dennett was appointed Commissioner of the GLO and took charge in March. Ballinger 

became Secretary of the Interior. 

The CivilAppropriations Act ofMay27,1908,35 Stat. 317, 

provided $25,000 for the purchase of iron posts to be used to 

monument the corners of the public land surveys. Iron posts 

have been the standard monument ever since. The act also 

abolished the offices of Surveyor General in Minnesota, 

North Dakota, and Florida. Rates of up to $25 per mile were 

allowed in the land surveys at that time. 

The Act of March 3, 1909, 35 Stat. 845, is the “Resurvey 

Law.” It provides by statute for the necessary resurveys of the 

public lands and is codified in 43 U.S.C. 772. Resurveys had 

been made for many years but this act authorized them 

whenever and wherever they were necessary to mark the 

boundaries of the remaining public lands. 

The Civil Appropriations Act of March 4, 1909, 35 Stat. 

945, abolished the Office of Surveyor General in Louisiana. 

The Act of June 20, 1910, 36 Stat. 557, again enabled 

Arizona and New Mexico to become States. New Mexico was 

admitted January 6, 1912, and Arizona on February 14, 

1912. Both States received sections 2,16,32, and 36 in each 

township for school lands. The 48 contiguous States were 

completed. 

The Civil Appropriations Act ofJune25,1910,36 Stat. 703, 

provided that, “The surveys and resurveys to be made by such 

competent surveyors as the Secretary of the Interior may 

select, at such compensation not exceeding two hundred dollars per month as he may prescribe. . . ” It was the end of the 

contract system of surveys begun by Rufus Putnam in 1797. 

The system had surveyed millions of acres of public lands by 

good, bad and indifferent surveyors. Most of the easy surveying had been done, so not even the Deputy Surveyors 

themselves were sorry to see the contract method go. 

186 
CHAPTER IV 

THE DIRECT SYSTEM 

TO END 

OF THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE 

187 
THE PERIOD 1910 - 1946 

As organized at the beginning of the direct system of surveying and resurveying the public lands, the GLO consisted 

of six units: 

(1) Washington Headquarters Office (GLO and divisions 

(2) Offices of the Surveyors General 

(3) District Land Offices 

(4) Field Service 

(5) Surveying Service 

(6) Logging Service 

The Commissioner of the GLO, the Assistant Commission- er, the Surveyors General, and the Registrar and Receivers of 

the district land offices were appointed by the President. 

Surveyors General and their offices were located at 

Juneau, Alaska; Phoenix, Arizona; San Francisco, California; Denver, Colorado; Boise, Idaho; Helena, Montana; Reno, 

Nevada; Santa Fe, New Mexico; Portland, Oregon; Huron, 

South Dakota; Salt Lake City, Utah; Olympia, Washington; 

and Cheyenne, Wyoming. 

Division “E” in the Washington Headquarters office had 

general supervision of all cadastral surveys on public lands, 

regardless of who managed those lands. All instructions for 

surveys issued in the field were examined and approved in 

Division“E.” 

The Civil Appropriations Act of March 4, 1911, 36 Stat. 

1363, permitted the Secretary of the Interior to appoint two 

Supervisors of Surveys. Frank M. Johnson and Arthur D. 

Kidder had already been appointed to those positions. 

The Field Surveying Service was organized with Johnson 

as Supervisor of Surveys; his office was located in Denver, 

Colorado. Kidder later became Associate Supervisor of Surveys in Washington, D.C. Ten surveying districts were established with an Assistant Supervisor in charge of each district, 

except the Eastern States District, which was under the 

Associate Supervisor. The Districts and their numbers were: 

therein) 

District 1 - Montana, 

District 2 - Colorado and Wyoming 

District 3 - South Dakota and Nebraska 

District 4 - New Mexico 

District 5 - Arizona and California 

District 6 - Utah and Nevada 

District 7 - Washington and Idaho 

District 8 - Oregon 

District 9 - Alaska 

District 10 - Eastern States, at Washington, D.C. 

Under this organization, the technical direction of the 

actual field work was controlled by the Supervisor of Surveys, through the Associate and Assistant Supervisors. The 

major office work was done under the Surveyors General, 

who were under the Chief Clerk in Washington. They issued 

the Special Instructions, prepared the plats and approved the 

field returns prepared by the field surveyors; but the plats did 

not become official until accepted by the Commissioner. The 

Surveyors General remained custodians of the survey records and also received and disbursed monies deposited by 

settlers for surveys and resurveys. This splitting of the re- 

(not numbered until 1918) 

sponsibilities for the surveys was unsatisfactory at best, but 

continued for 15 years until the offices of Surveyor General 

were abolished in 1925. 

The first cadre of surveyors was made up primarily of men 

who had been field examiners of the contract surveys and 

from the known reliable Deputy Surveyors who had proven 

themselves when executing their contracts. The titles given 

them were either “U.S. Surveyor” or “U.S. Transitman.” 

They were selected very strictly on the basis of ability. All 

were government employees, paid a monthly salary, and 

provided with food and lodging (tents) when in the field. All 

instruments and equipment were furnished by the government, although like most surveyors, they had and used personally owned equipment as well. 

The Surveyors General grouped the proposed field work 

together by type and classification; i.e., railroad, coal, and 

forest lands, settler’s application (deposit) surveys, and resurveys. If the proposed work program was approved by Division “E,” the Surveyor General prepared Special Instructions 

under a Group Number. A “group” might be a few miles of a 

special type of survey, but most often was for the survey or 

resurvey of a township or group of townships. The township 

was the usual unit used. The Special Instructions were 

approved in either Division “E,” or if more expedient, by a 

Supervisor. The work would then be assigned to a U.S. Surveyor or U.S. Transitman for execution in the field. Assignment instructions were issued by the appropriate Assistant 

Supervisor of Surveys. The surveyor assigned would hire his 

field assistants, gather his camp and surveying equipment 

and head for the field. 

At first, some of the Examiners of Surveys remained on 

that duty until all of the outstanding contracts were completed, examined, and approved. These men then became 

U.S. Surveyors or Assistant Supervisors. In the early years of 

the direct system, while the organization was being perfected, the field surveyors were placed in the field and moved 

around by the Supervisor of Surveys. A set amount of time 

was allowed for preparing field returns and in effect the field 

surveyors were per-diem employees, furloughed between 

jobs. The system was gradually refined and later the surveyors were assigned to a district and worked within that 

state or states as the responsibility of the Assistant Supervisors increased. Surveyors could not transfer from one district to another without the approval of the Supervisor of 

Surveys. 

Annual Instructions were issued on July 20, 1910, outlining in detail the procedures to be used in hiring surveyors, 

procurement, and use of equipment, duties of responsible 

persons, and other details of expending the appropriation for 

surveying. The surveyors Weekly Progress Report was installed and is still used in only slightly modified form. The 

Standard Field Tables and The Ephemeris (of the sun and 

selected stars) were issued in 1910 and are still being supplied to all BLM surveyors. 

The changeover to the direct system was apparently a 

rather smooth operation and had been in the planning and 

preparation stage for more than a year. Much of its early 

success was due to the superb organizational ability of the 

Supervisor of Surveys, Frank M. Johnson, and his selection of 

able Assistant Supervisors. 

After field work was completed on a group, the surveyor 

188 
submitted sketches and plats of the work to the Surveyor 

General. Field notes were usually handwritten, one mile per 

page, on loose sheets and turned in with the other materials. 

The notes would then be typed by an office typist. Those 

surveyors who had access to a typewriter and knew how to 

use it could type their notes directly. In a few years, when 

typewriters became available, the surveyors had to type up 

all the final field notes themselves. As more complicated 

resurveys and special surveys became numerous, this was a 

practical necessity. The first survey approved and accepted 

under the direct system was Group No. 1, Colorado, T. 14 S., 

R. 100 W., Sixth Principal Meridian, executed by A. C. Horton, Jr., US. Surveyor, and Jay P. Hester, Transitman, under 

Special Instructions issued on July 14, 1910. The returns 

were submitted to Division “E” on September 30, 1910, but 

were not immediately accepted because of a few deficiencies 

in the field notes and plat. Perhaps that is not too surprising, 

considering that an extremely rough and mountainous 

township had been surveyed, the field notes written, and plat 

drafted in just two and one half months. It is doubtful that 

any double party, complete with the most modern equipment, 

could match that feat today. The surveyors were out to prove 

that the direct system was more economical than contracting 

and succeeded despite the fact that most of easier, more 

accessible work had been already surveyed. And in fact the 

direct system was more economical in cost per mile of line 

surveyed and produced higher quality work than the contract 

system was doing in 1900-1910. 

Fairbanks Meridian 

The Appropriations Act of June 25, 1910, provided 

$100,000 for public land surveys in Alaska. Prior to that date, 

an irregular arrangement was made between Secretary of 

the Interior Richard A. Ballinger and George 0. Smith, 

Director of the Geological Survey, without consulting the 

Commissioner of the GLO, Fred Dennett. Smith detailed a 

large party to Alaska under the supervision of R. H. Sargent, 

Topographer. Smith formulated a system of “plans” for the 

surveys and sent them to Sargent on June 29, 1910, which 

called for metes and bounds surveys at the direction of settlers or speculators, laying off of township boundaries from 

irregular triangulation networks without measurement on 

the ground and to “correct” or alter previously established 

and accepted surveys. Most of the work was a matter of 

platting and protraction, rather than running and monumenting the lines. 

Commissioner Dennett and Division “E” disapproved 

these plans. They were not in compliance with the requirements of the 1902 Manual and hence would be in violation of 

the Act of April 26, 1902. But Sargent was in Alaska and 

executed much of what work was accomplished during the 

1910 field season. The initial point ofthe Fairbanks Meridian 

was established and some of the meridian and baseline surveyed. The $100,000 appropriation for surveys was largely 

consumed. The GLO insisted on the right to audit and disburse funds and this caused conflict with the USGS, who 

withdrew from the enterprise, since they could not exercise 

complete control of the work and funds. 

Sargent’s field returns were forwarded to Division “E” on 

May 15, 1911, in an incomplete and fragmentary condition. 

When examined they contained about 95 miles of line which 

were finally acceptable. These miles included the establishment of the Fairbanks Meridian and Baseline, the exterior 

boundaries of several townships, and the survey of five sections of land. 

The establishment of the initial point of the Fairbanks 

Meridian was made by S. G. Lund, under the supervision of 

R. H. Sargent. The point was monumented with a concrete 

post and brass tablet. The surveys were approved June 7, 

1913. 

These surveys were made by calculations from an unchecked triangulation net, with “forced” closures. The survey 

corners established were monumented with wood posts of 

spruce, birch, and aspen, instead of iron posts or stones. These 

were later replaced by U.S. Surveyors with permanent monuments. On the basis of the lines finally acceptable, the average cost ofthese surveys exceeded $360 per mile. As far as can 

be determined, this was the last adventure of the USGS into 

the execution of the rectangular system of surveying. 

Seward Meridian 

On May 15,1911, John P. Walker and G. G. McDaniel, U.S. 

Surveyors, established the initial point of the Seward Meridian and Baseline, near Seward, Alaska, tied into the existing 

Coast and Geodetic Survey (USC & GS) triangulation net. 

Walker and McDaniel surveyed many miles of townships 

boundaries and subdivided several townships on the Kenai 

Peninsula in 1911. The work was approved June 11,1914, by 

Charles E. Davidson, the second Surveyor General of Alaska. 

The Seward Meridian Surveys were extended into the 

Anchorage and Matanuska Valley areas in 1912 by using 

computations for position based on the Coast and Geodetic 

Survey (USC & GS) triangulation network, instead of extending the rectangular survey lines directly over the mountains. The Act of July 31,1876, permitted that procedure and 

it worked well with the proper application. 

The Act of August 24,1912, 37 Stat. 512, made Alaska a 

territory of the United States and established a civil government for the territory. 

On June 5, 1913, Clay Tallman was appointed Commissioner of the GLO. 

The Act of March 12, 1914, 38 Stat. 305, authorized the 

President to have the Alaska Railroad built and provided for 

townsites along that railway. Anchorage was one of the first 

townsites surveyed under the act. 

The Act of July 17,1914,38 Stat. 509, amended the public 

land laws to provide for agricultural entry on lands containing phosphate, nitrate, potash, oil and gas, with those elements reserved to the United States. The law did not apply to 

lands containing metallic minerals; those elements came 

under the 1872 Mining Act. Since 1914, nearly all homestead, cash entry, and small tract patents contain a clause 

reserving the minerals to the government. These mineral 

reserves can cause problems for the present-day surveyor 

when the surface has been patented, and he is called on to 

resurvey the section lines to identify the subsurface mineral 

deposits. 

TheActofMarch4,1915,38 Stat. 1214, granted sections 16 

and 36 in every township in Alaska to the territory for support of schools when the lands were surveyed. In addition, 

section 33 in each township in the Tanana Valley between 

parallels 64” and 65” north latitude and between 145” and 

189 
152” west longitude was granted. The four sections (1, 6,31, 

and 36) around the corner of Tps. 1 N., Rs. 1 and 2 W., and 

Tps. 1 S., Rs. 1 and 2 W., Fairbanks Meridian were granted 

for a college. 

By the Act of June 9,1916,39 Stat. 218, the unsold lands 

granted to the Oregon and California Railroad (pursuant to 

the Act of June 25,1866) were revested to the United States. 

These lands soon required surveys and resurveys to identify 

their boundaries and these have continued to the present 

time. 

The Act of July 8, 1916, 39 Stat. 352, reduced the size of 

homesteads in Alaska to 160 acres. 

The Act of August 25,1916, 39 Stat. 535, established the 

National Park Service within the Department of the Interior. 

The boundaries of the national parks have been surveyed by 

the surveyors of the GLO and BLM. 

In 1917, the organization and supervisors of the Field Surveying Service was reported as: Supervisor of Surveys - 

Frank M. Johnson, and Associate Supervisor of Surveys - 

Arthur D. Kidder. 

District Assistant Supervisor of 

No.1-Montana J. Scott Harrison 

No. 2-Colorado and Herman Jaeckel 

No. 3-Nebraska and South N. B. Sweitzer 

No. &New Mexico Alonzo E. Compton 

No. 5-California and Arizona A. C. Horton, Jr. 

No. &Utah and Nevada George D. D. Kirkpatrick 

No. 7-Idaho Frank S. Spofford 

No. 8-Oregon and Ernest P. Rands 

Washington 

No. 9-Alaska John P. Walker 

Eastern States Charles L. Dubois, 

Chief Division of 

Surveys, GLO 

Surveys 

Wyoming 

Dakota 

In January 1918, the Eastern States office was designated 

as District No. 10. 

The Act of September 21, 1918, 40 Stat. 965, provided for 

resurveys or retracements in townships which were more 

than 50 percent in private ownership. Resurveys could be 

made on application of three-fourths of the land owners or a 

court of competent jurisdiction and deposit of the estimated 

cost of executing the resurveys. This act is now codified in 43 

U.S.C. 773. 

On June 16,1919, advance sheets of the first six chapters of 

the 1930 Manual of Surveying Znstructions were officially 

issued. Congress had appropriated funds for revision of the 

1902 Manual in previous years, following the resurvey law of 

1909. A board was appointed to make the necessary revisions. Of the first six chapters, Chapter IV, Corner Monuments; Chapter V, Restoration of Lost Corners; and Chapter 

VI, Resurveys; were probably the most important. They 

directed the Cadastral Engineers in the proper marking of 

iron post monuments and in the execution of resurveys, 

things not covered by any of the previous manuals. 

The Civil Appropriations Act of July 19,1919,41 Stat. 163, 

provided funds for one Supervisor of Surveys and ten assistant supervisors and also provided funds for the resurvey of 

State boundaries where required to close the public land 

surveys against them. This same provision for State boundary resurveys was included in the appropriations acts in 

1920, 1921, and 1922. 

The Act ofFebruary 25,1920,41 Stat. 437, is known as the 

“Mineral Leasing Law.” It provides for the leasing of nonmetallic minerals on the public domain, including coal (except 

in Alaska), phosphate, oil, oil shale, and sodium. The leasing 

act also applies to the minerals on lands in which the minerals were reserved in the patents. Surveys for leases on unsurveyed lands are at the expense of the applicant. 

Sec. 7 of the Act of May 21, 1920, 41 Stat. 607 and 613, 

provides that one government agency may provide goods or 

services to another government agency on a reimbursable 

basis. This section of the act is referred to as the “Economy 

Act,” it is under this provision that the BLM executes surveys 

or resurveys on lands under the jurisdiction of another government agency, such as the Bureau of Indian Affairs or 

National Park Service. 

The Act of June 5,1920,41 Stat. 1059, abolished the 80-rod 

shore space between homesteads fronting on navigable waters in Alaska. 

On March 22,1921, William Spry was appointed Commissioner of the GLO. 

The Act of March 20, 1922, 42 Stat. 465, is the “Forest 

Exchange Act.” It provides for land exchanges between the 

Forest Service and private owners of surveyed, non-mineral 

lands. As written, it implies exchanges of legal subdivisions 

andlor aliquot parts of surveyed sections. Forest Exchange 

Surveys, similar to Homestead Entry Surveys, have been 

made by surveyors employed by the Forest Service, under 

Special Znstructions issued by the BLM. The field notes and 

plats were examined and accepted by the BLM. As of 1980, 

the surveys of odd-shaped tracts, made for exchange purposes, are made by BLM surveyors at the request of the 

Forest Service on a reimbursable basis. 

The Interior Appropriations Act of May 24,1922,42 Stat. 

552, did not provide funds for a Surveyor General in South 

Dakota; apparently that office was abolished. 

The Act of June 15,1922,42 Stat. 650, directed that small 

holding claims, up to 160 acres in area in New Mexico, would 

be shown on all township plats. If confirmed, the claims 

would then be surveyed and segregated on the plats. 

The Interior Appropriations Act of March 3,1925,43 Stat. 

1141, abolished the offices of the Surveyors General, effective 

July 1,1925. The surveying duties previously assigned to the 

Surveyors General were assigned to the Field Surveying 

Service under the direction of the Supervisor of Surveys. 

Under the reorganization following July 1,1925, the Assistant Supervisors were titled “District Cadastral Engineers.” 

The former Chief Clerks in the Surveyor Generals’ offices 

were titled “Office Cadastral Engineers.” The ten Surveying 

Districts remained as before, but at least one Public Survey 

Office was maintained in each State. These offices maintained the field notes and plats and other public contact 

duties formerly performed by the Surveyor General. The 

Division of Surveys in the GLO (Division E) was placed under 

the general supervision of the Supervisor of Surveys, who 

approved the plats which were then accepted by the Commissioner. Both approval and acceptance dates were shown on 

the face of the survey plats. 

190 
The Act of April 13,1926,44 Stat. 243, allowed departure 

from the rectangular form for surveying homesteads in Alaska. Previously, homesteads were surveyed in a rectangular 

form with exterior boundaries lying in cardinal directions. 

Under this act they could lie in any direction and in different 

shapes but were to be compact and as nearly rectangular in 

form as practicable. 

The Act of March 3, 1927, 44 Stat. 1365, provided for 

five-acre homesites or headquarters sites in Alaska on nonmineral lands, not withdrawn from entry. The act was 

amended in some provisions by the Act of May 26,1934,48 

Stat. 809. These homesites and headquarters sites were all 

surveyed under the numbered U.S. Survey method of metes 

and bounds surveys. 

The Act of December 28,1928,45 Stat. 1069, is sometimes 

known as the “Color of Title Act” and provides for survey and 

patent of lands claimed under color of title, the nearest thing 

to “adverse possession” of public lands. 

On May 9,1929, Charles C. Moore was appointed Commissioner of the GLO. 

On July 1, 1930, Surveying District No. 3, Nebraska and 

South Dakota, was consolidated and combined with District 

No. 2, Colorado and Wyoming. Thereafter, District No. 2 was 

composed of the four States. 

The 1930 Manual of Surveying Instructions was officially 

issued on June 14,1930; 20 years in preparation, it was a vast 

improvement over the 1902 Manual. It incorporated the first 

six chapters issued in 1919 and introduced chapters on instruments and methods, modern corner monumentation, restoration of lost and obliterated corners, resurveys, special 

surveys, and included the instructions for executing mineral 

surveys. The cover was blue, as is the cover of the 1947 and 

1973 Manuals. Since 1930 the Manual of Surveying Instructions has been referred to by the public land surveyors as the 

“Blue Bible.” 

One item should be mentioned here, Section 377 of the 

1930 and 1947 Manuals, which reads: 

“377. Lost meander corners, originally established on 

a line projected across the meanderable body of water 

and marked upon both sides will be relocated by single 

proportionate measurement, after the section or quarter-section corners upon the opposite sides of the missing meander corner have been duly identified or relocated.” 

That section was interpreted to mean that original meander corners were not used to determine the proportionate 

position of a lost quarter corner or section corner, nor to 

proportion a one-sixteenth corner; the meander corner controlled the direction of the line but not the proportions along 

it. That procedure was wrong but the people who wrote the 

Manual did not correct the wrong interpretation, which 

lasted until about 1966. 

On May 20,1933, Fred W. Johnson was appointed Commissioner of the GLO and Johnson was destined to be the last 

man to hold the position. He served until 1946 when the GLO 

was abolished. 

The Act of June 28,1934, 48 Stat. 1269, is known as the 

“Taylor Grazing Act.” Under this act, the Secretary of the 

Interior was authorized to withdraw up to 80 million acres of 

public domain and establish grazing districts, except in Alaska. The lands were to be classified for their best use, etc. The 

Grazing Act halted agricultural homesteading (in effect) in 

the Western Public Land States. Under this act, the Grazing 

Service in the Department of the Interior was established. 

The need for original surveys under the rectangular system 

was greatly reduced in the contiguous States. 

On May 1,1937, Surveying District No. 1, Montana, was 

added to District No. 7, Idaho and Washington. For the next 

three years, District No. 7 included all three States. 

The Act of June 1,1938,52 Stat. 609, as amended July 14, 

1945, and June 8, 1954, is known as the “Small Tract Act.” 

Under this act, small tracts up to five acres in area were sold 

or leased. The act provides that the lands must be surveyed, 

which was interpreted in various ways. In some cases, if a 

rectangular survey plat existed, even if surveyed 50 or more 

years previously, the lands were surveyed and 5-acre aliquot 

parts of a section were sold or leased. All too frequently, the 

old surveys were nearly obliterated and/or greatly distorted. 

Buyers tried to locate their lands according to the plat and 

build homes or cabins. Later a properly executed dependent 

resurvey and subdivision of section survey would reveal that 

these improvements were on someone else’s land and even in 

the wrong section. As these conflicts arose, the need for dependent resurveys of the lands being sold as small tracts was 

evident. Later many dependent resurveys were made by the 

Cadastral Engineers because of this act. No particular problems occurred in Alaska because that territory was largely 

unsurveyed; the small tracts there were surveyed by metes 

and bounds as Lots in a U.S. Survey. 

Effective January 1, 1941, the Surveying Districts were 

reorganized and numbered as follows: 

District State 

1 

2 New Mexico 

3 California and Arizona 

4 Utah and Nevada 

5 Idaho and Montana 

6 Oregon and Washington 

7 Alaska 

8 Eastern States 

Colorado, Wyoming, Nebraska, South Dakota 

Each District was supervised by a District Cadastral Engineer. 

The Surveying Service was again reorganized into Regions, effective January 1, 1946, as follows: 

Region State 

1 

2 

3 Utah, Nevada, and Idaho 

4 Oregon, Washington, Northern California 

5 Alaska 

Colorado, Wyoming, Montana, Nebraska, and 

New Mexico, Arizona, and Southern California 

South Dakota 

(the San Bernardino Meridian) 

(Humboldt and Mount Diablo Meridians) 

The surveys in each Region were under the general supervision of a Regional Cadastral Engineer. The Cadastral Engineers worked out of the Public Survey offices under an 

Office Cadastral Engineer. 

The Act of July 16,1946,60 Stat. 1100, known as Reorganization Plan No. 3 or the “Organic Act,” consolidated the 

191 
GLO, the Grazing Service, the Oregon and California Adrninistration, Alaska Fire Control, and others into one new 

bureau to be called the Bureau of Land Management (BLM). 

The GLO was abolished and the duties of the Commissioner 

were assigned to the Director of the BLM. The change had 

little, if any, immediate effect on the public land surveys. 

On April 4, 1971, Harold H. Waller, the last surviving 

Deputy Surveyor under the contract system, died in Seattle, 

Washington. He was born September 19, 1889. Waller had 

continued executing public land surveys over the years. The 

last was US. Survey No. 4941, a Soldier’s Additional Homestead Claim in Alaska, which he surveyed between September 

10, 1967, and August 7, 1969. 

During the past 30 years, changes have occurred. The 

surveying service has declined into more of a service instead 

of the planned program that existed under the GLO. The 

esprit de corps that existed among the surveyors following 

the beginning of the direct system has nearly disappeared. In 

1910, Frank M. Johnson and the men under him were out to 

prove that the direct system could do better surveys at a 

lower cost. Johnson ran a tight, close-knit organization of 

hard-working, dedicated men. But, like Rufus Putnam and 

Edward Tiffin, they have all passed into history. And that is 

sad. 

192 
CHAPTER V 

SURVEYORS GENERAL 

OF THE 

PUBLIC LANDS STATES 

193 
The following pages contain a list of the Surveyors General 

of the Public Lands States in which the rectangular surveys 

were executed. The first Surveyor General, Rufus Putnam, 

was appointed Surveyor General of the lands northwest of 

the Ohio River, on November 5, 1796, and established his 

office in Marietta, Ohio. 

The early records of the appointments of Surveyors General are vague and somewhat conflicting. Beginning in 1828, 

the records were kept in a “Bond Book” which indicates the 

date on which a given Surveyor General was commissioned, 

date of his bond, and other information pertaining to his 

tenure in office. Occasionally the man commissioned would 

decline the appointment or serve for only a temporary period. 

In the period 1796 to 1828, the list shows the date on which a 

Surveyor General was appointed or took office as determined 

from correspondence or reports. After 1828, the date given is 

the date of his commission as shown in the Bond Books. 

Under the “Remarks” heading is other pertinent information 

and dates thought to be of interest. 

Several Offices of Surveyors General were responsible for 

the surveys in more than one state (or territory) such as, 

Ohio, Indiana, and Michigan; Wisconsin and Iowa, etc. 

Therefore, there is duplication in the lists among the affected 

states. 

CAUTION: This list of Surveyors General is for informative purposes only. The dates given, spelling of names, etc., 

has not been positively verified and may contain factual 

errors. The information has been taken from the most reliable sources available without extensive individual research 

which, for the purpose intended, is not warranted. A considerable lapse often occurred between the date a Surveyor 

General was commissioned and the date he actually took 

charge of a particular office. 

COMMISSIONERS 

OF THE 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE 

Name 

Edward Tiffin 

Josiah Meigs 

John McLean 

George Graham 

Elijah Hayward 

Ethan A. Brown 

James Whitcomb 

Elisha M. Huntington 

Thomas H. Blake 

James Shields 

Richard M. Young 

Justin Butterfield 

John Wilson 

Thomas A. Hendricks 

Samuel A. Smith 

Joseph S. Wilson 

James H. Edmunds 

Joseph S. Wilson 

Willis Drummond 

Samuel S. Burdett 

James A. Williamson 

Noah C. McFarland 

William A. J. Sparks 

S. M. Stockslager 

Lewis A. Groff 

Thomas H. Carter 

WilliamH. Stone 

Silas W. Lamoreaux 

Binger Hermann 

William A. Richards 

Richard A. Ballinger 

Fred Dennett 

Clay Tallman 

William Spry 

Charles C. Moore 

Fred W. Johnson 

Date of Commission 

May 7,1812 

October 11,1814 

September 11,1822 

June 26,1823 

September 30,1830 

July 24,1835 

October 21,1836 

July 3,1841 

May 19,1842 

April 16,1845 

January 6,1847 

July 1,1849 

September 16,1852 

August 8,1855 

October 13,1859 

February 23,1860 

March 16,1861 

September 1,1866 

February 4,1871 

July 1,1874 

June 24,1876 

June 17,1881 

March 26,1885 

March 27,1888 

September 16,1889 

March31,1891 

November 18,1892 

March 28,1893 

March 25,1897 

January 26,1903 

January 28,1907 

January 14,1908 

June 5,1913 

March 22,1921 

May 9,1929 

May 20,1933 

194 
Name 

Munson C. Hillyer 

Barton Aikins 

Orville T. Porter 

Louis L. Williams 

James M. Shoup 

Gilbert B. Pray 

William L. Distin 

Charles E. Davidson 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF ALASKA 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

July 5,1884 

July21,1885 

June 21,1889 

February 20,1894 

June 26,1897 

July 27,1897 

August 7,1897 

July 23,1913 

Remarks 

U.S. Marshal and 

Ex offcio 

Surveyor General 

Office opened at 

Sitka, Alaska 

Ex officio 

Ex officio 

Effective 

October 1,1889 

Ex officio 

Temporary and declined 

Surveyor General 

Opened November 5,1897 

Office moved to Juneau, 

October 1,1906 

Entered office 

Drowned August 8,1919 

October 18,1913 

Robert J. Sommers September 25,1919 Resigned July 18,1921 

Karl Theile July22,1921 Entered office 

August 25,1921 

Office abolished by Act of March 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service, 

July 1,1925. 

195 
Name 

Isaac Briggs 

Seth Pease 

Thomas Freeman 

John Coffee 

James W. Weakley 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF ALABAMA 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

April 1,1803 

Early in 1807 

September 10,1810 

March 17,1817 

July 20,1833 

Remarks 

Surveyor, South of 

Opened at Washington, 

Tennessee 

Mississippi 

Surveyor General of 

Alabama at Huntsville 

Moved to Florence, 

Alabama in 1823 

Died July 7,1833 

Office closed 

October 29,1849 

Records were transferred to Secretary of State of Alabama June 8,1850. Subsequent surveys were under the direction of 

the Commissioner, General Land Office. 

196 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF ARIZONA 

Appointment or 

Name Date of Commission 

Levi Bashford 

Remarks 

May 4,1863 Office opened 

January 25,1864 

at Tucson, Arizona 

Closed July 4,1864 

John A. Clark Assumed duties 

July 1864 

Arizona under Surveyor 

General of New Mexico 

at Santa Fe 

Lauren Upson Effective 

March 2,1867 

Arizona under 

Surveyor General of 

California at 

San Francisco 

Sherman Day 

John Wasson 

July 22,1868 Surveyor General of 

California 

July 14,1870 Surveyor General of 

Arizona 

Opened office in Tucson 

on November 5,1870 

Joseph W. Robbins 

Royal A. Johnson 

July 15,1882 

January 11,1884 

Died November 14,1883 

Suspended 

November 6,1885 

John Hise 

Royal A. Johnson 

Levi H. Manning 

November 6,1885 

June 17,1889 

April 17,1893 

Removed June 17,1889 

Resigned March 4,1893 

Resigned 

January 10,1896 

George T. Roskruge 

George Christ 

March 11,1896 

July 22,1897 

Removed July 17,1897 

Took office 

August 6,1897 

Moved to Phoenix, 

Arizona, 

March 1,1902 

Hugh H. Price August 3,1901 Removed 

September 9,1903 

Frank S. Ingalls 

Frank P. Trott 

September 9,1903 

January 26,1916 

Charles M. Donohoe January 24,1924 Took office 

February 11,1924 

Office abolished by Act ofMarch 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service, 

July 1,1925. 

197 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF ARKANSAS 

Name 

Silas Bent 

William Rector 

William Clark 

William McRee 

James S. Conway 

Edward Cross 

RichardD. C. Collins 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

March 1806 

August 20,1813 

October 1824 

May 17,1825 

June 30,1832 

April 30,1836 

August 6,1838 

Remarks 

Principal Deputy of 

Missouri Territory at 

St. Louis, Missouri 

Principal Deputy 

Became Surveyor General 

of Illinois and Missouri by 

Act ofApril 29,1816 

Acting Surveyor General 

at St. Louis 

Surveyor General of *'. 

Illinois and Missouri 

at St. Louis 

Opened office of 

Surveyor General 

of Arkansas at 

Little Rock 

Declined office 

October 8,1838 

David Fulton November 7,1838 

William Pelham April 7,1841 

Lorenzo Gibson May 8,1849 

George Milbourne April 7,1853 

Henry M. Rector March 7,1855 Resigned February 7,1859 

Office closed March 12,1859. Records transferred to State of Arkansas about 1861. Subsequent surveys made under the 

Commissioner of the General Land Office. 

198 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF CALIFORNIA 

Name 

Samuel D. King 

John C. Hays 

James W. Mandeville 

Edward F. Beale 

Lauren Upson 

Sherman Day 

James R. Hardenbergh 

James T. Stratton 

Henry G. Rollins 

John W. Ames 

Theodore Wagner 

William H. Brown 

Richard P. Hammond Jr. 

William H. Pratt 

William S. Green 

James M. Gleaves 

William S. Graham 

Edward H. Archer 

Frank H. Gould 

Louis H. Mooser 

John Plover 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

March 12,1851 

March 19,1853 

July 13,1857 

April 15,1861 

February 25,1864 

July 22,1868 

January 20,1871 

December 20,1873 

January 15,1876 

September 27,1877 

May 25,1878 

June 2,1882 

November 20,1885 

March 4,1890 

March 24,1894 

February 19,1898 

January 9,1902 

February 11,1910 

January 27,1914 

February 19,1918 

October 3,1921 

Remarks 

Office created by Act of 

March 3,1851 

Office opened in 

San Francisco, 

California, on 

June 19,1851 

Resigned 

Died April 6,1878 

Resigned November 7,1885 

Died November 27,1901 

Died January 26,1918 

Resigned 

September 23,1921 

Office abolished by Act of March 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service July 

1,1925. 

199 
Name 

Francis M. Case 

OFFICE OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF COLORADO 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

April 5,1861 

John Pierce March 16,1863 

William H. Lessig March 20,1867 

Thomas B. Searight February 13,1874 

William L. Campbell January 26,1877 

Albert Johnson November 6,1879 

Norman H. Meldrum April 3,1883 

James A. Dawson November 6,1885 

Oney Carstarphen January 24,1887 

Enery C. Humphrey February 28,1890 

Thomas D. Robinson June 15,1893 

Richard LeBert December 22,1897 

Charles C. Goodale January 9,1899 

John F. Vivian March 3,1903 

William G. Lewis July 15,1905 

Timothy O’Connor 

John B. McGauran 

May 24,1910 

June 19,1914 

Remarks 

Office opened in Denver, Colorado 

June 17,1861 

Suspended November 6,1879 

Suspended April 3,1883 

Suspended November 6,1885 

Died January 16,1887 

Removed June 15,1893 

Resigned January 7,1899 

Entered office 

June 7,1910 

Entered office 

July 8,1914 

Removed 

September 16,1921 

William H. Clark October 8,1921 

Office abolished by Act ofMarch 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service July 

1,1925. 

200 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF FLORIDA 

Name 

Robert A. Butler 

Valentine Y. Conway 

Robert A. Butler 

Benjamin A. Putnam 

John Westcott 

Francis L. Dancy 

M. L. Stearns 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

July 9,1824 

March 17,1842 

August 11,1845 

April 11,1849 

April 29,1853 

May 13,1858 

April 17,1869 

Joshua W. Gilbert March 18,1873 

LeRoy D. Ball May 11,1875 

Malachi Martin March 1,1881 

William H. Hicks November21,1884 

James F. McClellan April 27,1885 

William D. Bloxham November 14,1885 

John C. Slocum October 28,1889 

William H. Milton Jr. 

Richard L. Scarlett October 29,1897 

Edmund C. Weeks March 5,1902 

Charles H. Parlin May 4,1906 

Records transferred to State ofFlorida on August 24,1908. 

April 12,1894 

Remarks 

Office opened at 

Tallahassee, Florida 

Ordered moved 

October 6,1843 to 

St. Augustine, Florida 

Resigned March 4,1861 

Opened in Tallahassee, 

ResignedMarch 18,1873 

Florida 

SuspendedMay 11,1875 

Died (Date unknown) 

Resigned October 21,1885 

Removed October 28,1889 

Closed June 30,1908 

201 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF IDAHO 

Name 

LaFayette Cartee 

Edward Ruger 

LaFayette Cartee 

William P. Chandler 

Joseph C. Straughan 

Willis H. Pettit 

Joseph C. Straughan 

Joseph Perrault 

Ernest G. Eagleson 

Darwin A. Utter 

Edward Hedden 

Virgil W. Samms 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

August 13,1866 

April 21,1869 

March21,1870 

May 28,1878 

November 6,1885 

July 9,1890 

June 28,1893 

October 2,1897 

June 30,1902 

February 10,1908 

August 29,1916 

May4,1921 

Remarks 

Opened November 7,1866, 

in Boise City, Idaho 

Resigned February 28,1870 

Suspended 

November 6,1885 

Removed June 28,1893 

Entered office 

November 1,1897 

Resigned 

November 16,1907 

Entered office 

March 1,1908 

Entered office 

September 30,1916 

Entered office 

June 1,1921 

Office abolished by Act of March 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service, 

July 1,1925. 

202 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF ILLINOIS 

Name 

Jared Mansfield 

Josiah Meigs 

Edward Tiffin 

William Rector 

William Clark 

William McRee 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

November 3,1803 

November 24,1812 

November 1814 

Effective 

April 29,1816 

October 1824 

April 1825 

Remarks 

Office at Cincinnati, Ohio 

Illinois Territory 

created by Act of 

February 3,1809 

Office moved to 

Chillicothe, Ohio, in 

November 1814 

Office of 

Surveyor General of 

Illinois and Missouri 

created by Act of 

April 29,1816. 

Located at St. Louis, 

Missouri 

Acting Surveyor General 

TookofficeMay 17,1825, 

in St. Louis 

Resigned 

Elias T. Langham May 30,1832 

Daniel Dunklin May 11,1836 

William Milburn March 13,1839 

Silas Reed April 27,1841 

J. C. Brown September 13,1841 

Silas Reed March 17,1842 

Frederick R. Conway May 12,1845 

Merriwether Lewis Clark June 14,1849 

Don Alonzo Spaulding February 10,1853 Resigned 

John Loughborough April 22,1853 

William Cuddy April 3,1861 Closed office 

October31,1863 

Records transferred to State of Illinois in July 1869. Subsequent surveys made under the Commissioner of the General 

Land Office. 

203 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF INDIANA 

Name 

Rufus Putnam 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

November 5,1796 

Jared Mansfield November 3,1803 

Josiah Meigs 

Edward Tiffin 

November 24,1812 

November 1814 

William Lytle July 3,1829 

Remarks 

Surveyor General of 

Northwest Territory 

opened office in 

Marietta, Ohio. 

Indiana Territory created 

by Act of May 7,1800 

Moved to Cincinnati, 

Ohio, in May, 1905 

Moved office to 

Chillicothe, Ohio 

Moved office to 

Cincinnati, Ohio 

Died March 18,1831 

Micajah T. Williams April 13,1831 

Robert T. Lytle April 23,1835 

Ezekial S. Haines June 6,1938 

William Johnston June 11,1842 

Lucius Lyon June 23,1845 Office moved to Detroit, 

Michigan, 

in June 1845 

Records transferred to State of Indiana in 1850. Subsequent surveys executed under Surveyor General in Detroit and 

under the Commissioner of the General Land Office. 

204 
Name 

Albert G. Ellis 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF IOWA 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

June 28,1838 

George W. Jones February 4,1840 

James Wilson April 24,1841 

George W. Jones May 9,1845 

Caleb H. Booth January 12,1849 

George B. Sargent March 24,1851 

Warner Lewis April 23,1853 

Thomas J. Townsend May 6,1861 

Henry A. Wiltse January 29,1863 

Remarks 

Opened office for 

Wisconsin and Iowa 

at Dubuque, Iowa, 

February 1839 

Office at Dubuque 

closed June 30,1866 

Subsequent surveys in Iowa were executed under the Surveyor General of Nebraska until about 1886. Survey records were 

transferred to the State ofIowa in March 1868. 

205 
Name 

John Calhoun 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF KANSAS 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

August 1,1854 

WardB. Burnett July 21,1858 

Mark W. Delahay April 29,1861 

Remarks 

Opened at 

Fort Leavenworth, 

Kansas, 

September 15,1854 

Moved to 

Nebraska City, 

Nebraska, in May 1858 

Moved to 

Leavenworth, Kansas, 

in September 1861 

Daniel W. Wilder October 10,1863 At Leavenworth, Kansas 

Hirano S. Sleeper March 16,1865 

C. W. Babcock April 21,1869 At Lawrence, Kansas 

Office was closed June 30,1876, and the records transferred to the State of Kansas. Subsequent resurveys made under the 

Commissioner of the General Land Office. 

NOTE: The Kansas-Nebraska Office was opened at Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, on September 15, 1854; moved to 

Wyandotte, Kansas, in September 1855; moved to Lecompton, Kansas in October 1856; moved to Nebraska City, 

Nebraska, in May 1858; and moved to Leavenworth, Kansas, in September 1861. The Act of July 28,1866,14 Stat. 

344, created the Office of Surveyor General of Nebraska and Iowa. The Kansas (only) office remained in 

Leavenworth until moved to Lawrence, Kansas, in 1869 until closed in 1876. 

206 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF LOUISIANA 

Name 

Isaac Briggs 

Seth Pease 

Thomas Freeman 

Levin Wailes 

George Davis 

James P. Turner 

Joseph Dunbar 

Hore Browse Triste 

Henry T. Williams 

Francis D. Newcomb 

Pierre T. Landry 

Robert W. Boyd 

J. Charlton Beattie 

William J. McCulloh 

John Lynch 

Everett W. Foster 

Maximilian F. Bonzano 

Orlando H. Brewster 

Orlando H. Brewster 

Jaques A. Gla 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

With Act of 

March 26,1804 

Early in 1807 

September 10,1810 

January 22,1822 

June 1,1824 

April 24,1828 

December 23,1829 

June 15,1831 

February21,1834 

June 23,1841 

May 10,1845 

May 9,1849 

April 7,1853 

June 2,1853 

June 3,1869 

February 27,1871 

November 28,1873 

July 21,1874 

January 23,1877 

November 2,1881 

Remarks 

2 Stat. 283 created 

Orleans Territory 

Briggs was Surveyor 

South of 

Tennessee with office 

at Washington, 

Mississippi 

At Washington, 

Mississippi 

Act ofMarch 3,1831 

Office of Surveyor 

General of Louisiana 

established at 

Donaldsonville, 

Louisiana 

Donaldsonville, 

Louisiana 

Declined 

Resigned February 6,1861 

Office closed 

Opened at New Orleans, 

Louisiana 

Suspended 

October 25,1873 

Resigned November 4,1876 

Suspended March 5,1883 

207 
James Lewis 

Benjamin T. Ledbetter 

Calhoun Fluker 

Charles B. Wilson 

Charles H. Dickinson 

James Lewis 

March 5,1883 

November 12,1885 

February 28,1887 

March 26,1890 

September 15,1893 

January 19,1899 

Suspended 

Resigned February 26,1886 

November 12,1885 

Temporary appointment 

Commissioned June 23,1886 

Died December 7,1886 

Removed September 5,1893 

DiedDecember 13,1898 

Civil Appropriations Act 

of March 4,1909, 

abolished office. 

July 1,1909 

Office closed 

Records transferred to State of Louisiana in 1910. 

208 
Name 

Jared Mansfield 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF MICHIGAN 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

November 3,1803 

Josiah Meigs November 24,1812 

Edward Tiffin November 1814 

William Lytle July 3,1829 

Micajah T. Williams 

Robert T. Lytle 

Ezekiel S. Haines 

William Johnston 

Lucius Lyon 

April 13,1831 

April 23,1835 

June 6,1838 

June 11,1842 

June 23,1845 

Charles Noble January 14,1850 

Leander Chapman April 1,1853 

Remarks 

At Marietta, Ohio 

Michigan Territory 

created 

January 11,1805 

Office moved to 

Cincinnati, Ohio, 

May 1805 

Office moved to 

Chillicothe, Ohio 

Office moved to 

Cincinnati, Ohio 

DiedMarch 18,1831 

Moved to Detroit, 

Michigan 

in June 1845 

Detroit Office closed 

May 11,1857 

Surveyor General moved 

to St. Paul, Minnesota 

Records transferred to State of Michigan between May 1857 and May 1858. Subsequent surveys and resurveys made under 

the Commissioner of the General Land Offke. 

209 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF MINNESOTA 

Name 

Charles L. Emerson 

William D. Washburn 

Levi Nutting 

Chester D. Davison 

Charles T. Brown 

Dana E. King 

James H. Baker 

Jacob H. Stewart 

Martin S. Chandler 

John F. Norrish 

James Compton 

Patrick H. Kirwan 

Eli S. Warner 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

March 24,1857 

March 28,1861 

April 26,1865 

April 21,1869 

February 2,1871 

October 3,1873 

May 1,1875 

April 3,1879 

April 2,1883 

February 28,1887 

March 20,1891 

November 4,1895 

January 18,1900 

Remarks 

Opened in St. Paul, Minnesota 

May 23,1857 

Resigned 

ResignedNovember 13,1886 

Removed November 4,1895 

Warner was the last Surveyor General listed. The office was closed and records transferred to the State of Minnesota on 

February 4,1908. 

210 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF MISSISSIPPI 

Name 

Isaac Briggs 

Seth Pease 

Thomas Freeman 

Levin Wailes 

George Davis 

James P. Turner 

Joseph Dunbar 

Gideon Fitz 

R. M. Williamson 

Henry S. Foote 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

April 1,1803 

Early in 1807 

September 10,1810 

January 10,1822 

June 1,1824 

February 28,1828 

February 20,1830 

February 19,1831 

July 1,1834 

May31,1836 

Remarks 

Surveyor, South of 

Opened at Washington, 

Tennessee 

Mississippi 

Office moved to and 

opened in 

Jackson, Mississippi, 

August 1,1833 

Opened August 16,1834 

Appointment rejected 

by Senate 

Closed in 1835 

and remained 

Closed until 1836 

Reopened at Jackson, 

Resigned April 20,1838 

Mississippi 

Volney E. Howard May 15,1838 

Benjamin A. Ludlow April 19,1841 

Alexander Downing May 9,1843 

Charles A. Bradford March 24,1845 

Office closed and records transferred to State of Mississippi in October 1849. Subsequent surveys and resurveys made 

under the Commissioner of the General Land Office. 

211 
Name 

Silas Bent 

William Rector 

William Clark 

William McRee 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF MISSOURI 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

March 1806 

August 20,1813 

October 1824 

April 1825 

Elias T. Langham May 30,1832 

Daniel Dunklin May 11,1836 

Remarks 

Principal Deputy 

Office opened in 

St. Louis, Missouri 

Principal Deputy 

Became Surveyor General by 

Act ofApril 29,1816 

Acting Surveyor General 

Surveyor General 

of Illinois 

and Missouri 

at St. Louis 

Resigned 

William Milburn 

Silas Reed 

March 13,1839 

April 27,1841 

Joseph C. Brown September 13,1841 

Silas Reed March 17,1842 

Frederick R. Conway May 12,1845 

Merriwether Lewis Clark June 14,1849 

Don Alonzo Spaulding February 10,1853 Resigned 

John Loughborough 

William Cuddy 

April 22,1853 

April 3,1861 Closed October 31,1863 

Records transferred to State of Missouri in August 1874. Subsequent surveys made under the Commissioner of the General 

Land Office. 

212 
Name 

Soloman Meredith 

Henry D. Washburn 

John E . Blaine 

Andrew J. Smith 

Roswell H. Mason 

John S. Harris 

Benjamin H. Greene 

George 0. Eaton 

John S. M. Neil1 

Edward W. Beattie 

John Frank Cone 

Jerome G. Locke 

Henry Gerharz 

Gilman Bullard 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF MONTANA 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

April 18,1867 

April 17,1869 

February 27,1871 

December 23,1873 

September 7,1877 

October 29,1881 

October 2,1885 

September 2,1889 

May 28,1894 

June 28,1897 

June 27,1906 

June 15,1911 

June 24,1914 

January 14,1920 

Remarks 

Opened in 

Helena, Montana 

Died January 26,1871 

Resigned December 18,1873 

Suspended August 14,1877 

Resigned October 18,1881 

Removed September 2,1889 

Removed June 22,1897 

Resigned May 1914 

Resigned 

December 27,1919 

Office abolished by Act ofMarch 3,1?25,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service, 

July 1,1925. 

213 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF NEBRASKA 

Name 

John Calhoun 

Ward B. Burnett 

Mark W. Delahay 

Daniel W. Wilder 

Hirano S. Sleeper 

Phineas W. Hitchcock 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

August 1,1854 

July21,1858 

April 29,1861 

October 10,1863 

March 16,1865 

April 1,1867 

Robert R. Livingston April 17,1869 

E. E. Cunningham April 20,1871 

John R. Clark July 2,1875 

George S. Smith April 14,1879 

DavidV. Stephensen March 7,1883 

Remarks 

Opened at 

Fort Leavenworth, 

Kansas, 

September 15,1854 

Moved to Nebraska City, 

Nebraska, in May 1858 

Moved to 

Leavenworth Kansas, 

in September 1861 

Surveyor General of 

Nebraska and Iowa 

Opened at Plattsmouth, 

Nebraska, in May 1867 

Plattsmouth, Nebraska 

Resigned May 2,1885 

Jonathan F. Gardner June 11,1885 

The Nebraska-Iowa office of Surveyor General was apparently closed June 30, 1886, due to lack of appropriations to 

maintain the office. The records were transferred to the State of Nebraska in September 1886. 

NOTE: The Kansas-Nebraska Office was opened at Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, on September 15, 1854; moved to 

Wyandotte, Kansas, in September 1855; moved to Lecompton, Kansas, in October 1856; moved to Nebraska City, 

Nebraska in May 1858; and moved to Leavenworth, Kansas, in September 1861. The Act of July 28,1866,14 Stat. 

344, created the Office of Surveyor General of Nebraska and Iowa, which was opened in Plattsmouth, Nebraska, 

in May 1867 where it remained until closed in 1886. 

214 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF NEVADA 

Name 

John W. North 

Edward F. Beale 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

March 28,1861 

From March 1862 

Lauren Upson February 25,1864 

William B. Thornburgh October 20,1866 

Anson P. K. Safford April 1,1867 

Edmund S. Davis April 28,1869 

Christopher C. Powning March 7,1883 

Remarks 

Opened in Carson City, 

Closed - Act of 

Nevada, June 22,1861 

March 14,1862 

Nevada under Surveyor 

General of California 

with office 

in San Francisco 

San Francisco, California 

Reopened in Carson City, 

Nevada, 

November 27,1866 

Moved to Virginia City, 

Nevada 

Moved to Reno, Nevada 

January 20,1882 

Suspended 

November 12,1886 

Charles W. Irish November 12,1886 Removed April 1,1890 

George F. Turrittin April 15,1890 

Clayton Belknap August 8,1894 

Matthew Kyle July21,1898 Resigned August 10,1914 

John B. O’Sullivan September 9,1914 Resigned July 5,1921 

Joseph E. Gelder July 19,1921 

Office abolished by Act of March 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service July 

1,1925. 

215 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF NEW MEXICO 

Name 

William Pelham 

Alexander P. Wilbar 

John A. Clark 

Benjamin C. Cutler 

T. Rush Spencer 

James K. Proudfit 

Henry M. Atkinson 

Clarence Pullen 

George W. Julian 

Edward F. Hobart 

Charles F. Easley 

Quinby Vance 

Morgan 0. Llewellyn 

John W. March 

Lucius Dills 

Manuel A. Sanchez 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

August 1,1854 

June 21,1860 

July 26,1861 

July 29,1868 

April 15,1869 

July 23,1872 

February 10,1876 

July 9,1884 

June 1,1885 

August 3,1889 

June 28,1893 

July 26,1897 

January 29,1902 

January 13,1908 

March 20,1914 

April 7,1922 

Remarks 

Office opened in Santa Fe, 

New Mexico, 

December 28,1854 

Died October 18,1869 

Died June 21,1872 

Resigned January 27,1876 

Suspended June 1,1885 

Removed August 3,1889 

Removed June 28,1893 

Resigned August 3,1897 

Resigned December 12,1907 

ResignedMarch 12,1914 

Office abolished by Act of March 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service July 

1,1925. 

216 
Name 

George D. Hill 

William Tripp 

William H. H. Beadle 

William P. Dewey 

Henry Espersen 

Cortez Fessenden 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF NORTH DAKOTA 

Maris Taylor 

Boetius H. Sullivan 

Erastus A. Williams 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

March 28,1861 

May 23,1866 

April 17,1869 

December 18,1872 

April 25,1977 

May 10,1881 

May 27,1885 

July 18,1889 

April 25,1890 

Andrew Blewett May 29,1894 

Erastus A. Williams May 3,1898 

Office closed and records transferred to the State of North Dakota July 1,1908. 

Remarks 

Surveyor General of 

Dakota Territory 

Opened July 1,1861, in 

Yankton, South Dakota 

Yankton, South Dakota 

Resigned 

Moved to Huron, 

South Dakota, 

July2,1883 

Removed July 18,1889 

Surveyor General of 

Opened in 

North Dakota 

Bismark, North Dakota, 

July 15,1890 

Bismark, North Dakota 

217 
Name 

Rufus Putnam 

Jared Mansfield 

Josiah Meigs 

Edward Tiffin 

William Lytle 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF OHIO 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

November 5,1796 

November 3,1803 

November 24,1812 

November 1814 

July 3,1829 

Micajah T. Williams April 23,1831 

Robert T. Lytle April 13,1835 

Ezekiel S. Haines June 6,1838 

William Johnston June 11,1842 

Lucius Lyon June 23,1845 

Remarks 

Opened in 

Marietta, Ohio 

Moved to 

Cincinnati, Ohio, 

in May 1805 

Moved to 

Chillicothe, Ohio, 

November 1814 

Moved to 

Cincinnati, Ohio, 

in July 1829 

DiedMarch 18,1831 

Moved to 

Detroit, Michigan 

The Ohio office was closed in June 1845 and moved to Detroit; the records were transferred to the State of Ohio on August 

11,1845. Subsequent surveys were made under the Commissioner ofthe General Land Office. 

218 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF OREGON 

Name 

William Gooding 

John B. Preston 

Charles K. Gardner 

John S. Zieber 

William W. Chapman 

B. J. Pengra 

Elisha L. Applegate 

William H. Ode11 

Benjamin Simpson 

James C. Tolman 

Douglas W. Taylor 

William Henry Byars 

John C. Arnold 

Robert A. Habersham 

Henry Meldrum 

John D. Daly 

George A. Westgate 

Edward G. Worth 

Wesley W. Caviness 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

September 28,1850 

November 22,1850 

June 30,1853 

March 18,1856 

March 22,1859 

June 13,1861 

March 14,1865 

December 9,1870 

February 28,1874 

April 27,1878 

July 20,1886 

June 12,1890 

August 4,1894 

September 22,1896 

April 26,1901 

March 16,1903 

October 15,1907 

April 24,1913 

November 15,1921 

Remarks 

Declined 

Opened May 5,1851, 

at Oregon City, Oregon 

Moved to Salem, Oregon, 

August 1,1854 

Salem, Oregon 

Moved to Eugene, Oregon, 

October 25,1859 

Moved to Portland, Oregon 

April 1,1875 

Resigned June 1,1886 

Died August 24,1896 

RemovedMarch 14,1903 

Died October 4,1907 

Office abolished by Act ofMarch 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service July 

1,1925. 

219 
Name 

Warner Lewis 

George D. Hill 

William Tripp 

William H. H. Beadle 

Henry Espersen 

Cortez Fessenden 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF SOUTH DAKOTA 

Maris Taylor 

Boetius H. Sullivan 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

April 23,1853 

March 28,1861 

May 23,1866 

April 17,1869 

April 25,1877 

May 10,1881 

May 27,1885 

July 18,1889 

Richard B. Hughes January 20,1894 

Frank A. Morris January 12,1898 

Clark B. Alford November 27,1907 

William A. Lynch March 23,1916 

Records transferred to State of South Dakota in 1923. 

Remarks 

Surveys began in Dakota 

Territory in 1859 under 

Surveyor General at 

Dubuque, Iowa 

Surveyor General of 

Dakota Territory 

Opened July 1,1861, in 

Yankton, South Dakota 

Yankton, South Dakota 

Resigned 

Moved to Huron, 

South Dakota 

July 2,1883 

Removed July 18,1889 

Surveyor General of 

Act of April 10,1890 

Removed January 8,1894 

South Dakota 

Closed June 30,1922 

220 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF UTAH 

Name 

David H. Burr 

John C . Hays 

Samuel C. Stambaugh 

Francis M. Case 

John Pierce 

William Lessig 

John A. Clark 

Courtland C. Clements 

Nathan Kimball 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

March 7,1855 

July 13,1857 

May 19,1859 

April 5,1861 

March 16,1863 

March 20,1867 

July 28,1868 

July 7,1869 

December 17,1873 

Frederick Salomon February 13,1878 

Richmond S. Dement October 12,1885 

William G. Bowman August 6,1886 

Ellsworth Daggett May 6,1889 

George W. Snow June 28,1893 

Jacob B. Blair September 16,1897 

Edward H. Anderson March 2,1901 

Thomas Hull July 26,1905 

Ingwald C. Thoresen March 13,1914 

Erastus D. Sorenson September 27,1921 

Remarks 

Opened in Salt Lake City, 

Utah, July 27,1855 

Salt Lake City 

(Vacatedin 1861) 

Utah surveys under 

Surveyor General of 

Colorado at 

Denver, Colorado 

Denver, Colorado 

Reopened Utah Office in 

Salt Lake City, Utah 

Suspended July 3,1877, 

by President’s Order 

Restored by Secretary’s 

Order, August 10,1877 

Suspended October 12,1885 

Died November 29,1888 

Removed June 28,1893 

DiedFebruary 12,1901 

Removed September 19,1921 

Office abolished by Act ofMarch 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service July 

1,1925. 

221 
OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF WASHINGTON 

Name 

James Tilton 

Anson G. Henry 

Edward Giddings 

Selucius Garfield 

Elisha P. Ferry 

Lewis P. Beach 

William McMicken 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

August 1,1854 

July 17,1861 

August 1865 

February 19,1866 

April 17,1869 

May 14,1872 

May 12,1873 

Remarks 

Opened in Olympia, 

Washington, March 1855 

Drowned July 30,1865 

Acting during vacancy 

Died April 29,1873 

J. Cabell Breckinridge April 23,1886 

Thomas H. Cavanaugh July 8,1889 

Amos F. Shaw June 30,1892 

William P. Watson February 7,1894 

William McMicken February 12,1898 

Edward P. Kingsburg October 19,1899 

Edward A. FitzHenry June 6,1913 

Clair Hunt July27,1921 

Office abolished by Act of March 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service, 

July 1,1925. 

Removed July 8,1889 

Resigned June 24,1892 

Removed January 29,1894 

Died September 9,1899 

ResignedMarch 1,1913 

222 
Name 

Robert T. Lytle 

Albert G. Ellis 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF WISCONSIN 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

April 23,1835 

June 28,1838 

George W. Jones February 4,1840 

Remarks 

Wisconsin Territory by 

Act of April 20,1836 

Surveys were under Surveyor 

General at 

Cincinnati, Ohio 

Surveyor General of 

Opened at Dubuque, Iowa, 

Wisconsin and Iowa 

in February 1839 

At Dubuque, Iowa 

James Wilson April 24,1841 

George W. Jones May 9,1845 

Caleb H. Booth January 12,1849 

George B. Sargent March 24,1851 

Warner Lewis April 23,1853 

Thomas J. Townsend May 6,1861 

Henry A. Wiltse January 29,1863 Closed June 30,1866 

Records transferred to State ofWisconsin on August 1,1866. Subsequent surveys made under the Commissioner of the 

General Land Office. 

223 
Name 

Silas Reed 

OFFICE OF SURVEYOR GENERAL OF WYOMING 

Appointment or 

Date of Commission 

March 2,1870 

Hiram Latham March 26,1873 

Silas Reed July 18,1873 

Edward C . David 

John W. Meldrum 

August 23,1875 

July 3,1884 

John Charles Thompson November 20,1885 

William A. Richards July 18,1889 

Perry Bickford October 23,1893 

John Charles Thompson September 5,1894 

Alpheus P. Hanson July 22,1897 

Charles L. Decker September 25,1913 

Cyde W. Atherly October 6,1921 

Remarks 

Office opened in 

Cheyenne, Wyoming 

Resigned August 23,1875 

Resigned July 20,1885 

Removed July 18,1889 

Removed September 29,1893 

Resigned August 9,1894 

Removed July 17,1897 

Removed June 21,1913 

Ofice abolished by Act of March 3,1925,43 Stat. 1141. Equipment and records transferred to Field Surveying Service, 

July 1,1925. 

224 
REFERENCES CITED 

Annual Reports. Secretary of the Interior and Commission of 

the General Land Office, 1849-1915; Serial List, Senate 

and House Documents: Multnomah County Library, 

Portland, Oregon. 

Carstensen, Vernon, The Public Lands - Studies in the 

History of the Public Domain (Madison: The University 

of Wisconsin Press, 1963). 522 p. 

Cazier, Lola, Surveys and Surveyors of the Public Domain, 

1785-1975 (Washington: U.S. Government Printing 

Office, 1976). 228 p. 

Dodds, J. S., Original Instructions Governing Public land 

Surveys of Iowa (Ames, Iowa: Iowa Engineering Society, 1943). 565 p. 

Donaldson, Thomas, The Public Domain, Its History With 

Statistics (New York and London: Johnson Reprint Corporation, 1884). 1,343 p. 

Fisher, C. G., Circulars and Regulations of the General Land 

Office (Washington: U.S. Government Printing Office, 

1930). 1,696 p. 

Gates, Paul W., History of Public Land Law Development 

(Washington: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1968). 

828 p. 

General Land Office Letters to Surveyors General, 1796- 

1901: National Archives, Microcopy No. 27. 

Hawes, J. H., Manual of United States Land Surveying (Columbus, Ohio: A Facsimile Reprint by Carben Surveying 

Reprints, 1868). 234 p. 

Hodgman, Francis, A Manual of Land Surveying (Climax, 

Michigan: Reprinted by Buckner Historical Surveying 

Book Reprints, 1913). 424 p. 

Manuals of Surveying Instructions for the Survey of the 

Public Lands of the United States (U.S. Government 

Printing Office, 1851, 1855, 1881, 1890, 1894, 1902, 

1930, 1947, and 1973 editions). 

McEntyre, John G., Land Survey Systems (New York: John 

Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1978). 537 p. 

Pattison, William D., Beginnings of the American Rectangular Land Survey System, 1784-1800 (Chicago, Illinois: 

The University of Chicago, 1957). 

Peters, William E., Ohio Lands and Their Subdivisions (2nd 

ed.), Courtesy of Ohio State University Library 

(Athens, Ohio: The Messenger Printery Co., ed. 1918). 

413 p. 

Sherman, C. E., Original Ohio Land Subdivisions; Vol. 111, 

Final Report, Courtesy of Ohio State University Library (Ohio: The Ohio State Reformatory, ed 1925). 233 

P. 

Stewart, Lowell O., Public Land Surveys, History - Instructions - Methods (Ames, Iowa: Collegiate Press, Inc., 

1935). 202 p. 

Thrower, Norman J. W., Original Survey and Land Subdivision (Chicago: Rand McNally and Company, 1919). 

Tillman, Thomas A., Personal collection of miscellaneous 

papers (1973 Manual Editor). 

Treasury Secretary Letters and General Land Office Commissioner Letters, From the Surveyor General of the 

Territory Northwest of the River Ohio, 1797-1849: 

National Archives, Microcopy No. 478. 

Treat, Payson Jackson, Ph.D., The National Land System, 

1785-1820 (New York: E. B. Treat & Company Publishers, 1910). 426 p. 

U.S. Statutes at Large, Volume 1 (Boston: Charles C. Little 

and James Brown, 1845). 

US. Statutes at Large, Volume 90 (Washington: US. Government Printing Office, 1978). 

Van Zandt, Franklin K., Boundaries of the United States and 

the Several States: U.S. Geological Survey Bulletin 909 

(Washington: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1976). 

Van Zandt, Franklin K., Boundaries of the United States and 

the Several States: U.S. Geological Survey Bulletin 

1212 (Washington: U.S. Government Printing Office, 

1966). 291 p. 

Innumerable miscellaneous text books, encyclopedia, publications by other authors, newspaper, library and historical society reference departments, and articles 

printed by the American Congress on Surveying and 

Mapping, were used as references, in the preparation of 

this book. Reference was frequently made to the original field notes and plats of the public land surveys. 

225 
APPENDIX 

to 

A HISTORY 

OF THE 

RECTANGULAR 

SURVEY SYSTEM 

by C. Albert White 

227 
INTRODUCTION 

The following pages contain copies of selected letters, 

circulars, instructions and Manuals pertaining to the public 

lands surveys. Until 1910, the surveys were executed by 

Deputy Surveyors under contract with the Surveyors General. The Surveyors General were under the overall supervision of the Secretary of the Treasury and, after 1812, the 

Commissioner of the General Land Office. 

Every effort has been made to retain the authenticity of the 

copies with regard to spelling, punctuation and phraseology. 

In the interest of space the documents are reduced to a 

printed form, requiring a change in the length of lines, but 

still retaining the paragraphing and other details as much as 

practicable. In the General Instructions to the Deputy Surveyors and in the Manuals of Surveying Instructions the 

page numbers are indicated, though there may (now) be 

several pages of the original printed on one page of this 

volume. The format of the sample field notes has been retained as much as possible. Due to the large volume of sample 

field notes, many pages of them have been deleted here but 

enough retained to show the general format and terminology. 

The text indicates the pages which have been deleted. Most of 

the mathematical tables have also been deleted because they 

had no direct bearing on the policies or procedures used in the 

original surveys. 

A brief introductory statement precedes each document, 

indicating the source from which the copy was made. 

229 
I. -1- 

(The following letter and “plan of instructions for the District 

Surveyors” was sent to Gallatin by Jared Mansfield, Surveyor 

General. Both are copied from a microfilm of the original, 

Microcopy No. 4 78, National Archives.) 

Marietta, August 20th, 1804 

Sir: 

I had the honour of receiving your letters of the 17th & 26th 

Ultimo by the last mail. In conformity to your request I 

enclose a plan of instructions for the District Surveyors, 

together with the number of miles, in each case, which I 

apprehend should be allowed them, according to the law, in 

estimating their fees. As to what they would have a right to 

demand on the principles of justice independent of the law, I 

am not settled in my opinion. It strikes me however, that the 

estimate does not deviate much from what is right in itself. In 

the division into quarters of a section surveyed under the law 

of 1800, there is indeed a large proportion of the traversing 

not allowed; but for this, the Surveyor will ultimately be 

compensated by the allowance of fees for each quarter, after 

the division for the first, which will require no resurveying. 

As Chain carrying & marking are comprehended in the very 

business of surveying, I cannot conceive that the expense of 

them should be defrayed by anyone other than the District 

Surveyor himself, especially as the law allows precisely the 

same sum per mile, as to any other Deputy Surveyor, who is 

always obliged to furnish everything incident to the business 

at his own expense. 

I am making preparations to descend the river by the 15th 

of the next month. I think it necessary for me to be at Vincennes as early as possible, in order to fix my plans for the 

survey of the tract about that place, & particularly to endeavor to draw a number of meridian lines, with a view of 

rendering the surveys correct. It will be a public loss, & a 

subject of much regret to me if any accident should have 

injured or destroyed the instruments, or even if they should 

not arrive here this fall. In going down the river I may make 

some useful Astronomical Observations for settling the Latitudes & Longitudes of places, & I would derive no small 

advantage even in common Surveying from the use of some 

instruments I expect. 

I have the honour to be Sir 

Your Obdt. Humble Serv. 

Jared Mansfield 

Hon. Albert Gallatin 

Secretary of the Treasury 

A plan of Instructions for the District Surveyors 

The law of the last session of Congress, authorizing the sale 

of the public lands in quarter sections, & appointing District 

Surveyors, requires that the division of sections into halves & 

quarters should be made by lines running due East & West, & 

North & South; this however must be considered as merely 

descriptive of lines parallel to the boundaries of the tracts 

which have been surveyed; which boundaries, theoretically 

& by law are contemplated as running due North & South, & 

East & West. In practice these are found to deviate very 

considerably from what was intended, & the dividing lines 

drawn according to the strict interpretation of the law, will 

not only in such cases divide a tract very unequally, but cause 

it to differ materially in the contents of the subdivisions from 

the returns of the Surveyor General. 

I conceive, therefore, that in all cases of the subdivision of 

any tract, the marks heretofore made by Surveyors for the 

corners of sections, or half sections are to be considered as 

invariable, & when found on the opposite sides of any tract, 

the division must be effected by running true line from one to 

the other, & in case of a further subdivision where there have 

been no marks for corners set by the Surveyors, the lines on 

each boundary must be measured, & posts established at the 

center, at an average distance from the corners, & the dividing lines run as before. 

-2- 

On these principles, with a view of providing uniformity & 

correctness in the surveys, I conceive it may be necessary to 

exhibit in detail the manner of proceeding in particular 

cases. 

Case 1st 

When a tract of 2 miles square surveyed under the law of 

1796, is to be divided into sections. 

Suppose A, C, E, G (No. 1 in the plan) to be the tract, & B, D, 

F, H, the posts set for the corners of the sections. Begin at one 

of those posts suppose F, & run a random line for its opposite 

post B; at the distance of every 5 chains from F, as you proceed 

on the random line, place a stake, until you have intersected 

the boundary line at b; measure the departure or distance of 

this point from B. Return on the line b,F, & from the marks on 

it, take offsets on that side where the point B lies, from every 

stake which you had set, in such proportion to the departure 

Bb, as your distance from F is to the whole distance bF, these 

will determine the points e, f, g &c in the true line from B to F. 

Blaze the true line from B to e, from e to f, from f to g, &c until 

you shall have arrived to F, & you will have completed the 

true divisionary line BF. 

Proceed in the same manner, by running a random line Hd, 

in order to find the true line from H to D; at the intersection of 

the true lines at c, establish the center post for the corners of 

the Sections. 

In this case the lines actually run & marked for a section 

are 

231 
-3- 

FB = 2 

AD = 2 - 4. price at $3 - $12 

-5- 

Case 2 

When a half or quarter section is to be surveyed from the 

above tract of 2 miles square. 

Proceed as before to run the divisionary FB, HD; but in 

going on the 1st random line from F to b, (No. 2 in the plan) 

set up a temporary post, at the estimated distance of the 

center of the line Fb, at 0, & in advancing on the 2d random 

line from H to d, note the distance of the point of intersection 

at n from H & from d; this will enable you to set off the 

quarter section corners, from the center c without a remeasurement of the interior sides of the sections; for adding 

mO to Ob, and subtracting it from FO, you will have mb & 

Fm, or cB & Fc; half these lengths laid from c to p, & from c to 

q respectively, will give the corners of the quarter sections on 

the line FB, & by laying half Hn from c to v, & half nd from c 

to s, you will have the corners v & s of quarter sections on the 

line HD. Or temporary posts may be placed for the corners of 

the quarter sections, after the random lines have been measured, & the distance from the temporary center post to the 

boundary lines of the tract has been determined. Afterwards 

the posts are to be permanently fixed, when the deviation of 

the central temporary post from the true dividing line shall 

have been ascertained. 

-4- 

The marks for the corners of the quarter sections, on the 

divisionary lines being made, you will next proceed to establish the corners on the exterior lines of the Section which is to 

be divided. 

Suppose Section 7 (No. 2 in the plan) is to be divided; 

measure the distance from E to F, & establish the post v at 

half that distance; measure the distance from E to D, & 

establish the post w in like manner. By running random lines 

from v to x, & from q to y, & by taking offsets at the distance of 

every 5 chains, in the manner prescribed for the division of a 

tract of 2 miles square, you will ascertain & mark the true 

divisionary lines vs & qw; at the intersection of these at z the 

central post for the corners of the quarters of the Section must 

be established. 

In case of a division for an half section, which by law can 

only be made by lines running due North & South, you need 

only find the center of the line FE, viz. at v, & run & mark as 

before the true divisionary line vs, which will divide the 

section into its East & West halves. 

In this case, the lines actually run & marked for the 1st half 

section are miles 

HD = 2 

FB = 2 

vs 

For another half section, (as in Sect. 14 of the plan), the 

lines for the division having been previously run & marked 

except vg, on the principle of the law which allows payment 

for those lines only which have been run & marked, we can 

only reckon vg 

= 1 = 5 miles, price $15 

= 1 mile & the price $3. 

1st Quarter Section 

HD = 2 

FB = 2 

vs = 1 

qw 

For any subsequent quarter Section (as in Sec. 14 in the 

plan) 

hp 

= 1 =6 - Due $18 

vg = 1 

= 1 = 2 miles Due $6 

Case 3 

When a division is to be made of a section surveyed according to the Law of 1800, either into halves or quarters. 

1st When the dividing line for the half section is to be 

determined, begin at one of the half mile posts already set, as 

at E (No. 3) & by means of a random line & offsets, running & 

blazing the true dividing line FB. The distance actually run 

& marked for the 1st Section is that of the line EB = 1 mile - 

price - $3 

The quarter sections in this case, must be determined by 

first measuring the North & South lines AF, CD, & establishing posts at the bisecting points f & d, & then by means of 

random lines & offsets, running & blazing the true dividing 

line fd. 

The distance actually run & marked, for the 1st quarter, or 

that which may be made prior to any other division will be 

EB = 1 

fd 

For each 2d quarter or one made after the 1st division into 

halves 

fd 

= 1 = 2 miles price $6 

= 1 mile - price $3 

232 
A 

H 

G 

C 

F 

b 

- 155 

- 150 

- 'I45 

- 25 

- 20 

- 15 

- 10 - 5 

No. 1 

C 

D 

d 

E 
Sec. 8 

Sec. 13 

No. 2 

% 

J 

0 

d 

W 

Y 

E 
A 

f 

F 

4 

C 

L 

No. 3 

C 

d 

D 
11. 

(The handwritten copy of these instructions was found in 

Records of the Michigan Department of Conservation, Lands 

Division. They are believed to be a blank copy of instructions, 

prepared by Jared Mansfield, to be completed and issued to a 

Deputy Surveyor along with his contract.) 

General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors 

1st. The Instrument called Ritenhouse Compass with a 

Nonius & a common 2 pole chain of 50 links, are to be used in 

running & measuring your lines. You will be careful that the 

needle traverses well in your compass, &, that your chain be 

compared & adjusted by the standard chain in the Office of 

the Surveyor General. It will be of importance that your 

Instruments, be also occasionally examined when in the 

Field; & corrected or allowances be made for the variations & 

errors if any should be found in them. 

2nd. Whenever you may be prevented by insuperable 

Obstacles such as Swamps, Ponds, Rivers, Creeks &c from 

measuring by the chain on the true course of your line; the 

distance must be ascertained by Trigonometry or by a 

traverse very accurately run & measured, until1 you fall in 

with the true line. 

3rd. The Courses of all navigable rivers, which may bound 

or pass through your district must be accurately surveyed & 

their width in several places must be determined, & all those 

points where they may pass through the sectional or 

township lines which you will run. You will likewise not fail 

to make especial notice of all streams of water which fall into 

the rivers with their width & course from whence they appear 

to come. 

4th. All Township & sectional lines which you may survey, 

are to be marked in the manner hitherto practised in surveys 

of the United States lands - vis. All those trees which your 

line cuts, must have two notches made, on each side of the 

tree where the line cuts: 

[ Page 2 1 

but no spot or blaze is to be made in them; & all or most of the 

trees on each side & near the line must be marked with two 

spots or blazes, diagonally, or quartering towards the line. 

5th. Posts must be erected at the distance of every mile & 

half mile from where the Town or sectional line commenced, 

(except a tree may be so situated as to supply the place of a 

post) which post must be at least 3 inches diamater & rise not 

less than three feet. All mile posts must have as many notches cut on two sides of them as they are miles distant from 

where the line commenced; but the Town Corner posts or 

trees shall be notched with six notches on each side, & half 

mile sectional posts. [Ed. Note: The Tiffin instructions, which 

are much the same in this part, say ", . . the half mile sectional posts are to be without any marks;" indicating a possible 

omission in this copy of the instructions.] 

The places of the posts are to be perpetuated in the following manner viz. at each post the courses shall be taken & 

distances measured to two or more adjacent trees in opposite 

directions as nearly as may be, which trees called bearing 

trees, shall be blazed on the side next the post & one notch 

made with the axe in the blaze, & there shall be cut with a 

marking Iron, on a bearing tree or some other tree near each 

corner of a section, the number of the section & over it the 

letter T with the number of the town & above this the letter R 

with the number of the range; but for the half section corners 

you are to put no numbers on the trees; they are to be distin- guished by this mark '/4 

S 

6th. You will be careful to note in your field books all the 

courses & distances, you shall survey, the names & estimated 

diamaters of all Corner & bearing trees & those trees which 

fall in your line, called station or line trees, notched as 

aforesaid, together with the courses & distances 

[ Page 3 1 

of the bearing trees from their respective corners, with the 

letters & numbers marked on them as aforesaid, all rivers, 

creeks, springs & smaller streams of water, with their width, 

& the course they run in crossing the lines of survey, & 

whether navigable, rapid or otherwise also the face of the 

country, whether level, hilly or mountainous, the kinds of 

timber & undergrowth, with which the land may be covered, 

all swamps, ponds, stone quarries, coal beds, peat or turf 

grounds, the quality of the land, uncommon natural or artificial mounds, precipices or rocks all rapids, cascades, or falls of 

water, minerals, ores & fossils & all other natural or artificial 

permanent things over which your lines shall pass. The quality of the soil, & the true situation of all mines, salt licks, salt 

springs & mill seats which may come to your knowledge, are 

particularly to be regarded & noticed in your field notes. 

7th. In all measurements, the level or horizontal length is 

to be taken not that which arises from measuring over the 

surface of the ground, when it should happen to be uneven & 

hilly, for this purpose the chainman, in ascending or descending hills must alternately let down one end of the chain to the 

ground & raise the other to a level as nearly as may be, from 

the end of which a plumb should be let fall to ascertain the 

spot for setting the tally rod or stick & where the land is very 

steep, it will be necessary to shorten the chain by doubling 

the links together, so as to obtain the true horizontal measure. 

8th. Though the lines be measured by a chain of two perches you are notwithstanding to keep your reckoning in 

chains of four perches of one hundred links each & all entries 

in your field books & all your plans & calculations must be 

made according to the decimal measure of a chain. 

Your courses & distances must be placed in the margin of 

your field books on the left, for which purpose, it should be 

large & your remarks noted on the right in the manner 

following. 

237 
North 

40.C.s 

Chs Lks 

80.00 

West 

15.70 

40.00 

55.00 

80.00 

Between Sections 35 & 36, Town. 4, Range 5. 

Sethalf mile post, fromwhich ablack Oak 20 Inches 

diamater bears S 5"E 50links & a sugartree 15Inches 

diamaterbears N 5" W30 links 

Setpost corner ofsectionsNo. 25,26,35 & 36,Town. 

4,R 5.from which awhite Oak 10Inches diamtr.bears 

S 78°30' E 20 links and a hickory 15Inches diamater 

bears N 50°W30links distant. 

Between SectionsNo 25 & 36, Town. 4, Range 5 

Over level upland to a brook 50 links wide course 

s 20" w timber, Oak, Hickory, Ash &c 

Set half milepost from which a Black Jack 10 In. 

diam.'bears S 50" E 100 links & a white Oak 20 In. 

Diam.'bears N 25" W 10 links 

A white Oak 10 In. Diam.' 

Intersected North & South line at the post corner of 

sections No 25,35 & 36, Town 4, Range 5. This mile 

generally broken land, some bottom on the creek, 

timber, Oak, Ash, Hickory &c. 

In this manner you are to enter all courses & distances, 

with the remarks which your contract & instructions require 

you to make of all the surveys in which you shall be engaged, 

the date to follow the close of each days work; which Field 

Book written with a fair hand of each township seperately, or 

true & fair copy with the original, you are to return to the 

Surveyor General's Office, together with the plats & descriptions of your surveys. 

[ Page 5 1 

9th. Plats of each Township and fractional parts of a 

township are to be neatly & accurately protracted, on durable 

paper, by a scale of two inches to a mile, or forty chains to an 

inch & must be just & true in every part, the scale must be 

laid down at the foot, or on the margin of all plats, & a 

compass or at least the cardinal points, shewing the true & 

magnetic meridian & their variation, On the exterior lines of 

your plats the course & length of each is to be noted, when it 

varies from a true North & South or East & West line, with 

the names of the proprietors, Range, Township or Section 

bounding thereon. 

The number of the Township, Range & District of Country, 

in which it lies must also be inscribed on the foot or margin of 

the plat. 

The field books & plats of all surveys must be returned into 

the Office of the Surveyor General, within the time specified 

by the instruction & contract, which authorize any particular 

survey. And there shall be inscribed on the plat of each 

township & signed by you, a certificate of the following form 

bearing date the day when the survey was finished viz. 

Pursuant to a Contract with & instructions from 

Surveyor General of the United States, 

I 

have admeasured, laid out & surveyed the above described 

township, or fractional part & do hereby certify, that it had 

such marks & bounds, both natural and artificial as are 

represented on said plat & described in the field notes made 

thereof & returned with the plat into the Surveyor General's 

Office. 

bearing date the day of 

Certified this day of 18 

238 
111. 

(These Instructions to Deputy Surveyors were written by Thomas Freeman, Surveyor of the Land South of the State of 

Tennessee. This copy was sent to Gideon Fitz, a Deputy Surveyor. The location of the original is presently unknown.) 

Surveyors Office Washington M. T. 

June 1811 

Instructions to Deputy Surveyors for surveying the public 

lands adjoining navigable streams, Lakes, Bayous, etc. in the 

Orleans Territory under 2d Sect. of the Act of the 3d of March, 

1811. 

The Surveyor should first take an accurate survey of the 

margin of the water course so far as surveys of tracts are to be 

extended thereon. Then lay down his survey on the large 

scale; and draw thereon right lines in the direction of the 

general course of the water course, and on these lines lay off 

the lengths of fronts of tracts 58 Rods or 14.50 (Ch. Lks.) 

chains and through these points draw right lines at right 

angles to the line first drawn which shall extend back from 

the margin of the water course 465 Rods or 116.25 (Ch. Lks.) 

chains and close his tract by drawing a back line at right 

angles to his side lines, or parallel to his first line, when the 

water course happens to be straight or nearly so, the back line 

of one tract may be extended so as to become the back line to 

several adjoining tracts. 

The side lines of the same tract, will frequently be of different lengths, and insect the dimensions & contents of these 

tracts will frequently differ from each other, but that cannot 

be avoided. The law in this case can very rarely be accurately 

complied with in consequence of the very great irregularities 

of the water courses. Any unavailable and unimportant deviations from the Law, should be in favor of the neatness and 

convienence of the survey. On large curves or bends of the 

water course the side lines of tracts should be drawn converging, or diverging, as the case may require. Converging on the 

concave side to prevent the tracts from interfering with each 

other and diverging, on the convex side to avoid the incononvenience of small angular vacancies which would remain 

between the tracts if the side lines were drawn parallel to 

each other; In these instances the back lines may be drawn at 

right angles to one of the side lines and at 465 Rods from the 

margin of the water course, or front, which will necessarily 

make all the tracts having diverging side lines something 

larger than required. The tracts having converging sides 

would contain less, but the fronts of these should be extended 

so that the lines may include the quantity required or nearly 

so. It appears to be the object of Government to attach the 

fronts on the water courses all the lands from thence within 

the distance prescribed 465 Rods. 

In short we may suppose any lake, bayou, water course, etc. 

to be circumscribed by lines drawn at 465 rods from the 

general course of its margin, and that the space included 

between these lines and the water course is to be divided into 

tracts of 58 Rods front and 465 Rods in depth. It should be the 

first object of the artist whose duty it becomes to designate 

those tracts to take an accurate survey of the water course, to 

lay that survey down on a large scale, and to divide the space 

as above into tracts as nearly conformable to the law as 

possible; To draw his lines on his Map both side and back 

lines noting their respective courses and distances; Thus 

prepared the surveyor can with great ease and accuracy 

transfer these lines of tracts from his plan to the ground and 

complete his survey agreeably to the intention of the Law and 

wish of the Government. 

The first and principal object of the surveyor should to have 

his lines accurately run, distinctly marked, and the contents 

of his survey correctly ascertained. It is much more desirable 

both to the Government, and purchaser, that the lines of a 

tract of land should be plainly designated and its contents 

correctly determined, than that its dimensions should be 

precisely a given number of chains and links. Should one 

tract occupy a larger or better front on a water course than 

another, it will be more valuable, and consequently sell for 

more than the other. 

The surveys contemplated by the 5th section of the Act 

above mentioned will be so very few in number if any for 2 

years to come, that it appears almost unnecessary to say 

anything on that subject at this time, should application be 

made by any of the owners of front tracts, to have a back tract 

surveyed adjoining him, and only on application of proprietors of front tracts are these surveys to be made. The law is 

very plain on that subject. The front tract should not exceed 

40 arpents in depth to Entitle its owner to an adjoining back 

tract: The back tract is not to Exceed 40 arpents in depth, nor 

to contain a quantity greater than the front tract, neither 

shall the back tract in any instance extend so far in depth as 

to include lands fit for cultivation on another water course, 

etc. 

The only difficulty that can arise in marking these surveys 

is when, by reasons of bends in the River, lake, etc. bordering 

on and in rear of front and adjoining tracts; each claimant 

cannot obtain a tract equal in quantity to his front front tract; 

in that case the vacant land, in the rear is to be divided 

between the claimants in the direct ratio of the quantity 

contained in their respective front tracts. 

Should the parties not consent to abide by the decision you 

may deem proper the make, you will send me a correct statement of the case, and I will make a division of these lands 

which shall be carried into Effect. 

REMARKS 

The Law does not point out any mode of marking or 

numbering the tracts to be surveyed under the 2d Sect. of 

the Act, so that they may be distinctly known from each 

other, this appears to be a defect which if not remedied 

will be productive of great trouble and inconvenience 

both to the Register & purchaser. 

The following manner of marking those tracts is recommended. Let the tracts be numerically numbered from some 

well known point or land mark, such as a Bluff, the junction 

of some Bayou or water course, or the intersection of some of 

the meridians or parallels already run. Thus lot N. 1.2.3. etc. 

as it may be above or below the land mark (naming it) and on 

239 
the right or left of the water course as it may be situated. The 

surveyor should set a strong squared picket in the side of each 

track near the margin of the water course noting its distance 

therefrom. These pickets should be set firmly in the ground 

and numbered on each side with a marking Iron the number 

of the adjacet tract; the course and distance from this picket 

should be taken to a tree if convenient on each tract, which 

tree is to be numbered with No. of the tract on which it stands; 

a picket should in like manner be set in the ground at the 

termination of the side lines and the bearing and distance 

taken to two trees which shall be marked and NO.^ as above. 

The whole is to be carefully noted in his field Book. 

When the Surveyor shall find it impracticable from the 

interposition of lakes or impenetrable swamps etc. to extend 

his side lines their full extent required and to complete his 

tract by running the back lines he should set a picket at the 

termination of his side line which picket is to be marked with 

the No. of the adjoining lots and courses and distances taken 

from it to two trees which shall also be marked and numbered 

as in the first instance. 

Should the depth required (465 Rods) extend so near 

another water course as to interfer with, or include lands fit 

for cultivation on it. Fronts of tract should be laid off on both 

water courses, and the lands between these water courses 

should be equally divided between the fronts on each. Provided the distance between the fronts or water courses be two 

miles or nearly so. 

These surveys will frequently lie between private claims or 

tracts already surveyed, in that case the front or tracts may 

benumbered from one of those former surveys to the other; 

and should a fraction remain it should be annexed to the 

adjoining tract without running the side line between them. 

I must here repeate a request I made when I first wrote to 

you on this subject. To report to the office as early as possible 

the number of tracts that can and ought to be surveyed either 

under the 2d Section of the Act above mentioned or in the 

usual way into Townships and Sections and what No. of the 

latter description are already prepared for sale. Taking it as a 

positive order that no new surveys of either description shall 

be made this year but such as are immediately saleable, or 

will be certain to be sold in a reasonable time. 

The enclosed diagram exhibits the mode recommended for 

laying off tracts on water courses etc. under the 2d Sect. of the 

Act above mentioned. The Red lines represent the general 

course of the River etc. on which the fronts of the tracts are 

laid down. The courses and distances of the side and back 

lines can very readily be ascertined on the Map; and from 

thence with care and accuracy be transferred to the ground. 

Any difficulty that may arise to you in the execution of this 

or any other part of your duty as connected with this office 

you will from time to time communicate to me and I shall 

with pleasure give you my advice and assistance thereon. 

I am respectfully 

Your Obt. Servant 

Thos. Freeman 

Gideon Fritz, Esq. 

PD Surveyors 

240 
IV. V. 

(This Letter from Josiah Meigs to Thomas Freeman is taken 

from Microcopy No. 27, National Archives.) 

(This letter from Thomas Freeman to Josiah Meigs is taken 

from the publication General Public Acts of Congress with 

Instructions, Vol. II, 1838.) 

Treasury Department 

General Land Office 13th 

Mar. 1815 

Sir, 

I have acknowleged the receipt of your letter of the 13th 

Ult.” with the township plats, connecting plat, & list of british claims reported, mentioned in said letter. Commissioners 

have been appointed to mark the boundaries of the lands 

lately acquired from the Creeks, & the law directs them to 

furnish you with a copy of the survey; enclosed you have a 

copy of the said law, entitled “An act to provide for the 

ascertaining & surveying of the boundary lines fixed by the 

treaty with the Creek indians & for other purposes. 

You observe that “the descriptions of the townships which 

you transmitted, do not accompany them because the deputy 

surveyors seldom or never noted the description of the soil or 

timber, nor have they taken references to, or lettered trees at 

the corners of the townships or sections.” 

I am astonished by this information, were not the deputies 

bound by contract, & by their official oaths to note the soil & 

timber, etc. & to mark the corners? If so, why were they paid 

before they had completed the contract? How will purchasers 

find their land? How will explorers know the township & 

ranges they traverse? 

I am very respectfully 

Your ob’t servant 

Josiah Meigs 

Commissioner 

Tho*. Freeman, Esq‘. 

Surveyor General 

Washington M.Ty. 

THOMAS FREEMAN TO JOSIAH MEIGS 

[GLO:Div. E, Miss. SG, vol. 53,1810-1816:ALSl 

Surveyor’s Office Washington, M, TY, April 2gth 1815 

SIR I have to acknowledge the red of your letter of the 13‘h 

Ult” enclosing a copy of the law providing for the designation 

of the boundary lines fixed by the Treaty with the Creek 

Nation of Indians -and acknowledging the rec‘ of my General & connected map of the Natchez settlement, and of the 

Township maps accompanying it.- 

Your “Astonishment by the information that the deputy 

Surveyors did not mark & letter Trees at the corners of 

Townships & Sections within the limits of that Map”, was 

reasonable &just, but, you will perceive, that the deputies 

were not so much to blame, when you are informed, that they 

were not instructed to take reference to, nor letter trees, at 

those corners-This omission however has only extended to 

the Survey of the Tract of country embraced by the Map 

above mentioned-& Washington County on the Tombigby 

river & adjoining the Line of demarkation containg about 30. 

Township-These surveys were made under the superintendance of M Briggs, who was the first surveyor of U. States 

lands South of Tennessee, The surveyors were paid & disperced and the principal himself had left the country long 

previous to my arrival here, so that I had no other agency or 

control over that survey, than, a variety of resurveys & corrections of the inaccuracies & blunders commited by M 

Briggs’ deputiesIn all other surveys of public lands South of Tennessee, The 

Marking, Numbering & Lettering, of Refirence trees at the 

corners, or Angles, of Townships & Sections has been made 

part of the Surveyor’s duty and punctually complied with.-I 

find by Mr Briggs’ Instructions to his deputies that he was 

very attentive to the careful running, measuring & marking, 

Township & section Lines, but his mode of numbering & 

lettering corners was only on posts set in the ground at those 

corners-as will appear by the subjoined extract from his 

Instructions to his Deputies. 

You ask “How will purchasers find their lands?-how will 

explorers know the Townships & ranges they Traverse?”- 

The difficulty to purchasers & Explorers, from a want of the 

proper Numbers & letters on the Trees, at corners of 

Townships & Sections in the Survey of the above mentioned 

Map, is not so great as may at first appear-That portion of it, 

clear of Private Claims, was Offered for sale whilst the corner 

posts were standing; and its surface is now intersperced with 

settlements of Purchasers, and Intruders or Squatters, who 

know the numb Township & Range of their respective positions-som corner Posts are yet standing-and the relative 

position, of other points, not suffcienty designated in the 

24 1 
field, can readily be ascertained in This, or the Register’s 

office, by inspection of the Maps-. The vacant Sections & 

fractional sections lying between private claims and intersperced thro’ the settlement will generally be purchased by 

the proprietors of the adjoining Tracts or their friends, The 

position of these vacant sections with respect to the adjoining 

or neighbouring Tracts, will be distinctly known to the 

purcher or explorer-and their Number Range & Township 

can readily be ascertained on application to the Maps-We 

cheerfully give all the Information applied for or required on 

this subject, which is generally satisfactory to applicants-so 

that no difficulty has yet occured on this subject & I hope 

there will not hereafter. 

Extract from M Briggs Instructions to his deputies whilst 

Superintending the Survey of the public lands south of 

Tennessee- 

“The lines must by carefully measured and Well Marked A 

Tree standing exactly in the Line, should have a Blaze & four 

Notches for a Township Line-a Blaze and three Notches for 

a Section Line on each side of it in direction of the Line. All 

Trees within a short distance on each side of your Line should 

be simply Blazed on the side facing your line.-Plant a strong 

substantial post at every corner of a Township, and a smaller 

one at every mile. 

“The West side of each Township post, exhibits the Number 

of the Township-The East side, The number of Miles from 

the line of demarkation-The South side The Number of 

Miles from the Basis-Meridian-and the North sidewhether it be East or West of the said meridian- 

“The East side of of every post whether it be the corner of 

Township or Section, exhibits the Number of Miles on the 

Meridian; and the south side the Number of Miles on the 

parallel of Latitude.” 

From the above extract it appears that the numbering of 

sections in the field was not contemplated-which has arisen 

perhaps from the impossibility of correctly numbering the 

sections in a Township containing private claims, as the the 

survey progresses.-Each private claim whether large or 

small has a separate Number, so that a Township may contain any number of sections from 10, to 100, which cannot be 

ascertained until the survey of the Township is completed, 

and a map of it made. The surveyor will then be compel’d, to 

retravel over his lines, with his map, and transfer the proper 

Sectional No from it to the corner Trees, or posts, of sectionsThis is a severe duty which the surveyors complain of but it 

cannot be avoided. 

I fear I have extended this letter to a troublesome length on 

this subject not now very interesting - 

I am very respectfully Sir your Obd‘ Servt 

VI. 

(The following extract is taken from a letter from Edward 

Tiffin to Josiah Meigs, Microcopy No. 478, National Archives. 

The letter mentions Tiffin’s instructions to Rector which were 

included.) 

Surveyor General’s Office 

Chillicothe, July 26th, 1815 

Sir, 

I have this day received yours of the 18th inst. and am 

happy to find that you agree with me in the construction of 

the Act of the 28 of February 1806 for I had feared from the 

tenor of some of your former letters that you either had not 

adverted to it - or differed from me in its construction. As Mr. 

Rector and one of his deputies who have attended here to 

make some returns from the Kaskaskia District are both laid 

up with fever and will be here some time, I take the liberty of 

submitting to you copies of such instructions as I have prepared for his government in regard to the surveying to be 

done between the Rivers St. Francis and the Arkansas, so 

that if you should not approve of any part or should anything 

farther be necessary, you would have the goodness to point it 

out to me, as there will be time before he leaves his (if done 

promptly). 

I beg leave further to observe that I have contracted for the 

standard lines and the range and township lines all to be done 

both in Michigan and North of the Illinois River and am now 

writing to those I had engaged to come on here and enter into 

contracts and receive instructions for subdividing the 

townships, for I presume the difficulties arising from the 

hostile disposition of the Indians will be removed by the 

Treaty to be held with them. . . 

With great respect, I am 

Your Obt. Servant 

Edward Tiffin 

Hon. J. Meigs Esq. 

Commissioner of the 

Genl. Land Office 

Washington 

THOS FREEMAN 

JOSIAH MEIGS Esq’ commisr Gen’ Land office 

242 
VII. 

(These instructions to Rector were included with the preceding 

letter. Microcopy No. 478, National Archives.) 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR GENERAL RECTOR, PRINCIPAL DEPUTY SURVEYOR FOR THE TERRITORY OF 

MISSOURI 

1st. 

1st. 

2nd. 

3rd. 

4th. 

5th. 

6th. 

You are required to have surveyed two million acres 

of land between the Rivers St. Francis and Arkansas, 

which have been appropriated by an Act of Congress 

for Military Bounties - (to which I refer you) - the 

annexed plan, on which these rivers are laid down, 

with the lands lying between them in Ranges and 

Townships, will show you the mode in which it is 

intended to have these surveys executed. 

Let a standard line be accurately run from the confluence of the Arkansas with the Mississippi due North 

according to the true meridian so far that a base line 

run due west from the mouth of the River St. Francis 

to the Mississippi will intersect it as laid down on the 

plan. 

Lay off the lands South of this base or East & West 

line into Ranges and Townships of six miles square 

by running the North and South lines according to 

the true meridian and the East & West lines at right 

angles as near as may be, down to the Rivers Mississippi and Arkansas, and number them both Ranges 

& Townships as exhibited on the plan. 

Let these townships be subdivided as has been heretofore practiced into Sections, establishing corners 

for quarter sections, and marking the lines, and 

Ranges, Townships, sections and quarter sections 

corners in the usual mode. 

Furnish every Surveyor you employ with one of the 

deputations enclosed, and see that both himself, his 

chain and axemen are duly sworn before they proceed 

to work and return a copy of such oaths to this office. 

Furnish every Surveyor with a plan of the whole 

Military district and a copy of the Instructions enclosed, that each man may be able to comprehend the 

plan how the surveys are to be executed and how to 

attend to his compass and chain, to mark his corners 

accurately, and make his returns in a proper manner. 

When work is done and returned to your office you 

are to examine and see that it is done agreeable to 

Law and the instructions given, and return it certified to the Office of the Surveyor General to wita 

copy of the field notes of every township or fractional 

243 

7th. 

8th. 

9th. 

township, and two setts of plats and descriptions laid 

down on paper of a uniform size with an inch space in 

the margin, so that all the plats when finished may 

by bound in a book. 

You are furnished with a copy of a form of contract, so 

that you may enter into contracts with the Deputies, 

observing always to have duplicates so signed, one of 

which is to be returned to this office when entered 

into. 

All the surveys contracted for to be done in the Michigan and Illinois Territories have been at 250 Cents 

per mile, it is therefore expected you will be able to 

get the Military Lands done in Missouri at the same 

rate, but if as you suggested this should be impracticable, you are authorized to give 300 per mile, but 

only in case of necessity-being satisfied you will 

guard the interests of the United States from imposition, inasmuch as by doing so, you are advancing 

your own interests. 

When any Deputy Surveyor has finished his contract, made his returns to your Office and it is certified and returned to this Office, the accounts will be 

paid off in such manner as may be most convenient to 

the claimant and the regulations of the Treasury 

Department. 

signed E.T. 

G.R. 

Principal Deputy 
VIII. 

(Tiffin’s Instructions, 1815 are available from many sources. Copies may be found in the National Archives.) 

INSTRUCTIONS for 

Deputy Surveyors 

by E. Tiffin 

Surveyor General 

United States 

245 
Instructions for Subdividing Townships. -2- 

1st When the township lines are completed, you must 

begin the survey of sections at the South east corner 

of the township, and move on in comtinued progression from east to west and from south to north in 

order that the excess or defect of the township as to 

complete sections may fall on the west and north 

sides of the township, according to the provisions of 

the Act of the 10th of May, 1800. 

2nd Each side of a section must be made one mile in 

measure by the chain and quarter section corners are 

to be established at every half mile, except, when in 

the closing of a section if the measure of the closing 

side should vary from 80 chains or one mile, you are 

in that case to place the quarter section corners equi 

distant, or at an average distance from the corners of 

the section, but in running out the sectional lines on 

the west, or north side of the township you will establish your quarter section posts or corners at the distance of half a mile from the last corner and leave the 

remaining excess or defect on the west or north tier of 

quarter-sections; which balance or remainder you 

will carefully measure and put down in your field 

notes, in order to calculate the remaining or fractional quarter section on the north and west side of the 

township; also in running to the western or northern 

boundary, unless your sectional lines fall in with the 

posts established therefor the corners of sections in 

the adjacent townships you must set post and mark 

bearings at the points of intersection of your lines 

with the town boundaries, and take the distance of 

your corners from the corners of the sections of the 

adjacent townships, and note that and the side on 

which it varies in chains, or links or both. 

3rd The sections must be made to close, by running a 

random line from one corner to another except on the 

north and west ranges of sections, and the true line 

between them is to be established by means of offsets. 

4th In fractional townships on Rivers it will be necessary 

to vary from the foregoing rules; and the lines must 

be continued from the rectilinear boundaries of the 

township which may be parallel to the river, perpendicularly to those boundaries till they meet the river, 

the sections however must be made complete on the 

sides of the townships bounded by straight lines, and 

all excess or defect of measure must be thrown into 

the fractional sections on the river; the measure of 

the lines from the last entire sectional corner should 

be made very exact in order to calculate the fractional section with exactness. 

Illustration. 

Begin at N. the south east corner of the township, and 

run west 40 chains, and establish the quarter section 

corner at n of 

section 36, if it be not already established, continue 

40 chains further and establish the corner at 0, of 

sections 36 and 35; from 0 run a true north course 40 

chains and mark the quarter section corner between 

35 and 36, continue 

-3- 

40 chains farther on the north line and establish the 

corner 25, 26, 35 and 36. From this corner run a 

random line for the post or corner of M, without 

blazing; at the distance of every 20 chains on this line 

set up a stake or post or mark some other mark on the 

random line; if you strike the post or corner M exactly, you have only to blaze the lines back and establish 

the quarter section corner, which you will take care 

to establish at the average distance between the corner at M and the corner between 25,26 35 and 36; but 

if running for the post M you fall north or south of it, 

you must note the departure or deviation in your field 

book, and return on the true course observing to 

correct it by means of offsets from your marks made 

on the random line. 

From the corner of sections 25,26, 35 and 36, run 

due north one mile, setting the half mile post as 

before at 2 on the line, from 0 to F, return south to 0, 

and establish at 0 and P your quarter section and 

section corners; then run north from P and establish 

quarter section and section corners as before and run 

a random line from the section corner on the line P E 

to the corresponding corner on the line 0 F; proceed in 

this manner till you arrive to the last corner towards 

the western boundary of township from M to U, viz: 

between sections 29, 30, 31 and 32; from this corner 

run west and at the distance of 40 chains from it, 

established the quarter section corner at 6, in the line 

from M to U; continue west till you intersect the town 

boundary, suppose at U, note carefully the distance of 

the point of intersection from the last section or quarter section corner, and also the distance of this point 

from the section corner of the adjacent township west 

of you, or the distance of U from M and on which side 

it lies, viz: either north or south; at the point of 

intersection U set the section post or corner and take 

bearing trees. 

In this manner you will proceed until your 

township is completed, observing always to move 

either in a range of sections from that at the southeast corner of the township to the western boundary, 

or from that section to the northern boundary, but 

when you shall have completed the sections to the 

north boundary of the township you will proceed from 

the last section corners, establish quarter section 

corners at 40 chains from them, and continue north 

till you intersect the town boundary in the same 

manner as on the western side of the township, 

observing to note the distance at which you intersect 

246 
A 

Y 

Y 

- 

1 

X - 

W 

W 

- 

V 

V - 

U 

II 

t 

T 

S. 6 s. 5 

43.50 16 40 (5 

I I 

S. 8 5 s.7 

16 15 

I I 

S.17 , 

4 S. I8 

s-19 p s.20 

16 (5. 

4.20 I 40 I 

S.29 . 2 S.30 -- 

16 15 

,3.80 I 40 I 

-- S.32 - 

I S. 31 

N‘ - , 

- s. 3 6 6 

- s.4 

14 13 

I I 

s.10 5 5 

- s.9 

14 13 

I I 

S.15 . 4 4 - S.16 -- 

14 13 

I I 

- s.22 . 3 s.21 

14 13 

I I 

s.27 . 2 ’ S.28 -- 

14 13 

I I 

s.34 - 

I I 

- 

I 

s.33 -- 

- 

S S r QP 

6 

- s.2 s.1 

1 s.12 

5 

- S.II 

12 II 

I I 

S. 13 4 4 

- S.14 -- 

12 11 

I I 

3 

- S.23 S.24 

12 II 

I I 

S. 25 2 ’ S.26 -- 

12 II 

I I 

S.36 I ! s.35 -- 

v 

PO on 

G 

g 

H 

h 

I 

i 

K 

k 

L 

I 

M 

m 

N 

the north boundary from the section or quarter section corner you left last. Also you will be careful to 

note the distance of the point of intersection from the 

corner of the section of the adjacent township and 

whether it be on the East or West side of it; then the 

distance from 6 to F or from 6 to E on the line 0 F and 

P E, must be carefully noted in your field notes and 

also the distance from F where you intersect to 0 the 

post on the town above and on which side whether 

east or west. 

-4- 

5th Great care must be taken that the north and south 

lines be run according to the true meridian as required by law, and the east and west lines be run at 

right angles to them as far as is practicable in closing, 

but if on running on a true east and west line you find 

6th 

247 

the post you are running for lies very much to the 

north or south of the lines, you are then to mistrust 

the measure by the chain, and if possible, the line on 

which the posts are established must be remeasured; 

also in running a meridional line by the compass, if 

you find the measurement of the closing lines of the 

sections, that is an uniform convergency on diagonally of these lines; you may then reasonably mistrust 

the accuracy of the direction of your lines by the 

needle. In such case it will be well to endeavour to run 

parallel to the meridian adjacent on which section 

closes, in order that it may contain a just or legal 

quantity viz: 640 acres or one mile square. 

As the measurement by the chain is the principal 

source of errors in surveying, you will be careful to 

attend to your chainmen, that they carry the chain 

horizontally and to prevent their loosing a tally rod, 
7th 

8th 

9 th 

10th 

11th 

12th 

13th 

you must be provided with a set of them pointed with 

iron or steel, and to allow no other to be used but the 

precise number which you shall have selected for the 

purpose. 

In meandering Rivers you will take the bearings 

according to the true meridian of the River and note 

the distance on any course when the River intersects 

the sectional lines, and the calculations of the contents of the fractions are to be made by the tables of 

Difference of Latitude and Departure, and returned 

on your plats; but the quantity of contents of the 

whole section only are to be put down; in all the other 

sections, and each of them is to be accounted one mile 

square or 640 acres, unless your closing lines deviate 

very much from 80 chains, in which case you will be 

careful to put down their true length on your plats. 

You must frequently while in the field attend to 

the correction of your chain; for this purpose you 

should be provided with some measure taken from 

the Standard chain in the office of the Surveyor 

General. 

All random lines, as well as the true, are to be 

noted in your field book at the time of running them, 

and are to be kept in the order in which the work is 

executed, also you must be careful to note the variation of the random lines from the corners or posts 

which they were intended to strike. 

All courses of whatever lines, must be taken with 

the sight of your Compass set to the variation and 

estimated according to the true meridian for which 

purpose the variation of the needle at the place where 

you survey must be taken or previously known and 

your Compass regulated to it before you commence 

running the lines. 

General Instructions for 

Deputies. 

1st You will provide a good compass of Rittenhouses 

construction, having a nonius division and movable 

sights, and a two poles chain of 50 links; the chain 

must be adjusted by the Standard Chain in the Office 

of the Surveyor General, and it will be of importance 

that both it and the compass be frequently examined 

in the field in order to determine any errors and 

irregularities which may arise from the use of them. 

2nd Whenever you may be obstructed by insuperable 

obstacles, such as ponds, swamps, rivers, creeks, etc., 

you will take the necessary offsets, or work by a 

traverse or trigonometry, in order to ascertain the 

distance on any line which is not actually run. 

3rd The courses of all navigable rivers, which may 

bound or pass through your district must be accurately surveyed and their width taken at those points 

where they may be intersected by township or sectional lines; also the distance of those points from the 

sectional corners and from the commencement of any 

course where you are meandering the River, you will 

likewise not fail to make special notice of all streams 

of water which fall in your way with their width and 

course from whence they appear to come or run. 

4th All township or sectional lines which you may survey are to be marked in the manner hitherto practised in the surveys of the United States lands, viz: 

All those trees which your line cuts must have two 

notches made on each side of the tree where the line 

cuts; but no spot or blaze is to be made on them, and 

all or most of the trees on each side of the line, and 

near it, must be marked with two spots or blazes 

diagonally or quartering towards the line. 

-6- 

-5- 

No lines of whatever description are to be run, or 

marks of any kind made by any person but yourself, 

or who may be under the immediate inspection of 

yourself or some Deputy Surveyor duly authorized 

from this office. 

Any considerable departure from these instructions will be considered as a forfeiture of the conditions of the contract, or any claim for payment, and 

loose inaccurate or precipitate work will not be 

admitted, either as it respects surveys in field, or 

their returns on paper. 

You will take care that your posts be well driven 

into the ground and that there be one or two sight 

trees marked between every quarter section corner; 

also at the section corners that there be marks for 

every section corner where they corner. 

5th The posts must be erected at the distance of every 

mile, and half mile from where the town or sectional 

line commenced (except a tree may be so situated as 

to supply the place of a post) which post must be at 

least three inches diameter and rise not less than 

three feet. All mile posts must have as many notches 

cut on two sides of them as there are miles distant 

from where the town or sectional line commenced, 

but the town corner posts, or trees shall be notched 

with six notches on each side, and the half mile sectional posts are to be without any marks; the places of 

the posts are to be perpetuated in the following manner, viz: at each post, the courses shall be taken and 

the distances measured to two or more adjacent trees 

in opposite directions, as nearly as may be, which 

trees, called bearing trees, shall be blazed on the side 

next the post and one notch made with an axe on the 

blaze, and there shall be cut with a marking iron on a 

bearing tree, or some other tree within and near each 

248 
6th 

7th 

8th 

9th 

North 

Chains Links 

20 30 

corner of a section, the number of the section, and 

over it the letter T with the number of the township, 

and above this the letter R with the number of the 

range, but for quarter section corners, you are to put 

no numbers on the trees, they are t o be distinguished 

by this mark l/4 S. 

Between Sections35 and 36,Town 4,Range 6. 

A White Oak 20 inch diameter. 

You will be careful to note in your field book all the 

courses and distances you shall have run, the names 

and estimated diameters of all corner or bearing 

trees, and those trees which fall in your line called 

station or line trees notched as aforesaid, together 

with the courses and distances of the bearing trees 

from their respective corners, with the letters and 

numbers marked on them as aforesaid; also all rivers, creeks, springs and smaller streams of water, 

with their width, and the course they run in crossing 

the lines of survey, and whether navigable, rapid or 

mountainous; the kinds of timber and undergrowth 

with which the land may be covered, all swamps, 

ponds,stone quarries, coal beds, peat or turf grounds, 

uncommon,natural, or artificial productions,such as 

mounds, precipices, caves, etc., all rapids, cascadesor 

falls of water; minerals, ores, fossils, etc.; the quality 

of the soil and the true situation of all mines, salt 

licks,salt springs and mill seats, which may come to 

your knowledge are particularly to be regarded and 

noticed in your field books. 

In all measurementsthe level or horizontal length 

is to be taken, not that which arisesfrom measuring 

over the surface of the ground when it happensto be 

uneven and hilly; for this purpose the chainmen in 

ascending or descending hills must alternately let 

down one end of the chain to the ground and raise the 

other to a level as nearly as may be, from the end of 

which a plumb should be let fall to ascertain the spot 

where to set the tally rod or stick; and where the land 

is very steep, it will be necessary to shorten the chain 

by doubling the links together, so as to obtain the 

true horizontal measure. 

-7- 

Though the line be measured by a chain of two 

perches, you are notwithstanding to keep your reckoning in chains of four perches of one hundred links 

each, and all entries in your field books, and all your 

plans and calculationsmust be made accordingt o the 

decimal measure of a chain. 

Your courses and distances must be placed in the 

margin of your field books on the left, for which 

purpose itshouldbe large, and yourremarksmade on 

the right in the manner following: 

10th 

11th 

37 10 

40 - 

80 00 

East 

Zhains Links 

16 40 

40 00 

64 30 

79 90 

West 

Chains Links 

39 95 

55 00 

79 90 

A stream30 linkswide SE 

Set half mile post,from which a B. Oak 18inch 

diameter bears S.50°E. 40 links,and a sugar 

tree 16inch diameter hears N. 10°W. 34links. 

Set post corner ofsection No. 25,26,35 and 36, 

township 4 range 6fromwhich a White Oak 10 

inch in diameter bears S. 78°30'E. distant 20 

links, and a Hickory 15inch diameter bears N. 

50°W. 37 links distant. 

Between No. 25 and 36 Town 4, Range 6, on a 

random. 

A brook 30 linkswide, course S.20°W. 

Set tempy quarter section post. This half mile 

overbroken land. Timber Oak, Ash, etc. 

A stream 25 links wide, course SE. 

Intersected N. & S. line 20 links south of section corner. Over hilly land, soil rich and good 

for farming. Timber, Oak, Hickory, Poplar, 

Ash, etc. 

Between Sections 25 and 36, Town 4, Range 6 

on true line. 

Moved temporary post to the average distance 

for ?4 section corner, from which a Black Jack 

10inch diameter bears S.50°E. 100links, and 

a White Oak 19inch in diam.bears N. 25°W. 

40 links. 

A White Oak 11 inch in diameter. 

Section Corner. 

-8- 

In this manner you must enter all courses and distances in your field book, the date must follow the 

close of each days work, which field book, written 

with a fair hand, of each township separately, or a 

true and fair copy, together with the original you will 

return to the Office of the Surveyor General. 

The plat of each township and fractional part of a 

township must be neatly and accurately protracted 

on durable paper, by a scale of 2 inches to a mile, or 

forty chains to an inch, and must be in such measure 

and proportions in every line and part as actually 

was determined by measurement in the field, a compass having the true and magnetic meridian, and the 

scale by which the lines are laid down, are to be 

placed on the SE. corner of the plat. 

The following certificate must be inscribed on your 

plat and signed by you. 

Pursuant to a contract with, and instructions from 

Surveyor General of the United States, bearing date 

the day of I have admeasured laid out 

249 
and surveyed the above described township (or fractional part) and do hereby certify that it had such 

marks and bounds, both natural and artificial as are 

represented on said plat and described in the field 

notes made thereof, and returned with the plat in the 

Surveyor General's Office. 

Certified this day of 

42.00 0 0 0 0 0 

2 2 2 

6 *6 *6 *6 *6 

2 9 

(u 

d 

Sec. 6 Sec. 5 Sec. 4 Sec. 3 Sec. 2 Sec I 

6 79.00 80.00 80. 00 80.00 80. 00 

Method by which to calculate the Northern and Western tier 

of fractional quarter sections. 

9 

length of the line G,g 40 chains and divide it by two which 

will give you the length of the line from the centre of the 

section to f on the Town boundary, which being added to the 

length of the line G,g and divided by two will give you the 

length of one of the lines required for calculating the N.E. 

quarter of Section No. 1; then the length ofthe line from G to f 

being 40 chains, and the south boundary of the sec. being 80 

chains the length of the line from H to 1 is 40 chains-the 

length of the line from G to f-therefore there is no necessity 

for additions or divisions as the line from 1 to f is parallel to 

1 

Y 

Y 

1.8c 

X 

X 

.96 

W 

W 

2.00 

V 

V 

1.50 

U 

U 

t 

T 

1.56 

You will commence, say at the North-east corner of the 

Township, the length of the line from G to g being 40 chains 

as established in running the exterior boundary of the 

Township, you will proceed by adding the length of the line 

from 6 to F on the line from 0 to F which is 42 chains to the 

the line G,H, then by multiplying those two sides together, 

and cutting off as many decimals as there are in the sums 

multiplyed, and dividing by 10 you have the contents of the 

N.E. quarter of section 1, in acres and decimal parts of an 

acre. You will then proceed to calculate the N.W. quarter of 

the same section, by taking the length of the line from the 

centre of the section to f, as found in your former calculation 

to which add 42 chains, the length of the line from 6 to F and 

divide by two which gives you the length of one of the lines 

required. Then as the line from 0 to F intersected the town 

boundary 3 chains East of the section corner, the length of 

-2- 

the line from F to f is only 37 chains which added to 40 chains 

(the length of the South line of the southwest quarter of 

section 1) and divided by two will give you the length of the 

line from 6 to the centre of the section which being added to 37 

and divided by two will give the length of the other line 

required-which you will calculate in the same manner as 

above. 

As the length of the line from F to f is only 37 chains, the 

length of the line from e to F must be 43 chains-the length of 

the line from E to e is 38.50 chains, the length of the line from 

to [sic] d to E 41.50 chains, &c. The quarter section corners 

not being placed at the average disance between the section 

corners, except when you strike the corners of the sections 

established in running the exterior lines of the township. 

E.T 

250 
IX 

(The following instructions from Thomas Freeman to Silas Dinsmore, for the St. Helena Meridian surveys is taken from a 

copy of the original, now in the possession of the State of Florida, Bureau of State Land Management, Title Section, 

Tallahassee, Florida. Some words are bound into the margins and are missing from the copy. These are shown here in 

parentheses as indicated by inference in the text to give the most logical sentences.) 

Instructions to the Principal Deputy 

Surveyor 

of the 

Land District East of Island of N. Orleans 

251 
This district of which you are appointed Princip(a1) Deputy 

Surveyor is bounded on the North by the Parellel of the 31"st 

degree of N.L. on the East by Perdido River & Bay on the 

South by the Gulf of Mexico & the Island of N. Orleans and on 

the West by the Miss. River. It is divided into two land 

Districts Called the District East of the Island of N. Orleans 

the Land Office for the East District to be held at Jackson 

Courthouse and for the Western District at St. Helena Courthouse.- The Registers of these land offices will furnish you 

with abstracts of the confirmation of all private Claims confirmed within their respective Districts, which abstracts 

with the plats of the Original Surveys will be necessary to 

enable the Deputy Surveyor to make the Survey or resurvey 

corect1y.- You will proceed without delay to Survey the land 

district East of the Island of N. Orleans into Townships 

agreeable to the Instructions here inclosed. When the 

Townships Shall have been designated you will procede to 

Survey the Private Claims. 

2 

The Titles of which being confirmed by the boar(d of) Commissioners carefully locating and connecting wh(en) practicable these Claims with each other &with (the) Townships, So 

that when laid down on a Genl. Map (of the) District, the 

position, connection, and dimentions of (each) Claim may be 

distinctly exhibited.- When the Sur(vey of) the District 

Shall have thus far progressed the va(cant) Spots of Public 

Land shall be Surveyed into Section(a1) Teritories and prepared for Sale. The Survey of these d(istricts) will be commenced by extending the Basis Mer(idian) of the Land Districts East and West of Pearl Ri(ver) & North of the parellel of 

the 31st. Deg. of N.L. (due) South from that parellel through 

the District to (the) Southern limits, whichMeridian when so 

run Shal(1 be) the Basis Meridian. And the Parellel of the 

31(st Degree) of N.L. will be the Basis Parellel for the Distri(ct) East of the Island of N. Orleans.- The Ranges will b(e 

nulmerically numbered East & West of the Basis Meridian 

and the Townships South from the Basis Parallel to (the) 

boundaries of the district. The Ranges and Township(s of) 

these Districts approaching each other will termidate) at 

Pearl River which River is the boundary between the (districts) 

3 

Standard Meridians must be accurately run, marked & measured due South from the Basis Parellel at 4 Townships or 24 

miles apart through the Districts to their Southern limits, 

and one Standard Parellel Shall be run through the Districts 

at the distance of 24 miles from the Basis Parellel(1) This 

Standard line will be commenced at the termination of the 

24th mile on the Basis Meridian, and be corectly run, marked 

and measured due East & West through the Districts intersecting the Standard Meridians (if practicable) at the termination of the 24th mile from the Basis Parellel and will of 

course become the Southern Boundary of the 4th Townships 

through the Districts.- 

The Variation of the magnetic needle must be carefully 

ascertained on the Basis Parellel at the Basis & Standard 

Meridians and allso at the 24th mile or South Boundary of 

the 4th Townships on these Meridians.-A true Meridian 

must be distinctly disignated at the points on trees or by 

Pickets firmly Set in the ground, and allso the corect length of 

the Chain Measured on a tree or Sapling Cut down for that 

purpose, or by Pickets Set in the ground at those points for the 

Surveyors who may be imployed in Townshiping or Sectioning the Districts to Compare their Compasses and Chains 

with.- 

4 

Townshiping 

The Townships lines must be run due South (from) the 

Township monuments established on the Basis Pa(relle1) and 

due East and West from the Township Corders) previously 

established on the Basis Meridian, Closing (the) Townships 

at the points of Intersections of these lines on (the) East of the 

Basis Meridian at their South East Cor(ners) and on the West 

of the Basis Meridian at their South (West) Corners or 

Angles, begining with the Townships adjoing (the) Basis 

Meridian & Parellels, and Closing the Township(s) adjoining 

these lines first for the purpose of detecting (&) Correcting 

any inaccuracies that may be in them, th(ence) extend and 

Close the Townships progressively allwa(ys) running the 

Township lines from the Basis line.- In Closing the 

Townships on the Standard meridia(ns1 (It not being expected that South Boundary will intersect (their) Meridians 

exactly at the Township Corners Previously est(ablished1) 

the Points of intersection of the Township lines with the 

Standard Meridians will be adopted as the Township Corners, (and) marked as hereafter directed. But in extending 

the (Survey) from the Standard Meridians, the lines both 

Township (& section) must be run from the monuments or 

Corners previously established on them.- 

5 

In Closing Townships or Sections on the Standard Parellel 

the lines must be run to the monuments previously established on that Parellel and thence proceed due South from 

these monuments.- 

Directions for Marking and Lettering 

All Trees on each side of a line for a Sufficient number to 

distinctly mark the line Shall be blazed on their Sides facing 

the line, and all line trees or trees Standing in the line blazed 

on each Side in direction of the line. On the Basis Meridian 

there Shall be one Chop under each blaze on each Side of the 

line, & two chops above & two below each blaze on line 

trees.- On Standard lines there Shall be two Chops below 

each blaze on line trees - and Section line trees are to be 

blazed without chops as above.- 

Lettering 

The lines must be carefully & distinctly marked at the termination of each mile a Square post must be firmly set in the 

ground its Sides facing diagonally the four Sections or 

252 
Townships to which it is a boundary haveing each Side lettered with the letter T for Township 

6 

R for Range & S for Section, with the proper numbers of the 

Township, Range & Section to whic(h) it is a boundary Prefixed to these letters as i(n) the margin. The Course & distance from the p(ost) to a tree in each of the adjoining Sections 

must (be) taken and these trees lettered & numbered with 

t(he) letters & numbers of the Township Range & Sect(ion) in 

which they Stand So that the face of the post and referance 

trees may be marked and lettered alike.- Posts must allso be 

Set in the ground at the termination of each l/z mile faced on 

two Sides & each Side marked thus l/2 S for half Section 

Corner; the bearing & distance of two trees lettered thus Yz S 

(one on each Side of the line taken from the half mile post) All 

the numbers and letters m(ust) be painly & distinctly marked 

with a lettering I(ron) and the names of the reference trees 

with their lett(ers) & numbers and bearing & distance from 

the Corner p(ost) must be plainly noted in the Surveyors field 

Book. 

T. 1 T. 1 

R.1W. R.1E. 

S.36 S.31 

T.2 T.2 

R.1W. R.1E. 

s. 1 S.6 

7 

On Section Corners in the interior of Township the Range & 

Township may be omited one the tree excepted 

Misclosures of Townships 

The misclosure of a Township or the difference in length of 

the north & South Boundaries ariseing from the figure of the 

earth Will be in your District about 40 Links which increase 

from the Basis to the Standard Parellel amounts to 160 links. 

The erors arising from the impfection of Instruments, and 

unavoidable irors in practice may be estamated at 300 

links.- Then the admissible eror in Closing Townships in 

your District will be limitted to 500 Links Should the eror in 

closing a Township be more than that the Township line 

Should be run over again and Corrected. 

Sectioning 

The Sections of the Townships on the East of the Basis Meridian will be Closed at their S.E. Angles and on the West of the 

Basis Meridian at their S.W. Angles. The Townships on the 

East of the Basis Meridian will be Sectioned by 

running a guide or experimental (line) West to the first mile 

monument on the West boun(dary) of the Township and retraceing or Corecting if necedsary) that line from the Section 

Corner on the Township (line) to the Section Corner on the 

Section line establishing (the) half Sectioncorner in the center of the line; the Se(ction) thus closed in the N.W. of the 

Township will be S. No. 6.- In like manner the meridian 

Section lines will be (run) due South one mile and the Section 

Closed by fir(st) running a guide line West and thence a 

correct line East between the monument on the South 

bou(ndary) of the Section allways establishing the half mile 

(corner) in the Centere of these 1ines.- 

In Closing the Section on East and South Bound(ary1 of the 

Township a guide line must be first run f(rom) the Section 

Corner to its Corisponding Corner on the Township line and 

the Section Closed by running 

9 

running a correct line between these corners fixing the l/zS 

post in the Center of the line- The Guide lines will be 

measured but not marked, Fractional Section lines falling on 

the margin of water courses, Bayous, Lakes &C. may be run 

with out a guide line from the Sectional monuments priviously established but these lines must be continued in right lines 

across water courses correctly to the opposite boundary of the 

Township as if Such Water course had not intervened - At 

the termination of Section lines on the margin of water 

courses a post with two refierence Trees must be established 

to Identify the points and corect Sirvey of the margin of the 

water courses uniting these points must be taken to ascertain 

the contents of the fraction - Townships on the West of the 

Basis Meridian must be Sectioned in like manner / with the 

diffirence of commencing with the Section in N.E. Corner of 

the Township Closing the Sections at their South West Corners - on the South and West boundaries of the Township.- 

10 

Chain Carriers 

The Chain Carriers must be Sworn faithfully (& honestly) to 

make all measurements on the lines agreable (to the) Instructions the may receive from the Surveyor (to) the best of 

their Skill & Knowledge, and faithf(ul1y) return at their 

measurements at all times make (to the) Surveyor when 

required.- The Chain must (be) exactly two Rods or 33 feet 

in length, and (of) fifty links of equal length, The measur(ement) will be kept in two pole chains and links- The (pin) 

must be of Iron or Iron pointed of about 12 In. (in) length with 

a Scrap of red Cloth attached to each, the may be con viently 

Seen amongst g(rass) & weeds, or found if 1ost.- 

Flag 

8 

by running a due South line from the first mile Monument on 

the north Boundary, establishing a 1/2 S (corner) at a half mile 

& a Section Corner at the termination (of) a mile Thence 

To avoid a constant Source of errors in running (lines) for 

want of a propper object at each Station to (retain) the direction of the line and to enable the Chain Carriers to measure 

correctly in the line each Surveyor m(ust) 

253 
11 

must make use of a Flag, for that purpose. A man with a flag 

Staff and a Small Flag attached to it must be kept ahead and 

at each Station fixed in the line by the Surveyor to retain the 

true position or direction of the line for the Surveyor and to 

enable the Chain Carriers to continue their measurements 

Correctly in the line. This must not be omitted by any Surveyor throughout his whole Survey. 

Variation 

To determine the variation of the magnetic needle note exactly by a good watch when the Polar Star and the first in the tail 

of the great Bear (or Star next the Square) are vertical to each 

other, or range with a Plumb line. Ten minutes after wards 

the polar Star will be on the rue meridian a Stake or Small 

light placed at that time in a right line with the Plumb line 

and the Polar Star will point out a true meridian, To which 

12 

To which the Compass being applied will dhow) the Variation of the needle. Which Variation m(ust) be Carefully laid 

off on the index or limb of the Compass, so that when the 

needle p(oints) to the North and South points of the Base the 

ind(ex) or Sight will point out the true merdian. The most 

convenient, practical & accurate mo(de) for Surveyors to 

ascertain the Variation of the needle will be by the polar 

Star’s greatest Elongation which will be visible from the first 

ofNovember to the first of March (& to) the West and from the 

first of May to the first of Sept. to the East.- When the polar 

Star’s Elongation is to the East, its Azimuth must be added or 

la(id) off to the West and when West its azimuth m(ust) be 

deducted or laid off to the East. The azim(uth) of the Polar 

Star for the year 1820 within y(our) District will be l”58’30” 

nearly, and Sufficient(1y) Correct for your Surveyors.- It 

will 

13 

It will be at its greatest Elongation West at midnight on the 

1st of Jany and east at midnight on the third of July.- 

Field Book 

The Surveyors must take care to Record in their field Book 

the nature, quality & growth of the Soil the width depth & 

direction of water courses, the elevation of waters during 

their inundation and their greatest depression at low water.- The depth or width of the low or Alluvial Lands from 

the water Courses Capable of Cultivation; noteing all mines 

or mineral productions or appearances; all Salt or Mineral 

Springs or waters; and Mill Seats, with such further remarks 

& observations as may be necessary to give an accurate 

Topographical Knowledge of the Country in which the Survey.- 

Original notes returned to the Su(rveyor) Office for examination without olteration or correc(tion) after taken on the 

lines.- The Sections in th(e) Township must be numbered as 

in the followi(ng) figure Commenceing with the Section in 

the N.E. No. 1 and Terminating with the Section in S. (E.) No. 

36 when the Township does not contain priv(ate) Claims.- 

But when private Claims are included in a Township, each 

Claim or tract, (or) part of a private Claim, must be a Seperate Sectional number. The Sections and fracti(ona1) Sections, 

in a fractional Township must be numbered as if the would 

be, had the Tow(nship) been complete. 

( Surveyors Office 

Silas Dinsmore Esq. ) Town of Washington 

P D Surveyor District ( Sept. 15th 181(9) 

E. Island N. Orleans ) (Unnumbered Page) 

All deviations from the True Cardinal point must be carefully noted by the Surveyor; when the Surveyor finds it necessary to alter the course of any Township or Section line from 

the due North or South, East or West to Close a Town(-)ship 

or Section, the Course and distance of Such line as actually 

run marked and measured must be recorded in his field 

book.- 

N 

A 

E 

Township of Public 

land Sectioned 

& numbered 

S 

All Townships of Public land Clear of Private Claims must 

have their Sections numbered as in the above figure whether 

the Township be in Range East or West of the Basis meridian.- Each private Claim or part of a private Claim in a 

Township must have a Sectional number.- No two Sectional 

numbers in a Township Shall be alike.- 

14 

Their field notes must be plainly & distinctly kept, and their 

254 
X. 

(Letter from Tiffin to George Graham. Copied from Microcopy 

No. 478, National Archives.) 

Surveyor General’s Office 

Chillicothe Sept. 22nd 1823 

Dear Sir, 

I have received your letter of the 9th inst. and am entirely 

satisfied with the explanation it contains of the circular letter therein referred to. 

The omission in the form of contracts with deputy surveyors which you advert, is supplied in thelnstructions given 

them. You will observe by the contract that it binds the 

deputy to execute his surveys “agreeably with the laws of the 

United States, and such instructions as he may receive from 

the said Edward Tiffin, Surveyor General”. To every surveyor 

is given in writing ample and detailed instructions regarding 

every part of his duty, and which instructions contain the 

following rule: Yn case any corner should fall in a prairie or 

other place where there may be no trees for bearings within a 

convenient distance, you will, at the mark of such corner 

raise around the post a mound of earth or pile of stones, not 

less than two and a half feet high and two and a half feet 

diameter at the base. 

It has never been the usage in this Surveying department 

for Deputy Surveyors to Stipulate in their contracts for the 

correction of Errors at their own expense should any be subsequently discovered in their Surveys. But it has often been 

and still is required of them to correct, where material errors 

have been committed by them, especially when done through 

inattention or carelessness. 

It would be particularly desireable if I could reduce the 

price per mile which is paid for Surveying the public lands; 

and under more favourable circumstances than those which 

have of late years attended the public Surveys this might be 

effected. During the war, and until within the last three 

years, the prices of all kinds ofprovisions, the wages of hands, 

and the cost of transportation were very high. Within that 

period, the public Surveys, which commenced at the old Indian boundary where the Settlements terminated, were extended in general from fifty to more than one hundred miles 

into the wilderness. The Surveyors have Still to obtain their 

provisions from the Settlements, and are obliged to transport 

them on pack horses through a trackless wilderness, in many 

parts literally impenetrable from Swamps, fallen timber, etc. 

So that in general by the time the Surveyors get their provisions to where their work lies, they really cost them more 

than they did five years ago, when the Surveying was contiguous to the Settlements, and provisions dear. It may with 

propriety be added, that at least two thirds of the Surveyors 

are obliged to abandon their work before it is finished and 

return home, either on account of the Sickness of themselves 

or their hands, or both, or from high waters, the loss of their 

pack horses, breaking of their compasses, and other casualties-any of which oblige them to return to their Settlements, 

at a heavy expense and loss of time. Another circumstance 

may be added:-To prevent Surveyors from employing 

journeymen (on a per diem pay) to Survey their districts on 

the plea of their own Sickness, I have adopted the rule to give 

no Surveyor more than five townships, in quantity, to Survey 

in one trip. 

From those considerations it appears to me that the present allowance of three dollars per mile will not enable the 

Surveyors to realize more than a reasonable compensation 

for their Services. Nevertheless, if you think it best, I will 

make the attempt, although I am persuaded it will drive 

some of our most skillful and efficient Surveyors from the 

work. 

Your circular to Surveyors’ General, of the 4th & 5th Augt. 

last, I have been obliged to lay over for the present on account 

of the Sickness of myself and two of the three clerks in my 

office, who have been some time confined with the prevailing 

fever which afflicts our town and the Surrounding country. 

These letters shall be attended to so soon as the clerks shall 

be able to get to work again. 

I am with great regard 

Your Obidient Servant 

Edward Tiffin 

George Graham, Esquire 

Commissioner of the 

-General Land Office 

255 
XI. 

(This letter is copied from the publication “1811 -1844 Instructions to U.S. Deputy Surveyors” issued by the U.S. Department of Agriculture Forest Service, as prepared by Walter G. 

Robillard. The spelling andparagraphing are unverified with 

the original.) 

Principal Deputy Surveyor’s Office 

Southwestern Land District, State Of Louisiana 

Opelousas, March 1830 

Mr. Edward R. Downing 

Deputy Surveyor. 

Sir: 

Along with the printed instructions accompanying and 

attached to this for your Governance in surveying your District, you are to attend to and be governed by the following 

additional ones, to-wit: 

For surveying the exterior and section lines of a Township 

you are never to run towards, but always from an established 

point or corner within your own District, which can always be 

done therein except when you intersect the boundary of 

another surveying District on the opposite side from you the 

basis or standard lines from which your lines were started, in 

that case you may establish your corner where you intersect 

it if you have committed no error in running the line towards 

it but as your line must have perfect continuity throughout 

your own District without offsets, therefore when they are 

commenced on any of the basis or standard or standard lines 

they must be continued on in the same direction as far as they 

may be extended by you. Should however by some mismanagement have unavoidably to run a line towards an established point or corner within your District you may make a 

small inclination of the line to enable you to close at the point 

already established. 

In the law directing the manner in which the public lands 

shall be surveyed into sections it is required that the section 

meridians shall each be exactly one mile and the parallels of 

latitude to be run so as to close thereto, except the closing 

lines, on the North or South boundaries of the Township. 

(According as your District may be situated North or South of 

the 31st Latitude) North on the Northside thereof and south 

on the southside. Therefore beginning at the post one mile 

from the corner of the Township nearest the basis on Standard lines you are to run the meridian one mile North or 

South then run a Random or guide line on the parallel to the 

Township boundary and if you do not intersect at the true 

point, connect the line in direction back again so as to close at 

the point established on the Meridian (Should you however 

intersect with your Random line with five or six links of the 

true point on the Township line you need not connect the 

direction of the line, but merely mark it properly back again) 

proceed in the same manner with the next mile of the Meridian and with the parallel to close therewith and so on until 

you arrive at the opposite boundary of the Township; then 

travel back to the boundary thereof at which you commenced 

and begin another Range of Sections and proceed in the same 

manner with it and so with every range of sections, until the 

township is completed. 

You will mark a tree in each Section at every established 

corner with the number of the Section in which it stands with 

letter S. annexed thereto; and on one of these trees at least 

the number of the Township and Range in which it stands, 

with Appropriate letters T and R before as above the figures 

for which purpose you ought to be provided with good marking irons similar to those used for marking Casks by Coopers 

and others. You will insert all these marks in your Field Book 

correctly; you will also take the bearing and distance in links 

from the corner to at least two of these trees, (one of which 

should always be the one marked with the number of the 

Township and Range) which bearings and distances you will 

note correctly in your Field Book Stating also whether the 

bearing is taken from the true or magnetic meridian; should 

any of your corners fall in prairie you may either erect a 

mound of the dimensions, stated in your contract or else plant 

a good substantial post at least four inches diametre, of light 

wood, or some other durable timber, squared and set up so as 

to front the four sections, with the appropriate numbers 

marked thereon, and on one side the number of the Township 

and Range as directed above. 

As you are confined chiefly to subdividing Townships in 

which claims fa.vourably reported on by the Register and 

Receiver in their report dated the 1st of October, 1825 and 

confirmed by an Act of Congress approved the 16th of May 

1826 and as these claims are not to be surveyed you are in 

conformity with instructions received from the Commissioner of the General Land Office, to ascertain as well as may be 

in your power the situation shape and extent of the improvements under which the claimant is entitled to and confirmed 

in his claim in what section it maybe situated and whether it 

extends into one or more sections besides, and the numbers of 

such sections, and how much of it is in each section as nearly 

as you can judge without a survey, and insert all in your field 

notes, to be laid down in the Township Map to enable the 

Register and Receiver to point out the different half quarter 

sections to which the claimant may be entitled - You are not 

authorized to survey any of these claims but you may do so at 

the request and expense of the claimant, and in that case 

must include only half quarter or quarter sections as laid off 

by the public lines and as nearly in a square as may be. 

Your Chain carriers must be sworn faithfully and honestly 

to carry the chain to the best of their skill and judgment, and 

agreeable to your instructions from time to time given them 

and to make true return of all measurements which they 

shall execute for you as required by you from time - You will 

pay particular attention to ascertaining the true and correct 

variation of your compass from the true Meridian, and insert 

it your field notes and returns to this office. 

Wishing you all success in your expedition and that you 

may do credit to yourself as a man of science and to the 

department, I am 

Respectfully your friend etc 

John Dinsmore Sr. 

Principal Dep. Surveyor 

256 
XII. 

(These letter instructions to the Surveyors General from 

Eluah Hayward are taken from Microcopy No. 27, National 

Archives. The copy given here was originally sent to Gideon 

Fitz.) 

Gideon Fitz, Esq. 

Surveyor General 

Washington, 

Mississippi 

28th July 1831 

Sir, 

In continuation of my replies to the several subjects of your 

letter of 10th April last, I have intentionally omitted to 

advert to the internal arrangement of your Office as they are 

Subjects which come within the special conusance of Mr. 

King the Agent of the Department who ere this date, has 

most probably, reached your Ofice. 

I therefore proceed to shew what are the requirements of 

the Department in reference to the township surveys and the 

mode of making returns thereof in order that you may model 

& adapt your contracts with your deputies, and instructions 

and forms of field books precisely to suit those requirements. 

In the preparation of the township plats, it is requisite that 

they exhibit a perfect delineation of the country, as represented in the field notes of the survey. 

1st. The plats are to be so constructed as to indicate, both by 

protraction and by figures, the courses and distances of all 

lines, viz: The exact distance between the posts planted at the 

corners of each section or fractional section, and the courses of 

the lines where, from any cause, they vary from the cardinal 

points; also, the precise delineation, by courses and distances, 

of private claims, reservations, and other tracts of land not 

conforming to sectional lines. 

2d. Whenever the continuation of a surveyed line is interrupted by an impassable swamp, or from any other cause, the 

distance of the line actually run, between the starting and 

finishing posts, is to be truly represented be the platting, and 

also by figures. 

3d. The distance on a surveyed line, at the points where 

streams cross the same, is to be indicated by figures, and the 

general course of such streams, where they are not navigable, 

between such different points of intersection, is to be delineated on the plat, as nearly as the same can be conjectured. 

The courses and distances of the meanders of navigable 

streams are to be truly delineated, and also represented by 

figures on the plat opposite the delineation, wherever it is 

practicable so to do; and where the same are too numerous to 

admit of their exhibition by figures on the plat, in that mode, 

the same are required to be exhibited in a detached tabular 

form, either on the face of the plat, or connected therewith, as 

may be found most expedient. The width of all water- courses, 

rivers, creeks, &c., is to be represented in figures on the plat. 

4th. The plat is to exhibit the received names of all rivers, 

creeks, lakes, swamps, prairies, hills, mountains, and other 

natural objects, and the surveyors should be instructed never 

to give original names to such objects, where names have 

heretofore been given. All lakes or ponds of sufficient magnitude to justify such expense are to be meandered and platted 

agreeably to courses and distances, which are also to be 

exhibited by figures. In passing such ponds or lakes as are not 

to be meandered, offsets are to be taken, which offsets are to 

be carefully noted on the plat, to show that the distance 

across has been correctly ascertained. Such ponds or lakes 

are to be exhibited on the plat as accurately as practicable, 

from careful ocular observation, to be made by the Deputy 

and noted in his field book. 

5th. Swamps are to be represented in the ordinary method, 

by slightly shaded black lines and dots, and the outlines of the 

same should be distinctly exhibited. 

6th. Prairies are to be represented by slightly shadedgreen 

lines and dots, and the outlines of the same to be distinctly 

exhibited. 

7th. The plats should also exhibit, as far as practicable, all 

mines, salt springs, salt licks, and mill seats; also, towns, 

villages, and settlements, and the names of the same; also, 

forges, factories, cotton gins, and all other such items of information; also, the general course of travelled roads and 

tracks, denoting the place to which they may lead. 

8th. The exterior lines of the township plat should be double the thickness of the sectional lines, and both of them 

should be in black ink. The lines denoting the quarter sections and the subdivisions of fractional sections should be in 

red. 

9th. The quantities of the subdivisions of fractional sections are to be indicated by red figures, within the respective 

subdivisions. The numbers and quantities of the sections and 

fractional sections are to be exhibited in black figures, at the 

centre of each, as nearly as practicable; and in cases where 

the marks and figures on the plat are too numerous to admit 

of the convenient exhibition of the quantities in that way, the 

quantity of each section and fractional section is to be exhibited in a neat tabular statement, on the right side of the plat; 

and where there are private claims in the township, the 

quantities of such claims are to be exhibited under a separate 

head in the tabular statement, which is to exhibit separate 

totals of public lands and private claims; where any private 

claim, Indian or other Reservation, &c., is exhibited, the 

name of the confirmee or reservee must be given; also, such 

other reference as will clearly identify the tract, with the 

Report by which it was confirmed, or the Treaty, &c., under 

which the individual claims the title. 

In cases where the quantities are exhibited in the centre of 

the section or fractional section, and it is not necessary to 

resort to a tabular statement, the sum total of the public lands 

in the township is to be exhibited as one item, near the foot of 

the plat. 

10th. At the foot of each plat the surveyor general must 

give an Of‘ficial Certificate, of the following purport, viz: 

The above map of Township No. , of Range No. 

-, is strictly conformable to the field notes of the survey thereof on file in this Office, which have been examined 

and approved; (or if any exceptions are taken to the field 

notes, by reason of their not standing the test of correct 

platting, such exceptions are to be stated in the margin of the 

plat, as before mentioned, and exhibited on the face of the 

plat by red dotted lines, and alluded to in the certificate thus: 

“with the exception stated in the margin hereof.”) The Certificate is then to be closed, by indicating the name of the 

Deputy or Deputies by whom the exterior boundary lines, 

and the subdivisional lines, were respectively surveyed, 

257 
shewing the sum total of miles run by each Deputy Surveyor, 

also the date of the contract, the quarter of the year in which 

the survey was made, and the quarter in which the same was 

paid for and charged in the accounts of of the Surveyor General. 

11th. All lines in a township survey, which have not been 

actually run, must be represented on your plat of survey by 

red dotted lines, and any portion of a survey found or suspected to be erroneous must also be represented by red dotted 

lines, and payment for the same is to be suspended until the 

error is corrected, or the cause of suspicion done away, to the 

full satisfaction of the Surveyor General; and in every case 

when the survey of a township is incomplete, from any cause, 

such cause must be fully set forth by a marginal note on the 

face of the plat, and certified thereon in the mode designated 

in the 10th article of this letter. 

12th. Navigable streams are declared by law to be public 

highways.-Except in cases where navigable streams constitute the boundary line between two Land Districts; and 

where the Ranges and townships in each District are numbered from different meridians and base lines, they are not to 

interrupt the regular survey of the Township lines, which are 

to be continued across such stream for the exact distance. 

Each border of such stream is, however, to be meandered, by 

course and distance, and a fractional portion of the same 

township will be constituted on each side thereof, to be denominated, as the case may be, the fraction of township 

North or South, or East or West, of such stream, having 

special regard in such designation to the general course 

thereof, from its source to its mouth. 

A Deputy Surveyor continuing Surveys on the opposite 

banks of streams must invariably be made to shew the connections of such survey with certain established posts or 

points in the opposite survey; which connections, as well as 

the mode by which the same was ascertained, are to be shewn 

in the field book and exhibited in the plat of survey; and, in 

passing up or down rivers, frequent connections with the 

surveys across should be made and exhibited, both in the field 

book and plat. 

The width of navigable streams and bayous binding on the 

surveys should frequently be ascertained by trigonometrical 

process. Where the width of the stream does not sensibly vary 

in the township, the measurement thereof is to be made at the 

two extreme points of intersection of such objects with the 

township line; but where there is a sensible variation in the 

width, measurement thereof must be made as often as may be 

justly deemed necessary for the accuracy of the survey in 

connection with the adjoining lands, and the correct exhibition thereof in the township plats. 

13th. Where it is necessary to make a return to this Office 

of township boundaries merely, prior to the subdividing of 

such townships into sections, and the rendition of the regular 

plats of survey, such boundaries are to be platted in connection, on a scale of from two to three inches to six miles. 

14th. The paper to be used on your plats of survey must be 

of the best quality and of uniform size. 

The descriptive notes are to be written on paper of the folio 

post size, best quality. The records of the plats and field notes 

to be kept in your Office must be made out on paper of the best 

quality-. Great care and neatness are to be observed in the 

execution of the work, and in the particular examination 

thereof after the same is completed. 

SURVEYS AND CONTRACTS. 

15th. You are to require bond and approved security for the 

due execution of all surveying contracts, in the penalty of 

double the value of the contract; and in case of failure to 

comply with the terms of a contract, unless such failure arise 

from causes satisfactorily proved to be beyond the control of 

the contractor, immediate measures are to be taken to recover the penalty of the bond, agreeably to law; and no Deputy 

Surveyor, who has improperly failed to fulfil his engagements, is afterwards to be employed by you, and of every such 

failure you are required to give immediate notice to the 

Department. 

The surveys must be executed under the personal and 

immediate superintendence of the contractor. Sub-contracts 

are illegal. The contract and bond of the Deputy are expressly 

to provide against sub-contracts. 

16th. The act of 18th May, 1796, (Land Laws, new edition, 

page 420,) provides, that the public lands “shall be divided by 

North and South lines, run according to the true meridian, 

and by others crossing them at right angles, so as to form 

townships of six miles square.” 

“The corners of the townships shall be marked with progressive numbers, from the beginning; each distance of a 

mile between the said corners shall also be distinctly marked, 

with marks different from those of the corners.” 

The same law requires that “townships shall be subdivided 

into sections, containing, as nearly as may be, six hundred 

and forty acres each, by running through the same, each way, 

parallel lines at the end of every two miles, and by marking a 

corner on each of the said lines at the end of every mile. The 

sections shall be numbered, respectively, beginning with the 

number one in the northeast section, and proceeding west 

and east, alternately, through the township, with progressive numbers, till the thirty-six be completed.” 

“And it shall be the duty of the Deputy Surveyors to cause 

to be marked on a tree, near each corner made as aforesaid, 

and within the section, the number of such section, and over 

it the number of the township within which such section may 

be; and the said Deputies shall carefully note in their respective field books the names of the corner trees marked, and the 

numbers so made.” 

The Act of 10th May, 1800, (Land Laws, new edition, page 

456,) prescribes the mode of subdividing Sections into half 

Sections of three hundred and twenty acres each, as nearly as 

may be, “by running parallel lines through the same, from 

East to West, and from South to North, at the distance of one 

mile from each other, and marking corners at the distance of 

each half mile on the lines running from East to West, and at 

the distance of each mile on those running from South to 

North,” and making the marks, notes, and descriptions, prescribed to Surveyors by the Act of 18th of May, 1796. The 

same act also provides that, “in all cases where the exterior 

lines of the townships, thus to be subdivided into Sections or 

half Sections, shall exceed, or shall not extend, six miles, the 

excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or 

deducted from the Western and Northern ranges of Sections 

258 
or half Sections in such townships, according as the error may 

be in running the lines from East to West, or from South to 

North. The sections and half sections bounded on the Northern and Western lines of such townships shall be sold as 

containing only the quantity expressed in the returns and 

plats, respectively, and all others as containing the complete 

legal quantity.” By a vigilant and faithful attention to duty 

on the part of the Deputy Surveyor, the excesses and deficiencies alluded to by the law, except to a trifling extent, will be of 

rare occurrence. 

The Act of 11th February, 1805, entitled “An Act concerning the mode of surveying the public lands of the United 

States,” (Land Laws, new edition, page 515,) prescribes 

general regulations for dividing townships into Sections, and 

subdividing such sections into half sections and quarter sections. The following is a summary of those regulations: 

The lands are to be laid off in townships of precisely six 

miles square, by lines running due North and South, and 

East and West. On each of those lines, precisely at the distance of one mile apart, corners are to be established for 

sectional lines. Parallel lines are to be run through the 

township each way, from each Sectional corner to the corresponding sectional corner on the opposite side of the 

township; on each of which lines Sectional corners are to be 

established, at the distance of one mile apart; which process 

will divide the township into thirty-six sections. In running 

the exterior township lines, and also the interior Sectional 

lines, intermediate half-mile posts or corners (precisely 

equidistant between the corners of the Sections) are to be 

established, as the boundaries of quarter Sections. 

17th. Each Deputy Surveyor is to provide himself with two 

two-pole chains, containing each thirty-three feet, and subdivided into fifty links, which are to be regulated by the Standurd Chain in the Surveyor’s Office; one of which chains is to 

be specially reserved by the Deputy, as a Standard for his 

field work, and by which he will adjust the one in active use, 

at least every other day, if not oftener. Each Deputy will also 

provide himself with a good compass, with a nonius or a 

theodolite, (which latter in some respects is preferable, by 

reason of its peculiar adaptation to the taking of long sights,) 

which will be compared with the Standard in the Surveyor’s 

Office. 

18th. The Surveys are required by law to be made agreeably to the true meridian, and at right angles therewith. The 

variation of the magnetic meridian is to be observed and 

ascertained, from time to time, as often as the Surveyor 

General may deem expedient, and is always to be indicated 

on the township plat. 

19th. The greatest cure is to be taken in levelling the chain, 

and plumbing the pins, so as to obtain the true horizontal 

distance, where the surface of the country is irregular and 

hilly. 

The oath to be taken by the chain-men must specially 

provide for such levelling and plumbing. The Deputy Surveyor must ever be vigilant over the conduct of his subagents, (chain-men, marker, and flag-bearers,) whose oaths, 

with that of the Deputies, are to be filed in your office. 

You are to enjoin on your Deputies a strict regard to the 

moral integrity of their sub-agents. None must be employed 

in whom implicit confidence cannot be reposed, as the interest of the public service is at stake. 

AS TO MARKING. 

20th. The greatest possible caution is to be observed in 

marking the corners of townships, &c., in a plain, distinct, 

and permanent manner. 

Where a tree is not found immediately at the corner, a 

corner is to be established by planting a post, on which is to be 

marked the number of the township, over which is to be 

marked the number of the Range, and underneath the number of the Section. 

The bearing and distance, also the names and respective 

diameters of the nearest trees from such corner are to be 

carefully taken and noted in the field book. The nearest of 

such trees [where there are more than one] is to be marked to 

correspond with the marked corner. The mark should be [in a 

regular chop, squared OK’ to be] made into such tree in such a 

way [sol as to be always distinguishable from a mere blaze. 

The letters B T, to denote the fact of its being a “bearing tree,” 

should be distinctly cut into the wood, some distance below 

the other marks. All these particulars are to be most intelligibly and minutely noted in the field book. The post used in 

forming the corners of townships must always be larger [for 

the sake of distinction] than those which denote the sectional 

and quarter sectional corners, and should be neatly squared 

off at the top, to correspond with the cardinal points. 

[The marks on the posts and bearing trees should be deeply 

burnt into the wood with marking irons.] 

The posts must always be made of the most durable wood 

that can be had, and should be set in the earth to the depth of 

two feet, and very securely rammed in with earth and stone. 

[It is highly, important, in reference to their durability, that 

the portion of each post below the surface should be charred, 

and the whole of it rubbed over with tar, except the portion 

which bears the Surveyor’s marks.] The sectional posts are to 

indicate, by a number of notches on each of the four corners 

directed to the cardinal points, the number of miles that it 

stands from the outlines of the townships; the side of the post 

will be numbered to correspond with the number of the Section it faces. Each half-mile post on a section line, and quarter-section post on a township line, should be marked, to 

indicate that it is a quarter sectional [,‘l 4 S”] post, and the 

nearest adjoining tree on each side of such a post must be 

similarly marked; the Surveyor to note in his field book the 

kind of tree, its diameter, bearing and distance from the true 

corner. 

Posts denoting the same kind of character of boundary 

should be of uniform construction, and there should always 

be a striking difference between posts denoting different 

kinds of boundary. 

[To create additional and increased facility in the discovery 

of boundary lines by the purchasers of public lands, and to 

prevent errors of entry, you are to require your Deputies to 

fasten to the sectional and quarter sectional posts, near the 

ground, but so as to be plainly seen, a finger board, on which 

is to be distinctly marked with black oilpaint, the appropriate 

number of the tract. This board to point diagonally across the 

tract, and to be marked similarly to this: N.W. Y4 S.l. T. 1 N. 

R. 1 E.1 

1. The worda included in the brackets were omitted in the letter to the surveyor general 

of Arkansas. 

259 
In prairie countries, where bearing trees cannot be had, 

mounds, to be covered with sod, are, agreeably to contract, to 

be erected. Such mounds should be of uniform size, and conform precisely to instructions to be given by you. As mounds 

are subject to be worn away, by the action of the weather and 

other causes, I would recommend that a stone be planted in 

the centre of the mound, and that a few handfuls of charcoal 

be enclosed therein. [I would further recommend, that at each 

corner of a square, which will enclose the mound and conform 

to the cardinal points, there be planted a chestnut, hickorynut, walnut, or acorn. 

A stake to be set up in the centre of the mound, to which is 

to be fastened a finger-board, on which is to be designated in 

black oil paint the appropriate numbers. 

All the particulars relative to the construction of a mound 

are to be minutely indicated in the field book. 

The perpetuation of the corners of the public surveys is a 

subject of primary importance. Every possible care and precaution to secure correct and durable corners must be 

observed by your agents, whose fidelity you should test by 

every means in your power. 

AS TO FIELD BOOKS. 

21st. You are to furnish your Deputy Surveyors with a 

printed specimen form of field book, which is to be so constructed as to exhibit every particular required either by law 

or instruction, so as to admit of a perfect topographical exhibition of the country, and accompany such form with special instructions on every point in relation to which it can be 

presumed that instructions are necessary. 

In the field book, the number of miles, chains, and links, 

run on a line, are to be exhibited in a column, which is to be 

added up at the foot of each page, and carried forward from 

page to page, so as to form at the conclusion of the book the 

aggregate of miles, chains, and links, run in the township or 

fractional township. 

The Act of Congress approved 18th of May, 1796, (Land 

Laws, new edition, page 420,) requires that “every Surveyor 

shall note in his fzeld book the true situation of all Mines, Salt 

licks, salt springs, and Mill Seats, which shall come to his 

knowledge; all water courses over which the line he runs 

shall pass; also, the quality of the lands. These field books 

shall be returned to the Surveyor General, who shall thereupon cause a description of the whole lands surveyed to be 

made out, and transmitted to the Officers who may superintend the sales. He shall also cause a fair plat to be made of the 

townships and fractional parts of townships contained in the 

said lands, describing the subdivisions thereof, and the 

marks of the corners. This plat shall be recorded in books to 

be kept for that purpose; a copy thereof shall be kept open at 

the Surveyor General’s Office, for public information, and 

other copies sent to the places of sale, and to the Secretary of 

the Treasury.”-. 

As the protraction of the surveys at the Office of the Surveyor General, from the field books furnished by his Deputies, is the test of the accuracy or incorrectness of the survey, 

the greatest caution is to be observed in making such protractions. 

The field books are to indicate the examination and 

approval thereof, (or disaproval, as the case may be,) by the 

Surveyor General, with the date of such examination and 

approval, under his own proper signature; also, the date of 

the contract, the quarter of the year in which the land was 

surveyed, and payment made therefor. 

The field books are to be signed by the Deputy Surveyor, 

and also by the chain-men, marker, and flag-bearers, employed in the survey. 

SUBDIVISIONS OF SECTIONS AND 

FRACTIONAL SECTIONS. 

22d. The Act of 24th of April, 1820, entitled “An Act making further provision for the sale of the public lands,” (Land 

Laws, New Edition, page 770,) requires that the public lands 

be offered for sale in half-quarter sections, and requires that 

the lines, supposed to divide 1 the quarter sections into halfquarter sections, are to run North and South. This law also 

requires that the corners and contents of half-quarter sections shall be ascertained in the manner and on the principles 

prescribed by the Act of 11th of February, 1805. (Land Laws, 

New Edition, page 515.) 

The same Act requires that “fractional sections containing 

One hundred and sixty acres and upwards shall in like manner, as nearly as practicable, be subdivided into half-quarter 

sections, under such rules and regulations as may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury; but fractional sections containing less than one hundred and sixty acres shall 

not be divided, but shall be sold entire.” 

The instruction of the Secretary of the Treasury, under the 

aforesaid act, is, that the lines of the subdivisions of fractional sections containing one hundred and sixty acres or upwards may run either North and South, or East and West, so 

as to preserve to the respective subdivisions the most compact and convenient forms. 

The lines of the subdivisions of quarter sections and fractional sections are to be merely indicated on the maps. It is 

not contemplated by the existing laws that they should be 

actually surveyed at the expense of the United States. 

In the subdivision of fractional Sections, you are requested 

to observe, as a general rule, points equidistant between the 

half-mile posts, as the the supposed boundaries, whether 

North and South or East and West, between the subdivisions. 

I am, very respectfully, 

your Ob’t Servant, 

Elijah Hayward 

(Ed. Note:) 

(Copies of this letter were sent to William McRee, John Coffee, M. T. Williams, Robert Butler and H. B. Triste, Surveyors General on September 23, 1831. A copy was sent to 

Jame S. Conway, on July 6,1832, following his appointment 

as Surveyor General of Arkansas. The words included in the 

brackets [ I were omitted in the letter to Conway.) 

260 
XIII. 

(This extract from a letter to Gideon Fitz from Hayward is 

copied from the publication “General Acts of Congress with 

Instructions, Vol. II, 1838.) 

INSTRUCTIONS.-SURVEY S. 

NO. 9124s. G. VO~. 5, p. 18.) 

From the Commissioner to the Surveyor General, 

Washington, Miss. 

October 24, 1831. 

SIR: I have received your letter of the 21st ultimo, in 

reference to certain points in my letter of instruction of 28th 

July last. 

Inasmuch as you have suggested so many difficulties 

attending the use of branding irons in various situations in 

which the surveyors may be placed, I request that you will 

consider so much of the 20th article of my letter of instructions of 28th July last, as relates to that peculiar mode of 

marking, as being hereby suspended until you receive farther instructions. Meanwhile, you will continue the mode of 

marking hitherto in use, enjoining on your surveyors the 

observance of every particular necessary to effect the primary object of that instruction, which is the proper designation of boundaries, and the perpetuation of the same. You 

propose to have red paint traced in the groove cut by the 

common marking irons, to give a conspicuous appearance to 

the letters of figures. I see no objection to this mode. 

The objections to the charring and tarring of the posts 

appear to be principally the loss of time attending those 

operations, for which the surveyors would require extra pay. 

Under these circumstances, as increased pay cannot be 

granted, those precautions against the decay of the posts 

must, of necessity, be abandoned. 

I am not satisfied with some of the reasons assigned by you 

against the use of finger boards; but, although desirous of 

adopting them as a precaution against errors of entry, and for 

increased facility in the discovery of boundary lines, it is not 

intended to introduce any innovation which would unnecessarily retard the execution of the public surveys. If surveyors 

cannot be found to undertake the placing of finger boards 

without increased pay, the plan cannot be put into operation. 

261 
XIV. 

(The following complete copy ofInstructions is taken from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives. 

INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR 

SURVEYING THE LANDS OF THE 

UNITED STATES, 

IN THE STATE OF 

Mississippi. 

PREPARED 

BY GIDEON FITZ, 

“SURVEYOR OF THE LANDS OF THE UNITED 

STATES, SOUTH OF THE STATE OF 

TENNESSEE.” 

NATCHEZ, 

Printed by Robert Semple, Main Street. 

1832. 

263 
INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR SURVEYING IN THE STATE OF MISSISSIPPI. 

Surveyor’s Office, Washington, Mississippi 

DECEMBER, 1831. 

Elijah Hayward, Esq. Commissioner of the General Land 

Office, in his instructions of the 28th July 1831, having 

requested that instructions be prepared for the Deputy Surveyors, and printed, with a specimen form of a field-book, in 

order that the returns to this office, may be more correct, and 

uniform in every respect; I have prepared the following instructions, with a specimen field-book, which, it is hoped, will 

answer the purpose. 

In preparing these instructions, I have thought it best to 

take a review of the several Acts of Congress, relating to the 

subject, which acts will be noticed in the order of their dates; 

Beginning with the act entitled “An act, providing for the sale 

of the lands of the United States, in the Territory North-West 

of the river Ohio, and above the mouth of Kentucky river.”- 

Approved on the 18th May, 1796. [See Land Laws, new edition, page 420.1 

By the 10th and 11th sections of the act of the 3rd March, 

1803, entitled “An act regulating the grants of land, and 

providing for the disposal of the lands of the United States, 

South of Tennessee,” the provisions of the foregoing act of the 

18th May, 1796, are made applicable to the surveys of this 

State, so far as relates to the formation of instructions for the 

Deputy Surveyors, administering to them the necessary oath 

upon their appointment, and removing them from office for 

negligence or misconduct in office.-Also, the method of surveying the public lands into Townships of six miles square, by 

lines run according to the true meridian, due North and 

South, “and 

-3- 

others crossing them at right angles,” and to divide the 

Townships into thirty-six square Sections, containing each 

as nearly as practicable 640 acres.-Also, the mode of 

numbering the Sections by one uniform rule, commencing 

with the number one, in the North-East corner of each 

Township, and proceeding West and East alternately with 

progressive numbers, till the thirty-six numbers be completed. The sections of fractional Townships are numbered in 

the same manner, as if such fractional Township was full and 

complete. Fractional Townships are occasioned by Indian 

boundaries, District or State boundaries, and not by navigable streams passing through them. Fractional Sections are 

occasioned by Indian boundaries, District boundaries, State 

boundaries, navigable water courses, and individual or private claims. On navigable water cources, the sections may 

retain their square form, and yet become fractional, because 

part of the area of such sections, are taken out by such water 

course; and the parts of such sections are separated, and may 

not be connected by their boundaries continuing on the same 

right line across such stream, nor is it necessary that the 

lines in such situations should be continued directly across 

such navigable streams, because the fractional part of such 

sections on opposite sides of such streams, have their areas 

determined independent of each other. 

Fractional sections, in the meaning of the law, are not 

occasioned by the section containing more or less than 640 

acres, but become fractional only in situations as above mentioned, on navigable water courses, Indian boundaries, district, or State boundaries, and by individual claims. 

The act of the 18th May, 1796, is the only act which prescribes the mode of marking the corners of Townships and 

sections, and requires that the deputy Surveyors respectively, shall “cause to be marked on 

-4- 

a tree near each corner of each section, and within such 

section, the number of such section, and over it, the number of 

the Township within which such section may be, and to note 

carefully in their respective field-books, the names of the 

corner trees marked, and the number so made. That all lines 

shall be plainly marked upon trees, and measured with 

chains containing two perches of sixteen feet and one half 

each (each perch) subdivided into twenty-five equal links, 

which chain shall be adjusted by a standard to be kept for that 

purpose. That every Surveyor shall note in his field-book the 

true situation of all mines, salt licks, salt springs and mill 

seats which shall come to his knowledge; all water courses, 

over which the line he runs shall pass, and also the quality of 

the land. That these field-books shall be returned to the 

Surveyor General, (or officer acting as such,) who shall therefrom cause a description of the whole lands surveyed to be 

made out, and transmitted to the officers who may superintend the sales. He (the surveyor General) shall also cause a 

fair plat to be made of the Townships and fractional parts of 

Townships, describing the subdivisions thereof, and the 

marks of the corners. The plats shall be recorded in books to 

be kept for that purpose; a copy thereof shall be kept open at 

the Surveyor General’s office for public information, and 

other copies sent to the places of sale, and to the Secretary of 

the Treasury.” 

This law is very important, as prescribing the manner of 

making the surveys generally, numbering the sections and 

manner of keeping field-books, to be returned by the deputy 

Surveyors. 

The second act of Congress to be noticed, is that passed on 

the 10th May, 1800, entitled “An act to amend an act entitled 

“An actproviding for the sale of the lands of the United States 

in the Territory North-West of Ohio, and above the mouth of 

Kentucky river.” [See Land Laws, new edition, page 456.1 

-5- 

Although this act is referred to in the Commissioner’s 

instructions, it seems very doubtful whether its provisions 

generally, can now be applied to the surveys to be made in 

this State. Its general provisions are, that twenty-five of the 

sections of each full Township, shall each, contain the exact 

quantity of 640 acres, and that the error of measurement on 

the township lines, shall affect the sections only on the 

Northern and Western tiers, and in the Northern and Western parts of those sections respectively. This mode of surveying was certainly impracticable, because it presupposes 

264 
that the measurement on the South and East boundary of 

each Township, will be without error, and the section lines of 

twenty-five of the sections respectively were to be returned 

by the surveyor, as being just one mile in length each, 

whether he found them so or not. Then it only became necessary to measure those lines to set the quarter section corners, 

and note the water courses. The quarter section corners 

would stand at half a mile from the section corner run from, 

without regard to the true length of such section line, and 

therefore could not answer the purpose properly, of dividing 

the sections into four equal parts. The measurement would 

not, on one set of the section lines at least, have any check 

short of four, five, or say six miles. If there was only a difference of ten links in the measurement on each mile, which 

may seem to be small in rough woods, that error would 

accumulate in running across the Township to 40, 50 or 60 

links in the closing miles. The next line East or West, North 

or South of the first one run across the Township, would have 

its errors in measurement accumulated in the opposite direction, and consequently increase the angle which a line would 

make with the true cardinal points, in running across any 

section, and the four quarters of each section according to 

such rule, would differ 

-6- 

from each other in area. It seems to have been contemplated 

by this act, that the section lines might be run alternately 

across the Township. I believe that no practical surveyor will 

admit that lines run in this way, would be measured with 

sufficient accuracy to set the quarter section corners according to the provisions of other laws, which require them to be 

set equidistant from the section corners, on the same lines, 

nor would the crossing of streams be noted on the lines in 

their proper places. The provisions of this act, as relates to the 

forms of the sections, and the principles of fixing quarter 

section corners, were effectually repealed by the act of the 

11th Feb. 1805. 

The third act of Congress to be noticed, is that which 

governs the forms of the sections, the areas of sections and 

parts, under all circumstances, and consequently fixes the 

principles on which the surveys are to be made. This act is 

entitled “An act concerning the mode of surveying the public 

lands of the United States.”-Approved on the 11th February 

1805. (See Land Laws, new edition, page 515.) 

It is evident from the words of this act, that it was intended 

to supercede, so far as it goes, the provisions of all other acts, 

in relation to the mode of surveying the public lands. Its 

general provisions are, that all the lines and corners established under the authority of the Surveyor General, or surveyor of public lands South of Tennessee, and the areas of the 

sections and fractional sections, and their subdivisions resulting from the measurement and courses of the boundaries 

of the sections and fractional sections, shall be deemed to be 

correct, and the section lines and subdivisional lines shall 

proceed from the established corners by straight lines to the 

opposite corresponding corner, without regard to course, except on navigable water courses, Indian boundary, or other 

external boundary of fractional Townships, where no opposite 

-7- 

corresponding corner has been, nor can be established; then 

the lines of such fractional sections and subdivisions, shall be 

run due East, West, North or South as the case may be, to 

such Indian boundary, water course, State or district boundary. This act recognises the same principle, as all the other 

acts referred to, of running the Township and section lines as 

nearly as practicable, due East, West, North and South, and 

only admits that they may deviate from the true cardinal 

points, when it becomes indispensable from errors of former 

surveys, where corners erroneously established, cannot with 

propriety be removed. This act also requires that the quarter 

section corners shall be set equidistant from the section corners on the same line. The quarter section corners therefore 

cannot always be just half a mile from either of the section 

corners on the same line, but must be governed by the length 

of the section lines on which they stand, whether on the 

North and South, or East and West lines. This will make it 

necessary in practice, to go over many of the lines twice. It is 

impracticable to avoid this inconvenience, and it must therefore be submitted to, wherever necessary, both for the purpose of complying with this law, and to do justice to purchasers of the public lands. The Surveyor will therefore see 

the necessity of running the lines in the first instance, with 

great care, and in such manner as to avoid the necessity of 

running towards the Basis lines, but always in a direction 

from them, that all the lines may be continued in a direct 

course through the district or State, as nearly as practicable. 

The fourth act necessary to be noticed, is the act entitled 

“An act making further provisions for the sale of the public 

lands.”-Approved on the 24th April, 1820. (See Land Laws, 

new edition, page 770.) 

This act provides that from and after the first day of July 

1820, all the lands of the United States, the 

-8- 

sale of which is, or may be authorised by law, shall, when 

offered at public sale to the highest bidder, be offered in half 

quarter sections; and when offered at private sale may be 

purchased at the option of the purchaser, either in entire 

sections, half sections, quarter sections or half quarter sections; and in every case of the division of a quarter section, 

the line for the division thereof shall run North and South, 

and the corners and contents of half quarter sections which 

may thereafter be sold, shall be ascertained in the manner, 

and on the principles directed and prescribed by the second 

section of an act, entitled, “An act concerning the mode of 

surveying the public lands of the United States,” passed on 

the 11th day of February, 1805; and fractional sections containing 160 acres, or upwards, shall in like manner, as nearly 

as practicable, be subdivided into half quarter sections, 

under such rules and regulations, as may be prescribed by the 

Secretary of the Treasury; but fractional sections containing 

less than 160 acres, shall not be divided, but shall be sold 

entire; provided, that this act shall not be construed to alter 

any special provision made by law for the sale of land in town 

lots. 

The Secretary of the Treasury has directed, that the lines of 

the subdivisions of fractional sections containing 160 acres or 

265 
upwards, may run either North & South, or East & Wast so as 

to preserve to the respective subdivisions the most compact 

and convenient forms. 

The subdivisional lines of quarter sections and fractional 

sections, are merely to be indicated on the maps by red or 

dotted lines. It is not contemplated by existing laws that they 

shall be actually surveyed at the expense of the United 

States. 

By reference to the act of 24th April, 1820, it is evident that 

the act of the 11th February, 1805, should 

-9- 

govern, in the mode of surveying the public lands, and not the 

act of the 10th May 1800, which last mentioned act is not 

referred to in the act of 24thApril,l820. It is also evident that 

to do justice to the purchasers of public lands, the quarter 

section corners must be placed equidistant from the section 

corners on the same line, for all sections that are intended to 

be offered for sale in half quarter sections. This circumstance 

then fixes the principle upon which the surveys must be 

made. 

The principle for running the Township and Range lines in 

a direction from the Basis lines, is recognised in the law of the 

10th May, 1800, as it requires the Townships to be closed at 

the North-West angle, because it is presumed, the district lay 

West of the Basis Meridian, and North of the Basis Parallel. 

This is a correct principle as relates to Township, Range and 

section lines. It is supposed that the Basis lines will be well 

run and measured, and if lines be run due East, West, North 

or South from such Basis lines, there will be seldom a necessity for making objectionable unsightly offsets, at the corners 

of Townships, nor for changing the course of the closing miles 

to intersect at corners previously established. 

The Meridians should be run in like manner fram the Basis 

Parallel, North or South, until1 the natural convergency, or 

divergency becomes so considerable as to require a new standard Parallel, or East and West line on which to lay off exact 

miles, to continue the surveys North or South. On these East 

and West standard lines, there must of necessity be two sets 

of corners, otherwise the closing lines of the Ranges, on those 

lines would in some instances diverge from the true cardinal 

points by very large and objectionable angles. 

Having referred to the provisions of the several acts of 

Congress relative to the proper mode of survey- 

-10- 

ing the public lands, and preparing them for market, according to the requisitions ofthe act of the 20th of April, 1820, and 

finding by the first section of the act of the 18th May, 1796, 

that it is the duty of the Surveyor General, and the Survyor of 

the United States ands South of Tennessee, respectively to 

frame regulations and instructions for the government of the 

deputies, I have given the necessary instructions, in compliance, as far as practicable, with the views of the Government, expressed through the Commissioner of the General 

Land Office, that the lines may be well run and marked and 

the corners be established in a manner the most conspicuous 

and durable, which the price of surveying will justify and the 

nature of the country admit. 

The first object was to have the Basis Parallel and the Basis 

Meridian of the Choctaw land district, extended through the 

country lately acquired from the Choctaws from which to 

number the Townships North from the Basis Parallel, and 

the Rranges respectively East and West from the Basis Meridian. It was an object to have as few Basis lines in the State as 

practicable, to number Townships and Ranges from, because, 

to have many Basis lines to number from, is calculated to 

produce confusion in the surveyor’s office, and if the name of 

the district happens to be omitted on the field-notes or maps, 

as has sometimes happened already, those notes and maps 

may become doubtful, if not useless. In order to prevent the 

errors of the old surveys from being extended into the new 

purcace, a standard meridian was directed to be run with 

great care, observing the variation of the needle carefully, 

and run due North between Ranges six and seven from the 

Basis Parallel, to the distance of ninety-six miles, measuring 

the line with two sets of chain carriers, one set following the 

other at a short distance, to detect any error that might 

happen 

-11- 

in the measurement. From the North end of this line, another 

line was ordered to be run due West to intersect the extended 

Basis Meridian, and then to return on the line measuring 

exact miles from the Basis Meridian East, so as to throw any 

excess or deficiency of measurement between the Basis Meridian and the standard Meridian, on the mile next to the 

standard Meridian, where it would not affect the surveys of 

the new work, or but very slightly so. This line too, was 

directed to be double chained. Also the Basis Parallel and 

Basis Meridian. Also an East and West line to be run across 

the country, at the distance of forty-eight miles North, and 

another at ninety-six miles North, and another at one hundred and forty-four miles North of the Basis Parallel, all East 

of the Basis Meridian, and one from the Basis Meridian due 

West, at the distance of 144 miles North of the Basis Parallel. 

One standard Meridian, West of the Basis Meridian, has been 

ordered, to be run at the distance of 36 miles from the Basis 

Meridian, and one standard Meridian, to be run on the East 

side of the first mentioned standard Meridian, between 

Ranges 12 and 13, extending from the Basis Parallel to the 

Chickasaw lands. All these lines are to be run with peculiar 

care, as standard lines to check the errors which may arise in 

running the Township lines.-They are all to be double measured, and the variation of the needle carefully observed on 

them, by which to govern the running of the Township and 

section lines. For all these standard lines, the price of six 

dollars per mile is allowed, to be deducted from the section 

lines in the open parts of the country.-The next business 

will be, to run out the Township lines, by which means, a 

knowledge of the character of the country will be obtained, 

and then the districts for sectioning will be designated, some 

to be sectioned at three dollars per mile, and others at five, ac- 

-12- 

cording to the nature of the country and difficulties which 

may attend the surveying; so as to average the whole at four 

dollars per mile, or as the law provides that, the whole ex266 
pense of surveying the country, shall not exceed four dollars 

per mile. 

These are the general outlines of the plan, the advantages 

or disadvantages of which, can only be tested by time and 

experience. It is a plan proposed by myself and accepted by 

the Government. I fear no derangement, but that which may 

arise from too much hurrying of the surveys, and a want of 

skillful, experienced surveyors to conduct it. 

Remarks on the mode of running Section lines, as 

heretofore generally practised. 

In Townships North of the Basis Parallel, the general rule 

was to begin on the line between sections 35 and 36, and run 

due North half a mile, fixing the quarter section corner, and 

proceeding to the end of the mile, and fixing the section 

corner permanently. Thence a randum line due East, between sections 25 and 36, measuring the line without marking, and leaving a temporary quarter section post at half a 

mile, and on reaching the corner on the township line and 

noting the misclosure, if any, the line was run Westwardly on 

a straight direction from corner to corner, marking the line 

and fixing the quarter section corner equidistant between the 

section corners. Thence due North between 25 and 26, fixing 

the quarter section corner at half a mile, and the section 

corner at a mile, as before, and thence due East on a randum 

line as before, and returning on the straight line from corner 

to corner. Thus the first tier of sections were run until the 

surveyor arrived at the South-West corner of section one, 

where he run a randum line between sections one and two 

due North, and corrected back, marking the line on his return, and fixing the quarter 

-13- 

section corner equidistant from the respective section corners. Then he travelled back to the beginning point, or to the 

corner of sections 34 and 35 on the South boundary of the 

Township, and proceeding as before, to carry on another tier 

of sections to the North boundary of the Township. In 

Townships South of the Basis Parallel the order was reversed, so as to run South instead of North. To this mode, 

there are two strong objections. The East and West section 

lines are run in a zig zag manner, seldom conforming to the 

cardinal points, and all the lines are governed by the 

measurement, and not by the compass. All the interior section lines had to be gone over twice, that is, once in running 

them, and once in back travelling, which occasioned much 

loss of time and in thick woods the randum lines have to be 

cut open, and require as much labor and time, as when marking them. The sections are not of uniform size. 

To obviate these objections, I propose the following plan, in 

which the compass will have its due share of credit, and the 

surveyor may have the measurement always under his control, it being checked at every mile, and most of his back 

travelling will be on marked lines, which will be of great 

advantage in thick woods. All experience has shown, that the 

compass, in the hands of a skillful surveyor, is much more to 

be relied on for accuracy, than measurement, and particularly so in hilly rough woods. It is presumed the Township and 

Range lines will be well run and measured, in which case the 

errors in the sections will be very small. This mode too, will 

be in compliance with the laws, so far as practical surveying 

can be made to comply with them, in causing the lines generally to conform to the cardinal points, in equalizing the areas 

of the sections, and marking quarter section corners, so as to 

divide the sections and fractional sections into equal parts as 

the law 

-14- 

directs. It will be only necessary to back travel 35 miles in the 

Townships generally, instead of 60 miles as has been heretofore required. In Townships East of the Basis Meridian, and 

North of the Basis Parallel, the township. lines are to be run 

North and East respectively, closing them at the North-East 

angle, except those adjacent to the old Choctaw boundary, 

which of necessity will be closed on that boundary. Those 

West of the Basis Meridian and North of the Basis Parallel, 

will be closed at the North-West angle, except along the old 

Choctaw boundary, where they must be closed on that boundary. Those South of the Basis Parallel have already been 

surveyed, except one tier of Townships East of Pearl river, 

which will be run North, and closed on the Basis Parallel, 

making corners wherever the Range lines and the Meridiana1 section lines may intersect that line.-All the miles (as we 

must call them) on the Township and Range lines, are intended to be exact miles, except on the closing lines, where 

they may be more or less than a mile. On these closing lines, 

or miles, the surveyor must return, and fix the quarter section corner equidistant from the Township corner and the 

nearest mile, or section corner, both on the Township and 

Range lines. 

Plan for running interior Section lines, 

In Townships East of the Basis Meridian and 

North of the Basis Parallel. 

Beginning on the South boundary of the Township at the 

corner of sections 31 and 32 and running due North between 

those sections half a mile and fix the quarter section corner, 

and continue to the end of the mile and set a temporary corner 

stake. Thence run due West on a randum line between sections 30 and 31, measuring carefully half a mile and set a 

temporary quarter section stake, and continue on to the in- 

-15- 

tersection with the West boundary line of the Township, and 

note the misclosure, if any, and return from the corner previously established, on the township line due East, marking 

as you go and noting the crossings of water courses &c. on the 

true line, and fixing the quarter section corner on that line 

equidistant from the section corners, and take bearings. Continue on due East until1 you intersect the line first run, and 

fix the corner of the section at the point of intersectien, and 

take bearings &c. Thence continue the line due East between 

sections 29 and 32 half a mile, marking the line as you go, and 

fix the quarter section post, take bearings, and continue the 

line one mile, and set a temporary corner stake. Then travel 

back on the line, and run due north one mile between sections 

267 
29 and 30, marking the line as you go, and fixing the quarter 

section corner, and setting a temporary section corner post. 

Thence on the randum line due West between sections 19 and 

30 setting a temporary quarter section stake, and noting as 

before, the intersection on the West boundary of the 

Township-Return and mark the line from the corner due 

East, noting the crossings of streams &c. on the true line till 

you intersect the Meridian section line, and there fix the 

section corner, taking bearings &c. and continue on due East 

between sections 20 and 29 one mile and set a temporary 

section corner stake-return on the line, having as before 

fixed the quarter section corner at the half mile, run due 

North between sections 19 and 20, and continue in like manner to run and mark in the following order all the lines, 

between sections 18 and 19,17 and 20,17 and 18,7 and 18,8 

and 17,7 and 8,6 and 7, then run a randum line due North 

between sections 5 and 6, measuring carefully, leaving a 

temporary quarter section stake at half a mile, and noting 

the intersection on the North boundary of the Township, East 

or 

-16- 

West of the corner and then correct the line back on a direct 

course from corner to corner, and mark the true line, noting 

the crossings of the streams on that line and fixing the quarter section post equidistant from the section corners-then 

run due East, marking the line as you go, between sections 5 

and 8, fixing the quarter section corner, and setting a temporary mile corner-then run a randum line due North from the 

last mentioned corner between sections 4 and 5, leaving a 

temporary stake at half a mile, and note the intersection East 

or West of the corner on the Township line, and length of the 

line, and run due South from the corner to intersect the 

section line last run by you; fix the section corner at the 

intersection, and run the line due East between sections 4 

and 9, and return on it having set a temporary mile, or section 

post, and fixed the quarter section corner at half a mile, and 

then run due South between sections 8 and 9 in like manner 

as before, marking the lines and fixing the quarter section 

corners to suit the measurement which you may have found 

on the opposite side of each section respectively, till you 

arrive at the North-East corner of section 32-then run a 

randum line due South between 32 and 33, and correct back 

on a direct line from corner to corner of these sections, and 

then run due East marking the line between 28 and 33 one 

mile, and set a temporary mile post, having marked the 

quarter section as before directed, and then run a randum 

line due South between sections 33 and 34, and note the 

intersection and length of line-then return due North from 

the corner, marking the line and fixing the quarter section as 

you go, and noting the crossing of streams to the intersection, 

at, or near the section corner; set the corner at the intersection, and run due East between sections 27 and 34 one mile, 

setting the quarter section corner and a temporary mile 

post-return on the 

-17- 

line and run due north between sections 27 and 28, on the 

same plan as before and mark the line between sections 22 

and 27,21 and 22,15 and 22,15 and 16,lO and 15,9 and 10, 

and then run a randum line due North between sections 3 and 

4, and correct the line back on a straight course from corner to 

corner, fixing the quarter section corner equidistant from the 

section corners, and noting the crossing of streams on the 

true line. Then run due East between sections 3 and 10, 

marking as you go, and setting a temporary section post. 

Then run due North between sections 2 and 3 on a randum 

line as before, and return from the corner due South marking 

the line and fixing the quarter section corner, and make the 

section corner at the intersection, take be.arings and run due 

East between sections 2 and 11 one mile and set a temporary 

mile post, and fix the quarter section corner, and then return 

and run due South between sections 10 and 11. Then East 

between 11 and 14.-Then South between 14 and 15, and so 

on to the North-East corner of section 34. Then run a randurn 

line between sections 34 and 35, noting the intersection and 

length of the line, and correct back on a straight line from 

corner to corner, of the sections. Then run due East between 

26 and 35 one mile and set a temporary mile stake, and run 

due South between sections 35 and 36 to intersect the South 

boundary of the Township, and return from the corner due 

North fixing the quarter section post, and making the section 

corner at the intersection. Thence run due East on a randum 

line between sections 25 and 36, and correct back on the 

straight line from corner to corner as before. Then due North 

between sections 25 and 26. Then East between 24 and 25, 

and so on till you arrive at the South-West corner of section 

one. Then run due East on a randum line and correct back 

between sections 1 and 12, and likewise 

-18- 

between sections 1 and 2, and you will end the work at the 

South-West corner of section one. By this plan two of the 

sectional meridians will be run South, and the other three 

North, through the Township.-The measurement will be 

checked at every mile, and can never err much. The only lines 

which may diverge from the cardinal points, will be those 

between sections 5 and 6,3 and 4,l and 2,32 and 33,34 and 

35, and the tier on the East side of the Township, between 1 

and 12,12 and 13,13 and 24,24 and 25,25 and 36, and these 

will diverge very little, if the measurement on the Township 

lines be correct, and the section lines well run. The measurement on the interior lines cannot derange the work, which 

will be a great advantage in the plan. All the interior lines 

will be run due North, South, East or West, except those 

mentioned on the exterior tiers of sections. If on intersecting 

at the interior section corners in open level land, you come 

within twenty-five links of the temporary corner, then the 

quarter section may stand as first set, because it is presumable that in common rough woods, another set of chain carriers might make that much difference in a mile, and the 

quarter section corner would only be affected by half the 

error, that is twelve and a half links. It is not to be taken for 

granted that one measurement is better than another, in 

small differences, when both are made with equal care. In 

very broken country, and difficult to measure, then double 

that allowance may be made. but if the error in closing a 

section exceed that, then the quarter section corner must be 

corrected. It will not be very inconvenient generally, to go on 

268 
a marked line half a mile to correct a corner. It will still be 

much better than the old plan of going over all the lines twice. 

It is believed that very few of the quarter section corners will 

need correction, except the outside tiers, because all the interior lines 

-19- 

may generally be chained by the same chain carriers, and 

they will not make much difference in each mile. The surveyor, too, may exercise his judgment as to which of the half 

miles are best measured, and make allowances of that nature. In deep swamps where the land will not be saleable till 

long after the posts are decayed, the surveyor may correct the 

quarter section bearings by calculation, and not return to 

remove the stakes, because if removed they will not be of use 

in such places, but this should not be done in any position 

where those stakes might mislead a person who may be 

exploring the country to purchase land. 

In Townships East of the Basis Meridian and North of the 

Basis Parallel, the sectioning will commence on the South 

boundary of the Townships generally, between sections 31 

and 32, and end at the South-West corner of section one. 

In Townships West of the Basis Meridian and North of the 

Basis Parallel, the sectioning will commence between sections 35 and 36, and end at the South-East corner of section 6. 

By the same rule, in Townships South of the Basis Parallel 

and West of the Basis Meridian, the sectioning would commence between sections 1 and 2 and end at the North-East 

corner of section 31, and in Townships South of the Basis 

Parallel and East of the Basis Meridian, the beginning would 

be between sections 5 and 6, and end at the North-West 

corner of section 36. But it is not supposed that there will be 

any now to run South of the Basis Parallel in this State, 

except a tier of Townships East of Pearl river, which will have 

the section lines run North and West to close on the Basis 

Parallel, to complete the old district in that quarter. 

If navigable rivers or lakes pass through the Townships or 

into them, the section lines on one side of 

-20- 

such rivers and lakes may be run, and then on the other side, 

running the lines due North, South, East or West from the 

Township lines to such rivers or lakes, keeping as much as 

possible to the order and principles of intersecting at the 

corners to form the sections on the general plan. In noting the 

banks of streams, instead of North or South, East or West, 

always use the terms right, and left bank, applying the terms 

as if you were decending the stream, and not ascending it. 

Corner posts and marks. 

The posts must be large enough to mark the necessary 

numbers on. Those at the corners of Townships should be 

larger than others, to distinguish them. They should be all 

hewn square from the top about a foot down. The Townshp 

corner posts should not be less than 5 inches square, the 

section posts about 3 to 4 inches square, and the quarter 

section posts hewn on two sides only, made smaller than the 

section corner posts. They should all be set firmly in the 

ground, say to the depth of 18 inches or more, if the surveyor 

has the means of setting them to that depth, but as it will not 

be practicable for the surveyor to carry a spade, or other 

instrument to dig holes of such depth in all situations, he 

must fasten the posts in the best manner in his power, the 

time he can spare for that object, and his means of performing 

the work. The posts should be about two and a half feet above 

the ground; if they are taller, they are more liable to be 

loosened, or pressed down by cattle. All the posts are to be of 

the most durable wood at hand. I had intended not to have the 

posts marked, except in the absence of trees, because they are 

liable to be twisted round from their proper positions, by 

designing persons, by carelessness or ignorance, and are in 

that situation, calculated to deceive persons who may take 

numbers from them to enter land; 

-21- 

but as the Commissioner has directed that the section numbers shall be marked on the posts, it must be done until1 

further orders. In a Southern climate, where posts of the best 

wood will last but a few years, it is time thrown away, to mark 

such posts as the surveyors are generally compelled to use, of 

young, green, perishable wood, many of which posts are gone 

in 2 to 3 years, and some in one year. In prairies or other 

places, where there are not trees convenient to mark, then all 

the necessary numbers of sections, townships and Ranges 

must be marked on the posts.-The quarter section posts 

must be marked thus 1/4 the letter S. for section may be 

omitted on all the posts and trees, as it is sometimes mistaken 

for the figure 8, or 3, and the numbers are as well understood 

without it as with it, particularly if they are marked in a 

uniform manner, as they must be. 

In prairies a small mound of sod is to be thrown up around 

the post, say 18 inches high and thirty inches across the base. 

The proper numbers of section, Township and Range, are to 

be marked on trees, if trees are found standing within 500 

links of such corners, and for quarter section corners, if within 300 links. Four trees are to be marked at each corner that 

is intended as a common corner to four sections, but if it is a 

corner to two sections only then two trees are to be marked in 

like manner, corresponding with the sections in which the 

trees stand. 

At each of the interior section corners, one of the trees only 

need to be marked with the number of the Township and 

Range. The letters T and R, must be marked on the left of the 

respective numbers, and the letters E and W, on the right to 

designate the Rrange East, or West, of the Basis Meridian; 

always marking in one uniform manner, that is, Range first, 

then Township underneath, and the section number 

-22- 

under that, as the law directs. The quarter section reference 

trees, must be one on each side of the line, if practicable, and 

marked as the stake, thus V4. On Range lines, the number of 

Range and Township must be marked at each section corner, 

on two trees, one on each side of the line, following the same 

rule on the Township lines which run East and West.-Red 

oil paint is required to be traced in the grooves of all the 

letters and figures on the trees, but may be omitted on the 

269 
posts, on account of their perishable nature, except in 

prairies where there are not trees to mark. 

The paint recommended by painters, as being most durable 

and cheap, is called Venetian red. It can be had in Natchez at 

25 cents a pound, ready ground and mixed with oil. It has cost 

37 1-2 cents in this town. From the small trial which has been 

made, it required about one pound to six corners of four 

sections each. It may be more or less. Strong tin cases have 

been used to carry it in, and a small one for one of the hands to 

carry each day. 

At the Township and section corners, as well as at the 

quarter section corners and fractional section corners, on 

water courses or elsewhere, the distance and course from the 

corner, must be taken to two of the reference trees, if practicable and noted in the field book, with the name and diameter of 

such trees. The bearings and distance to two trees will do, 

because that number is required to fill the form prescribed for 

the descriptive notes, and may be sufficient to perpetuate the 

corner. 

Marking of lines. 

All trees in the lines are to be blazed where the line strikes 

them, and on the opposite side, where the line leaves them. 

Trees within three feet of the line where the timber stands 

verry thick, and within five 

-23- 

or six feet on either side where timber is scattering may be 

blazed on the side facing the line, or a little turned in the 

direction of the line, so as to be easily seen by a person who 

may be following the line. On one side of the line let the blazes 

be a little turned one way, and on the other side, in the 

opposite direction, so that the line may be easily followed 

either way. 

Trees on the Township and Range lines, are to have two 

chops below the blaze, and those standing in the section lines 

in the interior of the Townships are to have one chop under 

each blaze. Where the timber is scattering, it will be proper to 

note the distance to a tree now and then, on the line, from the 

section corner run from, which tree may be notched instead of 

being only chopped. The surveyor will notice the shape of 

water courses, ponds, prairies &c. as he goes along the lines, 

and in passing through the sections, by which he may be 

enabled to lay down in the maps, a good eye draft of all those 

objects with the conections of streams, and the bearings and 

connections of roads and paths. He should have the form of a 

Township, with the square sections in his field-book, and 

while on the ground, represent as well as he can judge by the 

eye, on such maps, all the objects above mentioned, and the 

windings of swamps, or low land along the water courses of 

note. 

By a little and proper attention to these matters on the 

ground, the maps may be made to represent the country, 

much better than has generally been done heretofore. It will 

hinder very little time to do it, and it is the duty of the 

surveyor to give as good a representation of the country as 

circumstances will justify, particularly in shaping and connecting water courses, swamps, ponds and roads. 

-24- 

Of Marks on Trees. 

It is proper to instruct the surveyor as to the manner of 

marking letters and figures on trees. It is known that marks 

on the bark of trees are more durable than those made on the 

wood. There are few persons who perhaps have not noticed 

dates cut on Beech trees near public roads. From such dates it 

is evident that the wood could not have endured so long. If a 

block be cut out to make a flat surface to mark on, water will 

lodge in the cut and destroy the tree. It would not be practicable to cut small trees so much as to make a flat suface to mark 

on, without injuring the tree. Nor would it be practicable to 

block out many kinds of trees, as proposed by the Commissioners suggestins, even with the help of a mall and iron 

wedge. All trees therefore that have bark smooth enough to 

mark on, must be marked on the bark. If pine trees are cut to 

the wood, the turpentine will soon obscure the marks, which 

will soon be destroyed by fire. They should therefore be 

marked on the bark only, scraping off the scales to get a 

smooth surface. On old oaks & hickory trees, the bark must 

be removed, and marks made on the wood, and the place 

should be made so wide as to prevent its growing over in 

many years. 

Variation of the Needle. 

I shall make some remarks on the variation of the needle to 

show the importance of attending to it. In running long East 

and West lines, it would be best to ascertain the variation at 

each end of the line, and some intermediate points, as it may 

not be uniform on the whole line, but it will not vary much 

from uniformity in such distances as across a district, or State 

perhaps. It has been found to change much faster in going 

East from the Mississippi river in this State than was at first 

supposed. 

-25- 

On the Basis Parallel East of the Choctaw district, it was 

found to alter twelve minutes in the first thirty miles, and 

fifteen minutes in the next thirty miles, which occasioned 

that line to incline too much to the North in going East, 

because the surveyor, did not change his variation for the 

first thirty miles, which carried the line too far North by an 

angle equal to six minutes, or half the difference for that 

distance, being equal to a departure of 420 links, and again at 

the end of the next thirty miles, equal to an angle of 7 1-2 

minutes, making another departure North, equal to about 

525 links, which added together will make the whole error 

about 945 links. This error will be corrected on the first 

Township line North of the Basis Parallel, by directing the 

surveyor to change his course two and half minutes for every 

six miles, except in Range 12, after the first six miles from the 

standard Meridian to the Alabama State line. On the vernier 

of Stancliff & Draper’s makes of compasses, the angle of two 

and an half minutes may be seen, the vernier being divided to 

every five minutes. The East and West district lines, as I 

shall here call them for explanation, are to be laid off at 48 

miles apart. Now suppose a Meridian on the West side of such 

district, near the old Choctaw boundary, to be run due North 

270 
forty eight miles, and another Meridian run with the same 

compass, without altering for variation near the East side of 

the district, say at 60 miles East of the first Meridian, and the 

error in the course of the latter would make a departure at the 

end of the forty-eight miles of thirty chains and twenty-four 

links. This shews the propriety of observing the variation 

carefully, at short distances and conforming to it in runing 

the lines. The natural convergency of the Meridians in going 

North is equal to about thirty six chains and sixty links, in 

forty-eight miles, between two Meridians starting sixty 

miles apart, 

-26- 

on the said Basis Parallel. This shews the propriety of having 

standard Parallels at about forty-eight miles apart, on which 

to measure exact miles to continue the surveys North or 

South. 

There is a considerable difference between different compasses as to the variation of the needle. At this office there 

has been found by comparison on the same lines, a difference 

of twenty-four minutes. This shews the propriety of comparing the compasses which are to be used on the surveys, because in this case if one of these compasses were set to the 

angle of variation indicated by the other, they would run 

lines diverging from each other by the angle, of their difference, which in this case is 24 minutes, which in a line of 

forty-eight miles in length, would make the departure between them, equal to 26 chains and 88 links, being considerably more than a quarter of a mile. It is probable that for want 

of the proper attention to these circumstances, the public 

surveys have been found to differ so widely from each other in 

many places. 

These differences between instruments, and inattention to 

the variation in different parts of the country, with some 

carelesness and want of skill, added to bad measurement, is 

calculated to bring the buisiness and the surveyors into disrepute, and produce a deplorable derangement in the public 

surveys. 

While on this subject, I think it proper to make a few 

remarks on the methods of tracing a Meridian, which is so 

essential to the accuracy of the public surveys. The easiest 

and most practicable mode, is by observing the pole star on 

the meridian of the place, which is known by the star called 

Alioth passing over the pole star, being the one next to the 

square, in the tail of the Great Bear, (Epsalon Ursa Majoris,) 

four minutes after which, the pole star is on the Meridian of 

that place. The other star commonly used for the same purpose, in the winter season, when Alioth 

-27- 

is below the pole, in the night, is the star called Gamma, in 

the Constellation, Cassiopea, nine minutes and twenty-five 

seconds after this star is vertical to the pole star, the pole star 

is on the Meridian, at which times respectively, a Meridian 

may be staked out, and by applying the compass to it, the 

needle will shew the variation. 

I perceive from Ellicotts journal, that while he was on the 

line of the 31” lat. on the South boundary of this State, he 

traced Meridians, by taking the greatest elongations of the 

pole star, East and West, then measuring a convenient distance on each line, and then a line across the angle, and 

bisecting it in the middle. He used for this purpose, several of 

the stars which revolve round the pole. As it is presumed, 

however, that every surveyor, before he depends on his own 

observations, will practice taking them, with some experienced person, I shall only refer him to Gummere’s treatice on 

surveying, a very good work which explains the method of 

tracing a Meridian by the greatest elongation of the pole star, 

and the manner of fixing a plummet line which mode of fixing 

a plummet line will serve for both methods. 

I shah11 only remark that in practice in the woods, the 

compass sight may be more conveniently used by setting the 

compass on a stake South of the plummet line, and turning 

the compass on the ball and socket, to follow’the motion of the 

stars, than by using a sliding board, it being inconvenient to 

carry a board in the woods for that purpose. The sight of the 

compass next to the plummet line, must be taken off, at the 

time of making such observation. 

It may be proper to caution the surveyor, that if he suffers 

the glass of his compass to rub against woollen cloth, in 

carrying it, the glass will be affected by electricity and cause 

the needle to adhere to it, which may be removed by blowing 

the breath on the glass, or 

-28- 

moisten it in any way. The surveyor should leave a stake 

where he moves his compass from, on a line, in order to take a 

back sight. This precaution is necessary to detect local attraction, or error in setting the compass. The flag staff may have 

fastened to it, a straight stick about an inch square and a foot 

long, at the hight of the eye, with a common wood screw or 

nail, through the centre for it to turn on up or down, by which 

the flagman may set it in the direction of the line back, and 

see how to pursue his course forward, leaving a stake to guide 

the surveyor and chain-men. In open woods this may facilitate the work. 

In traversing water courses, the section lines must be extended to such water course, before the traverse is taken, in 

order to connect the traverse with the lines, and the surveyor 

must see by the help of the traverse tables, whether the 

surveys will close well, before leaving the Township. This 

matter must be strictly attended to. The annexed table will 

show the natural convergency of the Range lines of 

Townships, from the Basis Parallel to the distance of fortyeight miles North, which, with little alteration will apply as 

far North as to the Tennessee line, for each distance of fortyeight miles. The Ranges are considered to be just six miles 

wide on the Basis Parallel, and will be about five miles and 76 

chs. 24 lks. wide when they reach the standard Parallel, on 

which Parallel it is intended to close those Ranges and lay off 

exact miles again, from which to carry on the surveys North. 

With these instructions and remarks, accompanied by a 

specimen form of a field-book and map, and the requirements 

set forth in the “Contract,” it will be easy for the surveyor to 

make his surveys and returns in a uniform manner, according to the provisions of the laws, and forms prescribed by the 

Government.-I have been lengthy and particular, because 

the instructions are to be printed, and become permanent; 

271 
-29- 

and the cost will be but a trifle more on account of their 

length. The surveyor will be put out of doubt upon, perhaps, 

every point, on which he will need instructions. He will see 

the reasons and authority on which the instructions are 

founded, which is a good general rule as far as practicable in 

relation to public officers and agents in our government. 

Officers and agents should know that nothing unreasonable 

or illegal is required of them, and they will cheerfully comply 

with their duty, and be enabled to give satisfactory information to others who may ask it, in relation to their business. 

The measurement must be made in a horrizontal manner 

as much as possible, by holding up the hind end of the chain 

over the pin, in going up hills, and the fore end in going down 

hills, letting the pins drop from the end of the chain to the 

ground, or by taking the angle of elevation or depression or 

rising ground, and make the proper allowance, which would 

be more correct. The pins must be made of iron, about a foot 

long, and half inch thick two inches from the point, and 

tapered from that upwards to the size of large wire, having a 

ring turned at the top, of half inch or three quarters diameter, 

in which to fasten a bunch of red cloth or ferritin. 

The surveyor should have a spare chain, by which, to adjust 

the other, and compare them every morning. If a spare chain 

cannot be had, then he must have two sticks, each three feet 

in length, and measure the chain by stretching it on smooth 

ground, a log, or cut down a small straight tree for the purpose, holding one stick fast while the other is carried forward 

alternately. The sticks should be square at the ends, and used 

with care. They must agree with the standard measure of this 

office. 

I subjoin a list of compasses which have been compared at 

this office, shewing the variation on each, 

-30- 

that the surveyor may thereby adjust his compass to agree 

with others in any part of the country in which they may be 

used. 

The distances set down in your field-books, must be in four 

pole chains, and links, and not in two pole chains, as has 

frequently been done heretofore. 

As it is desirable that there should not be two corners on 

the same line, very near to each other, I think it proper to 

direct the Surveyor, in closing the last mile to the standard 

Parallels, or standard Meridians, to run a guide line, and if it 

intersect nearer to the mile post, than ten four pole chains, 

then to close such last mile to said mile post, by a straight line 

from the last corner set, and make this a general rule in all 

cases, except some particular reason may render it improper, 

which will not apply generally. There are inconveniences 

arising from two corners being near to each other in the 

public surveys. There must not be two sets of corners on the 

Standard Meridians in any case. 

As it is possible that the tier of sections, along the standard 

lines, may, in some instances, be much larger or smaller than 

it was intended to make them, by reason of those lines having 

been run of great length, without any check on the course or 

measurement. It is necessary to give general instructions as 

to the closing sections along the lines. If the section lines, of 

the tier of sections next to the standard parallels, be longer 

than one mile, and less than one and a quarter miles, then the 

quarter section corner must be set half way on such closing 

lines; but if those closing lines are a mile and a full quarter 

long, then the mile corner shall be set at the mile, and the 

additional quarter of a mile shall make a lot in the same 

section, turning such lot with its longest sides in the direction 

of East and West, and making ten lots in the section; eight of 

which may contain eighty acres each, and 

-31- 

the other two, nearly or quite, the same quantity each. But if 

the lines are more than a mile and a quarter long, and less 

than a mile and three quarters, then, the mile and half mile 

corners are to be set at an even mile, and even half mile from 

the nearest interior section corner on the same line, South of 

such standard parallel, and the lots will be laid off with their 

lengths North and South as other sections; in which case a 

section adjoining a standard parallel may have twelve lots, 

laid off as half quarter sections, eight of which may contain 

each eighty acres, and the other four, being the northern tier, 

may contain more or less than eighty acres each, This is, I 

presume, as far as I need go with these instructions, as it is 

hardly probable that the standard lines will close so badly as 

to exceed three quarters of a mile more, or fall short that 

much, in their closing points of intersection. If they should, 

however, we cannot, according to law, make more than thirty-six sections in a township of public land, but must divide 

the tier of sections into more lots next to the standard lines. 

The large or small sections, which may happen along the 

standard Meridians, must be governed by the same principles, but the lots, in that case, will seldom exceed a quarter of 

a mile in width, East and West; but if the closing lines are not 

more than a mile and half a quarter of a mile in length, then 

the excess may be divided equally among the eight half 

quarters of the section, and if the measurement exceeds that, 

then let there be ten lots made in the section, giving a quarter 

of a mile, in width, to each of the eight half quarters as usual, 

and the balance to the fractional quarters next to the standard Meridian. 

To remind the Surveyor, more fully, of the necessity of 

causing the measurement to be made in a horizontal manner, 

I refer him to the Traverse tables, where, at one view, may be 

seen the difference in the 

-32- 

length of the sloping line up or down the surface of hills. The 

latitude will be the horizontal length of the base line, where 

the angle of elevation, or depression, is less than forty-five 

degrees, and the departure will be the level, or base line, if 

the angle exceeds forty-five degrees. 

The angle of elevation, of only ten degrees, which the 

Surveyor, perhaps, would not notice, will make the base or 

level line sixty-one links shorter than the line measured on 

the surface, with the slope of the hill, in half a mile-being 

equal to 122 links in a mile. Steeper hills make a greater 

difference. If one side of a section pass over hilly land, and the 

opposite side over level land, the difference of measurement 

on the two sides will be very considerable if strict attention is 

272 
not had to levelling the chain, or taking the angles of elevation and depression, and making the proper allowance for 

such elevations and depressions. It is desirable that this part 

of the business be strictly attended to. 

It is proper to caution the Surveyors against a habit, which 

has been too much indulged in, of making abbreviations in 

words in an unusal manner. The field notes are intended to be 

recorded, and the language should be clear, full and comprehensive, so as not to be misunderstood. Such words as occur 

frequently and the abbreviation of which cannot be mistaken, as Diam., for diameter of a tree-Ins., for inches-Ch., 

for chains, and Lks for links, may be admissible; but the 

names of trees should be written in full-as white oak, water 

oak, sweet gum, &c., because there are other kinds of gums, 

and other kinds of oaks, &c. The word cross should be written, 

instead of a X. If this manner of abbreviating words is permitted, every Surveyor will have a different mode of abbreviating, until some may write in short-hand, which others cannot 

understand. 

-33- 

There has been a practice permitted, in suffering persons to 

come into the Surveyors Office, who have no particular business, and who disturb the regular order of business, by talking on subjects not necessary for the time and place. The 

Deputies are particularly requested not to practice this kind 

of conduct; but with as few words as practicable to do their 

business, and leave the office to give place to others who may 

have business to do. 

The Deputy Surveyors and others are requested, particularly, not to handle the files ofpapers in the office: because, by 

that means, the papers may be misplaced and the business 

retarded. The second clerk, when there are two or more 

clerks, will be entrusted with the files of papers, and to him 

application must be made for any information in such papers 

or field books. The chief clerk, in the absence of the Surveyor 

General, will have charge of the office, and give general 

directions, as to the manner of carrying on business in the 

office, so far as may be consistent and proper. 

The Deputy Surveyors are requested not to use the paper, 

quills and instruments belonging to the office. If one is permitted to take these privileges, another will claim an equal 

right. There is a regular estimate of stationary and contingent expenses for the office; and, except blanks, it is not 

contemplated that the Deputies are to use the office paper for 

their returns. They should have their returns made out in 

good order before such returns are presented. The returns 

must not be pepared in the office. The practice, by the Deputies, of preparing returns in the office, has been indulged in 

too much. The office should be as free from noise, and as little 

crowded as practicable. 

If irreconcilable difference of opinion should exist as to the 

business, between the Deputy and the Sur- 

-34- 

veyor General, then the matter in question must be referred 

to the Commissioner of the General Land Office for his decision. 

It is proper, too, to caution the Surveyors against a too 

confident expectation of receiving their pay for surveys, 

when their returns are ready for the office. Great inconvenience has arisen to the Deputies and others from this source. 

The funds, supplied by the government, have frequently 

been, and may again be, exhausted, and leave many accounts 

unpaid for months after such accounts have been approved by 

the Head of the Department. In some instances, there are 

errors in the returns, or omissions, which may occasion delay 

in the payment. All these contingencies should be guarded 

against, by the Deputies, by not contracting more debts than 

may be indispensable in the prosecution of the surveying, 

until their accounts are paid. 

Respectfully, 

GIDEON FITZ, 

Surveyor of the lands of the United States, 

South of the State of Tennessee. 

-35- 

The following table, shewing the natural convergency of Meridians of the Range lines of Townships, was politely furnished by Mr. ROBERT W. BOYD, one of the Cadets ofJefferson College, Mississippi. 

No. 

of 

Town. 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

Latitude 

of their 

commencement. 

31,52, 5,73 

31,57,18,30 

32,02,30,87 

32,07,43,44 

32,12,56,01 

32,18,08,58 

32,23,21,15 

32,28,33,72 

32,33,46,29 

32,33,46,29 

32,38,58,86 

32,44,11,43 

32,49,24, 

32,54,36,57 

32,59,49,14 

33,05,01,71 

33,10,14,28 

33,15,26,85 

33,15,26,85 

33,20,39,42 

33,25,51,99 

33,31,04,56 

33,36,17,13 

33,41,29,70 

33,46,42,27 

33,51,54,84 

33,57,07,41 

Lengths of the 

East and West 

Township lines 

mil’s ch‘s l’ks 

~~ 

6,00,00 

5,79,55, 4 

5,79,09 2 

5,78,63 6 

5,78,18 

5,77,72 3 

5,77,26 6 

5,76,79, 1 

5,76,34 5 

6,00,00 

5,79,52 8 

5,79,07 6 

5,78,59, 3 

5,78,11 1 

5,77,65, 6 

5,77,18, 6 

5,76,71 4 

5,76,24 2 

6,00,00 

5,79,53 4 

5,79,03 9 

5,78,55 8 

5,78,07 7 

5,77,59 6 

5,77,11 2 

5,76,62 9 

5,76,1432 

273 
No. Latitude 

of of their 

Town. commencement. 

24 33,57,07,41 

25 34,02,19,98 

26 34,07,32,55 

27 34,12,45,12 

28 34,17,57,69 

29 34,23,10,26 

30 34,28,22,83 

31 34,33,35,40 

32 34,38,47,97 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

Lengths of the 

East and West 

Township lines 

mil’s ch’s I’ks. 

6,00,00 

5,79,52 5 

5,79,01 7 

5,78,52 4 

5,78,03 1 

5,77,53 6 

5,77,04 1 

5,76,54 3 

5,76,06 3 

34,38,47,97 

34,44,00,54 

34,49,13,11 

34,54,25,68 

34,59,38,25 

6,00,00 

5,79,47 8 

5,78,97 3 

5,78,46 8 

5,77,96 1 

-36- 

WASHINGTON, Mississippi, 

Tuesday, October 11,1831. 

This evening, Gamma, the third star in the Constellation 

Cassiopea, was vertical with Polaris, at . . . . . .llh 26m 10s 

Time to elapse after those stars are on the same 

vertical line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 25 

Gives time at which Polaris is on the Meridian 11 35 35 

At this moment a very satisfactory observation was made, 

to trace a Meridian, agreeing, without the least apparent 

difference, with a mean of nine preceding observations made 

on the same ground, by Levin Wales, Esq., some, of Polaris in 

his transit of the Meridian, others, at his greatest Easterly 

elongation. 

Carefully compared with this Meridian, the following compasses indicate the variation respectively set opposite to 

each, viz: 

Owner of compass. 

Levin Wales. 

A. Downing. 

D. W. Connely. 

Edward R. Christie 

Henry T. Williams 

Wm. L. S. Dearing 

John B. Peyton. 

William Dowsing. 

George Dougherty. 

Jacob R. Sharkey. 

Reuben McCarty. 

By whom made. 

Chandler. 

stancliff & Drapet 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

B. Stancliff. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

Where made. 

Winchester, Va. 

Philadelphia, Pa. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

ditto. 

Easterly 

variation. 

8, 40, 00 

8, 32, 00 

8, 32, 00 

8, 35, 00 

8, 27, 30 

8, 16, 00 

8, 35, 00 

8, 30, 00 

8, 35, 00 

8, 30, 00 

8, 30, 00 

274 
xv. 

(The following copy of the Speciman Field Notes as prepared by Fitz were taken from the original document now in the 

possession of the National Archives.) 

SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES 

FOR THE USE OF 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS, 

IN THE 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

PREPARED 

IN COMPLIANCE WITH INSTRUCTIONS 

FROM 

ELIJAH HAYWARD, ESQ. 

Commissioner of the General Land Offices; 

bearing date 28th July, 1831; 

BY GIDEON FITZ, 

Surveyor of the Lands of the United States 

South of the State of Tennessee. 

May 1832 

WASHINGTON MISS. 

PRINTED BY ANDREW MARSCHALK. 

275 
STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

Ch. 

18 

26 

30 

38 

40 

60 

70 

80 

FIELD NOTES’ 

-4- 

L. 

50 

10 

Set 1st mile post, whence a 

Red oak, 12 in. diam. S. 30 E. 22 L. 

Hickory, 10 in. diam. N. 27 W. 10 L. 

along the creek. 

Undulating second rate land, oak and hickory; cane 

of Township No. 26 in 

Range No. 20, East 

Numbered from the Basis lines of the Choctaw district 

extended; 

Surveyed by 

Jonathan Straightline, 

Deputy Surveyor 

in year 1832. 

Variation of the Needle East, 

Approved by 

Surveyor of the Lands of the United States, South of the 

State of Tennessee. 

January loth, 1833. 

-2- 

NORTH BOUNDARY, T. 26-R. 20 E. 

Commenced January 10th 1831. 

George Careful, 

James Justice. 

John Keepline, 

Ezekiel Sharpaxe, 

The Chain Carriers duly sworn to perform their respective 

duties faithfully, as may be seen by reference to their several 

oaths and certificates, subjoined to this Field Book. [Or other 

book, as the case may be.] 

Began at the North West corner of this Township,’ and run 

due east. 

Chain Carriers. 

Flagman, 

Marker. 

I 

-3- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North EastDistrict. 

North Boundary, T. 26, R. 20, E. 

Through open woods to swamp, 

Cross small branch, runs S. W. 

To Young Woman’s Creek, runs S. E. 20 links wide, 

To open woods, 

Set 1-4 section post, whence a 

1st mile, run due East. 

White oak, 10 in. diam. N. 10 E. 20 L. 

Red oak, 15 in. diam. S. 20 W. 30 L. 

Touch bend of said creek thus 

To high land, 

1. For the notes of each separate mile, see reference table at the end of the book. 

2. If it is known to the Surveyor that the Corner is common to the three other adjacent 

Townships, he may add--“being the common corner of the three adjacent Townships,” 

or ifhe knows it is not and knows the distance, he may add, “being 00 ch. due E. W. N. or 

S.” [as the case may be] “from the Corner of the two adjoining Townships. 

Ch. 

10 

20 

30 

35 

40 

46 

80 

Ch. 

30 

35 

40 

48 

Ch, 

80 

30 

40 

60 

L. 

50 

50 

L. 

L. 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

North boundary T. 26, R. 20 E. 

Cross plain path, bears N. E. and S. W. 

Cross branch 15 L. wide, runs N. W. 

To deep pond, offset due South three Ch. 

Run due E. 5 Ch. to large creek 50 L. 

To East side of pond thus, 

Set ?4 sec post, whence a 

2nd mile due East. 

cross runs N. W. offset due North 3 Ch. to line 

Black oak 15 in. diam. N. 14, W. 13 L. 

White oak 10 in. diam. S. 10, E. 10 L. 

Cross road to leading from 

Set 2 mile post, whence an 

Elm 16 in. diam. N. 9, W. 150 L. 

Ash 20 in. diam. S. 15, W. 200 L. 

First quarter level 2nd rate land residue poor and hilly. 

-5- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

North boundary T. 26, R. 20 E. 

3d mile due East. 

Through open woods, hilly poor 

Land, pine and oak. 

To left bank Tie river, runs N. 

Set a stake, whence an 

Ash 18 in. diam. N. 10 W. 20 L. 

Red elm 17 in. diam. S. W. 100 L. 

Marked with proper numbers of 

T. R. and S. 

stake due South 3 Ch. whence a 

stake in the line on the opposite bank of the river, 

to stake on right bank, whence 

Run a base line from 

bears N. 59 E. 

a Sweet gum 18 in. diam. N. 10 W. 30 L. 

Ash 24 in. diam. S. 30 E. 20 L. 

Set % sec. post whence an 

Elm 18 in. diam. N. 20 W. 60 L. 

Beech 20 in. diam. S. 10E. 8 L. 

high bluff bank. 

Touch a bend of the river thus 

-6- 

‘ORTH BOUNDARY T. 26, R. 20 E. 

3d mile due East. 

Set 3d mile post whence 

Beech 12 in. diam. S. 20 E. 10 L. 

Sweet gum 18 in. diam. S. 20 E. 10 L. 

The river low ground is 

rich strong cane, above high water, except a few places. 

Growth Mulberry, Sassafras and sweet gum. 

4th Mile due East. 

To low land overflows 2 feet 

Set ‘/4 sec. post, whence a 

Mayple 40 in. diam S. 40 W. 16 L. 

Sycamore, 18 in. diam. N. 10 W. 15 L. 

To high land open woods. 

276 
Ch. 

40 

80 

30 

35 

340 

50 

Ch. 

380 

Ch. 

40 

80 

20 

40 

80 

L. 

80 

L. 

60 

L. 

Set 4 mile post, whence a 

Redoak12in.diam.N. 15W.20L. 

White oak 15 in. diam. S. 8 E. 6 L. 

Land 2nd rate, part overflows 2 feet. 

-7- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

North boundary T. 26, R. 20 E. 

5thmiledueEast. 

Set ?4 sec post, whence a 

Red oak 17 in. diam. N. 20, W. 109 L. 

Post oak 10 in. diam. S. 10, W. 100 L. 

Set 5 mile post, whence a 

Chesnut tree 10 in. diam. N. 3 W. 5 L. 

Chinkapin tree 8 in. diam. S. 4E. 10 L. 

First half mile level, 2nd rate, 

residue broken and poor, Oak, Hickory and some pine. 

6th Mile due East. 

Touch bend of a creek runs 

N. W. thus 

To low wet land 

Set ?4 sec. post, whence a 

Red oak20 in. diam. N. 15 W. 10 L. 

Persimmon tree 10 in. diam. S. 10 E. 20 L. 

To high land, open woods. 

-8- 

NORTH BOUNDADY OF T. 26 R. 20 E. 

6th mile due East, continued, 

Intersect East boundary of the 

Township 130 L. North of the Temporary post, and 

alargewhiteoakbearsN. 20E.30L. 

Redoak 15 in. diam. S. 14 W. 103 L. 

set the corner at the intersection, whence 

Poor hilly land, oak pine and hickory. 

-9- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

East boundary T. 26, R. 20 E. (see note page 2.) 

1st mile due North.-January 5th, 1832. 

Set ?4 sec. post, whence 

White oak 12 in. diam. N. 8, W. 20 L. 

Post oak 8 in. diam. S. 5, E. 30 L. 

Set 1st mile post, whence a 

Red oak 18 in. diam. N. 4 W. 15 L. 

Hickory 12 in. diam. S. 9 E. 5 L. 

Second rate level land, oak and Hickory. 

2nd Mile due East. 

Cross road leading from to 

Set Y4 sec. post, whence a 

Pine 14in. diam. N. 2 W. 20 L. 

Mayple 10 in. diam. S. 10 E. 34 L. 

Set 2 mile post, whence a 

Dogwood 8 in. diam. N. 30 W. 40 L. 

Pine 20 in. diam. S. 15 E. 12 L. 

High steep hills, Poor land, pine and oak. 

3. The distance to the temporary quarter section corner and section corner on the 

closing miles, should not be inserted, nor the bearings taken until the intersection is 

made, but a stake should be set at the supposed distance, or half mile and at the end of 

the mile to be removed if necessary, after the intersection is made. 

Ch. 

20 

30 

40 

60 

80 

Ch. 

20 

27 

40 

Ch. 

80 

40 

80 

Ch. 

40 

L. 

L. 

66 

L. 

L. 

65 

-10- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

East boundary of T. 26, R. 20 E. 

To swamp.-Boggy 

Cross alagoon, bears N. E. and S. W. 20 L. wide, 

Set ?4 sec. post 

3d mile due North. 

whence an 

Elm 18 in. diam. N. 20 W. 60 L. 

No other tree near 

To high land 

Set 3rd mile post whence 

Redoak20in.diam.N.20E.300L. 

No other tree near. 

Narrow ridges poor land, oak and pine 

20 Ch. boggy marsh, residue 

-11- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

East boundary T. 26 R. 20 E. 

4th mile due North. 

To left bank Tie river, set a stake, 

whence a red oak 12 in. diam. 

Bears N. 20 W. 10 L. no other tree near, 

From the stake run a base line N. 20 W. 5 Ch. 

whence a stake on the opposite bank of 

the river in the line bears, 

N.30E. widthofriveronthe 

line found by calculation 766 L. 

Mayple 10 in. diam. 

bears S. 10 E. 20 L. and a 

Dogwood N. 30 W. 40 L. 

to stake on right bank of the river, whence a 

Set '/4 sec. post whence 

Red oak 10 in. diam. S. 10E. 20 L. 

Beech 15 in. diam. N. 20 W. 15 L. 

-12- 

EAST BOUNDADY OF T. 26 R. 20 E. 

4th mile due North continued, 

Set 4 mile post, whence 

Red oak 10 in. diam. N. 10 E. 20 L. 

White oak 15 in. diam. S. 30 W. 40 L. 

North side of the river the soil is good, residue is poor 

Timber, generally oak and hickory. 

~~ ~ 

5th Mile due North. 

Set ?4 sec. post, whence a 

Pine 20 in. diam. N. 20 W. 10 L. 

Hickory 10 in. diam. S. 20E. 30 L. 

Set 5th mile post, whence a 

Red oak 30 in. diam. N. 40 W. 20 L. 

Blackoak18in.diam.S.30E. lOL. 

Second rate land lies well for cultivation. Oak, 

Hickory and some pine. 

-13- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

East boundary T. 26 R. 20 E. 

Set quarter section post, whence 

6th mile due North. 

Red oak 24 in. diam. N. 20 E. 30 L. 

277 
81 30 

i 

Ch. 

440 

480 

Ch. 

439 

479 

I White oak20 in. diam. S. 30 W. 100 L. 

Intersect North bounder ofTownship 

60 Links East of temporary corner, 

Set post at the intesection 

See bearings on the North boundary. 

See note, page 8. 

Land on this mile is somewhat broken, 

2ndrate. Oak and pine. 

Chain Carriers. 

GEORGE CAREFUL, 

JAMES JUSTICE. 

JONATHAN STRAIGHTLINE, 

Deputy Surveyor. 

January 20th, 1832. 

-14- 

L. 

15 

30 

L. 

80 

60 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

North East District. 

INTERIOR SECTION LINE T. 26 R. 20 E. 

Due North between sections 31 and 32. 

Set ?h sec. post, whence a 

Pine 20 in. diam. N. 20 W. 32 L. 

white oak 8 in. diam. S. 15 E. 30 L. 

To corner of sections 29,30,31 and 32 

See bearings on line between sections 30 and 31 

-15- 

I’OWNSHIP 26, RANGE 20 EAST. 

North East District of Mississippi. 

True line due East between sections 30 and 31. 

Set Y4 sec. post, whence a 

White oak 10 in. diam. N. 20 W. 50 L. 

Red oak 20 in. diam. S. 20 E. 10 L. 

Intersect at corner of sec. 29,30,31 and 32. 

30 L. North ofpost, set the post at the intersection, 

whence a 

Beech18in.diam.N. 10E.20L. 

Black oak 24 in. diam. S. 15 W. 100 L. 

First half is first rate level land 

Residue 2nd rate, oak and hickory, 

Sassafras, Mulberry &. 

section corners, and taking bearings, see note in page 14, 

at the end ofthe line between sections 31 and 32. 

For inserting the length of line to the quarter and 

4. The length of the line for the quarter sections and sections, should not be inserted 

until the intersection is made, but a stake should be set at the estimated distance and 

bearings taken at the quarter section comers, as the line progresses, which bearings 

should aRerwards be corrected if necessary as advised in the “instructions,” page 

18.-That is, ifthe quarter section stake stands within 12 links of the point, equidistant 

from the section corners on the same line, in open level country, it may remain without 

correction, or double that distance in very hilly or difficult country to measure, because 

it is found in common practice, that another set of chain carriers may make that 

difference, but ifthe error excoed that, then the quarter section stake must be removed, 

and the bearing corrected, except in low swamp difficult of access, where the land and 

timber is not saleable, the bearings may be corrected in the field book by caculation, or 

by taking similar angles and measurement at any suitable place, as that which would 

be necessary at the quarter section corner to correct it. The quarter section stakes in low 

swamps will soon decay, and if the field notes will furnish the means of finding the 

proper point from the reference trees, it may suffice. The operation by the chain and 

compass, to get the corrected bearings, will be preferable to calculation, and quicker 

done. 

Ch. 

Ch. 

540 

581 

L. 

L. 

70 

81 

-16- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, 

In running guide lines between the sections, the distance need not be taken more than half the estimated 

length ofthe line, because in returning on the true line 

the other half of the distance will be measured and will 

shew where the quarter Section should be set.-The 

crossings of streams, roads &c., must be noted on the true 

line, and not on the guide line, because the distances 

may be different on the two lines. In the Maps the distances are to be laid down on the true lines. 

In running guide lines where it is probable that the 

true line will diverge from the cardinal point, and the 

woods is thickly set with under growth, so that it is 

necessary to cut the way, then it will be best to run on the 

course which will probably intersect at the point aimed 

at, because the guide line being cut open, and very near 

the true line, may facilitate the return on the true line, 

and in some instances be in the proper place for the true 

line. 

-17- 

TOWNSHIP 26, RANGE 20 EAST. 

North East District, Mississippi. 

Guide line between sections 5 and 6. 

Intersect East of corner on the Township line 

True line between sections 5 and 6 S. 1.30 E. 

70 links, corrected back. 

Set ?4 sec. post, whence a 

Beech 10 in. diam. N. 10E. 40 L. 

Ash 18 in. diam. S. 5 W. 4 L. 

To corner of sections 5,6,7 and 8, 

See bearings on line between 6 and 7. 

2nd rate land, gentle undulating 

Oak Hickory &c., thick undergrowth ofbushes 

and vines. 

-18- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI. 

The foregoing examples and remarks it is believed will 

suffice for the purpose of attaining uniformity in the arrangement of the field books, and manner of noting generally. 

Other necessary information will be obtained from strict 

attention to the printed “instructions;” with which each surveyor will be furnished. It is intended that field books shall be 

furnished to the surveyor’s from the surveyor’s office; which 

books will be of uniform size, and ruled in a proper manner. 

They will be the length and width of this book, or they may be 

of fool scap paper, folded into eight pages per sheet, which 

will be the same in length up and down as this book, but a 

little wider, which will make the lines to write on some longer 

than these. 

Generally, it will be best to allow a page for each mile. This 

arrangement will facilitate the reference to any particular 

mile, and if some blank should be left on the page, it will not 

be objectionable. 

5. For length of line and bearings to reference trees, see remarks in pages 14 and 16. 

278 
GENERAL REMARKS. 

All streams deemed to be navigable even for small keel 

boats, and likely to be used as such, by the public, 

MERIDIANS. 

Between Between 

Sections. Page. Sections. Page. 

-21- 

PARALLELS. 

Between Between 

Sections. Page. Sections. Page 

-19- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI. 

are to be traversed on both banks to give the areas of fractional sections on each side of such streams. All Lakes of considerable size, say one hundred yards wide, having land fit for 

cultivation on their margins in quantity sufficient to induce a 

purchase of it, must also be transversed for a like purpose. In 

noting channels, the most appropriate terms should be used 

to convey the proper meaning. As a wide, or deep ravine, 

which is a channel generally dry in the summer and fall. 

Lagoon for a channel, filled with water, but which as no 

current; gully or dry branch, may serve for water courses, 

near their sources, which get dry in the summer and fall. In 

taking offsets to get round ponds or lakes, where it is not 

necessary to ascertain their exact shape, it may be done in the 

most convenient manner, but where a traverse is taken for 

the purpose of ascertaining the areas, of adjacent fractional 

sections, it must be done by course and distance, along the 

margin of such lake or water course, and the traverse connected with the section lines. In such traverse the mouths of 

creeks &c., must be noted, and out lets from such river or 

lakes. Base lines should be noted and intersections taken, to 

the upper and lower end of the Islands, in rivers and lakes 

worthy of being 

-20- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI. 

noted, so as to represent them properly on the Township 

Maps.-The width of the Mississippi river, should be taken at 

suitable places. 

Particular care should be had in noting the depth of inundation; and the quality of soil, whether fertile, loose, loam or 

sandy, wet or boggy. The field book should be dated frequently, and signed by the surveyor. If the same chain carriers 

measure all the lines of the Township, or lines noted in the 

field book; then a certificate to that effect, at the end of the 

book, signed by them will suffice; the object being to have 

their acknowlegement of services rendered; which cannot 

afterwards be disputed. 

The following may serve as a form of oath for chain carriers 

&C. 

We George Careful, James Justice, John Keepline and 

Ezekiel Sharpaxe, employed by Jonathan Straightline, Deputy Surveyor; do solemnly swear that, each of us will faithfully perform the duties of chain carrier, marker or flagman, as 

may be required of us, by said Deputy Surveyor; and make 

true report of the measurement, in such manner as he may 

lawfully direct, so long as we continue in his employ. Sworn 

to and subscribed before 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI. 

me this day of 

A. B. Justice of 

County, State of Mississippi. 

the peace in and for 

GEORGE CAREFUL, 

JAMES JUSTICE, 

JOHN KEEPLINE, 

EZEKIEL SHARPAXE. 

(Signed ,) 

In case a Magistrate cannot be conveniently had, the surveyor may administer the oath and certify it. It is not necessary to swear the Marker or Flagman, as the law does not 

require it, and slaves may be employed for this service. 

In traversing streams, the terms right and left bank must 

be used, always applying the terms as if you were descending 

and not ascending. 

For travers of any particular section, say, “traverse of right 

or left bank;” (as the case may be,) in or fronting section No. 

Base lines to calculate inaccessible distances, should be as 

long as they can conveniently be, because the compass is not 

calculated to take very accute angles with accuracy. An error 

of three chains is thought to be a liberal allowance to make in 

closing Townships, and 

-22- 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI. 

fifty links in closing sections in the most difficult ground to 

measure. 

The course and distance to two trees at each corner is to be 

noted, but four are to be marked as mentioned in the printed 

instructions, except it be a corner to two sections only. 

-23- 

REFERENCE TO TOWNSHIP AND SECTION LINES. 

For East Boundary of Township see page 

West do. 

North do. 

South do. 

LINES BET WEEN SECTIONS. 

19 and 20 

20 ---21 

21 -----22 

22 -----23 

23 -----24 

25 -----26 

26 -----27 

27 -----28 

28 -----29 

29 -----30 

31 -----32 

16 and 21 

17 -----20 

18 -----19 

19 -----30 

20 -----29 

21 -----28 

22 -----27 

23 -----26 

24 -----25 

25 -----36 

26 -----35 

279 
14 -----15 32 -----33 

15 -----16 33 -----34 

16 -----17 34 -----35 

17 -----18 35 -----36 

12 -----13 27 -----34 

13 -----24 28 -----33 

14 -----23 29 -----32 

15 -----22 30 -----22 

Specimen form for descriptive field Notes. 

STATE OF MISSISSIPPI, North East District. 

TOWNSHIP No. RANGE No. 

Quality of Land on the Boundaries of the Township. 

1st Mile, 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

II 

11 

I1 

II 

II 

East Boundary, run North. 

Poor land, Pine timber and reed brakes 

Low wet land, soil poor, timber Pine and Oak 

Low wet land, some parts boggy 

Level poor land, pine timber, sandy 

Hilly poor land, oak, Hickory and Pine 

Level 2nd rate land, oak and hickory. 

West Boundary, run North. 

Level 2nd rate land, oak and hickory 

Very broken steep hills, soil 2nd rate 

Rich level land, oak hickory and walnut 

First kalf good land, residue low swamp 

30 Ch. sypress swamp, residue low inundated 

20 Ch. low land good quality, residue hilly 

land 

and poor. 

1st Mile, 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

I1 

II 

,I 

II 

I1 

South Boundary run East. 

Broken poor land, pine and reed glades 

Level sandy land, pine and small oak timber 

2nd rate land, undulating, hickory and pine 

Narrow ridges of land, with reed brakes 

1st rate high land, sassafras, walnut and 

30 Ch. first rate river bottom, above high 

Mulberry 

I water. 

1st Mile, 

2 

3 

4 

11 

II 

II 

5 

6 

II 

,I 

North Boundary run East. 

Open pine woods large timber 

Stony hills, thinly timbered, oak timber, 

Poor blackjack ridges 

Braud ridges, gently undulating, hickory 

First half good level land, residue swamp 

30 Ch. swamp, residue high land 2nd rate. 

growth 

[Pages 2 through 8 of the descriptive notes are deleted here. 

The pages contain blank forms of no particular value. The 

footnote at the bottom of page 8 is included - following the 

deletions6 .I 

6. The advantages of this form of descriptive Field Notes, over that formerly used at the 

office of Surveyor of public lands, South of Tennessee, are that, it dispenses with the 

necessity of reference letters on the Township Maps, at each Section and half Section 

corner, on the boundaries of the Township, and the descriptive notes may follow the 

order in which the exterior lines were run. The left hand column of figures refering to 

the interior sectional lines being arranged in numerical order, will make it easy to refer 

to any particular section line. If the deputy Surveyors should at any time be required to 

make out descriptive notes for the townships, which they may survey, the necessary 

blanks on paper of the proper size, will be furnished to them, but that is not contemplated at present; and this specimen is furnished merely to make the Surveyor better 

acquainted with the system generally, and to show the propriety of being particular in 

preparing the field notes. 

May 1832. 

280 
XVI. 

(The copy of this circular was obtained from Records Group 

No. 49, National Archives.) 

Circular to Surveyors General. 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

8th May, 1832. 

SIR: 

Enclosed is a copy of the instructions to Registers and 

Receivers of the District Land Oflkes, prescribed by the 

Secretary of the Treasury, under the act of Congress, 

approved on the 5th ult., entitled “An act supplementary to 

the several laws for the sale of public lands.” 

The Registers of the Land Offices within your surveying 

department have been requested to furnish you with a schedule of such fractional sections, and parts of fractional sections, remaining unsold, as are liable to be subdivided under 

the act referred to. 

The Secretary of the Treasury directs that in making the 

subdivisions of those lands into quarter quarter sections, in 

pursuance of the provisions of this act, and on the principles 

of the act approved on the 11th February, 1805, entitled “An 

act concerning the mode of surveying the public lands of the 

United States,” you will be particularly careful not to leave 

fractions of less quantity than that contained in a quarter 

quarter section, or thereabouts, as nearly as practicable. 

Where a portion of a fractional section has heretofore been 

sold, the residuary portion will of course have to be subdivided, subject to any embarrassments resulting from the 

previous subdivisions of the portion sold. 

In all cases where the quantity of the fractional section or 

the portion thereof remaining unsold, and liable to be subdivided under the act of 5th April, 1832, admits of the sale of 

one or more quarter sections, you will subdivide such quarter 

sections into quarter quarter sections, and they will be described by the Registers as quarter quarter sections; and in 

describing the residuary lots or portions of such fraction, due 

reference must be had to the mode adopted in describing the 

portion of the fraction which has been sold. For instance, 

where the portion of a fraction heretofore sold has been described as a lot bearing a special number, the residuary 

fractions will have to be described as lots bearing numbers in 

a series consecutive to that commenced by the former subdivision. But where the lots or portions heretofore sold in the 

fraction have been described in reference to their relative 

position in the fraction and not by numbers, the description of 

the residuary portions of the fraction is also to be in reference 

to their position, and not by numbers. 

Fractional sections containing less than one hundred and 

sixty acres, or the residuary portion of a fractional section, 

after the subdivision into as many quarter quarter sections 

as it is susceptible of, may be subdivided into lots, each 

containing the quantity of a quarter quarter section, as nearly as practicable, by so laying down the line of subdivision as 

that they shall be twenty chains wide; which distances are to 

be marked on the plat of subdivision, as are also the areas of 

the quarter quarters and residuary fractions. 

In all cases where the land is described in reference to its 

relative position in the fraction, and not as a lot bearing a 

special number, the proper mode of describing it must be 

written in a tabular statement annexed to the plat of subdivision. 

You will be pleased to prepare and transmit to the several 

Registers the necessary plats of subdivisions as promptly as 

practicable after they shall have furnished you with schedules of the tracts to be subdivided. Copies of such plats are to 

be furnished at the same time to this office. The township 

plats hereafter to be prepared at your office must exhibit the 

subdivisions authorised by this act. 

I am, very respectfully, 

Your ob’t. servant, 

(Signed) ELIJAH HAYWARD 

Surveyor of Public Lands. 

281 
XVII. 

(These Instructions are copied from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives. The volume has a 

hand-written notation “Rec’d with S. G.’s letter dated Aug. 30, 1833.”) 

INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

[ARKANSAS, 18331 

283 
INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

Office of the Surveyor of Public Lands 

for the Territory of Arkansas, 

LITTLE ROCK, 183 

SIR : 

You will provide yourself with a good compass, of Rittenhouse’s construction; having a nonius; or, with a theodolite; 

also two two-pole chains of fifty links, which are to be regulated by the standard compass and chain in this office: one of 

which chains you will specially reserve as a standard for your 

field work, and by which you will adjust the one in active use 

at least every other day, if not oftener. 

Whenever the continuation of a surveyed line is interrupted by an impassable swamp, or from any other cause, the 

distance of the line actually run between the starting and 

finishing posts is to be truly noted; and if the impassable 

obstacle is a lake or swamp, of sufficient magnitude to require 

meandering, you will in that case and in all such cases, 

establish a corner at such interruption, in the same manner 

as is directed in cases of intersecting a navigable river. In 

order to ascertain the distance on any line not actually surveyed in consequence of insuperable obstacles, you will work 

by a traverse, or by offsets. If by offsets, you are to note them, 

as they are to be represented on the plat, to show that the 

distance across has been correctly ascertained; and also you 

will enter in your field-book, a description of such lakes or 

ponds, as a careful occular observation may suggest, that the 

same 

-4- 

may be exhibited on the plat, for which purpose you will 

please keep on a page of your field-book a plat of a township or 

line, on which you may portray such and other objects, as 

streams, prairies, &c. 

You will meander all lakes or ponds, if they are of sufficient 

magnitude to justify the expense. 

The courses of all navigable rivers, which may bound or 

pass through your district, must be accurately surveyed, and 

their width taken at those points where they may be intersected by township lines, and at other points, by trigonometrical process. The width must be frequently taken, 

particularly where there is a sensible variation in the width, 

to test the accuracy of the survey in connection with the 

adjoining lands, and the correct exhibition thereof in the 

township plats. And should you continue surveys on opposite 

banks of a navigable stream, you are to show the connections 

of such surveys with certain establishedposts or points on the 

opposite side and these connections, as well as the mode by 

which they were ascertained, are to be shown in your fieldbook. Thus, in meandering, if you are careful to render the 

established points, as sectional corners, &c. on the opposite 

side obvious, their bearing, taken from two stations, will not 

only give the width, but the connection which is desired. 

You will give the received names to all the rivers, creeks, 

lakes, and swamps, as also of prairies, hills, mountains, and 

other natural objects. You will never give original names to 

such objects, where names have heretofore been given. 

You will note precisely the distance to, and the width of, all 

streams, not navigable, which your line may traverse; also 

their general course, as accurately as you can conjecture. 

All mines, salt springs, salt licks, and mill seats; also towns, 

villages, and settlements, and the names of the same; also 

forges, factories, cotton gins, and all such items of information; also the general course of travelled roads and tracks, 

denoting the place to which they may lead; are to be noted in 

your field-book. 

-5- 

All township and sectional lines which you may survey, are 

to be marked in the manner heretofore practiced in the surveys of the United States, viz: all trees, which your lines cut, 

must have two notches made on each side of the tree where 

the line cuts it; but no spot or blaze is to be made on them; and 

all or most of the trees, on each side of the line and near to it, 

must be marked with two spots or blazes diagonally, or 

quartering towards the line. 

You will be careful to note in your field-book all the courses 

and distances you shall have run; the names and estimated 

diameters in inches, of all bearing or corner trees, and those 

trees which fall in your line called station or line trees, 

notched as aforesaid, together with the courses and distances 

of the bearing trees from their respective corners; also, the 

face of the country, whether level, rolling, hilly, or mountainous; the kinds of timber and undergrowth with which the 

land abounds, and the quality of the soil, &c. 

Though your lines be measured by a chain of two perches, 

you are notwithstanding to keep your reckoning in chains of 

four perches, or one hundred links each; and all entries in 

your field-book, and all your plans and calculations, must be 

made according to the decimal measure of a chain. 

Each of your sub-agents must take and subscribe the following oath or affirmation, before they enter on their duty: 

1,A-B , do solemnly swear (or affirm, as the 

case may be) in the presence of Almighty God, that I will 

faithfully and impartially execute and fulfil the duty which 

may be assigned me as chain-man, or marker, or any other 

service which may be required, in executing the surveys of 

the public lands, to the best of my abilities, so help me God. 

A-B- 

- 

Sworn to and subscribed before the undersigned, the 

day of 18 . B C , Dep’y. Surveyor. 

-6- 

This affidavit you will place in the front part of your fieldbook, and return the same with your field-book to this office. 

As the measurement by the chain is the principal source of 

errors in surveying, you will be careful to attend to your 

chain-men, that they carry the chain horizontally, and plumb 

284 
the pins. To prevent their losing a tally-rod, you must be 

provided with a set of them, pointed with iron or steel, and to 

allow none other to be used but the precise number which you 

shall have selected for that purpose. 

It is enjoined on you, not to employ any person whose 

character is known or suspected for wanting correct principles, as chain-man, marker, or any other important business 

in executing the surveys which you are to perform; nor is any 

one to be employed in the capacity above stated who is not a 

free white person, and who has not attained years of discretion sufficient to understand the nature and solemnity of an 

oath. 

The page of your field-book containing notes of the first 

work performed by you, must be numbered one (or 11, and 

progress in numerical order to the end of your book, or to the 

last page containing notes of your surveys. A blank page is to 

be left on the front part of your field-book, preceding the oaths 

of your chain-men, marker, &c. on which you are required, 

after having filled your book with notes, to make an index, 

showing the page at which the notes of every line or part of a 

line may be found. 

No lines of whatsoever description are to be run, or marks 

of any kind made by any person but yourself, or persons 

under your immediate inspection. Subcontracts are illegal. 

The United States’ surveys are required by law to be made 

agreeably to the true meridian, and at right angles therewith. You will therefore ascertain the variation of the needle, 

when sub-dividing townships, at least once in every third 

township, or eighteen miles, when they lay east and west, 

with respect to each other; and in every fourth township, or 

twenty -four 

-7- 

miles, when they are situated north and south, with respect 

to each other; and when surveying exterior boundaries, once 

at least on every fourth range, or north and south line; and 

once on every fifth township, or east and west line. The 

variation you will ascertain by an observation of the pole 

star. 

The posts must be erected at every half mile and mile from 

where the township or sectional line commenced, (except a 

tree may be so situated as to supply the place of a post.) All 

mile posts must have as many notches cut on each side of 

them, directed to the cardinal points, as they stand miles 

from the outlines of the township; and the township corner 

posts must be notched with six notches on each side, and the 

half mile quarter sectional posts are to be without any mark. 

All posts are to be at least two and a half feet above the 

surface of the ground, and in size not less than four inches in 

diameter at township corners-nor less than three inches in 

diameter at sectional and quarter section corners-and in all 

cases to be planted firmly in the earth in an erect position, 

and their places are to be perpetuated in the following manner, viz: At each post the courses shall be taken and the 

distance measured to two adjacent trees, in opposite directions, as nearly as may be, which trees, called bearing trees, 

shall be blazed on the side next the post, and one notch made 

on the blaze; and there shall be cut, with a marking-iron on 

the bearing tree, or some other tree within and near each 

corner of a section, the letter S., with the number of the 

section, and over it the letter T., with the number of the 

township, and above this the letter R., with the number of the 

range. But, for quarter section corners, you are to put no 

numbers on the trees; they are to be distinguished by the 

mark “Y4 S.” 

The above instructions are required by law; in addition to, 

or extension of which, I have received the following instructions from the Commissioner of the General Land-office, the 

execution of which is enjoined on you. 

-8- 

“Where a tree is not found immediately at the corner, a 

corner is to be established by planting a post, on which is to be 

marked the number of the township, over which is to be 

marked the number of the range, and underneath the number of the section. 

“The bearing and distance, also the names and respective 

diameters of the nearest trees from such corner, are to be 

carefully taken and noted in the field-book. The nearest of 

such trees (where there are more than one) is to be marked, to 

correspond with the marked corner. The mark should be 

made into such tree, in such a way as to be always distinguishable from a mere blaze. The letters B. T., to denote the 

fact of its being a “bearing tree,” should be distinctly cut into 

the wood, some distance below the other marks. All these 

particulars are to be most intelligibly and minutely noted in 

the field-book. The posts used in forming the corners of 

townships must always be larger (for the sake of distinction) 

than those which denote the sectional and quarter sectional 

corners, and should be neatly squared off at the top, to correspond with the cardinal points. The sectional posts are to 

indicate, by a number of notches on each side of the four 

corners, directed to the cardinal points, the number of miles 

that it stands from the outlines of the township-the side of 

the post will be numbered to correspond with the number of 

the section it faces. Each half mile post on a section line, and 

quarter section post on a township line, should be marked to 

indicate that it is a quarter sectional post, thus: l/4 S.-and 

the nearest adjoining tree on each side of such post, must be 

similarly marked. The surveyor to note in his field-book the 

kind of tree, its diameter, bearing, and distance, from the 

true corner. 

“Posts denoting the same kind or character of boundary, 

should be of uniform construction; and there should always 

be a striking difference between posts denoting different 

kinds of boundary.” 

In prairie countries, where bearing trees cannot be found 

within a reasonable distance of a corner which 

-9- 

you are to establish, you must, in that case, and in all such 

cases, erect mounds of earth, covered with sod, to perpetuate 

such corners. The mounds must be, for quarter section and 

section corners, two feet six inches high, and two feet diameter at the base; for township corners, three feet high, and two 

feet six inches in diameter at the base. And at all corners 

where mounds are necessary, you will deposit a rock, or 

rocks, weighing not less than ten pounds; a cylinder of charcoal, not less than six inches long and two inches diameter; or 

285 
a quantity of glass, or cinder from a black-smith's shop, not 

less than half a pint. 

Instructions for laying off and surveying the exterior 

boundaries of townships. 

31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 

In your field-book, the number of miles, chains and links, 

actually run and marked on a line, are to be exhibited in a 

column, which is to be added up at the foot of each page, and 

carried forward, from page to page, so as to form, at the 

conclusion of the book, the aggregate of miles, chains and 

links, run in the township or fractional township. 

Your field-notes are to be signed by yourself, and must give 

the names of the chain-men, marker, &c., employed in the 

survey, by their signature, or otherwise. 

36 

In surveying the exterior boundaries of townships, when 

running north or south, you must establish sectional corners 

for the townships west of the line, and not for the townships 

east of the line, except at township corners, where the number of the range, township, and section, must be marked in 

the corner of each township or fractional township, as represented on the sketch herewith furnished, marked No. I. 

On the east and west lines between townships, you will 

establish corners for the townships north of the line, and not 

south of it, except the corners of townships or fractional 

I I I I 

townships. 

DIAGRAM, exhibiting the exterior boundaries of Townships. 

I I I I I INo. I 

I- I- I12 - 12 - 

I3 - 13- 

12 - 

I3 - 

T. 15 N., R. 13 W. T. 15 N., R. 12 W. 

24 - 24- 24 - 

25 - 25- 25- 

DIAGRAM, exhibiting the exterior boundaries 

of Townships. 

T. I6 N., R. I3 W. T. 16 N., R. 12 W. 

36 - 

I12- 

13- 

24 - 

25- 

36- 

31 32 33 34 32 33 34 

I I I I I I 

I- I12- 12- 

13- 13- 

T. I4 N., R.13 W. T. 14 N., R. 12 W. 

24 - 24- 

25 - 25- 

31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 

I I IIi- I I I I I286 
-10- 

Chain compared and found correct. 

15 N, R. 12 W ofthe 5thprincipal meridian. 

North-along the east side of section 36, township 

A brook, 20 lks. wide, runs NW. 

A black-walnut, 15 ins. india. 

Set l/4 sec. corner post, from which a mulberry, 12 ins. 

dia. bears N 36 W, 54 links, and a hackberry, 24 ins. 

dia. bears S 45 E, 85 links. 

1 

, An ash, 15 ins. dia. 

The SW border of a lake, impassable. 

Thence offset N45 W, 10.00 

north, 5.00 

east, 7.07 to the true line at 

TheNE border ofthe lake, whichis 11.07 chs. wide. 

On the course north of offsets crossed the lake, where it 

is marshy. The marsh extends north-westwardly 

about 10 chains, where it terminates at bluffs, and is 

generally about 5 chs. wide. 

black-walnut, 28 ins. dia. bears S 74E, 70 links, and 

an ash, 33 ins. dia. bears N 87 W, 125 links. 

&c.; undergrowth, spice, papaw, &c. 

Set post corner to sections 25 and 36, from which a 

Land level and rich; timber walnut, ash, hackberry, 

Jan. lst, 18 . 

-12- 

Ch's. 

4.75 

39.75 

79.75 

The names of all bearing trees are to be fully written out; 

not abbreviated or expressed by initial letters. And you will, 

at the beginning of each of your field-books, and at the beginning of each day's work, when starting a sectional line, write 

out in full the name of the section, the township, north or 

south of the base line, and east or west of the 5th principal 

meridian. 

You will keep your field notes in the following form: 

East-corrected the line along the south boundary of 

Ared-oak, 8 ins. dia. 

Set %section corner post on the true line, from which a 

white-oak, 18 ins. dia. bears N 39 W, 132 links, anda 

black-oak, 28 ins. dia. bears S 48 E, 15 links. 

Raised a mound on true line, in which deposited a 

cylinder of charcoal, [or rock, glass, or cinder], corner 

to sections 31 and 32. 

sec. 31, T. 16 N, R. 12 W of the 5th principal meridian. 

M. Ch$. 

20.10 

32.25 

40.00 

42.18 

50.00 

62.07 

80.00 

-11- 

North-along the east side of sec. 25, township 15 N, 

The bank of-river, a navigable stream, 

R. 12 W. 

course eastwardly whereat set post corner to fractional section 25, T. 15 N, R. 12 W, and of fractional 

section 30, T. 15 N, R. 11 W, from which a sycamore, 

30 ins. dia. bears S 82 E, 20 links, and a box-elder, 12 

ins. dia bears N 89 W, 15 links. 

The north or left bank ofthe river, it being 10 chains 

wide, (the distance obtained by calculation,) whereat 

set post corner to fractional sections 25, T. 15 N, R. 

12W,and30,T.l5N,R,llW,northofriver, from which an elm, 15 ins. dia. bears S 88 W, 22 

links, and a hackberry, 17 ins. dia. bears N 72 E, 

12 links. 

Set ?4 sec. corner post, from which a hickory, 10 ins. 

dia. bearsN 20 W, 22 links, and an elm, 12 ins. dia. 

bears S 22 E, 40 links. 

south of W. 

Bluffs or highland, they bear a little N of east and 

A black-oak, 20 ins. dia. 

Set post corner to sections 24 and 25, from which a 

black-oak, 20 ins. dia. bears S 42 W, 26 links, and a 

white-oak, 30 ins. dia. bears N 46 E, 25 links. 

Land south of the bluffs level, wet, low grounds, that 

part immediately north of the river five chains, is 

much cut by sloos, and generally liable to 

inundation. Timber, oak, hickory, elm, ash, &c. 

Undergrowth, cane, vines and briars. Residue on the 

bluffs, hilly, rocky and poor. Timber, post-oak and 

black-hickory. Undergrowth, same. 

Proceed in this manner establishing quarter section and 

section corners, until you get six miles from the 

beginning, where you would (in this case) establish the corner of townships 15 and 16 north of the base line, of ranges 11 

and 12 west of the 5th principal meridian. We will suppose 

that the corner to townships 15 and 16 N, Ranges 12 and 13 

W, had been previously established. You would, in that case, 

run from the township corner just established a random line 

west, between townships 15 and 16, and keep your field-notes 

as follows: 

M. Ch's . 

18.75 

22.50 

40.00 

47.60 

73.00 

80.00 

West-on a random line along the south side of sec. 36, 

A brook, 12 links wide, runs SW. 

Entered a prairie, bears NE and SW. 

Set temporary '/4 section post. 

A brook, 15 links wide, runs south. 

Left prairie, bears north and south. 

Set post temporary corner, to secs. 35 and 36. 

Land uneven, mostly prairie, good soil; timber at the 

east and west part, oak, hickory, ash, &c.; undergrowth, hazle, vines, &c. 

T. 16 N, R. 12 W. 

Proceed in this manner until you intersect the range line. 

Note in your field-book the distance you fall north or south of 

the township corner, for which you run, as well as the length 

of the south boundary of sec. 31. We will suppose that the line 

along the south boundary of sec. 31 measured 79 chains and 

75 links. Then, in correcting the line between townships 15 

and 16, proceed as follows: 

M. 

2 

-13- 

Proceed in this manner, until you complete the correction 

of the township line, taking care to establish quarter section 

and section corners on the true line, and in all cases to throw 

the excess or deficiency of a township in the west tier of 

quarter sections. 

Instructions for sub-dividing townships into sections and 

quarter sections. 

When the township lines are completed, you must begin 

the survey of sections at the sectional corner nearest to the 

south-east corner of the township, and move on in continued 

progression, from east to west, and from south to north, 

(except in fractional township here it will in some cases be 

necessary to run from north to south), in order that the excess 

or defect of the township, as to complete sections, may fall on 

the west and north sides of the township, according to the 

provisions of the act of Congress of the 10th May, 1800. 

Each side of a section must be made one mile in measure by 

the chain, and quarter section corners are to be established at 

287 
every half mile, except when in the closing of a section, if the 

measure of the closing side should vary from eighty chains, or 

one mile, you are in that case to place the quarter section 

corners equi-distant, or at an average distance, from the 

sectional corners between which they are placed. But in running the sectional lines on the west or north side of the 

township, you will establish quarter section posts at the 

distance of half a mile from the last corner, and leave the 

remaining excess or defect on the west or north tier of quarter 

sections, which balance or remainder you will carefully 

measure and put down in your field-notes, in order to calculate the remaining or fractional quarter sections on the north 

or west side of the township. Also, in running to the western 

or northern boundary, unless your sectional lines fall in 

-14- 

with the posts established there for the corners of the sections 

in the adjacent townships, you must set posts, and take bearing trees at the points of intersection of your lines with the 

township boundary, and take the distance of your corners 

from the corners of the sections in the adjacent township, and 

note that and the side on which it varies in chains or links, or 

both. 

The sections must be made to close by running a random 

line, from one corner to another, except in the north and west 

ranges of sections, and a true line be established between 

them. 

ILLUSTRATION4see the plat of a township herewith 

furnished, marked No. II.] 

No. I1 

Township 15 North of the base line, Range 12 West of 

the 5th P. M. 

( No. II. - To front page 11. 1 

Township 15 North of the base line,Range 12 West of the 5th P.M. 

3 

4 

I 

59 5 10 

4 I3 

4 16 4 15 

4 3 

3 21 3 22 

4 3 

I 

Ill 

qQP 

s 

ye ~;f 

:I 0 PI 3 - 

0 

62 6 I- 

'2 I 

0 P 

3 0 

5 II 5 12 - 

2 I 

4 14 4 13 - 

2 I 

I 

2 26 2 25 - 

2 I 

I 

I 35 I 36 - 

I I 

oOn 

a 

H 

7 

I 

i 

K 

k 

L 

I 

M 

m 

N 

288 
Begin at 0, the corner of sections 35 and 36; from thence 

run a true north course 40 chains, and mark the quarter 

section corner between sections 35 and 36; continue 40 chains 

farther on the north line, and establish the corner to sections 

25,26,35 and 36. From this corner run a random line for the 

corner at M, without blazing; at the distance of every 20 

chains on this line set up a stake or post, or make some other 

mark on your random line. If you strike the corner at M 

exactly, you have only to blaze the line back, and establish 

the quarter section corner at the average distance between 

the corner at M, and the corner of sections 25,26,35 and 36; 

but if, on running for the corner at M, you fall north or south 

of it, you must note the deviation or departure in your fieldbook, and return on the true line, observing to correct it, by 

means of offsets, from the marks on the random line. From 

the corner of sections 25, 26, 35 and 36, run due north one 

mile, setting the half mile post for quarter section corner as 

before at 2, on the line from 0 to F. You will then travel to P, 

in the south boundary of the township corner to sections 34 

and 35, from whence you will run due north, and establish 

quarter section and section corners as before, and run a 

random line from the section corner on the line P E, to 

Ch's. 

15.80 

32.75 

40.00 

I 

40.50 

1 49.50 

90.00 

-15- 

the corresponding corner on the line 0 F. Proceed in this 

manner until you arrive at the last corner towards the western boundary of the township, from M to U, viz: the corner of 

sections 29, 30, 31 and 32; from this corner run west, and at 

the distance of 40 chains from it, establish the quarter section 

corner at 6, on the line from M to U. Continue west until you 

intersect the township boundary, suppose at U. Note the 

distance of the point of intersection from the last section or 

quarter section corner, and also the distance you fall north or 

south of the section corner of the adjacent township west of 

you. At the point of intersection at U, set the section post or 

corner, and take bearing trees. 

In this manner you will proceed until your township is 

completed, observing always to move in a range of sections, 

from that at the SE corner of the township to the western 

boundary, or from that section to the northern boundary of 

the township. When you shall have completed the sections, as 

far north as the south boundary of the northern tier of sections, you will proceed north from the last section corners, 

and establish quarter section corners at 40 chains from them; 

and continue north until you intersect the township line in 

the same manner as on the western side of the township, 

observing the distance at which you intersect the north 

boundary from the section corner you left last. You will also 

note the distance you may fall east or west of the sectional 

corner, for the township north of the line. 

In fractional townships, on navigable rivers, it will be 

necessary to vary from the foregoing rules, and the lines must 

be run from the sectional corners established in the rectilineal boundary of the township, whether north, south, east 

or west, as the case may be. The sections must be made 

complete, as far as it may be practicable to make them so, and 

the excess or defect of measure must be thrown into the 

fractional sections on the river. 

Great care must be taken that the north and south 

-16- 

lines be run according to the true meridian, as required by 

law, and the east and west lines to be run at right angles to 

them, as far as is practicable in closing. But if, on running a 

line east and west, you find the post you are running for, lies 

very much to the north or south of the line, you are then to 

mistrust the measure of the chain, and the lines on which the 

posts are established must be re-measured. 

Also, in running a meridian line by the compass, if you 

find, in the measurement of the closing lines of the sections, 

an uniform convergency or divergency of these lines, you may 

then mistrust the accuracy of the direction of your lines, by 

the needle; in such cases you will endeavor to run parallel to 

the meridian adjacent, on which the section closes, in order 

that it may contain the just or legal quantity of 640 acres, or 

one mile square. 

You will keep your field-books in the following form: 

M. North-between sections 35 and 36, township 15 north 

of the base line, range 12 west of the 5th principal 

meridian. 

A black-oak, 24 ins. dia. 

A brook, 18 lks. wide, runs SW. 

Set Yi sec. corner post, from which a white-oak, 18 ins. 

dia. bearsN, 28 W, 32 links, anda hickory, 15 ins. 

dia. bears S, 75 E, 44links. 

Entered a prairie, bears E and W. 

A brook, 12 links wide, runs SW. 

Raised a mound, in which deposited three rocks, corner 

Land, the south halfuneven, good soil, timber oak, 

to sec's. 25,26,35 and36. 

hickory, ash, &c. undergrowth hazle, vines, &c. The 

north halflevel, wet, prairie, thin soil 

January lst, 1833. 

Chain compared and found correct. 

M' 1 Ch's' I East-between sections 25 and36, T. 15 N. R. 12 W. 

M. 

M. 

1 

M. 

Ch's. 

9.50 

10.00 

73.00 

79.90 

Ch's. 

2.17 

39.95 

79.90 

Ch's. 

10.00 

20.00 

35.00 

-17- 

A creek, 80 links wide, runs NW., rapid current. 

Set temporary ?4 sec. corner post. 

Entered woods, bears NE and SW. 

Intersected the N and S line, G links north of the 

section corner. 

Land, west half level wet prairie; east half uneven, the 

prairie good soil, the woodland thin soil; timber oak 

and hickory, undergrowth vines, &c. 

Westbetween sections 25 and 36, on a true line. 

A hickory, 7 ins. dia. 

Raised a mound, in which deposited as witness some 

glass. 

The corner of sec. 25,26,35 and 36. 

North-between sections 25 and 26, T. 15 N, R. 12 W. 

A black-oak, 14 ins. dia. 

Descended to low grounds or bottom land. 

The border of a lake, impassable, thence offset: 

east 5.00, 

north 7.00, to edge of the lake. 

east 4.00, 

north 3.00, over wet land, partially 

west 9.00, or at 

covered by water. 

289 
M. 

45.00 

50.00 

70.00 

75.00 

Ch's. 

The true line, 5.00 chs. north ofthe '/4 section corner, 

which is in the lake, and inaccessible, and 60 lks. 

north of the north border of the lake, in which 

marked the line south. 

Highland from bottom land. 

A brook, 15 links wide, course NE. 

The border of a lake, impassable, which I consider of 

suficient magnitude to mean- 

-18- 

der, whereat set post, from which a maple, 12 ins. 

dia. bearsN 82 E, 10 lks., and an elm, 20 ins. dia. 

bears N 85 W, 20 lks. thence meandering N 60 W, 

7.00 chs., N. 20 W, 8.00 chs., N 25 W, 6.00 chs. Along 

these courses the land is high and dry, soil 1st rate. 

Thence N 5 W, 5.00 chs., N 10 E, 6.00 ch. Along these 

courses the land is low and marshy. Thence N 45 E, 

7.00 ch., N 60 E. 6.69 ch. to post corner to fractional 

sections 23 and 24, (the line to which is run south from 

the corner to sections 12,13,23 and 24.) 

1 

In this manner you will enter all courses and distances in 

your field-book, and the date must follow the close of each 

day's work; which field-book of each township, separately, 

written with a fair hand, or a true and fair copy, together with 

the original, you will return to the office of the Surveyor of 

the lands of the United States in the Territory of Arkansas. 

WM. F. WOODRUFF, PRINTER, 

Little Rock, A. T. 

290 
XVIII. 

(These Instructions are copied from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives The cover contains a 

hand-written notation, “Wash. Hoods Capt. Top’l Engineers, 1839.”) 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO HIS 

DEPUTIES; 

BY THE SURVEYOR GENERAL OF THE 

UNITED STATES, FOR THE STATES OF 

OHIO AND INDIANA, AND THE 

TERRITORY OF MICHIGAN. 

CINCINNATI: 

JOHN H. WOOD, PRINTER. 

..... 

..... 

1833. 

291 
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

1. The public Lands of the United States are surveyed in a 

uniform mode, established by law, by lines run by the cardinal points of the compass; the north and south lines coinciding with the true meridian, and the east and west lines 

intersecting them at right angles, giving to the tracts thus 

surveyed, the rectangular form. 

2. The public lands are laid off and surveyed, primarily, 

into tracts of six miles square, called Townships, containing, 

each, 23,040 acres. The townships are subdivided into thirtysix tracts, called Sections, each of which are one mile square, 

and contains 640 acres. Any number, or series, of contiguous 

townships, situated north or south of each other, constitute a 

Range. 

3. To obtain and preserve a convenient and uniform mode 

of numbering the ranges and townships, it is usual, in commencing the survey of an insulated body of public lands, to 

run, or assume, two Standard Lines, as the basis of the 

surveys to be made therein. One of these standard lines is run 

due north and south, and is called the Principal Meridian, to 

which the ranges are parallell, and from which they are 

numbered eastward and westward. The other standard line is 

run due east and west, and is called the Base Line, and from 

which the townships are numbered northward and southward. 

4. To distinguish from each other, the systems or series of 

surveys thus formed, the several Principal Meridians are 

designated by progressive numbers. Thus, the Meridian running north from the mouth of the Great Miami river, is called 

the First Principal Meridian; the Meridian running north 

through the centre of the State of Indiana, is called the 

Second Principal Meridian; that running north from the 

mouth of the Ohio river through the state of Illinois, is called 

the third Principal Meridian; and that running North from 

the mouth of the Illinois river, through the State of Illinois 

and the Wisconsin Territory, is called the Fourth Principal 

Meridian. 

5. This mode of executing the public surveys, conduces 

more, perhaps, than any other which could be devised, to the 

simplicity, regularity, and symmetry of the work; and to the 

ease and certainty with which any tract may be identified. 

6. The public lands are surveyed under the direction of the 

Surveyor General, by Deputies appointed by himself. He 

selects for his deputies none other than skilful and experienced practical surveyors, men of good moral character, in 

whose integrity and fidelity and fullest confidence can be 

reposed.-Their duties are prescribed in the following code of 

General Instructions, a copy of which is furnished to every 

deputy, for his government. 

7. Each deputy surveyor is required, before he enters upon 

the duties of his appointment, to take and subscribe an oath 

or affirmation for the faithful performance thereof; which 

oath or affirmation is to be filed in the office of the Surveyor 

General. The following form of this oath or affirmation (or the 

substance thereof) will be used: 

do solemnly swear (or affirm,) that I 

will well and faithfully perform the duties of a deputy surveyor of United States Lands, to the best of my skill and 

ability, and according to the laws of the United States, and 

the Instructions of the Surveyor General, as I shall answer to 

LBSworn and subscribed before me, this - day of 

J-L 

183 Justice of Peace. 

8. Each deputy Surveyor appoints his own chain carriers, 

markers, and flag bearers, who must severally take and 

subscribe an oath, or affirmation, for the faithful performance of the trust reposed in them; which oath, or affirmation, 

may be administered by the deputy Surveyor himself, or by a 

Justice of the Peace, and must be filed in the Surveyor General’s Office. The following is the oath to be taken by the 

chainmen. 

do solemnly swear [or affirm1 that I 

will well and faithfully perform the duties of chain-carrier in 

all surveys of United States Lands in which I shall be employed as such: and that I will strictly attend to levelling the 

chain, and plumbing the tally pins, in measuring over hills or 

side-lying ground-to the best of my skill and ability, as I 

shall answer to God. C-Dsworn and subscribed before me, this - day of ___ 

183 

A-BD. Surveyor. 

9. The oaths of the markers and flag-bearers may be 

“I. L B 

God at the Great Day. 

“I, C- D 

varied to apply to their duties respectively. 

OF CONTRACTS. 

1. Before entering upon the execution of any surveys 

which may be allotted to a deputy Surveyor, he enters into a 

written contract with the Surveyor General, in which the 

surveys to be performed are described, and the period for 

their completion, and the compensation per mile, fixed; and 

wherein the deputy binds himself to a faithful performance of 

the work, according to the terms of the contract, and pursuant to the laws of the United Statesand the instructions of 

the Surveyor General. To the contract is annexed a bond, 

executed by the deputy with approved security, conditioned 

for the faithful performance of the work, in the penalty of 

double the estimated amount or value of the contract. 

2. The surveys must be executed, in all cases, by the deputy contracting for the same, in his own person, or under his 

immediate personal superintendence and direction. All subcontracts are illegal. 

3. In case of failure to comply with the terms of a contract, 

unless such failure arise from causes satisfactorily proven to 

be beyond the controul of the contractor, immediate measures are to be taken to recover the penalty of the bond, 

agreeably to law. And no deputy surveyor who shall improperly fail to fulfil his engagements, will afterwards be em292 
ployed in the public surveys; and of every such failure, the 

Surveyor General is required to give immediate notice to the 

Commissioner of the General Land Office. 

4. And where any portion of a survey is found or suspected 

to be erroneous, payment therefor will be suspended until the 

error is corrected, or the cause of suspicion done away to the 

full satisfaction of the Surveyor General. 

OF SURVEYING INSTRUMENTS. 

1. You will provide yourself with a good Compass, having 

a nonius and movable sights, which is to be compared with 

and regulated by the Standard Compass in the Surveyor 

General’s Office. 

2. You will likewise procure a Surveying Chain, two poles, 

or thirty-three feet, in length, and containing fifty-links; 

which is to be compared with and adjusted by the Standard 

Chain in the Surveyor General’s Office. It should be made of 

good iron wire, of such size as to prevent the chain from 

stretching by use, and yet light enough to be readily straightened in mea161 

suring. The handles should be made of iron or brass, at least a 

fourth of an inch in diameter. 

3. You must be provided likewise with the measure of the 

standard chain, which may be made similar to your surveying chain, of smaller wire. And by this your surveying 

chain must be compared and adjusted, at least every other 

day, or oftener. 

4. Tally-Rods, are usually made of iron, about twelve inches in length, having a ring at the top, in which is fixed a 

piece of red cloth, or something else of a conspicuous colour, 

that they may be more readily seen when stuck in the ground. 

Eleven tally-rods is the number required to be used. They 

should be counted by both of the chain-men at the end of 

every “out,” to see that none have been lost. 

5. Your compass and chain must be frequently examined 

in the field, in order to discover and rectify any error or 

irregularity which may arise in the use of them. 

6. The aberrations of the needle, are a fruitful source of 

error in surveying. These may arise from a variety of causes. 

“Local attraction,” owing to the presence of iron mineral, is 

generally assigned by surveyors as the principal cause of the 

disturbance of the needle. But it is believed that in many 

instances, the true source of the errors complained of, is to be 

found in the carelessness or inattention of the surveyor, in 

the use and management of his compass, or the erroneous 

measurement of his lines. All these must be constantly and 

vigilantly guarded against, by every means in your power. 

OF THE VARIATION OF THE COMPASS. 

There is a certain irregular curve line which passes around 

the earth towards the north and south poles, called the “line 

of no variation.” On every part of this line the magnetic 

needle co-incides with the true meridian. But on each side of 

it, the needle declines from the true meridian towards it. This 

declination is usually called the “variation of the compass;” 

and increases gradually, but irregularly, in receding either 

eastward or westward from the line of no variation, until it 

reaches its maximum, beyond which it gradually descreases 

again to the line of no variation. This line is not stationary; 

but moves to the eastward for a series of years, and then to the 

westward through another series of years, but without any 

regular period, or any known proportion between the time of 

this movement and the amount thereof. Hence the variation 

[71 

of the compass, at any place, is continually changing, to an 

extent corresponding to the change of place in the line of no 

variation. 

The line of no variation, at this time, passes through the 

western part of Pennsylvania and New York. West of this, 

the needle points to the east of the true meridian; and this 

variation increases in going westward across the states of 

Ohio and Indiana, and Michigan Territory; until, in the south 

western part of that territory, on the Mississippi river, it 

amounts to nine degrees or upwards. 

The following method of determining the Variation of the 

Compass, extracted from Flints “Treatise on Surveying,” is 

recommended to the deputy surveyors, as being perhaps, the 

most convenient and best adapted to the service in the field: 

The star commonly called the North Star, is not directly 

north but revolves round the pole in a small circle, once in 24 

hours.’ It can therefore be due north only twice in that period; 

and that is within a very few minutes of the time, when a star, 

called Alioth in the constellation of Ursa major, or the great 

bear, is directly over or under it. There is also another star 

nearly in an opposite direction from the pole, called Gamma, 

in the constellation of Cassiopeia. When these three stars are 

vertical, the north star is very near the meridian; and when 

they are horizontal, it is at its greatest elongation, that is, at 

its greatest distance east or west of the pole, and on the same 

side as the star in Cassiopeia. The variation may be calculated when the star is on the meridian, or when at its greatest 

elongation; more accurately, however, at the latter period, 

because its motion being then nearly vertical for some time, 

gives the observer opportunity to complete his observation.’ 

[81 

To find the elongation of this star in any latitude, its 

declination must be known; that is, its distance north of the 

equator. This being found, institute the following proportion: 

as co-sine of the latitude, is to radius; so is co-sine of the 

declination, to sine of the elongation. 

The declination of the North Star, January 1,1810, was 88” 

17’ 28’‘) and increasing at the rate of about 19 seconds and one 

half annually. 

In the following table, the elongation is calculated for ten 

1. More exactly, 23 hours, 56 minutes and 4 seconds.- 

2. The following figure exhibits a view of the relative situation of these stars, as they 

appear, when in a horizontal position; or when the north star is in its greatest eastern 

elongation. 

The Great Bear. * Cassiopeia. * 

* N. Star * * Alioth Pole Gamma * * * * * * * * 

293 
successive years, ending with 1840, and for six different 

latitudes. The calculation is made for the first ofJuly, and of 

course gives the mean angle for the year. 

TABLE SHOWINGTHE ELONGATION OF THE 

NORTH STAR. 

Years. 

1831 

1832 

1833 

1834 

1835 

1836 

1837 

1838 

1839 

1840 

34°

1° 55' 

154% 

154 

153% 

153 

152% 

1 52% 

152% 

152 

1 51% 

36° 

1° 58 1/2 '

158 

157% 

157 

1 56% 

156 

1 55% 

155 

154Y2 

154 

38° 

2° 1 1/2'

21 

2 0% 

159?h 

159 

1 5B1/2 

158% 

158 

1571/2 

157% 

40" 

2° 5' 

2 4?h 

24 

24 

23 

2 2% 

22 

2 1Y2 

21 

2 0% 

42° 

2° 9'

2 BY2 

28 

2 7% 

2 6l/2 

2 

2 5% 

2 

2 5?h 

24 

44" 

2° 13' 

2 12% 

2 12Y2 

2 12 

2 11 

2 10'/2 

2 10 

2 9% 

29 

2 8?h 

The elongation for the latitude of the observation being 

calculated, or taken from the above table, proceed to find its 

range, according to the following directions: 

Take a pole 18 or 20 feet in length; t o the end of it fasten a 

small line;raise it to an elevation of 45° or 50"; and support it 

by two crotches of suitable height t o keep it firm in its place. 

At the end of the line near the ground,fasten a weight of half 

a pound or more, which should swim in water to prevent the 

air frommoving the line. Southward of the line fix a compass 

sight, or other piece of metal or wood,with a narrow, perpendicular aperture at a convenient height fromthe ground,say 

about 1or 2 1-2 feet; and let it'be so fixed that 

[91 

it can be moved a small distance east or west at pleasure.- 

Let an assistant hold a light either N E or N W of the line, 

nearly as high asthe range fromthe sightt o the north star,in 

such a position that the line may be plainly seen;then, [three 

stars above mentioned being parallel or nearly so with the 

horizon,]move the sight-vane east or west, until through the 

aperture, the line is seen to cut the star; and continue to 

observe, at short intervals, till the star is seen at its greatest 

elongation. Let a lighted candle be placed in an exact range 

with the sight-vane and line at the distance of 20 rods or 

more, which should 'stand perpendicularly, be made fast, 

extinguished, and left till morning. Then the sight-vane,the 

line, and the candle, will be the range of elongation, which 

observe accurately with a compass; and if the elongation be 

east, and the variation west, the former must be subtracted 

fromthe latter; and if they are both west,they must be added, 

and their difference or sum will be the true variation." 

OF RUNING AND MARKING LINES. 

1. All lines, of whatever description, which you may survey,must be run by the true meridian. For which purpose the 

variation of the magnetic needle, at the place where you 

survey,must be taken, or previously known, and the sights of 

your compass adjusted to the true meridian, by means of the 

nonius, before you commence the survey. 

2. All lineswhich you may survey, are to be marked in the 

following manner, viz: all those trees which your line cuts, 

must have two notches made on each side of the tree, where 

the line cuts it; but no spot or blaze is to be made thereon. 

These are indifferently called "station trees," "line trees," or 

"sight trees." And all those trees on each side of the line, and 

within ten or fifteen links thereof (or farther if the land 

should be thinly timbered) must be marked with two spots or 

blazes, diagonally or quartering towards the line; which blazing must be made so conspicuous, that the line may be readily 

found and traced. 

3. Whenever, in running lines, your course may be obstructed by insuperable obstacles, as swamps, marshes, 

lakes, rivers, precipices, or other objects over which you cannot pass, you will take the necessary offsets, or work by 

traverse, or by trigonometry, in order to pass the obstacle, 

and to ascertain the exact distance on so much of the line as, 

by reason of such obstructions, may not be actually run. By 

whatever method you pass such inaccessible parts of the 

lines, the utmost accuracy is necessary to obtain the true 

measure thereof. 

[ 10 1 

4. No lines, of whatever description, embraced in your 

contract, are permitted in any case to be run or surveyed by 

any person but yourself, or some regularly accredited Deputy 

Surveyor, duly authorised by the Surveyor General. Nor are 

letters, numbers, or marks of any kind, to be made by any 

other person than yourself, except it be in your presence, and 

under your immediate and personal direction; in which case 

you are to inspect such letters, numbers, or marks, to see that 

that they are neatly and correctly made. 

OF EXTERIOR TOWNSHIP LINES. 

1. The Act of Congress of the 18th of May, 1796, requires 

that the public lands "shall be divided by north and south 

lines, run by the true meridian, and by others crossing them 

at right angles, so as to form townships of six miles square." 

In laying out and surveying the exterior boundaries of 

townships, in conformity to this provision of the Act, the 

greatest possible accuracy must be observed, both in the 

course and measurement of the lines. To run the lines by the 

true meridian, the variation of the magnetic needle must be 

frequently and with the utmost exactness, determined by 

celestial observation, and the sights of your compass adjusted 

accordingly. 

2. Celestial observations, to find the variation of the compass, should be made at least every twelve miles on the east 

and west lines; and at the end of eighteen or twenty-four 

miles on the north and south lines. It is not material that 

these observations should be made at the township corners. 

They may be made at any part of the lines, so as to be, as 

nearly as practicable, at the intervals here directed. But no 

alteration must be made in the course of any township line, 

until you arrive at a township corner; for with whatever 

course you set out, in running a township line, that course 

must, in all cases, be continued to the end thereof. 

3. The following is the order and method to be pursued in 

running exterior township lines: a base line, or a township 

line assumed as a base, is run due east and west, across the 

southern boundary of the tract of country to be surveyed. On 

this line the quarter-section, section, and township corners 

are established at the full measure. From each of the 

294 
township corners on this line, range lines are run due north, 

the section and quarter-section corners established thereon, 

and at the end of the sixth mile on each of those lines, temporary township corner posts are set. But at the end of the 

sixth mile on the most easterly line, a township corner is 

established. From this corner, a township line is run due west 

across the whole district, intersecting the range lines previously run; which, if the work be well done, will be at or near 

the temporary township corner posts placed at the end of 

them. Exactly at the points of intersection, whether at the 

temporary posts or north or south of them, the township 

corners are to be established. The distances from the points of 

intersection, to the temporary posts, must be accurately measured and noted, shewing whether it be north or south of 

those posts. On this west line, the intermediate section and 

quarter-section corners will be established, as the survey of 

the line advances. 

4. The same process will be repeated, in running up due 

north, from the township corners on this last west line, 

another series or tier of range lines, to temporary six mile 

posts; establishing as before, the most easterly one, and from 

thence extending another due west township line across the 

whole district, in the manner before directed. The same 

method is pursued in each successive tier of townships, until 

the survey of the township lines is completed. 

5. Variations from this order and mode of running 

township lines, will sometimes be necessary, to accommodate 

them to the situation and boundaries of the tract of country to 

be surveyed, or to connect with prior surveys. Such cases, as 

they occur, will be provided for in Special Instructions. 

6. Whatever excess or deficiency may occur in the 

measurement of the exterior township lines, is to be carried 

to the north or west end of those lines. But by a vigilant and 

faithful attention to duty on the part of the skillful and 

experience surveyor, those excesses or deficiencies, except to 

a trifling extent, will be of rare occurrence. As the interior 

section lines must necessarily conform, both in their course 

and measure, to the township lines; any error committed in 

the latter will unavoidably be carried out into the former, and 

may mar the beauty and order of the entire sub-divisions of 

the township. 

7. It will be seen, then, how very important it is, that the 

townships be, as nearly as possible, six miles square; that the 

exterior boundaries be run exactly by the true meridian; and 

that the measures thereof be truly and accurately made. 

8. The bearing trees at the section and quarter section 

corners, on the exterior township lines, are to be taken only 

on the north and west sides of those lines, respectively, 

wherever it is practicable. And those sections only, which lie 

on the north and west sides of these lines, are to be marked 

and numbered. 

9. With the Field Notes of exterior township lines, the 

surveyor must return a map or diagram of the lines run, 

drawn on a scale of four miles to an inch; on which will be 

represented the length of each line, in miles, chains and 

links; the variation of the compass by which it is run; and also 

the water courses, lakes, prairies, swamps, roads, and such 

other objects as may be shown on a map. 

OF MEASURING LINES. 

1. In all measurements, the level or horizontal length is to 

be taken, and not that which arises from measuring along the 

surface of the ground, where it happens to be uneven, rolling, 

or hilly. For this purpose, in ascending or descending hills, 

the chainmen must let down one end of the chain to the 

ground, and raise the other end to a level therewith, as nearly 

as may be; from the end of which a tally rod should be 

plummed and let fall, to ascertain the spot for setting it. And 

where the surface of the ground is very steep, it may be found 

necessary to shorten the chain (by doubling it together) to one 

half its length, or even less, so as to obtain the true horizontal 

measure. 

2. Though your lines be measured by a chain of two poles 

or perches in length, you are, notwithstanding, to keep your 

reckoning in chains of four perches of one hundred links; and 

all your entries in your Field Book, and all your calculations, 

plans, &c., must be made accordingly in four-pole chains, and 

decimal parts (or hundrethslthereof. 

3. In measuring lines, every five chains are called an 

“ou~,” because at that distance the last of the ten tally-rods, or 

pins, with which the forward chain-man set out, has been set. 

The other chain-man then comes up, counts and delivers to 

him the ten tally-rods which he has taken up in his last “out;” 

the forward chain-man likewise counting them as he receives 

them. At the end of every five chains, the forward chain-man, 

as he sets the tenth or last tally-rod, calls “ou~!” which is 

repeated by the other chainman, by the marker and by the 

surveyor, each of whom keeps a tally of the “outs,” and marks 

the same as he calls them. 

4. You are to pay the strictest attention to the frequent 

examination and correction of your surveying chain by the 

standard measure taken with you. The greatest attention 

must likewise be observed in obtaining, and entering in your 

Field Book, the exact measure on the lines, to every object 

which is noted therein. These measurements are very fre- 

[ 13 1 

quently found to be important, after many years, both in 

tracing the lines and in identifying the corners. 

5. The principal source of error in surveying is in the 

measurement by the chain. And as the interest of the public 

service, the rights of purchasers of the public lands, as well as 

your own standing as a surveyor, are at stake, it is enjoined 

on you, in selecting your Chain-carriers, to have strict regard 

to their character and fitness for the trust; and to employ 

those only, in whose moral integrity, capacity, and faithfulness, you can repose the most implicit confidence. You are 

required to attend vigilantly to the manner in which your 

chainmen perform their duty, and to cause it to be faithfully 

and correctly executed; to see, especially, that they carry the 

chain horizontally on hilly ground; and that all the lines 

which you may run, be not only correctly measured by them, 

but the length thereof truly reported to you, for immediate 

entry in the Field Book. 

295 
6. In measuring across streams of water, you are to give 

the width directly across the channels thereof. The distances 

to the posts which you shaIl establish on the banks of rivers, 

lakes, or bayous which are to be meandered, are to be taken 

with great accuracy. 

OF ESTABLISHING AND MARKING CORNERS. 

1. The corners of townships, sections and quarter sections, 

are to be established and marked in the following manner:- 

2. On the exterior township lines, corner posts must be 

erected at the distance of every mile and half mile from the 

township corner. The mile posts are for the corners of sections, and the half mile posts for the corners of quarter sections.-These posts are always to be made of the most durable 

wood that can be had, and should be very securely set or 

driven into the ground to the depth of fifteen or twenty inches 

at least; and the sides of the posts are to be neatly squared off 

at the top-the angles of the square to be set in the direction 

of the cardinal points of the compass. All mile posts, on the 

township lines, must have as many notches cut on them, on 

one of the angles thereof, as they are miles distant from the 

township corner where the line commenced. But the 

township corner posts, shall be notched with six notches on 

each of the four angles of the squared part. The mile posts on 

the section lines shall be notched, on the south and east 

angles of the square, respectively, with as many notches as 

those posts are miles distant from the south and east boundaries of the town- 

[ 14 1 

ship. Wherever a tree may be so situated as to supply the 

place of a corner post, it is to be blazed on the four sides facing 

the sections to which it is the corner, and will be notched as 

the corner posts are. 

3. At all posts thus established for section or township 

corners, there shall be cut with a marking iron, on a bearing 

tree or some other tree, within each section, and as near as 

may be to the corner therof, the number of such section: and 

over it the letter T, with the number of the township, and 

annexed thereto, the letter N or S as the township may be 

north or south of the Base Line; and above this, the letter R 

with the number of the Range, and annexed thereto, the 

letter E or W, as the range may lay east or west of the 

principal meridian; thus: 

R4E 

T9N 

36 

4. The letters and numbers thus marked should be made 

in a regular chop, cut into such tree, and neatly squared off 

and faced, so as to be always readily distinguished from a 

mere blaze. 

5. But at the quarter-section corners there are no numbers 

to be made: the post is to be flattened on two opposite sides, 

and thus marked: “1-4 S,” to indicate that it is a quarter 

section post: and the nearest adjoining tree on each side of the 

sectional line, must be similarly marked. 

6. The place of all corner posts, of whatever description, 

which may be established, are to be perpetuated in the following manner, viz: from each post the courses shall be taken, 

and the distances measured, to two or more adjacent trees, in 

opposite directions as nearly as may be; which trees are 

called “Bearing trees,” and shall be blazed on the side next to 

the post, and one notch made with an axe in the blaze. On 

each Bearing Tree, the letters B. T. to denote the fact of its 

being a Bearing Tree, must be distinctly cut into the wood 

some distance below the blaze. 

7. In prairies and other places where bearing trees cannot 

be had, the places of the posts are to be perpetuated by 

quadrangular mounds of earth, tobe raised around the posts, 

to the height of two and a half feet, and having a base of four 

feet square, the angles of which shall be in the direction of the 

cardinal points. Near the centre of each mound there must be 

placed a stone of at least three or four pounds weight, or a few 

handsful of charcoal. And to prevent as much as possible, the 

action of the rains and weather in wearing away the mounds, 

they must be covered over with sod. The posts should shew 

not less than two feet above the mounds, and are to be 

[ 15 1 

squared and notched, as in other cases, and must be marked 

on each of the four square sides thereof, with the number of 

the section which it faces. Wherever stone can be conveniently obtained, a pile of stones of the same dimensions, will, in 

all cases, be made in place of a mound of earth. 

8. Wherever the section or township lines intersect lakes, 

streams of water, or islands, which are to be meandered, posts 

are likewise to be established on the margin or banks thereof, 

at the points where the lines intersect or leave them. These 

posts are to be flattened on the two sides, co-inciding with the 

lines on which they are set; and on each of these sides is to be 

marked, the number of the section which it faces. 

OF SUBDIVIDING TOWNSHIPS INTO SECTIONS. 

1. Each Township is laid off and surveyed into thirty-six 

sections of one mile square, by lines running due north and 

south, crossed by others running due east and west. The 

sections are known and designated by progressive numbers, 

beginning at the north-east corner of the township, and 

numbering westward and eastward, alternately, as shewn in 

the followng diagram: 

2. Each side of a section must be made one mile in measure 

by the chain. Quarter section corners are to be established at 

every half mile, except in closing a section, when the closing 

296 
line varies from eighty chains or one mile; in which case you 

are to place the quarter-section corner equi-distant, or at the 

average distance from the corners of the section. But in running out the last section lines, to the north and west boundaries of the township, the quarter-section corners are to be 

established at the distance of forty chains from the last section corner, and the excess or deficiency of measure (if any) 

carried out into the last half mile, and cast upon the north 

and west sides of the township, as required by law. 

3. In closing out the section lines to the north boundary of 

the township, unless the section lines intersect that boundary at the section corners thereon established for the adjoining townships, you must set a post, and take bearing 

C 16 1 

trees at each such intersection, and measure and note the 

distance to the posts previously set for the adjoining 

township, and on which side of such posts. But wherever the 

closing lines of the sections, intersect at the posts on the north 

boundary, such posts become common for the sections on both 

sides of the town boundary. Bearing trees are however to be 

taken, and the proper marks and numbers made, for and 

within the sections between which the closing lines are run. 

In establishing the corners on the north and west sides of the 

townships, where the section lines close thereon, the bearing 

trees, wherever it may be practicable, are to be taken on the 

south and eat sides, respectively, of those boundaries. 

4. Having adjusted the sights of your compass to correspond with the course of the east boundary of the township, 

you will begin at the corner of sections 35 and 36, on the south 

boundary, and run a line due north forty chains, and establish the quarter-section corner between sections 35 and 36;- 

continue north forty chains farther, and establish the corner 

of sections 25, 26, 35, 36. 

5. From the corner of sections 25,26,35,36, run a random 

line, without blazing, due east for the corner of sections 25 

and 36, on the east boundary, and at the distance of every five 

or ten chains on the random line, set up a stake, or make some 

other mark. If you intersect exactly at the post on the range 

line, you will blaze the random line back, as the true line. But 

if your random line falls north or south of the corner on the 

range line, you must measure and note such deviation in your 

field book; and from the said corner on the range line, return 

upon a true line back to the corner where you commenced the 

random, blazing and marking the true line, and observing to 

verify the correctness of its course, by means of offsets, from 

the stakes set or marks made on the random. The quartersection post is to be established on the true line, at the 

average distance between the corner of sections 25,26,35,36, 

and the corner on the range line. 

6. From the corner of sections 25,26,35,36, run due north, 

between sections 25 and 26, setting the quarter-section post, 

as before, at forty chains; and at eighty chains establish the 

corner of sections 23,24,25,26. Then run a random line due 

east, for the corner of sections 24 and 25 on the range line; 

correcting back, and establishing the quarter-section corner, 

in the manner directed for running the line between sections 

25 and 36. 

7. In this manner proceed with the survey of each successive section in the first tier, until you arrive at the north 

boundary of the township, which you will reach in running up 

the line between sections 1 and 2. On this line, the distance 

[ 17 1 

at which the north boundary is intersected, is to be carefully 

noted. If you should not intersect at the post established for 

corner to sections 35 and 36 in the adjoining township, you 

must carefully measure and note in your Field Book, the 

distance of the point of intersection from said post, shewing 

whether you fell east or west thereof: and at that point, you 

will set a post and establish a corner for sections 1 and 2, 

taking your bearing trees, if practible, south of the township 

line, and making the proper marks and numbers for and 

within sections 1 and 2. Bearing trees are to be taken, and 

marks and numbers made, in the same manner, should your 

line intersect at the post for sections 35 and 36. 

8. The first tier of sections being thus laid out and surveyed, you will return to the south boundary of the township, 

and from the corner of sections 34 and 35, commence and 

survey the second tier of sections, in the same manner that 

you pursued in the survey of the first; closing at the section 

corners on the first tier. 

9. In like manner proceed with the survey of each successive tier of sections, until the fifth, or last entire tier is run up. 

From the section corners on this tier, you will run random 

lines for the corresponding corners established on the western boundary of the township, and correct back on true lines 

from these corners on the west boundary. But instead of 

setting the quarter section posts, on these true lines, at the 

average distance, you will establish them at the exact distance of forty chains from your last section corners; carrying 

out any excess or deficiency in the measure, into the last half 

mile, or that part of the line west of the quarter-section post. 

In closing thus on the west boundary, you will take bearing 

trees on the east side thereof, if practicable, and make the 

proper marks, and numbers for, and within each section, as 

on the north boundary. 

10. Great care must be taken that the north and south 

lines be run according to the true meridian, as required by 

law. But if you find by the measurement of the closing lines of 

the sections, that there is an increasing convergency or divergency of the north lines, you may reasonably distrust the 

accuracy of the direction of your lines by the needle. In such 

case it will be necessary so to vary your course as to run 

parallel to the meridian (or north and south line) on which 

you are closing, in order that the sections may contain, as 

nearly as possible, the just and legal quantity of six hundred 

and forty acres, or one mile square. 

11. The east and west lines are to be run at right angles 

with the north and south lines, as far as may be practicable in 

closing. But if; on running an east and west line, you find 

18 1 

the post you are running for, lies much to the north or south of 

the point where you intersect, you are to mistrust the 

measurement of the north and south line last run by you. In 

such case, a re-measurement of the lines must be made, and 

the error, wherever found, corrected. 

12. You are referred, here, to the accompanying specimen 

297 
ofthe Field Notes of a township, in which the whole process of 

the subdivision is illustrated at large, by example. 

13. The foregoing mode of subdividing Townships into sections, it will be perceived, is intended for, and can be fully 

applied only, to entire townships. In the subdivision of fractional townships, however, the order of the survey will be 

varied no farther than may be necessary to adapt it to the 

situation and boundaries of such fractional township. As a 

general rule, from which there will be few exceptions, it will 

be found best to make entire sections on the township lines 

bounding a fractional township, and making the work to 

close on the irregular boundaries thereof. 

14. An Act of Congress of the 24th of May, 1824, authorises a departure from the ordinary mode of surveying the 

public land on any river, lake, or bayou, whenever, in the 

opinion of the President of the United States, the public 

interest would be promoted thereby so as to survey such lands 

in tracts of two acres in width, fronting on such river, lake, or 

bayou, and running back to the depth of forty acres. But as no 

general rules could be framed to govern all such surveys, this 

branch of the service is left to be provided for in Special 

Instructions, as cases thereof may occur. 

15. Should you find a manifest error in the measurement 

of any township line within, or bounding your district, (which 

will be readily detected by the closing of your lines thereon,) 

you are to correct such error, by remeasuring such township 

line, from where the error is found, to the north or west end 

thereof. The section and quarter-section corners thereon are 

to be removed to the proper distances and there established; 

and the marks and numbers at the cancelled corners are to be 

cut out or effaced, and the distances at which you pass those 

corners must be noted by you. Of such remeasurement and 

corrections you are to take full and complete Field Notes, in a 

separate book, to be returned to the Surveyor General’s 

Office, with the Field Notes of your subdivisions. For such 

corrections, however, the Surveyor General is not authorized 

to make any compensation. 

OF MEANDERING RIVERS, &c. 

1. You will accurately meander, by course and distance, 

all navigable Rivers which may bound or pass through your 

[ 19 1 

district; all navigable bayous flowing from or into such rivers; all Lakes or deep Ponds, of sufficient magnitude to justify 

such expense; and all Islands suitable for cultivation. At all 

those points where the township or section lines intersect the 

banks of such rivers, bayous, lakes or islands, posts are to be 

established, as before directed. In meadering, you are to 

intersect all these posts, closing at each post the course and 

distance on which it is intersected. You will likewise notice 

all streams of water falling into the river, lake, or bayou, 

which you are surveying, with their width at their mouth; all 

springs, noting the size thereof, and whether pure or mineral 

water; the head and mouth of all bayous, all rapids, falls, or 

cascades; all islands and bars, with intersections to their 

upper and lower points, to establish their exact situation. 

This must be done with the greatest accuracy, in relation to 

all islands which you shall meander, so as to determine and 

shew their precise location and bearing on the maps of the 

surveys. 

2. Should any lake or pond which you shall meander, be 

situated within any one section, so as not to be intersected by 

any of the lines thereof, you will run and measure a line very 

exactly, but without marking, from one of the corners, or one 

of the half mile posts, or other given point on one of the lines 

of said section, to the point on the margin of the lake at which 

you shall commence the meanders thereof. The true location 

of such lakes is necessary, in order to calculate the contents of 

the subdivisions of such sections. 

3. The width of streams of water and bayous binding on, or 

forming a boundary of your surveys, must be ascertained at 

every intersection of your lines therewith, by trigonometrical 

process, or otherwise; which can generally be most conveniently done in taking the meanders. This is necessary for the 

correct exhibition of such streams on the township plats. 

4. Except in cases where navigable streams constitute the 

boundary line between two series or systems of surveys commencing from different standard lines, such streams are not 

to interrupt the regular survey of the townships through 

which it passes, the lines of which shall be continued across 

those streams to the complete measure. And where the surveys have been closed on a stream, as a boundary of a cession, 

or from other cause, and are afterward to be continued across 

such stream, the surveyor continuing the surveys on the 

opposite side, must extend the lines across the stream so as to 

make the sections thereon complete. 

5. To establish a uniform and simple mode of designating 

and distinguishing the two sides of navigable streams, the 

terms “Right bank,” or “Left bank,” will be used, in all 

[ 20 1 

cases, thus:-suppose yourself standing at the head of the 

river, looking down stream; then that bank of the stream on 

your right hand is to be called and referred to in your Field 

Notes, as the “Right bank,” and that on your left hand as the 

“Left bank.”-And these terms, thus applied to navigable 

rivers, are to be used in all cases, whether in running lines or 

taking meanders. 

6. Great care must be taken to describe clearly the post at 

which any meanders of a river, bayou, lake, or island commence; and also all the posts, on township or section lines, 

which may be intersected in the progress of the meanders. 

7. The Field Notes of meanders are to be written at the end 

of the subdivisions. The courses are to be inserted in a column 

on the left of the page; the distances, in chains and links, in a 

column next to this, and the notes or remarks on the right, 

opposite the proper course and distance. The column of “distances” must be added up at the foot thereof, on each page. 

8. Errors in meandering are of very frequent occurrence, 

arising principally, it is believed, from bad chaining. Your 

special attention is called to the manner in which this part of 

the work is executed; and all possible accuracy is enjoined, 

both in the courses and measurement, and the entry thereof 

in your field book. 

298 
OF PRIVATE CLAIMS, 

INDIAN RESERVATIONS, &c. 

1. In surveying Private Claims, Indian Reservations, or 

other tracts not conforming to section lines, the location 

thereof must be particularly described, and the place of beginning clearly stated in your Field Notes; also the name of 

the claimant in whose right the survey is made, with the 

number by which it is known; and if a reservation, the 

quantity contained in it, and the name of the reservee. The 

Field Notes of all the lines of each tract must be complete, and 

are to be entered in the Field Book separately from the notes 

of other tracts. The Field Notes of Private Claims and Indian 

Reservations, must be entered in separate books. 

2. Wherever a section or township line intersects a line of a 

private claim, or Indian reservation, there a corner must be 

established. The particular line intersected, with its course, 

and the name of the claimant or reservee, with the number or 

other designation by which it is known, must be noted. And 

from such intersection, the private claim or reserve line must 

be carefully measured, each way along said line, to the 

[ 21 1 

end thereof, unless it should be intersected by another section 

or township line before the end be reached. 

3. The course of every line of the survey of a private claim 

or Indian reservation, with the length thereof, and the variation of the compass, and date of the survey, are to be inserted 

in the Field Notes, which are to be certified and signed by 

you. 

OF FIELD NOTES. 

1. The field books are all to be made of one uniform size, 

viz: foolscap octavo; or a sheet of common sized cap paper, 

folded into sixteen pages. The paper must be of good quality, 

and the books covered with morocco or other leather, and 

neatly stitched and trimmed, and containing space enough 

for all the field notes of a township. The pages are to be ruled 

with red ink, and feint lined. 

2. On the first page of your field book of each township, 

insert in a plain and neat manner, by way of title, the number 

of the township and range, with the state or territory in 

which it lies, and by whom surveyed, with the date of the 

commencement, and the date of completing the subdivision of 

the same. 

3. On the fourth page, draw a plan or diagram of the 

township, on a scale of one mile to an inch. On this diagram 

you will accurately delineate, as near as may be practicable 

by ocular observation on the spot, as you progress with the 

work, the crossing and courses of all streams of water, the 

intersection, situation, and boundaries of all prairies, 

marshes, swamps, lakes, and all other things mentioned in 

your field notes, the situation of which can be conveniently 

shewn on the diagram. You will also insert thereon, in small 

figures, the length of the section lines closing out to the north 

and west boundaries of the township. 

4. At the head of each subsequent page, on which the field 

notes are written, you will insert a running title, designating 

the number of the township and range, which is to be separated from the field notes by a double red line. 

5. The Field Notes of the surveys furnish primarily, the 

materials from which the plats and calculations of the public 

lands are made; and the source from whence the description 

and evidence of the location and boundaries of those surveys 

are drawn and perpetuated. It is evidently, then, of the 

utmost importance that the Field Notes should be, at once, an 

accurate, clear and minute record of every thing that is done 

by the Surveyor and his assistants, (in accordance with these 

[ 22 1 

Instructions,) in relation to the running, measuring and 

marking lines, establishing corners, &c. as well as a full and 

complete topographical description of the country surveyed, 

as it regards every thing which may afford useful information, or gratify public curiosity. 

6. For this purpose you are to enter in your Field Book, in a 

neat and distinct manner, notes or minutes of the following 

objects:- 

1. The description, course and length of every line which 

you shall have run. 

2. The name, and estimated diameters of all corner and 

bearing trees, and the courses and distance of the bearing 

trees from their respective corners. 

3. The description of all mounds which you shall erect as 

corners in prairies, or places where there shall be no trees 

convenient for bearings. 

4. The names and estimated diameters of all those trees 

which fall in your lines, called station or line trees, with their 

exact distances on the line. 

5. The face of the country, whether level, rolling, broken, 

hilly, or mountainous. 

6. The quality and character of the soil, and whether first, 

second, or third rate. 

7. The several kinds of timber and undergrowth, with 

which the land may be covered, naming each kind of timber 

in the order in which it is most prevalent; and in prairie, the 

kind of grass or other herbage, which it produces. 

8. All rivers, creeks and smaller streams of water, with 

their width, and the course they run where the lines of your 

survey intersect or cross them, and whether the current be 

rapid, sluggish, or otherwise. 

9. All rapids, cataracts, cascades, or falls of water. 

10. All springs of water, and whether fresh and pure, or 

mineral; shewing also on which side of the line situated, and 

the distance therefrom, and the course of the stream flowing 

from them. 

11. All lakes and ponds, with the description of banks 

surrounding them, and whether the water be deep or shallow, 

pure or stagnant. 

12. The meanders of all lakes, navigable rivers, bayous, 

islands and streams forming boundaries. 

13. All prairies, swamps, and marshes. 

14. All coal banks or beds, and peat or turf grounds. 

15. All precipices, caves, stone quarries, and ledges of 

rock, with the kind of stone found in them. 

16. All towns and villages, Indian towns and wigwams, 

houses or cabins, fields or other improvements, sugar-tree 

groves, and sugar camps. 

299 
[ 23 1 24 1 

17. All minerals and ores, with particular descriptions of 

the same, as to quality and extent. 

18. All diggings for minerals, smelting or other furnaces, 

forges and factories. 

19. The exact situation, and description of all mines, salt 

springs, salt licks and mill-seats, which you may discover, or 

that may come to your knowledge. 

20. All fossils, petrifactions, and other natural curiosities, 

with descriptions thereof. 

21. All travelled roads, and “trails,” with their courses, 

and denoting the places from, or to which they lead. 

22. The tracks of tornados or hurricanes, commonly called 

“windfall,” or “fallen timber,” shewing the direction of the 

wind, as indicated by the fallen trees. 

23. All ancient works of art, as mounds, fortifications, 

embankments, ditches, or other similar objects. 

24. All offsets, or methods of whatever kind, by which you 

shall obtain the measurement or distance on any line which 

cannot be actually measured. 

25. The method and calculations by which you shall determine the variation of the compass, at each observation for 

that purpose. 

7. In addition to the foregoing items, you will insert notes 

of any others as the occasions therefor may occur. The field 

notes are to be written out in your book, on the spot, as you 

proceed with the work. Nothing in your notes must be left to 

be supplied by memory. 

8. Rivers, creeks, and smaller streams, lakes, swamps, 

prairies, hills, mountains, or other natural objects, are to be 

distinguished in your field notes by their received names 

only, where names have heretofore been given. To such you 

are not to give original names. 

9. Beside the ordinary Field Notes taken on the lines, you 

will add at the end of your field book, such further description 

or information as you may be able to give, concerning any 

thing in the township, worthy of particular notice, or which 

you may judge necessary or useful to be known. And you will 

add also, a general notice or description of the township, in 

the aggregate, as it regards the face of the country, soil, 

timber, &c. 

10. In your field book, the courses and distances must be 

placed in a column on the left hand side of the page, and your 

notes and remarks on the right. Each page is to contain the 

field notes of one section line only. The field notes of the 

subdivisions of each township and fractional township, are to 

be written in a separate field book. The field notes are to be 

written in a fair and legible hand; if otherwise, they must 

be accompanied with true and fair copies. The original field 

notes must in all cases, be returned into the office of the 

Surveyor General. 

11. The date of each day’s work must be inserted at the 

close thereof, near the bottom of the page. 

12. At the close of the original field notes of the subdivision of each township, and fractional township, the following certificate is to be written and signed by yourself, and 

also by your chainmen and marker:- 

“I hereby certify, that in pursuance of a contract with Surveyor General of the United States, for the States of Ohio and 

Indiana, and the territory of Michigan, bearing date, the 

day of 18 , and in strict conformity to the 

laws of the United States and the Instructions of said Surveyor General, I have surveyed and subdivided into Sections, 

Township, [or Fractional Township] No. , in Range 

No. . And I do 

further certify, that the foregoing are the true and original 

Feld Notes of the said Survey and subdivision, executed as 

aforesaid. 

, in the State (or Territory] of 

Certified this day of 18 . A B 

Deputy Surveyor. 

Chainmen. 

Marker.” 

C- D-. 

E- F-. 

G-. L. 

13. A printed specimen of the Field Notes of the subdivision of a township into sections, accompanies these Instructions; which will serve to illustrate both the order and 

method of performing the surveys, and the most approved 

form of keeping the Field Notes; for which purposes, it is to be 

regarded as a part of these General Instructions. 

14. Any material departure from these Instructions, or 

negligence in the observance thereof, will be considered as a 

violation of the conditions of your contract, and a forfeiture of 

all claim for payment. And loose, inaccurate, precipitate, or 

defective work, either as it respects the surveys in the field, or 

the notes and returns thereof on paper, will not be admitted. 

Surveyor General. 

To 

Surveyor General’s Office, 

Deputy Surveyor, 

Cincinnati. 

300 
XIX. 

(This copy of General Instructions was made from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives. 

Illinois and Missouri Received with letter for U.S. Surveyor General dated January 9, 1834.) 

Preceding the front cover is typewritten the following notation, rrGeneral Surveying Instructions to Deputy Surveyors in 

-1- 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

SURVEYOR’S OFFICE, 

St. Louis, 183 

[ILLINOIS AND MISSOURI] 

[ 1834] 

301 
To 

Deputy Surveyor. 

SIR, 

In the execution of surveys under the authority of this 

office, the following General Instructions have been prepared 

for the government of the Deputy Surveyors, and must be 

strictly adhered to in all cases not otherwise provided for by 

special instructions, which may be rendered necessary on 

account of any peculiar circumstances. 

You will provide yourself with a compass of excellent quality and approved construction, having a nonious division, and 

moveable sights; also, with two two-pole chains, of 50 links 

(of equal length) each. One of said chains must be adjusted to 

the standard in this office, and by it you will compare and 

adjust that which is used, at least once in every two days, and 

note their difference, if 

-2- 

any, your Field Book; and, if there is no difference, state in 

your Field Book the fact of your having compared and found 

them to agree. You must likewise be provided with a full set 

of tally rods, of iron or steel, or pointed therewith, and allow 

none others to be used but the precise number you shall have 

selected for that purpose. 

Your chain-men, axe-men and flag-men, must be men of 

strict moral integrity; none must be employed, in whom implicit confidence cannot be reposed;-and you will be ever 

vigilant over their conduct. 

Each of your Field Books will commence with a list of your 

chain-men, axe-men and flag-men then in your service, and 

intended to be employed in performing the surveys you are 

about to execute. The first book under your contract will 

contain an attested record of their oaths, and a statement of 

their compensation; and whenever you may ‘employ any 

others, you will insert their names, together with their oaths 

and compensation, in your Field Book, before they are permitted to commence work. You will also, when a chain-man, 

axe-man or flag-man is dismissed, or quits work from any 

cause Whatever, note it in your Field Book, together with the 

cause of his dismissal, or the reason for which he quits work, 

and refer thereto by a note in the front part of your book. 

I, E. F., do solemnly swear in the presence of Almighty God, 

that I will faithfully and truly perform the duties of a flagman (or axe-man, as the case may require) to the best of my 

abilities, so help me God E. F. 

Sworn to and subscribed 

before the undersigned, 

this day of 183 

All lines must be run with the assistance of a flag or fore 

vane-man; and Township boundary lines, with the compass 

adjusted to the true meridian, unless otherwise instructed by 

this office. 

If by reason of mineral attraction, or any other cause whatever, any line or lines cannot be accurately surveyed with the 

use of the needle, other means must be adopted, so as to 

ensure the correct execution of the work; and the manner of 

operating must be carefully noted in the Field Book. 

All trees which your lines (except random lines) strike, 

must be noted in your Field Book, and have two notches cut 

on each side thereof in the direction of the line; but no other 

spot or blaze, whatever, is to be made thereon. 

All trees on each side of the lines, and near thereto, (except 

random lines) must be marked 

C. D. Deputy Surveyor. 

-4- 

with two spots or blazes, diagonally or quartering towards 

the line. Range lines (N. & S. Township boundary lines) will 

be run North, and corners for Sections and quarter Sections 

will be established thereon at every half mile, and mile, for 

the Sections and quarter Sections to the West, and not for 

those to the East of the line, except at Township corners. East 

and West standard lines will be run East or West, as the case 

may require, and corners established thereon for the quarter 

Sections, Sections, and Townships, North of the line, and not 

for those to the South of it. East and West fractional 

Township lines, which close to a boundary line of this Surveying District, or to an Indian or State boundary will be run 

East or West, as may be required; and quarter Section and 

Section corners will be established thereon for the quarter 

Sections and Sections to the North of the line, and not for 

those South of it. 

All other E. & W. Township lines will be run West on 

[Form of oath for Chain-men.] randoms, and corrected East from Township corner to 

I, A. B., do solemnly swear in the presence of Almighty 

God, that I will faithfully and impartially execute and fulfil 

the duties of a Chain Carrier; that I will level the chain, and 

plumb the pins, so as to obtain the true horizontal distance; 

and that I will make a true report of the 

-3- 

length of all the lines that I may assist in measuring, to the 

best of my abilities, so help me God A. B. 

Sworn to and subscribed, 

before the undersigned, 

this day of 183 

C. D. Deputy Surveyor. 

[Form of oath for Flag-men and Axe-men.] 

Township corner; and the excess or deficiency mist be added 

to, or deducted from, the South boundary of Section 31, West 

of the quarter Section corner. 

Sub-division lines of a Township will be run with the compass adjusted to the East boundary thereof; but the true 

variation of the needle must be determined so as to shew the 

difference (if any) between the said true variation and the 

variation at which the surveys are executed. 

Section, fractional Section, and Township corners, will be 

perpetuated by planting a post at the place of the corner, of 

the most durable wood that can be had in the vicinity thereof. 

The posts must be set in the earth by digging a hole 

-5- 

to admit them two feet deep, and be very securely rammed in 

302 
with earth, and also with stone, if convenient-the Township 

corner posts must be at least 5, and the Section and fractional 

Section corner posts 4 inches diameter; they must be neatly 

squared off at top, and placed so, that the corners will correspond to the cardinal points. The posts at the corners of 

Sections in the interior of a Township must indicate, by a 

number of notches on each of the four corners directed to the 

cardinal points, the number of miles that it stands from the 

outlines of the Township; the four sides of the post will be 

numbered to correspond to the number of the Section they 

respectively face. If, however, a tree is at the place of any 

corner, it will be notched as aforesaid, and answer for the 

corner in lieu of a post. 

Section corner posts on Range and Township lines, will 

indicate, by a number of notches on two corners directed to 

the proper cardinal points, the number of miles it stands from 

the nearest Township corner; and two sides of said posts will 

be numbered to correspond to the number of the Section they 

face. 

Corner posts at Township corners, will have 6 notches on 

each of the four corners, directed to the cardinal points, and 

each of the four sides thereof will be numbered to correspond 

to the number of the Section they face.-Or in lieu of posts, 

you may insert endways into the ground, to the depth of 7 or 8 

inches, a stone, which shall be not less than 12 inches wide, 

14 inches long, and 3 inches thick. 

You will ascertain and state in your field notes, the course 

and distance from the several Section and Township corner 

posts, trees and stones, to a tree in each Section for which 

they stand as 

-6- 

a corner; each of said trees you will mark with a notch and 

blaze facing the post; the notch to be at the lower end of the 

blaze; and on the blaze, which must be neatly made, you will 

mark, with a marking iron, in a plain, distinct and permanent manner, the letter S., with the number of the Section, 

and over it the letter T., with the number of the Township; 

and above this, the letter R., with the number of the Range. 

And in all cases where there is no tree in any Section within a 

reasonable distance of a corner, on which to mark the number 

of Section, Township and Range, that fact must be stated in 

your field notes. 

Township corners in a prairie, or other situation, where 

bearing or witness trees are not at hand, will be perpetuated 

by depositing in the ground, and at least 3 inches beneath the 

natural surface thereof, a portion of charcoal (the quantity to 

be specified in your field notes,) not less than two quarts, at 

the place of such corners, over which you will erect a mound of 

earth, three feet high, five feet square at the base, and two 

feet square at top; the sides whereof must be reveted or faced 

with sods laid horizontally and in successive layers on each 

other; each of said layers having an offset inwards, corresponding to the general slope of the face of the mound; and in 

the mound you will insert a post of the dimensions and 

marked as before directed; or you may deposite at the place of 

the corner, three stones, not less than five inches square, by 

three inches thick, all of which you will particularly describe 

in your field notes-the top of the uppermost stone to be three 

inches below the natural surface of the ground, and the other 

two succesively and immediately beneath the first-and over 

said stones you will 

-7- 

erect a mound similar to that directed to be made over the 

deposited charcoal-or, in lieu of charcoal or stone, to be 

deposited as before stated, you may perpetuate the corner by 

inserting endways into the ground, and to the depth of 7 or 8 

inches, a stone, which shall not be less than 12 inches wide, 

14 inches long, and 3 inches thick; over which no mound need 

be erected; but the kind of stone used, together with its shape 

and dimensions, and the manner in which it is set, must be 

particularly described in your field notes. 

If a Township corner, where bearing or witness trees are 

not to be found within a reasonable distance therefrom, shall 

fall within a ravine, or in any other situation where the 

nature of the ground or the circumstances of its locality shall 

be such as may prevent, or prove unfavorable to the erection 

of a mound, you will perpetuate such corner by selecting, in 

the immediate vicinity thereof, a suitable plot of ground as a 

site for a bearing or witness mound, and erect thereon a 

mound of earth in the same manner, & conditioned in every 

respect, with charcoal or stone deposited beneath, as before 

described for a Township corner; and measure, and state in 

your field notes, the distance and course from the position of 

the true corner of the bearing or witness mound so placed and 

erected. 

Section corners in a prairie or other situation where bearing or witness trees cannot be had, will be perpetuated in the 

manner before directed for a Township corner, except that, 

where mounds are made they will be only two feet six inches 

high, by four feet square at the base, and two feet square at 

the top. 

Quarter-Section corners will be perpetuated by a post (of 

durable wood) 3 inches diameter, 

-8- 

placed in the ground and marked 1-4 S., from which you will 

state in your field notes the course and distance to two of the 

most suitable trees in two different quarter-Sections for 

which you are establishing the corner; which two trees you 

will mark with a blaze and notch facing the post; and on the 

blaze above the notch you will mark 1-4 S., with a marking 

iron. And where bearing or witness trees are not at hand, you 

will perpetuate quarter-Section corners by erecting a mound, 

beneath which no deposite need be made-the mound, to be of 

similar construction to those for Section and Township corners, except, that they will be only two feet high, three feet 

six inches square at the base, and 1 foot 6 inches square at 

top. 

Whenever your course may be obstructed by insuperable 

obstacles, such as ponds, swamps, marshes, lakes, rivers, 

creeks, &c., you will prolong the line across such obstacles by 

taking the necessary right angled off-setts; or, if this is inconvenient, by a traverse or trigonometrical operation, until you 

regain the line on the opposite side; and in case a north and 

south, or a true east and west line is regained in advance of 

any obstacle, you will prolong and mark the line back to the 

obstacle so passed, and state all the particulars in relation 

303 
thereto in your field notes; and at the intersection of lines, 

with both margins of impassable obstacles, you will establish 

a witness point (for the purpose of perpetuating the intersections therewith,) by setting a post, and giving in your field 

notes the course and distance therefrom to two trees on opposite sides of the line, each of which trees you will mark with a 

blaze and notch facing the post, except on the margins of 

navigable water courses or navigable lakes; in 

-9- 

these cases you will mark the trees with the proper number of 

the fractional Section, Township and Range. 

The Townships are to be laid off as nearly six miles square 

as practicable, by lines running from south to north 6 miles, 

and the corresponding corners joined by lines running easterly and westerly; and they will be subdivided into 36 Sections, 

containing, as nearly as may be, 640 acres each. The Sections 

to be numbered by beginning with No. 1, in the north-east 

corner of the Township, and going west and east, alternately, 

through the Township, with progressive numbers ending 

with 36, which will be in the south-east corner thereof. 

The courses of all navigable rivers which may bound or 

pass through your district, must be accurately surveyed, and 

their width taken at those points where they may be intersected by Section or Township lines. Those navigable rivers which may pass through your district, must be surveyed 

on each side. You will also meander all lakes or ponds of 

sufficient magnitude to justify such expense. In meandering, 

you will state particularly in your field notes, at what corner 

you commence the meanders of each fractional Section, and 

also the corner to which you close. You will likewise state on 

which side of the river you are meandering, whether on the 

right or left bank, (going downwards,) and, also whether on 

the East, West, North, South, North-East, North, West, 

South-East or South-West side of the river, or other water 

course, through or adjoining your district. 

Any excess or deficiency in the length of any Township 

boundary line, or excess of error in the falling off from the 

corner to which any clos- 

-10- 

ing Township line shall be run, that may exceed five chains; 

or any excess or deficiency exceeding one chain in the length 

of any Section line, or excess of error in the falling off from the 

corner to which any Section line shall be run, that shall 

exceed one chain in closing the lines of a whole Section; and at 

the same rate for the Section lines, and at the rate of one 

chain and fifty links per mile of the meanders, in closing the 

meanders of a navigable river or other water course with the 

line or lines of a fractional Section, must be corrected by you 

and reduced within those limits, before leaving the ground, 

by re-surveying the line or lines which may have occasioned 

the excess or deficiency in the length of such Township or 

Section line, or excess of error in closing the lines of a 

Township, or of a whole or fractional Section. All notes of 

corrections and re-surveys, must be entered as such in the 

proper place of the Field Book, according to the order in which 

they may be executed; and the former and erroneous survey 

must be referred to in the said entries. Also, in the margin of 

the pages containing erroneous surveys, that fact must be 

stated, and the page on which the notes of the re-survey or 

correction are entered, must also be referred to. 

In subdividing Townships you will commence at the corner 

to Sections 35 and 36 on the south boundary of the Township, 

(one mile west of the south-east corner thereof,) and move on 

in continued progression from east to west, and from south to 

north, in order that the excess or deficiency of the Township, 

as to complete Sections, may be added to, or deducted from, 

the northern and western Ranges of quarter Sections. 

Each north and south Section line must be 

-11- 

made one mile in measure by the chain, except those which 

close to the north boundary of the Township, so that the 

excess or deficiency will be thrown in the northern Range of 

quarter Sections, viz:-In running north between Sections 1 

and 2, at 40.00 chains, establish the quarter Section corner, 

and note the distance at which you intersect the north boundary of the Township; and also, the distance you fall east or 

west of the corresponding Section corner for the Township to 

the north; and, at said intersection, establish a corner for the 

Sections between which you are surveying. 

The east and west Section lines, except those in the west 

Range of Sections and those which cross navigable water 

courses, will be run from the proper Section corners, east on 

random lines, (without blazing,) for the corresponding Section corners. Temporary quarter Section corner posts will be 

set at 40.00 chains, and the distance at which you intersect 

the Range or Section line, and your falling north or south of 

the corner run for, will be noted in your Field Book; from 

which corner you will correct the line west by means of 

off-sets from stakes, or some other marks set up or made on 

the random at convenient distances, and remove the temporary quarter Section post, and place it and establish the 

corner on the true line, equidistant, or at the average distance between the proper Section corners. If, however, you 

strike the corner run for, you have only to blaze the line back, 

and establish the quarter Section corner at the average distance. 

The east and west lines, in the west Range of Sections, will 

be run west on true lines; the quarter Section corner will be 

established at 40.00 chains; the corners for the proper Sections will 

-12- 

be established at the intersection with the Range line, and 

the distance which it intersects north or south of the corresponding Section corner west of the line, will be noted in the 

Field Book. 

Whenever an east and west Section line, other than those 

in the west Range of Sections, crosses a navigable river, or 

other water course, you will not run a random line and correct 

it as in ordinary cases where there is no obstruction of the 

kind, but you will run east and west on a true line, (at right 

angles to the adjacent north and south lines,) from the proper 

Section corners, to the said river or other navigable water, 

and make an accurate connection between the corners established on the opposite banks thereof; and if the error, neither 

304 
in the length of the line, nor in the falling north and south of 

each other of the fractional corners on the opposite banks, 

exceed the limits before specified in these instructions for the 

closing of a whole Section, you will proceed with your operations. If, however, the error exceeds those limits, you will 

state the amount thereof in your field notes, and proceed 

forthwith to ascertain which line or lines may have occasioned the excess of error, and reduce it within the proper 

bounds, by re-surveying or correcting the line or lines so 

ascertained to be erroneous; and note in your Field Book the 

whole of your operations in determining what line was 

erroneous, and the correction thereof. 

If, by reason of bends in a river, or other navigable water 

course, the whole of any East and West Section line would not 

be surveyed, if the parts which are run East and West respectively were to terminate at their first intersection with the 

said river or other navigable water course, that part of the 

line, which, by being prolonged, 

-13- 

would give the survey the best form, must be continued to its 

last intersection with the said river or other navigable water; 

and from said last intersection of the line so continued, you 

will make the connection with the corresponding corner on 

the opposite bank, and if it is found that the error exceeds the 

limits before specified for the closing of a whole Section, you 

will make the required correction in the manner before 

pointed out in these instructions. 

All rivers, creeks, springs and smaller streams of water, 

with their width and the course they run in crossing the lines 

of surveys, and whether navigable, rapid or otherwise; also, 

all swamps, ponds, stone quarries, coal beds, peat or turf 

grounds, mounds, precipices, caves, rapids, cascades or falls 

of water, minerals, ores, salt springs, salt licks and fossils, 

prairies, hills and mountains, towns, villages and settlements, forges, factories and cotton gins; also, all uncommon, 

natural or artificial productions, which may come to your 

knowledge, are to be particularly regarded and noted in your 

Field Book. You will likewise note when the lines enter and 

when they leave creek or river bottom. 

At the end of every half mile, in running Section or 

Township lines, and at the end of the meanders of each 

fractional Section, you will give a particular description of 

the face of the country, whether level, hilly or mountainous; 

of the quality or rate of the soil, and whether it is fit or unfit 

for cultivation; and, particularly, whether the bottom land is 

liable to inundation or not; and, if it shall be liable to inundation, state, also, to what depth, so far as that circumstance 

may come to your knowledge, whether from observation of 

the water marks upon the trees, or any other 

-14- 

source of information; and note the kinds and quality of 

timber and undergrowth, naming the different sorts in the 

order which they predominate.-The description of each half 

mile must be full, and not refer to any previous description. 

The names of all bearing or witness trees, and station or line 

trees, must be written out in full, and not abbreviated; nor 

must any word which relates to the course or length of a line, 

or any object noted thereon, or in the establishment of a 

corner, be abbreviated, except in stating the courses to the 

witness trees from the corners, the course of meanders, and 

the bearing or direction of small streams, mountains &c., 

when they are not to the cardinal points; in these cases, the 

capital letters N. S. E. & W., plainly and distinctly made, will 

be used. 

The plots or sketches which you are to return, will exhibit, 

as accurately as practicable, from careful occular observation 

(in addition to the measurements on the line) to be made by 

you and noted in your Field Book, the true situation of all 

objects noted; including the courses and connections of all 

rivers and other water courses, and travelled roads or tracks, 

denoting the principal places to which they lead, and the 

enchainment and direction of remarkable hills or mountains. 

Your Field Books for your original notes will be of such a 

size as you may deem most convenient; they will be of the best 

quality of foolscap paper; and the original field notes, which 

are to be returned to this office, together with a fair and 

correct copy thereof, must be kept in a plain and intelligible 

manner, according to the form hereafter prescribed in these 

instructions. Every entry must be so specific as not to admit 

of a doubt 

-15- 

as to what is intended thereby, or a possibility of a misconstruction of your meaning. The said notes must be entered in 

the same order, from day to day, as the work is executed on 

the ground, including all re-surveys and corrections, and the 

date must follow each day’s work. 

Although your lines are to be measured with a chain of two 

poles, you are to keep your reckonings in chains of four poles, 

or one hundred links each; and all entries in your Field Book, 

and all plans and calculations are to be made according to the 

decimal measure of a chain. 

The courses and distances on your lines must be placed in 

the margin of your Field Book, on the left hand, (for which 

purpose it should be large,) and your remarks on the right. 

The Field Books in which you copy your notes, will be 

according to a form to be prescribed by this office. 

In all measurements, the level or horizontal length is to be 

taken, and not that which arises from measuring over the 

surface of the ground, when it happens to be uneven or hilly. 

Your Field Books, containing your original notes, will be 

signed by each of your chain-men, axe-men and flag-men, 

and they and the copies thereof, will be certified by yourself, 

according to a form to be prescribed by this office, in conformity with the requirements of your contract and instructions. 

The certificate to each book will state as many of the following facts as are applicable to the notes of the surveys contained therein, viz:-That all the witness trees to Township 

and Section corners, were marked with a blaze and notch 

facing the several corner posts; that the notch on each tree 

was at the lower end of the blaze; that the blaze was neatly 

made; and that 

-16- 

there was marked, in a plain, distinct, and permanent manner, with a marking iron, on the blaze of each witness tree, 

305 
and above the notch, the letter S., with the number of the 

Section; and over it the letter T., with the number of the 

Township; and over this, the letter R., with the number of the 

Range, in which the said trees respectively stand. That all 

the Section and Township corner posts were inserted two feet 

into a hole dug in the ground, and that they were securely 

rammed in with earth, and also with stone, when convenient; 

that the said posts were of the most durable wood that could 

be had in the vicinity; that the Township corner posts were 5, 

and the Section corner posts 4 inches diameter; that they 

were neatly squared at top and placed with the corners to the 

cardinal points, and that the several sides were marked with 

the number of the Section which they faced; also, that the 

corners of Township corner posts were marked with 6 notches 

each; that two of the corners of Section corner posts on 

Township boundary lines, were marked with as many 

notches facing the proper cardinal points as said posts are 

miles from the nearest Township corners; and that the corners of the Section posts, in the interior of a Township, were 

marked with as many notches as the posts stand miles from 

the Township boundaries; that the witness trees to quarter 

Section corners were marked with a blaze and notch facing 

the post; and that 1-4 S. was marked on the blaze above the 

notch; and also, that 1-4 S. was marked on each corner post, 

and that the posts were at least 3 inches diameter and placed 

firmly in the ground. That the mounds were reveted or faced 

with sod, laid horizontally and in successive layers on each 

other, each layer having an 

-17- 

offset inwards, corresponding to the general slope of the face 

of the mound; and that the mounds at Township corners were 

5 feet square at the base, 2 feet square at top, and 3 feet high; 

that the mounds at Section corners were 4 feet square at the 

base, 2 feet square at the top, and 2 feet 6 inches high; and 

that the mounds at quarter Section corners, were 3 feet 6 

inches square at the base, 1 foot 6 inches square at the top, 

and 2 feet high. 

[Form of keeping field notes of exterior boundary lines of 

Townships, viz:] 

Suppose the line to be surveyed, is the East boundary of 

Township 21 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian, and that the corner to Sections 1,6,31& 36, of Townships 

20 & 20,21 & 1 North, Ranges 6 & 7 East, had been established by another surveyor, and that you was furnished with 

a description thereof from this office. You will commence 

your field notes as follows, viz: 

If first book, oaths of chain-men, axe-men and flag-men, 

and a statement of their compensation. 

A. B., hind chain-man, 

C. D., fore chain-man, 

E. F., flag-man, 

G. H., axe-man, 

each at a compensation of twenty dollars per month. 

Measuring chain compared with the standard chain and 

found to be of the right length. 

Took the variation of the needle last night, (27th of 

September, 1832,) about 5 chains South West of the corner to 

Townships 20 & 20,21& 21 North, Ranges 6 & 7 East of the 

4th principal meridian, and found it to be 8’ 20 min. East-I 

therefore adjust my compass to that va- 

-18- 

riation, and commence at the corner to Sections 1,6,31& 36, 

of Townships 20 & 20,21& 21 North, of Ranges 6 & 7 East of 

the 4th principal meridian, which agrees with the description 

furnished me by the Surveyor’s Office, viz:-A post, from 

which a white oak, 6 inches diameter, bears S. 67‘ East, 372 

links; a hickory, 14 inches diameter, bears North 25’ East, 13 

links; and a white oak, 13 inches diameter, (stated to be 11 in 

the description furnished me) bears North 62’ West, 135 

links. The other witness tree (an ash, 16 inches diameter) has 

fallen down; I therefore mark, with the proper number of 

Section, Township and Range, a black walnut, 24 inches 

diameter, which bears South 83‘ West, 127 links distant, and 

run from said Township corner 

North 

Chains 

14.70 

27.60 

29.40 

33.70 

40.00 

Chains 

49.07 

64.08 

80.00 

North 

Chains 

13.80 

14.90 

40.00 

49.50 

Along the east boundary of Section 36, Township 21, north 

)fthe base line, Range 6 east of the 4th principal 

neridian. 

A brook, 25 links wide, with a rapid current, runs south 

westerly about 10 chains, then turns to the N. W. 

Left the creek bottom, and entered hills. 

A white oak, 15 inches diameter. 

A hickory, 24 inches diameter. 

Set a quarter Section corner post on the top of a ridge, 

bearing north easterly and south westerly; from which post, 

3 white oak, 24 inches diameter, bears S 28’ W. 197 links, 

and a poplar, 18 inches diameter, bears N. 56’ W., 14 links 

distant. The S. 27.60 chains, level, creek bottom; subject 

to occasional inundation of about 4 feet, as appears from 

the water marks 

-19- 

on the trees. The soil is good and fit for cultivation; 

timber, walnut, cherry and white oak; undergrowth, pawpaw 

and spice. The remainder of the line is too hilly and 

broken for cultivation, although the soil is good. Timber, 

hickory, white oak and walnut; undergrowth, redbud and 

dogwood. 

A white oak, 8 inches diameter. 

A walnut, 36 inches diameter. 

Set apost, corner to Sections 25 and36, Township 21 

north, Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal meridian, from 

which a hickory, 17 inches diameter, bears South 57‘ West, 

127 links; and a white oak, 13 inches diameter, bears North 

23’ West, 72 links distant. 

Land, too hilly and broken for cultivation, although the 

soil is rich; timber, hickory, white oak and walnut; 

undergrowth, pawpaw and spice. 

Along the East boundary of Section 25, Township 21 North, 

Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Left the hills, and entered river bottom. 

A burr oak, 36 inches diameter. 

Set a quarter-Section corner post, from which an elm, 13 

inches diameter, bears North 85‘ West, 18 links, and a pin 

oak, 12 inches diameter, bears South 74’ West, 39 links 

distant. The South 13.80 chains, rolling land; the 

remainder, river bottom. The soil on the halfmile, is 

rich and fit for cultivation; imber white oak, poplar and 

hickory; undergrowth, sassafrass and dogwood. 

An impassable swamp. Set a post, from 

306 
Chains 

72.54 

80.00 

Chains 

North 

Chains 

17.52 

18.76 

19.75 

32.50 

33.00 

40.00 

Chains 

59.32 

63.73 

80.00 

-20- 

which a hickory, 12inches diameter, bears South 76' West, 

18links; and awhite oak, 13inches diameter, bears South 

85' East, 14links.Thisswamp lies mostly West ofthe 

line;it extendsin a SouthWesterly direction about 25.00 

chains. Offset around said swamp, asfollows,viz: 

East 4.50 chains, 

North 7.60chains, 

East 6.70chains, 

North 8.50 chains, 

West 7.50 chains, 

North 3.20 chains, 

West 3.70 chains-regained the line on the 

East boundary of Section 25,Township 21North, Range 6 

East, in advance ofthe swamp;Itherefore run South 3.72 

chains and intersected the North-west margin of the swamp, 

where set a post,from which an ash, 12inches diameter, 

bearsNorth 17'West, 18links, andanelm, 13inches 

diameter, bears North 12'East, 45 linksdistant.Thence 

continued the line North, along the East boundary of 

Section 25,Township 21North,Range 6East; counting the 

distancesfrom the corner of Sections25 & 36;the distance 

acrossthe swamp,on the line, being 15.58chains. 

A white oak, 18inches diameter. 

Set apost,cornert o Sections24 & 25,Township21North, 

Range 6East,fromwhich a white oak, 18inches diameter, 

bears South 18°West,32 links; and a gum, 24 inches 

diameter,bears North 

-21- 

27°West, 34 links distant.Except the swamp,the land is 

low,wet bottom, unfit for cultivation; generally subject 

to overflowfrom 7to 10feet, as appears by the water 

marks on the trees; and, asI am informed by HJ 

swampmaple and pin oak; no undergrowth.The swamp is 

covered with bushes of various sorts. 

,wholivesin the vicinity thereof. Timber, gum, 

September 28, 1832. 

Proceed in a similar manner along the East boundary of 

Sections 24,13 & 12;then along the East boundary of 

Section 1,asfollows, viz: 

Alongthe East boundary of Section 1,Township 21North, 

Range 6East ofthe 4th pricipal meridian. 

Aroad between Holmin's Ferry t o the SouthWest,and 

Princeton t o the North East. 

Awhite oak, 16inches diameter. 

Acreek, generally called White Water, but by someCrooked 

Creek, 200 linkswide,runs North East-gentle current, not 

navigable. This creek is crossed by the road, noted above, 

at about 5 chainsto the SouthWest. 

Ahickory, 15 inches diameter. 

Left the timber and entered Prairie-bearsSouthEast and 

North West. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner.The timbered land is gently rolling;the soil is 

good, and fit for cultivation.Timber, white oak, hickory 

and walnut; undergrowth, dogwood and sumach. The prairie 

is 

-22- 

level;soilrich and fitfor cultivation. 

Left the prairie and entered timber-bears North East and 

SouthWest. 

A white walnut, 16inches diameter. 

Set a post, cornerto Sections 1,6,31& 36, ofTownships 

21 &21,22&22North,Ranges6&7Eastofthe4th 

principal meridian, from which a hickory, 17inches 

diameter, bears South 56°East, 18links; a white oak, 24 

West 

Chains 

40.00 

80.00 

West 

Chains 

21.00 

40.00 

69.00 

80.00 

West 

Chains 

00.57 

40.00 

64.00 

Chains 

82.75 

East 

Chains 

00.32 

17.50 

18.00 

33.75 

307 

inches diameter, bears North 77"East, 36 links; a white 

oak, 14inches diameter, bears North 27 1-2°West, 35 

links; and a black walnut, 24 inches diameter, bears South 

75°West, 137linksdistant.-Land,moderately rolling; 

soil,good and fitfor cultivation;timber, white oak, 

black oak, hickory and walnut; undergrowth,sassafrass 

and hazel. 

September 29, 1832. 

Suppose that the corner to Townships 21 & 21,22 & 22 

North, ofRanges 5 & 6 East, had been established; you 

would then proceed as follows: 

Chain compared with the standard chain and found to be 

correct. 

On a random line along the South boundary of Section 36, 

Township 22 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal 

meridian. 

Set a temporary quarter-Section corner post. 

Set a post for temporary corner to Sections 35 & 36, 

Township 22 North, Range 6 East. 

On a random line, along the South boundary of Section 35, 

Township 22 North, 

-23- 

Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

A remarkably fine spring, about 30 links to the North, 

runs North-easterly . Set a temporary quarter-Section corner post. 

A quarry of excellent lime stone. 

Set a post for temporary corner to Sections 34 & 35, 

Township 22 North, Range 6 East. 

September 30, 1832. 

Continue in this manner along the south boundary of 

Sections 34,33 & 32, and then run 

On a random line, along the South boundary of Section 31, 

Township 22 North, Range 6 east of the 4th principal 

meridian. 

The South-east bank of a navigable lake, which lies mostly 

to the north of the line, it being about 2 miles in a 

north-eastern direction to the northern end thereof; I 

therefore off-set around the south end, as follows, viz: 

South 10.00 chains. 

West 15.00 chains. 

South 11.00 chains. 

West 12.00 chains. 

North 21.00 chains, regained the 

random line along the south boundary of Section 31, in 

advance ofthe lake, and continue west, counting the 

distances from the temporary corner post to Sections 31 

and 32. 

Set a temporary quarter-Section corner post. 

A coal bed, in the west bank of Bear Grass creek, which 

runs South 

-24- 

Intersected the Range line 326 links south ofthe corner to 

Sections 1,6,3land36,ofTownships21 and21,22 

and 22 north, Ranges 5 and 6 east. 

Then, from said township corner, run 

On a true line along the s outh boundary of Section 31, 

Township 22 north, Range 6 east of the 4th principal 

meridian. 

A branch, 7 links wide, runs south-east. 

A white oak, 18 inches diameter. 

Bear Grass creek runs south. 

A hickory, 12 inches diameter. 
42.75 

57.60 

Chains 

81.90 

82.75 

East 

Chains 

14.50 

Chains 

20.17 

30.00 

33.09 

40.00 

42.10 

47.20 

jet a quarter-Section corner post, onthe true line,from 

vhich a persimmon, 12inches diameter, bears N. 26" W., 163 

inks, and a white oak, 24 inches diameter, bears N. 42° 

3., 18linksdistant. 

Land, rolling;soil, good and fitfor cultivation; timber, 

phite oak, black oak and hickory; undergrowth, pawpaw and 

spice. 

[ntersected the north-west bank of the navigable lake, 

noted on the random line,)where set apost, cornerto 

i-actional Sections6 & 31, ofTownships 21and 22 north, 

Range6east,from which post a hackberry, 18inches 

liameter, bearsN. 23°W., 18links; and a white oak, 15 

,riches diameter, bears S.65°W. 8links. 

rhence offset around the lake asfollows,viz: 

West 4.00chains with themarked 

line on the south boundary 

ofsection 31. 

South 16.00 

East 28.00 

-25- 

North 15.82chains,regained the true line on the South 

boundaryofsection 31,25 IinksEast ofthesouth-east 

margin ofthe lake;Itherefore blazed the lineback, West 

25linksto the south-east bank ofthe lake, where set a 

postfor corner to fractionalSections6and 31,Townships 

2 1 and 22 North, Range 6East, 81.35 chains east of the 

cornert o Townships 21and 21,22 and 22 North,Ranges 5 

and 6East. From said post, a hickory, 12inches diameter, 

bearsNorth 23°E., 13links,and an elm, 14inches 

diameter,bears South 27°East,54 links distant. 

Then continue the line east alongthe south boundary of 

Section 31,counting the distancesfrom the Township corner. 

Aburr oak, 48 inches diameter. 

Set a post on the true line for cornert o Sections31and 

32,Township 22North, Range 6East,from which a sycamore, 

18inches diameter, bears North 25°East, 32links; 

and awhite oak, 18inches diameter, bears North 28°West, 

13links distant. Land, level and wet;soil, poor,notfit 

for cultivation;timber, white oak,burr oak and sycamore. 

31st of September, 1832. 

Continue in thismanner along the southboundaries of 

Sections 32,33,34 and 35, and thenrun 

On atrue line along the south boundary of Section 36, 

Township 22North, Range 6East ofthe 4th principal 

meridian. 

Entered afield of about 40 acres, bear- 

-26- 

ing north-east and south-west: it lies mostly south of 

the line. 

Aspringbranch runssouth-east, and empties into a creek 

in about 10chains. The spring is about 5 chainsin a 

north-western direction, and is outside ofthe field. 

Left the field,bearing north-east and south west. 

Awhite oak, 28 inches diameter. 

Set a post for quarter-Section corner on the true line, 

fromwhich ahickory, 17inches diameter, bears North 18°

West, 14links; and awhite oak, 15inches diameter,bears 

North 27"East, 42 links distant. 

Land,rolling;soil, good andfit for cultivation;timber, 

white oak,hickory and black oak; undergrowth, hazel and 

vines. 

Acreek, 50linkswide, runs North 80°East;-the current 

israpid. About 5chains up stream,in a south-westerly 

direction, is a mill seat,therebeing rock onboth banks, 

and afall of about 50feet in 20.00 chains. 

Diggingsforlead, calledNew Design. 

59.60 

75.82 

80.00 

Chains 

Chains 

North 

Chains 

17.62 

27.60 

40.00 

40.32 

47.60 

Asmelting furnace,ownedby J- H 

Awagon road, leadingfrom Kingston and Holmes' Ferry to 

Galena,bears north-west and south-east. 

The corner t oTownships 21and 21,22 and 22North,Ranges 

6and 7East. 

Land,rolling;soil, good,and fitfor cultivation; 

timber, hickory, walnut & white oak;undergrowth, briers 

andhazel. 

1st of October, 1832. 

-27- 

Form offield notesin sub-dividing a Township (say 

rownship 21North, Range 6East of the 4th principal 

meridian,)afterthe outlinesshall have been surveyed. 

A.B.Hindchain-man. 

C.D. Fore chain-man. 

E. F. Flagorforevane-man. 

G.H. Axe-man. 

Measuring chain compared with the standardchain, and 

adjusted thereto, it having been found 1-4of an inch too 

long.Last night (14th ofApril, 1833)about 20.00chains 

north-west ofthe cornert o Townships 20 and 20,21 and 21 

North,Ranges 6 & 7East,I ascertained the variation of 

the needle, by polar observations, t o be 8°35' min. east; 

I,therefore, adjust my compass at that variation; and,to 

determine the course of the east boundary ofthe Township, 

commence atthe corner, toTownships 20 and 20,21 and 21 

North, Ranges 6and 7East, and run-Thence,North on a 

blank line; at 40.04 chains,fell 15linksWest ofthe 

quarter Section corner; a t 79.96 chains,fell 36 linksWest 

ofthe corner to Sections25 and 36,Township 21North, 

Range 6East;then from said cornert o Sections25 and 36, 

run North (ona blank line,)39.97 chains, fell 18links 

West ofthe quarter-Section corner;80.05 chainsfell 37 

linksWest ofthe corner to Sections24 & 25.-Therefore, 

to run parallel t o said East boundary ofTownship 21North, 

Range 6East, my compassmust be adjusted t o an assumed 

variation of 8°20 

-28- 

min.East;which is 15minuteslessthan the true 

variation. I adjust itt o that assumed variation, (viz: 8°

20min. East)and commence at the cornert o Sections35and 

36,on the Southboundary of the Township, and run-Thence 

Between Sections35 and 36,Township 21North,Range 6East 

Df the 4th principal meridian. 

A sugarmaple, 18inches diameter. 

A creek, calledwhite oak creek, 40 linkswide, gentle 

current, runs north-west. 

Set apostfor quarter-Section corner,fromwhich a walnut, 

20 inches diameter,bears South 16" East, 18links; and a 

white oak, 18inches diameter, bears North 23°West, 184 

links. 

Entered river bottom; bears E. andW. 

The right bank of WhiteRiver,a naviga-stream, at an 

eastern bend thereof, runs North easterly. Set apost, 

cornerto fractional Sections35 and 36,fromwhich a white 

oak, 18inches diameter, bears South 25" W., 18links; and 

a hickory, 17inches diameter, bearssouth 15°east,39 

links distant.The line will run downthe river, and leave 

it again on the right side,without crossingoverto the 

left;I,therefore,meander down stream onthe right bank 

ofsaidriver, along fractional Section 36,fromthe before 

described corner offractionalSections35 and 36, as 

follows, viz: 

North 27, East 16.00 chains. 

North 14, East 4.00 chains. 

North 3, West 2.00 chains. 

North39, West 12.93, chains,re308 
Chains 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

40.00 

80.18 

West 

Chains 

17.60 

29.40 

40.09 

40.15 

65.17 

80.18 

North 

Chains 

27.62 

29.34 

Chains 

40.57 

-29- 

gained the line between Sections35and 36,on the right 

bank ofWhiteRiver,where set a post, corner to fractional 

Sections35 and 36, ofTownship 21North,Range 6East of 

the 4th principal meridian, fromwhich a burr oak, 10 

inches diameter, bears South 85"East, 27 links,and a 

hickory, 18inches diameter, bears North 27" W., 134links 

distant. This corneris 30.17 chains North ofthe corner 

established at 47.60 chains,on samebank ofthe river;& 

is 77.77chains North ofthe corner to Sections35and 36, 

on the south boundary ofthe Township. I continue the line 

north between Sections35 and 36, counting the distances 

fromthe corner on the south boundary of the Township. 

Set apost, corner, to Sections 25,26,35 and 36,Township 

21North, Range 6 East, fromwhich a white oak, 14inches 

diameter, bears North 17°E., 18links; a white oak; 12 

inches diameter, bears South25° W.,13 links, and a 

walnut, 14inches diameter, bears South58°E.,32 links 

distant. There is no tree within a reasonable distance in 

Section 26. 

On a random line between Sections25 and 36,Township 21 

North, Range 6East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Set a temporary quarter-Sectioncorner post. 

Intersected the east boundary oftheTownship 37links 

south ofthe cornerto Sections25 & 36;fromwhich corner 

I run 

On atrue line,between Sections25 and 

-30- 

36,Township 21north, Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal 

meridian. 

Awhite oak, 15 inches diameter. 

Abranch, 26 linkswide,runssouth-west. 

Set a quarter-Section corner post on the true line, at 

average distance; fromwhich a pine, 17inches diameter, 

bears South 32°East, 49 links; and a pine, 27 inches 

diameter,bears North 42°West, 132links distant. 

Left hills and entered bottom;bears north west and 

south-east. 

Awalnut, 36 inches diameter. 

The cornerto Sections 25,26,35 and 36. 

15th of April, 1833. 

Between Sections25 and 26,Township 21North Range 6East 

ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Awhite oak, 12inches diameter. 

Intersected the right and southerlybank of White River, a 

navigable stream;runs easterly. Set a post, cornerto 

fractional Sections25 and 26,from whicha burr oak, 17 

inches diameter, bears South 17"East, 39 links, and a 

black oak, 13inches diameter, bears South 25°West, 142 

links distant. Sentmy flag-man over the river, andcaused 

the flagto be set on the left bank thereof, on the line 

between Sections25 and 26;I then offsetfromthe before 

described corner to fractionalSections 25 & 26,E. 5.00 

chains, to a point fromwhich the flagset as before said, 

on the left bank ofthe river, and on the line between 

Sections25 and 26,bearsNorth 24°West.,making the 

-31- 

distance acrossthe river 11.23chains; therefore, at 

(29.34more 11.23)equal to 

Set a post on the left and north bank ofWhite River,for 

cornert o fractional Sections25 and 26,Township 21Eorth, 

Range 6East, fromwhich a hickory, 13inches diameter, 

bears South 65°East, 125links; and a white oak, 17inches 

diameter, bears S.72°West, 19links distant.-The place 

56.42 

74.39 

79.16 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

21.32 

Chains 

West 

Chains 

4.05 

21.32 

West 

Chains 

17.60 

32.40 

40.00 

45.38 

North 

Chains 

0.62 

3.20 

40.00 

62.00 

ofthe quarter-Section corner isin the river; it cannot 

therefore be established. 

A whiteoak, 13inchesdiameter. 

Ablack oak, 14inches diameter. 

Ablack oak, 14inches diameter. 

Set a post, corner of Sections 23,24,25 and 26,from 

which a white oak, 17inches diameter, bears North 23°

West, 27 links; a black oak, 14inches diameter,bears 

North 62°East, 113links; and a black oak, 14inches 

diameter, bears South 36"East, 39 links. There is no tree 

within a reasonable distance in Section 26. 

~~~ ~ 

On a random line, between Sections24 and 25,Township 21 

North, Range 6East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Intersected the left bank ofWhiteRiver, a navigable water 

course,runs north-easterly;set a post, cornerto 

fractionalSections 24 and 25,fromwhich a hickory, 17 

inchesdiameter, bears South 39°West, 18links;and a 

white oak, 18inches diameter, bears N. 85"W., 132links 

distant.Not knowing that thisline would intersect a 

navigable stream,when I com- 

-32- 

mencedthe survey thereof,Irun it on a random line;I 

therefore,fromthisfractionalSection corner,run and 

blazed 

On a true line between Sections24 and 25,Township 21 

North,Range 6East. 

A black oak, 13inches diameter. 

The corner of Sections 23,24,25 and 26. 

16th of April, 1833. 

Measuring chain compared with the standard chain and 

foundto be 1inch too long;made it ofthe proper length 

and commenced at the corner of Sections24 and 25, on the 

East boundary ofTownship 21 North,Range 6East of the 4th 

principal meridian, and run-Thence 

On a true line,between said Sections24 and 25,Township 

21North, 

Range 6East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Awhite oak, 8inches diameter. 

Abrook, 15linkswide,runsSouth-West. 

Set a post for quarter Section corner,fromwhich a white 

oak, 13inches diameter, bears North 32°West, 18links; 

and ablackoak, 15 inchesdiameter, bears S. 35"E., 14 

linksdistant. 

Intersected the right & south-easterlybank ofWhite River, 

which runs north-easterly; set a post, cornertofractional 

Sections 24 and 25,Township 21North,Range6Eastfrom 

which a white oak, 14inches diameter, bears N. 80"E., 17 

links; and an elm, 14inches diameter, bears S.17°E.,45 

links distant.Thepost, corner to fractionalSections24 

and 25, established on the left bank ofWhiteRiver, at 

21.32chainsEastofthecornerto 

-33- 

Sections 23,24,25 and 26,(seepage 31 ofthis book,) 

bears S.87 1-4°W.;Ithen run south 65 linksto a point 

fromwhich the aforesaid post, cornerto fractional 

Sections24 and 25, on the left bank ofWhiteRiver, bears 

west.-TheSection,therefore, closeswithin the limits 

specified in my instructions. 

Between Sections 23 and 24, Township 21 North, Range 6 East 

of the 4th principal meridian. 

Left bottom and entered upland. 

Enteredprairie, bears N. E. and S. W. 

Raised a mound, in which set a quarter Section corner post. 

A branch, 6 links wide, runs east. 

309 
80.00 

East 

Chains 

7.00 

29.35 

West 

Chains 

17.84 

30.60 

37.54 

North 

Chains 

00.16 

40.00 

80.00 

Depoisted2 quarts of charcoal, 3 inches below the natural 

surface ofthe earth, and oversaid charcoal erected a 

mound,in which set a post, cornert o Sections 13,14,23 

and 24, ofTownship 21north Range 6east. 

On a true line,between Sections 13and 24,Township 21 

North, Range 6East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Left the prairie and entered timbered land. 

Intersected the left bank ofWhiteRiver, (runs 

north-easterly;)set a post, corner offractional Sections 

13and 24,from which awhite oak 18inches diameter,bears 

S. 17"W., 183links; andahickory, 18inches diameter, 

bearsN. 74"W., 14linksdistant. 

Ithen go to the corner of Sections 13and 24, on the East 

boundary oftheTownship, and run thence 

-34- 

3n true line between said Sections 13and 24,Township 21 

Vorth, Range 6East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

htersected the left bank ofWhiteRiver;runssouth-east. 

Set a post, cornerto fractional Sections 13and 24,from 

nhich an elm,8inches diameter, bears S. 42°E., 18links, 

md a gum, 13inchesdiameter, bears N. 46° 15min. E., 73 

.inks.-Determinedthe distance acrossthe river by causing 

my flagt o be set on the opposite orright bank thereof, 

nest from this corner,on the line between Sections13and 

24, and run south 3.76 chainsto a point under the bank of 

the river;from which the flag,set as aforesaid onthe 

ipposite bank,bears N. 73 1-2"W.,which gives 12.76 

:hains the distance acrossthe river west fromthe post, 

:orner offractionalSections 13and 24, on the right bank, 

17.84chains west ofthe corner on the east boundary ofthe 

Township;therefore, at 17.84more 12.76chains, equal to 

West ofthe aforesaid corner to Sections 13and 24, onthe 

eastboundary ofthe Township, set a post, cornerto 

fractional Sections 13and 24,Township 21North,Range 6 

East on the right bank ofWhiteRiver, fromwhich a white 

oak, 16inches diameter, bears N. 57°W., 19links; and a 

hickory, 15inches diameter bears S. 69° W., 13links. 

Intersected the right bank of WhiteRiver,runs north-east, 

where set a post, cornert o fractional Sections 13 hnd 24, 

from 

-35- 

which a red elm, 18inches diameter, bears S. 16" E., 79 

links, and a pin oak, 15inches diameter, bears N. 87"E., 

19links.-Fromthis corner,the corner to fractional 

Sections 13and 24, on the right bank ofWhite River, 29.35 

chains east ofthe corner to Sections 13,14,23 and 24, 

bears S.87 3-4°W.-I run thence South linksto a point 

fromwhich the aforesaid corner offractionalSections 13 

and 24, on the left bank of the river, bears West.-The 

Section, therefore, closeswithin the prescribed limits. 

Between Sections 13and 14,Township 21North,Range 6East 

ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Entered prairie. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner. 

Placed three lime stonesin the ground, the top ofthe 

uppermost one 4 inches belowthe natural surface thereof; 

and the othertwo,successively and immediately below 

itThe upper stone is8incheslong, 6 inches wide at one 

end, 5 inches wide at the other end, and 3 1-4inches 

thick;the stone,next belowit,is 5inchessquare and 4 

thick; and the lowermoststone is 6inchessquare and 3 

inchesthick; oversaid stonesraised a mound, in which set 

apost corner to Section 11,12,13 and 14,Township 21 

North, Range 6east. 

17th of April, 1833. 

North 

Chains 

40.00 

49.50 

62.00 

80.76 

North 

Chains 

40.00 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

40.00 

46.17 

60.32 

West 

Chains 

5.61 

A.B.Hind chain-man. 

C.D.Fore chain-man. I 

I Mr. A.B. quitswork on account of 

-36- 

;ickness.-I have suppliedhis place with C. D.,my former 

'ore chain-man, and employedJ.K. asfore chain-man, at a 

:ompensation ofTwenty Dollars per month. 

[J.K's. oath to be entered here.] 

?roceed in this manner between Sections 12and 13,ll and 

12, and 1and 12;-Thenrun 

Between Sections 1and 2,Township 21north, Range 6east 

Ifthe 4th principal meridian. 

Raisedmound, in which set a postfor quarter Section 

:orner. 

Left prairie and entered timber. 

4 creek 50 linkswide, not navigable, runs north-east; 

rapid current. 

[ntersected the south boundary ofTownship 22North,Range 

;East, 37 linksWest ofthe corner to Sections35 and 36; 

md atsaid intersectionset a post, cornert o Sections1 

2nd 2,Township 21North,Range 6East,fromwhich a white 

,ak, 14inches diameter, bears S. 26°E., 14links, and a 

hickory, 13inches diameter, bears S.42°W., 18links 

iistant. 

18th of April, 1833. 

Between Sections34 and 35,Township 21North,Range 6East 

3f the 4th principal meridian. 

Raised a mound, inwhich set a post for quarter Section 

corner. 

Set alime stone,which is 16incheslong, 14inches wide 

at one end, 12inches wide at the other end, and4 inches 

thick, with the widest end 10inchesin the ground, the 

edgesfacing north and south, 

-37- 

for corner to Sections 26,27,34 and 35. 

~~ ~ 

On atrue line between Sections26 and 35, ofTownship 21 

North, Range 6East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner. 

Left the prairie and upland, and entered timbered bottom 

land. 

Intersected the left bank ofWhiteRiver, where set a post, 

for corner to fractional Sections26 and 35,fromwhich a 

hickory, 17inches diameter, bears S.65°W., 13links, and 

a black walnut, 16inches diameter, bears N. 72'W., 142 

links distant. 

Thence commence at the cornert o Sections 25,26,35 and 

36, andrun 

On a true line, between Sections26 and 35,Township 21 

North, Range 6East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Intersected the right and easterly bank ofWhite River, 

runs North-westerly; atsaid intersection set a post, 

cornert o fractional Sections26 and 35,Township 21North, 

Range 6East,fromwhich an elm, 18inches diameter,bears 

S.85°E., 13links;and a white oak, 14inches diameter, 

bears N. 27" E., 14links distant.-Search forthe corner 

offractional Sections26 and 35, on the oppositebank of 

the river, and find itto be at least 5chainsfurther 

Souththan the before described corner to the fractions of 

said Sections 26and 35on the right bank. The Section 

doesnot, therefore, closewithin the limitsspecifiedin 

my instructions. I therefore proceed forthwith 

310 
North 

Chains 

40.13 

74.65 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

40.00 

49.57 

61.17 

North 

Chains 

40.00 

80.00 

-38- 

to ascertain in what line or linesthe error was committed, 

and to make the required correction:-Asthe linebetween 

Sections25 and 36closed within the proper limits,the 

presumption isthat the errorisin the linebetween 

Sections34 & 35;I go to the corner to said Sectionson 

the south boundary ofthe Township and run-Thence 

With the line already surveyed between Sections34 and 35, 

Township 21North,Range 6East ofthe 4th principal 

meridian (seepage 36 ofthis book.) 

The quarter Section corner.-Thereis no error,therefore, 

in this half mile, the 13links being not more than a 

reasonable difference in measurement;so I continue the 

line North, and count the distancesfromthe corner on the 

South boundary oftheTownship, adopting 40.00 chains as 

the length of that part of the linewhich lies Southofthe 

quarter Section corner. 

The corner established by me for Sections 26,27,34 and 

35.-I therefore remove the stone, cornerto said Sections, 

and at 

Setitforthe cornert o Sections 26,27,34 and 35,said 

stone being as described on page 36, viz: 16incheslong, 

14incheswide at one end, 12inches wide at the other end, 

and 4 inchesthick, and issetwith the widest end 10 

inchesin the ground, with the edgesfacingNorth and South. 

Then run 

On a true line between Sections26 and 

-39- 

35,Township 21North, Range 6East ofthe 4th principal 

meridian. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner;then goto the quarter Section corner established 

by me on the line erroneously surveyed between Sections26 

and 35, & described on page 37 ofthis book, and destroy it 

by levelling the mound & removing the post, & return to the 

above described quarter Section corner and continue the 

line East between Setions 26 and 35, counting the 

distancesfromthe corner to Sections 26,27,34 and 35. 

Entered timber. 

Intersected the left and westerly bank ofWhite River, 

(establish the cornerand make the connectionwith the 

oppositecorner.)-Thendestroy the corner to fractional 

Sections26 and 35, established by me on the left bank of 

WhiteRiver, atthe intersection therewith ofthe 

errroneous line between saidSections26 and 35,described 

on page 37 of this book,by removing the post and defacing 

the marks on the witnesstrees. 

Between Sections26 and 27,Township 21North, Range 6East 

ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Raised a mound in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner. 

The middle ofa ravine, which runssouth-west.-Itherefore 

selectthe most suitable plot of ground in the vicinity, 

and deposite 3 quarts of charcoal, 4 inches below 

the naturalsurface ofthe ground, and overit erect a mound, 

in which set a 

-40- 

post as awitness point t o the corner of Sections 22,23, 

26 and 27;said witness point bears N. 26" W., 144links 

fromthe true place ofsaid corner to Sections 22,23,26 

and 27,Township 21North, Range 6East. 

19th of April, 1833. 

Continue in this manner until you get to the Western Range 

of Sections,and after having established the cornerto 

311 

West 

Chains 

40.00 

72.00 

80.42 

Sections29,30,31 and32,run 

On atrue line between Sections30 and 31,Township 21 

North, Range 6East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner. 

Entered timber-bears N. E. and S.W. 

Intersected theEast boundary ofTownship 2 North,Range 5 

East, 62 links South ofthe corner to Sections25 and 36, 

and atsaid intersectionset a post, cornerto Sections30 

and 31,Township 21North, Range 6East,fromwhich a burr 

oak, 17inches diameter, bears S. 25"E., 18links, and a 

white oak, 17inches diameter, bears N. 27°E., 184links 

distant. 

27th of April, 1833. 

-41- 

[Form of keeping field notes of the meanders of a navigable 

river, or other water course:] 

Commence at the corner to fractional Sections 25 and 26, 

Township 21 North of the base line, Range 6 East of the 4th 

principid meridian, on the right and south-easterly bank of 

White River, and run thence down stream, with the meanders of the right bank of said river, along fractional Section 

25, Township 21 North, Range 6 East, as follows: 

Chains. 

N. 36° IE., 14.00-Thence 

N. 25° IE., 17.20 to the mouth of a spring branch, 6 links 

wide, 

comes from the South-East 

-Thence 

N. 40° E., 30.00-Thence 

N. 18° E., 00.40-To the corner of fractional Sections 24 & 

25, Township 21 North, Range 6 East, on the right bank of 

White River. 

Land, high,rich bottom, fit for cultivation; timber,walnut, 

cherry and white oak; undergrowth, spicewood and vines. 

Thence from said corner to fractional Sections 24 and 25, 

down stream with the meanders of the right and southeasterly bank of White River, along fractional Section 24, 

Township 21 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian, as follows: 

Chains. 

N. 13° E., 5.00; Thence 

N. 3° E., 48.00; Thence 

N. 9° E., 27.53-To the corner of fractional Sections 13 

and 24, on the right bank of White River, and 37.54 chains 

West of the corner on the East boundary of the Township. 

-42- 

Land, high, rich bottom, fit for cultivation; timber, walnut, 

cherry and white oak; undergrowth, spicewood and vines. 

In all cases where there are 2 or more fractional corners of 

like denomination on the same bank of a river, distinguish 

them in your meandering notes by stating their course and 

distance from the proper Section corner. 

[Form of certificate for your original field notes.] 

I certify, that the foregoing notes on pages 1 to 65 inclusive, 

are the original field notes of the survey of [here state the 

surveys described on said pages,] as executed by me in the 
months of 183 , under my contract with, and instructions from, Elias T. Langham, Surveyor of the Lands of 

- 

the United States, in Illinois and Missouri, bearing date the 

day of 183 -And I do further certify, that 

the marks, descriptions, courses and distances specified in 

said notes, are correct; and also, that the said notes were all 

set down at the time when, and in the order which, the work 

was performed on the ground. 

Then state such of the facts designated on pages 15,16 and 

17, as are applicable to the case.-And, if there are any 

exceptions on account of re-surveys, or corrections, or any 

other cause whatever, they must be intelligibly and accurately specified in the proper place of the certificate. 

The certificate to the copy will be similar to that to the 

original, with the necessary variations; such 

-43- 

as, I certify that the foregoing notes on pages 1 to 73 inclusive, are correctly transcribed from the original field notes, 

&C. 

xx. 

(The following extract from a letter to Erastus Farnum was 

almost surely written by Robert Lytle the (then) Surveyor 

General. Farnum was probably a private or county surveyor 

making inquiry on how to subdivide certain sections. The 

location of the original letter is unknown at this time.) 

October 30, 1835 

To: Erastus Farnham, Adrian, Lenawee County, Michigan 

Territory 

Subject: Instructions for subdivision of quarter sections 

according to the way in which they were sold. 

“In subdividing the quarter sections on the North and West 

boundaries of the townships, respect should be had by you to 

the division of those quarters made by the Register of the 

Land Office in which they are situate. For instance, in a 

quarter section adjoining the west boundary of a township, 

containing, say, 170 acres; if the Register has sold the East 

half of the quarter for 80 acres, and the West half as containing 90 acres; then of course you should set off 80 acres, exact 

measure, for the East half, and the remainder of the quarter 

belongs to the West half-be it more or less than 90 acres. 

So, likewise, if the Register has sold the East and West half 

of the same quarter as containing, each, eighty five acres; you 

should run the subdivisional line so as to give to each lot an 

equal quantity of land.” 

312 
XXI. 

(This copy of General Instructions was made from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

LITTLE ROCK: 

PRINTED BY WOODRUFF & PEW. 

1837. 

313 
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

SURVEYOR’S OFFICE, 

Little Rock, 18 

To 

Deputy Surveyor. 

SIR-In the execution of surveys under the authority of 

this office, the following general instructions have been prepared for the government of the Deputy Surveyors, and must 

be strictly adhered to in all cases not otherwise provided for 

by special instructions. 

You will provide yourself with a compass of excellent quality and approved construction, having a nonious division; 

also, with two two-pole chains, of 50 links (of equal length) 

each. One of said chains must be adjusted to the standard in 

this office, and by it you will compare and adjust that which is 

used, at least once in every two days, and note their difference, if any, in your Field Book; and, if there is no difference, 

state in your Field Book the fact of your having compared and 

found 

-2- 

them to agree. You must likewise be provided with a full set 

of tally rods, of iron or steel, or pointed therewith, and allow 

none others to be used but the precise number you shall have 

selected for that purpose. 

It is enjoined on you, not to employ any person whose 

character is known or suspected for wanting correct principles, as chain-man, marker, or any other important business 

in executing the surveys which you are to perform; nor is any 

one to be employed in the capacity above stated, who is not a 

free white person, and who has not attained years of discretion sufficient to understand the nature and solemnity of an 

oath. 

Each of your Field Books will commence with a list of your 

chain-men, axe-men, and flag-men, then in your service, and 

intended to be employed in performing the surveys you are 

about to execute. The first book under your contract will 

contain an attested record of their oaths; and whenever you 

may employ any others, you will insert their names, together 

with their oaths, in your Field Book, before they are permitted to commence work. You will also, when a chain-man, 

axe-man, or flag-man is dismissed, or quits work from any 

cause whateuer, note it in your Field Book. 

[Form of oath for assistants.] 

State of Arkansas, 

County of 

I, A. B., do solemnly swear, (or affirm, as the case may be), 

in the presence of Almighty God, that, in measuring where 

the surface of the country is hilly or irregular, I will level the 

chain and plumb the pins, so as to obtain the true horizontal 

distance, and faithfully and impartially execute and fulfil, in 

all things, the duty which may be assigned me, as chain-man 

or marker, or any other 

-3- 

service which may be required in executing the surveys of the 

public lands, to the best of my abilities, so help me God. 

A. B. 

Sworn to and subscribed before me, in the county and State 

E. F., Justice of the Peace. 

above mentioned, this day of A.D. 18 

All Township boundary lines must be run with the compass 

adjusted to the true meridian, unless otherwise instructed by 

this office. 

If, by reason of mineral attraction, or any other cause 

whatever, any line or lines cannot be accurately surveyed 

with the use of the needle, the manner of operating must be 

carefully noted in the Field Book. 

The variation of the needle should be taken, (by an 

observation of the pole star), at least once in every fourth 

range and township. 

All trees which your lines (except random lines) strike, 

must be noted in your Field Book, and have two notches cut 

on each side thereof, in the direction of the line; but no other 

spot or blaze, whatever, is to be made thereon. 

All trees on each side of the lines, and near thereto, (except 

random lines), must be marked with two spots or blazes, 

diagonally or quartering towards the line. Range lines will be 

run North or South, as the case may require, and corners for 

Sections and quarter Sections will be established thereon at 

every half mile and mile, for the Sections and quarter Sections to the West, and not for those to the East of the line, 

except at Township corners. East and West standard lines 

will be run East or West, as the case may require, and corners 

established thereon for the quarter Sections, Sections, and 

Townships North of the line, and not for those to the South of 

it. 

-4- 

All other E. & W. Township lines will be run West on 

randoms, and corrected East from Township corner to 

Township corner; and the excess or deficiency must be added 

to, or deducted from, the South boundary of Section 31, West 

of the quarter Section corner. 

Sub-division lines of a Township will be run with the compass adjusted to the East boundary thereof. 

Section, fractional Section, quarter Section, and Township 

corners, will be perpetuated by planting a post at the place of 

the corner, of the most durable wood that can be had in the 

vicinity thereof. The posts must be set in the earth by digging 

a hole to admit them, one foot deep, and very securely 

rammed in with earth, and also with stone. if convenient314 
the Township corner posts must beat least 5, and the Section 

and fractional Section corner posts 4 inches diameter; they 

must be neatly squared off at top, and placed so that the 

corners will correspond to the cardinal points. The posts at 

the corners of Sections in the interior of a Township must 

indicate, by a number of notches on each of the four corners 

directed to the cardinal points, the number of miles that it 

stands from the outlines of the Township; the four sides of the 

posts will be numbered to correspond to the number of the 

Section they respectively face. If, however, a tree is at the 

place of any corner, it will be notched as aforesaid, and 

answer for the corner in lieu of a post. 

Section corner posts on Range and Township lines, will 

indicate, by a number of notches on two corners directed to 

the proper cardinal points, the number of miles it stands from 

the nearest Township corner; and two sides of said post will 

be numbered to correspod to the number of the Section they 

face. 

Corner posts at Township corners, will have 6 

-5- 

notches on each of the four corners, directed to the cardinal 

points, and each of the four sides thereof will be numbered to 

correspond to the number of the Section they face. Quarter 

Section posts should be 3 inches in diameter, and marked Y4S. 

Or in lieu of posts, you may insert, endways into the ground, 

to the depth of 7 or 8 inches, a stone, for Township, Section, or 

quarter-section corners, which shall be not less than 12 inches wide, 14 inches long, and 3 inches thick. 

You will ascertain and state in your field notes, the course 

and distance from a Township corner post, tree, and stone, to 

a tree in each Section for which it stands as a corner; each of 

said trees you will mark with a notch and blaze facing the 

post, the notch to be on the blaze; and on the blaze, which 

must be neatly made, you will mark, with a marking iron, in 

a plain, distinct, and permanent manner, the letter S., with 

the number of the Section, and over it the letter T., with the 

number of the Township; and above this, the letter R., with 

the number of the Range. 

In establishing a Section or fractional Section corner post, 

tree, or stone, you will mark a tree in each Section for which 

they stand as a corner, in the same manner as for a Township 

corner. You will ascertain and state in your field notes the 

course and distance from the corner to two of these trees. 

Where there is no tree within a reasonable distance in any 

Section on which to mark the number of Section, Township, 

and Range, the fact should be stated in your field notes. 

From quarter Section corners you will state in your field 

notes the course and distance to two trees in different quarter 

Sections, for which you are establishing the corner; which 

trees will be marked with a blaze and notch facing the post 

and Y4S, on the blaze. 

-6- 

The Commissioner of the General Land-office requires that 

all bearing trees should be marked with the letters B. T. 

below the other marks. 

No corner tree should be marked in any Section for which 

the corner is not established; nor should a bearing tree be 

3 

taken in any Section for which the corner is not established, 

unless compelled by necessity, in which case the tree would 

only be marked B. T. 

If, in sub-division, it becomes necessary to run the line 

between Sections 1 and 2, South from the corner to Sections 

35 and 36 of the township above, you will mark a tree in each 

of Sections 1 and 2 in the usual manner, and state in your 

field notes their course and distance from the corner to Sections 35 and 36. In all such cases a similar course would be 

pursued. 

In prairie countries, where bearing trees cannot be found 

within a reasonable distance of a corner which you are to 

establish, you must, in that case, and in all such cases, erect 

mounds of earth, covered with sod, to perpetuate such corners. The mounds must be, for quarter Section and Section 

corners, two feet six inches high, and two feet diameter at the 

base; for Township corners, three feet high, and two feet six 

inches diameter at the base. And at all corners where mounds 

are necessary, you will deposite a rock, or rocks, weighing not 

less than ten pounds; a cylinder of charcoal, not less than six 

inches long and two inches diameter; or a quantity of glass or 

cinder from a blacksmith's shop, not less than half a pint. 

If a corner shall fall within a ravine, or in any other situation where the nature of the ground or the circumstances of 

its locality shall be such as may prevent or prove unfavorable 

to establishing a corner, you will perpetuate such corner by 

selecting, in the immediate vicinity thereof, a suitable plot of 

ground, and establish a witness corner; and 

measure and state in your field notes, the distance and course 

from the position of the true corner to the bearing or witness 

corner so placed. 

Whenever your course may be obstructed by insuperable 

obstacles; such as ponds, swamps, marshes, lakes, rivers, 

creeks, &c., you will prolong the line across such obstacle by 

taking the necessary right-angled off-sets; or, if this is inconvenient, by a traverse or trigonometrical operation, until you 

regain the line on the opposite side; and in case a north and 

south, or a true east and west line is regained in advance of 

any obstacle, you will prolong and mark the line back to the 

obstacle so passed; and at the intersection of lines with navigable water courses, you will establish a post, and give in 

your field notes the course and distance therefrom to two 

trees on opposite sides of the line, each of which trees you will 

mark with a blaze and notch facing the post, and the proper 

number of the fractional Section, Township, and Range. 

The Townships are to be laid off as nearly six miles square 

as practicable, by lines running North and South 6 miles, and 

the corresponding corners joined by lines running easterly 

and westerly; and they will be sub-divided into 36 Sections, 

containing, as nearly as may be, 640 acres each. The Sections 

to be numbered by beginning with No. 1, in the north-east 

corner of the Township, and going west and east, alternately, 

through the Township, with progressive numbers, ending 

with 36, which will be in the south-east corner thereof. 

The courses of all navigable rivers which may bound or 

pass through your district, must be accurately surveyed, and 

their width taken at those points where they may be intersected by Section or Township lines. You will also mean15 
der all lakes or ponds of sufficient magnitude to justify such 

expense. In meandering, you will state particularly in your 

field notes, at what corner you 

-8- 

commence the meanders of each fractional Section, and also 

the corner to which you close. You will likewise state on 

which side of the river you are meandering, whether on the 

right or left bank, and, also, whether on the East, West, 

North, South, North-east, North-west, South-east or Southwest, side of the river or other water course, through or 

adjoining your district. 

All notes of corrections and re-surveys, and the cause 

thereof, must be entered as such in the proper place of the 

Field Book, according to the order in which they may be 

executed; and the former and erroneous survey must be referred to in the said entries. 

In sub-dividing Townships, you will commence at the corner to Sections 35 and 36 on the south boundary of the 

Township, and move on in continued progression from east to 

west, and from south to north, in order that the excess or 

deficiency of the Township, as to complete Sections, may be 

added to, or deducted from, the northern and western Ranges 

of quarter Sections. 

Each north and south section line must be made one mile in 

measure by the chain, except those which close to the north 

boundary of the Township, so that the excess or deficiency 

will be thrown on the northern Range of quarter Sections, 

viz:-In running north between Sections 1 and 2, at 40.00 

chains, establish the quarter Section corner, and note the 

distance at which you intersect the north boundary of the 

Township; and also, the distance you fall east or west of the 

corresponding Section corner for the Township the north; 

and, at said intersection, establish a corner for the Sections 

between which you are surveying. 

The east and west Section lines, except those in the west 

Range of Sections, and those which cross navigable water 

courses, will be run from the proper Section corners, on random lines, (without blaz- 

-9- 

ing), for the corresponding Section corners. Temporary quarter Section corner posts will be set at 40.00 chains, and the 

distance at which you intersect the Range or Section line, and 

your falling north or south of the corner run for, will be noted 

in your Field Book; from which corner you will correct the 

line, and remove the temporary quarter Section post, and 

place it and establish the corner on the true line, equidistant, 

or at the average distance between the proper Section corners. 

The east and west lines, in the west Range of Sections, will 

be run west on true lines; the quarter Section corner will be 

established at 40.00 chains; the corners for the proper Sections will be established at the intersection with the Range 

line; and the distance which it intersects north or south of the 

corresponding Section corner west of the line, will be noted in 

the Field Book. 

Whenever an east and west Section line, other than those 

in the west range of Sections, crosses a navigable river, or 

other navigable water course, you will run east and west on a 

true line, from the proper Section corners, to the said river or 

other navigable water, and make an accurate connection 

between the corners established on the opposite banks thereof. 

You will give the received names to all the rivers, creeks, 

lakes, and swamps, as also of prairies, hills, mountains, and 

other natural objects. You will never give original names to 

such objects, where names have heretofore been given. 

You will note precisely the distance to, and the width of, all 

streams, not navigable, which your line may traverse; also, 

their general course, as accurately as you can conjecture. 

All mines, salt springs, salt licks, and mill seats; also, 

towns, villages, and settlements, and the names of the same; 

also, forges, factories, cotton-gins, and all such items of information; also, the general 

-10- 

course of traveled roads and tracks, denoting the place to 

which they may lead; are to be noted in your Field Book. 

You will likewise note when the lines enter and when they 

leave creek or river bottom. At the end of every mile, in 

running Section or Township lines, and at the end of the 

meanders of each fractional Section, you will give a particular description of the face of the country, whether level, hilly, 

or mountainous; of the quality or rate of the soil; and, if liable 

to inundation, state to what depth, from observation of the 

water-marks upon the trees, or any other source of information; and note the kinds and quality of timber and undergrowth. The description of each mile must be full, and not 

refer to any previous description. 

The names of all bearing trees are to be fully written out; 

not abbreviated or expressed by initial letters. And you will, 

at the beginning of each of your Field Books, and at the 

beginning of each day’s work, when starting a sectional line, 

write out in full the name of the Section, the Township, north 

or south of the base line, and east or west of the 5th principal 

meridian. 

In stating the courses to the witness trees from the corners, 

the course of meanders, and the bearing or direction of small 

streams, mountains, &c., when the are not to the cardinal 

points; the capital letters N. S. E. & W., plainly and distinctly 

made, will be used. 

The plots or sketches which you are to return, will exhibit, 

as accurately as practicable, from careful occular observation 

(in addition to the measurement on the line) to be made by 

you and noted in your Field Book, the true situation of all 

objects noted; including the courses and connections of all 

rivers and other water courses, and traveled roads or tracks, 

denoting the principal places to which they lead; and it would 

be well to keep on a page 

-11- 

of your field-book a plat of a Township or line, on which you 

may portray such, and other objects, as streams, prairies, &c. 

Your Field Books for your original notes will be of such a 

size as you may deem most convenient; they will be of the best 

quality of foolscap paper; and the original field notes, which 

are to be returned to this office, together with a fair and 

316 
correct copy thereof, must be kept in a plain and intelligible 

manner, according to the form hereafter prescribed in these 

instructions. Every entry must be so specific as not to admit 

of a doubt ast o what is intended thereby, or a possibility of a 

misconstruction of your meaning. The said notes must be 

entered in the same order, from day t o day, as the work is 

executed on the ground, including all re-surveys and corrections; and the date must follow each day's work. 

Although your lines are to be measured with a chain oftwo 

poles,you are to keep your reckonings in chains of four poles, 

or one hundred links each; and all entriesin your Field Book, 

and all plans and calculations are to be made accordingto the 

decimal measure of a chain. 

The Field Books in which you copy your notes, will be 

according to a form t o be prescribed by this office. 

As the measurement, by the chain, is the principal source 

of errors in surveying, you will be careful to attend to your 

chain-men, that they carry the chain horizontally and plumb 

the pins. 

No lines of whatsoever description are to be run, or marks 

of any kind made, by any person but yourself, or persons 

under your immediate inspection. Sub-contracts are illegal. 

The page of your Field Book containing notes of the first 

work performed by you, must be numbered 1,and progress in 

numerical order to the end of your book, or to the last page 

containing notes of your 

-12- 

surveys. A blank page is to be left on the front part of your 

Field Book, preceding the oaths of your chain-men, marker, 

&c., on which you are required, after having filled your book 

with notes, to make an index,showing the page at which the 

notes of every line or part of a line may be found. 

When closing meanders on an old surveyed line, where no 

corner has been established, or, if established, has fallen in 

the river, or cannot be found,from any cause, you will establish a corner to the proper fractional sections, and measure, 

and state in your field notes, the distance from said corner,so 

established, to the nearest known corner on the line. 

-13- 

Form of keeping Field Notes of exterior boundary 

lines of Townships.-[SeeMap.] 

[The "map" referred to here is deleted. 

It is simply a township diagram.] 

Suppose the line to be surveyed is the east boundary of 

Township 1North,Range 12West, ofthe 5thprincipal meridian. 

If first book, oaths of assistants. Chain compared with the 

standard and found to be correct., 

Adjusted my compass to the true variation of the needle, 

which is 8 East. 

CHAINS. 

along the eastside of Sec. 36,Township 1north, ofthe 

base line, Range 12west of the 5th principal meridian. 

Abrook 20 linkswide runs NW. 

35.00 

40.00 

55.25 

71.10 

80.00 

Ared oak 15inches dia. 

Set a 1/4 Sec. corner post,fromwhich a red oak 10 

inches dia.bears N. 30°W 16links, and a hickory 18 

inches dia. bears S 15?h0W. 10links. 

East 10.00 chains 

North 5.00 " 

East 2.50 I' 

North 3.75 " -acrossthelake.64.00 

West 12.50 " -tothe true line in advance ofthe 

lake; blazed the line south to the lake 3.25ch's;which 

is 5.50ch's wide on the line; now continue the line. 

An impassablelake bears NE and SW,thence off-set. 

A black walnut 8 inches dia. 

Set apost corner to Sections25 and 36,T. 1N.,R. 12 

W.,from which a hickory 6 inches dia.bears S.18°W. 11 

links, and a white oak 20 inches dia.bears N. 72°W. 

36 links. 

Land level, and 2d rate soil;timber, oak, hickory, 

hackberry, walnut, &c.; undergrowth green briars. 

-14- 

Proceed in this manner alongthe east boundary of Sections 

25, 24, 13, and 12-then along the east side of Section 1,as 

foli 0w s : 

CHAINS. 

NORTH 

8.00 

12.16 

21.50 

35.60 

48.50 

63.11 

71.81 

80.00 

along the east side of Section 1,T. 1 N.,R. 12W. 

Abayou 100links wide,bears NW and SE. 

Entered bottomof river. 

An ash 10inches dia. 

Intersected the right bank of-river, runs east; 

navigable; where set a post cornert o fractional Sections 

1,T. lN.,R. 12 W.,and6,T. lN.,R. 11 W.,fromwhich 

a hickory 12inches dia. bears S. 41"W. 18links, and a 

cottonwood30 inches dia.bears S. 60"E. 28 links. 

river; distance across 

obtained by calculation; where set a post cornerto 

fractional Sections 1,T. 1N.,R. 12W., and 6,T. 1N., 

R. 11W.,from which an elm 18inches dia. bears N 69°E 

18links, and a sweet gum 15inches dia. bears N. 19°W. 

40 links. 

Tothe left bank of 

Asweet gum 15inches in dia. 

Left bottom and entered upland. 

Set a post corner to Sections 1,6,31, and 36, and to 

Townships 1and 2 North, Ranges 11and 12West,fromwhich 

a red oak 10inches dia. bears S lo" E 10links, an 

over-cup oak 24 inches in dia. bears S. 46Yz" W. 23 

links; a hickory 14inches dia.bears N. 18°W. 38links 

and a hickory 6 inches dia. bearsN. 35"E. 50links. 

hickory-no underLand south ofthe bottom 2d rate soil;timber, oak and 

-15- 

growth:the bottom 1strate soil;timber,sweet gum, elm, 

cotton wood, &c., with heavy cane. North of the bottom 3d 

rate soil, and rocky; timber mostly oak and blackjack, 

some hickory. Undergrowth oak bushes. 

1st - 18 

Suppose the corner to Townships 1 and 2 North, Ranges 12 

Chain compared and adjusted to the standard. 

and 13 West, had been established, proceed as follows: 

CHAINS. 

WEST 

20.10 

on a random line along the south side of Section 36, 

Township 2 North of the base line, Range 12 West of 

the 5th principal meridian. 

A creek 10 links wide runs SE. 

317 
40.00 

51.15 

63.25 

80.00 

CHAINS. 1 

WEST 

10.00 

16.00 

40.00 

55.00 

67.00 

81.50 

Set a temporary l/4 Sec. corner post. 

Roadfrom to bearssouth. 

Springbranch runs SE-spring10linksto the north. 

Set a post, temporary cornert o Sections35 and 36. 

CHAINS. 

EAST 

25.80 

41.50 

55.20 

65.70 

35.70 

81.50 

on a random line along the south side of Section 31,T. 

2 N.,R. 12W. 

A creek 15linkswide runs SW. 

Anavigable lake bears north and south, about 10.00 

Set a temporary ?4 Sec. corner post. 

Entered A. B.'sfield, bearsNE andSW. 

Left the field, bears NW and SE. 

Intersected theRange line 250 links 

chainswide. 

-16- 

South ofthe cornerto Townships 1and 2North,Ranges 12 

and 13West. 

2d - 18 

Chain compared, and found correct. 

on a true line along the south side of Section 31, 

Township 2 North of the base line,Range 12West ofthe 

5thprincipal meridian. 

An ash 10inches dia. 

Set a Yi Section corner post, from which an ash 15 

inches dia. bears N. 18°E. 19links,and an elm 18inches 

dia. bears N. 35" W. 25links. 

fractionalSections6,T. lN.,Range 12W,and31,T.2 

N.,R. 12W.,fromwhich a hackberry 6 inches dia.bears 

N. 60" W. 50links,and a sweet gum 12inches dia. bears 

S.40°W. 25 links. 

Tothe east bank ofsaid lake; distanceacross obtained 

by calculation; where set a post cornerto fractional 

Sections6,T.lN.,R.l2W.,and31,T.2N.,R.i2W., 

fromwhich a box-elder 10inches dia.bears N. 20°E. 14 

links, and a swampoak 15inches dia.bears S.65°E. 18 

links. 

Set a post on the westsideofthe lake, cornerto 

Ahickory 10inches dia. 

Set a post cornert o Sections31and 32,T. 2 N.,R. 12 

W,from which a hickory 15inches dia. bears N. 31°E. 25 

links,and a hickory 6 inches dia.bears S. 18°W. 20 

links, and marked B. T. only, there being no tree 

convenient in Section 31. 

overflowfrom the lake, of about 2feet.Timber, oak, 

hickory, 

Land 2drate soil, and inclined to be wet-subject to 

-17- 

hackberry,sweet gum, &c. Undergrowth, small cane, green 

briars, &c. 

Proceed in this manner along the south boundary of Sections 32, 33, 34, and 35-then along Section 36, as follows: 

CHAINS. I on a true line along the south side of Section 36,T. 2 

N.,R. 12W. 

26.18 

40.00 

67.00 

Awhite oak 23inches dia. 

Set a l/4 Sec. corner post, from which a white oak 16 

inches dia. bears N. 20"E 15links, and a white oak 30 

inches dia bears norqh 30°W. 15links. 

Ahickory 8inches dia. 

80.00 The corner t o Townships 1and 2N,Ranges 11and 12West. 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

3d - 18 

I 

Form of keeping Field Notes i n sub-dividing a Townshipsay Township 1 N., Range 12 West of the 

5th principal meridian.-[Seemap.] 

4th 18 , commenced the sub-division of 

Township 1North of the base line, Range 12West of the 5th 

principal meridian. 

If first book of survey-oaths of assistants. Chain compared and adjusted to the standard. 

Thence adjusted my compass to the east boundary of said 

Township, in the following manner: 

With my compassadjustedt o a variation of 7 30" East,Irun 

north along the east side of Section 36-at 39.98 chains, a 

point 32 links east of the l/4 Sec. corner, on the east side of 

Section 36, at 80.03 chains, a point 67 links east of the corner 

to Sections 25 and 36. I therefore adjust my compass to a 

variation of 8° East. 

If the east boundary of the Townshiphad been surveyed by 

yourself immediately previous, you 

-18- 

will adjust your compass for sub-dividing, as follows: 

By reference to the notes of survey of the east boundary of 

the Township as surveyed by me in - 18 ,I find the 

survey to have been made at a variation of 8" East, which is 

the true variation. I therefore adjust my compassto the same 

degree. 

CHAINS. 

NORTH 

10.50 

24.00 

31.50 

38.60 

40.00 

56.00 

63.50 

80.00 

between Sections35 and 36,Township 1North of the base 

line,Range 12West ofthe 5th principal meridian. 

Ahickory 6 inches dia. 

Entered cane. 

Tothe south side of lake, navigable, bearsWest 

and NE; where set a post cornert o fractionalSections35 

and 36,from which a sweet gum 18inches dia. bears S 30" 

E 17links, and a hackberry 12inches dia. bears S45"W 

10links. 

calculation;where set a post cornerto fractional 

Sections35 and 36,fromwhich an elm 12inches dia.bears 

N 10"E 16links, and a cotton wood 30 inches dia. bears N 

30" W 10links. 

Set a Y4 Sec. corner post,fromwhich a sassafras 6 

inches dia. bears N 18"E 16links and an elm20 inches 

dia bears S28°W40 links. 

Left cane. 

Ahickory 10inches dia. 

Set a post corner t o Sections 25,26,35, and 36,from 

which a hickory 8 inches dia. bears N 15" W32links,and 

awhite oak20 inches dia.bears S 56%"E 20 links. 

The north side of the lake-distance obtained by 

Land, the first and last Yi mile, 2d rate 

-19- 

soil;timber mostly oak and hickory. Undergrowth oak 

bushes; the balance 1strate soil;timber,sweet gum, 

cottonwood,and somehickory. Undergrowth cane. 

I 

318 
CHAINS. 

EAST 

10.00 

30.00 

40.00 

50.00 

55.00 

63.00 

80.60 

West 

15.60 

40.30 

66.10 

80.60 

on a random line between Sections25 and 36,T 1N, 

R 12W. 

Ahigh bluff ofrocks. 

Off-setsouth 10.00 chains 

east 20.00 " 

north 10.00 " regained the line. 

Set a temporary ?4 Sec. corner post. 

Entered lowwet land. 

Acreek 100linkswide runs SW. 

Entered upland. 

Intersected theRange line 55linkssouth ofthe corner 

to Sections25 and 36. 

on a true line between Sections25 and 36. 

Awhite oak 20 inches dia. 

Set a ?4 Sec. corner post,from which a red oak 15 

inches dia. bears S 18"E 25links,and a white oak 24 

inches dia. bears N 61°W35links. 

Ablackjack 10inches dia. 

The corner t o Sections25 26,35, and 36. 

Land, except a few chains on each side of the creek is 

uneven and poor;timber mostly oak,somehickory. 

Undergrowth oak and blackjack bushes. 

4th - 18 

Proceed in this manner until you arrive at the corner to 

Sections 1,2,11, and 12-then between Sections 1and 2, as 

follows: 

CHAINS 

NORTH 

21.20 

33.00 

40.00 

51.10 

80.45 

I' S 77° E 24.10 -to the corner of fractional 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

Sections 1,T 1N, R 12 W, and 6, T 1N, R 11W. 

Commenced at the corner to fractional Sections 35 and 36, 

on the south side of lake, and meander along the 

southerly side of said lake in Section 36, T 1N, R 12 W 

Chains. 

Thence N60" E 25.00 

" N71" E 15.00 

I' N50" E 18.00 " N 20° W10.00 -At 50 Links on this course a 

bayou 50 links wide comes 

from the NE. 

" N80" W15.00 

'I S 55° W30.00 

'I S 15° W24.50 -to the corner of fractional 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

Sections 25 and 36, on the north side of the lake. 

5th - 18 

Having progressed with the survey to the corner of Sections 29,30,31, and 32, run the line between Sections 30 and 

31, as follows: 

-20- 

-22- 

between Sections 1and 2,Township 1North of the base 

line, Range 12West ofthe 5th principal meridian. 

Intersected the right bank of- river, runs 

easterly;where set a post cornert o fractional Sections 1 

and 2,from which a box-elder 10inches dia. bears S35°E 

10links,and a hackberry 12inches dia. bears S41°W 18 

links. 

To the left bank of-river, distance across, 

obtained by calculation; where set a post cornerto 

fractionalSections 1and 2,fromwhich a sweet gum 18 

inches dia. bears N 20° east 10links, and a sweet gum 12 

inches dia. bears N 50°W30 links. 

Set a '14 Sec. corner post, fromwhich a hickory 12 

inches dia. bears S38°E 50 links, and a hackberry 14 

inches dia. bears N 31" W27 links. 

A hackberry 8inches dia.Left bottom and entered 

upland. 

Intersected the south boundary ofT2 N, R 12W, 25 

links east of the corner to Sections35and 36;where set 

a post corner to Sections 1and 2,T 1N,R 12W,from 

which a burr-oak 18inches dia. bears S 46"E 33links, 

anda white oak 20 inchesdia. bears S36 1/2°W 21links. 

(Here describe the land, timber, &c.) 

-21- 

Form of keeping Field Notes of meanders. 

Commenced at the corner to fractional Sections 1and 2 on 

the right and south bank of river, and meander along 

the right bank ofsaid river, through Section 1,T 1N, R 12W. 

Chains. 

Thence N 75° E 20.00 

'I N801/2" E 10.50 

" N65" E 30.00 -at 15.00 chains on this course 

the mouth of a creek 50 links 

wide comes from the SE. 

CHAINS 

WEST 

15.50 

23.50 

29.00 

40.00 

65.00 

85.50 

CHAINS 

WEST 

15.45 

23.40 

28.93 

35.95 

40.00 

60.00 

80.51 

(Re-surveyed-seepage .) 

on a true line between Sections30 and 31,Townshipone 

North ofthe base line, Range 12West ofthe 5th 

principal meridian. 

A path bears north and south. 

Awhite oak 30 inches dia. 

Entered prairie, bears NE and SW. 

Raised a mound for ?4 Sec. corner, inwhich deposited 

Left prairie, and entered timber. 

Intersected the east boundary ofT 1 N, R 13W. 25 links 

On examiningmy diagram, Ifind the line between 

Itherefore proceed to re-survey said line. 

tworocks. 

south ofthe cornerto Sections25 and 36. 

Sections30 and 31should be nearly 80.00 chainsin length 

(Re-survey-see page .) 

on the line previously surveyed, between Sections30 and 

31,TlN,R12W-onare-survey. 

Apath bears north and south. 

A white oak 30 inches dia. 

Entered prairie, bears NE and SW. 

The '/4 Sec. corner mound, which Idestroy. 

Raised a mound for '/4 Sec. corner, in which deposited 

Left prairie, and entered timber. 

Intersected the east boundary ofT 1N, R 13W. 25 links 

two rocks. 

south ofthe cornert o Sections25and 36;where set a 

post corner to Sections30 and 31,T 1N,R 12W,from 

which awhite oak 15inches dia. bears S60,E 30 links, 

and a hickory 10inches dia. bears N 40"E 20 links. 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

-23- 

Having established a corner to Sections 19,20,29, and 30 

run. 

319 
CHAINS. 

WEST 

16.00 

26.50 

East. 

21.30 

35.20 

in a true line between Sections 19and 30,T 1N,R 12W. 

Ahickory 18inches dia. 

Alake, bears north and south, navigable; where set a 

post cornert o fractional Sections 19and 30,from which a 

nickory 10inches dia. bears S 151/4"E 20 links,and a 

sweet gum 20 inches dia.bears N 18" E 30 links. 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

~~ ~ 

Commenced atthe cornerto Sections24 and 25,T 1N, R 

13W, fromwhich a hickory 8inches dia. bears N 45"E 30 

links, and a white oak 20 inches dia.bears S 36", E 35 

links, thence 

on a true line between Sections 19and 30,T 1N,R 12W. 

Ahickory 10inches dia. 

A lake, navigable; where set a post cornerto fractional 

Sections 19and 30,fromwhich a box-elder 10inches dia. 

bears S 30°W 10links, and a sycamore30 inches dia. 

bearsN 22°W50 links. 

The corner to fractionalSections 19and 30 on the 

opposite side ofthe lake, bears S89°E. 

opposite side ofthe lake bears east. 

Thence south 31links;from this point the corner on the 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

6th - 18 

In fractional Townships, on navigable rivers, it may be 

necessary to run the lines from the rectilineal boundary of 

the Township, whether north, south, east, or west, as the case 

may be, and throw the fractional Sections on the river. 

measurement within which a survey shall close; but having 

made allowance for the inaccuracy or obliquity of adjoining 

surveys, an excess or deficiency ofa close in course or distance 

of a Township line of more than 5 chains; of a Section line of 

more than 1 chain; of meanders of a Section of more than 1 

chain, 50 links, would be sufficient to cause a distrust in the 

accuracy of the survey. 

You will leave a margin of at least half an inch on each edge 

of every page of your Field Book, which will not only admit of 

binding, but prevent obliteration of the notes. 

No memorandum, or writing, of any description should be 

made in the Field Book, except such as exclusively relates to 

the surveys. 

Each book will be signed by yourself and close with a 

certificate in the following form: 

I certify that the foregoing notes, on pages 1 to - 

inclusive, are the original field notes of the surveys therein 

specified; that the surveys were executed, and the field notes 

taken, by myself in person, (or by -, under my 

immediate and personal superintendence), at the dates 

therein written. 

A. B., 

Dept. Sur. 

The foregoing instructions have been draughted with a 

view to insure a correct execution of surveys, and uniformity 

of returns, and with a special 

-25- 

-24- 

Where the exteriors of a Township are one continued line, 

it is preferable that the sub-division N and S lines should 

progress from south to north in the usual order, unless the 

barrier be insuperable. 

Where a Township is not rectangular, it may be convenient 

to deviate fom the cardinal points, in running random lines, 

in order to intersect the corner run for. There are no objections to this mode; but the exact course at which you run must 

be stated in you field notes. 

It is not thought advisable to prescribe any limit of 

reference to the laws of the United States in relation to the 

surveys of public lands. 

It is expected they will be strictly adhered to in form and 

substance 

do 

hereby acknowledge the receipt of instructions from the Surveyor of public lands, in Arkansas, of which the foregoing, on 

pages 1 to 25 inclusive, is a true copy. 

D. S. 

320 
(These Florida Instructions of 1842 were printed in a newspaper type format, with the title similar to a headline and the body 

of the instructions in narrow columns. The original document is now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

OFFICE OF THE SURVEYOR GENERAL 

Tallahassee, Nov’r 3, 1842 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

to 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS 

321 
1. You will provide yourself with a good nonius compass, 

which is to be compared with, and regulated by, the standard 

compass in the Surveyor General’s office. 

2. You will likewise procure a surveying chain two poles, 

or 33 feet, in length, and containing fifty links, which is to be 

compared with, and adjusted by, the standard chain in the 

Surveyor General’s office. It should be made of good iron wire 

of such size as to prevent the chain from stretching by use, 

and yet light enough to be readily straigtened in measuring,-the handles should be made of iron or brass, at least a 

fourth of an inch in diameter. 

3. You must likewise be provided with the measure of the 

standard chain, which may be made similar to your surveying chain, of smaller wire; and by this your surveying 

chain must be compared and adjusted at least every other 

day, or oftener. 

4. Tally rods are usually made of iron about 12 inches in 

length, having a ring at the top in which is fixed a piece of red 

cloth, or something else of a conspicuous color, that they may 

be more readily seen when stuck in the ground. Eleven tally 

rods is the number required. They should be counted by both 

the chainmen at the end of every “out” to see that none have 

been lost. 

5. Your compass and chain must be frequently examined 

in the field in order to discover and rectify any error or 

irregularity which may arise in the use of them. 

6. The aberrations of the needle are a fruitful source of 

error in surveying. These may arise from a variety of causes. 

“Local attraction,” owing to the presence of iron mineral, is 

generally assigned by surveyors as the principal cause of the 

disturbance of the needle; but it is believed that in many 

instances the true source of errors complained of is to be 

found in the carelessness or inattention of the surveyor in the 

use and management of his compass, or the erroneous 

measurement of his lines. All these must be constantly and 

vigilantly guarded against by every means in your power. 

OF RUNNING AND MARKING LINES. 

1. All lines of whatever description which you may survey, 

must be run by the true meridian. For which purpose the 

variation of the magnetic needle, at the place where you 

survey, must be taken or previously known, and the sights of 

your compass adjusted to the true meridian, by means of the 

nonius, before you commence your survey. 

2. All lines which you may survey, are to be marked in the 

following manner, viz: All those trees which your line cuts, 

must have two notches made on each side of the tree where 

the line cuts it; but no spot or blaze is to be made thereon. 

These are indifferently called “station trees,” “line trees,” or 

“sight trees.” And all those trees on each side of the line and 

within ten or fifteen links thereof, (or farther, if the land 

should be thinly timbered,) must be marked with two spots or 

blazes, diagonally or quartering towards the line, which blazing must be made so conspicuous that the line may be readily 

found and traced. 

3. Whenever, in running lines, your course may be obstructed by insuperable obstacles, as swamps, marshes, 

lakes, rivers, precipices, or other objects, over which you 

cannot pass, you will take the necessary offsetts, or work by 

traverse or by trigonometry, in order to pass the obstacle, and 

to ascertain the exact distance on so much of the line as, by 

reason of such obstructions, may not be actually run. By 

whatever method you pass such inaccessible parts of the 

lines, the utmost accuracy is necessary to obtain the true 

measure thereof. 

4. No lines, of whatever description, embraced in your 

contract, are permitted in any case to be run or surveyed by 

any person but yourself, or some regularly accredited deputy 

surveyor duly orthorized by the Surveyor General; or are 

letters, numbers, or marks of any kind, to be made by any 

other person than yourself, except it be in your presence and 

under your immediate and personal direction, in which case 

you are to inspect such letters, numbers, or marks, to see that 

they are neatly and correctly made. 

OF EXTERIOR TOWNSHIP LINES. 

1. The act of Congress of 18th of May, 1796, requires that 

the public lands “shall be divided by north and south lines 

run by the true meridian, and by others crossing them at 

right angles, so as to form townships of six miles square.” In 

laying out and surveying the exterior boundaries of 

townships, in conformity to this provision of the act, the 

greatest possible accuracy must be observed both in the 

course and measurement of the lines. To run the lines by the 

true meridian, the variation of the magnetic needle must be 

frequently, and with the utmost exactness, determined by 

celestial observation, and the sights of your compass adjusted 

accordingly. 

2. Celestial observations, to find the variation of the compass, should be made at least every twenty or twenty-four 

miles. It is not material that these observations should be 

made at the township corners. They may be made at any part 

of the lines, so as to be as nearly as practicable at the intervals here directed. But no alteration must be made in the 

course of any township line until you arrive at the township 

corner; for with whatever course you set out in running a 

township line that course must in all cases be continued to 

the end thereof. 

3. The following is the order and method to be pursued in 

running exterior township lines: A base line, or a township 

line assumed as a base, is run due east and west across the 

southern boundary of the tract of country to be surveyed. On 

this line the quarter section, section, and township corners, 

are established at the full measure; from each of the township 

corners on this line, range lines are run due north, the section 

and quarter section corners established thereon, and at the 

end of the sixth mile on each of those lines, temporary 

township corner-posts are set. But at the end of the sixth mile 

on the most easterly line a township corner is established; 

from this corner a township line is run due west across the 

whole district, intersecting the range lines previously run, 

which, if the work be well done, will be at or near the temporary township corner-posts placed at the end of them. Exactly 

at the point of intersection, whether at the temporary posts or 

north or south of them, the township corners are to be established. The distance from the points of intersection to the 

322 
temporary posts, must be accurately measured and noted, 

shewing whether it be north or south of those posts. On this 

west line the intermediate section and quarter section corners will be established as the survey of the line advances. 

4. The same process will be repeated in running up due 

north from the township corners on the last west line, 

another series or tier of range lines to temporary six mile 

posts, establishing as before the most easterly one, and from 

thence extending another, due west, township line across the 

whole district, in the manner before directed. The same 

method is pursued in each successive tier of townships until 

the survey of the township lines is completed. 

5. Variations from this order and mode of running 

township lines, will sometimes be necessary, to accommodate 

them to the situation and boundaries of the tract of country to 

be surveyed, or to correct with prior surveys, such cases as 

they occur, will be provided for in special instructions. 

6. Whatever excess or deficiency may occur in the 

measurement of the exterior township lines, is to be carried 

to the north or west end of those lines. But by a vigilant and 

faithful attention to duty on the part of the skilful and experienced surveyor, those excesses or deficiences, except to a 

trifling extent, will be of rare occurrence. As the interior 

section lines must necessarily conform, both in their course 

and measure, to the township lines, any error committed in 

the latter will unavoidably be carried into the former, and 

may mar the beauty and order of the entire subdivisions of 

the township. 

7. It will be seen, then, how very important it is that the 

townships be as nearly as possible, six miles square; that the 

exterior boundaries be run exactly by the true meridian; and 

that the measures thereof be truly and accurately made. 

8. The bearing trees at the section and quarter section 

corners, on the exterior township lines, are to be taken only 

on the north and west sides of those lines, respectively, 

wherever it is practicable. And those sections only which lie 

on the north and west sides, are to be marked and numbered. 

With the field notes of exterior township lines the surveyor 

must return a map or diagram, drawn on a scale of 40 chains 

to an inch, on which will be represented the length of each 

line, in chains and links, the variation of the compass by 

which it was run, and, also, the water courses, lakes, prairies, 

swamps, roads, and such other objects as may be shewn on a 

map. 

2. Though your lines be measured by a chain of two poles 

or perches in length, you are notwithstanding, to keep your 

reckoning in chains of four perches or one hundred links, and 

all your entries in your field book, and all your calculations, 

plans &c., must be made accordingly in four pole chains, and 

decimal parts, (or hundredths) thereof. 

because at that distance the last of the ten tally rods or pins 

with which the forward chainman set out, has been set; the 

other chainman then comes up, counts and delivers to him 

the ten tally rods which he has taken up in the last “ou~,” the 

forward chainman likewise counting them as he receives 

them. At the end of every five chains the forward chainman 

as he sets the tenth or last tally rod calls “out,” which is 

repeated by the other chainman, by the marker and by the 

surveyor, each of whom keeps a tally of the “outs,” and marks 

the same as he calls them. 

4. You are to pay the strictest attention to the frequent 

examination, and correction of your surveying chain by the 

standard measure taken with you. The greatest attention 

must likewise be observed in obtaining, and entering in your 

field book, the exact measure on the lines, to every object 

which is noted therein. These measurements are very frequently found to be important, after many years, both in 

tracing the lines and in identifying the corners. 

5. The principal source of error in surveying is the 

measurement by the chain. And as the interest of the public 

service, the rights of purchasers of public lands as well as 

your own standing as a surveyor, are at stake, it is enjoined 

on you in selecting your chain carriers, to have strict regard 

to their character and fitness for the trust; and to employ 

those only in whose moral integrity, and faithfulness, you 

can repose the most implicit confidence. You are required to 

attend vigilantly to the manner in which your chainmen 

perform their duty, and to cause it to be faithfully and correctly executed; to see especially that they carry the chain 

horrizontally on hilly ground, and that all the lines which 

you may run, be not only correctly measured by them but the 

length thereof truly reported to you for immediate entry in the 

field book. 

6. In measuring across streams ofwater you are to give the 

width directly across the channel. The distances to the posts 

which you shall establish on the banks of rivers, lakes, or 

bayous which are to be meandered, are to be taken with great 

accuracy. 

3. In measuring lines, every five chains are called an 

OF MEASURING LINES. 

OF ESTABLISHING AND MARKING CORNERS. 

1. In all measurements, the level or horizontal length is to 

be taken, and not that which arises from measuring along the 

surface of the ground, when it happens to be uneven, rolling 

or hilly. For this purpose in ascending or decending hills, the 

chainmen must let down one end of the chain to the ground, 

and raise the other end to a level therewith, as nearly as may 

be; from the end of which a tally rod should be plummed and 

let fall to ascertain the spot for setting it. And when the 

surface of the ground is very steep it may be found necessary 

to shorten the chain, (by doubling it together,) to one half its 

length, or even less, so as to obtain the true horizontal measure. 

1. The corners of Township sections and quarter sections, 

are to be established and marked in the following manner:- 

2. On the exterior Township lines, corner posts must be 

erected at the distance of every mile and half mile from the 

township corners. The mile posts are for the corners of sections and the half mile posts for the corners of quarter sections. These posts are always to be made of the most durable 

wood that can be had, and should be very securely set or 

driven into the ground to the depth of fifteen or twenty inches 

at least, and the sides of the posts to be neatly squared off at 

the to-the angles of the squares to be set in the direction of 

323 
the cardinal points of the compass. Wherever a tree may be so 

situated as to supply the place of a corner post it is to be 

blazed on all four sides facing the sections to which it is the 

corner. 

3. At all the posts thus established for section or township 

corners, there shall be cut with a marking iron, on a bearing 

tree or some other tree within each section and as near as 

may be to the corner thereof, the number of each section: and 

over it the letter T with the number of each Township, 

annexed thereto the letter N or S, as the Township may be 

north or south of the base line, and above this the letter R, 

with the number of the range, and annexed thereto the letter 

E or W, as the Range may lay east or west of the principle 

meridian; thus: R 4 E 

T9N 

36. 

4. The letters and numbers thus marked should be in a 

regular chop, cut into such tree and neatly squared off and 

faced, so as to be always readily distinguished from a mere 

blaze. 

5. At the quarter section corners, the post is to be flattened 

on two opposite sides and thus marked: “1-4 S.” to indicate 

that it is a “quarter” section post, and the nearest adjoining 

tree on each side of the sectional line must be marked, to show 

the Township, Range and Section in which such tree may be 

situated. 

6. The place of all corner posts of whatever description, 

which may be established, are to be perpetuated in the following manner, viz: from each post the courses are to be taken 

and distances measured, to two or more trees in opposite 

directions, as nearly as may be, which trees are called “bearing trees,” and shall be blazed on the side next to the post, and 

one notch made with an axe in the blaze. On each bearing tree 

the letters B. T. to denote the fact of its being a bearing tree, 

must be distinctly cut in the wood, below the blaze. 

7. In prairies and other places where bearing trees cannot 

be had, the places of the posts are to be perpetuated by 

quadrangular mounds of earth, to be raised around the posts 

to the height of two and a half feet, and having a base of four 

feet square, the angles of which shall be in the direction of the 

cardinal points. The earth to form the same must be taken 

from one place to form a pit, directly south of a section corner, 

and east of a quarter section corner; but when circumstances 

conflict with this arrangement the earth to form the pit may 

be taken from any point where most convenient; but in all 

cases, the course and distance to the centre of the pit must be 

noticed in your field notes; near the centre of each mound 

there must be placed a stone of at least three or four pounds 

weight, or a few handsful of charcoal, when convenient. And 

to prevent, as much as possible, the action of the rains and 

weather in wearing away the mounds, they must be covered 

over with sod. The posts should show not less than two feet 

above the mounds, and are to be squared and marked as in 

other cases, and must be marked on each of the four square 

sides thereof, with the number of the section which it faces. 

Wherever stone can be conveniently obtained, a pile of stones 

of the same dimensions, will in all cases be made, in the place 

of a mound of earth. 

8. Wherever the section or Township lines intersect lakes, 

steams of water, or islands, which are to be meandered, posts 

are likewise to be established on the margin or banks thereof, 

at the points where the lines intersect or leave them. These 

posts are to be flattened on the two sides coinciding with the 

lines on which they are set, and on each of these sides is to be 

marked the number of the section which it faces. 

OF SUBDIVIDING TOWNSHIPS INTO SECTIONS. 

1. Each Township is subdivided into thirty-six sections of 

one mile square by lines running due north and south, 

crossed by others running due east and west. The sections are 

known and designated by progresive numbers beginning at 

the north east corner of the Township and numbering westward and eastward alternately, as shown in the following 

diagram: 

2. Each side of a section must be made one mile in measure, by the chain, quarter section corners are to be established at every half mile except in closing, when the closing 

lines vary from eighty chains or one mile, in which case you 

are to place the quarter section corners equidistant, or at 

least at the average distance from the corners of the section, 

but in running out the last section lines to the north and west 

boundaries of the Township, the quarter section corners are 

to be established at the distance of forty chains from the last 

section corner and the excess or deficiency of measure (if any) 

carried out into the last half mile, and cast upon the north 

and west sides mi of the Township, as required by law. 

18 17 16 15 14 13 

3. In closing out the section lines to the north boundary of 

the township, unless the section lines intersect the boundary 

at the section corners thereon established for the adjoining 

Township, you must set a post and take bearing trees at such 

intersection, and measure and note the distance to the post 

previously set for the adjoining Township, and on which side 

of such post, but wherever the closing lines of the section 

intersect at the post on the north boundary, such post becomes common for the sections on both sides of the Township 

boundary; bearing trees are however to be taken and the 

proper marks and numbers made for and within the sections 

between which the closing lines are run. In establishing the 

corners on the north side of the Township, where the section 

lines close thereon, the bearing trees, wherever it may be 

practicable, are to be taken on the south side of that boundary. But in closing out to the west boundary you will first run 

a random line and correct back from the post already established thereon, and observe the instructions for establishing 

324 
the quarter section corner, given in the second section of this 

article. 

4. Having adjusted the sights of your compass to correspond with the course of the east boundary of the Township, 

you will begin at the corners of sections 35 and 36, on the 

south boundary, and run a line due north forty chains, and 

establish the quarter section corner between sections 35 and 

36, continue north forty chains further, and establish the 

corner of sections 25, 26, 35, 36. 

5. From the corner of sections 25,26,35,36 run a random 

line, without blazing, due east from the corner of 25 and 36 on 

the east boundary, at the distance of five or ten chains on the 

random line, set up a stake, or make some other mark; if you 

intersect exactly at the post on the range line, you will blaze 

the random line back as the true line, but if your random line 

falls north or south of the corner on the range line, you must 

measure and note such deviation in your field book; and from 

the said corner on the range line, return upon a true line back 

to the corner where you commence the random, blazing and 

marking the true line, and observing to verify the correctness 

of its course, by means of offsets, from the stake set or marks 

made on the random. The quarter section first is to be established on the true line, at the average distance between the 

corner of sections 25,26,35,36, and the corner on the range 

line. 

6. From the corner of sections 25,26,35,36, run due north, 

between sections 25, 26, setting the quarter section post as 

before, at forty chains; and at eighty chains establish the 

corner of sections 23,24,25,26. Then run a random line due 

east for the corner 24, 25 on the range line; correcting back 

and establishing the quarter section corner, in the manner 

directed for running the line between 25 and 36. 

7. In this manner proceed with the survey of each successive section in the first tier, until you arrive at the north 

boundary of the Township, which you will reach by running 

up the line between sections 1 and 2. On this line, the distance at which the north boundary is intersected, is to be 

carefully noted. If you should not intersect at the post established for corner to sections 35,36 in the adjoining Township, 

you must carefully measure and note in your field book, the 

distance of the point of intersection from said post, showing 

whether you fall east or west thereof; and at that point you 

will set a post and establish a corner for sections 1 and 2, 

taking your bearing trees, if practicable, south of the 

Township line, making the proper marks and numbers for 

and within sections 1 and 2. Bearing trees are to be taken, 

and marks and numbers made in the same manner, should 

your line intersect at the post for sections 35 and 36. 

8. The first tier of sections being thus laid out and surveyed you will return to the south boundary of the Township, 

and from the corner sections 34 and 35, commence and survey 

the second tier of sections, in the same manner that you 

pursued in the survey of the first, closing at the section 

corners on the first tier. 

9. In like manner proceed with the survey of each successive tier of sections, until the 5th, or last entire tier is run up. 

From the section corners on this tier you will run random 

lines for the corresponding corners established on the Western boundary of the Township and correct back on the true 

lines from these corners on the West boundary.-But instead 

of setting the quarter section post, on these true lines, at the 

average distance, you will establish them at the exact distance of 40 chains from your last section corners; carrying out 

any excess or deficiency in the measure, into the last half 

mile, or that part of the line West of the quarter section post. 

In closing thus on the West boundary, you will take bearing 

trees on the east side thereof, if practicable, and make the 

proper marks, and numbers for, and within each section as on 

the north boundary. 

10. Great care must be taken that the north and south 

lines be run according to the true meridian, as required 

bylaw. But if you find by the measurement of the closing lines 

of the sections, that there is an increasing convergency or 

divergency of the north lines, you may reasonably distrust 

the accuracy of the direction of your lines by the needle. In 

such case it will be necessary, so to vary your course as to run 

parallel to the meridian (or north and south line) on which 

you are closing in order that the sections may contain, as 

nearly as possible the just and legal quantity of 640 acres or 

one mile square. 

11. The east and west lines are to be run at right angles 

with the north and south lines as far as may be practicable in 

closing: But if on running an east and west line, you find the 

post you are running for, lies much to the north or south of the 

point where you intersect, you are to mistrust the measurement of the north and south line last run by you. In such case 

a re-measurement of the lines must be made, and the error, 

wherever found corrected. 

12. You are referred here to the accompanying specimen of 

the field notes of a Township in which the whole process of the 

subdivison is illustrated at large, by example. 

13. The foregoing mode of subdividing townships into sections, it will be perceived, is intended for, and can be fully 

applied only to entire Townships. In the subdivision of fractional Townships, however, the order of survey will be varied 

no further than may be necessary to adapt it to the situation 

and boundaries of such fractional Township. As a general 

rule, from which there will be few exceptions, it will be found 

best to make entire sections on the Township lines bounding 

a fractional Township, and making the work to close on the 

irregular boundaries thereof. 

14. An act of Congress of the 24th of May 1842 authorizes a 

departure from the ordinary mode of surveying the pubjic 

land on any river, lake, bayou whenever in the opinion of the 

President of the United States, the public interest would be 

promoted thereby; so as to survey such land in tracts of two 

acres in width, fronting on such river, lake or bayou and 

running back to the depth of forty acres. But as no general 

rules can be framed to govern all such surveys, this branch of 

the service is left to be provided for in special instructions, as 

cases thereof may occur. 

15. Should you find a manifest error in the measurement 

of any Township line within, (or bounding your district) 

which will be readily detected by the closing of your lines 

thereon, you are to correct such error, by remeasuring such 

Township line, from where the error is found, to the north or 

west end thereof, the section and quarter section corners 

thereon, are to be removed to proper distances and there 

established; and the marks and numbers are to be cut off or 

effaced, and the distance at which you pass those corners 

must be noted by you. Of such re-measurement and corrections you are to take full and complete field notes, in a 

325 
separate book, to be returned to the surveyor General’s 

Office, with the field notes of your subdivisions. For such 

corrections, however, the surveyor General is not authorized 

to make any compensation. 

OF MEANDERING RIVERS. 

1. You will accurately meander, by course and distance, 

all navigable rivers which may bound or pass through your 

district; all navigable bayous flowing from or into such rivers; all lakes or deep ponds of sufficient magnitude; and all 

islands suitable for cultivation. 

At those points where the township or section lines intersect the banks of such rivers, bayous, lakes, or islands, 

posts are to be established, as before directed. In meandering, 

you are to intersect all these posts, closing at each post the 

course and distance on which it is intersected; you will likewise notice all streams of water falling into the river, lake, or 

bayou, which you are surveying, with their width at their 

mouth; all springs, noting the size thereof, and whether pure 

or mineral water; the head and mouth of all bayous, and all 

rapids, falls or cascades; all islands and bars, with intersections to their upper and lower points, to establish their exact 

situation; this must be done with great accuracy, in relation 

to all islands which you shall meander so as to determine and 

shew their precise location and bearing on the maps of the 

surveys; and at the close of the meanders within each section, 

you will give the estimated elevation of the banks; the shores, 

whether bold or shallow; the current, whether quick or sluggish; the quality of the soil, and kind of timber. 

2. Should any lake or pond which you shall meander, be 

situated within any one section, so as not to be intersected 

with any of the lines thereof, you will run, and measure, a 

line very exactly; but without marking, from one of the corners, or one of the half mile posts, or other given point on one 

of the lines of said section, to the point on the margin of the 

lake at which you shall commence the meanders thereof. The 

true location of such lakes is necessary, in order to calculate 

the contents of the subdivisions of such sections. 

3. The width of streams of water, and bayous binding on, 

or forming a boundary of your surveys, must be ascertained 

at every intersection of your lines therewith, by trigonometrical process, or otherwise; which can generally be 

most conveniently done in taking the meanders. This is 

necessary for the correct exhibition of such streams on the 

townships plats. 

4. Except in cases where navigable streams constitute the 

boundary line between two series or systems of surveys, 

commencing from different standard lines, such streams are 

not to interrupt the regular survey of the townships through 

which it passes, the lines of which shall be continued across 

the streams to the complete measure; and where the surveys 

have been closed on a stream, as a boundary of a cession, or 

from other cause, and are afterwards to be continued across 

such stream, the surveyor continuing the surveys on the 

opposie side, must extend a line across the stream so as to 

make the sections thereon complete. 

5. To establish a uniform and simple mode of designating 

and distinguishing the two sides of navigable streams, the 

terms “right bank,” or “left bank,” will be used in all cases, 

thus: Suppose yourself standing at the head of the river 

looking down stream; then that bank of the stream on your 

right hand is to be called and referred to in your field notes, as 

the right bank, and that on your left hand as the left bank; 

and these terms thus applied to navigable rivers, are to be 

used in all cases, whether in running lines or taking meanders. 

6. Great care must be taken to describe clearly the post at 

which any meanders of a river, bayou, lake, or island, commence; and also, all the posts on township or section lines, 

which may be intersected in the progress of the meanders. 

7. The field notes of meanders are to be written at the end 

of the subdivisions. The courses are to be inserted in a column 

on the left of the page; the distance in chains and links in a 

column next to this; at the extreme right of the page the notes 

and remarks.-Each section is to be tabled by latitude and 

departure before you leave it as finished, so as to correct any 

mistake that might occur while meandering such section. 

The column of distances must be added up at the foot thereof 

on each page. 

Errors in meandering are of very frequent occurrence, 

arising principally it is believed from bad chaining. Your 

special attention is called to the manner in which this part of 

the work is executed; and all possible accuracy is enjoined, 

both in the courses and measurement, and the entry thereof 

in your field book, and in testing the same before you leave 

the field. 

8. 

OF PRIVATE CLAIMS, 

INDIAN RESERVATIONS, &c. 

1. In surveying private claims, Indian reservations, or 

other tracts not conforming to section lines, the location 

thereof must be particularly described and the place of beginning clearly stated in your field notes; also, the name of the 

claimant in whose right the survey is made, with the numbers by which it is known, and if a reservation the quantity 

contained in it, and the name of the reservee. The field notes 

of all the lines of each tract must be complete, and are to be 

entered in the field book separately from the notes of other 

tracts. The field notes of private claims and Indian reservations must be entered in separate books. 

2. Wherever a section or Township line intersects a private claim or Indian reservation, there a corner must be 

established. The particular line intersected with its course 

and the name of the claimant or reservee with the number or 

other designation by which it is known must be noted. And 

from such intersection the private claim or reserved line 

must be carefully measured, each way along said line, to the 

end thereof, unless it should be intersected by another section 

or township line before the end be reached. 

3. The course of every line of the survey of a private claim 

or Indian reservation, with the length thereof and the variation of the compass and the date of the survey are to be 

inserted in the field notes, which are to be certified to and 

signed by you. 

326 
OF FIELD NOTES. 

1. The field books are to be made of one uniform size, the 

paper must be of good quality and the books covered with 

morocco or other leather, and neatly stitched and trimmed 

and containing space enough for all the field notes of a 

township. The pages are to be ruled with red ink and faint 

lined. 

2. On the first page of your field book of each township, 

insert in a plain and neat manner, by way of title, the number 

of the Township and Range; by whom surveyed, with the date 

of the commencement, and the date of completing the subdivision of the same. 

3. At the head of each subsequent page on which the field 

notes are written, you will insert a running title designating 

the number of the township and range which is to be separated from the field notes by a double red line. 

4. The field notes of the surveys furnish primarily the 

materials from which the plats and calculations of the public 

lands are made; and the source from whence the description 

and evidence of the location and boundaries of those surveys 

are drawn and perpetuated. It is evidently then of the utmost 

importance that the field notes should be at once, an accurate, clear and minute record of every thing that is done by 

the Surveyor and his assistants (in accordance with these 

instructions) in relation to the running, measuring and 

marking lines, establishing corners, &c., as well as a full and 

complete topographical description of the country surveyed; 

as it regards every thing which may afford useful information, or gratify public curiosity. 

5. Rivers, creeks, and smaller streams, lakes, swamps, 

prairies, hills, mountains, or other natural objects, are to be 

distinguished in your field notes by their received names 

only, where names have heretofore been given. To such you 

are not to give original names. 

6. Besides the ordinary field notes taken on the lines you 

will add, at the end of your field book, such further description or information as you may be able to give, concerning 

any thing in the township worthy of particular notice, or 

which you may judge necessary, or useful, to be known; and 

you will add, also, a general notice or description of the 

township in the aggregate, as it regards the face of the country, soil, timber, &c. 

7. In your field book the courses and distances must be 

placed in a column on the left hand side of the page, and your 

notes and remarks on the right. Each page is to contain the 

field notes of one section line only. The field notes of the 

subdivisions of each township, and fractional township, are 

to be written in a separate field book. The field notes are to be 

written in a fair and legible hand-if otherwise, they must be 

accompanied with true and fair copies. The original field 

notes must in all cases be returned into the office of the 

Surveyor General according to your contract. 

8. With your field notes you are to return a plat of every 

township surveyed by you, protracted on a scale of 40 chains 

to an inch, exhibiting all ponds, lakes, rivers, and creeks, the 

contents of all sections and fractional sections will be ascertained by latitude and departure. The area of public lands 

and private claims must be exhibited in separate tables on 

your township plats, as is explained in the form furnished. 

9. The plats are to be so constructed as to indicate, both by 

protraction and by figures, the courses and distances of all 

lines, viz-The exact distances between the posts planted at 

the corners of each section or fractional section; and the 

course of the lines where, from any cause, they vary from the 

cardinal points; also, the precise delineation by courses and 

distances of private claims, reservations, and other tracts of 

land not conforming to sectional lines, wherever the continuation of a surveyed line is interrupted by an impassible 

swamp, or from any other cause, the distance of the line 

actually run between the starting and finishing post is to be 

truly represented by the platting, and also by figures. 

10. The distance of a surveyed line at the points where a 

stream crosses the same, is to be indicated by figures, and the 

general course of such streams, where they are not navigagable, between such different points of intersection, is to be 

delineated on the plat as nearly as the same can be conjectured. 

11. The plat is to exhibit the received names of all rivers, 

creeks, lakes, swamps, prairies, hills, and other natural objects; original names are never to be given to objects which 

have heretofore been named, all ponds or lakes which are not 

actually meandered are to be represented as nearly as practicable on the plat by occular observation, swamps are to be 

represented by slightly shaded black lines, and dots and the 

outlines of the same should be distinctly exhibited. 

12. The plat should also exhibit as far as practicable all 

mines, salt springs, salt licks, and mill seats, also towns 

villages and settlements with the names of the same, also 

forges, cotton gins and all other such items of informationalso the general course of traveled roads and tracts denoting 

the places to which they may lead. 

13. When any private claim, Indian or other reservation 

&c. is exhibited, the name of the confirmee or reservee must 

be given, all lines in the Township survey which have not 

been actually run must be represented on your plat of survey 

by dotted lines. The bearing and distance of each line of all 

private claims must be exhibited on the plats and noted in the 

field book, the length of all connective lines between private 

claims and public lands to be exhibited on the plats. A separate plat and certificate of each claim protracted to a scale of 

twenty chains to an inch to be made out. 

14. The date of each days work must be inserted at the 

close thereof near the bottom of the page. 

15. At the close of the original field notes of the subdivision of each Township and fractional Township, the following 

certificate is to be written and signed by yourself: 

“I hereby certify that in pursuance of a contract entered 

into with V. Y. CONWAY, Surveyor General of the United 

of - 18-, and in strict conformity to the laws of the 

United States and the instructions of said Surveyor General, 

I have surveyed and subdivided into sections, Township [fractional Township] in range in the Territory of Florida. 

And I do further certify that the foregoing are the true and 

original field notes of the said survey and subdivision, executed as aforesaid. Certified this - day of -.” 

16. Any material departure from these instructions, or 

negligence in the observance thereof, will be considered as a 

violation of the conditions of your contract, and a forfeiture of 

States for the Territory of Florida, bearing date - day 

327 
all claim for payment: all loose, inaccurate, precipitate or 

defectivework, either asit respectsthe surveysin the field or 

the notes and returns thereof on paper WILL BE REJECTED. 

Distance 

40,OO 

45,OO 

72,OO 

80,OO 

~~ 

40,OO 

40,50 

80,OO 

FORM OF FIELD NOTES. 

NorthBoundary of Township 9, Range9, So. &East. 

BeginningattheN.E. CandranN. 89"40'W. 

1hmilepostPineN.34"E. 15Lks.PineS. 77"E. 15. 

ToBushyCypress Pond. 

X Pond 

Set 1stmile post 

Mostly flat 3rdrate pine and 

Palmetto 

Pine N. 37°W. 15 

Pine S. 58°W. 72' 

Pine N. 56"E. 38'

Pines. 50"E. 73'

Lks. 

2nd Mile Weston the NorthBoundary 

YzMileposts.N.6l"W. 11LinksPineS. 60"W. 10Lks. 

Toa miserable saw-grass, cypressand pine swamp. 

Set 2nd mile postFirst 40,50 chsflat 3rdrate 

pine & palmetto-residue misable cypress, pine & swamp. 

G~mN.83~W.7 

BayN.57°E.9'' 

Bay S.50°W7"

GumS.3WE15" 

Links. 

Distance 

24,OO 

40,OO 

80,OO 

3,OO 

40,OO 

55,OO 

68,50 

80.00 

FORM OF FIELD NOTES. 

3d Mile Weston theNorth Boundary. 

Leave Swampto flat 3dpine and palmetto 

VzmilepostCypressN. 5OE.35LksS. 10"E. 59Lks. 

Set 3rdmile postFirst 24.00chainsswamp 

Residue flat 3d pine 

and palmetto 

Pine N. 62°W. 23 

Pine S.30°W. 81'" 

CypressN. 57"E. 

Pines. 63"E. 3'

Links. 

101" 

4th Mile Weston theNorthBoundary. 

To cypress and pine swamp (saw-grass,briers, &c.) 

VZ mile post Cypress,N. 16"W. 25Lks Pine S. 59"E. 

A skirt of 3rdrate flat pine land 18Chains X 

through swamp,to flat 3rd rate pine and palmetto 

Set 4th mile post- PineN.2YE.70 

Pines. 70"E. 10" 

Bay N. 82° W. 21 " 

Bays. 76"W.24" 

23Lks 

Links 

328 
XXIII. 

(This copy of General Instructions was made from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

LITTLE ROCK. 

PRINTED BY ELI COLBY: 

Office of the Arkansas Times and Advocate. 

1843. 

329 
-3- -5- 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FORM OF OATH FOR ASSISTANTS. 

TO DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

SURVEYORS OFFICE, 

Little Rock, 

To Deputy Surveyor. 

SIR: In the execution of surveys under the authority of this 

office, the following general instructions have been prepared 

for the guidance of the Deputy Surveyors, and must be strictly adhered to in all cases not otherwise provided for by special 

instructions. 

You will provide yourself with a compass of excellent quality and approved construction, having a nonious division; 

also, with two two-pole chains, of fifty links (of equal length) 

each, both of which must be adjusted to the standard measure 

in this Office, one to be kept for a standard and the other used 

in surveying. The chain you use in surveying must be compared and adjusted to your standard at least once in every two 

days, 

-4- 

and their difference, if any, noted in your Field Book; and, if 

there is no difference, state in your Field Book the fact of your 

having compared and found them to agree. 

You must likewise provide yourself with a full set of tally 

rods, of iron or steel, or pointed therewith, and allow none 

others to be used but the precise number you shall have 

selected for that purpose. 

It is enjoined on you, not to employ any person whose 

principles are known or supposed to be corrupt, as chainman, marker, or any other important business connected 

with the execution of Surveys which you may have to perform; nor is any one to be employed in the capacity above 

stated, who is not a free white person, and who has not 

attained years of discretion sufficient to understand the nature and solemnity of an oath. 

Each of your Field Books will commence (on the third or 

fourth page from the beginning thereof) with a list of your 

chain-men, blazers, and flag-men, then in your service; and 

intended to be employed in performing the surveys you are 

about to execute. The first book under your contract will 

contain an attested record of their oaths; and whenever you 

may employ any others, you will insert their names, together 

with tneir oaths in your Field Book, before they are permitted 

to commence work. You will also, when a chain-man, blazer, 

or flag-man is dismissed, or quits work from any cause whatever, note it in your Field Book. 

, do solemnly swear, (or affirm as the 

State of Arkansas, 

County of -. 

I, A- B 

case may be.) in the presence of Almighty God, that, in 

measuring where the surface of the country is hilly or irregular, I will level the chain and plumb the pins, so as to obtain 

the true horizontal distance, and faithfully and impartially 

execute and fulfil in all things the duty which may be 

assigned me, as chain-man, or blazer, or any other service 

which may be required in executing the surveys of the public 

lands, to the best of my abilities, so help me God. 

A. B. 

Sworn to and subscribed before me, in the County and 

State above mentioned, this - day of -, A. D. 

18-. 

E. F. Deputy Surveyor. 

No lines of whatever description are to be run, or marks of 

any kind made, by any person but yourself, or persons under 

your immediate personal inspection. Sub-contracts are illegal. 

I 

The Townships are to be laid off as nearly six miles square 

as possible, by lines running North and South six miles 

(called Range lines,) and the corresponding corners joined by 

lines running East and West (called Township lines;) and 

they (i. e. the Townships) are to be sub-divided into 36 Sections, each to be one mile square as nearly as may be. The Sec- 

-6- 

tions to be numbered by beginning with No. 1, in the North 

East of the Township, and going West and East alternately 

through the Township, with progressive numbers, ending 

with 36 in the South East corner thereof. 

If by reason of local attraction, or any other cause whatever, any line or lines cannot be accurately run with the use 

of the needle, the manner of operating must be fully and 

explicitly noted in your Field Book. 

TOWNSHIP BOUNDARY LINES, HOW RUN. 

All township boundary lines must be run with the compass 

adjusted to the true meridian, unless otherwise instructed by 

this office. The variation of the needle should be taken by an 

astronomical observation, at least once in every Fourth 

Range and Township, and the result entered in your Field 

Book. 

Range lines will be run North or South, as the case may 

require, and corners for quarter sections and sections will be 

established thereon, at every half mile and mile for the quar330 
ter sections and sections to the West, and not for those to the 

East of the line, except at Township corners. 

East and West standard lines will be run East or West, as 

the case may require, and corners established thereon, at 

every half mile and mile, for the quarter Sections, Sections 

and Townships North of the line, and not for those South of it. 

All East and West Township boundary lines, others than 

standard lines. will be run West on 

-7- 

randoms, and corrected East from Township corner to 

Township corner; and the excess or deficiency in the length of 

the boundary, must be added to, or deducted from, the south 

boundary of Section 31 West of the quarter Section corner. 

The Section and quarter section corners, East of the quarter 

section corner on the south side of Section 31, will be established on the corrected line, at every half mile, and mile 

therefrom. 

At the intersection of all lines, (randoms excepted,) with 

navigable water courses, you will establish corners for fractional sections. 

Whenever your course may be obstructed by impassable 

obstacles, you will state in your Field Book, the precise way 

you may adopt to prolong the line across. 

SUB-DIVISIONAL LINES OF A TOWNSHIP, 

HOW RUN. 

Sub-divisional lines of a Township will be run with the 

compass adjusted to the East boundary thereof, and the operation of ascertaining it, and the result, must be minutely 

stated in your Field Book. 

In sub-dividing Townships, you will commence at the corner to sections 35 and 36, on the South boundary of the 

Township, and move on in continued progression, in order 

that the excess or deficiency of the Township, as to complete 

sections, may be thrown upon the lines between the northern 

and western tiers of Sections, North and West of the quarter 

section corners on those lines. 

All North and South sub-division lines, except 

necessary to run the lines from the rectilineal boundary of 

the Township, whether North, South, East or West, as the 

case may be, and throw the Fractional Sections on the river; 

it is preferable however, where the exteriors of a Township 

are one continued line, that the sub-divisionNorth and South 

lines, should progress from South to North in their usual 

order, unless the barrier be inseparable. 

If it should become necessary to run the lines between the 

northern tier of sections, South from the corners on the north 

boundary of the Township, you will take two bearing trees at 

each of those corners, which trees must be on the south side of 

the boundary, and in the Sections for which the corner 

stands. 

The East and West section lines, except those 

-9- 

in the west tier of sections, and those which cross navigable 

water courses, will be run from the proper section corners, on 

random lines, (without blazing,) for the corresponding section corners; temporary quarter section corner posts will be 

set at 40 chains, and the distance at which you intersect the 

Range or Section line, and your falling North or South of the 

corner run for, will be noted in your Field Book; from which 

corner you will correct back, by running in a direct line for 

the corner first run from, and remove the temporary quarter 

Section corner post, and place it, and establish the corner on 

the true line equidistant, or at the average distance between 

the section corners. 

Where a Township is not rectangular, it may be convenient 

to deviate from the cardinal points in running random lines, 

in order to intersect near to the corner run for. There are no 

objections to this mode; but the exact course at which you run, 

must in every instance be stated in your Field Notes. 

The East and West lines in the west tier of sections, will be 

run West on true lines, and the quarter section corners established at 40 chains, in order to throw the excess or deficiency 

in the length of the lines, west of the said quarter section 

corners; at the intersection of these lines with the west 

boundary of the Township, establish corners, (the bearing 

trees to be taken in the Sections for which the corner stands,) 

from each of which, measure the distance to the nearest 

corner on the boundary. If it should become necessary to 

survey the lines 

-8- 

-10- 

those between the northern tier of sections, must be one mile 

in measure by the chain, at the end of which distance, section 

corners; and at 40 chains on each Section line, quarter Section corners must be established. In running North between 

the northern tier of sections, establish the quarter section 

corners on the lines at 40 chains, so as to throw the excess or 

deficiency in the length of the lines, north of the quarter 

section corners; at the intersection of those lines with the 

north boundary of the Township, establish corners, (the bearing trees to be taken in the sections for which the corner 

stands,) from each of which ascertain the the distance to the 

nearest known corner on the boundary. 

In Fractional Townships, on navigable rivers, it may be 

between the western tier of sections East on true lines, or you 

should be required by special instructions, to survey them 

west on random lines, and correct them back from the corners 

on the range line, you will in either of these instances, take 

two additional bearing trees, on the east side of the range line 

at each section corner thereon, for the sections in the 

Township East of such Range line, and make an entry of the 

same in your Field Book. 

Whenever your East and West sub-division lines, other 

than those in the west tier of sections, cross a navigable river, 

(or other water course,) you will run from the proper section 

corners both East and West on true lines, to the said river, 

331 
and establish corners at each intersection, on opposite banks, 

and make an accurate correction between the corners thus 

established. 

When from wide closes and the excess or deficiency in the 

length of the section lines of a Township which you may be 

sub-dividing, you are led to believe that error exists, say to 

the amount of 1 chain and 50 links, in any particular mile of 

an exterior line, you will remeasure the suspected line and 

make an entry of the fact in your Field Book. But when the 

error is found to exceed 1 chain and 50 links, or you find that 

each mile of an exterior line of a Township is uniformly 100 or 

more chains longer or shorter than a mile, you will in either 

of those cases, make a resurvey of such boundary, and obliterate the old or former corners; provided, however, the 

-11- 

sub-divisional lines of any adjacent Tounship have not been 

surveyed and closed upon said boundary; if the lines in any 

Township adjacent have been surveyed and closed thereupon, you are only required to re-measure the boundary from 

section corner to section corner as formerly established. 

MEASUREMENT. 

As measurement by the chain is the principal source of 

errors in surveying, you cannot be too particular in your 

attentions to your chain-men. Where the ground is uneven, 

make them in every instance, level the chain and plumb the 

pins, so as to obtain the true horizontal distance. 

Although your lines are to be measured with a chain of two 

poles, you are to keep your reckonings in chains of four poles, 

or one hundred links each; and all entries in your Field Book, 

and all plans and calculations are to be made according to the 

decimal measure of a chain. 

In the measurement of lines whether exterior or subdivisional, the distances to objects, on each mile, must be 

counted from the particular Section corner started from, and 

the count to cease as soon as the next Section corner is 

reached. 

All lines, both exterior and sub-divisional, which have been 

run on Randoms, must, when corrected back, be chained, so 

that the distances to all objects and offsets around impassable 

barriers shall appear in the notes of 

-12- 

the corrected instead of the Random lines.-The length of the 

line as found on running the Random, will be used, unless 

upon the measurement of the corrected line you find palpable 

error. 

MEANDERING. 

All rivers that may bound or pass through your district, 

which are navigable, and all lakes of sufficient magnitude to 

justify the expense, must be accurately meandered; the 

courses and distances of the meanders to be entered in your 

Field Book, of the sub-division of the Township, in the order 

the work is performed on the ground. 

In meandering, you will state particularly, in your field 

notes, at what corner you commence the meanders of each 

fractional Section, and also the corner to which you close. You 

will likewise state on which side of the river you are 

meandering, whether on the right or left bank, and whether 

up or down stream; and also, which side of lakes, whether on 

the North, South, East, West, S. E., S. W., N. W., or N. E. 

sides. When closing meanders on a surveyed line where no 

corner has been established, or if established has been destroyed, you will establish a corner on said line for the proper 

fractional Sections, and measure therefrom, and state in your 

field notes the distance to the nearest corner on said line. 

If you should be compelled to base lines upon meanders, the 

Latitude and Departure 

-13- 

made in arriving at the line to be established, must, in all 

such cases, be explicitly stated in your Field Book. 

LIMITS WITHIN WHICH YOUR SURVEYS 

MUST CLOSE. 

After having made allowance for inaccuracy or obliquity in 

adjoining Surveys, an excess or deficiency in the close or 

length of a Township boundary line, of more than 5 chains, of 

a Section line of more than 1 chain, and of one mile of meanders, of more than 1 chain and 50 links, will be sufficient to 

cause a distrust in the accurracy of the Survey, and will 

render a re-survey necessary, since no Survey will be received that does not close within those limits; it will therefore 

be necessary for you, whilst on the ground, and immediately 

after surveying each Township and Section line and the line 

of meanders through each Section, to test and satisfy yourself 

that they each close within the above prescribed limits; if 

they should not, a re-survey must necessarily be made. By 

pursuing this course-which is hereby enjoined-you will 

save the time of the office, and the consequent trouble and 

expense to yourself of returning to correct errors, which 

would otherwise be overlooked. 

LINES, HOW MARKED. 

All trees which your lines, both exterior and sub-divisional 

(Randoms excepted) strike, must have two notches cut on 

each side of 

-14- 

each tree, exactly where the line strikes and leaves them, 

which places you can indicate to your blazer by striking the 

point of your jacob staff into the tree at the spot for the 

notches; no other mark or blaze whatever is to be made 

thereon: at least one or two of these line trees on every half 

mile, with its name and diameter, and the distance thereto 

must be accurately noted in your Field Book. All trees on 

332 
each side of the line and near thereto (except Randoms) must 

be marked with two spots or blazes, diagonally, or quartering 

towards the line. For the purpose of having the lines of Survey 

well blazed, you are required to have two good blazers constantly employed, blazing the same line at the same time. 

CORNERS, HOW MADE. 

Township, Section, fractional Section and quarter Section 

corners will be perpetuated by setting a post of the most 

durable wood that can be procured in the vicinity thereof, 

firmly in the ground, at the exact point for the corner. 

In lieu of posts you may use stones, which are to be, each, 

not less than equal to 6 inches square; the shape is not very 

material-an oblong, twelve or fourteen inches in length, set 

to the depth of seven or eight inches in the earth, would be the 

most preferable. Whether posts or stones are used, the fact 

must be stated in your Field Book. Posts used for Township, 

Section and fractional 

-15- 

Section corners, must be at least four inches, and those for the 

quarter Section corners, three inches in diameter; they must 

be neatly squared off from about half way to the top, and 

placed in the ground, so that the corners thereof will correspond to the cardinal points. If a tree should happen to be on 

the exact point for a corner, it must be well blazed on the sides 

towards the Sections for which it stands as a corner, and the 

fact, with the kind and diameter of the tree, stated in your 

Field Book. From a Township, Section, and fractional Section 

corner, you will ascertain and state in your field notes, the 

course and distance to a tree in each Section for which said 

corner is made or stands; each of said trees you will mark 

with a blaze facing the corner; on this blaze, which must be 

neatly made, you will mark with a marking iron, in a plain, 

distinct and permanent manner, the letter “R,” with the 

number of the Range, and under this letter “T,” with the 

number of the Township, and under this the letter “S,” with 

the number of the Section; for instance, suppose a tree stood 

in Section 1 as a bearing tree to the corner of Sections 1,2,11 

and 12, T. 1 N., R. 12 W., the marks on it would be as 

follows-”R. 12 W., T. 1 N., S. 1.” 

In no instance should a bearing tree be taken in a Section for 

which the corner is not established, unless compelled on 

account of the scarcity of trees, in which case the tree 

with the letters B. T., and the fact of there being no other 

trees must also be stated in your field notes. 

Two bearing trees must be taken at the quarter Section 

corners, which trees must be marked with blaze facing the 

corner, and this “1-4 S.,” on the blaze. 

You will select for bearing trees those which are the soundest and most thrifty in appearance, and of the size and kinds 

of trees which experience teaches will be the most permanent 

and lasting. In prairie or any other countries where be‘aring 

trees cannot be found within a reasonable distance, say 10 

chains of a corner which you are to establish, you must in that 

case and in all similar ones, erect mounds of earth covered 

with sod, to perpetuate such corners. 

The mounds must be for quarter Section and Section corners, two feet six inches high, and two feet in diameter at the 

base; 

-17- 

for Township corners, three feet high and three diameter at 

the base, At all corners where mounds are necessary, you will 

deposit therein, at or near the bottom, a rock or rocks 

weighing not less than ten pounds, a cylinder of charcoal not 

less than six inches long and two inches diameter, or a 

quantity of glass or cinder from a blacksmith’s shop, not less 

than half a pint. 

Whenever a corner, whether a quarter Section, Section, or 

Township corner, shall be inaccessible, a witness corner will 

be made on each margin of the obstacle, at the points where 

the surveyed lines intersect and leave it; for example, suppose the inaccessible corner is a corner for four Townships or 

Sections, four witness corners will, in that case, have to be 

established, one on each of the surveyed lines where they 

intersect the obstruction. 

THE FIELD BOOK. 

Entries to be made in the Field Book in addition to those 

already required to be made-to wit: 

The distances from corner to corner; the name, diameter, 

course and distance to all bearing trees, (the name of the 

bearing tree to be fully written out, and never abreviated;) 

the courses and distances of the meanders of navigable water 

courses; the closes of your lines at their intersection with 

exterior or other lines; the fallings of random lines; offsets 

around obstacles; the name, size and precise distance to the 

line trees; the distance to and where you 

-18- 

-16- 

will only be marked with the letters B. T., and the fact stated in 

your field notes. When at any corner there is not a tree within 

a reasonable distance, in each of the Sections for which the 

corner stands, which can be used as a bearing tree, the fact 

must be stated in your field notes. When there are but two 

trees within a reasonable distance of a corner, and those two 

should happen to be in the same section, you will take the 

bearing and distance to both, and mark one of them with the 

number of the Section, Township and Range, and the other 

333 

leave all lakes, streams, swamps, fields, prairies, travelled 

roads and tracks, (denoting the places to which, and from 

where they lead,) creek and river bottoms, mountains, hills, 

bluffs, and other natural objects, with their course as well as 

you can conjecture; the distance to all mines, Salt and other 

mineral Springs, Salt Licks, Forges, factories, cotton gins and 

other houses; the distance to and where you leave towns and 

villages with their names. The location of other objects that 

are not on your lines which may come to your knowledge, 

such as Salt Springs, lead mines, houses, fields, &c., must 
also be noted in your Field Book. You will never give original 

names to such objects as have already been named. 

At the end of every mile in running either exterior or 

sud-divisional lines, and at the end of the meanders of each 

fractional section, you will give a particular description of the 

face of the country, whether level, hilly or mountainous; of 

the quality or rate of the soil, whether lst, 2nd, or 3rd rate, or 

unfit for cultivation, and if liable to inundation state to what 

depth; of the kinds and quality of the timber and undergrowth. The description of each mile, must be for that particular mile, and not refer to any previous description. 

All notes of corrections and re-survey and the cause thereof, 

must be entered in your Field Book as such, and reference 

must be made from the erroneous to the page which contains 

the re-survey, by writing the word “re-surveyed,” and the 

page upon which the 

-19- 

re-survey is to be found, across the notes of the erroneous 

survey; the re-survey must be headed as such. 

The entries must be made in the order from day to day as 

the work is executed on the ground, including all re-surveys 

and corrections, and the date must follow each day’s work. 

If in the subdivision of a Township, the notes of the random 

and true line, (between the same sections,) are taken on 

different pages, and are separated by intervening notes of 

other lines, reference must be made from the random to the 

page containing the notes of the true line. 

You must, at the beginning of each of your Field Books, and 

at the commencement of each day’s work, when starting a 

section line, write out in full, the name of the Township, 

whether North or South of the base line and East or West of 

the 5th Principal Meridian. 

No memorandum or writing of any description, should be 

made in the Field Book, except such as relates exclusively to 

the surveys. 

Your books into which your original notes are to be taken 

in the field,will be of a size to be prescribed by this office;they 

must be of the best quality of paper, and the entries must be 

made in the plainest and fairest hand-writing, so plain and 

intelligible that a letter or figure cannot by possibility be 

taken for any thing else than what is intended, or your 

meaning in any way whatever misconstrued. 

The notes of the sub-division of each Township, must be 

kept in separate books. The me- 

-20- 

anders in a Township are considered as sub-divisional work. 

The notes of exterior lines, must be kept to themselves, in 

books of a convenient size. 

The two out side pages of your Field Books, must be left 

blank, and kept as clean as possible by a cover of leather or 

paper; which cover can be taken off when the books are 

returned to this office. 

Your Field Books must be paged, and a neat index made in 

the front of each, immediately preceding the page containing 

the oaths of your chain-men. 

If an instance should occur from inclemency of weather, 

that you cannot write in your Field Book without obliterating 

and defacing your notes, you can, in that case, take the notes 

on a detatched piece of paper, which however, you must write 

off into your regular Field Book, in the proper place as soon as 

the weather will permit; and the scraps must, in all such 

cases, be returned with your regular original Field Book to 

this office, that they may be compared. 

You will leave a margin of at least half an inch on each edge 

of every page of your Field Book, so as to admit of binding, 

and also to prevent the obliteration of the notes. 

In taking your Field Notes, you will abreviate only those 

words which are abreviated in the form for keeping the Field 

Notes hereto appended. 

You must make, or have made out, and return with your 

original Field Books, a fair and 

-21- 

correct copy thereof, to be of a form to be prescribed by this 

office. And you will also make out and return with your 

original Field Notes, an accurate plat or sketch of your surveys, which must exhibit the true situation of all objects 

noted in your Field Book; and it would be well to make on the 

temporary outside cover of each Field Book, a Plat, upon 

which you could portray, while on the ground, those objects. 

[Page 22 is blank. Inserted between pages 21 and 23 is a 

township diagram, deleted here, which is referred to as a 

“map” in the sample field notes. These sample field notes differ 

slightly from those of 1837.1 

FORM OF KEEPING FIELD NOTES OF EXTERIOR 

BOUNDARY LINES OF TOWNSHIPS. 

If first book, give the oaths of assistants. Then say: “Chain compared with 

Adjusted my compass to the true variation of the needle, which is 

Suppose the line to be surveyed in the East boundary ofTownship 1 North, 

the standard and found to be correct- 

- E.” 

Range 12 West.-See Map. 

CHAINS. 

NORTH 

20.10 

35.00 

40.00 

55.25 

64.00 

71.10 

80.00 

along the east side of Section 36, Township 1 north ofthe 

base line, Range 12 west of the 5th principal meridian. 

A brook 20 links wide runs NW. 

Aredoak 15inchesdia. 

Set a ‘/4 Sec. corner post, from which ared oak 10 

inches dia. bears N. 30d, W. 16 links, and a hickory 18 

inches dia. bears S. 151/2d, E. 10 links. 

East 10.00 chains, 

North 5.00 ” 

East 2.50 “ 

North 3.75 “ -across the lake, 

West 12.50 “ -to the true line in advance ofthe 

lake; blaze the line south to the lake 3.25 chains; which 

is 5.50 ch’s wide on the line. 

An impassible lake bears NE. and SW. thence offset, 

A black walnut 8 inches dia. 

Set a post for corner to Sections 25 

-24- 

and 36, from which a hickory 6 inches dia. bears S. 18d, 

W. 11links,and a white oak 20 inchesdia. bearsN. 72d, 

W. 36 links. 

334 
Land level, and 1st rate soil; timber, oak, hickory, 

hackberry, walnut, &c.; undergrowth, green briars, 

vines, &c. 

40.00 

80.00 

Proceed as in the foregoing manner, along the East boundary of Sections 

25,24,13 and 12; then along the East side of Section 1, as follows: 

Set a temporary ?4 Section corner post. 

Set a post for temporary corner to Sections 35 and 36. 

CHAINS. 

NORTH 

8.00 

9.50 

12.16 

21.54 

35.66 

48.52 

63.11 

71.81 

80.00 

along the East side of Sec. 1, T. 1 N., R. 12 W. 

A bayou 100 links wide, runs NE. 

A road leading from 

Entered bottom of river, bears E. and W. 

An ash 10 inches dia. 

Intersected the right bank of-river, runs 

E.; navigable; where set a post for corner to fractional 

Sections 1, T. 1 N., R. 12 W., and 6, T. 1 N., R. 11 W., 

from which acottonwood 30 inches dia. bears S. 41d, W. 18 

links and a cottonwood 35 inchesdia. bears S. 60d, E. 28 

links. 

across obtained by calculation whereset a post for corner 

to fractional Sections 1, T. 1 N., R. 12 W., and 6, T. 1 

N., R. 11 W., from which an 

to - bears NE. 

andSW. 

To the left bank of- river; distance 

-25- 

elm 18 inches dia. bears N. 69d, E. 18 links, and a sweet 

gum 15 inches dia. bears N. 19d, W. 40 links. 

A sweet gum 15 inches dia. 

Left bottom which bears NE. and SW. and entered upland. 

Set a post for corner to Sections 1,6,31 and 36, and 

to townships 1 and 2 N., Ranges 11 and 12 W., from which a 

red oak 10 inchesdia. bears S. 10d, E. 11 links; apost 

oak 24 inches dia. bears S. 461/2d, W. 23 links, a white 

oak 14 inches dia. bears N. 18d, W. 38 links, and a white 

oak 10 inches dia. bears N. 35d, E. 50 links. 

Land south of the bottom second rate soil; timber, oak 

and hickory; no undergrowth; the bottom first rate soil; 

timber, sweet gum, elm, cottonwood, &c. with heavy cane; 

north of the bottom, third rate soil and rocky; timber 

mostly oak, some hickory; undergrowth oak bushes. 

1st - 18 

(Suppose the corner to Townships 1 and 2 North, Ranges 12 and 13 West, 

had been established, (see Diagram.) then proceed as follows:) 

corner, to Townships 1 and 2 North, Ranges 12 and 13 West. 

2d 18 

Chain compared, and found correct. 

~~ 

CHAINS. 

EAST 

13.10 

25.00 

25.86 

41.50 

55.23 

65.79 

71.33 

81.50 

(Proceed in this manner, along the South boundary of Sections 32,33,34 

and 35, thence along Section 36, as follows:) 

-28- 

CHAINS 

EAST 

Chain compared with the standard, and found ‘/z an inch too long, which I 

adjusted. 

3.25 

~ 

CHAINS. 

on a random line along the South side of Section 36, 

Township 2 North of the base line, Range 12 West, of the 

5th principal meridian. 

(Proceed in this manner along the South side of sections 35,34 33, and 32; 

then along Section 31, as follows:) 

CHAINS. 

WEST 

16.00 

40.00 

81.50 

on a random line along the South side of Section 31, 

Township 2 North, Range 12 West. 

wide, distance obtained by calculation. 

A navigable Lake bears North and South 10.66 chains 

Set a post for temporary 1-4 Section corner. 

Intersected the Range line 2.50 lks. South of the 

corrected the line along the South side of Section 31, 

Township 2 North ofthe base line, Range 12 West ofthe 

5th principal meridian. 

Entered A. B’s. field brs. N. W. and S. E. 

Left the field, brs. N. E. and S. W. 

An ash 10 ins. dia. 

Set a 1/4 Section corner post, from which an ash 15 ins. 

dia. brs. N. 18d. 

-27- 

E. 19 lks. and an Elm 18 ins. dia. brs. N. 35d, W. 25 lks. 

fractional Sections 6, Township 1 North, Range 12 West, 

and 31, Township 2 North, Range 12 West, from which a 

hackberry 6 ins. dia. brs. N. 60d, W. 56 lks. anda sweet 

gum 12 ins. dia. brs. S. 42d, W. 47 lks. 

To the East side ofthe Lake; distance across obtained 

by calculation; where set a post for corner to fractional 

Sections 6, Township 1 North, Range 12 West, and 31, 

Township 2 North, Range 12 West, from which a box elder 10 

ins. dia. brs. N. 28d, E. 14 lks. and a willow oak 15 ins. 

dia. brs. S. 64d, E. 18 lks. 

wide, runs S. E. out ofthe Lake. 

a hickory 15 ins. dia. brs. N. 31d, E. 25 lks. and a 

hackberry 6 ins. dia. brs. N. 18d, W. 201ks. Land level, 

and 2nd rate, soil inclined to be wet, subject to overflow 

from the Lake, about 2 feet deep. Timber, oak, hickory, 

hackberry, sweet gum, &c. Undergrowth, small cane, green 

briers and vines. 

Set a post on the West side of the Lake, corner to 

A white oak 15 ins. dia. on the bank ofa bayou, 50 lks. 

Set a post for corner to Sections 31 and 32, from which 

23.18 

25.30 

40.00 

58.42 

60.10 

80.00 

on a true line along the South side of Section 36, Township 

2 North, Range 12 West. 

North. 

A spring branch runs S. E., the spring 10 lks. to the 

A white oak 20 ins. dia. 

Road leading from , to 

brs. South. 

16 ins. dia. brs. N. 27d, E. 15 lks. anda white oak 12 

ins. dia. brs. N. 44d, W. 29 lks. 

Set a post for 1-4 Sec. corner, from which a white oak 

A white oak 12 ins. dia. 

A Creek 10 lks. wide, runs S. E. 

The corner to Townships 1 and 2 North, Ranges 11 and 12 

West. 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

3d - 18 

FORM OF KEEPING FIELD NOTES IN 

SUB-DIVIDING A TOWNSHIP. 

(Suppose Township 1 North Range 12 West, is the Township to be sub4th, 18 , commenced the sub-division of Township 1 

divided-see diagram.) 

335 
North of the base line, Range 12 West, of the 5th principal 

meridian. 

(If first book of survey, give oaths of assistants. 

Chain compared, and found to agree with) the standard 

Adjusted my compass to the East boundary said Township 

With my compass set to a variation of 7d 

measure. 

in the following manner: 

-29- 

30m East, I run North, along the East side of Section 36-at 39.98 chains, a 

point 52 links East of the 1-4 Section corner, at 80.03 chains, a point 107 lks. 

East of the corner to Sections 25 and 36. I therefore adjust my compass to a 

variation of 8d 15m East. 

(If the East boundary of the Township had been surveyed by yourself 

immediately previous, you will adjust your compass for sub-dividing as 

follows:) 

By reference to the notes of the survey of the East boundary of the 

Township as surveyed by me in -, 18-. I find the said boundary to 

have been run at avariation of d East; I therefore adjust my 

compass to the same degree. 

CHAINS. 

NORTH 

11.53 

24.00 

26.50 

38.75 

40.00 

56.00 

63.50 

79.00 

80.00 

CHAINS. 

EAST 

~ 

40.00 

80.33 

between Sections 35 and 36, Township 1 North of the base 

line, Range 12 West of the 5th principal meridian. 

A hickory 12 inches dia. 

Entered cane, which brs. E. & W. 

To the South side of Lake, which I consider 

navigable, bears West and NE.; where set a post for corner 

to fractional Sections 35 and 36, from which a sweet gum 

18 inches dia. bears S. 38d, E. 17 links, and a hackberry 

12 inches dia. bears S. 45d, W. 12 links. 

calculation; where set a post for corner to fractional SecThe North side of the Lake; distance obtained by 

-30- 

tions 35 and 36, from which an elm 12 inches dia. bears N. 

14d, E. 16 links, and a cottonwood 30 inches dia. bears N. 

33d, W. 9 links. 

Set a $4 Sec. corner post from which a sassafras 8 

inches dia. bears N. 48d, E. 21 links, and an elm 18 

inchesdia. bears S. 28d, W. 39 links. 

Left the cane which bears NE. and SW. 

A hackbery 12 inches dia. 

Entered a hurricane which bears NE. and SW. 

Set a post corner to Sections 25,26,35 and 36, from 

which a hickory 12 inches dia. bears N. 63d, E. 42 links, 

an elm 16 inchesdia. bears S. 41d, E. 102 links, and a 

white oak 20 inches dia. bears S. 37d, W. 168 links; there 

is no tree in Sec. 26, within a reasonable distance. 

Land, the first and last 1h miles, 2nd rate soil; 

timber mostly oak and hickory; undergrowth oak bushes; the 

remainder, 1st rate soil; timber sweet gum cottonwood, 

&c.; undergrowth cane. 

on a random line between Sections 25 and 36, Township 1 

North,Range 12 West. 

Set a post for temporary '/4 Section corner. 

Intersected the Range line 42 links S. of the corner to 

Sections 25 and 36. 

-31- 

CHAINS. 

corrected the line between Sections 25 and 36. 

A white oak 20 inchesdia. 

17.00 

25.50 

30.00 

40.161/2 

50.30 

65.30 

66.14 

68.00 

80.33 

CHAINS 

NORTH 

25.00 

26.89 

27.00 

28.93 

70.38 

76.32 

80.00 

EAST 

5.06 

14.67 

WEST 

15.00 

22.71 

Entered bottom land which bears NE. and W. 

A creek 100 links wide runs NE. 

Entered low, wet land. 

Set a post for 1/4 Section corner, from which a red oak 

inches dia. bears S. 18d, E. 25 links, and apost oak 12 

inchesdia. bears N. 61d, W. 19 links. 

A bluff of rocks insurmountable. 

Offset South 10.00 chains 

West 15.00 " 

North 10.00 " regained 

the line at the West side ofbluff. 

A black jack 8 inches dia. 

Entered bottom land. 

The corner to Sections 25,26,35 and36. 

Land, except a few chains at the West end, broken and 

Timber, oak and hickory. Undergrowth oak, and black 

poor, not fit for cultivation. 

jack bushes. 

4th ___ 18 

between Sections 25 and 26, Township 1 North of the 

base line, Range 12 West of the 5th principal meridian. 

Left the hurricane, bears E. and SW. 

An elm 15 inches dia. 

-32- 

A house about 100 lks. west ofthe line. 

To the South end of a navigable Lake, bears NE. and NW.; 

where set a post for corner to fractional Sections 25 and 

26, from which a box elder 12 inches dia. bears S. 32d, E. 

31 links, and a black gum 16 inches diameter, bears S. 

75d, W. 15 links. 

From the above corner to fr. Secs. 25 and 26, I proceed 

to meander along the SW. bank of Lake, through Sec. 26. 

Thence N. 15d, W. 11.00 chains. 

N.21d,W. 7.00 " 

North 10.00 " 

N. 9d,E. 8.00 " 

N.29d,E. 5.00 " 

N.40d,E. 2.63 " 

here regained the line, having made 

41.45 chains northing; where set a post for corner to 

fractional Sections 25 and 26, from which a sweet gum 15 

inches dia. bears North 59d, East 13 links, and a sweet 

gum 12 inches dia. bears S. 53d, W. 26 links. 

A sassafras 12 inches dia. 

Set a post for corner to Sections 23,24,25 and 26, 

from which a hickory 16 inches dia. bears S. 35d, E. 27 

links; a sweet gum 12 inches dia. bears N. 42d, E. 15 

links, an elm 20 inches dia. bears N. 28d, W. 31 links, 

and a willow oak 12 inches dia. bears S. 51d, W. 12 links. 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

-33- 

on a true line between Sections 24 and 25, Township 1 

North, Range 12 West. 

A honey locust 10 inches diameter. 

To the NW. side of a Lake; navigable; where set a post 

for corner to fractional Sections 24 and 25, from which a 

black walnut 15 inches dia. bears N. 56d, E. 13 links, and 

a black gum 18 inches dia. bears S. 73d, W. 25 links. 

edge where set an object pole. 

on a true line between Sections 24 and 25, Township 1 

North, Range 12 West, from the corner on Range line. 

Entered a Cypress Swamp, bears North and South. 

A Cypress 24 inches dia. 

From this corner, I measure East 50 links to the water's 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

336 
30.50 

40.00 

47.56 

50.15 

CHAINS. 

NORTH 

20.21 

Left the Swamp, bears North and South, and entered heavy 

Set a post for ?4 Sect. corner, from which a black gum, 

cane, which bears North and South. 

8 inches dia. bears S. 37d, E. 21 links, and a hackberry 

12inchesdia. bearsN.51d, W. 17links. 

A black walnut 18 inches dia. 

To the SE. bank of the lake, where set a post for corner 

to fractional Sections 24 and 25, from which a pecan, 18 

inches dia. bears S. 32d, E. 12 

between Sections 1 and 2, T. 1 N. R. 12 W. 

Intersected the right bank of- 

-34- 

links, and a sweet gum 15 inches dia. bears N. 47d, E. 15 

links. 

The object pole on the opposite bank ofthe Lake, bears 

from this corner S. 881/4d, W. thence due South46 links, 

and it bears due West. 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

Commenced at the corner to fractional Sections 24 and 25, on the East side 

of Lake, and meander along the East side of said Lake, through Sec. 25, T. 1 

N. R. 12 W. 

Chains. 

Thence S.50?hd, W. 4.00 

S.28d,W. 7.00 

" S.55d,W. 12.00 

" S. 9d,W. 10.00 

" S. 9d, E. 20.00 -at 19.00 chains on this course the 

outlet of the lake 50 lks. wide, runs 

NE . 

" S.23d,W. 5.50 

" S. 70d, W. 5.50 

" N. 87d, W. 7.68 -to the corner of fractional Sections 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

25 and 26. 

-35- 

33.86 

40.00 

51.10 

80.45 

River, runs East; where set a post for corner to 

fractional Sections 1 and 2, from which a box elder 10 

ins. dia. bears S. 35d, E. 11 lks., and a hackberry 12 

ins. dia . brs. S. 41d, W. 18 lks. 

River, distance across 

obtained by calculation; where set a post for corner to 

fractional Sections 1 and 2, from which a sweet gum 18 

ins. dia. brs. N. 20d, E. 11 lks., and a sweet gum 12 ins. 

dia. bears N. 52d, W. 33 lks. 

Set a '/4 Section corner post, from which a hickory 12 

ins. dia. brs. South 38d, E. 52 lks., anda hackberry 14 

ins. dia. brs. N. 31d, W. 27 lks. 

A hackberry 8 ins. dia.; (and left bottom and entered 

upland, which bearsNE. and SW.) 

Intersected the South boundary ofT. 2 N. R. 12 W. 25 

lks. East of the corner to Sections 35 and 36; where set a 

post for corner to Sections 1 and 2, T. 1 N. R. 12 W., 

from which a burr oak 18 ins. dia. brs. South46d, E. 33 

lks., and a white oak 20 ins. dia. brs. S. 361/2d, W. 21 lks. 

To the left bank of 

(Here describe the land, &.I 

Commenced at the corner to fractional Sections 1 and 2, on the right and 

South bank of River, and meander downstream along the 

-36- 

right bank of said River, through Section 1, Township 1 North, Range 12 

West. 

Chains. 

Thence N. 75d, E. 20.00 

" N. 8O%d,E. 10.50 

" N. 65d, E. 30.00 -at 15.00 chains on this course the 

mouth of a creek 50 links wide comes 

from the SE. 

" S. 77d, E. 20.00 

" S. 85d, E. 4.11 -to the corner of fractional Section 

1, T. 1 N., R. 12 W., and 6, 

T. 1 N. R. 11 W. 

(Here describe the land, &c.J 

5th - 18 

(Having progressed with the survey to the corner of Sections 29,30,31 and 

32. run the line between Sections 30 and 31, as follows:) 

CHAINS. 

WEST 

15.50 

23.50 

29.00 

40.00 

65.00 

85.50 

.~ 

WEST 

15.48 

23.49 

29.00 

35.96 

40.00 

60.00 

80.50 

Each I 

RE-SURVEYED-see page 37. 

on a true line between Sections 30 and 31, Township 1 

North ofthe base line, Range 12 West ofthe 5th 

principal meridian. 

A path bears N. and S. 

A white oak 30 ins. dia. 

Entered a prairie, bears N. E. and S. W. 

Raised a mound for '/4 Section corner in which deposited 

two rocks, weighing together about 20 lbs. 

Left the prairie bearsN.W. andS.E. 

-37- 

Intersected the East boundary ofT. 1 N. R. 13 W., 25 

lks. South of the corner to S ections 25 and 36. 

On examining my sketch, I find that the line between 

Sections 30 and 31, should be about 80.00 chains long; I 

therefore proceed to re-survey said line. 

on the line previously surveyed, (see page 36,) between 

Sections 30 and 31, T. 1 N. R. 12 W.; on a re-survey. 

A path bears N. and S. 

A white oak 30 ins. dia. 

EnteredprairiebearsN.E. andS.W. 

The former Yi Section corner mound, which I destroy. 

Raised a mound for l/4 Section corner, in which deposited 

Lefttheprairie, bearsN.W. andSE. 

Intersected the East boundary of T. 1 N. R. 13 W., 25 

Iks. South of the corner to Sections 25 and 36; yhere set 

a post for corner to Sections 30 and 31, T. 1 N. R. 12 W., from 

whicha white oak 15 ins. dia. brs. S. 62d, E. 35 lks., and a 

hickory 10 ins. dia. brs. N. 41d, E. 21 lks. 

two rocks, weighing together, about 20 lbs. 

(Here describe the land, &c.) 

F your Field Books must be signed by yourself, and 

close with a certificate in the following form, to wit: 

inclusive, are the original Field Notes 

I certify that the foregoing notes on pages 1 to - 

-38- 

of the surveys therein specified; that the surveys were executed, and the Field Notes taken by myself in person, (or by 

, under my immediate and personal inspection,) at the dates therein written. 

A. B., 

Deputy Surveyor. 

337 
The foregoing instructions have been draughted with a 

view to insure the correct execution of surveys, and uniformity of returns, and with a special reference to the laws of the 

United States, in relation to the surveys of the public land. 

They must be strictly adhered to in form and substance. 

338 
XXIV. 

(This copy of General Instructions was made from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

-1- 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 

OFFICE OF THE SURVEYOR GENERAL 

OF WISCONSIN AND IOWA, 

Dubuque, May 28,1846. 

339 
To Plain Compass, provided it is of approved construction and 

furnished with a vernier or nonius. 

Deputy Surveyor, 

SIR:-You are to survey in person, or by the assistance of 

some duly authorized Deputy Surveyor acting under your 

immediate direction and supervision, the district assigned 

you under contract of 

18 , conformably 

to such parts of the following instructions as apply to the 

character of the work for which you have contracted, except 

so much thereof as is modified or countermanded by manuscript special instructions, hereinafter written. 

SYSTEM OF SURVEY. 

1. The United States lands are surveyed into rectangular 

tracts, bounded by north and south, east and west lines. They 

are first surveyed into townships or tracts of six miles square, 

which 

-2- 

are subdivided into thirty-six equal parts, called sections. 

2. Townships and ranges number from base and meridian 

lines-the former bearing due east and west and the latter 

intersecting them at right angles, and bearing due north and 

south. 

3. The base line of the surveys in Wisconsin is the south 

boundary of so much thereof as borders the State of Illinois; 

that of Iowa, is located near the geographical centre of the 

State of Arkansas. 

4. The fourth principal meridian, to which the surveys in 

Wisconsin relate, starts from the mouth of the Illinois river. 

The fifth principal meridian, to which the surveys in Iowa 

relate, starts from the mouth of the Arkansas river. 

5. The townships, both in Wisconsin and Iowa, number 

from their respective base lines, northward; the ranges, in 

each, number from their respective meridians, both east and 

west. 

6. Sections are numbered from east to west and from west 

to east progressively, commencing with the north east corner 

section. 

7. Correction lines provide for the error that would otherwise arise from the convergency of meridians, and arrest that 

arising from the inaccuracies of measurement. They are run 

due east and west, at stated distances, forming a base to the 

townships north of them. This base, for each township, is 

extended sufficiently to meet the convergency for a given 

distance. 

INSTRUMENTS. 

Base, meridian, correction and township lines are to be run 

with an instrument that operates independently of the 

magnetic needle, which is to be employed only to show the 

true magnetic variation. 

-3- 

Section, meander and all other lines interior of a township, 

may be run either with the same instrument, or with the 

ASSISTANTS-THEIR OATHS. 

You are to employ no other assistants than men of reputable character, each of whom must, before performing any 

duty as such, take and subscribe an oath (or affirmation) of 

the following form, which must be forwarded to or depsited in 

this office, prior to or upon the return of your field notes: 

For Chainmen. 

I, A. B., do solemnly swear (or affirm,) that I will impartially and faithfully execute the duties of Chain carrier, that I 

will level the chain upon uneven ground, and plumb the 

tally-pins whether sticking or dropping the same; that I will 

report the true distance to all notable objects, and the true 

length of all lines that I assist in measuring, to the best of my 

skill and ability. 

Sworn and subscribed before 

me at this 

18 

Justice of the Peace 

(or other officer authorized to administer oaths) 

of , County 

of , State or Territory of 

For Flagman or Axeman. 

I, C. D., do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will well and 

truly perform the duties of axeman or flagman, according to 

instructions given me, and to the best of my skill and ability. 

-4- 

MARKING LINES, ESTABLISHING AND MARKING CORNERS. 

1. All lines which you actually establish are to be marked 

as follows: Those trees which intercept your line are to have 

two notches upon the side where your line intersects and 

leaves them, without any other mark whatever. 

2. A sufficient number of those trees which approach 

nearest your line, to render the same conspicuous, are to be 

blazed upon two sides, diagonally or quartering towards the 

line; the blazes to approach nearer each other the farther the 

line passes from the blazed trees, and to be as nearly opposite-coinciding with the line-as possible, in cases where 

they are barely passed. 

3. Corner posts are to be made only of the most durable 

wood found in the vicinity of your lines. Township corner 

posts must not be less than five, section and meander corner 

posts four, and quarter section posts three inches in diameter. 

These posts must be set or driven firmly into the ground, 

above which they are to appear, at township corners three 

feet, at section and meander corners two and a half feet, and 

at quarter section corners two feet. 

4. All township and section corner posts are to be squared 

upon their upper ends and the angles of the square set with 

the cardinal points of the compass. Township corner posts 

340 
must have six notches upon each of the said angles; section 

corner posts, upon towhship lines, as many notches upon one 

of the said angles as they are miles distant from the township 

corner where the line commenced, and interior section corner 

posts as many notches both upon their south and east angles 

as they are 

-5- 

miles distant from the south and east boundaries of the 

township, respectively. 

5. Quarter section and meander corner posts are to be 

blazed upon two opposite sides, and set with those blazes 

facing the sections between which they occur. 

6. A tree supplying the place of a corner post is to be 

squared and marked as directed for posts. 

7. All posts established at corner of sections are to be 

mrked upon each side of their squared part with the number 

of the four sections which those sides respectively face; at 

meander corners with the number of the sections between 

which such posts are set and at quarter section corners with 

l/4 S. upon the two blazed sides. 

8. Bearing trees are those of which you take the course and 

distance from a corner. They are distinguished by a large 

smooth blaze or chop, fronting the corner, upon which is 

marked, with an iron made for that purpose, the number of 

the range, township and section, except at quarter section 

corners where l/4 S. will supply the number of the section, 

thus; 

R-------- E. or W. 

T ________ N. 

S ________ or 1/4 S. 

The letters B. T. are also to be marked upon a smaller chop, 

directly under the large one and as near the ground as is 

practicable. 

9. Witness trees are signalized and marked as above, but 

the course and distance to them, as well as the small chop, are 

omitted. 

10. Trees, employed either for the purpose of bearing or 

witness trees, are to be alive and healthy and not less than 

five inches diameter. 

-6- 

11. From all posts established for township corners, or for 

section corners upon township lines, four bearing trees, if 

within a reasonable distance, must be taken; one to stand 

within each of the four sections. 

12. At interior section corners four trees, one to stand 

within each of the four sections, are to be marked; two of them 

as bearing and two as witness trees. 

13. From quarter section and meander corners two bearing trees are marked, one within each of the adjoining sections. 

14. Wherever bearing trees cannot be had, quadrangular 

mounds of earth or stone are to be raised around the corner 

posts, the four angles of which must coincide with the cardinal points of the compass. 

15. Mounds, at township corners are to have a base of five 

feet, a top of two feet, and a height of three feet; at section, 

meander and quarter section corners, they are to have a base 

of four feet, a top of one and a half feet, a height of two and a 

half feet. 

16. Where mounds are made of earth the place from which 

it is taken is styled the Pit, which is to be a uniform and stated 

distance from the mound in all instances where the same is 

practicable, viz: at township corners there are to be two pits, 

one ten links due north, and the other ten links due south; at 

section corners one pit, eight links due south; at quarter 

section corners one pit eight links due east, and at meander 

corners one pit eight links either due north, south, east or 

west. The distance of the mound and pit to be obtained by 

measuring from centre to centre. The mounds 

-7- 

are to be neatly covered with sod in all cases where the same 

can be had. 

17. Posts established in mounds for township corners are 

to be marked upon each side of the square, with the appropriate number of the range and township; at section corners 

upon township lines with the appropriate number of the 

range and township upon two sides thereof, and at interior 

section corners with the range and township within which 

such post stands. 

18. Whenever the true place of establishing a corner is 

inaccessible, except it occurs in a body of water that is to be 

meandered, you are to establish a witness corner as near 

thereto as is practicable and either due north, south, east or 

west of it.-Such corner is to be constructed in all respects 

like the one for which it stands as a witness, with the addition 

of the letters W. C., immediately over the numbering, both 

upon the post and trees. 

19. When a section or quarter section corner happens at 

the point for establishing a meander corner, the posts and 

trees are to be marked with the appropriate numbers for such 

section or quarter section corner. 

MEASUREMENTS AND WHERE TO ESTABLISH 

MEANDER CORNERS. 

1. Your distances are all to be noted and returned in 

chains and links and to be taken with a half or two pole chain 

of fifty parts, each measuring seven inches and ninety-two 

hundredths. The length of your chain should be adjusted by 

means of a screw attached to the handle of the hind end; every 

tenth link should compose a swivel, and all the rings and 

loops should be welded or brazed.-The accuracy of your 

chain is to be preserved by 

-8- 

comparing it with a standard adjusted at this office. 

2. Your tally-pins, eleven in number, must not exceed 

fourteen inches in length, must be of sufficient weight to drop 

plumb, and are to be made of iron or seasoned wood pointed 

with steel. 

3. The length of every line you run is to be ascertained by 

horizontal measurement. 

4. Whenever your line is obstructed by an object over 

which you cannot measure with the chain, you are to pass the 

same by offsets, traverse or trigonometry; observing that the 

341 
distance thus obtained, extends no farther than is necessary 

to actually pass the interposing object. 

5. Whenever your course is so obstructed by navigable 

streams, or other bodies of water which are to be meandered, 

you are to establish a meander corner at the intersection of 

your lines with both margins thereof, and of all islands therein. 

TOWNSHIP LINES. 

1. North and south lines are termed range lines; east and 

west, township lines. The former are styled, in the field notes, 

the line between certain ranges; the latter, the line between 

certain townships. Each mile both of a range and township 

line, is particularized by the number of the sections between 

which it is run, thus; north between sections 31 and 36, west 

between section 1 and 36. 

2. Upon the base or township line forming the southern 

boundary of your district, township corners are established at 

intervals of six miles. From each of these corners you are to 

run range lines due north, six miles; establishing a quarter 

section corner at the end of the first forty, and a section corner 

at the end of the first eighty chains, and observing the same 

order and intervals of establish- 

-9- 

ing quarter section and section corners to the end of the sixth 

mile, where you will temporarily set a township corner post. 

3. You will then commence at a township corner upon the 

first range line east of your district, and immediately east of 

the township corner posts temporarily set by you, and from 

thence run due west across your whole district, intersecting 

your range lines at or within three chains and fifty links, due 

north or south, of your said six mile posts. At the point of 

intersection, if within the above limits, you will establish a 

township corner. Upon this township or last mentioned line, 

quarter section and section corners are to be established at 

the same distances and intervals as directed for range lines; 

observing that the length of each and every township line 

which you are to establish, is in no case to exceed or fall short 

of the length of the corresponding township boundary upon 

the south, more than three chains and fifty links. If, however, 

in closing your first tier of townships, and all others closing to 

or upon old work, you find it impossible to preserve the true 

course of your lines and close within the above limits, you are 

to re-survey and examine until you detect the real cause of 

discrepancy, which if not in your own work, you will report to 

this office, and for which you will provide in the field, in all 

instances where the same is practicable, by adding to, or 

deducting from the length of your first range line or lines. 

And where, in order to close a township to or upon old work, 

you are compelled to employ a variation greater or less than 

the true magnetic variation, both must be stated. 

4. After closing your first tier of townships, you 

-10- 

are to run up and close successive tiers, to the completion of 

your district, by the same method of survey as directed for the 

first tier. 

5. You are to observe and note the true magnetic variation, at least once upon every mile or section line, and as 

much oftener as there is a change therein. 

6. The bearing trees, standing upon the west side of range, 

and upon the north side of township lines, are to be entered 

first in your field notes. 

7. After at ownship corner is established as before 

directed, you are to complete the notes of the corresponding 

range line, by inserting the said corner, with the true distance thereto, and adding or erasing the notes of any topography or other minutes, that may be included or excluded by 

thus adding to or deducting from the length of the range line 

as temporarily established. 

8. With your field notes you must return a diagram, drawn 

upon a scale of one and a half inches to six miles, on which you 

are to represent each boundary you have run with the length 

and variation thereof, and with all the topography thereupon 

that can be properly expressed upon that scale. 

SUBDIVISION. 

Length of North and South and East and West 

lines, and where to establish quarter section posts. 

1. Every north and south section line, except those terminating in the north boundary, are to be one mile in length. 

The east and west section lines, except those terminating in 

the west boundary, are to be within one hundred links of 

eighty chains in length; and the north and south boundaries 

of any one section, except in the extreme west- 

-11- 

ern tier, are to be within one hundred links of equal length. 

2. The length of the section lines closing to the north and 

west boundaries, are to be governed by the length of the sixth 

or closing miles, both of the range and township lines, and 

must be as nearly of the same length, or of an average thereof, 

as is practicable. 

3. Quarter section corners, both upon north and south and 

upon east and west lines, are to be set equidistantly from the 

corresponding section corners; except upon those closing to 

the north and west boundaries, where the quarter section 

corners will be established precisely forty chains north or 

west of the respective section corners from which those lines 

start. 

Method of subdividing; Random, Corrected and True 

lines, and Diagram.. 

1. The first mile, both of the south and east boundaries of 

each township you are to subdivide, is to be carefully traced 

and measured, before you enter upon the subdivision thereof. 

This will enable you to observe any change that may have 

taken place in the magnetic variation, as it existed at the 

running of the township lines, and will also enable you to 

compare your chaining with that upon the township lines. 

2. Any discrepancy, arising either from a change in the 

magnetic variation of a difference in measurement, is to be 

stated as directed under the head of field notes. 

3. After adjusting your compass to a variation which you 

342 
have thus found will retrace the eastern boundary of the 

township, you will commence at the corner to sections 35 and 

36, on the south 

-12- 

boundary, and run a line due north, forty chains, to the 

quarter section corner which you are to establish between 

sections 35 and 36; continuing due north forty chains farther, 

you will establish the corner to sections 25, 26, 35 and 36. 

4. From the section corner last named, run a random line, 

without blazing, due east for corner of section 25 and 36, in 

east boundary. If you intersect exactly at the corner, you will 

blaze your random line back and establish it as the true line. 

But if your random line intersects the said range line, either 

north or south of the said corner, you will measure the distance of such intersection, from which you will calculate a 

course that will run a true line back to the corner from which 

your random started. 

5. From the corner of sections 25,26,35,36, run due north 

between sections 25 and 26, setting the quarter section post, 

as before at forty chains, and at eighty chains establishing 

the corner of sections, 23,24,25,26. Then run a random line 

due east for the corner of sections 24 and 25 in east boundary; 

correcting back in the manner directed for running the line 

between sections 25 and 36. 

6. In this manner proceed with the survey of each successive section in the first tier, until you arrive at the north 

boundary of the township, which you will reach in running up 

a random line between sections 1 and 2. If this line should not 

intersect at the post established for corner to sections 1,2,35 

and 36 upon the township line, you will note the distance that 

you fall east or west of the same, from which distance you will 

calculate a course that will run a true line south to the corner 

from which your random started. 

-13- 

7. The first tier of sections being thus laid out and surveyed, you will return to the south boundary of the township, 

and from the corner of sections 34 and 35, commence and 

survey the second tier of sections, in the same manner that 

you pursued in the survey of the first; closing at the section 

corners on the first tier. 

8. In like manner proceed with the survey of each successive tier of sections, until you arrive at the fifth or last tier. 

From each section corner which you establish upon this tier, 

you are to run random lines for the corresponding corners 

established upon the range line forming the western boundary of your township, and in returning, establish the true line 

as before directed. 

9. All section lines are to be right lines, regardless of the 

number or nature of intervening obstacles; except in the 

event of their intersecting a lake or pond of such diameter, at 

the points of intersection, as forbids their continuance by 

means of a trigonometrical calculation, in which case, and in 

cases also where a river, lake, correction line, or reservation, 

form a portion of the boundary of a township, when the 

closing lines thereupon, will be true lines, the courses of 

which will have a strict reference to the variation and closing 

of the adjacent lines; the quarter section posts upon which are 

to be set forty chains from the section corner at which such 

true lines commenced. 

10. In closing upon a correction line, you are to establish a 

section corner at the point of your intersection therewith, 

stating the true distance of such intersection from the 

nearest corner thereon. 

11. Field notes of random lines are to embrace 

-14- 

nothing but the variation, length andlosing thereof. 

12. Topography of every description, line trees and corners, are to be taken upon the corrected lines and included in 

the notes thereof, following which, is to be written the description of the land and timber. 

13. With these instructions you are furnished a diagram, 

drawn upon a scale of one mile to an inch, upon which is 

represented the magnetic variation or variations and length 

of each township boundary of the district you are to subdivide, also the topography and corners upon the same, as 

returned by the township line surveyor. On this diagram you 

are to represent, as you progress with your survey, the crossing and courses of all streams of water and of the bottom land 

through which they meander; the intersecton, situation and 

boundaries of all lakes, ponds, prairies, marshes, swamps, 

windfalls and all other objects, mentioned in your field notes, 

that can be shown upon said diagram. All the topography 

thus noted upon your diagrams must be joined or connected, 

so as to form a complete map of the townships of your district. 

These diagrams form an essential part of, and must be returned with your field notes. 

14. Should you find a manifest error in the measurement 

of any of the township lines of your district, you are to correct 

the same, by re-surveying and re-establishing such line or 

lines, from the point where the error was detected, to the 

north or west end thereof; noting your intersection with each 

one of the erroneous corners as you progress, which you are to 

demolish and deface with all evidences thereof. Of such remeasurement and cor- 

-15- 

rections you are to take full and complete field notes, in a 

separate book, to be returned to the Surveyor General’s 

Office, with the field notes of your subdivision. For such 

corrections, however, the Surveyor General is not authorized 

to make any compensation. 

HOW AND WHAT TO MEANDER. 

1. In subdividing any one township, you are to meander as 

hereinafter directed, any lake or lakes, pond or ponds, lying 

entirely within the boundaries thereof, of the area of forty 

acres and upwards, and which cannot be drained and are not 

likely to fill up, or from any cause to become dry. 

2. Whenever required by special instructions, to meander 

any stream or body of water, passing through or lying within 

your district, you are also to meander all islands situated 

therein, which are valuable for their soil or timber. 

3. Standing with your face towards the mouth of a stream, 

the bank on your left hand, is termed the left bank, and that 

343 
upon your right hand, the right bank. These terms are to be 

universally used to distinguish the two banks of a river, both 

in running lines and in meandering. 

4. In meandering rivers, you are to commence at a meander corner in the township boundary, and take the course and 

distance of the bank upon which you commence, to a meander 

corner upon the same or another boundary of the same 

township, carefully noting your intersection with all intermediate meander corners. By the same method you are to 

meander the opposite bank of the same river. 

5. In meandering lakes, ponds or bayous, you are to commence at a meander corner upon the township line and proceed as above directed for the 

-16- 

banks of a navigable stream; except where a lake, pond or 

bayou lies entirely within the township boundaries, when 

you will commence at a meander corner established in subdividing, and from thence take the course and distance of the 

entire margin thereof. 

6. To meander a pond, lying entirely within the boundaries of a section, you will run a random line thereto from the 

nearest section or quarter section corner. At the point where 

this random line intersects the margin of such pond, you will 

establish a witness point, by fixing a post in the ground and 

raising a mound or taking bearings, as at a meander corner; 

except that the post and the large face upon the bearing trees, 

will be marked with the letter W., only. 

7. In meandering islands, you are to proceed as directed in 

sections, 5 and 6 of this chapter, except that where there are 

no meander corners established upon an island, you are to 

take the course and distance of your starting point from the 

nearest meander corner, instead of section or quarter section 

corner. 

8. The meanders of each fractional section, or between any 

two meander posts, or of a pond or island interior of a section, 

must close within one chain and fifty links. 

9. Your field notes ofmeanders in any one township, are to 

follow immediately after the notes of the subdivision thereof. 

They are to state and describe, particularly, the meander 

corner from which they commenced, each one with which 

they close, and are to exhibit the meanders of each fractional 

section separately; following and composing a part of which, 

will be given a description of the 

-17- 

land, timber, depth of inundation to which the bottom is 

subject, and the banks, current and bottom of the stream or 

body of water you are meandering. 

10. To furnish data that will enable this office to fix the 

exact location of all islands, whether to be meandered or not, 

you will take the bearing of the upper and lower points 

thereof, from both ends of one or more of your meander 

courses which form a base line of sufficient length for that 

purpose.-You will repeat the same process in meandering 

the opposite bank or margin of the same stream, lake, pond or 

bayou. You will also note, in the proper place in the meanders 

of each fractional section, the exact position and extent of all 

falls and rapids; fords, portages and mill sites existing in, or 

connected with the river or other body of water which you are 

meandering. 

11. No blazes or marks of any description are to be made 

upon your meander lines, though the utmost care must be 

taken to pass no object of topography, or change therein, 

without giving a particular description thereof in its proper 

place in your meander notes. 

FIELD NOTES. 

1. Your field notes are to form a full and perfect history of 

your operations in the field. 

2. The field notes of the subdivision of every township, 

whether fractional or not, are to be written in a separate 

book. 

3. No one page, either of the notes of township lines or 

subdivision, is to embrace the field notes of more than one 

section line. 

4. Descripton of the timber, undergrowth, surface, soil and 

minerals, upon each section line, is to 

-18- 

follow the notes thereof, and not to be mixed with them. 

5. The language of your field notes must be so concise and 

clear, the hand in which they are written so plain and legible, 

that no doubt can exist as to your figures, letters, words or 

meaning. 

6. No abreviations are to be made in your field notes, 

except such as relate to course, to express which, the proper 

combinations of the capital letters, N. S. E. and W. are to be 

used; except when a course is exactly to a cardinal point, in 

which case it is to be written full. 

7. The description of each mile must be independent, and 

not refer to a preceding description. 

8. The date of each days work must follow immediately 

after the notes thereof. 

9. The variation is invariably to occupy a separate line. 

10. The first page of a field book of subdivision-a sample 

of which will be shown or furnished you by this office,-is to 

embrace only the township and range, State or Territory, 

name of the deputy, with the dates at which the survey was 

commenced and finished. The head of each subsequent page 

will express the township, range and meridian. 

11. The second page will contain the notes of your resurvey of the first mile, both of the south and east boundaries 

of your township; stating the corner at which you commence, 

the variation you assume, and each corner with which you 

close. 

12. All rivers, creeks and other streams, lakes, ponds, 

prairies, swamps, marshes, groves, hills, bluffs, windfalls, 

roads and trails, are to be distinguished in your field notes by 

their original and re- 

-19- 

ceived names, only; and where such names cannot be ascertained or do not exist, your imagination is not to supply them. 

13. Immediately following your field notes, you will give a 

general description of the township. 

344 
Objects and data to be embraced by your field notes. 

You are to enter in their proper places in the field notes of 

your survey, a particular description and the exact location of 

the following objects. 

1. The length and variation qr variations of every line you 

run. 

2. The name and diameter of all bearing trees, with the 

course and distance of the same from their respective corners. 

3. The name of the material of which you construct 

mounds, with the course and distance to the pits. 

4. The name, diameter and exact distance to all those trees 

which your lines intersect. 

5. At what distance you enter, and at what distance you 

leave every river, creek or other “bottom,” prairie, swamp, 

marsh, grove or windfall, with the course of the same at both 

points of intersection. 

6. The surface, whether level, rolling, broken or hilly. 

7. The soil, whether first, second or third rate. 

8. The several kinds of timber and undergrowth; naming 

the timber in the order of its prevalency. 

9. All rivers, creeks and smaller streams of water, with 

their actual or right angled widths, course, banks, current 

and bed, at the points where your lines cross. 

10. A description of all bottom lands-whether 

-21- 

-20- 

wet or dry, and if subject to inundation, state to what depth. 

11. All springs of water, and whether fresh, saline or 

mineral, with the course and width of the stream flowing 

from them. 

12. All lakes and ponds, describing their banks and the 

depth and quality of their water. 

13. All coal banks, precipices, caves, sink-holes, quarries 

and ledges with the character and quality of the same. 

14. All water-falls and mill sites. 

15. All towns and villages, houses, cabins, fields and sugar 

camps, factories, furnaces and other improvements. 

16. All metalliferous minerals or ores, and all diggings 

therefor, with particular descriptions of both, that may come 

to your knowledge, whether intersected by your lines or not. 

17. All roads and trails with the courses they bear. 

18. All offsets or calculations by which you obtain the 

length of such parts of your lines as cannot be measured with 

the chain. 

19. The precise course and distance of all witness corners 

from the true corners which they represent. 

AFFIDAVIT. 

1. Following the field notes and general description, in 

each of your field books, an affidavit of the followin form is to 

be written, and to be signed by yourself and each of your 

assistants in the field: 

I, A. B., Deputy Surveyor, do solemnly swear (or affirm) 

that, in pursuance of a contract with C. D., Surveyor General 

of the United States for Wisconsin and Iowa, bearing date the 

day of , and in strict conformity to the laws of the 

United States, and the instructions of the said Surveyor 

General, I have regularly surveyed 

,18 

principal meridian (State or Territory) of 

and I do further solemnly swear (or affirm,) that the 

foregoing are the true and original field notes of the said 

survey, executed as aforesaid. 

A. B., Deputy Surveyor. 

G* H* ] Chainmen. J. K. 

L. M., Marker. 

N. O., Flagman. 

Subscribed by said A. B., Deputy Surveyor, and sworn 

before me at 

of , 18 

authorized to administer oaths) of 

in the county of 

this day 

, P. Q., Justice of the Peace (or other officer 

State (or Territory) of 

2. Your attention is directed to the following section of an 

act of Congress, approved, August 8th, 1846, entitled “An Act 

to equalize the compensation of the Surveyors General of the 

public lands of the United States, and for other purposes:” 

3. “That the Surveyors General of the public lands of the 

United States, in addition to the oath now authorized by law 

to be administered to deputies on their appointment to office, 

shall require each of their deputies, on the return of his sur- 

-22- 

veys, to take and subscribe an oath or affirmation that those 

surveys have been faithfully and correctly executed, according to law and the instructions of the Surveyor General; and, 

on satisfactory evidence being presented to any court of competent jurisdiction that such surveys, or any part thereof, had 

not been thus executed, the deputy making such false oath or 

affirmation shall be deemed guilty ofperjury, and shall suffer 

all the pains and penalties attached to that offence; and the 

district attorney of the United States for the time being, in 

whose district any such false, erroneous, or fraudulent surveys shall have been executed, shall, upon the application of 

the proper Surveyor General, immediately institute suit 

upon the bond of such deputy; and the institution of such suit 

shall act as a lien upon any property owned or held by such 

deputy, or his sureties, at the time such suit was instituted.” 

The above section of the said law, applies to the foregoing 

affidavit, and will be in all particulars and in every instance, 

rigidly enforced. 

FIELD NOTES OF TOWNSHIP LINES, SUBDIVISION AND MEANDERS, WITH A DIAGRAM. 

The following illustration of the manner of arranging and 

style of entering field notes; is to be regarded by you as a part 

of your instructions. A single page has been made to embrace 

345 
the notes of more than one mile, in order to preserve a convenient size for this book; in this particular, therefore, you will 

be governed by section 3 under head of field notes. The diagram attached to forepart of this book was platted from the 

following field notes, and shows the importance of carefully 

noting all 

-23- 

the topography your lines intersect; otherwise your diagram, 

upon which nothing is to appear that is not mentioned in your 

field notes, will be but a partial and disconnected representation of the topography of the township. 

Suveryor General. 

TOWNSHIP LINES. 

Between Townships 58 and 59 North, Range 36 West, 4th 

CHAINS. 

1.89 

40.00 

62.81 

72.77 

80.00 

26.21 

30.10 

40.00 

60.00 

70.10 

80.00 

Meridian. 

West, between section 1 and 36. 

Bur Oak, 14 inches in diameter. 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Whiteoak, 10N.36E.34links, 

Jack Oak, 12 S. 54?hw. 96 links, 

Variation 7" 45' East, 

Jack Oak, 30 inches in diameter, 

Hickory, 12 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sections 1,2,35 and 36, 

Bur Oak, 10 N. 22 E. 18 links, 

Black Oak, 16 N. 84% W. 92 links, 

Whiteoak, 14s. 62 E. 114links, 

Maple, 10 S. 10 W. 55 links, 

Bearings 

Hilly, 2d ra i e land-Timber, Black, White and Bur oak; 

very little undergrowth. 

West, between sections 2 and35, 

Foot of hill and enter bottom, bears north, 

Harrison's creek 40 links wide, runs north, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Black Oak, 12 N. 42 W. 122 links, 

Bur Oak, 14 S. 54?h E. 187 links. 

Leave bottom, bears north, 

White Oak, 10 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sections, 2,3,34 and 35. 

Maple, 10 N. 48 E. 114 links, 

Maple, 12 N. 36 W. 68 links, 

White Ash, 6 S. 60 E. 25 links, 

Bur Oak, 9 S. 75 112 W. 12 links. 

oak-undergrowth Hazel and Spice. 

Variation 7" 47' East, 

Land 2d rate-Timber, Maple, White ash, Bur & Black 

-26- 

Between Townships 58 and 59 N., R. 36 W., 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

17.50 

28.50 

40.00 

West between sections 3 and 34. 

Enter marsh, bears N. E. 

Leave marsh, bears north, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

White Oak,.12 S. 31 E. 47 links, 

Bur Oak, 16N. 64 W. 16 links. 

Variation 8" East. 

42.50 

56.40 

80.00 

17.12 

29.40 

40.00 

46.19 

60.00 

80.00 

17.50 

40.00 

59.30 

Parker'srun, 12 links wide, runs W. ofN. 

Sugar, 20 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sections 3,4,33 and 34, 

Sugar 12 N. 36 E. 100 links, 

White Oak, 12 N. 75 W. 114 links, 

Maple,8 S. 44 E. 56links, 

Beech, 14 S. 35%w. 96 links. 

Maple and Oak. 

Land, except marsh, 1st rate-timber, Sugar, Beech, 

West, between sections 4 and 33, 

Aspen, 9 inches in diameter, 

Hickory, 14 inches in diameter, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Aspen, 10 N. 52 W. 12 links, 

Hickory, 6 S. 38% E. 150 links, 

Red Oak, 20 inches in diameter, 

Enter wind-fall, bearsE. S. E. 

Set post for corner sections 4,5,32 and 33. 

Aspen, 6 N. 23 E. 75 links, 

Red Oak, 10 N. 46 W. 140 links, 

Hickory, 14 S. 33 E. 200 links, 

White Oak, 8 S. 25 W. 86 links, 

Land, rolling and broken, 2drate-timber, Aspen, Hickory, Red oak-undergrowth, greenbriar and hazel. 

Variation 8" East, 

West, between sections 5 and 32, 

Leave wind-fall, bears S. E. 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Beech, 12 N. 75 E. 84links, 

Maple, 10 S. 14 W. 115 links, 

Variation 8 degs. 10 m. east. 

Variation 8" 7' East, 

Maple, 10 inches in diameter, 

-27- 

TOWNSHIP 59 NORTH, 

Between Ranges 36 and 37 West, 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.00 

21.91 

40.00 

79.90 

37.50 

40.00 

Set post for corner to sections 5 and 32. 

Maple, 24 N. 22 E. 10 links, 

Bur Oak, 9 N. 32 W. 14links, 

Beech, 18S46E.4links, 

Sugar, 16 S. 36% W. 6links, 

Land level, 3d rate-Timber, 

Beech, Maple, Sugar and Bur oak. 

West, between sections 6 and 31, 

Hickory, 10 inches in diameter, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Hickory, 15 S. 34E. 13 links, 

Ironwood, 6 N. 25 W. 10 links, 

and set post, 

West, 4th Meridian. 

Hickory, 10 N. 84E. 100 links, 

Ironwood, 20 N. 16 W. 96 links, 

Jack Oak, 12 S. 14E. 12 links, 

White Oak, 14 S. 10 W. 104links. 

Hickory, Ironwood; undergrowth hazel. 

Variation 8 degs 10 m. East. 

Intersect Range line 85 links North of temporary post 

Corner to Townships 58 and 59 North, Range 36 and 37 

Land level 2d rate-Timber, White and Jack oak, 

JANUARY 10, 1846. 

North between sections 31 and 36, 

Enter windfall, bears S. E. 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Variation 8 degs. East. 

346 
51.50 

63.90 

80.00 

CHAINS. 

40.00 

Hickory, 12 S. 34 E. 16 links, 

Ironwood, 8 N. 25 W. 20 links, 

Leave windfall, bears S. E. 

Dogwood, 12 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sections 25,30,31 and 36. 

Dogwood, 6 N. 46 W. 100 links, 

Ironwood, 4 S. 54 W. 196 links, 

Maple, 10 S. 64 E. 4 links, 

Sugar, 8 N. 19 E. 50 links. 

and Dogwood. 

Land, rolling 2d rate-Timber, Maple, Sugar, Ironwood 

Hickory, 8 N. 32 E. 64 links, 

Buckeye, 10 West 12 links. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

Maple 12 N. 24E. 4 links. 

Sycamore, 48 S. 13 W. 6 links. 

-28- 

TOWNSHIP 59 NORTH. 

Between Ranges 36 and 37 West, 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

17.80 

40.00 

45.90 

80.00 

25.36 

30.56 

40.00 

56.40 

80.00 

5.00 

16.72 

27.50 

39.16 

North, between sectios 25 and 30, 

Hickory, 12 inches in diameter, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Hickory, 12 N. 64?h E. 12 links, 

Beech, 8 S. 54 W. 4 links, 

Beech, 8 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sections 19,24,25 and 30. 

Beech 6 N. 62 W. 24 links, 

Sugar,4S. 13 W. 14links, 

Maple, 10 S. 13 E. 6links, 

Ash, 8 N. 25 E. 10 links. 

and Ash. 

Variation 7" 50' East. 

Land, level 1st rate-Timber, Beech, Sugar, Maple 

North, between sections 19 and 24, 

White Oak, 12 inches in diameter, 

Bur Oak, 8 inches in diameter, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Black Oak, 10 N. 62 E. 100 links, 

Bur Oak, 8 S. 19 W. 6 links, 

Hickory, 11 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sections 13,18,19 and 24, 

Variation 7" 30' East. 

White Oak, 10 N. 62 W. 14 links, 

Hickory, 14 S. 19 W. 10 links, 

Bur Oak, 4 S. 14 E. 100 links, 

Red Oak, 8 N. 12 E. 96 links, 

and Hickory. 

Land, good 2d rate-Timber, Rod, Bur and White oak 

JANUARY 11, 1846. 

North, between sections 13 and 18, 

Road from acre to Arpent. bears N. E. 

Enter bottom, bears N. 80 E. 

Left bank ofCompass river, runs S. 68 W. and set 

Variation 7" 55' East. 

meander post, 

Sycamore, 24East 150 links, 

Cottonwood, 12 S. 35 W. 50 links, 

Over river and set meander post on right bank, 

-29- 

TOWNSHIP 59 NORTH, 

66.25 

80.00 

14.97 

36.17 

40.00 

57.40 

80.00 

32.14 

40.00 

49.13 

Leave bottom, bears N. 55 E. 

Set post for corner to sections 7,12,13 & 18. 

Hickory, 6 N. 64 W. 4 links. 

Cottonwood, 10 S. 34 W. 10 links, 

Buckeye, 14 S. 42 E. 6 links, 

B. Walnut, 8 N. 13 E 24links. 

Sycamore; any quantity of Grapes in bottoms. 

Land, rich bottom-Timber, Hackberry. Buckeye and 

North, between sections 7 and 12, 

Buckeye, 8 inches in diameter, 

Walnut, 36 inches in diameter 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Sugar, 9 N. 45 E. 14 links, 

Beech, 10 S. 75 W. 18 links, 

Variation 7" 55' East. 

Ash, 15 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sections 1,6,7 and 12. 

Buckeye, 24N. 32 W. 114 links, 

Ash, 16 S. 14 W. 98 links, 

Walnut, 6 S. 23 E. 14 links, 

Beech, 12 N. 50 E. 20 links 

and Buckeye. 

Land level and good-Timber, Walnut, Sugar, Beech 

North, between sections 1 and 6, 

Hickory, 16 inches in diameter, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Hickory, 10 S. 51 W. 14links, 

Sugar, 8 N. 64 E. 20 links, 

Elm, 14 inches in diameter, 

Variation 8" East. 

-30- 

TOWNSHIP 59 NORTH, 

Between Ranges 35 and 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

70.27 

80.30 

40.00 

45.59 

80.00 

37.50 

40.00 

52.13 

White oak, 2 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to townships, 59 and 60 N., between 

ranges 36 and 37 W., ofthe 4th meridian. 

Hickory, 10 N. 62 W. 14 links, 

Sugar, 6 S. 49 W. 9 links, 

Beech,8S.54E. lllinks, 

Oak, 14N. 43 E. 100 links. 

and Lind. 

Land rolling, first rate-Timber, Hickory, Sugar, Beech 

JANUARY 12, 1846. 

North, between sections 31 and 36, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Variation 7" 45' East. 

Pine, 10S.64E. 114links, 

Birch, 12 N. 84 W. 100 links. 

White oak, 10 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sect's. 25,30,31& 36. 

White oak, 10N. 24 W. 24 links, 

Jack oak, 6 S. 15 W. 114 links, 

Bur oak, 14N. 16E. 16 links, 

Birch, 20 S. 14E. 18 links. 

Land hilly, poor sandy soil-Timber, White and Bur oak. 

North, between sections 25 and 30, 

Random creek, 80 links wide, runs N. W. clear, gentle 

current. 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Poplar, 12 N. 67 E. 10 links, 

White oak, 24 S. 15 W. 16links, 

Bur oak, 16 inches in diameter, 

Variation 7" 40' East. 

347 
80.00 

CHAINS. 

Set post for corner to sections 19,24,25 & 30. 

White oak, 10N. 12 W. 46links, 

Bur oak, 14 S. 34 W. 110 links, 

6.00 

7.00 

16.00 

37.50 

40.00 

54.00 

80.00 

16.42 

40.00 

54.14 

71.81 

Poplar, 6 N. 4 E. 96 links, 

Bur oak, 9 S. 19 E. 14 links 

rate-Timber White and Bur oak-undergrowth, 

Sassafras. 

Land South of Creek, 3rd rate-North of Creek 2d 

~~ 

North, between sections 19 and 24, 

Creek, 16 links wide, runs S. of W. 

Foot ofTraverse Mountain bears S. W. 

Summit ofsame. 

Foot of same. 

Set post for Quarter Section Corner. 

Variation 7" 30' East. 

Lind, 6 N. 15 E. 4 links, 

Hickory, 8 S. 76 W. 64 links. 

Sugar, 10 inches in diameter. 

Set post for Corner to Sections 13,18,19, and 24. 

Sugar, 16 N. 64 W. 19 links. 

Lind, 24 S. 24 W. 14 links. 

Maple,9N. 19E.8links. 

Hickory, 14 S. 47 E. 12 links. 

level, and lstrate, densely timbered with Sugar, 

Maple, and Hickory-undergrowth of spice 

and briars. 

South half mile mountainous, third rate. North halfmile 

JANUARY 13, 1846. 

North, between sections 13 and 18. 

White Ash, 10 inches in diameter. 

Set post for Quarter Section Corner. 

White Ash, 10 N. 13 W. 14 links. 

Hackberry, 8 S. 16 E. 6 links. 

about five acres. 

Variation 7" 50' East. 

About 5 chains west of this corner is a pond, of an area of 

Sugar, 10 inches in diameter. 

Black Walnut, 26 inches in diameter. 

-32- 

TOWNSHIP 59 NORTH, 

Between Ranges 35 and 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.00 

10.14 

30.74 

40.00 

57.75 

Set post for corner to Sections 7,12,13 and 18. 

Black Walnut, 10N. 84 W. 28links. 

Sugar, 4 S. 64 W. 12links. 

Hickory, 14 N. 84 E. 16 links. 

White Ash, 6 S. 14, E. 27 links. 

Land level and first-rate. Timber, White Ash, Sugar, 

Hickory, and Hackberry-under growth, spice. 

North, between Sections 7 and 12. 

Sugar, 10 inches in diameter. 

White Oak, 20 inches in diameter. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

White Oak, 10 N. 14 E. 144 links 

Hickory, 12 S. 41 W. 6 links. 

rock channel. 

Variation 7" 55' East. 

Reeder's Run, 14 links wide, runs S. W. gentle current, 

80.00 

40.00 

70.11 

80.50 

Set post for corner to sections 1,6,7 and 12. 

White Oak, 6 N. 14 W. 6 links. 

Hickory, 10 S. 16 W. 11 links. 

Sugar, 28N. 41 E. 10links. 

Beech, 18 S. 28 E. 28 links. 

Beech. 

land first-rate, Timber, White oak, Hickory, Sugar, and 

North, between sections 1 and 6. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

Ash, 32 S. 75 E. 10links. 

Walnut,24N. 14W. 14links. 

White Ash, 10 inches in diameter. 

Set post for corner to Townships 59 and 60 North, Ranges 

Variation 7" to 40' East. 

35 and36Westofthe4thMeridian. 

White Ash. 14N. 14 W. 104links 

-33- 

Between Townships 59 and 60 N. R. 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

~~ 

CHAINS. 

23.40 

40.00 

55.00 

80.00 

12.50 

15.49 

40.00 

50.83 

59.23 

Beech, 9 S. 16 W. 94 links. 

Walnut, 6 N. 40 E. 14 links. 

Sugar, 14 S. 53% E. 63 links. 

and Beech. 

Land rolling, first-rate, Timber, of Ash, Walnut, Sugar, 

JANUARY 14, 1846. 

West, between sections 1 and 36. 

Beech, 20 inches in diameter. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

Beech, 16 N. 13 E. 6links. 

Maple,12S.31W. 10links. 

Variation, 8" 25' East. 

Road from Arpent to Rangeville, bears N. E. 

Set post for corner to sections 1,2,35 & 36 

Maple, 9 N. 14 E. 12 links. 

Sugar, 15 N. 25 W. 96links. 

Beech, 12 S. 14E. 100 links. 

Ash, 14s. 12 W. 6links. 

Maple. 

Land rolling, first-rate, Timber, Sugar, Beech, and 

West, between sections 2 and 35 

Variation, 7"30' East. 

Enter rich bottom, bears S. W. 

Walnut, 36 inches in diameter. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

White Ash, 12 N. 46 E. 10links. 

Beech, 16 S. 49 W. 14links. 

meander post. 

Sycamore, 36 N. 251/2E. 16links. 

Buckeye, 10 S. 50 E. 14 links. 

from which point to flag bears N. 69 W.- 

distance across river 8 chains and 40 links. 

Over River and set meander post on right bank. 

Left bank of Compass River, runs South, and set a 

Set flag in line on opposite bank. Offset South 323 links, 

-34- 

Between Townships 59 and 60 N., R. 36 W., 4th Meridian. 

~ 

CHAINS. 

61.12 

72.50 

80.00 

WhiteAsh,30N. 15W.10links. 

Walnut, 36 inches in diameter. 

Leave bottom bears S. W. 

Set post for corner to sections 2,3,35 and 36. 

Soft Maple, 40 S. 20 W. 16 links. 

Walnut, 20 N. 16 E. 23 links. 

348 
24.16 

40.00 

46.49 

73.12 

80.00 

CHAINS. 

7.70 

15.19 

12.50 

15.75 

28.75 

North, between sections 35 and 36. 

Pine, 18 inches diameter. 

Brook 6 links wide, runs N. W. swift, rocky bed, low 

Variation, 7" 45' East. 

earth banks, clear water. 

Buckeye, 12 N. 54 W. 16 links. 

Sugar, 28 S. 43 E. 4links. 

Maple, 40 S. 22 W. 12 links. 

Sugar, Maple, and Buckeye. 

Land, rich level bottom, first-rate. Timber, Walnut, 

West, between sections 3 and 34. 

Bur Oak, 24 inches in diameter. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

Elm, 24N. 84 W. 40 links. 

Black Walnut, 40 S. 24E. 16 links. 

Maple, 24 inches in diameter. 

Cottonwood, 36 inches in diameter. 

Set post for corner to sections 3,4 33, and 34. 

Cottonwood, 8 N. 36 E. 14 links. 

Black Walnut, 14 N. 40 W. 6 links. 

Maple, 20 S. 42?h E. 9 links. 

Sugar, 16 S. 39 W. 14 links. 

nut, Elm, Sugar, and Maple. 

Variation 7" 40' East. 

Land, level, 2d rate. Timber, of Cotton wood, Black Wal- 

~~ 

West, between sections 4 and 33. 

Enter bottom bears S. S. W. 

Cottonwood, 15 inches in diameter. 

Left bank Nonius River, runs S. S. W. and set meander 

Variation, 8" East. 

post. 

Sycamore, 40 N. 45?h E. 14 links. 

Buckeye, 26 South, 16links. 

-35- 

Between Townships 59 and 60 N., R. 36 W., 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

33.30 

40.00 

50.19 

60.83 

80.00 

14.46 

34.49 

40.00 

54.94 

80.00 

32.50 

40.00 

Over river, and set meander post on right bank 

Maple, 12 N. 20 W. 19 links. 

Hickory, 9 S. 62% W. 42 links. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

Elm, 20 N. 14 W. 64links. 

Ash, 40 S. 24 E. 14 links. 

Hickory, 14 inches in diameter. 

Leave bottom bears S. W. 

Set post for corners to sections 4,5,32 and 33. 

Beech, 15 N. 12 E. 14 links. 

Hickory, 20 N. 40 W. 10 links. 

Ironwood, 9 S. 20 E. 16 links. 

Red Elm, 14s. 54 W. 4 links. 

Land, level bottom, first-rate; Timber ofBeech, Hickory, 

Ironwood, Red Elm, and Maple. 

West, between sections 5 and 32. 

Sugar, 10 inches in diameter. 

Ash, 10 inches in diameter. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

Pine Oak, 10 N. 77 E. 14 links. 

Plum, 6, S. 17, W. 5, links. 

White Oak, 10 inches in diameter. 

Bur Oak, 10 N. 32 E. 4 links. 

Pin Oak, 12 N. 16 W. 10 links. 

Hickory, 16 S. 54E. 6 links. 

Maple, 20 S. 32 1/4 W. 14 links. 

ory, Maple, and Plum. 

Variation, 8" 10' East. 

Set post for corner to sections 5,6,31 and 36. 

Land rolling, 2d rate; Timber, Bur and Pin Oe.., HickWest, between sections 6 and 31. 

Tally-Rod Creek, 14 links wide, runs South. 

Set post for quarter section corner. 

Variation, 8" 10' East. 

-36- 

Between Townships 59 and 60 N., R. 36 W., 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

49.39 

50.47 

80.94 

Bur Oak, 18 N. 51 E. 11 links. 

Hickory, 24 S. 24 W. 9 links. 

Hickory, 12 inches in diameter. 

White Ash, 14 inches in diameter. 

Intersect Range line 30 links North of temporary post 

and set post, corner to Townships 59 and 60 North, 

Ranges 36 and 37 West, 4th Meridian. 

Hickory, ION. 62, E. 14 links. 

Sugar, 6 N. 49 W. 9 links. 

Beech, 8 S. 54 E. 11 links. 

Oak, 14 S. 45 W. 100 links. 

ory, and Beech; under-growth of vinez and spice. 

Land rollingfirst-rate, Timber, Bur Oak, Sugar, HickJANUARY 16, 1846. 

-37- 

SUBDIVISION 

OF 

TOWNSHIPS 59 NORTH, RANGE 36 WEST 

OF 

4th PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN, 

Wisconsin, 

BY 

A. B. Deputy Surveyor. 

COMMENCED May 16, 1846. 

COMPLETED May 28, 1846. 

CHAINS. 

40.07 

80.13 

31.9 

79.83 

-38- 

Beginning at corner to sections 25 and 36. retraced East 

Variation 7"45' East. 

Intersected 5 links west of quarter section corner. 

Intersected 9 links west ofTownship corner. Thence 

side of section 36; running South. 

retraced South side of section 36. 

Variation 7" 45' East. 

Intersected 5 links North of quarter section corner. 

Intersected 10 links North of corner to sections 35 and 

36. 

MAY 16, 1846. 

-39- 

SUBDIVISIONS. 

349 
23.42 

30.95 

40.00 

51.16 

80.00 

79.49 

8.76 

39.741/2 

Chesnut Oak, 12 inches diameter. 

Brook, 5 links wide, runs S. 70 W. swift, sandy bottom, 

low bank, clear water. 

Set quarter section post. 

Pine, 30 N. 29 E. 17 links. 

Birch, 10 S. 19 W. 7 links. Bearings. 

Jack Oak, inches diameter. 

Set post, corner to sections 25,26,35 and 36. 

White Oak, 12 S. 52 W. 9 links. i Jack Oak, 5 N. 24E 12 links. Bearings. 

Surface hilly; soil sandy and poor; timber, Pine, White 

and Jack Oak, Birch and Chesnut Oak; under-growth, 

Whortleberry and Greenbriars. The hills are a part of 

the Magnet Range. 

East Random, between sections 25 and 36. 

Intersected Range line, 15 links south ofpost. 

Variation, 7" 45' East. 

West, corrected between sections 25 and 36. 

Pine, 20 inches diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Variation, 7" 51' East. 

Jack Oak, 6 S. 24 W. 18 links. 

Pine 12 N. 19 E. 10 links. Bearings. 

-40- 

Township 59 N., Range 36 W., 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

49.50 

58.85 

67.71 

79.49 

15.16 

22.20 

28.46 

36.00 

40.00 

52.13 

53.50 

72.19 

80.00 

79.85 

~~ 

Brook. 5 links wide, runs N. W. rapid, rocky bed and 

Brook. 4 links wide, runs N. E. rapid, rocky bed and 

Chesnut Oak, 18 inches diameter. 

Section corner. 

Surface hilly and broken; soil 3d rate; timber, Pine, 

banks. 

banks. 

White, Black, and Jack Oak, and Birch; 

under-growth, Greenbriar, Whortleberry and Hazel. 

North, between sections 25 and 26. 

Hickory, 15 inches diameter. 

Enter Creek bottom, bears S. 75 W. 

Random Creek, 95 links wide, runs West, gentle current, 

Leave bottom, bears S. W. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings. 

Bur Oak, 18 inches in diameter. 

Large chalybeate spring, 90 links East, runs S. E. 

Hickory, 18 inches in diameter, 

Set post, corner to sections 23,24,25 and 26. 

Variation, 7" 40' East. 

mud bottom, earth banks. 

Poplar, 24 S. 29 W. 6 links. { White Oak, 16N. 57 E. 15 links. 

Spanishoak 18 S. 45 E. 13 links, 

Hickory 12 N. 71 W. 150 links, 

creek bottom broken, soil 2d rate; creek bottom, 

about 10 chains wide; soil first-rate; timber, Pine, 

Gum, White and Jack Oak, Hickory and Poplar, 

undergrowth, Hazel, Whartleberry, and Sassafras. 

Surface south of creek bottom hilly; soil 3d rate; North of 

East Random, between sections 24 and 25. 

Variation 7" 50' East. 

Intersected Range line, 60 links south ofpost 

-41- 

Townships 59 North Range 36 West 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

8.33 

39.92% 

49.74 

79.85 

7.96 

40.00 

46.50 

61.00 

71.18 

80.00 

West, corrected between sections 24 and 25. 

Variation 8" 16' East. 

Gum, 8 inches in diameter on East bank of creek 18 links 

wide, runs South, swift sandy bottom and low 

sandy banks. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Gum 16 inches in diameter. 

Section corner. 

Surface mountainous; soil 3d rate-timber Pine, Bur 

oak and Gum; undergrowth, Greenbriars and Whortelberry. Iron ore in N. W. % of section 25, and in 

W. 1/4 of same section in creek there is a cascade and 

near it Clark's furnace. 

{ Pine, 15 S. 16 E. 189 links. 

Pine, 12 N. 22 W. 15 links. 

North, between sections 23 and 24, 

Black oak, 20 inches in diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Lind, 18 N. 25 E. 7 links. Bearings 

Enter willow swamp, heads N. E. about 20 chains. 

Leaves swamp, bears S. W. 

Poplar, 34 inches in diameter. 

Set post, corner to sections 13,14,23 & 24. 

Bearings 

Surface South of swamp hilly; soil 2d rate; North of 

Variation 7" 30' East. 

i Sycamore, 12 S. 14 W. 119 links 

Sugar, 20 S. 16 W. 90 links. i B. walnut, 30 N. 31 E. 22 links. 

swamp level, 1st rate-timber White and Jack oak, 

Hickory, Sugar maple, Ash and Walnut; undergrowth 

Hazel, Pawpaw and Spice. 

East Random, between sections 13 and 24. 

Variation 8" 15' East. 

-42- 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

79.60 

9.20 

12.00 

26.00 

28.54 

39.80 

47.80 

50.44 

79.60 

Intersected range line 12 links South ofpost. 

West, corrected between sections 13 and 24. 

White oak, 16 inches in diameter. 

Cranberry marsh, impassable, bears S. 25 W. 

Variation 8" 20' East. 

Offset S. 20 W. 12 chains. 

West 14 chains, 

N. 20 E. 12 chains to line. 

Leave Marsh, bears N. 20 E. 

Swamp Ash, 10 inches in diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Brook, 6 links wide, runs S. W. low banks, sluggish, mud 

bottom. 

Black walnut, 36 inches in diameter. 

Section corner. 

Surface level; soil on East lh marshy, 3d rate; West '/z 

Hickory, 16N. 85?h W. 109 links. i Sugar, 15 N. 76 E. 17 links. 

dry, 1st rate-timber Sugar maple, Poplar, 

Hickory and Black walnut; undergrowth Spice 

and Pawpaw. 

350 
6.72 

20.45 

25.95 

26.13 

40.00 

49.22 

80.00 

-43- 

North, between sections 13 and 14. 

White ash, 20 inches in diameter. 

Small deep pond bears N. E. offsets N. 60 E 5.50 chains, 

N. 60W.5.50,chainstoline. 

Line leaves pond, bears S. E. 

Lind 30 inches in diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Hickory, 18 inches in diameter. 

Set post, corner to sections 11,12,13 & 14. 

Variation 8" 10' East. 

Lind, 24 S. 52% W. 99. i Hackberry, 9 N. 40 W 11. 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

80.04 

~ 

CHAINS. 

East random, between sections 1 and 12. 

Variation 8" 25' East. 

Intersected Range line 2 links South ofpost. 

79.94 

9.96 

39.97 

56.78 

79.94 

8.40 

21.62 

30.47 

31.00 

40.00 

80.00 

Hickory, 12 N. 20 W. 4 links. I White oak, 16 S. 14 E. 79 links Bearings 

Surface level; soil 1st rate; a few chains on the North of 

pond, rather low & wet-timber White ash, White 

and Black oak, Sugar, Maple, Walnut, Hickory 

and Lind; undergrowth Pawpaw and Spice. 

MAY 16, 1846. 

East random between sections 12 and 13. 

Intersected Range line 6 links South ofpost. 

Variation 8" 20' East. 

West, corrected between sections 12 & 13. 

Blackwalnut, 50 inches in diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

White Oak, 20 inches diameter. 

Section corner. 

Surface level; soil 1st rate-timber Lind, Beech, Sugar 

Variation 8" 23' East. 

White ash, 30 N. 65 W. 10 links. I Beech, 24 S. 46 E. 9 links. 

maple, White oak, Black walnut, White ash 

and hickory; undergrowth Pawpaw. 

North between sections 11 and 12. 

Sugar maple, 15 inches in diameter. 

Reeder's run 15 links wide, runs S. W. rapid; limestone 

White oak, 20 inches in diameter. 

Enter Mound prairie, bears N. E. 

Set quarter section post in mound, pit 8 links East. 

Set post, corner to sections 1,2,11 and 12 in mound, pit 8 

Surface generally level; soil 1st rate; timber on South % 

Variation 7" 55' East. 

bed and banks. 

links south. 

Sugar maple, Ash, Walnut, 

-44- 

Township 59 North Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

5.27 

37.00 

40.02 

80.04 

80.41 

10.15 

18.00 

29.00 

40.41 

57 .OO 

67:OO 

West corrected between sections 1 and 12. 

Black Walnut, 36 inches diameter. 

Enter Mound prairie, bears S. 20 W. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Section corner. 

West %rich, dry, and level prairie; East VZ rolling; soil 

Variation 8" 26' East. 

Black Walnut, 16 N. 73 E. 327 links. i Sugar, 12 S. 81 E. 332links. 

1st rate-timber Beech, Sugar maple, Ash, 

Walnut; undergrowth Pawpaw and Spice. 

North random between sections 1 and 2. 

Variation 7" 40' East. 

Intersected north boundary 6 links West ofpost. 

South corrected between sections 1 and 2. 

Hickory, 18 inches in diameter. 

Road from Arpent to Rangeville, bears N E. 

Enter Mound prairie, bears East. 

Set quarter section post in mound, pit 8 links East. 

Enter Walnut grove, beors S. 80 W. 

Leave same, bear S. 80 W. lies mostly west 

Variation 7" 37' East. 

-45- 

Township 59 North Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.41 

10.71 

18.97 

33.10 

40.00 

51.90 

53.04 

80.00 

80.17 

12.51 

40.081/2 

48.85 

49.35 

of line. 

Section corner. 

South %rich and dry prairie; north YZ rolling; soil 1st 

rate; timber Beech, Ash, Sugar, Maple, Walnut, 

Hackberry, and Buckeye; undergrowth, Pawpaw, 

and Spice. 

North, between sections 34 and 35. 

White Oak, 18 inchesdiameter. 

Enter swamp, bears S. W. 

Maple, 15 inches diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings. 

Leave swamp, bears S. W. 

Hickory, 10 inches diameter. 

Set post, corner to sections 26,27,34 & 35. 

Bearings. 

Surface level, soil 2d rate; timber Black Oak, Sugar 

Variation, 7" 50' East. 

Maple, 9 S. 51 E. 10 links. i Maple, 15, N. 75, W. 14 links. 

Black Oak, 16N. 12 W. 6links. I Black Oak, 12 S. 16 E. 111 links. 

Maple, Hickory, and Dogwood; but little 

undergrowth. 

MAY 17, 1846. 

East Random, between sections 26 and 35. 

Intersected North and South line 12 links North of 

Variation, 7" 50' East. 

corner. 

West, corrected between sections 26 and 35. 

Pine, 12 inchesdiameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings. 

Harrison's Creek, 45 links, runs N. W. rapid; sand 

bottom. 

Sugar Maple, 18 inches diameter. 

Variation, 7" 45' East 

White Oak, 15 S. 19 E. 24 links. I Hickory, 12 N. 28 W. 16 links. 

351 
[Pages 46 thru 59 deleted. The notes continue in the same 

format and style.] 

64.05 

80.07 -60- 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

Set post on Right bank ofNonius River. 

Maple 9 S. 30 W. 44links. { BoxElder5N.7E.6links. Bearings 

Section corner. 

Bottom dry, upland rolling; soil 1st rate; timber Cottonwood, Ash, Sycamore, Buckeye and Maple; undergrowth Vines and Briars. 

North Random, between sections 4 and 5. 

Variation 7" 35' East. 

CHAINS. 

58.42 

4.26 

16.12 

40.00 

42.77 

62.34 

Left bank of Compass River; set meander post. 

Maple, 12 N. 56E. 18links. I Box Elder, 8 S. 42 W. 81 links Bearings 

Thence offset South 6.83 chains; West 21,64 chains to 

line between sections 16 and 17,3 chains South 

of meander post. 

Walnut and Hickory; undergrowth Hazle and 

Vines. 

Uplandrolling; soil 1st rate; timber Beech, Ash, Maple, 

North, between sections 8 and 9. 

From meander post on left bank of Compass River, beVariation 7" 55' East. 

tween sections 16 and 17, offset West 395 links, 

from which flag in line on Right bank bears 

N. 26 E. therefore from section corner to Right 

bank is 426 links. 

Right bank of Compass River, set meander post. 

Bearings. 

Hackberry, 20 inches diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Maple, 20 S. 14 E. 15 links. 

Hackberry,12N.21W. 18links. 

Locust, 15 N. 33 W. 12 links. 

Bearings 

Right bank of Compass River; Set meander post. 

Bearings' I Buckeye, 18 S. 15 E. 91 links. 

ThenceoffsetN.60W. 19.57chains;N.60E. 19.57 

chains to line on Right bank of Compass River. 

Line leaves river and enters upland; set meander post on 

Right bank. 

Box Elder, 6 N. 27 E. 14 links. I Ash, 10 N. 18 W. 18 links. 

I 

-61- 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.00 

80.07 

10.15 

34.00 

40.031/z 

59.20 

Hickory, 18 S. 60 W. 42 links. 

Sugar Maple, 12 N 10 E. 41 links 

Walnut, 12 S. 20 E. 100 links. 

Bearings 

Set post, corner to sections 4,5,8 and 9. 

Bearings I Ash, 15 N. 51 W. 65 links. 

Surface in bend of River low bottom; North of River 

gently rolling; soil 1st rate; timber Ash, Walnut, 

Sugar Maple, Hickory and Hackberry; very little 

undergrowth. 

I 

East Random, between sections 4 and 9. 

Variation 8" 10' East. 

IntersectedN. & S.line 10linksNorthofpost. 

West, corrected between sections 4 and 9. 

White Oak 18 inches diameter. 

Enterbottom bears S. E. 

Set quarter section post. 

Cottonwood, 36 S. 21 E. 92 links. 

Sycamore, 24 N. 80 W. 115 links. 

Buckeye, 14N.41YzE. 47links. 

Bearings 

Left bank of Nonuis River, set meander post. 

Bearings { Maple 9 S. 27 E. 15 links. 

Thence offset South 4.85 chains, from which flag in line 

Variation 8" 6' East. 

I 

onRightbankbearsN.45 W. 

-62- 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.09 

22.00 

40.09 

49.00 

60.01 

80.09 

19.20 

32.30 

40.00 

65.40 

80.00 

80.07 

14.00 

Intersected North boundary 2 links West of post. 

South, corrected between sections 4 and 5. 

Enter bottom bears N. E. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings { Sugar maple, 12 N 49 W 14 links 

Leave bottom bears S. E. 

Sugar Maple 14 inches diameter. 

Section corner. 

Surface nearly level; soil 1st rate; timber Hackberry, 

Walnut, Sugar Maple and Beech; undergrowth 

Hazel and Vines. 

Variation, 7" 34' East. 

Walnut, 8 S. 65 E. 33 links. 

~~ 

North, between sections 31 and 32. 

Enter windfall, bears S. 60 E. 

Leave same, bears S 60 E. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Hackberry, 10 inches diameter. 

Set post, corner to sections 29,30,31& 32. 

Beech, 14N. 28 E. 117 links. 

Bearings I White Oak, 16 S. 55 W 21 links. 

Surface partly broken and partly level; soil 3d rate, and 

sandy; timber Chesnut, Gum, Scrub and Jack Oak; 

under-growth Oak and Hickory. 

Variation, 8" East. 

Chestnut, 24 S. 49 E. 45 links. { Ironwood,6N.42%W.61links. 

East Random, between sections 29 and 32. 

Intersected N. and S. line at post. 

Variation 8" 10' East. 

West, corrected between sections 29 & 32. 

Road from lead-mines to Arpent, bears N. 20 E 

Variation 8" 10' East. 

-63- 

Township 59 North Range 36 West 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

40 .O3 ?h 

61.11 

80.07 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Beech 18 inches diameter. 

Section corner. 

Surface broken; soil sandy, 3drate; timber Chesnut, 

Beech, Oak and Ironwood; under-growth Oak and 

Hickory brush. 

Ironwood, 8 S. 22 E. 7 links. I Dogwood, 6 N46% W 71 links. 

MAY 23, 1846. 

352 
79.82 

6.38 

39.82 

55.00 

79.82 

7.19 

25.20 

61.20 

80.00 

West Random, between sections 30 and 31. 

Intersected West boundary 4 links North of post. 

Variation, 8" 10' East. 

13.08 

East, corrected between sections 29 and 32. 

Hickory, 14 inchesdiameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Brook 4 links wide, runs N. E. 

Section corner. 

Surface level; soil 2d rate; timber Oak, Ash and Elm; 

Variation, 8" 12' East. 

Hickory, 12 S. 32 E. 49 links. { Ironwood,6N.40W.4links. 

under-growth Spice. 

North, between sections 29 and 30. 

Elm, 14 inches diameter. 

Intersected South bank of offset Lake, and set meander 

post. 

Black Oak, 22 S. 51 E. 13 links. { Hickory, 12 S. 30 W. 51 links. Bearings 

Offset West 12 chains; North 36 chains; East 12 chains to 

line. 

North bank and set meander post. 

{ Cherry, 12 N. 80 W. 20 links. Bearings 

Set post, corner to sections 19,20,29 & 30. 

Variation, 8" 50' East. 

Black Oak, 14 N. 40% E 18 links. 

-64- 

Township 59 North Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.03 

12.00 

40.01% 

49.97 

80.03 

80.15 

40.15 

45.07 

80.15 

Hickory, 14 N. 87 E. 92 links. I Ironwood, 8 S. 79 W. 19 links. Bearings 

Surface level; soil 2d rate; timber Hickory, Black Oak, 

Cherry and Ironwood; under-growth 

Whortleberry. 

East Random, between sections 20 and 29. 

Intersected N. and S. line, 2 links South of post. 

West, corrected between sections 20 and 29. 

Leave bottom, bears N. W. 

Set quarter section corner. 

Bearings 

Bunch ofElms 40 inches diameter. 

Section corner. 

Surface generally level; soil good 2d rate; timber Elm, 

Variation 8" 10' East. 

Variation 8" 11' East. 

Sugar maple, 14 N 88 W 14 links. I Hickory, 12, S. 1Yz E. 9 links. 

Oak and Hickory; under-growth Dogwood and 

Alder. 

West Random, between sections 19 and 30. 

Intersected West boundary at post. 

Variation, 8" 15' East. 

East, corrected between sections 19 and 30. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings { White Oak, 18 S. 10E. 19 links. 

White Oak, 18 inches diameter. 

Section corner. 

Surface rolling; soil 2d rate; timber White Oak, Sugar 

Variation, 8" 15' East. 

Aspen, 10N. 45?hW.47links. 

Maple and Aspen; unper-growth Hickory and 

Oak. 

~ 

North, between sections 19 and 20. 

Variation, 7" 15' East. 

Set post on South boundary of Black Re- 

-65- 

Township 59 North Range West, 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.00 

10.05 

79.91 

23.19 

39.91 

43.84 

serve 35.25 chains 

EastofS. W. corner 

Bearings 

Thence on same course without blazing. 

Set temporary corner to sections 17,18,19 and 20. 

Land level; soil 2d rate; timber Oak, Sugar Maple Ash. 

West, on true line between sections 17 and 20, from 

Sugar maple, 18 N 89 W 16 links { Black Oak, 20 S. 42 E. 29 links 

corner to sections 16,17,20 and 21. 

Variation 8" 12' East. 

Set post on East boundary of Blackhawk's reserve 67.08 

chains North of S. E. corner of the same. 

Bearings { Ash, 10 S. 56 W. 20 links. 

Land level; soil 2d rate; timber Oak, Ash, and Hickory; 

undergrowth Hazel and Ironwood. 

Hackberry, 12 S. 14E. 51 links. 

MAY 24, 1846. 

West Random, between sections 18 and 19. 

Intersected West boundary 12 links South of post. 

Variation 8" 20' East. 

East, corrected between sections 18 and 19. 

Honey Locust, 14 inches diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings [ White Ash, 10 N. 7 E. 18 links. 

Set post on West boundary of Blackhawk's reserve. 

Variation 8" 20' East. 

Walnut,14S.38W.90links. 

-66- 

Township 59 North Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

56.50 

64.62 

80.00 

16.97 

27.58 

White Oak, 8 N. 21 W. 62 links. 

Black Oak, 12 S. 25 W. 27 links Bearings 

Surface rolling; soil 1st rate; timber Black and White 

Oak, Ash and Hickory; under-growth Prickly Ash 

and Grape-vines. 

North, between sections 17 and 18. (line in reserve not 

blazed.) 

Variation 8" East. 

Left bank of Compass River, and leave Blackhawk's 

Offset East, 8.12 chains from which flag in line on Right 

Set meander post on Right bank of Compass river. 

Buckeye, 15 N. 32 W 10 links. 

Maple, 6N. 28 E. 13 links. 

Maple 12 N. 46 W. 5 links. 

Bearings 

Set post, corner to sections 7,8,17 and 18. 

Sycamore, 10 S. 30E. 11 links. Bearings 

Bottom 1st rate; timber, Maple, Sycamore and Buckeye. 

East, on true line between sections 8 and 17. 

Elm, 20 inches diameter. 

Set meander post on Right bank of Compass river. 

reserve. 

bankbearsN. 45 W. therefore at 

{ 

I 

Variation 8" 12' East. 

353 
80.10 

Township 59 North Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

Box Elder, 5 N. 2 E. 16 links. 

Bearings { Maple 8 S. 59 W. 11 links. 

Bottom 1st rate, dry; timber Buckeye, Sycamore, Maple 

and Box Elder; under-growth Ash and Prickly Ash. 

West Random, between sections 7 and 18. 

Intersected West boundary at post. 

Variation 8" 15' East. 

CHAINS. 

15.99 

19.00 

40.10 

55.15 

64.21 

80.10 

80.16 

32.07 

40.16 

57.25 

80.16 

21.54 

35.10 

43.24 

53.00 

West Random, between sections 6 and 7. 

Variation 8" 15' East. 

Intersected West boundary 13 links South of post. 

East, corrected between sections 6 and 7. 

Elm 22 inches diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Tally-rod Creek, 15 links wide, runs South, gentle curSection corner. 

Land gently rolling; soil 1st rate; timber 

Variation 8" 9' East. 

Hickory, 12 S. 51 W, 116 links. { Sugar maple, 18 N 46 E 10 links 

rent, mud bed. 

~~ 

East, corrected between sections 7 and 18. 

White Oak, 20 inches diameter. 

Enter bottom bears S. W. 

Set quarter section post. 

Bearings 

Set Meander post on West of Chain Lake. 

Bearings 

Thence offset South 423 chains; from which flag in line 

on East bank bears N 65 E. therefore at 

Set meanderpost on East bank of Chain lake. 

Buckeye, 10 S. 40 W. 17 links. i Buckeye, 15 N. 24 W. 13 links. Bearings 

Section corner. 

Bottom 1st rate, dry; timber Sycamore, Cottonwood, MaVariation 8" 15' East. 

White Ash, 14s. 40 E. 24 links. 

Maple, 9 N. 36 W. 10links. 

Cottonwood, 20 N 50 E 7 links. 

i 

i Maple, 12 S 39E 10 links. 

ple and Hackbeny; no undergrowth. 

North, between sections 7 and 8. 

Sycamore 48 inches diameter. 

Set meander post on South bank of Chain lake. 

Variation 7" 55' East. 

CHAINS. 

Maple 10 S. 71 E. 14 links. { - Made. 12 s. 52 w. 9 links. Bearings 

Set post, corner to sections 5,6,7 and 8. 

Bearings Sugar maple, 15 S 45 W 4 links. I Sugar maple, 18 N 34E. 6 links. 

. -, 

Offset East 8.14 chains from which, flag on North bank 

Set meander post on North bank of CIiain lake. 

Sugar maple, 15 N 45 W 12 links Bearings 

Leave bottom, bears West. 

bears N. 45 W. therefore at- 

{ Beech, 10 N. 39 E. 8 links. 

-68- 

Corners. Chains. 

South. 5.50 

S. 29 E. 11.50 

S. 5 ,E. 14.00 

S. 26?h W 9.00 

s. 47 w. 11.00 

s. 59 w. 10.00 

S. 72 W. 16.23 

S 55 W 4.00 

S 48 W 8.50 

Compass River. 

Beginning at post on left bank in north boundary, 

thence down stream. 

Variation 7" 35 East. 

In section 2. 

At 4 chains enter Mound Prairie, bears east. 

To line of sections 2 and 3. 

From this post, Maple at head of Out Island, bears N. 

Banks 8 feet high, alluvial; current gentle. 

87% W. 

Variation 7" 45 East. 

Maple on Island bears N. 65% W. 

In section 3. 

79.90 

21.17 

39.95 

79.90 

East Random, between sections 5 and 8. 

Variation 8" 10' East. 

Intersected N. and S. line 11 links south of post. 

West, corrected between sections 5 and 8. 

Sugar Maple, 36 inches diameter. 

Set quarter section post. 

Variation 8" 15' East. 

Sugar maple, 16 N 29 W 18 links 

Elm, 22 S. 70 E. 19 links. Bearings { I 

Section corner. 

Surface rolling; soil 1st rate; timber chiefly Sugar Maple 

May 25, 1846. 

and Elm; Uundergrowth Prickly Ash. 

-69- 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.24 

10.90 

40.24 

42.75 

80.24 

Sugar Maple, Ash, Elm and Oak; under-growth Oak 

and Hickory. 

North Random, between sections 5 and 6. 

Intersected North boundary at post. 

South, corrected between sections 5 and 6. 

Variation 7"35' East. 

Poplar 28 inches diameter. 

Marked Hickory 14 inches diameter for quarter section 

corner. 

Hickory, 18 N. 20 E. 49 links. I Ironwood, 8 S. 72 W. 97 links. Bearings 

Brook 5 links wide runs swiftly S. W. mud bed; low 

banks. 

Section corner. 

Surface level; soil 1st rate; timber Hickory Beech, PopVariation 7" 35' East. 

lar, Oak, Walnut and Elm; undergrowth Vines, Spice 

and Ash. 

May 26, 1846. 

[Page 70 is blank.] 

-71- 

MEANDERS. 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

354 
S 56 W 12.00 

S 70 W 5.74 

S 75 W 6.00 

N 80 W 18.00 

To upper corner of Claim No. 1. 

Banks and bed sandy; current gentle; 

bottomland lstrate. 

Beginning at lower corner of Claim No. 3, 

on left bank; thence down stream. 

Variation 8" East. 

To Bayou 150 links wide, runs S. W. 

-72- 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West 4th Meridian. 

~ 

Corners. Chains. 

N 59 W 16.00 

N 75 W 9.50 

s 75 w 11.00 

S 28 W 4.00 

S 24% E 8.00 

S47 E 21.00 

S 28% E 9.00 

S 2% E 6.50 

S 22 E 2.50 

s 12 w 10.00 

S 36 W 8.12 

s 57 w 11.00 

S 81 W 6.50 

N 70 W 7.16 

N 72 W 9.86 

s 54 w 2.00 

In section 9 

At 100 linksmouth ofBayou 150 links wide, 

comes from N. E. 

To line of sections 9 and 16. 

Banks generally low and sandy; bed gravel; current 

gentle; bottom land subject to inundation, 

to depth of 6 feet. 

Variation 8" East. 

At 9.50 chains Reeders' Run 20 links wide, 

comes from S. E. 

In section 16. 

Line of sections 16 and 17. 

Current swift; bed sand and gravel; banks 8 feet 

high, loamy bottom, land high and dry, soil 

1st rate. 

Variation 8" to 5' East. 

In section 17:-to upper corner of Blackhawk's 

Bottom land dry, 1st rate; banks 8 feet high; 

Reserve. 

current gentle. 

Beginning at lower corner of Blackhawk's Reserve, 

on left bank. 

Variation 8" 15' East. 

Over Random Creek, 180 links wide, comes from 

S. E. 

[Pages 73 through 79 deleted. The meander notes continue in 

the same format and style.] 

-80- 

Township 59 North, Range 36 West, 4th Meridian. 

Corners. Chains. 

S 61 W 13.00 

s 21 w 19.00 

S 35% E 13.00 

S 81 E 3.00 

S84E 11.15 

Variation 7" 55' East. 

In section 30. 

Inlet 8 links wide, runs N. E. 

Inlet 6 links wide, runs N. E. 

To point ofbeginning. 

Banks low; land 1st rate; water clear and cold. 

S 63 W 5.09 

S 79 W 9.50 

N 49 W 12.00 

North. 10.00 

N 46 E 4.00 

N 17 E 8.50 

N 54 E 5.00 

N 70 E 5.00 

N 52 E 14.00 

N 75 E 8.00 

S 55 E 6.00 

South. 4.50 

S 23 W 10.00 

s 1 w 12.00 

S 40% W 14.55 

Beginning at quarter section corner between 

sections 30 & 31, thence north, 16.20 chains to 

margin of Lake, and set post for witness point. 

Buckeye 10 S. 17 W. 41 links. 

Variation 8" East. 

Bearings [ Maple 8 S. 10 E. 19 links. 

At 7 Chains outlet 10 links wide, runs N. 80 E. 

To point ofbeginning. 

Banks low; beach sandy and rocky; water clear 

and deep. 

MAY 28, 1846 

I Link Lake in section 30. 

355 
xxv. 

(The location of the original copy of these Special Instructions 

is unknown at this time.) 

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 

to 

John Mullett, Deputy Surveyor 

April 22, 1848 

Sir, 

In the execution of the work embraced in your contract this 

day entered into for the subdivision of Fifteen Townships and 

Fractional Townships lying between Green Bay and Menomonie River, in Northern Michigan, you will be governed by 

the General Instructions to the Deputies of this office, so far 

as they may be applicable, except as herein stated, and, 

where they may not be applicable you will be governed by the 

general principles, applicable to the surveys of the public 

lands, laid down in the laws of the United States, with all 

which you have been so long and so well acquainted, that it is 

deemed unnessary to repeat them here. 

The exceptions above referred to are the following, viz: 1st. 

Instead of establishing new corners of sections on the North 

and West boundaries of townships, wherever, in running 

section lines you may intersect the same, you will close at the 

corners already established on those boundaries, by running 

random lines from the nearest subdivisional section corners 

South or East thereof as the case may be, and correcting the 

same, giving in your notes and on your diagrams the courses 

and lengths of the corrected closing lines; 2nd. Instead of 

returning diagrams of townships on a scale of two miles to an 

inch, your township diagrams must be made on thin, tough 

paper, and drawn on a scale of two inches to a mile; 3rd. 

Instead of a certificate at the end of each field book, you will 

take and subscribe an oath to be inserted in lieu thereof, a 

form of which oath is already in your possession; 4th. Instead 

of a common compass, you will use a solar compass in your 

work, and give in your notes the true variation of the needle 

as often as there may be changes of variation worth noting; 

5th. A general description of each township that you subdivide must be given at the end of the field notes thereof, and at 

the end of the notes of each line the time when it was run 

should be set down. 

In subdividing the Fractional Townships on the Menomonie River, you will ascertain the width of the River at different points and get as frequent and accurate connection with 

the surveys on the right bank thereof as practicable. All the 

islands in the River below the Quinnessec Falls, are included 

in the jurisdiction of Wisconsin. 

You will please keep this office advised of the progress of 

your work, and send in your field notes from time to time as 

you may have opportunity to do so. 

Very respectfully, 

Your Obt. Servant 

(s) Lucius Lyon 

Surveyor General 

Surveyor Generals Office 

Detroit, April 22nd, 1848 

356 
XXVI. 

(The location of the original copy of these Special Instructions 

is unknown at this time.) 

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 

to 

Guy H. Carleton, Deputy Surveyor 

Surveyor Generals’ Office 

Detroit, Michigan 

July 14, 1849 

Sir: 

In subdividing Townships 42,43,44, & 45 North of Ranges 

XI1 and XI11 West, in the northern peninsula of Michigan, 

embraced in the contract this day made with you, you will be 

governed by the General Instructions to the Deputies of this 

office heretofore issued, except as hereinafter stated, which 

instructions are similar to the printed General Instructions 

of the Surveyor General at Du Buque, Iowa, a copy of which 

dated July 26, 1848 you have this day shown me. 

The General Instructions of this office are now out of print, 

and I, therefore, refer you to the printed instructions of the 

Office at DuBuque for information as to what they are, instead of furnishing you a copy thereof. 

A letter of appointment of this date, constituting you one of 

my Deputies, and a diagram of your district, showing the 

topography, variation of the needle, and lengths of the exterior township lines thereof, are herewith enclosed. 

In the performance of your work you will use a good solar 

compass of Burt’s Patent, and run your lines wholly by the 

sun without depending on the needle, in all cases where its 

variation is not uniform and regular. 

The oaths of your chainmen and axeman must be inserted 

in the forepart of your first field book, and near the end of 

each book you will give a certificate, over your own signature, 

stating the names and residences of alltthe persons who may 

have assisted you in making the surveys therein described, 

and the duties performed by each. 

You will also, at the end of the notes of each mile, give the 

day, month and year, on which it was run, instead of dating 

each days work as heretofore required. 

You will recollect that in all cases there must be at least 

two bearings noted at every corner, whether fractional or 

otherwise, and whether a post be set, or a tree be noted in 

place of a post; and you will please also recollect that the 

original notes taken on the ground when your lines and 

corners are established must in all cases be returned to this 

office, together with a fair neat copy of such field book as may 

not be plainly written, or as it may, from any cause, be 

difficult to read. 

Your survey must be made by yourself, as required by your 

contract, and not by any other person, and great care must be 

taken by you to see that every part of the work is well and 

faithfully done. 

As the east boundaries of townships 42 North of Ranges 13 

and 14 West, were originally run from North to South and the 

corners thereon were so established as to throw the fractional 

sections on the South instead of on the North sides of those 

townships, those corners must be re-established at proper 

distances south of their present position so as to throw the 

fractions on the north side of each township, as required by 

law. The old corners must be cut out and field notes of the new 

corners, showing their direction and distance from the old 

must be returned with the notes of your subdivisions. 

Algernon Merryweather, D. S. who has a district of subdivisions adjoining yours on the west, has been instructed to 

correct the East boundary of T42NR14W. and may possibly 

do so before you close on to it. If does not, you will do it, and 

inform him thereof by a note left in the post at the first 

quarter section corner and also at the first section corner 

from the south boundary of the township. 

As fast as you finish your townships, you will please send 

one of your field notes and diagrams thereof (the latter made 

on a scale of two inches to a mile) that the office work may be 

kept up as near as practicable with your work in the field. 

The Commissioner directs me to advise my Deputies that 

no draft of theirs will be accepted, nor any order to theirs 

paid, but that the amount of their account will be forwarded 

to them respectively to such place as they may direct, by draft 

from the treasury as soon as they are settled. 

Very Respectfully, 

Your Obedient Servant 

Lucius Lyon 

Surveyor General 

To: Guy H. Carleton, Deputy 

Surveyor, St. Clair, St. Clair Co., Michigan 

357 
XXVII. 

(This copy of General Instructions was made from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

Dl 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO HIS 

DEPUTIES; 

BY THE 

SURVEYORGENERAL 

of the UNITED STATES, 

FOR THE 

STATES OF OHIO, INDIANA AND 

MICHIGAN. 

DETROIT: 

PRINTED BY W. W. HART, BOOK & JOB PRINTER. 

1850. 

359 
[31 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

through the centre of the State of Indiana, is called the 

Second Principal Meridian; that running north from the 

mouth of the Ohio river through the State of Illinois, is called 

the Third Principal Meridian; that running North from the 

mouth of the Illinois river, through the States of Illinois and 

Wisconsin, is called the Fourth Principal Meridian; and that 

runOffice of the Surveyor General of 

Ohio, Indiana and Michigan, 

DETROIT, 18 

To 

Deputy Surveyor: 

SIR,-You are to survey in person, or by the assistance of 

some duly authorized Deputy Surveyor, employed by you 

under the sanction of this Office, and acting under your 

immediate supervision and direction, while you are yourself 

with him, so as to inspect his work, the District described in 

your contract, dated 

18 conformably to 

the following printed instructions, so far as they are applicable to the character of the work which you have contracted to 

perform, excepting so much thereof as is modified or countermanded by manuscript special instructions, hereinafter written. 

SYSTEM OF SURVEY. 

1. The public Lands of the United States are surveyed in a 

uniform mode, established by law, by lines run by the cardinal points of the compass; the north and south lines coinciding with the true meridian, and the east and west lines 

intersecting them at right angles, giving to the tracts thus 

surveyed the rectangular form. 

2. The public lands are laid off and surveyed, primarily, 

into tracts of six miles square, called Townships, containing, 

each, 23,040 acres. The townships are subdivided into thirtysix tracts, called Sections, each of which is one mile square, 

and contains 640 acres. Any number, or series, of contiguous 

townships, situated north or south of each other, constitute a 

Range. 

3. To obtain and preserve a convenient and uniform mode 

of numbering the ranges and townships, it is usual, in commencing the survey of an insulated body of public lands, to 

run, or assume, two Standard Lines, as the basis of the 

surveys to be made therein. One of these standard lines is run 

due north and south, and is called the Principal Meridian, to 

which the ranges are parallel, and from which they are numbered eastward and westward. The other standard line is run 

due east and west, and is called theBase Line, and from which 

the townships are numbered northward and southward. 

4. To distinguish from each other, the systems or series of 

surveys thus formed, the several Principal Meridians are 

designated by progressive numbers. Thus, the Meridian running north from the mouth of the Great Miami river, is called 

the First Principal Meridian; the Meridian running north 

ning North from the mouth of the Arkansas river, thro’ the 

States of Missouri and Iowa, is called the Fifth Principal 

Meridian. 

5. The surveys in Ohio and Indiana were begun before the 

present system of surveying the public lands was fully 

adopted. The only regular base line in Ohio is run due east 

from a point in the first principal meridian, about one hundred and thirty-three miles north of the beginning of that 

meridian at the mouth of the Great Miami river. The base 

line for the surveys in Indiana, crosses the second principal 

meridian about thirty miles north of the commencement of 

that meridian, on the Ohio river, and extends west to the 

Mississippi river, forming, also, a base for the surveys in the 

State of Illinois. The base line for the surveys in Wisconsin, is 

the south boundary of that State, established in latitude 42 

30 North. 

6. The State of Michigan has a base line and principal 

meridian of its own, separate from those of the adjoining 

States. The base line begins at a point on Lake St. Clair, 173 

links south of the north east corner of private claim No. 222, 

and extends thence west to Lake Michigan. The principal 

meridian was run due north from the Maumee river, at Fort 

Defiance, opposite the mouth of the Auglaize river, in the 

State of Ohio, but is not adopted as a principal meridian for 

any other surveys than those of Michigan. 

7. Correction lines correct the error that would otherwise 

arise from the convergency of meridians, and arrest that 

proceeding from the inaccuracies of measurement. They are 

run due east and west at stated distances, generally at the 

end of every tenth township, and each forms a base for the 

townships north of it. 

8. Each range of townships should be made as much over 

six miles in width, on each base and correction line, as it will 

fall short of the same width where it closes on to the next 

correction line north, the excess or deficiency of width being 

always thrown into the last half 

[61 

mile, on all the lines closing out to the west boundary of each 

township. 

9. This mode of executing the public surveys, conduces 

more, perhaps, than any other which could be devised, to the 

simplicity, regularity, and symmetry of the work; and to the 

ease and certainty with which any tract may be identified. 

10. The public lands are surveyed under the direction of 

the Surveyor General, by Deputies appointed by himself. He 

selects for his deputies none other than skillful and experienced practical surveyors, men of good moral character, in 

whose integrity and fidelity the fullest confidence can be 

reposed. Their duties are prescribed in the following code of 

360 
General Instructions, a copy of which is furnished to every 

deputy, for his government. 

11. Each deputy surveyor is required, before he enters 

upon the duties of his appointment. to take and subscribe an 

oath or affirmation for the faithful performance thereof; 

which oath or affirmation is to be filed in the office of the 

Surveyor General. The following form of this oath or affirmation, or the substance thereof) will be used: 

do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I 

will well and faithfully perform the duties of a deputy surveyor of the United States Lands, to the best of my skill and 

ability, and according to the Laws of the United States, and 

the Instructions of the Surveyor General, as I shall answer to 

God at the Great Day 

A-BSworn and subscribed before me, at - county of 

- state of -, this - day of - 18 

J-KJustice of Peace. 

12. Each deputy surveyor appoints his own chain carriers, 

markers, and flag bearers, who must severally take and 

subscribe an oath, or affirmation, for the faithful performance of the trust reposed in them; which oath, or affirmation, may be administered by the deputy sur- 

“I, A- B 

“71 

veyor himself, or by a Justice of the Peace, and must be 

written and subscribed to on some of the pages, immediately 

after the title page, of the first field book that may be used in 

describing the surveys which they may assist in making. The 

following is the oath to be taken by the chainmen: 

“I, C- D- do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I 

will well and faithfully perform the duties of chain-carrier, in 

all surveys of United States Lands in which I shall be employed as such; and that I will level the chain, in measuring 

over uneven ground, and plumb the tally-pins, whether sticking or dropping the same; and that I will report the true 

distance to all notable objects, and the true length of all lines 

that I may assist in measuring, and mark correctly the letters 

and numbers at all corners that I maybe required to mark, to 

the best of my skill and ability. 

C-DSworn and subscribed before me, this- day of - 

18 A-BDeputy Surveyor. 

13. The oaths of the markers and flag-bearers may be 

varied to apply to their duties respectively. 

OF CONTRACTS. 

1. Before entering upon the execution of any surveys 

which may be allotted to a deputy surveyor, he enters into a 

written contract with the Surveyor General, in which the 

surveys to be performed are described, and the period for 

their completion, and the compensation per mile, fixed; and 

wherein the deputy binds himself to a faithful performance of 

the work, according to the terms of the contract, and pursuant to the laws of the United States, and the instructions of 

the Surveyor General. To the contract is annexed a bond, 

executed by the deputy with approved security, conditioned 

for the faithful performance of the work, in the penalty of 

double the estimated amount or value of the contract. The 

place of residence of the deputy, and of each of his sureties, 

[81 

must be given in the body of the bond, which must be signed 

by them in presence of at least two subscribing witnesses, 

whose places of residence must be given opposite their respective signatures. At the end of the contract, there is also the 

oath before mentioned, which must be taken and subscribed 

by the deputy, before some person authorized to administer 

oaths, previous to commencing his work. Three copies of each 

contract and bond are required to be executed; one for the 

Deputy, one for the Surveyor General’s office, and the other 

to be sent, by the Surveyor General, to the Commissioner of 

the General Land Office. 

2. The surveys must be executed, in all cases, by the deputy contracting for the same, in his own person, or under his 

immediate personal superintendence and direction, excepting random lines, which may be run by an assistant surveyor, 

as hereinafter provided. All subcontracts are illegal. 

3. In case of failure to comply with the terms of a contract, 

unless such failure arise from causes satisfactorily proven to 

be beyond the control of the contractor, immediate measures 

are to be taken to recover the penalty of the bond, agreeably 

to law. And no deputy surveyor who shall improperly fail to 

fulfil his engagements, will afterwards be employed in the 

public surveys; and of every such failure the Surveyor General is required to give immediate notice to the Commissioner 

of the General Land Office. 

4. And where any portion of a survey is found or suspected 

to be erroneous, payment therefor will be suspended until the 

error is corrected, or the cause of suspicion done away to the 

full satisfaction of the Surveyor General. 

OF SURVEYING INSTRUMENTS. 

1. You will provide yourself with Burt’s Improved Solar 

Compass, or some other equally good instrument, by which, 

when the sun shines, any survey may be accurately and expeditiously made without the use of the 

magnetic needle, which compass, unless it contains within 

itself the means of correctly adjusting all its parts, must be 

compared with, and adjusted by, the standard compass in this 

office. 

2. You will likewise procure a Surveying Chain, two poles, 

or thirty-three feet, in length, and containing fifty links; 

which is to be compared with and adjusted by the Standard 

Chain in the Surveyor General’s Office. It should be made of 

good iron wire, of such size as to prevent the chain from 

stretching by use, and yet light enough to be readily straightened in measuring. The handles should be’made of iron or 

brass, at least a fourth of an inch in diameter. 

3. You must be provided likewise with the measure of the 

standard chain, which may be made similar to your surveying chain, of smaller wire. And by this your surveying 

361 
chain must be compared and adjusted, at least every other OF THE VARIATION OF THE COMPASS. 

day, or oftener. 

4. You will use eleven tally pins, made of steel, not more 

than fourteen inches in length, large enough near the point to 

make them drop perpendicularly, and having a ring at the 

top in which is fixed a piece of red cloth, or something else of 

conspicuous color, that they may be more readily seen when 

stuck in the ground. They should always be counted, by both 

of the chain men, at the end of every tally, to see that none 

have been lost. 

5. Good marking tools, made especially for that purpose, 

must be provided and used for marking, neatly and distinctly, all the letters and figures required to be made at corners. 

There is a certain irregular curve line which passes around 

the earth towards the north and south poles, called the “line 

of no variation.” On every part of this line the magnetic 

needle coincides with the true meridian. But on each side of 

it, the needle declines from the true meridian towards it. This 

declination is usually called the “variation of the compass;” 

and increases gradually, but irregularly, in receding either 

eastward or westward from the line of no variation, until it 

reaches its maximum, beyond which it gradually decreases 

again to the line of no variation. This line is not stationary; 

but moves to the eastward for a series of 

[ 11 1 

years, and then to the westward through another series of 

years, but without any regular period, or any known proportion between the time of this movement and the amount 

thereof. Hence the variation of the compass, at any place, is 

continually changing, to an extent corresponding to the 

change of place in the line of no variation. The line of no 

6. You will likewise provide yourself with a good telescope, from 16 to 18 inches in length, with parallel lines 

correctly set in its principal focus, forming an angle in the 

field view of not less than 50 minutes, or 5-6 of a degree, to be 

attached, in a suitable manner, to the sights of your compass, 

when necessary. Also, two 

[ 10 1 

common targets, and a good tape measure, at least two poles 

long, correctly divided into links on one side, and into feet, 

inches and tenths, on the other. The telescope will often be 

useful in identifying lines and corners across bays and lakes, 

and, in connexion with the tape line and targets, as hereinafter mentioned, may, in some cases, be advantageously used 

in measuring inaccessible distances, and in meandering the 

shores of lakes and rivers which cannot be so easily or correctly meandered in any other way, 

7. Your compass and chain must be frequently examined 

in the field, in order to discover and rectify any error or 

irregularity which may arise in the use of them. 

8. The aberrations of the needle, are a fruitful source of 

error in surveying. These may arise from a variety of causes. 

“Local attraction,” owing to the presence of iron mineral, is 

generally assigned by surveyors as the principal cause of the 

disturbance of the needle. But it is believed that in many 

instances, the true source of the errors complained of, is to be 

found in the carelessness or inattention of the surveyor, in 

the use and management of his compass, or the erroneous 

measurement of his lines. All these must be constantly and 

vigilantly guarded against, by every means in your power. 

variation, at this time, passes through Lake Huron, and 

across the eastern end of the Northern Peninsula of Michigan, coinciding very nearly, in some places, with the true 

meridian; in other places, varying very much from it. East of 

this irregular line, the needle points to the west of the true 

meridian, and west of it, to the east of that meridian. Its 

variation increases in going westward, until, at the mouth of 

the Montreal River, on the northwestern boundary of the 

State, a distance of about three hundred miles, it amounts to 

more than seven degrees. It changes, however, almost continually during the day, and, on some days, as much as half a 

degree in the course of seven or eight hours. This change is 

called the diurnal variation of the needle, and is much greater 

in the summer than in the winter months. The north end of 

the needle reaches its greatest daily eastern declination, 

between one and two hours after sunrise, and its greatest 

western declination between one and two hours after noon, 

and points out the magnetic meridian about sunset. Its daily 

movements may be better understood by an examination of 

the following table: 

362 
Observations made by Wm. A. Burt, D. S., in latitude 42 degress 42 minutes north, near Detroit, in July, 1839. 

1839 Thermometer. Weather. Weather. Wind. Magnetic Variations. 

July. 5l/z A M 1 P M 6l/2 P M A M PM 5?hAM 1PM 6l/2PM 

13 60 

14 59 

15 56 

16 55 

17 52 

18 55 

19 56 

20 63 

21 70 

22 72 

23 65 

24 72 

25 69 

26 66 

27 69 

28 64 

29 66 

30 69 

79 

72 

73 

71 

80 

85342 

89 

80 

82 

86 

88 

86 

83 

88 

80 

86 

87 

90 

[ 13 1 

62 clear, 

67 clear, 

64 cloudy, 

66 cloudy, 

69 clear, 

83 clear, 

82 clear, 

74 clear, 

77 clear, 

75 cloudy, 

77 clear, 

77 rain, 

80 clear, 

79 clear, 

76 clear, 

80 clear, 

78 cloudy, 

79 clear, 

OF RUNNING AND MARKING LINES. 

1. All surveys of every description, where the magnetic 

variation is not uniform, must be made with Burt’s improved 

solar compass, or some other equally good instrument, operating independently of the needle. All range, township, and 

section lines, must be run and marked on the true meridian, 

or at right angles to it, as nearly as practicable, and the 

courses of these, and of all other lines, must be entered in 

your field notes, with reference to that meridian. In all cases, 

where a line or part of a line is run by the needle, the fact that 

it is so run must be distinctly stated in your notes. 

2. All lines which you actually establish, are to be marked 

as follows: Those trees which your line cuts must have two 

notches made on each side of them, where the line intersects 

and leaves them, without any other mark. These arecalled 

“sight trees,” “line trees,” or “station trees.” A sufficient 

number of other trees, standing nearest on either side of your 

line, to render the same conspicuous, are to be blazed on two 

sides, diagonally or quartering towards the line; the blazes to 

approach nearer each other the farther the line passes from 

the blazed trees, and to be as nearly opposite each other as 

possible, coinciding with the line, where the trees stand very 

near it. Great care must be taken to have your lines well 

marked, so that they may be easily seen and followed. Random lines are not to be blazed, but may have the bushes 

lopped, and stakes set at every ten chains, and, occasionally, 

a tree blazed on one side, to enable the surveyor to follow and 

correct them. 

3. Whenever, in running lines, your course may be oblight showers, 

flying clouds, 

light showers, 

some cloudy, 

clear, 

clear, 

flying clouds, 

cloudy, 

cloudy, 

some cloudy, 

clear, 

clear, 

clear, 

cloudy, 

showery, 

clear, 

clear, 

showers, 

W. s. W. 

N. W. 

N. W. 

West, 

W. N. W. 

West, 

s. W. 

s. s. W. 

South, 

West, 

East, 

W. s. W. 

N. W. 

West, 

West, 

West, 

West, 

West, 

1” 42’ 

1 42 

1 32 

138 

130 

141 

1 40 

1 40 

1 42 

1 40 

141 

1 43 

141 

1 40 

141 

1 42 

141 

141 

1” 28‘ 

126 

1 28 

1 28 

1 28 

128 

1 28 

1 25 

1 28 

128 

1 23 

1 25 

115 

123 

130 

124 

121 

1 25 

1” 42’ 

133 

1 28 

1 30 

130 

135 

135 

1 35 

1 30 

135 

136 

1 35 

1 32 

135 

137 

130 

1 30 

1 33 

structed by insuperable obstacles, as swamps marshes, lakes, 

rivers, precipices, or other objects over which you cannot 

pass, you will take the necessary offsets, or work by traverse, 

or by trigonometry, in order to pass the obstacle, and to 

ascertain the exact distance on so much of the line as, by 

reason of such obstructions, may 

not be actually run. By whatever method you pass such 

inaccessible parts of the lines, the utmost accuracy is necessary, to obtain the true measure thereof. 

4. No lines, of whatever description, embraced in your 

contract, excepting the random lines that may be run by your 

assistant, (should you employ one under the provisions for 

that purpose,) hereinafter contained, are permitted, in any 

case, to be run or surveyed by any person but yourself, or 

some regularly accredited Deputy Surveyor, duly authorized 

by the Surveyor General. Nor are letters, numbers, or marks 

of any kind, to be made by any other person than yourself, or 

such Deputy, except it be in your presence, and under your 

immediate and personal direction; in which case you are to 

inspect such letters, numbers, or marks, to see that they are 

neatly and correctly made. 

OF EXTERIOR TOWNSHIP LINES. 

1. The Act of Congress of the 18th of May, 1796, requires 

that the public lands “shall be divided by north and south 

lines, run by the true meridian, and by others crossing them 

at right angles, so as to form townships of six miles square.’’ 

In laying out and surveying the exterior boundaries of 

363 
townships, in conformity to this provision of the Act, the 

greatest possible accuracy must be observed, both in the 

course and measurement of the lines. 

2. Celestial observations to find the variation of the needle, must be made whenever there may be reason to suppose 

there is any material change therein, and at least as often as 

once in each mile, whether there be any change or not, which 

observations must be entered in your field notes. 

3. The following is the order and method to be pursued in 

running exterior township lines: a base line, or a township 

line assumed as a base, is run due east and west, across the 

southern boundary of the tract of country to be surveyed. On 

this line the quarter-section, 

section, and township corners are established at the full 

measure. The western portion of the south boundary of section 31, in each township should, however, be made as much 

over 40 chains in length, as the western portion of section 6, 

will fall short of 40 chains in length on the next correction 

line north, so that each range shall average six miles in 

width,” From each of the township corners on this line, range 

lines are run due north, the section and quarter-section corners established thereon, and at the end of the sixth mile on 

each of those lines, temporary township corner posts are set. 

But, at the end of the sixth mile on the most easterly line, a 

township corner is established. From this corner, a township 

line is run due west across the whole district, intersecting the 

range lines previously run; which, if the work be well done, 

will be at or near the temporary township corner posts placed 

at the end of them. Exactly at the points of intersection, 

whether at the temporary posts or north or south of them, the 

township corners are to be established. The distances from 

the points of intersection, to the temporary posts, must be 

accurately measured and noted, showing whether they are 

north or south of those posts. On this west line, the intermediate section and quarter-section corners will be established, as 

thesurvey of the line advances. The same process will be 

repeated, in running up due north, from the township corners 

on this last west line, another series or tier of range lines, to 

temporary six mile posts; establishing as before, the most 

easterly one, and from thence extending another due west 

township line across the whole district, in the manner before 

directed. The same method is pursued in each successive tier 

of townships, until the survey of the township lines is completed. On account of the convergency of meridians, however, 

correction lines should be established at the end of every 

sixty miles north, on which lines, corners should be established on the same principle as on the base line. 

[ 16 1 

5. Variations from this order and mode of running 

township lines, will sometimes be necessary, to accommodate 

them to the situation and boundaries of the tract of country to 

be surveyed, or to connect with prior surveys. Such cases, as 

they occur, will be provided for in Special Instructions. 

6. Whatever excess or deficiency may occur in the 

measurement of the exterior township lines, is to be carried 

to the north and west end ofthose lines. But by a vigilant and 

faithful attention to duty on the part of the skilful and experienced surveyor, those excesses or deficiences, except to a 

trifling extent, will be of rare occurrence. As the interior 

section lines must necessarily conform, both in their course 

and measure, to the township lines; any error committed in 

the latter will unavoidably be carried out into the former, and 

may mar the beauty and order of the entire sub-divisions of 

the township. 

7. It will be seen, then, how very important it is, that the 

townships be, as nearly as possible, six miles square; that the 

exterior boundaries be run exactly by the true meridian; and 

that the measures thereof be truly and accurately made. 

8. North and southlines are termed range lines, and east 

and west lines township lines. The bearing trees standing on 

the west side of range, and on the north side of township lines, 

are to be entered first in your field notes. 

9. With the Field Notes of exterior township lines, the 

surveyor must return a map or diagram of the lines run, 

drawn on a scale of three miles to an inch; on which will be 

represented the length of each line, in miles, chains and 

links; the variation of the compas by which it is run; and also 

the water courses, lakes, prairies, samps, roads, and such 

other objects as may be shown on a map. 

[ 17 1 

OF MEASURING LINES. 

1. In all measurements, the level or horizontal length is to 

be taken, and not that which arises from measuring along the 

surface of the ground, where it happens to be uneven, rolling, 

or hilly. For this purpose, in ascending or descending hills, 

the chainmen must let down one end of the chain to the 

ground, and raise the other end to a level therewith, as nearly 

as may be; from the end of which a tally pin should be 

plumbed and let fall, to ascertain the spot for setting it. And 

where the surface of the ground is very steep, it may be found 

necessary to shorten the chain to one half its length, or even 

less, so as to obtain the true horizontal measure. 

2. Though your lines be measured by a chain of two poles 

or perches in length, you are notwithstanding, to keep your 

reckoning in chains of four perches of one hundred links; and 

all your entries in your Field Book, and all your calculations, 

plans, &c., must be made accordingly in four-pole chains, and 

decimal parts (or hundreths) thereof. 

3. In measuring lines, every five chains are called a “tally,” because at that distance the last of the ten tally pins with 

which the forward chainman set out, has been set. He then 

cries “tally,” which cry is repeated by the other chainman, 

and each registers the distance, by slipping a thimble, on a 

belt worn for that purpose, or by some other convenient 

method: The back chainman then comes up, and having 

counted, in the presence of his fellow, the tally pins which he 

has taken up, so that both may be assure that none of the pins 

have been lost, takes the forward end of the chain, and proceeds to set them. Thus the chainmen alternately change 

places, each setting the pins that he has taken up, so that one 

is forward in all the odd and the other in all the even tallies, 

which contributes to the accuracy of the measurement, facilitates the recollection of the distances to notable objects on the 

line, and renders a mis-tally almost impossible 

364 
4. You are to pay the strictest attention to the frequent 

examination and correction of your surveying chain by the 

standard measure taken with you. The greatest attention 

must likewise be observed in obtaining, and entering in your 

Field Book, the exact measure on the lines, to every object 

which is noted therein. These measurements are very frequently found to be important, after many years, both in 

tracing the lines and in identifying the corners. 

5. The principal source of error in surveying is in the 

measurement by the chain. And as the interest of the public 

service, the rights of purchasers of the public lands, as well as 

your own standing as a surveyor, are at stake, it is enjoined 

on you, in selecting your Chain-carriers, to have strict regard 

to their character and fitness for the trust; and to employ 

those only, in whose moral integrity, capacity, and faithfulness, you can repose the most implicit confidence. You are 

required to attend vigilantly to the manner in which your 

chainmen perform their duty, and to cause it to be faithfully 

and correctly executed; to see, especially, that they carry the 

chain horizontally on hilly ground; and that all the lines 

which you may run, be not only correctly measured by them, 

but the length thereof truly reported to you, for immediate 

entry in the Field Book. 

6. In measuring across streams of water, you are to give 

the width directly across the channels thereof. The distances 

to the posts which you shall establish on the banks of rivers, 

lakes, or bayous which are to be meandered, are to be taken 

with great accuracy. 

OF ESTABLISHING AND MARKING CORNERS. 

1. The corners of townships, sections quarter sections, and 

fractions are to be established and marked in the following 

manner:- 

2. On the exterior township lines, corner posts must be 

erected at the distance of every mile and half mile from the 

township corner. The mile posts are for the 

[ 19 1 

corners of sections, and the half mile posts for the corners of 

quarter sections. These posts are always to be made of the 

most durable wood that can be had, and should be very 

securely set or driven into the ground and the sides of the 

posts are to be neatly squared off at the top-the angles of the 

square to be set in the direction of the cardinal points of the 

compass. All mile posts, on the township lines, must have as 

many notches cut on them, on one of the angles thereof, as 

they are miles distant from the township corner where the 

line commenced. But the township corner posts shall be 

notched with six notches on each of the four angles of the 

squared part. The mile posts on the section lines shall be 

notched, on the south and east angles of the square, respectively, with as many notches as those posts are miles distant 

from the south and east boundaries of the township. Wherever a tree may be so situated as to supply the place of a 

corner post, it is to be blazed on the four sides facing the 

sections to which it is the corner, and will be notched as the 

corner posts are, and at least one bearing tree must be taken, 

in addition thereto, and marked in the usual manner. 

3. At all posts thus established for meander section or 

township corners, there shall be cut with a marking iron, on a 

bearing tree or some other tree, within each section, and as 

near as may be to the corner thereof, the number of such 

section; and over it the letter T, with the number of the 

township, and annexed thereto, the letter N or S as the 

township may be north or south of the base line; and above 

this, the letter R, with the number of the range, and annexed 

thereto, the letter E or W, as the range may lay east or west of 

the principal meridian; thus: 

R 15 W 

T 53 N 

36 

4. The letters and numbers thus marked must be neatly 

and very distinctly cut into the wood of such 

[ 20 1 

tree with a good marking tool, the bark thereof having been 

first hewn or peeled off from a spot on the side facing the 

corner, large enough for that purpose, unless the tree be a 

beach, in which case its bark, if smooth, may remain on. 

5. But at the quarter-section corners there are no numbers 

to be made; the post is to be flattened on two opposite sides, 

and thus marked: “1-4 S,” to indicate that it is a quarter 

section post; and the nearest adjoining tree on each side of the 

sectional line, must be similarly marked. 

6. The place of all corner posts, of whatever description, 

which may be established, are to be perpetuated in the following manner, viz: from each post the courses shall be taken, 

and the distances measured, to two or more adjacent trees, in 

opposite directions as nearly as may be; which trees are 

called “Bearing trees,” and shall be blazed near the ground, 

with a large blaze facing towards the post, and have one notch 

neatly and plainly made with an ax, square across, and a 

little below the middle of the blaze. On each bearing tree the 

letters B T to denote the fact of its being a bearing tree, or, in 

case of re-surveys, the letters N B T to denote the act of its 

being a new bearing tree, must be distinctly cut into the 

wood, in the blaze, a little above the notch. At all township 

corners, and at all section corners on range, or township lines, 

four bearing trees are to be marked in this manner, one 

within each of the adjoining sections. 

7. Wherever the section or township lines intersect lakes, 

streams of water, or islands, which are to be meandered, posts 

are likewise to be established on the margin or banks thereof, 

at the points where the lines intersect or leave them. These 

posts are to be flattened on the two sides, co-inciding with the 

lines on which they are set; and on each of these sides is to be 

marked, the number of the section which it faces. 

8. Wherever bearing trees cannot be had, quadran- 

[ 21 1 

gular mounds of earth or stone are to be raised around the 

corner posts, the four angles of which must coincide with the 

cardinal points of the compass. 

9. Mounds at township corners are to have a base of five 

feet, and a top of two feet in diameter, and a height of three 

feet. At section, quarter section, and meander corners, they 

365 
are to have a base of four feet, a top of one and a half feet, and 

a height of two and a half feet. 

10. When mounds are made of earth, the place from which 

it is taken is called the “Pit,” the centre of which must in all 

cases, where practicable, be made at a uniform distance, and 

in a uniform direction from the centre of the mound, viz: At 

township corners there are to be two pits, one ten links due 

north, and the other ten links due south; at section corners, 

one pit, eight links due south; at quarter section corners, one 

pit eight links due east; and at meander corners, one pit 

directly on the line, eight links farther from the water than 

the mound. Whenever the pits are not made as here directed, 

the course and distance to each must be given in your field 

book. The mounds are to be neatly covered with sod, placed 

grass side up, so that the grass may be kept alive, in all cases 

where sod can be found. 

11. The posts established in mounds must be squared, and 

show above the top of the mound about ten or twelve inches, 

and, on each side of the square, must be marked the number 

of the section towards which it faces, and above this, on two 

opposite sides, at all section corners on township and range 

lines, there must be marked the appropriate letters and numbers to indicate the township and range. 

12. When a section or quarter section happens at a point 

for establishing a meander corner, the posts and trees are to 

be marked with the appropriate letters and numbers for such 

section or quarter section corner. 

13. Whenever the proper place for establishing a corner is 

inaccessible, unless it be in a river or body of water which is to 

be meandered, you are to establish a 

[ 22 1 

witness corner, as near thereto as practicable, and either due 

north, south, east, or west of it. Such corner is to be constructed in all respects like the one for which it stands as a 

witness, with the addition of the letters W and C and the 

number of links from the true corner, immediately over the 

usual marks. 

OF SUBDIVIDING TOWNSHIPS. 

1. Each Township is laid off and surveyed into thirty-six 

sections of one mile square, by lines running due north and 

south, corssed by others running due east and west. The 

sections are known and designated by progressive numbers, 

beginning at the north-east corner of the township, and 

numbering westward and eastward, alternately, as shown in 

the following diagram: 

- 

1 

12 

13 

- 

24 

25 

- 

2. Each side of a section must be made one mile in measure 

by the chain. Quarter section corners are to be established at 

every half mile, except in closing a section, when the closing 

line varies from eighty chains or one mile; in which case you 

are to place in closing a section, when the closing the quarter 

section corner equidistant, or at the average distance from 

the corners of the section. But in running out the last section 

lines, to the north and west boundaries of the township, the 

quarter section corners are to be established at the distance of 

forty chains from the last section corner, and the excess or 

deficiency of measure (if any) carried out into the last half 

mile, and east upon the north and west sides of the township, 

as required by law. 

3. You will begin on the east boundary of the township, at 

the corner of sections 13 and 24, and run and measure a 

random line west, or parallel to the south boundary, to the 

west boundary of the township, and note your intersection, 

whether at, or north, or south of the corner of sections 18 and 

19, and if not at that corner, how far from it. On this random 

line you will 

[ 23 1 

set temporary section and quarter section posts; and also set 

stakes, or make some other marks, at all the even tallies, or 

outs, between those posts. From the corner of sections 18 and 

19, on the west boundary, you will then return on the true 

line, straight towards the corner where you commenced the 

random, blazing and marking that line, and verifying its 

course by means of off-sets from the posts and stakes set, or 

other marks made, on the random line, and mark and establish the proper section and quarter section corners thereon. 

4. From the corner of sections 13, 14, 23 and 24, run and 

measure a random line south, or parallel to the east boundary, to the south boundary of the township, and note the 

intersections thereof, whether at, east or west of the corner of 

sections 35 and 36, and if not at that corner, how far from it. 

On this random line, as it is run, you will set temporary 

section and quarter section posts, and make other marks for 

the even tallies, or outs, as directed on the random line 

through the middle of the township. From the corner of sections 35 and 36, on the south boundary, you will return on the 

true or direct line, blazing and marking that line, and establishing the quarter section and section corners thereon, at 

their average distances, or proportionate parts of the whole 

distance, to the corner of sections 13, 14, 23 and 24, on the 

middle line. 

You will also run and measure a random line east from the 

corner of sections 25, 26, 35 and 36, to the east boundary of 

the township, and note its intersection, whether at, or north, 

or south of the section corner, and how far from it, and correct, 

mark and establish this line back to the corner from which 

you set out, in the manner before directed for the correction of 

random lines, establishing the quarter section corner thereon equidistant between the section corners. Proceed in like 

manner with each east and west section line, as you progress 

north, until you close at the corner of sections 13,14,23 and 

24. 

366 
5. From this corner, run and measure a random line north, 

or parallel to the east boundary, to the north boundary of the 

township, and note its intersection, whether at, or east, or 

west of the corner of sections 35 and 36 in the township north, 

excepting where you close on a correction line, in which case 

you will note the distance east or west to the nearest section 

or quarter section corner, and establish a corner thereon, for 

sections 1 and 2, one mile west of the north-east corner of the 

township, according to the measure of the correction line. In 

running this random line, posts must be set for temporary 

section and quarter section corners, and stakes or some other 

marks must be left to indicate the places of all the even 

tallies, or outs, as before directed in similar cases. From the 

corner of sections 1 and 2, return on the true line, in the 

direction of the place of beginning the random, to the corner 

of sections 1,2,11 and 12, blazing and marking the same as 

before directed for true lines, and establishing the quarter 

section corner so as to leave the excess or deficiency of the 

whole measure in the half mile next to the north boundary of 

the township. From the corner of sections 1,2,11 and 12, run 

and measure a random line east for its corresponding corner 

on the east boundary. Note its intersection, and correct back, 

and establish the quarter section corner on the true line at 

equal distances between the section corners, blazing and 

marking the corrected line as before directed. In like manner 

proceed to run, measure, mark and establish all the subdivision lines on this part of the eastern tier of sections, until you 

close at the corner of sections 13, 14, 23 and 24. 

6. Proceed in the same manner with each successive tier of 

sections, to the last, changing the order only so far as necessary, when interrupted by lakes or other interferences. From 

the section corners on the east side of the last tier, run 

random lines west for their corresponding corners on the west 

boundary of the township, note your intersections, correct 

back from those corners, as 

[ 25 1 

directed in other cases, before mentioned, and establish the 

quarter section corners on the corrected lines at the distance 

of forty chains from the section corners east of them, so that 

the excess or deficiency of measure may be thrown into the 

half mile next to the west boundary, as required by law. 

7. Bearing trees are to be taken, and the proper marks and 

numbers made, for and within the sections between which 

the lines are run out to the north and west boundaries of the 

township, in all cases where such bearing trees have not been 

taken, and such marks made, for the section corners on those 

boundaries at which those lines close. 

8. The plan here laid down is intended to illustrate the 

principles on which townships must be subdivided so that the 

section lines may all run parallel either to the east or south 

boundaries thereof, and that each section may contain 640 

acres, as nearly as practicable. To effect these objects, it is 

indispensably necessary that for every section line, unless it 

be irregular or fractional, there should first be run a random 

or trial line, which must afterward be corrected, where necessary, and run, marked, and established, in its proper place, as 

the corrected or true line. This must always be done according to some regular order, which, when once begun, must, as 

far as practicable, be continued throughout the township. 

As a general rule, the order above prescribed is believed to 

be the best and most convenient that can be adopted; but if 

you find any other more convenient, and by which the surveys can be made with equal or greater accuracy, you are at 

liberty to adopt it, provided you give a clear and distinct 

statement, at the end of your field notes in each book, showing what that order is. A departure from theprinciples above 

laid down, will not, however, under any circumstances, be 

permitted. 

9. To enable you to have all your random lines correctly 

run by the sun, as far as practicable, independ- 

[ 26 1 

ently of the use of the magnetic needle, you are allowed to 

employ, by the month, an assistant surveyor, who is well 

skilled in the use of the solar compass, to run and measure 

such lines, and take the field notes thereof, under your direction, in accordance with the above instructions. The field 

notes of such assistant must, in all cases, be taken in separate 

books, and be sworn to and subscribed by him, before some 

person authorized to administer oaths, and returned by you 

to this office. 

10. The true lengths of all north and south, as well as of all 

east and west section lines, must be given according to your 

measure, whether they agree with the lengths of the same 

lines as ascertained by the compass and the measure of the 

township lines, or not. 

11. You are referred, here, to the accompanying specimen 

of the Field Notes of a township, in which the whole process of 

the subdivision is illustrated at large by example. 

12. The foregoing mode of subdividing townships into sections, it will be perceived, is intended for, and can be fully 

applied only, to entire townships. In the subdivision of fractional townships, however, the order of the survey will be 

varied no farther than may be necessary to adapt it to the 

situation and boundaries of such fractional township. As a 

general rule, from which there will be few exceptions, it will 

be found best to make entire sections on the township lines 

bounding a fractional township, and making the work to 

close on the irregular boundaries thereof. 

13. An act of Congress of the 24th of May, 1824, authorizes 

a departure from the ordinary mode of surveying the public 

land on any river, lake, or bayou, whenever, in the opinion of 

the President of the United States, the public interest would 

be promoted thereby; so as to survey such lands in tracts of 

two acres in width, fronting on such river, lake, or bayou, and 

running back to the depth of forty acres. But as no general 

rules could be framed to govern all such surveys, 

[ 27 1 

this branch of the service is left to be provided for in Special 

Instructions, as cases thereof may occur. 

14. Should you find a manifest error in the measurement 

of any township line within, or bounding your district, (which 

will be readily detected by the closing of your lines thereon,) 

you are to correct such error, by re-measuring such township 

line, from where the error is found, to the north or west end 

367 
thereof. The section and quarter section corners thereon are 

to be removed to the proper distances, and there established; 

and the marks and numbers at the cancelled corners are to be 

cut out or effaced, and the distances at which you pass those 

corners must be noted by you. Of such re-measurement and 

corrections you are to take full and complete Field Notes, in a 

separate book, to be returned to the Surveyor General’s 

Office, with the Field Notes of your subdivisions. For such 

corrections, however, the Surveyor General is not authorized 

to make any compensation, unless the amount thereof can be 

obtained from the Deputy by whom the erroneous survey was 

made, or shall be allowed by the Commissioner ofthe General 

Land Office. 

OF MEANDERING RIVERS, &C. 

1. You will accurately meander, by course and distance, 

all navigable Rivers which may bound or pass through your 

district; all navigable bayous flowing from or into such rivers; all lakes and deep ponds, of the area of forty acres and 

upwards; and all islands suitable for cultivation. At all those 

points where the township or section lines intersect the 

banks of such rivers, bayous, lakes or islands, posts are to be 

established, as before directed. In meandering, you are to 

intersect all these posts, closing at each post the course and 

distance on which it is intersected. You will likewise notice 

all streams of water falling into the river, lake, or bayou, 

which you are surveying, with their width at their mouth; all 

springs, noting the size thereof, and whether 

pure or mineral water; the head and mouth of all bayous, all 

rapids, falls, or cascades; all islands and bars with intersections to their upper and lower points, to establish their exact 

situation. This must be done with the greatest accuracy, in 

relation to all islands which you shall meander, so as to 

determine and show their precise location and bearing on the 

maps of the surveys, and particular care must be taken to 

pass no object in any degree worthy of note, nor any change in 

the topography along the waters that you meander, without 

giving a particular description thereof in its proper place in 

your meander notes. 

2. Should any lake or pond which you shall meander, be 

situated within any one section, so as not to be intersected by 

any of the lines thereof, you will run and measure a line very 

exactly, but without marking, from one of the corners, or one 

of the half mile posts, or other given point on one of the lines 

of said section, to the point on the margin of the lake at which 

you shall commence the meanders thereof. The true location 

of such lakes is necessary, in order to calculate the contents of 

the subdivisions of such sections. 

3. The width of streams of water or bayous binding on, or 

forming a boundary of your surveys, must be ascertained at 

every intersection of your lines therewith, by trigonometrical 

process, or otherwise; which can generally be most conveniently done in taking the meanders. This is necessary for the 

correct exhibition of such streams on the township plats. 

4. Except in cases where navigable streams constitute the 

boundary line between two series or systems of surveys commencing from different standard lines, such streams are not 

to interrupt the regular survey of the townships through 

which they pass, the lines of which shall be continued across 

those streams to the complete measure. And where the surveys have been closed on a stream, as a boundary of a cession, 

or from other cause, and are afterward to be continued across 

such 

[ 29 1 

stream, the surveyor continuing the surveys on the opposite 

side, must extend the lines across the stream, so as to make 

the sections thereon complete. 

5. To establish a uniform and simple mode of designating 

and distinguishing the two sides of navigable streams, the 

terms “Right bank,” or “Left bank,” will be used, in all cases, 

thus:-suppose yourself standing at the head of the river, 

looking down stream; then that bank of the stream on your 

right hand is to be called and referred to in your field notes as 

the “right bank,” and that on your left hand as the “left 

bank.” And these terms, thus applied to navigable rivers, are 

to be used in all cases, whether in running lines or taking 

meanders. 

6. Great care must be taken to describe clearly the post at 

which any meanders of a river, bayou, lake, or island commence; and also all the posts, on township or section lines, 

which may be intersected in the progress of the meanders. 

7. The Field Notes of meanders are to be written at the end 

of the subdivisions. The courses are to be inserted in a column 

on the left of the page; the distances, in chains and links, in a 

column next to this, and the notes or remarks on the right, 

opposite the proper course and distance. The column of distances must be added up at the foot thereof, on each page. 

8. Errors in meandering are of very frequent occurrence, 

arising principally, it is believed, from bad chaining. Your 

special attention is called to the manner in which this part of 

the work is executed; and all possible accuracy is enjoined, 

both in the courses and measurement, and the entry thereof 

in your field book. 

9. Where the meanders of small lakes cannot be accurately run and measured by course and distance, in the usual 

manner, by reason of obstacles along their shores or banks, a 

well constructed series of triangles may be made across the 

lake, so connected that all the angles of the lake coast can be 

accurately platted. A 

[ 30 1 

map of these triangulations must be made on a scale of 8 

inches to the mile, and their reduction into the meanders of 

the lake coast must be carefully entered in your field book. 

10. Streams to be meandered, having shores of like character, may have their courses taken with a solar compass, 

and measured by the angles made between two parallel lines 

so placed in the principal focus of a suitable telescope, 

attached to the sights of the compass, as to form an angle in 

the field view of at least 50 minutes, or 5-6 of a degree. For 

this purpose, the telescope is made to bear upon a rod, divided 

into feet, inches and tenths, and furnished with two targets, 

the upper one stationary, and the other moveable on the rod, 

to suit the angle seen through the telescope at various distances. The distance between the two targets on the rod being 

368 
then the measure of the angle formed by the two lines in the 

focus of the telescope, represents the distance between the 

compass and the rod, which may be taken out, in chains and 

links, from a table previously prepared for that purpose. 

11. By observing, accurately, the number of feet, inches, 

and tenths, which the targets are apart, when they measure 

the angle formed by the parallel lines in the telescope, at a 

given distance, of from three to five chains from the compass, 

you will have data from which such a table may be readily 

constructed for all other distances at which the telescope will 

enable you to observe a difference in the distance between the 

targets of one-tenth of an inch. 

12. Wherever meanders are made by this method, the fact 

that they are so made should be distinctly shown in the 

heading of your field notes, and the precise angle between the 

parallel lines in the focus of your telescope, must also be 

stated. The stations at which observations are made, must be 

designated by progressive numbers, and all the observations 

made at each station must be set down with great care and 

accuracy. Where a distance 

[ 31 1 

is noted, as measured by the telescope, the number of tenths 

of an inch on the rod, which corresponds to that distance, 

must also be carefully given, in order to facilitate the detection of errors, wherever they may occur. 

13. Having taken the width of the river so frequently, and 

made such observations, on both sides of it, as to enable you to 

protract, accurately, its shores, you will make a plat thereof 

on a scale of eight inches to a mile, and from it enter the 

meanders of each shore in your field book in the usual manner, immediately after the field notes of your telescopic 

observations for each township. All such plats, whether of 

rivers or lakes, must be returned with your field notes to this 

office. 

OF PRIVATE CLAIMS, 

INDIAN RESERVATIONS, &C. 

1. In surveying Private Claims, Indian Reservations, or 

other tracts not conforming to section lines, the location 

thereof must be particularly described, and the place of beginning clearly stated in your Field Notes; also the name of 

the claimant in whose right the survey is made, with the 

number by which it is known; and if a reservation, the 

quantity contained in it, and the name of the reservee. The 

Field Note of all the lines of each tract must be complete, and 

are to be entered in the Field Book separately from the notes 

of other tracts. The Field Notes of Private Claims and Indian 

Reservations, must be entered in separate books. 

2. Wherever a section or township line intersects a line of a 

private claim or Indian reservation, there a corner must be 

established. The particular line intersected, with its course, 

and the name of the claimant or reservee with the number or 

other designation by which it is known, must be noted. And 

from such intersection, the private claim or reserve line must 

be carefully measured, each way along said line, to the end 

thereof, unless it should be intersected by another section or 

township line before the end be reached. 

3. The course of every line of the survey of a private 

claim or Indian reservation, with the length thereof, and the 

variation of the compass, and date of the survey, are to be 

inserted in the Field Notes, which are to be certified and 

signed by you. 

OF FIELD NOTES. 

1. The field books are all to be made of one uniform size, 

viz: foolscap octavo; or a sheet of common sized cap paper, 

folded into sixteen pages. The paper must be of good quality, 

and the books covered with morocco or other leather, and 

neatly stitched and trimmed and contain space enough for all 

the field notes of a township. The pages are to be ruled with 

red ink and feint lined. 

2. The field notes of the subdivision of every township, 

whether fractional or not, are to be written in a separate 

book. 

3. No one page, either of the notes of township lines, or of 

subdivisions, is to embrace the field notes of more than one 

section line. 

4. The description of the surface, soil, minerals, timber 

and undergrowth on each section line, is to follow the notes of 

the survey of such line, and not to be mixed up with them. 

5. The language of your field notes must be so concise and 

clear, and the hand in which they are written so plain and 

legible, that no doubt can exist as to your figures, letters, 

words or meaning. If otherwise, they must be accompanied 

with true and fair copies. 

6. The only abbreviations allowable in your field notes, 

are--“in. diam.,” for “inches, diameter,” and the capital letters N. S. E. and W., for North, South, East and West. These 

latter words, however, must always be written in full, except 

when combined to express some course varying from the 

cardinal points. 

7. The description of each mile must be independent, and 

not refer to a preceding description. 

8. The field notes must be taken, in all cases, precise- 

[ 33 1 

ly in the order in which the work is done on the ground, and 

must show truly the direction in which each line is run and 

measured. 

9. The date of each day’s work must follow immediately 

after the notes thereof. 

10. All your writing, of every description, whether of field 

notes, memorandums, or arithmetical or trigonometrical calculations, relating to surveys that you may execute, must be 

taken, either in your regular field books, or in memorandum 

or miscellaneous books, of the same size and shape, which, 

when called for, must be returned to this office. It is not, 

therefore, allowable to make any notes, memorandums, or 

calculations, on loose pieces of paper. 

11. On the first page of your field book of each township, 

insert in a plain and neat manner, by way of title, the number 

of the township and range, with the state in which it lies, and 

by whom surveyed, with the date of the commencement, and 

the date of completing the subdivision of the same. 

12. Between the second and third pages, insert, without 

369 
fastening there, a diagram neatly folded, drawn on tough 

bank note paper, on a scale of half a mile to an inch. On this 

diagram you will accurately delineate, as near as may be 

practicable by occular observation on the spot, as you progress with the work, the crossing and courses of all streams of 

water, the intersection, situation, and boundaries of all 

prairies, marshes, swamps, lakes, hills, and all other things 

mentioned in your field notes, the situation of which can be 

conveniently shown on1 the diagram. You will also insert 

thereon, in small figures, the length of all the section lines of 

the township. 

13. On the fourth page, make an index diagram, representing all the sections in the township, on a scale of two 

miles to an inch, on each line of which, after the survey 

thereof is completed, you will write or print, in a neat and 

distinct manner, the number of the page of the book where 

the notes of that line may be found, 

[ 34 1 

and, where the notes of the random line and of the corrected 

line are on different pages, the former must be referred to in 

red, and the latter in black ink.” 

14. Leaving, after this, sufficient room for the oaths of 

your chain-men and markers, if necessary, at the head of 

each subsequent page, on which the field notes are written, 

you will insert a running title, designating the number of the 

township and range, which is to be separated from the field 

notes by a double red line. 

15. The Field Notes of the surveys furnish primarily the 

materials from which the plats and calculations of the public 

lands are made; and are the source from whence the description and evidence of the location and boundaries of those 

surveys are drawn and perpetuated. It is evidently, then, of 

the utmost importance that the Field Notes should be, at 

once, an accurate, clear, and minute record of every thing 

that is done by the Surveyor and his assistants, (in accordance with these Instructions,) in relation to running, 

measuring and marking lines, establishing corners, &c., as 

well as a full and complete topographical description of the 

country surveyed, as it regards every thing which may afford 

useful information, or gratify public curiosity. 

16. For this purpose you are to enter in your Field Book, in 

a neat and distinct manner, notes or minutes of the following 

objects, viz: 

17. The description, course and length of every line which 

you may run, beginning with the variation of the needle, if 

known to you, at the corner where you start. 

18. The name, and estimated diameters of all corner and 

bearing trees, and the courses and distances of the bearing 

trees from their respective corners. 

19. The name of the material of which you construct 

mounds, with the course and distance to the pits. 

20. The names and estimated diameters of at least one or 

two of those trees which fall in your lines, called station or 

line trees, with their exact distances on the line, between 

every two corners. They should be so 

[ 35 1 

taken as to divide the line as nearly into equal parts as 

practicable. 

21. The face of the country, whether level, rolling, broken, 

hilly, or mountainous. 

22. The quality and character of the soil, and whether 

first, second, or third rate. 

23. The several kinds of timber and undergrowth with 

which the land may be covered, naming each kind of timber 

in the order in which it is most prevalent; and in prairie, the 

kind of grass or other herbage which it produces. 

24. All rivers, creeks and smaller streams of water, with 

their right-angled width, and the course they run where the 

lines of your survey intersect or cross them, and whether the 

current be rapid, sluggish, or otherwise. 

25. All rapids, cataracts, cascades, or falls of water, and 

the estimated amount of their fall, in feet. 

26. All springs of water, and whether fresh and pure, or 

mineral; showing also on which side of the line situated, and 

the distance therefrom, and the course of the stream flowing 

from them. 

27. All lakes and ponds, with the description of banks 

surrounding them, and whether the water be deep or shallow, 

pure or stagnant. 

28. The meanders of all lakes, navigable rivers, bayous, 

islands, and streams forming boundaries. 

29. All prairies, swamps, and marshes. 

30. All coal banks or beds, and peat or turf grounds. 

31. All precipices, caves, stone quarries, and ledges of 

rock, with the kind of stone found in them. 

32. All towns and villages, Indian towns and wigwams, 

houses or cabins, fields or other improvements, sugar-tree 

groves, and sugar camps. 

33. All minerals and ores, with particular descriptions of 

the same, as to their quality and extent. 

34. All diggings for minerals, smelting or other furnaces, 

forges and factories. 

[ 36 1 

35. The exact situation, and description of all mines, salt 

springs, salt licks and mill-seats, which you may discover, or 

that may come to your knowledge. 

36. All fossils, petrifactions, and other natural curiosities, 

with descriptions thereof. 

37. All travelled roads, and “trails,” with their courses, 

and denoting the places from, or to which they lead. 

38. The tracks of tornadoes or hurricanes, commonly 

called “windfall,” or “fallen timber,” shewing the direction of 

the wind, as indicated by the fallen trees. 

39. All ancient works of art, as mounds, fortifications, 

embankments, ditches, or other similar objects. 

40. All offsets, or methods of whatever kind, by which you 

shall obtain the measurement or distance on any line which 

cannot be actually measured 

41. At what distance you enter and at what distance you 

370 
leave every lake, bay, pond, creek, bottom, windfall, grove, 

prairie, ravine, marsh and swamp, with the course of the 

same at both points of intersection; also the distances at 

which you begin to ascend, arrive at the top, begin to descend, 

and reach the foot of all hills and ridges, with their course, 

and estimated heights in feet above the level land of the 

surrounding country, or above the bottom lands, ravines, or 

waters on which they are situated. 

42. The variation of the needle must be noted at, and on 

each side of all places on the lines where there is any material 

change of variation, and the distances to the points where the 

observations are made must be given. 

43. The precise course and distance of all witness corners 

from the true corners which they represent, must be stated in 

the descriptions of those corners. 

44. In addition to the foregoing items, you will insert notes 

of any others as the occasions therefor may occur. The field 

notes are to be written out in your book, on the spot, as you 

proceed with the work. Noth- 

[ 37 1 

ing in your notes must be left to be supplied by memory. 

45. Rivers, creeks, and smaller streams, lakes, swamps, 

prairies, hills, mountains, or other natural objects, are to be 

distinguished in your field notes by their received names 

only, where names have heretofore been given. In any case 

you are not to give original names. 

46. Beside the ordinary Field Notes taken on the lines, you 

will add at the end of your field book, such further description 

or information as you may be able to give, concerning any 

thing in the township, worthy of particular notice, or which 

you may judge necessary or useful to be known. And you will 

add also, a general notice or description of the township, in 

the aggregate, as it regards the face of the country, soil 

timber, &c. 

47. In your field book, the courses and distances must be 

placed in a column on the left hand side of the page, and your 

notes and remarks on the right. The original field notes must 

in all cases, be returned into the office of the Surveyor General. 

48. Following the general description of each township, at 

the end of the field notes in each book, you will give a list of 

the names and residences of all the persons who may have 

assisted either in running measuring or marking, the lines 

and corners therein described, stating the capacity in which 

each acted; and below such list, a certificate must be written 

affirming its correctness, and that the township has been in 

every respect well and faithfully surveyed, according to the 

instructions of the Surveyor General, which certificate must 

be subscribed and sworn to by the persons named in the list, 

either before yourself, as a Deputy Surveyor, or before some 

other person duly authorized to administer oaths. The following forms, as far as applicable, may be used for this purpose: 

List of names and residences of persons who assisted in 

running, measuring, or marking the lines and corners 

[ 38 1 

described in the foregoing field notes of township - N. 

of Range , in the State of -, viz: 

- 

A-B , a resident of - in the county of 

in the State of - and C- D- of 

-- in the county of - and State of - performed the duty of chainmen and marked the corners; 

E- F- of - in the county of - and 

State of - and G- H- of - in the 

county of - and State of - performed the duty of 

- 

axe-men; and I- L of - in the county of 

and State of - performed the duty of compassman, under the personal supervision and direction of 

L- M- Deputy Surveyor, in running most of the 

lines, above referred to. 

We hereby certify that we assisted L. M., Deputy Surveyor, 

in subdividing township - of Range - in the 

State of - that our names and residences, and the 

duties that we respectively performed, are correctly set forth 

in the above statement, and that said township has been in 

every respect well and faithfully surveyed, according to the 

instructions of the Surveyor General. 

A - B - Chainman, 

C D - Chainman, 

E F - Axe-man, 

G H - Axe-man, 

I K - Compass-man. 

Subscribed and sworn to by the above named persons, 

before me at - this - day of- 18-. 

0- P-, Justice of the Peace (or other officer 

authorized to administer oaths) of the county of - and 

State of - 

49. In every field book, after the certificate above mentiohed, an affidavit of the following form is to be written, and 

sworn to and subscribed by you before some person duly 

authorized to administer oaths, viz. 

I, L- M- of - in the county of - 

and State of -, a Deputy Surveyor, do solemnly swear 

[ 39 1 

(or affirm) that, in pursuance of a contract with CN- Surveyor General of the United States, for Ohio, 

Indiana, and Michigan, bearing date - day of - 

18-. and in strict conformity to the laws of the United 

States, and the instructions of the said Surveyor General, I 

have faithfully and correctly surveyed township number 

- of range no of the principal meridian, in the 

State of - and I do further solemnly swear (or affirm) 

that the foregoing are the true and original field notes of the 

said survey, executed as aforesaid. 

, Deputy Surveyor. Subscribed by said 

L-M , Deputy Surveyor, and sworn to before 

me at - this day of - 18-. 

0- P-, Justice of the Peace, (or other officer 

authorized to administer oaths) of - in the county of 

- and State of 

50. Should you employ an assistant to run random lines, 

an affidavit, of the following form, must be written, subscribed and sworn to by him after his field notes in each book, 

viz: 

, of - in the county of - 

and State of - do solemnly swear, that the foregoing 

are the true and original field notes of the random lines 

L-M 

1,LS 

371 
therein described, in township ___ of range - in 

the State of and that the said lines were carefully and 

accurately run by me with a good solar compass, independently of the needle, except as mentioned in said notes, and 

that they were measured in my presence under the direction 

and at the expense of L M- Deputy Surveyor, 

while I was employed by him and paid by the month. 

LS-, 

Random line Surveyor. 

Subscribed by said L S-random line surveyor, and sworn to before me this - day of - 

18-. 

0-P , Justice of the Peace, 

stitute suit upon the bond of such deputy; and the institution 

of such suit shall act as a lien upon any property owned or 

held by such deputy, or his sureties, at the time such suit was 

instituted.” The provisions of the above section will, in all 

cases, and in every particular, be rigidly enforced. 

Surveyor General 

SUBDIVISION 

OF 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West. 

[ 40 1 

OF THE 

(or other officer authorized to administer oaths) of - in 

the county of 

51. A printed specimen of the Field Notes of the subdivision of a township into sections, accompanies these Instructions; which will serve to illustrate both the order and 

method of performing the surveys, and the most approved 

form of keeping the Field Notes; for which purpose, it is to be 

regarded as a part of these General Instructions. Where the 

notes of the true line follow immediately after those of the 

random, the provisions of section 3, under the head of field 

notes, must be carefully adhered to. When they do not so 

follow, a page may embrace the notes of more than one mile, 

provided they do not extend to the next page. 

52. Any material departure from these Instructions, or 

negligence in the observance thereof, will be considered as a 

violation of the conditions of your contract, and a forfeiture of 

all claim for payment. And loose, inaccurate, precipitate, or 

defective work, either as it respects the surveys in the field, or 

the notes and returns thereof on paper, will not be admitted. 

53. That you may better understand the responsibility 

under which you are acting, your attention is particularly 

called to the provisions of the third section of an act of Congress, approved August 8th, 1846, entitled “an act to equalize 

the compensation of the Surveyor General of the public lands 

of the United States, and for other purposes,” which is as 

follows, viz: 

“SEC. 3. That the Surveyor General of the public lands of 

the United States, in addition to the oaths now authorized by 

law to be administered to deputies on their appointment to 

office, shall require each of their deputies, on the return of his 

surveys, to take and subscribe an oath or affirmation that the 

surveys have been faithfully and correctly executed, according to law and the instructions of the Surveyor General; and, 

on satisfactory evidence being presented to any court of competent jurisdiction that such surveys, or any part thereof, 

and State of -. 

[ 41 1 

had not been thus executed, the deputy making such false 

oath or affirmation shall be deemed guilty of perjury, and 

shall suffer all the pains and penalties attached to that offence; and the district attorney of the United States for the 

time being, in whose district any such false, erroneous, or 

fraudulent surveys shall have been executed, shall, upon the 

application of the proper Surveyor General, immediately inPRINCIPAL 

MERIDIAN OF MICHIGAN, 

BY A. B., DEPUTY SURVEYOR. 

Begun, April lst, 1850. 

Finished, May lst, 1850. 

[ 47 1 

Township 53, North Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. ~ 

Chs. 

West, 

34 

40 

80 

Lks. 

50 

00 

00 

Beginning at post on East boundary between sections 13 

Random between sections 13 and 24. 

Stream 15 links, course N.W. 

Set temporary post. 

Set temporary post corner of sections 13,14,23 and 24. 

Land rolling; first rate clay soil. Timber, Sugar, Beech, 

and 24. Thence 

Variation 5” 00’ East. 

Variation 5” 50’ East. 

Lynn, Elm, Hickory, Black Walnut, &c. 

No undergrowth. 

West, 

20 

40 

80 

00 

00 

00 

Random between sections 14 and 23. 

Indian trail from sugar camp in section 24 to Indian 

Set temporary post. 

Variation 5” 00’ East. 

Set temporary post corner of sections 14,15,22 and 23. 

Land gently rolling; second rate clay soil. Timber, Beech, 

Variation 5” 15’ East. 

village. Course N. W. and S.E. 

Sugar, Hickory, Ironwood, Elm, Lynn, &c. 

[ 48 1 

Townshiy 53, North Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. 

West, 

28 

35 

40 

80 

Lks. 

00 

00 

00 

00 

Random between sections 15 and22 

Intersect pond. Course North and South, mostly South 

Leavepond. C0urseN.E. andS.W. 

Set temporary post. 

Set temporary post, corner of sections 15,16,21 and 22. 

Variation 5” 00’ East. 

ofline. 

Variation 5” 10’ East. 

372 
+ West, 

Land gently rolling, and first rate. Timber, Beech and 

Sugar trees. 

Random between sections 16 and 21. 

Set temporary post. 

Set temporary post, corner of sections 16,17,20 and21. 

Land gently rolling, and second rate. Timber, Beech, 

Variation 5" 00' East. 

Variation 4" 55' East. 

Sugar, Hickory, Ironwood, Elm and Lynn. 

[ 49 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

West, 

13 50 

20 00 

40 00 

51 00 

60 50 

72 00 

74 00 

80 00 

Random between sections 17 and 20. 

Road, course N.E. and S.W. 

Intersect East boundary of Indian Reservation, and 

enter cultivated fields; house and saw mill about 

5 chains south on stream. 

Leavefields. CourseN. andS. 

Enterbottomland. C0urseN.W. and S.E. 

Stream, 40 links. Course N.W. 

Stream, 50 links. Course North. 

Ascend 20 feet from bottoms to White and Yellow Pine 

Set temporary post in Reserve. 

Land, first 5 chains rolling, second rate; remainder 

bottoms and Pine Plains. 

Variation 4" 50' East. 

Variation 4"50' East. 

Plains. Course North and South. 

[ 50 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

West, 

20 00 

40 00 

75 50 

N. 89"50'E 

10 50 

25 00 

35 50 

48 70 

55 50 

75 50 

Random between sections 18 and 19. 

Intersect West boundary of Indian Reservation. 

Set temporary post. 

Intersect West boundary 139 links North ofpost. 

Land level. Timber, White and Yellow Pine plains; 

Variation 4" 15' East. 

Variation 4" 00' East. 

Variation 4" 00' East. 

third rate sandy soil. 

Corrected between sections 18 and 19. 

White Pine, 20 in. diam. 

Yellow Pine, 13 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

White Pine 10 North, 19"East, 31 links. 

Yellow Pine 30 South 23" West, 45 links. 

White Pine 8 in. diam. 

Intersect West line ofIndian Reservation, and set post. 

Yellow Pine 10 North 50"East, 20 links. 

15 South, 25" West, 60 links. 

Measured South on West line of Indian Reservation, 40 

Corner of sections 17,18,19 and 20 in Reserve. 

Variation 4" 00' East. 

Ditto 

chains to S.W. corner. 

April lst, 1850. 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

N. 89" 50' E 

60 00 

Corrected between sections 17 and 20. 

Intersect East line of Indian Reservation, and set post in 

East side of improvements. 

68 00 

80 00 

N 89" 50' E 

8 00 

25 00 

40 00 

48 00 

64 00 

80 00 

Beech 25 North 18"East, 75 links. 

Birch 17 South 29" West, 43 links. 

White Oak 13 in. diam. 

Set post corner of sections 16,17,20 and 21. 

Black Oak 25 North 40"East, 29 links. 

Hickory 18 South, 29" West, 40 links. 

Corrected betweensections 16 and 21. 

Beech 12 in. diam. 

Black oak 15 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Hickory 14North, 50" East, 28 links. 

Beech 10 South, 28" West, 19links. 

White Oak 18 in. diam. 

Maple 14 in. diam. 

Set post corner ofsections 15,16,21 and 22. 

Elm 14 South, 25"East, 18 links. 

Birch 20 North, 20" West, 45 links. 

[ 52 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

N. 89" 50' E. 

15 00 

35 50 

40 00 

53 00 

80 00 

N. 89" 50' E. 

14 00 

30 00 

40 00 

50 00 

68 00 

80 00 

Corrected betweensections 15 and 22. 

Ironwood 18 in. diam. 

White Ash 13 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Ironwood 8 North, 25" West, 17 links. 

Black Ash 10 South, 18"East, 28 links. 

Black Oak 10 in. diam. 

Set post corner ofsections 14,15,22 and 23. 

Beech 20 North, 28" West, 60 links. 

Black Oak 15 South, 40" East, 80 links. 

Corrected between sections 14 and 23. 

Ironwood 1 in. diam. 

Beech 24 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Lynn 18 South, 2" West, 40 links. 

Elm 28 North, 40" East, 60 links. 

Black Walnut 25 in. diam 

Hickory 18 in. diam. 

Set post corner of sections 13,14,23 and 24. 

Black Walnut 18 North, 24" West 15 links. 

Elm 14 South, 45"East, 29 links. 

[ 53 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

N 89" 50' E. 

20 00 

23 00 

40 00 

68 00 

80 00 

South, 

8 50 

40 00 

80 00 

Corrected between sections 13 and 24. 

Hickory 15 in. diam. 

Elm40 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Sugar 25 North, 29" West, 48 links. 

Lynn 18 South, 18"East, 60 links. 

Beech 25 in. diam. 

Intersect East boundary at post. 

April 2d, 1850. 

~ 

Random between sections 23 and 24. 

Variation 5" 15' East. 

Indian trail from sugar camp inN.E. corner ofsection 24. 

Set temporary post. 

Set temporarypost corner of sections 23,24,25 and 26. 

Landrolling, first rate; Timber, Sugar, Beech, Lynn, 

Course N. W. 

Variation 5" 15' East. 

Elm, Hickory, Black Walnut, Ironwood, &c. 

373 
Set post corner of sections 23,24,25 and 26. 

Black Walnut 14 North, 5" East, 29 links. 

O4 I Ironwood 12 South, 29" West, 04 links 

80 

N. 5'W. 

13 50 

34 00 

40 02 

49 00 

62 50 

____ 

Random between sections 25 and 26. 

Variation 5" 50' East. 

Set temporary post. 

Variation 5" 45' East. 

Set temporary post corner of sections 25,26,35 and 36. 

Land gently rolling, second rate; Timber, Beech, Sugar, 

Lynn, White Ash, Maple, Ironwood, &c. 

Corrected between sections 25 and 26. 

Beech 18 in. diam. 

White Ash 14 in. diam. 

Set quarter sectionpost. 

Sugar 25 North, 18" East, 15 links. 

Beech 15 South, 25" West, 16links. 

White Ash 14 in. diam. 

Lynn20 in. diam. 

South, 

40 00 

80 00 [ 56 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Random between sections 24 and 25. 

Set temporary post. 

Intersect East boundary 12 links North of post. 

Land gently rolling, first rate; Timber, Beech, Sugar, 

Lynn, Elm, Hickory, Ironwood, &c. Undergrowth 

the same. 

Variation 5" 50' East. 

Variation 5" 50' East. 

April 4th, 1850. 

East, 

40 00 

80 04 

[ 54 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Lks. 

90 

00 

00 

00 

12 

50 

00 

02 

00 

04 

Chs. 

South, 

15 

40 

49 

71 

80 

N. 5'W. 

9 

24 

40 

70 

80 

Random between sections 35 and 36. 

Enter prairie. C0urseN.E. and S.W. 

Set temporary post. 

Leave prairie and enter grove. Course N.E. and S. W. 

Leave grove and enter prairie. Course East and West. 

Intersect South boundary 35 links West ofpost. 

Land gently rolling, second rate; Timber North of 

prairie, Beech, Maple, Oak, &c. Timber in grove 

principally Oak. Soil ofprairie dry, light 

colored, sandy loam. 

Variation 5" 30' East. 

Variation 5" 45' East. N. 89" 55' W. Corrected between sections 24 and 25. 

Sugar 15 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Hickory 18 North, 15" West, 07 links. 

Red Elm 14 South, 14" East, 04 links. 

Red Elm 18 in. diam. 

White Ash 15 in. diam. 

Section corner. 

Variation 5" 00' East. 

24 00 

40 02 

50 00 

70 00 

80 04 

N. 5'W. 

13 00 

29 00 

40 02 

Corrected between sections 35 and 36. 

Black Oak 10 in. diam. 

Black Oak 20 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post in prairie, and raised a mound of 

Beech 10 in. diam. 

Set post corner of sections 25,26,35 and 36. 

Beech 20 North, 40"East, 10 links. 

Maple 18 South, 25" West, 05 links. 

Variation 5" 00' East. 

earth and sod around it. 

April 3d, 1850. 

Corrected between sections 23 and 24. 

Lynn 30 in. diam. 

Hickory20 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Sugar 15 North, 40" West, 10 links. 

Maple loSouth, 10"East, Slinks. 

Elm 30 in. diam. 

Beech 18 in. diam. 

Corner ofsections 13,14,23 and 24. 

52 00 

67 00 

80 04 

[ 57 1 

55 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. ~ 

Chs. Lks. 

Chs. Lks. North, 

East, 

30 00 

40 00 

79 90 

Random between sections 13 and 14. 

Enter alder bottoms. Course East and West. 

Stream 30 links, course West. Beaver dam and pond 

Leave alder bottoms. Course East and West. 

Enter swale. Course East and West. 

Leave swale. Course East and West. 

Set temporary post corner of sections 11,12,13 and 14. 

Land gently rolling; second rate. Timber, Beech, Maple, 

Variation 5" 15' East. 

2 chains East. 

Hickory, Elm, Black Ash, &c. Undergrowth on 

upland, Spice bush; in bottoms, Alder. 

Random between sections 25 and 36. 

Enter prairie. Course N.E. and S.W. 

Set temporary post. 

Variation 5" 50' East. 

Intersect East boundary at post. 

Land first 30 chains gently rolling, second rate; Timber, 

Beech, Maple, Ash, Ironwood, &c. Remainder rolling 

prairie; soil good sandy loam, almost first rate. 

Variation 5" 30' East. 27 00 

31 00 

34 50 

55 00 

60 00 

80 00 

West, Corrected between sections 25 and 36. 

Set quarter section post in prairie; raised a mound of 

earth and sod. 

Beech20 in. diam. 

Section corner. 

Variation 5" 50' East. 

39 95 Random between sections 11 and 12. 

Descend 10 feet, and enter bottom land, Meadow. 

Intersect stream, 200 links. Course West. 

Ascend 10 feet from bottom, and enter burnt land. 

Set temporary post, corner of sections 1,2,11, and 12. 

North of bottoms, burnt land, third rate, sandy soil; 

bottoms dry, rich, first rate land; South of bottoms 

gently rolling, first rate; Timber Sugar, Beech, 

Lynn, Elm, Hickory, Black Walnut, &c. 

Undergrowth Sugar, and Ironwood. 

Variation 5" 10' East. 

Variaton 5" 00' East. 

Course East and West. 

North, 

63 20 

79 90 

32 00 

40 00 

54 25 

80 00 

374 
[ 58 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15, West Meridian Michigan. 

[ 60 1 

Township 35 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. 

North, 

28 

18 

40 

61 

79 

South, 

15 

39 

65 

79 

Lks. 

00 

50 

00 

25 

50 

00 

50 

00 

50 

Random between sections 1 and 2. 

Leave burnt land, and enter windfall. Course N. W. 

Stream, 40 links. Course West. 

Set temporary post. 

Leave windfall, in thicket. Course'N. W. and S. E. 

Intersect north boundary, at post. 

Land, Balsam Thicket, windfall, and burnt land, 

Variation, 5" 10' East. 

and S. E. 

Variation 5" 00' East. 

rolling and third rate. 

April 5th, 1850. 

Corrected between sections 1 and 2. 

Variation 5" 00' East. 

Black Oak 10, South 40" West, 15 links. 

Poplar 13, South 28"East, 8 links. 

Balam tree, 10 in. diam. in thicket. 

Set quarter section post, in windfall. 

Black Oak 20 North, 75"East 1.60 links. No other 

Black Oak, 15 in. diam. 

Set post Corner ofsections 1,2,11, and 12. 

Black Oak, 10 North50"East 28 links 

White Oak, 8 South, 48" West, 60 links. 

tree near. 

[ 59 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

East, 

39 00 

79 90 

West. 

20 00 

39 95 

60 15 

79 90 

South, 

19 36 

40 00 

50 30 

70 00 

80 00 

Random between section 1 and 12. 

Variation, 5" 10' East. 

Leave burnt land, and enter windfall. Course N. W. and 

Intersect East boundary in windfall at post. 

Land rolling, burnt land and windfall; Soil sandy and 

third rate; Timber, nearly all dead Black and White 

Oak, and Aspen. 

S. E. 

Corrected between sections 1 and 12. 

White Oak, 10 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Variation, 5" 50' East. 

White Oak, 14North, 15"East 25 links. 

Black Oak 4, North 8" West, 18 links. 

Dead Beech, 10 in. diam. 

Section corner, in burnt land. 

Corrected between sections 11 and 12. 

Beech 10 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post, on left bank of stream 200 links 

wide. Course West, and raise a mound of earth, 

and sod around it. 

Hickory, 20 in. diam. 

Red Elm 24 in. diam. 

Set post corner of sections 11,12,13 and 14. 

Sugar 18 North, WEast, 10 links. 

Beech 24 S. 24" W. 8 links. 

April, 6th 1850. 

Chs. Lks. 

East, 

35 00 

42 50 

49 50 

67 00 

80 00 

S. 89"50' W. 

13 10 

40 00 

59 85 

80 00 

Random between sections 12 and 13. 

Descend 10 feet to river bottoms. Course N. W. and S. E. 

Intersect sluggish stream and pond. Course North and 

Leave Pond and stream. Course N. W. and S. E. 

Ascend 10 feet, from river bottoms to burnt land. Course 

Intersect east boundary, 23 links north of post. 

Land, first 35 chains gently rolling, first rate clay soil; 

timber Sugar, Beech, Lynn, Elm, Hickory, Black 

Walnut, &c. Bottom, dry wild meadow, with scattering clumps of alder bushes. Grass good for hay. 

Variation 5" 10' East. 

South. 

N.W.andS.E. 

Corrected between sections 12 and 13. 

Black Oak 8 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post, 

Sugar tree, 14 N. 5" W. 37 links. 

Lynn, 19 S. 36" W. 20 links. 

Beech 22 in. diam. 

Section corner. 

Variation 5" 15' East. 

Variation, 5" 15' East. 

(Pages 61 through 91 Deleted. The notes continue in the same 

format, order and style.) 

[ 92 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. 

South, 

47 

79 

N.2'E. 

11 

30 

39 

61 

79 

Lks. 

00 

85 

00 

00 

97% 

00 

95 

Random between sections 31 and 32. 

Stream 10 links wide. Course East. 

Intersect South boundary of township 14 links East 

Land level, third rate; Timber, Maple, Black Ash and 

Variation 5" 00' East. 

of post. 

Swamp White Oak. 

Corrected between sections 31 and 32. 

Maple 19 in. diam. 

Black Ash 17 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

BlackAsh20N.45"E. 8links. 

Black Ash 15 S. 49" W. 7 links. 

Maple 30 in. diam. 

Set post corner ofsections 29,30,31 and 32. 

BlackAsh 16N.30"E. 18links. 

Black Ash 14N. 28" W. 11 links. 

Variation 5" 25' East. 

Variation 5" 50' East. 

April 23d, 1850. 

[ 93 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

East, Random between sections 29 and 32. 

Variation 5" 00' East. 

375 
23 00 

34 00 

54 50 

79 75 

S. 89"57'W. 

30 00 

39 87?h 

55 00 

67 50 

79 75 

Stream 10 links, course North. 

Entermarsh,courseN.W. andS.E. 

Leave marsh, course N.E. and S.W. 

Intersect North and South line, 8 links South ofpost. 

Land level and wet, third rate; East of marsh, 

Timber, Black Ash, Maple and Oak. 

second rate; 

Corrected between sections 29 and 32. 

Beech 10 in. diam. 

Set quarer section post, in marsh. 

Black Ash 13 S. 500 links. No other tree near. 

Maple 12 in. diam. 

Black Oak 25 in. diam. 

Section corner. 

Variation 5" 10' East. 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

West, 

40 00 

76 00 

S. 89" 52' E. 

15 00 

36 00 

49 00 

71 80 

76 00 

~ 

N.2'E. 

20 00 

39 97Yz 

49 00 

79 95 

60 00 Black Ash 14 in. diam. 

80 02 I Sectioncorner. 

April 24th, 1850. 

[ 96 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

West, 

18 00 

54 80 

[ 94 1 

Random between sections 30 and 31. 

Set temporary post. 

Intersect West boundary 17 links South ofpost. 

Land level and wet, third rate; Timber, Black Ash, 

Variation 5" East. 

Variation 5" East. 

Maple, Oak, &c. 

~~ 

Corrected between sections 30 and 31. 

BlackOak20N. 50"E. 11 links. 

Maple 25 S. 40" E. 18 links. 

Maple 19 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Maple 30 N. 40" E. 11 links. 

Black Ash 15 S. 29" W. 8 links. 

White Oak 15 in. diam. 

Maple 28 in. diam. 

Section corner. 

Corrected between sections 29 and 30. 

Maple 19 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post in wet land. 

Willow 4N. 45"E. 176 links. No other tree near. 

Cedar 18 in. diam. 

Set post Corner ofsections 19,20,29, and 30, in bottoms; 

Variation 5" 00' East. 

no trees; raised a mound of earth and sod, from 

a pit which bears N. 50 E. 34 links distant. 

[ 95 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. ~~ 

Chs. Lks. 

East, 

7 00 

31 00 

80 02 

S. 8Y51'W. 

8 00 

29 00 

40 01 

Random between sections 20 and 29. 

Variation 4" 55' East. 

Leave bottoms and enter wet land, course N.E. and S.W. 

Leave wet land and enter swamp, course N.W. and S.E. 

Intersect North and South line 20 links South ofpost. 

Land mostly cedar and spruce swamp and wet land; 

all except bottoms third rate. 

Corrected between sections 20 and 29. 

Cedar 18 in. diam. 

Spruce 14 in. diam. 

Set quarter section post. 

Spruce 4 N. 29" W. 8 links. 

CedarSS.81"E. lllinks. 

Variation 5" 10' East 

55 30 

62 00 

64 00 

N.2'E. 

21 00 

31 50 

40 00 

TrueLine between sections 19 and 30. 

Intersect lake, and set meander post in bottom land. 

Black Ash 13 S. 23" W. 367 links. No other tree near. 

A tree on East end of island bears N. 80" W. 

Over lake trigonomotrically, and set meander post on 

Beech18N.3l0W.9links. 

Beech 14 S. 80" W. 4 links. 

Top of ascent, 30 feet; line runs along top ofbank. 

Descend 30 feet to lake. 

Set meander post on West side of island. 

Beech 15 N. 20" E. 11 links. No other tree near. 

Land, East side of lake, rich meadow bottoms; island, 

high, rolling, second rate; banks high all around it. 

Variation 4" 55' East. 

Variation 4" East. 

S.E. side of island. 

Corrected between sections 19 and 20. 

Bayou 50 links wide. Course East and West. 

Stream 50 links wide. Course East. 

Intersect South line of Indian Reservation, 20 chains 

White Pine 26 N, 57" W. 12.30 links. 

Yellow Pine 16 N. 1"E. 9.50 links. 

from S. W. corner, and set post in bottoms. 

[ 97 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Chs. Lks. 

North, 

13 00 

20 00 

37 00 

43 00 

50 57 

60 00 

74 50 

80 00 

Random between sections 17 and 18. 

Descend bank, 20 feet. 

Stream 50 links. Course West. 

In Indian village. 

River road. Course nearly East and West. 

Intersect left bank of Salmon river. 

Object on opposite side ofriver bears North; measured 

Variation 3" 45' East. 

Variation 3" 30' East. 

East 5 chains 67 links, and same object bears 

N. 31" W. 

Begin to ascend. 

Over river trigonometrically, and set temporary post. 

Top ofridge, 60 feet. Course N.N.E. 

Set temporary post on summit of ridge, corner of sections 

Land, North of Salmon river, hilly, rocky, and third rate. 

April 25, 1850. 

7,8,17 and 18. 

Timber, Birch, Aspen, Beech and Oak. 

(Pages 98 thru 105 deleted. The notes continue in the same 

format, order and style.) 

[ 106 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

s. Chs' 20' w. Lks. 1 Corrected between sections 17 and 18. 

11 50 Sugar 19 in. diam. 

376 
20 00 

In section 9, bank ofriver 10 feet high. 

Banks 8 feet high. 

River 9 chains wide. 

Ferry to Union, on opposite side. 

To post in line between sections 8 and9, N. 55%' E. 

1 to south point of Island. 

Variation, 4" 50' East. 

Set meander post on right bank of Salmon river. 

Sugar 21 N. 39" W. 10 links. 

Sugar 15 West, 11 links. 

Monday, April 29th, 1850. 

West, 20.00 In section 17, to post, at N. E. corner ofIndian 

Reservation. 

Variation, 4" East. 

From post, North West corner of Indian Reservation, at 

mouth of stream, from S. E. on left bank of River; 

thence in section 18. 

Variation, 3" 15' East. 

Sand bank, from 10 to 25 feet high, along bank ofriver. 

NOTE.-If any abbreviations other than those mentioned 

in Article 6, on Page 32 of these Instructions, are made, they 

should be in all cases explained in a Note at the end of your 

Book, signed by you, and must be uniform, thus: T. for 

Township, R. for Range, Var. for Variation, Rand. for Random, Corr. for Corrected or Corretion, Sec. for Section, Secs. 

for Sections, Btwn. for Between. All the timber may be designated by the initials for the color, and the trees should be 

written in full; as, W. Ash for White Ash, Y. Pine for Yellow 

Pine, "Sugar" for Sugar Maple, "Maple" for Soft Maple, W. 

Pine for White Pine, &c. 

[ 107 1 

N. 75" W. 10.00 

N. 80" W. 5.00 

N. 70" W. 10.00 

N. 80 W. 15.00 

S. 70" W. 10.00 

West. 7.00 To post on West boundary of township. 

Variation 4" 00' East 

[ 109 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Meanders of the Right Bank of Salmon River, beginning at MEANDERS. post on West boundary of township in section 18, thence up 

stream. 

Courses. 

c. L. 

East. 8.00 

Variation, 3" East 

Along foot of Ledge of Rocks, from 30 to 50 feet, 

perpendicular. 

Ditto. 

To marble bed, on bank of river. 

Variation. 2" East. 

Meanders of left bank of Salmon River, beginning at post, on 

North boundary of Township, in Section three, thence down 

stream. N. 70" E. 10.00 

East. 5.00 

S. 50" E. 5.00 

N. 70" E. 15.00 

S. 80" E. 15.00 

Courses. C. L. 

S. 30" W. 10.00 

S. 40" W. 5.00 

S. 50" W. 5.00 

S. 65" W. 5.00 

S. 40" W. 7.00 

S. 70" W. 6.00 

S. 30" W. 7.00 

South, 1.50 

S. 70" W. 5.00 

S. 40" W. 10.00 

S. 65" W. 15.00 

S. 80" W. 20.75 

Variation 5" East. 

Meadow bottoms, alongriver, from 15 to 20 chains wide; 

banks 6 to 10 feet high. 

N. 70" E. 10.00 

S. 30" E. 3.00 

S. 80" E. 5.00 

To mouth of stream, 150 N. 60" E. 5.00 links wide from South East. 

Over stream; about 10 chains up this stream, is a bridge, 

over which the river road passes. 

Leave marble bed, at post in line between sections 17 and 

Variation, 3" East. 

18. 

To post, in line between sections 3 and 4. 

Variation 4" East. 

N. 42" E. 13.50 

N. 50" E. 10.00 

N. 70" E. 10.00 

In section 17. 

At 3 chains, stream 50 links from North. 

To post, in line between sections 8 and 17. 

Variation, 3" East. 

S. 80" W. 5.00 

S. 60" W. 10.00 

S. 10" W. 15.00 

S. 27?h0w. 8.50 

In section 4. 

N. 60" E. 14.00 

S. 70" E. 8.00 

S. 80" E. 20.00 

N. 85" E. 20.00 

In section 8, along foot ofhigh mountain; summit about 

40 chains north 1000 feet high. Banks ofriver 10 feet 

high. 

To post, in line between sections 8 and 9. 

Variation, 4" East. 

To post, in line between sections 4 and 9, and at upper 

corner ofL. Lyon's claim. 

Variation 4" 10' East. 

[ 110 1 Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Courses. C. L. From lower corner ofJ. Mullett's claim in section 9 Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Variation 4" 00' East. 

Courses. C. L. 

S. 80" E. 7.00 

N. 70" E. 6.00 

N. 5" E. 12.50 

N. 15" E. 10.00 

N. 45" W. 15.00 

N. 35" W. 10.00 

S. 20" W. 5.00 

South, 9.75 To post in line between sections 9 and 16. 

Variation, 4" East. 

S. 30" W. 5.00 

s. 70" w. 10.00 

N. 86" W. 9.50 

In section 16. 

To post in line, between sections 16 and 17 

Variation, 4" East. 

377 
N. 50" W. 3.50 

N. 20" W. 10.00 

N. 23" E. 7.00 

N. 40" E. 5.00 

In section 8; river rapid; narrow, channel between, main 

land and Island 

To line between sections 8 and 9. S. 64?h" E. to head 

of Island. 

Variation, 3" 10' East. 

Meanders ofLake in Section28, beginning at apoint23 chains 

North of corner to sections 28,29, 32 and 33; thence 

East, 10.00 

N. 50" E. 5.00 

N. 20" W. 10.00 

N. 60" E. 10.00 

S. 60" E. 15.00 

N. 80" E. 10.00 

S. 50" E. 5.00 

s. 30" w. 10.00 

S. 20" E. 5.00 

S. 60" W. 10.00 

s. 80" w. 10.00 

S. 10" E. 5.00 

N. 70" W. 10.00 

N. 23" E. 14.50 

To Lake; thence 

At 5 chains, enter wet marsh. 

At 1 chain, sluggish stream, 20 links, from West 

At 2 chains, leave wet marsh and enter swamp. 

N. 68" E. 7.75 Leave swamp. 

S. 80" E. 8.00 

S. 60" E. 7.00 

S. 65" E. 5.00 

N. 70" E. 2.00 

S. 60" E. 5.00 

N. 65" E. 5.00 

N. 70" E. 10.00 

N. 50" E. 5.00 

N. 15" E. 10.00 

In section 9; River bluffs, rising gradually North; River 

rapid; River 3 chains wide. 

To falls 15 feet. 

River rapid. 

Leave Rapids. 

To place ofbeginning. 

To post in line between sections 4 and 9. 

Variation 3" 15' East. [ 113 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West , Meridian Michigan. [ 111 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. Meanders ofpart of a Lake in Sections 19 and 30, beginning at 

post on West boundary, on North side 

of Lake; thence 

~~ 

Courses. C. L. 

N. 12" E. 18.00 

N. 50" E. 15.00 

N. 75" E. 10.00 

N. 27%" E. 9.25 In section 4 

Courses. C. L. 

East, 20.00 

N. 50" E. 5.00 

S. 80" E. 5.00 

S. 40" E. 10.00 

S. 20" E. 5.00 

N. 80" E. 5.00 

N. 30" E. 10.00 

S. 50" E. 3.50 

S. 31" E. 3.50 

s. 10" w. 10.00 

S. 40" E. 10.00 

S. 10" E. 6.50 

To post in line, between sections 3 and 4. 

Variation, 3" 50' East. 

In section 19, sandy beach. 

At 5 chains enter rich bottom land, wet. 

N. 82 Tree on East end of Island bears S. 32" W. " E. 20.20 

N. 70" E. 10.00 

N. 45" E. 5.00 

N. 60" E. 10.00 

N. 30" E. 7.00 

N. 70" E. 7.00 

N. 40" E. 6.00 

N. 55" E. 10.00 

N. 35" E. 10.00 

In section 3. 

Outlet 50 links wide, and leave sandy beach. 

To post in line between sections 19 and30. 

Tree, before noted, on East end of Island, bears N. 80" W. 

Variation 4" East. 

To post on N. boundary oftownship. 

April 30th, 1850 

S. 33" W. 9.25 

N. 80" W. 10.00 

S. 30" W. 10.00 

N. 70" W. 5.00 

S. 60" W. 10.00 

S. 80" W. 15.00 

N. 70" W.10.00 

In section 30. 

Meanders of Island, in river, opposite Union, beginning at 

post in line between sections 8 and 9, on north side of Island; 

thence 

West side of Island bears N. 2" East. 

S. 70" W. 0.80 To post on West boundary, South side of Lake. 

S. 30" W. 4.00 

S. 15" E. 5.00 

S. 10" E. 3.00 

S. 50" E. 1.20 

In section 9. Variation, 4" East. 

To post on line South side of Island 

[ 114 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Meanders of Island in Lake in Sections 19 and 30, beginning 

at post in line of Sections 19 and 30, on East side of Island; 

thence 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

Courses. C. L. 

S. 50" E. 3.80 

N. 30" E. 3.00 

North, 5.00 

N. 15" E. 5.00 

N. 16" E. 4.50 

S. 80" W. 5.00 

S. 70" W. 2.20 

Variation 4" East. 

In section 19. 

In section 8. 

Courses. C. L. 

N. 30" E. 4.00 

S. 80" E. 3.00 

N. 60" E. 3.00 

N. lo" E. 2.00 

N. 60" W. 8.00 

West, 6.00 

At 2 chains, bridge from Island to Union. 

To place ofbeginning. 

I 

378 
S. 50" W. 7.00 

S. 10" E. 6.00 To post, in line between sections 19 and 30, on West side 

of Island. 

[ 115 1 

S. 55" E. 5.00 

N. 60" E. 5.80 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION. 

Insection30. 

Toplaceofbeginning. 

The surface of this township, is unequal; the Eastern and 

South-eastern portion, being gently rolling; the Southwestern level, and that portion lying North-west of Salmon 

River broken, hilly, and rocky. The soil is also varied. The 

largest portion of the Township south of Salmon River, is 

sandy second, and third rate, with a variety of timber, such as 

Beech, Maple, Ironwood, Oak, Birch, Sugar, &c. The Southeastern portion of the Township is a better quality of soil, 

being mostly first rate, and changing from sand to a clay 

loam. The timber is ppincipally Sugar Maple, which grows in 

groves of large extent, affording sugar in great abundance, to 

the Indians, whose sugar camps are established in many 

places in this vicinity, one of which was noted in section 

twenty-four. Beech, Lynn, Elm, Black Walnut, Hickory, and 

other varieties of valuable timber are also found in this 

portion of the township. 

A small portion of a beautiful rolling prairie, covers the 

south-east corner of this township, in which is noted a grove 

of timber on the line between sections 35 and 36. 

The plains in sections 18 and 19, extending, also, into the 

Indian Reservation, are elevated from the river and country 

around; but the soil is dry, barren and sandy, supporting a 

scattering growth of stunted White and Yellow Pines, which 

are of no value. 

Following the course of Salmon river and the large 

streams, is a level strip of bottom land, which is covered with 

wild grass of the first quality. The soil is sandy loam, and very 

rich in the Western part of the township. Along the stream 

which flows from a lake in sections 19 and 30, into Salmon 

River, the bottoms are 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

low and wet, caused by inundations which occur two or three 

times during the year. 

The large Swamp in the interior of the Township is heavily 

timbered with Cedar, Tamarack and Spruce. East of the line 

between sections 20 and 21, it is dry, and capable ofdrainage, 

and may be made valuable for agricultural purposes. 

Limestone appears at the surface on the line between sections 27 and 28, where the variation of the needle is somewhat increased. The course of this ledge is nearly East and 

West, and the outcrop continues for nearly 30 chains easterly, to the junction of two small streams, where it disappears 

from the surface. It is seen again in the bed of the stream, at 

the falls, on line between sections 22 and 27. This stone 

makes excellent lime. A kiln for burning it is situated at the 

junction of the streams before mentioned. 

A regular bluff, rising gradually from Salmon river to from 

100 to 150 feet in height, continues from the rapids below the 

falls, in section 9, along the North side of the river, to the 

North boundary. From the top of these bluffs, a level plateau 

of land extends westerly, covering several square miles. 

A large bed of marble has been discovered on the right 

bank of Salmon River, in section 18. This marble is 

variegated, and an excellent quality for building purposes; 

capable of receiving a very high polish. 

The variation of the needle, South of Salmon River, is nearly 

uniform. A decrease, however, in the East variation, is 

observed as you go West, and in some places it decreases to 

about 3%" East. 

North of Salmon River, in the mountainous parts of the 

township, the variation is more fluctuating. On the line between sections 6 and 7, it increases, going West, from 1" West 

at the corner of sections 5, 6, 7 and 8, to 30" West, and then 

diminishes to no variation; from 

[ 117 1 

Township 53 North, Range 15 West, Meridian Michigan. 

which point the East variation increases, till at the West 

boundary it is 10" East. 

A high ridge North of the line, containing iron ore, is 

probably the cause of these abberrations of the needle. An 

iron furnace is erected, and a company at work upon this ore 

bed. There is a good road leading from the furnace to Salmon 

River, opposite Union. 

The variation on the line between sections 5 and 6, is still 

more irregular. It changes abruptly at several points on the 

line, from East to West, and on the North side of the trap 

knob, noted on this line, the North end of the needle points S. 

50" W. This unusual attraction is attributed to the presence of 

copper-a spar vein, containing grains and small lumps of 

native copper, being exposed on the western declivity of the 

trap knob before mentioned, at which point a shaft has been 

sunk, and diggings commenced, but not yet far enough advanced to determine the extent or value of the mine. 

379 
XXVIII. 

(These General Instructions are copied from an original document now in the possession of the National Archives. The 

document contains the following hand -written notation ‘%lorida General Instructions Original with S. Gs letter of Dee. 7, 

1850, 25319a”. The document is signed by “B. A. Putnam Surveyor General” and was sent “To Henry Wells Deputy 

Surveyor”.) 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 

Surveyor General’s Office. 

[FLORIDA, 1850]

Preceding Page Blank 

381 
TO DEPUTY SURVEYORS: 

You will provide yourself with a good nonius Compass and 

two 2-pole chains, subdivided into fifty equal links each, 

which will be regulated by the standard instruments of this 

office, before you will be at liberty to leave for your field of 

operations. One of your chains you will keep as a standard by 

which you will adjust the one used every other day, at least. 

All surveys will be made by north and south lines, run 

agreeadly to the true meridian, and others crossing them at 

right angles. 

The lands are to be laid off in Townships of precisely six 

miles square, by lines running due north and south, east and 

west, commencing on the southern and eastern boundary of 

the district to be surveyed, thereby throwing the error or 

deficiency on the north and west sides thereof. On each of 

these lines, precisely at the distance of one mile, section 

corners are to be established, and at every half mile quarter 

section posts should be placed. 

In subdividing townships, parallel lines are to be run each 

way from the section corners on one side to the corresponding 

corner on the opposite side. At the intersections of these lines 

section corners are to be established, which, if the survey is 

correct, will be at the end of one mile on each line (should the 

difference be more than fifty links the line must be remeasured and corrected.) These lines are to be run in the manner 

best calculated to afford the greatest facility to the perfect 

execution of the work, and will divide the township into 36 

sections, beginning with No. 1 in the N. E. corner and proceeding west and east alternately through the township, 

until the whole are numbered. 

All section lines closing on the exterior township lines, and 

not forming a perfect close on the posts or corners thereon 

established, must be corrected back and the variation noted, 

so as to make the post already established on the township 

line the corner of the section. 

In running the section lines, quarter section posts must be 

set precisely equi-distant from the section corners; except in 

the northern and western tier of sections, when they are to be 

set exactly at 40 chains from the corner; throwing the excess 

or deficiency in that part of the sections north and west of 

these quarter section posts. 

It is required that all lines shall be run by the true meridian; you will therefore, once at least in every township, and as 

much oftener as may be necessary, ascertain the variation of 

the magnetic from the true meridian, and record it in your 

field books. 

The greatest possible care is to be observed in marking 

corners, which should be done in the following manner: At all 

township and section corners, if a tree is not to be found 

immediately at the corner, a post of durable wood, not less 

than three feet long, square at the top to not less than six 

inches, will be firmly planted in the ground with the angles in 

the direction of the cardinal points of the compass; the sides to 

be marked with the number of the section that it faces, and 

the nearest suitable tree in each section marked with the No. 

of the Range, Township and Section in which it is situated. 

Thus, 

R4E 

T9S 

34 

and the letters B T some distance below the other marks. 

These letters and numbers should be marked in the bark, and 

in such manner as not seriously to wound the tree, to render 

them as permanent as possible. The bearing and distance of 

these trees are to be taken, and kind designated, and carefully noted in the field books. The quarter section posts must 

also be of durable wood, 3 feet long, firmly set in the ground, 

flattened on opposite sides, and marked “?A4 S.”; and the 

nearest tree in each section must be marked and its bearing 

and distance noted in the same manner as is directed for 

section corners; when trees are found at the corners, so that 

posts are not required, these trees should be marked with the 

numbers and letters directed to be put upon the bearing trees 

(omitting the letters B. T.) In prairies or other places when 

bearing trees cannot be had, mounds of stone or earth are to 

be raised around the posts, not less than 2% feet high, and the 

bearing and distance to the pit from which the earth was 

taken carefully noted. 

When your course is obstructed by any impassable obstacle, you will take offsets, or by traverse or triangles ascertain 

the exact distance across it. 

All township lines are to be marked with 3 chops 6 inches 

apart, in the bark only, on all fore and aft or side line trees, 

and section lines in like manner with 2 chops 3 inches apart, 

and not less than one tree on each side of the line, to each 

chain, if within 50 links, to be blazed facing the line. 

Whenever a township or section line intersects lakes, 

ponds, or streams of water, or any obstacle that interrupts the 

regular order of the survey, and which require to be meandered, posts flattened on 2 sides and marked with the numbers of the sections it faces are to be set at the intersections. 

When a section line terminates on a claim line or other 

reservation, a post must be set and bearing trees taken in the 

manner prescribed for a corner, and the course and distance 

from such terminus to the nearest post or corner of such line 

must be taken and noted, so that the exact area of the fractional section may be ascertained. 

If variations from this mode of surveying the townships 

and sections are at any time required to adapt them to the 

situation of a particular tract of country or to connect them 

with prior surveys, special instructions will in such cases be 

given. 

When you are subdividing townships into sections you will 

meander all navigable streams, all lakes and deep ponds 

exceeding half a section in area and all islands suitable for 

cultivation. In meandering you will in all cases connect with 

the posts on the township and section lines set upon their 

margins as before directed. 

The field notes of your meanders are to be written at the 

end of the subdivisions of the townships; and the traverse 

work in each section tested by latitude and departure as you 

proceed. 

The width of streams and bayous bounding your surveys, 

as well as those intersecting them, are to be carefully noted at 

every intersection of your lines therewith, and except when 

such streams constitute the boundary between two series of 

surveys, they are not to interrupt the regular lines of the 

townships through which they pass, but those lines are to be 

continued across the stream to the complete measurement. 

In designating the two sides of a stream you will suppose 

382 
yourself looking down stream, the bank on your right hand 

will in all cases be termed the right bank, and that on your 

left hand the left bank. 

When swamps or marshes prevent the closing of your survey upon a coast, river or lake, you will state the facts in your 

field notes, and not meander the margin of those swamps, or 

marshes, but leave them as unfinished surveys; and when 

from this or any other cause you report any of your work 

impracticable, you will insert in your field notes a full description of the causes that render it so. 

All lines must be measured horizontally, your reckoning 

must be kept in chains of 4 poles, 100 links, and all your 

calculations and plats must be made in accordance therewith. Your tally rods or pins should not exceed fourteen 

inches in length. You will attend vigilantly to the manner in 

which your chainmen performs their duty, and cause it to be 

correctly and faithfully executed. 

For the surveying and location of private claims or other 

tracts, not conforming to the section lines, special instructions will be given. All permits under the armed occupation 

law must conform to the section lines. The settler is authorized to take continuous or contiguous half quarter sections 

so as to include his improvements, and as much of the land 

desired by him not exceeding 160 acres as can be embraced by 

regular legal subdivisions or half quarter sections of the 

same or different sections. He must designate to you in writing the half quarter sections for which he wishes a permit; 

but if he fails to do so, you will select the same so as to include 

his main improvements. 

Your field notes must contain an accurate, clear and minute record of every thing that is done by you under these 

instructions. 

You will carefully note the distances from your last corner 

post to the point where you meet with or leave any lakes, 

rivers, creeks, brooks, swamps, prairies, hills, roads, canals 

or any other natural or artificial object, with their general 

course; and also take their bearings, so as to establish the 

position of any important object which you may see on either 

side of your line, that your field notes may have a full and 

topographical description of the country surveyed by you. 

You will be especially careful to note in your field books 

where groves of Live Oak, Red Cedar and long leaf Yellow 

pine abound. 

On the first page of your field book you will insert the 

number of the Township and Range, by whom surveyed; the 

date of the survey; and at the head of each subsequent page 

the number of the Township and Range. 

At the end of the notes of each section line the quality of the 

land and description of the timber growing thereupon is to be 

given. 

Besides the field notes taken on the lines you will add at the 

end of the notes of each township such further description or 

information as you may be able to give concerning the general quality of the soil and productions with all other things 

worthy of notice. 

Your original field notes must in all cases be returned to 

the office of the Surveyor General and if not in a fair and 

legible hand, true and fair copies must also be returned with 

them. 

Each field book must contain the entire survey of a 

Township and at the close thereof the following oath or 

affirmation will be required. “I Deputy Surveyor do 

solemnly swear (or affirm) that in pursuance of a contract 

made the day of 184 with A. B. Surveyor General of the United States for the State of Florida 

and in strict conformity to the laws of the United States and 

instructions of said Surveyor General, I have regularly surveyed and subdivided into sections, Township (or Factional 

Township) No. of Range No. in the State of 

Florida. And I do further solemnly swear that the foregoing 

are the true and original field notes thereof executed as 

aforesaid, and that those parts which are reported impracticable, were rendered so from the cause therein stated.” 

If the field book is of Township lines and not of Subdivisions, instead of using the words “and subdivided into Sections Township (or Fractional Township)-or Range”-you 

will use the words “the exterior Township lines therein mentioned. 

You will return a plat or diagram of the Towship lines 

surveyed by you with the field notes, this may be on a scale of 

two inches to a Township. 

On each of the lines the length in miles must be inserted; 

and also the variation of the magnetic meridian; together 

with the general outline of the topographical features of the 

country. 

A plat of each Township subdivided by you will likewise be 

returned with the field notes thereof protracted on a scale of 

40 chains to an inch; exhibiting in like manner all lakes, 

ponds, rivers, creeks, swamps, prairies, hills, and other natural objects with their known original names and also the 

roads, canals, mines, minerals, salt-springs, mill-sites, towns 

villages &c &c. The courses and distances of all lines when 

not run by the true meridian, must be indicated upon them 

with the distances to the crossings of the streams or other 

natural or artificial object-and a general outline of the 

topographical features of each section. 

Any material departure from these instructions, or negligence in the observance thereof will be considered as a violation of the conditions of your contract, and forfeiture of all 

claim for payment: All loose, inaccurate, precipitate or defective work, either as it respects the surveys in the field or the 

notes and returns thereof on paper WILL BE REJECTED. 

The original field notes with a fair copy thereof are required to be returned to the Surveyor General’s Office, and no 

payment will be made for any part of the Survey not executed 

by you in your own proper person. 

27th Novr 1850 Surveyor General 

B. A. Putnam 

To 

Henry Wells 

Deputy Surveyor 

383 
(This copy of General Instructions was made from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives. The 

field notes indicate they were issued in 1851 .) 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 

OFFICE OF THE SURVEYOR GENERAL 

OF WISCONSIN AND IOWA 

385 
r11 

OFFICE OF THE SURVEYOR GENERAL 

OF WISCONSIN AND IOWA, 

DUBUQUE, 18 

To , Deputy Surveyor: 

SIR:-You are to survey in person, or by the assistance of 

some duly authorized Deputy Surveyor, acting under your 

immediate direction and supervision, the district assigned 

you under contract of 

18 , conformably to such parts of the following instructions 

as apply to the character of the work for which you have 

contracted, except so much thereof as is modified or countermanded by manuscript special instructions, hereinafter written. 

SYSTEM OF SURVEY. 

1. The United States lands are surveyed into rectangular 

tracts, bounded by north and south, east and west lines. They 

are first surveyed into townships or tracts of six miles square, 

which are subdivided into thirty-six equal parts, called sections. 

2. Townships and ranges number from base and meridian 

lines-the former bearing due east and west, and the latter 

intersecting them at right angles, and bearing due north and 

south. 

3. The base line of the surveys in Wisconsin is the south 

boundary of so much thereof as borders the State of Illinois; 

that of Iowa, is located near the geographical centre of the 

State of Arkansas. 

4. The fourth principal meridian, to which the surveys in 

Wisconsin relate, starts from the mouth of the Illinois river. The fifth 

principal meridian, to which the surveys in Iowa relate, 

starts from the mouth of the Arkansas river. 

5. The townships, both in Wisconsin and Iowa, number 

from their respective base lines, northward; the ranges, in 

each, number from their respective meridians, both east and 

west. 

6. Sections are numbered from east to west and from west 

to east progressively, commencing with the north-east corner 

section. 

7. Correction lines provide for the error that would otherwise arise from the convergency of meridians, and arrest that 

arising from the inaccuracies of measurement. They are run 

due east and west, at stated distances, forming a base to the 

townships north of them. This base, for each township, is 

extended sufficiently to meet the convergency for a given 

distance. 

INSTRUMENTS. 

Base, meridian, correction and township lines are to be run 

with an instrument that operates independently of the 

magnetic needle, which is to be employed only to show the 

true magnetic variation. Section, meander and all other lines 

interior of a township, may be run either with the same 

instrument, or with the Plain Compass, provided it is of 

approved construction and furnished with a vernier or 

nonius. 

ASSISTANTS-THEIR OATHS. 

You are to employ no other assistants than men of reputable character, each of whom must, before performing any 

duty as such, take and subscribe an oath (or affirmation) of 

the following form, which must be forwarded to or deposited 

in this office, prior to or upon the return of your field notes:- 

For Chainmen. 

I, A. B., do solemnly swear (or affirm,) that I will impartially and faithfully execute the duties of Chain Carrier, that I 

will level the chain upon uneven ground, and plumb the 

tally-pins whether sticking or dropping the same; that I will 

report the true distance to all notable objects, and the true 

length of all lines that I assist in measuring, to the best of my 

skill and ability. 

Sworn and subscribed before 

me at this 

18 

(or other officer authorized to administer oaths) 

Justice of the Peace. 

of , County of , State, 

(or Territory) of 

[31 

For Flagman or Axeman. 

I, C. D., do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will well and 

truly perform the duties of axeman or flagman, according to 

instructions given me, and to the best of my skill and ability. 

MARKING LINES, ESTABLISHING AND 

MARKING CORNERS. 

1. All lines which you actually establish are to be marked 

as follows: Those trees which intercept your line are to have 

two notches upon the side where your line intersects and 

leave them, without any other mark whatever. 

2. A sufficient number of those trees which approach 

nearest your line, to render the same conspicuous, are to be 

blazed upon two sides, diagonally or quartering towards the 

line; the blazes to approach nearer ,each other the farther the 

line passes from the blazed trees, and to be as nearly opposite-coinciding with the line-as possible, in cases where 

they are barely passed. 

3. Corner posts are to be made only of the most durable 

wood found in the vicinity of your lines. Township corner 

posts must not be less than five, section and meander corner 

posts four, and quarter section posts three inches in diameter. 

These posts must be set firmly into the ground, by digging a 

hole to admit them two feet deep, and be very securely 

rammed with earth, also with stone when convenient. They 

are to appear above ground, at township corners, three feet, 

386 

A 
at section and meander corners, two and a half feet, and at 

quarter section corners, two feet. 

4. All township and section corner posts are to be squared 

upon their upper ends and the angles of the square set with 

the cardinal points of the compass. Township corner posts 

must have six notches upon each of the said angles; section 

corner posts, upon township lines, as many notches upon one 

of the said angles as they are miles distant from the township 

corner where the line commenced, and interior section corner 

posts as many notches, both upon their south and east angles, 

as they are miles distant from the south and east boundaries 

of the township, respectively. 

5. Quarter section and meander corner posts are to be 

blazed upon two opposite sides, and set with those blazes 

facing the sections between which they occur. 

6. A tree supplying the place of a corner post, is to be 

squared and marked as directed for posts. 

7. All posts established at corner of sections, are to be 

marked upon each side of their squared part with the number 

of the four sections 

which those sides respectively face, at meander corners with 

the number of the sections between which such posts are set, 

and at quarter section corners with l/4 S. upon the two blazed 

sides. 

8. Bearing trees are those of which you take the course and 

distance from a corner. They are distinguished by a large 

smooth blaze or chop, fronting the corner, upon which is 

marked, with an iron made for that purpose, the number of 

the range, township and section, except at quarter section 

corners where l/4 S. will supply the number of the section, 

thus; 

R. -------E. or W. 

T. _______ N. 

S.--------or 1/4 S. 

The letters B. T. are also to be marked upon a smaller chop, 

directly under the large one, and as near the ground as is 

practicable. 

9. Witness trees are signalized and marked as above, but 

the course and distance to them, as well as the small chop, are 

omitted. 

10. Trees, employed either for the purpose of bearing or 

witness trees, are to be alive and healthy and not less than 

five inches diameter. 

11. From all posts established for township corners, or for 

section corners upon township lines, four bearing trees, if 

within a reasonable distance, must be taken; one to stand 

within each of the four sections. 

12. At interior section corners four trees, one to stand 

within each of the four sections, are to be marked with number of township and range, as well as section in which they 

stand. 

13. From quarter section and meander corners two bearing trees are marked, one within each of the adjoining sections. 

14. Wherever bearing trees cannot be had, quadrangular 

mounds of earth or stone are to be raised around the corner 

posts, the four angles of which must coincide with the cardinal points of the compass. 

15. Mounds at township corners are to have a base of five 

feet, a top of two feet, and a height of three feet; at section, 

meander and quarter section corners, they are to have a base 

of four feet, a top of one and a half feet, a height of two and a 

half feet. 

16. Where mounds are made of earth the place from which 

it is taken is styled the Pit, which is to be a uniform and stated 

distance from the mound in all instances where the same is 

practicable, viz.: at township corners there are to be two pits, 

one ten links due north, and the other ten links due south; at 

section corners one pit, eight links due south; at quarter 

section cornes one pit eight links due east, and at meander 

corners one pit, eight links either due north, south, east or 

west. The distance of the mound and pit to be obtained 

[51 

by measuring from centre to centre. The mounds are to be 

neatly covered with sod in all cases where the same can be 

had. 

17. Posts established in mounds for township corners are 

to be marked upon each side of the square, with the appropriate number of the range and township; at section corners 

upon township lines with the appropriate number of the 

range and township upon two sides thereof, and at interior 

section corners with the range and township within which 

such post stands. 

18. Whenever the true place of establishing a corner is 

inaccessible, or unadapted to the establishment of a proper 

corner, except it occurs in a body of water that is to be 

meandered, you are to establish a witness corner as near 

thereto as is practicable and either due north, south, east or 

west of it. Such corner is to be constructed in all respects like 

the one for which it stands as a witness, with the addition of 

the letters W. C., immediately over the numbering, both 

upon the post and trees. 

19. When a section or quarter section corner happens at 

the point for establishing a meander corner, the posts and 

trees are to be marked with the appropriate numbers for such 

section or quarter section corner. Or, in lieu ofposts, you may 

at any corner, insert endways into the ground, to the depth of 

seven or eight inches, a stone, the number of cubic inches in 

which shall not be less than the number contained in a stone 

fourteen inches long, twelve inches wide and three inches 

thick. The edges of which must be set north and south on 

north and south lines; and east and west on east and west 

lines. The dimension of each stone to be given in the field 

notes at the time of establishing the corner. 

Where stone section corners are made on the range and 

township lines, as many notches will be distinctly cut with a 

pick or chisel on the two sides in the direction of the line, as 

the corner is sections from the nearest township corners. At 

township corners six notches will be cut on each edge or side 

toward the cardinal points. At section corners in the interior 

of a township, as many notches will be cut on the south edge 

and east sides as the corner is sections distant from the south 

and east boundaries of the township; and at the corners of 

subdivisional intersections with the north boundaries of the 

townships, six notches on the south edge, and at the intersec387 

L 
tion with the west boundaries six notches on the east edge; 

and as many notches on the east or south sides (as the case my 

require,) as the corner is sections distant from the township 

corner. Quarter section corner stones will have l/4 cut on the 

west side on north and south lines, and on the north side on 

east and west lines. 

Where a corner is perpetuated by a stone of the dimensions, 

marked and set in the manner above described, no mound 

need be erected. 

When the closing lines to the north or west boundaries of 

the townships, either in subdivision or exterior work, exceed 

one hundred chains of length, corners for the legal subdivisions of the sections will be established at every twenty 

chains north or west of the quarter section corner. 

MEASUREMENTS AND WHERE TO ESTABLISH 

MEANDER CORNERS. 

1. Your distances are all to be noted and returned in 

chains and links, and to be taken with a half or two pole chain 

of fifty parts, each measuring seven inches and ninety-twohundredths. The length of your chain should be adjusted by 

means of a screw attached to the handle of the hind end; every 

tenth link should compose a swivel, and all the rings and 

loops should be welded or brazed. The accuracy of your chain 

is to be preserved by comparing it with a standard adjusted at 

this office. 

2. Your tally-pins, eleven in number, must not exceed 

fourteen inches in length, must be of sufficient weight to drop 

plumb, and are to be made of iron or seasoned wood pointed 

with steel. 

3. The length of every line you run is to be ascertained by 

horizontal measurement. 

4. Whenever your line is obstructed by an object over 

which you cannot measure with the chain, you are to pass the 

same by offsets, traverse or trigonometry, observing that the 

distance thus obtained extends no farther than is necessary 

to actually pass the interposing object. 

5. Whenever your course is so obstructed by navigable 

streams, or other bodies of water which are to be meandered, 

you are to establish a meander corner at the intersection of 

your lines with both margins thereof, and also on each side of 

all islands which said lines may cross. 

TOWNSHIP LINES. 

1. North and south lines are termed range lines; east and 

west, township lines. The former are styled, in the field notes, 

the line between certain ranges; the latter, the line between 

certain townships. Each mile, both of a range and township 

line, is particularized by the number of the sections between 

which it is run, thus; north between sections 31 and 36, west 

between sections 1 and 36. 

2. Upon the base or township line forming the southern 

boundary 

[71 

of your district, township corners are established at intervals 

of six miles. From each of these corners you are to run range 

lines due north, six miles; establishing a quarter section 

corner at the end of the first forty, and a section corner at the 

end of the first eighty chains, and observing the same order 

and intervals of establishing quarter section and section corners to the end of the sixth mile, where you will temporarily 

set a township corner port. 

3. You will then commence at a township corner upon the 

first range line east of your district, and immediately east of 

the township corner ports temporarily set by you, and from 

thence run due west across your whole district, intersecting 

your range lines at or within three chains and fifty links, due 

north or south, of your said six mile posts. At the point of 

intersection, if within the above limits, you will establish a 

township corner. Upon this township or last mentioned line, 

quarter section and section corners are to be established at 

the same distances and intervals as directed for range lines; 

observing that the length of each and every township line 

which you are to establish, is in no case to exceed or fall short 

of the length of the corresponding township boundary upon 

the south, more than three chains and fifty links. If, however, 

in closing your first tier of townships, and all others closing to 

or upon old work, you find it impossible to preserve the true 

course of your lines and close within the above limits, you are 

to resurvey and examine until you detect the real cause of 

discrepancy, which if not in your own work, you will report to 

this office, and for which you will provide in the field, in all 

instances where the same is practicable, by adding to, or 

deducting from the length of your first range line or lines. 

And where, in order to close a township to or upon old work, 

you are compelled to employ a variation greater or less than 

the true magnetic Variation, both must be stated. 

4. After closing your first tier of townships, you are to run 

up and close successive tiers, to the completion of your district, by the same method of survey as directed for the first 

tier. 

5. You are to observe and note the true magnetic variation, at least once upon every mile or section line, and as 

much oftener as there is a change therein. 

6. The bearing trees, standing upon the west side of range, 

and upon the north side of township lines, are to be entered 

first in your field notes. 

7. After a township corner is established as before 

directed, you are to complete the notes of the corresponding 

range line, by inserting the 

said corner, with the true distance thereto, and adding or 

erasing the notes of any topography or other minutes, that 

may be included or excluded by thus adding to or deducting 

from the length of the range line as temporarily established. 

8. With your field notes you must return a diagram, drawn 

upon a scale of three inches to six miles, on which you are to 

represent each boundary you have run with the length and 

388 
variation thereof, and with all the topography thereupon 

that can be propery expressed upon that scale. 

SUBDIVISION. 

Length of North and South and East and West Lines, and 

where to establish Quarter Section Posts. 

1. Every north and south section line except those terminating in the north boundary, are to be one mile in length. 

The east and west section lines, except those terminating in 

the west boundary, are to be within one hundred links of 

eighty chains in length; and the north and south boundaries 

of any one section, except in the extreme western tier, are to 

be within one hundred links of equal length. 

2. The length of the section lines closing to the north and 

west boundaries, are to be governed by the length of the sixth 

or closing miles, both of the range and township lines, and 

must be as nearly of the same length, or of an average thereof, 

as is practicable. 

3. Quarter section corners, both upon north and south and 

upon east and west lines, are to be set equidistant from the 

corresponding section corners, except upon those closing to 

the north and west boundaries, where the quarter section 

corners will be established precisely forty chains north or 

west of the respective section corners from which those lines 

start. 

Method of Subdividing; Random, Corrected and True Lines, 

and Diagram. 

1. The first mile, both of the south and east boundaries of 

each township you are to subdivide, is to be carefully traced 

and measured before you enter upon the subdivision thereof. 

This will enable you to observe any change that may have 

taken place in the magnetic variation, as it existed at the 

running of the township lines, and will also enable you to 

compare your chaining with that upon the township lines. 

2. Any discrepancy, arising either from a change in the 

magnetic variation or a difference in measurement, is to be 

stated as directed under the head of field notes. 

[91 

3. After adjusting your compass to a variation which you 

have thus found will retrace the eastern boundary of the 

township, you will commence at the corner to sections 35 and 

36, on the south boundary, and run a line due north, forty 

chains, to the quarter section corner which you are to establish between sections 35 and 36; continuing due north forty 

chains further, you will establish the corner to sections 25, 

26,35 and 36. 

4. From the section corner last named, run a random line, 

without blazing, due east for corner of sections 25 and 36, in 

east boundary. If you intersect exactly at the corner, you will 

blaze your random line back and establish it as the true line. 

But if your random line intersects the said range line, either 

north or south of the said corner, you will measure the distance of such intersection, from which you will calculate a 

course that will run a true line back to the corner from which 

your random started. 

5. From the corner of sections 25,26,35,36, run due north 

between sections 25 and 26, setting the quarter section post, 

as before at forty chains, and at eighty chains establishing 

the corner of sections 23,24,25,26. Then run a random line 

due east for the corner of sections 24 and 25 in east boundary; 

correcting back in the manner directed for running the line 

between sections 25 and 36. 

6. In this manner proceed with the survey of each successive section in the first tier, until you arrive at the north 

boundary of the township, which you will reach in running up 

a random line between sections 1 and 2. If this line should not 

intersect at the post established for corner to sections 1,2,35 

and 36 upon the township line, you will note the distance that 

you fell east or west of the same, from which distance you will 

calculate a course that will run a true line south to the corner 

from which your random started. 

7. The first tier of sections being thus laid out and surveyed, you will return to the south boundary of the township, 

and from the corner of sections 34 and 35 commence and 

survey the second tier of sections, in the same manner that 

you pursued in the survey of the first, closing at the section 

corners on the first tier. 

8. In like manner proceed with the survey of each successive tier of sections, until you arrive at the fifth or last tier. 

From each section corner which you establish upon this tier, 

you are to run random lines for the corresponding corners 

established upon the range line forming the western boundary ofyour township, and in returning, establish the true line 

as before directed. 

[ 10 1 

9. All section lines are to be right lines, regardless of the 

number or nature of intervening obstacles; except in the 

event of their intersecting a lake or pond of such diameter, at 

the points of intersection, as forbids their continuance by 

means of a trigonometrical calculation, in which case, and in 

cases also where a river, lake, correction line, or reservation, 

form a part of the boundary of a township, when the closing 

lines thereupon, will be true lines, the courses of which will 

have a strict reference to the variation and closing of the 

adjacent lines; the quarter section posts upon which are to be 

set forty chains from the section corner at which such true 

lines commenced. 

10. In closing upon a correction line, you are to establish a 

section corner at the point of your intersection therewith, 

stating the true distance of such intersection from the 

nearest corner thereon. 

11. Field notes of random lines are to embrace nothing but 

the variation, length and closing thereof. 

12. Topography of every description, line trees and corners, are to be taken upon the corrected lines and included in 

the notes thereof, following which is to be written the description of the land and timber. 

You will report in your general descriptions, and indicate 

upon your diagrams, the whole number of residences, or 

other edifices, and as nearly as practicable the character and 

extent of improvement within each township. Where you 

cannot determine these important facts accurately without 

leaving your lines, you must specify the smallest subdivision 

389 
or subdivisions upon which such residence or other improvement exists. 

You are to return the distance at which you strike, and that 

at which you leave every stream or other body of water that 

exceeds one hundred links of width at an ordinary stage of 

water; giving also the right angled width of the same. 

CHAIN CARRIERS. 

Your chain carriers must be reversed at every tally, so that 

one may be ahead upon the odd and the other upon all the 

even tallies. The discrepancies of measure likely to arise from 

unequal strength or care in chainmen, are thus rendered 

compensative; a check is instituted upon the accuracy of the 

tally, and the labor of recollecting and reporting objects is 

divided. As the chain men pass each other, the pins must be, 

in every instance, counted by each of them. 

MARKERS AND MARKING IRONS. 

You are to provide yourself with marking irons of the most 

approved 

description, and which are to be used only be experienced and 

skillful markers. In the marking of your lines in timber and 

the establishing and marking of your corners, whether in 

prairie or timber, particular care is to be taken, and such 

parts thereof as are not executed by yourself are to be personally inspected by you. The importance of this caution will be 

manifest, when you reflect that it is upon this evidence alone 

that the settler depends in locating or entering his land. 

STANDARD-CHAIN. 

Your chain, adjusted to the standard in this office, must be 

carefully guarded against all injury, and by it you will compare and adjust your measuring chain every morning after 

the latter has been in service, and note the difference between them in your field-book, and if none, then state that 

fact also. 

CORRECTIONS AND RESURVEYS. 

Full notes of every line and part of a line which you retrace, 

of every one which you re-establish, of every random line 

which it is necessary for you to run, whether measured or 

not-of every corner which you re-establish, alter or perfect-of every offset-of the elements of every distance 

obtained by triangulation, are to be carefully entered at the 

time in the proper place in your field books 

FIELD NOTES AND BOOKS. 

The second page in each field book must contain the names 

and duties of assistants then engaged upon your lines. 

Whenever you employ a new assistant or change the duty of 

one, the fact, with the cause thereof, must be given in an 

entry immediately preceding the notes taken under the new 

arrangements. 

The notes which you take in the field are to be returned to 

this office. With this view you will enter your notes, taken as 

above directed, in books containing a number of pages, that 

will admit of their being entered in every particular in conformity to these instructions. The books must be of regular 

form, size and material. If after the notes of any one or more 

townships are thus taken, the book or books are too much 

worn, soiled or defaced to be returned in conformity to said 

instructions, you will make out and submit, with the original, 

a fair handed and neat copy of the same. You are to use no 

other than black ink of the best quality. No erasures are to be 

made. If mistakes occur, the pen may be drawn across the 

erroneous entry, but always in such a manner that the words 

can be read afterwards. No leaves are to be cut, torn or 

otherwise taken out of your field books, as reason is thus 

given for 

suspicion that there was something upon the missing leaves 

which it was not to the interest of the deputy to have known. 

With these instructions you are furnished diagrams of each 

of the townships of your district upon a scale of two inches per 

mile, upon which are accurately laid down the respective 

boundaries of each township, the length of each of the closing 

lines, the magnetic variation of each mile, and at least two of 

the bearing trees, at all the section corners thereon, where 

bearings were taken. P. in M. signifies post in mound, the pits 

to which (unless it is otherwise stated) are in the direction 

and at the distance hereinbefore prescribed. 

DIAGRAMS. 

With your field notes you are to return a map of each 

township of your district, upon the scale above named, upon 

which is to be expressed the length and variation of each of 

your lines with all the topography neatly laid down. With a 

view to the completeness of these maps, you should make 

sketches of the topography as you progress with your lines, 

that you may be able to present not only the points upon your 

lines at which the same occurs, but also its direction and 

position between the lines or within each section, as every 

object of topography is to be properly closed or connected. 

These maps form the basis of all the official plats, and are 

carefully preserved in this office. 

SWAMP LANDS. 

By an act of Congress, approved September 28th, 1850, all 

of the swamp and overflowed lands that are unfit for cultivation, which were unsold at the date of the passage of the said 

act, were granted to the State or Territory in which said lands 

are located. In order that the field notes of surveys may 

hereafter clearly present the quantity and locality of the 

lands thus granted, you will, in addition to the objects of 

topography required by the foregoing instructions, note the 

point upon which you enter and leave all lands which are 

clearly the subject of the above grant, stating the character of 

the land thus noted, and whether it is a swamp or marsh, or 

subject from other cause to inundation, to an extent that 

would in the absence of artifical means render it uncultivable. The depth of inundation, if in timber, may be easily 

determined from the marks upon the trees, and its frequency 

may be ascertained, either from your knowledge of the gener390 
a1 character of the stream which overflows, or from the testimony of those residing upon or near the locality under examination. The usual phraseology for entering or leaving a 

swamp or marsh may be employed with the addi- 

[ 13 1 

tion of “unfit for cultivation;” but if the margin of bottom, 

swamp, or marsh in which uncultivable land exists is not 

identical with the margin of such uncultivable land, then a 

separate entry must be made for each opposite the marginal 

distance at which they respectively occur. 

LANDS OVERFLOWED BY ARTIFICIAL MEANS. 

When lands are overflowed by artificial means (say by 

dams for milling, logging or other purposes) you will in no 

instance set meander posts, but continue your lines across 

said overflowed tract, in the manner directed in the foregoing 

instructions, stating particularly in your notes the depth of 

water and how the overflow is caused. 

ERRORS IN TOWN LINES. 

Should you find a manifest error in the measurement of 

any of the township lines of your district, you are to correct 

the same by resurveying and re-establishing such line or 

lines, from the point where the error was detected, to the 

north or west end thereof, noting your intersection with each 

one of the erroneous corners as you progress, which you are to 

demolish and deface with all evidences thereof. Of such remeasurement and corrections you are to take full and complete field notes, in a separate book, to be returned to the 

Surveyor General’s office, with the field notes of your subdivision. 

HOW AND WHAT TO MEANDER. 

1. In subdividing any one township, you are to meander as 

hereinafter directed, any lake or lakes, pond or ponds, lying 

entirely within the boundaries thereof, of the area of forty 

acres and upwards, and which cannot be drained and are not 

likely to fill up, or from any cause to become dry. 

2. Whenever required by special instructions, to meander 

any stream or body of water, passing through or lying within 

your district, you are also to meander all islands situated 

therein. 

3. Standing with your face towards the mouth of a stream, 

the bank on your left hand, is termed the left bank, and that 

upon your right hand, the right bunk. These terms are to be 

universally used to distinguish the two banks of a river, both 

in running lines and meandering. 

4. In meandering rivers, you are to commence at a meander corner in the township boundary, and take the course and 

distance of the bank upon which you commence, to a meander 

corner upon the same or another boundary of the same 

township, carefully noting your inter- 

[ 14 1 

section with all intermediate meander corners. By the same 

method you are to meander the opposite bank of the same 

river. 

5. In meandering lakes, ponds or bayous, you are to commence at a meander corner upon the township line and proceed as above directed for the banks of a navigable stream, 

except where a lake, pond or bayou lies entirely within the 

township boundaries, when you will commence at a meander 

corner established in subdividing, and from thence take the 

course and distance of the entire margin thereof. 

6. To meander a pond, lying entirely within the boundaries of a section, you will run a random line thereto from the 

nearest section or quarter section corner. At the point where 

this random line intersects the margin of such pond, you will 

establish a witness point, by fixing a post in the ground and 

raising a mound or taking bearings, as at a meander corner, 

except that the post and the large face upon the bearing trees 

will be marked with the letter W. only. 

7. In meandering islands, you are to proceed as directed in 

sections 5 and 6 of this chapter, except that where there are 

no meander corners established upon an island, you are to 

take the course and distance of your starting point from the 

nearest meander corner, instead of section or quarter section 

corner. 

8. The meanders of each fractional section, or between any 

two meander posts, or of a pond or island interior of a section, 

must close within one chain and fifty links. 

9. Your field notes of meanders in any one township, are to 

follow immediately after the notes of the subdivision thereof. 

They are to state and describe, particularly, the meander 

corner from which they commenced, each one with which 

they close, and are to exhibit the meanders of each fractional 

section separately; following and composing a part of which, 

will be given a description of the land, timber, depth of inundation to which the bottom is subject, and the banks, current 

and bottom of the stream or body of water you are meandering. 

10. To furnish data that will enable this office to fix their 

exact location, you will note in the proper place in the meanders of each fractional section the exact position and extent of 

all falls and rapids, fords, portages and mill sites existing in, 

or connected with the river or other body of water which you 

are meandering. 

11. No blazes or marks of any description are to be made 

upon your meander lines, though the utmost care must be 

taken to pass no object of topography, or change therein, 

without giving a particular description thereof in its proper 

place in your meander notes. 

[ 15 1 

FIELD NOTES. 

1. Your field notes are to form a full and perfect history of 

your operations in the field. 

2. The field notes of the subdivision of every township, 

whether fractional or not, are to be written in a separate 

book. 

3. Description of the timber, undergrowth, surface, soil 

and minerals, upon each section line, is to follow the notes 

thereof, and not to be mixed with them. 

4. The language of your field notes must be so concise and 

clear, the hand in which they are written so plain and legible, 

391 
that no doubt can exist as to your figures, letters, words or 

meaning. 

5. No abbreviations are to be made in your field notes, 

except such as relate to course, to express which, the proper 

combinations of the capital letters, N. S. E. and W. are to be 

used; except when a course is exactly to a cardinal point, in 

which case it is to be written in full. 

6. The description of each mile must be independent, and 

not refer to a preceding description. 

7. The date of each day’s work must follow immediately 

after the notes thereof. 

8. All rivers, creeks and other streams, lakes, ponds, 

prairies, swamps, marshes, groves, hills, bluffs, windfalls, 

roads and trails, are to be distinguished in your field notes by 

their original and received names only, and where such 

names cannot be ascertained or do not exist your imagination 

is not to supply them. 

9. Your field notes must be kept in the exact form of the 

specimen herewith furnished you. 

Objects and data to be embraced in your field notes. 

You are to enter in their proper places in the field notes of 

your survey, a particular description and the exact location of 

the following objects:- 

1. The length and variation or variations of every line you 

run. 

2. The name and diameter of all bearing trees, with the 

course and distance of the same from their respective corners. 

3. The name of the material of which you construct 

mounds, with the course and distance to the pits. 

4. The name, diameter and exact distance to all those trees 

which your lines intersect. 

5. At what distance you enter, and at what distance you 

leave every river, creek or other “bottom,” prairie, swamp, 

marsh, grove or windfall, with the course of the same at both 

points of intersection. 

[ 16 1 

6. The surface, whether level, rolling, broken or hilly. 

7. The soil, whetiier first, second or third rate. 

8. The several kinds of timber and undergrowth, naming 

the timber in the order of its prevalency. 

9. All rivers, creeks and smaller streams of water, with 

their actual or right angled widths, course, banks, current 

and bed, at the points where your lines cross. 

10. A description of all bottom lands-whether wet or dry, 

and if subject to inundation, state to what depth. 

11. All springs of water, and whether fresh, saline or 

mineral, with the course and width of the stream flowing 

from them. 

12. All lakes and ponds, describing their banks and the 

depth and quality of their water. 

13. All coal banks, precipices, caves, sink-holes, quarries 

and ledges with the character and quality of the same. 

14. All water-falls and mill sites. 

15. All towns and villages, houses, cabins, fields and sugar 

16. All metalliferous minerals or ores, and all diggings 

camps, factories, furnaces and other improvements. 

therefor, with particular descriptions of both, that may come 

to your knowledge, whether intersected by your lines or not. 

17. All roads and trails, with the courses they bear. 

18. All offsets or calculations by which you obtain the 

length of such parts of your lines as cannot be measured with 

the chain. 

19. The precise course and distance of all witness corners 

from the true corners which they represent. 

AFFIDAVIT. 

1. Following the field notes and general descriptions, in 

each of your field books, an affidavit of the following form is to 

be written, and to be signed by yourself and each of your 

assistants in the field:- 

I, A. B., Deputy Surveyor, do solemnly swear (or affirm) 

that, in pursuance of a contract with C. D., Surveyor General 

of the United States for Wisconsin and Iowa, bearing date the 

day of , and in strict conformity to the laws of the 

United States, and the instructions of the said Surveyor 

General, I have regularly surveyed 

principal meridian (State or Territory) of 

,18 

and I do further solemnly swear (or affirm) 

[ 17 1 

that the foregoing are the true and original field notes of the 

said survey, executed as aforesaid. 

A. B., Deput.y -. Surve.yor. 

G. H, 

J. K. } Chainmen. 

L. M., Marker. 

N. O., Flagman. 

Subscribed by said A. B., Deputy Surveyor, and sworn 

before me at this day of 18 .P. 

Q., Justice of the Peace (or other officer authorized to administer oaths) of in the county of State (or 

Territory) of 

2. Your attention is directed to the following section of an 

act of Congress, approved, August 8th, 1846, entitled “An Act 

to equalize the compensation of Surveyors General of the 

public lands of the United States, and for other purposes:” 

3. “That the Surveyors General of the public lands of the 

United States, in addition to the oath now authorized by law 

to be administered to deputies on their appointment to office, 

shall require each of their deputies, on the return of his 

surveys, to take and subscribe an oath or affirmation that 

those surveys have been faithfully and correctly executed, 

according to law and the instructions of the SurveyorGeneral; and, on satisfactory evidence being presented to any 

court of competent jurisdiction that such surveys, or any part 

thereof, had not been thus executed, the deputy making such 

false oath or affirmation shall be deemed guilty of pedury, 

and shall suffer all the pains and penalties attached to that 

offence; and the district attorney of the United States for the 

time being, in whose district any such false, erroneous, or 

fraudulent surveys shall have been executed, shall, upon the 

application of the proper Surveyor General, immediately institute suit upon the bond of such deputy; and the institution 

392 
of such suit shall act as a lien upon any property owned or 

held by such deputy, or his sureties, at the time such suit was 

instituted.” 

The above section of the said law applies to the foregoing 

affidavit, and will be in all particulars and in every instance, 

rigidly enforced. 

GENERAL REMARKS. 

Your attention is particularly directed to the following 

specimen of field notes, which will illustrate the order and 

method of performing the work, and the manner in which 

your field notes are to be returned, and 

[ 18 1 

is to be regarded, therefore, as a part of these general instructions, any departure from which, without special authority, 

will be considered a violation of your contract and oath, and a 

forfeiture to all claim of payment. As your work will be 

rigidly examined in the field, by a Deputy appointed by this 

office for the special purpose, any neglect on your part cannot 

fail to be reported, and the penalty, however disagreeable, 

will certainly be enforced. 

[ 19 1 

SURVEY 

OF 

TOWNSHIP LINES, 

MADE BY 

GEORGE TAYLOR, 

UNDER CONTRACT, DATED MAY 16TH, 1851. 

[ 20 1 

NAMES OF ASSISTANTS. 

CHAINS 

1,oo 

5,OO 

8,OO 

10,oo 

17,OO 

40,OO 

46,50 

66,OO 

69,50 

69,75 

80,OO 

40,OO 

42,OO 

43,OO 

56,50 

80,OO 

West, between sections 1 and 36, 

Black Creek, runs S. E. 

Road to Stephen’s Point, bears N. 20 W. 

Black Creek, 20 links wide, runs N. E. 

Enterfield, bearsS. W. 

Leave field, bearsN. W., Road bearsN. W. 

Enter marsh bottom, N. W. unfit for cultivation, and set 

Variation 7” 15’ East, 

quarter section post, 

Oak, 12N. 77E. 114links, i Bur Oak, 9 N. 45 W. 240 links, Bearings 

Stream, 20 links wide, runs S. E. 

A house bears N. 20 W. 

A house bears N. 4 W. 

Leave marshy bottom, bears N. 45 W. unfit for cultivation. 

Subject to inundation 2 feet deep. A house bears N. 19 E. 

Another house bears N. 40 E. 

Stream 20 links wide, runs N. E. 

Enter bottom-unfit for cultivation. 

Set posts for corners to sections 1,2,35 and 36. 

Bur Oak, 10 N. 22 E. 34links, 

Bur Oak, 9 N. 41 W. 65 links, 

Black and White Oak; good quality openings. 

Surface, gently rolling; soil sand and loam, 2d rate; timber 

West between sections 2 and 25, 

Set post for ?4 section corner, 

Variation 7” 15‘ East, 

White Oak, 29 N. 25 E. 370 links, 

Black Oak, 10 N. 5 E. 325 links, 

James Adam’s house bears N. 50 W. 

John Munroe’s house bears S. 12 E. 

Bend of stream S. E. 

Leave bend of stream S. W. Road from Princeton to Steven’s 

point. 

Road to Irvin’s Mill, bears S. 80 W. 

A house bears S. 70 E.; another N. 65 E. 

Set posts for corner to sections 2,3,34 and 35, 

White Oak, 7 N. 44 E. 15 links, 

Black Oak, 10 N. 83 W. 52 links, 

Between Townships 26 and 27 North, Range 11 East of 4th 

Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

Between Townships 26 and 27 North, Range 11 East of 4th 

Meridian. 

Black Oak, 10 S. 15 W. 35 links, 

White Oak, 18 S. 17 E. 39 links, 

Surface gently rolling; soil 2d rate, 

Timber, Black and White Oak. 

Chainmen. I STEPHEN SUMNER, 

THOMAS SPRING, 

DAVID WINTER, Axeman. 

JOHN SMITH, Flagman. 

[ 21 1 

TOWNSHIP LINES. 

4,33 

7,50 

15,50 

17,OO 

40,OO 

53,OO 

59,22 

80,OO 

West, between sections 3 and 34, 

A. Spencer’s house bears S. 35 W. 

Enter Mrs. Ford’s field, bears North, 

Spencer’s house bears S. 20 E. 

Mrs. Ford’s house bears S. 45 W. 

Variation 7” 15’ East, 

Leave field. House bears S. E. 

Enter marsh; bears N. W.; unfit for cultivation. 

Set post for ?4 section corner, 

Black Oak, 12 N. 54 W. 728 links, 

Black Oak, 12 S. 89?h W. 1350 links, 

Leave marsh, bears S. 50 E. 

White Oak, 8 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to sections 3,4,33 and 34, 

Black Oak, 13 N. 78 W. 26 links, 

Black Oak, 13 N. 65 E. 41 links, 

Black Oak, 14 S. 42 W. 80 links, 

Surface, level; soil wet, 2drate; Oak openings. 

393 
40,OO 

52,OO 

80,OO 

CHAINS. 

8,29 

32,OO 

40,OO 

80,OO 

00,50 

13,OO 

18,OO 

39,OO 

40,OO 

North, between sections 31 and 36, 

Black Oak, 9 inches in diameter, 

Enter marsh, bears East and West; unfit for cultivation, 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Tamarac, 10 S. 9 W. 147 links, 

Tamarac, 10 S. 8 E. 124 links, 

Black Oak, 7 S. 85 W. 198 links, 

Aspen, 10 N. 10 W. 189 links, 

Tamarac, 8 S. 3% E. 440 links, 

No other tree near on N. E. 

Variation 7" 15' E. 

Set posts for corner to sections 25,30,31 and36, 

Surface, level; soil sandy, 2d rate; timber, Black Oak. 

West, between sections 4 and 33, 

Variation 7" 15' East, 

Enter swamp, bears N. E. and S. E. 

White Oak, 12 N. 35 W. 65 links, 

White Oak, 12 S. 77 E. 137 links, 

Set post for '/4 section corner, 

Leave swamp; bears N. W. 

Set post for corner to sections 4,5,32 and 33, 

White Oak, 12 N. 79 E. 175 links, 

White Oak, 18 N. 5 W. 228 links, 

White Oak, 14 S. 1 E. 312 links, 

White Oak, 14 S. 2 W. 317 links, 

Timber, Black Oak, Tamarac and White Oak. 

Surface, level and wet, mostly marsh; unfit for cultivation. 

West, between sections 5 and 32, 

Enter Tamarac swamp, bears north and south; unfit for 

cultivation, 

Leave swamp, 

Black Creek, 20 links wide, runs S. E. 

Leave marsh, bears N. W. 

Set post for Y4 section corner, 

Variation 7" 15' East, 

Black Oak, 14 N. 89% W. 335 links, 

Black Oak, 10 S. 14 W. 224links, 

[ 23 1 

Between Townships 26 and 27 North, Range 11 East of 4th 

CHAINS. 

55,OO 

79,OO 

80.00 

25,OO 

38,OO 

40,OO 

41,50 

50,50 

13.72 

Meridian. 

Enter marsh, bears S. E. 

Leave same, N. 80 E. and S. E. 

Set post corner to sections 5,6,31 and 32, 

Black Oak, 10 S. 20 W. 25 links, 

White Oak, 12 S. 30 E. 36 links, 

White Oak, 14N. 40 E. 49 links, 

Black Oak, 16 N. 50 W. 64 links, 

Timber, Black Oak, Tamarac and White Oak, 

Surface level and wet; mostly marsh unfit for cultivation. 

West, between sections 6 and 31, 

Enter swamp, bears south, 

Leave same, bears S. W. 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 7" 25' East, 

Black Oak, 9 N. 45 W. 57 links, 

Black Oak, 20 S. 11 E. 52 links, 

Enter field, bears S. 50 W. 

Leave same, bearsN. 30 W. 

Intersect range line 58,02 chains South of temporary post, 

and set post for corner to townships 26 and 27 North, 

ranges 10 and 11 East ofthe 4th meridian, 

Black Oak, 8 N. 1 W. 10 links, 

Black Oak, 10 N. 4 E. 8 links, 

Black Oak, 12 S. 9 E. 27 links, 

Black Oak, 14 S. 16 W. 64 links, 

principally Black Oak. 

Surface, gently rolling; soil sandy, 2d rate. Timber 

June 2d, 1851. 

~ ~~ 

Measuring chain compared with standard chain and found to 

be correct. 

TOWNSHIP 27 NORTH. 

Between Ranges 10 and 11 East of the 4th Meridian. 

[ 24 1 

TOWNSHIP 27 NORTH. 

Between Ranges 10 and 11 East of the 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

5,OO 

15,OO 

40,OO 

65,OO 

80,OO 

16,OO 

40,OO 

80,OO 

3,OO 

40,OO 

63,50 

69,50 

17,OO 

80.00 

North, between sections 25 and 30, 

Leave marsh, bears East and West, 

Enter same, bears East and West; unfit for cultivation, 

Set '/4 section post, 

Variation 7" 30' East, 

Aspen, 10 S. 10 W. 80 links, 

White Pine, 12 S. 35 W. 79 links, 

Leave marsh, bears East and West, 

Set post for corner to sections 19,24,25 and 30, 

Black Oak, 20 S. 34 W. 50 links, 

Black Oak, 15 N. 75 W. 238 links, 

Black Oak, 12 N. 61 E. 122 links, 

Black Oak, 10 S. 6 E. 65 links. 

Tamarac and Birch. 

Surface, level; soil sandy, 3d rate; timber, Black Oak, 

North, between sections 19 and24, 

Enter marsh, bears East and West; unfit for cultivation, 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 7", 50' East, 

Aspen, 12 N. 42 W. 159 links, 

Black Oak, 9 S. 57 E. 78 links, 

Tamarac, 10 S. 62 W. 42 links, 

Tamarac, 12 N. 61 W. 57 links, 

Tamarac, 12 N. 50 E. 74 links, 

Tamarac, 8 S. 7 E. 140 links, 

Black Oak. 

Set post for corner to sections 13,18,19 and 24, 

Surface level; soil sandy, 3d rate; timber Tamarac and 

North, between sections 13 and 18, 

Leave marsh, bears East and West, 

Set quarter section post, 

White Oak, 18 S. 20 W. 38 links, 

Black Oak, 14 N. 61 E. 50 links, 

Enter marsh, bears East and West, 

Leave same; unfit for cultivation, 

Road from Princeton to Pinery, bears N. W. 

Set post for corner to sections 7,12,13 and 18, 

Variation 7" 55' East, 

Black Oak, 10 N. 81 W. 112 links, 

Black Oak, 12 S. 34 W. 110 links, 

White Oak, 15 S. 13 E. 6links, 

White Oak, 14 N. 84 E. 58 links, 

Tamarac. 

Surface level; soil sandy, 3d rate; timber Black Oak and 

394 
TOWNSHIP 27 NORTH. 

Between Ranges 10 and 11 East of the 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

30,OO 

31,50 

34,OO 

40,OO 

15,93 

53,80 

86.70 

North, between sections 1 and 6, 

Enter Lunch Creek bottom; unfit for cultivation; bears 

Lunch Creek, 20 links wide, 30 inches deep; runs S. E.; 

Leave creek bottom, bears S. E. 

Set post for quarter section corner, 

Black Oak, 10 N. 73 W. 14 links, 

Black Oak, 12 S. 82 E. 23 links, 

Black Oak 18 inches in diameter, 

Double Black Oak 30 inches in diameter, 

Set post for corner to Townships 27 and 28 North; ranges 10 

Variation 8" East, 

East and West, 

current swift; banks low; bed sand, 

and 11 East of the 4th Meridian, 

Bur Oak, 20 N. 14 W. 175 links, 

Bur Oak, 16 S. 24 W. 274 links, 

Bur Oak, 19 S. 6 E. 307 links, 

Black Oak, 22 N. 80 E. 75 links, 

Bur and White Oak, very scattering; undergrowth, Alder, 

Hazel and Oak. 

Surface rolling; soil sandy; 2d rate; timber, Aspen, Black 

June 4th, 1851. 

Measuring chain compared with standard chain, found to be 

Vz an inch too short; adjusted same. 

TOWNSHIP 27 NORTH. 

Between Ranges 11 and 12 East of the 4th Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

2,oo 

3,79 

40,OO 

44,50 

65,50 

78,OO 

North, between sections 31 and 36, 

Road bears West, 

White Oak, 15 inches in diameter, 

Set post for V4 section corner, 

Bur Oak, 9 N. 34 W. 82 links, 

Bur Oak, 11 N. 19 E. 150 links, 

Enter J. Slocum's field; bears West, 

Leave same; bears West; Slocum's house bears N. 60 W.; 

Daniel Green's N. 18 E. 10 chains, 

Enter field; bears West; E. J. Johnson's house bears West 

8 chains, 

Variation 7" 20' East, 

80.00 Set post for corner to sections 25,30,31 and 36, 

Bur Oak, 20 S. 32" 30' W. 242 links, 

Black Oak, 10 S. 14" 15' E. 379links. 

Blackoak, lON.22"45'E.719links, 

No other tree on N. W. 

Surface level; soil sandy; 2d rate. 

(Pages 26 through 29 Deleted. The notes are of the east and 

north boundaries of the township and in the same order, style 

and format.) 

[ 30 1 

AFFIDAVIT. 

I, George Taylor, Deputy Surveyor, do solemn,] swear that 

in pursuance of a contract with Surveyor 

General of the United States, for Wisconsin and Iowa, dated 

May 16, 1851, and in strict conformity to the laws of the 

United States, and the instructions of said Surveyor General, 

I have regularly surveyed and established the following 

Township Boundaries, situated East of the Fourth Principal 

Meridian, in the State of Wisconsin, viz:-Lines between 

Ranges 10 and 11 and 11 and 12 of Township 27, and Lines 

between Townships 26 and 27 and 27 and 28 of Range 11. And 

I do further solemnly swear, that the foregoing are the true 

and original field notes of the said survey executed as 

aforesaid. 

GEORGE TAYLOR, Deputy Surwyor. - - STEPHEN SUMNER, 

THOMAS SPRINGS, 

DAVID WINTER, Axeman. 

JOHN SMITH, Flagman. 

Subscribed by said George Taylor, Deputy Surveyor, and 

sworn to before me, at my office, in Washington, Franklin 

County, Wisconsin, this 11th day of July, 1851. 

ANDREW FULLER, Notary Public. 

{SEAL} 

Franklin Co., Wisconsin. 

395 
[ 31 1 Black Oak, 15 N. 78 E. 191 links, 

Bur Oak, 14 N. 86 W. 88 links, Bearings 

Old road from Hamilton to Stevens' Point, bears W. N. W. 

Enter marsh, crossing thin cane-brake, bears East and West 

Leavesame,bearsS.E.andN. W. 

Set post corner to sections 25,26,35 and36, 

White Oak, 19 S. 80 E. 125 links, 

Black Oak, 11 N. 77"30' E. 82 links, 

Black, White, and Bur Oak; no undergrowth 

Surface of South half level Woods; soil, 2drate; timber, 

66,OO 

70,75 

78,50 

80.00 

SUBDIVISION 

OF 

TOWNSHIP NO. 27 NORTH, 

OF 

RANGE 11 EAST OF 4TH PRINCIPAL 

MERIDIAN, 

WISCONSIN. 

COMMENCED MARCH 6TH, 1852; FINISHED MARCH 

23D, 1852; 

BY 

WM. A. JACKSON, DEP. SUR. 

East Random, between sections 25 and 36, 

Intersect range line 40 links South ofpost. 

Variation 7" 15' East, 

79,80 

West corrected, between sections 25 and 36, 

Variation 7" 32' East, 

Black Oak, 14 inches in diameter, 

White Oak, 17 inches diameter, 

Road from Hamlton to Stevens' Point, bears N. N. W. 

Set quarter section post, 

White Oak, 27 N. 42" 30' W. 50 links, 

White Oak, 19 S. 45" 30' W. 102 links, 

Enter marsh, bears North and South, 

Marsh waste and worthless, 

Leave same and enter Spruce swamp, 

Leave Spruce swamp for Moss marsh, 

19,25 

35,08 

39,75 

39,90 

43,40 

46,OO 

53,04 

[ 32 1 

NAMES OF ASSISTANTS. [ 34 1 

Township27North, Range 11 East of4th Principal Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

70,54 

79,80 

Chainmen. WM. VON ROGLE, 

HENRY STROUGHTON, } Leave Moss marsh, for Oak timber land, 

Section corner, 

Surface of West end not much elevated. The whole of the 

marsh uncultivable and impassable to horses and cattle. 

March 6, 1852. 

SAMUEL FROST, Axeman 

PETER SNOW, Flagman. Measuring chain compared with standard chain, and found 

correct. 

North, between sections 25 and 26, 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 8" 40' E. 

WhiteOak, 15N. 44"30' W. 115 links, 

Black Oak, 13 S. 55 E. 114?hlinks, 

Black Oak, 9 inches diameter, 

Enter small marsh with pond, 3 feet deep, covered with 

Leave same, bears East and West, 

Set post corner of sections 23,24,25 and 26, 

Black Oak, 20 N. 70 E. 142 links, 

Blackoak, 18N. 77"30'W. 1741inks, 

marsh; timber chiefly Black and Scrub Oak; undergrowth 

Oak bushes and Hazel. 

grass, 

Surface undulating; Oak uplands but little elevated above 

[ 33 1 

Township27North, Range 11 East of4thPrincipal Meridian. 40,OO 

68,35 

74,95 

77,05 

80,OO 

Measuring chain compared with standard chain and adjusted 

thereto, it being found ?h inch too long. 

To determine the course of the East Boundary of the 

Township, I commence (with my compass adjusted at a 

variation of 7" 20' East) at the corner to Townships 26 

and 27, Ranges 11 and 12, and run thence North on a blank 

line, at 39,80 chain, fell 45 links East of quarter 

section post; at 79,61 chains, fell 99 links East of 

corner to sections 25 and 36, Township 27 North, Range 11 

East. 

From corner to Townships 26 and 27, Ranges 11 and 12, with 

compass adjusted at a variation of 7" 15' East, 1 run 

West on a blank line, along south boundary of section 36, 

Township 27 North, range 11 East; at 40,14 chains, fell 

25 links North ofquarter section corner; at 79,96, fell 

52 links North of corner to sections 35 and 36. 

East Random, between sections 24 and 25, 

Intersect range line 15 links south ofpost. 

West corrected, between sections 24 and 25, 

Variation 7" 38' East, 

Leave marsh, bears North and South, and cross dry ridge, 

Leave dry ridge and enter small marsh; bears N. E. and S. W. 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 7" 32' East, 

White Oak, 11 N. 21 W. 186 links, 

White Oak, 31 S. 70 W. 304links, 

Leave marsh; bears North and South, and rise high bluff, 

Section corner, 

80,20 

21,36 

38,86 

40,lO 

42,86 

80,20 

CHAINS 

33,50 

37,88 

40,OO 

North, between sections 35 and 36, 

New road from Hamilton to Stevens' Point, bears N. W. and 

Black Oak, 9 inches diameter, 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 8" 30' East, 

S. E. 

396 
22,38 

38,50 

40,OO 

42,41 

80,OO 

Surface East % of line flat and marshy; West 1% over 

dry Oak ridges; soil of upland 2d rate; timber Black and 

White Oak; little undergrowth but Oak bushes. 

North, between sections 23 and 24, 

White Oak 20 inches diameter, 

Road from Hamilton to Stevens' Point; bears W. N. W. and 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 8" 45' East, 

S. S. E. 

White Oak, 9 S. 50 E. 26 links, 

White Oak, 8 West 280 links, 

Black Oak, 27 inches diameter, 

Set post corner of sections 13,14,23 and 24, 

35 1 

Township27North, Range 11 East of4th Principal Meridian. 

CHAINS 

80,64 

14,39 

14,89 

17,95 

25,64 

40,32 

65,14 

65,64 

80.64 

15,08 

27,OO 

28,OO 

40,OO 

80,OO 

~~ 

White Oak, 13 N. 88 W. 950 links, 

White Oak, 23 S. 81"30' W. 936 links, 

Surface varying between marsh and upland; soil for the most 

part poor; timber, White and Black Oak; undergrowth, 

Whortleberry and Hazel. 

East Random, between sections 13 and 24, 

Intersect range line 67 links North of post. 

West corrected, between sections 13 and 24, 

Variation 7" 1' East, 

Intersect left bank of White River, 50 links wide, runs 

Variation 7" 30' East, 

South; swift, strong current; sandy bottom, 4 to 10 feet 

deep; clear water; banks in some places set with Willow 

and Black Alder, in others clear of bushes, 

bears North and South, 

same, 

and S. W. 

Black Oak, 12 S. 14"30' E. 498 links, 

Blackoak, llS.40"30'E.4941inks, 

Leave marsh for narrow point of timber, 

Leave same for irreclaimable marsh, 

Section corner, 

Surface level; East of White River, a White Ash and Alder 

swamp, mixed with Poplars and Tamaracs; land next West of 

White River firm; first rate bottom; land with here and 

there scraggy Jack Oaks. 

Gain right bank of river and pass bayou or old channel; 

Gain West bank of bayou, bears N. E. and S. E. and leave 

Leave firm bottom land for uncultivable marsh; bears North 

Set quarter section post, 

North between sections 13 and 14, 

Leave Tamarac swamp for open marsh, 

Leave wet marsh, bears East and S. W. and enter dry meadow, 

Leave meadow for Oak openings, 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 7" 30' East, 

Black Oak, 18 N. 14 W. 105 links, 

BlackOak, 11N. 62"30fE.2471inks, 

Set post corner ofsetions 11,12,13, and 14, 

Black Oak, 9 N. 78 W. 87 links, 

Poplar, 10 S. 70E. 35 links, 

South YZ 3d rate, on North YZ 2d rate; timber, Black 

and Bur Oak and Poplar. 

Surface level; a little raised through timber; soil on 

March 8. 1852 

[ 36 1 

Township27North, Range 11 East of4th Principal Meridian. 

CHAINS 

80,86 

36,26 

36,76 

40,43 

66,96 

80,86 

1,50 

22,15 

22,70 

35,OO 

40,OO 

41,lO 

67,OO 

80,OO 

80,66 

1,46 

9,91 

40.33 

Measuring chain compared with standard chain, found to be 

Yz an inch too short; adjusted same. 

East Random, between sections 12 and 13, 

Intersect range line 26 links North of post. 

West, corrected, between sections 12 and 13, 

Variation 7" 19' East, 

Intersect left bank of White River, 50 links wide; runs 

Gained right bank of same, 

Set quarter section post in a mound of earth and sod; pit 8 

Leave marsh, bears W. N. W. and S. E. and enter Poplar and 

Section corner, 

Surface level; soil, along White River bottom, rich and 

subject to inundation to depth of 3 feet; but little 

timber on line, except at West end, which is densely 

covered with White Poplar, Alder and White Birch. 

Variation 7" 30' East, 

South, 

links East, 

White Birch copse, 

North, between sections 11 and 12, 

Enter marsh ofWhite River bottom; bears East and West, 

Right bank of White River, 55 links wide; runs East, 

Gain left bank of same, 

Enter Tamarac swamp; bears East and West, 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 7" East, 

Tamarac, 10 N. 71" 30' E. 31 links, 

Tamarac, 10 S. 43" 15' W. 23 links, 

Tamarac, 8 inches diameter, 

Leave Tamarac swamp; bears East and West, 

Set post corner ofsections 1,2,11 and 12, 

Black Oak, 14 N. 36E. 30 links, 

White Oak, 12 S. 14 W. 42 links, 

Tamarac. 

Surface level; soil 2d rate; timber Black and White Oak and 

East Random, between sections 1 and 12, 

Intersect range line 71 links North ofpost. 

Variation 7" 30' East, 

West corrected, between sections 1 and 12, 

Variation 7" East, 

Black Oak, 13 inches diameter, 

Bur Oak, 8 inches diameter, 

Set quarter section post, 

Black Oak, 10 N. 47 E. 278 links, 

Bur Oak, 7 S. 10 W. 97 links, 

(Pages 37 through 52 deleted. The notes continue in the same 

order, style and format.) 

[ 53 1 

Township27North, Range 11 East of4th Principal Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

67,25 

80,29 

71,54 

Leave marsh; bears N. W. and S. E. 

Section corner, 

Surface generally flat; at West end of line a little 

elevated soil, 2d rate; timber, Black Oak ofpoor 

quality; blue joint grass along White River bottom. 

West Random, between sections 17 and 18, 

Intersect range line 73 links North of post. 

Variation 9" 18' East, 

East corrected, between sections 7 and 18, 

Variation 9" 49' East, 

397 
Road from Princeton to Dacotah; bears North and South, 

3ldroad from Princeton to Pinery; bears North and South, 

3et quarter section post, 

Blackoak, 15N. 17 W. 187 links, 

Black Oak, 22 S. 3"30' W. 179 links, 

Enter marsh, good for hay; bears N. W. and S. E. 

Leave same; bears N. W. and S. E. 

Enter inundated marsh; bears North, West and South, 

Leave same; bears N. W. and S. E. 

Section corner, 

Surface flat; soil, except marsh, 2d rate; little or no 

undergrowth. 

March 20, 1852. 

61,lO 

70,lO 

71,60 

Leave inundated marsh for Tamarac swamp, 

Leave swamp; bears North and South, 

Section corner, 

Surface low; soil almost worthless; marshes subject to 

inundation; scattering timber of White and Black Oak, 

White Birch and Black Ash. 

12,54 

15,79 

31,54 

42,50 

42,56 

60,53 

69,14 

71,54 

~~ 

85.23 

North Random, between sections 5 and 6, 

Intersect South boundary of Township 28 North, range 11 

Variation 7" 55' East, 

East, 254 links East of corner to sections 31 and 32. 

South corrected, between sections 5 and 6, 

White River, 50 links wide; runs S. W.; 4 to 10 feet deep 

sandy bottom; current gentle; banks bushy, 

Over same to left hank and enter Oak openings, 

Enter wet marsh, unfit for cultivation, bears S. W. and 

Set quarter section post in marsh, 

Variation 9" 37' East, 

E. N. E. 

White Birch, 7 N. 17 E. 178 links, 

Measuring chain compared with standard chain, and found 3/4 

of an inch too short; adjusted the same. 

2,56 

3,28 

31,OO 

45,23 

North, between sections 7 and 8, 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 7" 50' East, 

Tamarac, 9 S. 81 W. 82 links, 

Tamarac, 12 S. 54 E. 60 links, 

Tamarac, 7 N. 89 E, 27 links, 

Swamp Oak, 6 S. 17 W. 42 links, 

4 chains East on to line; therefore at 

White Oak, 14 N. 9 W. 56 links, 

Black Oak, 12 N. 37 E. 62 links, 

South side of Mud Lake and set meander post, 

Thence offset 4 chains West; thence 15 chains North; thence 

North side of Mud Lake and set a meander post, 

BlackOak 10 inchesdiameter, 

Set a post for corner to sections 5,6,7 and 8, 

Black Oak, 13 N. 73 E. 147 links, 

Black Oak, 11 S. 87 E. 153 links, 

treacherous soil; timber, Black and White Oak; not much 

undergrowth. 

Surface flat; soil 2d rate; margin of Lake oozy, 

40,OO 

46,OO 

61,OO 

65,OO 

80,OO 

[ 55 1 

Township 2 7North, Range 11 East of4th Principal Meridian. 

Tamarac, 10 S. 23 E. 187 links, 

Leave wet marsh; bears East and West, 

Section corner, 

Surface, except marsh, slightly undulating; soil 2d rate; 

timber, White and Black Oak; marsh unfit for cultivation; 

White Birch and a few Tamaracs of poor quality. 

CHAINS. 

48,73 

85,23 

- - March 22d, 1852. 

Meanders of Mud Lake, situated 

within sections 7 and 8, beginning 

at meander post on South side of Lake 

between sections 7 and 8, thence 

Insection8.-Var. 7"55'East, [ 54 1 ;HAINS. 

5,91 

10,67 

10,oo 

10,3 

5,50 

7,OO 

8,03 

7,82 

4,OO 

5,OO 

10,42 

8,50 

8,41 

9,24 

4,22 

7,74 

4,37 

9,00 

6,23 

2,75 

7,Ol 

9.50 

COURSES. 

S.3"30'E. 

S. 26,30 E. 

S. 60,30 E. 

S. 74,15 E. 

S. 70,30 E. 

S. 69,45 E. 

S. 51 E. 

S. 73 E. 

N. 56 E. 

N. 27 E. 

N. 23 E. 

N. 7,45 W. 

N. 31,39 W. 

N. 40,30 W. 

N. 58,45 W. 

N. 62 W. 

S. 70,15 W. 

West, 

N. 59,30 W. 

N. 31,30 W. 

N. 65 W. 

N. 67 W. 

Township27North, Range 11 East of4thPrincipal Meridian. 

East Random, between sections 5 and 8, 

Intersect Meridian section line 98 links North ofpost. 

Variation 7" 30' East, 

CHAINS. 

80,99 

West corrected, between sections 5 and 8, 

Leave marsh for Poplar swamp; bears North and South, 

Leave swamp; bears North and South, 

Road from Hamilton to Plover Portage; bears N. N. E. and 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 6" 49' East, 

S. S. E. 

Black Oak, 10 S. 19 W. 53 links, 

White Oak, 8 N. 17 W. 47 links, 

Section corner, 

Surface rolling, except marsh; soil 2d rate; timber, White 

and Black Oak; undergrowth Scrub Oak. 

To South-east corner of Lake, 

At 1,00, White River 60 links wide; runs 

8,OO East. 

10,50 

37,85 

40,491/2 

80,99 

West Random, between sections 6 and 7, 

Variation 7" 30' East, 

Intersect range line 258 links North of post. To meander corner on North side of Lake 

between sections 7 and 8; shore of 

Lake flat, almost all a marsh. 

71,60 

East corrected between sections 6 and 7. 

Road from Princeton to Pinery; bears North and South, 

Set quarter section post, 

Variation 9" 33' East, 

White Birch, 7 N. 17 W. 77 links, 

Black Ash, 16 S. 18 W. 88 links, 

Enter marsh; bears No.rth and South, 

White River, 50 links wide; runs South, 

Over same, water deep, gentle current, and enter wet marsh, 

N. 67 W. 

S. 25 W. 

S. 18 W. 

S. 19,30 E. 

S. 33 E. 

2,oo 

5,90 

434 

6,65 

6.78 

In section 7-Variation 7" 55' 

At 2,OO chains White River, 150 links 

22,50 

31,60 

47,57 

52,31 

52,81 

wide, comes in, 

To meander post on South side of Lake, 

place of beginning; South shore very 

398 
wet; marsh almost impassable; water 

of Lake turbid, about six feet deep; 

but little timber along shore. 

[ 56 1 

TownshipZ7North, Range 11 East of4th Principal Meridian. 

ll N. 68, 15 E. 

COURSES. 

S. 64 W. 

S.3OW. 

S. 37 E. 

S. 14,30E. 

S. 5,30E. 

S. 18,15 E. 

N. 19E. 

N. 87 E. 

S. 57,45 E. 

S. 34,30 E. 

S. 15,45 W. 

S. 38,15 W. 

S. 73,45 E. 

S. 69,15E. 

N. 44,45 E. 

N. 1,30E. 

N. 80,45 W. 

N. 26,45 E. 

N. 14,45 W. 

N. 63,45 W. 

N. 76 W. 

N. 65,45 W. 

N. 39 W. 

5,44 To the meander witness post, place of 

beginning; banks ofLake high; water 

clear and deep; banks skirted with 

White, Black and Bur Oak. 

March 12, 1852. 

S.49E. 

N.88E. 

S. 71 E. 

:HAINS. 

38,36 

9,00 

4,11 

4,50 

6,36 

5,OO 

3,79 

6,OO 

1,08 

3,76 

4,54 

2,74 

11 ,oo 

8,50 

7,50 

7,50 

6,64 

5,25 

13,50 

6,OO 

6,37 

11,oo 

1,43 

1,86 

4,87 

9,oo 

5,99 

Meanders of a Lake in section 7-leaving 

quarter section post between sections 

6 and 7, thence running S. 30 W. 

Variation 7" 35' E. 

Strike Lake and set a meander witness 

post on North shore of same, 

Black Oak, 13 N. 48 W. 50 links, 

Black Oak, 9 N. 57 E. 36 links, 

Beginning at this post thence 

To the place ofbeginning; banks of Lake 

3 to 8 feet high; water clear. 

March 23, 1852. 

Meanders of Comstock's Lake in section 

From quarter post, between sections 2 and 

No. 11, 

11, Variation 7" 45' East; run a line 

S. 15 E. 18 chains to bank oflake 

and set a witness post, taking 

bearings, 

Black Oak, 16N. 37 W. 45 links, 

White Oak, 20 N. 89 E. 27 links, 

thence on North side of Lake, 

Variation 78 45 East, 

[ 57 

Township27North, Range 11 East of4th Principal Meridian. 

COURSES. 

S. 85 E. 

S. 13 E. 

S. 58 W. 

S. 8 E. 

N. 66 W. 

N. 20 W. 

N. 40 W. 

N. 11 W. 

CHAINS. 

5,38 

7,13 

8,56 

9,45 

11,72 

1,81 

15,22 

6,35 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION. 

This Township contains numerous small marshes, and a 

few of considerable extent. There are also several Tamarac 

swamps; most of them are unfit for cultivation, although 

some of the marshes are good for hay. The surface is generally 

level; a part is Upland, where the soil is first and second rate. 

Timber is scattered all over the Township, and is chiefly 

White and Black Oak. Poplars and White Birch trees line the 

margins of the marshes. The White River enters the 

Township near the Northwest corner, and runs in a Southerly course until it meets the Mud Lake, where it loses itself; 

resuming its course from the Eastern side of Lake, flows on 

with a gentle current in an Easterly direction. It is a narrow, 

deep stream, but not sufficiently adapted to the forming of a 

good motive power for mills. There are several improvements 

within the Township. There are two houses on the N. E. 1/4 of 

N. E. Y4 of section 36; also two other houses on the South 1/4 of 

S. W. 1/4 of the same section. An improvement of about ten 

acres on S. E. 1/4 of S. E. 1/4 of section 34. A house and 

improvement on S: E. 1/4 of section 8. 

[ 58 1 

Township27North, Range 11 East of4th Principal Meridian. 

AFFIDAVIT. 

I, William A. Jackson, Deputy Surveyor, do solemnly 

swear, that in pursuance of a contract with Surveyor General of the United States, for Wisconsin and Iowa, 

bearing date the first day of January, 106a.d. 1852, and in 

strict conformity to the laws of the United States and the 

instructions of said Surveyor General, I have regularly surveyed and subdivided into sections, Township No. 27 North of 

range No. 11 East of the Fourth Principal Meridian, State of 

Wisconsin. And I do further swear, that the foregoing are the 

true and original field notes of the said survey excuted as 

aforesaid. 

WM. A. JACKSON, Deputy Surueyor. 

WILLIAM VON ROGLE, 

HENRY STROUGHTER, 

SAMUEL FROST, Axeman. 

PETER SNOW, Flagman. 

Subscribed by said William A. Jackson, Deputy Surveyor, 

and sworn to before me at my office in Smithville, Jones 

County, Wisconsin, this 31st day of March, A.D. 1852. 

{SEAL) 

JAMES BROWN, 

Justice of the Peace. 

A. P. WOOD, Printer, 

Dubuque, Iowa, 

399 
xxx. 

(The following instructions are copied from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives. 

INSTRUCTIONS 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS 

TO 

OF THE 

UNITED STATES 

FOR THE DISTRICT OF 

ILLINOIS AND MISSOURI 

ST. LOUIS, MO. 

1856 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS, 

FOR 

SURVEYING PUBLIC LANDS 

AND 

PRIVATE CONFIRMED CLAIMS 

40 1 
-Page 1- [ 4. 1 

I Office of the Surveyor General for the States of 

Illinois and Missouri. 

St. Louis, 185 

To Esq., 

Deputy Surveyor. 

SIR: 

In the execution of Surveys under the authority of this 

office, the following General Instructions have been prepared 

for the government of the Deputy Surveyors, and must be 

strictly adhered to in all cases not otherwise provided for by 

special instructions, which may be rendered necessary on 

account of peculiar circumstances. 

[ 1. 1 

RULES TO BE OBSERVED IN SURVEYING 

GENERALLY. 

You will provide yourself with a compass of excellent quality and approved construction, having a nonious division, and 

movable sights; also, with two two-pole chains, of 50 links 

each. One of said chains must be adjusted to the standard in 

this office, and by it you will compare and adjust that which is 

used, at least once in every two days, and note their difference, if any, in your Field Book; and, if there is no difference, 

state the fact of your having compared and found them to 

agree. You must likewise be provided with a full set of tally 

rods, of iron or steel, or pointed therewith, and allow none 

others to be used but the precise number you shall have 

selected for that purpose. 

-Page 2- 

[ 2. 1 

Moral Integrity of hands. 

Your chain-men, axe-men and flag-men, must be men of 

strict moral integrity; none must be employed, in whom i mplicit confidence cannot be reposed. 

[ 3. 1 

Field Books and Hands. 

Each of your Field Books will commence with a list of your 

chain-men, axe-men and flag-men, then in your service, and 

intended to be employed in performing the surveys you are 

about to execute. The first book under your contract will 

contain an attested record of their oaths; and whenever you 

may employ any others, you will insert their names, together 

with their oaths, in your Field Book, before they are permitted to commence work. You will also, when a chain-man, 

axe-man or flag-man is dismissed, or quits work from any 

cause whatever, note it, together with the cause of his dismissal, or the reason for which he quits work, and refer thereto 

by a note in the front part of your book. 

Form of Oath for Chain-men. 

I, A. B., do solemnly swear in the presence of Almighty 

God, that I will faithfully and impartially execute and fulfill 

the duties of a Chain Carrier; that I will level the chain, and 

plumb the pins, so as to obtain the true horizontal distance; 

and that I will make a true report of the length of all the lines 

that I may assist in measuring, to the best of my abilities, so 

help me God A. B. 

Sworn to and subscribed, 

before the undersigned, 

this- day of - 185 

C. D. Justice of the peace for the township of - county 

of - State of - 

1 5. 1 

Form of Oath for Flag-men and Axe-men. 

I, E. F., do solemnly swear in the presence of Almighty God, 

that I will faithfully and truly perform the duties of a flagman (or axe-man, as the case may require,) to the best of my 

abilities, so help me God. 

E. F. 

Sworn to and subscribed, 

before the undersigned, 

this - day of 185 

C. D., Justice of the peace for the township of - county 

of - State of 

-Page 3- 

[ 6. 1 

Lines, Flag and Compass. 

All lines must be run with the assistance of a flag or fore 

vane-man; and Township boundary lines, with the compass 

adjusted to the true meridian, unless otherwise instructed by 

this office. 

[ 7. 1 

Attraction. 

If by reason of mineral attraction, or any other cause whatever, any line or lines cannot be accurately surveyed with the 

use of the needle, other means must be adopted, so as to 

ensure the correct execution of the work; and the manner of 

operating must be carefully noted in the Field Book. 

[ 8. 1 

Line Trees and Blazes. 

All trees which your lines (except random lines) strike, 

must be noted in your Field Book, and have two notches cut 

402 
on each side thereof in the direction of the line; but no other 

spot or blaze, whatever, is to be made thereon. 

THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS, FROM NINE TO EIGHTYSEVEN, ARE INTENDED MAINLY TO GOVERN THE EXECUTION OF WORK IN REGARD TO THE SURVEY OF 

PUBLIC LANDS; YET, WHEREVER APPLICABLE, THEY 

MUST EQUALLY BE OBSERVED IN THE SURVEY OF PRIVATE CLAIMS. 

[ 9. 1 

Running and blazing of lines, and establishment of Corners 

thereon. 

All trees on each side of the lines, and near thereto, (except 

random lines) must be marked with a spot or blaze on each 

side, diagonally or quartering towards the line. Range lines 

(N. & S. Township boundary lines) will be run North, and 

corners for Sections and quarter Sections will be established 

thereon at every half mile, and mile, for the Sections and 

quarter Sections to the West, and not for those to the East of 

the line, except at Township corners. East and West standard 

lines will be run East or West, as the case may require, and 

corners established thereon for the quarter Sections, Sections, and Townships, North of the line, and not for those to 

the South of it. East and West fractional Township lines, 

which close to a boundary line of this Surveying District, or to 

an India or State boundary, will be run East or West, as may 

be required; and the quarter Section and Section corners will 

be established thereon for the quarter Sections and Sections 

to the North of the line, and not for those South of it. 

[ 10. 1 

Random and true Township lines-S. boundary of See. 31. 

All other E. & W. Township lines will be run west on 

randoms, and 

-Page 4- 

corrected East from Township corner to Township corner; 

and the excess or deficiency must be added to, or deducted 

from, the South boundary of Section 31, West of the quarter 

Section corner. 

[ 11. 1 

Adjustment of the Compass. 

Sub-division lines of a Township will be run with the compass adjusted to the East boundary thereof; and the true 

variation of the needle will be determined so as to show the 

difference (if any) between the said true variation and the 

variation at which the surveys are executed. 

[ 12. 1 

Manner of Establishing Corners. 

Section, fractional Section, and Township corners, will be 

perpetuated by planting a post at the place of the corner, of 

the most durable wood that can be had in the vicinity thereof. 

The posts must be set in the earth by digging a hole to admit 

them two feet deep, and be very securely rammed in with 

earth, and also with stone, if convenient-the township corner posts must be at least 5, and the Section and fractional 

section corner posts 4 inches diameter; they must be neatly 

squared off at the top, and placed so that the corners will 

correspond with the cardinal points. The posts at the corners 

of Sections in the interior of a Township must indicate, by a 

number of notches on each of the four corners directed to the 

cardinal points, the number of miles that it stands from the 

outlines of the Township; the four sides of the post will be 

numbered to correspond to the number of the Section they 

respectfully face. If, however, a tree is at the place of any 

corner, it will be notched as aforesaid, and answer for the 

corner in lieu of a post. 

[ 13. 1 

Marking and Numbering of Corner Posts. 

Section corner posts on Range and Township lines, will 

indicate, by a number of notches on two corners directed to 

the proper cardinal points, the number of miles it stands from 

the nearest Township corner; and two sides of said posts will 

be numbered to correspond to the number of the Section they 

face. 

[ 14. 1 

Notching Post, &c. 

Corner posts at Township corners will have 6 notches on 

each of the four corners, directed to the cardinal points, and 

each of the four sides thereof will be numbered to correspond 

to the number of the Section they face. All corner posts where 

mounds are not used must rise at least 3 feet above the 

surface of the ground. 

-Page 5- 

[ 15. 1 

Corner Stones. 

Or, in lieu of posts, you may, at any corner, insert endways 

into the ground, to the depth of 7 or eight inches, a stone, the 

number of cubic inches in which shall not be less'than the 

number contained in a stone 14 inches long, 12 inches wide 

and 3 inches thick-the edges of which must be set North and 

South, on North and South lines; and East and West, on East 

and West lines-the dimensions of each stone to be given in 

the Field Notes at the time of establishing the corner. 

[ 16. 1 

Marking Corner Stones. 

Where stone Section corners are made on the Range and 

Township lines, as many notches will be distinctly cut with a 

pick or chisel on the two sides in the direction of the line as 

the corner is sections from the nearest Township corners. At 

Township corners, 6 notches will be cut on each edge or side 

towards the cardinal points; at Section corners in the interior 

403 
of a Township as many notches will be cut on the South edge 

and East sides as the corner is sections distant from the South 

and East boundaries of the Township; and at the corners of 

sub-divisional intersections with the North boundaries of the 

Townships, 6 notches on the South edge, and at the intersection with the West boundaries 6 notches on the East edge; 

and as many notches on the East or South sides, as the case 

may require, as the corner is sections distant from the 

Township corner. Quarter section corner stones will have 1-4 

cut on the West side on North and South lines, and on the 

North side on East and West lines. 

[ 17. 1 

Courses and Distances to Witness Trees-Marking the same. 

You will ascertain and state in your Field Notes, the course 

and distance from the several Section and Township corner 

posts, trees or stones, to a tree in each section for which they 

stand as a corner; each of said trees you will mark with a 

notch and blaze facing the post, tree or stone; the notch to be 

at the lower end of the blaze; and on the blaze, which must be 

neatly made, you will mark, with a marking iron, in a plain, 

distinct and permanent manner, the letter S, with the number of the Section, and over it the letter T, with the number of 

Township; and above this the letter R, with the number of the 

Range. And in all cases where there is no tree in any section 

within a reasonable distance of a corner, on which to mark 

the number of Section, Township and Range, that fact must 

be stated in your Field Notes. 

[ 18. 1 

Mound Corners. 

Township corners in a prairie, or other situation, where 

bearing or 

-Page 6- 

witness trees are not at hand, will be perpetuated by depositing in the ground, and at least 3 inches beneath the natural 

surface thereof, a portion of charcoal, (the quantity to be 

specified in your Field Notes,) not less than two quarts, at the 

place of such corners,.over which you will erect a mound of 

earth, three feet high, five feet square at the base, and two 

feet square at the top; the sides whereof must be reveted or 

faced with sods laid horizontally and in successive layers on 

each other, each of said layers having an offset inwards, 

corresponding to the general slope of the face of the mound; 

and in the mound you will insert a post of the dimensions and 

marked as before directed, which post shall rise at least one 

foot above the top of the mound; or you may deposit at the 

place of the corner, three stones, not less than five inches 

square, by three inches thick, all of which you will particularly describe in your Field Notes-the top of the uppermost 

stone to be three inches below the natural surface of the 

ground, and the other two successively and immediately beneath the first-and over said stone you will erect a mound 

similar to that directed to be made over the deposite of charcoal; or, in lieu of charcoal or stone, to be deposited as before 

stated, you may perpetuate the corner by inserting endways 

into the ground, a stone, of the dimensions marked and set, in 

the manner before mentioned, overwhich no mound need be 

erected. 

[ 19. 1 

Witness Mounds to Township Corners. 

If a Township corner, where bearing or witness trees are 

not to be found within a reasonable distance therefrom, shall 

fall within a ravine or in any other situation where the 

nature of the ground or the circumstances of its locality shall 

be such as may prevent, or prove unfavorable to the erection 

of a mound, you will perpetuate such corner by selecting, in 

the immediate vicinity thereof, a suitable plot of ground as a 

site for a bearing or witness mound, and erect thereon a 

mound of earth in the same manner, and conditioned in every 

respect, with charcoal or stone deposited beneath, as before 

directed for a Township corner; and measure, and state in 

your Field Notes, the distance and course from the position of 

the true corner, of the bearing or witness mound so placed 

and erected. 

[ 20. 1 

Witness Mounds to Section Corners. 

Section corners in a prairie or other situation where bearing or witness trees cannot be had, will be perpetuated in the 

manner before directed for a township corner, except, that, 

where mounds are made they need be only two feet six inches 

high, by four feet square at the base, and two feet square at 

the top. 

-Page 7- 

21. 1 

The establishment of quarter Section Corners-Marking of 

Witness Trees-Mounds. 

Quarter Section corners will be perpetuated by a post (of 

durable wood) 3 inches diameter, place in the ground and 

marked 1-4 S., from which you will state in your Field Notes 

the course and distance to two of the most suitable trees in 

two different quarter Sections for which you are establishing 

the corner; which two trees you will mark with a blaze and 

notch facing the post; and on the blaze above the notch you 

will mark 1-4 S., with a marking iron. And where bearing or 

witness trees are not at hand, you will perpetuate quarter 

Section corners by erecting a mound, beneath which no deposite need be made-the mound to be of similar construction to 

those for Section and Township corners, except, that they 

may be only two feet high, three feet six inches square at the 

base, and one foot 6 inches square at top. 

[ 22. 1 

Insuperable obstacles-Witness Points. 

Whenever your course may be obstructed by insuperable 

obstacles, such as ponds, swamps, marshes, lakes, rivers, 

creeks, &c., you will prolong the line across such obstacles by 

404 
taking the necessary right angle off-sets; or, if this is inconvenient, by a traverse or trigonometrical operation, until you 

regain the line on the opposite side. And in case a North and 

South, or a true East and West line is regained in advance of 

any obstacle, you will prolong and mark the line back to the 

obstacle so passed, and state all the particulars in relation 

thereto in your Field Notes; and at the intersection of lines, 

with both margins of impassable obstacles, you will establish 

a witness point (for the purpose of perpetuating the intersections therewith,) by setting a post, and giving in your Field 

Notes the course and distance therefrom to two trees on 

opposite sides of the line, each of which trees you will mark 

with a blaze and notch facing the post, except on the margins 

of navigable water courses or navigable lakes; in these cases 

you will mark the trees with the proper number of the fractional Section, Township and Range. 

[ 23. 1 

Townships, sub-divisions thereof, and numbering 

the Sections. 

The Townships are to be laid off as nearly six miles square 

as practicable, by lines running from South to North 6 miles, 

and the corresponding corners joined by lines running easterly and westerly; and they will be subdivided into 36 Sections, 

containing, as nearly as may be, 640 acres each. The Sections 

to be numbered by beginning with No. 1, in the North-East 

corner of the Township, and going West and East, alternately, through the Township, with progressive numbers, ending 

with 36, which will be in the South-East corner thereof. 

-Page 8- 

[ 24. 1 

Navigable Streams, Lakes, &.-Meandering. 

The course of all navigable rivers which may bound or pass 

through your district must be accurately surveyed, and their 

width taken at those points where they may be intersected by 

Section or Township lines. Those navigable rivers which may 

pass through your district, must be surveyed on each side. 

You will also meander all lakes or ponds of sufficient magnitude to justify such expense. In meandering you will state 

particularly, in your Field Notes, at what corner you commence the meanders of each fractional Section, and also the 

corner to which you close. You will likewise state on which 

side of the river you are meandering, whether on the right or 

left bank, (going downwards,) and, also, whether on the East, 

West, North, South, North-East, North-West, South-East, or 

South-West side of the river, or other water course, through 

or adjoining your district.-[See Article 84.1 

[ 25. I 

Limits in Closing. 

Any excess or deficiency in the length of any Township 

boundary line, or excess of error in the falling off from the 

corner to which any closing Township line shall be run, that 

may exceed five chains; or any excess or deficiency exceeding 

one chain in the length of any Section line, or excess of error 

in the falling off from the corner to which any Section line 

shall be run, that shall exceed one chain in closing the lines of 

a whole Section; and at the same rate for the Section lines, 

and at the same rate of one chain and fifty links per mile of 

the meanders, in closing the meanders of a navigable river or 

other water course with the line or lines of a fractional section, must be corrected by you and reduced within those 

limits, before leaving the ground, by re-surveying the line or 

lines which may have occasioned the excess or deficiency in 

the length of such Township or Section line, or excess of error 

in closing the lines of a Township, or of a whole or fractional 

Section. 

[ 26. 1 

Corrections, Re-surveys and References. 

All notes of corrections and re-surveys must be entered as 

such in the proper place of the Field Book, according to the 

order in which they may be executed; and the former and 

erroneous survey must be referred to in said entries. Also, in 

the margin of the pages containing erroneous surveys, that 

fact must be stated, and the page on which the notes of the 

re-survey or correction are entered, must also be referred to. 

[ 27. 1 

Subdivision of Townships. 

In subdividing Townships you will commence at the corner 

to Sections 

-Page 9- 

35 and 36, on the South boundary, (one mile west of the 

South-East corner thereof,) and move on in continued progression from East to West, and from South to North, in order 

that the excess or deficiency of the Township, as to complete 

Sections, may be added to, or deducted from, the Northern 

and Western Ranges of quarter Sections. 

[ 28. 1 

North and South Section Lines-How to be Surveyed. 

Each North and South Section line must be made one mile 

in measure by the chain, except those which close to the 

North boundary of the Township, so that the excess or deficiency will be thrown in the Northern range of quarter 

Sections, viz:-In running North between Sections 1 and 2, at 

40.00 chains establish the quarter Section corner, and note 

the distance at which you intersect the North boundary of the 

Township; and also, the distance you fall East or West of the 

corresponding Section corner for the Township to the North; 

and, at said intersection, establish a corner for the Sections 

between which you are surveying. 

[ 29. 1 

Surveying of E. and W. Section Lines. 

The East and West Section lines, except those in the West 

405 
Range of Sections and those which cross navigable water 

courses, will be run from the proper Section corners, East on 

random lines, (without blazing,) for the corresponding Section corners. Temporary posts will be set at 40.00 chains, and 

the distance at which you intersect the Range or Section line, 

and your falling North or South of the corner run for, will be 

noted in your Field Book; from which corner you will correct 

the line West by means of off-sets from stakes, or some other 

marks set up or made on the random at convenient distances, 

and remove the temporary post, and place it and establish the 

quarter Section corner on the true line, equidistant, or at the 

average distance between the proper Section corners. If, 

however, you strike the corner run for, you have only to blaze 

the line back, and establish the quarter section corner at the 

intermediate distance. 

[ 30. 1 

Surveying of East and West lines in the West Range 

of Sections. 

The East and West lines, in the West Range of Sections, 

will be run West on true lines; the quarter section corner will 

be established at 40.00 chains; the corners for the proper 

sections will be established at the intersection with the 

Range line, and the distance which it intersects North or 

South of the corresponding Section corner West of the line 

will be noted in the Field Book. 

[ 31. 1 

Legal Subdivisions of Sections. 

When the closing lines to the North or West boundaries of 

the Town- 

-Page 10- 

ships, either in subdivision or exterior work, exceed 100 

chains in length, corners for the legal subdivisions of the 

Sections will be established at every 20 chains North or West 

of the quarter Section corner. 

[ 32. 1 

East and West lines intersecting Navigable StreamsCorrection of errors. 

Whenever an East and West Section line, other than those 

in the West Range of Sections, crosses a navigable river, or 

other water course, you will not run a random line and correct 

it as in ordinary cases where there is no obstruction of the 

kind, but you will run East and West on a true line, (at right 

angles to the adjacent North and South lines,) from the proper section corners, to the said river or navigable water, and 

make an accurate connection between the corner established 

on the opposite banks thereof; and if the error, neither in the 

length of the line, nor in the falling North or South of each 

other of the fractional corners on the opposite banks, exceeds 

the limits before specified in these instructions for the closing 

of a whole Section, you will proceed with your operations. If, 

however, the error exceeds those limits, you will state the 

amount thereof in your Field Notes, and proceed forthwith to 

ascertain which line or lines may have occasioned the excess 

of error, and reduce it within the proper bounds by resurveying or correcting the line or lines so ascertained to be 

erroneous, and note in your Field Book the whole of your 

operations in determining what line was erroneous, and the 

correction thereof. 

33. 1 

East and West lines intersecting Rivers in bends thereof. 

If, by reason of bends in a river, or other navigable water 

course, the whole of any East and West Section line would not 

be surveyed, if the parts which are run East or West respectively were to terminate at their first intersection with the 

said river or other navigable water course, that part of the 

line, which, by being prolonged, would give the survey the 

best form, must be continued to its last intersection with the 

said river or other navigable water; and from said last intersection of the line so continued, you will make the connection with the corresponding corner on the opposite bank, and 

if it is found that the error exceeds the limits before specified 

for the closing of a whole Section, you will make the required 

correction in the manner before pointed out in these instructions. 

[ 34. 1 

Water Courses, Stone Quarries, &c., &c., to be noted on lines. 

All rivers, creeks, springs and smaller streams of water, 

with their width and the course they run in crossing the lines 

of surveys, and whether navigable, rapid or otherwise;, also, 

all swamps, ponds, stone quarries, coal beds, peat or turf 

grounds, mounds, precipices, caves, rapids, cascades or falls 

of water, minerals, ores, salt springs, salt licks, and fossils, 

-Page 11- 

prairies, hills and mountains, towns, villages and settlements, forges, factories and cotton gins; also, all uncommon, 

natural or artificial productions, which may come to your 

knowledge, are to be particularly regarded and noted in your 

Field Book. You will likewise note when the lines enter and 

when they leave creek or river bottom. 

[ 35. 1 

Land, Timber and Undergrowth-Inundated bottomsNames of Station and Line Trees, to be written in full. 

At the end of every mile, in running Section or Township 

lines, and at the end of the meanders of each fractional 

Section, you will give a particular description of the face of 

the country; whether level, hilly or mountainous; of the quality or rate of the soil, and whether the bottom land is liable to 

inundation or not; and if so, state, also, to what depth, so far 

as that circumstance may come to your knowledge, whether 

from observation of the water marks upon the trees, or any 

other source of information; and note the kinds and quality of 

timber and undergrowth, naming the different sorts in the 

406 
order in which they predominate. The description of each 

mile must be full and complete in itself, and not refer to any 

previous description. The names of all bearing or witness 

trees, and station or line trees, must be written out in full, 

and not abbreviated; nor must any word which relates to the 

course or length of a line, or any object noted thereon, or in 

the establishment of a corner, be abbreviated, except in stating the courses to the witness trees from the corners, the 

course of meanders, and the bearing or direction of small 

streams, mountains, &c., when they are not to the cardinal 

points; in these cases, the capital letters N., S., E. and W., 

plainly and distinctly made, will be used. 

[ 36. 1 

Sketches returned to exhibit all objects noted, such as Water 

Courses, Roads, &c., &c. 

The plots or sketches which you are to return, will exhibit, 

as accurately as practicable, from careful occular observations (in addition to the measurements on the line,) to be 

made by you, and noted in your Field Book, the true situation 

of all objects noted, including the courses and connection of 

all rivers and other water courses, and travelled roads or 

tracks, denoting the principal places to which they lead, and 

the enchainment and direction of remarkable hills or mountains. 

[ 37. 1 

Field Books and entries therein. 

Your Field Books for your original notes will be of such a 

size as you may deem most convenient; they will be of the best 

quality of paper; and the original Field Notes, which are to be 

returned to this office, together with a fair and correct copy 

thereof, must be kept in a pain and intelligible manner, in the 

form hereafter prescribed in these instructions. 

-Page 12- 

Every entry must be so specific as not to admit of a doubt as to 

what is intended thereby, or a possibility of a misconstruction 

of your meaning. The said notes must be entered in the same 

order, from day to day, as the work is executed on the ground, 

including all re-surveys and corrections, and the date must 

follow each day's work.-[See Article 81.1 

[ 38. 1 

Chains of two and four Poles. 

Although your lines are to be measured with a chain of two 

poles, you are to keep your reckonings in chain of four poles, 

or one hundred links each; and all entries in your Field 

Books, and all plans and calculations, and to be made according to the decimal measure of a chain. 

[ 39. 1 

Courses and Distances. 

The courses and distances on your lines must be placed in 

the margin of your Field Book, on the left hand, (for which 

purpose it should be large,) and your remarks on the right. 

[ 39.1 B. 

Copies of Field Notes-Form prescribed by the office. 

The books in which you copy your Field Notes will be 

according to a form prescribed by this office. 

[ 39. I c. 

Horizontal Measurement. 

In all measurements, the level or horizontal length is to be 

taken, and not that which arises from measuring over the 

surface of the ground, when it happens to be uneven or hilly. 

[ 40. 1 

Form for keeping Field Notes of exterior Boundary Line of 

Townships, viz: 

Suppose the line to be surveyed is the East boundary of 

Township 21 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian, and that the corner to Sections 1, 6, 31 and 36, of 

Townships 20 and 21 North, Range 6 and 7 East, had been 

established by another surveyor, and that you were furnished with a description thereof from this office. You will 

commence your Field Note as follows, viz:- 

If first book, oaths of chain-men, axe-men and flag-men. 

A. B., hind chain-man, 

C. D., fore chain-man, 

E. F., flag-man, 

G. H., axe-man. 

-Page 13- 

Measuring chain compared with 

found to be of the right length. 

the standard chain, and 

Took the variation of the needle last night, (27th of 

September, 1832,) about five chains South-West of the corner 

to Townships 20 and 21 North, Ranges 6 and 7 East of the 4th 

principal meridian, and found it to be 8" and 20 min. East. I 

therefore adjust my compass to that variation, and commence 

at the corner to Sections 1,6,31 and 36, of Townships 20 and 

21 Norh, of Ranges 6 and 7 East of the 4th principal meridian, 

which agrees with the description furnished me by the Surveyor's Office, viz:-A post, from which a white oak, 6 inches 

diameter, bears S. 67" East, 372 links; a hickory, 14 inches 

diameter, bears North 25" East, 13 links; and a white oak, 13 

inches diameter, (stated to be 11 in the description furnished 

me) bears North 62" West, 135 links. The other witness tree 

(an ash, 16 inches diameter) has fallen down; I therefore 

mark, with the proper number of Section, Township and 

range, a black walnut, 24 inches diameter, which bears South 

83" West, 127 links distant, and run from said Township 

corner. 

41. 1 

East Boundaries of Townships. 

407 
North 

Chains 

14.70 

27.60 

29.40 

33.70 

40.00 

49.07 

64.08 

80.00 

North 

Chains 

13.80 

14.90 

40.00 

49.50 

72.54 

80.00 

Along the East boundary of Section 36, Township 21, North 

of the base line, Range 6 East of the 4th principal 

meridian. 

A brook, 25 links wide, with a rapid current, runs 

southwesterly about 10 chains, then turns to the N. W. 

Left the creek bottom, and entered hills. 

A white oak, 15 inches diameter. 

A hickory, 24 inches diameter. 

Set a quarter Section corner post on the top of a ridge, 

bearing northeasterly and south-westerly; from which post, 

a white oak, 24 inches diameter, bears S. 28" W. 197 

links, and a poplar, 18 inches diameter, bears N. 56" W., 

14 links distant. 

A white oak, 8 inches diameter. 

A walnut, 36 inches diameter. 

Set a post, corner to Sections 25 and 36, from which a 

hickory, 17 inches diameter, bears South 57" West, 127 

links; and a white oak, 13 inches diameter, bears North 

23" West, 72 links distant. 

Land, too hilly and broken for cultivation, although the 

soil is rich; timber, hickory, white oak and walnut; 

undergrowth, pawpaw and spice. 

[ 42. 1 

Along the East boundary ofsection 25, Township 21 North, 

Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Left the hills, and entered river bottom. 

A burr oak, 36 inches diameter. 

Set a quarter Section corner post, from which an elm, 13 

inches 

-Page 14- 

diameter, bears north 85" West, 18 links, and a pin oak, 

12 inches diameter, bears South 74" West, 39 links distant. 

An impassable swamp. Set a post, from which a hickory, 12 

inches diameter, bears South 76" West, 18 links; and a 

whiteoak, 13 inches diameter, bearsSouth 85"East, 14 

links. This swamp lies mostly West of the line; it 

extends in a southwesterly direction about 25.00 chains. 

Offset around said swamp, as follows, viz: 

East 4.50 chains, 

North 7.60 chains, 

East 6.70 chains, 

North 8.50 chains, 

West 7.50 chains, 

North 3.20 chains, 

West 3.70 chains-regained the line on 

the East boundary of Section 25, Township 21 North, Range 

6 East, in advance ofthe swamp; I therefore run South 

3.72 chains and intersected the North-west margin of the 

swamp, where set a post, from which an ash, 12 inches 

diameter, bears North 17" West, 18 links, and an elm, 13 

inches diameter, bears North 12"East, 45 links distant. 

Thence continued the line North along the East boundary of 

Section 25, Township 21, North, Range 6 East; counting the 

distances from the corner of Sections 25 and 36, the 

distance across the swamp, on the line, being 15.58 chains. 

A white oak, 18 inches diameter. 

Set a post, corner to sections 24 and 25, from which a 

white oak, 18 inches diameter, bears South 18" West 32 

links; and a gum, 24 inches diameter, bears North 27" 

West, 34 links distant. The land is low, wet bottom, 

unfit for cultivation; generally subject to overflow from 

7 to 10 feet, as appears by the water marks on the trees, 

and as I am informed by H J 

the vicinity thereof. Timber, gum, swamp maple and pine 

oak; undergrowth, spice, vines and green briars. 

,who lives in 

September 28, 1832. 

Proceed in a similar manner along the East boundary of 

North 

Chains 

17.52 

18.76 

19.75 

32.50 

33.00 

40.00 

59.32 

63.73 

80.00 

West 

Chains 

40.00 

80.00 

West 

Chains 

21.00 

40.00 

69.00 

80.00 

West 

Chains 

00.57 

sections 24,13 and 12; then along the East boundary of 

section 1, as follows, viz: 

[ 43. 1 

%long the East bounday of Section 1, Township 21, North 

Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

$road between Holmin's Ferry to the South-west, and 

Princeton to the North-east. 

Awhite oak, 16 inches diameter. 

A creek, generally called White Water, but by some Crooked 

Zreek, 200 links wide, runs North-east-gentle current, not 

-Page 15- 

navigable. This creek is crossed by the road noted above, 

st about 5 chains to the South-west. 

A hickory, 15 inches diameter. 

Left the timber and entered prairie-bears South-east and 

North-west. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter section corner. 

Left the prairie and entered timber-bears North-east and 

South-west. 

Awhite walnut, 16 inches diameter. 

Set a post, corner to Sections 1,6,31 and 36, of 

Townships 21 and 22 North, Ranges 6 and 7 East ofthe 4th 

principal meridian, from which a hickory, 17 inches 

diameter, bears South 56"East, 18 links; a white oak, 24 

inches diameter, bears North 77"East, 36 links; a white 

oak 14 inches diameter, bears North 271/2" West, 35 links 

and a black Walnut, 24 inches diameter, bears South 75" 

west, 137 links distant. Land moderately rolling; soil 

good and fit for cultivation; timber, white oak, black 

oak, hickory and walnut; undergrowth, sassafras and hazel. 

September 29, 1832. 

[ 44. 1 

Random Township Lines. 

Suppose that the corner to Townships 21 and 22 North, of 

Range 5 and 6 East, had been established, you would then 

proceed as follows:-Measuring chain compared with the 

standard Chain and found to be correct. 

On a random line along the south boundary of Section 

36, Township 22 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal 

meridian. 

Set a temporary quarter Section corner post. 

Set a post for temporary corner to Section 35 and 

36.-[SeeArticle 74 and78.1 

On a random line, along the south boundary of Section 

35, Township 22 North, Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal 

meridian. 

A remarkable fine spring, about 30 links to the North, 

runs North-easterly. 

Set a temporary quarter Section corner post. 

A quarry of excellent lime stone. 

Set a post for temporary corner to Sections 34 and 35. 

September 30, 1832. 

[ 45. 1 

Continue in this manner along the South boundary of 

Sections 34,33 and 32, and then run 

On a random line, along the South boundary of Section 31, 

-Page 16- 

Township 22 North, Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal 

meridian. 

The South-east bank of a navigable lake, which lies mostly 

to the North ofthe line, it being about two miles in a 

408 
40.00 

64.00 

82.75 

East 

Chains 

00.32 

17.50 

18.00 

33.75 

42.75 

57.60 

81.90 

82.75 

North-eastern direction to the northern end thereof; I 

therefore off-set around the South end, as follows, viz: 

South 10.00 chains, 

West 15.00 chains, 

South 11.00 chains, 

West 12.00 chains, 

North 21.00 chains, regained the random 

line along the South boundary of Section 31, in advance of 

the lake, and continue West, counting the distances from 

the temporary corner post to Sections 31 and 32. 

Set a temporary quarter Section corner post. 

A coal bed, in the West bank of Bear Grass creek, which is 

40 links wide and runs South. 

Intersected the Range line 326 links South of the corner 

to Sections 1,6,31 and 36, of Townships 21 and 22 North, 

Ranges 5 and 6 East. 

46. 1 

True Lines of Townships. 

Then, from said Township corner, run 

On a true line along the South boundary of Section 31, 

Township 22 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal 

meridian. 

A branch, 7 links wide, runs South-east. 

A white oak, 18 inches diameter. 

Bear Grass creek runs South. 

A hickory, 12 inches diameter. 

Set a quarter Section corner post, from which a persimmon, 

12 inches diameter, bears N. 26" W., 163 links, and a 

white oak, 24 inches diameter, bears N. 42" E., 18 

links distant.-[See Article 75.1 

Intersected the North-west bank of the navigable lake, 

(noted on the random line,) where set a post, corner to 

fractional Sections 6 and 31, ofTownships 21 and 22 

North, Range 6 East, from which post a hackberry, 18 

inches diameter, bears N. 23"W., 18 links; and a white 

oak, 15 inches diameter, bears S. 65" W., 8 links. 

Thence offset around the lake as follows, viz: 

West 4.00 chains wth the marked line on the South 

South 16.00 

East 28.00-parallel to the South boundaryNorth 16.00 chains, regained the true line on the South 

boundary of Section 31. 

boundary of Section 31,25 links East ofthe South-east 

margin of the lake; I therefore blazed the line back, 

West 25 links 

-Page 17- 

to the South east bank of the lake, where set a post for 

corner to fractional Sections 6 and 31, Townships 21 and 

22 North, Range 6 East, 81.35 chains East ofthe corner to 

Townships 21 and 22 North, Ranges 5 and 6 East. From said 

post, a hickory 12 inches diameter, bears north 23" E., 13 

links; and an elm, 14 inches diameter, bears South 27" 

East 54 links distant. 

Then continue the line East along the South boundary of 

Section 31, counting the distances from the Township 

corner. 

A burr-oak, 48 inches diameter. 

Set a post for corner to Sections 31 and 32, from which a 

sycamore, 18 inches diameter, bears north 25"East, 32 

links; and a white oak, 18 inches diameter, bears North 

28" West, 13 linksdistant. Land, level and wet; soil, 

poor, not fit for cultivation; timber, white oak, burr-oak 

and sycamore. 

September 31, 1832. 

[ 47. 1 

Continue in this manner along the south boundaries of 

East 

Chains 

14.50 

20.17 

30.00 

33.09 

40.00 

Chains 

42.10 

47.20 

59.60 

5.82 

80.00 

North 

Chains 

17.62 

Sections 32,33,34 a~d35, and then run 

On a true line along the South boundary of Section 36, 

Township 22 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal 

meridian. 

Entered a field of about 40 acres, bearing North-east and 

South-West; it lies mostly south ofthe line. 

A spring branch runs South-East, and empties into a creek 

in about 10 chains. 

The spring is about 5 chains in the North-western 

direction, and is outside the field. 

Left the field, bearing North-East and South-West. 

A white oak, 28 inches diameter. 

Set a post for quarter Section corner, from which a 

hickory, 17 inches diameter, bears North 18" West, 14 

links and a white oak, 15 inches diameter, bears North 27" 

East, 42 links distant. 

A creek, 50 links wide, runs North 80"East; the current 

is rapid. About 5 chains up stream, in a South-westerly 

direction, is a mill seat, there being rock on both banks, 

and a fall of of about 50 feet in 20.00 chains. 

Diggings for lead, called New Design. 

A wagon road, leading from Kingston and Holmes' Ferry 

to Galena, bears North-west and South-east. 

The corner to Townships 21 and 22 North, Ranges 6 and 7 East. 

Land, rolling; soil good, and fit for cultivation; timber 

hickory, walnut and white oak; undergrowth, briers and hazel. 

A smelting furnace, owned by J H 

October 1, 1832. 

-Page 18. 

[ 48. 1 

Subdivision Lines. 

Form of Field Notes in sub-dividing a Township (say 

Township 21 North, Range 6 East ofthe principal 

meridian,) after the outlines shall have been surveyed. 

A. B., Hind chain-man. 

C. D., Fore chain-man. 

E. F., Flag or fore vane-man. 

G. H., Axe-man. 

Measuring chain compared with the standard chain, and 

adjusted thereto, it having been found 1-4 of an inch too 

long. Last night (14th ofApril, 1845) about 20.00 chains 

North-west of the corner to Townships 20 and 21 North, 

Ranges 6 and 7 East, I ascertained the variation of the 

needle, by polar observations, to be 8" 35 min. E; I 

therefore adjust my compass at that variation; and, to 

determine the course of the East boundary of the township, 

commence at the corner of Townships 20 and 21 North, 

Ranges 6 and 7 East, and run-Thence North on a blank 

line; at 40.04 chains, fell 15 links West ofthe quarter 

Section corner; at 79.96 chains, fell 36 links West ofthe 

corner to Sections 25 and 36, Township 21 North, Range 6 

East; then from said corner to Sections 25 and 36, run 

North (on the blank line,) 39.97 chains, fell 18 links 

West ofthe quarter Section corner; 80.05 chains fell 37 

links West of the corners to Sections 24 and 

25,-therefore, to run parallel to said East boundary of 

Township 21 North, Range 6 East, I adjust my compass to a 

variation of 8" 20 min. East; which is 15 minutes less 

than the true variation, and commence at the corner to 

Sections 35 and 36, on the South boundary of the Township, 

and run-Thence 

[ 49. 1 

Between Sections 35 and 36, Township 21 North, Range 6 East 

of the 4th principal meridian. 

409 
27.60 

40.00 

40.32 

47.50 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

40.00 

80.18 

West 

Chains 

17.60 

20.40 

40.09 

40.15 

1 sugar maple, 18 inchesdiameter. 

1 creek, called White Oak creek, 40 links wide, gentle 

:urrent, runs North-west. 

jet a post for quarter Section corner, from which a 

Walnut, 20 inches diameter, bears South 16"East, 18 

inks; and a white oak, 18 inches diameter, bears North 

!3" West, 184 links.-[See Article 76.1 

Zntered river bottom; bearsE. and W. 

rhe right bank of White river, a navigable stream, at an 

3astern bend thereof, runs North. Set a post, corner to 

'ractional sections 35 and 36, from which a white oak, 18 

nchesdiameter, bears South 25" W., 18 links; and a 

iickory, 17 inches diameter, bears South 15" East, 39 

inks distant. The line will run down the river, and 

eave it again on the 

-Page 19- 

right side, without crossing over to the left; I, 

therefore, meander down stream on the right bank ofsaid 

river, along fractional Section 36, from the before 

iescribed corner offractional Sections 35 and 36, as 

follows, viz: 

N. 27" E. 16.00 chains, 

N. 14"E. 4.00chains, 

N. 3"W 2.00chains, 

N. 39" W. 12.93 chains,-regained the line 

between Sections 35 and 36, on the right bank of White 

river, where set a post, corner offractional Sections 35 

and 36, ofTownship 21 North, Range 6 East ofthe 4th 

principal meridian, from which a burr oak, 10 inches 

diameter, bears South 85"East, 27 links, and a hickory, 

18 inches diameter, bears North 27" West, 134 links 

distant. This corner is 77.79, chains North ofthe corner 

to Sections 35 and 36, on the South boundary of the 

Township. The river here runs north-westerly. I continue 

the line North between Sections 35 and 36, counting the 

distances from the corner on the South boundary ofthe 

Township. 

Set a post, corner to Sections 25,26,35 and36, from 

which a white oak, 14 inches diameter, bears North 17" 

East, 18 links; a white oak, 12 inches diameter, bears 

South 25" West, 13 links, and a walnut, 14 inches 

diameter, bears South 58" East, 32 links distant. There 

is no tree within a reasonable distance in Section 26. 

[ 50. 1 

On a random line, between Sections 25 and 36, Township 21 

North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Set a temporary quarter Section corner post. 

Intersected the East boundary ofthe Township 37 links 

South ofthe corner to Sections 25 and 36, from which 

corner I run. 

On a true line between Sections 25 and 36"', Township 21 

North, Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

A white oak, 15 inches diameter. 

A branch, 26 links wide, runs South-west. 

Set a quarter section corner post, from which a pine, 17 

inchesdiameter, bears South 32"East, 49 links; and a 

pine, 27 inches diameter, bears North 42" West, 132 links 

distant.-[See Article 77 and 78.1 

1. When the Notes of a TRUE East and West SUBDIVISION line follow IMMEDIATELY AFTER those of the random line, between the same Sections, as in the above case of 

the line between Sections 25 and 36, you MAY leave out the Township, Range and 

Meridian, in the Notes of the TRUE LINE, and instead of which, write affer the words, 

"from which corner I run." 

65.17 

80.18 

West 

North 

Chains 

27.62 

29.34 

40.57 

74.39 

79.16 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

21.32 

West 

Chains 

4.06 

21.32 

,eft hills and entered bottom; bears North-west and 

iouth-east. 

i walnut, 36 inches diameter. 

?he corner to Sections 25,26,35 and 36. 

April 15, 1833. 

-Page 20- 

[ 51. 1 

In a true line between said Sections 25 and 36. 

[ 52. 1 

3etween Sections 25 and 26, Township 21 North, Range 6 

Zast of the 4th principal meridian. 

1 white oak, 12 inches diameter. 

ntersected the right and Southerly bank of White river, a 

iavigable stream; runs Easterly. Set a post, corner of 

i-actional Sections 25 and 26, from which a burr oak, 17 

nches diameter, bears South 17"East, 30links, and a 

)lack oak, 13 inches diameter, bears South 25" West, 142 

inks distant. Sent my flag-man over the river, and 

:awed the flag to be set on the left bank thereof, on the 

ine between Sections 25 and 26; I then offset from the 

Jefore described corner to fractional sections 25 and 26 

West, 5.00 chains, to apointfrom which the flag, set as 

Defore said, on the left bank ofthe river, and on the 

line between Sections 25 and 26, bears North 24" East, 

making the distance across the river 11.23 chains; 

therefore, at (29.34more 11.23) equal to. 

Set a post on the left and North bank of White river, for 

zorner to fractional Sections 25 and 26, from which a 

hickory 13 inches diameter, bears North 65"East, 125 

Links; and a white oak, 17 inches diameter, bears North 72 

degrees West, 19 links distant. The place of the quarter 

Section corner is in the river; it cannot therefore be 

established. 

A black oak, 14 inchesdiameter. 

A black oak, 14 inches diameter. 

Set apost, corner ofsections 23,24,25 and 26, from 

which a white oak, 17 inches diameter, bears North 23" 

West, 27 links; a black oak, 14 inches diameter, bears 

North 62"East, 113 links; and a black oak 14 inches 

diameter, bears South 36" East, 39 links. There is no 

tree within a reasonable distance in Section 26. 

53. 1 

On a random line, between Sections 24 and 25, Township 21 

North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Intersected the left bank of White river, a navigable 

water course; runs north-easterly; set a post corner of 

fractional Sections 24 and 25, from which a hickory, 17 

inchesdiameter, bears South 39 West, 18 links; and a 

white oak, 18 inches diameter, bears North 85" West, 132 

links distant. 

Not knowing that this line would intersect a navigable 

stream, when I commenced the survey thereof, I run it on a 

random line; I therefore, from this fractional Section 

corner, run and blazed. 

-Page 21- 

[ 54. 1 

On a true line between Sections 24 and 25, Township 21 N., 

Range 6 East. 

A black oak, 13 inches diameter. 

The corner of Sections 23,24,25 and 26. 

April 16, 1833. 

410 
West 

Chains 

17.60 

32.40 

40.00 

45.38 

North 

Chains 

0.62 

3.20 

40.00 

62.00 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

7.00 

29.35 

West 

Chains 

17.84 

55. 1 

Measuring chain compared with the standard chain and 

found to be 1 inch too long; made it ofthe proper length, 

and commenced at the corner of Sections 24 and 25, on the 

East boundary of the Township, and run-Thence 

On a true line, between said Sections 24 and 25, Township 

21 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

A white oak, 8 inches diameter. 

A brook, 15 links wide, runs South-west. 

Set a post for quarter Section corner, from which a white 

oak, 13 inches diameter, bears North 32" West, 18 links; 

and a black oak, 15 inches diameter, bears South 35"East, 

14 links distant. 

Intersected the right and South-easterly bank of White 

river, which runs North-easterly; set a post, corner to 

fractional Sections 21 and 25, from which a white oak, 14 

inches diameter, bears North 80" East, 17 links; and an 

elm, 14 inches diameter, bears South l7"East, 45 links 

distant. The post, corner to fractional Sections 24 and 

25, established on the left bank ofwhiteriver, at 21.32 

chains East of the corner to Sections 23,24,25 and 26, 

[See Article 53 ofthis book,] bears South 87 1-4" West; I 

then run South 65 links to a point from which the 

aforesaid post, corner to fractional Sections 24 and 25, 

on the left Bank of White river, bears West. Section 25, 

therefore, closes within the limits specified in my 

instructions. 

[ 56. 1 

Between Sections 23 and 24, Township 21 North, Range 6 

East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Left bottom and entered upland. 

Entered prairie, bears N. E. and S. W. 

Raised a mound, in which set a quarter Section corner post. 

A branch 6 links wide, runs East. 

Deposited 2 quarts of charcoal, 3 inches below the natural 

surface of the earth, and over said charcoal erected a 

mound, in which set apost, corner to sections 13,14,23 

and 24. 

57. 1 

On a true line, between Sections 13 and 24, Township 21 

-Page 22- 

North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Left the prairie and entered timbered land. 

Intersected the left bank of White river, (runs 

northeasterly;) set a post, corner offractional Sections 

13 and 24, from which a white oak, 18 inches diameter, 

bears South 17" West, 183 links; and a hickory, 18 inches 

diameter, bears North 74" West, 14 links distant. 

I then commence at the corner of Sections 13 24, on the 

East boundary of the Township, and run thence. 

[ 58. 1 

On a true line between said Sections 13 and 24, Township 21 

North, Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Intersected the left bank of White river; runs 

South-east. Set a post, corner to fractional Sections 13 

and 24, from which an elm, 8 inches diameter, bears South 

42"East, 18 links; and a gum, 13 inches diameter, bears 

North46" 15 min. East, 73 links. Determined the distance 

across the river by causing my flag to be set on the 

opposite or right bank thereof, due west from this corner, 

on the line between Sections 13 and 24, and runs South 

3.78 chains to a point under the bank of the river; from 

which the flag, set as aforesaid on the opposite, bank, 

30.60 

37.54 

North 

Chains 

00.16 

40.00 

80.00 

North 

Chains 

40.00 

49.50 

62.00 

80.79 

bears North 73 1-2" West, which gives 12.76 chains the 

distance across the river West from the post, corner of 

fractional Sections 13 and 24, on the left bank, 17.84 

chains West of the corner on the East, boundary of 

the Township; therefore, at 17.84 more 12.76 chains, equal to 

West of the aforesaid corner to Sections 13 and 24, on the 

East boundary of the Township, set a post, corner to 

fractional Sections 13 and 24, Township 21 North, Range 6 

East, on the right bank of White river, from which a white 

oak, 16 inches diameter, bears North 57" West, 19 links; 

and a hickory 15 inches diameter, bears South 69" West, 13 

links. Intersected the right bank of White river, runs 

North-east, where set a post, corner to fractional 

Sections 13 and 24, from which a red elm, 18 inches 

diameter, bears South 16" East, 79 links; a pin-oak, 15 

inches diameter, bears North 87"East, 19 links. From 

this corner, the corner to fractional Sections 13 and 24, 

on the left bank ofwhite river, 29.35 chains East ofthe 

corner to Sections 13,14,23 and 24, bears South 87" 

West-I run thence South 72 links to a point from which 

the aforesaid corner offractional Sections 13 and 24, on 

the left bank of of the river, bears West. Section 24, 

therefore, closes within the prescribed limits. 

[ 59. 1 

Between Sections 13 and 14, Township 21 North, Range 6 

East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

-Page 23- 

Entered prairie. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner. 

Placed three lime stones in the ground, the top ofthe 

uppermost one 4 inches below the natural surface thereof; 

and the other two, successively, and immediately below 

it. The upper stone is 8 inches long, 6 inches wide at 

one end, 5 inches wide at the other end, and 3 1-4 inches 

thick; the stone next below it, is 5 inches square and 4 

thick; and the lowermost stone is 6 inches square and 3 

inches thick; over said stones raised a mound, in which 

set a post corner to Sections 11,12,13 and 14. 

April 17, 1833. 

A. B., Hind chain-man. 

C. D. Fore chain-man. 

[ 60. 1 

A. B. quits work on account of sickness-I have supplied 

his place with C. D., my former fore chain-man, and 

employed J. K. as fore chain-man. 

[J. K.'s oath to be entered here.] 

[ 61. 1 

Proceeded in this manner between Sections 12 and 13,ll 

and 12, and 1 and 12;-then run 

Between Sections 1 and 2, Township 21 North, Range 6 East 

of the 4th principal meridian. 

Raised mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner. Left prairie and entered timber. 

A creek 50 links wide, not navigable, runs North-east; 

rapid current. 

Intersected the South boundary oftownship 22 North, Range 

6 East, 37 links West of the corner to Sections 35 and 36; 

and at said intersection set a post, corner to sections 1 

and 2, Township 21 North, Range 6 East, from which a white 

oak, 14 inches diameter, bears South 26"East, 14 links, 

and a hickory, 13 inches diameter, bears South 42" West, 

April 18, 1833. 

411 
North 

Chains 

40.00 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

40.00 

46.17 

60.32 

West 

Chains 

5.61 

North 

Chains 

40.13 

[ 62. 1 

3etween Sections 34 and 35, Township 21 North, Range 6 

3ast of the 4th principal meridian. 

Xaised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

:orner. 

Set a lime stone, which is 16 inches long, 14 inches wide 

3t one end, 12 inches wide at the other end, and 4 inches 

;hick, 

-Page 24- 

with the widest end 10 inches in the ground, for corner to 

Sections26,27,34 and 35. 

[ 63. 1 

On a true line between Sections 26 and 35, of Township 21 

North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Raised a mound, in which set apost for quarter Section 

corner. 

Left the prairie and upland, and entered timbered bottom 

land. 

Intersected the left bank of White river, which runs 

North-west, where set a post for corner to fractional 

Sections 26 and 35, from which a hickory, 17 inches 

diameter, bears South 65" West, 13 links; and a black 

walnut, 16 inches diameter, bear, North 72" West, 142 

links distant. 

[ 64. 1 

Then commence at the corner to Sections 25,26,35 and 36" 

and run 

On a true line, between Sections 26 and 35, Township 21 

North, Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Intersected the right and easterly bank of White river, at 

said intersection set a post, corner to fractional 

Sections 26 and 35, from which an elm, 18 inches diameter, 

bears South 85" East, 13 links; and a white oak, 14 inches 

diameter, bears North 27"East, 14 links distant. Search 

for the corner of fractional Sections 26 and 35, on the 

opposite bank ofthe river, and find it to be at least 5 

chains further South than the before described corner to 

the fractions of said Sections 26 and 35 on the right 

bank. Section 35 does not close within the limits 

specified in my instructions. I therefore proceed 

forthwith to ascertain in what line or lines the error was 

committed, and to make the required correction: As the 

line between Sections 25 and 36 closed within the proper 

limits, the presumption is that the error is in the line 

between Sections 34 and 35. I commence at the corner to 

said Sections, on the South boundary of the Township, and 

run-Thence. 

[ 65. 1 

With the line already surveyed between Sections 34 and 35, 

Township 21 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal 

meridian, [See Article 62 of this book.] 

The quarter section corner. There is no error, therefore, 

in this half mile, the 13 links being not more than a 

reasonable difference in measurement; so I continue the 

line north, and count the distance from the corner on the 

South boundary ofthe Township, adopting 40.00 chains as 

the length of that part of the line which lies South of 

the quarter Section corner. 

-Page 25- 

The corner established by me for sections 26,27,34 and 

35. I therefore remove the stone, corner to said 

Sections, and at 

74.65 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

40.00 

49.57 

61.17 

North 

Chains 

40.00 

80.00 

West 

Chains 

72.00 

80.42 

Set it for the corner to Sections 26,27,34 and 35, said 

;tone being as described in Art. 62, viz: 16 inches long, 

i4 inches wide at one end, 12 inches wide at the other 

:nd, and 4 inches thick, and is set with the widest end 10 

nches in the ground. 

[ 66. 1 

rhen run 

3n a true line between Sections 26 and 35, Township 21 

Vorth, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

:orner; then go to the quarter Section corner established 

,y me on the line erroneously surveyed between Sections 26 

md 35, and described on page 21 ofthis book, and destroy 

it by leveling the mound and removing the post, and return 

;o the above described quarter Section corner, and 

:ontinue the line East between Sections 26 and 35, 

:ounting the distances from the corner to Sections 26,27, 

34 and 35. 

Entered timber. 

[ntersected the left andwesterly bank of White river, 

'establish the corner and make the connection with the 

vpposite corner.)-Then destroy the corner to fractional 

Sections 26 and 35, established by me on the left bank of 

White river, at the intersection therewith ofthe 

erroneous line between said Sections 26 and 35 described 

on page 21 of this book, by removing the post and defacing 

the marks on the witness trees. 

[ 67. 1 

Between Sections 26 and 27, Township 21 North, Range 6 

East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Raised a mound, in which set a post for quarter Section 

corner. 

The middle of a ravine, which runs South-west. I 

therefore select the most suitable plot of ground in the 

vicinity, and deposit three quarts of charcoal, 4 inches 

below the natural surface of the ground, and over it erect 

a mound, in which set a post as a witness point to the 

corner of Sections 22,23,25 and 27; said witness point 

bears North 26" West 144 links from the true place of said 

corner to said Sections 

April 19, 1833. 

[ 68. 1 

Continue in this manner until you get to the Western range 

of Sections, and after having established the corner to 

Sections 29,30,31 and 32,run 

On a true line between Sections 30 and 31, Township 21 

North, Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

-Page 26- 

Raised a mound, in which set apost for quarter Section 

corner. 

Entered timber-bears North-east and South-west. 

Intersected the East boundary ofTownship 21 North, Range 

5 East, 62 links South of the corner to Sections 25 and 

36, and at said intersection set a post, corner to 

Sections 30 and 31, Township 21 North, Range 6 East, from 

which a burr oak, 17 inches diameter, bears South 25" 

East, 18 links, and a white oak, 17 inches diameter, bears 

North 27" East, 184 links distant. 

April 27, 1833. 

[ 69. 1 

In running East and West RANDOM LINES, in the 

INTERIORof aTownship, where there are not navigable 

streams, or other obstructions:-Supposing for example 

412 
East 

Chains 

40.00 

79.92 

the line between Sections 27 and 3Pyour notes will be 

kept as follows: 

On a random line between Sections 27 and 34, Township 21 

North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal meridian. 

Set a temporary post. 

To a point 32 links North ofthe corner to Sections 26, 

27,34 and 35, from which corner I run, &c. 

[ 70. 1 

[Form of keeping Field Notes of the meanders of a navigable 

river, or other water course.] 

Commence at the corner to fractional Sections 25 and 26, 

Township 21 North of the base line, Range 6 East of the 4th 

principal meridian, on the right and south-easterly bank of 

White river, and run thence down stream, with the meanders 

of the right bank of said river, along fractional section 25, 

Township 21 North, Range 6 East, as follows: 

Chains 

N. 36" E., 14.00-Thence 

N. 25" E., 17.20 to the mouth of a spring branch, 6 links 

wide, comes from the South-east-Thence 

N. 40" E., 30.00-Thence 

N. 18" E., 00.40-To the corner of fractional Sections 24 

and 25, on the right bank of White river. 

Land, high, rich bottom, fit for cultivation; timber, walnut, 

cherry and white oak; undergrowth, spicewood and vines. 

Thence from said corner to fractional sections 24 and 25, 

down stream with the meanders of the right and southeasterly bank of White river, along fractional Section 24, 

Township 21 North, Range 6 East of the 4th principal merdian, as follows: 

Chains. 

N. 13"E., 5.00; Thence 

N. 3"E., 48.00; Thence 

N. 

and 

9" E., 27.53; To the corner of fractional Sections 13 

-Page 27- 

24, on the right bank of White river, and 37.54 chains West of 

the corner on the East boundary of the Township. 

Land, high, rich bottom, fit for cultivation; timber, walnut, 

cherry and white oak; undergrowths spicewood and vines. 

In all cases where there are two or more fractional corners 

of like denomination on the same bank of a river, distinguish 

them in your meandering notes, by stating their course and 

distance from the proper Section corner. 

Your Field Book, containing your original notes, will be 

signed by each of your chain-men, axe-men, and flag-men, 

and they, and the copies thereof, will be certified by yourself, 

the certificate to be in conformity with the requirements of 

your contract, which will be according to the following form, 

or to so many of the facts therein stated as may be applicable. 

[ 71. 1 

[Form of certificate for your original Field Notes.] 

I certify, that the foregoing notes on pages 1 to 362, inclusive, are the original Field Notes of the survey of [here state 

the surveys described on said pages] as executed by me in the 

months of 184-, under my contract with, and instructions from , Surveyor of Public Lands in Illinois 

and Missouri, bearing date the day of- 184-. 

And I do further certify, that the marks, descriptions, 

courses, and distances, specified in said notes, are correct, 

and also that the said notes were all set down at the time 

when, and in the order in which, the work was performed on 

the ground; that each of the witness trees to Township and 

Section corners was marked with a blaze and notch facing the 

corner post; that the notch on each tree was at the lower end 

of the blaze; that the blaze was neatly made; and that there 

was marked, in a plain, distinct and permanent manner, with 

a marking iron, on the blaze of each witness tree, and above 

the notch, the letter S, with the number of the Section; and 

over it the letter T, with the number of the Township; and 

over this the letter R., with the number of the Range, in 

which the said trees respectively stand; that each Section and 

Township corner post was inserted two feet in a hole dug in 

the ground, and that they were securely rammed in with 

earth, and also with stone, when convenient; that the said 

posts were of the most durable wood that could be had in the 

vicinity; that the Township corner posts were 5, and the 

Section corner posts 4 inches diameter; that they were neatly 

squared at the top, and placed with the corners to the cardinal 

points, and that the several sides were marked with the 

number of the Section which they faced; also, that the corners 

of Township corner posts were marked with 6 notches each; 

that two of the corners of Section corner posts on Township 

boundary lines, were marked with as many notches, facing 

the proper cardinal points, as said posts are miles from the 

nearest Township corners; and that the corners of the Section 

posts, in the interior of a Township, were marked with as 

many notches as the posts stand miles from the Township 

boundaries; that the witness trees to quarter Section corners 

were marked with a 

-Page 28- 

blaze and notch facing the post; and that 1-4 S. was marked 

on the blaze above the notch; and also, that 1-4 S. was marked 

on each corner post, and that the posts were at least three 

inches diameter, and placed firmly in the ground. That the 

mounds were reveted or faced with sod, laid horizontally and 

in successive layers on each other, each layer having an offset 

inwards, corresponding to the general slope of the face of the 

mound; and that the mounds at Township corners were 5 feet 

square at the base, 2 feet square at the top, and 3 feet high; 

that the mounds, at Section corners were 4 feet square at the 

base, 2 feet square at the top, and 2 feet 6 inches high; and 

that the mounds at quarter Section corner, were 3 feet 6 

inches square at the base, 1 foot 6 inches square at the top, 

and 2 feet high. That where stones were used for corners, they 

were, in all cases; inserted endways in the ground, to the 

depth of 7 or 8 inches, with their edges North and South, on 

413 
the North and South lines; and East and West, on East and 

West lines. That the said stones were marked in a plain and 

distinct manner, with a pick (or chisel) as follows: Township 

corner stones, each with 6 notches on each side and edge; 

Section corner stones on Range and Township lines, with as 

many notches on the edges as they stand Sections distant 

from the nearest Township corners, Section corner stones in 

the interior of a Township, with as many notches on South 

edges and East sides, as they stand Sections distant from the 

South and East boundaries of the Township. Stones at the 

corners of subdivisional intersections with the North boundary of a Township, with 6 notches on the South edge. At the 

subdivisional intersections with the West boundary of a 

Township, with 6 notches on the East edge. The side stones at 

the aforesaid intersections, with both the North and West 

boundaries, were also marked with as many notches on the 

East or South sides as they stand Sections from the N. E. or 

South W. corners of the Township. That each of the quarter 

Section corner stones were marked "1-4" on the West side, on 

North and South lines, and on the North side on East and 

West lines. 

And if there are any exceptions on account of re-surveys, or 

corrections, or any other cause whatever, they must be intelligibly and accurately specified in the proper place of the 

certificate. 

The certificate to the copy will be similar to that to the 

original, with the necessary variation; such as, I certify, that 

the foregoing notes on page 1 to 375 inclusive, are correctly 

transcribed from the original Field Notes, &c. 

72. 1 

The foregoing instructions are (with the exception of the 

numbering of, and the captions to, the several Articles) 

copied from the "General Instructions to Deputy Surveyors," 

issued by the Surveyor General of Illinois and Missouri, in 

the year 1841. The following are in addition thereto, and may 

be adopted hereafter as the form of keeping Field Notes of 

surveys, executed under the authority of this office, whenever found convenient. 

At the head of each page of your Field Book you will enter 

the number 

-Page 29- 

of the Township and range in which the surveys are made, 

and also the number of the Meridian, in the following 

manner:- 

[ 73. 1 

North 

Chains 

14.70 

27.60 

29.40 

33.70 

35.45 

East boundary ofTownship 21, North ofthe base line of 

Range 6 East ofthe 4th principal meridian. 

Along the East boundary of Section 36, 

A branch 25 links wide, rapid current runs south-westerly 

for about 10.00 chains, then turns to the North-west. 

Leave the creek bottom and ascend a rocky bluff; bears 

North-east and South 25" West. 

A white oak, 15 inches diameter. 

A hickory, 24 inches diameter, on the top ofthe bluff. 

An Indian mound, about 50 links long, 30 links wide, and 

At a variation 7" 35 East. 

40.00 

49.07 

64.08 

80.00 

West 

Chains 

40.00 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

10.50 

28.25 

36.20 

42.75 

50.20 

61.80 

82.75 

25 links in height, with the large trees growing over it. 

Set a post for quarter Section corner. 

Bearings 

A white oak, 8 inches diameter. 

A black walnut, 36 inches diameter. 

Set a post for corner to Sections 25 and 36. 

Bearings 

Here describe the land, timber and undergrowth, in the 

same manner as in Article 41. 

rhen continue along the East boundaries ofSections 25, 

24,3,12, and 1, and establish the corner to Townships 

21 and 22 North, Ranges 6 and 7 East, in the usual way. 

A white oak, 24 in. di. bears S. 28" W. 197 links. 

{ A poplar, 18 in. di. bears N. 56" W. 14 links. 

A hickory, 17 in. di. bears S. 57" W. 127 links. { A white oak, 13 in. di. bears N. 23" W. 72 links. 

[ 74. 1 

The South boundary of Township 22 North, Range 6 East of 

4th principal meridian. 

On a random line, along the South boundary of Section 36- 

At a variation of 7" 35 min. East. 

Set a post for temporary quarter Section corner. 

Set a post for temporary corner to Sections 35 and 36. 

Then continue the random line in the same manner pointed 

out in Article 44 and 45, except that the water courses, 

ponds, and swamps, &c., &c. (see Article 34) are to be 

noted only on 

-Page 30- 

the true line. The land, timber and undergrowth is to be 

described at the end of each mile of the true line. 

After connecting the random line along the South boundary 

of Section 31 with the Tonwship corner, you will calculate 

the true bearing of the South boundary of the Township, 

and adjust your compass thereto, and commence at said 

Township corner, and run-Thence 

[ 75. 1 

On a true line, along the South boundary of Section 31, 

Article46.1 

A pond, about 3.00 chains diameter, cross about the middle. 

A coal bed in the West bank of a creek, 40 links wide, 

runs South. 

Leave bottom and ascend a steep hill; bears North and 

South. 

Set a post for quarter Section corner. 

Bearings 

A hackberry, 24 inches diameter. 

A branch, 10 links wide, runs south-east. 

Set a post for corner to Sections 31 and 32. 

{ An ash, 14 in. di. bears N. 17"E. 43 links. Bearings 

Land, 36.50 chains West, part level rich bottom, some 

parts rather wet, not subject to inundation, and the most 

of it fit for cultivation. 

Timber, burr oak, black walnut and pin oak. 

Undergrowth, spice, prickly ash and vines. 

Upland, rolling and broken, too poor for cultivation. 

Timber, post oak, blackjack and hickory; no undergrowth. 

Then continue the true line along the South boundary of 

Sections32,33,34,35 and 36, establishingquarter 

Section and Section corners at every 40.00 chains. 

At a variation of 7" 12 min. East.-[See 

A black oak, 15 in. di. bears N. 27" W. 62 links. { A hickory, 18 in. di. bears N. 40"E. 53 links 

A burr oak, 36 in. di. bears N. 47" W. 22 links. 

[ 76. 1 

Subdivision of Townships. 

414 
North 

17.62 

27.60 

40.00 

55.30 

80.00 

East 

Chains 

Township 21 north ofthe base line, Range 6 East of 

the 4th principal meridian. 

Between Sections 35 and 36-at a variation of 7" 35 East. 

A sugar maple, 28 inches diameter. 

-Page 31- 

White Oak creek, 40 links wide, gentle current, runs 

North-west. 

Set a post for quarter Section corner. 

Bearings 

A white walnut, 14inches diameter. 

Set a post, corner to Sections 25,26,35 and 36. 

Bearings 

[See Article 49.1 

Black walnut, 20 in. di. bears S. 16"E. 18 links. i Honey locust, 16 in. di. bears N. 23" W. 184 links. 

A sugar maple, 26 in. di. bears S. 40"E. 27 links. 

A hickory, 12 in. di. bears N. 27"E. 41 links. 

A black oak, 20 in. di. bears N. 62" W. 110 lks. 

A black walnut 16 in. di. bears S. 53" W. 81 lks. 

[Here describe the land, timber and undergrowth.] 

1 

r 77. 1 

On arandom line, between Sections 25 and 36. 

Atavariationof7"35 min. East. 

Then proceeded as directed in Article 50, except that in 

describing the quarter Section corner (if in timber) you 

will describe the bearing or witness trees, as follows: 

A pine, 17 inchesdi. bears S. 32"E. 40 links. { A pine, 27 inches di. bears N. 42" W. 132 links Bearings 

And after closing the true line to the Section corner, you 

will describe the land, timber and undergrowth. 

[ 78. 1 

Field Notes of Township lines. 

On East and West Township lines, and on East and West 

subdivision lines, the distances to water courses, the points at 

which you enter or leave timber or prairie, swamps, ponds, or 

other objects which are required to be noted in your Field 

Book, are to be noted only on the true lines; you will, however, 

in running the random line, give the distances to the temporary Section and quarter Section posts-the length of each 

line, and falling from the corner run for. 

[ 79. 1 

At the top of each page of your Field Book of Township 

boundaries you will describe the line which you are surveying, or about to run, as in Articles 73 and 74; after which 

the Township, Range, and meridian, need not be repeated on 

that page, unless the Township corner which you run from, or 

close on, are to be particularly described. 

-Page 32- 

r 80. 1 

Field Notes of Subdivision Lines. 

In your Field Notes of subdivisions, you will give the 

Township, Range, and meridian, at the top of the page, as in 

Article 76, after which they need not be repeated on that 

page. 

[ 81. 1 

Copies of Field Notes. 

If your original Field Notes are plainly written, according 

to the printed form, not too much disfigured by blots, interlineations, &c., and your work shall be in every other respect 

unobjectionable, no copy will be required.-[See Articles 37 

and 39.-B. 

[ 82. 1 

Original Field Notes, Ink, Paper, &c. 

The original Field Notes of your surveys are to be written 

with good durable black ink; and the paper in your Field 

Books, must be of a good quality, of uniform size, and put 

together so as to form one or more volumes, which are to be 

paged accordingly. 

[ 83. 1 

Blank Pages for oaths. 

At the end of the Field Notes of each Township, or fractional Township, you will leave one or two blank pages for the 

oath, required by the 2d Section of the Act of Congress of the 

8th of August, 1846, for which see the 3d page of the triplicate 

contract, to be retained by you. The oath is to be according to a 

form which will be furnished to you by this office. 

[ 84. 1 

Impassable Lakes, Swamps, or Ponds, to be meandered. 

In all cases, where your township boundaries, or subdivision lines, intersect impassable lakes, swamps or ponds, 

which may have to be meandered, you will at each intersection establish a fractional Section corner, and meander the 

banks or margins of such lakes, &c., so far as they may lie in 

any Township you may subdivide, or so far as they may be 

impassable. The lines of meanders are to be connected with 

the fractional Section corners in the same manner as the 

meanders of a navigable stream. It is, however, not to be 

understood, that you are to meander a lake, 

-Page 33- 

swamp, or pond, merely because it should be impassable at a 

particular place where you happen to intersect it, but might 

be easily passed in other places.-[See Section 24.1 

1 85. 1 

Survey of Islands in Rivers, Lakes, or Swamps. 

415 
Islands are to be surveyed in the following manner, viz: 

Ascertain first the corner of the surveys on the main shore 

which is nearest to the Island; then prolong the line which 

that corner closes, across the arm of water to the edge of the 

Island, where establish a Township or Section corner, (as the 

case may be,) thence extend the line across the island to the 

opposite edge of the same, where set a corner, establishing on 

the line Township, Section, or quarter Section corners, (as the 

case may be) on the Island in the same position that they 

would occupy were there no river, lake or swamp in the way. 

And then meander around the Island, noting carefully the 

corners as you pass them. 

C 86. 1 

If the Island is so situated that no Section or Township line 

will run through it, you will connect the most convenient 

point on the edge of the Island nearest to the main shore, with 

the nearest corner on the said shore; at that point on the 

Island establish a meander corner, and then meander around 

the Island until you reach this corner again. In the same way 

you may connect a small Island in the vicinity, with another 

Island on which regular corners for Sections or Townships 

have been established. Also a group of small Islands may 

likewise be surveyed by connecting one Island with another 

by means of meander corners. 

[ 87. 1 

No Payment will be made until the Work is Completed. 

No payment will be made for the surveying of a Township 

until it is completed, so far as the lakes, swamps or ponds will 

admit of. 

[ 90. 1 

Your attention is also directed to the following Act of Congress, entitled, “An Act to protect the Surveyors of the Public 

Lands of the United States, and to punish persons guilty of 

interrupting and hindering, by force, Surveyors in the discharge of their duty.” 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representative of 

the United States of America, in Congress assembled, That 

any person who shall 

-Page 34- 

hereafter, in any manner, by threats or force, interrupt, hinder, or prevent, the Surveying of the Public Lands of the 

United States, or of any private land claim, which has, or may 

be confirmed by the United States, or the authority thereof, 

by the persons authorized to survey the same, in conformity 

with the instructions of the Commissioner of the General 

Land Office, or the principal Surveyors in any of the districts 

in any State or Territory, shall be considered and adjudged to 

be guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction in any 

District or Circuit Court of the United States, in any State or 

Territory having jurisdiction of the same, shall be fined a 

sum not less than fifty dollars, nor more than three thousand 

dollars, and be imprisoned for a period of time not less than 

one, nor more than three years. 

SEC. 2. And be it further enacted, That whenever the President of the United States shall be satisfied that forcible 

opposition has been offered, or will likely be offered, to any 

Surveyor or Deputy Surveyor, or Assistant Surveyor, in the 

discharge of his or their duties, in surveying the Public Lands 

of the United States, it shall and may be lawful for the 

President to order the Marshal of the State or District, by 

himself or deputy, to attend such Surveyor, deputy, or assistant Surveyor, with sufficient force to protect such officer in 

the execution of his duty as Surveyor, and to remove force, 

should any be offered. 

Approved, May 29, 1830. 

[ 91. 1 

Your attention is also directed to the following Section of 

an Act of Congress, approved August 8th, 1846, entitled, “An 

Act to equalize the compensation of the Surveyors General of 

the Public Lands of the United States, and for other purposes.” 

SEC. 2. And be it further enacted, That the Surveyors 

General of the Public Lands of the United States, in addition 

to the oath now authorized by law to be administered to 

deputies on their appointment to office, shall require each of 

their deputies, on the return of his surveys, to take and 

subscribe an oath or affirmation, that those surveys have 

been faithfully and correctly executed according to law and 

the instructions of the Surveyor General; and on satisfactory 

evidence being presented to any Court of competent jurisdiction, that such surveys, or any part thereof, had not been thus 

executed, the deputy making such false oath or affirmation, 

shall be deemed guilty of perjury, and suffer all the pains and 

penalties attached to that offense; and the District Attorney 

of the United State for the time being, in whose district any 

false, erroneous, or fradulent surveys have been executed, 

shall, upon the application of the proper Surveyor General, 

immediately institute suit upon the bond of such deputy; and 

the institution of such suit shall act as a lien upon any 

property owned or held by such deputy or his sureties, at the 

time such suit was instituted. 

Approved, August 8th, 1846. 

416 
-Page 35- 

INSTRUCTIONS, 

ESPECIALLY FOR 

SURVEYING PRIVATE CONFIRMED 

CLAIMS. 

In the execution of the surveys of private confirmed claims, 

you will, in all respects, be governed by the foregoing instructions, wherever they are applicable, and in addition thereto, 

will observe the following instructions: 

All trees on each side of the lines, and near thereto, except 

on random lines, and those trees hereafter excepted, must be 

marked with two spots, or blazes, diagonally, or quartering 

towards the line. 

Trees which have thereon plain marks of an old line which 

you are running anew, must not be re-blazed; but on lines of 

this description, only such trees will be blazed as have not 

good evidence of having been marked of old; and when any old 

corner trees, or witness trees to old corners, are cut into for 

the purpose of identifying the corner, all the particulars 

relating thereto must be entered in the field notes. 

All corners where witness trees are convenient, will be 

perpetuated in the following manner: 

1st. When a tree is at the exact place of any corner, it will be 

marked with three notches, in the direction of each line 

which runs therefrom. 

2nd. When there is no tree at the exact place of a corner, 

you will plant a post, of the most durable wood that can be had 

in the vicinity, the said posts must not be sharpened, and 

driven into the earth as stakes, but must be cut off square or 

nearly so at the bottom, and be set in the ground, by digging a 

hole to admit them two feet deep, and be very securely 

rammed in with earth, and also with stone, when convenient; 

they must be at least five inches diameter, and must be 

neatly squared off at top, or faced otherwise, as the case may 

require, and placed at the corners of private surveys, so that 

the corners of the posts will correspond to the lines which run 

therefrom; and at the fractional sectional corners, so that the 

corners of the posts will correspond with the cardinal points; 

and the letters P S will be marked on the several sides of the 

posts fronting private surveys; and the letter S, with the 

proper number of section, on a side fronting each fractional 

section. 

3rd. Or, when there is no tree at the exact place of a corner, 

you may, instead of a post, insert endways into the ground, to 

the depth of seven or eight inches, a stone which shall not be 

less than 12 inches wide, 14 inches long, and 3 inches thick, 

hich stone will be marked with a cross, thus-X; and you will 

particularly describe in your field 

-Page 36- 

notes the kind of stone used, together with its shape and 

dimensions, and the manner and depth it is set in the ground, 

and the mark put thereon. 

You will ascertain and state in your field notes, the course 

and distance from the several corner posts, trees, and stones, 

to a tree in each private survey and fractional section for 

which they stand as a corner; each of said trees you will mark 

with a notch and blaze, facing the corner post, tree, or stone; 

the notch to be at the lower end of the blaze; and on the blaze, 

which must be neatly made, you will mark, with a marking 

iron, in a plain, distinct and permanent manner, on each 

witness tree within a private survey, the letters P S; and each 

witness tree on the public land, the letter S, with the number 

of the section, and over it the letter T, with the number of the 

township; and above this the letter R, with the number of the 

range in which they respectively stand. And in all cases 

where there is no tree in any private survey or fractional 

section, within a reasonable distance of a corner on which to 

mark the number of section, township, or range, or the letters 

P S, that fact must be stated in your field notes. 

Corners in a prairie, or other situation, where bearing or 

witness trees are not at hand, will be perpetuated by depositing in the ground, and at least 6 inches beneath the natural 

surface thereof, a portion of charcoal, (the quantity to be 

specified in your field notes,) not less than 2 quarts, at the 

place of such corners, which you will cover with 3 inches of 

dirt; and on this you will set a post around which you will 

erect a mound of earth three feet high, five feet square at the 

base, and two feet square at the top; the sides whereofmust be 

reveted or faced with sods, laid horizontally, and in successive layers, on each other; each of said layers having an offset 

inwards, corresponding to the general slope of the face of the 

mound. The posts will be of the dimensions and marked, as 

directed, at the corners where witness trees are convenient; 

all of which will be noted in the description of the corner. Or, 

in lieu of charcoal or stone, (to be deposited as before stated,) 

you may perpetuate the corner by inserting endways into the 

ground, and to the depth of seven or eight inches, a stone, 

which you will mark on the top with a cross, thus-X, and 

which stone shall not be less than 12 inches wide, 14 inches 

long, and 3 inches thick, over which no mound need be 

erected; but the kind of stone used, together with its shape 

and dimensions, and the manner in which it is set, and the 

mark put thereon, must be particularly described in your 

field notes. 

The corner posts, where mounds are not made, must rise at 

least three feet above the surface of the ground; and where 

corner posts are placed in mounds, they must rise at least one 

foot above the top of the mound. 

If a corner, where bearing or witness trees are not to be 

found within a reasonable distance therefrom, shall fall within a ravine, or in any other situation, where the nature of the 

ground or the circumstances of its locality shall be such as 

may prevent or prove unfavorable to the erection of a mound, 

you will perpetuate such corner by selecting, in the immediate vicinity thereof, a suitable plat of ground as a site for a 

-Page 37- 

bearing or witness mound, and erect thereon a mound of 

earth in the same manner, and conditioned in every respect 

with charcoal deposited beneath, as before described, for a 

corner; and determine and state in your field notes the distance and course of the bearing or witness mound, so placed 

and erected, from the place of the corner. 

If the claimants of any surveys wish their corners more 

permanently established than is herein required, and will 

417 
furnish the additional materials and labor, you will establish 

the said corners in the manner they may request, and with 

the materials they may furnish:-their consent, however, 

will not authorize you to establish a corner of a less permanent character than is required in these instructions. 

At the intersections of the several lines of private surveys 

with the lines of the public surveys, corners must be established for the proper fractional sections, (in the manner 

heretofore directed for establishing corners,) and the course 

and distance therefrom to the nearest corner on the line of the 

public survey, and outside of the private survey, must be 

determined and entered in the field book. 

Also, when one private survey corners on a line of another 

private survey, or intersects it and continues across into the 

survey of which the line so intersected is a boundary, and the 

adjoining land is public, the course and distance therefrom to 

the nearest corner on the line of the private survey upon 

which you are cornering, and outside the survey you are 

executing, must be determined and entered in the field book. 

When a line of one private survey continues across, or into 

another confirmed private survey, or block of surveys, the 

points of intersection with the several lines thereof, when 

there is no public land adjoining, will be perpetuated in the 

manner of establishing corners, except that each witness tree 

will be marked with only a blaze, and notch facing the post or 

stone set to perpetuate the aforesaid point of intersection; 

and the relative position of the points of intersection thus 

perpetuated, and of the corners on the lines intersected, must 

be determined and entered in the field book. 

And when public land adjoins the point of intersection, the 

said point will be perpetuated as a fractional section corner, 

by marking a tree on the public land, as before directed, for 

marking witness trees to fractional section corners, and by 

marking one other witness tree on the private land, with a 

blaze and notch, facing the corner tree, post, or stone. 

Whenever the terms ‘>public surveys” and ‘>public land,” or 

terms of similar import are used in these instructions, you 

are to understand that they comprehend all land surveyed as 

public land, which has not been included in the survey of 

private claims subsequently executed, and all lines run as 

public lines, notwithstanding the United States may have 

parted with the land by public or private sale. 

The survey of claims which are confirmed unconditionally 

according to a former survey, will conform thereto, regardless of any excess or deficiency in quantity, provided, the old 

lines and corners can be found, 

-Page 38- 

and properly identified; in which event, the old corners will 

be run to, and the true courses and lengths of the several lines 

according to your operations will be correctly stated in the 

field notes; and if the old lines and corners cannot all be 

found, you will conform to the old survey as near as practicable, by running the courses and distances called for, or to 

the intersection of the proper lines as may be required, making the necessary allowance for the difference in the variation of the needle. 

The re-surveys of claims which are confirmed according to 

an old survey, but are restrictive in quantity, will be surveyed as above directed for those not restricted, except that if 

there is any excess or deficiency, it will be thrown off or taken 

in by a line parallel to that old line of the survey which the 

claimant may direct; or if he fails, or declines, to give directions, throw offthe excess, or take in the deficient quantity on 

the side which you may think will best promote his interest; 

being careful to note all the particulars relating thereto, in 

your field book, and give the position of the old lines and 

corners which may be abandoned, because of the excess or 

deficiency in quantity. Claims which are confirmed according to the concession, and have been legally surveyed in 

conformity therewith, except as to exactness in quantity, will 

be re-surveyed as the class of cases last above mentioned. 

If the survey heretofore executed of a claim which is confirmed according to a concession, whether the concession is or 

is not special as to the locality, but is special as to the direction of the lines, the proportional length of the different sides, 

or the figure of the survey to be made in virtue thereof, does 

not conform to these requirements of the concession, the said 

survey will be altogether disregarded, except so far as it may 

be useful in cases where the concession is not special as to 

locality, in identifying the situation of the land intended to be 

confirmed, unless the survey was executed and approved by 

the proper Spanish officer prior to the transfer of the country 

to the United States, in which event the survey will be considered as evidence of the changed intention of the authority 

making the concession, and will be taken as a part and parcel 

thereof. 

Claims which are confirmed according to special concessions, and which have not been surveyed, you will survey in 

strict accordance with the terms of the concessions; always 

bearing in mind that where there are no special requirements in the concession, it was the general practice under the 

government with which the claims originated, to run them 

either in squares, or in right angled parallelograms of 1-5.10, 

or some intermediate or greater number of arpents, by 40 or 

80, according to the size of the tract, or double as long as wide, 

unless some other survey or grant intervened, and rendered a 

departure from this rule unavoidable, in which case the rule 

was only so far departed from as was necessary to get rid of 

the interference with the prior surveys. 

Settlement claims which were legally surveyed before the 

confirmation, and sanctioned by the surveyor general, will be 

re-surveyed as nearly conformable to the old survey as practicable, departing therefrom only so far as may be necessary 

to include the exact quantity confirmed, unless the old survey 

of a newly confirmed tract interferes with a legal- 

-Page 39- 

ly executed and approved survey of an old confirmation, in 

which event, the survey under the new confirmation, must be 

so made as to avoid all such interference by taking in such of 

the adjoining public lands as will make the survey in as 

compact and regular form as practicable. 

Settlement claims which were not surveyed and sanctioned by the surveyor general before the confirmation, will 

be surveyed as near in squares as may be, so as to include the 

improvements, and not interfere with prior claims. You will 

allow the claimant, or his authorized agent, in these cases, to 

designate the land to be taken in, by conforming, as near as 

practicable, to the section lines, and the divisional lines of 

418 
sections: that is, you will not make a division of more than 

one quarter section by a line not recognized by law as creating a legal subdivision. If, however, the improvement, in 

virtue of which a settlement claim is confirmed, is within a 

survey of an old confirmed claim, the survey of said settlement right must interfere with said old survey, so much as 

may be necessary to include the improvement upon which it 

is founded. 

Information given to you by a claimant, or his agent, relating to the situation of a claim, will govern your operations; 

provided, you believe, from all the circumstances which come 

to your knowledge, that such information is correct; and 

provided, also, that it does not contradict the papers with 

which you may be furnished. 

The position of any point or place called for in a concession, 

and also of the settlement or improvement in virtue of which 

a settlement claim is confirmed, must be determined in the 

field notes. 

Whenever the line of a survey is intended to conform to the 

legal subdivision line of a section, either in part, or to its 

whole extent, said subdivision line must be run in conformity 

with the principles established by law for surveying and 

laying off the public lands of the United States. 

And when the line of a survey runs with the legal subdivision line of a section, with a section line, or with the line of 

another private survey, you will call in your field notes for 

running with said line, and call for all old corners which you 

may pass, and state distinctly their position, condition and 

general appearance, and whether the evidence thereof found 

upon the ground agrees with the description of it furnished 

you from this office; and if the evidence so found, should not 

agree with the description, state at large in your field notes 

how you determined its position, and what induced you to 

believe it to be the place of a corner, the description of which 

as furnished you did not agree with the evidance found upon 

the ground, in order that this office may be enabled to decide 

upon the sufficiency of your reasons for adopting it as the true 

position of a corner. 

If the description of corners furnished by this office shall be 

insufficient for properly connecting with a claim with the 

adjoining surveys, or shall be in any way whatever defective, 

you will give immediate notice thereof, and cease opperations 

on all lines that may be affected therby, until you are furnished with a proper description; and you are to distinctly 

understand that no omission of oversight of this office in 

furnishing in the first instance papers of this kind, will be 

considered a 

become corners of a survey you are executing, and which 

have been destroyed, may be renewed by you without further 

instructions from this office; provided, the necessary contiguous corners can be found and properly identified. The 

position of said destroyed corners will be determine in the 

following manner: 

1st. When at the intersection of two lines, by ascertaining 

the precise intersection of said lines. 

2d. When at the average distance between two other corners, by determing said average distance. 

3d. When at a legal subdivisional distance from a section 

corner, and a given fractional distance from some other corner, re-establish it at the like proportional distance from each 

of said corners, according to your operations. 

4th. When between two fractional corners, and at a given 

fractional distance from each, re-establish the corner at the 

place from which your measure to one of said fractional 

corners will have the same ratio to your measure to the other 

fractional corner, that the former measures had one to the 

other. 

If in tracing an old line, the corners at each extremity 

thereof can be found, and the line is blazed evenly between 

the said corners, the old blazes will be followed throughout; if, 

however, the blazed way from one corner to another varies 

from a straight line, it will not be followed in its windings, but 

new marks will be made on a direct line from corner to corner; 

unless some other survey or surveys on the opposite side of 

the line to your operations, corners on the said blazed way out 

of a direct line between the corners of the survey you are 

executing, in which event you will run straight between the 

several corners you may find on the blazed way, and report 

the true length and course of each division into which the 

boundary may be cut by reason of the said intervening corners. 

When a corner cannot be found, and properly identified, 

and the contiguous corners cannot be found to establish it in 

one of the four ways above authorized, the surveyor may at 

his own risk of having the work approved, adopt such measures as to him may seem best, from all the circumstances 

within his knowledge, to re-establish the corner, and report 

everything relating thereto to this office, to enable a proper 

decision to be made upon his plan of operations; or he may 

report all the facts connected with the case, and await further 

instructions. 

You must always recollect that the relations of a deputy 

surveyor to 

-Page 41- 

-Page 40- 

sufficient excuse for defective and improper connections with 

the adjoining or interfering surveys, public or private; this 

may frequently happen, because the very indefinite calls of 

many confirmations renders it extremely uncertain what 

ground the survey will cover, and consequently what corners 

may be wanted to connect with; you must therefore, in all 

such cases, after ascertaining what additional descritions 

will probably be wanted, apply therefor, and wait until they 

shall be furnished. 

Old corners of the public or private lands in the United 

States surveys on which you close or measure to, or that 

this office are of a highly confidential character; that to his 

discretion, as well as to his fidelity, and skill, much is necessarily entrusted; for it is evident that no instructions, however elaborate and detailed, can possibly anticipate and provide 

for every emergency which may occur upon the ground; and 

that the deputy surveyor, when there, is the only representative of the public interest; he should therefore act to the best 

of his understanding, and constantly bear in mind that the 

instructions issued by this office, are designed, and have no 

other aim than to fully accomplish the objects of the law, the 

most important of which are to perform the work accurately 

on the ground, to establish the lines and corners in the most 

419 
permanent and durable manner, and to describe the whole 

operations in the field book, plainly, fully, and distinctly in 

such a way that the meaning cannot possibly be mistaken or 

misunderstood. 

LINEAR MEASURE 

-Page 42- 

SUPERFICIAL MEASURE 

French Feet. 

Perches. 

6 

1 0 29 166 

2 0 58 333 

3 0 875 

4 1 16 661 

5 1 45833 

6 1 75 

7 2 04 166 

8 2 33 333 

9 2 625 

10 or 1 arpent 

72 are equal to 

CHAINS. LINKS. 

lineal. 2 91 666 

2 5 83 333 

3 8 75 

4 11 66 666 

5 14 58333 

G 17 50 

7 20 41 666 

8 23 33 333 

9 26 25 

10 29 16 666 

100 291 66 666 

1000 2916 66 666 

12 35 

U.S. Feet 

77 

Poles. 

Side of a league square. 

84 245 

Side ofamile square. 

Arpents. Perches. 

27 4 2-7 80 

Arpents. 

288 are equal to 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

100 

1000 

10000 

Arpents. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

117 

1175 

11755 

Acres. 

245 

0 85 07 

170 14 

2 55 21 

3 40 28 

4 25 35 

5 10 42 

5 95 49 

6 80 56 

7 65 625 

8 50 69 

85 06 94 

850 69 44 

8506 94 44 

Perches. Acres. 

17 551 1 

35 102 2 

52 653 3 

70 204 4 

87 755 6 

05 306 6 

22 857 7 

40 804 8 

57 959 9 

75 510 10 

55 102 100 

51 020 1000 

10 204 10000 

A league square contains 

7056 GOO2 50 

Arpents. Perches. 

Arpe"t5. Acres 

A mile square contains 

725 32 64 640 

-Page 43- 

Form of keeping Field Notes. 

If first book, or if there are any new hands employed, their 

oaths will become foremost. 

A. B., hind chain-man. 

C. D., fore chain-man. 

E. F., flag-man. 

G. H., Axe-man. 

Measuring chain compared with the standard and found 

correct. 

Compass adjusted to the line between sections 25 and 26, 

township 89 north, range 72 west, of the 5th principal meridian-variation 8' and 30' east. 

Survey a tract of 800 arpents equal to 680 561100 acres of 

land, granted to J. K. on the 20th day of March, 1803, by 

Carlos Dehault Delassus, Lieutenant Governor of Upper 

Louisiana; surveyed by Antoine Soulard, Surveyor General 

of the same province, cn the 3d of July, 1801; recommended 

for confirmation according to the concession by the late board 

of commissioners on the 17th of August, 1834, decision 

No.-, and confirmed according to the said decision of 

the commissioners by an act of Congress, approved 4th of 

July, 1836. 

Begin at the old south-western corner, a black oak 36 

inches diameter, with marks thereon, and which I mark with 

three notches in the direction of each line of this survey which 

runs therefrom; from said black oak a hickory 16 inches 

diameter, marked P. S., bears N. 20" E. 45 links, and a white 

oak marked R. 72 W., T. 89 N-see 26 bears S. 33, W. 14 links. 

Thence 

S. 82" E. 

Chains 

14.52 

19.36 

46.30 

72.30 

75.00 

79.00 

90.00 

116.67 

Thence 

N. 8" E. 

Chains. 

13.40 

58.33 

Thence 

N. 82 W 

Chains 

16.00 

17.48 

38.00 

52.80 

vliith the old marked line. 

4 walnut 17 inches diameter. 

4 road leading to J. K.'s mill bears N. W. 

EnterafieldbearsN. W. andS.E. 

[ntersect the line between sections 25 and 26, 

;ownship 89 north, range 72 west, where set a post in 

,he field for corner to fractional sections 25 and 

16, from which a poplar 18 inches diameter bears S. 

jl"E., 13 links and a hickory 24 inches diameter 

Dears S. 45", W. 43 links; measured south 3 chains 

md 24 links to the quarter section corner on said 

line. 

Leave the field bears N. E. and S. W. 

A creek 50 links wide runs north. 

Leave timber and enter prairie bears N. W. and S. E. 

Deposit two quarts of charcoal 6 inches beneath the 

natural surface of the earth, covered the charcoal 

with three inches of dirt, and set thereon a post 8 

inches diameter, and 4% feet long, around which I 

erect a mound of earth 3 feet high, 5 feet square at 

the base, and 2 feet square at the top, the sides 

whereofare reveted, or faced with sods laid hori- 

-Page 44- 

aontally, and in successive layers on each other, 

each layer having an offset inwards, corresponding to 

the general slope ofthe face of the mound, for 

corner of the survey and fractional section 25. 

Land rolling, good soil, timber, hickory and white 

oak, no undergrowth. 

Intersect the line between sections 24 and 25, township 

89 north, range 72 west, where for corner to 

fractional sections 24 and 25, set a lime stone 22 

inches long, 14 inches wide, and 4 inches thick 

endways into the ground to the depth of 8 inches; 

marked said stone distinctly with a cross, thus X, on 

the east side, the wide way facing east. 

Measured 

east on the line between sections 24 and 25, 30 

chains and 32 links to the corner of sections 24 and 

25 on the range line. 

Set a post in the prairie for corner to this survey 

and fractional section 24, from which a lone white 

oak 16 inches diameter bears N. 17" E. 35 links-no 

other tree convenient. 

September 17, 1836. 

Enter timber bears N. E. and S. W. 

A white oak 28 inches diameter corner to P. Y.'s 

survey, No. 29582 for 160 acres. 

Another corner of said survey No. 29582, one ofthe 

old witness trees, a black oak 17 inches diameter, 

bears No. 20" E., 17 links distant-the other witness 

tree has fallen down, I therefore mark in fractional 

sections 24, a walnut 18 inches diameter, which bears 

N. 47" W. 82 links distant. 

Intersect the line between sections 23 and 24,17 

chains and 93 links south of the quarter section 

420 
60.15 

72.13 

95.14 

101.00 

116.66 

Thence 

s. 8" w. 

Chains 

14.28 

21.00 

58.25 

N. 8Y4 E. 

Chains 

14.32 

23.00 

37.25 

43.41 

58.25 

corner, set a post for corner to fractional sections 

23 and 24, from which a white oak 16 inches diameter 

bears N. 25"E. 18 links, and a white oak 88 inches 

diameterbearsN. 32" W. 18links. 

A hickory 18 inches diameter. 

Enter bottom land ofriver Ohaha, bears N. E. and S. W. 

Intersected the right and east bank of Ohaha river, 

runs northeasterly, set a post for corner to 

fractional section 23, from which a hickory 15 inches 

diameter bears N. 26"E. 14 links, and a birch 24 

inches diameter bears S. 72" E. 72 links. 

The left and west bank of Ohaha river set a post 

corner to fractional section 23, from which an elm 18 

inches diameter bears N. 18" W. 13 links and a white 

oak 15 inches diameter, bears S. 62" W. 13 links 

distant, here enter hills. 

Set a limestone 16 inches long, 14 inches wide, and4 

inches thick, endways into the ground, to the depth of 8 inches, 

-Page 45- 

marked said stone distincly with a cross, thus X, on the S. E. 

side, the wide way facing S. 82" E., and from said stone a hickory 

18 inches diameter, bears N. 27, W. 32 links, and a black Walnut 

20 inches diameter, bears S. 24" E. 13 links. 

On a random and closing line. 

The left and northerly bank of Ohaha river runs easterly. 

The right bank of the river. 

Intersect the southern boundary of the survey, 27 

links S. 82" E. ofthe beginning corner tree, from 

which beginning corner tree I correct the line. 

Enter river bottom bears E. and W. 

Intersect the line between sections 23 and 26,ll 

chains and 17 links east ofthe corner to sections 

22,23,26 and 27 set apost, &c., [here describe the 

corner.] 

The right bank of Ohaha river, set a post &c., [here 

describe the corner.] 

The left bank of the river, where set a post, &c., 

[here describe the corner,] enter hills here. 

The north-western corner ofthe survey. 

Then to meander the Ohaha river through J. K.'s survey, 

and through the adjoining fractional section, I begin at the 

corner to fractional section 22 and 23, towhship 89 north, 

range 72 west, on the right bank of the Ohaha river, and 

meander down the right bank of said river through said 

fractional section 23, as follows: 

N. 82" E. 7.20 chains, at 2 chains the mouth of a branch 8 

links wide comes from the S. E. 

N. 74%" E. 6.80 chains, to the corner at the intersection of 

the western boundary of J. K.'s survey with the right bank of 

the Ohaha river. 

Thence with the meander of the said right bank of the 

Ohaha river through J. K.'s survey, as follows: 

N. 70" E. 10.00 chains-at 4 chains a ferry landing. 

N. 63" E. 12.45 chains-at 7.50 chains, the mouth of J. K.'s 

mill creek 150 links wide, comes from the S. E. 

The mill is on the left side of the creek, and about 

25 chains in south-easterly direction. 

N. 22" E. 9.70 chains-to the corner at the intersection of 

the northern boundary of J. K.'s survey, with the 

right bank of the Ohaha river. 

-Page 46- 

Thence down the right bank of the Ohaha river through 

fractional section 23, township 89 north, range 72 west, as 

follows: 

Chains. 

N. 25" E . . . . . . . .25.50 

N. 50" E . . . . . . . . . 2.00 

N. 14" E . . . . . . . .30.00, 

to the corner to fractional sections 4 and 23. 

[Then meander the left bank of the river; and your field work 

for this survey, and its connections with the public surveys, 

will be completed.] 

Separate instructions will be furnished for making the plat 

and description of the survey. 

-Page 47- 

APPENDIX. 

[ 1. 1 

Numerous and repeated applications having been made to 

the Surveyor General, by county and United States deputy 

Surveyors and others interested in the Public Surveys within 

the District of Illinois and Missouri, for information and 

directions as to the proper method of making re-surveys, 

renewing missing corners formerly established, and subdividing Sections, regular, anomalous, and fractional, the 

answers to which would occupy much time and delay other 

public business, it is deemed advisable to publish, for the 

information of those concerned, a brief statement of the system adopted by the General Land Office for the surveys of the 

public lands, together with such other information as the 

records show to be most needed by those engaged in the 

re-tracing of old surveys, or dividing the public lands according to the sales made thereof by the officers of the United 

Stats; and more especially necessary since it is known that a 

large portion of the early surveys, both in Illinois and Missouri, were carelessly, and, in some cases, erroneously executed. 

In the incorrect surveys above alluded to, the Township 

lines are not always straight, the measure frequently being 

more or less erroneous, and it is impossible to frame instructions so minute in detail as to meet every case, and enable a 

deputy or county Surveyor to do equal and exact justice to all 

parties concerned. After all that might or could be said, much 

will depend upon the judgment and experience of the Surveyor on the ground. 

It is not intended, by what is here recommended for renewing missing corners or subdividing Sections, to give anypositive directions to county Surveyors. This office has no control 

over them whatever, but it is believed that the information 

here given will enable the Surveyor in most cases to do justice 

to the parties interested, without any further correspondence 

with the Surveyor General on the subject. 

42 1 
[ 2. 1 [ 5. 1 

Systems of Surveys. 

Under the provisions of the several Acts of Congress in 

relation thereto, the Public Lands of the United States are 

surveyed into rectangular tracts, bounded by North and 

South, East and West lines, all having reference to some 

established East and West Base Line and North and South 

Meridian, are are designated by numbers accordingly. 

Meridians and Base Lines, in Illinois. 

The Public Surveys in the State of Illinois are connected 

with, or extended from, the 2d, 3d and 4th Principal Meridians, the 1st Principal Meridian being in the State of Ohio. 

-Page 48- 

[ 3. 1 

Base and Standard, or Correction Lines. 

The Surveyor General first establishes some known parallel of latitude as a Base Line; North and South of which, other 

lines running due East and West are surveyed by deputy 

Surveyors, to which, surveys of the Townships or larger 

tracts are afterwards connected. These last mentioned lines 

are usually run thirty miles apart, and in the District of 

Illinois and Missouri are designated Standard Lines; their 

object being the correction of the surveys as extended to them 

from the established Base Line. In other Surveying Districts, 

the Standard Lines are known as Correction Lines, and are 

numbered from the Base Line for that District. Standard or 

Correction Lines are run East or West from the Principal 

Meridian, and quarter Section and Section corners established at every 40.00 chains for the Sections North of said 

line, but not for the Sections on their South sides. 

Standard or Correction Lines compensate the error arising 

from the convergency of the Meridians as they proceed northwardly, and arrest inaccuracies arising from incorrect 

measurement. They form the Base for the Townships on their 

North until the occurrence of the next Standard or Correction 

Line, which in its turn becomes a Base for the next tier of 

Townships; and for each Township this Base Line is extended 

sufficiently to meet the convergency for a given distance. 

[ 4. 1 

Principal Meridians. 

In like manner are selected and established certain Meridian Lines, East and West of which the surveys of Townships 

are numbered and referred. 

The Base and Meridian Lines in this District were formerly 

run with a common compass, and in many instances are far 

from being correct, or following a parallel of latitude as intended, which will account for the many inaccuracies to be 

met with in the older surveys of Townships. These inaccuracies have led to the adoption by the General Land Office, 

wherever practicable, of the use of Burt's Solar Compass, an 

astronomical instrument, operating independently of the 

magnetic needle, admirably adapted to the purpose, and with 

which other surveys may also be made. In the surveys hereafter to be made in this District, the Surveyor General would 

recommend the use of this instrument in preference to the 

Theodolite or common Compass, in running Township and 

Range Lines; the Compass to be used only in the subdivisions 

of a Township into Sections. 

-Page 49- 

The 2d Principal Meridian is a line running due North 

from the mouth of little Blue river, in the State of Indiana. 

The 3d Principal Meridian is a line running due North 

from the mouth of the Ohio river, and is terminated at its 

intersection with the State line between Illinois and Wisconsin. 

The 4th Principal Meridian commences in the centre of the 

channel and at the mouth of the Illinois river, but immediately crosses to the East shore, and passes up on that side to a 

point in the channel in the river, 72 miles from its mouth. 

Here the Base Line for this Meridian commences and extends 

due West to the Mississippi river. The 4th Meridian is then 

continued North to a curve in the Mississippi, where it 

crosses and passes up on the West side of that river fifty-three 

miles, recrosses into Illinois and passes through the town of 

Galena to the North boundary of the State. It then continues 

through the State of Wisconsin,and terminates at a point on 

the Southern shore of Lake Superior, about 10.00 chains 

West of the mouth of Montreal river. That part of this Meridian lying on the West side of the Mississippi river is considered as a blank line only. 

The Base Line for both the 2d and 3d Meridians commences 

at Diamond Island, in the Ohio river, and runs due West to 

the Mississippi river. 

[ 6. 1 

Meridian and Base Line, in Missouri. 

The Public Surveys in the State of Missouri are connected 

with, or extended from the 5th Principal Meridian. 

This line commences at the mouth of the Arkansas river, in 

the State of Arkansas, and runs due North, crossing the 

Mississippi river in Township 53 North, near Clarksville. 

Thence continuing up the East side of the river, in the State of 

Illinois, about one hundred and forty miles; it then re-crosses 

the Mississippi into Iowa, in T. 77 N., and is continued 

through that State, terminating on the right bank of said 

river, in T. 91 N. The surveys in the State of Iowa are connected with this Meridian. The Base Line to this Meridian 

commences in the mouth of the St. Francis river, and runs 

due West across the State of Arkansas. That part of this 

Meridian lying on the East side of the Mississippi river is 

considered as a blank line only. 

[ 7. 1 

Division of Public Lands. 

The United States Lands are surveyed by deputy Surveyors, appointed and commissioned by the Surveyors 

General. These deputy Surveyors divide the lands into tracts 

422 
called Townships, each of which is six miles square, except 

when they are anomalous or fractional, as hereinafter explained. They subdivide each of these Townships into thirtysix equal squares, called Sections. The Township and Section 

lines being all run and marked, and the corners of all the 

tracts being established on the ground, as hereinafter explained. 

thrown into the South boundary of Section 31 West of the 

quarter section corner. 

[ 11. 1 

ANOMALOUS TOWNSHIPS AND SECTIONS. 

When the surveys of Townships have been connected with 

Standard 

-Page 50- 

-Page 51- 

L 8. 1 

Description of Public Lands. 

Tiers of Townships lying East and West of each other are 

known as being parallels of latitude North or South of the 

established Base Line, according to their numbers; and tiers 

of Townships lying North and South of each other are known 

as being in Meridian Ranges East or West of the established 

Principal Meridian, according to their numbers, and are 

named as in Townships and Ranges accordingly, for the purpose of facilitating the descriptions of their localities, as by a 

combination of these numbers any part of a Township maybe 

described and known by reference to the particular Range, 

Township, Section, quarter Section and Lot, or part of quarter Section in which it lies, as for instance “The South half of 

the North-East quarter of Section 3, in Township number 1 

North of the Base Line, and in Range number 1 EEst of the 3d 

Principal Meridian, being Lot number 1, containing 80 acres 

of land,” may be designated as in Diagram No. 3, as follows:- 

S. 1-2ofN.E. 1-4Sec. 3,T. lN.,R. lE.ofthe3dP.M.No. 1, 

80a. 

[ 9. 1 

RANGES. 

Ranges of Townships are numbered, as the case may be, 

East or West from the established Principal Meridian of the 

Surveying District in which they lie. Range Lines are run 

North or South from the Base Line, and corners for Sections 

and quarter Sections are established thereon at every mile 

and half mile or 80 and 40 chains, for the Sections and 

quarter Sections, on the West side of the line, but not for those 

on the East side. 

[ 10. 1 

TOWNSHIPS. 

Townships, when regularly surveyed, contain areas of six 

miles square and are numbered as the case may be, North or 

South from the established Base Line for the surveys of the 

District in which they lie. Township lines are run East or 

West on a random line, and corrected back towards the West 

or East, as the case may be, and in establishing this corrected 

line, the Section and quarter Section corners are established 

on the true line, at every 80 and 40 chains, for the Sections 

and quarter Sections on the North side of the line, but not for 

those on the South side. The excess of all East and West 

Township lines over 5 miles and 40.00 chains is always 

Lines or other surveys, and the surveys of Sections connected 

with the Northern and Western boundaries of the Township, 

thus giving to such Townships or Sections areas greater than 

the regular legal quantities, they are then called Anomalous 

Townships or Sections as the case may be. 

[ 12. 1 

FRACTIONAL TOWNSHIPS AND SECTIONS. 

When in like manner the surveys of Townships or Sections 

are connected with, or when the surveys of such tracts are 

limited or intersected by, a navigable stream or lake, the 

shores of which require to be meandered, thus giving to a 

Township or Section less than the legal areas as established 

by law, they are called Fractional Townships or Sections, as 

the case may be. 

[ 13. 1 

SECTIONS. 

Sections, when not anomalous, or fractional, contain 640 

acres each, and are numbered from East to West, and from 

West to East, progressively, commencing with the NorthEast corner Section, or No. 1, and ending with the South-East 

or No. 36, as is shown in the Diagram No. 1, representing the 

subdivision of a Township into Sections. 

[ 14. 1 

PLATS OF SURVEYS. 

After the surveys are made by the Deputy Surveyor, and 

their Field Notes properly sworn to and returned to the Surveyor General, proper Plats each Township are made out in 

triplicate, one of which is recorded in the office of the Surveyor General, subject to the examination of the public; 

another is sent to the Register of the Land Office in whose 

District the land may be, and is there filed subject to examination, and upon which plat the sales are made; the third 

is forwarded to the Commissioner of the General Land Office 

for the archives of the Government. Subdivision plats of parts 

of the Townships as may be required, are made out and 

returned to the Registers and Commissioner of all those 

quarter Sections within the Northern and Western tiers of 

Sections bordering upon the Northern and Westen boundaries of the Township, and of those lying along the margin of 

a navigable lake, or bank of a navigable river; and also, those 

adjoining an Indian or State Boundary Line, or the boundary 

lines of any private survey or confirmed land claim. 

423 
[ 15. 1 -Page 52- 

TOWNSHIP PLAT, 

Not bounded by a navigable Lake or River. 

Township contains the 36 Sections, either in whole or in part, 

and is not bounded by a navigable stream or lake. It also gives 

- the names of the several boundary lines of the Township 

selected, with the designations of the surrounding Townships, showing how they lie North and South of the Base 

Line, and East and West of the 3d Principal Meridian in 

Illinois:- 

The following Diagram, No. 1, is an example to show how a 

Township is subdivided, either regular, anomalous, or fractional, so long as the 

[ 16. 1 

DIAGRAM No. 1. 

ILLINOIS TOWNSHIP PLAT, 

Of Township 1 North of the Base Line, Range 1 East of the 3d 

Principal Meridian. 

Sec.6 

a Sec. 7 

C .- 

- 

C 

C 

u 

.- 

.- Sec.18 $ 

r 

L + 

T 

C 

C 

+ 

r 

C 

~ec. 30 

Sec. 31 

T. 2 N., R. I E. of the 3d P.M. 

Sec. 5 

East 

Sec. 8 

Sec. 17 

~~ 

Sec. 20 

Sec. 29 

Sec.32 

Township Line 

Sec. 4 Sec. 3 Sec. 2 Sec. I 

md West Subdivision L ine 

Sec. 9 Sec. 10 Sec. II Sec. 12 

Sec.16 1 Sec.15 1 Sec.14 1 Sec. I3 

Schools 

Sec. 21 

Sec. 28 

Sec. 33 

Sec. 22 

Sec. 27 

Sec. 34 

Sec. 23 Sec. 24 

Sec. 26 Sec. 25 

Sec. 35 Sec. 36 

Or igina I Base Line 

T. I S., R. I E. of the 3d P.M. 

424 
[ 17. 1 -Page 53- 

Fractional Township Plat the designation of the surrounding Townships on the North 

side of the river, showing how they lie North of the Base Line 

and West of the 5th Principal Meridian in Missouri. Diagram No. 2 is an example selected to show a fractional 

Township, made so by a navigable river, and contains only 

parts of two Sections North ofthe Missouri river, giving the 

names of the boundary lines, and 

[ 18. 1 

DIAGRAM No. 2. 

MISSOURI FRACTIONAL TOWNSHIP PLAT, 

Of Fractional Township 50 North of the Base Line, Range 34 

West of the 5th Principal Meridian. 

425 
-Page 54- -Page 55- 

[ 19. 1 

Subdivision of Sectional Areas. 

When Sections are neither anomalous or fractional, the 

Registers of the Land office may, to suit the applicants for the 

purchase of the Public Lands, subdivide the quarter Sections 

into halves or quarters, or 80 or 40 acre Lots. In the calculations of the areas of interior Sections they are always taken to 

contain 640 acres, and the subdivisions designated as containing 160,80 and 40 acres, respectively, whether the same 

be more or less, except where the northern or southern 

boundary lines of the Sections are 150 links greater or less 

than 80 chains, in which case the areas of the divisions are 

calculated and returned to the Registers as containing the 

quantities of land respectively so determined. But all those 

tiers of quarter Sections adjoining the Northern and Western 

boundaries of a Township, or lying on the shores of a navigable river or lake, and all the North and west tiers of Sections within an anomalous Township, or such fractional Sections as exceed 60 acres in area, should be subdivided according to the circumstances of the case, to the best advantage by 

the Surveyor General, and a certified plat of the subdivisions 

sent to the Register previous to any sale of such lands being 

made. These subdivisions are shown in Diagram N. 4. 

[ 20. 1 

Merged Areas. 

Tracts smaller than 60 acres in extent, may, according to 

the circumstances of the case, and the judgment of the Surveyor General, be reported to the Register with a separate 

area, or may be attached by him to an adjoining tract for sale, 

and its area merged into that of the tract to which it is 

attached, which should always be shown on the plat by peculiar marks drawn across the division lines. 

[ 21. 1 

Former Subdivisions of Sections. 

Previous to 1828 the Deputy Surveyors were required to 

return, with their field notes, plats of all the Townships 

which they surveyed, and to calculate the area of the fractional Sections on the navigable rivers and lakes, and in the 

North and West tier of quarter Sections in a Township. These 

plats were rudely constructed, and, in many cases, the areas 

put down upon them were erroneous. When this fact was 

ascertained before the land was sold, a recalculation was 

made in the Surveyor General’s Office, and the Register of 

the Land office, in whose district the land laid, was furnished 

with a correct plat thereof, as a substitute to the one formerly 

sent to him. 

In making the calculations of the area of the North and 

West tier of quarter Sections in a Township, some of the 

deputies considered the 

quarter Section corners on the Township and Range lines as 

common to the Sections on both sides of the line, whilst others 

adopted the method now in use and partiularly explained in 

Diagrams Nos. 4 and 5. 

At one time, some of the Deputy Surveyors, in subdividing 

a Township through which a navigable stream passed, ran a 

random line East between the proper Sections, and corrected 

it West, making the corner to the Fractional Sections on both 

banks of the river and on the true line; others pursued the 

method as now required. 

[ 22. 1 

The areas in many quarter Sections appear to have been 

put down without any calculation whatever, and it is therefore impossible to adopt any rule which will apply in all cases. 

The experienced Surveyor will generally be able to determine which of the foregoing methods was used in making the 

calculation of the area of a quarter Section, and he should 

make subdivisions accordingly in replacing lines formerly 

run by Deputy Surveyors of the United States. 

[ 23. 1 

Present Subdivision of Sections. 

None of the Acts of Congress, in relation to the Public 

Lands, make any special provision in respect to the manner 

in which the subdivisions of Sections should be made by 

Deputy Surveyors. 

The following plan may, however, be safely adopted in 

respect to all Sections, excepting those adjoining the North 

and West boundaries of a Township, where the same is to be 

re-surveyed. 

426 
-Page 56- 

r 24. 1 

Subdivision of interior Sections. 

DIAGRAM No. 3. 

REGULAR SECTION. 

79 

0 

0 

d9 

160 a. 

0 K 

0 

0 

d6 80a. 

P 

6 

Sec, 

E 

A. 64 

80 a. 

80 

H 

*I 

H A. 160 .OO 

80 a. 

0 

9 

8 

10 I 

L F 

1-00 

160 a. 

0 

9 

9 

!O 

'I 

-Page 57- 

[ 25. 1 

The Surveyor should have descriptions of all the established corners of the Section to be subdivided, in order to 

identify them, and find the place where each corner post, 

stone or mound, had been set. Then begin at a quarter Section 

corner, on a North and South line, say at D, from which run 

east on a random line, set a temporary post at 40.00 chains, 

note the distance to the point where said line intersects the 

East boundary of the Section, and the distance it falls North 

or South of the quarter Section corner at F. Then, by means of 

offsetts from the random, run a true line from the corner at F 

to that at D, and at equidistance between them establish the 

corner E. Then, by first running randoms as aforesaid, make 

a straight line from E. to B, and from E to H, and you have the 

Section divided into quarters. But should it be necessary to 

subdivide any of the quarters, say, for example, the N. E. 

quarter, into four 40 acre lots, and the S. W. quarter into two 

equal parts, then, in running the random line East from D to 

F, temporary posts should be set at 20 and 60 chains, to mark 

the points lettered K and L, and the corners should be established on the true true line, from F. to D, so as to place the 

corner L at average distance between F and E, and the corner 

K at average distance between E and D. In like manner the 

corner at M should be equi-distant between E B; 0 equidistant between B C; N equi-distant between C F, and I 

427 
equi-distant between M. N, and straight lines run from I to 0, 

and I to L. The corner at P. should be equi-distant between G. 

H, and a straight line run between P and K. 

North and South lines, all of which, except those intersecting 

the North boundary of a Township, are 80.00 chains in 

length, and have the quarter section corners thereon precisely at 40.00 chains; whereas, what are called East and West 

lines, excepting those in the West tier of Sections, are never 

due East and West, at the variation assumed, unless a random line, which has to be first run, happens to strike the 

corner run for. 

[ 26. 1 

This method offirst running a line from D to F is considered 

preferable to basing the work on the North and South line H 

to B, for the reason that the corners at D and F are on the 

Subdivision of Sections adjoining the North boundary of a 

Township. 

DIAGRAM No. 4. 

FRACTIONAL SECTIONS. 

0 

P 4 

39. E 

No. 2 F’ 

E 

75 

co 

38.23 a. 38.78 a. 

co 

bL 0 

oi 

ro 39.75 

c 

4 37-41 a. 37.96 a. 

;o No. 2 

M 0 (D 

cb N M 

3 

? 

2 

No. 1 

80 a. 

Sec, 

G 

3 

3 

d6 160 a. 

79 39.75 

C 

160 a. 
[ 30. 1 [ 33. 1 

These Sections, like those adjoining the North boundary of 

a Township, must be subdivided in a particular manner to 

suit the calculations of their several areas. Their East boundaries, except that of Section 6, are all 80 chains long, with the 

quarter Section corner at half that distance. Their North and 

South boundaries are all run due West; quarter Section corners are established thereon at 40 chains, and Section corners established where they intersect the Range line on the 

West. The lengths of the West boundaries are found by the 

distances, the North and South boundaries fall from the 

corners on the Range line previously run. The West boundaries of the s. W. quarters are always taken for 40.00 chains. 

For example, the West boundary of Section 18, Diagram No. 

5, is according to the fallings of its north and south boundaries 80.16 chains in length. ‘40.00,’ is therefore set down 

-Page 61- 

as the distance along the South-west quarter, and “40.16” 

along the North-west quarter. Therefore, the subdivision 

must be made by making the line C D exactly parallel to F I, 

paying no attention to the quarter Section corner near D, 

which belongs only to Section 13 of the Township on the West. 

Run a straight line from A to B, and, at the point where it 

intersects C D, make the corner G. The North-east and Southeast quarters are always considered as 160 acres, and are to 

be subdivided as mentioned in relation to Section 10.-See 

Diagram No. 3. The North-west and South-west quarters are 

subdivided in the same manner, as mentioned in respect to 

Section 3, Diagram No. 4, except, that in the one case the 80 

acre Lots are laid off by East and West lines, with the northern Lot divided when necessary by a North and South line; 

whilst, in this case, the 80 acre Lots are laid off by North and 

South lines, with the western Lots divided by East and West 

lines. 

[ 31. 1 

When the lines of a Section are found to be badly surveyed, 

and the corners are somewhat out of their proper places, the 

corners must nevertheless govern, if they can be identified; 

and the Surveyor who subdivides such a Section must, in 

some instances, have to exercise his own judgment, unless 

the matter can be compromised by the parties interested. 

[ 32. 1 

For some years past, Deputy Surveyors have been instructed to make corners for the legal subdivision of Sections 

on all lines intersecting the North and West boundaries of a 

Township, where their lengths exceed 100 chains, which 

corners are at every 20 chains North, or West, as the case may 

be, of the quarter Section corners. These subdivision corners 

must govern, without regard to quantity. For example, if 

Section 18, Diagram No. 5, be an anomalous or long Section, 

and corners were established at K and L at 20 chains West of 

A and B, then there should be a straight line between the 

corners at K and L, and a corner made at M, as before 

mentioned. 

Subdivision of fractional Sections on Rivers and Lakes. 

No rules can be given for the subdivision of fractional 

Sections along the margin of a navigable lake, or the bank of 

a navigable river, for the reason that the subdivisions are 

made by the Surveyor General in such a manner as to give 

the fractional parts of the Section the most convenient shape; 

and the Surveyor must establish the lines representing the 

subdivision according to the official plat of the Township by 

which the sales were made. The general plan of such subdivisions may, however, be seen by reference to Diagram No. 2, of 

a fiactional Township in Missouri, which shows the manner 

of subdividing the Sections 

-Page 62- 

into tracts or lots suitable to the circumstances of the case. 

These lots are usually numbered in a series for each Section 

or quarter Section, and any one of them may be composed of 

several smaller subdivisions joined, or having their areas 

merged, as herein before described, on account of the peculiar 

shape of the smaller tracts, the value of the ground, or other 

circumstances of the case. 

[ 34. 1 

For instance, the South-east quarter of Section 12, being a 

narrow strip lying stretched along the bank of the river in 

front of Lots numbered 1 and 2, of the North-east quarter of 

the same Section, and being liable to abrasion from the waters of the river, has been joined to Lots 1 and 2, above 

mentioned, and the areas calculated and represented on the 

Diagram as above given. The fact of these small tracts being 

merged into the areas of the Lots adjoining them on the 

North, is shown on the Diagram by the two marks drawn 

across the dividing quarter Section line, I K between them, 

which mark is generally adopted on the plats to show that the 

areas of the adjoining lands have been calculated and reported together as one tract. 

35. 1 

Establishing Corners. 

In surveying the Public Lands, the United States’ Deputy 

Surveyors are required to mark only the true lines, and 

establish on the ground the corners to Townships and Sections, and quarter Section corners on the Range, Township 

and Sectional lines. 

There are, no doubt, many cases where the corners are not 

in the right place, more particularly on East and West Sectional lines, which, no doubt, is owing to the fact that some 

Deputy Surveyors did not always run the random lines the 

whole distance and close to the Section corner, correct the 

line back and establish the quarter Section corner on the true 

line, and at average distance between the proper Section 

corners; but only ran East or West (from the proper Section 

corner) 40.00 chains, and there establish the quarter Section 

corner. 

In all cases where the land has been sold, an the corners can 

430 
be found and properly identified according to the original 

approved Field Notes of the survey, this office has no authoriety to remove them. 

1 36. 1 

When a tree does not happen to occupy the place for a 

corner, a stone, which must be particularly described in the 

Field Notes, and must not be less than a stone 14 inches long, 

12 inches wide, and 3 inches thick, may be used for any 

corner, either in timber or prairie. In all other cases, corners 

are to be established by setting a post, which must be properly marked, (according to instructions given), in the 

-Page 63- 

ground, at the point for corner; and if in a situation where 

bearing or witness trees can be had within a reasonable 

distance, and the corner is a Township corner common to 4 

Townships, or a Section corner in the interior of a Township 

common to 4 Sections, four bearing or witness trees are 

taken, (one in each Township or Section). Each of these trees 

is to be particularly described, and blazed on the side facing 

the corner stone, tree or post, with letters and figures indicating the particular corner; the bearing and distance taken, 

and every thing in relation to the establishment of the corner 

must be entered in the Field Book. 

In all cases, except those provided for above, only two 

witness trees are taken, which are to be described, marked, 

bearings and distances taken and entered in the Field book. 

Township and Section corners in a prairie or other situations where witness trees cannot be had within a reasonable 

distance, are established by setting a post, (which must be 

properly marked) in the ground, and depositing around the 

post, 3 inches below the natural surface of the earth, a quantity (which must be specified in the Field Notes, and must not 

be less than 2 quarts,) of charcoal, stones, gravel, scoria, 

cinders, or other durable material, and then erecting a 

mound of sod or earth around the post. Quarter Section corners are established in the same manner as Section corners, 

only that no deposit is required to be made in the mound, 

1 37. 1 

Re -establ ishing Lost Corners. 

Where old Section or Township corners have been completely destroyed, the places where they are to be reestablished may be found in timber, where the old blazes are 

tolerably plain, by the intersections of the East and West 

with the North and South lines; if in prairie, in the following 

manner:-See Diagram No. 1. This example is often given. 

Suppose the corner to Sections 25,26,35 and 36, to be missing, and that the quarter Section corner on the line between 

Sections 35 and 36 to be found. Begin at the said quarter 

Section corner and run North on a random line to the first 

corner which can be identified, which we will suppose to be 

that of Sections 23, 24, 25 and 26. At the end of the first 40 

chains, set a temporary post, corner to Sections 25,26,35 and 

36; at 80 chains, set a temporary quarter Section corner post; 

and suppose, also, that 121.20 chains would be at a point due 

East or West of said corner to Sections 23,24,25 and 26, note 

the falling or distance from the corner run for and the distance run. Thence from said corner run South on a true line, 

dividing the surplus, 1.20 chains, equally between the thiee 

half miles, viz:-At 40.40 chains, establish a quarter Section 

corner; at 80.80 chains, establish the corner to Sections 25 

and 26, 35 and 36. Thence, to the quarter Section corner on 

the line between Sections 35 and 36, would be 40.40 chains. 

The last mentioned Section corner being established, East or 

West random or true lines can be now run therefrom, as the 

case may require. 

-Page 64- 

38. 1 

This method will, in most cases, enable the Surveyor to 

renew missing corners by re-establishing them in the right 

place. But it may happen, that, after having established the 

North and South line, as in the above case, the corner to 

Sections 26, 27, 34 and 35, can be found; also, the quarter 

Section corner on the line between Sections 26 and 35. In this 

case, it might be better to extend the line from the corner to 

Sections 26, 27, 34 and 35, to said quarter Section corner 

straight to its intersection with the North and South line 

already established, and there establish the corner to Sections 25,26,35 and 36. If this point should differ much from 

the point where you would place the corner by the first 

method laid down, it might be well to examine the line between Sections 25 and 36. 

1 39. 1 

Previous to the year 1828, only two bearing trees to any 

corner were described, although at Township and interior 

Section corners four trees were marked as witness trees. The 

mounds erected before that time were smaller than those now 

used, having no deposites in them of any substance whatever, 

for any kind of corner; indeed, they were sometimes scarcely 

erected at all, having often been only small collections of sods 

surrounding a temporary stake set for the corner. 

[ 40. 1 

But, since 1828, Deputy Surveyors have been required to 

describe in their Field Notes four bearing trees to Township 

and interior Section corners, only two being so described for 

all other corners; and they were directed to increase the size 

of the mounds erected around corner posts, placing charcoal 

or other durable material as a witness under the stake placed 

for the corners of Townships and Sections, but not under the 

corners returned for quarter Sections. Since that time a 

general uniform practice has prevailed, with some few exceptions, in the establishment of corners and the marking of 

lines of the public surveys. 

43 1 
[ 28. 1 -Page 59- 

In this case there can but one rule for the subdivision to 

make it agree with the manner in which the several areas are 

calculated. You will observe that the line I H is 79.50 chains, 

and that the one half of it, 39.75, is assumed as the distance 

from E to D, which last distance, 39.75, is deducted from 

79.70, the length of the line E F, leaving 39.95 chains between the points F. D; consequently, the line C D must be 

exactly parallel to the line H E, without paying any respect to 

the quarter Section corner near D, which belongs entirely to 

Section 34, of the Township on the North. Run the line A B in 

the same manner as that of D F, on Diagram No. 3, except, 

that the corner G is to be established at the point where the 

line A. B intersects the line C D. After surveying thus far, if 

the S. E. and S. W. quarters are to be subdivided, it can be 

done in the same manner as in Section 10, Diagram 3. In this 

case, to subdivide the N. E. and N. W. quarters, the line 

c 

48 

56.91 a. 

!NC 

5 0' 

12 

56.64a. 

M 

56.59 a. 

> >cuN 

j d 

YZ 

56.330. 

48 

I - 

K L must be parallel to A B; the two lines ought to be 20 

chains apart, the corner M made where K L is intersected by 

C D. But as two surveyors seldom agree exactly as to distances, there might be found an excess, or deficiency in the 

contents of the N. E. and N. W. quarters; if so, the line K L 

should be just so far from A B as to apportion the excess or 

defficiency between the lots 1 and 2, not equally, but in 

proportion to the quantities sold in each. If the Lots numbered 2 are divided on the Township plat by North and South 

lines, then, that of the North-west quarter must have its 

South end equi-distant between K M, and its north end equidistant between F D. The North-east quarter will be subdivided by a line parallel to M D, and L E, and exactly half way 

between them. 

Towns hip. 

DIAGRAM No. 5. 

ANOMALOUS SECTION. 

12 

88 

No. 1 

80a. 

Sec 

No. 1 

80 a. 

88 

0 

I 

160 a. 

c; 

C 

0 

0 

0 

18 

G co 

160 a. 

C 

C 

C * 

A 

- H 

C 

- 

1 

429 
XXXI. 

(This copy of the "Oregon Manual" is taken from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

INSTRUCTIONS 

TO THE 

SURVEYOR GENERAL OF OREGON; 

BEING 

A MANUAL 

FOR 

FIELD OPERATIONS. 

WASHINGTON: 

GIDEON AND CO., PRINTERS. 

1851. 

433 
... 

111. -VTO THE SURVEYOR GENERAL OF 

PUBLIC LANDS IN OREGON. 

Under the provisions of the third section of the act of 

Congress Yo reorganize the General Land Office,” approved 

July 4th, 1836, it is made the duty of the officer therein styled 

PRINCIPAL CLERK OF SURVEYS, “to direct and superintend the making of surveys, the returns thereof, and all 

matters relating thereto, which are done through the offices 

of the Surveyors General;’’ and pursuant to such authority, 

and by direction of the COMMISSIONER OF THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE, the following MANUAL OF INSTRUCTIONS, as to field duties, has been prepared for your own 

government and that of the DEPUTY SURVEYORS whom 

you may employ in the surveying service. These embrace 

three different heads, as illustrated by the accompanying 

map and diagrams, marked A, B, C. 

First. The preparations preliminary to surveying into 

townships of the country between the Cascade mountains 

and the Pacific coast, after having run and established the 

principal meridian and base lines, as prescribed by the act of 

27th September last, creating your office. And these are by 

means of lines run, at stated intervals, parallel to the principal base, and which are called standard parallels, as shown 

by the map C. 

-ivSecond. The subsequent division of the country into 

townships of six miles square, of 23,040 acres,’“as nearly as 

may be.” And such division has to be effected in reference to 

the true meridian, by methods which keep in view the convergency on their north of the meridional lines. 

Third. The subdivisional survey of the townships into the 

minor tracts of a mile square, called “sections,” containing 

640 acres; and those of a half-mile square, called “quarter 

sections,” containing a proportional quantity. Also the subdivisional survey of anomalous lots, having small water fronts, 

and extending back for quantity, as authorized in certain 

cases by special enactments. 

The true position of boundary corners, on line, is determined by the accurate measurement of the mile and halfmile stations; and wherever the line is arrested by causes 

recognised by law, [whether such be navigable streams or 

public or private boundary lines,] the “legal subdivision,” 

whatever it be, becomes a fractional tract of the same denomination it would bear if entire. 

The subdivisions of the public lands, which are known to 

the surveying laws, but the corners of which are not marked 

in the field at the public expense, are those of the “half 

quarter section,” of eighty acres, and the “quarter quarter 

section,” of forty acres; and also the subdivisions of a certain 

class of sections termed “fractional,” containing 160 acres or 

over. And these last mentioned are shown by protraction on 

the official plats of survey, and are laid down on them 

at distances having relation to the established corner boundaries, which determine their legal position. 

The “half section,” of 320 acres, comprises two “quarter 

sections,” adjoining east and west, or north and south. 

The aim of the instructions is to attainSIMPLICITY in the work, by dispensing, everywhere, with 

double corners except on the lines termed “standard parallel~,~’ which govern the surveys starting from them: 

UNIFORMITY, by requiring the boundary monuments to 

be constructed and established according to like methods 

under like circumstances; and 

PERMANENCY, by requiring those monuments to be so 

evidenced by collateral testimony, that in case the principal 

should be destroyed by time or accident, its legal witnesses, of 

unmistakeable import, shall be there. Thus the place of a 

township or section boundary POST, must be evidenced by 

four “bearing trees,” if to be had, (one in each adjoining 

township or section, as the case may be,) whose course and 

distance, kind and diameter, all are to be given in the notes. 

The place of a boundary MOUND is to be evidenced by a 

quadrangular trench about its base, whose angles are to the 

cardinal points, where the corner is common to four; and 

whose sides are to face the points where the corner is common 

to two; besides which are the four PITS, (outside the trench,) 

from whence the earth is dug to form the mound. The earth 

spaded from the trench is to be thrown up on to its outer edge, 

so as to form a 

-vicontinuous elevated margin, which will tend to make the 

work conspicuous, and, when covered with grass, will be 

enduring. And, in view of.all possible causes of its decay or 

destruction, by time or accident, the mound will be evidenced 

internally, (and as a last resort for legal purposes,) by the 

deposit, beneath the earth‘s surface, at the precise point of the 

corner, of a stone, or a small portion of charcoal, or a small 

charred stake. Such deposit will occupy but a few moments of 

time in making it, and is to be identified with the corner by an 

appropriate citation in the notes. 

The prescribed process for constructing mounds, however 

tedious it may suggest itself from the minute description, 

will, nevertheless, on practice, be found comparatively simple and easy. The mound is designed by law to perform an 

enduring office, and time must be taken to make it fulfil its 

legal intention. The conscientious DEPUTY, and his faithful 

ASSISTANTS, however remote and secluded from the eye of 

human surveillance, will, nevertheless, ever keep in view the 

USES, extending into the indefinite future, which their daily 

toil is designed by the laws of their country to accomplish for 

thepublic good, present and prospective; never losing sight of 

the important fact that their field work is destined always to 

remain identified with their respective NAMES and REPUTATION in their own field notes; and that the RECORD of 

their fidelity or their falsity will be one of their own composing; and, moreover, SEALED with the sanctity of their respective OATHS or affirmations,-two in each case-the 

first, for their faithful intent to execute their official trust 

before 

434 
-viientering upon duty; the second, (per act of August, 1846, 

herein quoted,) for having discharged that trust according to 

law and instructions, after returning from the field of operations. 

This manual has been prepared amidst the pressure of 

other commanding duties, and its imperfections must hereafter be corrected. It is particularly regretted that, for want of 

time, the illustrative diagrams could not be lithographed to 

accompany it. The diagrams A and B will therefore have to be 

copied at your office for the use of your deputies. 

A suggestion will be found, under the appropriate head, 

that, at MOUND corners, at least, the seeds of fruit trees 

might be planted, with the hope that, in a few brief years, 

fruit bearing trees may mark the place of the corner; and, 

indeed, the same might be done with advantage at all other 

corners. Your surveying corps will travel over some fields 

rarely, if ever before, trodden by the white man; and to the 

extent that such experiment could be made, successfully, in 

advance of the progressing settlements, would be to confer a 

benefit to civilization whilst performing a professional duty; 

and those engaged in the work might, themselves, not unreasonably, expect to reap some of its acceptable results. 

I have the honor to be, sir, 

Your obedient servant, 

JOHN M. MOORE. 

Principal Clerk of Surveys. 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

March 3d, 1851. 

Approved: J. BUTTERFIELD, 

Commissioner. 

435 
-1- -3- 

SYSTEM 

OF 

RECTANGULAR SURVEYING. 

1. The public lands of the United States are ordinarily 

surveyed into rectangular tracts, bounded by lines conforming to the cardinal points. 

2. The public lands are laid off, in the first place, into 

bodies of land of six miles square, called Townships, containing as near as may be 23,040 acres. The Townships are 

subdivided into thirty-six tracts called Sections, of a mile 

square, each containing, as near as may be, 640 acres. Any 

number or series of contiguous townships, situate north or 

south of each other, constitute a Range. 

The law requires that, the lines of the public surveys shall 

be governed by the true meridian, and that the townships 

shall be six miles square,-two things involving in connexion 

a mathematical impossibility-for, strictly to conform to the 

meridian, necessarily throws the township out of square, by 

reason of the convergency of meridians, and hence, by adhering to the true meri- 

-2- 

dian, results the necessity of departing from the strict requirements of law as respects the precise area of townships, 

and the subdivisional parts thereof, the township assuming 

something of a trapezoidal form, which inequality developes 

itself, more and more as such, the higher the latitude of the 

surveys. It is doubtless in view of these circumstances that 

the law provides (see Sec. 2 of the act of May 18, 1796,) that 

the sections ofa mile square shall contain the quantity of 640 

acres, as nearly as may be; and, moreover, provides (see Sec. 3 

of the act of 10th May, 1800,) in the following words: “And in 

all cases where the exterior lines of the townships, thus to be 

subdivided into sections or half sections, shall exceed, or shall 

not extend six miles, the excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or deducted from the western or northern range of sections or half sections in such township, 

according as the error may be in running the lines from east 

to west, or from south to north; the sections and half sections 

bounded on the northern and western lines of such townships 

shall be sold as containing only the quantity expressed in the 

returns and plats, respectively, and all others as containing 

the complete legal quantity.” 

The accompanying diagrams marked A & B, will serve to 

illustrate the method of running out the exterior lines of 

Townships as well on the north as on the south side of the base 

line, and also on the east and west sides of the meridian; and 

also shewing the method to be pursued in subdividing the 

townships into sections and quarter sections. The method 

here presented is designed to ensure as full a compliance with all the requirements, meaning, and intent of the surveying laws as, it is 

believed, is practicable. 

In order to throw the excesses or deficiencies, as the case 

may be, on the north and on the west sides of a township 

according to law, it is necessary to survey the section lines 

from south to north on a true meridian, leaving the result in 

the northern line of the township to be governed by the 

convexity of the earth and the convergency of meridians, as 

illustrated in the diagram marked B. 

3. The Townships are to bear numbers in respect to the 

base line either north or south of it; and the tiers of 

townships, called “Ranges,” will bear numbers in respect to 

the meridian line according to their relative position to it, 

either on the east or west. 

4. The thirty-six sections into which a township is subdivided are numbered, commencing with number one at the 

northeast angle of the township, and progressing west to 

number six, and thence progressing east to number twelve, 

and so on, alternately, until the number thirty-six in the 

southeast angle. 

5. STANDARD PARALLELS (usually called correction 

lines), are established at stated intervals to provide for or 

counteract the error that otherwise would result from the 

convergency of meridians; and because the public surveys 

have to be governed by the true meridian, such lines serve 

also to arrest error arising from inaccuracies in measurements, which, however, must ever be studiously avoided. 

Such lines, when lying north of the principal base, themselves constitute a base to the sur- 

-4- 

veys lying on the north of them; and where lying south of the 

principal base, they constitute the base for the surveys lying 

south of them. 

7. In the portion of country in Oregon lying north of the 

Columbia river, it is proposed to have standard parallels run 

at distances of every four townships, or twenty-four miles; 

and south of that river, it is proposed to have such standard 

parallels at distances of every five townships, or thirty miles. 

Such standards will be found indicated on the accompanying 

sketch map. 

Departures, under certain circumstances, from the ordinary method of subdividing public lands, have been warranted 

by law; and such it is designed, where cirstances shall indicate the propriety of so doing, to incorporate into the surveying system to be pursued in OREGON. 

These are as follows: 

By the second section of the act of Congress, approved 

March 3d, 1811, entitled “An act providing for the final 

adjustment of claims to lands, and for the sale of the public 

lands in the Territories of Orleans and Louisiana, and to 

repeal the act passed for the same purpose, and approved 

February sixteenth, one thousand eight hundred and 

eleven,” it is required “that the two principal deputy sur436 
veyors of the Territory of Orleans shall be, and they are 

hereby, authorized, in surveying and dividing such of the 

public lands in the said Territory, which are or may be authorized to be surveyed and divided, as are adjacent to any river, 

lake, creek, bayou, or water course, to vary the mode heretofore prescribed by law, so far as relates to the 

-5- 

contents of the tracts, and to the angles and boundary lines, 

and to lay out the same into tracts, as far as practicable, of 

fifty-eight poles in front, and four hundred and sixty-five 

poles in depth, of such shape, and bounded by such lines, as 

the nature of the country will render practicable and most 

convenient.” 

By the act of Congress approved May 24th, 1824, entitled 

“An act changing the mode of surveying the public lands, or 

any river, lake, bayou, or water course,” it is declared “that 

whenever, in the opinion of the President of the United 

States, a departure from the ordinary mode of surveying land 

on any river, lake, bayou, or water course, would promote the 

public interest, he may direct the Surveyor General, in whose 

district such land is situated, and where the change is intended to be made, under such rules and regulations as the 

President may prescribe, to cause the lands thus situated to 

be surveyed in tracts of two acres in width, fronting on any 

river, bayou, lake, or water course, and running back the 

depth of forty acres; which tracts of land, so surveyed, shall be 

offered for sale entire, instead of in half quarter sections, and 

in the usual manner, and on the same terms, in all respects, 

as the other public lands of the United States.” 

In those localities where it would best subserve the interests of the people to have fronts on the navigable streams, 

and running back into the uplands for quantity and timber, 

the principles of the act of May 24th, 1824, may be adopted, 

and you are authorized to enlarge the quantity, so as to 

embrace four acres front by forty in depth, forming tracts of 

one hundred and sixty 

-6- 

acres. But in so doing it is designed only to survey the lines 

between every four lots, (or 640 acres,) but to establish the 

boundary posts, or mounds, in front and in rear, at the distances requisite to secure the quantity of 160 acres to each 

lot, either rectangularly, when practicable, or at oblique 

angles, when otherwise. The angle is not important, so that 

the principle be maintained, as far as practicable, of making 

the work to square in the rear with the regular sectioning. 

Thus, whenever, in consequence of bends in the course of 

streams, the rear lines of the lots so formed will not be 

identical in one prolonged line, such, nevertheless, ought to 

be, and must be, wherever practicable, lines of right angles to 

the regular work in the rear. The form and figure of such lots 

will be fully delineated on your official maps, by platting 

their side lines. Circumstances may, however, exist where 

the rear lines cannot be at right angles to the square work. 

The numbering of all anomalous lots will commence with 

No. 37, to avoid the possibility of conflict with the numbering 

of the regular sections. 

-7- 

OF MEASUREMENTS, CHAINING, AND MARKING. 

1. Where uniformity in the variation of the needle is not 

found, the public surveys must be made with an instrument 

operating independently of the magnetic needle. Burts’ i mproved solar compass, or other instrument of equal utility, 

must be used of necessity in such cases; and it is deemed best 

that such instrument should be used under all circumstances. Where the needle can be relied on, however, the 

ordinary compass may be used in sub-dividing and meandering. 

2. The township lines, and the sub-division lines, will 

usually be measured by a two-pole chain of thirty-three feet 

in length, consisting of fifty links, and each link being seven 

inches and ninety-two hundredths of an inch long. On uniform and level ground, however, the four-pole chain may be 

used. The deputy surveyor must also have with him a measure of the standard chain, wherewith to compare and adjust 

the chain in use from day to day with punctuality and carefulness; and must return such standard chain to the surveyorgeneral’s office for examination when his work is completed. 

3. The very best marking tools adapted to the purpose 

must be provided, to be used for marking, neatly and distinctZy, all the letters and figures required to be made at corners. 

-8- 

OF TALLY PINS. 

4. You will use eleven tally pins made of steel, not exceeding fourteen inches in length, weighty enough towards the 

point to make them drop perpendicularly, and having a ring 

at the top, in which is to be fixed a piece of red cloth, or 

something else of conspicuous color, to make them readily 

seen when stuck in the ground. 

PROCESS OF CHAINING. 

5. In measuring lines, every five chains are called “a tally,” 

because at that distance the last of the ten tally pins with 

which the forward chainman set out will have been stuck. He 

then cries “tally;” which cry is repeated by the other chainman, and each registers the distance by slipping a thimble, 

button, or ring of leather, or something of the kind, on a belt 

worn for that purpose, or by some other convenient method. 

The hind chainman then comes up, and having counted in the 

presence of his fellow the tally pins which he has taken up, so 

that both may be assured that none of the pins have been lost, 

he then takes the forward end of the chain, and proceeds to set 

the pins. Thus the chainmen alternately change places, each 

setting the pins that he has taken up, so that one is forward in 

all the odd, and the other in all the even tallies. Such procedure, it is believed, tends to ensure accuracy in measurement, facilitates the recollection of the distances to objects on 

the line, and renders a mis-tally almost impossible. 

437 
-9- 

LEVELLING THE CHAIN AND 

PLUMBING THE PINS. 

6. The length of every line you run, is to be ascertained by 

precise horizontal measurement, as nearly approximating to 

an air line as is possible in practice on the earth’s surface. 

This all important object can only be attained by a rigid 

adherence to the three following observances: 

1. Ever keeping the chain stretched to its utmost degree of 

tension on even ground. 

2. On uneven ground, keeping the chain not only stretched 

as aforesaid, buy horizontally levelled. And when ascending 

and descending steep ground, hills, or mountains, the chain 

will have to be shortened to one-half its length, (and sometimes more) in order accurately to obtain the true horizontal 

measure. 

3. The careful plumbing of the tally-pins, so as to attain 

precisely the spot where they should be stuck. The more 

uneven the surface, the greater the caution needed to set the 

pins. 

MARKING LINES. 

7. All lines on which are to be established the legal corner 

boundaries, are to be marked after this method, viz: Those 

trees which may intercept your line, must have two chops or 

notches cut on each side of them without any other marks 

whatever. These are called “sight trees,” or “line trees.” 

A sufficient number of other trees standing nearest to your 

line, on either side of it, are to be blazed on two sides, diagonally, or quartering towards the line, in order to render the 

line conspicuous, and readily to be 

-10- 

traced, the blazes to be opposite each other, coinciding in 

direction with the line where the trees stand very near it, and 

to approach nearer each other, the further the line passes 

from the blazed trees. Due care must ever be taken to have 

the lines so well marked as to be readily followed. 

ON TRIAL, OR RANDOM LINES, 

the trees are not to be blazed, unless occasionally from indispensable necessity, and then it must be done so guardedly as 

to prevent the possibility of confounding the marks of the 

trial line with the true. But bushes and limbs of trees may be 

lopped, and stakes set on the trial, or random line, at every ten 

chains, to enable the surveyor on his return to follow and 

correct the trial line, and establish therefrom the true line. To 

prevent confusion, the temporary stakes set on the trial, or 

random lines, must be pulled up when the surveyor returns to 

establish the true line. 

INSUPERABLE OBJECTS ON LINEWITNESS POINTS. 

8. Under circumstances where your course is obstructed 

by impassable obstacles, such as ponds, swamps, marshes, 

lakes, rivers, creeks, &c., you will prolong the line across 

such obstacles, by taking the necessary right angle offsets; or, 

if such be inconvenient, by a traverse or trigonometrical 

operation, until you regain the line on the opposite side. And 

in case a north and south, or a true east and west, line is 

regained in advance of any such obstacle, you will prolong 

and mark the line back to the obstacle so passed, and state all 

-11- 

the particulars in relation thereto in your field book. And at 

the intersection of lines with both margins of impassable 

obstacles, you will establish a Witness Point, (for the purpose 

of perpetuating the intersections therewith,) by setting a 

post, and giving in your field book the course and distance 

therefrom, to two trees on opposite sides of the line, each of 

which trees you will mark with a blaze and notch facing the 

post; but on the margins of navigable water courses, or navigable lakes, you will mark the trees with the proper number 

of the frational section, township, and range. 

ESTABLISHING CORNER BOUNDARIES. 

To procure the faithful execution of this portion of a surveyor’s duty is a matter of the last importance. After a true 

coursing, and most exact measurements, the corner boundary is the consummation of the work, for which all the previous pains and expenditure have been incurred. If, therefore, the corner boundary be not perpetuated in a workmanlike manner, the great aim of the surveying service will not 

have been attained. A boundary corner, in a timbered country, is to be a tree, if one be found at the precise spot; and if not, 

a post is to be planted thereat; and the position of the corner 

post is to be indicated by trees adjacent, the angular bearings 

and distances of which from the 

-12- 

corner are facts to be ascertained and registered in your field 

book. (See article, “Bearing trees.”) 

In a region where stone abounds the corner boundary will 

be a small monument of stones along side of a single marked 

stone for a township corner-and a single stone for all other 

corners. 

In a region where timber is not near, and stone not found, 

the corner will be a mound of earth, of prescribed size, 

varying to suit the case. 

The following are the different points for perpetuating 

corners, viz: 

1. For township, boundaries at intervals of every six miles. 

2. For section, boundaries at intervals of every mile, or 80 

chains. 

3. For quarter section, boundaries at intervals of every 

half mile, or 40 chains. 

[The half quarter section boundary is not marked in the 

field, but is regarded by the law as a point intermediate 

between the half mile or quarter section corners. See act of 

438 
24th April, 1820, entitled “An act making further provision 

for the sale of the public lands,” which act refers to the act of 

Congress passed on the 11th of February, 1805, entitled “An 

act concerning mode of surveying the public lands of the 

United States, for the manner of ascertaining the corners and 

contents of half quarter sections. 

MEANDER CORNER POSTS are planted at all those 

points where the township or section lines intersect the 

banks of such rivers, bayous, lakes, or islands, as are by law 

directed to be meandered. 

-13- 

The courses and distances on meandered, navigable 

streams, govern the calculations wherefrom are ascertained 

the true areas of the tracts of land (sections, quarter sections, 

&c.) known to the law as fractional, and binding on such 

streams. 

MANNER OF ESTABLISHING CORNERS BY 

MEANS OF POSTS. 

Township, sectional, or mile corners, and quarter sectional 

or half mile corners, will be perpetuated by planting a post at 

the place of the corner, to be formed of the most durable wood 

of the forest at hand. 

The posts must be set in the earth by digging a hole to 

admit them, eighteen inches deep, and must be very securely 

rammed in with earth, and also with stone, if any be found at 

hand. The portion of the post which protrudes above the earth 

must be squared off sufficiently smooth to admit of receiving 

the marks thereon, to be made with appropriate marking 

irons, indicating what it stands for. Thus the sides of 

township cornerposts must square at least three inches, (the 

post itself being four inches in diameter,) and must protrude 

two feet at least above the ground; the sides of section corner 

posts must square at least two and a half inches, (the post 

itself being three and a half inches in diameter,) and protrude 

eighteen inches from the ground; and the quarter section 

corner posts and meander corner posts must be three inches 

wide, presenting flattened surfaces, and protruding eighteen 

inches from the ground. 

Where a township post is a corner common to four 

-14- 

N 

S 

townships, it is to be set in the earth diagonally, thus: W 0 E, 

and the cardinal points of the compass are to be indicated 

thereon by a cross line, or wedge, (one-eighth of an inch deep 

at least,) cut or sawed out of its top, thus: W QE 

On each surface of the post is to be marked the number of the 

particular township, and its range, which it faces. Thus, if the 

post be a common boundary to four townships, say one and 

two, south of he base line, of range one, west of the meridian; 

also to townships one and two, south of the base line of range 

two, west of the meridian, it is to be marked thus: 

N 

S 

1 w. 

From N. to E. f: 1 s. } from E. to s. 

S. 31 

From N. to W. { 3; Z.} from W. to S. { 

These marks are not only to be distinctly but neatly cut 

(chiselled) into the wood, at least the eighth of an inch deep; 

and to make them yet more conspicuous to the eye of the 

anxious explorer, the faithful deputy must apply to all of 

them a streak of red chalk. The number of the sections which 

they respectively face, will also be marked on the township 

post. 

Section or mile posts, being corners of sections, and where 

such are common to four sections, are to be set diagonally in 

the earth, (in the manner provided for township corner posts,) 

and with a similar cross cut in the top, to indicate the cardinal 

points of the compass; 

-15- 

and on each side of the squared surfaces (made smooth, as 

aforesaid, to receive the marks) is to be marked the appropriate number of the particular one of the four sections, respectively, which such side faces; also on one side thereof are to be 

marked the numbers of its township and range; and to make 

such marks yet more conspicuous, (in manner aforesaid,) a 

streak of red chalk is to be applied. 

In the case of an isolated township, subdivided into thirtysix sections, there are twenty-five interior sections, the 

southwest corner boundary of each of which will be common 

to four sections. On all the extreme sides of an isolated 

township, the outer tiers of sections have corners common 

only to two sections then surveyed. The posts, however, must 

be planted precisely like the former, and presenting two 

vacant surfaces to receive the appropriate marks when the 

adjacent survey may be made. 

A quarter section or half mile post is to have no other mark 

on it than l/4 S., to indicate what it stands for. 

NOTCHING CORNER POSTS. 

Township corner posts are to be notched with six notches on 

each of the four angles of the squared part set to the cardinal 

points. 

All mile posts on township lines must have as many 

notches on them, on two opposite angles thereof, as they are 

miles distant from the township corners, respectively. Each 

of the posts at the corners of sections in the interior of a 

township must indicate, by a number of notches on each of its 

four corners directed to the cardinal points, the corresponding number of miles that it 

-16- 

stands from the outlines of the township. The four sides of the 

post will indicate the number of the section they respectively 

face. Should a tree be found at the place of any corner, it will 

be marked and notched, as aforesaid, and answer for the 

439 
corner in lieu of a post-the kind of tree and its diameter 

being given in the field notes. 

BEARING TREES. 

The position of all corner posts, or corner trees, of whatever 

description, which may be established, is to be perpetuated in 

the following manner, viz: From such post or tree the courses 

shall be taken, and the distances measured, to two or more 

adjacent trees, in opposite directions, as nearly as may be, 

which are called “bearing trees,” and are to be blazed near the 

ground, with a large blaze facing the post, and have one notch 

in it, neatly and plainly made with an axe, square across, and 

a little below the middle of the blaze. The kind of tree and the 

diameter of each are facts to be distinctly set forth in the field 

book. 

On each bearing tree the letters B. T., to denote the fact of 

its being a bearing tree, must be distinctly cut into the wood, 

in the blaze, a little above the notch, or on the bark, with the 

number of the range, township, and section. 

At all township corners, and at all section corners, on range 

or township lines, four bearing trees are to be marked in this 

manner, one in each of the adjoining sections. 

At interior section corners four trees, one to stand 

-17- 

within each of the four sections to which such corner is common, are to be marked in manner aforesaid, if such be found. 

A tree supplying the place of a corner post is to be marked 

in the manner directed for posts; but if such tree should be a 

beech, or other smooth bark tree, the marks may be made on 

the bark. 

From quarter section and meander corners two bearing 

trees are to be marked, one within each of the adjoining 

sections. 

Where the requisite number of “bearing trees” is not to be 

found at convenient and suitable distances, such as are found 

are to be marked as herein directed; but in all such cases of 

deficiency in the number ofbearing trees, (unless, indeed, the 

boundary itself be a tree,) a quadrangular trench, with sides 

of five feet, and with the angles to the cardinal points, must be 

spaded up outside the corner, as a centre, and the earth 

carefully thrown on the inside, so as to form a range of earth, 

which will become covered with grass, and present a small 

square elevation, which in aftertime will serve to mark, 

unmistakeably, the spot of the corner. 

CORNER STONES. 

Where it is deemed best to use STONES for boundaries, in 

lieu of posts, you may, at any corner, insert endwise into the 

ground, to the depth of 7 or 8 inches, a stone, the number of 

cubic inches in which shall not be less than the number 

contained in a stone 14 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 3 

inches thick-the edges 

-18- 

of which must be set north and south, on north and south 

lines, and east and west, on east and west lines-the dimensions of each stone to be given in the field notes at the time of 

establishing the corner. 

MARKING CORNER STONES. 

Stones at township corners (a small monument of stones 

being alongside thereof) must have six notches cut with a 

pick or chisel on each edge or side towards the cardinal 

points; and where used as section corners on the range and 

township lines, or as section corners in the interior of a 

township, they will also be notched by a pick or chisel, to 

correspond with the directions given for notching posts similarly situated. 

Stones, when used as quarter section corners, will have ‘44 

cut on them-on the west side on north and south lines, and 

on the north side on east and west lines. 

MOUNDS. 

Whenever bearing trees are not found, mounds of earth, or 

stone, are to be raised around posts on which the corners are 

to be marked in the manner aforesaid. Wherever a mound of 

earth is adopted, the same will present a conical shape; but at 

its base, on the earth‘s surface, a quadrangular trench will be 

dug; by the “trench” (here meant) is to be understood a spade 

deep of earth thrown up from the four sides of the line, out side 

the trench, so as to form a continuous elevation along outer 

edge. In mounds of earth, common to four townships or to four 

sections, they will present the angles of the quadrangular 

trench (diagonally) 

-19- 

towards the cardinal points. In mounds, common only to two 

townships or two sections, the sides of the quadrangular 

trench will face the cardinal points. The sides of the quadrangular trench at the base of a township mound are to be six 

feet, the height of mound three feet. 

At section, quarter section, and meander corners, the sides 

of the quadrangular trench at base of mounds are to be five 

feet, and the conical height tmo and a half feet. 

Prior to piling up the earth to construct a mound, there is to 

be dug a spade full or two of earth from the corner boundary 

point, and in the cavity, so formed, is to be deposited a stone, or 

a portion of charcoal, (the quantity whereof is to be noted in 

the Field Book;) or in lieu of charcoal or stone, a charred stake 

is to be driven twelve inches down into such centre point; 

either of those will be a witness for the future, and whichever 

is adopted the fact is to be noted in the Field Book. 

When mounds are formed of earth, the spot from which the 

earth is taken is called the “Pit,” the centre of which ought to 

be, wherever practicable, at a uniform distance and in a 

uniform direction from the centre of the mound. There is to be 

a “pit” on each side of every mound, distant eighteen inches 

outside of the trench. The trench may be expected hereafter 

to be covered by tufts of grass, and thus to indicate the place of 

the mound, when the mound itself may have become obliterated by time or accident. 

At meander corners the “pit” is to be directly on the line, 

eight links further from the water than the mound. Wherever 

necessity is found for deviating 

440 
-20- -22- 

from these rules in respect to the “pits,” the course and 

distance to each is to be stated in the Field Books. 

Perpetuity in the mound is a great desideratum. In forming 

it with light alluvial soil the surveyor may find it necessary 

to make due allowance for the future settling of the earth, 

and thus making the mound more elevated than would be 

necessary in a more compact and tenacious soil, and increasing the base of it. In so doing, the relative proportions between the township mound and other mounds is to be preserved as nearly as may be. 

The earth is to be pressed down with the shovel during the 

process of piling it up. Mounds are to be covered with sod, 

grass side up, where sod is to be had; but, in forming a mound, 

sod is never to be wrought up with the earth, because sod 

decays, and in the process of decomposing it will cause the 

mound to become porous, and therefore liable to premature 

destruction. 

POSTS IN MOUNDS 

Must be squared, and show above the top of the mound 

some ten or twelve inches, and if the mound be a township or 

section corner common to four townships, or common to four 

sections, or if the same be a corner common to two townships 

or to two sections, the post therein must be planted, marked, 

and notched, in mode and manner prescribed for ordinary 

posts in similar situations. 

In quarter section mounds the posts will bear the designation Y4 S. 

-21- 

MOUND MEMORIALS. 

Beside the charcoal, stone, or charred stake, one or the 

other of which must be lodged in the earth at the point of the 

corner, the deputy surveyor is specially enjoined to plant 

midway between each pit and the trench, seeds of some tree, 

(those of fruit trees adapted to the climate being always to be 

preferred,) so that, in course of time, should such take root, a 

small clump of trees may possibly hereafter note the place of 

the corner. The facts of planting such seed, and the kind 

thereof, are matters to be truthfully noted in the Field Book. 

WITNESS MOUNDS TO TOWNSHIP 

OR SECTION CORNERS. 

If a township or section corner, in a situation where bearing or witness trees are not found within a reasonable distance therefrom, shall fall within a ravine, or in any other 

situation where the nature of the ground, or the circumstances of its locality, shall be such as may prevent, or prove 

unfavorable to, the erection of a mound, you will perpetuate 

such corner by selecting, in the immediate vicinity thereof, a 

suitable plot of ground as a site for a bearing or witness 

mound and erect thereon, a mound of earth in the same 

manner and conditioned in every respect, with charcoal, 

stone, or charred stake, deposited beneath, as before directed; 

and measure and state, in your Field Book, the distance and 

course from the position of the true corner of the bearing or 

witness mound so plased and erected. 

DOUBLE CORNERS ON STANDARD PARALLELS. 

One being called “Standard Corners” and the others 

“Closing Corners.” 

Such corners are to be found nowhere except on the Standard Parallels or Corrrection lines, whereon are to appear 

both the corners which mark the intersections of the lines 

which close thereon, and those from which the surveys start 

in the opposite direction. Those lines are to be parallels to the 

principal base line, and therefore parallels of latitude. On 

those lines, and at the time of running the same, the 

township, mile, and half-mile, corners are to be planted, and 

each of these is a corner common to two, [whether township or 

section corners,] and must be so marked. [As remarked under 

the proper head, the quarter sectional corner is to be a flattened post protruding two feet from the surface with no other 

mark than l/4 S.1 

The corners which are established on the standard parallel, at the time of running it, are to be known as “Standard 

Corners,” and, in addition to all the ordinary marks, (as 

herein prescribed,) they will be marked with the letters S. C. 

The standard parallels are designed to be run in advance of 

the contiguous surveys, but circumstances may exist which 

will impede, or temporarily delay, the due extension of the 

standard; and when, from uncontrollable causes, the contiguous townships must be surveyed in advance of the time of 

extending the standard, in any such event, it will become the 

duty of the deputy who shall afterwards survey any such 

standard 

-23- 

lying north of the principal base line, to plant thereon the 

double sett of corners, to wit, the standard corners to be 

marked S. C., and the closing ones which are to be marked C. 

C.; and to make such measurements as may be necessary to 

connect the closing corners, and complete the unfinished 

meridional lines of such contiguous and prior surveys, on the 

principles herein set forth, under the different heads of “Exterior or Township Lines,” and “Description of the mode of 

laying off and surveying Interior or Section Lines.” 

You will recollect that the corners, (whether township or 

mile corners,) which are common to two, (two townships, or 

two sections,) are not to be planted diagonally like those 

which are common to four, but with the flat sides facing the 

cardinal points, and on which the marks and notches are 

made as usual. This, it will be perceived, will serve yet more 

fully to distinguish the standard parallels from all other 

linnc 

-24- 

THE MEANDERING OF NAVIGABLE STREAMS. 

1. Standing with the face looking down stream, the bank 

on the left hand is termed the “left bank,” and that on the 

right hand the “right bank.” These terms are to be universally used to distinguish the two banks of a river or stream. 

441 
2. Both banks of navigable rivers are to meandered by 

taking the courses and distances of their sinuosities, and the 

same are to be entered in the “meander field book.” 

At those points where either the township or section lines 

intersect the banks of a navigable stream, POSTS, or, where 

necessary, MOUNDS of earth or stone, are to be established 

at the time of running these lines. These are called “meander 

corners;” and in meandering you are to commence at one of 

those corners on the township line, coursing the banks, and 

measuring the distance of each course from your commencing 

corner to the next “meander corner,” upon the same or 

another boundary of the same township; carefully noting 

your intersection with all intermediate meander corners. By 

the same method you are to meander the opposite bank of the 

same river. 

When establishing the MEANDER CORNERS on one 

-25- 

bank of a navigable stream, sight must be taken across to 

determine the precise spot for planting corresponding corners 

in line, on the opposite bank thereof; and such spot must be 

signalized by a substantial, temporary STAKE, square across 

at top; and whenever, at any subsequent period, the surveyor 

shall meander the opposite bank of such stream, a permanent 

POST or MOUND, as already prescribed, will then and there 

be planted, in lieu of such temporary stake. 

When surveying to the river, in the opposite fraction of 

same township, suchpre-established meander corner must be 

reached by first running a random line thereunto, ascertaining the amount of its deviation from the corner, and correcting accordingly. 

The crossing distance between the MEANDER CORNERS, 

on same line, is to be ascertained by triangulation, in order 

that the river may be protracted with entire accuracy. The 

particulars to be given in the field notes. 

3. You are also to meander, in manner aforesaid, all lakes 

and deep ponds of the area of twenty-five zcres and upwards; 

also navigable bayous; shallow ponds, readily to be drained, 

or likely to dry up, are not to be meandered. 

You will notice all streams of water falling into the river, 

lake, or bayou you are surveying, stating the width of the 

same at their mouth; also all springs, noting the size thereof 

and depth, and whether the water be pure or mineral; also the 

head and mouth of all bayous; and all islands, rapids, and 

bars are to be noticed, with intersections to their upper and 

lower points to establish their exact situation. You will also 

the proper meander corners, and calculate the distance 

across. 

5. In meandering lakes, ponds, or bayous, you are to commence at a meander corner upon the township line, and 

proceed as above directed for the banks of a navigable stream. 

But where a lake, pond, or bayou lies entirely within the 

township boundaries, you will commence at a meander corner established in subdividing, and from thence take the 

course and distance of the entire margin of the stream, noting 

the intersection with all the meander corners previously 

established thereon. 

6. To meander a pond lying entirely within the boundaries 

of a section, you will run and measure two lines thereunto 

from the nearest section or quarter section corner on opposite 

sides of such pond, giving the courses of such lines. At each of 

the points where such lines shall intersect the margin of such 

pond, you will establish a witness point, by fixing a post in the 

ground, and 

-27- 

raising a mound around it, and taking bearings to any adjacent trees. The relative position of these points being thus 

definitely fixed in the section, the meandering will commence at one of them, and be continued to the other, noting 

the intersection, and thence to the beginning. The proceedings are to be fully entered in the field book. 

7. In taking the connexion of an island with the main land, 

when there is no meander corner in line, opposite thereto, to 

sight from, you will measure a special base from the meander 

corner nearest to such island, and from such base you will 

triangulate to some fixed point on the shore of the island, 

ascertain the distance across, and there establish a special 

meander corner, wherefrom you will commence to meander 

the island. When surveying on the opposite side of such river, 

you will there take another connexion with the island, but no 

corner need be planted. 

8. Your field notes of meanders in any one township are to 

follow immediately after the notes of the subdivision thereof. 

They are to state and describe particularly the meander 

corner from which they commenced, each one with which 

they close, and are to exhibit the meanders of each fractional 

section separately; following, and composing a part of such 

notes, will be given a description of the land, timber, depth of 

inundation to which the bottom is subject, and the banks, 

current, and bottom of the stream or body of water you are 

meandering. 

9. No blazes or marks of any description are to be made on 

the lines meandered beteen the established 

-26- 

-28- 

note the elevation of the banks of rivers and streams, the 

heights of falls and cascades, and the length of rapids. 

4. The precise relative position of islands, in a township 

made fractional by the river in which the same are situated, 

is to be determined trigonometrically-sighting to a flag or 

other fixed object on the island, from a special and carefully 

measured base line, connected with the surveyed lines, on or 

near the river bank you are to form connexion between the 

meander corners on the river to points corresponding thereto, 

in direct line, on the bank of the island, and there establish 

corners, but the utmost care must be taken to pass no object of 

topography, or change therein, without giving a particular 

description thereof in its proper place in your meander notes. 

OF FIELD BOOKS. 

442 
1. The FIELD NOTES afford the elements from which the 

plats and calculations in relation to the public surveys are 

made. They are the source wherefrom the description and 

evidence of locations and boundaries are officially delineated 

and set forth. They, therefore, must be a faithful, distinct, 

and minute record of every thing officially done and observed 

by the surveyor and his assistants, pursuant to instructions, 

in relation to running, measuring, and marking lines, establishing boundary corners, &c.; and present, as far as possible, 

a full and complete topographical description of the country 

surveyed, as to every matter of useful information, or likely 

to gratify public curiosity. 

These notes must be plainly and neatly written out; be free 

from blurs, blots, and interlineations; the language precise 

and clear; the figures, letters, words, and meaning, unmistakeable. 

2. There will be sundry separate and distinct field books of 

surveys, as follows: 

‘6. The GEODETIC FIELD BOOK will comprise all the 

operations in ascertaining the width of the streams; the lateral triangulations to remote and distinguishing objects; the 

angles of apparent altitude or depression of points triangulated to, from the base and meridian lines, or other objects 

viewed from line. In the same book will be shown the operation and results of the levelling on line, at each mile or half 

mile station, or special station a, b, c, &c.; and therein will 

also appear the barometrical observations in determining 

the elevation of hills and mountains. From the LINE FIELD 

BOOKS, and at the appropriate stations, specific references 

to matters not affecting surface measurements on line, will 

be made to a corresponding place or page in the “GEODETIC 

FIELD BOOK” for the full exhibition of the former in all 

necessary details. Therein will be noted, station by station, in 

series, as they occur, [and at necessary intermediate special 

stations a, b, c, as respects levelling,] all matters of geodesy 

with which the regular field book will not be encumbered. 

Each entry in this book will 

-29- 

-31- 

Field notes of the MERIDIAN and BASE lines, showing 

the establishment of the township, section or mile, and quarter section or half mile, boundary corners thereon; with the 

crossings, of streams, ravines, hills, and mountains; character of soil, timber, minerals, &c. These notes will be arranged, 

in series, by mile stations, from number one to number 

The mile stations will include the operations at the intermediate half mile stations or quarter section corners, and 

those will be designated 1/4 S. Within each mile station will be 

shown (or, otherwise, be referred to in another book, to be 

called the geodetic field book) all the operations appertaining 

to the station; and each station will exhibit the operations 

therein, complete in itself, either by insertion or reference. 

‘Wherever the levelling station on line is not the regular 

mile or half mile station, such will be designated alphabetically, a, b, c, &c. The levelling operations, triangulations 

from legal stations, and the angles of altitude and depression 

of the points triangulated to, will be set forth, in full detail, in 

the geodetic field book. 

3. Field notes of the “STANDARD PARALLELS, or correction lines,” will show the establishment of the township, 

section, and quarter section corners, besides exhibiting the 

topography of the country on line, as required on the base and 

meridian lines. 

4. Field notes of the EXTERIOR lines of TOWNSHIPS, 

showing the establishment of the corners on line, and the 

topography, as aforesaid. 

~. 

-30- 

5. Field notes of the SUBDIVISIONS of TOWNSHIPS into 

sections and quarter sections; at the close whereof will follow 

the notes of the MEANDERS of navigable streams. These 

notes will also show, by ocular observation, the estimated 

rise and fall of the land on the line. A description of the 

timber, undergowth, surface, soil, and minerals, upon each 

section line, is to follow the notes thereof, and not to be mixed 

up with them. 

be complete in itself-separated by a black line from every 

other-be arranged by stations in series, with cross references between each one to the corresponding entry in the 

other. 

The field notes must, in all cases, be taken precisely in the 

order in which the work is done on the ground, and the date of 

each day’s work must follow immediately after the notes 

thereof. The variation of the needle must always occupy a 

separate line preceding the notes of measurements on line. 

The exhibition of every mile of surveying, whether on 

township or subdivisional lines, must be complete in itself, 

and be separated by a black line drawn across the paper. 

The description of the Surface, Soil, Minerals, Timber, 

Undergrowth, &c., on each mile of line, is to follow the notes 

of survey of such line, and not be mixed up with them. 

No abbreviations of words are allowable, except of such 

words as are constantly occurring, such as “sec.” for “section;” 

“in., diam.,” for “inches, diameter;” rrchs.” for rrchains;” “lks.” 

for “links;” rrdist.”for “distant,” &c. Proper names must never 

be abbreviated, however often their recurrence. 

The nature of the subject matter of the field book is to form 

its first and title page, showing the State or Territory where 

the survey lies, by whom surveyed, the date of commencement and date of completion of the work. Between the second 

and third pages of the line field books a diagram is to be 

placed, (disconnectedly,) showing the distances on line at the 

crossings of 

-32- 

streams of water, and the direction of each by an arrow head 

pointing down stream; also the intersection on line by 

Prairies, Marshes, Swamps, Ravines, Lakes, Hills, and all 

other matters indicated by the notes, to the fullest extent 

they can be so illustrated. In the field book of SUBDIVISIONS OF TOWNSHIPS the illustrative diagram will show, 

1. This book embraces matters treated of in special instructions 

443 
in neat and small figures, the length of the section lines, with 

all objects set forth in the notes; the outlines of the area 

occupied by timber, prairies, swamps, &c., to be shown, as 

nearly as may be, by dotted lines. 

SUMMARY of objects and data required to be noted: 

1. The precise length of every line run, noting all necessary offsets therefrom, with the reason and mode thereof. 

2. The kind and diameter of all “bearing trees,” with the 

course and distance of the same from their respective corners; 

and the precise relative position of WITNESS CORNERS to 

the true corners. 

3. The kind of materials (earth or stone) of which 

MOUNDS are contructed-the fact of their being conditioned 

according to instructions-with the course and distance of 

the ‘kits,” from the centre of the mound, where necessity 

exists for deviating from the general rule. 

4. Trees on line. The name, diameter, and distance on line 

to all trees which it intersects. 

5. Intersections by line of land objects. The distance at 

which the line first intersects and then leaves every settler’s 

claim and improvement; prairie; river, creek, or other “bottom;” or swamp, marsh, grove, 

-33- 

and wind fall, with the course of the same at both points of 

intersection; also the distances at which you begin to ascend, 

arrive at the top, begin to descend, and reach the foot of all 

hills and ridges, with their courses, and estimated height, in 

feet, above the level land of the surrounding country, or 

above the bottom lands, ravines, or waters near which they 

are situated. 

6. Intersections by line of water objects. All rivers, creeks, 

and smaller streams of water which the line crosses; the 

distance on line at the points of intersection, and their widths 

on line. In cases of navigable streams, their width will be 

ascertained between the meander corners, as set forth under 

the proper head. 

7. The land’s surface-whether level, rolling, broken, or 

hilly. 

8. The soil-whether first, second, or third rate. 

9. Timber-the several kinds of timber and undergrowth. 

10. Bottom lands-to be described as wet or dry, and if 

subject to inundation, state to what depth. 

11. Springs of water-whether fresh, saline, or mineral, 

with the course of the stream flowing from them. 

12. Lakes and ponds-describing their banks, and giving 

their height, and also the depth of water, and whether it be 

pure or stagnant. 

13. Improvements. Towns and villages; Indian towns and 

wigwams; houses or cabins; fields or other improvements; 

sugar tree groves, sugar camps, mill seats, forges and factories. 

14. Coal banks or beds; peat or turf grounds; mine- 

-34- 

rals and ores; with particular description of the same as to 

quality and extent, and all diggings therefor; also salt 

springs and licks. All reliable information you can obtain 

respecting these objects, whether they be on your immediate 

line or not, is to appear in the general description to be given 

at the end of the notes. 

15. Roads and trails, with their directions, whence and 

whither. 

16. Rapids, cataracts, cascades or falls of water, with the 

height of their fall, in feet. 

17. Precipices, caves, sink-holes, ravines, stone quarries, 

ledges of rocks, with the kind of stone they afford. 

18. Natural curiosities, interesting fossils, petrifactions, 

organic remains, &c.; also all ancient works of art, such as 

mounds, fortifications, embankments, ditches, or objects of 

like nature. 

19. The variation of the needle must be noted at all points 

or places on the lines where there is found any material 

change of variation, and the position of such points must be 

perfectly identified in the notes. 

20. Besides the ordinary notes taken on line, (and which 

must always be written down on the spot, leaving nothing to 

be supplied by memory,) the deputy will subjoin, at the conclusion of his book, such further description or information 

touching any matter or thing connected with the township (or 

other survey) which he may be able to afford, and may deem 

useful or necessary to be known-with a general description 

of the township in the aggregate, as respects the face of the 

country, its soil and geological features, timber, minerals, 

waters, &c. 

-35- 

SPECIAL INSTRUCTION RESPECTING THE 

NOTING OF SETTLER’S CLAIMS. 

The law requires that such claims should be laid down 

temporarily on the township plats; in order to do which, it is 

indispensably necessary to obtain, to some extent, connexions of these claims with the lines of survey. Under the head 

of “intersection by line of land objects,” the deputy is required 

to note the points in line whereat it may be intersected by 

such claims; but, in addition thereto, there must be obtained 

at least one angle of each claim, with its course and distance, 

either from the point of intersection, or from an established 

corner boundary, so that its connexion with the regular survey will be legally determined. If the settler’s dwelling or 

barn is visible from line, the bearings thereof should be 

carefully taken from two points noted on line, and set forth in 

the field notes. 

AFFIDAVITS TO FIELD NOTES. 

21. At the close ofthe notes and thegeneral description (as 

above) is to follow an affidavit, a form for which is given 

below; and, to enable the deputy surveyor fully to understand 

and appreciate the responsibility under which he is acting, 

his attention is invited to the provisions of the third section of 

the act of Congress, approved August 8th, 1846, entitled “An 

act to equalize the compensation of the Surveyors General of 

the public lands of the United States, and for other purposes,” 

and which is as follows: 

“Sec. 3. That the Surveyors General of the public 

444 
-36- -38- 

lands of the United States, in addition to the oath now authorized by law to be administered to deputies on their appointment to office, shall require each of their deputies, on the 

return of his surveys, to take and subscribe an oath or 

affirmation that those surveys have been faithfully and correctly executed, according to law and the instructions of the 

Surveyor General; and on satisfactory evidence being presented to any court of competent jurisdiction, that such surveys, or any part thereof, had not been thus executed, the 

deputy making such false oath or affirmation shall be 

deemed guilty of perjury, and shall suffer all the pains and 

penalties attached to that offence; and the District Attorney 

of the United States for the time being, in whose district any 

such false, erroneous, or fraudulent surveys shall have been 

executed, shall, upon the application of the proper Surveyor 

General, immediately institute suit upon the bond of such 

deputy; and the institution of such suit shall act as a lien 

upon any property owned or held by such deputy, or his 

sureties, at the time such suit was instituted.” 

Following the “general description” of the township is to be 

“A list of the names of the individuals employed to assist in 

running, measuring, or marking the lines and corners described in the foregoing field notes of township No. - of 

the BASE LINE of range No. of the WILLAMETTE 

MERIDIAN, showing the respective capacities in which they 

acted.” 

(Here will be inserted their names and respective capacities, by whatever name such are designated, followed by 

their) 

-37- 

CERTIFICATE. 

“We hereby certify that we assisted -, Deputy Surveyor, in subdividing township number - of BASE 

LINE of range number - of the WILLAMETTE MERIDIAN, and that said township has been, in all respects to the 

best of our knowledge and belief, well and faithfully surveyed, and the boundary monuments planted according to 

the instructions furnished by the Surveyor General.” 

A. B., Chainman, 

C. D., Chainman, 

E. F., Axeman, 

G. H., Axeman, 

I. K., Compassman. 

this - day of - 185- 

Subscribed and sworn to by the above named persons, 

-, Justice of the Peace, 

Following such certificate in every Field Book, is to appear 

the affidavit of the deputy himself in form as follows: 

“I, - , Deputy Surveyor, do solemnly swear, 

(or affirm,) that in pursuance of a contract with JOHN B. 

PRESTON, Surveyor General of public lands of the United 

States in the Territory of OREGON, bearing date the - 

day of - A.D. 185-, and in strict conformity to the laws 

of the United States, 

before me, at 

Or any other officer authorized to administer oaths. 

and the instructions furnished by the said Surveyor General, 

I have faithfully surveyed 

WILLAMETTE MERIDIAN, in the teritory aforesaid, and do 

further solemnly swear, (or affirm,) that the foregoing are the 

true and original Field notes of such survey.” 

~ Deputy Surveyor. 

, Deputy Surveyor, and sworn 

, this ___ day of ~ 185-. 

Subscribed by said 

to before me, at 

, Justice of the Peace. 

Or any other officer authorized to administer oaths. 

The phraseology of the foregoing forms, (which is adapted 

to subdivisions of townships,) will be correspondingly modified to suit the circumstances of the surveying work on the 

base and meridian lines, on standard parallels, and on 

township exteriors. 

FORM OF OATHS BEFORE ENTERING UPON 

DUTY. 

FOR A DEPUTY SURVEYOR. 

“I, A. B., having been appointed a Deputy Surveyor of the 

lands of the United States in the Territory of Oregon, solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will well and faithfully, and to the 

best of my skill and ability, and according to the laws of the 

United States, and the instructions of the Surveyor General, 

perform the duties so confided to me, as I shall answer to God 

at the great day.” 

LB-. 

Sworn and subscribed before me, at county of -, in 

the Territory of Oregon, this - day of -, A.D. 

185-. 

E F-, 

Justice of the Peace. 

-39- 

FORM FOR CHAINMEN. 

“I, C. D., having been appointed a chainman in the service 

of A. B., Deputy Surveyor in Oregon, do solemnly swear, (or 

affirm,) that in all surveys of public lands or private land 

claims in which I shall be so employed, that I will level the 

chain in measuring over uneven ground, and well and truly 

plumb the tally pins, whether sticking or dropping the same; 

and that I will report the true distance to all notable objects, 

and the true length of all lines that I may assist in measuring 

and will mark correctly and distinctly the letters and numbers of all corners that I may be required to mark; and that I 

will faithfully act as required by said deputy, from time to 

time, in planting the corner boundaries, whether the same be 

posts or mounds, either of earth or stone; together with such 

other services as I shall be called to perform by said deputy in 

445 
the discharge of his surveying duties, to the best of my skill 

and ability; so help me God.” 

Sworn and subscribed before me, at ~, county of 

-, in the Territory of Oregon, this - day of 

-, A.D. 185-. 

E F-, or 

G-H-, 

Justice of the Peace. 

The oaths of all others, whether designated as axemen, 

flagbearers, markers, &c., are to be varied to suit the case; 

each, however, retaining this general clause, viz: “and that I 

will otherwise faithfully act as required by said deputy from 

time to time, in planting the corner boundaries, whether the 

same be POSTS, or MOUNDS of earth or stone; together with 

such other services as I shall be called to perform by said 

deputy in the discharge of his surveying duties. 

-40- 

EXTERIORS OR TOWNSHIP LINES. 

The principal meridian, the base line, and the standard 

parallels having been first run, measured, and marked, 

according to instructions, on true meridians, and true parallels of latitude, the process of running, measuring, and marking the exterior lines of townships will be as follows: 

Townships situated NORTH of the base line, and WEST of the 

principal meridian. 

Commence at No. 1, (see the red figures on diagram A,) 

being the southwest corner of T. 1 N-.R. 1 W:, as established 

on the base line; thence north, on a true meridian line, four 

hundred and eighty chains, establishing the mile and halfmile corners thereon, as per instructions, to No. 2, whereat 

establish the corner of Tps. 1 and 2 N-.Rs. 1 and 2 W.; thence 

east, on a random or trial line, setting temporary mile and 

half-mile stakes, to No. 3, where measure and note the distance at which the line intersects the eastern boundary, 

north or south of the true or established corner. Run and 

measure westward, on the true line, (taking care to note all 

the land and water crossings, &c., as per instructions,) to No. 

4, which is identical with No. 2, establishing the mile and 

half-mile PERMANENT CORNERS on said line, the last 

half-mile of which will fall short of forty 

-41- 

chains, about the amount of the calculated convergency per 

township. Should it ever happen, however, that such random 

line materially falls short, or overruns in length, or intersects 

the eastern boundary of the township at any considerable 

distance from the true corner thereon, (either of which would 

indicate an important error in the surveying,) the lines must 

be retraced, even if found necessary to remeasure the meridional boundaries of the township (especially the western 

boundary,) so as to discover and correct the error; in doing 

which, the true corners must be established and marked, and 

the false ones destroyed and obliterated, to prevent confusion 

in future; and all the facts must be distinctly set forth in the 

notes. Thence proceed in a similar manner from No. 4 to No. 

5, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 6 to No. 7, and so on to No. 10, the 

southwest corner of T. 4 N.-R. 1 W. Thence north, still on a 

true meridian line, establishing the mile and half-mile corners, until reaching the STANDARD PARALLEL or correction line; throwing the excess over, or deficiency under, four 

hundred and eighty chains, on the last half-mile, according to 

law, and at the intersection establishing the “CLOSING 

CORNER,” the distance of which from the standard corner 

must be measured and noted as required by the instructions. 

But should it ever so happen that some impassable barrier 

will have prevented or delayed the extension of the standard 

parallel along and above the field of present survey, then the 

deputy will plant, in place, the corner for the township, subject to correction thereafter, should such parallel be extended. 

-42- 

NORTH of the base line, and EAST of the principal meridian. 

Commence at No. 1, (red figure) being the southeast corner 

of T. 1 N-.R. 1 E., and proceed as with townships situated 

“north and west,” except that the random or trial lines will be 

run and measured west, and the true lines, east, throwing the 

excess over or deficiency under four hundred and eighty 

chains on the west end of the line, as required by law; wherefore, the surveyor will commence his measurement with the 

length of the deficient or excessive half section boundary on 

the west of the township, and thus the remaining measurements will all be even miles and half-miles. 

SOUTHof the base line, and WEST of the principal meridian. 

Commence at No. 1, the northwest corner oftownship 1 S., 

range 1 W., and proceed due south in running and measuring 

line, establishing and marking the mile, half mile, and 

township corners thereon, precisely in the method prescribed 

fr running NORTH and WEST, with the exception that, in 

order to throw the excess or deficiency [over or under four 

hundred and eighty chains] of the western boundaries of such 

of those townships as close on the standard parallel, on the 

south, upon the most northern half mile of the townships, 

according to law, the proceeding will be as follows, viz: 

-43- 

THE MODE OF CLOSING ON THE 

STANDARD PARALLEL. 

The western (meridional) boundary line of every township 

closing on the standard, (being every fifth one,) will be carefully run south, on a true meridian, until it intersects the 

standard, planting stakes and making distinctive marks on 

line trees, in sufficient number to serve as guides in afterwards retracing the line north with ease and certainty. At the 

point of the line’s intersection of the standard, the surveyor 

will establish the crclosing” (southwest) corner of the 

township, noting in his field book its distance and direction 

446 
from the “standard corner.” Then starting from such “closing 

corner,” he will proceed north on the line identified by the 

guide stakes and marks, measuring such line, and establishing thereon the mile and half mile stations, and noting, as 

he goes, all the land and water crossings, &c., as elsewhere 

directed. The surveyor, when nearing the standard, should 

avoid marking any trees south of it, and obliterate any which 

inadvertently may be made. The guide stakes are to be pulled 

up as he proceeds north. 

SOUTH of the base line, and EAST of the principal meridian. 

Commence at No. 1, at the northeast corner of township 1 

S., range 1 E., and proceed precisely as with the townships 

situated “south and west,” except that the random lines will 

be run and measured west, and the true lines east; the deficiency or excess of the measurements being, as in all other 

cases, thrown upon the most western half mile of line. 

-44- 

Description of the mode of laying off and surveying the interior 

or sectional lines of all townships, however situated in reference to the BASE and MERIDIAN lines. 

Commence at No. 1, (see red figures on diagram B,) the 

corner established on the township boundary for sections 1,2, 

35, and 36; thence north on a true meridian; at 40 chains 

setting the half mile or quarter section post, and at 80 chains 

(No. 2) establishing and marking the corner of sections 25, 

26,35, and 36. Thence east, on a random line, to No. 3, setting 

the temporary quarter section post at 40 chains, noting the 

measurement to No. 3, and the measured distance of the 

random’s intersection north or south of the true or established corner of sections 25, 36, 30, and 31, on the township 

boundary. Thence correct, west, on the true line to No. 4, 

setting the quarter section post on this line exactly at the 

equidistant point, now known, between the section corners 

indicated by the red figures Nos. 3 and 4. Proceed, in like 

manner, from No. 4 to No. 5,5 to 6,6 to 7, and so on to No. 16, 

the corner to sections 1, 2, 11, and 12. Thence north, on a 

random line, to No. 17, setting a temporary quarter section 

post at 40 chains, noting the length of the whole line, and the 

measured distance of the random’s intersection east or west of 

the true corner of sections 1,2,35 and 36, established on the 

township boundary; 

-45- 

thence southwardly from the latter, on a true line, noting the 

course and distance to No. 18, the established corner to sections 1, 2, 11, and 12, taking care to establish the quarter 

section corner on the true line, at the distance of 40 chains 

from said section corner, so as to throw the excess or deficiency 

on the northern half mile, according to law. Proceed in like 

manner through all the intervening tiers of sections to No. 

73, the corner to sections 31,32, 5, and 6; thence north, on a 

true meridian line, to No. 74, establishing the quarter section 

corner at 40 chains, and at 80 chains the corner to sections 29, 

30,31, and 32; thence east, on a random line, to No. 75, setting 

a temporary quarter section post at 40 chains, noting the 

measurement to No. 75, and the distance of the random’s 

intersection north or south of the established corner of sections 28, 29,32, and 33; thence west from said corner, on the 

true line, setting the quarter section post at the equidistant 

point, to No. 76, which is identical with 74; thence west, on a 

random line, to No. 77, setting a temporary quarter section 

post at 40 chains, noting the measurement to No. 77, and the 

distance of the random’s intersection with the western 

boundary, north or south of the established corner of sections 

25, 36, 30, and 31; and from No. 77 correct eastward, on the 

true line, giving its course, but establishing the quarter section post, on this line, so as to retain the distance of 40 chains 

from the corner of sections 29,30,31, and 32; thereby throwing the excess or deficiency of measurement on the most 

western half mile. Proceed north, in a similar manner, from 

No. 78 to 79, 79 to 80, 80 to 

-46- 

81, and so on to 96, the southeast corner of section 6, where, 

having established the corner for sections 5, 6, 7, and 8, run 

thence, successively, on random lines east to 95, north to 97, 

and west to 99; and by reverse courses correct on true lines 

back to said southeast corner of section 6, establishing the 

quarter section corners, and noting the courses, distances, 

&c., as before described. 

EXCEPTIONS from the above method, in townships 

contiguous to standard parallels. 

In every township SOUTH of the principal base line, which 

closes on a standard parallel, the deputy will begin at the 

southeast corner of the township, and measure west on the 

standard, establishing thereon the mile and half-mile corners, and noting their distances from the pre-established 

corners. He then will proceed to subdivide, as directed under 

the above head; and, 

In the townships NORTH of the principal base line; which 

close on the standard parallel, the sectional lines must be 

closed on the standard by true meridians, instead of by course 

lines, as directed under the above head for townships otherwise situated; and the connexions of the closing corners with 

the pre-established standard corners are to be ascertained 

and noted. Such procedure does away with any necessity for 

running the randoms. But in case he is unable to close the 

lines on account of the standard not having been run, from 

some inevitable necessity, as heretofore men- 

-47- 

tioned, he will plant a temporary stake, or mound, at the end 

of the sixth mile, thus leaving the lines and their connexions 

to be finished, and the permanent corners to be planted, at 

such time as the standard shall be extended. 

[Page -48- is blank.] 

447 
-49- 

Feet. 

level 

To swamp ........................................... .d 15 

To corner secs 31, 32, 5 & 6, in deep swamp, 

therefore N. 42"E. 200 links dist., raised 

Witness mound with trench as per instructions, and 

, Planted NE. 4 beech nuts; NW. 4 B. oak acorns; 

SE. 2 beech nuts; SW. 2 beech nuts. 

Land rich bottom, part wet. 

EXAMPLE 

OF THE 

FIELD NOTES 

OF 

THE EXTERIOR LINES 

OF 

AN ISOLATED TOWNSHIP. 

Field notes of the Survey of township 25 north, of range2 west, 

of the the Willamette meridian, in the Territory of OREGON, by Robert Acres, deputy surveyor, under his contract No. 1, bearing date the 2d day of January, 1851. 

Ch. lks. 2 

East. 

3 

West 

40.00 

62.50 

80.00 

Feet. 

TOWNSHIP LINES commenced January 20,1851. 

Southern boundary variation 18" 41' E. 

On arandom line on the south boundaries of 

sections 31,32,33,34,35, and 36. Set 

temporary mile and half mile posts, and 

intersected the eastern boundary 2 chains 

20 links north of the true corner 5 miles 

74 chains 53 links. 

Therefore the correction will be 5 chains 47 

links W. 37.1 links S. per mile. 

TRUE SOUTHERN BOUNDARY variation 18" 41' E. 

On the southern boundary of sec. 36, 

Set qr. sec. post from which 

Jan. 24,1851. 

a beech 24 in. dia. bears N. 11 E. 38 lks. dist. 

ado 9do do S 9 E. 17 do 

a brook 8 1. wide, course NW ....................... .d 10 

a5 

a beech9 in. dia. bears S. 46 E. 8 1. dist. 

a do 8 do do S. 62 W. 7 do. 

aW.oaklOdodoN.19W.14do. 

a B. oak 14 do do N. 22 E. 16 do. 

oak, ash, hickory, &c 

a 10 

Set post cor. of secs. 35 & 36, 1 & 2, from which 

Land level, part wet and swampy ; timber beech, 

-50- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. lks. 

West 

40.00 

65.00 

80.00 

~ ~~ 

Feet. 

a 10 

On the S. boundary of sec. 35- 

Set qr. sec. post, with trench, from which 

abeech6in.dia. bearsN.80E.81.dist. 

planted SW. a yellow locust seed. 

To beginning of hill .................................. .a 5 

Set post, with trench, cor. of secs. 34 & 35, 

2 & 3, from which a 20 

a beech 10 in. dia. bears S. 51 E. 13 1. dist. 

DolOdodoN.56W.9do. 

West 

40.00 

80.00 

West 

40.00 

62.00 

80.00 

West 

37.50 

40.00 

planted SW. a white oak acorn. 

NE. a beech nut. 

same, some walnut and poplar. 

Land level, rich, and good for farming; timber 

On the S. boundary of sec. 36 

Set qr. sec. post with trench, from which a5 

a B. oak 10 in. dia. bears N. 2 E. 635 1. dist. 

Planted SW. a beech nut. 

To corner ofsections 33,34,3 and 4, drove 

charred a 10 

stakes raised mound with trench as 

per instructions, and 

Planted NE. a W. oak ac'n; NW. a yel. locust seed; 

Land level, rich and good for farming, some 

SE. a butternut; SW. a beech nut. 

scattering oak and walnut. 

On the south boundary of section 33- 

Set qr. section post, deposited one quart of 

charcoal d5 

raised mound with trench as per 

instructions, and 

Planted NE. a beech nut; NW. a white oak acorn; 

To foot of hill.. ...................................... .d 20 

To corner sections 32, 33, 4 and 5, deposited a d 10 

flint boulder 9 in. diam., raised mound with 

trench as per instructions, and 

SE. a W. 0. ac'n; SW. a yel. locust seed. 

Planted NE. a hickory nut; NW. a walnut; 

SE. 4 chesnuts; SW. 4 beech nuts. 

On the south boundary of section 32- 

Set qr. sec. stone, a granite 14 X 4 in. with 

Planted NE. a walnut; NW. a butternut; 

A creek 20 links wide, course N.. ..................... .d 10 

a5 

trench as per instructions, and 

SE. a beech; SW. a black oak acorn. 

-51- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

~ 

Ch. lks. 

* 76.00 

80.00 

West. 

50 

11.00 

40.00 

54.00 

57.50 

61.00 

70.00 

74.73 

On the south boundary of section 31- 

To beginning of bluff. ................................ .a 30 

Set qr. sec., post from which a 50 

A brook 10 1. wide, course south ...................... .level 

a sugar 27 in. dia. bears S. 81 W. 42 1. dist. 

a beech24dodoS. 71 E. 24do. 

To rocky bluff.. ...................................... .d 30 

A spring branch NW ................................. .d 10 

Enter swamp. ....................................... .level 

Passed do ........................................... .level 

To township corner 24 and 25 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., level 

land 1st rate, scattering sugar and beech 

5. Mound section corner 

6. Mound corners 

7. Stone corner 

8. Wit. sect. cor's. 

9. Pre-established Tp. corner 

2. Random tp. S. boundary. 

3. Timbered corners. 

4. Deficient timbered corners. 

448 
3 

North. 

1.00 

18.00 

20.00 

40.00 

55.00 

72.50 

80.00 

North. 

6.00 

40.00 

Eastboundary,var. 17"51'E., January25,1851. 

On the E. boundary of section 36- 

A brook 5 1. wide, course NW ......................... 

To foot of hill ........................................ To rocky bluff.. ...................................... 

Set qr. sec., post from which 

a beech 13 in, dia. bears N. 36 E. 22 1. dist. 

apoplar 20 do do S. 39 E. 42 do. 

To rocky bluff.. ...................................... 

A brook 10 1. wide, course NW.. ...................... 

Set post cor. sect. 25,36,30, and 31, from 

which 

a beech24 in. dia. bears S. 38 E. 12 1. dist. 

asugarl2dodoN.81 W.25do. 

a poplar 15 do do N. 20 E. 40 do. 

aW.oak9dodoS.40W.60do. 

Y4 mile part wet. 

North '/z mile rich and good for farming, south 

.d 10 

.a 15 

.a 50 

a 60 

.d 40 

.d 20 * 

a 15 

On the E. boundary of sec. 25- 

To foot of hill ........................................ .a 15 

Set qr. sec. stone, arose quartz 15 X 3 in., 

from which a 25 

apoplar60in.dia.bearsS.42W. 111.dist. 

a beech 9 do do N. 40 W. 3 do. 

-52- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer 

Ch. lks. 

80.00 

North. 

40.00 

44.00 

49.00 

57.00 

80.00 

North. 

14.00 

40.00 

80.00 

Feet. 

from which a 20 

a beech 12 in. dia. bears S. 32 W. 26 1. dist. 

ado20dodoN.64E.41do. 

aW.oaklOdodoN.30W. 13do. 

a do 11 do do S. 34E. 48 do. 

walnut, elm, &c. 

Set post cor. ofsecs. 24,25,19, and 80, 

Land nearly first rate; timber, sugar, beech, 

On the E. boundary of section 26 

Set qr. sec. post, from which 

a buckeye 10 in. dia. bears S. 48 W. 6 1. dist. 

a do 14 do do N. 39 E. 27 do. 

d 40 

To road from Williamsburg to Astoria ................. .d 5 

A creek 150 1. wide, course W ........................ .d 20 

A brook 10 1. wide do S.W ........................... .level 

Set stone 16 X 2 in., cor. secs. 13 and 24,18 

and 19, from which a 15 

a walnut 8 in. dia. bears S. 8 W. 5 1. dist. 

ado9dodoN. 18 W. 29 do. 

abeech6dodoS.20E.40do. 

a do 12 do do N. 30 E. 50 do. 

Land same as on the last mile. 

On the E. boundary of sec. 13- 

To foot of hill ........................................ .a 15 

Set qr. sec. post, from which a 30 

acherry 10 in. dia. bears N. 35 W. 2 1. dist. 

ado 10dodoS. 52E. 21 do. 

which a 50 

a sugar 10 in. dia. bears S. 42 E. 23 1. dist. 

a hickory20 do do N. 39 W. 38 do. 

ado 15 do doN. 40 E 14 do. 

a beech 12 dodo S. 36 W. 16 do. 

beech, lynn, elm, &c. 

Set post cor. of secs. 12,13,7, and 18, from 

Land level, part wet and swampy; timber, oak, 

North. 

7.00 

40.00 

68.00 

On the E. boundary of sec. 12- 

To second ledge ofhill ................................. a 50 

Set qr. sec. post, from which a 30 

a W. ash 10 in. dia. bears N. 35 W. 15 1. dist. 

an elm 10 do do S. 83 E. 2 do. 

To steep bluff.. ..................................... .a 50 

-53- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. lks. 

80.00 

"North. 

9.00 

40.00 

44.00 

80.00 

11 

East. 

12 

West. 

24.50 

40.00 

80.00 

Feet. 

Set post cor. of secs. 1, 12, 6, and 7, from which a100 

a beech 10 in. dia. bears S. 40 E. 6 1. dist. 

ado lOdodoN.40W.28do. 

an elm 12 do do N. 46E. 30 do. 

a hickory 10 do do S. 55 W. 40 do. 

Land similar to last mile. 

On the E. boundary of sec. 1- 

To steep bluff ....................................... .dl00 

Set qr. sec. post, from which d 50 

apoplar 9 in. dia. bears N. 76 E. 7 1. dist. 

ado9dodoS. 22E. 15do. 

To open prairie ..................................... .d 30 

a charred stake.. ................................. .d 10 

To cor. tps. 25 and 26 N., Rs. 1 and 2 W. Drove 

Raised mound with trench, as per instructions, and 

Planted NW. 4 chestnuts. SW. 2 hickory nuts. 

Land very rich and good for farming; timber 

1st halfmile, beech, sugar, ash, walnut, 

&c.; last halfmile, prairie. 

NE. 4 cherry stones. SE. 4 W. oak acorns. 

Northern boundary, var. 18"41' E.- 

On a RANDOM line on the north boundaries of 

sections 6,5,4,3,2,1, [at 190 c. 09 1. 

to right bank of Chickeeles river where 

offset 7 c. 63 1. north, and at 30 c., came 

back to line at left bank ofriver,] set 

temporary mile and half mile posts, and 

intersected E. boundary at 25 1. N. oftrue 

corner oftps. 25 and 26 N., R. 1 and 2 W. 

5 m. 76 c. 53 1. Therefore the correction 

will be 3 c. 47 1. W. 4.2 1. S. per mile. 

~~~ 

Truenorth boundary, var. 18"41'E. 

On the northern boundary ofsec. 1, Jan. 27,1851. 

A brook 12 1. wide, course N .......................... .a 10 

Set qr. sec. post from which d 10 

a beech 24 in. dia. bears N. 11 E. 38 1. dist. 

ado 9 dodo S. 9 W. 19 do. 

Set stone (a rose quartz) 12 X 3, from which 

a buckeye 9 in. dia. bears N. 66 E. 15 1. dist. 

an elm 36 do do S. 65 W. 8 do. 

anelm20dodoN.4W. 10do. 

abuckeyelOdodoS.40E.20do. 

walnut, elm, oak, &c. 

d 20 

Land level and first rate timber; beech, sugar, 

3. Timbered corners. 

6. Mound corners. 

10. Mound with fruit trees. 

11. Random township line. 

3. Timbered corners 12. Stone cor. with bearing trees. 

449 
-54- 

Township 25 N., Range W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. Iks. 

West. 

40.00 

80.00 

West. 

9.00 

17.00 

22.00 

40.00 

75.00 

80.00 

l3 West. 

2.00 

3.50 

21.50 

40.00 

46.44 

l4 76.44 

80.00 

Feet. 

d 20 

On N. boundary of sec. 2- 

Set qr. sec. post, from which 

a W. oak 9 in. dia. bears N. 24 E. 28 1. dist. 

a buckeye 11 do do S. 48 W. 9 do. 

a sugar 27 in. dia. bears N. 44 W. 30 1. dist. 

ado 14 do do S. 30 E. 14 do. 

ado15dodoN.46E. 15do. 

a beech 16 do do S. 35 W. 16 do. 

Land same as on the last mile. 

On the N. boundary of sec. 3- 

Set post cor. of secs. 2, 3, 34, and 35, from which d 15 

Enter wet prairie .................................... .d 10 

Beautiful spring branch SW .......................... .level 

Passed prairie ............................ .. .level 

Set qr. sec. post, from which 

a W. walnut 6 in. dia. bears N. 64 E. 7 1. dist. 

ado 12dodoS. 73 W. 31 do. 

a 10 

Enter prairie ... .... ........... .d 10 

To cor, secs. 3,4,33, and 34 drove a charred 

stake ............................................. .level 

Raised mound, with trench, as per instructions, and 

Planted NW. a W. oak ac’n; SW. a wild cherry 

stone. NE. a beech nut; SE. a butternut. 

Land same as on last mile. 

On N. boundary of sec. P 

A spring branch 3 1. wide, course N ................... .level 

Passed prairie ....................................... .a 5 

A spring branch 15 1. wide, course NW ................ .d 5 

AB. walnut 30 in. dia. stands for qr. sec. 

cor., from which level 

a buckeye 9 in. dia. bears S. 45 E. 11 1. dist. 

Set post on left bank of Chickeeles river, 

from which level 

anelm8in.dia.bearsN.71E. 51.dist. 

an elm 9 do do S. 19 W. 6 do. 

The line running in the river, an offset 

was made due north of 7 c. 63 1.; and at 30 c. 

came back to true line. 

Set post on right bank ofriver Chickeeles, 

in John Burton’s claim, from which 

acherry6in.dia.bearsN.61E. 171.dist. 

a sugar 23 do do west 20 1. 

Set post, cor. to secs. 4,5,32, and 33, in 

John Burton’s claim, from which 

a hackberry 7 in. dia. bears N. 67 E. 17 1. dist. 

level 

a 20 

-55- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

a sugar 19 in. dia. bearsN. 71 W. 43 1. dist. 

a beech 20 do do S. 20 E. 50 do. 

alocust 14 do do S. 30 W. 16 do. 

Land first rate river bottom. 

l5 West. I OnN.boundaryofsec.5- 

3. Timbered corners. 

6. Mound corners. 

13. A corner tree. 

14. Offset at river. 

15. Claim line intersected. 

24.40 

40.00 

42.73 

44.58 

80.00 

l6 West. 

8.00 

13.26 

34.30 

40.00 

48.65 

67.40 

76.53 

17 

North. 

8.56 

34.50 

A W. oak 16 in dia.. .................................. a 10 

Set qr. sec. post, from which a 10 

a hickory 8 in. dia. bears N. 88 E. 40 1. dist. 

amulberry14dodoN.69W.103do. 

A B. ash 15 in. dia.. .................................. a 3 

Intersect lower boundary line ofJohn Burton’s 

claim, 640 acres, as near as could be 

ascertained; course SE.. ............................ .a 3 

Set post, cor. of secs. 5, 6, 35, and 36, from which d 10 

a sugar 19 in. dia. bears N. 89 E. 60 1. dist. 

an elm 14dodoN. 12 W. 24do. 

an elm 15 do do S. 14 W. 23 do. 

a sugar 16 do do S. 15 E. 26 do. 

Land broken, and first rate; timber, sugar, 

walnut, and oak, und’gr. elm and spice. 

~ ~~ ~ 

On the N. boundary of sec. 6 

A R. oak 33 in. d 

Set qr. sec. post, from which 

.............................. d 10 

................. .level 

............................ .level 

level 

.... 

a burr oak 27 in. dia. bears N. 49 E. 46 1. dist. 

a sugar 20 do do N. 56 W. 60 do. 

A stream 14 1. wide, course S.. ................ level 

A W. oak 28 in dia .................................. .level 

To establishedcor. tps. 25 and 26, rs. 2 

and 3 W .......................................... .level 

Land level, second rate; timber, oak and 

hickory, und’gr. hazel and hickory. 

Jan. 28,1851. 

West boundary, variation 18” 56’ E. 

On the west boundary of sec. 31- 

Set post on left bank ofwillamette river, 

from which d 20 

a hackberry 11 in. dia., bearsN. 50 E. 11 1. dist. 

a sycamore 60 do do S. 15 W. 24 do 

Set post meander cor. on right bank ofriver 

in Henry William’s claim of 640 acres, 

from which level 

a beech 10 in. dia., bears S. 2 E. 12 1. dist. 

a B. oak 12 do do N. 80 W. 16 do 

-56- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. Iks. 

80.00 

“North. 

27.73 

39.00 

Setpostcornerofsecs. 30,31,25,and36 

in Henry William’s claim.. ..................... 

abeech14in. dia.,bearsN. 20E. 141. dist. 

ado 16 do do S. 40 W. 16 do 

a hickory 9 do do N. 25 W. 12 do 

a W. oak 10dodoS. 44E. 20 do 

Feet. 

. .a 20 

~~~ 

On west boundary of sec. 30- 

Set post, meander cor., on right bank of 

Chickeeles river in H. William’s reserve.. ... 

a willow 6 in. dia. bears S. 50 E. 11 I. dist. 

a do 5 do do S. 65 Iks. 

William’sclaim, S. W. as pointed outN. 20 W. 2 chs. N. 35 W. 4 chs. 

N. 25 W. 8 chs. N. 40 W. 10 chs. 

Chickeeles river, from which 

a hickory 8 in. dia. bears N. 72 W. 8 1. dist. 

Then as follows, to Upper river corner of 

Set post, meander corner, on left bank of 

16. Trees on line 

17. Through a claim 

18. Connexion to claim corner 

........ .d 20 

level 

450 
40.00 

80.00 

l9 North. 

32.50 

40.00 

51.80 

80.00 

a W. oak8dodoN. 44E. 17 do 

a hickory 9 in. dia. bears N. 16 E. 16 1. dist. 

abuckeyel0dodoS. 16E. 18do 

Set post cor. of secs. 19,30,24, and 25, 

from which a 20 

a sugar 15 in. dia. bears N. 49 W. 4 1. dist. 

anelm6dodoN.82E.25do. 

an do 9 do do S. 42 W. 30 do. 

a sugar 10 do do S. 55 E. 45 do. 

Land rich, and good for farming. 

Set qr. sec. post, from which level 

3.00 

40.00 

61.11 

80.00 

On the W. boundary of sec. 19- 

A hackberry 20 in. diam. at the meander cor. on 

left bank of Chickeeles river ........................ .d 20 

Qr. sec. corner in river, from which level 

a beech 12 in. dia. N. 40 E. 95 1. dist. 

ado14doS.55E. 120do. 

Set post at meander corner on right bank of 

Chickeeles river, from which level 

alynn15in. dia.bearsN.28W.321.dist. 

apoplar15dodoS.61 W.78do 

Set post cor. ofsec. 18,19,13, and 24, 

from which a 20 

a R. oak 27 in. dia. bears S. 26 W. 20 1. dist. 

a W. oak 17 do do N. 64 W. 18 do. 

ado18dodoN.55E.24do. 

a R. oak 15 dodo S. 29 E. 40 do. 

Land rolling, 2d rate; timber oak, hickory; 

un'gr. oak and sassafras. 

-57- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. lks. 

North. 

21.88 

38.60 

40.00 

68.37 

80.00 

"North. 

15.18 

30.26 

40.00 

68.37 

80.00 

"North. 

Feet. 

On the W. boundary ofsec. 18- 

A R. oak 20 in. dia. .................................. .a 10 

A W. oak 24 do ...................................... .a 18 

Set qr. sec. post, from which a2 

a W. oak 23 in. dia. bears S. 28 W. 92 1. dist. 

a do 22 dodo N. 27 W. 26 do 

A B. walnut 21 in. dia. ............................... .a 15 

Set post cor. secs. 7, 18, 12, and 13, from which a5 

a buckeye 16 in. dia. bears S. 40 W. 55 1. dist 

a do 8 do doN. 53 W. 40 do. 

a R. oak 10 do do S. 44 E. 50 do. 

a W. oak 12 dodo N. 55 E. 68 do. 

and sugar; und'gr. sugar and elm. 

Land level, 1st rate; timber walnut, buckeye, 

On W. boundary ofsec. 7- 

A W. oak 15 in. dia.. ................................. .d 10 

Ado 21 do ............................................ d 5 

Set qr. sec. post, from which d5 

a W. oak 12 in. dia. bears S. 13 W. 60 1. dist. 

ado 15 do doN. 35 W. 55 do. 

A B. walnut 21 in. dia.. .............................. .d 10 

Set post cor. of secs. 6, 7, 1, 2, from which d 15 

a W. oak 18 in. dia. bears S. 52 W. 20 1. dist. 

ado 18dodoN. 54 W. 51 do. 

ado16dodoN.58E.60do. 

a hickory 14 dodo S. 64 E. 42 do. 

hickory; und'gr. hazel and oak. 

Land gently rolling, 2d rate, timber oak, 

On W. boundary of sec. 6 

19. Corner in river. 

20. Trees in true line. 

21. Stone mound at T'p corner 

Enter stoney barrens and swamp.. .................... .d 10 

Set qr. sec. cor., aquartz stone 13 X 4 in. 

with trench, as per instructions, from which 

a beech 20 in. dia. bears S. 44 E. 95 1. dist. 

d 15 

PlantedNW. 6 honey locust seed. 

Adryditch 101. wide. 

To corner of Tps. 25 and 26 N. Rs. 2 and 3. W. level 

set stone, a granite 18 X 6 in., raised level 

stone mound with trench, as per instructions, and 

Planted NW. 4 chestnuts. NE. 6 beechnuts. 

SW. a W. oak acorn. SE. 4 do. 

January29th, 1851. 

-58- 

EXAMPLE 

OF THE 

FIELD NOTES 

OF THE 

SUBDIVISIONAL OR 

SECTIONAL LINES 

AND 

MEANDERS. 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. lks. 

"North. 

9.19 

29.97 

40.00 

51.90 

76.73 

80.00 

23 East. 

9.00 

15.00 

40.00 

55.00 

72.00 

80.00 

22. True line 

23. Random. 

Feet. 

SUBDIVISIONS. Commenced February 1,1851. 

Between secs. 35 and 36 

A beech 30 in. dia.. .................................. .d 10 

A beech 30 in. dia.. .................................. .d 5 

Set qr. sec. post, from which d5 

a beech 15 in. dia. bears S. 48 E. 12 1. dist. 

a do 8 do do N. 23 W. 45 do. 

A beech 18 in dia .................................... .d 5 

A sugar 30 in. dia.. .................................. .d 8 

Set apost cor. ofsecs. 25,26,35,36, 

from which d2 

a beech 24 in. dia. bears N. 62 W. 17 1. dist. 

a poplar 36 do do S. 66 E. 34 do. 

a do 20 do do S. 70 W. 50 do. 

a beech 28 do do N. 60 E. 45 do. 

sugar, and und'gr. spice, &c. 

Land level, second rate; timber, beech, poplar, 

On random between secs. 25 and 36- 

A brook 30 1. wide, course N .......................... .d 10 

To foot of hill ........................................ .a 10 

Set temporary qr. sec. post.. .......................... .a 60 

To opposite foot of hill. ............................... .d 40 

A brook 15 1. wide, course N .......................... .d 20 

Intersect E. boundary at post ......................... .a 10 

Land level, second rate; timber, beech, oak, 

ash, &c.,und'gr. spice, &c. 

451 
-59- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. lks. 

22 West. 

40.00 

80.00 

“North. 

7.00 

17.25 

18.05 

23.44 

40.00 

60.15 

80.00 

24 East. 

8.90 

12.00 

40.00 

48.00 

60.50 

73.00 

80.12 

22 West. 

40.06 

80.12 

25~~rth. 

6.70 

9.65 

Feet. 

3n true line west, between secs. 25 and 36- 

Set qr. sec. post, at average dist. from which 

a hickory 14 in. dia. bears N. 60 E. 27 1. dist. 

a beech 15 do do S. 74 W. 9 do. 

To sec. car. 

Between secs. 25 and 26- 

A poplar 40 in. dia ................................... .d 5 

A brook 30 1. wide, course W.. ........................ .d 10 

A walnut 30 in. dia .................................. .d 2 

A brook 25 1. wide, course NE.. ....................... .d 5 

Set qr. sec. post, from which a 10 

a beech 10 in. dia. bears S. 72 W. 9 1. dist. 

a B. oak36dodoN. 42 E. 18do. 

A beech 30 in. dia.. .................................. .a 5 

Set post cor. of secs. 23,24,25,26, 

from which a 10 

a sugar 12 in. dia. bears S. 42 E. 14 1. dist. 

adol2dodoN. 14W.31do. 

a W. oak 14 do do N. 50 E. 40 do. 

a do 13 do do S. 38 W. 32 do. 

ash, sugar, &c.; und’gr. spice, &c. 

Land level, second rate; timber, beech, walnut, 

On random between secs. 24 and 25- 

A stream 30 1. wide, course NW.. ..................... .d 10 

To foot of hill ........ 

Set temp. qr. sec. post ................................ .a 50 

To opposite foot of hi ..................... .d 50 

A stream 30 1. wide, 

To foot of hill ...... 

Intersect E. boundary at post 

Land rolling, good se 

............... 

beech, elm, &c.; und’gr. spice, &c. 

On true line between secs. 24 and 25- 

Set qr. sec. post, at aver. dist. from which 

abeech18in.dia.bearsN.74 W.251.dist. 

ado16dodoS.73E.22do. 

To sec. car. 

Between secs. 23,2P 

A W. oak 20 in. dia .................................. .d 10 

A stream 40 1. wide, course NW .. .d 5 

-60- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. lks. 

13.15 

16.00 

35.00 

40.00 

40.35 

54.08 

Feet. 

A brook 25 1. wide, course NE ........................ .level 

A brook 25 1. wide, course NW.. ...................... .level 

To south boundary of Henry Thompson’s claim, 

S. 76 E. 2 c. 20 1. to southeast corner of 

claim as pointed out.. .............................. .a 15 

Set qr. sec. post in H. Thompson’s claim, 

from which d 10 

a cottonwood 18 in. dia. bears S. 7 W. 7 1. dist. 

a W. walnut 24 do do S. 22 E. 4 do. 

A stream 125 links wide, course NW.. ................ .level 

To road from Astoria to Williamsburg ................. .a 30 

22. True line. 

24. Random line 

25. Claim noted. 

58.00 

68.00 

72.12 

80.00 

East 

14.00 

40.00 

80.00 

West 

40.00 

80.00 

North 

6.17 

22.15 

40.00 

Enter wet prairie .................................... .d 15 

Leave do and enter timber land.. ..................... .level 

A W. oak 30 in. dia ................................... a 10 

Set post cor. of secs. 13, 14, 23, and 24, from which a 2 

an elm 8 in. dia. bears S. 67 W. 161ks dist. 

a W. waln’t 24 do do N. 59 E. 27 do. 

a W. oak 16 do do N. 42 E. 15 do. 

aB. oak 14dodoS. 38E. 17 do. 

half mile first rate; timber, walnut, buckeye, 

oak; and undergrowth, spice, &c. 

First half mile hilly second rate land; second 

On random between sections 13 and 24- 

To east boundary of H. Thompson’s claim as 

pointed out, course NE ............................. .a 15 

Set temporary quarter section post .................... .a 10 

Intersect east boundary 16 links S. of post ............. .a 20 

Land first rate; timber, walnut, sugar, elm, 

buckeye, oak, &c.; undergrowth, spice, &c. 

On true line between sections 13 and 2G 

Set qr. sec. post at an average distance, 

from which 

a sugar 30 in. dia. bears N. 80 W. 22 1. dist. 

a W. oak 16 do do S. 53 E. do. 

To sec. corner. 

Between sections 13 and 1P 

A W. oak 30 in dia ................................... .a 10 

A beech 30 do.. ...................................... .a 10 

Set quarter section post, from which a 20 

a beech 24 in. dia. bears N. 66 W. 6 links dist. 

ado 20 do do S. 45 E. 40 do. 

-61- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W.,. Willamette Mer. 

Ch. lks. 

42.25 

52.25 

62.61 

80.00 

East 

40.00 

80.10 

West 

40.05 

80.10 

North 

10.81 

40.00 

52.25 

62.61 

Feet. 

To northern boundary line of H. Thompson’s 

claim, course NW .................................. .a 5 

A beech 24 in. dia.. .................................. .a 5 

AB. oak30 do ........................................ a 5 

Setpostcor.ofsecs. 1,2,11,and12, 

from which a 20 

asugar 30 in dia. bears S. 32 W. 25 lks. dist. 

aB.oak36dodoN.53E. 10do. 

a W. oak20 do do S. 24 E. 20 do. 

aB.oak21dodoN.20W.35do. 

ash; and undergrowth, spice, &c. 

Land level, second rate; timber, beech, oak, 

On random between sections 12 and 13- 

Set temporary quarter section post .................... .a 50 

Intersect east boundary 13 links north of post.. ........ .a 50 

Land level, second rate; timber, beech, black 

oak, and undergrowth, spice, &c. 

On true line between sections 12 and 13- 

Set quarter section post at average dist., 

from which 

an elm 24 in. dia. bears N. 51 E. 50 lks. dist. 

abeechl8dodoS.51 W.29do. 

To sec. corner. 

Between sections 11 and 12- 

An elm 15 in. dia .................................... .a 10 

Set quarter section post, from which a5 

a beech 30 in. dia. bears N. 33 W. 9 lks. dist. 

ado20dodoS.64W.20do. 

A beech 24 do ....................................... .level 

A B. oak 30 do.. ..................................... .d 10 

452 
80.00 

East. 

30.00 

40.00 

West. 

80.00 

Setpostcornerofsecs. 1,2,ll,and 12, 

from which 

a sugar 30 in. dia. bears S. 32 W. 25 Iks. dist. 

a poplar 36 do do N. 43 E. 25 do. 

a do 32 dodo N. 41 E. 30 do. 

a sugar 21 do do S. 35 E. 40 do. 

poplar, walnut; and undergrowth, spice, &c 

Land level, good second rate; timber, sugar, 

To sec. cor. 

d 10 

On random between secs. 1 and 12- 

To second bluff of hill ................................ .a 50 

Set temp. qr. sec. post ................................ .a 20 

-62- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. Iks. 

73.00 

80.25 

West. 

40.121/z 

80.25 

2fiNorth. 

6.82 

40.00 

44.96 

62.94 

80.11 

27So~th. 

40.11 

80.11 

North. 

6.56 

23.00 

34.58 

40.00 

50.00 

75.86 

80.00 

Feet. 

To steep bluff ....................................... .a 50 

Intersect E. boundary 13 1. N. of post ................. .a100 

Level, 2d rate land; timber, beech, oak, sugar, 

&c.; open woods. 

On true line between secs. 1 and 12- 

Set qr. sec. post, at aver. dist. from which 

a sugar 24 in. dia. bears S. 56 W. 25 1. dist. 

ado20dodoN. 20E. 32do 

To sec. cor. 

On random between secs. 1 and 2- 

A sugar 27 in. dia.. ................................. ..a 10 

Set temp. qr. sec. post.. .............................. .level 

A beech 28 in. dia.. .................................. .d 10 

A sugar 36 do.. ...................................... .d 5 

Intersect N. boundary 30 1. E. of true corner ........... .d 10 

Land level; timber, walnut, sugar, beech, and 

open wood. 

48" E. on the true line between secs. 1 and 2- 

Set qr. sec. cor., from which 

a sugar 14 in. dia. bears S. 49 E. 32 1. dist. 

a W. oak 20dodoN. 31 W. 65do 

February3d, 1851. 

To sec. corner. 

Between secs. 34 and 35- 

A hickory 36 in. dia 

To foot of hill ...... 

A walnut 38 in. dia ................... 

Set qr. sec. post, from which 

a beech 16 in. dia. bears S. 18 E. 13 1. dist. 

a do 10 do do N. 69 W. 40 do. 

..................... .d 10 

..................... .d 30 

d5 

d5 

A maple 24 in. dia . .............. ..d 10 

An ash 24 do ........................................ .d 10 

Set post sec. cor. of secs. 26,27,34, & 35, 

from which d5 

a beech 14 in. dia. bears S. 67 E. 12 1. dist. 

anash36dodoN.52W. 19do. 

an do 30 do do N. 40 E. 24 do. 

a beech 16 dodo S. 69 W. 41 do. 

spice, &c. 

Land level; timber, beech, oak; undgr. 

-63- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer 

Ch. Iks. 

East. 

40.00 

80.00 

West. 

40.00 

80.00 

North. 

8.47 

29.18 

40.00 

46.37 

60.48 

80.00 

East. 

40.00 

48.00 

80.00 

28 West. 

40.00 

South. 

24.00 

Feet. 

On random between 26 and 35- 

Set temp. qr. sec. post.. .............................. .d 10 

Intersect N. and S. line 20 1. N. of true corner.. ........ .d 10 

Land level; brushy timber, beech, elm, &c.; 

und'gr. spice, &c. 

On the true line between 26 and 35- 

Set qr. sec. post at aver. dist., from which 

a beech 14 in. dia. bears N. 56 E. 12 1. dist. 

a do 12 do do S. 32 W. 32 do. 

To sec. cor. 

Between secs. 26 and 27- 

An elm 20 in. dia ................................... ..a 5 

A lynn 34 do. ........................................ .a 5 

Set qr. sec. post, from which level 

a sugar 14 in. dia. bears S. 13 W. 31 1. dist. 

a beech 12 do do N. 54 E. 27 do. 

A poplar 40 do.. ..................................... .d 5 

A B.oak 36 do ........................................ d 5 

Set post cor. ofsecs. 22,23,26, adn 27, 

from which d 10 

an ironwood 8 in. dia. bears S. 32 E. 24 1. dist. 

a walnut 30 do do N. 36 W. 14 do. 

a do 24 do do S. 24 W. 16 do. 

a W. oak 31 do do N. 50 E. 13 do. 

First half mile 2d rate, 2d half mile 1st rate 

land; timber, walnut, poplar, beech, &c., 

spices, &c. 

On random between secs. 23 and 26- 

Set temp. qr. sec. post ................................ .a 10 

A spring branch 8 1. wide, course NW ................. .d 10 

Intersect N. and S. line at post.. ...................... .a 10 

Land good, 2d rate; timber, poplar, beech, &c.; 

ugr. spice, &c. 

On the true line between secs. 23 and 26- 

Set qr. sec. post at aver. dist. from which 

a beech 16 in. dia. bears N. 72 W. 18 I. dist. 

a do 10 do do S. 72 W. 16 do. 

To N. margin of lake where set post, from which 

a beech 14 in. dia. bears N. 45 E. 10 1. dist. 

a5 

a do 9 do do N. 15 W. 14 do. 

-64- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. Iks. 

S. 53" E. 

S. 392 E. 

S. 29% W. 

S. 65 W. 

N. 63% W. 

N. 12 W. 

N. 50 E. 

Feet. 

rhence meander lakes as follows: 

16.83 To place ofbeginning. 

17.75 

13.00 

12.00 

10.00 

21.00 Thence to YZ mile post on line 

between secs. 26 and 27 east 28 

chains. 

26. Random for course line 

27. Course line. 
29North. 

8.00 

24.18 

40.00 

41.66 

47.00 

56.00 

64.00 

65.00 

68.00 

69.92 

80.00 

East. 

4.00 

40.00 

80.15 

Ch. lks. 

East. 

Between secs. 22 and 23- 

A stream 150 1. wide, course SW ...................... .d 5 

A do 150 do do NE.. ................................. .level 

Set qr. sec. post, from which level 

a B. oak 20 in. dia. bears S. 9 W. 45 1. dist. 

ado20dodoN. 34E. 48do 

Same stream 150 1. wide, course SW .... level 

Enter wet prairie .................................... .level 

To S. boundary ofHenry Thompson’s claim as 

pointed out, course N. 76 W. 2 c. to SW. corner 

of claim. .......................................... .level 

To west boundary of H. Thompson’s claim 

Leave wet prairie. ................................... .level 

To road from Astoria to Williamsburg.. . 

A W. oak 18 in. dia .................................. .a 2 

Set post cor. of secs. 14,15,22, and 23, 

from which a 10 

a sugar 24 in. dia. bears S. 52 E. 23 1. dist. 

an elm 24 do do N. 34 W. 45 do. 

Do16dodoN.27E.50do. 

a sugar 18 do do S. 60 W. 42 do. 

timber, W. oak, sugar, beech, &c.; ugr. spices. 

First 1/z mile broken, 2d 1/z mile 2d rate land; 

Feet. 

On the true line between secs. 6 and 7- 

On random between secs. 14 and 23- 

To W. boundary ofH. Thompson’s claim as 

pointed out ........................................ .a 5 

Set temp. qr. sec. post.. ............................. ..level 

Intersect N. and S. line at post.. ...................... .a 10 

Land level, good, second rate; timber, sugar, 

oak, beech, &c.; up. spice, &c. 

-65- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer 

Ch. lks. 

West. 

40.07% 

80.15 

North 

14.14 

34.13 

40.00 

47.20 

61.84 

77.72 

80.00 

East 

2.62 

7.03 

8.05 

13.00 

40.00 

80.15 

Feet. 

On the true line between secs. 14 ank 23- 

Set qr. sec. post at aver. dist. in Thompson’s 

claim, from which 

a sugar 30 in. dia. bears N. 39 E. 31 1. dist. 

amulberrydodos. 26W.4do. 

To sec. cor. 

Between sections 14 and 15- 

5 

A cotton wood 22 do.. ................................ .a 5 

Set qr. sec. post, from which a 10 

A sugar 14 in. dia.. .................................. .a 

asugar 20 in. dia. bears S. 43 E. 741ks. dist. 

a beech 24 do do N 45 W. 37 do. 

A walnut 27 do do .................................. ..a 5 

A do 36 do do.. ...................................... .a 5 

A stream 25 lks. wide, course SW ..................... .d 10 

Setpostcor.ofsecs. 10,11,14,and15, 

from which a5 

a hickory 15 in. dia. bears S. 12 E. 361ks. dist. 

aB.oak30dodoN. 17W.32do. 

a do 28 do do N. 16 E. 40 do. 

a W. oak 14 do do S. 15 W. 38 do. 

walnut, &c.; undergrowth, spice, &c. 

Land level, second rate; timber, beech, oak, 

On random between sections 11 and 14- 

A stream 25 links wide, course N ..................... .d 5 

Same 25 do do SW.. ................................. .level 

Same 25 do do SW.. ................................. .level 

Same 25 do do NE ................................... .level 

Set temporary quarter section post .................... .a 20 

Intersect N. and S. line 20 links N. of post. ............ .a 50 

Land brushy; timber, beech, oak, &c. 

29. Connexion with claim 

West. 

40.07% 

80.15 

North 

5.29 

39.16 

On the true line between sections 11 and 14- 

Set qr. sec. post at average dist., from which 

a sugar 16 in. dia. bears N. 66 E. 35 links dist. 

a do 14 do do S. 44 W. 13 do. 

To sec. corner. 

Between sections 10 and 11- 

A W. oak 24 in. dia .................................. .a 2 

A do 36 do ............................................ a 8 

[Ed. Note: Pages 66 through 81 of the sample field notes are 

deleted here in the interest of space. The deleted pages are in 

the same vein and style as those given.] 

-82- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Ch. lks. 

East. 

35.67 

75.67 

North. 

10.00 

11.39 

16.00 

35.17 

40.00 

67.83 

80.00 

East. 

10.57 

West. 

10.57 

West. 

20.19 

25.10 

40.00 

56.00 

61.00 

75.00 

Feet. 

On the true line between secs. 7 and 18- 

Set qr. sec. post, from which 

a R. oak 30 in. dia. bears S. 6 E. 22 1. dist. 

ado 30 do do N. 26 E. 52 do. 

To sec. cor. 

Between secs. 7 and 8- 

A stream 10 1. wide, course SE ....................... .level 

A R. oak 24 in. dia .................................. .level 

A stream 40 1. wide, course SE ....................... .level 

A B. oak 15 in. dia .................................. .level 

Set qr. sec. post, from which level 

a W. oak 4 in. dia. bears S. 35 W. 17 1. dist. 

ado7 dodo N. 59E. 4do. 

A hickory 10 do .................................... ..level 

Set post cor. of secs. 5, 6, 7, and 8, from which level 

a W. oak40 in. dia. bears S. 75 E. 22 1. dist. 

AR. oak 24 do do S. 80 W. 39 do. 

ado21dodoN.20E.40do. 

a W. oak 25 do do N. 16 W. 43 do. 

Land and timber as before noted. 

On random between secs. 5 and 8- 

To a point near right bank of Chickeeles river, 

2 1 S. of meander sec. car ........................... .d 5 

Completed meander corner of secs. 5 and 8, 

from whence 

a R. oak 32 in. dia. bears N. 58 E. 5 1. dist. 

a hickory 12 do do S. 42 W. 5 do. 

Land broken, lstrate; timber, as before noted. 

On the true line between secs. 5 and 8- 

To sec. car. 

On random between secs. 6 and 7- 

A hickory 10 in. dia.. ................................ .a 10 

A stream 35 1. wide, course SE.. ...................... .d 5 

Set temp. qr. sec. post ................................ .a 10 

A stream 15 1. wide, course SE.. ...................... .d 5 

A W. oak 40 in. dia .................................. .a 10 

Intersect W. boundary 21 1. N. of corner ............... .a 5 

Land hilly, 2d rate; timber, oak, sugar, 

hickory; und‘gr. sassafras and hickory. 

-83- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

454 
35.00 

5.00 

North. 

28.75 

40.00 

53.75 

66.25 

80.06 

South 

40.06 

53.75 

66.25 

80.06 

Courses. 

Set qr. sec. post, from whence 

a W. oak40 in. dia. bears S. 4 W. 41 1. dist 

a cherry 15 do doN. 4 W. 49 do. 

To sec. cor. 

Dist. REMARKS. 

Ch. Iks. 

N. 30 E. 

N. 40 E. 

N.44E. 

N. 40 E. 

N. 45 E. 

N. 38 E. 

N. 49 E. 

N. 37 E. 

N. 55 E. 

N. 62 E. 

N. 72 E. 

N. 45 E. 

9.16 

3.20 

2.50 

6.74 

9.05 

8.79 

15.14 

5.00 

5.00 

7.30 

11.00 

5.00 

On random between secs. 5 and 6- 

A sugar 18 in. dia ................................... .level 

Set temp. qr. sec. post ................................ .a 5 

A sugar 30 in. dia.. .................................. .a 5 

A do 18 do ............................................ a 3 

Intersect N. boundary 24 1. E. of corner,. .............. .a 5 

Land level and 1st rate; timber, sugar, and ash; 

ugr. hazel and walnut. 

Intersect the lower cor. ofJohn Burton's claim. 

To post in line between secs. 4 and 5. 

In sec. 4 to post in N. boundary oftp. 

-85- 47'E. on true line between secs. 18 and 19- 

Set qr. sec. post, from which 

a hickory 20 in. dia. bears S. 2 E. 63 1. dist. 

anelml6dodoN. 18E.53do. 

A sugar 30 in. dia. 

Ado 18 do. 

To sec. cor. 

February 13. 

- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

REMARKS. 

Commenced again right bank in sec. 31 and 

thence up stream. 

N. 7E. 

N. 32 E. 

N. 68 E. 

N. 50 E. 

N. 20 E. 

East. 

N. 45 W. 

N. 55 W. 

N. 31 W. 

6.85 

10.90 

12.50 

9.00 

6.10 

10.90 

13.80 

11.80 

12.50 

MEANDERS OF CHICKEELES RIVER. 

Post in W. boundary oftp. 

N. 34 E. February 15th, 1851. 

N. 40 E. 

N. 58 E. 

19.29 

14.79 

3.48 

In sec. 19. 

To post in line between secs. 18 and 19. 

~ ~~__________ ~_______ 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION. 

N. 58 E. 

N. 63 E. 

N. 70 E. 

9.72 

17.00 

30.34 

In sec. 18. 

To post in line between secs. 17 and 18. 

The quality of the land in this township is considerably 

above the common average. There is a very fair proportion of 

rich bottom land, chiefly situated on both sides of the river 

Chickeeles, which is navigable through this township for 

steamboats of light draft; and although a few small patches of 

swamp and wet prairie occur, the uplands, especially as we 

approach the eastern and southern boundaries of the 

township, where the surface becomes more undulating, are 

well calculated for the sereal grains, and afford many beautiful and apparently healthy locations for first rate farms. The 

timber, chiefly oak, beech and sugar, is very equally distributed through the township, and we met several very fair 

specimens of good building stone exposed at two or three 

points on the river banks, indicating a sufficient abundance 

thereof in the township to supply the wants ofthe settlers and 

for the construction of roads, The town of Williamsburg, on 

the right bank, was founded about five years ago. It now 

contains some thirty houses, several of which are of stone, 

has a good landing in front, with a ferry, and 

-84- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

Courses. Dist. 

Ch. lks. 

REMARKS. 

10.24 

6.82 

12.17 

7.29 

11.92 

11.92 

7.36 

4.06 

3.00 

5.00 

11.25 

10.06 

10.00 

4.42 

13.55 

5.50 

8.50 

5.45 

5.50 

5.13 

12.06 

In sec. 17. 

To lower line of town of Williamsburg. 

N. 72 E. 

N. 45 E. 

N. 16E. 

North. 

N. 2W. 

N. 8W. 

N. 10 W. 

N. 18 W. 

N. 30 W. 

N. 19 W. 

N. 9W. 

N. 2W. 

N. 7W. 

N. 15 W. 

North. 

N. 8E. 

N. 18 E. 

N. 10 E. 

N. 17 E. 

N. 26 E. 

N. 23 E. 

To post in line between secs. 8 and 17. 

Insec. 8. 

At 2.15 c. a stream 40 1. wide. 

-86- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

To post in line between secs. 5 and 8. 

Insec. 5. 

bears all the marks of enterprise, and of an industrious, 

temperate, thriving community. The township is intersected 

455 
from east to west with a road leading from Williamsburg to 

Astoria, thus affording, together with the river, a good outlet 

to market. 

LIST OF NAMES. 

A list of the names of the individuals employed to assist in 

running, measuring, or marking the lines and corners described in the foregoing field notes of township No. 25 north, 

of the base line of range No. 2 west, of the Willamette meridian, showing the respective capacities in which they acted. 

PETER LONG, Chainman. 

JOHN SHORT, Chainman. 

GEORGE SHARP, Axeman. 

ADAM DULL, Axeman. 

HENRY FLAGG, Compassman. 

We hereby certify that we assisted Robert Acres, deputy 

surveyor, in surveying the exterior boundaries and subdividing township number twenty-five north, of the base line of 

range number two west, of the Willamette meridian, and that 

said township has been in all respects, to the best of our 

knowledge and belief, well and faithfully surveyed, and the 

boundary monuments planted according to the instructions 

furnished by the surveyor general. 

PETER LONG, Chainman. 

JOHN SHORT, Chainman. 

GEORGE SHARP, Axeman. 

ADAM DULL, Axeman. 

HENRY FLAGG, Compassman. 

Subscribed and sworn to by the above named persons, 

before me, a justice of the peace for the county of Willamette, 

at Oregon city, 0. T., this 24th day of February, 1851. 

HENRY DOOLITTLE, 

Justice of the Peace. 

I, Robert Acres, deputy surveyor, do solemnly swear, that 

in pursuance of a contract No. 1, with John B. Preston, surveyor of the public lands of the United States in the Territory 

of Oregon, bearing date the second day of January, A.D. 1851, 

and in strict conformity to the laws of the United States and 

the instructions furnished by the said surveyor general, I 

have faithfully surveyed the exterior boundaries, subdivisions, and meanders of township number twenty-five north, 

of the base line of range number two 

-87- 

Township 25 N., Range 2 W., Willamette Mer. 

west, of the Willamette meridian, in the Territory aforesaid, 

and do further solemnly swear that the foregoing are the true 

and original Field Notes of such survey. 

ROBERT ACRES, 

Deputy Surveyor. 

Subscribed by said Robert Acres, deputy surveyor, and 

sworn to before me, a justice of the peace for Willamette 

county, 0. T., at the city of Oregon, this 24th day of February, 

1851. 

HENRY DOOLITTLE, 

Justice of the Peace. 

To the copies of the Field Notes transmitted to the seat of 

Government, the surveyor general will append to each 

township the following certificate: 

I certify that the foregoing transcript of Field Notes of the 

survey of township number twenty-five north, ofthe base line 

of range number two west, of the Willamette meridian, in the 

territory of Oregon, has been compared with the original on 

file in this office. 

JOHN B. PRESTON, Sur. Gen. 

SURVEYOR GENERAL'S OFFICE, 

Oregon City, March 4th, 1851. 

N. B. The abbreviations for chains and links should invariably have been chs. and Iks. The marginal columns should 

have been extended on several of the foregoing pages where 

they have been omitted. Time did not admit of the correction. 

456 
XXXII. 

(This copy of the 1855 manual is taken from an original volume now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

INSTRUCTIONS 

TO THE 

SURVEYORS GENERAL OF PUBLIC 

LANDS 

OF 

THE UNITED STATES, 

FOR THOSE 

SURVEYING DISTRICTS ESTABLISHED 

IN AND SINCE THE YEAR 1850; 

CONTAINING, ALSO, 

A MANUAL OF INSTRUCTIONS 

TO 

REGULATE THE FIELD OPERATIONS OF 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS, 

ILLUSTRATED BY DIAGRAMS. 

PRESCRIBED, ACCORDING TO LAW, BY THE PRINCIPAL CLERK OF SURVEYS, PURSUANT TO ORDER OF THE 

COMMISSIONER OF THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE. 

WASHINGTON: 

A. 0. P. NICHOLSON, PUBLIC PRINTER. 

1855. 

457 
TO THE SURVEYORS GENERAL 

OF 

PUBLIC LANDS OF THE 

UNITED STATES 

FOR THE SURVEYING DISTRICTS ESTABLISHED 

IN AND SINCE THE YEAR 1850. 

By the direction of the COMMISSIONER OF THE 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, the accompanying instructions 

are prescribed for your official government, including a 

MANUAL OF INSTRUCTIONS to regulate the field operations of your deputy surveyors. The latter is a revision of the 

Manual of Surveying Instructions prepared for OREGON in 

1851, (the edition of which is now exhausted,) and presents, 

in some respects, more copious illustrations, both in the 

specimen field notes and in the diagrams, than could be 

furnished amidst the pressure of the exigency under which 

the former had to be prepared. It will be observed that, in the 

former edition, the township and section lines south of the 

base are made to start therefrom, and close on the first standard parallel south; whereas, under the present instructions, 

such lines are made to start from the first standard parallel 

south, and to close to the north on the base: and thus there 

will be closing corners and starting corners, both on the base 

and standard lines. Such modification is introduced for the 

sake of entire uniformity of method in new fields of survey, 

and will not, of course, affect any past operations under the 

original instructions. 

The starting corners on the base line and on the standards 

will, of course, be common to two townships orto two sections 

lying on and north of such lines; and the closing corners on 

such lines, from the south, should be carefully connected with 

the former by measurements to be noted in the field book. 

Where STONE can be had to perpetuate corner boundaries, such, for obvious reasons, should always be preferred 

for that purpose, and the dimensions of the stone, as herein 

prescribed, (on page 9,) are to be regarded as the minimum 

size; but in localities where it is found practicable to obtain a 

stone of increased dimensions, it is always desirable to do so, 

particularly for TOWNSHIP CORNERS, and especially for 

those on base, meridian, and standard lines; and to such 

purport the deputy surveyor is to be specially instructed. 

Prior to entering upon duty, the deputy surveyor is to make 

himself thoroughly acquainted with the official requirements in regard to field operations in all the details herein set 

forth, and to be apprized of the weighty moral and legal 

responsibilities under which he will act. 

iv 1 

Unfaithfulness in the execution of the public surveys will 

be detected by special examinations of the work to be made 

for that purpose, and, when detected, will immediately subject the delinquent deputy and his bondsmen to be sued by the 

district attorney of the United States, at the instance of the 

proper surveyor general-the institution of which suit will 

act at once as a lien upon any property owned by him or them 

at that time; and such delinquency, moreover, is an offence 

punishable by the statute, with all the pains and penalties of 

perjury, (see act of 1846, quoted on pages 19 and 20 hereof,) 

and will of necessity debar the offending deputy from future 

employment in like capacity. Hence, in the execution of contracts for surveying public lands, there is every incentive to 

fidelity that can address itself either to the moral sense, or to 

motives of private interest. 

By order to the Commissioner: 

JOHN M. MOORE, 

Principal Clerk of Surveys. 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

February 22, 1855 

TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

System of rectangular surveying; range, 

township, and section lines; mode of numbering 

townships and sections. Standard parallels ... Of measurements, chaining, and marking; tally 

pins; process of chaining .................... Marking lines; of trial or random lines ......... Insuperable objects on line; witness points; marking irons.. ................................. Establishing corner boundaries; at what points for 

township, section, quarter section, and meander corners, respectively .................... Manner of establishing corners by means of posts 

Notching corner posts. ........................ Bearing trees; how many at the different corners, 

and how to be marked.. .................... Stones for corner boundaries; minimum size; 

marking same ............................. Mounds around posts, of earth or stone; how to be 

constructed and conditioned ................. Mound memorials-witness mounds to corners. . Double corners only on base and standard parallels. ....................................... Meandering navigable streams, lakes, and deep 

Page. 

1, 2 

2, 3, 4 

4 

5 

5, 6 

6, 7 

8 

8, 9 

9 

10 

11 

12 

ponds ...................................... 12,13,14 

Field books for deputy surveyors.. ............. 15, 16 

Summary of objects and data to be noted in field 

books ...................................... 17, 18 

Swamp lands granted to the State by act of 28th 

September, 1850; their outlines to be specially 

noted by the deputy surveyor.. .............. Noting of settlers’ claims in OREGON, WASHINGTON, and NEW MEXICO.. ............. Affidavits to field notes, and provisions of act of 

8th August, 1846, respecting the same. Pains 

and penalties which attach to false surveys. .. Forms of official oaths, prior to entering upon 

duty, for a deputy and his assistants.. ....... 

18, 19 

19 

20 

20, 21 

458 
Exteriors or township lines; and limitations within which they must close.. .................. 21, 22 

Method of subdividing ....................... .22, 23, 24 I 

Limitations within which section and meander 

lines must close ............................ 

Of Diagram A, showing a body of township exteriors. .................................... 

vi 1 

Of Diagram B, showing the subdivision of a 

Of Diagram C, illustrating the mode of making 

mound, take, and stone corners.. ............ Subdivisions of fractional sections into forty-acre 

lots are to be made by the surveyor general on 

the township plats, and to be designated by special numbers, where they cannot be described as 

quarter-quarters ........................... Township plats to be prepared by the surveyor 

Township plats to be furnished to the General 

Land Office and to the district land offices. Details to be shown thereon, respectively ....... “Descriptive notes,” showing the quality of soil 

and kind of timber found on the surveyed lines 

in each township, and describing each corner 

boundary, are to accompany the plat of the 

same, to be furnished by the surveyor general to 

the district land office ...................... 

The original field books of surveys, bearing the 

written approval of the surveyor general, to be 

retained in his office.. ...................... 

Certified transcripts of field books to be furnished 

to General Land Office.. .................... 

Meander corners to be numbered on township 

plats ...................................... 

Variation of the needle, and mode of ascertaining 

the same .................................. Specimen field notes A and B-the former of the 

exterior lines of a township, and the latter of the 

subdivision of the same-constitute a separate 

series of pages from 1 to 53 inclusive; and they 

are preceded by an INDEX referring the 

township, section, closing, and meander lines, 

as shown on diagram B, to their corresponding 

pages in the notes A and B.. ................ The “General description” of the character of public land in the township follows the subdivisiona1 notes, with a “list of names” of assistants, and 

the mode of authenticating the survey, under 

the provisions of the act of 8th August, 1846, 

and form for certifying copies of field notes to be 

township into sections ...................... 

general in triplicate. ........................ 

24 

24 

25 

25 

25,26 

26 

26 

26 

26 

26 

26 

28 

1-53 

I-_ 

transmitted to the General Land Office ..... .54, 55, 56 

Conclusion. “Table showing the difference of latitude and departure in running 80 chains, at any 

course from 1 to 60 minutes”. ............... 56 

SYSTEM 

OF 

RECTANGULAR SURVEYING. 

1. The public lands of the United States are ordinarily 

surveyed into rectangular tracts, bounded by lines conforming to the cardinal points. 

2. The public lands are laid off, in the first place, into 

bodies of land of six miles square, called Townships, containing as near as may be 23,040 acres. The townships are subdivided into thirty-six tracts called Sections, of a mile square, 

each containing as near as may be, 640 acres. Any number of 

series of contiguous townships, situate north or south of each 

other, constitute a Range. 

The law requires that the lines of the public surveys shall 

be governed by the true meridian, and that the townships 

shall be six miles square,---two things involving in connexion 

a mathematical impossibility-for, strictly to conform to the 

meridian, necessarily throws the township out of square, by 

reason of the convergency of meridians, and hence, by adhering to the true meridian, results the necessity of departing 

from the strict requirements of law, as respects the precise 

area of townships and the subdivisional parts thereof, the 

township assuming something of a trapezoidal form, which 

inequality developes itself more and more as such the higher 

the latitude of the surveys. It is doubtless in view of these 

circumstances that the law provides (see sec. 2 of the act of 

May 18,1796) that the sections of a mile square shall contain 

the quantity of 640 acres, as nearly as may be; and, moreover, 

provides (see sec. 3 of the act of 10th May, 1800) in the 

following words: “And in all cases where the exterior lines of 

the townships, thus to be subdivided into sections or half 

sections, shall exceed, or shall not extend six miles, the excess 

or deficiencey shall be specially noted, and added to or deducted from the western or northern ranges of sections or half 

sections in such township, according as the error may be in 

running the lines from east to west, or from south to north; 

the sections and half sections bounded on the northern and 

western lines of such townships shall be sold as containing 

only the quantity expressed in the returns and plats, respectively, and all others as containing the complete legal quantity.” 

The accompanying diagram, marked A, will serve to illustrate the method of running out the exterior lines of 

townships, as well on the north as on the south side of the base 

line; and the order and mode of subdividing townships will be 

found illustrated in the accompanying specimen field notes, 

conforming with the township diagram B. The method here 

presented is designed to insure as full a compliance with all 

the requirements, meaning, and intent of the surveying laws 

as, it is believed, is practicable. 

The section lines are surveyed from south to north on true 

meridians, and from east to west, in order to throw the ex459 
cesses or deficiencies in measurements on the north and west 

sides of the township, as required by law. 

3. The townships are to bear numbers in respect to the 

base line either north or south of it; and the tiers of 

townships, called “Ranges,” will bear numbers in respect to 

the meridian line according to their relative position to it, 

either on the east or west. 

4. The thirty-six sections into which a township is subdivided are numbered, commencing with number one at the 

northeast angle of the township, and proceeding west to number six, and thence proceeding east to number twelve, and so 

on, alternately, until the number thirty-six in the southeast 

angle. 

5. STANDARD PARALLELS (usually called correction 

lines) are established at stated intervals to provide for or 

counteract the error that otherwise would result from the 

convergency of meridians, and also to arrest error arising 

from inaccuracies in measurements on meridian lines, 

which, however, must ever be studiously avoided. On the 

north of the paincipal base line it is proposed to have these 

standards run at distances of every four townships, or 

twenty-four miles, and on the south of the principal base, at 

distances of every five townships, or thirty miles. 

OF MEASUREMENTS, CHAINING, AND MARKING. 

1. Where uniformity in the variation of the needle is not 

found, the public surveys must be made with an instrument 

operating independently of the magnetic needle. Burt’s i mproved solar compass, or other istrument of equal utility, 

must be used of necessity in such cases; and it is deemed best 

that such instrument should be used under all circumstances. Where the needle can be relied on, however, the 

ordinary compass may be used in subdividing and meandering. 

131 

2. The township lines, and the subdivision lines, will 

usually be measured by a two-pole chain of thirty-three feet 

in length, consisting of fifty links, and each link being seven 

inches and ninety-two hundredths of an inch long. On uniform and level ground, however, the four-pole chain may be 

used. Your measurements will, however, always be represented according to the four-pole chain of one hundred links. 

The deputy surveyor must also have with him a measure of 

the standard chain, wherewith to compare and adjust the 

chain in use, from day to day, with punctuality and carefulness; and must return such standard chain to the Surveyor 

General’s office for examination when his work is completed. 

OF TALLY PINS. 

3. You will use eleven tally pins made of steel, not exceeding fourteen inches in length, weighty enough towards the 

point to make them drop perpendicularly, and having a ring 

at the top, in which is to be fixed a piece of red cloth, or 

something else of conspicuous color, to make them readily 

seen when stuck in the ground. 

PROCESS OF CHAINING. 

4. In measuring lines with a two-pole chain, every five 

chains are called “a tally,” because at that distance the last of 

the ten tally pins with which the forward chainman set out 

will have been stuck. He then cries “tally;” which cry is 

repeated by the other chainman, and each registers the distance by slipping a thimble, button, or ring of leather, or 

something of the kind, on a belt worn for that purpose, or by 

some other convenient method. The hind chainman then 

comes up, and having counted in the presence ofhis fellow the 

tally pins which he has taken up, so that both may be assured 

that none of the pins have been lost, he then takes the forward end of the chain, and proceeds to set the pins. Thus the 

chainmen alternately chain places, each setting the pins that 

he has taken up, so that one is forward in all the odd, and the 

other in all the even tallies. Such procedure, it is believed, 

tends to insure accuracy in measurement, facilitates the recollection of the distances to objects on the line, and renders a 

mis-tally almost impossible. 

LEVELLING THE CHAIN AND 

PLUMBING THE PINS. 

5. The length of every line you run is to be ascertained by 

precise horizontal measurement, as nearly approximating to 

an air line as is pos- 

[41 

sible in practice on the earth’s surface. This all important 

object can only be attained by a rigid adherence to the three 

following observances: 

1. Ever keeping the chain stretched to its utmost degree 

of tension on even ground. 

2. On uneven ground, keeping the chain not only 

stretched as aforesaid, but horizontally levelled. And when 

ascending and descending steep ground, hills, or mountains, the chain will have to be shortened to one-half its 

length, (and sometimes more,) in order accurately to 

obtain the true horizontal measure. 

3. The careful plumbing of the tally pins, so as to attain 

precisely the spot where they should be stuck. The more 

uneven the surface, the greater the caution needed to set 

the pins. 

MARKING LINES. 

6. All lines on which are to be established the legal corner 

boundaries are to be marked after this method, viz: Those 

trees which may intercept your line must have two chops or 

notches cut on each side of them without any other marks 

whatever. These are called “sight trees,” “line trees,” or “station trees.” 

A sufficient number of other trees standing nearest to your 

line, on either side of it, are to be blazed on two sides diagonally, or quartering towards the line, in order to render the line 

conspicuous, and readily to be traced, the blazes to be opposite each other, coinciding in direction with the line where 

the trees stand very near it, and to approach nearer each 

other the further the line passes from the blazed trees. Due 

460 
care must ever be taken to have the lines so well marked as to 

be readily followed. 

ON TRIAL, OR RANDOM LINES, 

the trees are not to be blazed, unless occasionally from indispensable necessity, and then it must be done so guardedly as 

to prevent the possibility of confounding the marks of the 

trial line with the true. But bushes and limbs of trees may be 

lopped, and stakes set on the trial, or random line, at every ten 

chains, to enable the surveyor on his return to follow and 

correct the trial line, and establish therefrom the true line. To 

prevent confusion, the temporary stakes set on the trial, or 

random lines, must bepulled up when the surveyor returns to 

establish the true line. 

[51 

INSUPERABLE OBJECTS ON LINEWITNESS POINTS. 

7. Under circumstances where your course is obstructed 

by impassable obstacles, such as ponds, swamps, marshes, 

lakes, rivers, creeks, &c., you will prolong the line across 

such obstacles by taking the necessary right angle offsets; or, 

if such be inconvenient, by a traverse or trigonometrical 

operation, until you regain the line on the opposite side. And 

in case a north and south, or a true east and west, line is 

regained in advance of any such obstacle, you will prolong 

and mark the line back to the obstacle so passed, and state all 

the particulars in relation thereto in your field book. And at 

the intersection of lines with both margins of impassable 

obstacles, you will establish a Witness Point, (for the purpose 

of perpetuating the intersections therewith,) by setting a 

post, and giving in your field book the course and distance 

therefrom to two trees on opposite sides of the line, each of 

which trees you will mark with a blaze and notch facing the 

post; but on the margins of navigable water courses, or navigable lakes, you will mark the trees with the proper number 

of the fractional section, township, and range. 

The best marking tools adapted to the purpose must be 

provided for marking neatly and distinctly all the letters and 

figures required to be made at corners; and the deputy is to 

have always at hand the necessary implements for keeping 

his marking irons in order; for which purpose a rat-tail file 

and a small whetstone will be found indispensable. 

ESTABLISHING CORNER BOUNDARIES. 

To procure the faithful execution of this portion of a surveyor’s duty is a matter of the utmost importance. After a 

true coursing, and most exact measurements, the corner 

boundary is the consummation of the work, for which all the 

previous pains and expenditures have been incurred. If, 

therefore, the corner boundary be not perpetuated in a 

permanent and workmanlike manner, the great aim of the 

surveying service will not have been attained. A boundary 

corner, in a timbered country, is to be a tree, if one be found at 

the precise spot; and if not, apost is to be planted thereat; and 

461 

the position of the corner post is to be indicated by trees 

adjacent, the angular bearings and distances of which from 

the corner are facts to be ascertained and registered in your 

field book. (See article, “Bearing trees.”) 

[61 

In a region where stone abounds the corner boundary will 

be a small monument of stones along side of a single marked 

stone for a township corner, and a single stone for all other 

corners. 

In a region where timber is not near, and stone not found, 

the corner will be a mound of earth, of prescribed size, 

varying to suit the case. 

The following are the different points for perpetuating 

corners, viz: 

1. For township boundaries, at intervals of every six 

miles. 

2. For section boundaries, at intervals of every mile, or 

80 chains. 

3. For quarter section boundaries, at intervals of every 

half mile, or 40 chains. Exceptions, however, occur on east 

and west lines, as explained hereafter. 

[The half quarter section boundary is not marked in the 

field, but is regarded by the law as a point intermediate 

between the half mile or quarter section corners. See act of 

24th April, 1820, entitled “An act making further provision 

for the sale of the public lands,” which act refers to the act of 

Congress passed on the 11th of February, 1805, entitled “An 

act concerning the mode of surveying the public lands of the 

United States,” for the manner of ascertaining the corners 

and contents of half quarter secti0ns.1~ 

4. MEANDER CORNER POSTS are planted at all 

those points where the township or section lines intersect 

the banks of such rivers, bayous, lakes, or islands, as are 

by law directed to be meandered. 

The courses and distances on meandered navigable 

streams govern the calculations wherefrom are ascertained 

the true areas of the tracts of land (sections, quarter sections, 

&c.) known to the law as fractional, and binding on such 

streams. 

MANNER OF ESTABLISHING CORNERS BY 

MEANS OF POSTS. 

Township, sectional, or mile corners, and quarter sectional 

or half mile corners, will be perpetuated by planting a post at 

the place of the corner, to be formed of the most durable wood 

of the forest at hand. 

The posts must be set in the earth by digging a hole to 

admit them two feet deep, and must be very securely rammed 

in with earth, and also with stone, if any be found at hand. 

The portion of the post which protrudes above the earth must 

be squared off sufficiently smooth to admit of receiving the 

marks thereon, to be made with appropriate marking irons, 

indicating what it stands for. Thus the sides of township 

1. The subdivision of the half-quarter section into quarter-quarter sections is authorized by “An act supplementary to the several laws for the sale of the public lands,” 

approved April 5, 1832. 
[71 

cornerposts should square at least four inches, (the post itself 

being five inches in diameter,) and must protrude two feet at 

least above the ground; the sides of section cornerposts must 

square at least three inches, (the post itself being four inches 

in diameter,) and protrude two feet from the ground; and the 

quarter section cornerposts and meander cornerposts must be 

three inches wide, presenting flattened surfaces, and protruding two feet from the ground. 

Where a township post is a corner common to four 

townships, it is to be set in the earth diagonally, thus: 

N 

WOE 

S 

On each surface of the post is to be marked the number of the 

particular township, and its range, which it faces. Thus, if the 

post be a common boundary to four townships-say one and 

two, south of the base line, of range one, west of the meridian; 

also to townships one and two, south of the base line, of range 

two, west of the meridian, it is to be marked thus: 

From N. to E. {:: 1 s.} from E. to s. { ; s. } 

From N. to W. { 3;l E} from w. to s. { 1” s.} 

These marks are not only to be distinctly but neatly cut into 

the wood, at least the eighth of an inch deep; and to make 

them yet more conspicuous to the eye of the anxious explorer, 

the deputy must apply to all of them a streak of red chalk. 

Section or mile posts, being corners of sections, and where 

such are common to four sections, are to be set diagonally in 

the earth, (in the manner provided for township corner posts;) 

and on each side of the squared surfaces (made smooth, as 

aforesaid, to receive the marks) is to be marked the appropriate number of the particular one of the four sections, respectively, which such side faces; also on one side thereof are to be 

marked the numbers of its township and range; and to make 

such marks yet more conspicuous, in manner aforesaid, a 

streak of red chalk is to be applied. 

In every township, subdivided into thirty-six sections, 

there are twenty-five interior section corners, each of which 

will be common to four sections. 

A quarter section, or half mile post, is to have no other 

mark on it than l/4 S., to indicate what it stands for. 

1 w. 1 w. 

S. 31 

2 w. 

NOTCHING CORNER POSTS. 

Township corner posts, common to four townships, are to be 

notched with six notches on each of the four angles of the 

squared part set to the cardinal points. 

All mile posts on township lines must have as many notches on them, on two opposite angles thereof, as they are miles 

distant from the township corners, respectively. Each of the 

posts at the corners of sections in the interior of a township 

must indicate, by a number of notches on each of its four 

corners directed to the cardinal points, the corresponding 

number of miles that it stands from the outlines of the 

township. The four sides of the post will indicate the number 

of the section they respectively face. Should a tree be found at 

the place of any corner, it will be marked and notched as 

aforesaid, and answer for the corner in lieu of a post, the kind 

of tree and its diameter being given in the field notes. 

BEARING TREES. 

The position of all corner posts, or corner trees, of whatever 

description, that may be established, is to be evidenced in the 

following manner, viz: From such post or tree the courses 

must be taken and the distances measured to two or more 

adjacent trees in opposite directions, as nearly as may be, and 

these are called “bearing trees.” Such are to be distinguished 

by a large smooth blaze, with a notch at its lower end, facing 

the corner, and in the blaze is to be marked the number of the 

range, township, and section; but at quarter section corners 

nothing but l/4 S. need be marked. The letters B. T. (bearing 

tree) are also to be marked upon a smaller blaze directly 

under the large one, and as near the ground as practicable. 

At all township corners, and at all section corners, on range 

or township lines, four bearing trees are to be marked in this 

manner, one in each of the adjoining sections. 

At interior section corners four trees, one to stand within 

each of the four sections to which such corner is common, are 

to be marked in manner aforesaid, if such be found. 

A tree supplying the place of a corner post is to be marked 

in the manner directed for posts; but if such tree should be a 

beech, or other smooth bark tree, the marks may be made on 

the bark, and the tree notched. 

From quarter section and meander corners two bearing 

trees are to be marked, one within each of the adjoining 

sections. 

191 

Where the requisite number of “bearing trees” is not to be 

found at convenient and suitable distances, such as are found 

are to be marked as herein directed; but in all cases of deficiency in the number of bearing tree, (unless, indeed, the 

boundary itself be a tree,) a quadrangular trench, with sides 

of five feet, and with the angles to the cardinal points, must be 

spaded up outside the corner, as a centre, and the earth 

carefully thrown on the inside, so as to form a range of earth, 

which will become covered with grass, and present a small 

square elevation, which in aftertime will serve to mark, 

unmistakably, the spot of the corner. 

CORNER STONES. 

Where it is deemed best to use STONES for boundaries, in 

lieu of posts, you may, at any corner, insert endwise into the 

ground, to the depth of 7 or 8 inches, a stone, the number of 

cubic inches in which shall not be less than the number 

contained in a stone 14 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 3 

inches thick-equal to 504 cubic inches-the edges of which 

must be set north and south, on north and south lines, and 

east and west, on east and west lines; the dimensions of each 

stone to be given in the field notes at the time of establishing 

the corner. The kind of stone should also be stated. 

462 
MARKING CORNER STONES. 

Stones at township corners, common to four townships, 

must have six notches, cut with a pick or chisel on each edge 

or side towards the cardinal points; and where used as section 

corners on the range and township lines, or as section corners 

in the interior of a township, they will also be notched, to 

correspond with the directions given for notching posts similarly situated. 

Posts or stones at township corners on the base and standard lines, and which are common to two townships on the 

north side thereof, will have six notches on each of the west, 

north, and east sides or edges; and where such stones or posts 

are set for corners to two townships south of the base or 

standard, six notches will be cut on each of the west, south, 

and east sides or edges. 

Stones, when used for quarter section corners, will have l/4 

cut on them-on the west side on north and south lines, and 

on the north side on east and west lines. 

[ 10 1 

MOUNDS. 

Whenever bearing trees are not found, mounds of earth, or 

stone, are to be raised around posts on which the corners are 

to be marked in the manner aforesaid. Wherever a mound of 

earth is adopted, the same will present a conical shape; but at 

its base, on the earth’s surface, a quadrangular trench will be 

dug; by the “trench” (here meant) is to be understood a spade 

deep of earth thrown up from the four sides of the line, outside 

the trench, so as to form a continuous elevation along its outer 

edge. In mounds of earth, common to four townships or to four 

sections, they will present the angles of the quadrangular 

trench (diagonally) towards the cardinal points. In mounds, 

common only to two townships or two sections, the sides of the 

quadrangular trench will face the cardinal points. The sides 

of the quadrangular trench at the base of a township mound 

are to be six feet, the height of mound three feet. 

At section, quarter section, and meander corners, the sides 

of the quadrangular trench at base of mounds are to be five 

feet, and the conical height two and a half feet. 

Prior to piling up the earth to construct a mound, there is to 

be dug a spadeful1 or two of earth from the corner boundary 

point, and in the cavity so formed is to be deposited a marked 

stone, or a portion of charcoal, (the quantity whereof is to be 

noted in the field book;) or in lieu of charcoal or marked stone, 

a charred stake is to be driven twelve inches down into such 

centre point: either of those will be a witness for the future, 

and whichever is adopted, the fact is to be noted in the field 

book. 

When mounds are formed of earth, the spot from which the 

earth is taken is called the “pit,” the centre of which ought to 

be, wherever practicable, at a uniform distance and in a 

uniform direction from the centre of the mound. There is to be 

a “pit” on each side of every mound, distant eighteen inches 

outside of the trench. The trench may be expected hereafter 

to be covered by tufts of grass, and thus to indicate the place of 

the mound, when the mound itself may have become obliterated by time or accident. 

At meander corners the “pit” is to be directly on the line, 

eight links further from the water than the mound. Wherever 

necessity is found for deviating from these rules in respect to 

the “pits,” the course and distance to each is to be stated in the 

field books 

Perpetuity in the mound is a great desideratum. In forming 

it with light alluvial soil the surveyor may find it necessary 

to make due allowance for the future settling of the earth, 

and thus making the mound 

more elevated than would be necessary in a more compact 

and tenacious soil, and increasing the base of it. In so doing, 

the relative proportions between the township mound and 

other mounds is to be preserved as nearly as may be. 

The earth is to be pressed down with the shovel during the 

process of piling it up. Mounds are to be covered with sod, 

grass side up, where sod is to be had: but, in forming a mound, 

sod is NEVER to be wrought up with the earth, because sod 

decays, and in the process of decomposing it will cause the 

mound to become porous, and therefore liable to premature 

destruction. 

POSTS IN MOUNDS 

must show above the top of the mound ten or twelve inches, 

and be notched and marked precisely as they would be for the 

same corner without the mound. 

MOUND MEMORIALS. 

Besides the charcoal, marked stone or charred stake, one or 

the other of which must be lodged in the earth at the point of 

the corner, the deputy surveyor is recommended to plant 

midway between each pit and the trench, seeds of some tree, 

(those of fruit trees adapted to the climate being always to be 

preferred,) so that, in course of time, should such take root, a 

small clump of trees may possibly hereafter note the place of 

the corner. The facts of planting such seed, and the kind 

thereof, are matters to be truthfully noted in the field book. 

WITNESS MOUNDS TO TOWNSHIP OR SECTION 

CORNERS. 

If a township or section corner, in a situation here bearing 

or witness trees are not found within a reasonable distance 

therefrom, shall fall within a ravine, or in any other situation 

where the nature of the ground, or the circumstances of its 

locality, shall be such as may prevent, or prove unfavorable 

to, the erection of a mound, you will perpetuate such corner 

by selecting in the immediate vicinity thereof a suitable plot 

of ground as a site for a bearing or witness mound, and erect 

thereon a mound of earth in the same manner and conditioned in every respect, with charcoal, stone, or charred 

stake deposited beneath, as before directed; and measure and 

state in your field book the distance and course from the 

position of the true corner of the bearing or witness mound so 

placed and erected. 

463 
DOUBLE CORNERS. 

Such corners are to be nowhere except on the base and 

standard lines, whereon are to appear both the corners which 

mark the intersections of the lines which close thereon, and 

those from which the surveys start on the north. On these 

lines, and at the time of running the same, the township, 

section, and quarter section corners are to be planted, and 

each of these is a corner commmon to two, (whether township 

or section corners,) on the north side of the line, and must be 

so marked. 

The corners which are established on the standard parallel, at the time of running it, are to be known as “standard 

corners,” and, in addition to all the ordinary marks, (as herein prescribed,) they will be marked with the letters s. C. 

Closing corners will be marked with the letters C. C. in 

addition to other marks. 

The standard parallels are designed to be run in advance of 

the contiguous surveys on the south of them, but circumstances may exist which will impede or temporarily delay the 

due extension of the standard; and when, from uncontrollable 

causes, the contiguous townships must be surveyed in advance of the time of extending the standard, in any such 

event it will become the duty of the deputy who shall afterwards survey any such standard to plant thereon the double 

set of corners, to wit, the standard corners, to be marked S. C., 

and the closing ones which are to be marked C. C.; and to 

make such measurements as may be necessary to connect the 

closing corners and complete the unfinished meridianal lines 

of such contiguous and prior surveys, on the principles herein 

set forth, under the different heads of “exterior or township 

lines,” and of “diagram B.” 

You will recollect that the corners, (whether township or 

section corners,) which are common to two, (two townships or 

two sections,) are not to be planted diagonally like those 

which are common to four, but with the flat sides facing the 

cardinal points, and on which the marks and notches are 

made as usual. This, it will be perceived, will serve yet more 

fully to distinguish the standard parallels from all other 

lines. 

THE MEANDERING OF NAVIGABLE STREAMS. 

1. Standing with the face looking down stream, the bank 

on the Zef? hand is termed the “left bank,” and that on the 

right hand the “right bank.” These terms are to be universally used to distinguish the two banks of a river or stream. 

[ 13 1 

2. Both banks of navigable rivers are to be meandered by 

taking the courses and distances of their sinuosities, and the 

same are to be entered in the field book. 

At those points where either the township or section lines 

intersect the banks of a navigable stream, POSTS, or, where 

necessary, MOUNDS of earth or stone, are to be established 

at the time of running these lines. These are called “meander 

corners;” and in meandering you are to commence at one of 

those corners on the township line, coursing the banks, and 

measuring the distance of each course from your commencing 

corner to the next “meander corner,” upon the same or 

another boundary of the same township, carefully noting 

your intersection with all intermediate meander corners. By 

the same method you are to meander the opposite bank of the 

same river. 

The crossing distance between the MEANDER CORNERS 

on same line is to be ascertained by triangulation, in order 

that the river may be protracted with entire accuracy. The 

particulars to be given in the field notes. 

3. You are also to meander, in manner aforesaid, all lakes 

and deep ponds of the area of twenty-five acres and upwards; 

also navigable bayous; shallow ponds, readily to be drained, 

or likely to dry up, are not to be meandered. 

You will notice all streams of water falling into the river, 

lake, or bayou you are surveying, stating the width of the 

same at their mouth; also all springs, noting the size thereof 

and depth, and whether the water be pure or mineral; also the 

head and mouth of all bayous; and all islands, rapids, and 

bars are to be noticed, with intersections to their upper and 

lower points to establish their exact situation. You will also 

note the elevation of the banks of rivers and streams, the 

heights of falls and cascades, and the length of rapids. 

4. The precise relative position of islands, in a township 

made fractional by the river in which the same are situated, 

is to be determined trigonometrically-sighting to a flag or 

other fixed object on the island, from a special and carefully 

measured base line, connected with the surveyed lines, on or 

near the river bank, you are to form connexion between the 

meander corners on the river to points corresponding thereto, 

in direct line, on the bank of the island, and there establish 

the proper meander corners, and calculate the distance 

across. 

5. In meandering lakes, ponds, or bayous, you are to commence at a meander corner upon the township line, and 

proceed as above directed for the banks of a navigable stream. 

But where a lake, pond, or bayou 

lies entirely within the township boundaries, you will commence at a meander corner established in subdividing, and 

from thence take the courses and distances of the entire 

margin of the same, noting the intersection with all the 

meander corners previously established thereon. 

6. To meander a pond lying entirely within the boundaries 

of a section, you will run and measure two lines thereunto 

from the nearest section or quarter section corner on opposite 

sides of such pond, giving the courses of such lines. At each of 

the points where such lines shall intersect the margin of such 

pond, you will establish a witness point, by fixing a post in the 

ground, and taking bearings to any adjacent trees, or, if 

necessary, raising a mound. 

The relative position of these points being thus definitely 

fixed in the section, the meandering will commence at one of 

them, and be continued to the other, noting the intersection, 

and thence to the beginning. The proceedings are to be fully 

entered in the field book. 

7. In taking the connexion of an island with the main land, 

464 
when there is no meander corner in line, opposite thereto, to 

sight from, you will measure a special base from the meander 

corner nearest to such island, and from such base you will 

triangulate to some fixed point on the shore of the island, 

ascertain the distance across, and there establish a special 

meander corner, wherefrom you will commence to meander 

the island. 

The field notes of meanders will be set forth in the body of 

the field book according to the dates when the work is performed, as illustrated in the specimen notes annexed. They 

are to state and describe particularly the meander corner 

from which they commenced, each one with which they close, 

and are to exhibit the meanders of each fractional section 

separately; following, and composing a part of such notes, 

will be given a description of the land, timber, depth of inundation to which the bottom is subject, and the banks, current, 

and bottom of the stream or body of water you are meandering. 

9. No blazes or marks of any description are to be made on 

the lines meandered between the established corners, but the 

utmost care must be taken to pass no object of topography, or 

change therein, without giving a particular description 

thereof in its proper place in your meander notes. 

[ 15 1 

OF FIELD BOOKS. 

The FIELD NOTES afford the elements from which the 

plats and calculations in relation to the public surveys are 

made. They are the source wherefrom the description and 

evidence of locations and boundaries are officially delineated 

and set forth. They therefore must be a faithful, distinct and 

minute record of every thing officially done and observed by 

the surveyor and his assistants, pursuant to instructions, in 

relation to running, measuring, and marking lines, establishing boundary corners, &c.; and present, as far as possible, 

a full and complete topographical description of the country 

surveyed, as to every matter of useful information, or likely 

to gratify public curiosity. 

There will be sundry separate and distinct field books of 

surveys, as follows: 

Field notes of the MERIDIAN and BASE lines, showing 

the establishment of the township, section or mile, and quarter section or half mile, boundary corners thereon; with the 

crossings of streams, ravines, hills, and mountains; character 

of soil, timber, minerals, &c. 

Field notes of the “STANDARD PARALLELS, or correction lines,” will show the establishment of the township, 

section, and quarter section corners, besides exhibiting the 

topography of the country on line, as required on the base and 

meridian lines. 

Field notes of the EXTERIOR lines of TOWNSHIPS, showing the establishment of corners on lines, and the topography, as aforesaid. 

Field notes of the SUBDIVISIONS OF TOWNSHIPS, into 

sections and quarter sections. 

The field notes must in all cases be taken precisely in the 

order in which the work is done on the ground, and the date of 

each day’s work must follow immediately after the notes 

thereof. The variation of the needle must always occupy a 

separate line preceding the notes of measurements on line. 

The exhibition of every mile of surveying, whether on 

township or subdivisional lines, must be complete in itself, 

and be separated by a black line drawn across the paper. 

The description of the surface, soil, minerals, timber, 

undergrowth, &c., on each mile of line is to follow the notes of 

survey of such line, and not be mixed up with them. 

No abbreviations of words are allowable, except of such 

words as are constantly occurring, such as “sec.” for “section;” 

“in. diam,” for 

“inches diameter;” “chs.” for “chains;” “lks.” for “links;” 

“dist.” for “distant,” &c. Proper names must never be abbreviated, however often their recurrence. 

The nature of the subject-matter of the field book is to form 

its title page, showing the State or Territory where such 

survey lies, by whom surveyed, and the dates of commencement and completion of the work. The second page is to 

contain the names and duties of assistants. Whenever a new 

assistant is employed, or the duties of any one of them are 

changed, such facts, with the reasons therefor, are to be 

stated in an appropriate entry immediately preceding the 

notes taken under such changed arrangements. With the 

notes of the exterior lines of townships, the deputy is to submit a plat of the lines run, on a scale of two inches to the mile, 

on which are to be noted all the objects of topography on line 

necessary to illustrate the notes, viz: the distances on line at 

the crossings of streams, so far as such can be noted on the 

paper, and the direction of each by an arrow-head pointing 

down stream; also the intersection of line by prairies, 

marshes, swamps, ravines, ponds, lakes, hills, mountains, 

and all other matters indicated by the notes, to the fullest 

extent practicable. 

With the instructions for making subdivisional surveys of 

townships into sections, the deputy will be furnished by the 

Surveyor General with a diagram of the exterior lines of the 

townships to be subdivided, (on the above named scale,) upon 

which are carefully to be laid down the measurements of each 

of the section lines on such boundaries whereon he is to close, 

the magnetic variation of each mile, and the particular description of each corner. P. in M. signifies post in mound. And 

on such diagram the deputy who subdivides will make 

appropriate sketches of the various objects of topography as 

they occur on his lines, so as to exhibit not only the points on 

line at which the same occur, but also the direction and 

position of each between the lines, or within each section, so 

that every object of topography may be properly completed or 

connected in the showing. 

These notes must be distinctly written out, in language 

precise and clear, and their figures, letters, words, and meaning are always to be unmistakable. No leaf is to be cut or 

mutilated, and none to be taken out, whereby suspicion 

might be created that the missing leaf contained matter 

which the deputy believed it to be his interest to conceal. 

465 
[ 17 1 

SUMMARY OF OBJECTS AND DATA REQUIRED 

TO BE NOTED. 

1. The precise length of every line run, noting all necessary 

offsets therefrom, with the reason and mode thereof. 

2. The kind and diameter of all “bearing trees,” with the 

course and distance of the same from their respective corners; 

and the precise relative position of WITNESS CORNERS to 

the true corners. 

3. The kind of materials (earth or stone) of which 

MOUNDS are constructed-the fact of their being conditioned according to instructions-with the course and distance of the ‘kits,” from the centre of the mound, where 

necessity exists for deviating from the general rule. 

4. Trees on line. The name, diameter, and distance on line 

to all trees which it intersects. 

5. Intersections by line of land objects. The distance at 

which the line first intersects and then leaves every settler’s 

claim and improvement; prairie; river, creek, or other “bottom;” or swamp, marsh, grove, and wind fall, with the course 

of the same at both points of intersection; also the distances at 

which you begin to ascend, arrive at the top, begin to descend, 

and reach the foot of all remarkable hills and ridges, with 

their courses, and estimated height, in feet, above the level 

land of the surrounding country, or above the bottom lands, 

ravines, or waters near which they are situated. 

6. Intersections by line of water objects. All rivers, creeks, 

and smaller streams of water which the line crosses; the 

distance on line at the points of intersection, and their widths 

on line. In cases of navigable streams, their width will be 

ascertained between the meander corners, as set forth under 

the proper head. 

7. The land‘s surface-whether level, rolling, broken, or 

hilly. 

8. The soil-whether first, second, or third rate. 

9. Timber-the several kinds of timber and undergrowth, 

in the order in which they predominate. 

10. Bottom lands-to be described as wet or dry, and if 

subject to inundation, state to what depth. 

11. Springs of water-whether fresh, saline, or mineral, 

with the course of the stream flowing from them. 

12. Lakes and ponds-describing their banks and giving 

their height, and also the depth of water, and whether it be 

pure or stagnant. 

13. Improvements. Towns and villages; Indian towns and 

wigwams; houses or cabins; fields, or other improvements; 

sugar tree groves, sugar camps, mill seats, forges, and factories. 

[ 18 1 

14. Coal banks or beds; peat or turf grounds; minerals and 

ores; with particular description of the same as to quality and 

extent, and all diggings therefor; also salt springs and licks. 

All reliable information you can obtain respecting these objects, whether they be on your immediate line or not, is to 

appear in the general description to be given at the end of the 

notes. 

15. Roads and trails, with their directions, whence and 

whither. 

16. Rapids, cataracts, cascades, or falls of water, with the 

height of their fall in feet. 

17. Precipices, caves, sink-holes, ravines, stone quarries, 

ledges of rocks, with the kind of stone they afford. 

18. Natural curiosities, interesting fossils, petrifactions, 

organic remains, &c.; also all ancient works of art, such as 

mounds, fortifications, embankments, ditches, or objects of 

like nature. 

19. The variation of the needle must be noted at all points 

or places on the lines where there is found any material 

change of variation, and the position of such points must be 

perfectly identified in the notes. 

20. Besides the ordinary notes taken on line, (and which 

must always be written down on the spot, leaving nothing to 

be supplied by memory,) the deputy will subjoin, at the conclusion of his book, such further description or information 

touching any matter or thing connected with the township (or 

other survey) which he may be able to afford, and may deem 

useful or necessary to be known-with a general description 

of the township in the aggregate, as respects the face of the 

country, its soil and geological features, timber, minerals, 

waters, &c. 

SWAMP LANDS. 

By the act of Congress approved September 28, 1850, 

swamp and overflowed lands “unfit for cultivation” are 

granted to the State in which they are situated. In order 

clearly to define the quantity and locality of such lands, the 

field notes of surveys, in addition to the other objects of 

topography required to be noted, are to indicate the points at 

which you enter all lands which are evidently subject to such 

grant, and to show the distinctive character of the land so 

noted; whether it is a swamp or marsh, or otherwise subject to 

inundation to an extent that, without artificial means, would 

render it “unfit for cultivation.” The depth of inundation is to 

be stated, as determined from indications on the trees where 

timber exists; and its frequency is to be set forth as accurately 

as may be, either from your own knowledge of the general 

[ 19 1 

character of the stream which overflows, or from reliable 

information to be obtained from others. The words “unfit for 

cultivation,” are to be employed in addition to the usual 

phraseology in regard to entering or leaving such swamps, 

marshy, or overflowed lands. It may be that sometimes the 

margin of bottom, swamp, or marsh, in which such uncultivable land exists, is not identical with the margin of the body 

of land “unfit for cultivation;’’ and in such cases a separate 

entry must be made for each opposite the marginal distance 

at which they respectively occur. 

But in cases where lands are overflowed by artificial 

means, (say by dams for milling, logging, or for other purposes,) you are not officially to regard such overflow, but will 

continue your lines across the same without setting meander 

posts, stating particularly in the notes the depth of the water, 

and how the overflow was caused. 

466 
SPECIAL INSTRUCTION RESPECTING THE 

NOTING OF SETTLERS’ CLAIMS IN OREGON, 

WASHINGTON, AND NEW MEXICO. 

The law requires that such claims should be laid down 

temporarily on the township plats; in order to do which, it is 

indispensably necessary to obtain, to some extent, connexions of these claims with the lines of survey. Under the head 

of “intersection by line of land objects,” the deputy is required 

to note the points in line whereat it may be intersected by 

such claims; but, in addition thereto, there must be obtained 

at least one angle of each claim, with its course and distance 

either from the point of intersection, or from an established 

corner boundary, so that its connexion with the regular survey will be legally determined. If the settler’s dwelling or 

barn is visible from line, the bearings thereof should be 

carefully taken from two points noted on line, and set forth in 

the field notes. 

AFFIDAVITS TO FIELD NOTES. 

At the close of the notes and the general description is to 

follow an affidavit, a form for which is given; and to enable 

the deputy surveyor fully to understand and appreciate the 

responsibility under which he is acting, his attention is invited to the provisions of the second section of the act of 

Congress, approved August 8th, 1846, entitled “An act to 

equalize the compensation of the surveyors general of the 

public lands of the United States, and for other purposes,” 

and which is as follows: 

“Sec. 2. That the surveyors general of the public lands of 

the United 

[ 20 1 

States, in addition to the oath now authorized by law to be 

administered to deputies on their appointment to office, shall 

require each of their deputies, on the return of his surveys, to 

take and subscribe an oath or affirmation that those surveys 

have been faithfully and correctly executed according to law 

and the instructions of the surveyor general; and on satisfactory evidence being presented to any court of competent jurisdiction, that such surveys, or any part thereof, had not been 

thus executed, the deputy making such false oath or affirmation shall be deemed guilty of perjury, and shall suffer all the 

pains and penalties attached to that offence; and the district 

attorney of the United States for the time being, in whose 

district any such false, erroneous, or fraudulent surveys shall 

have been executed, shall, upon the application of the proper 

surveyor general, immediately institute suit upon the bond 

of such deputy; and the institution of such suit shall act as a 

lien upon any property owned or held by such deputy, or his 

sureties, at the time such suit was instituted.” 

Following the “general description” of the township is to be 

“A list of the names of the individuals employed to assist in 

running, measuring and marking the lines and corners described in the foregoing field notes of township No. -of 

the BASE LINE of range No. of the ~ MERIDIAN, showing the respective capacities in which they acted.” 

FORM OF OFFICIAL OATHS TO BE TAKEN PRIOR 

TO ENTERING UPON DUTY. 

For a deputy surveyor. 

I, A. B., having been appointed a deputy urveyor of the 

lands of the United States in -, do solemnly swear (or 

affirm) that I will well and faithfully, and to the best of my 

skill and ability, execute the duties confided to me pursuant 

to a contract with C. D., surveyor general of public lands in 

-, bearing date the - day of -, 18 , 

according to the laws of the United States and the instructions received from the said surveyor general. 

(To be sworn and subscribed before a justice of the peace, or 

other officer authorized to administer oaths.) 

For chainman. 

I, E. F., do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will faithfully 

execute the duties of chain carrier; that I will lee1 the chain 

upon uneven ground, and plumb the tally pins, whether by 

sticking or dropping the 

same; that I will report the true distance to all notable objects, and the true length of all lines that I assist in measuring, to the best of my skill and ability. 

(To be sworn and subscribed as above.) 

For flagman or axeman. 

I, G. H., do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will well and 

truly perform the duties of -, according to instructions 

given me, and to the best of my skill and ability. 

(To be sworn and subscribed as above.) 

EXTERIORS OR TOWNSHIP LINES. 

The principal meridian, the base line, and the standard 

parallels having been first run, measured, and marked, and 

the corner boundaries thereon established, according to instructions, the process of running, measuring, and marking 

the exterior lines of townships will be as follows: 

Townships situated NORTH of the base line, and WEST of 

the principal meridian. 

Commence at No. 1, (see figures on diagram A,) being the 

southwest corner of T. 1 N-.R. 1 W., as established on the 

base line; thence north, on a true meridian line, four hundred 

and eighty chains, establishing the section and quarter section corners thereon, as per instructions, to No. 2, whereat 

establish the corner of Tps. 1 and 2 N-.Rs. 1 and 2 W.; thence 

east, on a random or trial line, setting temporary section and 

quarter section stakes, to No. 3, where measure and note the 

distance at which the line intersects the eastern boundary, 

north or south of the true or established corner. Run and 

measure westward, on the true line, (taking care to note all 

the land and water crossings, &c., as per instructions,) to No. 

467 
4, which is identical with No. 2, establishing the section and 

quarter section PERMANENT CORNERS on said line. 

Should it happen, however, that such random line falls short, 

or overruns in length, or intersects the eastern boundary of 

the township at more than three chains and fifty links distance from the true corner thereon, as compared with the 

corresponding boundary on the south, (either of which would 

indicate an important error in the surveying,) the lines must 

be retraced, even if found necessary to remeasure the meridianal 

boundaries of the township, (especially the western boundary,) so as to discover and correct the error; in doing which, 

the true corners must be established and marked, and the 

false ones destroyed and obliterated, to prevent confusion in 

future; and all the facts must be distinctly set forth in the 

notes. Thence proceed in a similar manner from No. 4 to No. 

5, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 6 to No. 7, and so on to No. 10, the 

southwest corner of T. 4 N-.R. 1 W. Thence north, still on a 

true meridian line, establishing the mile and half-mile corners, until reaching the STANDARD PARALLEL or correction line; throwing the excess over, or deficiency under, four 

hundred and eighty chains, on the last half-mile, according to 

law, and at the intersection establishing the “CLOSING 

CORNER,” the distance of which from the standard corner 

must be measured and noted as required by the instructions. 

But should it ever so happen that some impassable barrier 

will have prevented or delayed the extension of the standard 

parallel along and above the field of present survey, then the 

deputy will plant, in place, the corner for the township, subject to correction thereafter, should such parallel be extended. 

NORTH of the base line, and EAST of the 

principal meridian. 

Commence at No. 1, being the southeast corner of T. 1 

N-.R. 1 E., and proceed as with townships situated “north 

and west,” except that the random or trial lines will be run 

and measured west, and the true lines east, throwing the 

excess over or deficiency under four hundred and eighty 

chains on the west end of the line, as required by law; wherefore the surveyor will commence his measurement with the 

length of the deficient or excessive half section boundary on 

the west of the township, and thus the remaining measurements will all be euen miles and half-miles. 

METHOD OF SUBDIVIDING. 

1. The first mile, both of the south and east boundaries of 

each township you are required to subdivide, is to be carefully 

traced and measured before you enter upon the subdivision 

thereof. This will enable you to observe any change that may 

have taken place in the magnetic variation, as it existed at 

the time of running the township lines, and will also enable 

you to compare your chaining with that upon the township 

lines. 

2. Any discrepancy, arising either from a change in the 

magnetic variation or a difference in measurement, is to be 

carefully noted in the field notes. 

[ 23 1 

3. After adjusting your compass to a variation which you 

have thus found will retrace the eastern boundary of the 

township, you will commence at the corner to sections 35 and 

36, on the south boundary, and run a line due north, forty 

chains, to the quarter section corner which you are to establish between sections 35 and 36; continuing due north forth 

chains further, you will establish the corner to sections 25, 

26,35 and 36. 

4. From the section corner last named, run a random line, 

without blazing, due east, for corner of sections 25 and 36, in 

east boundary, and at forty chains from the starting point set 

a post for temporary quarter section corner. If you intersect 

exactly at the corner, you will blaze your random line back, 

and establish it as the true line; but if your random line 

intersects the said east boundary, either north or south of 

said corner, you will measure the distance of such intersection, from whih you will calculate a course that will run a true 

line back to the corner from which your random started. You 

will establish the permanent quarter section corner at a point 

equidistant from the two terminations of the true line. 

5. From the corner of sections 25,26,35,36, run due north 

between sections 25 and 26, setting the quarter section post, 

as before, at forty chains, and at eighty chains establishing 

the corner of sections 23, 24,25, 26. Then run a random due 

east for the corner of sections 24 and 25 in east boundary; 

setting temporary quarter section post at forty chains; correcting back, and establishing permanent quarter section 

corner at the equidistant point on the true line, in the manner 

directed on the line between sections 25 and 36. 

6. In this manner you will proceed with the survey of each 

successive section in the first tier, until you arrive at the 

north boundary of the township, which you will reach in 

running up a random line between sections 1 and 2. If this 

random line should not intersect at the corner established for 

sections 1,2,35 and 36, upon the township line, you will note 

the distance that you fall east or west of the same, from which 

distance you will calculate a course that will run a true line 

south to the corner from which your random started. Where 

the closing corner is on the base or standard line, a deviation 

from the general rule is explained under the head of “Diagram B.” 

7. The first tier of sections being thus laid out and surveyed, you will return to the south boundary of the township, 

and from the corner of sections 34 and 35 commence and 

survey the second tier of sections in the same manner that 

you pursued in the survey of the first, closing at the section 

corners on the first tier. 

[ 24 1 

8. In like manner proceed with the survey of each successive tier of sections, until you arrive at the fifth tier; and from 

each section corner which you establish upon this tier, you 

are to run random lines to the corresponding corners established upon the range line forming the western boundary of 

468 
the township; setting, as you proceed, each temporary quarter 

section post at forty chains from the interior section corner, so 

as to throw the excess or deficiency of measurement on the 

extreme tier of quarter sections contiguous to the township 

boundary; and, on returning, establish the true line, and 

establish thereon the permanent quarter section corner. 

QUARTER SECTION CORNERS, both upon north and 

south and upon east and west lines, are to be established at a 

point equidistant from the corresponding section corners, 

except upon the lines closing on the north and west boundaries of the township, and in those situations the quarter 

section corners will always be established at precisely forty 

chains to the north or west (as the case may be) of the respective section corners from which those lines respectively start, 

by which procedure the excess or deficiency in the measurements will be thrown, according to law, on the extreme tier of 

quarter sections. 

Every north and south section line, except those terminating in the north boundary of the township, is to be eighty 

chains in length. The east and west section lines, except those 

terminating on the west boundary of the township, are to be 

within one hundred links of eighty chains in length; and the 

north and south boundaries of any one section, except in the 

extreme western tier, are to be within one hundred links of 

equal length. The meanders within each fractional section, or 

between any two meander posts, or of a pond or island in the 

interior of a section, must close within one chain and fifty 

links. 

marked A; and the mode and order of subdividing a township 

into sections and quarter sections are illustrated by the specimen field notes marked B. The attention of the deputy is 

particularly directed to these specimens, as indicating not 

only the method in which his work is to be conducted, buy also 

the order, manner, language, &c., in which his field notes are 

required to be returned to the Surveyor General’s office; and 

such specimens are to be deemed part of these instructions, 

and any departure from their details, without special authority, in cases where the circumstances are analogous in practice, will be regarded as a violation of his contract and oath. 

The subdivisions of fractional sections into forty acre lots, 

(as near as may be,) are to be so laid down on the official 

township plat in red lines, as to admit of giving to each a 

specific designation, if possible, according to its relative position in the fractional section, as per examples afforded by 

diagram B, as well as by a number, in all cases where the lot 

cannot properly be designated as a quarter-quarter. Those 

fractional subdivision lots which are not susceptible of being 

described according to relative local position, are to be numbered in regular series; No. 1 being (wherever practicable, 

and as a general rule) either the northeastern or the most 

easterly fractional lot, and proceeding from east to west and 

from west to east, alternately, to the end of the series; but 

such general rule is departed from under circumstances 

given as examples in fractional sections 4,7,19 and 30, where 

No. 1 is the interior lot of the northern and western tiers of 

the quarter sections to which there is a corresponding No. 2 

given to the exterior lot, and the series of numDIAGRAM A illustrates the mode of laying off township 

exteriors north of the BASE line and EAST and WEST of the 

principal MERIDIAN, whether between the base and first 

standard, or between any two standards; and the same general principles will equally apply to townships south of the base 

line and east and west of the meridian, and between any two 

standards south, where the distances between the base and 

first standard, and between the standards themselves, are 

five townships or thirty miles. 

DIAGRAM B indicates the mode of laying off a 

TOWNSHIP into sections and quarter sections, and the 

accompanying set of field notes (marked B) critically illustrate the mode and order of conducting the survery under 

every variety of circumstance shown by the topography on 

the diagram. In townships lying south of and contiguous to 

the base or to any standard parallel, the lines between the 

northern tier of sections will be run north, and be made to 

close as true lines; quarter section corners will be set at forty 

chains, and section corners established at the intersection of 

such section lines with the base or standard, (as the case may 

be,) and the distance is to be measured and entered in the 

field book to the nearest corner on such standard or base. 

DIAGRAM C illustrates the mode of making mound, stake, 

or stone corner boundaries for townships, sections, and quarter sections. 

The mode and order of surveying the exterior boundaries of 

a township are illustrated by the specimen field notes 

bers is in continuation of the latter. The lots in the extreme 

northern and western tiers of quarter sections, containing 

either more or less than the regular quantity, are always to 

be numbered as per example. Interior lots in such extreme 

tiers are to be twenty chains wide, and the excess or deficiency 

of measurement is always to be thrown on the exterior lots; 

elsewhere, the assumed subdivisional corner will always be a 

point equidistant from the established corners. 

The official township plat to be returned to the General 

Land Office is to show on its face, on the right hand margin, 

the meanders of navigable streams, islands, and lakes. Such 

details are wanted in the adjustment of the surveying 

accounts, but may be omitted in the copy of the township plat 

to be furnished to the district land office by the surveyor 

general. A suitable margin for binding is to be preserved on 

the left hand side of each plat. Each plat is to be certified, with 

table annexed, according to the forms subjoined to “diagram 

B,” and is to show the areas of public land, of private surveys, 

and of water, with the aggregate area as shown on the diagram. 

Each township plat is to be prepared in triplicate: one for 

the General Land Office, one for the district office, and the 

third to be retained as the record in the office of the Surveyor 

General. 

The original field books, each bearing the written approval 

of the Surveyor General, are to be substantially bound into 

volumes of suitable size, and retained in the surveyor general’s office, and certified transcripts of such field books (to be of 

469 
foolscap size) are to be prepared and forwarded, from time to 

time, to the General Land Office. 

With the copy of each township plat furnished to a district 

land office, the surveyor general is required by law to furnish 

descriptive notes as to the character and quality of the soil and 

timber found on and in the vicinity of each surveyed line, and 

giving a description of each corner boundary. 

Printed blank forms for such notes will be furnished by the 

General Land Office. The forms provide eighteen spaces for 

meander corners, which, in most cases, will be sufficient; but 

when the number shall exceed eighteen, the residue will 

have to be inserted on the face of the township plat, to be 

furnished to the register of the district land office. There is 

shown a series of meander corners on diagram B, viz: from 

No. 1 to No. 22, on the river and islands; 23 to 28 being on 

Island lake; 29 and 30 on Clear lake; and 31 and 32 on lake in 

section 26. 

There is also a distinct series of numbers, 1 to 7, to designate corners D. Reed's private survey, and to fractional sections, made such thereby; and the same series is continued 

from 8 to 14 inclusive, to 

designate corners to S. William's private survey, and to fractional sections made such thereby. These are numberings on 

the plat merely for the purpose of ready reference to the 

descriptions of such corners to be furnished to the registers. 

The letters on "diagram B," at the "corners" on the 

township boundaries, are referred to in the descriptive notes 

to be furnished to the district land office, but are not required 

to be inserted on the official plat to be returned to the General 

Land Office. 

The following chapter, on the subject of the variation of the 

magnetic needle, is extracted from the revised edition of the 

work on surveying by CHARLES DAVIES, L. L. D., a graduate of the Military Academy at West Point. The work itself 

will be a valuable acquisition to the deputy surveyor; and his 

attention is particularly invited to the following chapter, 

which sets forth the modes by which the variation may be 

ascertained. 

[ 28 1 

VARIATION OF THE NEEDLE. 

1. The angle which the magnetic meridian makes with the 

true meridian, at any place on the surface of the earth, is 

called the variation of the needle at that place, and is east or 

west, according as the north end of the needle lies on the east 

or west side of the true meridian. 

2. The variation is different at different places, and even 

at the same place it does not remain constant for any length of 

time. The variation is ascertained by comparing the magnetic with the true meridian. 

3. If we suppose a line to be traced through those points on 

the surface of the earth, where the needle points directly 

north, such a line is called the line of no variation. At all 

places lying on the east of this line, the variation of the needle 

is west; at all places lying on the west of it, the variation is 

east. 

4. The public is much indebted to Professor Loomis for the 

valuable results of many observations and much scientific 

research on the dip ad variation of the needle, contained in 

the 39th and 42d volumes of Siliman's Journal. 

The variation at each place was ascertained for the year 

1840; and by a comparison of previous observations and the 

application of known formulas, the annual motion, or change 

in variation, at each place, was also ascertained, and both are 

contained in the tables which follow. 

5. If the annual motion was correctly found, and continues 

uniform, the variation at any subsequent period can be ascertained by simply multiplying the annual motion by the number of years, and adding the product, in the algebraic sense, to 

the variation in 1840. It will be observed that all variations 

west are designated by the plus sign; and all variations east, 

by the minus sign. The annual motions being all west, have 

all the plus sign. 

6. Our first object will be to mark the line, as it was in 

1840, of no uariation. For this purpose we shall make a table 

of places lying near this line. 

PLACES NEAR THE LINE OF NO VARIATION. 

An. 

Place. Latitude. Longitude. Variation. Motion. 

A Point.. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4053' 8073' O"00' +4'.4 

Cleveland, Ohio.. . .. . 41 31 81 45 -0 19 4 .4 

Detroit, Mich . . . . . . . . 42 24 82 58 -1 56 4 

Mackinaw . . .. . . . . . . . 45 51 84 41 - 2 08 3 .9 

Marietta, Ohio.. . . , . . 39 0 81 28 -1 24 4 .3 

Charlottesville, Va . . . 39 02 78 30 to 19 3 .I 

Charleston, S. C.. . . .. 32 42 80 04 - 2 44 1 .3 

[ 29 1 

At the point whose latitude is 40" 53', longitude 80" 13', the 

variation of the needle was nothing in the year 1840, and the 

direction of the line of no variation, traced north, was N. 24" 

35' west. The line of no variation, prolonged, passed a little to 

the east at Cleveland, in Ohio-the variation there being 19 

minutes east. Detroit lay still further to the west of this line, 

the variation there being 1" 56' east; and Mackinaw still 

further to the west, as the variation at that place was 2" 08' 

east. 

The course of the line of no variation, prolonged southerly, 

was S. 24" 35' E. Marietta, Ohio, was west of this line-the 

variation there being 1" 24' east. Charlottesville, in Virginia, 

was a little to the east of it-the variation there being 19' 

west; whilst Charleston, in South Carolina, was on the 

west-the variation there being 2" 44' east. 

From these results, it will be easy to see about where the 

line of no variation istraced in our own country. 

7. We shall give two additional tables: 

470 
PLACES WHERE THE VARIATION WAS WEST. 

An. 

Places. Latitude. Longitude. Variation. Motion. 

EASTERN ELONGATIONS. 

~ 

Angle of Maine ...... 48"OO' 67"37' + 19"30' + 8O.8 

Waterville, Me. 44 27 69 32 12 36 5 .7 

Montreal 45 31 73 35 10 18 5 .7 

Keesville, N. Y.. 44 28 73 32 8 51 5 .3 

Burlington, Vt.. ...... 44 27 73 10 9 27 5 .3 

Hanover, N. H... 43 42 72 14 9 20 5 .2 

Cambridge, Mass. 42 22 71 08 9 12 5 

Hartford, Ct.. 41 46 72 41 6 58 5 

Newport, R. I 41 28 71 21 7 45 5 

Geneva, N. Y.. 42 52 77 03 4 18 4 .1 

West Point 41 25 74 00 6 52 4 

New YorkCity.. 40 43 71 01 5 34 3 .6 

Philadelphia 39 57 75 11 4 08 3 .2 

Buffalo, N. Y.. 42 52 79 06 1 37 4 .1 

...... 

............ 

..... 

..... 

.... 

........ 

......... 

....... 

........... 

..... 

......... 

....... 

~~ 

PLACES WHERE THE VARIATION WAS EAST. 

An. 

Places. Latitude. Longitude. Variation. Motion. 

Mouth of Columbia River.. . 

Jacksonville, Ill. ........... 

St. Louis, Mo.. ............. 

Nashville, Tenn. ........... 

Louisiana, at. .............. 

Mobile, Ala. ............... 

Tuscaloosa, Ala.. ........... 

Columbus, Geo. ............ 

Milledgeville, Geo. ......... 

Savannah, Geo. ............ 

Tallahassee, Fla. ........... 

Pensacola, Fla. ............. 

Logansport, Ind.. ........... 

Cincinnati, Ohio ........... 

46"12' 

39 43 

38 37 

36 10 

29 40 

30 42 

33 12 

32 28 

33 07 

32 05 

30 26 

30 24 

40 45 

39 06 

123"30' -21"40' 

90 20 8 28 

90 17 8 37 

86 52 6 42 

94 00 8 41 

88 16 7 05 

87 43 7 26 

85 11 5 28 

83 24 5 07 

81 12 4 13 

84 27 5 03 

87 23 5 53 

86 22 5 24 

84 27 4 46 

Unknown 

+2' .5 

2 .3 

2 

1 .4 

1 .4 

1 .6 

2 

2 .4 

2 .7 

1 .8 

1 .4 

2 .7 

3 .1 

[ 30 1 

METHODS OF ASCERTAINING THE VARIATION. 

8. The best practical method of determining the true meridian of a place, is by observing the north star. If this star 

were precisely at the point in which the axis of the earth, 

prolonged, pierces the heavens, then, the intersection of the 

vertical plane passing through it and the place, with the 

surface of the earth, would be the true meridian. But the star 

being at a distance from the pole, equal to 1" 30' nearly, it 

performs a revolution about the pole in a circle, the polar 

distance which is 1" 30': the time of revolution is 23 h. and 56 

min. 

To the eye of an observer, this star is continually in motion, 

and is due north but twice in 23 h. 56 min; and is then said to 

be on the meridian. Now, when it departs from the meridian, 

it apparently moves east or west, for 5 h. and 59 m., and then 

returns to the meridian again. When at its greatest distance 

from the meridian, east or west, it is said to be at its greatest 

eastern or western elongation. 

The following tables show the times of its greatest eastern 

and western elongations. 

Days. April. May. June. July. August. Sept 

H.M. H.M. H.M. H.M. H.M. H.M. 

1 18 18 16 26 14 24 12 20 10 16 8 20 

7 17 56 16 03 14 00 11 55 9 53 7 58 

13 17 34 1540 13 35 11 31 930 736 

19 17 12 15 17 ' 13 10 11 07 9 08 7 15 

25 1649 14 53 12 45 1043 8 45 6 53 

WESTERN ELONGATIONS. 

Days. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. March 

H.M. H.M. H.M. H.M. H.M. H.M 

1 18 18 16 22 14 19 12 02 9 50 8 01 

7 17 56 15 59 13 53 11 36 9 26 7 38 

13 17 34 15 35 13 27 11 10 902 7 16 

19 17 12 15 10 13 00 1044 8 39 654 

25 1649 1445 12 34 10 18 8 16 6 33 

The eastern elongations are put down from the first of 

April to the first of October; and the western, from the first of 

October to the first of April; the time is computed from 12 at 

noon. The western elongations in the first case, and the 

eastern in the second, occurring in the daytime, cannot be 

used. Some of those put down are also invisible, occurring in 

the evening, before it is dark, or after daylight in the morning. In such case, if it be necessary to determine the meridian 

at that particular season of the year, let 5 h. and 59 m. be 

added to, or subtracted from, the time of greatest eastern or 

western elongation, and the observation be made at night, 

when the star is on the meridian. 

9. The following table exhibits the angle which the meridian plane makes with the vertical plane passing through the 

pole-star, when at its greatest eastern or western elongation: 

such angle is called the azimuth. The mean angle only is put 

down, being calculated for the first of July of each year: 

AZIMUTH TABLE. 

Year. Lat. 32" Lat. 34" Lat. 36" Lat. 38" Lat. 40" Lat. 42" La.t. 44" 

Azimuth. Azimuth. Azimuth. Azimuth. Azimuth. Azimuth. Azimuth. 

1851 1" 45%' 1" 48' 1" 50%' 1" 53%' 1" 56%' 2" oo1/4' 2" 04%' 

1852 1" 45' 1" 47%' 1" 50' 1" 53' 1" 56V4' 1" 59%4' 2" 03%' 

1853 1" 441/2' 1" 47' 1" 493/4' 1" 52%' 1" 55%4' 1" 591/4' 2" 03%' 

1854 1" 44V4' 1" 46%' 1" 499'4' 1" 52' 1" 551/4' 1" 59' 2" 02V"' 

1855 1" 433/4' 1" 461/4' 1" 483/4' 1" 513/4' 1" 543/4' 1" 58%' 2" 021/a' 

1856 1" 439'4' 1" 453/4' 1" 481/4' 1" 51%' 1" 54%' 1" 58' 2" 0l3/4' 

1857 1" 43' 1" 45?'4 I" 48' 1" 503/4' 1" 54' 1" 571/2' 2" 01'/4' 

1858 1" 42%' 1" 44Y4' 1" 47%' 1" 509'4' 1" 531/z' 1" 57' 2" Oo3/4' 

1859 1" 42' 1" 44%' 1" 47' 1" 493/4' 1" 53' 1" 56Yz' 2" 00%' 

1860 1" 41%' 1" 44' 1" 46%' 1" 49yz' 1" 52%' 1" 56' 2" 00' 

1861 1" 419'4' 1" 43%' 1" 469'4' 1" 49' 1" 521/4' 1" 553/4' 1" 59%' 

The use of the above tables, in finding the true meridian, 

will soon appear. 

47 1 
[ 32 1 TO FIND THE TRUE MERIDIAN 

WITH THE COMPASS. 

TO FIND THE TRUE MERIDIAN WITH THE 

THEODOLITE. 

10. Take a board, of about one foot square, paste white 

paper upon it, and perforate it through the centre: the diameter of the hole being somewhat larger than the diameter of 

the telescope of the theodolite. Let this board be so fixed to a 

vertical staff as to slide up and down freely; and let a small 

piece of board, about three inches square, be nailed to the 

lower edge of it, for the purpose of holding a candle. 

About twenty-five minutes before the time of the greatest 

eastern or western elongation of the pole-star, as shown by 

the tables of elongations, let the theodolite be placed at a 

convenient point and levelled. Let the board be placed about 

one foot in front of the theodolite, a lamp or candle placed on 

the shelf at its lower edge; and let the board be slipped up or 

down, until the pole-star can be seen through the hole. The 

light reflected from the paper will show the cross hairs in the 

telescope of the theodolite. 

Then, let the vertical spider’s line be brought exactly upon 

the pole-star, and, if it is an eastern elongation that is to be 

observed, and the star has not yet reached the most easterly 

point, it will move from the line towards the east, and the 

reverse when the elongation is west. 

At the time the star attains its greatest elongation, it will 

appear to coincide with the vertical spider’s line for some 

time, and then leave it, in the direction contrary to its former 

motion. 

As the star moves towards the point of greatest elongation, 

the telescope must be continually directed to it, by means of 

the tangent-screw of the vernier plate; and when the star has 

attained its greatest elongation, great care should be taken 

that the instrument be not afterwards moved. 

Now, if it be not convenient to leave the instrument in its 

place until daylight, let a staff, with a candle or small lamp 

upon its upper extremity, be arranged at thirty or forty yards 

from the theodolite, and in the same vertical plane with the 

axis of the telescope. This is easily effected, by revolving the 

vertical limb about its horizontal axis without moving the 

vernier plate, and aligning the staff to coincide with the 

vertical hair. Then mark the point directly under the theodolite; the line passing through this point and the staff, makes 

an angle with the true meridian equal to the azimuth of the 

pole-star. 

From the table of azimuths, take the azimuth corresponding to the year and nearest latitude. If the observed elongation was east, the true meridian lies on the west of the line 

which has been found, and makes 

[ 33 1 

with it an angle equal to the azimuth. If the elongation was 

west, the true meridian lies on the east of the line; and, in 

either case, laying off the azimuth angle with the theodolite, 

gives the true meridian. 

11. 1. Drive two posts firmly into the ground, in a line 

nearly east and west; the uppermost ends, after the posts are 

driven, being about three feet above the surface, and the 

posts about four feet apart: then lay a plank, or piece of 

timber three or four inches in width, and smooth on the upper 

side, upon the posts, and let it be pinned or nailed, to hold it 

firmly. 

2. Prepare a piece of board four or five inches square, and 

smooth on the under side. Let one of the compass-sights be 

placed at right angles to the upper surface of the board, and 

let a nail be driven through the board, so that it can be tacked 

to the timber resting on the posts. 

3. At above twelve feet from the stakes, and in the direction of the pole-star, let a plumb be suspended from the top of 

an inclined stake or pole. The top of the pole should be of such 

a height that the pole star will appear about six inches below 

it; and the plumb should be swung in a vessel of water to 

prevent it from vibrating. 

This being done, about twenty minutes before the time of 

elongation, place the board, to which the compass sight is 

fastened, on the horizontal plank, and slide it east or west, 

until the aperture of the compass-sight, the plumb-line, and 

the star, are brought into the same range. Then if the star 

depart from the plumb-line, move the compass-sight east or 

west along the timber, as the case may be, until the star shall 

attain its greatest elongation, when it will continue behind 

the plumb-line for several minutes, and will then recede from 

it in the direction contrary to its motion before it became 

stationary. Let the compass-sight be now fastened to the 

horizontal plank. During this observation it will be necessary 

to have the plumb-line lighted: this may be done by an assistant holding a candle near it. 

Let now a staff, with a candle or lamp upon it, be placed at a 

distance of thirty or forty yards from the plumb-line, and in 

the same direction with it and the compass-sight. The line so 

determined makes, with the true meridian, an angle equal to 

the azimuth of the pole-star; and from this line the variation 

of the needle is readily determined, even without tracing the 

true meridian on the ground. 

Place the compass upon this line, turn the sights in the 

direction of it, and note the angle shown by the needle. Now, 

if the elongation, at 

[ 34 1 

the time of observation, was west, and the north end of the 

needle is on the west side of the line, the azimuth, plus the 

angle shown by the needle, is the true variation. But should 

the north end of the needle be found on the east side of the 

line, the elongation being west, the difference between the 

azimuth and the angle would show the variation, and the 

reverse when the elongation is east. 

472 
1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

Elongation west, azimuth----------------- 2" 04' 

North end of the needle on the west, 

angle 4" 06' ________________________________________----- 

Variation _________________________ 6" 10' west. 

Elongation west, azimuth----------------- 1" 59' 

North end of the needle on the east, 

4" 50' 

2" 51' east. 

angle ________________________________________----- 

Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Elongation east, azimuth ----------------- 

North end of the needle on the west, 

2" 05' 

angle ____________________ 8" 30' ____________________----- 

Elongation east, azimuth ----------------- 

North end of the needle on the east, 

1" 57' 

angle ____________________ 8" 40' ____________________----- 

REMARK I. The variation at West Point, in September, 

1835, was 6" 32' west. 

REMARK 11. The variation of the needle should always be 

noted on every survey made with the compass, and then if the 

land be surveyed at a future time, the old lines can always be 

re-run. 

12. It has been found by observation, that heat and cold 

sensibly affect the magnetic needle, and that the same needle 

will, at the same place, indicate different lines at different 

hours of the day. 

If the magnetic meridian be observed early in the morning, 

and again at different hours of the day, it will be found that 

the needle will continue to recede from the meridian as the 

day advances, until about the time of the highest temperature, when it will begin to return, and at evening will make 

the same line as in the morning. This change is called the 

diurnal variation, and varies, during the summer season, 

from one-fourth to one-fifth of a degree. 

[ 35 1 

13. A very near approximation to a true meridian, and 

consequently to the variation, may be had, by remembering 

that the pole-star very nearly reaches the true meridian, 

when it is in the same vertical plane with the star Alioth in 

the tail of the Great Bear, which lies nearest the four stars 

forming the quadrilateral. 

The vertical position can be ascertained by means of a 

plumb-line. To see the spider's lines in the field of the telescope at the same time with the star, a faint light should be 

placed near the object-glass. When the plumb-line, the star 

Alioth, and the north star, fall on the vertical spider's line, 

the horizontal limb is firmly clamped, and the telescope 

brought down to the horizon; a light, seen through a small 

aperture in a board, and held at some distance by an assistant, is then moved according to signals, until it is covered by 

the intersection of the spider's lines. A picket driven into the 

ground, under the light, serves to mark the meridian line for 

reference by day, when the angle formed by it and the magnetic meridian may be measured. 

* 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

0 

INDEX. 

Referring the lines to the pages of the field-notes. 

Town. 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

A. 

Field Notes of the survey of the exterior boundaries of 

Township 25 north of range 2 west of the Willamette 

meridian, in the Territory of Oregon, by Robert Acres, 

deputy surveyor, under his contract No. 1, bearing date 

the 2d day of January, 1854. 

South Boundary, T. 25 N. R. 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. Begin at the post, the established corner to Townships 24 

and 25 North, in Ranges 2 and 3 West. The witness trees 

all standing, and agree with the description furnished me 

by the offce, viz: 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. N. 37 E. 27 links, 

A Bur Oak, 24 in. dia. N. 43 W. 35 links, 

A Maple, 18 in. dia. S. 27 W. 39 links, 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. S. 47 E. 41 links. 

31,32,33,34,35, and 36. 

East, on a random line on the South Boundaries of sections 

Variation by Burt's improved solar compass, 18" 41' E, 

I set temporary halfmile and mile posts at every 40 and 80 

chains, and at 5 miles, 74 chains, 53 links, to a 

point 2 chains and 20 links north ofthe corner to 

Townships 24 and 25 North, Ranges 1 and 2 W. 

and 37 links South per mile,) 

agree with the description furnished me by the 

surveyor general's office, viz: 

ABur Oak, 17 in. dia. bears N. 44 E. 31 links, 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. N. 26 W. 21 links, 

ALynn, 20 in. dia. S. 42 W. 15 links. 

(Therefore the correction will be 5 chains, 47 links West, 

I find the corner post standing and the witness trees to 

473 
40.00 

62.50 

80.00 

A Black Oak, 24 in. dia. S. 27 E. 14 links. 

West, Irun(at avariationof 18"25'East,) 

From the corner to Townships 24 and 25 N. Ranges 1 and 2 

West, on a true line along the South Boundary of section 36, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Beech, 24 in. dia. bears N. 11 E. 38 links dist 

A Beech, 9 in. dia. bears S. 9 E. 17 linksdist. 

A Brook, 6 links wide runs North, 

Set a post for corner to sections 35 and 36,l and 2, 

from which 

ABeech, 9 in. dia. bears N. 22 E. 16 links dist. 

ABeech, 8 in. dia. bear N. 19 W. 14 links dist. 

A White Oak, 10 in. dia. bears S. 52 W. 7 linksdist. 

ABlack Oak, 14 in. dia. bears S. 46 E. 8 links dist. 

Land level, good soil, fit for cultivation, 

Timber, Beech; various kinds of Oak, Ash, and Hickory. 

r21 

South Boundary, T. 25 N. R. 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

40.00 

65.00 

80.00 

40.00 

80.00 

37.51 

40.00 

62.00 

80.00 

37.50 

40.00 

West, on a true line along the South Boundary of section 35, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A beech, 8 in. dia. bears N. 20 E. 8 linksdist. 

No other tree convenient; made trench around post, 

Begin to ascend a moderate hill; bears N. and S. 

Set a post with trench, for corner of sections 34 and 35, 

Variation 18" 25' East, 

2 and 3, from which 

ABeech, 10 in. dia. bearsN. 56 W. 9 linksdist. 

A Beech, 10 in. dia. bears S. 51 E. 13 linksdist. 

No other trees convenient to mark, 

Land level, or gently rolling, and good for farming, 

Timber, Beech, Oak, Ash, and Hickory; some Walnut 

and Poplar. 

[31 

South Boundary, T. 25 N. R. 2 W. Willamette Meridian 

CHAINS. 

76.00 

80.00 

11.00 

40.00 

54.00 

57.50 

61.00 

70.00 

74.73 

West, on a true line along the South Boundary of section 34, 

Set a quarter section post with trench, from which 

No other tree convenient to mark, 

To point for corner of sections 33,34,3 and 4, 

Drove charred stakes, raised mounds with trenches, 

as per instructions, from which 

ABur Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 31 E. 344 links, and 

A Hickory, 12 in. dia. bears S. 43 W. 231 links, 

Variation 18" 25' East, 

A Black Oak, 10 in. dia. bears N. 2 E. 635 links dist. 

No other trees convenient to mark, 

Land level, rich and good for farming, 

Timber, some scattering Oak and Walnut. 

1.00 

18.00 

20.00 

40.00 

55.00 

57.00 

72.50 

80.00 

West, on a true line along the South Boundary of section 33, 

ABlack Oak, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 18" 25' East, 

ABlack Oak, 18 in. dia. bears N. 25 E. 32 links dist. 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. bears N. 43 W. 22 links dist. 

Tofootofsteephill, bearsN. E. andS. W. 

Set a post for corner to sections 32,33,4 and 5, 

from which 

A Whiteoak, 15in.dia. bearsN.23E.27linksdist. 

ABlack Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 82 W. 75 links dist. 

A Bur Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 37 W. 92 links dist. 

A White Oak, 24 in. dia. bears S. 26 E. 42 linksdist. 

Land gently rolling; good rich land for farming, 

Timber, Black and White Oak, Hickory and Ash. 

West, on a true line along the South Boundary of section 32, 

A creek 20 links wide, runs North, 

Set a granite stone 14in. long, 10 in. wide, and 

Variation 18" 25' East, 

4 in. thick, for quarter section corner from which 

AMaple, 20 in. dia. bears N. 41 E. 25 links distant, 

ABirch, 24 in. dia. bears N. 35 W. 22 linksdistant, 

To S. E. edge of swamp, 

As it is impossible to establishpermanently the corner 

to sections 31,32,5 and 6 in the swamp, I therefore 

at this point, 400 chains East of the true point for 

said section cor. raise a witness mound with trench, 

as per instructions, from which 

ABlack Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 51 E. 115 links, 

A point in deep swamp for corner to sections 31,32, 

5 and 6, 

Land, rich bottom; west of creek part wet; east of creek 

good for farming, 

Timber, good; Oak, Hickory, and Walnut. 

West, on a true line along the South Boundary of Section 31, 

Leave swamp and rise bluff 30 feet high, bears N. and S. 

Set post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Sugar Tree, 27 in. dia. bears S. 81 W. 42 links dist. 

ABeech, 24 in. dia. bears S. 71 E. 24, 

Variation 18" 25' East, 

Foot ofrocky bluff30 feet high, bears N. E. and S. W. 

A spring branch comes out at the foot of the bluff 5 

Enter swamp; bears N. and S. 

Leave swamp; bears N. S. The swamp contains about 

The corner to Townships 24 and 25 N. ranges 2 and 3 W. 

Land, except the swamp, rolling, good, rich soil, 

Timber, Sugar Tree, Beech, and Maple. 

links wide; runs N. W. into swamp, 

15 acres, the greater part insection31, 

January 25th, 1854. 

Between ranges 1 and 2 West S. 25 N. Willamette Meridian, 

From the corner to Townships 24 and 25 N. ranges 1 and 

2 W. I run North, along the East Boundary of section 36, 

.Variation 17" 51' E. 

A brook 5 links wide, runs N. W. 

Tofootofhil1,bearingN. W.andS.E. 

Torockybluff50feethigh, bearsN. W.andS.E. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

ABeech, 13 in dia. bears N. 36 E. 22 links dist. 

APoplar, 20 in. dia. bears S. 39 E. 42 links dist. 

TO top ofrocky bluff40 feet high, bears N. W. and S. E. 

TO foot ofbluff; enter level, rich land, 

A brook 10 links wide, runs N. W. 

Set a post for corner to sections 25,36,30, and 31, 

from which 

[41 

Between Ranges 1 and 2 W. T. 25 N. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

5.51 

6.00 

40.00 

ABirch, 24 in. dia. bears N. 20 E. 49 links dist. 

A Sugar Tree, 12 in. dia. bears N. 81 W. 25 linksdist. 

A White Oak, 9 in. dia. bears S. 40 W. 60 linksdist. 

APoplar, 15 in. dia. bears S. 38 E. 12 linksdist. 

Land, North and South parts rich and good for farming; 

middle part broken, 3d rate; Timber, Beech, Sugar Tree, 

Poplar, and White Oak. 

~ ~ 

North, on the East Boundary of section 25, 

Variation 18" East. 

AMaple, 20 in. dia. 

To foot of hill, rises moderately, bears E and N. W. 

Set quarter section stone (a rose quartz) 15 inches long, 

12 inches wide, and 3 inches thick, (on steep side 

hill, slopes West,) from which 

474 
73.21 

80.00 

21.17 

40.00 

44.00 

49.00 

57.10 

59.67 

65.50 

80.00 

APoplar, 40 in. dia. bears N. 40 W. 10 links dist. 

A Beech. 9 in. dia. bears S. 42 W. 11 links dist. 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner of sections 24,25,19 and 30, from which 

ABeech, 20 in. dia. bears N. 64 E. 41 links dist. 

A White Oak, 10 in. dia. bearsN. 30 W. 13 linksdist. 

ABeech, 12 in. dia. bears S. 32 W. 26 linksdist. 

A White Oak, 11 in. dia. bears S. 34E. 48 links dist. 

Land rolling; good soil; nearly 1st rate, 

Timber, Sugar Tree, Beech, Walnut, Elm, and White Oak. 

9.00 

25.37 

40.00 

44.00 

80.00 

North, on the East Boundary of section 24, 

A White Walnut, 20 in. dia. 

Set a quarter section post, from which 

Variation 17" 55' East, 

ABuckeye, 14in. dia. bearsN. 39E. 27 linksdist. 

A Buckeye, 10 in. dia. bears S. 48 W. 6 linksdist. 

The road (at the foot ofthe bluff) from Williamsburg 

to Astoria, bears East and West, 

Elk creek, 150 links wide, gentle current, runs West, 

A brook, 10 links wide, runs S. W. 

A Black Oak, 24 in. dia. 

Leave creek bottom and enter upland, bears E. and W. 

Set alime stone, 16 in. long, 14 wide, and 3 in. thick, for 

corner to sections 13,24,18 and 19, from which 

ABeech,12in. dia.bearsN.30E.50linksdist. 

A Walnut, 9 in. dia. bearsN. 18 W. 29 linksdist. 

A Walnut, 8 in. dia. bears S. 8 W. 51 links dist. 

ABeech, 6 in. dia. bears S. 20 E. 40 links dist. 

dry and rich-not subject to inundation, 

Land, except creek bottom, rolling; good, rich soil. The bottom, 

Timber, good; Walnut, Beech, Maple, Ash and Hickory. 

[51 

Between Ranges 1 and 2 W. T. 25 N. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS 

14.00 

21.00 

40.00 

43.71 

80.00 

7.26 

40.00 

68.00 

80.00 

North, on the East Boundary ofsection 13, 

A White Oak, 24 in. dia. 

Enter high broken ridges, bearing East and N. W. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Cherry, 10 in. dia. bears N. 35 W. 2 links dist. 

A Cherry, 10 in. dia. bears S. 52 E. 21 linksdist. 

Variation 17" 55' East, 

ABur Oak, 30 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 12,13,7 and 18, from which 

AHickory, 15 in. dia. bears N. 40 E. 14 linksdist. 

AHickory, 20 in. dia. bears N. 39 W. 38 linksdist. 

ABeech, 12 in. dia. bears S. 36 W. 16 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 10 in. dia. bears S. 42 E. 23 linksdist. 

Land (except 21.00 chains, South part) high, broken, and 

mountainous, 

Timber, Beech, Hickory, Sugar Tree, and Blackjack. 

North, on the East Boundary of section 12, 

A Black Oak, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A White Ash, 10 in. dia. bears N. 35 W. 15 linksdist. 

An Elm, 10 in. dia. bears S. 83 E. 2 linksdist. 

The foot of the mountain bears East and N. W. 

Set a post on the top of eastern extremity ofmountain, 300 feet 

Variation 17" 55' East, 

high, for corner to sections 1,12,6 and 7, from which 

An Elm, 12 in. dia. bears N. 46 E. 30 links dist. 

ABeech, 10 in. dia. bears N. 40 W. 28 links dist. 

AHickory, 10 in. dia. bears S. 55 W. 40 links dist. 

A Beech, 10 in. dia. bears S. 40 E. 6 links dist. 

Land mountainous and broken, 

Timber, Hickory, White Oak, Black Oak, Beech, and Ash. 

North, on the East Boundary of section 1, 

The foot of mountain bears East and West, 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. 

Set a post in deep ravine bearing S. W. for quarter section 

corner, from which 

A Poplar, 9 in. dia. bears N. 76 E 7 links dist. 

A Sugar Tree, 9 in. dia. bears S. 22 E. 15 linksdist. 

Variation 17" 55' East, 

Leave timber and enter prairie, bears E. and N. W. 

To a point for corner to Townships 25 and 26 N. 

Ranges 1 and 2 W. 

Drove charred stake, and raised a mound with trench, 

as per instructions, and planted N. W. 4 Chesnuts, 

S. W.2HickoryNuts,N.E.4CherryStones,andS.E. 

4 White Oak Acorns. 

Between Ranges 2 and 3 W. T. 25 N. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

8.56 

34.50 

40.00 

43.41 

80.00 

27.73 

Land, South ofprairie, mountainous and broken; prairie 

Timber, Sugar Tree, Cedar, and Pine. 

good for farming, 

January 26th, 1854. 

From the corner to Townships 24 and 25 N. Ranges 2 and 

North, on the Range line between sections 31 and 36, 

Set a post on the left bank of Chickeeles river, for corner 

to fractional sections 31 and 36, from which 

A Hackberry, 11 in. dia. bears N. 50 E. 11 links dist. 

A Sycamore, 60 in. dia. bears S. 15 W. 24links dist. 

I now cause a flag to be set on the right bank of the river, 

and in the line between sections 31 and 36. I now cross 

the river, and from a point on the right bank thereof, West 

ofthe cornerjust established on the left bank, I run 

North, on an offset line, 25 chains and 94 links, to a point 

8 chains and 56 links West ofthe flag. I now set a post 

in the place ofthe flag, for corner to fractional sections 

31 and 36, from which 

ABeech, 10 in. dia. bears N. 2 E. 12 links dist. 

ABlack Oak, 12 in. dia. bears N. 80 W. 16linksdist. 

3 West, I run 

Variation 18" 56' East, 

The corner above described, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Bur Oak, 20 N. bears N. 37 E. 26 links dist. 

A Black Oak, 24 in. dia. bears S. 75 W. 21 linksdist. 

A Black Walnut, 30 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 30,31,25 and 36, from which 

A Beech, 14 india. bears N. 20 E. 14 linksdist. 

A Hickory, 9 in. dia. bears N. 25 W. 12 linksdist. 

A Beech, 16 in. dia. bears S. 40 W. 16 links dist. 

A White Oak, 10 in. dia. bears S. 44E. 20 links dist. 

Land level; rich bottom; not subject to inundation, 

Timber, White and Black Oak, Beech, Hickory, and Ash. 

North, between sections 25 and 30, 

Set a post for corner to fractional sections 25 and30 on the 

Variation 18" 50' East, 

right bank of Chickeeles river, a navigable stream, 

which here runs S. E. from which 

A Willow, 6 in. dia. bears S. 37 W. 55 linksdist. 

AMaple, 20 in. dia. bears S. 30 E. 11 linksdist. 

I now cause a flag to be set on the left bank of the river, and 

in the line between sections 25 and 30. From the above 

corner I run West 333 chains to a point from which the 

flag bears N. 16" 30' E. which gives for the distance across 

475 
[71 

Between Ranges 2 and 3 W. T. 25 N. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

39.00 

40.00 

43.71 

80.00 

32.50 

51.80 

55.74 

80.00 

the river on the line 11.27 chains, to which add 

27.73, makes, 

To the flag on the bank, I here set a post for corner to 

fractional sections 25 and 30, from which 

A Hickory, 8 in. dia. bears N. 44E. 17 links dist. 

A White Oak, 8 in. dia. bears N. 15 W. 8 linksdist. 

AHickory, 9 in. dia. bears N. 16 E. 16 linksdist. 

ABuckeye, 10 in. dia. bears S. 16 E. 18 links dist. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Hickory, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 19,30,24,25, from which 

An Elm, 6 in. dia. bears N. 82 E. 25 linksdist. 

ASugarTree, 14in.dia. bearsN.49W.4linksdist. 

An Elm, 9 in. dia. bears S. 42 W. 30linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 10 in dia. bears S. 55 E. 45 links dist. 

Land good; rich bottom, 1st rate, 

Timber, Hickory, Elm, Buckeye, Sugar Tree, and Ash; 

North, between sections 19 and 24, 

A Hickory, 20 in. dia. on the left bank of Chickeeles river mark 

Variation 18" 50' East, 

it for corner to fractional sections 19 and 24, from which 

AHackberry, 20 in. dia. bears S. 13 W. 27 linksdist. 

ABlack Oak, 24 in. dia. bears S. 27 E. 31 links dist. 

I now cause a flag to be set on the right bank ofthe river, and in 

the line between sections 19 and 24, and from the corner run 

a base East 5.90 chains to a point from which the flag bears 

N. 17 W. continue the base East to a point 9.00 chainsEast 

of the corner on the river bank, from which the flag bears 

N. 25" 15' W. which gives by calculation as the mean 

result of the two observations for the distance across the 

the river on the line between sections 19 and 24,19.30 chains, 

to which add 32.50 chains, the distance to the river, makes 

corner to fractional sections 19 and 24, from which 

A Beech, 12 in. dia. bears N. 24 E. 39 links dist. 

A Beech, 14 in. dia. bears S. 55 W. 120 links dist. 

the river, it cannot therefore be established, 

To the flag on the right bank of the river; I here set a post for 

NOTE.-The point for quarter section corner falling in 

A Black Oak, 30 inches diameter, 

Set a post for corner to sections 18,19,13, and 24, from which 

A White Oak, 18 in. dia. bears N. 55 E. 24 links dist. 

A White Oak, 17 in. dia. bearsN. 64 W. 18 linksdist. 

A Red Oak, 27 in. dia. bears S. 26 W. 20 links dist. 

A Red Oak, 15 in. dia. bears S. 29 E. 40 links dist. 

Between Ranges 2 and 3 W. T. 25 N. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

5.00 

21.88 

38.60 

40.00 

46.50 

68.37 

80.00 

Land good; rich bottom; not subject to inundation, 

Timber, various kinds of Oak, Beech, Hickory, and Ash; 

undergrowth same, and vines. 

North, between sections 13 and 18, 

Leave bottom and enter upland; bears N. E. and S. W. 

A Red Oak, 20 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 24 in. dia. 

Set apost for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 18" 53' East, 

A White Oak, 22 in. dia. bears N. 27 W. 27 links dist. 

A White Oak, 23 in. dia. bears S. 28 E. 92 links dist. 

A road from Williamsburg bears East and West, 

ABlack Walnut, 21 in. dia. 

Set apostfor corner to sections 7,18,12, and 13, from which 

A White Oak, 12 in. dia. bears N. 55 E. 68 links dist. 

A Black Oak, 8 in. dia. bears N. 53 W. 40 links dist. 

15.18 

30.26 

40.00 

68.37 

80.00 

~ 

3.00 

25.31 

40.00 

45.00 

CHAINS. 

61.11 

80.00 

20.00 

A Black Oak, 16 in. dia. bears S. 40 W. 55 links dist. 

ARed Oak, 10 in. dia. bears S. 44E. 50 links dist. 

Land rolling, and next the bottom broken; soil 2d rate, 

Timber good; various kinds of Oak and Hickory. 

North, between sections 7 and 12, 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 21 in dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 18" 53' East, 

A White Oak, 12 in. dia. bears S. 13 W. 60 links dist. 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. bears S. 35 E. 55 links dist. 

ABlack Walnut, 21 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 6,7,1, and 12, from which 

A White Oak, 17 in. dia. bears N. 58E. 60 links dist. 

A White Oak, 18 in. dia. bears N. 54 W. 51 links dist. 

A White Oak, 18 in. dia. bears S. 51 W. 20 links dist. 

A Hickory, 14 in. dia. bears S. 64 E. 42 links dist. 

Land gently rolling, 2d rate. 

Timber, Oak and Hickory; undergrowth, Oak and Hazel. 

North, between sections 1 and 6, 

Enter stony barrens; timber scattering; bears East and West, 

ABlackjack, 12 in. dia. 

Set aquartz stone, 13 in. long, 12 in. wide, and4 in. thick, for 

quarter section corner, with trench, as per instructions, 

from which 

ABlackjack, 20 in. dia. bears S. 44 E. 95 links dist. 

Variation 18" 53' East, 

No other tree convenient to mark, 

Leave stony barrens, bears East and West, 

Between Townships 25 and 26 N. R. 2 W. 

Willamette Meridian. 

A Hickory, 10 in. dia. Here leave timber and enter prairie, 

bearing West and N. E. 

Set a granite stone, 18 in. long, 12 in. wide, and 6 inches thick, 

for corner to Townships 25 and 26 North, Ranges 2 and 3 

West; raise a stone mound, with trench, as per instructions, 

Land broken and stony; too poor for cultivation, 

Timber, scattering and poor; Blackjack and Hickory. 

January 27th, 1851. 

From the corner to Townships 25 and 26 N. Ranges 2 and 

3 West, I run 

East, on a random line between saidTownsbips, the variation 

of my compass being 18" 41' E. I set temporary half-mile and 

mile posts at 40.00 and 80,OO chains, 

navigable stream, where set a temporary post; obtain the 

distance across the river on the line by causing my flag to be 

set on the left bank ofthe river, in said line, 

From the temporary post on the right bank, I run North 

7 chains 63 links to a point; thence East, on an offset line, 

and at 30.00 chains a point North of the flag standing 

on the left bank of the river, set a temporary post in 

the place ofthe flag, 

the falling to be 25 links North ofthe township corner, 

chains 47 links West and 4.2 links South per mile. 

At 160.09 intersected the right bank of Chickeeles river, a 

I find the Township line to be 5 miles, 76 chains 53 links, and 

The correction for the true line will therefore be 3 

From the corner to Townships 25 and 26 N. Ranges 1 and 

West, on a true line between sections 1 and 36, 

Leave prairie and enter scattering timber; bears N. and S 

2 West, I run 

Variation 18" 39' East, 

476 
40.00 

43.71 

80.00 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Beech, 24 in. dia. bears N. 11 E. 38 linksdist. 

ABeech, 9 in. dia. bears S. 9 W. 19 linksdist. 

A Black Walnut, 30 in. dia. 

Set a sandstone, 16 in. long, 12 in. wide, and 3 in. 

thick, for corner to sections 1,2,35 and 36, from which 

ABuckeye, 9 in. dia. bears N. 66E. 15 links dist. 

An Elm, 20 in dia. bears N. 4 W. 10 links dist. 

An Elm, 36 india. bears S. 65 W. 8 links dist. 

ABuckeye, 10 in. dia. bears S. 40E. 20 links dist. 

Land level, or gently rolling, and 1st rate, 

Timber, scattering next the prairies; Elm, Buckeye, 

Beech, Walnut, and Oak. 

[ 10 1 

Between Fownships 25 and 26 N. Range 2 W. Willamette 

Meridian. 

CHAIN: 

27.13 

40.00 

75.59 

80.00 

9.00 

16.00 

22.00 

31.27 

40.00 

41.33 

74.52 

75.00 

80.00 

7.50 

21.50 

40.00 

41.40 

46.44 

West, on a true line between sections 2 and 35, 

A White Oak, 24 in, dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 18" 39' East, 

A White Oak, 9 in. dia. bears N. 24 E. 28 links dist. 

A Buckeye, 12 in. dia. bears S. 48 W. 9 links dist. 

A Black Oak, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 2,3,34 and 35, from which 

A Sugar Tree, 15 in. dia. bears N. 46 E. 15 links dist. 

No tree convenient in section 34, 

ABeech, 16 in. dia. bears S. 35 W. 16 links dist. 

ASugarTree, 14india. bearsS.30E. 14linksdist. 

Land gently rolling, and 1st rate, 

Timber, good; Elm, Buckeye, Beech, Walnut, and Oak, 

West, on a true line between sections 3 and 34, 

Enter wet prairie; bears N. and S. 

A beautiful spring branch, 5 links wide, runs S. W. 

Leave prairie; bears N. E. and S. W. 

ABlack Oak, 20 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 18" 39' East. 

A White Walnut, 16 in. dia. bearsN. 64 E. 7 linksdist. 

A White Walnut, 12 in. dia. bears S. 73 W. 31 linksdist. 

A White Oak, 30 in. dia. 

A point 4 links South ofa Black Oak, 24 in. dia; mark it by 

Leave timber and enter a narrow strip of prairie; bears N. W. 

A point for corner to sections 3,4,33 and 34, drove a charred 

cutting 2 notches South side, 

and S. E. 

stake, and raised a mound, with trench, as per instructions, 

from which 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 73 E. 540 links dist. 

A Black Oak, 30 in. dia. bears S. 76 E. 613 links dist. 

Land gently rolling; 1st rate. 

Timber, White and Black Oak, Walnut and Sugar Tree. 

West, on a true line between sections 4 and 33, 

Leave prairie; bearsN. W. and S. E. 

A spring branch, 15 links wide, runs N. W. 

A Black Walnut, 30 in. dia.; mark it for quarter section corner, 

Variation 18" 39' East, 

from which 

ABuckeye, 9 in. dia. bears S. 45 E. 11 links dist. 

A Black Walnut, 20 in. dia. bears N. 29 W. 25 links dist. 

Leave upland and enter river bottom; bears N. E. and S. W. 

Set a post on the left bank of Chickeeles river, for corner 

to fractional sections 4 and 33, from which 

CHAINS 

76.44 

76.64 

80.00 

24.40 

40.00 

42.73 

80.00 

8.00 

18.00 

18.26 

34.30 

40.00 

[ 11 1 

Between Townships 25 and 26 N. R. 2 W. 

Willamette Meridian. 

An Elm, 8 in. dia. bears N. 71 E. 5 links dist. 

An Elm, 10 in. dia. bears S. 19 W. Glinksdist. 

The line running in the river, the distance on the random 

line was obtained on an offset by runningNorth from 

the temporary post on the right bank 7 chains 63 links to a 

point thenceEast 30.00 chains, and coming back to true 

line on the left bank ofthe river, 

Set a post on the right bank of the river for corner to 

fractional sections 4 and 33,from which 

A Cherry, 6 in. dia. bears N. 61 E. 17 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears S. 75 W. 20 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 23 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 4,5,32 and 33, from which 

AHackberry, 7 in. dia. bears N. 67 E. 17 linksdist. 

ASugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears N. 71 W. 43 links dist. 

ALocust, 14 in. dia. bears S. 30 W. 16 linksdist. 

ABeech, 20 in. dia. bears S. 20 E. 50 linksdist. 

Land, East ofbottom, rolling; good soil; the bottom 

subject to inundation 4 feet, 

Timber, on upland, Oak; in bottom, Sugar, Cherry, and 

Hackberry. 

West, on a true line between sections 5 and 32, 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. Here leave bottom and enter hills; 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 18" 39' East, 

bears N. E. and S. W. 

AHickory, 18 in. dia. bears N. 88 E. 40 links dist. 

AMulberry, 14 in. dia. bears S. 69 W. 103 linksdist. 

A Black Ash, 15 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 5,6,31 and 32, from which 

ASugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears N. 89 E. 60 links dist. 

An Elm, 14 in. dia. bears N. 12 W. 24 linksdist. 

An Elm, 15 in. dia. bears S. 14 W. 23 links dist. 

A Sugar Tree, 16 in. dia. bears S. 15 E. 26 linksdist. 

Land gently rolling, and 1st rate; the bottom level, 

Timber, Sugar Tree, Walnut, and Oak; undergrowth, same 

and Spice. 

West, on a true line between sections 6 and 31, 

Variation 18"39' East, 

To swamp of about 15 acres; bears N. E. and S. W. 

Leave swamp; bears N. E. and S. W.; the line passes through 

ARed Oak, 30 in. dia. on N. W. bank ofswamp, 

AHickory, 18 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

the middle of the swamp, 

ABur Oak, 27 in. dia. bears N. 49 E. 46 linksdist. 

[ 12 1 

Between Townships 25 and 26 N. R. 2 W. 

Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

48.65 

57.40 

61.00 

76.53 

A Sugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears N. 56 W. 60 links dist. 

No tree convenient South ofthe line, 

A stream 14 links wide runs South, 

A White Oak, 28 in. dia. 

Enter prairie; bears N. E. and S. W. 

To the established corner to Townships 25 and 26 N. Ranges 

2 and 3 West. 

477 
Land level; 1st rate for farming, 

Timber, good; various kinds of Oak, Hickory, and Sugar Tree; 

undergrowth, Hazel, Hickory, and Vines. 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION. 

This Township contains a large amount of first rate land 

for farming. It is well timbered with the various kinds of Oak, 

Hickory, Sugar Tree, Walnut, Beech and Ash. 

Chickeeles river is navigable for small boats in low-water, 

and does not often overflow its banks, which are from ten to 

fifteen feet high. 

The Township will admit of a large settlement, and should 

therefore be subdivided. 

B. 

Field Notes of the subdivision lines and meanders of Chickeeles river in Township 25 N. R. 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS 

40.05 

80.09 

9.19 

29.97 

40.00 

51.00 

76.00 

80.00 

9.00 

15.00 

40.00 

55.00 

72.00 

80.00 

40.00 

To determine the proper adjustment of my compass for subdividing this Township, I commence at the corner to 

Townships 24 and 25 N. R. 1 and 2 W., and run 

North, on a blank line along the East Boundary of section 36, 

To a point 5 links West of the quarter section corner, 

To a point 12 links West ofthe corner to sections 25 and 36, 

To retrace this line or run parallel thereto, my compass must 

be adjusted to a variation of 17" 46' East. 

Subdivision commenced February 1,1854 

From the corner to sections 1,2,35 and 36 on the South 

Boundary of the Township, I run 

North, between sections 35 and 36, 

ABeech, 30 in. dia. 

A Beech, 30 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

ABeech, 8 in. dia. bears N. 23 W. 45 links dist. 

ABeech, 15 in. dia. bears S. 48 E. 12 linksdist. 

Variation 17" 51' East, 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

ABeech, 18 in. dia. 

ASugar Tree, 30 in. dia. 

Set apost for corner to sections 25,26,35 and 36, from which 

A Beech, 28 in. dia. bears N. 60 E. 45 linksdist. 

A Beech, 24 in. dia. bears N. 62 W. 17 links dist. 

A Poplar, 20 in. dia. bears S. 70 W. 50 links dist. 

A Poplar, 36 in. dia. bears S. 66 E. 34 linksdist. 

Land level; 2d rate, 

Timber, Poplar, Beech, Sugar Tree, and some Oak; undergrowth, same and hazel. 

East, on a random line between sections 25 and 36, 

A brook, 20 links wide, runs north, 

To foot of hills bears N. and S. 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner 

To opposite foot of hilI, bears N. and S. 

A brook, 15 links wide runs North, 

Intersected East Boundary at post corner to sections 25 

and 36, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 25 and 36, 

Set a post on top ofhill bears N. and S. from which 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

AHickory, 14 in. dia. bears N. 60 E. 27 linksdist. 

[ 14 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

80.00 

7.00 

17.20 

18.05 

23.44 

40.00 

60.15 

80.00 

~ 

8.90 

12.00 

40.00 

48.00 

60.50 

73.00 

80.12 

40.06 

80.12 

6.70 

ABeech, 15 in dia. bears S. 74W. 9 links dist. 

The corner to sections 25,26,35 and 36, 

Land, east and westpartslevel, 1st rate; middle part 

Timber, Beech, Oak, Ash, &c.; undergrowth, same and Spice 

broken, 3d rate, 

in the branch bottoms. 

North, between sections 25 and 26, 

A Poplar, 40 in. dia. 

A brook, 25 links wide, runs N. W. 

A Walnut, 30 in. dia. 

A brook, 25 links wide, runs N. E. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

ABur Oak, 36 in. dia. bears N. 42 E. 18 links dist. 

ABeech, 30 in. dia. bears S. 72 W. 9 linksdist. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

ABeech, 30 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 23,24,25 and 26, from which 

A White Oak, 14 in. dia. bears N. 50E. 40 links, 

A Sugar Tree, 12 in. dia. bears N. 14 W. 31 links dist 

A White Oak, 13 in dia. bears S. 38 W. 32 linksdist. 

ASugarTree, 12in.dia.bearsS.42E. 14linksdist. 

Land level on the line, high ridge ofhills through the 

middle ofsection 25 running N. and S. 

Timber, Beech, Walnut, Ash, Sugar Tree, &c. 

~~ ~ ~ 

East, on a random line between sections 24 and 25, 

A stream, 30 links wide, rapid current, runs N.W. 

To foot of hill, bears south and N. E. 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

To opposite foot ofhill, bears South and N. W. 

A stream, 30 links wide, runs N. soon turns N. W. 

To foot ofhill, risesmoderately, bears S. and N. W. 

Intersected East Boundary ofthe Township at the post 

corner to sections 24 and 25, from which corner I run 

West, on a true linebeeween sections 24 and 25, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

ABeech, 18 in. dia. bears N. 74 W. 26 links dist. 

ABeech, 16 in. dia. bears S. 73 E. 22 links dist. 

The corner to sections 23,24,25,26, 

Land rolling between the branches; good, 2d rate; 

branch bottoms level, 1st rate, 

Timber, Walnut, Beech, Elm, and Oak; undergrowth, same 

and Spice. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

North, between sections 23 and 24, 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

[ 15 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

9.65 

13.50 

16.00 

40.00 

40.35 

Astream, 25 links wide, runs N. W. 

Same stream, 25 links wide, runs N. E. 

Same stream, 25 links wide, runs N. W. 

Set a post near the South bank of a stream for quarter 

section corner, from which 

A Cottonwood, 18 in. dia. bears S. 7 W. 7 links dist. 

A White Walnut, 24 in. dia. bears S. 22 E. 4links dist. 

Elk Creek, 125 links wide, runs N. W. general course West 

John Jones has a field on the North side of the creek and 

West ofthe line; his house is 2 chains South ofthe 

road and 2 chains East of the line, 

478 
54.00 

58.00 

68.00 

72.12 

75.00 

80.00 

40.00 

80.10 

40.05 

80.10 

6.17 

To the road from Astoria to Williamsburg, bears E. and W. 

Enter wet prairie, bearsEast and West, 

Leave prairie and enter timber, bearing East and West, 

This prairie extendsEast into section 24 and 30 chains, 

A White Oak, 30 in. dia. 

Leave creek bottom and enter hills bearing East and West, 

Set apost for corner to sections 13,14,23,24, 

from which 

A White Walnut, 16 in. dia. bears N. 42 E. 15 links dist. 

A White Walnut, 24 in. dia. bears N. 59 W. 27 links dist. 

An Elm, 8 in. dia. bears S. 67 W. 16 linksdist. 

ABlack Oak, 14 in. dia. bears S. 38 E. 17 links dist. 

Land mostlylevel; 1st rate soil, 

Timber, Walnut, various kinds of Oak, Buckeye, and Hickory; 

undergrowth, same and Spice, 

February lst, 1854. 

East, on a random line between sections 13 and 24, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected the East Boundary ofTownship 16 links South of 

post corner to sections 13 and 24, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 13 and 24, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

Variation 17" 53' East, 

A SugarTree, 30 in. dia. bearsN. 80 W. 22 linksdist. 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bears S. 53 E. 20 links dist. 

The corner to sections 13,14,23,24, 

Land mostly rolling; good rich soil; 1st rate, 

Timber, Walnut, Sugar Tree, Oak, Elm, and Buckeye; undergrowth, same and Spice. 

North, between sections 13 and 14, 

A White Oak, 30 in. dia. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

[ 16 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS 

22.15 

40.00 

52.25 

62.61 

80.00 

20.50 

40.00 

80.10 

40.05 

80.10 

A Beech, 30 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Beech, 24 in. dia. bears N. 66 W. 6 linksdist. 

ABeech, 20 in. dia. bears S. 45 E. 40 links dist. 

ABeech, 24 in. dia. 

A Bur Oak, 30 in. dia. 

Set apost for corner to sections 11,12,13,14, from which 

ABlack Oak, 26 in. dia. bears N. 53 E. 10 links dist. 

ABlack Oak, 21 in. dia. bears N. 20 W. 35 links dist. 

A Sugar Tree, 30 in. dia. bears S. 32 W. 25 linksdist. 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 24 E. 20 linksdist. 

Land gently rolling; good, 2d rate. 

Timber, Beech, Oak, and Ash; undergrowth, same and Hazel. 

East, on a random line between sections 12 and 13, 

Foot of hills, and enter broken ridges bearing North 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected East Boundary 13 links North of post corner to 

sections 12 and 13, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 12 and 13, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

An Elm, 24 in. dia. bears N. 51 E. 50 links dist. 

ABeech, 18 in. dia. bears S. 51 W. 29 links dist. 

The corner to sections 11,12,13,14, 

Land West 20 chains; gently rolling; good, 2d rate; 

the balance high, broken ridges, 

Timber, Beech, Black Oak, and White Oak; undergrowth, 

same and Hazel. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

and South, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

10.81 

40.00 

52.25 

62.61 

75.40 

80.00 

North, between sections 11 and 12, 

An Elm, 15 in dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

ABeech, 30 in. dia. bears N. 33 W. 9 links dist. 

A Beech, 20 in. dia. bears S. 64 W. 20 links dist. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

ABeech, 24 in. dia. 

A Black Oak, 30 in. dia. 

A spring branch, 10 links wide, runs West, 

Set a post for corner to sections 1,2,11 and 12, from which 

A Poplar, 32 in. dia. bears N. 41 E. 30 links dist. 

A Poplar, 36 in. dia. bears N. 43 W. 25 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 30 in. dia. bears S. 32 W. 25 links dist. 

A Sugar Tree, 21 in. dia. bears S 35 E. 40 links dist. 

Land level; good, 2d rate, 

Timber, Sugar Tree, Poplar, Walnut, and Oak; undergrowth, 

same and Hazel. 

[ 17 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

23.00 

40.00 

42.50 

63.00 

80.24 

40.12 

80.24 

40.00 

80.11 

40.11 

80.11 

6.56 

23.00 

34.58 

40.00 

50.00 

75.86 

80.00 

East, on a random line between sections 1 and 12, 

Enter high, broken ridges, bearing N. E. and South, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

A spring branch, 10 links wide, runs S. W. 

To foot of high mountain; bears North and South, 

Intersected the East Boundary ofthe Township 13 links North 

ofpost corner to sections 1 and 12, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 1 and 12, 

Set a post on top of narrow ridge, bearing North and 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

South, for quarter section corner, from which 

A Sugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears N. 20 E. 32 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 24 in. dia. bears S. 56 W. 25 linksdist. 

The corner to sections 1,2,11,12, 

Land very broken and mountainous, 

Timber, Sugar Tree, Beech; various kinds ofOak and 

On this line, and towards the foot ofthe mountain, we 

Hickory. 

discovered gold dust; and throughout the line we observed many specimens of what appeared to be rich auriferous quartz. 

North, on a random line between sections 1 and 2, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected the North Boundary 32 links East of corner to 

sections 1 and 2, from which corner I run 

South, on a true line between sections 1 and 2, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

Variation 18" 00' East, 

AWhiteOak,20in.dia.bearsN.31 W. 65linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 14 in. dia. bears S. 49 E. 32 links dist 

The corner to sections 1,2,11,12, 

Land level; good, rich soil, 

Timber, Walnut, Sugar Tree, Beech, and various kinds of 

Oak; open woods. 

February 2d, 1854. 

North, between sections 34 and 35, 

AHickory, 36 in. dia. 

To foot ofhill; bears East and West, 

A Walnut, 38 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Beech, 16 in. dia. bears S. 18 E. 13 linksdist. 

A Beech, 10 in. dia. bears N. 69 W. 40 links dist. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

A Maple, 24 in. dia. 

An Ash, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 26,27,34 and 35, from which 

479 
[ 18 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

40.00 

80.08 

40.04 

80.08 

8.47 

29.18 

40.00 

46.37 

60.48 

80.00 

40.00 

48.00 

80.00 

An Ash, 30 in. dia. bears N. 30 E. 24linksdist. 

An Ash, 36 in. dia. bears N. 52 W. 19 linksdist. 

ABeech, 16 in. dia. bears S. 69 W. 41 linksdist. 

ABeech, 14 in. dia. bears S. 67 E. 12 linksdist. 

Land, South 23 chains, broken; the balance level, rich soil, 

rimber, Ash, Beech, Oak, and Hickory; undergrowth, same and 

Spice. 

East, on a random line between sections 26 and 35, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

[ntersected N. and S. line 20 links North ofthe corner to 

sections 25,26,35 and 36, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 26 and 35, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

Variation 17" 37' East, 

ABeech, 14 in. dia. bears N. 56 E. 12 linksdist. 

ABeech, 12 in. dia. bears S. 32 W. 32 linksdist. 

The corner to sections26,27,34 and 35, 

Land level; good, rich soil, 

Timber, Beech, Elm, Ash, and Walnut. 

North, between sections 26 and 27, 

An Elm, 20 in. dia. 

A Lynn, 34 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Sugar Tree, 14 in. dia. bears N. 54E. 27 links dist. 

ABeech, 12 in. dia. bears S. 13 W 31 linksdist. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

A Poplar, 40 in. dia. 

A Black Oak, 36 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 22,23,26,27, from which 

A White Oak, 30 in. dia. bears N. 50 E. 13 links dist. 

A Walnut, 30 in. dia. bears N. 36 W. 14 linksdist. 

A Walnut, 24 in. dia. bears S. 24 W. 16 links dist. 

An Ironwood, 8 in. dia. bears S. 32 E. 24 links dist. 

Timber, Walnut, Poplar, White Oak, Beech and Hickory 

About 10 chains from this corner on the S. W. and on the 

left bank of Elk creek we discovered evidences of 

extensive ancient works, supposed to be fortifications, 

with many ancient mounds in the vicinity. 

Land, south half, 2d rate; north half, 1st rate, 

~~ 

East, on a random line between sections 23 and 26, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

A stream, 12 links wide, outlet to a lake in the middle 

Intersected North and South line 15 links North ofpost 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

of section 26, runs N. W. 

corner 

[ 19 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

40.00 

80.00 

to sections 23,24,25,26, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 23 and 26, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

ABeech, 16 in. dia. bears N. 72 W. 18 links dist. 

A Beech, 10 in. dia. bears S. 72 W. 16 links dist. 

The corner to sections 22,23,26,27, 

Land level, good; 2drate soil, 

Timber, Beech, Sugar Tree, Elm and Hickory. 

Notes of the meanders of a small lake in section 26 

Begin at the quarter section corner on the line between 

24.00 

8.00 

24.20 

40.00 

41.60 

sections 23 and 26, and run thence South 

ro the North margin of the lake, where set a post for 

meander corner, from which 

ABeech, 14 in. dia. bears N. 45 E. 10 links dist. 

ABeech, 9 in. dia. bears N. 15 W. 14links dist. 

I'hence meander around the lake as follows: 

1 links wide runs N. E. 9.53"E. 17.75 

9.3"E. 13.00 

9.30'W. 8.00 

9.65" W. 12.00 to apoint previously determined 20.30 

At 75 links cross outlet to lake 10 

chains North of the quarter section corner on the line 

between sections 26 and 35, 

Set post meander corner, Maple, 16 in. dia. bears S. 15 W. 

20 links dist. 

Ash, 12 in. dia. bears S. 21 E. 15 links dist. 

N' 63" w' lo'oo 

N. 13" w. 21.00 

N. 52 E. 17.30 to the place ofbeginning. 

This is a beautiful lake, with well-defined banks from 

Land, 1st rate. 

North, between sections 22 and 23, 

Elk creek, 150 links wide, runs S. W. 

Same creek, rapid current, rocky bed and banks, 150 links 

wide, runs S. E. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 34E. 48 links, 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 9 W. 45 links, 

In this vicinity we discovered remarkable 

fossil remains of animals well worthy the { attention ofnaturalists. 

6 to 10 feet high. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

Same creek, 150 links wide, rocky bed and banks, runs West. 

About 500 chains below the crossing of the line a stream 20 

Two chains below the mouth ofthis stream the creek turns 

links wide comes in from the North, 

South 

[ 20 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

47.00 

65.00 

68.00 

69.92 

70.50 

80.00 

40.00 

80.14 

40.07 

Here is a very fine mill seat, the fall in the river being 

about 6 feet in the distance ofthree chains. Both banks 

of the creek about 10 feet high, composed principally of 

limestone of excellent quality, 

Enter wet prairie near the West end, bearing N. W. and East, 

Leave wet prairie, bearing East and West, 

The road from Astoria to Williamsburg, bearing S. 80 E. and 

A White Oak, 18 in. dia. 

Enter high, rolling land, bearing East and West, 

Set apost for corner to sections 14,15,22 and 23, from which 

An Elm, 16 in. dia. bears N. 27 E. 50 links dist. 

An Elm, 24 in, dia. bears N. 34 W. 45 links dist. 

A Sugar Tree, 18 in. dia. bears S. 60 W. 42 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 24 in. dia. bears S. 52 E. 23 linksdist. 

balance part wet, 2d rate, 

N. 60 W. 

Land, south ofwet prairie at 47 chains, broken, 3d rate; the 

Timber, Elm, Sugar Tree, Oak, and Hickory, 

February 3d, 1854. 

East, on a random line between sections 14 and 23, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected North and South line 14 links North of the 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

corner to sections 13,14,23, and24, from which corner 

I run 

West, on a true line between sections 14 and 23, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

ASugarTree,30in,dia. bearsN.39E. 3llinksdist. 

A Mulberry, 12 in. dia. bears S. 26 W. 4 links dist. 

480 
80.14 

14.14 

34.13 

40.00 

47.20 

61.84 

77.72 

80.00 

To corner to sections 14,15,22,23, 

Land gently rolling; good soil, 

Timber, Elm, Sugar Tree, Oak, and Mulberry. 

r 22 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

North, between sections 14 and 15, 

A Sugar Tree, 14 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 22 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

ABeech, 24 in. dia. bears N. 45 W. 37 links dist. 

A Sugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears S. 43 E. 74 links dist. 

A Walnut, 27 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 36 in. dia. 

A stream, 25 links wide, rapid current, runs S. W. 

Set a post for corner to sections 10,11,14,15, from which 

A Burr Oak, 28 in. dia. bears N. 16 E. 40 links dist. 

A Black Oak, 30 in. dia. bears N. 17 W. 32 links dist. 

[ 21 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAIN: 

8.25 

13.00 

40.00 

80.16 

40.08 

80.16 

5.29 

39.16 

40.00 

45.17 

63.79 

71.12 

80.00 

18.36 

40.00 

80.10 

40.05 

A White Oak, 14 in. dia. bears S. 15 W. 38 links dist. 

A Hickory, 15 in. dia. bears S. 12 E. 36, 

Land gently rolling; 2d rate. 

Timber, various kinds of Oak, Beech and Walnut; open woods. 

East, on a random line between sections 11 and 14, 

Astream, 25 links wide, runs S. W. 

A stream, 10 links wide, runs N. W. 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected N. and S. line 20 links North ofpost corner to 

West, on a true line between sections 11 and 14, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

sections 11,12,13,14, from which corner1 run 

Variation 17" 37' East, 

A Sugar Tree, 16 in. dia. bears N. 66 E. 35 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 14 in. dia. bears S. 44 W. 13 links dist. 

To corner to sections 10,11,14,15, 

Land rolling, but not broken; good soil. 

Timber good; various kinds of Oak, Beech, Sugar Tree, Elm 

and Ash. 

North, between sections 10 and 11, 

A White Oak, 24 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 36 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Beech, 15 in. dia. bears N. 18 W. 42 links dist. 

A Beech, 18 in. dia. bears S. 62 E. 12 linksdist. 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

A Sugar Tree, 27 in. dia. 

A Sugar Tree, 30 in. dia. 

A brook, 20 links wide, rapid current, gravelly bottom, runs 

West; soon turns South, 

Set a post for corner to sections 2,3,10,11, from which 

ASugarTree, 18in. dia. bearsN. 13 E. 61 linksdist. 

A Beech, 24 in. dia. bears N. 48 W. 26 links dist. 

A White Oak, 13 in. dia. bears S. 39 W. 40 links dist. 

No tree in section 11 convenient to mark, 

Land gently rolling, good; 2d rate, 

rimber, various kinds ofOak, Beech, Walnut; open woods. 

East, on a random line between sections 2 and 11, 

4 brook, 20 links wide, runs S. W. 

3et a post for temporary quarter section,corner, 

[ntersected N. and S. line 12 links North of the corner to 

sections 1,2,11,12, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 2 and 11, 

3et a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

Variation 17" 35' East, 

CHAINS 

80.10 

40.00 

80.00 

40.00 

80.00 

5.61 

13.20 

40.00 

49.10 

71.04 

80.00 

18.00 

40.00 

48.20 

50.20 

79.90 

ABeech, 18 in. dia. bears N. 35 W. 5 links dist. 

ABeech, 14 in. dia. bears S. 47 E. 49 links dist. 

The corner to sections 2,3,10,11, 

Land gently rolling; soil good, 

Timber, Beech, Sugar Tree, Elm and Oak; West part brushy; 

East part open woods. 

North, on a random line between sections 2 and 3, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected the North Boundary ofthe Township 25 links East 

South, on a true line between sections 2 and 3, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

An Elm, 8 in. dia. bears N. 35 W. 5 linksdist. 

AHickory, 10 in. dia. bears S. 75 E. 18 links dist. 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

ofthe corner to sections 2 and 3, from which corner I run 

Variation 17" 51' East, 

The corner to sections 2,3,10,11, 

Land gently rolling; good, 2d rate, 

Timber, various kinds of Oak, Beech, Elm and Hickory; open 

woods. 

February 4, 1854. 

North, between sections 33 and 34, 

An Ash, 22 in. dia. 

An Elm, 15 in. dia. 

Set a sand stone, 15 in. long, 12 in. wide, and 4 in. thick, 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

for quarter section corner, from which 

A Beech, 15 in. dia. bears N. 22 E. 22 links dist. 

A Beech, 24 in. dia. bears S. 78 W. 15 linksdist. 

ABlack Oak, 36 in. dia. 

An Elm, 30 in. dia. 

Set a post on high ridge bearing N. S. for corner to sections 

27,28,33,34, from which 

A White Oak, 14 in. dia. bears N. 22 E. 18 links dist. 

ABeech, 8 in. dia. bears N. 48 W. 14linksdist. 

An Elm, 12 in. dia. bears S. 16 W. 42 links dist. 

ABeech, 10 in. dia. bears S. 74 E. 14 links dist. 

Land broken; poor soil; not fit for cultivation, 

Timber, Beech, Oak, Sugar Tree and Elm. 

East, on a random line between sections 27 and 34, 

To foot of hill bearing North and S. E. 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corneh, 

A brook, 20 links wide, runs North, 

A brook, 15 links wide, runs N. W. 

[ntersected N. and S. line 14 links North ofthe corner to 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

sec- 

[ 23 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian 

CHAINS. 

39.95 

79.90 

tions 26,27,34, and 35, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 27 and 34, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

A Sugar Tree, 15 in. dia. bears N. 32 W. 32 linksdist. 

ASugar Tree, 15 in. dia. bears S. 52 E. 26 links dist. 

The corner to sections 27,28,33, and 34, 

Land, east ofhill; gently rolling; good soil, 

Timber, Sugar Tree, Elm, Oak, and Ash, 

North, between sections 27 and 28, 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

481 
2.11 

20.42 

34.00 

40.00 

62.16 

64.20 

80.00 

40.00 

75.70 

80.06 

40.03 

80.06 

A Black Oak, 30 in. dia. 

An Elm, 36 in. dia. 

To foot of hill bearing S. W. and S. E. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Buckeye, 10 in. dia. bears N. 30 W. 6 links dist. 

APoplar, 36 in. dia. bears S. 15 E. 38 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 24 in. dia. 

Elk creek, 200 links wide, rapid current; bluffbank 20 

feet high; South side runs west; enter bottom after 

crossing creek, 

Set a sandstone 16 in. long, 12 in. wide, and 6 in. thick, 

for corner to sections 21,22,27,28, from which 

AnElm, 15in.dia.bearsN.31E. 14linksdist. 

ABeech, 14 in. dia. bears N. 43 W. 37 links dist. 

An Elm, 20 in. dia. bears S. 24 W. 24 links dist. 

A Beech, 24 in. dia. bears S. 20 E. 52 links dist. 

creek rich bottom, 

Land, South ofcreek, broken and rolling, 3drate; North of 

Timber, Beech, Elm, various kinds of Oak and Hickory. 

East, on a random line between sections 22 and 27, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Elk creek, 200 links wide, gentle current, gravelly bottom, 

Intersected North and South line 15 links North of the 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

runs S. W. 

corner to sections 22,23,26, and 27, from which corner 

I run 

West, on a true line between sections 22 and 27, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

An Elm, 14 in. dia. bears N. 50 E. 16 links dist. 

AMulberry, 10 in. dia. bears S. 87 W. 43 links dist. 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

The corner to sections 21,22,27,28, 

Land level; rich bottom, 1st rate, 

Timber, Elm, Beech, Oak, andHickory, 

North, Between sections 21 and 22, 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

[ 24 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

3.15 

32.32 

33.50 

52.70 

56.11 

80.00 

A Walnut, 18 in. dia. 

An Ash, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post on the South bank of a lake ofdeep, clear water, 

for corner to fractional sections 21 and 22, from which 

AMaple, 16 in. dia. bears S. 33 W. 21 links dist. 

An Ash, 12 in. dia. bears S. 21 E. 34 links dist. 

To obtain the distance across the lake, I send my flagman 

around the west end thereof, who sets the flag on its 

North bank, and in the line between sections 21 and 22, 

I now run a base West (from the corner on South bank) 5.60 

chains, to a point from which the flag bears N. 16" 15' 

E. and continue said base line West, and at 9 chains and 

6 links, a point from which said flag bears N. 25" 15' E. 

and taking the mean between the results so ascertained, 

find for the distance across the lake, on the line 

between sections 21 and 22,19 chains and 20 links, to 

which add 33.50 chains, makes 

To the flag on the North bank ofthe lake, 

Here set a post for corner to fractional sections 21 and 22, 

from which 

An Ash, 16 in. dia. bears N. 21 E. 15 links dist. 

An Elm, 14 in. dia. bears N. 71 W. 23 links dist. 

cannot he established, 

The point for quarter section corner being in the lake, 

An Elm, 36 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 15,16,21,22, 

from which 

ABlack Oak, 12 in. dia. bears N. 83 E. 23 links dist. 

ABuckeye, 10 in. dia. bears N. 82 W. 17 links dist. 

A White Oak, 14 in. dia. bears S. 1 W. 14links dist. 

ABlackOak, 15in.dia.bearsS. 28E.24linksdist. 

Land level; rich bottom; not subject to inundation, 

Timber, Elm, Oak, Hickory, and Ash. 

Field notes of the meanders of Clear Lake. 

Begin at the corner to fractional sections 21 and 22, on 

East, 10.00 chains, thence 

N. 80 E. 12.00 'I 

S.75E. 5.00 " 

S.60E. 5.00 " 

S.30E. 5.00 " 

S.1OW. 6.00 " 

S.36W. 8.00 " 

S.82W. 10.00 " 

West, 10.00 I' 

N. 89 W. 8.55 " to the corner to fractional 

sections 21 and 22, on the South bank ofthe lake. 

Thence in section 21 

the North bank, and run thence, in section 22, as follows: 

[ 25 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

40.00 

58.00 

65.50 

79.94 

39.97 

79.94 

N. 75 W. 

N. 87 W. 10.50 " 

N. 62 W. 8.00 " 

N. 43 W. 5.50 " 

N. 34 W. 4.20 " 

North, 5.00 " 

N. 35 E. 7.00 " 

N. 55 E. 8.00 " 

East, 5.00 " 

S. 75 E. 3.00 It 

S. 35 E. 6.50 " 

S. 67% E. 11.10 " tothecornertofractional 

9.00 chains, thence 

At 1.50 chains outlet to 

lake 20 links wide runs :{ South West. 

sections 21 and 22, on the North bank of the lake, and 

place of beginning, 

Land, around this lake, good, rich soil; banks from 8 to 10 

feet high, except at the Western part, as far South as 

the outlet, where the land is level and wet, 

Timber, good Black Oak, Hickory, and Ash. 

Ifthe Deputy should find it more convenient to meander 

the lake before continuing the line North ofit, he will 

do so. 

Monday, February 6th, 1854. 

~ ~ 

East, on a random line between sections 15 and 22, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

The road from Astoria to Williamsburg bearing N. W. 

Astream, 20 links wide, runs South, 

Intersected North and South line 12 linksNorth of the 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

and S. E. 

corner to sections 14,15,22, and 23, from which corner 

I run 

West, on a true line between sections 15 and 22, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Sugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears N. 35 W. 21 linksdist. 

A Lynn, 18 in. dia. hears S. 28 E. 81 links dist 

Variation 17" 41' East, 

The corner to sections 15,16,21,22, 

Land, gently rolling; good, rich soil, 

Timber, good; various kinds of Oak, Hickory, Ash, and Sugar 

Tree. 

North, between sections 15 and 16, 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

482 
4.68 

13.00 

16.75 

CHAINS. 

80.00 

An Elm, 24 in. dia. 

Leave timber and enter high rolling prairie, bearing East 

The road from Astoria to Williamsburg bears N. 80 W. and 

and West, 

S. 80 E. 

Deposited a quart of charcoal and set a post for corner to 

sections 3,4,9,10, and raised a mound, as per 

instructions, and planted N. W. 4 White Oak acorns, S. W. 

126 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

40.00 

50.00 

55.00 

61.00 

80.00 

40.00 

46.50 

61.40 

79.86 

39.93 

79.86 

40.00 

51.25 

Set a hard flint stone, which cannot be marked, for quarter 

section corner; said stone is 16 inches long, 12 inches 

wide, and 8 inches thick, and from which a cone White 

Oak, 16 in. dia. bearsN. 42 W. 351 links dist. 

No other tree convenient to mark. 

Enter John Orr'sfield, bearingN. W. and S. E. 

A point 3 chains West of Orr's house, 

Leave field bearing N. W. and S. E. This field contains 

about 10 acres, the line passing through the middle, 

Set a post in mound, with trench, as per instructions, for 

corner to sections 9,10,15,16, from which corner a 

granite boulder, four feet in diameter at the surface of 

the ground, and three feet high, bears N. 72 E. 257 links 

distant. I cut a (X) cross near the top, facing the 

corner, the cross-marks being four inches long and 

one-fourth of an inch deep. 

occasional boulders appear above the natural surface. 

Land high, rollingprairie; good soil; not stony, but 

East, on a random line between sections 10 and 15, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Leave prairie and enter timber bearing North and S. 40 E. 

A stream, 25 links wide, gentle current, muddy bottom, runs 

Intersected N. and S. line at the post corner to sections 

West, on a true line between sections 10 and 15, 

Set a sand stone, 20 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 4 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

South, 

10,11,14,15, from which corner I run 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

inches thick for quarter section corner, raise a mound 2 

feet high West side of stone. 

From the stone a Bur Oak, 16 in. dia. in the Eastern edge 

ofthe timber, bearsN. 75 E. 674 linksdistant. 

The corner to sections 9,10,15,16. 

Land; the prairie rolling; good soil; timber land level; 

Timber, Oak, Hickory and Ash. 

1st rate. 

North, between sections 9 and 10, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, raise a mound with 

trench, as per instructions. A lone Bur Oak, 10 in. dia. 

bears S. 75 E. 530 links distant; no other tree near. 

This corner about 10 chains West of a grove of Oak and 

Hickory ofabout 15 acres. 

grove bears N. 45 E. 

10 acres North of the house. 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

From this corner Jacob Fry's house in the North end of 

A point from which Fry's house bears East, a field of about 

[ 27 1 

40.00 

55.00 

79.90 

39.95 

79.90 

40.00 

42.00 

55.15 

66.50 

79.95 

39.95 

79.95 

Wild Cherry stones, N. E. Beech nuts, and S. E. a Butter 

nut. 

cultivation. 

Land high, rolling prairie; good rich soil; fit for 

East, on a random line between sections 3 and 10, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Leave prairie and enter timber, bearing N. and S. 

[ntersected N. and S. line 14 links South of the corner to 

sections2,3,1O,ll,fromwhichcornerIrun 

West, on a true line between sections 3 and 10, 

Set a sand stone, 16 inchs long, 12 inches wide, and 4 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

Variation 17" 52' East, 

inches thick for quarter section corner, from which a 

granite boulder 4 feet long E. and W. by 3?h feet wide 

N. and S. and 2 feet high above ground, and marked '14 

with a pick, bears N. 31 E. 153 links distant; no other 

boulder in sight ofthis corner. 

The corner to sections 3,4,9,10, 

Land level; goodrich soil, 

Timber, Elm, Beech, Maple, and Ash. 

North, on a random line between sections 3 and 4, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Leave prairie and enter timber, bearing S. E. and S. W. 

Aspring branch, 10 links wide, runs N. W. 

Enterprairie,bearingN. W. andS.E. 

Intersected the North Boundary of the Township 30 links 

East of the corner to sections 3 and 4, from which corner 

I run 

Variation 17" 46' East, 

South, on a true line between sections 3 and 4, 

Set a Mulberry post 6 inches diameter in the North point of 

Variation 17" 59' East, 

prairie, from which 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bearsN. 41 E. 195links. 

ABlack Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 37 W. 205 links 

The corner to sections 3,4,9,10, 

Land level; good rich soil; fit for cultivation, 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, and Elm. 

February 7th, 1854. 

All traces ofthe corner to sections 4,5,32 and 33 on the 

South Boundary of the Township having disappeared, I 

restore and re-established said corner in the following 

manner, viz: 

Begin at the quarter section corner the line between 

sections 4 and 33. One of the witness trees to this 

corner has fallen down, and the post is gone. 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

40.00 

80.06 

40.03 

The Black Oak, 18 in. dia. bearing North 25 E. 32 links, 

standing and sound, 

I find also the Black Oak station tree, 24 in. dia. called 

for at 37.51 chains; and 2.49 chains West ofthe quarter 

section corner, set a new post at the point for quarter 

section corner, and mark for witness tree a White Oak, 20 

in. dia. bears N. 34 W. 37 links dist. 

West, with the oldmarked line, 

Set a post for temporary corner to sections 4,5,32 and 33, 

To a point 7 links South of the quarter section corner on 

the line between sections 5 and 32. This corner agrees 

with its description, and from which I run 

East, on the true line between sections 5 and 32, 

Variatien 18" 22' East, 

Set a lime stone 18 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 3 

Variation 18" 25' East, 

inches thick, for re-established corner to sections 4,5, 

483 
80.06 

19.85 

32.37 

40.00 

48.75 

58.20 

75.96 

80.00 

32 and 33, from which 

A White Oak, 12 in. dia. bears N. 21E. 41 linksdist. 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 41 W. 21 linksdist. 

ABlack Oak, 18 in. dia. bears S. 17 W. 32 links dist. 

ABur Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 21 E. 37 links dist. 

Thence between sections 4 and 33, 

The quarter section corner on said line, 

The difference in measurement, being very small, will be 

rejected. 

North, between sections 32 and 33, 

A Beech, 25 in. dia. 

An Elm, 30 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

ABeech, 24 in. dia. bears N. 11 E. 30 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears S. 40 W. 9 linksdist. 

course N. E. 

A stream, 20 links wide, rapid current, runs East; general 

A Sugar Tree, 30 in. dia. 

A Sugar Tree, 25 in. dia 

Set a post with trench for corner to sections 28,29,32 

and 33, from which 

An Elm, 20 in. dia. bears N. 66 W. 29 links dist. 

ABeech, 10 in. dia. bears S. 16 E. 13 links dist. 

No other trees convenient to mark, 

Planted N. E. 4 Hickory nuts, and S. W. 4 Cherry stones, 

Land gently rolling; good rich soil, 

Timber, Oak, Elm, Beech, and Sugar Tree. 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

19.50 

40.00 

60.00 

80.12 

40.06 

80.12 

17.13 

29.65 

40.00 

52.73 

71.15 

80.00 

East, on a random line between sections 28 and 33, 

A stream, 25 links wide, runs North; rapid current; the 

line crosses about two chains below the mouth of a 

beautiful spring branch 10 links wide; comes from the 

hills on the S. E. 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

To foot of hills bearing N. and S. 

Intersected the N. and S. line 7 links North ofthe corner 

to 27,28,33 and 34, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line, between sections 28 and 33, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Hickory, 10 in. dia. bears N. 25 W. 22 links dist. 

An Elm, 24 in. dia. bears S. 9 W. 14 linksdist. 

Variation 17" 37' East, 

The corner to sections28,29; 32,33, 

Land, 20 chains, East part very broken; the balance gently 

Timber, Oak, Elm, Ash, and Sugar Tree. 

rolling; good rich soil, 

North, between sections 28 and 29, 

A Sugar Tree, 30 in. dia. 

A Beech, 24 in. dia. 

Set apost for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

An Elm, 14 in. dia. bears N. 6 W. 200 links dist. 

A White Oak, 12 in. dia. bears S. 41 E. 122 linksdist. 

A Beech, 36 in. dia. 

Top of limestone bluff, 20 feet high, on the South bank of 

Elk creek, 200 links wide, rapid current, gravelly 

bottom, runs West; soon turns S. W. 

Enter low wet bottom on the right bank of creek, 

Set a post for corner to sections 20,21,28,29, from which 

A Hickory, 13 in. dia bears N. 39 E. 16 links dist. 

A Hickory, 18 in. dia. bears N. 32 W. 22 links dist. 

23.00 

40.00 

43.20 

80.18 

A Walnut, 17 in. dia. bears S. 48 W. 40 links dist. 

A Walnut, 26 in. dia. bears S. 56 E. 34links dist. 

Land, South of creek, rolling; good, rich soil, 

Timber, Oak, Elm, Beech, and Sugar Tree; open woods; no 

undergrowth. 

East, on a random line between sections 21 and 28, 

A stream, 10 links wide, runs S. W. 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

A stream, 20 links wide, low, muddy banks and bottom, runs 

Intersected North and South line 20 links North ofthe 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

South, 

corner to sections 21,22,27,28, from which corner Irun 

[ 30 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

40.09 

80.18 

8.24 

28.94 

52.33 

54.20 

57.31 

72.50 

80.00 

West, on a true line between sections 21 and 28, 

Set a post about 200 links North ofthe right bank ofthe 

creek for quarter section corner, from which 

ASugar Tree, 14 in. dia. bears N. 57 E. 45 linksdist. 

ABuckeye, 15 in. dia. bears S. 61 W. 61 links dist. 

Variation 17" 31' East, 

The corner to sections 20,21,28,29, 

Land level, wet bottom; subject to inundation from 4 to 6 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, and Ash; no undergrowth. 

feet deep, 

North, between sections 20 and 21, 

A Bur Oak, 24 in. dia. 

An Ash, 15 in. dia. on the S. E. margin ofa large lake, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

across which no sight can be had because of the water 

bushes around lake lying principally in section 20, with 

low, muddy banks; mark said tree for corner to fractional 

sections 20 and 21, from which 

ARed Oak, 15 in. dia. bears S. 35 W. 32 links dist. 

A Water Willow, loin. dia. bears S. 21 E. 12 links dist 

NOTE.-The point for quarter section corner being in the 

lake, it cannot be established, 

I now run as follows around the East end of the lake in 

sec. 21. 

N.35E. 8.00 chains, thence 

N. lOE. 6.50 " 

N.15W. 5.50 " 

N. 40 W. 6.70 " to apoint in the line 

The northing on the 4 courses of meanders is 23.39 chains, 

To the point in the line between sections 20 and 21 on the 

between sections 20 and 21, 

to which add 28.94 chains, makes 

N. E. bank of the lake. Here set a post for corner to 

fractional sections 20 and 21, from which 

An Elm, 20 in. dia. bears N. 22 E. 24links dist. 

ARedOak,24in.dia.bearsN. 17 W.21linksdist. 

lake, 

A stream, 25 links wide, gentle current, running S. W. into 

A Red Oak, 16 in. dia. 

Leave level, rich bottom and enter upland, bearing E. and W. 

Set apost for corner to sections 16,17,20,21, from which, 

A Black Oak, 10 in. dia. bears N. 53 E. 53 links dist. 

ABeech, 14 in. dia. bears N. 16 W. 14 linksdist. 

ABur Oak, 12 in. dia. bears S. 8 W. 20 links dist. 

ABeech, 16 in. dia. bears S. 19 E. 15 linksdist. 

from 4 to 6 feet deep, 

Land mostly low, level, rich bottom; subject to inundation 

Timber, Oak, Beech, Maple, and Ash; open woods, 

February 8th, 1854. 

484 
[ 31 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

CHAINS. 

18,90 

19,50 

21,55 

40,OO 

61,50 

70,OO 

80.20 

40.10 

80.20 

Land, upland broken, 3d rate; the bottom level and rich, 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, &c.; in the bottom, Elm and Ash; 

undergrowth, same, Pawpaw, Spice, and Vines. 

9.72 

26.84 

39.00 

40.00 

54.20 

80.00 

40.00 

45.00 

81.20 

East, on a random line between sections 16 and 21, 

A Brook, 10 links wide, runs South, 

Same brook runs North, 

Same brook runs South, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner 

Enter a small bushy swamp, 

Leave swamp, which contains about 15 acres, and lies mostly 

in section 21, 

Intersected N. and S. line 16 links North ofthe corner to 

sections 15,16,21 and 22, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 16 and 21, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

Variation 17" 33' East, 

ABeech, 30 in. dia. bearsN. 19 W. 31 linksdist. 

A Buckeye, 24 in. dia. bears S. 11 E. 29 linksdist. 

The corner to sections 16,17,20,21, 

Land rolling; 2d rate; wet around swamp, 

Timber, Oak, Beech, Buckeye, and Hickory; thick undergrowth 

of same and Hazel. 

North, between sections 16 and 17, 

A Bur Oak, 30 in. dia. 

A Bur Oak, 36 in. dia. 

The road from Astoria to Williamsburg bearing N. 80 W. and 

S. 80 E. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Lynn, 15 in. dia. bears N. 88 W. 17 links dist. 

ABlackOak, 18india.bearsS. 76E.21linksdist. 

A White Oak, 28 in. dia. 

Set apost for corner to sections 8,9,16,17, from which 

AnElm, loin. dia. bearsN. 28E. 5 linksdist. 

A Black Oak, 10 in. dia. bears N. 13 W. 48 links dist. 

An Elm, 12 in. dia. bears S. 41 W. 42 links dist. 

A Bur Oak, 6 in. dia. bears S. 17 E. 105 links dist. 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

Land gently rolling; good; 2d rate, 

Timber, good quality and open woods, Oak, Elm, Ash, and 

Hickory. 

East, on a random line between sections 9 and 16, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Enter prairie, bearing N. and S. 

Intersected the N. and S. line 22 links North ofthe corner 

to sections 9,10,15,16; section 16 is therefore out 

of the proper limits, and I am of opinion that the error 

is in the 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

[Pages 32 and 33 missing.] 

[ 34 1 

13.75 

33.51 

40.00 

The line between sections 4 and 5 will strike Chickeeles 

river before reaching the Township line; I therefore 

run it 

North, on a true line between sections 4 and 5, 

A Cherry, 20 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

AWhiteOak,12in,dia. bearsN.24E. 12linksdist. 

A Beech, 28 in. dia. bears S. 44E. 21 links dist. 

No tree West ofthe line convenient to mark, 

A White Oak, 30 in. dia. 

Leave broken upland and enter Chickeeles river bottom, 

AHackberry, 24 in. dia. 

An Elm, 12 in. dia. on the left bank of Chickeeles river, 

bearingN. E. andS. W. 

mark it for corner to fractional sections 4 and 5, 

from which 

A Black Oak, 14 in. dia. bears S. 10 W. 18 links dist. 

An Elm, 18 in. dia. bears S. 45 E. 35 linksdist. 

The uplandbroken, 3drate; the bottomlevel, 1st rate, 

Timber, on upland, Oak; in bottom, Elm, Oak, Ash, 

and Hickory; undergrowth, Pawpaw and Spice. 

February loth, 1854. 

The point for corner to sections 5,6,31 and 32 being in a 

deep swamp, and not having been established, I begin at the 

witness corner on the S. E. edge ofthe swamp, 4.00 

chains East of said point, and run thence East 250 links 

(with the line between sections 5 and 32) to a point; 

thenceNorth 7.50 chains to a point; thence West 6.50 

chains to a point on the North edge of the swamp and in 

the line between sections 31 and 32, and 7.50 chains 

North of the point for corner to sections 31 and 32, on 

the South Boundary of the Township. I here set a post 

for witness point, from which 

ABurOak, 16in.dia.bearsN.31E. 25linksdist. 

An Ash, 12 in. dia. bears N. 25 W. 17 linksdist. 

From this witness point I run 

North, between sections 31 and 32, counting the distance 

from the point for corner to said sections in the swamp, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

A Walnut, 22 in. dia. 

An Ash, 35 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Beech, 20 in. dia. bears N. 12 W. 45 linksdist. 

A Sugar Tree, 20 in. dia. bears S. 12 E. 13 links dist. 

[ 35 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS 

57.74 

66.19 

80.00 

40.00 

80.16 

40.08 

80.16 

An Ash, 24 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 36 in. dia. 

Set a post with trench for corner to sections 29,30,31, 

32, from which 

ABeech, 26 in. dia. bears N. 9 W. 12 links dist. 

A Sugar Tree, 24 in. dia. bears S. 13 E. 56 links dist. 

And planted N. E. a Butter nut, and S. W. 4 Cherry stones, 

Land, South half level, North half rolling; good soil, 

Timber, Oak, Beech, Sugar Tree, and Walnut; undergrowth, 

same and Hazel on North part. 

East, on a random line between sections 29 and 32, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected the N. and S. line 10 links N. ofpost corner 

to sections 28,29,32 and 33, from which corner I run 

West, on a true line between sections 29 and32, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

Variation 17" 36' East, 

A Black Oak, 18 in. dia. bears N. 36 E. 42 links dist. 

A Bur Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 43 W. 47 links dist. 

The corner to sections 29,30,31,32, 

Land gently rolling; good soil; fit for cultivation, 

Timber, Oak, Beech, Hickory, and Walnut; open woods. 

West, on a true line between sections 30 and 31, knowing 

485 
3.41 

5.00 

8.00 

25.17 

40.00 

41.90 

CHAINS. 

39.95 

that it will strike the Chickeeles river in less than 

80.00 chains, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. 

Leave upland and enter creek bottom, bearing N. E. and S. W. 

Elk creek, 200 links wide, gentle current, muddy bottom and 

Ascertain the distance across the creek on the line as 

Cause the flag to be set on the right bank of the creek, 

banks, runs S. W. 

follows, viz: 

and in the line between sections 30 and 31. From the 

station on the left bank of creek, at 8.00 chains, I run 

South 245 links to a point from which the flag on the 

right bank bears N. 45 W. which gives for the distance 

across the creek, on the line between sections 30 and 31, 

2 chains 45 links. 

A Bur Oak, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Buckeye, 24 in. dia. bears N. 15 W. 8 links dist. 

A White Oak, 30 in. dia. bears S. 65 E. 12 links, 

navigable stream, for corner to fractional sections 30 

and31,fromwhich 

Set a post on the left bank of Chickeeles river, a 

West, on a true line between sections 17 and 20, 

Set a post near the North bank of the lake for quarter 

Variation 17" 37' East, 

section corner, from which 

[ 36 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

6.50 

13.00 

15.00 

31.00 

40.00 

49.71 

68.19 

80.00 

40.00 

80.10 

40.05 

80.10 

40.00 

75.53 

A Buckeye, 16 in. dia. bears N. 50 E. 16 links dist. 

AHackberry, 15 in. dia. bears S. 79 E. 14 linksdist. 

Land, low bottom; subject to inundation 3 or 4 feet deep, 

Timber, Buckeye, Hackberry, Oak, and Hickory. 

North, between sections 29 and 30, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

Enter creek bottom, bearing N. E. and S. W. 

Elk creek, 200 links wide, runs S. W. 

Enter a small prairie, about 40 acres, 

Leave prairie and enter timber, bearing E. and W. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Hickory, 14 india. bears N. 78 E. 15 links dist. 

ABur Oak, 26 in. dia. bears N. 63 W. 19 links dist. 

ABlack Oak, 30 in. dia. 

A Walnut, 36 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 19,20,29,30, from which 

ABeech, 15 in. dia. bearsN. 24E. 18linksdist. 

A Blue Ash, 24 in. dia. bears N. 79 W. 10 links dist. 

A Bur Oak, 9 in. dia. bears S. 14 W. 10 links dist. 

ABlack Oak, 8 in. dia. bears S. 11 E. 14 links dist. 

Land, first half-mile, level prairie, and brushy, Oak and 

Hazel; second half-mile, some good timber, Oak, &c.; 

thick undergrowth, same. 

East, on a random line between sections 20 and 29, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected the N. and S. line 20 links North of the corner 

West, on a true line between sections 20 and 29, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 70" 25' East, 

to sections 20,21,28,29, from which corner I run 

Variation 17" 31' East, 

A Sugar Tree, 24in. dia. bears N. 17 W. 20 links dist. 

A Walnut, 14 in. dia. bears S. 10 E. 361inks dist. 

The corner to sections 19,20,29,30, 

Land level, and rather wet, 

Timber, Oak, Sugar Tree, Beech, and Walnut; open woods. 

~ ~~~ 

West, on a random line between sections 19 and 30, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected the West boundary of the Township 20 links 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

35.52 

South ofthe corner to sections 19 and 30, from which 

corner I run 

East, on a true line between sections 1 9 and 30, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A Sugar Tree, 18 in. dia. bears N. 26 W. 23 linksdist. 

An Ash. 10 in. dia. bears S. 86 E. 32 links dist. 

Variation 17" 31' East, 

[ 37 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

75.52 

7.10 

27.16 

34.00 

40.00 

49.00 

80.00 

40.00 

79.90 

rhe corner to sections 19,20,29,30, 

Land level; rich soil; not subject to inundation, 

rimber, Sugar Tree, Beech, Walnut, and Ash; undergrowth, 

Spice, Prickly Ash, and vines. 

February llth, 1854. 

Yorth, between sections 19 and 20, 

A Bur Oak, 20 in. dia. 

ALocust, 18 in. dia. 

A pond, 200 links wide, muddy bottom, and low banks; water 

not so deep as to prevent measuring across on the line 

with the chain. This pond extends about 15 chains East 

into section 20, and lies mostly in section 19, extending 

West, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

ABeech, 9 in. dia. bears N. 56 E. 44 links dist. 

ALynn, 12in.dia.bearsS. 36W. llllinksdist. 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

The S. W. bank of a lake to be meandered, 

Set a post for corner to fractional sections 19 and 20, from which 

ARed Oak, 12 in. dia. bears S. 45 W. 21 linksdist. 

A Lynn, 15 in. dia. bears S. 23 E. 24links dist. 

From this corner offset West 7.50 chains to a point; thence 

North on an offset line 24.00 chains to a point; thence 

East 7.50 chains to a point in the line between sections 

19 and 20-50 links in advance of lake; thence South to 

N. W. margin of lake, 50 links, where set a post for 

corner to fractional sections 19 and 20, from which 

A Red Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 27 E. 31 links dist. 

ABur Oak, 15 in. dia. bears N. 36 W. 24 linksdist. 

19,20,29,30, and from which1 continue the line 

between sections 19 and 20 North, counting the distance 

from the corner to sections 19,20,29,30, 

A Chesnut, 10 in. dia. bears N. 14 E. 14 links dist. 

ABuckeye, 12 in. dia. bearsN. 86 W. 13 linksdist. 

ABeech, 20 in. dia. bears S. 13 W. 16 links dist. 

A Buckeye, 20 in. dia. bears S. 27 E. 35 links dist. 

This corner is 72.50 chainsNorth of the corner to sections 

Set apost for corner to sections 17,18,19,20, from which 

Land level; rich soil, but too wet for cultivation, 

Timber, Oak, Walnut, Buckeye, and Beech; undergrowth, 

Prickly Ash and vines. 

East, on a random line between sections 17 and 20, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected N. and S. line 7 links North ofpost corner to 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

sections 16,17,20,21,fromwhichcornerIrun 

[ 38 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

486 
79.90 

A White Oak, 12 in. dia. bears N. 33 E. 19 links dist. 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. bears S. 16 W. 34 linksdist. 

From this corner I run South 150 links to a point on the 

North bank of the lake, where set a meander corner, 

from which 

ARed Oak, 15 in. dia. hears N. 21 E. 15 links dist. 

An Ash, 12 in. dia. bears N. 16 W. 12 linksdist. 

The corner to sections 17,18,19,20, 

Land level and wet; rich soil, 

Timber, Oak, Ash, Elm, and Beech; undergrowth, same, briers 

andvines. 

Meanders of Island Lake. 

Begin at the corner to fractional sections 19 and 20, on 

the N. W. margin ofthe lake, and run thence along the 

N. W. margin thereof, in fractional section 20, as follows, 

viz: 

N. 79E. 20.00 chains, thence 

N. 84E. 20.43 " to the meander corner 150 links 

South of the quarter section corner on the line between 

sections 17 and 20, thence 

S. 73 E. 

S.61E. 14.00 " 

S. 4O?h E. 19.22 " to the corner to fractional 

16.00 chains, thence 

sections 20 and 21, on the N.E. bank of lake, at 52.33 

chains. At 18.00 chains on this line across the mouth of 

a branch, 30 links wide, coming from N.E. 

Begin at the corner to fractional sections 20 and 21, on 

S. E. bank of lake, at 28.94 chains, and run thence 

along the Southern bank of said lake in fractional section 

20, as follows: 

S. 70 W. 

S.85W. 23.00 " *At 14.50 chainscross 

outlet to lake, 30 links 

wide, running W. about 5 

chains into pond. 

N. 70 W. 12.00 " 

N. 30 W. 18.00* " 

N. 63 W. 20.24 " to the corner to fractional 

20.00 chains, thence 

:: } 

sections 19 and 20, at 49.00 chains; thence in section 19 

as follows, viz: 

N. 75 W. 

N.60W. 2.00 " 

N. 1OW. 6.00 " 

N. lOE. 6.00 " 

N.25E. 3.00 " 

N. 38% E. 8.48 I' to the corner to fractional 

5.00 chains, thence 

sections 19 and 20 on the bank of lake at 72.50 chains. 

[ 39 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS Phis lake has low, wet, brushy banks, and has an island of 

timber in the middle, which ought to be meandered. 

Timber, around lake, Ash, Maple, and Red Oak. I cause a 

flag to be set on the North bank of the island South of 

the meander corner, which is 150 links South ofthe 

quarter section corner on the line between sections 17 

and 20. From the meander corner run a base 7.50East to 

a point, from which the flag bears S. 45 W. which gives 

for the distance across the water to the flag on the 

island 7.50 chains. Set a meander post in the place of 

the flag, from which a Red Oak, 15 in. dia. bears S. 21 

W,24links,andanAsh, 10in.dia. bearsS.25E. 17 

links dist. From the meander post I run around the 

island as follows: 

3.62 E. 7.50 chains, thence 

3.55E. 10.00 " 

3.20E. 5.00 " 

South 4.00 " 

3.25W. 6.00 " 

3.62W. 5.00 " 

3.80W. 4.00 " 

7.91 

16.54 

28.90 

West 3.50 " 

N.70W. 5.00 " 

N. 62 W. 15.00 " 

N. 45 W. 10.00 " 

N.35W. 6.00 " 

N.40E. 6.50 " 

N.82E. 8.00 " 

S. 88?h E. 14.20 " to the meander corner and place 

ofbeginning. This island is well timbered, and is good, 

dry land, 

vines. 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, Beeh, and Ash; undergrowth, same and 

The line between sections 18 and 19 will strike the river 

West, on a true line between sections 18 and 19, 

ABuckeye, 15 in. dia. 

ALocust, 24 in. dia. 

Set a post on the left bank of Chickeeles river for corner 

to fractional sections 18 and 19, from which 

A Buckeye, 24 in. dia. bears N. 76 E. 22 links dist. 

A Hackberry, 16 in. dia. bears S. 24 W. 15 links. 

There is an island in the river opposite this corner. To 

ascertain the distance on the line between sections 18 

and 19 to the island, I send my flagman across the 

slough, who sets the flag on the S. E. bank of the 

island, and in the line between sectiocns 18 and 19, from 

the corner to said sections on the left bank of the 

river. I run South 260 links to a point from 

before reaching the range line, I therefore run it 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

[ 40 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

32.69 

36.52 

39.10 

40.00 

45.50 

which the flag on the island bears N. 45 W. which 

gives for the distance 3.79 chains, to which add 28.90 

chains, makes 

corner to fractional sections 18 and 19, from which 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 41 W. 37 links dist. 

ABur Oak, 14 in. dia. bears S. 81 W. 16links dist. 

To the flag. Set a post in the place ofthe flag for 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. 

A Bur Oak, 16 in. dia. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. bears N. 15 W. 21 links dist. 

A Walnut, 20 in. dia. bears S. 21 E. 17 linksdist. 

Set a post on the N. W. bank of the island for corner to 

fractional sections 18 and 19, from which 

A Hackberry, 10 in. dia. bears N. 85 E. 15 links dist. 

AHickory, 15 in. dia. bears S. 51 E. 17 linksdist. 

From this corner I meander around the island as follows: 

In section 19, 

S. 60 W. 

S.43W. 8.00 " 

South 2.00 " 

East 2.00 " 

N.55E. 4.00 " 

N. 60 E. 10.00 " 

N. 66% E. 14.15 " to the corner to fractional 

sections 18 and 19, on the S. E. bank of the island, 

thence in section 18, 

N. 70 E. 

N. 75 E. 10.00 " 

N.25E. 4.00 " 

North 2.50 " 

West 1.00 " 

S.66W. 2.00 " 

S.75W. 4.00 " 

S.80W. 10.00 " 

S. 63% W. 21.10 " tothecornerto fractional 

10.00 chains, thence 

10.00 chains, thence 

487 
6.57 

10.80 

sections 18 and 19, on the N. W. bank of island, 

and place of beginning. 

to inundation, 

and vines. 

Land, on island and main shore, level and rich; not subject 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, Ash, and Walnut; undergrowth, same 

North, between sections 17 and 18, 

A Hickory, 20 in. dia. 

Set a post on the left bank of Chickeeles river for corner 

Variation 17" 40' East. 

to fractional sections 17 and 18, from which 

ABuckeye, 8 in. dia. bears S. 25 W. 15 links dist. 

A Hackberry, 10 in. dia. bears S. 61 E. 3 links dist. 

Monday, February 13th, 1854. 

[ 41 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

Meanders of the left bank of Chickeeles river through the Township. 

Begin at the corner to fractional sections 4 and 33, in the North Boundary of 

the Township and on the left and S. E. bank of the river, and run thence 

down stream with the meanders of the left bank of said river, in fractional 

section 4, as follows: 

Causes. 

S. 76 W. 

S. 61 W. 

s. 59 w. 

s. 54 w. 

S. 40 W. 

S. 50 W. 

s. 37 w. 

s. 44 w. 

S. 38 W. 

s. 21 w. 

s. 10 w. 

South 

S. 9 E. 

S. 17 E. 

S. 10 E. 

S. 221/4 E. 

S. 17 E. 

S. 8E. 

s. 4w. 

S. 25 W. 

S. 78 W. 

S. 71 W. 

S. 65 W. 

s. 733/4 w 

S. 65 W. 

S. 60 W. 

Distances. 

18.50 chs. 

10.00 

8.30 

10.70 

5.60 

8.50 

17.00 

22.00 

26.72 

16.00 

13.00 

8.50 

5.00 

20.00 

12.00 

8.46 

15.00 

12.00 

22.00 

17.00 

12.00 

9.55 

15.00 

15.93 

14.00 

23.00 

Remarks. 

To the corner to fractional sections 4 and 

5: thence in section 5- 

To the corner to fractional sections 5 and 

8: thence in section 8- 

To the head of rapids. 

To foot of rapids. 

To the corner to fractional sections 8 

and 17. 

Land, along fractional section 8, high, rich 

bottom; not subject to inundation. 

The rapids are 37.00 chains long; rocky 

bottom; estimated fall 10 feet. 

Meanders in section 17. 

At 5 chains discovered a vein of coal, which 

appears to be 5 feet thick, and may be 

readily worked. 

At 3.00 chains the ferry across the river to 

Williamsburg, on the opposite side of the 

river. 

42 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

Causes. 

S. 42 W. 

s. 20 w. 

S.l61/2 W. 

S. 41 E. 

S. 49 E. 

S. 42 E. 

S. 12% E. 

S. 12 E. 

s. 12 w. 

S. 41 W. 

S. 58 W. 

s. 35 w. 

s. 20 w. 

s. 23V4 w. 

CHAINS 

15.10 

23.50 

Distances. 

0.00 chs. 

0.00 

3.83 

10.00 

.5.00 

.2.00 

5.30 

.o.oo 

.3.50 

9.00 

.1.00 

.1.00 

!O.OO 

8.80 

Remarks. 

At 2 chains cross outlet to pond and lake, 

50 links wide, to the corner to 

fractional sections 19 and 24, on the 

range line, 32.50 chains North of the 

corner to sections 19, 30, 24 and 25. 

Begin at the corner to fractional sections 

25 and 30, on the range line 1 chain 

South of the quarter section corner on 

said line, and run thence down stream 

with the meanders of the left bank of 

Chickeeles river, in fractional section 

30, as follows, viz: 

spring. 

village. 

At 10 chains discovered a fine mineral 

Here appear the remains of an Indian 

To the corner to fractional sections 30 and 

31; thence in section 31- 

To mouth of Elk river, 200 links wide; 

At 200 links across the creek. 

comes from the East. 

At 15 chains mouth of stream, 25 links 

wide; comes from S. E. 

To the corner to fractional sections 31 and 

36, on the range line, and 8.56 chains 

North of the corner to sections 1, 6, 31 

and 36, or S. W. corner to this Township. 

Land along the left bank of Chickeeles 

river is level rich soil, and only a 

small part subject to inundation. 

much undergrowth. 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, Beech, and Elm; not 

February 14th, 1854. 

From the corner to sections 30 and 31, on the West Boundary 

East, on a true line between sections 30 and 31, 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. 

Intersected the right bank of Chickeeles river, where set 

of the Township, I run 

Variation 18" East, 

a post for corner to fractional sections 30 and 31, 

from which 

ABlackOak, 16in.dia. bearsN.60W.25linksdist. 

A White Oak. 20 in. dia. bears S. 35 W. 32 links dist. 

[ 43 1 

CHAINS. 

To the corner to fractional sections 17 and 

18: thence in section 18- 

To the corner to fractional sections 18 and 

In section 19. 

19. 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

From this corner1 run South 12 links to apoint West of 

the corner to fractional sections 30 and 31, on the left 

bank of the river; thence continue South 314 links to a 

point from which the corner to fractional sections 30 and 

31,ontheleftbankoftheriver, bearsN. 72East, 

which gives for the distance across the river 9.65 

chains. The length of the line between sections 30 and 

31 as follows, viz: 

Part East of river ________________________________________ 41.90 

Part across river ________________________________________--- 9.65 

chains, 

488 
Part West of river ________________________________________ 23.50 

Total ________________________________________--------- 75.05 

Commence the meanders of section 31 at the corner to 

fractional sections 31 and 36, on the right bank of 

Chickeeles river, and run thence up stream with the 

meanders of the right bank of said river, in fractional 

section 31, as follows: 

N.25E. 7.00 chains, thence 

N.38E. 11,OO ” 

N. 50 E. 12.50 ” 

N. 25 E. 10.00 ” 

North 13.40 ” to the corner to fractional 

N. 45 W. 

N.40 W. 12.00 “ 

N. 34% W. 10.50 “ to the corner to fractional 

sections 30 and 31; thence in section 30 

14.00 chains, thence 

sections 25 and 30, on the right bank of Chickeeles 

river, 27.73 chains North of the corner to sections 25, 

30,31,36. 

Land level; rich bottom; not subject to inundation, 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, and Ash; undergrowth, same, Spice 

and vines. 

CHAINS. 

15.17 

20.00 

37.51 

52.34 

62.41 

79.42 

10.25 

17.51 

41.73 

55.00 

61.53 

80.00 

15.73 

25.31 

45.61 

3.52 

17.31 

21.00 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

liamsburg, and from which I run up stream with the 

meanders of the right bank of Chickeeles river as 

follows: At an assumed 

Variation 18” 00‘ East, 

North 17.00 chains; at 11.00 chains ferry landing. 

N. 12 W. 16.00 chains, 

N. 18 W. 

N. 12 W. 

20.00 chains; at 14chainsfootofrapids. 

27.45 chains, to a point on the right bank of 

the river, where set a post for corner to this survey, 

from which 

ABlack Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 75 W. 33 linksdist. 

A white Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 43 W. 35 links dist. 

mouth of stream 40 links wide; comes from the N. W. 

NOTE.-At 3 chains on the last course of meanders cross the 

From this corner I run 

S 78 W. with the Northern line of this survey, 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. 

A stream, 30 links wide, rapid current, runs S. E. 

ABur Oak, 20 in. dia. 

AHickory, 16 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. 

Set apost for corner to this survey, from which 

ABlack Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 25 E. 16links dist. 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 10 W. 21 links dist. 

A White Oak, 24 in. dia. bears S. 21 W. 16 linksdist. 

A Black Oak, 24 in. dia. bears S. 60 E. 17 links dist. 

thence 

S. 12 E. with the Western line ofthis survey, 

ABlack Oak, 16 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. 

A Sugar Tree, 20 in. dia. 

The road to Williarnsburg, bearingE. and W. 

AnElm, 14in. dia. 

Set a post for corner ofthis survey, from which 

A white Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 73 E. 25 links dist. 

A white Oak, 12 in. dia. bears N. 21 W. 17 links dist. 

A white Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 61 W. 22 links dist. 

A white Oak, 24 in. dia. bears S. 31 E. 23 links dist. 

thence 

N. 78 E. with the Southern line of this survey, 

ABlackOak, 16in. dia. 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 12 in. dia. 

From the corner to sections 18,19,13 and 24, I run 

East, on a true line between sections 18 and 19, 

A Bur Oak, 20 in. dia 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. 

Set a post on the right bank of Chickeeles river for corner 

to fractional sections 18 and 19, from which 

A White Oak, 15 in,. dia. bears N. 10 E. 31 links dist. 

ABlack Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 80 W. 15 linksdist. 

From this corner the corner to fractional sections 18 and 

19, on the N. W. bank ofthe island, bearsEast. 

To obtain the distance across the river between the two 

corners, I run (from the corner on right bank)North 375 

links to a point from which the corner on the island 

bears S. 68 E. which gives for the distance 9.27 chains 

Variation 18” 00’ East, 

[ 44 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. The length ofthe line between sections 18 and 19 is 75.77 

East ofriver and across the island, including 3.79 chains 

Across the river N. W. of island ----------------------9.27 

chains, the several parts of which being as follows: 

across the slough ______________________________________ 45.50 chains, 

West of river ________________________________________------- 21.00 

Aggregate as above _____________________________ 75.77 I 

From the corner to fractional sections 19 and 24, on the 

right bank of Chickeeles river, I run up stream with the 

right bank of said river in fractional section 19, as 

follows, viz: 

N. 30 E. 

N. 45% E. 15.50 ” to the corner to fractional 

N. 58E. 10.00 chains, thence 

N. 63 E. 17.00 ” 

N. 75% E. 32.12 “ to a point on the right bank of 

Chickeeles river North of the corner to fractional 

sections 17 and 18, on the left bank ofthe river; I here 

set a post for corner to fractional sections 17 and 18, 

on North side of river, from which 

A Black Oak, 15 in. dia. bears N. 25 E. 21 links dist. 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 27 W. 17 links dist. 

20.00 chains, thence 

sections 18 and 19; thence, in section 18, 

To obtain the distance across the river, on the line between 

20.93 

sections 17 and 18,I run a base line West 430 links to a 

point from which the post corner to fractional sections 

17 and 18, on the left and South bank of the river, bears 

S. 23 East, which givesfor the distance 10.13 chains, to 

which add 10.80 chains, makes 

right and North bank of the river. 

To the corner to fractional sections 17 and 18, on the 

Williams. 

Begin at a Black Oak, 15 inches diameter, on the right bank 

of Chickeeles river, opposite the head of a small island 

in said river. Mark said tree with a blaze 15 inches 

long and 6 inches wide, a notch at the top and another at 

the bottom of the blaze, and on the face of the blaze, 

with a marking iron, the letters P. S. C. (Private Survey 

Claim.) From the corner tree 

ABlack Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 27 W. 55 linksdist. 

ABur Oak, 16 in. dia. bears S. 50 W. 41 linksdist. 

Both trees marked with a blaze and notch at the lower end 

ofthe blaze, facing the corner tree, and on the blaze, 

with a marking iron, cut the letters W. P. S. (Witness 

Private Survey.) This is also the S. E. corner ofthe 

town of Wil- 

[ 45 l 

489 
67.20 

77.68 

A White Oak, 18 in. dia. 

To the corner tree and place ofbeginning. 

The land of this claim rolling, good, 2d rate soil; 

somewhat broken along the rapids in the N. E. part; well 

timbered, 

[ 46 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS 

22.73 

36.45 

Black Oak, White Oak, Hickory, and Bur Oak; not much 

undergrowth; some Hazel, briers, and vines. The town of 

Williamsburg, situated on the S. E. part ofthe claim, is 

pleasantly located on the right bank ofthe river, some 8 

or 10 feet above high water, and has at this time sixteen 

families residing in it. Some three or four tenements 

are now being constructed within the limits ofthe town. 

February 15th, 1851. 

From the corner to fractional sections 17 and 18, on the 

right and North bank of Chickeeles river, 20.93 chains 

North ofthe corner to sections 17,18,19,20, Irun 

North, between sections 17 and 18, counting the distance 

from the corner to sections 17,18,19,20, 

Variation 18" East, 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. 

Intersected the Southern line of Samuel Williams's claim, 

where set a post for corner to fractional sections 17 and 

18, from which 

ABlack Oak, 16 in dia. bears S. 50 W. 22 links dist. 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 21 E. 31 links dist. 

From this corner I run N. 78 E. along the Southern line of 

the said claim 20.15 chains to the corner tree on the 

right bank of Chickeeles river and S. E. corner of said 

claim; thence down stream, on the right bank of said 

river, in fractional section 17, as follows: 

S. 16 W. 10.00 chains, thence 

s.45w. 10.00 " 

S. 72 W. 10.30 " to the corner to fractional 

sections 17 and 18. 

Fields notes of the survey ofa small island in Chickeeles 

Cause the flag to be set on the head of the island at a 

river, lying wholly in section 17. 

point bearing S. 45 E. from the Black Oak Tree, the S. E. 

corner to Samuel Williams's claim; from said corner tree 

run S. 45 W. 215 links to a point West of the flag on the 

head of the island, which gives for the distance from the 

corner tree to the flag 215 links. Set a meander post in 

the place of the flag, from which 

ABur Oak, 16 in. dia. bears S. 10 W. 15 linksdist. 

A White Oak, 12 in. dia. bears S. 15 E. 21 links dist. 

From the meander post I run around the island as follows: 

S. 16 W. 

s.45w. 10.00 " 

s.1ow. 2.00 " 

South 1.50 " to the lower end ofisland, thence 

9.00 chains, thence 

[ 47 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS East 1.50 chains, thence 

N. 75 E. 4.00 " 

N. 50 E. 5.00 I' 

N. 30 E. 6.00 I' 

N. 10 E. 6.00 " 

N. 10 W. 3.00 " 

N. 73 W. 2.96 " tothemeanderpostandplaceof 

This island is well timbered; White and Black Oak, and 

beginning. 

Hickory; not subject to inundation; undergrowth, same, 

Spice and vines. 

From the corner to sections 7,18,12 and 13, on the range 

East, on a true line between sections 7 and 18, 

Intersected the western line of Samuel Williams's survey of 

640 acres, and at said intersection set a post for corner 

to fractional sections 7 and 18, from which 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. bears N. 25 W. 15 linksdist. 

ABlack Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 34 W. 19 links dist. 

From this corner I run 

N. 12 W. with the Western line ofsaid Williams's claim, 

Land gently rolling. 

Timber, Oak and Hickory. 

From the corner to fractional sections 17 and 18, in the 

Southern line of Samuel Williams's survey, and 36.45 

chainsNorth ofthe corner to sections 17,18,19,20, 

I run 

North, on a blank line passing through Samuel Williams' 

survey, counting the distance from the corner to said 

sections 17 18,19,20, 

line I run 

Variation 18" 00' East, 

23.23 chains to the N. W. corner thereof. 

Variation 18" 00' East, 

Point for quarter section corner in Samuel Williams's 

survey; corner not established, 

The road leading into Williamsburg, 

Set a temporary corner to sections 7,8,17,18, in said 

This line passes through the back part of the town of 

Williams's claim, 

Williamsburg; but I make no connexion with the lines of 

said town. 

North, on a blank line between sections 7 and 8, 

To creek, 30 links wide; runs east, comes from N. W. 

Intersected the North Boundary of Samuel Williams's survey 

where set a post for corner to fractional sections 7 

and 8, fom which 

Variation 18" 00' East, 

48 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian 

CHAINS. 

40.00 

45.17 

63.71 

80.00 

ABlack Oak, 10 in. dia. bears N. 10 E. 15 links dist. 

ABur Oak, 15 in. dia. bears N. 16 W. 17 links dist. 

From this corner I run N. 78 E. on the North line of said 

claim, 440 links to the N. E. corner thereof, on the 

right bank of Chickeeles river, 

From the corner offractional sections 7 and 8 in the North 

line of Samuel Williams's survey, 

North, on a true line between sections 7 and 8, counting the 

distance from the temporary corner to sections 7,8,17, 

18, within said Williams's survey, 

ABlack Oak, 15 in. dia. bears N. 25 E. 16 linksdist. 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 73 W. 12 linksdist. 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

A White Oak, 18 in. dia. 

ABur Oak, 15 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner to sections 5,6,7,8, from which 

ARed Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 20 E. 40 links dist. 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 16 W. 43 links dist. 

A Red Oak, 24in. dia. bears S. 80 W .39 links dist. 

A White Oak, 40 in. dia. bears S. 75 E. 22 links dist. 

Land gently rolling; good rich soil, 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, and Ash. 

February 16th, 1854. 

East, on true line between sections 5 and 8, 

Variation 18" 00' East, 

490 
5.16 

7.41 

10.50 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. 

ABur Oak, 12 in. dia. 

Set a post on the right bank of Chickeeles river for corner 

to fractional sections 5 and 8 west ofriver, from which 

ARedOak,30in. dia.bearsN.58W.5linksdist. 

AHickory, 12 in. dia. bears S. 42 W. 5 linksdist. 

From this corner the post corner to fractional sections 5 

and 8, on the left bank ofthe river, bears S. 89 E. 

From a point 16 links South of this corner, and West of the 

corner to fractional sections 5 and 8, on the left and 

East bank ofthe river, I run North 454 links to a point 

from which the corner post on the left bank of the river 

bears S. 63 E. which gives for the distance across the 

river 8.91 chains. The length ofthe line between 

sections 5 and 8, including the distance across the 

river, is therefore 80.06 chains, viz: 

East of river _________________ ~ _____-_______________________ 60.65 

Across river ________________________________________---------- 8.91 

West of river ________________________________________------- 10.50 

chains, 

I Total ________________________________________--------- 80.06 

I 

[ 49 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

25.10 

40.00 

56.00 

76.26 

36.26 

76.26 

20.00 

35.00 

40.00 

80.06 

40.06 

80.06 

2.10 

4.00 

West, on a random line between sections 6 and 7, 

A stream, 25 links wide, gentle current, runs South, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

A stream, 15 links wide, runs S. E. 

Intersected the West Boundary 21 links North of the corner 

to sections 6 and 7, from which corner I run 

East, on a true line between sections 6 and 7, 

Variation 18" 09' East, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 18" 00' East, 

ABlackOak, 16in.dia.bearsN. 15 W.2llinksdist. 

A White Oak, 40 in. dia. bears S. 21 W. 33 linksdist. 

The corner to sections 5,6,7,8. 

Land hilly; 2d rate, 

Timber, Oak, Sugar Tree, and Hickory; undergrowth, same 

and Hazel. 

North, on a random line between sections 5 and 6, 

Variation 18" 00' East, 

Enter windfall, bearing N. 60 W. and S. 60 E. 

Leave windfall, having same bearings, 

Set a post for temporary quarter section corner, 

Intersected the North Boundary of the Township 24 links 

East of the corner to sections 5 and 6, from which corner 

I run 

South, on a true line between said sections 5 and 6, 

Set a post for quarter section corner, from which 

Variation 18" 10' East, 

A Hickory, 20 in. dia. bears N. 18 E. 27 links dist. 

A White Oak, 24 in. dia. bears S. 31 W. 18 links dist. 

The corner to sections 5,6,7,8. 

Land rolling, and 2d rate, 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, Sugar Tree, and Ash; undergrowth, 

same and Hazel. 

From the corner to sections 4,5,32 and33, on the North 

South, on a true line between sections 4 and 5, 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. 

Set a post on the right bank of Chickeeles river for corner 

Boundary of the Township, I run 

Variation 18" 00' East, 

to fractional sections 4 and 5, from which 

A Bur Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 25 E. 34 linksdist. 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 33 W. 21 links dist. 

From this corner the post corner to fractional sections 4 

and 5, on the left bank ofthe river, bears S. lh W. To 

obtain the distance across the river I run (from the 

corner on the right bank) N. 89" 30' W. 326 links to a 

point from which the post corner to fractional sections 4 

and 5, on the left bank, bears 

[ 50 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS 

Aggregate _______________________________________ ---79.96 

From the corner to fractional sections 4 and 33, on the 

right bank of Chickeeles river, I run down stream with 

the meanders of the right and N. W. bank of said river as 

follows, viz: 

In section P 

S. 41"45' W. 5.35 chains to the corner to fractional 

S. 72 W. 

s.55w. 20.00 I' 

S. 40 W. 20.00 " at this point the bluffcomes to 

the river; thence 

S.42W. 18.00 " thence 

S.40W. 18.00 " 

S. 18% W. 19.75 I' to the corner to fractional 

sections 5 and 8. 

Land, rolling along the last three courses, which are under 

a bluffbank from 20 to 30feet high; the bottom, along 

the first three courses of meanders, good rich land, 

same, and vines in the bottom. 

sections 4 and 5; thence, in section 5 

11.00 chains, thence 

Timber, Oak, Hickory, Ash, Elm, and Buckeye; undergrowth, 

From the corner to fractional sections 5 and 8, on the 

right bank of the river, I continue the meanders down 

stream, along fractional section 8, asfollows, under a 

bluff blank from 20 to 30 feet high: 

S.26W. 9.70 chains, thence 

S.1OW. 15.00 " 

South 15.00 I' to the head ofrapids; thence 

S. 12 E. 2.55 " to the corner to fractional section 8 

and N. E. corner of Samuel Williams's claim. Mark the 

Black Oak witness tree to this corner, bearing N. 75 W. 

33 links distant, "Section 8." 

Land rolling, and rather broken along the river, 

Timber, principally Oak. 

February 17th, 1854. 

Private claim surveyed after public survey. 

Survey of a claim of 640 acres, confirmed by law to Daniel 

Begin at the corner to fractional sections 5 and 8, on the 

Reed. 

left bank of Chickeeles river, 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

description furnished me, viz: 

A Blue Ash, 24 in. dia. bears N. 66 E. 4links dist. 

An Elm, 24 in. dia. bears S. 56 E. 20 links dist. 

left and East bank of said river S. 21 W. 16.00 chains to 

From this corner I run down stream with the meanders ofthe 

491 
10.51 

20.67 

31.00 

44.73 

57.34 

77.90 

3.41 

5.45 

a point where set a post on the left and East bank of 

Chickeeles river, for the S. W. corner ofthe said Reed's 

claim, from which 

A Black Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 44 E. 37 links dist. 

This tree marked with a blaze 15 inches long, 6 inches 

wide, facing the corner post, with two notches-one at 

the upper end and the other at the lower end of the 

blaze; also marked with a marking iron on the face of the 

blaze the letters D. R. (Daniel Reed) W. P. C. (Witness 

Private Claim,) 

ABur Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 47 E. 45 links dist. 

Marked with a blaze and notch at the lower end of the blaze 

facing the corner post, with the letters R. 2 W. T. 25 N. 

sec. 8, 

From the corner post I run 

S. 54 E. along the S. W. Boundary line of said claim, 

ABur Oak, 16 in. dia. 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. 

Leave river bottom and enter upland, bearing N. and S. 

A White Oak, 24 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. 

Set a post for corner of this claim and fractional section 

8, from which 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 40 W. 31 links dist. 

This tree marked with a baze and two notches facing the 

corner post; one notch above and the other below the 

blaze. Mark the letters W. P. C. (Witness Private Claim) 

on the the face of the blaze, 

A Black Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 10 W. 21 links dist. 

ABur Oak, 15 in. dia. bears S. 45 E. 13 links dist. 

Both trees marked with a blaze and notch facing the post, 

and S. 8, with a marking iron. 

From this corner I run 

N. 36 E. along the South Eastern line of this claim, 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. 

Intersected the line between sections 8 and 9, where set a 

post for corner to fractional sections 8 and 9, from which 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bears S. 25 W. 22 links dist. 

ABur Oak, 20 in. dia. bears S. 37 E. 18 linksdist. 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

[ 52 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS 

33.73 

41.17 

57.31 

60.57 

64.00 

75.17 

80.00 

From this corner I run South, with the line between said 

sections, 23.70 chains to the corner to sections 8,9, 

16,17. 

A White Oak, 15 in. dia. 

A Bur Oak, 16 in. dia. 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. 

A Black Oak, 30 in. dia. 

Leave timber and enter prairie, bearing N. and S. 

Intersected the line between sections 4 and 9, 

where set a post with mound and trench for corner to 

fractional sections 4 and 9, 

Plant N. E. a Hickory nut, S. E. 4 Apple seeds. 

To obtain the distance on the line between sections 

sections 4 and 9, from the fractional section cornerjust 

established, to the corner to sections 3,4,9,10, I run 

as follows: 

North, 4.00 chains (to avoid the pond) to a point; thence 

East on an offset line 12.00 chains to apoint; thence 

South 4.00 chains to the line between said sections 4 and 

9; thence East with said line, and at 39.33 chains, the 

corner to sections3,4,9,10, the distance being 

countedfrom the corner to fractional sections 4 and 9, 

in the S. E. line of Daniel Reed's claim, 

To apoint for the East corner of the claim. Set a lime 

5.50 

10.53 

25.34 

54.07 

stone 10 inches square and 6 inches thick, and post with 

mound and trench, as per instructions, for corner to said 

claim and to fractional section 4. From the corner, a 

White Oak, 16 in. dia. standing in the edge ofthe 

timber, bears N. 65 W. 555 links distant. Mark said tree 

with a blaze and two notches, one above'and the other 

below the blaze, facing the corner. With a marking iron 

cut the letters W. P. C. (Witness Private Claim) on the 

face ofthe blaze. This corner about 3.00 chains N. W. 

of a small pond. Thence I run 

N. 54 W. along the N. E. Boundary line ofthis claim, 

Leave prairie and enter timber, bearing N. E. and S. W. 

A Bur Oak, 15 in. dia. 

ABlack Oak, 16 in. dia. 

Intersected the line between sections 4 and 5, 

Variation 17" 40' East, 

Here set a post for corner to fractional sections 4 and 5, 

from which 

ABlack Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 43 E. 22 links dist. 

A White Oak, 20 in. dia. bears N. 37 W. 17 linksdist. 

From this corner I runNorth with the line between said 

sections 4 and 5, and at 30.81 chains, the corner to 

fractional sections 4 and 5, on the left and South bank 

of Chickeeles river, 

[ 53 1 

Township 25 N. Range 2 W. Willamette Meridian. 

CHAINS. 

64.00 

65.50 

71.53 

75.36 

77.90 

Leave upland, and enter river bottom, bearing N. E. and 

s. w. 

ABur Oak, 20 in. dia. 

ABur Oak, 16 in. dia. 

A Walnut, 36 in. dia. 

Set a post on the left and S. E. bank of Chickeeles river 

for corner of this claim and fractional section 5, 

from which 

A White Oak, 16 in. dia. bears N. 60 E. 31 links dist. 

5 on the face of the blaze, 

ABur Oak, 15 in. dia. bears S. 40 E. 37 links dist. 

letters W P. C. (Witness Private Claim) cut with a 

marking iron on the face of the blaze, 

From this corner I run up stream with the meanders ofthe 

left and S. E. bank ofthe river in fractional section 5, 

N.37E. 1.00 chains, thence 

N.50E. 8.50 " 

N.40E. 5.60 " 

N. 54 E. 10.70 " to the corner to fractional sections 

From the corner to fractional section 5 and the upper 

Marked with a blaze and notch facing the post, and section 

Marked with a blaze and two notches facing the post. The 

4 and 5, on the left bank of the river, 

corner to the claim on the left bank of Chickeeles river, 

I run down stream with the meanders of the left bank of 

said river, within the claim, as follows: 

S. 37 W. 

s.44w. 22.00 " 

S. 38 W. 26.72 " to the original corner to fractional 

sections 5 and 8, on the left and East bank of Chickeeles 

river, and place ofbeginning. 

Land, much the largest portion of this claim gently rolling 

upland; good, 2d rate timber, Oak, Walnut, Hickory, and 

Sugar Tree. The bottom land along the river is dry rich 

land, not subject to inundation. 

same, briers and vines. 

16.00 chains, thence 

Timber, Walnut, Oak, Hickory, and Hackberry; undergrowth, 

February 18th, 1854. 
GENERAL DESCRIPTION. 

The quality of the land in this Township is considerably 

above the common average. There is a very fair proportion of 

rich bottom land, chiefly situated on both sides of Chickeeles 

river, which is navigable through the Township for steamboats of light draft, except over the rapids in section 8. These 

rapids are 37 chains long; estimated fall about 10 feet. 

The uplands are generally rolling, good 1st and 2d rate 

land, and well adapted for cultivation. Elk river is a beautiful 

stream of clear water, running through the Southern part of 

the Township, and emptying into Chickeeles river, in section 

31. There is a fine mill-seat on this stream in section 22. 

Timber, chiefly Oak, Beech, Hickory, Hackberry, and 

Sugar Tree, and is very equally distributed over the 

Township, except in the prairie embracing parts of sections 3, 

4, 9, 10, 15, and 16. 

The town of Williamsburg was laid out by Samuel Williams, some two years since, on the right bank of Chickeeles 

river, a little below the foot of the rapids. It now contains 

sixteen houses, and others are being built; has a good landing 

in front, with a ferry, and has the appearance of thrift and 

prosperity. 

There are several good quarries of stone (principally lime) 

along the Chickeeles and Elk rivers, which will afford inexhaustible quantities of excellent building materials. On the 

line between sections 1 and 12, I discovered gold dust and 

auriferous quartz, and in section 17, on the left bank of 

Chickeeles river, opposite Williamsburg, a valuable coal 

bank. There are three settlements-one on the N. W. quarter 

of section 10, one on the N. W. quarter of section 15 and N. E. 

quarter of section 16, and the other on the N. E. quarter of 

section 23 and N. W. quarter of section 24. 

A valuable salt spring was discovered crossing the South 

Boundary of section 31, running N. W.; also the remains of an 

Indian village on the left bank of Chickeeles river, in section 

30. Fossil remains on the West bank of a small lake in section 

26, and ancient works on the left bank of the Elk river, in the 

N. E. quarter of section 27. 

LIST OF NAMES. 

A list of names of the individuals employed to assist in 

running, measuring, or marking the lines and corners described in the foregoing field notes of Township No. 25 North 

of the base line of Range No. 2 West of the Willamette meridian, showing the respective capacities in which they acted: 

PETER LONG, Chainman. 

JOHN SHORT, Chainman. 

GEORGE SHARP, Axeman. 

ADAM DULL, Axeman. 

HENRY FLAGG, Compassman. 

[ 55 1 

Range number two west of the Willamette meridian, and that 

said Township has been in all respects, to the best of our 

knowledge and belief, well and faithfully surveyed, and the 

boundary monuments planted according to the instructions 

furnished by the Surveyor General. 

PETER LONG, Chainman. 

JOHN SHORT, Chainman. 

GEORGE SHARP, Axeman. 

ADAM DULL, Axeman. 

HENRY FLAGG, Compassman. 

Subscribed and sworn to by the above named persons, 

before me, a Justice of the Peace for the county of , in 

the State [or Territory] of , this day of 7 

185 

HENRY DOOLITTLE, 

Justice of the Peace. 

I, Robert Acres, deputy surveyor, do solemnly swear that, 

in pursuance of a contract with surveyor of the public lands of 

the United States in the State [or Territory] of 7 

bearing date the day of 185 , and in strict conformity to the 

laws of the United States and the instructions furnished by 

the said Surveyor General, I have faithfully surveyed the 

exterior boundaries [or sub-division and meanders, as the 

case may be] of Township number twenty-five North of the 

base line of Range number two West of the Willamette meridian, in the aforesaid, and do further solemnly swear that the 

foregoing are the true and original field notes of such survey. 

ROBERT ACRES, 

Deputy Surveyor. 

Subscribed by said Robert Acres, deputy surveyor, and 

sworn to before me, a Justice of the Peace for county, in the 

State [or Territory] of , this day of , 185 . HENRY DOOLITTLE, 

Justice of the Peace. 

To each of the original field books, the Surveyor General 

will append his official approval, according to the following 

form, or so varied as to suit the facts in the case: 

SURVEYORS OFFICE AT , 185 . 

The foregoing field notes of the survey of [here describe the 

survey,] executed by Robert Acres, under his contract of the 

day of 7 

185 , in the month of , 185 , having been critically 

examined, the necessary corrections and explanations made, 

the said field notes, and the surveys they describe, are hereby 

approved. 

We hereby certify that we assisted Robert Acres, deputy 

surveyor, in surveying the exterior boundaries and subdividing Township number twenty-five North of the baseline of 

493 

A.B. 

Surveyor General. 
I 

. . - __ . . . . __ . . . 

... . . . - - 
7%e n.,nr<qhf. figures (ride thus 1.2.3) cummencing 

mar the Principul ilfi,ridian und Base line wiih 

N?I,iic<ficute tfre pmrmbullrtions of the Surveyor in 

running the Townships and Correctiort, lines. 

The Correction or Standard lines Nbrih of thi 

Base we rvei:.~ 4 lowashipa; rurd South uf the Rast: 

cvvt:~ .5 town.,sliips. 

T/tz CIC~.TS or d64kiemy u/'rnt:ri.~ur~:~i.~/i~ OR northern. end southern boundnries is &row* on the 

westernmost half mite . 

TIE measurements betwcen Mwidian lines trill ~ 

of course, nlrv~~v.~ vqv ncsording to the laiitlLde of' 

the survey, besides being liablc. to he rr.ru<ertzcl ih~x 

act iulure (he L.~~A~IJ>,;G. is very hiUy or bruken. Tke 

convergency of the range lines as shown by the measurements on 

lation, as ic exists between the parallels of 46" 

and 47"NL. 

his diagram, i.s according to calcu- 

':Ill1 I). 

N1 2 WEST WILLAMETTE MERIDIAN. 

I 

- ,

,,I I 

i 

(/I I 
To the copies of the field notes transmitted to the seat of 

government, the Surveyor General will append to each 

Township the following certificate: 

I certify that the foregoing transcript of the field notes of 

the survey of the [here describe the character of the surveys, 

whether meridian, base line, standard parallel, exterior 

Township lines, or subdivision lines, and meanders of a particular Township] in the State [or Territory] of , has 

been correctly copied from the original notes on file in this 

office. 

A. B. 

Surveyor General. 

TABLE 

Showing the difference of latitude and departure in running 

80 chains, at any course from 1 to 60 minutes. ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ 

Minutes. Links. Minutes. Links. Minutes. Links. 

1 2 l/3 21 

2 4Y3 22 

3 7 23 

4 9 1/3 24 

5 112/3 25 

6 14 26 

7 1 6 l/3 27 

8 18Y3 28 

9 21 29 

10 23% 30 

11 2S2/3 31 

12 28 32 

13 30% 33 

14 322/3 34 

15 35 35 

16 ' 37l/3 36 

17 3973 37 

18 42 38 

19 441/3 39 

20 46Y3 40 

49 41 

51?h 42 

532/3 43 

56 44 

58Y3 45 

602/3 46 

63 47 

65Y3 48 

6 7 2/3 49 

70 50 

72% 51 

74Y3 52 

77 53 

79Y3 54 

81Y3 55 

84 56 

86Y3 57 

882/3 58 

91 59 

931h 60 

500 
XXXIII. 

(This Instructions Circular is copied from an original document now in the possession of the National Archives. It was 

reprinted in 1871 with only the printing style changed and Roman numerals used in paragraphing in place of Arabic 

numerals.) 

INSTRUCTIONS 

TO THE 

SURVEYORS GENERAL 

OF 

THE UNITED STATES, 

RELATING 

TO THEIR DUTIES AND TO THE FIELD 

OPERATIONS OF 

DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

PRESCRIBED, ACCORDING TO LAW, BY THE COMMISSIONER OF 

THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE. 

WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 

1864. 

501 
INSTRUCTIONS 

TO THE 

SURVEYORS GENERAL OF PUBLIC 

LANDS OF THE UNITED STATES. 

General Land Office, June 1, 1864. 

1. THE SURVEYING MANUAL AND 

INSTRUCTIONS OF THE COMMISSIONER ARE 

MADE A PART OF THE SURVEYING CONTRACTS 

BY LAW. 

By the second section of the act of Congress entitled “An act 

to reduce the expenses of the survey and sale of the public 

lands in the United States,” approved May 30, 1862, it is 

provided, “That the printed Manual of Instructions relating 

to the public surveys, prepared at the General Land Office, 

and bearing date February twenty-second, eighteen hundred 

and fifty-five the instructions of the Commissioner of the 

General Land Office, and the special instructions of the surveyor general, when not in conflict with said printed Manual 

or the instructions of said Commissioner, shall be taken and 

deemed apart of every contract for surveying the public lands 

of the United States.” 

In pursuance of law, the following instructions are prescribed for your government and that of your deputies in 

surveying the public lands: 

2. SURVEYS TO BE EXECUTED BY DEPUTY 

SURVEYORS IN PERSON. 

Your attention is especially directed to the last clause of 

the printed form of contract furnished by this office, which 

stipulates “that no payment shall be made for any surveys 

not executed by the said deputy surveyor in his own proper 

person.” It has been the practice of deputies to take contracts 

for more surveying than they could perform in person, and 

then employ one or more compassmen with their auxiliaries 

to do the work. The object of the stipulation referred to in the 

contract is to prevent a continuance of this practice. 

Deputy surveyors are required to verify by their oath that 

the surveys embraced in their contracts have been executed 

in strict conformity with instructions, the requirements of 

the Surveying Manual, and the laws of the United States. 

The deputy cannot consistently make this oath if the work is 

done by separate parties in other parts of the field from where 

he is operating. 

-4- 

That there may be no misunderstanding upon this point, 

you are hereby instructed not to enter into contract with any 

one deputy for a greater amount of surveying than it may 

reasonably be expected he will be able to execute in one 

season, under his own immediate and personal direction, 

with one surveying party only; and deputy surveyors will be 

notified in advance that acco-unts for surveying done in violation of this rule will not be allowed. 

When two deputies enter into joint contract for certain 

surveys, and only one of them goes into the field, if that one, 

with a single surveying party, executes all the work in person, his affidavit alone as surveyor, attached to the field 

notes, will be deemed sufficient, and no impediment to the 

payment of his account will result therefrom.’ 

If two deputies, joint parties in a contract, both go into the 

field, each with a separate surveying party, the field notes 

must show clearly the particular surveying done by each 

deputy. The date and the name of the deputy will be stated at 

the beginning and end of the notes of every continuous part of 

such survey execued by him, so that it may be distinctly seen 

by whom each mile of line was run.2 

The following form of affidavit is prescribed, to be attached 

to the field notes in cases of joint surveys, in lieu of the one 

heretofore used, to wit: 

“I, A B, deputy surveyor, do solemnly swear that, in pursuance of a joint contract, wherein A B and C D are joint 

contractors with S. G., United States surveyor general for 

-, bearing date the ~ day of - 18 , I have 

well, faithfully, and truly, in my own proper person, and in 

strict conformity with the instructions furnished by the surveyor general, the Surveying Manual, and the laws of the 

United States, surveyed all those parts or portions of - 

as are represented in the foregoing field notes as having been 

surveyed under my direction; and I do further solemnly 

swear that all the corners of said surveys have been established and perpetuated in strict accordance with the Surveying Manual and printed instructions, and that the foregoing are the true and original field notes of such ~urvey.”~ 

The separate affidavit of each deputy, in the above form, 

well be attached to the field notes of joint surveys. 

3. OPERATIONS IN THE FIELD, WHEN TO 

COMMENCE. 

The practice of anticipating the appropriations is deemed 

unwise and contrary to the spirit of the law. The surveys 

should not be commenced in advance of the year for which the 

means is provided by Congress, and no moneys can be used to 

pay for work done before they were appropriated. This must 

be regarded as an invariable rule to be rigidly observed in 

future. 

The object of this restriction is to keep back the surveying 

operations to the legitimate period of time contemplated in 

the appropriations. These appropriations are made with reference to the 

-5- 

current necessities of given years, and if allowed to be 

absorbed in advance, the purposes of Congress in providing 

stated sums annually to carry forward the public surveys 

would be defeated. In order to enable deputy surveyors to 

avail themselves of the whole season belonging to the fiscal 

year, however, they may be permitted to commence their 

operations as soon after the first day of May in each year as 

1. When one Deputy does the work under a joint contract, he may verify 

2. Active Deputies under joint contract each to verify. 

3. Form of affidavit for joint surveys 

502 
notice is received from this office that the appropriations 

have been made. You will be promptly notified, by mail or 

telegraph, as circumstances may determine, when the 

appropriations are passed, and no surveying chargeable to 

such appropriations must be done before receiving this 

notice. 

4. CONTRACTS MUST BE APPROVED BY THE 

COMMISSIONER. 

The first section of the act of May 30, 1862, provides that 

contracts for the survey of the public lands shall not become 

binding upon the United States until approved by the Commissioner of the General Land Office, except in such cases as 

the Commissioner shall otherwise especially order. 

5. REVENUE STAMPS TO BE ATTACHED TO 

CONTRACTS AND BONDS. 

The requirements of the internal revenue law make it 

necessary that five separate stamps be attached to the several 

parts of every contract and of a deputy surveyor, to wit: 

1. To the contract, five-cent stamp; 2. To the affidavit of the 

deputy surveyor, five cents; 3. To the bond, fifty cents; 4. To 

the certificate as to the sufficiency of the bond, ten cents; 5. To 

the oath of allegiance, five cents. 

Surveyors general are reminded that the sufficiency of the 

sureties to the bonds of deputy surveyors must be certified 

BY THE PROPER OFFICER OF A COURT HAVING A 

SEAL. 

6. WHEN DESIRED BY SETTLERS, SURVEYS MAY 

BE MADE BY THE SURVEYOR GENERAL AT 

THEIR EXPENSE IN CERTAIN CASES. 

By section 10 of an act entitled “An act to reduce the 

expenses of the survey and sale of the public lands in the 

United States,’’ approved May 30,1862, it is provided, “That 

when the settlers in any township or townships, not mineral 

or reserved by Government, shall desire a survey made of the 

same under the authority of the surveyor general of the 

United States, and shall file an application therefor in writing, and deposit in a proper United States depository, to the 

credit of the United States, a sum sufficient to pay for such 

survey, together with all expenses incident thereto, without 

cost or claim for indemnity on the United States, it shall and 

may be lawful for said surveyor general, under such instructions as may be given him by the Commissioner of the General Land Office, and in accordance with existing laws and 

instructions, to survey such township or townships, and 

make return thereof to the general and proper local land 

office: Provided, The townships so proposed to be surveyed 

desired survey will cost. On receiving a certificate of deposit 

of a United States depositary, showing that the required sum 

has been deposited with him in a proper manner to pay for the 

work, you will contract with a competent United States deputy surveyor, and have the survey made and returned in the 

same manner as other public surveys are. 

You are especially enjoined in all cases to state explicitly in 

your letters furnishing estimates to applicants, that the payment of the amount required for the survey will not give the 

depositor any priority of claim or right to purchase the land, 

or in any manner affect the claim or claims of any party or 

parties thereto; and that, when surveyed, it will be subject to 

the same general laws and regulations in relation to the 

disposition thereof as other public lands are. 

The money should be deposited to the credit of the Treasurer of the United States on account of the proper appropriations. A separate estimate is required and a separate deposit 

must be made for office work and field work; one to be placed 

to the credit of the appropriation “for compensation of the 

surveyor general and the clerks in his office,” and the other to 

the credit of the appropriation “for continuing the public 

surveys.” The depositary will issue certificates in triplicate, 

one of which will be transmitted to this office with the contract and bond of the deputy surveyor. 

The account will be adjusted and paid in the same manner 

as other surveying accounts. Should the amount deposited 

exceed the cost of survey and all expenses incident thereto, 

including office work, an account setting forth the fact of such 

excess may be rendered by the depositor, certified by the 

surveyor general, and transmitted to this office with the final 

surveying returns, to be reported for payment. 

Where a township is surveyed under the provisions of the 

aforesaid act, the survey must include all the surveyable 

public land in such township. 

7. SMALL ISLANDS MAY BE SURVEYED AT THE 

COST OF APPLICANTS. 

Many applications are received at this office for the purchase of small unsurveyed islands which were omitted when 

the adjacent lands were surveyed. These islands are usually 

of too little value to justify the Government in incurring the 

expense of survey; but where a party desires the survey made 

and is willing to pay the cost thereof in advance, upon the 

conditions set forth in these instructions, it may be done 

under the provisions of the tenth section of the act of May 30, 

1862. 

The party desiring the survey to be made must file a written application with the surveyor general, giving an intelligible description of the locality of the island, its distance 

from the main shore, the width 

-6- -7- 

are within the range of the regular progess of the public 

surveys embraced by existing standard lines or bases for the 

township and subdivisional ~urveys.~’-(Sec. 10, p. 410, vol. 

12, U. S. Laws.) 

Applications for surveys under this law must be made to 

the surveyor general in writing, upon the receipt of which he 

will furnish the applicant with an estimate of how much the 

of the narrowest channel between it and the main land, with 

an estimate of its area. 

Upon receiving such application, made in the manner indicated, you will examine the records and data in your office, 

and if it appears that the island is public land and has not 

already been surveyed, you will furnish the applicant an 

estimate of the cost of surveying it, as directed under the 

503 
sixth head in these instructions, stating explicitly that the 

depositing of the money will not in any manner affect the 

rights of parties in said lands, nor give any priority of claim to 

the depositor. 

You will observe particularly that two separate deposits 

are to be madeone on account of the appropriation for field 

work, and one on account of the appropriation for office 

work-a separate certificate for each to be transmitted to this 

office with the contract and bond of the deputy surveyor. 

It will be understood that these instructions relate only to 

isolated islands, or islands that were omitted when the public 

surveys were extended over the adjacent lands, and do not 

apply to islands falling within the regular course of current 

surveys, which must be included in the contracts for surveying the public lands. 

As a general rule, a body of land separated from the main 

land by a perpetual natural channel may be regarded as an 

island for the purposes contemplated in these instructions. 

8. SURVEY OF SWAMP LANDS. 

Contracts with deputy surveyors must of course embrace 

any “swamp and overflowed” lands which, in alluvial regions, are intermingled with the arable or fast lands. Over all 

such lands the lines of the public surveys must be extended, 

as the selections in such cases are made according to the 

character of the smallest legal subdivision. If the greater part 

of such subdivision is “swamp and overflowed,” it goes to the 

swamp grant; if otherwise, it is excluded from such grant, and 

is retained by the Government. 

In the survey of all lands of this mixed character, the 

deputies must be charged to give in their field notes a specific 

and full description of the land, indicating the causes of its 

being unfit for cultivation in its natural condition, with the 

character of the timber, shrubs, or plants growing on the 

tract, and the contiguity of the premises to rivers, watercourses, or lakes, naming them respectively. The swamp 

grant does not embrace tracts in which the inundation is 

casual, but only those where the overflow would totally destroy crops and prevent the raising of the same without artificial means, such as levees, draining, &c. The essentiality 

must be obvious to you of the requirement of full data in these 

respects, in order to enable the Department properly to adjust 

swamp and other interests. 

Where the State authorities desire to have swamp lands 

surveyed at their expense, the same may be done in accordance with instructions on page 5 for surveys under the 

provisions of the tenth section of the act of May 30,1862; but 

all applications for separate surveys 

-8- 

of swamp lands must be submitted to this office, with a full 

report and a diagram illustrating the locality, and the 

approval of the Commissioner first obtained. 

9. CERTAIN RIVERS TO BE MEANDERED ON 

ONE BANK ONLY. 

Rivers not embraced in the class denominated “navigab1e”under the statute, but which are well-defined natural 

arteries of internal communication, and have a uniform 

width, will only be meandered on one bank. For the sake of 

uniformity, the surveyor will traverse the right bank when 

not impracticable; but where serious obstacles are met with, 

rendering it difficult to course along the right bank, he may 

cross to the left bank and continue the meanders as far as 

necessary; but all changes from one bank to the other will be 

made at the point of intersection of some line of the public 

surveys with the stream being meandered. 

The subdividing deputies will be required to establish 

meander corners on both banks of such meanderable streams 

at the intersection of all section lines, and the distances 

across the river will be noted in the field book. 

In meandering water-courses, where a distance is more 

than ten chains between stations, even chains only should be 

taken; but if the distance is less than ten chains, and it is 

found convenient to employ chains and links, the number of 

links should be a multiple of ten, thereby saving time and 

labor in testing the closings both in the field and in the 

surveyor general’s office. 

10. WHAT LAKES ARE NOT TO BE MEANDERED. 

Paragraph numbered three, on page 13 of the Manual, in 

regard to the meandering of lakes, &c., is modified as follows: 

Lakes embracing an area of less than forty acres will not be 

meandered. Long, narrow or irregular lakes of larger extent, 

but which embrace less than one-half of the smallest legal 

subdivision, will not be meandered. Shallow lakes or bayous, 

likely in time to dry up or be greatly reduced by evaporation, 

drainage, or other cause, will not be meandered, however 

extensive they may be. 

Deputy surveyors will be allowed pay for the distance 

across lakes or ponds not meandered, where they are required to continue the lines of the public surveys across them; 

but no offsets or lines run in triangulating will be paid for. 

Where the distance across a lake or other body of water is 

ascertained by offsetting, it is not enough to say in the field 

notes “8.65 over lake and set a meander corner,” but the mode 

by which the distance is ascertained must be stated and 

described in full. 

Posts will be established by the subdividing deputy at the 

intersections of all the public lines with these lakes the same 

as if they were to be meandered. 

11. CORNER POSTS AND CORNER STONES. 

In loose or alluvial soil, section, quarter-section, or meander posts may be driven into the ground, instead of digging 

holes and planting 

-9- 

them as required in the Manual; but no posts will be so driven 

unless, from the character of the soil, they will thereby be 

rendered more firm and enduring. 

All corner stones fourteen inches long, or more, and less 

than eighteen inches in length, should be set two-thirds of 

their length in the ground; if more than eighteen inches long, 

they should be set three-quarters of their length in the 

ground. 

504
12. QUARTER SECTION CORNERS NOT TO BE 

ESTABLISHED IN CERTAIN CASES. 

Quarter section corners are not required to be established 

on the west boundary of the western tier of sections in a 

township, nor on the north boundary of the northern tier of 

sections in a township south of and bordering on a standard 

parallel or base line. The resurvey of township, standard, or 

base lines, by the deputy surveyor, for the purpose of establishing such quarter posts, is unnecessary and will not be 

paid for. 

13. POSTS IN MOUNDS. 

All posts in mounds will hereafter be planted or driven into 

the ground to the depth of twelve inches, at the precise corner 

point; and the charcoal-charred stake or marked stone required in the Manual will be deposited twelve inches below 

the surface, against the north side of the post when the 

deputy is running north, and against the west side when the 

deputy is running west, &c. 

Township mounds will be five feet in diameter at their base 

and two and a half feet in perpendicular height. Posts in 

township mounds are therefore required to be four and a half 

feet in length, so as to allow twelve inches to project above the 

mound. 

Mounds at section, quarter section, and meander corners, 

will be four and a half feet in diameter at their base and two 

feet in perpendicular height, the posts being four feet in 

length, leaving twelve inches to project above the mound. 

The planting of seeds between the pits and trenches, as 

directed on page 11 of the Manual, is not required. 

14. PITS IN LIEU OF TRENCHES. 

The quadrangular trench required in connection with the 

construction of mounds is dispensed with. The pits will be 

continued, and should be of uniform dimensions. The pits for 

a township mound will be eighteen inches wide, two feet in 

length, and at least twelve inches deep, located six feet from 

the post. At section corners the pits will be eighteen inches 

square, and not less than twelve inches in depth. 

At township corners common to four townships, the pits 

will be dug on the lines and lengthwise to them. On base and 

standard lines, where the corners are common to only two 

townships or sections, three pits only will be dug-two in line 

on either side of the post, and one on the line north or south of 

the corner, as the case may be. By this means the standard 

and closing corners will be readily distinguished from each 

other. 

-10- 

15. NOTCHING SECTION CORNER POSTS. 

Posts or stones at the corners of sections in the interior of 

townships will have as many notches on the south and east 

edges as they are miles from the south and east boundaries of 

the township, instead of being notched on all four edges, as 

directed on pages 8 and 9 of the Manual. 

16. MARKING LINES. 

In addition to the instructions under this head on page 4 of 

the Manual, the following requirements will be observed, to 

wit: 

Where trees two inches or more in diameter are found, the 

required blazes must not be omitted. 

Bushes on or near the line should be bent at right angles 

therewith, and receive a blow of the axe at about the usual 

height of blazes from the ground sufficient to leave them in a 

bent position, but not to prevent their growth. 

On trial or random lines, when it is necessary to lop bushes, 

they should be bent in the direction of the line, to prevent 

mistaking random for true lines. 

17. BEARING TREES. 

Where a tree not less than two and a half inches in diameter can be found for a bearing tree within 300 links of the 

corner, it should be preferred to the trench or pit. The quadrangular trench required on page 9 of the Manual as a substitute, where the requisite number of “bearing trees” is not 

found, is dispensed with, and apit two feet square and not less 

than twelve inches deep is required in lieu thereof. 

18. MODE OF CORRECTING BACK 

RANDOM LINES. 

The manner of running random and true lines illustrated 

in the specimen field notes, marked “B,” in the Manual, is 

hereby modified so as to conform to the directions on page 23; 

that is, the deputy, having run a random line, will correct 

back “by calculating a course that will run a true line back to 

the corner post from which the random started.” For instance: instead of saying “west on a true line,” &c., with an 

altered variation, say “north 89” 47‘ west on a true line,” &c., 

with same variation. 

19. ABBREVIATIONS IN THE FIELD NOTES. 

The following additional abbreviations are authorized to 

be used in the field notes, to wit: 

For quarter section corner, use V4 sec. cor.;” for variation, 

“va.;” for 14 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 3 inches thick, in 

describing a corner stone, use 14 x 12 x 3, being particular to 

always observe the same order of length, width, and thickness. 

-11- 

20. PRESCRIBED LIMITS FOR CLOSINGS AND 

LENGTH OF LINES IN CERTAIN CASES. 

1. Every north-and-south section line, except those terminating in the north boundary of the township, must be eighty 

chains in length. 

2. The east-and-west section lines, except those terminating in the west boundary of the township, are to be within one 

hundred links of the actual distance established on the south 

boundary line of the township for the width of said tier of 

sections. 

505 
3. The north boundary and south boundary of any one 

section, except in the extreme western tier, are to be within 

one hundred links of equal length. 

4. The meanders within each fractional section, or between any two meander posts, or of a pond or island in the 

interior of a section, must close within one chain and fifty 

links. 

5. In running random township exteriors, if such random 

lines fall short or overrun in length, or intersect the eastern 

or western boundary, as the case may be, of the township, at 

more than three chains and fifty links north or south of the 

true corner, the lines must be retraced, even if found necessary to remeasure the meridional boundaries of the 

township. 

It will be particularly observed that no changes in regard to 

surveying operations are made by these instructions excepting those specially stated and authorized. In every other 

particular the Manual and existing instructions of the Commissioner remain in full force. 

Very respectfully, 

Your ob’t servant, 

J. M. Edmunds, 

Commissioner. 

XXXIV. 

(This circular is copied from the original, Microcopy No. 27, 

National Archives. A copy was sent to all Surveyors General.) 

CIRCULAR 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

July 28, 1866 

Sir, 

The experience of this office having demonstrated the desireableness of a change in the system adopted for the 

numbering of fractional lots of the public lands as illustrated 

in “Diagram B” accompanying the printed Manual of Surveying Instructions issued February 22, 1855, it has been 

decided to substitute in lieu thereof a more simple and less 

inconvenient system. 

It is now proposed to employ but one continuous series of 

numbers in each section containing fractional lots, to 

embrace all lots made fractional by any cause, and not containing the recognized legal quantity of some legal subdivision; but those subdivisions in the exterior halves of sections 

in the north and west tiers of sections in a township, which 

contain eighty or forty acres, will not be numbered in the 

future preparation of plats. The printed instructions on pages 

25 and 26 of the aforesaid Manual are hereby modified to that 

extent. 

Accompanying this letter is a “Diagram B” illustrating the 

proposed change in numbering and which is designated in 

red ink on the same. 

Where islands are situated in two or more sections the lots 

should be embraced in the series of numbers of the respective 

sections in which they are located. Islands situated wholly 

within a section may be numbered as one lot unless the area 

exceed 160 acres in which case they should be divided by 

extending the subdivisional lines across them and then numbered. 

You are requested to acknowledge the receipt of this letter 

and cause these instructions to be carried out in your office. 

I am Very Respectfully 

Your Ob’t Servant 

J. M. Edmunds 

Commissioner 

(Ed. Note: This circular was sent to the Surveyors General of 

California, Oregon, Washington, Dakota, Minnesota, Kansas 

and Nebraska, New Mexico and Idaho. Copies were sent to 

Florida on June 22,1869, and to Louisiana on December 3, 

1878. A copy of Diagram frB” accompanied the circular.) 

506 
xxxv. 

(This copy of Circular No. 22 is taken from the original, Microcopy No. 27, National Archives. A copy was sent to all 

Surveyors General.) 

(CIRCULAR No. 22.) 

Department of Interior, 

General Land Office, 

June 10, 1868. 

As inquiries arise in regard to the Survey of Islands in 

Lakes or Rivers in Districts where the office of Surveyor 

General has been discontinued, the following is communicated as the proper mode of proceeding to have the same 

surveyed and obtain title: 

1st. Islands may be surveyed at the expense of the party 

applying under the provisions of the Act of Congress approved 

30th May, 1862, “to reduce the expenses of the Survey and Sale 

of the Public Lands of the United States,” U. S. Statutes, vol. 

12, p. 410, in the 10th Section of which it is declared: “That 

when the settlers in any Township or Townships, not mineral 

or reserved by Government, shall desire a survey made of the 

same under the authority of the Surveyor General of the 

United States, and shall file an application therefor in writing, and deposit in a proper United States Depository, to the 

credit of the United States, a sum sufficient to pay for such 

survey, together with all the expenses incident thereto, without 

cost or claim for indemnity on the United States, it shall and 

may be lawful for said Surveyor General, under such instructions as may be given him by the Commissioner of the General 

Land Office, and in accordance with existing laws and instructions, to survey such Township or Townships, and make 

return thereof to the General and proper local Land Office; 

provided the Townships so proposed to be surveyed are within 

the range of the regular progress of the public surveys 

embraced by existing standard lines or bases for the Township 

and subdivisional surveys.” 

-2 ~ 

Application for the survey should be addressed to the Commissioner of the General Land Office, and be accompanied by 

the affidavits of at least two reliable and disinterested parties, 

showing that thirty days’ notice had been given the coterminous proprietors of the intention to apply for the survey of such 

Island, stating the area, character, and situation of the Island 

in the Lake or River, with reference to the description of the 

Section, Township, and range of the public surveys, the same 

to be illustrated by a diagram. The width and depth of the 

channel, on either side between the Island and the main shore, 

should be shown, and it should be stated whether the configuration of either share of the mainland has materially 

changed since the original survey of the water front on the 

mainland. 

2d. The applicant should designate some competent and 

reliable Surveyor, and send to this Office a statement from 

him, in writing, of the amount for which he is willing to 

execute the field work of the survey. 

IL upon examination of the evidence filed in support of the 

application, the Island is deemed a proper subject of survey, 

the applicant will be notifid of the amount necessary to be 

deposited with a United States Depositary to the credit of the 

Treasurer of the United States on account of the Appropriation 

to defray the expense of the field work of the survey, and of a 

separate deposit on the account of the Appropriation - 

for Clerk hire in the examination of the returns and the necessary protraction of plats. 

Upon such deposits being made the United States Depositary is required to issue Certificates ofDeposit in triplicate, one 

to be transmitted to this Office, upon the receipt of which, all 

the other requirements having been complied with, the Commissioner will issue the necessary instructions to the Surveyor 

to enable him to execute the field work of survey in accordance 

with the public land system. 

3d. It is proper to state that the fact of having borne the 

expense of survey will give no priority of claim or right, under 

existing laws, to purchase the land, or 

-3 - 

in any manner affect the vested interest of any party thereto, 

should such exist, as the Island, when surveyed, will be subject 

to disposal according to the Laws of Congress and the Regulations of this Office relative to the disposal of lands embraced in 

fagmentary surveys. 

Respectfully 

Jos S. Wilson 

Commissioner 

507 
XXXVI. 

(This Circular is copied from the original, Microcopy No. 27, 

National Archives. A copy of it was sent to all Surveyors 

General.) 

CIRCULAR. 

Department of the Interior 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D. C., July 13,1874. 

As inquiries arise in regard to the survey of the beds of 

meandered lakes or other similar bodies of water in districts 

where the office of Surveyor General has been discontinued, 

the following is communicated as defining the conditions 

under which such lake beds are regarded as surveyable, and 

as giving the proper mode of proceeding to have the same 

surveyed and to obtain title thereto: 

The beds of lakes, (not navigable,) sloughs, and ponds over 

which the lines of the public surveys were not extended at the 

date of the original survey, but which from the presence of 

water at the date of such survey were meandered, are held to 

be the property of the United States; and whenever, by evaporation or the operation of any other cause, natural or artificial, the waters of such lake, slough, or pond have so permanently receded or dried up as to leave within the unsurveyed area dry land fit, in ordinary seasons, for agricultural 

purposes, such dry land is subject to survey and sale under 

the general laws regulating the disposal of the public domain. 

Such surveys will be ordered and, upon approval, disposition proceeded with in the following cases: 

1st. Where the waters have so far permanently receded or 

disappeared as to permit, during the ordinary surveying season, (not on the ice,) the actual extension of the lines of 

survey, and the establishment and marking of corners in the 

manner required by law, over the whole area of the bed of 

such former lake. 

2d. Where the waters have not generally disappeared, but 

where they have so far permanently receded as to leave a 

margin of dry land fit for cultivation between the original 

meandered lines and the remaining waters of sufficient area 

to admit of the survey and of the estabishment of at least 

three of the corners of a quarter-section. 

3d. The Commissioner of the General Land Office will 

consider the question of ordering a survey of margins not 

admitting the laying off of one hundred and sixty acres, but 

not less than forty acres. 

Parties desiring the survey of such lands may make application in writing to the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office therefor, stating the approximate area, and the situation of the tract with reference to the section, township, and 

range of the public surveys, the same to be illustrated by a 

diagram; the fact that the waters have disappeared in the 

manner or to the extent as specified in one of the three several 

above-specified cases-such statement to be accompanied 

with the affidavit of at least two credible and disinterested 

witnesses as to the disappearance of the waters, the probable 

quantity of land capable of being surveyed in the whole area 

lying between the original meandered line and the then 

margin of the waters, and showing what proportion of such 

area is fit for agricultural purposes. To insure prompt attention and decision by this Office, both the statement and 

affidavits required must be full and specific. 

If, upon examination of such statement, diagram, and 

proof, it is found that such survey my be properly allowed, the 

parties applying will be so notified, and upon their designating to this Office the name and residence of some competent 

and reliable surveyor, together with a statement from him in 

writing of the amount for which he is willing to execute the 

field-work of the survey, and a certificate of some United 

States depositary that the amount specified has been deposited to the credit of the United States “on account of 

individual depositors,” the Commissioner will then issue the 

necessary instructions to the surveyor to enable him to execute the field-work of survey in accordance with the public 

land system. 

To correct what seems to be a very general misapprehension as to the manner in which persons may proceed to 

perfect title who have made actual settlement on lands of the 

character herein designated, and who claim or propose to 

claim under the pre-emption laws of the United States, it is 

remarked that in no event and at no stage of the proceedings 

can their declaratory statements be received or filed in this 

Office. Such declaratory statements must be filed in the local 

land office, and cannot be there received until after such 

survey has been made and the approved plat thereof filed in 

the local office. 

It is proper to further state that the fact of having borne the 

expense of survey will give no priority of claim or right, under 

existing laws, to purchase the land, or in any manner affect 

the vested interest of any party thereto, should such exist, as 

the land, when surveyed, will be subject to disposal according 

to the laws of Congress and the regulations of this Office 

relative to the disposal of lands embraced in fragmentary 

surveys. 

In case the lake bed is small and is so situated that no 

township, section, or quarter-section corners will need to be 

established by reason of such lake being situated within a 

given section or sections fully surveyed, no deposit will be 

required; and upon proof being furnished this Office as above 

of the disappearance of the water, the premises will be 

platted, and the land can then be disposed of under the existing laws. 

Respectully , S. S. BURDETT, 

Commissioner 

508 
XXXVII. XXXVIII. 

(This Circular letter was copied from the original, Microcopy 

No. 27, National Archives. A copy was sent to all Surveyors 

General.) 

CIRCULAR 

Department of the Interior 

General Land Office 

Washington D.C. April 17, 1879 

Sir: 

Experience has shown that it is often necessary to order the 

suspension of plats of survey in the local land offices and 

frequently the cancellation of the survey. The filing of the 

triplicate plats of surveys in the local land offices, before the 

duplicates have been approved by this office, has frequently 

led to complications of title and individual hardship to persons making entries according to such surveys, in cases 

where it has been necessary to set aside or cancel them. 

For these reasons you will not, after the receipt of this 

order, file the duplicate plats in the local land offices until the 

duplicates have been examined in this office and approved, 

and you officially notified to that effect. 

Very respectfully 

Your Obedient Servant 

J. A. Williamson 

Commissioner 

(This Circular is copied from a printed copy of the original, 

Microcopy No. 27, National Archives. It was routinely sent in 

response to inquiries about subdividing sections.) 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

November 1, 1879. 

This Office being in receipt of many letters making inquiry 

in regard to the proper method of subdividing sections of the 

public lands and restoring lost corners of the public surveys, 

the following general rules have been prepared as a reply to 

such inquiries. The rules for subdivision are based upon the 

laws governing the survey of the public lands. There being no 

special law in regard to the re-establishment of lost corners, 

the rule given below is to be considered merely as an expression of the opinion of this Office on the subject. When cases 

arise which are not covered by these rules and the advice of 

this Office in the matter is desired, the letter of inquiry 

should, in every instance, contain a description of the particular tract or corner with reference to township, range, and 

section of the public surveys, to enable the Office to consult 

the record. 

SUBDIVISION OF SECTIONS. 

Under the provisions of the Act of Congress approved 

February 11,1805, the course to be pursued in the subdivision of sections is to run straight lines from the established 

quarter-section corners-United States surveys-to the 

opposite corresponding corners, and the point of intersection 

of the lines so run will be the corner common to the several 

quarter-sections, or, in other words, the legal center of the 

section. 

In the subdivision of fractional quarter-sections where no 

opposite corresponding corners have been or can be fixed, the 

subdivision lines should be ascertained by running from the 

established corners due north, south, east, or west lines, as 

the case may be, to the water-course, Indian boundary line, or 

other external boundary of such fractional section. 

The law presupposes the section lines surveyed and 

marked in the field by the United States deputy surveyors to 

be due north and south or east and west lines, but in actual 

experience this is not always the case; hence, in order to carry 

out the spirit of the law, it will be necessary, in running the 

subdivisional lines through fractional sections, to adopt 

mean courses where the section lines are not due lines, or to 

run the subdivision line parallel to the section line when 

there is no opposite section line. 

Upon the lines closing on the north and west boundaries of 

a township, the quarter-section corners are established by 

the United States deputy surveyors at precisely forty chains 

to the north or west of the last interior section corners, and 

the excess or deficiency in the measurement is thrown on the 

outer tier of lots, as per Act of Congress approved May 10, 

1800. 

509 
-2- 

In the subdivision of quarter-sections the quarter-quarter 

corners are to be placed at points equidistant between the 

section and quarter-section corners and between the quarter 

corners and the common center of the section, except on the 

last half mile of the lines closing on the north or west boundaries of a township, where they should be placed at twenty 

chains, proportionate measurement, to the north or west of 

the quarter-section corner. 

The subdivision lines of fractional quarter-sections should 

be run from points on the section lines intermediate between 

the section and quarter-section corners due north, south, 

east, or west, to the lake, water-course, or reservation which 

renders such tracts fractional. 

When there are double sets of section corners on township 

and range lines, the quarter corners for the sections south of 

the township lines and east of the range lines are not established in the field by the United Stated surveyors, but in 

subdividing such sections said quarter corners should be so 

placed as to suit the calculations of the areas of the quartersections adjoining the township boundaries as expressed 

upon the official plat, adopting proportionate measurements 

where the present measurements of the north or west boundaries of the sections differ from the original measurements. 

RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF LOST CORNERS. 

The original corners, when they can be found, must stand 

as the true corners they were intended to represent, even 

though not exactly where strict professional care might have 

placed them in the first instance. 

Missing corners should be re-established in the identical 

localities they originally occupied. When the point cannot be 

determined by the existing landmarks in the field, resort 

must be had to the field notes of the original survey. The law 

provides that the lengths of the lines as stated in the field 

notes shall be considered as the true lengths thereof, and the 

distances between corners set down in the field notes constitute proper data from which to determine the true locality of 

a missing corner; hence the rule that all such should be 

restored at distances proportionate to the original measurements between existing original corners. That is, if the 

measurement between two existing corners differs from that 

stated in the field notes, the excess or deficiency should be 

distributed proportionately among the intervening section 

lines between the said existing corners standing in their 

original places. Missing corners on standard, township, and 

range lines should be restored by proportionate measurement between the nearest existing original corners on those 

lines. Missing section corners in the interior of townships 

should be re-established at proportionate distances between 

the nearest existing original corners north and south of the 

missing corners. 

-3- 

As has been observed, no existing original corner can be 

disturbed, and it will be plain that any excess or deficiency in 

measurements between existing corners cannot in any degree affect the distances beyond said existing corners, but 

must be added or subtracted proportionately to or from the 

intervals embraced between the corners which are still 

standing. 

J. M. ARMSTRONG, 

Acting Commissioner 

510 
XXXIX. 

(The 1881 Manual is copied from an original volume now in the possession of the BLM, Oregon State Office, Portland.) 

INSTRUCTIONS 

OF THE 

COMMISSIONER 

OF THE 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE 

TO THE 

SURVEYORS GENERAL OF THE UNITED 

STATES 

RELATIVE TO THE 

SURVEY OF THE PUBLIC LANDS 

AND 

PRIVATE LAND CLAIMS. 

MAY 3,1881. 

WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 

1881. 

511 
DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D.C., May 3, 1881. 

GENTLEMEN: The following instructions, including full 

and minute directions for the execution of surveys in the 

field, are issued under the authority given me by sections 

453,456,2398, and 2399 United States Revised Statutes, and 

must be strictly complied with by yourselves and your deputy 

surveyors. 

Very respectfully, 

J. A. WILLIAMSON, 

Commissioner. 

To SURVEYORS GENERAL OF THE UNITED STATES. 

-5- 

INTRODUCTORY. 

The present system of survey of the public lands was inaugurated by a committee appointed by the Continental Congress, and consisting of the following delegates: 

Hon. THOS. JEFFERSON, Chairman .......... .Virginia. 

Hon. HUGH WILLIAMSON. ............ .North Carolina. 

Hon. DAVID HOWELL ................... .Rhode Island. 

Hon. ELBRIDGE GERRY. ............... .Massachusetts. 

Hon. JACOB READ .................... .South Carolina. 

On the 7th of May, 1784, this committee reported “An 

ordinance for ascertaining the mode of locating and disposing 

of lands in the western territory, and for other purposes 

therein mentioned.” This ordinance required the public lands 

to be divided into “hundreds” of ten geographical miles 

square, and those again to be subdivided into lots of one mile 

square each, to be numbered from 1 to 100, commencing in 

the northwestern corner, and continuing from west to east 

and from east to west consecutively. This ordinance was 

considered, debated, and amended, and reported to Congress 

April 26,1785, and required the surveyors “to divide the said 

territory into townships of 7 miles square, by lines running 

due north and south, and others crossing these at right 

angles. * * * The plats of the townships, respectively, shall be 

marked by subdivisions into sections of 1 mile square, or 640 

acres, in the same direction as the external lines, and numbered from 1 to 49. * * * And these sections shall be subdivided into lots of 320 acres.” This is the first record of the use 

of the terms “township” and “section.” 

May 3, 1785, on motion of Hon. William Grayson, of Virginia, seconded by Hon. James Monroe, of Virginia, the section respecting the extent of townships was amended by 

striking out the words “seven miles square” and substituting 

the words “six miles square ‘‘ The record of these early sessions of Congress are not very full or complete; but it does not 

seem to have occurred to the members until the 6th of May, 

1785, that a township six miles square could not contain 49 

sections of 1 mile square. At that date a motion to amend was 

made, which provided, among other changes, that a township 

should contain 36 sections; and the amendment was lost. The 

ordinance as finally passed, however, on the 20th of May, 

1785, provided for townships, 6 miles square, containing 36 

sections of 1 mile square. The first public surveys were made 

under this ordinance. The townships, 6 miles square, were 

laid out in ranges, extending northward from the Ohio River, 

the townships being numbered from south to north, and the 

ranges from east to west. The region embraced by the surveys 

under this law forms a part of the present State of Ohio, and is 

usually styled “The Seven Ranges.” In these initial surveys 

only the exterior lines of the townships were surveyed, but the 

plats were marked by subdivisions into sections of 1 mile 

square, and mile corners were established on the township 

lines. The sections were numbered from 1 to 36, commencing 

-6- 

with No. 1 in the southeast corner of the township, and 

running from south to north in each tier to No. 36 in the 

northwest corner of the township, as shown in the following 

diagram: 

The surveys were made under the direction of the Geographer of the United States. 

The act of Congress approved May 18, 1796, Frovided for 

the appointment of a surveyor-general, and directed the survey of the lands northwest of the Ohio River, and above the 

mouth of the Kentucky River, “in which the titles of the 

Indian tribes have been extinguished.” Under this law onehalf of the townships surveyed were subdivided into sections 

“by running through the same, each way, parallel lines at the 

end of every two miles, and by making a corner on each of said 

lines at the end of every mile,” and it further provided that 

“the sections shall be numbered, respectively, beginning 

with the number one in the northeast section and proceeding 

west and east alternately, through the township, with progressive numbers till the thirty-sixth be completed.” This 

method of numbering sections, as shown by the following 

diagram, is still in use: 

512 
I I I I I I I 

7 

18 

30 

31 

8 9 10 11 12 

17 16 15 14 13 

29 28 27 26 25 

32 33 34 35 36 

31 

The act of Congress approved May 10, 1800, required the 

“townships west of the Muskingum, which * * * are directed 

to be sold in quarter townships, to be subdivided into half 

sections of three hundred and twenty acres each, as nearly as 

may be, by running parallel lines through the same from east 

to west, and from south to north, at the distance of one mile 

from each other, and marking corners, at the distance of each 

half mile on the lines running from east to west, and at the 

distance of each mile on those running from south to north.* * 

25 19 13 7 1 

-7- 

* And the interior lines of townships intersected by the Muskingum, and of all the townships lying east of that river, which 

have not been heretofore actually subdivided into sections 

shall also be run and marked. * * * And in all cases where the 

exterior lines of the townships thus to be subdivided into 

sections or half sections shall exceed, or shall not extend, six 

miles, the excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and 

added to or deducted from the western and northern ranges of 

sections or half sections in such township, according as the 

error may be in running the lines from east to west or from 

south to north.” 

The act of Congress approved February 11, 1805, directs 

the subdivision of the public lands into quarter sections, and 

provides that all the corners marked in the public surveys 

shall be established as the proper corners of sections or subdivisions of sections, which they were intended to designate, 

and that corners of half and quarter sections not marked shall 

be placed as nearly as possible “equidistant from those two 

corners which stand on the same line.” This act further provides that “The boundary lines actually run and marked * * * 

shall be established as the proper boundary lines of the sections or subdivisions for which they were intended; and the 

length of such lines as returned by * * * the surveyors * * * 

shall be held and considered as the true length thereof, and 

the boundary lines which shall not have been actually run 

and marked as aforesaid shall be ascertained by running 

straight lines from the established corners to the opposite 

corresponding corners; but in those portions of the fractional 

townships, where no such opposite or corresponding corners 

have been or can be fixed, the said boundary line shall be 

ascertained by running from the established corners due 

north and south or east and west lines, as the case may be, to 

the * * * external boundary of such fractional township.” 

The act of Congress approved April 25, 1812, provided 

“That there shall be established in the Department of the 

Treasury an office to be denominated the General Land 

Office; the chief officer of which shall be called the Commissioner of the General Land Office, whose duty it shall be, 

under the direction of the head of the department, to superintend, execute, and perform all such acts and things touching 

or respecting the public lands of the United States, and other 

lands patented or granted by the United States, as have 

heretofore been directed by law to be done or performed in the 

office of the Secretary of State, of the Secretary and Register 

of the Treasury, and of the Secretary of War, or which shall 

hereafter by law be assigned to the said office.” 

The act of Congress approved April 24, 1820, provides for 

the sale of public lands in half quarter sections, and requires 

that “in every case of the division of a quarter section the line 

for the division thereof shall run north and south * * * and 

fractional sections, containing 160 acres and upwards, shall, 

in like manner, as nearly as practicable, be subdivided into 

half quarter sections, under such rules and regulations as 

may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury; buy 

fractional sections containing less than 160 acres shall not be 

divided.” 

The act of Congress approved May 24,1824, provides “That 

whenever, in the opinion of the President of the United 

States, a departure from the ordinary mode of surveying land 

on any river, lake, bayou, or watercourse would promote the 

public interest, he may direct the surveyor-general in whose 

district such land is situated, and where the change is intended to be made, under such rules and regulations as the 

President may prescribe, to cause the lands thus situated to 

besurveyed 

-8- 

in tracts of two acres in width, fronting on any river, bayou, 

lake, or watercourse, and running back the depth of forty 

acres.”” * * 

The act of Congress approved May 29, 1830, provides for 

the fine and imprisonment of any person obstructing the 

survey of the public lands, and for the protection of surveyors, 

in the discharge of their official duties, by the United States 

marshal, with sufficient force, whenever necessary. 

The act of Congress approved April 5, 1832, directed the 

subdivision of the public lands into quarter-quarters; that in 

every case of the division of a half-quarter section the dividing line should run east and west, and that fractional sections 

should be subdivided under rules and regulations prescribed 

by the Secretary of the Treasury. Under the latter provision 

the Secretary directed that fractional sections containing 

less than 160 acres, or the residuary portion of a fractional 

section, after the subdivision into as many quarter-quarter 

sections as it is susceptible of, may be subdivided into lots, 

each containing the quantity of a quarter-quarter section as 

nearly as practicable, by so laying down the line of subdivision that they shall be 20 chains wide, which distances are to 

be marked on the plat of subdivision, as are also the areas of 

the quarter-quarters and residuary fractions. 

The two acts last above mentioned provided that the corners and contents of half-quarter and quarter-quarter sections should be ascertained, as nearly as possible, in the 

manner and on the principles directed and prescribed in the 

act of Congress approved February 11, 1805. 

513 
The act of Congress approved July 4,1836, provided for the 

reorganization of the General Land Office, and that the executive duties of said ofice “shall be subject to the supervision and control of the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office under the direction of the President of the United 

States.” The repealing clause is, “That such provisions of the 

act of the twenty-fifth of April, in the year one thousand eight 

hundred and twelve, entitled ‘An act for the establishment of 

a General Land Office in the Department of the Treasury’ 

and of all acts amendatory thereof, as are inconsistent with 

the provisions of this act, be, and the same are hereby, repealed.” 

From the wording of this act it would appear that the 

control of the General Land Office was removed from the 

Treasury Department, and that the Commissioner reported 

direct to the President, but, as a matter of fact, the Secretary 

of the Treasury still had supervisory control, for the act of 

Congress approved March 3,1849, by which the Department 

of the Interior was established, provided “That the Secretary 

of the Interior shall perform all the duties in relation to the 

General Land Office, of supervision and appeal, now discharged by the Secretary of the Treasury * * *.” By this act 

the General Land Office was transferred to the Department 

of the Interior, where it still remains. 

In 1855 a manual of instructions to surveyors general was 

prepared, under the direction of the Commissioner of the 

General Land Office, by John M. Moore, then principal clerk 

of surveys, and the act of Congress approved May 30,1862, 

provided “That the printed manual of instructions relating to 

the public surveys, prepared at the General Land Office, and 

bearing the date February twenty-second, eighteen hundred 

and fifty-five, the instructions of the Commissioner of the 

General Land Office, and the special instructions of the surveyor-general, when not in conflict with said printed manual 

or the instructions of said Commissioner, shall be taken and 

deemed to be a part of every contract for surveying the public 

lands of the United States.” 

The instructions contained in this volume are issued under 

the author- 

-9- 

ity given in the clause in said act providing that “The instructions of the Commissioner of the General Land Office * * * 

shall be taken and deemed to be a part of every contract for 

surveying the public lands of the United States.” 

The following comprise so much of the general laws relating to the survey of the public domain as it is deemed necessary to incorporate in this volume, reference being made by 

chapter and section to the codification of the Public Land 

Laws, prepared pursuant to acts of Congress approved March 

3, 1879, and June 16, 1880, and by section number to the 

Revised Statutes of the United States. 

[The remainder of page 9 and pages 10 through 17 deleted. 

These pages contain sections of the Revised Statutes pertaining to the public land surveys, and forms of contracts between 

Surveyors General and their Deputies.] 

-18- 

SYSTEM OF RECTANGULAR SURVEYING. 

1. The public lands of the United States are ordinarily 

surveyed into rectangular tracts, bounded by lines conforming to the cardinal points. 

2. The public lands shall be laid off, in the first place, into 

bodies of land of 24 miles square, as near as may be. This shall 

be done by the extension of standard lines from the principal 

meridian every 24 miles, and by the extension, from the base 

and standard lines, of auxiliary meridians every 24 miles. 

Thereafter they shall be laid off into bodies of land of 6 miles 

square, as near as may be, called townships, containing as 

near as may be 23,040 acres. The townships shall be subdivided into 36 tracts, called sections, each containing as near 

as may be 640 acres. Any number or series of contiguous 

townships, situate north or south of each other, constitute a 

range. 

The law requires that the lines of the public surveys shall 

be governed by the true meridian, and that the townships 

shall be six miles square-two things involving in connection 

a mathematical impossibility-for, strictly to conform to the 

meridian, necessarily throws the township out of square, by 

reason of the convergency of meridians, and hence, by adhering to the true meridian, results the necessity of departing 

from the strict requirements of law, as respects the precise 

area of townships and the subdivisional parts thereof, the 

township assuming something of a trapezoidal form, which 

inequality develops itself more and more as such, the higher 

the latitude of the surveys. It is doubtless in view of these 

circumstances that the law provides (see section 2 of the act of 

May 18,1796) that the sections of a mile square shall contain 

the quantity of 640 acres, as nearly as may be; and, moreover, 

provides (see section 3 of the act of May 10, 1800) in the 

following words: “And in all cases where the exterior lines of 

the townships, thus to be subdivided into sections or half 

sections, shall exceed, or shall not extend 6 miles, the excess 

or deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or deducted from the western or northern ranges of sections or half 

sections in such township, according as the error may be in 

running the lines from east to west, or from south to north; 

the sections and half sections bounded on the northern and 

western lines of such townships shall be sold as containing 

only the quantity expressed in the returns and plats, respectively, and all others as containing the complete legal quantity.” 

The accompanying diagram, marked A, and the specimen 

field-notes pertaining to the same, will serve to illustrate the 

method of running lines to form tracts of land 24 miles 

square, as well as the method of running out the exterior 

lines of townships, and the order and mode of subdividing 

townships will be found illustrated in the accompanying 

specimen field-notes, conforming with the township diagram 

B. The method here presented is designed to insure as full a 

compliance with all the requirements, meaning, and intent of 

the surveying laws as, it is believed, is practicable. 

The section lines are surveyed from south to north on true 

meridians, and from east to west, in order to throw the excesses or deficiencies in measurements on the north and west 

sides of the township, as required by law. In case where a 

514 
township has been partially surveyed, and it is necessary to 

complete the survey of the same, or where the character of the 

land is such that only the north or west portions of the 

township can be surveyed, this rule can not be strictly 

adhered to, but, in such cases, must be departed from only so 

far as is absolutely necessary. It will also be necessary to 

depart from this rule where surveys close upon 

-19- 

State or Territorial boundaries, or upon surveys extending 

from different meridians. 

3. The townships are to bear numbers in respect to the 

base line, either north or south of it; and the tiers of 

townships called “ranges” will bear numbers in respect to the 

meridian line according to their relative position to it, either 

on the east or west. 

4. The thirty-six sections into which a township is subdivided are numbered, commencing with number one at the 

northeast angle of the township, and proceeding west to number six, and thence proceeding east to number twelve, and so 

on, alternately, until the number thirty-six in the southeast 

angle. In all cases of surveys of fractional townships, the 

sections should bear the same numbers as they would if the 

township was full. 

5. Standard parallels shall be established at intervals of 

every 24 miles, north and south ofthe base line, and auxiliary 

meridians at intervals of every 24 miles, east and west of the 

principal meridian; the object being to confine the errors 

resulting from convergence of meridians, and inaccuracies in 

measurements, within the tracts of lands bounded by the 

lines so established. 

6. The survey of all principal base and meridian, standard 

parallels, and auxiliary meridian, and township lines must 

be made with an instrument operating independently of the 

magnetic needle. Burt’s improved solar compass, or other 

instrument of equal utility, must be used of necessity in such 

cases; and it is deemed best that such instrument should be 

used under all circumstances. Where the needle can be relied 

on, however, the ordinary compass may be used in subdividing and meandering. Whenever deputies use instruments 

with magnetic apparatus only, they must test the accuracy of 

their work and the condition of their instruments by at least 

three observations upon a circumpolar star, upon different 

days, between the commencement and the close of surveying 

operations in any given township. Deputies using instruments with solar apparatus are not required to make 

observations of the star Polaris, but they must test their 

instruments by taking the latitude daily, weather permitting, in running base, standard, meridian, and range lines, 

and upon three different days during the execution of subdivisional surveys in each township. They must make complete 

records in their field-notes, under proper dates, of the making 

of all observations in compliance with these instructions, 

showing the style and condition of the instrument in use, and 

the angle formed, by comparing the line run with the meridian as by observation determined. 

7. The construction and adjustments of all surveying instruments used in the surveying of the public lands of the 

United States must be tested at least once a year, and oftener 

if necessary, by comparison with the true meridian, established under the direction of the surveyor general of the 

district; and the instruments must be so modified in construction, or in such a way corrected, as may be necessary to 

produce the closest possible approximation to accuracy and 

uniformity in the operation of all such instruments. A record 

will be made of such examinations, showing the number and 

style of the instrument, name of the maker, the quantity of 

instrumental error discovered by comparison, in either solar 

or magnetic apparatus, or both, and means taken for correction. The surveyor-general will allow no surveys to be made 

until the instruments to be used therefor have been approved 

by him. 

8. The township lines and the subdivison lines will usually 

be measured by a two-pole chain of 33.03 feet in length, 

consisting of 50 links, and each link being 7 inches and 

ninety-two hundredths of an inch long. 

-20- 

On uniform and level ground, however, the four-pole chain 

may be used. The measurements will, however, always be 

represented according to the four-pole chain of 100 links. The 

four-pole chains must be adjusted to lengths of 66.06 feet. The 

object in adding six-hundredths of a foot to the 66 feet of a 

four-pole chain is to assure thereby that 66 feet will be set off 

upon the earth’s surface without the application of a greater 

strain than about 20 pounds by the chainmen, thus providing 

for loss by vertical curvature of the chain, and at the same 

time avoiding the uncertain results attending the application of strains taxing its elasticity. The deputy surveyor must 

provide himself with a measure of the standard chain kept at 

the office of the surveyor-general, to be used by him as a field 

standard. The chain in use must be compared and adjusted 

with this field standard each working day, and such field 

standard must be returned to the surveyor-general’s office for 

examination when his work is completed. 

OF TALLY PINS. 

9. You will use eleven tally pins made of steel, not exceeding 14 inches in length, weighty enough toward the point to 

make them drop perpendicularly, and having a ring at the 

top, in which is to be fixed a piece of red cloth, or something 

else of conspicuous color, to make them readily seen when 

stuck in the ground. 

PROCESS OF CHAINING. 

10. In measuring lines with a two-pole chain, every five 

chains are called “a tally;” and in measuring lines with a 

four-pole chain, every ten chains are called “a tally,” because 

at that distance the last of the ten tally pins with which the 

forward chainman set out will have been stuck. He then cries 

“tally;” which cry is repeated by the other chainman, and 

each registers the distance by slipping a thimble, button, or 

ring of leather, or something of the kind, on a belt worn for 

that purpose, or by some other convenient method. The hind 

chainman then comes up, and having counted in the presence 

of his fellow the tally pins which he has taken up, so that both 

may be assured that none of the pins have been lost, he then 

takes the forward end of the chain, and proceeds to set the 

515 
pins. Thus the chainmen alternately change places, each 

setting the pins that he has taken up, so that one is forward in 

all the odd, and the other in all the even tallies. Such procedure, it is believed, tends to insure accuracy in measurement, 

facilitates the recollection of the distances to objects on the 

line, and renders a mis-tally almost impossible. 

LEVELING THE CHAIN AND 

PLUMBING THE PINS. 

11. The length of every line you run is to be ascertained by 

precise horizontal measurement, as nearly approximating to 

an air line as is possible in practice on the earth‘s surface. 

This all-important object can only be attained by a rigid 

adherence to the three following observances: 

1. Ever keeping the chain stretched to its utmost degree of 

tension on even ground. 

2. On uneven ground, keeping the chain not only stretched 

as aforesaid, but horizontally leveled. And when ascending 

and descending steep ground, hills, or mountains, the chain 

will have to be shortened to 

-21- 

one-half its length (and sometimes more), in order accurately 

to obtain the true horizontal measure. 

3. The careful plumbing of the tally pins, so as to attain 

precisely the spot where they should be stuck. The more 

uneven the surface, the greater the caution needed to set the 

pins. 

MARKING LINES. 

12. All lines on which are to be established the legal corner 

boundaries are to be marked after this method, viz: Those 

trees which may intercept your line must have two chops or 

notches cut on each side of them without any other marks 

whatever. These are called “sight trees” or “line trees.” A 

sufficient number of other trees standing within 50 links of 

the line, on either side of it, are to be blazed on two sides 

diagonally, or quartering toward the line, in order to render 

the line conspicuous, and readily to be traced, the blazes to be 

opposite each other, coinciding in direction with the line 

where the trees stand very near it, and to approach nearer 

each other the farther the line passes from the blazed trees. 

Due care must ever be taken to have the lines so well marked 

as to be readily followed, and to cut the blazes deep enough to 

have recognizable scars as long as the trees stand. 

Where trees 2 inches or more in diameter are found, the 

required blazes must not be omitted. 

Bushes on or near the line should be bent at right angles 

therewith, and receive a blow of the ax at about the usual 

height of blazes from the ground sufficient to leave them in a 

bent position, but not to prevent their growth. 

ON TRIAL, OR RANDOM LINES, 

the trees are not to be blazed, unless occasionally, from indispensable necessity, and then it must be done so guardedly as 

to prevent the possibility of confounding the marks of the 

trial line with the true. But bushes and limbs of trees may be 

lopped, and stakes set on the trial or random line, at every ten 

chains, to enable the surveyor on his return to follow and 

correct the trial line and establish therefrom the true line. To 

prevent confusion, the temporary stakes set on the trial or 

random lines must bepulled up when the surveyor returns to 

establish the true line. 

INSUPERABLE OBJECTS ON LINEWITNESS POINTS. 

13. Under circumstances where your course is obstructed 

by impassable obstacles, such as ponds, swamps, marshes, 

lakes, rivers, creeks, &c., you will prolong the line across 

such obstacles by taking the necessary right angle offsets; or, 

if such be inconvenient, by a traverse or trigonometrical 

operation, until you regain the line on the opposite side. And 

in case a north and south, or a true east and west, line is 

regained in advance of any such obstacle, you will prolong 

and mark the line back to the obstacle so passed, and state all 

the particulars in relation thereto in your field-book. And at 

the intersection of lines with both margins of impassable 

obstacles, you will establish a witness point (for the purpose of 

perpetuating the intersections therewith), by setting a post, 

and giving in your field-book the course and distance therefrom to two trees on opposite sides of the line, each of which 

trees you will mark with a blaze and notch facing the post; 

but on the margins of navigable water-courses, or navigable 

lakes, you will mark the trees with the proper number of the 

fractional section, township and range. 

-22- 

The best marking tools adapted to the purpose must be 

provided for marking neatly and distinctly all the letters and 

figures required to be made at corners, arabic figures being 

used exclusively; and the deputy is always to have at hand 

the necessary implements for keeping his marking irons in 

order. 

ESTABLISHING CORNERS. 

To procure the faithful execution of this portion of a surveyor’s duty is a matter of the utmost importance. After a 

true coursing and most exact measurements the establishment of corners is the consummation of the work. If, therefore, the corner be not perpetuated in a permanent and workmanlike manner the great aim of the surveying service will 

not have been attained. 

The following are the different points for perpetuating 

corners, viz: 

1. For township boundaries, at intervals of every 6 miles. 

2. For section boundaries, at intervals of every mile, or 80 

chains. 

3. For quarter-section boundaries, at intervals of every 

half mile, or 40 chains. Exceptions, however, occur as fully 

set forth hereafter in that portion of the manual showing the 

manner of running township lines and method of subdividing. 

4. Meander corners are established at all those points 

where the lines of the public surveys intersect the banks of 

516 
such rivers, bayous, lakes, or islands as are by law directed to 

be meandered. 

DESCRIPTION OF CORNERS. 

The following is the form and language to be used by 

deputy surveyors in describing the establishment of corners 

in their field-notes, and their work in the field must strictly 

comply with the same. 

STANDARD TOWNSHIP CORNERS. 

stone - x - x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.) Tps. 

5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked S. C. with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

edges, dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line, N., E. 

& W. of stone 6 ft. dist. and raised a mound of earth, 2l/2 ft. 

high, 5 ft. base alongside. 

stone - x - x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 

5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked S. C., with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

edges, and raised a mound of stone alongside. Pits impracticable. 

stone - x - x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 

5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked S. C., with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

edges, from which 

A-, - ins. diam. bears N -' E. - 

lks., dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. W. 

lks., dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

A-, - ins. diam., bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

SEC. 4. 4Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., 

marked S. C. T. 5 N. on N. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a 

SEC. 2. 2Set a 

SEC. 3. 3Set a 

-23- 

R. 2 W. S. 31, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. faces, with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

faces, dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line, N., E. 

& W. of post, 6 ft. dist. and raised a mound of earth 2Y2 ft. 

high, 5 ft. base, around post. 

SEC. 5. 5Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.) Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W. 

marked 

S. C. T. 5 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. faces, with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

faces; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears N-'E. - lks., dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

- 

A-, ins., diam., bears N -' W. 

lks., dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S -' W. - lks., dist. maeked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S.l, B. T. 

SEC. 6. 'Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.1 

Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., dugpits. 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on 

each line, N., E. & W. of cor., 6 ft. dist. and raised a mound of 

earth 2l/2 feet high, 5 ft. base, over it. In E. pit drove a stake 2 

ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins. in the ground, marked 

S. C. T. 5 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. faces, with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

SEC. 7. 7A -, ins. diam., which I marked 

S. C. T. 5 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. faces, with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

faces, dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line, N., E. & 

W. of tree 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth around tree, 

for Standard Cor. to Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W. 

, - ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.1 

faces.' 

(e.g.1 

SEC. 8. 'A 

T. 5 N. S. C. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. faces, with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

faces, for Standard Cor. to Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W.; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears N-O E. - lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

A-, ins.diarn.,bearsN-'W.- 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W., S. 36, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S W. - 

lks. dist., marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

CLOSING TOWNSHIP CORNERS. 

ins. - ins. in the ground for Closing Cor. to (e.g.) Tps. 4 

N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked C. C. with 6 notches on S. E. & W. 

edges, dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, S., E. 

& W. of stone, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth, 2Y2 ft. 

high, 5 ft. base alongside. 

ins.ins. in the ground for Closing Cor. to (e.g.) Tps. 4 

N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked C. C. with 6 notches on S. E. and W. 

edges, and raised a mound of stone alongside. Pits impracticable. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a stone X-XSEC. 2. 2Set a stone x-x- 

-24- 

SEC. 3. 3Set a stone - x - x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground for Closing Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 4 

N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked C. C. with 6 notches on S., E., & W. 

edges; from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears N W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

SEC. 4. 4Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground for Closing Cor. to (e.g.) Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., 

marked 

1. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

2. Stone with Mound of Stone. 6. Mound without Post or Stone. 

3. Stone with Bearing Trees. 

4. Post in Mound. 

5. Post with Bearing Trees 

7. Tree Corner without Bearing Trees. 

8. Tree Corner with Bearing Trees 

517 
C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. faces, with 6 notches on S., E., & W. faces, 

dugpits24x18x 12ins.,crosswiseoneachline, S.,E., & W. of 

post, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2% ft. high, 5 ft. 

base, around post. 

SEC. 5. 5Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Closing Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., 

marked 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. faces, with 6 notches on S., E. & W. faces; 

from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears N OW.- 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

SEC. 6. 'Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e.g.) 

Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on 

each line, S., E., & W. of corner, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound 

of earth 2% ft. high, 5 ft. base, over it. In E. pit drove a stake 2 

ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins. in the ground, marked 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. faces, with 6 notches on S., E. & W. faces. 

SEC. 7. 7A ins. diam., which I marked 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. faces, with 6 notches on S., E. & W. faces, 

dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line S. E. & W. of 

tree, 6 ft. dist. and raised a mound of earth around tree, for 

Closing Cor. to Tps. 4 N. Rs 2 & 3, W. 

, ~ ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.1 

(e.g.1 

SEC. 8. 'A 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. faces, with 6 notches on S., E. & W. faces 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. - 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

A-, -ins. diam. bears N-O W. - 

for Closing Cor. to Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W.; from which 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

Iks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

-25- 

SEC. 9. All Closing Township Corners must be connected 

with the nearest corner on the Standard line. 

STANDARD SECTION CORNERS. 

x - x ins., in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 35 & 36, marked S. C., 

with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. edges, dug pits, 18 x 18 

x 12 ins., N., E. & W. of stone, 5% ft. dist., and raised a mound 

of earth, 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base alongside. 

SEC. 1 . 'Set a - stone 

SEC. 2. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.1 

Secs. 33 & 34, marked S. C., with 3 notches on E. & W. edges, 

and raised a mound of stone alongside. Pits impracticable. 

- 

x - x ~ ins., 

ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. 50 (e.g.1 Sec. 35 

& 36, marked S. C., with 1 notch on E and 5 notches on W. 

edges; from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears N W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 35, B. T. 

A -, - ins. diam. bears S E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 2, B. T. 

SEC. 4. 4Set a post, 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 35 & 36, marked 

SEC. 3. 3Set a stone 

S.C.T.5N.R.3W.,onN. 

S. 36, on E. and 

S. 35 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

faces, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N., E. and W. of post, 5% ft. 

dist. and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base round 

post. 

SEC. 5. 5Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.) Secs. 35 & 36, marked 

S. C.T.5N.R.3 W.,onN. 

S. 36, on E. and 

S. 35 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

faces; from which 

, A- ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S . 36, B. T. 

A -, -ins. diam. bears N W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 35, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam. bears S E. - 

Iks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 2, B. T. 

SEC. 6. 'Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e.g.1 

Secs. 33 & 34, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N., E. and W. of 

corner, 5% ft. dist., and raised a mound ofearth 2 ft. high, 4Y4 

ft. base over it. In E. pit drove a stake 2 ins. square, 2 ft. long, 

12 ins. in the ground, marked 

T. 5N. R. 3 W.,S. C. onN. 

S. 34 on E. and 

S. 33 on W. faces, with 3 notches on E. & W. faces. 

SEC. 7. 7A 

S. C. T. 5N. R. 3 W., onN. 

S. 36, on E. and 

S. 35 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

ins, diam., which I marked 

(ex.) 

faces, 

-26- 

dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. N., E. & W. of tree, 5% ft. dist. and 

1. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

2. Stone with Mound of Stone. 6. Mound without Post or Stone 

3. Stone with Bearing Trees. 

4. Post in Mound. 

5. Post with Bearing Trees. 

7. Tree Comer without Bearing Trees. 

8. Tree Comer with Bearing Trees. 

518 
raised a mound of earth around tree, for Standard Cor. to 

Secs. 35 & 36. 

SEC. 8. 'A -, - ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.1 

S.C.T.5N.R.3W.,onN. 

S. 36, on E. and 

S. 35 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

A -, - ins. diam. bears N E. - 

A-, -ins. diam. bears N W. - 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. - 

faces, for Standard Cor. to Secs. 35 & 36; from which 

lks dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 35, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 2, B. T. 

SECTION CLOSING CORNERS. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins., -ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 

1 & 2, marked C. C., with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

edges, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. S., E. & W. of stone, 5% feet 

dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base 

alongside. 

SEC. 2. 2Set a - stone - x ~ x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e.g.) Secs. 

3 & 4, marked C. C., with 3 notches on E. and W. edges, & 

raised, a mound of Stone alongside. Pits impracticable. 

stone - x - x - 

ins. - ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 

1 & 2, marked C. C., with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

edges; from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. - lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 2, B. T. 

A -, ~ ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

SEC. 4. 4Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone, (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground for Closing Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 1 & 2, marked 

SEC. 3. 3Set a 

C.C.T.4N.R.3 W.,onS. 

S. 1, on E. and 

S. 2 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

faces, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., S., E. & W. of post 5% ft. dist., 

and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base around 

post. 

SEC. 5. 5Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Closing Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 1 & 2, marked 

C.C.T.4N.R. 3 W.,onS. 

S. 1, on E. and 

S. 2 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

faces; from which 

A -, - ins. diam. bears S E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3, W. S. 1, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 2, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears N "E.- 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

SEC. 6. 'Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e.g.) 

Secs. 3 & 4, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., S., E. & W. of Cor., 5% 

-27- 

ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base 

over it. In E. pit drove a stake, 2 ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

C.C.T.4N.R.3W.,onS. 

S. 3, on E. and 

S. 4 on W. faces, with 3 notches on E. & W. faces. 

SEC. 7 7A 

C. C.T.4N.R.3 W.,onS. 

S. 1, on E. and 

S. 2 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

faces, dug pits 18 x 18 x 12 ins. S., E. & W. of tree, 5l/2 ft. dist., 

and raised a mound of earth around tree, for closing Cor. to 

Secs. 1 & 2. 

ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.1 

ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.1 

SEC. 8. 'A 

C. C.T.4N.R. 3 W.,onS. 

S. 1, on E. and 

S. 2 on W. faces, with one notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

A -, - ins. diam. bears S E. - 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

A-, ins. diam. bears N E. 

SEC. 9. 'All Section Closing Corners must be connected 

faces, for Closing Cor. to Secs. 1 & 2; from which 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N. R. 3 W. S. 2, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

with the nearest corner on the Standard line. 

CORNERS COMMON TO 4 TOWNSHIPS. 

stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground for Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 2 & 3 N. 

R's 2 & 3 W., marked with 6 notches on each edge, dug pits, 24 

x 18 x 12 ins. lengthwise on each line, N., S., E. & W. of stone, 

6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2Y2 ft. high, 5 ft. base 

alongside. 

stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Cor. to (e.g.) Tps. 2 & 3 N. 

Rs 2 & 3 W. marked with 6 notches on each edge, and raised a 

mound of stone alongside. Pits impracticable. 

stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 2 & 3 N. 

R. 2 & 3 W. marked with 6 notches on each edge; from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

A ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears N W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a 

SEC. 2. 2Set a 

SEC. 3. 3Set a 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

SEC. 4. 4Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

Stone with Pits and Mound. 

Stone with Mound of Stone. 

Stone with Bearing Trees. 

Post in Mound. 9. Connection Lines. 

Post with Bearing Trees. 

6. Mound without Post or Stone. 

7. Tree Corner without Bearing Trees. 

8. Tree Corner with Bearing Trees. 

519 
stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 2 & 3 N. Rs 2 & 3 W. marked 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1, on S. W. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on N. W. faces, with 6 notches on each edge, 

dug pits, 

-28- 

24 x 18 x 12 ins., lengthwise on each line, N., S., E. & W. of 

post, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2% ft. high, 5 ft. 

base around post. 

SEC. 5. 5Set a post 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Cor. to (e.g.1 Tps. 2 & 3 N. Rs 2 & 3 W. marked 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1, on S. W. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on N. W. faces, with 6 notches on each edge; 

from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. ~ 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears N W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

SEC. 6. 'Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground for Cor. to (e.g.) Tps. 2 & 3 N. 

Rs 2 & 3 W., dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., lengthwise on each 

line, N., S., E. & W. of cor., 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of 

earth 2% ft. high, 5 ft. base over it. In S. E. pit drove a stake 2 

ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins. in the ground, marked 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1 on S. W. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36, on N. W. faces, with 6 notches on each edge. 

SEC. 7. 7A -, ins. diam., which I marked 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1, on S. W. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on N. W. faces, with 6 notches on each edge, 

dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins. lengthwise on each line, N., S., E. & 

W. of tree, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth around tree, 

for Cor. to Tps. 2 & 3 N. R's 2 & 3 W. 

ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.1 

(e.g.1 

SEC. 8. 'A -, 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1, on S. W. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36, on N. W. faces, with 6 notches on each edge, 

A - ~ ins. diam. bears N E. - 

A-, ins. diam. bears S. E. - 

A-, ins. diam. bears S. W. ~ 

A-, ins. diam. bears N OW.- 

for Cor. to Tps. 2 & 3 N. Rs 2 & 3 W. from which 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N. R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N. R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

CORNERS COMMON TO 4 SECTIONS. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a ~ stone - x - x - ins. - ins. in the ground for Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 25,26,35 

& 36, marked with 1 notch on S. & E. edges, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 

12 ins. in each Sec., 5% ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 

ft. high, 4% ft. base alongside. 

-29- 

SEC. 2. 2Set a stone - x - x - 

ins. ~ ins. in the ground, for Cor. to (e.g.) Secs. 14,15, 

22 & 23, marked with 3 notches on S. and 2 notches on E. 

edges, and raised a mound of stone alongside. Pits impracticable. 

SEC. 3. 3Set a - stone - x ~ x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground, for Cor. to (e.g.) Secs. 9,10,15 

& 16, marked with 4 notches on S. & 3 notches on E. edges, 

from which 

A-, -ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 10, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 15, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 16, B. T. 

A-, -ins. diam. bears N. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 9, B. T. 

SEC. 4. 4Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Cor. to (e.g.) Secs, 15, 16, 21 & 22, marked 

T. 2 N. S. 15, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 22, on S. E. 

S. 21, on S. W. and 

S. 16 on N. W. faces, with 3 notches on S. & E. edges, dug 

pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. in each Sec., 5% ft. dist., and raised a 

mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base around post. 

SEC. 5. 5Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 25, 26, 35 & 36, marked 

T. 2 N. S. 25, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 36, on S. E. 

S. 35, on S. W. and 

S. 26, on N. W. faces, with 1 notch on S. & E. edges; from 

which 

A-, ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 25, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 36, B. T. 

A ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 35, B. T. 

A ins. diam. bears N W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 26, B. T. 

SEC. 6. 'Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Cor. to (e.g.1 Secs. 25,26, 

35 & 36, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. in each Sec., 5% ft. dist., 

1. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

2. Stone with Mound of Stone. 6. Mound without Post or Stone. 

3. Stone with Bearing Trees. 

4. Post in Mound. 

5. Post with Bearing Trees. 

7. Tree Corner without Bearing Trees. 

8. Tree Corner with Bearing Trees. 

520 
and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base over it. 

In S. E. pit drove a stake 2 ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins in 

the ground, marked 

T. 2 N. S. 25, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 36, on S. E. 

S. 35, on S. W. and 

S. 26 on N. W. faces, with 1 notch on S. & E. edges. 

SEC. 7. 7A -, 

T. 2 N. S. 29, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 32, on S. E. 

S. 31, on S. W. and 

S. 30, on N. W. faces, with 1 notch on S. and 5 notches on E. 

edges, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. in each sec. 5% ft. dist. and 

raised a mound of earth around tree, for Cor. to Secs. 29,30, 

31 & 32. 

ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.1 

-30- 

SEC. 8. 'A 

T. 2 N. S. 5, on N. E. 

R.'2 W. S. 8, on S. E. 

S. 7, on S. W. and 

S. 6 on N. W. faces, with 5 notches on S. & E, edges, for Cor. 

A-, - ins. diam. bears N E. - 

A -, - ins. diam. bears S E. - 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

A-, ins. diam. bears N W. - 

ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.) 

to Secs. 5, 6, 7 & 8; from which 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 5, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 8, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 7, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

ARTICLE X. 

QUARTER SECTION CORNERS. 

stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins, in the ground, for l/4 Sec. Cor., marked 1/4 on 

N. (or W.) face, dug pits,l8 x 18 x 12 ins., N. & S., (or E. & W.) 

of stone 5% ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 1% ft. high, 

3% base alongside. 

SEC. 2. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for l/4 Sec. Cor., marked 1/4 on 

N. (or W.) face, and raised a mound of stone alongside. Pits 

impracticable. 

stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for 1/4 Sec. Cor. marked l/4 on 

N. (or W.) face; from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked l/4 S. B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked l/4 S. B. T. 

SEC. 4. 4Set a post 3 ft. long, 3 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for 1/4 Sec Cor., marked 1/4 S. on N. (or W.) face, dug 

pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N. & S., (or E. and W.) of post 5%. ft. 

dist., and raised a mound of earth 1% ft. high, 3% ft. base 

around post. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a 

SEC. 3. 3Set a 

SEC. 5. %et a post 3 ft. long, 3 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for 1/4 Sec. Cor., marked l/4 S. on N. (or W.) face; from 

which 

A ins. diam., bears N. E., 

- lks., dist. marked 1/4 S. B. T. 

A-, lks., dist. marked l/4 S. B. T. 

SEC. 6. 'Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for 1/4 Sec. Cor., dugpits, 18 

x 18 x 12 ins., N. & S., (or E. & W.) of post 5% ft. dist. and 

raised a mound of earth 1% ft. high, 3% ft. base over it. In E. 

(or N.) pit drove a stake 2 ft. long, 2 ins. square, 12 ins. in the 

ground, marked l/4 S. on N. (or W.) face. 

ins. diam., which I marked 1/4 

S. on N. (or W.) face, for l/4 Sec. Cor., dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. 

N. & S. (or E. & W.) of tree, 5% ft. dist. and raised a mound of 

earth around tree. 

SEC. 8. 'A ins. diam., which I mark 1/4 S. 

on N. (or W.) face, for 1/4 Sec Cor.; from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears N E. - 

lks. dist. marked 1/4 S. B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked 1/4 S. B. T. 

SEC. 9. "On N. and S. lines the marks must be made on W. 

side, and on E. and W. lines on N. side of the stone, post or 

tree. 

ins. diam., bears S- W., 

SEC 7. 7A 

-31- 

SEC. 10. "On N. & S. lines, the pits must be dug N. & S. of 

SEC. 11. 120n N. & S. lines, the stakes must be driven in N. 

Cor. and on E. & W. lines, E. & W. of Cor. 

pit, and on E. & W. lines, E. pit. 

STANDARD QUARTER SECTION CORNERS. 

All Quarter Section Corners on Standard lines must be 

established in all respects like other Quarter Section Corners, with the addition of the letters S. C., and ifbearing trees 

are established for such Corners, each tree must be marked S. 

C. l/4 S. B. T. 

MEANDER CORNERS. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a stone x-xins., ins. in the ground, for Meander Cor. to (e.g.) 

Fractional Secs. 1 & 2, marked M. C., dug a pit 3 ft. square, 1 

ft. deep, 8 lks. of stone, and raised a mound of earth 2 

ft. high, 4% ft. base alongside. 

SEC. 2. 'Set a stone x-xins., - ins. in the ground for Meander Cor. to (e.g.) 

Fractional Secs. 35 & 36, marked M. C., and raised a mound 

of stone 2 ft. high, 41/z ft. base alongside. Pits impracticable. 

SEC. 3. 3Set a stone x-x1. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

2. Stone with Mound of Stone. 

3. Stone with Bearing Trees. 

4. Post in Mound. 

5. Post with Bearing Trees. 

6. Mound without Post or Stone. 12. Stakes in Pits. 

7. Tree Corner without Bearing Trees. 

8. Tree Corner with Bearing Trees. 

9. Connection Lines. 

10. Marks. 

11. Pits. 

521 
ins., - ins. in the ground for Meander Cor. to (e.g.) 

Fractional Secs, 9 & 10, marked M. C.; from which 

A -, - ins. diam. bears S E. ~ 

lks., dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 10, M. C. B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 9, M. C. B. T. 

SEC. 4. 4Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Meander Cor. to (e.g.) Fractional Secs. 35 & 36, 

marked M. C., with 

T. 2 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 36, on E. and 

S. 35 on W. faces, dug a pit, 3 ft. square, 1 ft. deep, 8 lks. 

- of post, and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4?h ft. 

base, around post. 

SEC. 5. %et a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Meander Cor. to (e.g.) Fractional Secs. 20 & 21, 

marked M. C. with 

T. 2 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 21 on E. and 

S. 20 on W. faces; from which 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S E. - 

lks., dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 21, M. C. B. T. 

A-, ins, diam., bears S W. - 

lks., dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 20, M. C. B. T. 

SEC. 6. ‘Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Meander Cor. to (e.g.1 

Fractional Secs. 11 & 12, dug a pit, 3 ft. square, 1 ft. deep, 8 

Iks. -of Cor., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4l/z 

ft. base, over it. In pit drove a stake 2 ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 

ins. in the ground, marked M. C. with 

T. 2 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 12 on E. and 

S. 11 on W. faces. 

-32- 

SEC. 7. 7A, 

(e.g.1 M. C. with 

T. 2 N. on W. 

R. 2 W. S. 13 on N. and 

S. 24 on S. faces, for Meander Cor. to Fractional Secs. 13 & 

24. 

SEC. 8. ‘A ins. diam., which I marked 

(e.g.1 M. C. with 

T. 2 N. on E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6 on N. and 

S. 7 on S. faces, for Meander Cor. to Fractional Secs. 6 & 7; 

from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears N W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 6, M C. B. T. 

A-, ins. diam. bears S W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 7, M. C. B. T. 

SEC. 9. “When a pit is dug at a Meander Cor. it must be 8 

lks. from the Cor., on the side opposite the river or lake 

meandered. 

SEC. 10. “The letters “M. C.” for Meander Corner must be 

marked on the side facing the river or lake meandered. 

ins diam., which I marked 

WITNESS CORNERS. 

A Witness Corner must bear the same marks that would be 

placed upon the Corner for which it is a witness, with the 

addition of the letters W. C., and be established in all respects 

like such Corner. 

If bearing trees are established for a Witness Corner, each 

tree must be marked W. C., in addition to the usual marks. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

SEC. 1. 13When a rock in place is established for a Corner, 

its dimensions above ground must be given, and a cross (X) 

marked at exact Corner point. In other respects form for stone 

corners will be used. 

SEC. 2. ‘*Where mounds of earth are raised “alongside” of 

Corners, on N. and S. lines, they must be placed on the W. and 

on E. and W. lines on the N. side of Corner. In case the 

character of the land is such that this cannot be done, the 

deputy will state in his notes instead of “alongside,” “S’ (or 

E.) 

SEC. 3. 151n case where pits are practicable, the deputy 

prefers raising a mound of stone, or stone covered with earth, 

as more likely to perpetuate the Corner, he will use the form 

given for mound of stone, omitting the words “pits impracticable,” and adding “covered with earth,” when so 

e~tab1ished.l~ 

SEC. 4. “Where the requisite number of trees can be found 

within 300 links of the Corner point, three (3) bearing trees 

should be established for every Standard or Closing Cor., four 

(4) for every Cor. common to 4 Townships or Sections, and two 

(2) for every Quarter Sec. Cor. or Meander Cor. In case the 

requisite number cannot be found within limits, the deputy 

must state in his field notes after describing those established, “no other trees within limits,” and “dug pits in Secs. 

-& ,” or “raised a mound of stone alongside.” 

SEC. 5. 17Stones 18 ins. and less long must be set twothirds, and over 18 ins. long, three-fourths of their length in 

the ground. No stones containing less than 504 cubic inches 

must be used for corners. 

-33- 

SEC. 6. “Particular attention is called to the “Summary of 

objects and data required to be noted,” on pages - and - 

of these instructions, and it is expected that the deputy will 

thoroughly comply with same in his work and field notes. 

SEC. 7. ”No mountains, swampy lands, or lands not 

classed as surveyable are to be meandered, and all lines 

approaching such lands must be discontinued at the section 

or quarter section corner. 

SEC. 8. 20Where by reason of impassable objects the south 

4. Post in Mound. 

5. Post with Bearing Trees. 

6. Mound without Post or Stone. 

7. Tree Comer without Bearing Trees 

8. Tree Comer with Bearing Trees. 

9. Connection Lines. 

10. Marks. 

11. Pits. 

12. Stakes in Pits. 

13. Rock in Place. 

14. Mounds of Earth. 

15. Mounds of Stone. 

16. Bearing Trees. 

17. Stones. 

18. Objects to be Noted. 

19. Lines Discontinued at Legal Corners. 

20. Fractional Townships. 

522 
boundary of a township cannot be established, an east and 

west line should be run through the Township, first random, 

then corrected, from one range line to the other, and as far 

south as possible, and from such line the section lines will be 

extended in the usual manner, except over any fraction south 

of said line, which may be surveyed in the opposite direction 

from the Section Corners on the auxiliary base thus established. 

SEC. 9. 21When no part of the east or west boundaries can 

be run, both the north and south boundaries will be established as true lines. 

SEC. 10. 22Allowance for the convergency of Meridians 

must be made whenever necessary. 

SEC. 11. 23All letters and figures cut in posts or trees must 

be marked over with red chalk to make them still more plain 

and durable. 

SEC. 12. 24Township corners common to four townships, 

and section corners common to four sections, are to be set 

diagonally in the earth, with the angles in the direction of the 

lines. All other corners are to be set square, with the sides 

facing the direction of the lines. 

SEC. 13. 25The sizes of wooden posts, mounds, and pits 

noted in foregoing descriptions of corners are to be regarded 

as minimum, and whenever practicable to increase their 

dimensions it is desirable to do so. 

SEC. 14. 261n establishing corners, stones should be used 

wherever practicable; then, posts; and lastly, mounds, with 

stake in pit. 

SEC. 15. 271t is expected that the deputy surveyors will 

carefully read and familiarize themselves with these instructions, and all others contained in this volume, and will instruct their assistants as to their duties before commencing 

work. Extra copies will be furnished the deputies for the use 

of their assistants. 

MEANDERING. 

SEC. 1. Proceeding down stream, the bank on the left hand 

is termed the “left bank,” and that on the right hand the 

“right bank.” These terms are to be universally used to distinguish the two banks of a river or stream. 

SEC. 2. Both banks of navigable rivers are to be meandered 

by taking the general courses and distances of their sinuosities, and the same are to be entered in the field book. 

At those points where either the township or section lines 

intersect the banks of a navigable stream, corners are to be 

established at the time of running these lines. These are 

called “meander corners”; and in meandering you are to 

commence at one of those corners, coursing the banks, and 

measuring the distance of each course from your com- 

-34- 

mencing corner to the next “meander corner.” By the same 

method you are to meander the opposite bank of the same 

river. 

21. Boundaries. 25. Size of Posts, etc 

22. Convergency. 26. Corner Materials 

23. Red Chalk. 27. Examine Instructions. 

24. Mode of Setting Corners. 

The crossing distance between the MEANDER CORNERS 

on same line is to be ascertained by triangulation, in order 

that the river may be protracted with entire accuracy. The 

particulars to be given in the field notes. 

Rivers not embraced in the class denominated “navigable” 

under the statute, but which are well-defined natural arteries of internal communication, will only be meandered on one 

bank. For the sake of uniformity, the surveyor will traverse 

the right bank when not impracticable; but where serious 

obstacles are met with, rendering it difficult to course along 

the right bank, he may cross to the left bank and continue the 

meanders as far as necessary; but all changes from one bank 

to the other will be made at the point of intersection of some 

line of the public surveys with the stream being meandered. 

The subdividing deputies will be required to establish 

meander corners on both banks of such meanderable streams 

at the intersection of all section lines, and the distances 

across the river will be noted in the field book. 

In meandering water-courses, where a distance is more 

than ten chains between stations, even chains only should be 

taken; but if the distance is less than ten chains, and it is 

found convenient to employ chains and links, the number of 

links should be a multiple of ten, thereby saving time and 

labor in testing the closings both in the field and in the 

surveyor-generals’ office. 

SEC. 3. You are also to meander, in manner aforesaid, all 

lakes, bayous, and deep ponds, which may serve as public 

highways of commerce. Shallow lakes or ponds, readily to be 

drained or likely to dry up, are not to be meandered. Lakes, 

bayous, and ponds lying entirely within a section are not to be 

meandered. 

In meandering lakes, bayous, or ponds you are to commence at a meander corner, and proceed as above directed for 

meandering the banks of navigable streams; and from said 

corner take the courses and distances of the entire margin of 

the same, noting the intersections with all meander corners 

established thereon. 

You will notice all streams of water falling into the river, 

lake, or bayou you are surveying, stating the width of the 

same at their mouth; also all springs, noting the size thereof 

and depth, and whether the water be pure or mineral; also the 

head and mouth of all bayous; and all islands, rapids, and 

bars are to be noticed, with intersections to their upper and 

lower points to establish their exact situation. You will also 

note the elevation of the banks of rivers and streams, the 

heights of falls and cascades, and the length of rapids. 

SEC. 4. Meander lines should not be established at the 

segregation line between dry and swamp or overflowed land, 

but at the ordinary low-water mark of the actual margin of 

the rivers or lakes on which such swamp or overflowed lands 

border. In cases where such meander lines were formerly 

established at the segregation line between dry and swamp 

or overflowed lands, new and proper meander lines may be 

established under the direction of the surveyor general, and 

the township and section lines extended over such swamp or 

overflowed lands and the corners established, as hereinbefore provided, in order that the plats and field-notes of surveys may show the actual facts in the case. 

5. The precise relative position of islands, in a township 

made fractional by the river in which the same are situated, 

523 
is to be determined trigonometrically; sighting to a flag or 

other fixed object on the island, 

-35- 

from a special and carefully measured base line, connected 

with the surveyed lines, on or near the river bank, you are to 

form connection between the meander corners on the river to 

points corresponding thereto, in direct line, on the bank ofthe 

island, and there establish the proper meander corners, and 

calculate the distance across. 

6. In taking the connection of an island with the main 

land, when there is no meander corner in line, opposite thereto, to sight from, you will measure a special base from the 

meander corner nearest to such island, and from such base 

you will triangulate to some fixed point on the shore of the 

island, ascertain the distance across, and there establish a 

special meander corner, wherefrom you will commence to 

meander the island. 

7. The field-notes of meanders will be set forth in the 

field-books showing the dates when the work is performed, as 

illustrated in the specimen notes annexed. They are to state 

and describe particularly the meander corner from which 

they commenced, and each one upon which they close, and 

are to exhibit the meanders of each fractional section separately; following, and composing a part of such notes, will be 

given a description of the land, timber, depth of inundation to 

which the bottom is subject, and the banks, current, and 

bottom of the stream or body of water you are meandering. 

The utmost care must be taken to pass no object of topography, or change therein, without giving a particular description. 

SURVEYING. 

measurement, two sets of chainmen, operating independently of each other, must be employed. 

Where transits are used, the line will be run by setting off 

at the point of departure on the principal meridian, a tangent 

to the parallel of latitude, which will be a line falling at right 

angles to the said meridian. The survey will be continued on 

this line for twelve (12) miles, but the corners will be established at the proper points by offsets north- 

-36- 

erly from said line, at the end of each half mile. In order to 

offset correctly from the tangent to the parallel, the deputy 

will be guided by the table of offsets and azimuths contained 

in this volume. As the azimuth of the tangent is shown, the 

angle thence to the true meridian at each mile is readily 

found, thus indicating the direction of the offset line. The 

computations are made for a distance of 12 miles, at the end of 

which observations on the polar star must be taken for the 

projection of a new tangent. The computations are also upon 

even degrees of latitude; offsets for intervening parallels can 

be readily determined by interpolation. Where offset distances to quarter-section corners exceed 50 links, their direction to the parallel can be determined in like manner by 

interpolation for azimuth. 

Where said distances are less than 50 links interpolations 

for determining directions will not be required. 

PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN. 

The principal meridian shall be extended north and south 

from the initial point, by the use of solar instruments or 

transits, as may be directed by the surveyor general in his 

special written instructions. Where solar instruments are 

used, the line will be run in the same manner as prescribed 

for running the base line by solar instruments. Where transits are used, observations upon the polar star must be taken 

within each 12 miles of line run. In addition to the above 

general instructions, it is required that in all cases where the 

sary to the surveyor-general, he shall submit the matter, 

together with his reasons therefor, to the Commissioner of 

the General Land Office, and the survey of such principal 

meridian shall not be commenced until written authority, 

together with such special instructions as he may deem 

Initial points from which the lines of the public surveys are 

to be extended must be established whenever necessary 

under such special instructions as may be prescribed in each 

locus of such initial points must be selected with great care 

and due consideration for their prominence and easy identification, and must be established astronomically. 

The initial point having been established, the lines of the 

public surveys are to be extended therefrom as follows: 

by the Of the Land Office’ The establishment ofa new principal meridian to be necesBASE LINE. necessary, shall have been received from the Commissioner. 

The base line shall be extended east and west from the STANDARD PARALLELS. 

initial point by the use of solar instruments or transits, as 

may be directed by the surveyor-general, in his special written instructions. Where solar instruments are used, the deputy must test said instruments in every 12 miles of line run, 

by taking the latitude, or by observation on the polar star; 

Standard parallels, which are also called correction lines, 

shall be extended east and west from the principal meridian, 

at intervals of every 24 miles north and south of the base line, 

in the same manner as prescribed for running the base line. 

and in all cases where he has reason to suppose that said 

instrument is in error, he must take an observation on the AUXILIARY MERIDIANS. 

polar star, and if error be found, must make the necessary 

corrections before proceeding with his survey. The proper 

corners shall be established at each 40 and 80 chains, and at 

the intersection of the line with rivers, lakes, or bayous that 

should be meandered, in accordance with the instructions for 

the establishment of corners. In order to check errors in 

Auxiliary meridians shall be extended north and south 

from the base line, at intervals of every 24 miles east and 

west from the principal meridian, in the same manner as 

prescribed for running the principal meridian. 

It is contemplated that these base, principal meridian, 

standard, and auxiliary meridian lines shall first be ex524 
tended over the territory to be surveyed, and that afterwards 

township and section lines shall be run, where needed, within 

these tracts of 24 miles square, formed by the extension of 

these principal lines; and each surveyor general will therefore cause said principal lines to be extended as rapidly as 

practicable. 

EXTERIORS OR TOWNSHIP LINES. 

The east and west boundaries of townships are always to be 

run from south to north on a true meridian line; and the north 

and south bounda- 

-37- 

ries are to be run from east to west, or from west to east 

(according to the location of the township to be surveyed with 

reference to prior surveys), on a random or trial line and 

corrected back on a true line. The distance north or south of 

the township corner to be closed upon, from the point of 

intersection of these random lines with the east or west 

boundary of the township, must be carefully measured and 

noted. Should it happen, however, that such random line 

should fall short, or overrun in length, or intersect the east or 

west boundary more than three chains’ distance from the 

township corner thereon, as compared with the corresponding boundary on the south (due allowance being made for 

convergency), the line, and if necessary the entire exterior 

boundaries of the township, must be retraced, so as to discover and correct the error. In running random lines temporary 

corners are to be set at each 40 and 80 chains, and permanent 

corners established upon the true line as corrected back, in 

accordance with instructions, throwing the excess or deficiency on the west half mile, as prescribed by law. Permanent corners are to be established in accordance with instructions on the east and west township boundaries at the time 

they are run. Whenever practicable the township lines within these tracts of 24 miles square must be surveyed in regular 

order from south to north, i. e., the exterior boundaries of the 

township in any one range lying immediately north of the 

south boundary of such tract of 24 miles square must first be 

surveyed, and the exteriors of the other three townships in 

said range extended therefrom, in regular order from south to 

north, and it is preferable to first survey the entire range of 

townships in such tract adjoining the east boundary or adjoining the west boundary, and the other three ranges in 

regular sequence. In cases, however, where the character of 

the land is such that this rule cannot be complied with, the 

following will be observed. 

In extending the south or north boundaries of a township to 

the west, where the southwest or northwest corners cannot be 

established in the regular way by running a north and south 

line, such boundaries will be run west on u true line, allowing 

for convergency on the west half mile; and from the township 

corner established at the end of such boundary, the west 

boundary will be run north or south, as the case may be. In 

extending south or north boundaries of a township to the east, 

where the southeast or northeast corner cannot be established 

in the regular way, the same rule will be observed, except 

that such boundaries will be run east on a true line, and the 

east boundary run north or south, as the case may be. One set 

of chainmen only is required in running township lines. 

METHOD OF SUBDIVIDING. 

1. The first mile, both of the south and east boundaries of 

each township you are required to subdivide, is to be carefully 

traced and measured before you enter upon the subdivision 

thereof. This will enable you to observe any change that may 

have taken place in the magnetic variation, as it existed at 

the time of running the township lines, and will also enable 

you to compare your chaining with that upon the township 

lines. 

2. Any discrepancy arising either from a change in the 

magnetic variation or a difference in measurement, is to be 

carefully noted in the field-notes. 

3. After adjusting your compass to a variation which you 

have thus found will retrace the eastern boundary of the 

township, you will commence at the corner, to sections 35 and 

36, on the south boundary, and 

-38- 

run a line parallel to the range line, forty chains, to the 

quarter-section corner, which you are to establish between 

sections 35 and 36; continuing on said course forty chains 

farther, you will establish the corner to sections 25, 26, 35, 

and 36. 

4. From the section corner last named run a random line, 

without blazing, due east, for the corner of sections 25 and 36, 

on east boundary, and at forty chains from the starting point 

set a post for temporary quarter-section corner. If you intersect exactly at the corner, you will blaze your random line 

back, and establish it as the true line; but if your random line 

intersects the said east boundary, either north or south of 

said corner, you will measure the distance of such intersection, from which you will calculate a course that will run a 

true line back to the corner from which your random started. 

You will establish the permanent quarter-section corner at a 

point equidistant from the two terminations of the true line. 

5. From the corner of sections 25, 26,35, and 36, run due 

north between sections 25 and 26, setting the quarter-section 

post as before, at forty chains, and at eighty chains establishing the corner of sections 23, 24, 25, and 26. Then run a 

random due east for the corner of sections 24 and 25 on east 

boundary; setting temporary quarter-section post at forty 

chains; correcting back, and establishingpermanent quartersection corner at the equidistant point on the true line, in the 

manner directed on the line between sections 25 and 36. 

6. In this manner you will proceed with the survey of each 

successive section in the first tier, until you arrive at the 

north boundary of the township, which you will reach in 

running up a random line between sections 1 and 2. If this 

random line should not intersect at the corner established for 

sections 1,2,35, and 36, upon the township line, you will note 

the distance that you fall east or west of the same, from which 

distance you will calculate a course that will run a true line 

south to the corner from which your random started. If the 

north boundary of a township is a base or standard line, the 

line between sections 1 and 2 is to be run north as a true line, 

and the closing corner established at the point of intersection 

with such base or standard line; and in such case the distance 

from said closing corner to the nearest section or quarter525 
section corner on such base or standard line must be carefully 

measured and noted as a connection line. 

7. In like manner proceed with the survey of each successive tier of sections, until you arrive at the fifth tier; and from 

each section corner which you establish upon this tier you are 

to run random lines to the corresponding corners established 

upon the range line forming the western boundary of the 

township; setting, as you proceed, each temporary quartersection corner at forty chains from the interior section corner, 

so as to throw the excess or deficiency of measurement on the 

extreme tier of quarter sections contiguous to the township 

boundary; and on returning establish the true line, and establish thereon the permanent quarter-section corner. 

8. It is not required that the deputy shall complete the 

survey of the first tier of sections from south to north, before 

commenting the survey of the second or any subsequent tier, 

but the corner on which the random line closes must have 

been previously established by running the line north on 

which it is established, except as follows: Where it is impracticable to establish such section corner in the regular manner 

it may be established by running the east and west line east 

or west, as the case may be, on a true line, setting the quartersection corner at 40 chains and the section corner at 80 

chains. 

-39- 

9. Quarter-section corners, both upon north and south and 

upon east and west lines, are to be established at a point 

equidistant from the corresponding section corners, except 

upon the lines closing on the north and west boundaries of the 

township, and in those situations the quarter-section corners 

will always be established at precisely forty chains to the 

north or west (as the case may be) of the respective section 

corners from which those lines respectively start, by which 

procedure the excess or deficiency in the measurements will 

be thrown, according to law, on the extreme tier of quartersections. 

PRESCRIBED LIMITS FOR CLOSINGS AND 

LENGTH OF LINES IN CERTAIN CASES. 

1. Every north-and-south section line, except those terminating in the north boundary of the township, must be eighty 

chains in length. 

2. The east-and-west section lines, except those terminating in the west boundary of the township, are to be within 

eighty links of the actual distance established on the south 

boundary line of the township for the width of said tier of 

sections, and must close within eighty links north or south of 

the section corner. 

3. The north boundary and south boundary of any one 

section, except in the extreme western tier, are to be within 

eighty links of equal length. 

4. The meanders within each fractional section, or between any two meander posts, or of an island in the interior of 

a section, must close within one chain and fifty links. 

5. In running random township exteriors, if such random 

lines fall short or overrun in length, or intersect the eastern 

or western boundary, as the case may be, of the township, at 

more than three chains north or south of the true corner, the 

lines must be retraced, even if found necessary to remeasure 

the meridional boundaries of the township. One set of chainmen, only, is required in subdividing. 

SUBDIVISION OF SECTIONS. 

Under the provisions of the act of Congress approved 

February 11, 1805, the course to be pursued in the subdivision of sections is to run straight lines from the established 

quarter-section corners-United States surveys-to the 

opposite corresponding corners, and the point of intersection 

of the lines so run will be the corner common to the several 

quarter-sections, or, in other words, the legal center of the 

section. 

In the subdivision of fractional quarter sections where no 

opposite corresponding sections have been or can be fixed, the 

subdivision lines should be ascertained by running from the 

established corners due north, south, east, or west lines, as 

the case may be, to the water-course, Indian boundary line, or 

other external boundary of such fractional section. 

The law presupposes the section lines surveyed and 

marked in the field by the United States deputy surveyors to 

be due north and south or east and west lines, but in actual 

experience this is not always the case; hence, in order to carry 

out the spirit of the law, it will be necessary, in running the 

subdivisional lines through fractional sections, to adopt 

mean courses where the section lines are not due lines, or to 

run the subdivision line parallel to the section line when 

there is no opposite section line. 

Upon the lines closing on the north and west boundaries of 

a township, the quarter-section corners are established by 

the United States deputy surveyors at precisely forty chains 

to the north or west of the 

-40- 

last interior section corners, and the excess or deficiency in 

the measurement is thrown on the outer tier of lots, as per act 

of Congress approved May 10, 1800. 

In the subdivision of quarter-sections the quarter-quarter 

corners are to be placed at points equidistant between the 

section and quarter-section corners and between the quarter 

corners and the common center of the section, except on the 

last half mile of the lines closing on the north or west boundaries of a township, where they should be placed at twenty 

chains, proportionate measurement, to the north or west of 

the quarter-section corner. 

The subdivisional lines of fractional quarter sections 

should be run from points on the section lines intermediate 

between the section and quarter-section corners due north, 

south, east, or west, to the lake, water-course, or reservation 

which renders such tracts fractional. 

When there are double sets of section corners on township 

and range lines, the quarter corners for the sections south of 

the township lines and east of the range lines are not established in the field by the United States surveyors, but in 

subdividing such sections said quarter corners should be so 

placed as to suit the calculations of the areas of the quartersections adjoining the township boundaries as expressed 

upon the official plat, adopting proportionate measurements 

were the present measurements of the north or west boundaries of the sections differ from the original measurements. 

526 
RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF LOST CORNERS. 

The original corners, when they can be found, must stand 

as the true corners they were intended to represent, even 

though not exactly whe restrict professional care might have 

placed them in the first instance. 

Missing corners should be re-established in the identical 

localities they originally occupied. When the point cannot be 

determined by the existing landmarks in the field, resort 

must be had to the field notes of the original survey. The law 

provides that the lengths of the lines as stated in the field 

notes shall be considered as the true lengths thereof, and the 

distances between corners set down in the field notes constitute proper data from which to determine the true locality of 

a missing corner; hence the rule that all such should be 

restored at distances proportionate to the original measurements between existing original corners. That is, if the 

measuremnt between two existing corners differs from that 

stated in the field notes, the excess or deficiency should be 

distributed proportionately among the intervening section 

lines between the said existing corners standing in their 

original places. Missing corners on standard, township, and 

range lines should be restored by proportionate measurement between the nearest existing original corners on those 

lines. Missing section corners in the interior of townships 

should be re-established at proportionate distances between 

the nearest existing original corners north and south of the 

missing corners. 

As has been observed, no existing original corner can be 

disturbed, and it will be plain than any excess or deficiency in 

measurements between existing corners cannot in any degree affect the distances beyond said existing corners, but 

must be added or subtracted proportionately to or from the 

intervals embraced between the corners which are still 

standing. 

RETRACING TOWNSHIP LINES. 

If, in subdividing a township, it is found that the exterior 

boundaries have been improperly run, measured, or marked, 

or the corners estab- 

-41- 

lished thereon have been obliterated, the deputy will resurvey so much of said exterior boundaries as may be necessary, 

and establish new corners upon same wherever necessary. 

Where no subdivisions have been made on either side of a 

township boundary, it will be corrected, if necessary, in point 

of alignment as well as measurement, by establishing the 

section corners at lawful distances from the south or east 

boundaries of the township (as the case may be), and upon a 

right line extending between the township corners; and in 

such case, the old corners on said township boundaries will be 

destroyed. 

Where subdivisional lines have been closed upon a 

township boundary in advance of the preliminary survey of 

the same, its alignment will not be changed. If it is found 

necessary to establish new corners on such boundary they 

will receive only the marks referring to the sections in the 

township being subdivided, and the marks on the old corners 

on such boundary, which refer to such sections, will be 

obliterated. 

In all cases such necessary corrections will be made as will 

place the section corners at the aforesaid lawful distances 

from the south or east boundary, in order that a legal subdivision of the township may be made, and where new corners are 

thus necessarily established, the distance, be it one hundred 

links or more, and direction between new and old corners 

must be carefully noted. 

New corners on township boundaries must be established 

by a survey of such lines, and in no case will such corners be 

established from data acquired in running lines closing on 

such boundaries. One set of chainmen, only, is required in 

retracing township lines. 

If, in the subdivision of part of a township, the lands to be 

surveyed cannot be reached by lines extending from the 

south boundary of the township, a line corresponding to the 

south boundary of the same shall be extended from some 

section corner on the east boundary of the township to the 

west boundary thereof, in order that it may constitute the 

south boundary of the surveyable area; from which subdivisional meridian lines will be projected northward, and the 

surveys carried forward in the same manner as for the subdivision of a full township, in order that regular and fractional 

areas shall occupy their true and legal positions. 

Fragmentary portions of surveyable lands lying south of 

the provisional base last described may be included in the 

survey by extending lines south from the same in harmony 

with the general system. 

When the proper point for the establishment of a section 

corner is inaccessible, and a witness monument can be 

erected upon each of the two lines which approach the same 

at distances not exceeding twenty chains therefrom, the 

quarter-sections depending thereon will be disposed of in the 

same manner as if the corner had been regularly established. 

The witness monument must be marked as conspicuously 

as a section corner, and bearing trees used wherever possible. 

The deputy will be required to furnish good evidence that 

the section corner is actually inaccessible. 

When township or subdivision lines intersect the boundaries of confirmed private land claims, the latter must be 

retraced so far as may be necessary to establish the corners to 

the fractional sections at their proper places, and such corners must be established, in all respects, like meander corners, except that instead of the letters “M. C.” the letters used 

to designate such private land claim must be marked on 

corners. In retracing the boundary of such claim the deputy 

must set stakes thereon, at each forty chains, where the 

ground is level, and on broken 

-42- 

ground, at every spur, ridge, or other prominent point, and 

also at each angle formed by a change in the direction of such 

boundary. 

FIELD NOTES. 

The deputy surveyor will provide himself with proper 

blank books for his field notes, or same will be furnished to 

him by the surveyor general, and in such books he must make 

a faithful, distinct, and minute record of everything officially 

done and observed by himself and his assistants, pursuant to 

527 
instructions, in relation to running, measuring and marking 

lines, establishing corners, &c., and present, as far as possible, a full and complete topographical description of the country surveyed. 

From the data thus recorded at the time when the work is 

done on the ground, the deputy must prepare true field notes 

of the surveys executed by him, in the manner hereinafter 

prescribed, and return same to the surveyor general, 

together with the required sketches, at the earliest practicable date after the completion of his work in the field. 

The field notes of the survey of base, meridian, standard, 

exterior, and subdivision lines are each to be written in 

separate books. 

The first, or title, page of the field-note book is to describe 

the subject-matter of the same, the locus of the survey, by 

whom surveyed, date of contract, and the dates of commencement and completion of the work. The second page is to 

contain the names and duties of the assistants, and the index 

is to be placed on same or following page. Whenever a new 

assistant is employed, or the duties of any one of them 

changed, such facts are to be stated in an appropriate entry 

immediately preceding the notes taken under such changed 

arrangements. 

The exhibition of every mile of surveying, whether on 

township or subdivisional lines, and of meanders in each 

section, must be complete in itself, and be separated by a black 

line drawn across the paper. 

The variation of the needle must always occupy a separate 

line preceding the notes of measurements on line. 

The description of the surface, soil, minerals, timber, 

undergrowth, &c., on each mile of line, is to follow the notes of 

survey of such line, and not be mixed up with them. 

The date of each day’s work must follow immediately after 

the notes thereof. 

No abbreviations of words are allowable, except of such 

words as are constantly occurring, such as ‘rsec.” for “section”; 

“in. diam.” for “inches diameter”; “chs.” for “chains”; rrlks.” 

for “links”; rrdist.” for “distant”; V4 sec. cor.” for “quartersection corner”; crva.’7 for “variation,” &c.; for 14 inches long, 

12 inches wide, and 3 inches thick, in describing a corner 

stone, use 14 x 12 x 3, being particular to always observe the 

same order of length, width, and thickness. Proper names 

must never be abbreviated, however often their recurrence. 

When the lines of survey cross hills or ravines, the height 

or depth of same, in feet, must be noted as nearly as practicable. 

The corners established in previous surveys, from which 

the lines start, or upon which they close, must be fully described in the field notes. A full description of such corners 

will in all cases be furnished the deputy from the surveyor 

general’s office at the date authority is given for commencing 

work. 

In all cases where a corner is re-established the field notes 

must describe fully the manner in which it is done. 

Field notes of the survey of base, standard, and meridian 

lines must describe all corners established thereon, how 

established, the crossings 

-43- 

of streams, ravines, hills, and mountains; character of soil, 

timber, minerals, &c.; and after the description of each 

township carner established in running such lines, the deputy will note particularly in the “general description” the 

townships on each side of the lines run. 

Field notes of the survey of exterior boundaries of 

townships must describe the corners and topography, as 

above required, and the “general description” at the end of 

such notes must describe the townships as fully as may be, 

and also state whether or not they should be subdivided. The 

topography on the true line of exterior boundaries must be 

given, and not that on the random line. 

Field notes of the subdivisional survey of townships must 

describe the corners and topography as above required, and 

the “general description” at the end of such notes must state 

minutely the character of the land, soil, timber, &c., found in 

such townships. 

A blank line must be left at the bottom of each page of the 

field notes, and the notes must be written in a plain, legible 

hand, and in clear and precise language, so that the figures, 

letters, words, and meaning will always be unmistakable, 

and erasures and interlineations avoided, as far as possible. 

With the notes of the survey of principal lines forming a 

tract of 24 miles square the deputy will submit a plat of the 

lines run, on a scale of one-half inch to the mile, and with the 

notes of survey of the exterior lines of townships, a plat of the 

lines run, on the scale of two inches to the mile, on which are 

to be noted all the objects of topography on line necessary to 

illustrate the notes, viz, the distance on line at the crossings 

of streams, so far as such can be noted on the paper, and the 

direction of each by an arrow head pointing down stream; 

also the intersection of line by prairies, marshes, swamps, 

ravines, ponds, lakes, hills, mountains, and all other matters 

indicated by the notes, to the fullest extent practicable. 

With the instructions for making subdivisional surveys of 

townships into sections, the deputy will be furnished by the 

surveyor general with a diagram of the exterior lines previously established of the townships to be subdivided (on the 

above-named scale), upon which are carefully to be laid down 

the measurements of each of the lines on such boundaries 

whereon he is to close, and the magnetic variation of each 

mile. And on such diagram the deputy who subdivides will 

make appropriate sketches of the various objects of topography as they occur on his lines, so as to exhibit not only the 

points on line at which the same occur, but also the direction 

and position of each between the lines, or within each section, 

as far as practicable, so that every object of topography may 

be properly completed or connected in the showing. 

SUMMARY OF OBJECTS AND DATA REQUIRED 

TO BE NOTED. 

1. The precise length of every line run, noting all necessary offsets therefrom, with the reason and mode thereof. 

2. The kind and diameter of all “bearing trees,” with the 

course and distance of the same from their respective corners; 

and the precise relative position of WITNESS CORNERS to 

the true corners. 

3. The kind of materials of which corners are constructed. 

4. Trees on line. The name, diameter, and distance on line 

5. Intersections by line of land objects. The distance at 

to all trees which it intersects. 

528 
which the line first intersects and then leaves every settler’s 

claim and improvement; prairie, river, creek, or other “bottom”; or swamp, marsh, grove, and 

-44- 

wind fall, with the course of the same at both points of intersection; also the distances at which you begin to ascend, 

arrive at the top, begin to descend, and reach the foot of all 

remarkable hills and ridges, with their courses, and estimated height, in feet, above the level land of the surrounding 

country, or above the bottom lands, ravines, or waters near 

which they are situated. 

6. Intersections by line of water objects. All rivers, creeks, 

and smaller streams of water which the line crosses; the 

distances on line at the points of intersection, and their 

widths on line. In cases of navigable streams, their width will 

be ascertained between the meander corners, as set forth 

under the proper head. 

7. The land’s surface-whether level, rolling, broken, or 

hilly. 

8. The soil-whether first, second, third, or fourth rate. 

9. Timber-the several kinds of timber and undergrowth, 

in the order in which they predominate. 

10. Bottom lands-to be described as wet or dry, and if 

subject to inundation, state to what depth. 

11. Springs of water-whether fresh, saline, or mineral, 

with the course of the stream flowing from them. 

12. Lakes and ponds-describing their banks and giving 

their height, and also depth of water, and whether it be pure 

or stagnant. 

13. Improvements. Towns and villages; houses or cabins; 

fields, or other improvements; sugar-tree groves, sugar 

camps, mill seats, forges, and factories. 

14. Coal banks or beds; peat or turf grounds; minerals and 

ores; with particular description of the same as to quality and 

extent, and all diggings therefor; also salt springs and licks. 

All reliable information you can obtain respecting these objects, whether they be on your immediate line or not, is to 

appear on the general description to be given at the end of the 

notes. 

15. Roads and trails, with their directions, whence and 

whither. 

16. Rapids, cataracts, cascades, or falls of water, with the 

estimated height of their fall in feet. 

17. Precipices, caves, sink holes, ravines, stone quarries, 

ledges of rocks, with the kind of stone they afford. 

18. Natural curiosities, interesting fossils, petrifications, 

organic remains, &c.; also all ancient works of art, such as 

mounds, fortifications, embankments, ditches, or objects of 

like nature. 

19. The variation of the needle must be noted at all points 

or places on the lines where there is found any material 

change of variation, and the position of such points must be 

perfectly identified in the notes. 

20. Besides the ordinary notes taken on line (and which 

must always be written down on the spot, leaving nothing to 

be supplied by memory), the deputy will subjoin, at the conclusion of his book, such further description or information 

touching any matter or thing connected with the township (or 

other survey) which he may be able to afford, and may deem 

useful or necessary to be known-with a general description 

of the township in the aggregate, as respects the face of the 

country, its soil and geological features, timber, minerals, 

waters, &c. 

Following the “general descripton” of the township is to be 

“A list of the names of the individuals employed to assist in 

running, measuring, and marking the lines and corners described in the foregoing field notes of township No. - of 

the BASE LINE of range No. - of the - MERIDIAN, showing the respective capacities in which they acted.” 

-45- 

AFFIDAVITS TO FIELD NOTES. 

The following are the forms of official oaths to be taken by 

deputy surveyors and their assistants. The original oaths are 

to be affixed to the true field notes returned to the surveyorgeneral by the deputy surveyor; the preliminary oaths being 

placed immediately after the index of the first book, and the 

final oaths at the end of the last book of field notes of the 

surveys to which they refer: 

PRELIMINARY OATHS OF ASSISTANTS. 

I, - , do solemnly swear that I will well and 

truly perform the duties of compassman, according to instructions given me, and to the best of my skill and ability, in 

the survey of the 

- -, Compassman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, 18-. 

-- 

We, - and - -, do solemnly 

swear that we will well and faithfully execute the duties of 

chain carriers; that we will level the chain upon even and 

uneven ground and plumb the tally pins, either by sticking or 

dropping the same; that we will report the true distance to all 

notable objects, and the true length of all lines that we assist 

in measuring, to the best of our skill and ability, and in 

accordance with instructions given us, in the survey of the 

-. 

-, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

- 

-, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, 18-. 

We, and -, do solemnly 

swear that we will well and truly perform the duties of axemen, in the establishment of corners and other duties, according to instructions given us, and to the best of our skill and 

ability, in the survey of 

-, Axeman. 

-, Axeman. 

529 
Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, la-. 

FINAL OATHS FOR SURVEYS. 

List of names. 

A list of the names of the individuals employed by - 

-, United States deputy surveyor, to assist in running, 

measuring, and marking the lines and corners described in 

the foregoing field notes of the survey of - -, 

showing the respective capacities in which they acted. 

, Compassman. 

, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

, Chainman. 

, Chainman. 

, Axeman. 

, Axeman. 

-, Flagman. 

FINAL OATHS OF ASSISTANTS. 

We hereby certify that we assisted - -,

United States deputy surveyor, in surveying all those parts 

or portions of the - of the - base and - 

meridian, - of -, as are represented in the foregoing field notes as having been surveyed by him and under 

his direction; and that said survey has been in all respects, to 

the best of our knowledge and belief, well and faithfully 

surveyed, and 

-46- 

the corner monuments established according to the instructions furnished by the United States surveyor-general for 

, Compassman. 

, Chainman. 

, Chainman. 

, Chainman. 

, Chainman. 

-, Axeman. 

, Axeman. 

, Flagman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, la-. 

9 

-. 

FINAL OATH OF UNITED STATES DEPUTY 

SURVEYOR. 

I, , United States deputy surveyor, do 

solemnly swear that in pursuance of instructions received 

from - , United States surveyor general for 

have well, faithfully, and truly, in my own proper person, and 

-, bearing date of the day of , la-, I 

in strict conformity with the instructions furnished by the 

United States, surveyed all those parts or portions of ~ 

of the base and meridian in the - of 

-, as are represented in the foregoing field notes as 

having been surveyed by me and under my directions; and I 

do further solemnly swear that all the corners of said survey 

have been established and perpetuated in strict accordance 

with the surveying manual, printed instructions, the special 

written instructions of the United States surveyor general 

for -, and in the specific manner described in the field 

notes, and that the foregoing are the true field notes of such 

survey; and, should any fraud be detected, I will suffer the 

penalty of perjury, under the provisions of an act of Congress, 

approved August 8, 1816. 

-- 

United States Deputy Surveyor. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, la-. 

-- 

The final oath of the deputy surveyor must, in all cases, be 

taken before some officer duly authorized to administer 

oaths. It is preferable that all oaths-both preliminary and 

final-of assistants should also be taken before such officer. 

In cases, however, where great delay or inconvenience would 

result from a strict compliance with this rule, the deputy 

surveyor is authorized to administer the necessary oaths to 

liis assistants, but in each case where this is done he must 

submit a full written report to the proper surveyor general of 

the circumstances of such case. 

To enable the deputy surveyor to fully understand and 

appreciate the responsibility under which he is acting, his 

attention is invited to the provisions of the second section of 

the act of Congress, approved August 8, 1846, entitled “An 

act to equalize the compensation of the surveyors-general of 

the public lands of the United States, and for other purposes,’’ 

and which is as follows: 

“SEC. 2. That the surveyors-general of the public lands of 

the United States, in addition to the oath now authorized by 

law to be administered to deputies on their appointment to 

office, shall require each of their deputies, on the return of his 

surveys, to take and subscribe an oath or affirmation that 

those surveys have been faithfully and correctly executed 

according to law and the instructions of the surveyorgeneral; and on satisfactory evidence being presented to any 

court of competent jurisdiction that such surveys, or any part 

thereof, had not been thus executed, the deputy making such 

false oath or affirmation shall be deemed guilty of perjury, 

and shall suffer all the pains and penalties attached to that 

offense; and the district attorney of the United States for the 

time being, in whose district any such false, erroneous, or 

fraudu- 

-47- 

lent surveys shall have been executed, shall, upon the application of the proper surveyor-general, immediately institute suit upon the bond of such deputy; and the institution of 

such suit shall act as a lien upon any property owned or held 

530 
by such deputy, or his sureties, at the time such suit was 

instituted.” 

SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES AND PLATS. 

Diagram A illustrates the method of laying off tracts of 

land 24 miles square, as nearly as practicable, by the survey 

of principal lines, and the survey of exteriors or township 

lines within such tracts, north of the base line and east of the 

principal meridian. The same general principles will apply 

equally to the survey of such tracts differently located with 

reference to the initial point. The topography noted on said 

diagram is on those portions of the lines of surveys for which 

specimen field notes are given. 

Diagram B illustrates the method of laying off a township 

into sections and quarter sections. In the subdivision of 

townships lying south of and contiguous to the base line, or to 

any standard parallel, the lines between the northern tier of 

sections will be run north as true lines; quarter-section corners will be established at 40 chains, closing section corners 

will be established at the points of intersection of such lines 

with the base or standard lines (as the case may be), and the 

course and distance from such corners to the nearest corner 

upon the line closed upon are to be accurately ascertained 

and set down in the field notes. 

Diagram C illustrates the mode of establishing stone, post, 

and mound corners for townships, sections, and quarter sections. 

Specimen field notes Nos. 1,2,3,4, and 5 illustrate, respectively, the mode and order of surveying standard lines, meridian lines, exteriors or township lines, resurveying exteriors or township lines, and subdividing a township into 

sections and quarter sections. The attention of the deputy is 

particularly directed to these specimens, as indicating only 

the method in which his work is to be conducted, but also the 

order, manner, language, &c., in which his field notes are 

required to be returned to the surveyor general’s office; and 

such specimens are to be deemed part of these instructions, 

and any departure from their details, without special authority, in cases where the circumstances are analogous in practice, will be regarded as a violation of his contract and oath. 

The subdivisions of fractional sections into 40-acre lots (as 

near as may be) are to be so laid down on the official township 

plat in dotted black lines as to admit of giving to each a 

specific designation, if possible, according to its relative position in the fractional section, as per examples afforded by 

Diagram B, as well as by a number, in all cases where the lot 

cannot properly be designated as a quarter-quarter. Those 

fractional subdivision lots which are not susceptible of being 

described according to relative local position, are to be numbered in regular series; those bordering on the north boundary of a township to be numbered progressively from east to 

west, and those bordering on the west boundary of a township 

to be numbered progressively from north to south, in each 

section. As section 6 borders on both the north and west 

boundaries of the township, the fractional lots in same will be 

numbered as follows: Commencing with No. 1 in the northeast, thence progressively west to No. 4 in the northwest, and 

south to No. 7 in the southwest corner of the section. 

In numbering fractional lots, other than those above specified (wherever practicable and as a general rule), the series 

should commence with 

-48- 

No. 1 in the northeastern or the most easterly fractional lot, 

and continue from east to west, and west to east, alternately, 

to the end of the series, as shown in Diagram B; but such 

general rule is departed from under circumstances given as 

examples in said diagram. 

Interior lots are to be, as nearly as possible, 20 chains long 

by 20 chains wide; and the excess or deficiency of measurement is always to be thrown on the lots bordering on the 

northern and western boundaries of the township, or those 

made fractional by meander lines. 

The official township plat to be returned to the General 

Land Office is to show on its face, on the right-hand margin, 

the meanders of navigable streams, islands, and lakes. Such 

details are wanted in the adjustment of the surveying 

accounts, but may be omitted in the copy of the township plat 

to be furnished to the district land office by the surveyor 

general. A suitable margin for binding is to be preserved on 

the left-hand side of each plat. Each plat is to be certified, 

with table annexed, according to the forms subjoined to “Diagram B,” and is to show the areas of public land, of private 

surveys, and of water, with the aggregate area as shown on 

the diagram. 

Each township plat is to be prepared in triplicate: one for 

the General Land Office, one for the United States district 

land office, and the third to be retained as the record in the 

office of the surveyor general. 

The plat for the local land office must not be forwarded 

until notice is received by the surveyor-general from the 

Commissioner of the General Land Office that the survey 

represented on said plat has been approved. 

The plats must be prepared as nearly as possible in accordance with the specimen plat designated as “Diagram B.” The 

use of all fluids, except a preparation of India ink of good 

quality, must be avoided by the draughtsman in delineations 

relating to the public surveys. All lines, figures, &c., must be 

sharply defined. All lettering on the plats must be clear and 

sharp in outline and design, and ornamentation of any kind is 

prohibited. These requirements are necessary in order that 

everything shown upon original plats may be fairly reproduced in making photolithographic copies of the same. 

All towns, settlements, permanent buildings, private 

claims, reservations, water courses, ditches, lakes, islands, 

mountains, buttes, canons, roads, railroads, telegraph lines, 

canals, &c., will be shown upon the plats and designated by 

proper names where such are known. 

The mean magnetic declinations determined at the date of 

the survey of the exterior and subdivisional lines will be 

entered upon each plat in the manner shown in Diagram B. 

This will be ascertained by taking the mean of the greatest 

and least magnetic declination found at the dates of surveys, 

excluding such changes as are clearly attributable to local 

attraction. 

All plats are to be drawn to a uniform scale of 40 chains to 1 

inch, United States standard. 

Surveyors general will require that the specimen plat shall 

be closely followed in order that uniformity of appearance 

and expression of drawings representing the public land surveys may be attained. 

The true field books, each bearing the written approval of 

53 1 
the surveyor-general, are to be substantially bound into 

volumes of suitable size, and retained in the surveyorgeneral’s office, and certified transcripts of such field books 

(to be of foolscap size) are to be prepared and forwarded, from 

time to time, to the General Land Office. 

All transcripts of surveys must be written in a bold, legible 

hand, with durable black ink, and such transcripts of any 

series of surveys 

-49- 

included in one account forwarded to the General Land Office 

must be firmly fastened together at the surveyor-general’s 

office prior to transmittal. 

With the copy of each township plat furnished to a district 

land office, the surveyor-general is required by law to furnish 

descriptive notes as to the character and quality of the soil and 

timber found on and in the vicinity of each surveyed line, and 

giving a description of each corner. 

Printed blank forms for such notes will be furnished by the 

General Land Office. The forms provide eighteen spaces for 

meander corners, which, in most cases, will be sufficient; but 

when the number shall exceed eighteen, the residue will 

have to be inserted on the face of the township plat, to be 

furnished to the register of the district land office, or on a 

supplemental blank form. 

There is shown a series of meander corners on Diagram B, 

viz, from No. 1 to No. 12 on the river and island, and No. 1 to 

No. 5 on Lin’s Lake. 

THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION OR VARIATION 

OF THE NEEDLE. 

The magnetic declination at any place is the angle which 

the compass needle, when it is correctly constructed and 

freely suspended, makes with the true meridian. The true 

meridian is fixed, but the declination varies because the 

direction in which the needle points is in a continuous state of 

change. Therefore, whenever a measure of the declination of 

the needle is taken, the exact time (year, day of month, and 

hour of the observations) should be recorded, as well as the 

geographical position of the place, or its latitude and longitude expressed to the nearest minutes of arc. 

The declination is called “West” when the north end of the 

needle points to the west of the true meridian, and it is called 

“East” when the north end of the needle points east of the true 

meridian. In order to give an idea of the amount of the 

declination at present observable within the limits of the 

United States we instance the following places at or near 

which it reaches extreme value, which are given to the 

nearest whole degree. 

At Eastport, Me., the declination is 18” west. 

At the mouth of the Rio Grande, Texas, 8” east. 

At San Diego, Cal., 14” east. 

At Sitka, Alaska, 29” east. 

At Fort Yukon, Alaska, 36“ east. 

The accuracy with which the declination may be determined depends chiefly upon the instrumental means, but 

also, and in a great measure, upon the care taken in the use of 

the instruments and the selection of the proper methods and 

times for observing. 

The instruments ordinarily at the disposal of the surveyor 

are sufficiently described, but for a description and illustration of more refined ones, as used by scientists, we refer to the 

instructions for magnetical observations published as 

Appendix No. 16, Coast Survey Report for 1875. 

Omitting any detailed notice of the irregular variations to 

which the magnetic needle is subject, it becomes important 

for the purposes of the surveyor to refer particularly to the 

changes which have a special bearing upon his observations. 

These are the daily variation and the secular variation. 

The daily variation.-It has been found that at about the 

time of sunrise the north end of the needle has a slow motion 

towards the east which soon ceases. The needle is then said to 

be at its eastern elongation; its 

-50- 

north end then begins a retrograde motion towards the west, 

and at about one o’clock in the afternoon reaches the point at 

which it is said to be at its western elongation, after which it 

again turns back towards the east. 

The times at which the needle reaches its eastern and 

western elongations vary with the seasons of the year (with 

the sun’s declination), happening a little earlier in summer 

than in winter. 

The angular range between the eastern and western 

elongations varies also with the seasons of the year. 

The average position of the needle for the day is called the 

mean magnetic meridian. 

At about six o’clock in the evening (and for about an hour 

before and after), throughout the year, the position of the 

needle coincides very nearly with the mean magnetic meridian, and this, therefore, is the time most favorable for making 

observations to obtain at once the mean declination. 

For reducing the direction of the needle observed at other 

hours to the mean magnetic meridian the following table is 

furnished. It gives to the nearest minute the variations of the 

needle from its average position during the day, for each hour 

in the day for the four seasons of the year. 

Table for reducing the observed declination to the mean declination of the day. 

The needle points east of the The needle points west of the mean 

mean magnetic meridian. magnetic meridian. 

A.M. A.M. A.M. A.M. A.M. A.M.No0n.P.M. P.M. P.M. P.M. P.M. P.M. 

h. h. h. h. h. h. h. h. h. h. h. h. 

Hour _...... 6 7 8 9 10 11 Noon. 1 2 3 4 5 6 

~~ ~ ~ 

,1,,~,,,,,I,, 

Spring .... 3 4 4 3 1 14 5 5 4 3 2 1 

Summer ... 4 5 5 4 1 2 4 6 5 4 3 2 1 

Autumn ... 2 3 3 2 0 2 3 4 3 2 1 1 0 

Winter .... 1 1 2 2 1 0 2 3 3 2 1 1 0 

The secular variation of the magnetic declination is a subject of the greatest importance to surveyors. It manifests 

itself by a gradual change in one direction, which at first 

increases slowly, then more rapidly, diminishing again afterward until the needle becomes stationary and subsequently 

returns by similar changes to its former position, the whole 

period extending over nearly two and a half centuries. Thus it 

532 
will be seen by a table given below that at Philadelphia the 

declination was S3/4' west in 1700, whence it diminished until 

in 1800 it reached a minimum 2O.1 (2"6'), and will increase 

again to 6O.8 in 1880. At present all along the Atlantic and 

Gulf coasts the effect of the secular variation is to increase 

west declinations or to decrease east declinations by from 2' to 

5', but on the Pacific coast the effect is opposite in direction, 

viz, increasing east declinations by from 1' to 3'. 

In Alaska, however, we have indications of a decrease of 

east declinations. 

The following table of computed declinations at various 

places, taken from the Coast Survey Report for 1874, exhibits 

the effect of the secular variation for a number of places, and 

will be found especially useful where old lines have to be 

retraced. 

The table should not be extended in time either way without the support of additional observations. 

[Pages 51 and 52 are deleted. They contain a "Table ofDecima1 Values of the Magnetic Declination."] 

-53- 

It will be observed that the amount of change is by no 

means the same even in places not far remote from each 

other, as New York and Philadelphia. 

In grouping together a table of the present rate of change 

much allowance must therefore be made for possible local 

peculiarities that have not been ascertained. 

The following statement of the present (1878) annual 

change in the magnetic declination, due to the secular variation, may serve to give a general idea of the approximate 

amount of change along our immediate sea-coast. For the 

interior States the information is very scanty, and therefore 

less trustworthy, or altogether wanting. 

The annual change is expressed in minutes of arc, a + sign 

indicating increase of westerly or decrease of easterly declination. 

Locality. Annual 

change. 

Maine, coast of.. ..... ... ..... +2 

Maine, interior. ...... ...................... +3 

New Hampshire. ................................... + 3?h 

Massachusetts, western part ............. ..... +3to4 

New York, Long Island ............................. 

New York, northern and western part ..... +4% 

Pennsylvania ...................................... + 3% 

... + 2?h 

...................... +2Y2 

+ 3 

Tennessee, western part ............................ + 2 

Missouri +2 

Delaware, Maryland, and Virginia .................. + 3 

West Virginia. ..................................... + 3?h 

North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia 

Florida, southern part .............................. 

Louisiana, eastern part ............................. 

Florida, northern part ...................... 

Alabama and Mississippi, Gulf coast of 

+ 3 

+3 

+ 2% 

Louisiana, western coast. ........................... Texas, coast of.. ................................... 

Texas, southwestern part ........................... 

New Mexico and Southwestern Arizona. ............. 

California, coast of. ................................ 

Oregon, coast of.. .................................. Washington Territory, coast of ...................... 

+ 2 

+ 1 

+ 0 (probably.) 

+ 0 (probably.) 

- 1% 

- 2 to 2% 

- 2% to 3 

The negative sign indicates an increase of easterly direction. 

METHOD OF ASCERTAINING THE TRUE 

MERIDIAN AND THEREBY THE MAGNETIC 

DECLINATION OR VARIATION OF THE COMPASS. 

The following chapter, on the subject of the declination of 

the magnetic needle, is extracted from the revised edition of 

the work on surveying by Dr. Charles Davies, a graduate of 

the Military Academy at West Point. The work itself will be a 

valuable acquisition to the deputy surveyor, and his attention is particularly invited to the following chapter, which 

sets forth the usual easy modes by which the true meridian 

and magnetic declination may be approximately ascertained; 

his attention is also called to more complete statements on 

the subject given in the work "A treatise on land-surveying, 

&c.," by Dr. W. M. Gillespie, professor of engineering, Union 

College, in chapter treating of the declination of the magnetic 

needle. For more refined methods, he may consult Coast 

Survey Report for 1875, Appendix No. 16. 

-54- 

METHOD OF ASCERTAINING THE 

TRUE MERIDIAN. 

The best practical method of determining the true meridian of a place is by observing the north star. If this star were 

precisely at the point in which the axis of the earth, prolonged, pierces the heavens, then the intersection of the vertical plane passing through it and the place, with the surface 

of the earth, would be the true meridian. But the star being at 

a distance from the pole equal to 1'30' nearly, it performs a 

revolution about the pole in a circle, the polar distance of 

which is 1'30'; the time of revolution is 23 hours and 56 

minutes. 

To the eye of an observer this star is continually in motion, 

and is due north but twice in 23 hours and 56 minutes; and is 

then said to be on the meridian. Now, when it departs from 

the meridian, it apparently moves east or west for 5 hours 

and 59 minutes, and then returns to the meridian again. 

When at its greatest distance from the meridian, east or 

west, it is said to be at its eastern or western elongation. 

The following tables show the times of its eastern and 

western elongations: 

Time of elongation of Polaris (a Ursa Min.), April 1, 1883, to April 1,1884, 

computed for north latitude38", and which will serve for all latitudes from26" 

to 50" north, and for all dates from April, 1878, to April, 1888, with an error of 

less than five minutes. 

[The times are reckoned from noon (astronomical time).] 

533 
EASTERN ELONGATIONS. 

Day. April. May. June. July. August. September. 

h.m. h.m. h.m. h.m. h.m. h.m 

1 ........... 18 37 16 39 14 37 12 39 10 37 8 36 

7 ........... 18 14 16 16 14 14 12 16 10 14 8 12 

13 .......... 17 50 15 52 13 50 11 52 9 50 7 48 

19 .......... 17 26 15 28 13 26 11 29 9 27 7 25 

25 .......... 17 03 15 05 13 03 11 05 9 03 7 01 

WESTERN ELONGATIONS. 

Day. October. November. December. January. February. March. 

h.m. h.m. h.m. h.m. h.m. h.m. 

1 ........... 18 27 16 25 14 28 12 26 10 24 8 30 

7. .......... 18 04 16 02 14 04 12 02 10 00 8 06 

13 .......... 17 40 15 38 13 40 11 39 9 37 7 43 

19 .......... 17 17 15 15 13 17 11 15 9 13 7 19 

25 .......... 16 53 14 51 12 53 10 51 8 49 6 55 

The eastern elongations are put down from the beginning 

of April to the end of September, and the western from the 

beginning of October to the end of March. The time is computed from noon. The western elongations in the first case, 

and the eastern in the second, occurring in the day-time, 

cannot be used. Some of those put down are also invisible, 

occurring in the evening before it is dark, or after daylight in 

the morning. 

-55- 

In such case, if it be necessary to determine the meridian at 

that particular season of the year, let 5 hours 59 minutes be 

added to or subtracted from the time of greatest eastern or 

western elongation, and the observation be made at night 

when the star is on the meridian. 

The following table exhibits the angle which the meridian 

plane makes with the vertical plane passing through the 

pole-star when at its greatest eastern or western elongation; 

such angle is called the azimuth. 

The mean angle only is put down, being calculated for the 

first of July of each year. 

Azimuth of Polaris (a Ursa Min.) at elongation, 1878 to 1888. 

(Latitude 2"6 to 50" north.) 

TO FIND THE TRUE MERIDIAN WITH THE 

THEODOLITE. 

Take a board, of about one foot square, paste white paper 

upon it, and perforate it through the center; the diameter of 

the hole being somewhat larger than the diameter of the 

telescope of the theodolite. Let this board be so fixed to a 

vertical staff as to slide up and down freely; and let a small 

piece of board, about three inches square, be nailed to the 

lower edge of it, for the purpose of holding a candle. 

About twenty-five minutes before the time of the greatest 

eastern or western elongation of the pole-star, as shown by 

the tables of elongations, let the theodolite be placed at a 

convenient point and leveled. Let the board be placed about 

one foot in front of the theodolite, a lamp or candle placed on 

the shelf at its lower edge; and let the board be slipped up or 

down, until the pole-star can be seen through the hole. The 

light reflected from the paper will show the cross hairs in the 

telescope of the theodolite. 

Then, let the vertical spider's line be brought exactly upon 

the pole-star, and if it is an eastern elongation that is to be 

observed, and the star has not yet reached the most easterly 

point, it will move from the line toward the east, and the 

reverse when the elongation is west. 

At the time the star attains its greatest elongation, it will 

appear to coincide with the vertical spider's line for some 

time, and then leave it, in the direction contrary to its former 

motion. 

As the star moves toward the point of greatest elongation, 

the telescope must be continually directed to it, by means of 

the tangent screw of the vernier plate; and when the star has 

attained its greatest elongation, great care should be taken 

that the instrument be not afterward moved. 

Now, if it be not convenient to leave the instrument in its 

place until daylight, let a staff, with a candle or small lamp 

upon its upper extremity, be arranged at thirty or forty yards 

from the theodolite, and in the 

-56- 

same vertical plane with the axis of the telescope. This is 

easily effected, by revolving the vertical limb about its horizontal axis without moving the vernier plate, and aligning 

the staff to coincide with the vertical hair. Then mark the 

26" 28" 30" 32" 34" 36" 38" 40" 42" 44" 46" 48" 50" 

1878 .......... 1879 .......... 

1880 .......... 

1881 .......... 1882 .......... 

1883 .......... 

1884 .......... 

1885 .......... 1886. ......... 1887 .......... 1888. ......... 

0, 

156 

55% 

55 

54YZ 

54Y4 

53Y4 

53v4 

523/4 

521/4 

513h 

51?h 

0, 

2 OOYZ 

2 00 

159% 

59 

58% 

58 

57% 

57 

56% 

56V4 

5 5 3/4 

534 
point directly under the theodolite; the line passing through 

this point and the staff, makes an angle with the true meridian equal to the azimuth of the pole star. 

From the table of azimuths, take the azimuth corresponding to the year and nearest latitude. If the observed elongation was east, the true meridian lies on the west of the line 

which has been found, and makes with it an angle equal to 

the azimuth. If the elongation was west, the true meridian 

lies on the east of the line; and, in either case, laying off the 

azimuth angle with the theodolite, gives the true meridian. 

TO FIND THE TRUE MERIDIAN WITH THE 

COMPASS. 

1. Drive two posts firmly into the ground, in a line nearly 

east and west; the uppermost ends, after the posts are driven, 

being about three feet above the surface, and the posts about 

four feet apart; then lay a plank, or piece of timber three or 

four inches in width, and smooth on the upper side, upon the 

posts, and let it be pinned or nailed, to hold it firmly. 

2. Prepare a piece of board four or five inches square, and 

smooth on the under side. Let one of the compass sights be 

placed at right angles to the upper surface of the board, and 

let a nail be driven through the board, so that it can be tacked 

to the timber resting on the posts. 

3. At about twelve feet from the stakes, and in the direction of the pole star, let a plumb be suspended from the top of 

an inclined stake or pole. The top of the pole should be of such 

a height that the pole star will appear about six inches below 

it; and the plumb should be swung in a vessel of water to 

prevent it from vibrating. 

This being done, about twenty minutes before the time of 

elongation place the board to which the compass sight is 

fastened on the horizontal plank, and slide it east or west 

until the aperture of the compass sight, the plumb line, and 

the star are brought into the same range. Then if the star 

depart from the plumb line move the compass sight east or 

west along the timber, as the case may be, until the star shall 

attain its greatest elongation, when it will continue behind 

the plumb line for several minutes, and will then recede from 

it in the direction contrary to its motion before it became 

stationary. Let the compass sight be now fastened to the 

horizontal plank. During this observation it will be necessary 

to have the plumb line lighted; this may be done by an 

assistant holding a candle near it. 

Let now a staff, with a candle or lamp upon it, be placed at a 

distance of thirty or forty yards from the plumb line, and in 

the same direction with it and the compass sight. The line so 

determined makes, with the true meridian, an angle equal to 

the azimuth of the pole star; and from this line the variation 

of the needle is readily determined, even without tracing the 

true meridian on the ground. 

Place the compass upon this line, turn the sights in the 

direction of it, and note the angle shown by the needle. Now, 

if the elongation at the time of observation was west, and the 

north end of the needle is on the west side of the line, the 

azimuth, plus the angle shown by the needle, is the true 

variation. But should the north end of the needle be found on 

the east side ofthe line, the elongation being west, the difference between the azimuth and the angle would show the 

variation, and the reverse when the elongation is east. 

-57- 

Elongation west, azimuth ......................... T04' 

North end of the needle on the west, angle. . 4'06' 

Variation .......................... 6"lO' west. 

Elongation west, azimuth ......................... 439' 

North end of the needle on the east, angle.. 4"50' 

Variation .......................... 251' east. 

Elongation east, azimuth. ......................... 2'05' 

North end of the needle on the west, angle. . V30' 

Variation. ..................... 6'25' west. 

Elongation east, azimuth. ......................... 1'57' 

North end of the needle on the east, angle . . 8"40' 

Variation .......................... lO"37' east. 

The variation at West Point in September, 1835, was 6" 32' 

west. 

The variation of the needle should always be noted on 

every survey made with the compass, and then if the land be 

surveyed at a future time the old lines can always be rerun. 

It has been found by observation that heat and cold sensibly affect the magnetic needle, and that the same needle 

will at the same place indicate different lines at different 

hours of the day. 

If the magnetic meridian be observed early in the morning, 

and again at different hours of the day, it will be found that 

the needle will continue to recede from the meridian as the 

day advances, until about the time of the highest temperature, when it will begin to return, and at evening will make 

the same line as in the morning. This change is called the 

diurnal variation, and varies, during the summer season, 

from one-fourth to one-fifth of a degree. 

A very near approximation to a true meridian, and consequently to the variation, may be had, by remembering that 

the pole star very nearly reaches the true meridian when it is 

in the same vertical plane with the star Alioth in the tail of 

the Great Bear, which lies nearest the four stars forming the 

quadrilateral. 

The vertical position can be ascertained by means of a 

plumb line. To see the spider's lines in the field of the telescope at the same time with the star, a faint light should be 

placed near the object glass. When the plumb line, the star 

Alioth, and the north star fall on the vertical spider's line, the 

horizontal limb is firmly clamped and the telescope brought 

down to the horizon; a light, seen through a small aperture in 

a board, and held at some distance by an assistant, is then 

moved according to signals, until it is covered by the intersection of the spider's lines. A picket driven into the ground, 

under the light, serves to mark the meridian line for reference by day, when the angle formed by it and the magnetic 

meridian may be measured. 

535 
* 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

0 

[Pages 58 and 59 are deleted. They contain a table of latitudes 

and departures, and a table of offsets from the tangent to the 

parallel.] 

536 
T. 13 S. 

H.21 E. 

FOURTH STANDARD PARALLEL NOR 

THIRD STANDARD PARALLEL NOR1 
DIAGRAM A 

RTH STANDARD PARALLEL NORTH 

IRD STANDARD 

1 

T.16 N 

R .2 4 F: . 

LI 
DLQG RrLM 6 

TOWNSHIP N? 6 NORTH RANGE NO 34 EAST OF THE PRI 

3661 , I, 

A 
34 EAST OF THE PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN MONTANA 
Shad Nai 

,- 
Shwi N"2 
Sheet No3 

DlAGRAM C 
XL. 

(This Circular pamphlet is copied from an original now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

RESTORATION 

OF 

LOST AND OBLITERATED CORNERS. 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

MARCH 13,1883. 

WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 

1883. 

IRev;sed in 1885, only change 

was the date on the cover.] 

545 
RESTORATION OF LOST AND OBLITERATED 

CORNERS. 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D. C., March 13, 1883. 

The increasing number of letters from county and local 

surveyors received at this office, making inquiry as to the 

proper method of restoring to their original position lost or 

obliterated corners marking the survey of the public lands of 

the United States, or such as have been willfully or 

accidentally moved from their original position, have rendered the preparation of the following general rules necessary, particularly as in a very large number of cases the 

immediate facts necessary to a thorough and intelligent 

understanding are omitted. Moreover, surveys having been 

made under the authority of different acts of Congress, different results have been obtained, and no special law has been 

enacted by that authority covering and regulating the subject of the above-named inquiries. Hence the general rules 

here given must be considered merely as an expression of the 

opinion of this office on the subject, based, however, upon the 

spirit of the several acts of Congress authorizing the surveys, 

as construed by this office. When cases arise which are not 

covered by these rules, and the advice of this office is desired, 

the letter of inquiry should always contain a description of 

the particular corner with reference to the township, range, 

and section of the public surveys, to enable this office to 

consult the record. 

To restore extinct boundaries of the public lands correctly, 

the surveyor must have some knowledge of the manner in 

which townships were subdivided by the several methods 

authorized by Congress. Without this knowledge he may be 

greatly embarrassed in the field, and is liable to make mistakes invalidating his work, and leading eventually to serious litigation. It is believed that the following synopsis of the 

several acts of Congress regulating the surveys of the public 

lands will be of service to county surveyors and others, and 

will help to explain many of the difficulties encountered by 

them in the settlement of such questions. 

The differences resulting from Congressional legislation at 

different periods resulted in two sets of corners being established on township lines at one time; at another time three 

sets of corners were established on range lines, while the 

system now in operation makes but one set of corners on 

township boundaries, except on standard lines, i. e., base and 

correction lines, and in some exceptional cases. 

The following brief explanation of the modes which have 

been practiced will be of service to all who may be called upon 

to restore obliterated boundaries of the public land surveys: 

Where two sets of corners were established on township 

boundaries one set was planted at the time the exteriors were 

run, those on the 

-3- 

-4- 

north boundary belonging to the sections and quarter sections north of said line, and those on the west boundary 

belonging to the sections and quarter sections west of that 

line. The other set of corners was established when the 

township was subdivided. This method, as stated, resulted in 

the establishment of two sets of corners on all four sides of the 

townships. 

Where three sets of corners were established on the range 

lines, the subdivisional surveys were made in the above manner, except that the east and west section lines, instead of 

being closed upon the corners previously established on the 

east boundary of the township, were run due east from the 

last interior section corner, and new corners were erected at 

the points of intersection with the range line. 

The method now in practice requires section lines to be 

initiated from the corners on the south boundary of the 

township, and to close on existing corners on the east, north, 

and west boundaries of the township, except when the north 

boundary is a base line or standard parallel. 

SYNOPSIS OF ACTS OF CONGRESS. 

The first enactment in regard to the surveying of the public 

lands was an ordinance passed by the Congress of the Confederation, May 20,1785, prescribing the mode for the survey of 

the “Western Territory,” and which provided that said territory should be divided into “townships of six miles square, by 

lines running due north and south, and others crossing them 

at right angles” as near as might be.’ 

It further provided that the first line running north and 

south should begin on the Ohio River, at a point due north 

from the western terminus of a line run as the south boundary of the State of Pennsylvania, and the first line running 

east and west should begin at the same point, and extend 

through the whole territory. In these initial surveys only the 

exterior lines of the townships were surveyed, but the plats 

were marked by subdivisions into sections of one mile square, 

numbered from 1 to 36, commencing with No. 1 in the southeast corner of the township, and running from south to north 

in each tier to No. 36 in the northwest corner of the township; 

mile corners were established on the township lines. The 

region embraced by the surveys under this law forms a part of 

the present State of Ohio, and is generally known as “the 

Seven Ranges.” 

The Federal Congress passed a law, approved May 18, 

1796, in regard to surveying the public domain, and applied 

to “the territory northwest of the Ohio River, and above the 

mouth of the Kentucky River.”’ 

Section 2, of said act, provided for dividing such lands as 

had not been already surveyed or disposed of, “by north and 

south lines run according to the true meridian, and by others 

crossing them at right angles, so as to form townships of 6 

miles square,” &c. It also provided that “one half of said 

townships, taking them alternately, should be subdivided 

into sections containing, as nearly as may be, 640 acres each, 

by running parallel lines through the same each way at the 

end of every two miles, and marking a corner on each of said 

lines at the end of every mile.” The act also provided that “the 

1. Ordinance of the Congress ofthe Confederation, of May 20,1785. U. S. Land Laws, p. 

349. Edition 1828. 

2. Act ofMay 18,1796. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 1, p 465. Section 2395, U. S. Revised 

Statutes. 

546 
sections shall be numbered, respectively, beginning with the 

number one in the northeast section, and proceeding west 

and east alternately through the township, with progressive 

numbers till the thirty-sixth be completed.” This method of 

numbering sections is still in use. 

-5- 

An act amendatory of the foregoing, approved May 10, 

1800, required the “townships west of the Muskingum, which 

are directed to be sold in 1 quarter townships, be subdivided 

into half sections of 320 acres each, as nearly as may be, by 

running parallel lines through the same from east to west, 

and from north to south, at the distance of one mile from each 

other, and marking corners, at the distance of each half mile 

on the lines running east and west, and at the distance of each 

mile on those running from south to north. And the interior 

lines of townships intersected by the Muskingum, and of all 

townships lying east of that river, wich have not been heretofore actually subdivided into sections, shall also be run and 

marked. And in all cases where the exterior lines of the 

townships thus to be subdivided into sections or half sections 

shall exceed, or shall not extend six miles, the excess or 

deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or deducted 

from the western or northern ranges of sections or half sections in such townships, according as the error may be in 

running the lines from east to west or from south to north.” 

Said act also provided that the northern and western tier of 

sections should be sold as containing only the quantity expressed on the plats, and all others as containing the complete legal q~antity.~ 

The act approved June 1, 1796, “regulating the grants of 

land appropriated for military services,” &c., provided for 

dividing the “Virginia Military Tract,” in the State of Ohio, 

into townships 5 miles square, each to be subdivided into 

quarter townships containing 4,000 acres.4 

Section 6 of the act approved March 1,1800, amendatory of 

the foregoing act, enacted that the Secretary of the Treasury 

was authorized to subdivide the quarter townships into lots of 

100 acres, bounded as nearly as practicable by parallel lines 

160 perches in length by 100 perches in width. These subdivisions into lots, however, were made upon the plats in the 

office of the Secretary of the Treasury, and the actual survey 

was only made at a subsequent time when a sufficient number of such lots had been located to warrant the survey. It 

thus happened, in some instances, that when the survey 

came to be made the plat and survey could not be made to 

agree, and that fractional lots on plats were entirely crowded 

out. A knowledge of this fact may explain some of the difficulties met with in the district thus ~ubdivided.~ 

The act of Congress approved February 11, 1805, directs 

the subdivision of the public lands into quarter quarter sections, and provides that all corners marked in the field shall 

be established as the proper corners of the sections or quarter 

sections which they were intended to designate, and that 

corners of half and quarter sections not marked shall be 

3. Act ofMay 10,1800. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 2, p. 73. Section 2395, U. S. Revised 

Statutes. 

4. Act of June 1, 1796. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 1, p. 490 

5. Act of March 1, 1800. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 2, p. 14. 

placed as nearly as possible “equidistant from those two 

coraers which stand on the same line.” This act further provides that “the boundary lines actually run and marked” (in 

the field) “shall be established as the proper boundary lines of 

the sections or subdivisions for which they were intended; 

and the length of such lines as returned by the surveyors 

shall be held and considered as the true length thereof, and 

the boundary lines which shall not have been actually run 

and marked as aforesaid shall be ascertained by running 

straight lines from the established corners to the opposite 

corresponding corners, but in those fractional townships 

where no such opposite or corresponding corners have been or 

can be fixed, the said boundary line shall be ascertained by 

running from the established corners due north and south, or 

east and 

-6- 

west, as the case may be, to the external boundary of such 

fractional township.”6 

The act of Congress approved April 24, 1820, provides for 

the sale of public lands in half quarter sections, and requires 

“that in every case of the division of a quarter section the line 

for the division thereof shall run north and south, and fractional sections, containing 160 acres and upwards, shall in 

like manner, as nearly as practicable, be subdivided into half 

quarter sections, under such rules and regulations as may be 

prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury; but fractional 

sections, containing less than 160 acres, shall not be 

di~ided.”~ 

The act of Congress approved May 24,1824, provides “that 

whenever, in the opinion of the President of the United 

States, a departure from the ordinary mode of surveying land 

on any river, lake, bayou, or water course would promote the 

public interest, he may direct the surveyor general in whose 

district such land is situated, and where the change is intended to be made, under rules and regulations as the President may prescribe, to cause the lands thus situated to be 

surveyed in tracts of two acres in width, fronting on any river, 

bayou, lake, or water course, and running back the depth of 

forty acres.”’ 

The act of Congress approved April 5, 1832, directed the 

subdivision of the public lands into quarter quarters; that in 

every case of the division of a half quarter section the dividing line should run east and west, and that fractional sections 

should be subdivided, under rules and regulations prescribed 

by the Secretary of the Treasury. Under the latter provision 

the Secretary directed that fractional sections containing 

less than 160 acres, or the residuary portion of a fractional 

section, after the subdivision into as many quarter quarter 

sections as it is susceptible of, may be subdivided into lots, 

each containing the quantity of a quarter quarter section as 

nearly as practicable, by so laying down the line of subdivision that they shall be 20 chains wide, which distances are to 

6. Act of February 11, 1805. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 2, p 313. Section 2396, U. S. 

Revised Statutes. 

7. Act of April 24, 1820. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 3, p. 566. Section 2397, U. S. 

Revised Statutes. 

8. Act of May 24, 1824. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 4, p. 34. 

547 
be marked on the plat of subdivision, as are also the areas of 

the quarter quarters and residuary fraction^.^ 

These two acts last mentioned provided that the corners 

and contents of half quarters and quarter quarter sections 

should be ascertained as nearly as possible in the manner and 

on the principles prescribed in the act of Congress approved 

February 11, 1805. 

From the foregoing synopsis of Congressional legislation it 

is evident1st. That the boundaries of the public lands established 

and returned by the duly appointed Government surveyors, 

when approved by the surveyors general and accepted by the 

Government, are unchangeable. 

2d. That the original township, section, and quarter section 

corners established by the Government surveyors must stand 

as the true corners which they were intended to represent, 

whether the corners be in place or not. 

3d. That quarter quarter corners not established by the 

Government surveyors must be planted equidistant and on 

line between the quarter section and section corner. 

4th. That all subdivisional lines of a section must be 

straight lines, running from the proper corner in one exterior 

line to its opposite corresponding corner in the opposite exterior line. 

5th. That in fractional sections where no opposite corresponding corner has been or can be established, any required 

subdivision line of such section must be run from the proper 

original corner in the boundary 

-7- 

line due east and west, or north and south, as the case may be, 

to the water course, Indian reservation, or other exterior 

boundary of such section. 

From the foregoing it will be plain that extinct corners of 

the Government surveys must be restored to their original 

locations, whenever it is possible to do so; and hence resort 

should always be first had to the marks of the survey in the 

field. The locus of the missing corner should be first identified 

on the ground by the aid of the mound, pits, line trees, bearing trees, &c, described in the field notes of the original 

survey. 

The identification of mounds, pits, and witness trees, or 

other objects noted in the field notes of survey, afford the best 

means of relocating the missing corner in its original position. If this cannot be done, clear and unquestioned testimony 

as to the locality it originally occupied should be taken, if 

such can be at all obtained. In any event, whether the locus of 

the corner be fixed by the one means or the other, such locus 

should always be tested and proven by measurements to 

known corners. No definite rule can be laid down as to what 

shall be sufficient evidence in such cases, and much must be 

left to the skill, fidelity, and good judgment of the surveyor in 

the performance of his work. 

Where retracements of lines have to be made for the purpose of either testing the relocation of a missing corner, or by 

direct measurement between known corners intersecting at 

the point sought to be re-established, it will almost invari9. Act ofApril 5,1832. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 4, p. 503. Section 2397, U. S. Revised 

Statutes. 

ably happen that a difference of measurement is developed 

between the original measurement, as stated in the field 

notes, and the new measurement made for the purpose of 

re-establishment or proof. When these differences occur, the 

surveyor must in all cases re-establish or prove his corners at 

intervals proportionate to those given in the field notes of the 

original survey. From this rule there can be no departure, 

since it is the basis upon which the whole operation depends 

for accuracy and truth. 

TO RESTORE LOST OR OBLITERATED CORNERS. 

1. To restore corners on base and correction lines.-Run a 

right line between the nearest existing corners on such line, 

whether base or correction line, which corners must, however, be fully identified, and at the point proportionate to the 

distance given in the field notes of the original survey, establish a new corner. This point should be verified by measurements to the nearest known corners north or south of the base 

or correction line, or both. 

Where several corners are missing between the corners to 

be connected, as directed above, their location will be determined upon the same principle and in the same manner; that 

is to say, the original distance of the entire line between the 

recognized corners is to the entire distance remeasured between the same corners as the original distance of the first, 

second, third, &c., interval of the original survey is to the new 

distance to be laid off for the corresponding new interval. 

After having checked each new location by measurement to 

the nearest known corners north or south of the line, new 

corners will be established permanently, and new bearings 

and measurements taken to prominent objects, which should 

be of as permanent a character as possible, and the same 

recorded for future reference. 

-8- 

As has been observed, no existing original corner can be 

disturbed, and it will be plain that any excess or deficiency in 

measurements between existing corners cannot in any degree affect the distances beyond said existing corners, but 

must be added or subtracted proportionately to or from the 

intervals embraced between the corners which are still 

standing. 

2. Re-establishment of township corners common to four 

townships.-Inasmuch as township lines are sometimes run 

in a direction not true north and south, or east and west, a 

line should first be run connecting the nearest known corners 

on the north and south township lines and a temporary corner established at the proportionate distance. This will establish the location of the township corner only so far as its 

relative position north and south is concerned. The nearest 

known corners on the east and west township lines will then 

be connected in the same manner, independent of the temporary corner previously set, and the proportionate point determined in that direction; any difference east or west of the 

temporary corner which may be developed by the last operation, by intersection with the line previously run north and 

south, will then be laid off in the direction required from the 

temporary corner, and a permanent corner established at 

such point, marked and witnessed as in the foregoing case. 

548 
3. Re-establishment of corners common to two townships.-The two nearest known corners on the township line, 

the same not being a base or a correction line, will be connected as in case No. 1, by a right line, and the missing corner 

established by proportionate distance as directed in that 

case; the location thus found will be checked upon by 

measurements to nearest known section or quarter section 

corners north and south, or east and west, of the township 

line as the case may be. 

4. Re-establishment of closing corners.-Measure from the 

quarter section, section or township corner east or west, as 

the case may be, to the next preceding or succeeding corner in 

the order of original establishment, and re-establish the 

missing closing corner by proportionate measurement. The 

line upon which the closing corner was originally established 

should always be remeasured, in order to check upon the 

correctness of the new location. 

5. Re-establishment of interior section corners.-This class 

of corners should be re-established in the same manner as 

corners common to four townships. In such cases, when a 

number of corners are missing on all sides of the one sought to 

be re-established, the entire distance must, of course, be 

remeasured between the nearest existing recognized corners 

both north and south and east and west, in accordance with 

the rule laid down, and the new corner re-established by 

proportionate measurement. The mere measurement in any 

one of the required directions will not suffice, since the direction of the several section lines running northwards through 

a township, or running east and west, are only in the most 

exceptional cases true prolongations of the alignment of the 

section lines initiated on the south boundary of the township; 

while the east and west lines running through the township, 

and theoretically supposed to be at right angles with the 

former, are seldom in that condition, and the alignment of the 

closing lines on the east and west boundaries of the township, 

in connection with the interior section lines, even less seldom 

in accord. Moreover, the alignment of the section line itself 

from corner to corner, in point of fact, also very frequently 

diverges from a right line, although presumed to be so from 

the record contained in the field notes and so designated on 

the plats, and become either a broken or a curved line. This 

fact will be determined, in a 

-9- 

timbered country, by the blazes which may be found upon 

trees on either side of the line, and although such blazed line 

will not strictly govern as to the absolute direction assumed 

by such line, it will assist very materially in detemining its 

approximate direction and should never be neglected in retracements for the re-establishment of lost corners of any 

description. Sight trees described in the field notes, together 

with the recorded distances to same, when fully identified, 

will, it has been held, govern the line itself, even when not in 

a direct or straight line between established corners, which 

line is then necessarily a broken line by passing through said 

sight trees. Such trees, when in existence and properly identified beyond a question of doubt, will very materially assist 

in evidencing the correct relocation of a missing corner. It is 

greatly to be regretted that the earlier field notes of survey 

are so very meager in the notation of the topography found on 

the original line, which might in very many instances materially lessen a surveyor’s labors in retracement of lines and 

re-establishment of the required missing corner. In the absence of such sight trees and other evidences regarding the 

line, as in an open country, or where such evidence has been 

destroyed by time, the elements, or the progress of improvement, the line connecting the known corners should be run 

straight from corner to corner. 

6. Re-establishment of quarter section corners on township 

boundaries.-Only one set of quarter section corners are 

actually marked in the field on township lines, and they are 

established at the time when the township exteriors are run. 

When double section corners are found, the quarter section 

corners are considered generally as standing midway between the corners of their respective sections, and when 

required to be established or re-established, as the case may 

be, they should be generally so placed; but great care should 

be exercised not to mistake the corners of one section for those 

of another. After determining the proper section corners 

marking the line upon which the missing quarter section 

corner is to be re-established, and measuring said line, the 

missing quarter section corner will be re-established in 

accordance with the requirements of the original field notes 

of survey by proportionate measurement between the section 

corners marking the line. 

Where there are double sets of section corners on township 

and range lines, and the quarter section corners for sections 

south of the township or east of the range lines are required to 

be established in the field, the said quarter section corners 

should be so placed as to suit the calculation of areas of the 

quarter sections adjoining the township boundaries as expressed upon the official township plat, adopting proportionate measurements when the present measurements of the 

north and west boundaries of the section differ from the 

original measurements. 

7. Re-establishment of quarter section corners on section 

lines closing upon the north and west township boundaries.- 

This class of corners must be re-established according to the 

original measurement at forty chains from the last interior 

section corner. If the measurements do not agree with the 

original survey, the excess or deficiency must be divided 

proportionately between the two distances, as expressed in 

the field notes of original survey. The section corner started 

from and the corner closed upon should be connected by a 

right line, unless the retracement should develop the fact 

that the section line is either a broken or curved line, as is 

sometimes the case. 

8. Re-establishment of interior quarter section corners.-In 

some of the older surveys these corners are placed at variable 

distances, in which case the field notes of the original survey 

must be consulted, and the 

-10- 

quarter section corner re-established at proportionate distances between the corresponding section corners, in accordance therewith. The later surveys being more uniform and in 

stricter accordance with law, the missing quarter section 

corner must be re-established equidistant between the section corners marking the line, according to the field notes of 

the original survey. The marks made under 45, in relation to 

549 
section lines, apply with full force here also; the caution there 

given not to neglect sight trees is equally applicable; since 

the proper re-establishment of the quarter section corner 

may in some instances very largely depend upon its observance, and avoid one of the many sources of litigation. 

8. Where double corners were originally established, one of 

which is standing, to re-establish the other.-It being remembered that the corners established when the exterior 

township lines were run belong to the sections in the 

townships north and west of those lines, the surveyor must 

first determine beyond a doubt to which sections the existing 

corner belongs. This may be done by testing the courses and 

distances to witness trees or other objects noted in the original field notes of survey, and by remeasuring distances to 

known corners. Having determined to which township the 

existing corner belongs, the missing corner may be reestablished in line north or south of the existing corner, as 

the case may be, at the distance stated in the field notes of the 

original survey, by proportionate measurement, and tested 

by remeasurement to the opposite corresponding corner of 

the section to which the missing section corner belongs. 

These double corners being generally not more than a few 

chains apart, the distance between them can be more accurately laid off, and it is considered preferable to first establish 

the missing corner as above, and check upon the corresponding interior corner, than to reverse the proceeding; since the 

result obtained is every way more accurate and satisfactory. 

9. Where double corners were originally established, and 

both are missing, to re-establish the one established when the 

township line was run.-The surveyor will connect the 

nearest known corners on the township line, by a right line, 

being careful to distinguish the section from the closing corners, and re-establish the missing corner at the point indicated by the field notes of the original survey, by proportionate measurement. The corner thus restored will be common 

to two sections either north or west of the township boundary, 

and the section north or west, as the case may be, should be 

carefully retraced; thus checking upon the re-established 

corner, and testing the accuracy of the result. It cannot be too 

much impressed upon the surveyor, that any measurements 

to objects on line noted in the original survey are means of 

determining and testing the correctness of the operation. 

10. Where double corners were originally established, and 

both are missing, to re-establish the one established when the 

township was subdivided.-The corner to be re-established 

being common to two sections south or east of the township 

line, the section line closing on the missing section corner 

should be first retraced to an intersection with the township 

line in the manner previously indicated, and a temporary 

corner established at the point of intersection. The township 

line will of course have been previously carefully retraced in 

accordance with the requirements of the original field notes 

of survey, and marked in such a manner as to be readily 

identified when reaching the same with the retraced section 

line. The location of the temporary corner planted at the 

point of intersection will then be carefully tested and verified 

by remeasurements to noted objects and known corners on 

the township line, as noted in the 

-11- 

original field notes of survey, and the necessary corrections 

made in such relocation. A permanent corner will then be 

erected at the corrected location on the township line, properly marked and witnessed, and recorded for future requirements. 

11. Where triple corners were originally established on 

range lines, one or two of which have become obliterated, to 

re-establish either of them.-It will be borne in mind that only 

two corners were established as actual corners of sections, 

those established on the range line not corresponding with 

the subdivisional survey east or west of said range line. The 

surveyor will, therefore, first proceed to identify the existing 

corner or corners, as the case may be, and then re-establish 

the missing corner or corners in line north or south, according 

to the distances stated in the original field notes of survey in 

the manner indicated for the re-establishment of double corners, and testing the accuracy of the result obtained, as 

hereinbefore directed in other cases. If, however, the distances between the triple corners are not stated in the original field notes of survey, as is frequently the case in the returns 

of older surveys, the range line should be first carefully 

retraced, and marked in a manner sufficiently clear to admit 

of easy identification upon reaching same during the subsequent porceedings. The section lines closing upon the missing 

corners must then be retraced in accordance with the original 

field notes of survey, in the manner previously indicated and 

directed, and the corners re-established in the manner 

directed in the case of double corners. The surveyor cannot be 

too careful, in the matter of retracement, in following closely 

all the recorded indications of the original line, and nothing, 

however slight, should be neglected to insure the correctness 

of the retracement of the original line; since there is no other 

check upon the accuracy of the re-establishment of the missing corners, unless the entire corresponding section lines are 

remeasured by proportional measurement, and the result 

checked by a recalculation of the areas as originally returned, which, at best, is but a very poor check, because the 

areas expressed upon many plats of the older surveys are 

erroneously stated on the face of the plats, or have been 

carelessly calculated. 

12. Where triple corners were originally established on 

range lines, all of which are missing, to re-establish same.-- 

These corners should be re-established in accordance with 

the foregoing directions, commencing with the corner originally established when the range line was run, establishing 

the same in accordance with previously given directions for 

restoring section and quarter section corners; that is to say, 

by remeasuring between the nearest known corners on said 

township line, and re-establishing the same by proportionate 

measurement. The two remaining will then be re-established 

in conformity with the general rules for re-establishment of 

double corners. 

13. Re-establishment of meander corners and meanders.- 

Before proceeding with the re-establishment of missing 

meander corners, the surveyor will carefully rechain at least 

three of the section lines between known corners of the 

550 
township within which the lost corner is to be relocated, in 

order to establish the proportionate measurement to be used. 

This requirement of preliminary remeasurement of section 

lines must in no case be omitted; since it is the only data upon 

which the fractional section line can be remeasured proportionately, the corner marking the terminus, or the meander corner, being missing, and which it is intended to reestablish. The missing meander corner will be re-established 

on the section or township line retraced in its original location, by the proportionate measurement found by the preceding operations, from the 

-12- 

nearest known corner on such township or section line, in 

accordance with the requirements of the original field notes 

of survey. To retrace the original meander lines, between the 

meander corners re-established as above, is generally an 

operation of much greater difficulty, owing to the fact that 

the line connecting the meander corners is, in most instances, 

a broken line, and is, moreover, unmarked at each point of 

change in direction intermediate between the said meander 

corners, thus affording no check upon the work as it progresses through a section. The several deflections of line 

comprising the meanders in any one section being originally 

run by compass, their retracement by compass at a later 

period offers too many opportunities for error; inasmuch as 

the variation of the needle, as noted in the original field notes 

of survey, may have undergone violent changes by removal of 

the cause, such as timber, &c., or increased attractions by 

exposure of minerals, thus giving no means of correction to be 

applied in that direction at the time of retracement. Moreover, the variation of the needle as noted is not to be implicitly depended upon, since the observations for variation are in 

many instances crude and rough, and at best afford but an 

approximation in such work. It is, therefore, deemed preferable, where such variation has been carefully noted in the 

original field notes of survey, and the lines have been run 

with a true meridian throughout, to retrace the meanders by 

the angles made by the several successive courses. For instance, supposing the first course of a meander in a section to 

be initiated from a north and south section line, and the 

course by compass to be N. 30" 15' E., true meridian, the 

surveyor will lay off the angle of 30" 15' in the direction 

required; the second course being N. 85" 45' E., makes an 

angle with the preceding course of 55" 30'; the next course 

being S. 23" 30' E. makes an angle with the preceding course 

of 66" 30', and so on through the section. The required distances on each course being carefully chained, the excess or 

deficiency of the aggregate distance should be proportionately distributed on each course between the meander corners 

from the data thus found; also any error that may develop 

itself in the angles will be proportionately distributed upon 

the several angles and the entire meanders corrected in 

accordance therewith. Where no variation has been noted in 

the original field notes of survey, the meanders can only be 

retraced by trial lines, on the courses and distances originally 

given, and corrected by proportionate measurement of angle 

and distance as above. The surveyor will, of course, take 

cognizance of any information furnished by the original field 

notes of survey, as to objects on each course to which distances may be given or bearings taken, as well as at the 

meander stations themselves. 

14. Fractional section lines.-County and local surveyors 

being sometimes called upon to restore fractional section 

lines closing upon Indian, military, or other reservations, 

private grants, &c., such lines should be restored upon the 

same principles as directed in the foregoing pages, and 

checked whenever possible upon such corners of monuments 

as have been placed to mark such boundary lines. 

In some instances corners have been moved from their 

original position, either by accident or design, and county 

surveyors are called upon to restore such corners to their 

original positions, but, owing to the absence of any and all 

means of identification of such location, are unable to make 

the result of their work acceptable to the owners of the lands 

affected by such comer. In such cases the advice of this office 

has invariably been to the effect that the relocation of such 

corner must be made in accordance with the orders of a court 

of competent jurisdiction, 

-13- 

the United States having no longer any authority to order 

any changes where the lands affected by such corner have 

been disposed of. 

The original evidences of the public land surveys in the 

following States, viz: Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Michigan, Wisconsin, Iowa, Missouri, Arkansas, Mississippi, Alabama, and 

Kansas have been turned over, under the provisions of sections 2218, 2219, and 2220, United States Revised Statutes, 

to the State authorities, to whom application should be made 

for such copies of the original plats and field notes as may be 

desired. 

N. C. MCFARLAND, 

Commissioner. 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

Approved. 

March 13, 1883. 

H. M. TELLER, 

Secretary. 

551 
XLI. 

(This Circular No. 119 is copied from an original printink now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

CIRCULAR (No. 119) 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE. 

Washington, D. C., June 2, 1887. 

553 
This Office being in receipt of many letters making inquiry 

in regard to the proper method of subdividing sections of the 

public lands, the following general rules have been prepared 

as a reply to such inquiries. The rules for subdivision are 

based upon the laws governing the survey of the public lands. 

When cases arise which are not covered by these rules and 

the advice of this Office in the matter is desired, the letter of 

inquiry should, in every instance, contain a description of the 

particular tract or corner with reference to township, range, 

and section of the public surveys, to enable the Office to 

consult the record. 

SUBDIVISION OF SECTIONS. 

Under the provisions of the act of Congress approved 

February 11, 1805, the course to be pursued in the subdivision of sections is to run straight lines from the established 

quarter-section corners, United States surveys, to the opposite corresponding corners, and the point of intersection of 

the lines so run will be the corner common to the several 

quarter-sections, or, in other words, the legal center of the 

section. 

In the subdivision of fractional quarter-sections where no 

opposite corresponding corners have been or can be fixed, the 

subdivision lines should be ascertained by running from the 

established corners due north, south, east or west lines, as the 

case may be, to the water-course, Indian boundary line, or 

other external boundary of such fractional section. 

The law presupposes the section lines surveyed and 

marked in the field by the United States deputy surveyors to 

be due north and south or east and west lines, but in actual 

experience this is not always the case; hence, in order to carry 

out the spirit of the law, it will be necessary, in running the 

subdivisional lines through fractional sections, to adopt 

mean courses where the section lines are not due lines, or to 

run the subdivision line parallel to the section line when 

there is no opposite section line. 

Upon the lines closing on the north and west boundaries of 

a township, the quarter-section corners are established by 

the United States deputy surveyors at precisely forty chains 

to the north or west of the last interior section corners, and 

the excess or deficiency in the measurement is thrown on the 

outer tier of lots, as per act of Congress approved May 10, 

1800. 

In the subdivision of quarter-sections the quarter-quarter 

corners are to be placed at points equidistant between the 

sections and quarter-sec- 

-2- 

tion corners and between the quarter corners and the common center of the section, except on the last half mile of the 

lines closing on the north or west boundaries of a township, 

where they should be placed at twenty chains, proportionate 

measurement, to the north or west of the quarter-section 

corner. 

The subdivision lines of fractional quarter-sections should 

be run from points on the section lines intermediate between 

the section and quarter-section corners due north, south, 

east, or west, to the lake, water-course, or reservation which 

renders such tracts fractional. 

When there are double sets of section corners on township 

and range lines, the quarter corners for the section south of 

the township lines and east of the range lines are not established in the field by the United States surveyors, but in 

subdividing such sections said quarter corner should be so 

placed as to suit the calculations of the areas of the quartersections adjoining the township boundaries as expressed 

upon the official plat, adopting proportionate measurements 

where the present measurements of the north or west boundaries of the sections differ from the original measurements. 

By “proportionate measurement” as used in this circular is 

meant a measurement having the same ratio to that recorded 

in the original field notes as the length of chain used in the 

new measurement has to the length of chain used in the 

original survey, assuming that the original measurement 

was correctly made. 

For example: The length of the line from the quartersection corner on the west side of section 2, township 24 

north, range 14 east, Wisconsin, to the north line of the 

township, by the United States surveyor’s chain was reported 

as 45.40 chains, and by the county surveyor’s measure is 

reported as 42.00 chains, then the distance which the quarter-quarter corner should be located north of the quartersection corner would be determined as follows: 

As 45.40 chains, the Government measure of the whole 

distance, is to 42.90 chains, the county surveyor’s measure of 

the same distance, so is 20.00 chains, original measurement, 

to 18.90 chains by the county surveyor’s measure, showing 

that by proportionate measurement in this case the quarterquarter corner would be set at 18.90 chains north of the 

quarter-section corner instead of at 20.00 chains north of 

such corner as represented on the official plat. In this manner 

the deficiency of measurement by the county surveyor7s 

chain from that by the Government surveyor’s chain is equitably distributed. 

Very respectfully, 

WM. A. J. SPARKS, 

Commissioner. 

Approved June 2, 1887: 

H. L. MULDROW, 

Acting Secretary. 

554 
XLII. 

(This copy of the 1890 Manual is taken from an original in the possession of the BLM, Oregon State Office, Portland.) 

MANUAL 

OF 

SURVEYING INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR THE 

SURVEY OF THE PUBLIC LANDS 

OF THE 

UNITED STATES 

AND 

PRIVATE LAND CLAIMS. 

Prepared in conformity with law under the direction of 

THE COMMISSIONER OF THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE. 

JANUARY 1,1890. 

WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 

1890. 

555 
DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D. C., December 2, 1889. 

GENTLEMEN: The following instructions, including full 

and minute directions for the execution of surveys in the 

field, are issued under the authority given me by sections 

453,456, and 2398 United States Revised Statutes, and must 

be strictly complied with by yourselves and your deputy 

surveyors. 

Very respectfully, 

LEWIS A. GROFF, 

Commissioner. 

To SURVEYORS GENERAL OF THE UNITED STATES. 

INTRODUCTORY. 

The present system of survey of the public lands was inaugurated by a committee appointed by the Continental Congress, and consisting of the following delegates: 

Hon. THOS. JEFFERSON, Chairman .......... .Virginia. 

Hon. HUGH WILLIAMSON. ............ .North Carolina. 

Hon. DAVID HOWELL ................... .Rhode Island. 

Hon. ELBRIDGE GERRY. ............... .Massachusetts. 

Hon. JACOB READ .................... .South Carolina. 

On the 7th of May, 1784, this committee reported “An 

ordinance for ascertaining the mode of locating and disposing 

of lands in the western territory, and for other purposes 

therein mentioned.” This ordinance required the public lands 

to be divided into “hundreds” of ten geographical miles 

square, and those again to be subdivided into lots of one mile 

square each, to be numbered from 1 to 100, commencing in 

the northwestern corner, and continuing from west to east 

and from east to west consecutively. This ordinance was 

considered, debated, and amended, and reported to Congress 

April 26,1785, and required the surveyors “to divide the said 

territory into townships of 7 miles square, by lines running 

due north and south, and others crossing these at right 

angles. * * * The plats of the townships, respectively, shall be 

marked by subdivisions into sections of 1 mile square, or 640 

acres, in the same direction as the external lines, and numbered from 1 to 49. * * * And these sections shall be subdivided into lots of 320 acres.” This is the first record of the use 

of the terms “township” and “section.” 

May 3, 1785, on motion of Hon. William Grayson, of Virginia, seconded by Hon. James Monroe, of Virginia, the section respecting the extent of townships was amended by 

striking out the words “seven miles square” and substituting 

the words “six miles square.” The record of these early sessions of Congress are not very full or complete; but it does not 

seem to have occurred to the members until the 6th of May, 

1785, that a township six miles square could not contain 49 

sections of 1 mile square. At that date a motion to amend was 

made, which provided, among other changes, that a township 

should contain 36 sections; and the amendment was lost. The 

ordinance as finally passed, however, on the 20th of May, 

1785, provided for townships, 6 miles square, containing 36 

sections of 1 mile square. The first public surveys were made 

under this ordinance. The townships, 6 miles square, were 

laid out in ranges, extending northward from the Ohio River, 

the townships being numbered from south to north, and the 

ranges from east to west. The region embraced by the surveys 

under this law forms a part of the present State of Ohio, and is 

usually styled “The Seven Ranges.” In these initial surveys 

only the exterior lines of the 

-5- 

-6- 

townships were surveyed, but the plats were marked by subdivisions into sections of 1 mile square, and mile corners were 

established on the township lines. The sections were numbered from 1 to 36, commencing with No. 1 in the southeast 

corner of the township, and running from south to north in 

each tier to No. 36 in the northwest corner of the township, as 

shown in the following diagram: 

The surveys were made under the direction of the Geographer of the United States. 

The act of Congress approved May 18,1796 provided for the 

appointment of a surveyor-general, and directed the survey 

of the lands northwest of the Ohio River, and above the 

mouth of the Kentucky River, “in which the titles of the 

Indian tribes have been extinguished.” Under this law onehalf of the townships surveyed were subdivided into sections 

“by running through the same, each way, parallel lines at the 

end of every two miles, and by making a corner on each of said 

lines at the end of every mile,” and it further provided that 

“the sections shall be numbered, respectively, beginning 

with the number one in the northeast section and proceeding 

west and east alternately, through the township, with progressive numbers till the thirty-sixth be completed.” This 

method of numbering sections, as shown by the following 

diagram, is still in use: 

556 
The act of Congress approved May 10, 1800, required the 

“townships west of the Muskingum, which * * * are directed 

to be sold in quarter townships, to be subdivided into half 

sections of three hundred and twenty acres each, as nearly as 

may be, by running parallel lines through the same from east 

to west, and from south to north, at the distance of one mile 

from each other, and marking corners, at the dis- 

-7- 

tance of each half mile, on the lines running from east to west, 

and at the distance of each mile on those running from south 

to north. * * * And the interior lines of townships intersected 

by the Muskingum, and of all the townships lying east of that 

river, which have not been heretofore actually subdivided 

into sections, shall also be run and marked. * * * And in all 

cases where the exterior lines of the townships thus to be 

subdivided into sections or half sections shall exceed, or shall 

not extend, six miles, the excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or deducted from the western and 

northern ranges of sections or half sections in such township, 

according as the error may be in running the lines from east 

to west or from south to north.” 

The act of Congress approved February 11, 1805, directs 

the subdivision of the public lands into quarter sections, and 

provides that all the corners marked in the public surveys 

shall be established as the proper corners of sections, or 

subdivisions of sections, which they were intended to designate, and that corners of half and quarter sections not marked 

shall be placed, as nearly as possible, “equidistant from those 

two corners which stand on the same line.” This act further 

provides that “The boundary lines actually run and marked 

* * * shall be established as the proper boundary lines of the 

sections or subdivisions for which they were intended; and 

the length of such lines as returned by * * * the surveyors 

* * * shall be held and considered as the true length thereof, 

and the boundary lines which shall not have been actually 

run and marked as aforesaid shall be ascertained by running 

straight lines from the established corners to the opposite 

corresponding corners; but in those portions of the fractional 

townships, where no such opposite or corresponding corners 

have been or can be fixed, the said boundary line shall be 

ascertained by running from the established corners due 

north and south or east and west lines, as the case may be, to 

the * * * external boundary of such fractional township.” 

The act of Congress approved April 25, 1812, provided 

“That there shall be established in the Department of the 

Treasury an office to be denominated the General Land 

Office, the chief officer of which shall be called the Commissioner of the General Land Office, whose duty it shall be, 

under the direction of the head of the department, to superintend, execute, and perform all such acts and things touching 

or respecting the public lands of the United States, and other 

lands patented or granted by the United States, as have 

heretofore been directed by law to be done or performed in the 

office of the Secretary of State, of the Secretary and Register 

of the Treasury, and of the Secretary of War, or which shall 

hereafter by law be assigned to the said office.” 

The act of Congress approved April 24,1820, provides for 

the sale of public lands in half quarter sections, and requires 

that “in every case of the division of a quarter section the line 

for the division thereof shall run north and south * * * and 

fractional sections, containing 160 acres and upward, shall, 

in like manner, as nearly as practicable, be subdivided into 

half quarter sections, under such rules and regulations as 

may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury; but 

fractional sections containing less than 160 acres shall not be 

divided.” 

The act of Congress approved May 24,1824, provides “That 

whenever, in the opinion of the President of the United 

States, a departure from the ordinary mode of surveying land 

on any river, lake, bayou, or watercourse would promote the 

public interest, he may direct the surveyor-general in whose 

district such land is situated, and where the change is intended to be made, under such rules and regulations as the 

-8- 

President may prescribe, to cause the lands thus situated to 

be surveyed in tracts of two acres in width, fronting on any 

river, bayou, lake, or watercourse, and running back the 

depth of forty acres.” * * * 

The act of Congress approved May 29, 1830 (Secs. 2412, 

2413, R. S.), provides for the fine and imprisonment of any 

person obstructing the survey of the public lands, and for the 

protection of surveyors, in the discharge of their official 

duties, by the United States marshal, with sufficient force, 

whenever necessary. 

The act of Congress approved April 5, 1832, directed the 

subdivision of the public lands into quarter quarters; that in 

every case of the division of a half-quarter section the dividing line should run east and west, and that fractional sections 

should be subdivided under rules and regulations prescribed 

by the Secretary of the Treasury. Under the latter provision 

the Secretary directed that fractional sections containing 

less than 160 acres, or the residuary portion of a fractional 

section, after the subdivision into as many quarter-quarter 

sections as it is susceptible of, may be subdivided into lots, 

each containing the quantity of a quarter-quarter section, as 

nearly as practicable, by so laying down the line of subdivision that they shall be 20 chains wide, which distances are to 

be marked on the plat of subdivision, as are also the areas of 

the quarter-quarters and residuary fractions. 

The two acts last above mentioned provided that the corners and contents c?f half-quarter and quarter-quarter sections should be ascertained, as nearly as possible, in the 

manner and on the principles directed and prescribed in the 

act of Congress approved February 11, 1805. 

The act of Congress approved July 4,1836, provided for the 

557 
reorganization of the General Land Office, and that the executive duties of said office “shall be subject to the supervision and control of the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office under the direction of the President of the United 

States.” The repealing clause is, “That such provisions of the 

act of the twenty-fifth of April, in the year one thousand eight 

hundred and twelve, entitled ‘An act for the establishment of 

a General Land Office in the Department of the Treasury,’ 

and of all acts amendatory thereof as are inconsistent with 

the provisions of this act, be, and the same are hereby, repealed.” 

From the working of this act it would appear that the 

control of the General Land Office was removed from the 

Treasury Department, and that the Commissioner reported 

direct to the President, but, as a matter of fact, the Secretary 

of the Treasury still had supervisory control, for the act of 

Congress approved March 3,1849, by which the Department 

of the Interior was established, provided “That the Secretary 

of the Interior shall perform all the duties in relation to the 

General Land Office, of supervision and appeal, now discharged by the Secretary of the Trasury * * *.” By this act the 

General Land Office was transferred to the Department of 

the Interior, where it still remains. 

In 1855 a manual of instructions to surveyors general was 

prepared, under the direction of the Commissioner of the 

General Land Office, by John M. Moore, then principal clerk 

of surveys, and the act of Congress approved May 30, 1862 

(Sec. 2399 R. S.), provided “That the printed manual of instructions relating to the public surveys, prepared at the 

General Land Office, and bearing the date February twentysecond, eighteen hundred and fifty-five, the instructions of 

the Commissioner of the General Land Office, and the special 

instructions of the surveyor-general, when not in conflict 

with said printed manual or the instructions of said Commissioner, shall be taken and deemed to be a part of every 

contract for surveying the public lands of the United States.” 

-9- 

The instructions contained in this volume are issued under 

the authority given in the clause in said act providing that 

“The instructions of the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office * * * shall be taken and deemed to be a part of every 

contract for surveying the public lands of the United States.” 

The following comprise so much of the general laws relating to the survey of the public domain as it is deemed necessary to incorporate in this volume, reference being made by 

chapter and section to the codification of the Public Land 

Laws, prepared pursuant to acts of Congress approved March 

3, 1879, and June 16, 1880, and by section number to the 

Revised Statutes of the United States. 

[The remainder ofpage 9 and pages 10 through 16 and part of 

page 17 are deleted. These pages contain the Revised Statutes 

pertaining to the public land surveys, and forms of contracts 

between Surveyors General andthe Deputies.] 

SYSTEM OF RECTANGULAR SURVEYING. 

1. The public lands of the United States are ordinarily 

surveyed into rectangular tracts, bounded by lines conforming to the cardinal points. 

2. The public lands shall be laid off, in the first place, into 

bodies of land of 24 miles square, as near as may be. This shall 

be done by the extension of standard lines from the principal 

meridian every 24 miles, and by the extension, from the base 

and standard lines, of guide meridians every 24 miles. Thereafter they shall be laid off into bodies of land of 6 miles 

square, as near as may be, called townships, containing as 

near as may be 23,040 acres. The townships shall be subdivided into 36 tracts, called sections, each containing as near 

as may be 640 acres. Any number or series of contiguous 

townships, situate north or south of each other, constitute a 

range. 

The law requires that the lines of the public surveys shall 

be governed by the true merdian, and that the townships 

shall be six miles square-two things involving in connection 

a mathematical impossibility-for, strictly to conform to the 

meridian, necessarily throws the township out of square, by 

reason of the convergency of meridians, and hence, by adhering to the true meridian, results the necessity of departing 

from the strict requirements of law as respects the precise 

area of townships and the subdivisional parts thereof, the 

townships assuming something of a trapezoidal form, which 

inequality develops itself more and more as such, the higher 

the latitude of the surveys. It is doubtless in view of these 

circumstances that the law provides (see section 2 of the act of 

May 18,1796) that the sections of a mile square shall contain 

the quantity of 640 acres, as nearly as may be; and, moreover, 

provides (see section 3 of the act of May 10, 1800) in the 

following words: “And in all cases where the exterior lines of 

the townships, thus to be subdivided into sections or half 

sections, shall exceed, or shall not extend 6 miles, the excess 

or deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or deducted from the western or northern ranges of sections or half 

sections in such township, according as the error may be in 

running the lines from east to west, or from south to north; 

the sections and half sections bounded on the northern and 

western lines of such townships shall be sold as containing 

only the quantity expressed in the returns and plats, respectively, and all others as containing the complete legal quantity.” 

The accompanying diagram, marked B, and the specimen 

field-notes pertaining to the same, will serve to illustrate the 

method of running 

-18- 

lines to form tracts of land 24 miles square, as well as the 

method of running out the exterior lines of townships, and 

the order and mode of subdividing townships will be found 

illustrated in the accompanying specimen field-notes conforming with the township diagram C. The method here 

presented is designed to insure as full a compliance with all 

the requirements, meaning, and intent of the surveying laws 

as, it believed, is practicable. 

The section lines are surveyed from south to north on true 

meridians,’ and from east to west, in order to throw the 

1. See method of subdividing and remarks under the heading “Table 111. Azimuths of 

the tangent to the parallel.” 

558 
excesses or deficiencies in measurements on the north and 

west sides ofthe township, as required by law. In case where a 

township has been partially surveyed, and it is necessary to 

complete the survey of the same, or where the character of the 

land is such that the only north or west portions of the 

township can be surveyed, this rule can not be strictly 

adhered to, but, in such cases, must be departed from only so 

far as is absolutely necessary. It will also be necessary to 

depart from this rule where surveys close upon State or 

Territorial boundaries, or upon surveys extending from different meridians. 

3. The townships are to bear numbers in respect to the 

base line, either north or south of it; and the tiers of 

townships called “ranges” will bear numbers in respect to the 

meridian line according to their relative position to it, either 

on the east or west. 

4. The thirty-six sections into which a township is subdivided are numbered, commencing with number one at the 

northeast angle of the township, and proceeding west to number six, and thence proceeding east to number twelve, and so 

on, alternately, until THE NUMBER THIRTY/SIX IN THE 

SOUTHEAST ANGLE. In all cases of surveys of fractional 

townships, the sections should bear the same numbers as 

they would if the township was full. 

5. Standard parallels shall be established at intervals of 

every 24 miles, north and south of the base line, and guide 

meridians at intervals of every 24 miles, east and west of the 

principal meridian; the object being to confine the errors 

resulting from convergence of meridians, and inaccuracies in 

measurements, within the tracts of lands bounded by the 

lines so established. 

6. The survey of all principal base and meridian, standard 

parallels, and guide meridian, and township lines must be 

made with an instrument operating independently of the 

magnetic needle. Burt’s improved solar compass, or other 

instrument of equal utility, must be used of necessity in such 

cases; and it is deemed best that such instrument should be 

used under all circumstances. Where the needle can be relied 

on, however, the ordinary compass, if provided with a revolving compass box and variation arc, may be used in subdividing and meandering. Whenever deputies use instruments 

with magnetic apparatus only, they must test the accuracy of 

their work and the condition of their instruments by at least 

three observations upon a circumpolar star, upon different 

days, between the commencement and the close of surveying 

operations in any given township, an preferably at the southeast and southwest corners of the township and at or near the 

corner to sections 9, 10, 15 and 16. Deputies using instruments with solar apparatus are also required to make 

observations of the star Polaris at the beginning of every 

survey and they must examine the adjustments of their instruments and take the latitude2 daily, weather 

-19- 

permitting, in running base, standard, meridian, and range 

lines, and upon three different days during the execution of 

subdivisional surveys in each township. They must make 

complete records in their field-notes, under proper dates, of 

the making of all observations in compliance with these instructions, showing the style and condition of the instrument 

in use, and the angle formed, by comparing the line run with 

the meridian as by observation determined. 

7. The construction and adjustments of all surveying instruments used in the surveying of the public lands of the 

United States must be tested at least once a year,3 and oftener if necessary, by comparison with the true meridian, established under the direction of the surveyor-general of the 

district; and the instruments must be so modified in construction, or in such a way corrected, as may be necessary to 

produce the closest possible approximation to accuracy and 

uniformity in the operation of all such instruments. A record 

will be made of such examinations, showing the number and 

style of the instrument, name of the maker, the quantity of 

instrumental error discovered by comparison, in either solar 

or magnetic apparatus, or both, and means taken for correction. The surveyor-general will allow no surveys to be made 

until the instruments to be used therefor have been approved 

by him. 

8. The township lines and the subdivison lines will usually 

be measured by a two-pole chain of 33 feet in length,4 consisting of 50 links, and each link being seven and ninety-two 

hundredths of an inch long. On uniform and level ground, 

however, the four-pole chain may be used. The measurements will, however, always be represented according to the 

four-pole chain of 100 links. The deputy surveyor must provide himself with a measure of the standard chain kept at the 

office of the surveyor-general, to be used by him as a field 

standard. The chain in use must be compared and adjusted 

with this field standard each working day, and such field 

standard must be returned to the surveyor-general’s office for 

examination when his work is completed. 

OF TALLY PINS. 

9. You will use eleven tally pins made of steel, not exceeding 14 inches in length, weighty enough toward the point to 

make them drop perpendicularly, and having a ring at the 

top, in which is to be fixed a piece of red cloth, or something 

else of conspicuous color, to make them readily seen when 

stuck in the ground. 

PROCESS OF CHAINING. 

10. In measuring lines with a two-pole chain, every five 

chains are called “a tally;” and in measuring lines with a 

four-pole chain, every ten chains are called “a tally,” because 

at that distance the last of the ten tally pins with which the 

forward chainman set out will have been stuck. He then cries 

“tally;” which cry is repeated by the other chainman, and 

each registers the distance by slipping a thimble, button, or 

ring of leather, or something of the kind, on a belt worn for 

that purpose, or by some other convenient method. The hind 

chainman then comes up, and having counted in the presence 

of his fellow the tally pins which he has taken up, so that both 

may be assured that none of the pins have been lost, he then 

takes the forward end of the chain, and proceeds to set the 

pins. Thus the chainmen alternately change places, each 

2. Taking the latitude does not necessarily prove the correctness of adjustments. 

3. The adjustments should be verified daily when the instrument is in use. 

4. See R. S. 2395, sec. 99, par. 6 (page 11). 

559 
setting the pins that he has taken up, so that one is forward in 

all 

-20- 

the odd, and the other in all the even tallies. Such procedure, 

it is believed, tends to insure accuracy in measurement, 

facilitates the recollection of the distances to objects on the 

line, and renders a mis-tally almost impossible. 

LEVELING THE CHAIN AND 

PLUMBING THE PINS. 

11. The length of every line you run is to be ascertained by 

precise horizontal measurement, as nearly approximating to 

an air line as is possible in practice on the earth’s surface. 

This all-important object can only be attained by a rigid 

adherence to the three following observances: 

(1) Ever keeping the chain stretched to its utmost degree of 

tension on even ground. 

(2) On uneven ground, keeping the chain not only 

stretched as aforesaid, but horizontally leveled. And when 

ascending and descending steep ground, hills or mountains, 

the chain will have to be shortened to one-half its length (and 

sometimes more), in order accurately to obtain the true horizontal measure. 

(3) The careful plumbing of the tally pins, so as to attain 

precisely the spot where they should be stuck. The more 

uneven the surface, the greater the caution needed to set the 

pins. 

MARKING LINES. 

12. All lines on which are to be established the legal corner 

boundaries are to be marked after this method, viz: Those 

trees which may intercept your line must have two chops or 

notches cut on each side of them without any other marks 

whatever. These are called “sight trees” or “line trees.” A 

sufficient number of other trees standing within 50 links of 

the line, on either side of it, are to be blazed on two sides 

diagonally or quartering toward the line, in order to render 

the line conspicuous, and readily to be traced, the blazes to be 

opposite each other, coinciding in direction with the line 

where the trees stand very near it, and to approach nearer 

each other the farther the line passes from the blazed trees. 

Due care must ever be taken to have the lines so well marked 

as to be readily followed, and to cut the blazes deep enough to 

have recognizable scars as long as the trees stand. 

Where trees 2 inches or more in diameter are found, the 

required blazes must not be omitted. 

Bushes on or near the line should be bent at right angles 

therewith, and receive a blow of the ax at about the usual 

height of blazes from the ground sufficient to leave them in a 

bent position, but not to prevent their growth. 

ON TRIAL, OR RANDOM LINES, 

the trees are not to be blazed, unless occasionally, from indispensable necessity, and then it must be done so guardedly as 

to prevent the possibility of confounding the marks of the 

trial line with the true. But bushes and limbs of trees may be 

lopped, and stakes set on the trial or random line, at every ten 

chains, to enable the surveyor on his return to follow and 

correct the trial lines and establish therefrom the true Zine. 

To prevent confusion, the temporary stakes set on the trial or 

random lines must bepulled up when the surveyor returns to 

establish the true line. 

-21- 

INSUPERABLE OBJECTS ON LINEWITNESS POINTS. 

13. Under circumstances where your course is obstructed 

by impassable obstacles, such as ponds, swamps, marshes, 

lakes, rivers, creeks, &c., you will prolong the line across 

such obstacles by taking the necessary right angle offsets; or, 

if such be inconvenient, by a traverse or trigonometrical 

operation, until you regain the line on the opposite side. And 

in case a north and south, or a true east and west, line is 

regained in advance of any such obstacle, you will prolong 

and mark the line back to the obstacle so passed, and state all 

the pariculars in relation thereto in your field-book. And at 

the intersection of lines with both margins of impassable 

obstacles, you will establish a witness point (for the purpose of 

perpetuating the intersections therewith), by setting a post, 

and giving in your field-book the course and distance therefrom to two trees on opposite sides of the line, each of which 

trees you will mark with a blaze and notch facing the post; 

but on the margins of navigable water-courses, or navigable 

lakes, you will mark the trees with the proper number of the 

fractional section, township, and range. 

The best marking tools adapted to the purpose must be 

provided for marking neatly and distinctly all the letters and 

figures required to be made at corners, arabic figures being 

used exclusively; and the deputy is always to have at hand 

the necessary implements for keeping his marking irons in 

order. 

ESTABLISHING CORNERS. 

To procure the faithful execution of this portion of a surveyor’s duty is a matter of the utmost importance. After a 

true coursing and most exact measurements the establishment of corners is the consummation of the work. If, therefore, the corner be not perpetuated in a permanent and workmanlike manner the great aim of the surveying service will 

not have been attained. 

The following are the different points for perpetuating 

corners, viz: 

1. For township boundaries, at intervals of every 6 miles. 

2. For section boundaries, at intervals of every mile, or 80 

chains. 

3. For quarter-section boundaries, at intervals of every 

half mile, or 40 chains. Exceptions, however, occur as fully 

set forth hereafter in that portion of the manual showing the 

manner of running township lines and methods of subdividing. 

4. Meander corners are established at all those points 

where the lines of the public surveys intersect the banks of 

such rivers, bayous, lakes, or islands as are by law directed to 

be meandered. 

560 
DESCRIPTION OF CORNERS. 

The following is the form and language to be used by 

deputy surveyors in describing the establishment of corners 

in their field-notes, and their work in the field must strictly 

comply with the same. 

STANDARD TOWNSHIP CORNERS. 

SEC. 1. 5Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 

5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked S. C., with 6 notches on N., E., & W. 

edges, dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line, N., E., 

& W. of stone 6 ft. dist. and raised a mound of earth, 21/2 ft. 

high, 5 ft. base alongside. 

-22- 

SEC. 2. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins.ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 

5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., maked S. C., with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

edges, and raised a mound of stone,7 ?4 ft. high, 2 ft. base, 

alongside. Pits impracticable. 

SEC. 3. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 

5N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked S. C., with 6 notches on N., E. & W. 

edges, from which 

A-, - ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks., dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

, A--ins. diam. bears N. W. - 

lks., dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

, A-- ins. diam., bears S W. - 

lks., dist. markedg S. C. T. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., B. T. 

SEC. 4. "Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., 

marked 

S. C. T. 5 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. faces, with 6 notches on N., E., & W. 

faces, dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line, N., E., 

& W. of post, 6 ft. dist. and raised a mound of earth 2Yz ft. 

high, 5 ft. base, around post. 

SEC. 5. "Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W. 

marked. 

S. C. T. 5 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. faces, with 6 notches on N., E., & W. 

faces; from which 

A-, -ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks., dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W. 

lks., dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

, A- ins., diam. bears S. W. - lks., dist. markedg 

S. C. T. 5. N., Rs 2 & 3 W., B. T. 

SEC. 6. "Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) 

Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., dugpits. 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on 

each line, N., E., & W. of cor., 6 ft. dist. and raised a mound of 

earth 21/2 feet high, 5 ft. base, over it. In E. pit drove a stake 2 

ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins. in the ground, marked 

S. C. T. 5 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31 on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. faces, with 6 notches on N., E., & W. 

SEC. 7. I3A-, ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

S. C. T. 5 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31 on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. sides, with 6 notches on N., E., & W. 

sides, dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line, N., E., 

& W. of tree 6 ft. dist. and raised a mound of earth around 

tree, for Standard Cor. to Tps. 5 N., R's 2 & 3 W. 

ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

faces. 

gJ 

SEC. 8. I4A 

T. 5 N. S. C. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 31, on E. and 

gJ 

-23- 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on W. sides, with 6 notches on N., E., & W. 

sides, for Standard Cor. to Tps. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W.; from which 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

A -, ~ ins. diam., bears N. W. 

- lks dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

, A--ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

lks. disk markedg S. C. T. 5 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., B. T. 

CLOSING TOWNSHIP CORNERS. 

SEC. 1. 5Set a stone - x - x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 4 

N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked C. C. with 6 notches on S. E. & W. 

edges, dugpits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, S., E. 

& W. of stone, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth, 2% ft. 

high, 5 ft. base alongside. 

ins. -ins. in the ground for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 4 

N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked C. C. with 6 notches on S., E. & W. 

edges, and raised a mound of stone 1% ft. high, 2 ft. base, 

alongside. Pits impracticable. 

SEC. 3. 'Set a stone x-xins. - ins. in the ground for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) tps. 4 

N., Rs 2 & 3 W., marked C. C. with 6 notches on S., E., & W. 

edges; from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam. bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

SEC. 2. 'Set a stone x-x5. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

6. Stone with Mound of Stone 

7. To consist ofnot less than four stones. Mound to be at least 1% ft. high, with 2 ft. base. 

8. Stone with Bearing Trees. 

9. See "Miscellaneous," sec. 4, page 32. 

10. Post in Mound. 

11. Post with Bearing Trees 

12. Mound without Post or Stone. 

13. Tree Corner without Bearing Trees 

14. Tree Corner with Bearing Trees. 

561 
, A- ins. diam. bears N. W. - 

lks. dist. markedg C. C. T. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., B. T. 

SEC. 4. "Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., 

marked 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. faces, with 6 notches on S., E., & W. faces, 

dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, S., E., & W. of 

post, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2Yz ft. high, 5 ft. 

base, around post. 

SEC. 5. "Set a post, 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., 

marked 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. faces, with 6 notches on S., E. & W. faces; 

from which 

, A--ins. diam. bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam. bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W. 

lks. dist., markedg C.C.T. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., B. T. 

SEC. 6. 12Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor., to (e. g.) 

Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on 

each line, S., E., & W. of corner, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound 

of earth 2% ft. high, 5 ft. base, over it. In E pit drove a stake 2 

ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins. in the ground, marked 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

-24- 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

SEC. 7. 13A-, 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. sides, with 6 notches on S., E. & W. sides, 

dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line S. E. & W. of 

tree, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth around tree, for 

Closing Cor. to Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W. 

ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

€5) 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. faces, with 6 notches on S., E. & W. faces. 

ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

gJ 

SEC. 8. 14A 

C. C. T. 4 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on E. and 

R. 3 W. S. 1 on W. sides, with 6 notches on S., E. & W. sides 

, A- ins. diam. bears S. E. - 

, A- ins. diam. bears S. W. - 

, A- ins. diam. bears N. W.- 

SEC. 9. All Closing Township Corners must be connected 

for Closing Cor. to Tps. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W.; from which 

lks. dist., marked T. 4 N. R., 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

lks. dist., marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

lks. dist., markedg C. C. T. 4 N., Rs 2 & 3 W., B. T. 

with the nearest standard corner on the Standard Line. 

STANDARD SECTION CORNERS. 

SEC. 1. 5Set a stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) 

Secs. 35 & 36, marked S. C., with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches 

on W. edges, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N., E. & W. of stone 5% 

ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4?h ft. base, 

alongside. 

SEC. 2. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) 

Secs. 33 & 34, marked S. C., with 3 notches on E. & W. edges, 

and raised a mound of stone, l/z ft. high, 2 ft. base, alongside. 

Pits impracticable: 

SEC. 3. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) 

Secs. 35 & 36, marked S. C., with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches 

on W. edges, from which 

A-, ins. diam. bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

, A--ins. diam. bears N. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. 35, B. T. 

, A--ins. diam. bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. markedg T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. C. S. 35 & 36, B. T. 

SEC. 4. "Set a post, 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 35 & 36, marked 

S.C.T. 5N.,R.3 W.,onN. 

S. 36, on E., and 

S. 35 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

faces, dug pits 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N., E. and W. of post, 5% ft. 

dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4?/z ft. base round 

post. 

SEC. 5. "Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 35 & 36, marked 

S.C.T.5N.,R.3W.,onN. 

S. 36, on E. and 

-25- 

S. 35 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

faces; from which 

A ins. diam. bears N. E. - 

lks. dist., marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam. bears N. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. 35, B. T. 

A- ins. diam. bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. markedg T. 5 N., R. 3 W. S. C. S. 35 & 36, B. T. 

SEC. 6. "Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Standard Cor. to (e. g.) 

5. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

6. Stone with Mound of Stone 

7. Toconsistofnotlessthanfourstones. Moundtobeatleast 1Yzft. high, with2ft. base. 

8. Stone with Bearing Trees. 

9. See "Miscellaneous," sec. 4, page 32. 

10. Post in Mound. 

11. Post with Bearing Trees. 

12. Mound without Post or Stone. 

13. Tree Comer without Bearing Trees. 

14. Tree Comer with Bearing Trees 

562 
Secs. 33 & 34, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N., E. and W. of 

corner, 5% ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 41/4 

ft. base, over it. In E. pit drove a stake 2 ins. square, 2 ft. long, 

12 ins. in the ground, marked 

T.5N.,R.3W.,S.C.onN. 

S. 34 on E. and 

S. 33 on W. faces, with 3 notches on E. & W. faces. 

SEC. 7. 13A -, - ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

S. C.T.5N.,R.3 W.,onN. 

S. 36. on E. and 

S. 35 on W. sides, with one notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

sides, dugpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. N., E. & W. of tree, 5?h ft. dist. 

and raised a mound of earth around tree, for Standard Cor. to 

Secs. 35 & 36. 

SEC. 8. 14A ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

S.C.T.5N.,R.3 W.,onN. 

S. 36, on E. and 

S. 35 on W. sides, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

A -, - ins. diam. bears N. E. - 

, A- ins. diam. bears N. -OW. - 

A, - ins. diam. bears S E. - 

gJ 

g.1 

sides, for Standard Cor. to Secs. 35 & 36; from which 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W., S. 36, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 5 N., R. 3 W., S. 35, B. T. 

lks. dist markedg 

T. 5 N., R. 3 W., S. C. S. 35 & 36, B. T. 

CLOSING SECTION CORNERS. 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 

1 & 2, marked C. C., with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

edges, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. S., E. & W. of stone, 5% feet 

dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base 

alongside. 

SEC. 2. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins., -ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 

3 & 4, marked C. C., with 3 notches on E. and W. edges, and 

raised a mound of stone 11/2 ft. high, 2 ft. base, alongside. Pits 

impracticable. 

stone - x - x - 

ins., -ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 

1 & 2, marked C. C., with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

edges; from which 

A -, ~ ins. diam., bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W., S. 1 B. T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W., S. 2, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. markedg T. 4 N., R. 3 W., C. C. S. 1 & 2 B. T. 

SEC. 1. 5Set a - stone x-xSEC. 3. 8Set a 

-26- 

SEC. 4 "Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 1 & 2, marked 

C.C.T.4N.,R.3W.,onS. 

S. 1 on E., and 

S. 2 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

faces, dug pits 18 x 18 x 12 ins., S., E. & W. ofpost 5% ft. dist., 

and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4?h ft. base around 

post. 

SEC. 5. "Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 1 & 2, marked 

C.C.T.4N.,R.3W.,onS. 

S. 1 on E. and 

S. 2 on W. faces, with 1 notch on E and 5 notches on W. 

faces; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W., S. 1, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W., S. 2, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. markedg T. 4 N., R. 3W., C. C. S. 1 & 2, B. T. 

SEC. 6. I2Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Closing Cor. to (e. g.) 

Secs. 3 & 4, dugpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., S., E. & W. of Cor. 5% ft. 

dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high,'4% ft. base, over 

it. In E. pit drove a stake, 2 ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins. in the 

ground, marked 

C.C.T.4N.,R.3W.,onS. 

S. 3 on E., and 

S. 4 on W. faces, with 3 notches on E. & W. faces. 

SEC. 7 13A 

C.C.T.4N.,R.3W.,onS. 

S. 1, on E., and 

S. 2 on W. sides, with 1 notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

sides, dug pits 18 x 18 x 12 ins. S., E. & W. of tree, 5?h ft. dist., 

and raised a mound of earth around tree, for closing Cor. to 

Secs. 1 & 2. 

ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

€5) 

ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

gJ 

SEC. 8. 14A 

C.C.T.4N.,R.3W.,onS. 

S. 1, on E., and 

S. 2 on W. sides, with one notch on E. and 5 notches on W. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E. - 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

, A- ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

SEC. 9. 15All Section Closing Corners must be connected 

sides, for Closing Cor. to Secs. 1 & 2; from which 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W., S. 1, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 4 N., R. 3 W., S. 2, B. T. 

lks. dist. markedg 

T. 4 N., R. 3 W., C. C. S. 1 & 2, B. T. 

with the nearest standard corner on the Standard line. 

5. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

6. Stone with Mound of Stone. 

7. Toconsistofnotlessthanfourstones.Moundtobeatleastl%ft. high,with2ft.base. 

8. Stone with Bearing Trees. 

9. See "Miscellaneous," sec. 4, page 32. 

10. Post in Mound. 

11. Post with Bearing Trees. 

12. Mound without Post or Stone. 

13. Tree Comer without Bearing Trees. 

14. Tree Corner with Bearing Trees 

15. Connection Lines. 

563 
CORNERS COMMON TO FOUR TOWNSHIPS. 

stone - x ~ x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground for Cor.to (e. g.) Tps. 2 & 3 N., 

Rs 2 & 3W., marked with 6 notches on each edge,dug pits, 24 

x 18x 12ins. lengthwise on each line, N., S.,E. & W. ofstone, 

6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2Yz ft. high, 5 ft. base 

alongside. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a 

-27- 

SEC. 2. 'Set a stone - x - x - 

ins., -ins. in the ground,for Cor.to (e. g.) Tps. 2 & 3N., 

R's 2 & 3W. marked with 6 notches on each edge,and raised a 

mound of stone 1% ft. high, 2 ft. base, alongside. Pits impracticable. 

stone - x - x ~ 

ins., - ins. in the ground,for Cor. to (e. g.)Tps. 2 & 3N. 

R. 2 &3. W. marked with 6 notches on each edge;from which 

- 

A -, - ins., diam., bears N. E. 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N., R. 2 W., S. 31, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam.,bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W., S. 6, B. T. 

A-,-ins.diam.,bearsS.-"W.- 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 3 W., S. 1,B. T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W. 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N., R. 3 W., S. 36, B. T. 

SEC.4. "Set a post, 4% ft. long 4 ins. square,with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Cor. t o (e. g.)Tps. 2 & 3 N., Rs 2 & 3W., marked 

SEC. 3. 'Set a 

T.3N.,S. 31,0nN.E. 

R. 2 W., S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N., S. 1,on S. W. and 

R. 3W., S. 36 on N. W. faces,with 6 notches on each edge, 

dug pits, 24 x 18x 12ins., lengthwise on each line, N., S.,E., 

& W. of post, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 2% ft. 

high, 5 ft. base around post. 

SEC. 5. "Set a post 4% ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Cor. to (e. g.) Tps., 2 & 3N., R's 2 & 3 W., marked 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1,on S. W. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on N. W. faces, with 6 notches on each edge; 

from which 

, A--ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N., R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam.,bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam.,bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 3 W. S. 1, B. T. 

A ~, ins. diam., bears N. W. 

- lks. dist. marked T. 3 N., R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

SEC.6. I2Deposited amarked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12ins. in the ground for Cor. to (e. g.) Tps. 2 & 3 

N., R s 2 & 3W., dugpits, 24x 18x 12ins.,lengthwise on each 

line, N., S.,E., & W. of Cor., 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of 

earth 2% ft. high, 5 ft. base over it. In E. pit drove a stake 2 

ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins. in the ground, marked 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1,on S. W. and 

R. 3W. S. 36, on N. W. faces, with 6 notches on each edge. 

SEC.7. 13A ins. diam.,which Imarked (e. 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1,on S. W. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36 on N. W. sides, with 6 notches facing each 

cardinal point, dug pits, 24 x 18x 12 ins. lengthwise on each 

line, N., S., E., & 

€5) 

-28- 

W. of tree, 6 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth around tree, 

for Cor. to Tps. 2 & 3 N., Rs 2 & 3 W. 

SEC. 8. I4A -, - ins diam., which Imarked (e. 

T. 3 N. S. 31, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6, on S. E. 

T. 2 N. S. 1,on S. W. and 

R. 3 W. S. 36, on N. W. sides, with 6 notches facing each 

cardinal point, for Cor. to Tps. 2 & 3 N., R s 2 & 3 W., fom 

which 

, A--ins. diam.,bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N., R. 2 W. S. 31, B. T. 

A. -, ins. diam.,bears S. E. - 

Iks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

A. -, - ins. diam., bears S. W. 

- lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 3 W. S. 1,B. T. 

A. -. ins. diam., bears N. W. 

€5) 

lks. dist. marked T. 3 N., R. 3 W. S. 36, B. T. 

CORNERS COMMON TO FOUR SECTIONS. 

SEC. 1. 'Set a - stone - x - x ___ 

ins. - ins. in the ground for Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 25,26, 

35,&36,marked with 1notch on S.&E. edges, dug pits, 18x 

18 x 12 ins. in each Sec., 5% ft. dist., and raised a mound of 

earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base alongside. 

stone - x ___ x - 

ins. - ins. in the ground, for Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 14,15, 

22, & 23, marked with 3 notches on S. and 2 notches on E. 

edges, and raised a mound of stone 1% ft. high, 2 ft. base, 

alongside. Pits impracticable. 

stone - x - x - 

ins. -ins. in the ground,for Cor.to (e.g.)Secs. 9,10,15, 

& 16, marked with 4 notches on S.& 3 notches on E. edges, 

from which 

, A- ins. diam.,bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 10, B. T. 

SEC. 2. 'Set a 

SEC. 3. 'Set a 

5. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

6. Stone with Mound of Stone. 

7. Toconsistofnotlessthanfourstones.Moundtobeatleast lYzft. high,withZft.base. 

8. Stone with Bearing Trees 

9. See "Miscellaneous," sec. 4, page 32. 

10. Post in Mound. 

11. Post with Bearing Trees 

12. Mound without Post or Stone. 

13. Tree Comer without Bearing Trees. 

14. Tree Comer with Bearing Trees 

564
A-, ins. diam., bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 15, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 16, B. T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 9, B. T. 

SEC. 4 "Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Cor. to (e. g.) Secs, 15, 16, 21, & 22, marked 

T. 2 N. S. 15, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 22, on S. E. 

S. 21, on S. W. and 

S. 16 on N. W. faces, with 3 notches on S. & E. edges, dug 

pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. in each Sec., 5Y2 ft. dist., and raised a 

mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base around post. 

SEC. 5. "Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 25, 26, 35, & 36, marked 

T. 2 N. S. 25, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 36, on S. E. 

S. 35, on S. W. and 

S. 26, on N. W. faces, with 1 notch on S. & E. edges; from 

, A--ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E. - 

which 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 25, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 36, B. T. 

-29- 

, A--ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 35, B. T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 26, B. T. 

SEC. 6. 12Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Cor. to (e. g.) Secs. 25, 

26, 35, & 36, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. in each Sec., 5% ft. 

dist., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. base over 

it. 

In S. E. pit drove a stake 2 ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 ins in 

the ground, marked 

T. 2 N. S. 25, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 36, on S. E. 

S. 35, on S. W. and 

S. 26, on N. W. faces, with 1 notch on S. & E. edges. 

SEC. 7. 13A 

T. 2 N. S. 29, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 32, on S. E. 

S. 31, on S. W. and 

S. 30, on N. W. sides, with 1 notch on S. and 5 notches on E. 

sides, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. in each sec. 5% ft. dist. and 

raised a mound of earth around tree, for Cor. to Secs. 29,30, 

31, & 32. 

SEC. 8. 14A- , - ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

T. 2 N. S. 5, on N. E. 

R. 2 W. S. 8, on S. E. 

S. 7, on S. W. and 

S. 6, on N. W. sides, with 5 notches on S. & E. sides, for Cor. 

, A- ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

,-ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

gJ 

g.1 

to Secs. 5, 6, 7 & 8; from which 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 5, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 8, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 7, B. T. 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 6, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

, A- ins. diam., bears N. - W. - 

ARTICLE X. 

QUARTER SECTION CORNERS. 

SEC. 1. a stone x-xins., -ins. in the ground, for l/4 Sec. Cor., marked l/4 on 

N. (or W.) face, dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N. & S. (or E. & W.) 

of stone 51/2 ft. dist., and raised a mound of earth 1Yz ft. high, 

3l/z ft. base alongside. 

SEC. 2. 'Set a - stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for 1/4 Sec. Cor., marked l/4 on 

N. (or W.) face, and raised a mound of stone 1% ft. high, 2 ft. 

base, alongside. Pits impracticable. 

stone - x - x ~ 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for l/4 Sec. Cor., marked '/4 on 

N. (or W.) face; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. marked l/4 S. B. T. 

, A- ins. diam , bears S. W. ~ 

lks. dit. marked Y4 S. B. T. 

SEC. 4. "Set a post 3 ft. long, 3 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for 1/4 Sec. Cor., marked 1/4 S. on N. (or W.) face, dug 

pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N. & S., (or E. and W.) of post 51/z ft. 

dist., and raised a mound of earth 1% ft. high, 3% ft. base 

around post. 

SEC. 3. 'Set a 

-30- 

SEC. 5. "Set a post 3 ft. long, 3 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for 1/4 Sec. Cor., marked 1/4 S. on N. (or W.) face; from 

which 

, A- ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks., dist. marked 1/4 S. B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. - W. - lks., dist. marked l/4 S. B. T. 

SEC. 6. 12Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for 9'4 Sec. Cor., dug pits, 18 

x 18 x 12 ins., N. & S. (or E. & W.) of corner 5% ft. dist. and 

raised a mound of earth 1% ft. high, 31/z ft. base over it. In E. 

(or N.) pit drove a stake 2 ft. long, 2 ins. square, 12 ins. in the 

ground, marked l/4 S. on N. (or W.) face. 

5. Stone with Pits and Mound. 

6. Stone with Mound of Stone. 

7. Toconsistofnotlessthanfourstones.Moundtobeat1east l'hft. high,with2ft.base. 

8. Stone with Bearing Trees. 

9. See "Miscellaneous," sec. 4, page 32. 

10. Post in Mound. 

11. Post with Bearing Trees. 

12. Mound without Post or Stone. 
SEC 7. "A ins. diam., which I marked 1/4 

S. on N. (or W.) side, for l/4 Sec. Cor., dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. 

N. & S. (or E. & W.) of tree, 5% ft. dist. and raised a mound of 

earth around tree. 

SEC. 8. 14A ins. diam., which I marked l/4 

S. on N. (or W.) side, for 1/4 Sec. Cor.; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears N. E. - 

lks. dist. marked 1/4 S. B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked 1/4 S. B. T. 

SEC. 9. 160n N. and S. lines the marks must be made on W. 

side, and on E. and W. lines on N. side of the stone, post, or 

tree. 

SEC. 10. 170n N. & S. lines the pits must be dug N. & S. of 

Cor., and on E. & W. lines E. & W. of Cor. 

SEC. 11. "On N. & S. lines the stakes must be driven in N. 

pit, and on E. & W. lines in E. Pit. 

STANDARD QUARTER SECTION CORNERS. 

All Quarter Section Corners on Standard lines must be 

established in all respects like other Quarter Section Corners, with the addition of the letters S. C., and if bearing trees 

are established for such Corners, each tree must be marked S. 

C. '/4 S. B. T. 

MEANDER CORNERS. 

SEC. 1. %et a stone - x - x - 

ins., ins. in the ground for Meander Cor. to (e. g.) 

Fractional Secs. 1 & 2, marked M. C. on - face, dug a 

pit 3 ft. square, 1 ft. deep, 8 lks. -of stone, and raised a 

mound of earth 2 ft. high, 41/z ft. base alongside. 

stone ~ x - x - 

ins., ins. in the ground, for Meander Cor. to (e. g.) 

Fractional Secs. 35 & 36, marked M. C. on - face, and 

raised a mound of stone 1% ft. high, 2 ft. base, aiongside. Pits 

impracticable. 

stone - x - x - 

ins., - ins. in the ground, for Meander Cor. to (e. g.) 

Fractional Secs. 9 & 10, marked M. C. on - face; from 

which 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. E. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 10, M. C. B. T. 

A- ,-ins. diam. bears S. -OW. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N. R. 2 W. S. 9, M. C. B. T. 

SEC. 4. "Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, with marked 

stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the 

ground, for Meander Cor. to (e. g.) Fractional Secs. 35 & 36, 

marked M. C. on - face, with 

SEC. 2. 'Set a 

SEC. 3. 'Set a 

T. 2 N. on N. 

R. 2 W. S. 36, on E. and 

S. 35 on W. faces, dug a pit 3 ft. square, 1 ft. deep, 8 lks. 

-of post, and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% ft. 

base, around post. 

-31- 

SEC. 5. "Set a post 4 ft. long, 4 ins. square, 24 ins. in the 

ground, for Meander Cor. to (e. g.) Fractional Secs. 20 & 21, 

marked M. C. on face, with 

T. 2 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S 21 on E. and 

S. 20 on W. faces; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E. - lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 21, M. C. B. T. 

A ins. diam., bears S. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 20, M. C. B. T. 

SEC. 6. 12Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart 

of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for Meander Cor. to (e. g.) 

Fractional Secs. 11 8z 12, dug a pit, 3 ft. square, 1 ft. deep, 8 

lks. -of Cor., and raised a mound of earth 2 ft. high, 4% 

ft. base, over it. In pit drove a stake 2 ins. square, 2 ft. long, 12 

ins. in the ground, marked M. C. on - face, with 

T. 2 N. on S. 

R. 2 W. S. 12 on E. and 

S. 11 on W. faces. 

SEC. 7. 13A 

T. 2 N. on W. 

R. 2 W. S. 13 on N. and 

S. 24 on S. sides, for Meander Cor. to Fractional Secs. 13 & 

SEC. 8. 14A , -ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

T. 2 N. on E. 

R. 2 W. S. 6 on N. and 

S. 7 on S. sides, for Meander Cor. to Fractional Secs. 6 & 7; 

from which 

A -, -ins. diam. bears N. W. - 

lks. dist. marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 6, M. C. B. T. 

A-, -ins. diam. bears S. W. - 

lks. dist., marked T. 2 N., R. 2 W. S. 7, M. C. B. T. 

SEC. 9. 17When a pit is dug at a Meander Cor. it must, be 8 

lks. from the Cor., on the side opposite the river or lake 

meandered. 

SEC. 10. "The letters "M. C." for Meander Corner must be 

marked on the side facing the river or lake meandered. 

, ins. diam., which I marked (e. 

g.) M. C. on side, with 

24. 

g.) M. C. on - side, with 

WITNESS CORNERS. 

A Witness Corner must bear the same marks that would be 

placed upon the Corner for which it is a witness, with the 

addition of the letters W. C., and be established in all respects 

like such Corner. 

If bearing trees are established for a Witness Corner, each 

tree must be marked W. C., in addition to the usual marks. 

15. Connection Lines. 

16. Marks. 

17. Pits. 

18. Stakes in Pits. 

566
MISCELLANEOUS. 

SEC. 1. lgWhen a rock in place is established for a Corner, 

its dimensions above ground must be given, and a cross (x) 

marked at exact Corner point. In other respects the form for 

stone corners will be used. 

SEC. 2. 20Where mounds of earth’are raised “alongside” of 

Corners, on N. and S. lines, they must be placed on the W. and 

on E. and W. lines on the N. side of Corner. In case the 

-32- 

character of the land is such that this can not be done, the 

deputy will state in his notes instead of “alongside,” “S” (or 

E.) 

SEC. 3. 211n case where pits are practicable the deputy 

prefers raising a mound of stone, or stone covered with 

earth,22 as more likely to perpetuate the Corner, he will use 

the form given for mound of stone, omitting the words “pits 

impracticable,” and adding “covered with earth,” when so 

established. (See foot-note, p. 22.) 

SEC. 4. 23Where the requisite number of trees can be found 

within 300 links of the Corner point, three (3) bearing trees 

should be established for every Standard or Closing Cor., four 

(4) for every Cor. common to (four) Townships or Sections, 

and two (2) for every Quarter Sec. Cor. or Meander Cor. When 

a bearing tree is located on the side of a Base Line or Standard 

Parallel opposite the township to which the corner it witnesses belongs, it will be marked with the township and 

ranges, (if a township corner), and, (if a section corner), with 

the township, range, and sections to which it belongs, and 

with the letters S. C. (for Stand Cor.), or C. C. (for Closing 

Cor.), as the case may require. The number of the Section in 

which the tree stands will be omitted. See “Discription of 

Corners.” In case the requisite number of trees can not be 

found within limits, the deputy must state in his field notes 

after describing those established, “no other trees within 

limits,” and “dug pits in Secs. - & -,” or “raised 

a mound of stone alongside.” The bearing trees, being the 

most important adjuncts of the corners, their exact bearings 

from the true meridian must be taken with the instrument 

used in running the lines ofsurvey, and the distance should be 

measured from the center of the tree to the center of the 

corner. The height of the top of all blazes and markings on 

trees must be limited to two and one-half feet above the 

ground. 

SEC. 5. 24Stones 18 ins. and less long must be set twothirds, and over 18 ins. long, three-fourths, of their length in 

the ground. No stones containing less than 504 cubic inches 

must be used for corners. 

SEC. 6. 25Particular attention is called to the “Summary of 

objects and data required to be noted,” on pages 44 and 45 of 

these instructions, and it is expected that the deputy will 

thoroughly comply with same in his work and field notes. 

SEC. 7. 26No mountains or lands not classed as surveyable 

are to be meandered, and all lines approaching such lands 

must be discontinued at the section or quarter section corner. 

SEC. 8. 27Where by reason of impassable objects the south 

boundary of a township can not be established, an auxiliary 

base-line should be run through the Township, first random, 

then corrected, from one range line to the other, connecting 

corresponding corners, and as far south as possible, and from 

such line the section lines will be extended northwardly in 

the usual manner, and any fraction south of said line may be 

surveyed in the opposite direction from the Section Corners 

on the auxiliary base thus established. 

SEC. 9. 28When no part of the east or west boundaries can 

be run, both the north and south boundaries will be established as true lines. 

SEC. 10. 29Allowance for the convergency of meridians 

must be made whenever necessary. 

SEC. 11. 30All letters and figures cut in posts or trees must 

be marked over with red chalk to make them still more plain 

and durable. 

-33- 

SEC. 12. 31Township corners common to four townships, 

and section corners common to four sections, are to be set 

diagonally in the earth, with the angles in the direction of the 

lines. All other corners are to be set square, with the sides 

facing the direction of the lines. 

SEC. 13. 32The sizes of wooden posts, mounds, and pits 

noted in foregoing descriptions of corners are to be regarded 

as minimum, and whenever practicable to increase their 

dimensions it is desirable to do so. 

SEC. 14. 331n establishing corners, stones should be used 

wherever practicable; then, posts; and lastly, mounds, with 

stake in pit. 

SEC. 15. 341t is expected that the deputy surveyors will 

carefully read and familiarize themselves with these instructions, and all others contained in this volume, and will instruct their assistants as to their duties before commencing 

work. Extra copies will be furnished the deputies for the use 

of their assistants. 

19. Rock in Place. 

20. Mounds of Earth. 

21. Mounds of Stone. 

22. For mound ofstone “covered with earth,” the height and base will be the same as for 

mound of earth. 

23. Bearing Trees. 

24. Stones. 

25. Objects to be Noted 

26. Lines Discontinued at Legal Corners. 

27. Fractional Townships. 

28. Boundaries. 

29. Convergency. 

30. Red Chalk. 

31. Mode of Setting Corners. 

32. Size of Posts, etc. 

33. Corner Materials. 

34. Examine Instructions. 

567 
MEANDERING. 

SEC. 1. Proceeding down stream, the bank on the left hand 

is termed the “left bank,” and that on the right hand the 

“right bank.” These terms are to be universally used to distinguish the two banks of a river or stream. 

SEC. 2. Both banks of navigable rivers, as well as of all 

rivers not embraced in the class denominated as “navigable,” 

the right angle width of which is three chains and upwards, 

will be meandered on both banks by taking the general 

courses and distances of their sinuosities, and the same are to 

be entered in the field book. Rivers not classed as navigable 

will not be meandered above the point where the average 

right-angle width is less than three chains. 

At those points where either the township or section lines 

intersect the banks of a navigable stream, or any meanderable line, corners are to be established at the time of running 

these lines. These are called “meander corners;” and in 

meandering you are to commence at one of those corners, 

coursing the banks or boundary line, and measuring the 

distance of each course from your commencing corner to the 

next “meander corner.” By the same method you are to meander the opposite bank of the same river. 

The crossing distance between the MEANDER CORNERS 

on same line and the true bearing and distance between 

opposite meander corners is to be ascertained by triangulation or direct measurement, in order that the river may be 

protracted with entire accuracy. The particulars to be given 

in the field-notes. 

The subdividing deputies will be required to establish 

meander corners on both banks of such meanderable streams 

at the intersection of all section lines, and the distances 

across the river, determined as above directed, will be noted 

in the field-book. 

In meandering water-courses, where a distance is more 

than ten chains between stations, whole chains only should 

be taken; but if the distance is less than ten chains, and it is 

found convenient to employ chains and links, the number of 

links should be a multiple of ten, thereby saving time and 

labor in testing the closings both in the field and in the 

surveyor-general’s office. 

SEC. 3. You are also to meander, in manner aforesaid, all 

lakes, and deep ponds of the area of twenty-five acres and 

upwards; also naviga- 

-34- 

ble bayous; shallow ponds, readily to be drained, or likely to 

dry up, are not to be meandered. 

In meandering lakes, bayous, or ponds you are to commence at a meander corner, and proceed as above directed for 

meandering the banks of navigable streams; and from said 

corner take the courses and distances of the entire margin of 

the same, noting the intersections with all meander corners 

established thereon. 

You will notice all streams of water falling into the river, 

lake, or bayou you are surveying, stating the width of the 

same at their mouth; also all springs, noting the size thereof 

and depth, and whether the water be pure or mineral; also the 

head and mouth of all bayous; and all islands, rapids, and 

bars are to be noticed, with intersections to their upper and 

lower points to establish their exact situation. You will also 

note the elevation of the banks of river and streams, the 

heights of falls and cascades, and the length of rapids. 

To meander a lake or deep pond lying entirely within the 

boundaries of a section, you will run and measure two lines 

thereunto from the nearest section or quarter-section corner 

on opposite sides of such pond, giving the courses of such 

lines. At each of the points where such lines shall intersect 

the margin of such pond or lake you will establish a meander 

corner as above directed. (See “Meander corners.”) 

The relative position of these points being thus definitely 

fixed in the section, the meandering will commence at one of 

them, and be continued to the other, noting the intersection, 

and thence to the beginning. The proceedings are to be fully 

entered in the field-book. 

SEC. 4. Meander lines should not be established at the 

segregation line between dry and swamp or overflowed land, 

but at the ordinary low-water mark of the actual margin of 

the rivers or lakes on which such swamp or overflowed lands 

order. In cases where such meander lines were formerly 

established at the segregation line between dry and swamp 

or overflowed lands, new and proper meander lines may be 

established under the direction of the surveyor general, and 

the township and section lines extended over such swamp or 

overflowed lands and the corners established, as hereinbefore provided, in order that the plats and field-notes of surveys may show the actual facts in the case. 

5. The precise relative position of islands, in a township 

made fractional by the river in which the same are situated, 

is to be determined trigonometrically; sighting to a flag or 

other fixed object on the island, from a special and carefully 

measured base line, connected with the surveyed lines, on or 

near the river bank, you are to form connection between the 

meander corners on the river to points corresponding thereto, 

in direct line, on the bank of the island, and there establish 

the proper meander corners, and calculate the distance 

across. 

6. In taking the connection of an island with the main land, 

when there is no meander corner in line, opposite thereto, to 

sight from, you will measure a special base from the most 

convenient meander corner, and from such base you will 

triangulate to some fixed point on the shore of the island, 

ascertain the distance across, and there establish a special 

meander corner, wherefrom you will commence to meander 

the island. 

7. In the survey of lands bordering on tide water, “meander 

corners” are to be established at the points where surveyed 

lines intersect high-water mark, and meanders are to follow 

the high-water line. 

8. The field-notes of meanders will be set forth in the 

field-books showing the dates when the work is performed, as 

illustrated in the specimen notes annexed. They are to state 

and describe particularly 

-35- 

the meander corner from which they commenced, and each 

one upon which they close, and are to exhibit the meanders of 

each fractional section separately; following, and composing 

a part of such notes, will be given a description of the land, 

timber, depth of inundation to which the bottom is subject, 

568 
and the banks, current, and bottom of the stream or body of 

water you are meandering. The utmost care must be taken to 

pass no object of topography, or change therein, without giving a particular description thereof in its proper place in your 

meander notes. 

SURVEYING. 

Initial points from which the lines of the public surveys are 

to be extended must be established whenever necessary 

under such special instructions as may be prescribed in each 

case by the Commissioner of the General Land Office. The 

locus of such initial points must be selected with great care 

and due consideration for their prominence and easy identification, and must be established astronomically. 

The initial point having been established, the lines of the 

public surveys are to be extended therefrom as follows: 

BASE LINE. 

The base line shall be extended east and west from the 

initial point by the use of solar instruments or transits, as 

may be directed by the surveyor-general, in his special written instructions. The transit should be designated for the 

alignment of all important lines. Where solar instruments 

are used the deputy must test said instruments in every 12 

miles of line run by observation on the polar star; and in all 

cases where he has reason to suppose that said instrument is 

in error, he must take an observation on the polar star, and if 

error be found, must make the necessary corrections before 

proceeding with his survey. The proper corners shall be 

established at each 40 and 80 chains, and at the intersection 

of the line with rivers, lakes, or bayous that should be meandered, in accordance with the instructions for the establishment of corners. In order to check errors in measurement, two 

sets of chainmen, operating independently of each other, 

must be employed. 

Where transits are used, the line will be run by setting off 

at the point of departure on the principal meridian35 a tangent to the parallel of latitude, which will be a line falling at 

right angles to said meridian. The line thus determined will 

be prolonged by two back and two fore sights at each setting of 

the instrument, turning the horizontal limb 180 in azimuth 

between the observations. The survey will be continued on 

this line for twelve (12) miles,36 but the corners will be established at the proper points by offsets northerly from said line, 

at the end of each half mile. In order to offset correctly from 

the tangent to the parallel, the deputy will be guided by the 

tables of offsets and azimuths contained in this volume37. As 

the azimuth of the tangent is shown, the angle thence to the 

true meridian at each mile is readily found, thus indicating 

the direction of the offset line. The computations are made for 

a distance of 12 miles, at the end of which observations on the 

polar star must be taken for the projection of a new tangent. 

The computations are also upon whole degrees of latitude; 

offsets for intervening parallels can be readily determined by 

interpolation. Where offset distances to quarter-section corners exceed 50 links, their direction to the parallel can be 

determined in like manner by interpolation for azimuth. 

-36- 

Where said distances are less than 50 links interpolations 

for determining directions will not be required. 

PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN. 

The principal meridian shall be extended north and south 

from the initial point, by the use of solar instruments or 

transits, as may be directed by the surveyor general in his 

special written instructions. Where solar instruments are 

used, the line will be run in the same manner as prescribed 

for running the base line by solar instruments. Where transits are used, observations upon the polar star must be taken 

within each 12 miles of line run. In addition to the above 

general instructions, it is required that in all cases where the 

establishment of a new principal meridian seems to be necessary to the surveyor-general, he shall submit the matter, 

together with his reasons therefor, to the Commissioner of 

the General Land Office, and the survey of such principal 

meridian shall not be commenced until written authority, 

together with such special instructions as he may deem 

necessary, shall have been received from the Commissioner. 

Two set of chainmen, operating independently of each other, 

must be employed. 

STANDARD PARALLELS. 

Standard parallels, which are also called correction lines, 

shall be extended east and west from the principal meridian, 

at intervals of every 24 miles north and south of the base line, 

in the same manner as prescribed for running the base line, 

and two sets of chainmen must be employed. 

GUIDE MERIDIANS. 

Guide meridians shall be extended north and south from 

the base line, at intervals of every 24 miles east and west 

from the principal meridian, in the same manner as prescribed for running the principal meridian, and two sets of 

chainmen must be employed. 

It is contemplated that these base, principal meridian, 

standard, and guide meridian lines shall first be extended 

over the territory to be surveyed, and that afterwards 

township and section lines shall be run, where needed, within 

these tracts of 24 miles square, formed by the extension of 

these principal lines; and each surveyor-general will therefore cause said principal lines to be extended as rapidly as 

practicable. 

declares that the object of running standard parallels and guide 

meridians is “to confine the errors resulting from convergency of meridians, and inaccuracies in measurement, within 

the tracts of lands bounded by the lines so established.” 

As the convergency is rapidly increased in the higher latitudes and resulting inaccuracies developed in about the same 

Paragraph 5, “System of rectangular 

35. See diagram A, Fig. 1. 

36. Or a less distance. 

37. See Tables 111, IV, and V, and Diagram A, Fig. 1. 

38. Page 18. 

569 
proportion, it would seem to be consistent with the spirit of 

the above paragraph to so contract the blocks of 24 miles 

square, by diminishing either the distances between correction lines, or by reducing the interval between guide meridians, or by using both contractions simultaneously, as to 

confine convergency errors, as near as practicable, to a uniform amount. 

Unfortunately, guide meridians have been so irregularly 

spaced in the several surveying districts, in some cases exceeding the authorized 24 miles by three times its amount or 

even more, that any attempt to provide a general rule for use 

in all parts of the country would 

-37- 

probably result in failure to correct existing irregularities 

and help still further to increase the present confusion. 

Therefore, the only thing that can be done is to reiterate 

the above directions limiting the tracts bounded by guide 

meridians and standard parallels to 24 miles square and 

direct, that in future, compliance with the above requirement 

will be insisted upon. 

EXTERIORS OR TOWNSHIP LINES. 

The east and west boundaries of townships are always to be 

run from south to north on a true meridian line; and the north 

and south boundaries are to be run from east to west, or from 

west to east (according to the location of the township to be 

surveyed with reference to prior surveys), on a random or 

trial line and corrected back on a true line. The distance 

north or south of the township corner to be closed upon, from 

the point of intersection of these random lines with the east or 

west boundary of the township, must be carefully measured 

and noted. Should it happen, however, that such random line 

should fall short, or overrun in length, or interset the east or 

west boundary more than three chains’ distance from the 

township corner thereon, as compared with the corresponding boundary on the south (due allowance being made for 

covergency), the line, and if necessary the entire exterior 

boundaries of the township, must be retraced, so as to discover and correct the error. In running random lines temporary 

corners are to be set at each 40 and 80 chains, and permanent 

corners established upon the true line as corrected back, in 

accordance with instructions, throwing the excess or deficiency on the west half mile, as prescribed by law. Permanent corners are to be established in accordance with instructions on the east and west township boundaries at the time 

they are run. Whenever practicable the township lines within these tracts of 24 miles square must be surveyed in regular 

order from south to north, i. e., the exterior boundaries of the 

township in any one range lying immediately north of the 

south boundary of such tract of 24 miles square must first be 

surveyed, and the exteriors of the other three townships in 

said range extended therefrom, in regular order from south to 

north, and it is preferable to first survey the entire range of 

townships in such tract adjoining the east boundary or adjoining the west boundary, and the other three ranges in 

regular sequence. In cases, however, where the character of 

the land is such that this rule cannot be complied with, the 

following will be observed: 

In extending the south or north boundaries of a township to 

the west, where the southwest or northwest corners cannot be 

established in the regular way by running a north and south 

line, such boundaries will be run west on a true line, allowing 

for convergency on the west half mile; and from the township 

corner established at the end of such boundary, the west 

boundary will be run north or south, as the case may be. In 

extending south or north boundaries of a township to the east, 

where the southeast or northeast corner cannot be established 

in the regular way, the same rule will be observed, except 

that such boundaries wil be run east on a true line, and the 

east boundary run north or south, as the case may be. One set 

of chainmen only is required in running township lines. 

METHOD OF SUBDIVIDING. 

1. The variation is to be found by observations on Polaris 

taken at or near the S. E. corner of the township. The first 

mile, both of the 

-38- 

south and east boundaries of each township you are required 

to subdivide, is to be carefully traced and measured before 

you enter upon the subdivision thereof. This will enable you 

to observe any errors that may have been made in former 

surveys either in direction or length of the lines and will also 

enable you to compare your chaining with that upon the 

township boundaries. 

2. Any discrepancy arising either from a disagreement of 

bearings or a difference in measurement, is to be carefully 

noted in the field-notes. In this article the term “bearing” is to 

be construed to mean the true bearing or angle made with the 

true meridian. 

3. After adjusting our compass to the variation which you 

have determined by observation, you will commence at the 

corner to sections 35 and 36, on the south boundary, and run a 

line northwardly with the true bearing of the range line, forty 

chains, to the quarter-section corner, which you are to establish between sections 35 and 36; continuing on said course 

forty chains farther, you will establish the corner to sections 

25, 26, 35, and 36. 

4. From the section corner last named run a random line, 

without blazing, parallel to the south boundary of section 36, 

for the corner of sections 25 and 36, on east boundary, and at 

forty chains from the starting point set a post for temporary 

quarter-section corner. If you intersect exactly at the corner, 

you will blaze your random line back, and establish it as the 

true line; but if your random line intersects the said east 

boundary, either north or south of said corner, you will measure the distance of such intersection, from which you will 

calculate a course that will run a true line back to the corner 

from which your random started. You will establish the 

permanent quarter-section corner at a point equidistant from 

the two terminations of the true line. 

5. From the corner of sections 25, 26, 35, and 36, run 

northwardly with the true bearing of the range line between 

sections 25 and 26, setting the quarter-section post as before, 

at forty chains, and at eighty chains establishing the corner 

of sections 23, 24,25, and 26. Then run a random parallel to 

the south boundary of section 36 for the corner of sections 24 

570 
and 25 on east boundary; setting temporary quarter-section 

post at forty chains; correcting back, and establishing permanent quarter-section corner at the equidistant point on the 

true line, in the manner directed on the line between sections 

25 and 36. 

6. In this manner you will proceed with the survey of each 

successive section in the first tier, until you arrive at the 

north boundary of the township, which you will reach in 

running up a random line between sections 1 and 2, with the 

true bearing of the range line, setting the temporary quartersection corner at forty chains from the interior section corner 

so as to throw the excess or deficiency of measurement on the 

quarter-sections adjoining the north boundary of the 

township. If this random line should not intersect at the 

corner established for sections 1, 2, 35, and 36, upon the 

township line, you will note the distance that you fall east or 

west of the same, from which distance you will calculate a 

course that will run a true line to the corner from which your 

random started, on which line you will establish the permanent quarter-section corner. If the north boundary of a 

township is a base or standard line, the line between sections 

1 and 2 is to be run with the true bearing of the range line as a 

true line, and the closing corner established at the point of 

intersection with such base or standard line; and in such case 

the distance from said closing corner to the nearest standard 

corner on such base or standard line must be carefully measured and noted as a connection line. 

-39- 

7. In like manner proceed with the survey of each successive tier of sections, until you arrive at the fifth tier; and from 

each section corner which you establish upon the west boundary of this tier you are to run random lines parallel to the 

south boundary of section 31, towards the corresponding corners established upon the range line forming the western 

boundary of the township; setting, as you proceed, each temporary quarter-section corner at forty chains from the interior section corner, so as to throw the excess or deficiency of 

measurement on the extreme tier of quarter sections contiguous to the township boundary; and on returning establish 

the true line, and establish thereon the permanent quartersection corner. The random of an east and west section line 

must always be runparallel to the south boundary of the tier of 

sections to which it belongs and with the true bearing of said 

boundary. 

8. It is not required that the deputy shall complete the 

survey of the first tier of sections from south to north, before 

commencing the survey of the second or any subsequent tier, 

but the corner on which the random line closes must have 

been previously established by running the line which determines its position, except as follows: Where it is impracticable to establish such section corner in the regular manner 

it may be established by running the east and west line as a 

true line, with a true bearing, determined as above directed 

for random lines, setting the quarter-section corner at 40 

chains and the section corner at 80 chains. 

9. Quarter-section corners, both upon north and south and 

upon east and west lines, are to be established at a point 

equidistant from the corresponding section corners, except 

upon the lines closing on the north and west boundaries of the 

township, and in those situations the quarter-section corners 

will always be established at precisely forty chains to the 

north or west (as the case may be) of the respective section 

corners from which those lines respectively start, by which 

procedure the excess or deficiency in the measurements will 

be thrown, according to law, on the extreme tier of quarter 

sections. 

If, in the subdivision of part of a township, the lands to be 

surveyed can not be reached by lines extending from the 

south boundary of the township, a line corresponding to the 

south boundary of the same shall be extended from some 

section corner on the east boundary of the township to the 

west boundary thereof, in order that it may constitute the 

south boundary of the surveyable area; from which subdivisional meridian lines will be projected northward, and the 

surveys carried forward in the same manner as for the subdivision of a full township, in order that regular and fractional 

areas shall occupy their true and legal positions. 

Fragmentary portions of surveyable lands lying south of 

the provisional base last described may be included in the 

survey by extending lines southwardly from the same in 

harmony with the general system. 

When the proper point for the establishment of a section 

corner is inaccessible, and a witness monument can be 

erected upon each of the two lines which approach the same 

at distances not exceeding twenty chains therefrom the quarter-sections depending thereon will be disposed of in the same 

manner as if the corner had been regularly established. 

The witness monument must be marked as conspicuously 

as a section corner, and bearing trees used wherever possible. 

The deputy will be required to furnish good evidence that 

the section corner is actually inaccessible. 

-40- 

PRESCRIBED LIMITS FOR CLOSINGS AND 

LENGTH OF LINES IN CERTAIN CASES. 

1. Every north-and-south section line, except those terminating in the north boundary of the township, must be eighty 

chains in length. 

2. The east-and-west section lines, except those terminating in the west boundary of the township, are to be within 

eighty links of the actual distance established on the south 

boundary line of the township for the width of said tier of 

sections, and must close within fifty links north or south of 

the section corner. 

3. The north boundary and south boundary of any one 

section, except in the extreme western tier, are to be within 

eighty links of equal length. 

4. The meanders within each fractional section, or between any two meander posts, or of an island in the interior of 

a section, must close within a limit determined by allowing 

five-eighths of a link for each chain of said meander line when 

less than 80 chains in length. When the meander line is more 

than 80 chains in length the closing error must in no case 

exceed 150 links. 

5. In running random township exteriors, if such random 

lines fall short or overrun in length, or intersect the eastern 

or western boundary, as the case may be, of the township, at 

more than three chains north or south of the true corner, the 

571 
lines must be retraced, even if found necessary to remeasure 

the meridional boundaries of the township. One set of chainmen only is required in subdividing. 

RETRACING TOWNSHIP LINES AND 

BOUNDARIES OF PRIVATE LAND CLAIMS. 

If, in subdividing a township, it is found that the exterior 

boundaries have been improperly run, measured, or marked, 

or the corners established thereon have been obliterated, the 

deputy will resurvey so much of said exterior boundaries as 

may be necessary, and establish new corners upon same 

wherever necessary. Where no subdivisions have been made 

on either side of a township boundary, it will be corrected, if 

necessary, in point of alignment as well as measurement, by 

establishing the section corners at lawful distances from the 

south or east boundaries of the township (as the case may be), 

and upon a right line extending between the township corners; and in such case, the old corners on said township 

boundaries will be destroyed. 

Where subdivisional lines have been closed upon a 

township boundary in advance of the preliminary survey of 

the same, its alignment will not be changed. If it is found 

necessary to establish new corners on such boundary they 

will receive only the marks referring to the sections in the 

township being subdivided, and the marks on the old corners 

on such boundary, which refer to such sections, will be 

obliterated. 

In all cases such necessary corrections will be made as will 

place the section corners at the aforesaid lawful distances 

from the south or east boundary, in order that a legal subdivision of the township may be made, and where new corners are 

thus necessarily established, the distance and direction between new and old corners must be carfully noted. 

New corners on township boundaries must be established 

by a survey of such lines, and in no case will such corners be 

established from data acquired in running lines closing such 

boundaries. One set of chainmen, only, is required in retracing township lines. 

When township or subdivision lines intersect the boundaries of confirmed private land claims, the latter must be 

retraced so far as may be necessary to establish the corners to 

the fractional sections at their 

-41- 

proper places, and such corners must be established, in all 

respects, like meander corners, except that instead of the 

letters “M. C.” the letters used to designate such private land 

claim must be marked on corners. In retracing the boundary 

of such claim the deputy must set stakes thereon, at each 

forty chains, where the ground is level, and on broken 

ground, at every spur, ridge, or other prominent point, and 

also at each angle formed by a change in the direction of such 

boundary. 

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ISSUED BY UNITED 

STATES SURVEYORS-GENERAL TO UNITED 

STATES DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

One of the most important duties to be performed by the 

surveyor-general, is to provide the deputy surveyor with 

Special Instructions, in connection with the contract, prepared in accordance with law, which instructions are not to 

be limited to calling attention to certain paragraphs in this 

Manual, reiteration of its requirements and in providing the 

deputy with a printed copy of directions of a general nature; 

but they must, in all cases, and particularly for the survey of 

exteriors, be specific in character, with all necessary detailed 

statements setting forth what the deputy is to do and how the 

work is to be performed. Before making out special instructions, the surveyor-general will cause a thorough examination to be made of the field notes and plats of older surveys of 

standard and township lines upon which the deputy is to base 

his work, and give him full information-both written and 

graphic-of the exact condition of adjoining surveys, with all 

irregularities that may be found, carefully and clearly noted, 

with all necessary instructions for his guidance if he finds 

everything as it should be, and; in addition, advise him, so far 

as he can, what to do in case the surveys on the ground are not 

as represented in the old notes. 

If the contract includes exterior lines, the surveyor-general 

will specify in detail where the deputy is to commence, in 

what order and in what direction he is to run the lines, inform 

him how much convergency to use, and provide for his use a 

diagram, giving full and accurate information in regard to 

lengths and bearings of all lines of old surveys, from which he 

is to work, or upon which he is to close. The diagrams will be 

made in triplicate, one copy for the General Land Office, one 

for the deputy, and one to be retained. They may be either 

original drawings, blue prints, or tracings. In no case must 

the deputy be sent into the field without full and accurate 

information in regard to all irregularities which will in any 

manner affect the extent or accuracy of his survey. 

FIELD NOTES. 

The proper blank books for field notes will be furnished by 

the surveyor-general, and in such books the deputy surveyor 

must make a faithful, distinct, and minute record of everything officially done and observed by himself and his assistants, pursuant to instructions, in relation to running, 

measuring, and marking lines, establishing corners, etc., and 

present, as far as possible, a full and complete topographical 

description of the country surveyed. 

From the data thus recorded at the time when the work is 

done on the ground, the deputy must prepare true field notes 

of the surveys executed by him, in the manner hereinafter 

prescribed, and return same to the surveyor-general, 

together with the required sketches, at the earliest practicable date after the completion of his work in the field. 

The true field notes are in no case to be made out in the office 

of the surveyor-general. 

The field notes of the survey of base, meridian, standard, 

exterior, 

-42- 

and subdivision lines are each to be written in separate books. 

The subdivisions of each township will form one book. No 

adhesive material of any kind will be used to fasten the leaves 

or covers. 

The first, or title page of each field-note book is to describe 

the subject matter of the same, the locus of the survey, by 

572 
whom surveyed, date of contract, and the dates of commencement and completion of the work. The second page is to 

contain the names and duties of the assistants, and the index 

is to be placed on same or following page. Whenever a new 

assistant is employed, or the duties of any one of them 

changed, such facts are to be stated in an appropriate entry 

immediately preceding the notes taken under such changed 

arrangements. 

The exhibition of every mile of surveying, whether on 

township, or subdivisional lines, and of meanders in each 

section, must be complete in itself, and be separated by a black 

line drawn across the paper. 

The change in the variation, if any is observed, the hour of 

the day and cause of the change will be stated at the commencement of every line run. 

The variation of the needle must always occupy a separate 

line preceding the notes of measurements on line. 

The description of the surface, soil, minerals, timber, 

undergrowth, etc., on each mile of line, is to follow the notes of 

survey of such line, and not be mixed up with them. 

The date of each day’s work must follow immediately after 

the notes thereof. 

No abbreviations of words are allowable, except of such 

words as are constantly occurring, such as “sec.” for “section”; 

rrin. diam.” for “inches diameter”; “ch~.~~ for “chains”; Yks.” 

for “links”; frdist.” for “distant”; T4 sec. cor.” for “quartersection corner”; rrva.” for “variation,” etc.; for 14 inches long, 

12 inches wide, and 3 inches thick, in describing a corner 

stone, use 14 x 12 x 3, being particular to always observe the 

same order of length, width, and thickness. Proper names 

must never be abbreviated, however often their recurrence. 

When the lines of survey cross hills or ravines, the height 

or depth of same, in feet, must be noted as nearly as practicable. 

The corners established in previous surveys, from which 

the lines start, or upon which they close, must be fully described in the field notes. A full description of such corners 

will in all cases be furnished the deputy from the surveyorgeneral’s office at the date authority is given for commencing 

work. 

In all cases where a corner is re-established the field notes 

must describe fully the manner in which it is done. 

Field notes of the survey of base, standard, and meridian 

lines must describe all corners established thereon, how 

established, the crossings of streams, ravines, hills, and 

mountains; character of soil, timber, minerals, etc.; and after 

the description of each township corner established in running such lines, the deputy will note particularly in the 

“general description” the townships on each side of the lines 

run. 

Field notes of the survey of exterior boundaries of 

townships must describe the corners and topography, as 

above required, and the “general description” at the end of 

such notes must describe the townships as fully as may be, 

and also state whether or not they should be subdivided. 

Near the end of his field notes and immediately before the 

“general description,” the deputy surveyor will add, in form 

similar to that shown in specimen field notes, No. 3, a tabular 

statement of the latitude and departure of each boundary line 

of the township, taken from a traverse table, giving the totals 

and errors in latitude and departure, 

-43- 

which must in no case exceed the “prescribed limits for closings” contained in this manual.39 If a part or the whole of one 

or more of the boundaries is made up of meander lines,40 the 

total northings, southings, eastings and westings of such 

lines will take the place of the missing N. and S. or E. and W. 

lines, so as to present the total errors of the township boundaries, considered as a closed survey. If all the exterior lines 

have been surveyed by the deputy, the bearings and distances for the table will be taken from his own notes. In a case 

where some of the boundaries have been surveyed under an 

older contract, the deputy will use the bearings and distances 

supplied by the Surveyor General in connection with his own 

lines, and if the errors exceed the allowance defined in paragraphs 4 and 5 of the “prescribed limits,” he will determine 

where the error occurs, correct the same before he leaves the 

field, and place the table in his field note book. This requirement is made necessary by the frequent occurrence of errors 

in the exterior lines, of which nothing is known in this office 

until after the township has been subdivided and the returns 

taken up for examination and settlement of the account, and 

then much correspondence and delay results in injury to the 

service and sometimes in trouble for settlers. 

Field notes of the subdivisional survey of townships must 

describe the corners and topography as above required, and 

the “general description” at the end of such notes must state 

minutely the character of the land, soil, timber, etc., found in 

such townships. 

The topography must be given on the true line in all cases, 

and must be taken correctly, not estimated or approximated. 

A blank line must be left at the bottom of each page of the 

field notes, and the notes must be written in a plain, legible 

hand, and in clear and precise language, so that the figures, 

letters, words, and meaning will always be unmistakable, 

and erasures and interlineations avoided, as far as possible. 

With the notes of the survey of principal lines forming a 

tract of 24 miles square the deputy will submit a plat of the 

lines run on a scale of one-half inch to the mile, and with the 

notes of survey of the exterior lines of townships a plat of the 

lines run on the scale of two inches to the mile, on which are 

to be noted all the objects of topography on line necessary to 

illustrate the notes, viz, the distance on line at the crossings 

of streams, so far as such can be noted on the paper, and the 

direction of each by an arrow-head pointing down stream; 

also, the intersection of line by prairies, marshes, swamps, 

ravines, ponds, lakes, hills, mountains, and all other matters 

indicated by the notes, to the fullest extent practicable. 

With the instructions for making subdivisional surveys of 

townships into sections, the deputy will be furnished by the 

surveyor-general with a diagram of the exterior lines previously established of the townships to be subdivided (on the 

above-named scale), upon which are carefully to be laid down 

the measurements of each of the lines on such boundaries 

whereon he is to close, and the magnetic variation of each 

mile. And on such diagram the deputy who subdivides will 

make appropriate sketches of the various objects of topography as they occur on his lines, so as to exhibit not only the 

39. See page 40 

40. In the table, meanderable lines of new surveys will be left blank 

573 
points on line at which the same occur, but also the direction 

and position of each between the lines, or within each section, 

as far as practicable, so that every object of topography may 

be properly completed or connected in the showing. 

-44- 

SUMMARY OF OBJECTS AND DATA REQUIRED 

TO BE NOTED. 

1. The precise length of every line run, noting all necessary offsets therefrom, with the reason and mode thereof. 

2. The kind and diameter of all “bearing trees,” with the 

course and distance of the same from their respective corners; 

and the precise relative position of WITNESS CORNERS to 

the true corners. 

3. The kind of materials of which corners are constructed. 

4. Trees on line. The name, diameter, and distance on line 

to all trees which it intersects. 

5. Intersections by line of land objects. The distance at 

which the line first intersects and then leaves every settler’s 

claim and improvement; prairie, river, creek, or other “bottom;” or swamp, marsh, grove, and wind-fall, with the course 

of the same at both points of intersection; also the distances at 

which you begin to ascend, arrive at the top, begin to descend, 

and reach the foot of all remarkable hills and ridges, with 

their courses, and estimated height, in feet, above the level 

land of the surrounding country, or above the bottom lands, 

ravines, or waters near which they are situated. 

6. Intersections by line of water objects. All rivers, creeks, 

and smaller streams of water which the line crosses; the 

distances on line at the points of intersection, and their 

widths on line. In cases of navigable streams, their width will 

be ascertained between the meander corners, as set forth 

under the proper head. 

7. The land’s surface-whether level, rolling, broken, or 

hilly. 

8. The soil-whether first, second, third, or fourth rate. 

9. Timber-the several kinds of timber and undergrowth, 

in the order in which they predominate. 

10. Bottom lands-to be described as wet or dry, and if 

subject to inundation, state to what depth. 

11. Springs of water-whether fresh, saline, or mineral, 

with the course of the stream flowing from them. 

12. Lakes and ponds-describing their banks and giving 

their height, and also depth of water, and whether it be pure 

or stagnant. 

13. Improvements. Towns and villages; houses or cabins; 

fields, or other improvements; sugar-tree groves, sugar 

camps, mill seats, forges, and factories. To be located by 

bearing and distance or intersecting bearings from given 

points. 

14. Coal banks or beds; peat or turf grounds; minerals and 

ores; with particular description of the same as to quality and 

extent, and all diggings therefor; also salt springs and licks. 

All reliable information you can obtain respecting these objects, whether they be on your immediate line or not, is to 

appear on the general description to be given at the end of the 

notes. 

15. Roads and trails, with their directions, whence and 

whither. 

16. Rapids, cataracts, cascades, or falls of water, with the 

estimated height of their fall in feet. 

17. Precipices, caves, sink holes, ravines, stone quarries, 

ledges of rocks, with the kind of stone they afford. 

18. Natural curiosities, interesting fossils, petrifications, 

organic remains, etc.; also all ancient works of art, such as 

mounds, fortifications, embankments, ditches, or objects of 

like nature. 

19. The variation of the needle must be noted at all points 

or places on the lines where there is found any material 

change of variation, and the position of such points must be 

perfectly identified in the notes. 

20. Besides the ordinary notes taken on line (and which 

must always be written down on the spot, leaving nothing to 

be supplied by mem- 

-45- 

ory), the deputy will subjoin, at the conclusion of his book, 

such further description or information touching any matter 

or thing connected with the township (or other survey) which 

he may be able to afford, and may deem useful or necessary to 

be known-with a general description of the township in the 

aggregate, as respects the face of the country, its soil and 

geological features, timber, minerals, waters, etc. 

Following the “general description” of the township is to be 

“A list of the names of the individuals employed to assist in 

running, measuring, and marking the lines and corners described in the foregoing field notes of township No. - of 

the BASE LINE of range No. - of the ~ MERIDIAN, showing the respective capacities in which they acted.” 

AFFIDAVITS TO FIELD NOTES. 

The following are the forms of official oaths to be taken by 

deputy surveyors and their assistants. The original oaths are 

to be affixed to the true field notes returned to the surveyorgeneral by the deputy surveyor; the preliminary oaths being 

placed immediately after the index of the first book, and the 

final oaths at the end of the last book of field notes of the 

surveys to which they refer: 

PRELIMINARY OATHS OF ASSISTANTS. 

We, and -, do solemnly 

swear that we will well and faithfully execute the duties of 

chain-carriers; that we will level the chain upon even and 

uneven ground and plumb the tally pins, either by sticking or 

dropping the same; that we will report the true distance to all 

notable objects, and the true length of all lines that we assist 

in measuring, to the best of our skill and ability, and in 

accordance with instructions given us, in the survey of the 

-, Chainman. 

-7 Chainman. 

-7 Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, 18-. 

574 
We, - - and - -, do solemnly 

swear that we will well and truly perform the duties of axemen, in the establishment of corners and other duties, according to instructions given us, and to the best of our skill and 

ability, in the survey of - -. 

- 

- 

-, Axeman. 

-, Axeman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, la-. -- 

I, - -, do solemnly swear that I will well and 

truly perform the duties of flagman, according to instructions 

given me, to the best of my skill and ability, in the survey of 

-. 

- -, Flagman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

- 18-. 

-- 

FINAL OATHS FOR SURVEYS. 

List of Names. 

A list of the names of the individuals employed by - 

-, United States deputy surveyor, to assist in running, 

measuring, and marking the lines and corners described in 

the foregoing field notes of the survey of showing the 

respective capacities in which they acted. 

- 

- 

-, Chainman. 

-) Chainman. 

- 

- 

-, Chainman. 

- 

-, Chainman. 

-) Axeman. 

- 

- 

-, Axeman. 

-, Flagman. 

-46- 

FINAL OATHS OF ASSISTANTS. 

9 

United States deputy surveyor, in surveying all those parts 

or portions of the - of the - base and - 

meridian, - of -, as are represented in the foregoing field notes as having been surveyed by him and under 

his direction; and that said survey has been in all respects, to 

the best of our knowledge and belief, well and faithfully 

surveyed, and the corner monuments established according 

to the instructions furnished by the United States surveyorgeneral for 

We hereby certify that we assisted - 

-, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

-, Axeman. 

-) Axeman. 

-, Flagman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, 18-. 

-- 

FINAL OATH OF UNITED STATES DEPUTY 

SURVEYOR. 

, United States deputy surveyor, do 

solemnly swear that in pursuance of instructions received 

from , United States surveyor-general for 

-, bearing date of the day of -, 18-, I 

have well, faithfully, and truly, in my own proper person, and 

in strict conformity with the instruction furnished by the 

United States surveyor-general for -, the surveying 

manual, and the laws of the United States, surveyed all those 

parts or portions of of the - base and 

- meridian in the of , as are represented in the foregoing field notes as having been surveyed 

by me and under my directions; and I do further solemnly 

swear that all the corners of said survey have been established and perpetuated in strict accordance with the surveying manual, printed instructions, the special written instructions of the United States surveyor-general for -, 

and in the specific manner described in the field notes, and 

that the foregoing are the true field notes of such survey; and 

should any fraud be detected, I will suffer the penalty of 

perjury, under the provisions of an act of Congress approved 

August 8, 1846. 

I, - 

-- 

United States Deputy Surveyor. 

, deputy surveyor, and 

day of -, 18-. 

Subscribed by said 

sworn to before me this 

2 

U. S. Surveyor-General for -. 

The final oath of the deputy surveyor must, in all cases, be 

taken before the U. S. Surveyor-General for the State or 

Territory in which the survey is executed. Before the above 

final oath is administered to the deputy surveyor, the surveyor-general will make such personal examination of the 

notes taken in the field and such general investigation of the 

returns as he may consider necessary to fully assure himself 

that all the observations for determination of the true meridian and variation and the tabular statement of closing 

errors, when one is required, are actually contained in the 

original notes taken by the deputy on the ground, and that his 

contract and special instructions have been complied with in 

every particular. It is preferable that all oaths-both preliminary and final-of assistants should be taken before 

some officer duly authorized to administer oaths other than 

the deputy surveyor. In cases, however, where great delay, 

expense, or inconvenience would result from a strict compliance with this rule, the deputy surveyor is authorized to 

administer the necessary oaths to his assistants, but in each 

case where this is done he must submit a full written report to 

the proper surveyor general of the circumstances of such 

case. 

575 
To enable the deputy surveyor to fully understand and 

appreciate the responsibility under which he is acting, his 

attention is invited to the 

-47- 

provisions of the second section of the act of Congress 

approved August 8, 1846, entitled “An act to equalize the 

compensation of the surveyors-general of the public lands of 

the United States, and for other purposes,” and which is as 

follows: 

“SEC. 2. That the surveyors-general of the public lands of 

the United States, in addition to the oath now authorized by 

law to be administered to deputies on their appointment to 

office, shall require each of their deputies, on the return of his 

surveys, to take and subscribe an oath or affirmation that 

those surveys have been faithfully and correctly executed 

according to law and the instructions of the surveyorgeneral; and on satisfactory evidence being presented to any 

court of competent jurisdiction that such surveys, or any part 

thereof, had not been thus executed, the deputy making such 

false oath or affirmation shall be deemed guilty of perjury, 

and shall suffer all the pains and penalties attached to that 

offense; and the district attorney of the United States for the 

time being in whose district any such false, erroneous, or 

fraudulent surveys shall have been executed, shall, upon the 

application of the proper surveyor-general, immediately institute suit upon the bond of such deputy; and the institution 

of such suit shall act as a lien upon any property owned or 

held by such deputy, or his sureties, at the time such suit was 

instituted.” 

SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES AND PLATS. 

Diagram B illustrates the method of laying off tracts of 

land 24 miles square, as nearly as practicable, by the survey 

of principal lines, and the survey of exteriors ‘or township 

lines within such tracts, north of the base line and east of the 

principal meridian. The same general principles will apply 

equally to the survey of such tracts differently located with 

reference to the initial point. The topography noted on said 

diagram is on those portions of the lines of surveys for which 

specimen field notes are given. 

Diagram C illustrates the method of laying off a township 

into sections and quarter sections. In the subdivision of 

townships lying south of and contiguous to the base line, or to 

any standard parallel, the lines between the sections of the 

northern tier will be run with the true bearing of the east 

boundary of the township as true lines; quarter-section corners will be established at 40 chains, closing section corners 

will be established at the points of intersection of such lines 

with the base or standard lines (as the case may be), and the 

course and distance from such corners to the nearest standard 

corner upon the line closed upon are to be accurately ascertained and setdown in the field notes. 

Diagram D illustrates the mode of establishing stone, post, 

and mound corners for townships, sections, and quarter sections. 

Specimen field notes Nos. 1,2,3,4, and 5 illustrate, respectively, the mode and order of surveying standard lines, meridian lines, exteriors or township lines, resurveying exteriors or township lines, and subdividing a township into 

sections and quarter sections. The attention of the deputy is 

particularly directed to these specimens, as indicating not 

only the method in which his work is to be conducted, but also 

the order, manner, language, etc., in which his field notes are 

required to be returned to the surveyor general’s office; and 

such specimens are to be deemed part of these instructions, 

and any departure from their details, without special authority, in cases where the circumstances are 

-48- 

analogous in practice, will be regarded as a violation of his 

contract and oath. 

The subdivisions of fractional sections into the 40-acre lots 

(as near as may be) are to be so laid down on the official 

township plat in broken black lines as to admit of giving to 

each a specific designation, if possible, according to its relative position in the fractional section, as per example afforded 

by Diagram C, as well as by a number, in all cases where the 

lot can not properly be designated as a quarter-quarter. 

Those fractional subdivision lots which are not susceptible of 

being described according to relative local position, are to be 

numbered in regular series; those bordering on the north 

boundary of a township to be numbered progressively from 

east to west, and those bordering on the west boundary of a 

township to be numbered progressively from north to south, 

in each section. As section 6 borders on both the north and 

west boundaries of the township, the fractional lots in the 

same will be numbered as follows: Commencing with No. 1 in 

the northeast, thence progressively west to No. 4 in the 

northwest, and south to No. 7 in the southwest corner of the 

section. 

In numbering fractional lots, other than those above specified (wherever practicable and as a general rule), the series 

should commence with No. 1 in the northeastern or the most 

easterly fractional lot, and continue from east to west, and 

west to east, alternately, to the end of the series, as shown in 

Diagram C; but such general rule is departed from under 

circumstances given as examples in said diagram. 

Interior lots are to be, as nearly as possible, 20 chains long 

by 20 chains wide; and the excess or deficiency of measurement is always to be thrown on the lots bordering on the 

northern and western boundaries of the township, or those 

made fractional by meander lines. 

The official township plat to be returned to the General 

Land Office is to show on its face, on the right-hand margin, 

the meanders of navigable streams, islands, and lakes. Such 

details are wanted in the adjustment of the surveying 

accounts, but may be omitted in the copy of the township plat 

to be furnished to the district land office by the surveyor 

general. A suitable margin for binding is to be preserved on 

the left-hand side of each plat. Each plat is to be certified, 

with table annexed, according to the forms subjoined to “Diagram C,” and is to show the areas of public land, of private 

surveys, and of water, with the aggregate area as shown on 

the diagram. 

Each township plat is to be prepared in triplicate: one for 

the General Land Office, one for the United States district 

land office, and the third to be retained as the record in the 

office of the surveyor-general. 

576 
The plat for the local land office must not be forwarded 

until notice is received by the surveyor-general from the 

Commissioner of the General Land Office that the survey 

represented on said plat has been accepted, and that he is 

authorized to file the triplicate plat. 

The plats must be prepared as nearly as possible in accordance with the specimen plat designated as "Diagram C." The 

use of all fluids, except a preparation of India ink of good 

quality, must be avoided by the draughtsman in delineations 

relating to the public surveys. All lines, figures, etc., must be 

sharply defined. All lettering on the plats must be clear and 

sharp in outline and design, and ornamentation of any kind is 

prohibited. These requirements are necessary in order that 

everything shown upon original plats may be fairly reproduced in making photolithographic copies of he same. 

All towns, settlements, permanent buildings, private 

claims, reservations, water courses, ditches, lakes, islands, 

mountains, buttes, canons, 

-49- 

roads, railroads, telegraph lines, canals, etc., will be shown 

upon the plats and designated by proper names where such 

are known. 

The true meridian and declination of the magnetic needle, 

or variation of the compass, must be determined, by observation on Polaris, at or near the southeast corner of the 

township, or at the point where the survey begins. The mean 

local time of observation and all particulars will be stated in 

the field notes. In all cases the mean declination will be the 

value to insert in the tabular statement (See Diagram C), 

below the plat. A table will be found in this manua141 for 

reducing the observed to the mean declination. If the observation is taken away from the corner, the point must be so 

connected with the township line as to define its exact direction with reference to the true meridian. For the above determination the surveyor may use any one of methods herein 

described. 

All township plats are to be drawn to a uniform scale of 40 

chains to 1 inch, United States standard, and diagrams of 

exteriors to a scale of 160 chains to 1 inch. 

Surveyors-general will require that the specimen plat 

shall be closely followed in order that uniformity of appearance and expression of drawings representing the public land 

surveys may be attained. 

The true field books, each bearing the written approval of 

the surveyor-general, are to be substantially bound into 

volumes of suitable size, and retained in the surveyorgeneral's office, and certified transcripts of such field books 

(to be of foolscap size) are to be prepared and forwarded, from 

time to time, to the General Land Office. 

All transcripts of surveys, made out as described under the 

head "FIELD NOTES," must be written in a bold, legible 

hand, with durable black ink, and such transcripts of any 

series of surveys included in one account forwarded to the 

General Land Office must be securely put up in one package, 

but not fastened together, at the office of the surveyorgeneral prior to transmittal. 

With the copy of each township plat furnished to a district 

41. On page 55 

land office, the surveyor-general is required by law to furnish 

descriptive notes as to the character and quality of the soil and 

timber found on and in the vicinity of each surveyed line, and 

giving a description of each corner. 

Printed blank forms for such notes will be furnished by the 

General Land Office. The forms provide eighteen spaces for 

meander corners, which, in most cases, will be sufficient; but 

when the number shall exceed eighteen, the residue will 

have to be inserted on the face of the township plat, to be 

furnished to the rgister of the district land office, or on the 

supplemental blank form. 

There is shown a series of meander corners on Diagram C, 

viz, from No. 1 to No 12 on the river and island, and No. 1 to 

No. 5 on Lin's Lake, and No. 1 to No. 2 on small lake in Sec. 

33. 

GEOGRAPHICAL POSITIONS OF BASE-LINES 

AND PRINCIPAL MERIDIANS GOVERNING THE 

PUBLIC SURVEYS. 

Since the adoption of the rectangular system of public 

surveys, May 20, 1785, twenty-four initial points, or the 

intersection of the principal bases with surveying meridians, 

have been brought into requisition to secure the certainty 

and brevity of description in the transfer of public lands to 

individual ownership. From the principal bases townships of 

six miles square are run out and established, with regular 

series of numbers counting north and south thereof, and from 

-50- 

the surveying meridians a like series of ranges are numbered 

both east and west of the principal meridians. 

During the period of ninety years since the organization of 

the system the following numerical and independent principal meridians and bases have been initiated, to wit: 

The firstprincipal meridian divides the States of Ohio and 

Indiana, having for its base the Ohio River, the meridian 

being coincident with 84" 51' of longitude west from Greenwich. The meridian governs the surveys of public lands in the 

State of Ohio. 

The second principal meridian coincides with 86" 28' of 

longitude west from Greenwich, starts from the confluence of 

the Little Blue River with the Ohio, runs north to the northern boundary of Indiana, and governs the surveys in Indiana 

and a portion of those in Illinois. 

The third principal meridian starts from the mouth of the 

Ohio River and extends to the northern boundary of the State 

of Illinois, and governs the surveys in said State east of the 

meridian, with the exception of those projected from the 

second meridian, and the surveys on the west to the Illinois 

River. This meridian coincides with 89" 10' 30" of longitude 

west from Greenwich. 

The fourth principal meridian begins in the middle of the 

channel of the mouth of the Illinois River, in latitude 38" 58' 

12" north and longitude 90" 29' 56" west from Greenwich, and 

governs the surveys in Illinois west of the Illinois River and 

west of the third principal meridian lying north of the river. 

It also extends due north through Wisconsin and northeastern Minnesota, governing all the surveys in the former and 

those in the latter State lying east of the Mississippi and the 

577 
third guide meridian (west of the fifth principal meridian) 

north of the river. 

The fifth principal meridian starts from the mouth of the 

Arkansas River, and, with a common base-line running due 

west from the mouth of the Saint Francis River, in Arkansas, 

governs the surveys in Arkansas, Missouri, Iowa, Minnesota 

west of the Mississippi, and the third guide meridian north of 

the river, and in Dakota Territory east of the Missouri River. 

This meridian is coincident with 90" 58' longitude west from 

Greenwich. 

The sixth principal meridian coincides with longitude 97" 

22' west from Greenwich, and, with the principal base line 

intersecting it on the 40th degree of north latitude, extends 

north to the intersection of the Missouri River and south to 

the 37th degree of north latitude, controlling the surveys in 

Kansas, Nebraska, that part of Dakota lying south and west 

of the Missouri River, Wyoming, and Colorado, excepting the 

valley ofthe Rio Grande del Norte, in southwestern Colorado, 

where the surveys are projected from the New Mexico meridian. 

In addition to the foregoing six principal meridians and 

bases governing public surveys, there have been established 

the following meridians and bases, viz: 

The Michigan meridian, in longitude 84" 19' 09'' west from 

Greenwich, with a base-line on a parallel seven miles north of 

Detroit, governing the surveys in Michigan. 

The Tallahassee meridian, in longitude 84" 18' west from 

Greenwich, runs due north and south from the point of intersection with the base-line at Tallahassee, and governs the 

surveys in Florida. 

The Saint Stephen's meridian, longitude 88" 02' west from 

Greenwich, starts from Mobile, passes through Saint 

Stephen's, intersects the base line on the 31st degree of north 

latitude, and controls the surveys of 

-51- 

the southern district in Alabama and of the Pearl River 

district lying east of the river and south of township 10 north 

in the State of Mississippi. 

The Huntsville meridian, longitude 86" 31' west from 

Greenwich, extends from the northern boundary of Alabama 

as a base, passes through the town of Huntsville, and governs 

the surveys of the northern district in Alabama. 

The Choctaw meridian, longitude 89" 10' 30 west from 

Greenwich, passes two miles west of the town of Jackson, in 

the State of Mississippi, starting from the base-line twentynine miles south of Jackson, and terminating on the south 

boundary of the Chickasaw cession, controlling the surveys 

east and west of the meridian and north of the base. 

The Washington meridian, longitude 91" 05' west from 

Greenwich, seven miles east of the town of Washington, in 

the State of Mississippi, with the base-line corresponding 

with the 31st degree of north latitude, governs the surveys in 

the southwestern angle of the State. 

The Saint Helena meridian, 91" 11' longitude west from 

Greenwich, extends from the 31st degree of north latitude, as 

a base, due south, and passing one mile east of Baton Rouge, 

controls the surveys in the Greensburgh and the southeastern districts of Louisiana, both lying east of the Mississippi. 

The Louisiana meridian, longitude 92" 20' west from 

Greenwich, intersects the 31st degree north latitude at a 

distance of forty-eight miles west of the eastern bank of the 

Mississippi River, and, with the base-line coincident with the 

said parallel of north latitude, governs the surveys in 

Louisiana west of the Mississippi. 

The New Mexico meridian, longitude 106" 52' 09" west from 

Greenwich, intersects the principal base-line on the Rio 

Grande del Norte about ten miles below the mouth of the 

Puerco River, on the parallel of 34" 19' north latitude, and 

controls the surveys in New Mexico, and in the valley of the 

Rio Grande del Norte, in Colorado. 

The Great Salt Lake meridian, longitude 111" 53' 47" west 

from Greenwich, intersects the base-line at the corner of 

Temple Block, in Salt Lake City, Utah, on the parallel of 40" 

46' 04'' north latitude, and governs the surveys in the Territory of Utah. 

The Boise meridian, longitude 116" 20' west from Greenwich, intersects the principal base between the Snake and 

Boise Rivers, in latitude 43" 26' north. The initial monument, 

at the intersection of the base and meridian, is nineteen miles 

distant from Boise City, on a course of south 29" 30' west. This 

meridian governs the surveys in the Territory of Idaho. 

The Mount Diablo meridian, California, coincides with 

longitude 121" 54' west from Greenwich, intersects the baseline on the summit of the mountain from which it takes its 

name, in latitude 37" 53' north, and governs the surveys of all 

central and northeastern California and the entire State of 

Nevada. 

The San Bernardino meridian, California, longitude 116" 

56' west from Greenwich, intersects the base-line at Mount 

San Bernardino, latitude 34" 06' north, and governs the surveys in southern California lying east of the meridian and 

that part of the surveys situated west of it which are south of 

the eighth standard parallel south of the Mount Diablo baseline. 

The Humboldt meridian, longitude 124" 11' west from 

Greenwich, intersects the principal base-line on the summit 

of Mount Pierce, in latitude 40" 25' 30"north, and controls the 

surveys in the northwestern 

-52- 

corner of California lying west of the Coast range of mountains and north of township 5 south of the Humboldt base. 

The Willamette meridian is coincident wite longitude 122" 

44' west from Greenwich, its intersection with the base-line 

is on the parallel of 45" 30' north latitude, and it controls the 

public surveys in Oregon and Washington Territory. 

The Montana meridian extends north and south from the 

initial monument established on the summit of a limestone 

hill, eight hundred feet high, longitude 111" 40' 54"west from 

Greenwich. The base line runs east and west from the monument on the parallel of 45" 46' 27" north latitude. The surveys 

for the entire Territory of Montana are governed by this 

meridian. 

The Gila and Salt River meridian intersects the base-line 

on the south side of the Gila River, opposite the mouth of Salt 

River, in longitude 112" 15' 46" west from Greenwich, and 

latitude 33" 22' 57" north, and governs the public surveys in 

the Territory of Arizona. 

The Indian meridian intersects the base-line at Fort 

578 
Arbuckle, Indian Territory, in longitude 97" 15' 56" west 

from Greenwich, latitude 34" 31' north, and governs the 

surveys in that Territory. 

THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION OR VARIATION 

OF THE NEEDLE. 

The following account of the geographical distribution and 

of the annual change of the magnetic declination or variation 

of the needle, with tables, explanations, and charts, presenting the latest information on the subject, were prepared by 

direction of the Superintendent of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, in accordance with a request of the Commissioner 

of the General Land Office. 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D.C., November 30, 1889. 

For the following article with tables and their explanation, 

relating to the use of the compass in surveying, the Commissioner of the General Land Office is indebted to Prof. T. C. 

Mendenhall, Superintendent of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic 

Survey; it was furnished at the request of the Commissioner. 

The paper originally written in January, 1878, by Assistant C. A. Schott, in charge of the computing division, has 

been revised and enlarged by him in order to present the 

latest information on the subject; it is also accompanied by 

two charts, taken from the Coast and Geodetic Survey Report 

for 1889 illustrating the present distribution of the magnetic 

declination. 

This paper is designed to take the place of the chapter 

commencing at the foot of page 25 and ending in the middle of 

page 29 of the "Manual of Instructions to Surveyors-General 

of the United States," printed in 1871, part of which in the 

course of time had become obsolete. The article will be found 

of great interest and value as an aid in the prosecution of the 

surveys of the public lands. 

in minutes of arc, and it generally suffices to give the nearest 

whole minute; longitudes are to be reckoned westward from 

Greenwich as the initial meridian. 

The declination is called "west" when the north-seeking 

end of the magnet or needle points to the west of the true 

meridian, and is called "east" when the same end points to 

the east of the true meridian. The north end of the needle 

tends approximately toward the north and more particularly 

toward a region which surrounds the magnetic pole of dip; the 

magnetic declination within the limits of the United States 

presents, such great extremes as 18?42" west at Eastport, Me., 

3" east at Key West, Fla., 13%" east at San Diego, Cal., 23" 

east in the Strait of Fuca, Washington Territory, and about 

33" east at Fort Yukon, Alaska. The general distribution of 

the declination in the United States at the present time is 

shown on the accompanying charts, taken from the annual 

report of the Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1889 (as yet 

unpublished), the large MS. charts on two sheets having been 

greatly reduced to suit the present publication. These charts 

are for the epoch 1890 (January). 

With regard to changes with the lapse of time the declinations, as observed, have undergone variations of several degrees. Thus at Boston, Mass., the declination changed from 

10" west in 1700 to about 6Y2" west in 1778, and is now 

approaching 12" west and still increasing; at Monterey, Cal., 

the declination was 111/2" east in 1780; it is now 16" east. On 

this subject the reader may consult the Coast and Geodetic 

Survey Report for 1888.43 

The accuracy with which the declination may be determined depends chiefly upon the instrumental means at command, but also in a great measure upon the ability and care of 

the observer in using his instruments and in selecting the 

proper method and best time for observation. The instruments ordinarily in the hands of the observer are sufficiently 

described in works on surveying or in catalogues of instrument-makers; but for descriptions and illustrations of more 

refined instruments and for their adjustment and the 

methods of using them the reader may be 

-53- 

-54- 

AN ACCOUNT OF THE PRESENT GEOGRAPHICAL 

DISTRIBUTION AND OF THE ANNUAL CHANGE 

OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION (COMMONLY 

KNOWN AS THE VARIATION OF THE COMPASS 

NEEDLE42) WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE UNITED 

STATES. 

The magnetic declination at any place is the angle contained between two vertical planes, one being the astronomical or true meridian of the place and the other a plane in 

which the horizontal axis of a freely suspended magnetic 

needle lies at the time. The former is a fixed plane, the latter 

is variable since observation shows that the direction of a 

magnetic needle, when delicately suspended, is constantly 

changing, nor is it the same at different places. The magnetic 

declination, thus varying with respect to locality and time, it 

is necessary on the part of the observer to give with his 

statement of the declination the exact local time, year, 

month, day and hour, and fraction when the measure was 

taken, as well as the geographical position or the latitude and 

longitude of the place, which co-ordinates may be expressed 

referred to Coast and Geodetic Survey Report for 1881, 

Appendix No. 8, entitled "Directions for Measurement of 

Terrestrial Magnetism." 

It is a matter of observation that the needle, especially 

when light and delicately suspended, is seldom or never at 

rest; the principal laws of the angular changes have been 

made out; others and minor ones are known with more or less 

certainty and some are conjectural. These motions have, for 

convenience, been classified as regular and irregular variations, but we shall notice here only the principal ones. 

To the former class belongs the solar variation depending 

upon the hour of the day, the time of the year, and the 

condition of the sun with respect to spot-activity; to the same 

class belongs the lunar variation depending on the moon's 

42. In scientific treatises on terrestrial magnetism the term magnetic declination is 

always used in order to avoid any confusion which would arise when treating of such 

notions of the needle as the diurnal annual, and secular variations. 

43. The Coast and Geodetic Survey Report for 1888, Appendix No. 7, it is expected, will 

soon pass through the press. 

579 
hour-angle and her position in the orbit, but this is of little 

interest to the practical surveyor on account of the small 

amplitude. In the same class is also included the secular 

variation, which is a systematic alteration in the earth’s 

magnetism involving centuries to unfold itself, and as yet of 

unexplained origin. To the second class belong the so-called 

magnetic disturbances or storms, which frequently and 

simultaneously affect large parts and sometimes apparently 

the whole surface of the earth. On large averages these disturbances are found subject to complex laws, and they are 

noticed generally to accompany auroral displays and strong 

earth-currents. 

They may be expected to occur at any time. Omitting any 

detailed notice of these disturbances and confining our attention to those more or less systematic changes which are of 

special interest to the surveyor as possibly affecting his work, 

we shall briefly review the effects of the principal regular 

variations as exhibited within the area of the United States. 

The solar diurnal variation consists in a systematic movement of the direction of a magnet, having for its period the 

solar day; its character is the same for the greater part of the 

northern hemisphere. About the time of sunrise, or soon after 

it, the north-seeking end of the needle is generally found 

approaching to or near its easternmost position, i. e., near or 

at its eastern elongation. This phase happens, for instance, at 

Philadelphia, Pa., on the yearly average about 8h a. m., at 

Key West, Fla, about 81/4h a. m., and at Los Angeles, Cal., at 

81/3h a. m.; it is subject to an annual variation, the time being 

earlier in summer and near 71/zh a. m. at Philadelphia, near 

71/zh a. m. at Key West, near 72/3h at Los Angeles, near 8h a. m. 

at Fort Steilacoom, Wash., and near 73/4h a. m. at Camp Date 

Creek, Arizona. In the winter, this phase is reached laterabout 83/4h or gh a. m. at Philadelphia, about 91/zh a. m. at Key 

West and Los Angeles. The needle after remaining nearly 

stationary about this time, soon begins its principal daily 

motion toward the west, at first slowly, but after about gl/zh a. 

m. quite rapidly, and slackening again when nearing its 

western daily extreme, known as the western elongation, 

about ll/zh p. m. This phase is reached on the yearly average 

about p. m. at Philadelphia, abut 13/4h p. m. at Key West, 

and about at Los Angeles, a few minutes earlier in 

summer and a few minutes later in winter, but it will generally fall between lh and 2h p. m. After this second temporary 

stand the needle reverses its angular motion and gradually 

returns to the direction from which it had set out in the early 

morning. Not infrequently a small or secondary oscillation 

takes place during the night. The average daily direction of 

the needle is reached in summer about a. m. and in 

winter about 103/4h a. m. at Philadelphia, about a. m. 

and 113/4h a. m., at Key West, and about loh a. m. and lll/zh a. 

m., respectively, at Los Angeles. 

-55- 

The needle crosses a second time the average magnetic 

meridian about 7h p. m. at the former place, and about 8Yzh p. 

m. at the latter places, but these p. m. times are subject to 

considerable irregularity. The amount of displacement between the morning and afternoon elongations is called the 

diurnal range; it is about 8’ on the average during the year at 

Philadelphia, about 5%’ at Key West, and about 6Y3’ at Los 

Angeles. This range is greater for northern stations than for 

southern stations, and is also subject to an annual inequality, 

being more conspicuous in summer than in winter; thus, at 

Philadelphia, it reaches in August 12‘, but in November only 

5’, and at Key West it is in August 8’, and in November 3’; at 

Los Angeles, the ranges in these months are 83/4’ and 4’. This 

change from the maximum to the minimum and return is 

gradual. The solar diurnal variation is further subject to a 

periodic inequality related to the eleven-year cycle of the 

sun-spots. The diurnal range is least in years of minimum 

spots, as in 1878 or 1889, and is greatest in years of maximum 

sun spots, generally occurring about four years after the 

minima, as in 1883. In minimum years the range is about 0.8 

and in maximum years about 1.3 of the average range. The 

daily variation appears at times intensified, at other times 

irregular and occasionally, and especially in the winter season, there are days when it is obscured or not recognizable. 

The following table will be found useful for reducing 

observed declinations, taken at any time of the day between 6 

a. m. and 6 p. m., on any day of the year, to the average value 

of the day, or that value which would have been obtained had 

hourly or continuous observations been made. The tabular 

values answer approximately to the middle epoch in the 

sun-spot cycle, and the nearest whole minute derived from 

them will give a degree of accuracy quite sufficient in view of 

the ordinary irregularities in the diurnal motion itself. 

The tabular quantities give the average deviations of the 

direction of the needle at the respective hours of the day from 

the direction that would have been obtained had the mean 

been taken of twenty-four hourly observations. The letter W 

indicates that the needle points to the westward of the daily 

average, the letter E the reverse, whence the sign of the 

correction can be inferred whether the declination be westerly or easterly. Two sets of figures are given; the upper one is 

the mean from observations at Toronto, Canada; Philadelphia, Pa.; and Madison, Wis.; and answers, therefore, for 

northern stations; the lower one is the mean from observations at Key West, Fla., and Los Angeles, Cal., and answers, 

therefore, for southern stations. 

Table for reducing an observed declination to the average declination of the 

day. 

Mean local time. 6h a. m. 7h a. m. ah a. m. gh a. m. 10ha.m.llha.m. 

E. E. E. E. E. W. 

Northern stations .............. 0.7 1.1 1.9 2.2 1.5 0.1 

Southern stations ............... 0.1 0.3 1.4 2.3 2.4 1.3* 

Northern stations .............. 2.6 3.8 4.4 3.5 1.2 1.6 

Southern stations .............. 1.4 2.7 3.2 2.6 1.2 0.4 

Northern stations .............. 4.0 5.6 5.7 4.5 1.7 1.6 

Southern stations 2.1 3.5 3.6 2.4 0.3 1.5 

Northern stations .............. 1.8 2.6 3.1 2.5 1.0 1.5 

Southern stations .............. 9.6 2.1 2.5 1.9 0.6 0.9 

December, January, February: 

March, April, May: 

June, July, August: 

September, October, November: 

*East 

580 
-56- 

Table for reducing an observed declination to the average declination of the 

day-Cont'd. 

Mean local time. Noon. lh p. m. Zh p. m. 3h p. m. 4h p. m. 5h p. m. fjh p. m. 

W.W.W.W.W.W.W. 

Northern stations.. . . . . .. 1.8 2.9 2.8 2.1 1.3 0.7 0.2 

Southern stations . . . . . . . . 0.4 1.3 1.5 1.3 0.8 0.3" 0.0 

Northern stations ........ 3.8 4.8 4.6 3.8 2.5 1.4 0.7 

Southern stations . .. .. . . . 1.6 2.3 2.6 2.2 1.5 0.8 0.4 

Northern stations .. . . . .. . 4.1 5.6 5.6 4.6 3.0 1.4 0.6 

Southern stations . . .. . . . . 2.6 3.1 2.9 2.4 1.5 0.9 0.5 

Northern stations. .. . . . .. 3.3 4.0 3.4 2.3 1.2 0.6 0.1 

Southern stations . .. .. . . . 1.9 2.1 1.7 1.2 0.8 0.7 0.4 

December, January, February: ' 

March, April, May: 

June, July, August: 

September, October, Novmber: 

*East 

The annual variation of the declination is so small that a 

mere mention here suffices; its amplitude is at most 1Yz 

minutes of angular measure. 

The lunar variations and inequalities.-These we likewise 

pass over briefly on account of their small amplitude or 

general minute effect. The principal inequality is the lunar 

diurnal variation, which exhibits the peculiarity of two maximum and two minimum values each lunar day. The range at 

Philadephia is about 27" and at Toronto about 38". Other 

lunar inequalities are generally of smaller order. 

The secular variation of the magnetic declination is, as has 

already been pointed out, a subject of great importance to the 

surveyor, expecially when he is called upon to re-run old 

compass lines or to decide between conflicting claims as to the 

position of boundary lines marked out by compass many 

years ago, but the traces of which on the ground have become 

lost in the course of time. The most complete investigation of 

this remarkable change is contained in Coast and Geodetic 

Survey Report for 1888,44 Appendix No. 7, and the tables 

here given of decennial values of the declination have been 

taken from this appendix. The variation in question is most 

probably of a periodic character, requiring centuries for its 

complete development, whence its specific name; it is undoubtedly of a highly complex nature. As yet at no station has 

a complete cycle been observed or completed, nor do we know 

whether the needle will ever trace out a similar one in period, 

in amplitude, or in other particulars; hence the necessity of 

continuing systematic observations at a number of stations 

specially selected for following up the inquiry. 

These observations will enable us in time to introduce any 

needed change in the law as hitherto observed and improve 

the expression of the same, or gain a deeper insight into the 

secular variation. The motion may be compared to that of an 

oscillation of a pendulum, which alternately comes to rest at 

its extreme elongations and moves fastest midway between 

these extremes. Smaller oscillations within the period have 

also been discovered. About the times of maximum deflections the needle seems to fluctuate about an average position, 

apparently stationary for several years to ordinary or coarsely-divided instruments; but soon a perceptible change takes 

place, and the direction of motion is noticed to have slowly 

changed to one opposite to that followed before the stationary 

epoch. The annual change increases year by year, until the 

motion reaches a maximum speed, after which it 

-57- 

gradually declines till the opposite stationary phase is 

attained, when it becomes once more zero. 

This stately swing is gone through within our geographical 

limits in from about two hundred and fifty to about three 

hundred and fifty years. Thus, for example, at Baltimore and 

vicinity the needle was observed to be stationary about 1680, 

the north end of the needle pointing then nearly 6" west; in 

1802 it had reached the opposite phase and was observed to 

point nearly Y2" west; since that time the westerly motion has 

been kept up, and at present has already reached 43/40 west. 

As might be expected the range varies greatly with geographical position, and so does the epoch of the elongations: 

thus the last easterly extreme occurred earliest in Maine; 

later in Florida, Texas, and Mexico, and has just reached but 

not yet touched all parts of the Pacific coast north of southern 

California; beyond the Straits of Fuca and for Alaska we have 

but little information. We have here at present a region or 

broad belt of no annual change or where the effect of secular 

variation is nil; it passes off and on the coast from the Strait of 

Fuca to near Point Conception, California, where it leaves 

the coast and stretches southward to the west of Lower California. On the other hand there is a region of no annual 

change but of opposite phase, and passing through Nova 

Scotia and New Brunswick. Between these two belts, and 

comprising the greater part of the United States, the effect of 

the secular variation is to increase west declination, or, what 

comes to the same thing, to decrease east declination, whereas on the Pacific coast there is still a narrrow strip of land to 

the west of the belt first described, where the annual change 

is opposite, i. e., easterly declination is still slightly increasing. 

The following table gives the latitude and longitude as well 

as the annual change of the declination for each station, and 

the next table the computed decennial values of the declination (and after 1850 for every fifth year), at all places where 

the observations were sufficiently numerous and of sufficient 

range to admit of the recognition of the law of secular variation: 

Geographical position of stations and annual change of declination for 1890 

and 1895. 

+ signifies increasing west or decreasing east declination. 

~ 

Longi- Annual change of 

tude west declination. 

Name of places. Latitude from 

Greenwich. For 1890. For 1895. 

Eastern Group 0, 0, 

Eastport, Me.. . . . . . . . . . 44 54.4 66 59.2 + 0.8 + 0.2 

Bangor, Me. . . . . . . . . . . . + 2.4 + 1.9 

Portland, Me.. . . . . . . . . . 43 38.8 70 16.6 + 2.6 + 2.2 

Burlington, Vt. . . . . . . . . 44 28.5 73 12.0 + 5.0 + 3.8 

Hanover, N. H. . . . . . . . . 43 42.3 72 17.1 + 4.4 + 3.9 

44 48.2 68 46.9 

44. Still in MS, in the hands of the printer. 

581 
(Ed. Note: The remainder of this table, which continued on 

pages 58 through 65 are deleted.) 

-66- 

It will be observed that the character of the secular variation is the same over large areas, though each place has 

apparently minor features peculiar to itself. In consequence 

of our very imperfect data the deduced annual change (in 

minutes of arc) due to the action of the secular variation, can 

only claim to be a fair approximation for the several States 

and Territories at the present time. 

In the following table the + sign indicates an increase of 

west declination, or its equivalent a decrease of east declination. 

Table showing the annual change of the magnetic declination 

for the epoch 1890 and referring to the central part of each 

State, Territory, or subdivision. 

Annual Annual 

Locality Change Locality Change 

Alabama ............ +3.5 Mississippi. .......... + 3.5 

Alaska: Missouri.. ........... 4.2 

Dixon Entrance. ... 1 (?) Montana. ............ 2 (?) 

Sitka Bay.. ........ 3 Nebraska 

Off Mount St. Elias 9 (?) Western part.. ..... 3 (?) 

Arizona.. ............ 2 (?) Eastern part ....... 4 (?) 

[The remainder of the table is deleted.] 

It is to be hoped that before long we shall be in possession of 

sufficient material to render the above table more comprehensive and satisfactory. The numbers may be used for a few 

years (five) without serious error, but they certainly need 

recomputing after the lapse of a few years. 

Isogonic charts.-If for any epoch we connect by curves all 

positions where the needle was observed to have the same 

declination, we trace out the so-called isogonic lines. On the 

accompanying charts they are laid down for equal differences 

of lo, every fifth line, for greater distinction, being heavier. 

Such charts need reconstruction from time to time, not only 

for the purpose of improvements, but in consequence of the 

ever changing direction of the magnetic force. Thus, for instance, the line of no declination, or agonic line, as such lines 

are called, but which have no other distinction (beyond declination equal to zero), over any other isogonic line, is now 

seen to pass through the Strait of Mackinaw, Mich., Toledo, 

Ohio, and crossing the coast near Charleston, S. C.; 

-67- 

whereas about the years 1797 and 1803, when this same 

agonic line had its most northeasterly position on this coast, 

it passed near Buffalo, N. Y., Harrisburg, Pa., Annapolis, 

Md., to Cape Henry, Va. This and its neighboring lines will 

continue for some time to move southwestward on the Atlantic coast. 

Magnetic disturbances.-These irregular motions of the 

needle may not infrequently be a source of annoyance to the 

surveyor; they may occur at any time, and are, when taken 

individually, beyond our power of prediction, but when averages are taken of many thousands they are nevertheless 

found to be subject to precise laws. 

Their presence is generally indicated by sudden deflections 

and by rapid and great fluctuations in the direction of the 

needle, greatly exceeding all ordinary variations. 

These deflections occur alternately on opposite sides of the 

normal position, and often take place simultaneously at distant regions of the globe; they may last from a few hours to a 

day, or even several days, and are frequently accompanied by 

auroral displays. These disturbances are found to be strictly 

under solar influence. Irrespective of direction of the disturbing force, the most disturbed hours of the day are frequently 

those between 7h and loh a. m., and the least disturbed those 

between 2h and 6h p. m., but we can not here enter more fully 

into this subject. The greatest number of disturbances occur 

in the months of August, September, and October, the least 

number in January and June, and the disturbances are most 

active in years of sunspot maxima, and least so in years of 

minima. In the United States (excepting Alaska) deflections 

on either side of the normal of Y4" are common; deflections of 

1/4" may occasionally be noticed, but those exceeding 1" are 

rare, unless the place be near the northern boundary.-[C. A. 

S., AUGUST 26, 1889.1 

METHOD OF ASCERTAINING THE MAGNETIC 

DECLINATION OR VARIATION OF THE COMPASS. 

The following chapter, on the subject of the declination of 

the magnetic needle, is extracted from the revised edition of 

the work on surveying by Dr. Charles Davies, a graduate of 

the Military Academy at West Point. The work itselfwill be a 

valuable acquisition to the deputy surveyor, and his attention is particularly invited to the following chapter, which 

sets forth the usual easy modes by which the true meridian 

and magnetic declination may be approximately ascertained; 

his attention is also called to more complete statements on 

the subject given in the work "A treatise on land-surveying, 

etc.," by Dr. W. M. Gillespie, professor of engineering, Union 

College, in chapter treating of the declination of the magnetic 

needle. For more refined methods, he may consult Coast and 

Geodetic Survey Report for 1881, Appendx No. 8. 

METHOD OF ASCERTAINING THE VARIATION. 

"The best practical method of determining the true meridian of a place is by observing the north star. If this star were 

precisely at the point in which the axis of the earth, prolonged, pierces the heavens, then the intersection of the vertical plane passing through it and the place, with the surface 

of the earth, would be the true meridian. But the star being at 

a distance from the pole equal to 1" 30' nearly,45 it performs a 

revolution about the pole in a circle, the polar distance of 

which is 1" 30';45 the time of revolution is 23 hours and 56 

minutes. 

-68- 

"To the eye of an observer this star is continually in motion 

and is due north but twice in 23 hours and 56 minutes; and is 

then said to be on the meridian. Now, when it departs from 

45. 1" 17' in 1890 

582 
the meridian, it apparently moves east or west for 5 hours 

and 5946 minutes, and then returns to the meridian again. 

"When at its greatest distance from the meridian, east or 

west, it is said to be at its eastern or western elongation." 

The following table47 shows the times of the eastern and 

western elongations for 1889, computed for latitude 40" and 

for longitude 90" W. of Greenwich, also the times of culminations of Polaris; with directions for use for any year between 

1889 and 1910; and for different latitudes. 

Local mean (astron~rnical~~) time of the culminations and elongations of 

Polaris in the year 1889. 

[Computed for latitude + 40" and longitude 6h west from Greenwich.] 

Date. 

1889. 

Jan. 1 

15 

Feb. 1 

15 

Mar. 1 

15 

April 1 

15 

May 1 

15 

June 1 

15 

July 1 

15 

Aug. 1 

15 

Sept. 1 

15 

Oct. 1 

15 

Nov. 1 

15 

Dec. 1 

15 

Eastern 

elongation. 

h. m. 

0 36.2 

23 37.0 

22 29.9 

21 34.6 

20 39.4 

19 44.4 

18 37.4 

17 42.4 

16 39.5 

15 44.6 

14 37.9 

13 43.0 

12 40.4 

11 45.5 

10 39.0 

9 44.1 

8 37.5 

7 42.6 

6 39.7 

5 44.7 

4 37.9 

3 42.7 

2 39.7 

144.4 

Upper culmination. 

h. m. 

6 31.0 

5 35.7 

4 28.6 

3 33.3 

2 38.1 

143.0 

0 36.0 

23 37.1 

22 34.2 

21 39.3 

20 32.7 

19 37.8 

18 35.2 

17 40.3 

16 33.8 

15 38.9 

14 32.3 

13 37.4 

12 34.5 

11 39.5 

10 32.1 

9 37.5 

8 34.5 

7 39.3 

Western 

elongation. 

h. m. 

12 25.7 

11 30.4 

10 23.3 

9 28.1 

8 32.8 

7 37.7 

6 30.7 

5 35.7 

4 32.9 

3 38.0 

2 31.3 

136.4 

0 33.8 

23 35.0 

22 28.4 

21 33.5 

20 26.9 

19 32.0 

18 29.1 

17 34.1 

6 27.3 

15 32.2 

14 29.2 

13 34.0 

Lower culmination. 

h. m. 

18 29.1 

17 33.8 

16 26.7 

15 31.4 

14 36.2 

13 41.1 

12 34.1 

11 39.0 

10 36.1 

9 41.2 

8 34.6 

7 39.7 

6 37.1 

5 42.2 

4 35.7 

3 40.8 

2 34.2 

139.3 

0 36.4 

23 37.6 

22 30.8 

21 35.6 

20 32.6 

19 37.3 

It will be noted that for the tabular year two eastern 

elongations occur on January 10 and two western elongations on July 9; there are also two culminations on April 10 

and on October 9. 

The lower culmination either follows or precedes the upper 

culmination by 11 hours 58.1 minutes. 

For other dates and positions than those implied by the 

table we need to apply the following corrections: 

To refer the tabular times to any year subsequent to the 

tabular year (1889) add 0.33 minutes for every year. To refer 

the tabular times, corrected as above, to any year in a quadriennium observe that for first year after a leap year the table 

is correct; for second year after a leap year add 0.9 minutes to 

the tabular value; for third year after a leap year add 1.7 

minutes to the tabular value; for leap year, 

46. In 1890 and latitude 40°, for about 5h 55" easterly and 6h 03" westerly 

47. Computed at the Coast and Geodetic Survey Office, as was also the table of 

azimuths. 

48. Counted from noon and from zero to twenty-four hours. 

-69- 

and before March 1, add 2.6 minutes to the tabular value; for 

leap year from and after March 1, subtract 1.2 minutes from 

the tabular value. 

To refer to any calendar day other than the first and fifteenth of each month, subtract 3.94 minutes for every day 

between it and the preceding tabular day, or add 3.94 minutes for every day between it and the succeeding tabular 

day. The longitude correction will amount to 0.16 minutes for 

each hour. 

To refer to any other than the tabular latitude and between 

the limits of 25" and 50" north, add to the time of west 

elongation 0.13 minutes for every degree south of 40" and 

subtract from the time of west elongation 0.18 minutes for 

every degree north of 40"; reverse these signs for corrections 

to times of east elongation. 

It will be important to direct attention to the fact that the 

year 1900 is not a leap year, and this must be kept in view 

when dealing with dates from and after March 1 of that year. 

The twentieth century begins after the expiration of December 31, 1900. 

The deduced tabular times may generally be depended 

upon with no greater error than 0.3 minute. 

The following table exhibits the angle which the meridian 

plane makes with the vertical plane passing through the 

pole-star when at its eastern or western longation; this angle 

is called the azimuth of the star at elongation: 

[Ed. Note: Pages 70 through 89 and most ofpage 90 is deleted. 

These pages contain tables of Azimuths of Polaris, instructions for polaris observations, time of Upper Culmination, 

Azimuths of the Tangent to the Parallel, offsets from the Tangent to the Parallel and difference in latitude and departure 

for 80 chains. The copy picks up again with the bottom of 

page 90.1 

-90- 

Random bearings, determined as above directed, are 

actually the true bearings of the lines and are so used for 

running fractional true lines. Any deviation from random 

bearings, derived from the application of the falling [Table 

VI], changes the random bearing by an amount due to unavoidable errors, and should give for a final result a bearing 

as near the true bearing as the field work will permit. A true 

bearing means the angular deviation from the true meridian 

in contradistinction to the magnetic bearing, or angle made 

with the magnetic meridian. A true line is to be understood to 

refer to the line upon which the corners are established. 

Table VI [A and B] is used to determine the return from the 

random course by the following rules, the meridians being 

regarded as parallel. 

1.-If the random line is run east or west, subtract the 

falling [in minutes of arc] from go", reverse the departure 

letter, and name the meridianal letter N. or S., like the 

falling. 

-91- 

11.-When the random course is nearly east and west, take 

the sum of the random course and closing error [in minutes of 

583 
arc], if they are of the same name-that is, both north or both 

south-but their difference when of different names; in 

either case changing the meridional and departure letters of 

the random line. [This is easily remembered by bearing in 

mind the initial letters of Sum and Same and Difference and 

Different]. 

111.-In any case when the sum exceeds go", the return 

course is found by subtracting said sum from 180" and retaining the meridional letter of the random course unchanged. If 

the sum is exactly go", the return course is evidently west [or 

east] to the starting point. 

THE RANDOM AND TRUE LINE AND USE 

OF THE VARIATION. 

In the article entitled "METHOD OF SUBDIVIDING," 

directions have been given to run east and west random lines 

parallel to the south boundary of the tier of sections to which 

they belong, instead of due east as given in former editions of 

these instructions. In many instances the south boundary of 

townships to be subdivided are found to depart, sometimes 

considerably, from the true east and west line, or parallel of 

latitude, which they are supposed to follow. The present 

instructions are intended to reduce the falling of the random 

to the smallest practicable amount and to show at once how 

much the random line departs from the true line, instead of 

complicating its departure with the deviation of the south 

boundary. When the south boundary makes a comparatively 

large angle with the parallel, the random line, ifrun due east, 

necessarily falls at a considerable distance north or south of 

the objective corner, and it appears to have been the practice 

of some surveyors to turn around the compass box until the 

north end of the needle points to the north mark, and to call 

the resulting reading of the vernier the variation. Thus, 

many old plats give the variation on east and west lines one 

value throughout, and on the north and south lines another 

uniform variation, the two differing by ten or fifteen minutes, 

or even more. In other instances two lines, making an angle 

of one or two degrees with each other, will be run, for example, north, and the variation recorded as differing by the 

angle between them. By this practice neither the magnetic 

nor the true bearing is given, and what is called the variation 

is simply an arbitrary angle, which may in some cases be the 

variation by accident, but oftener something else. The bearing of the south boundary will be the same from one end to the 

other if correctly run, and its bearing is of course the true 

bearing of east and west section lines if the corners are at the 

proper distance from said boundary. Therefore, for the sake of 

uniformity, it necessarily follows that the bearing of random 

lines should be the same as that of the south boundary of the 

tier of sections to which they belong and the lines are to be so 

run. 

When the lines are run as above directed, that portion of 

the falling due to deviation of the south boundary no longer 

enters into consideration and the limit for the closing error 

may be consistently reduced to the limit allowed on exterior 

lines, or fifty linksper mile, and this change has been made in 

the prescribed limits (on page 40), which are, even after this 

reduction, much greater than good work will ever require. 

The variation, when once properly determined, is to be set 

off on the variation arc, which should then be clamped and 

not again moved until natural causes-such as diurnal 

change or local attraction-require it to be corrected. 

Whenever any change in the variation is made on 

-92- 

the instrument, all particulars relating thereto must be recorded, as illustrated in Specimen Field Notes. 

The compass used as above directed will always give the 

bearing from the true meridian or the true bearing of any 

point, or of any line upon which the compass is directed. 

TABLES VII AND VIII. 

These tables, which require no special description, are 

useful for converting linear into angular, and angular into 

linear, measures, as well as for determining the convergencies and divergencies of the meridians, on the speroidal surface of the earth. As the tabular values are given in chains, 

the tables will be found convenient for the surveyor's use. The 

following rules and examples will illustrate their application: 

1. Given the latitudes of any two places on the same meridian, to find the distance between them. 

RULE.-Find from Table VII the length of a degree of the 

meridian at each latitude, and take half their sum for the 

mean length of a degree. Then say, as 60 minutes is to the 

difference of latitude, so is the mean length of a degree to the 

distance required. 

The latitude of the north boundary of Wyoming is 45" N., 

and that of the 1st Standard Parallel South, Montana, 45" 26' 

4.08; what is the meridional distance between them? 

Chains. Chains. 

As 60' : 26' 4".08 :: 5524.02 : 2400, the distance required. 

2. Given the distance between any two places on the same 

meridian, and the latitude of one of them, to find the difference 

of latitude. 

RULE.-Find from Table VII the length of a degree of the 

meridian, in the given latitude, and also in that differing 

from it, by the meridional distance, converted into arc at the 

rate of 52 seconds per mile, and take half their sum for the 

mean length of a degree. Then say, as the mean length of a 

degree is to the meridional distance, so is 60 minutes to the 

difference of latitude required. 

The latitude of the north boundary of Wyoming is 45" N.; 

what is the latitude of the 1st Standard Parallel South, Montana, the meridional distance being 30 miles? 

Chains. Chains. 

AS 5524.02 : 2400 :: 60' : 26'4'.08, the difference of 

latitude required. 

3. Given the longitudes of any two places, on the same 

parallel, in agiven latitude, to find the distance between them. 

RULE.-Find from Table VIII the length of a degree of 

longitude in the given latitude; and say, as 60 minutes is to 

the difference of longitude, so is the length of a degree of 

longitude to the distance required. 

The longitude of the Willamette Meridian is 122" 44', and 

that of east boundary of Range 6 east, 121" 59' 31"; what is the 

distance between them, on the Base Line, in latitude 45" 30'? 

584 
Chains. Chains. 

As 60' : 44'29" :: 3884.81 : 2880, the distance required. 

4. Given the distance between any two places on the same 

parallel, in a given latitude, to find their difference of longitude. 

RULE.-Find from Table VIII the length of a degree of 

longitude in the given latitude; and say, as the length of the 

degree of longitude is to the given distance, so is 60 minutes 

to the difference of longitude. 

-93- 

The longitude of the Willamette Meridian is 122" 44'; what 

is the difference of longitude to east boundary of Range 6 east, 

the distance on the Base Line, in latitude 45" 30', being 36 

miles? 

Chains. Chains. 

As 3884.81 : 2880 :: 60' : 44" 29', the difference of 

longitude required. 

5. Given the distance between two meridians, on anyparallel, in agiven latitude, to find the convergency of the meridians 

for any distance north of that parallel. 

RULE.-Find the length of a degree of longitude, at each 

latitude, by the foregoing rules; and say, as the greater of the 

two lengths is to their difference, so is the given distance to 

the convergency required. 

The distance between the Principal Meridian and first 

Range Line west is 6 miles, in latitude 42" 39' 12"; what is the 

convergency of the two range lines at the Base Line, the 

meridional distance being 24 miles? 

Chains. Chains. Chains. Chains. 

As 4075.67: 22.71 :: 480 : 2.67, the 

convergency required. 

6. Given the distance between two meridians, on anyparallel in a given latitude, to find the divergency of the meridians 

for any distance south of that parallel. 

RULE.-Find the length of a degree of longitude, at each 

latitude, by the foregoing rules; and say, as the less of the two 

lengths is to their difference, so is the given distance to the 

divergency required. 

The distance between the Principal Meridian and first 

Range Line on the Base Line in latitude 43", is 5 miles 77.33 

chains; what is the divergency of the two range lines at the 

parallel 42" 39' 12", the meridional distance being 24 miles? 

Chains. Chains. Chains. Chains. 

As 4052.96: 22.71 :: 477.33 : 2.67, the 

divergency required. 

[Pages 94 through 99 deleted. They contain tables of the length 

of a degree ofLatitude and degree oflongitude, and computations for convergency of meridians.] 

585 

RAM A, 

vy. I. 

_- /-- 

. il 

! 

i 

I 

--- 

I 

22 

I 

.. . . 

11 

.. -- 

14. 

23 

:I> 

I 12 i 

i 

-I 

I 

i 13 

. . .-. - - 

24 

, -1 - 

25 

/ 

I 

, 

I 

I 

I \ 

I I 

I \ 

1 \ 

I \ 

I \ I 

i I I 
DIAGRAM R 

FOURTH STANDARD PARALLEL NORTH 

THIRD STANDARD PARALLEL NORTH 
DIAGRAM I3 

3URTH STANDARD PARALLEL NORTH I 

T. I6 N. 

H.24.E. z4 - 

25 . 

T. 13 S. 

Il.24 I?. 

rHlRO STANDARD PARALLEL NORTH 
TOWNSHIP "? 6 NORTH RANGE NO 34 EAST OF THE PRlN 
''lJAt~RAM C 

' 34 EAST OF THE PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN MO N TA NA 
.. . 
Section G,i.tier Post rritli nloiind of earth 
Sheet No3 

Mound Cwtier Common to 4 Sections 

Quarter Sec.tion Mound Corner 
XLIII 

(This copy of the 1894 Manual is taken from an original volume in the possession of the BLM, Oregon State Office, Portland.) 

1894 

MANUAL 

OF 

SURVEYING INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR THE 

SURVEY OF THE PUBLIC LANDS 

OF THE 

UNITED STATES 

AND 

PRIVATE LAND CLAIMS. 

Prepared in conformity with law under the direction of 

THE COMMISSIONER OF THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE. 

JUNE 30, 1894. 

WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 

1894. 

595 
DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D. C., June 30, 1894. 

GENTLEMEN: 

The following instructions, including full and minute 

directions for the execution of surveys in the field, are issued 

under the authority given me by sections 453,456, and 2398, 

United States Revised Statutes, and must be strictly complied with by yourselves, your office assistants, and deputy 

surveyors. 

All directions in conflict with these instructions are hereby 

abrogated. 

In all official communications, this edition will be known 

and referred to as the Manual of 1894. 

Very respectfully, 

S. W. LAMOREUX, 

Commissioner. 

tion respecting the extent of townships was amended by 

striking out the words “seven miles square” and substituting 

the words “six miles square.” The records of these early 

sessions of Congress are not very full or complete; but it does 

not seem to have occurred to the members until the 6th of 

May, 1785, that a township six miles square could not contain 

49 sections of 1 mile square. At that date a motion to amend 

was made, which provided, among other changes, that a 

township should contain 36 sections; and the amendment 

was lost. The ordinance as finally passed, however, on the 

20th of May, 1785, provided for townships 6 miles square, 

containing 36 sections of 1 mile square. The first public 

surveys were made under this ordinance. The townships, 6 

miles square, were laid out in ranges, extending northward 

from the Ohio River, the townships being numbered from 

south to north, and the ranges from east to west. The region 

embraced by the surveys under this law forms a part of the 

present State of Ohio, and is usually styled “The 

-6- 

To SURVEYORS GENERAL OF THE UNITED STATES. 

-5- 

MANUAL OF SURVEYING 

INSTRUCTIONS. 

HISTORY OF LEGISLATION FOR SURVEYS. 

The present system of survey of the public lands was inaugurated by a committee appointed by the Continental Congress, consisting of the following delegates: 

Hon. THOS. JEFFERSON, Chairman ........ .Virginia. 

Hon. HUGH WILLIAMSON .......... .North Carolina. 

Hon. DAVID HOWELL. ................ .Rhode Island. 

Hon. ELBRIDGE GERRY ............. .Massachusetts. 

Hon. JACOB READ .................. .South Carolina. 

On the 7th of May, 1784, this committee reported “An 

ordinance for ascertaining the mode of locating and disposing 

of lands in the western territory, and for other purposes 

therein mentioned.” This ordinance required the public lands 

to be divided into “hundreds” of ten geographical miles 

square, and those again to be subdivided into lots of one mile 

square each, to be numbered from 1 to 100, commencing in 

the north-western corner, and continuing from west to east 

and from east to west consecutively. This ordinance was 

considered, debated, and amended, and reported to Congress 

April 26,1785, and required the surveyors “to divide the said 

territory into townships of 7 miles square, by lines running 

due north and south, and others crossing these at right 

angles. * * * The plats of the townships, respectively, shall be 

marked by subdivisions into sections of 1 mile square, or 640 

acres, in the same direction as the external lines, and numbered from 1 to 49. * * * And these sections shall be subdivided into lots of 320 acres.” This is the first record of the use 

of the terms “township” and “section.” 

May 3, 1785, on motion of Hon. William Grayson, of Virginia, seconded by Hon. James Monroe, of Virginia, the secSeven Ranges.” In these initial surveys only the exterior lines 

of the townships were surveyed, but the plats were marked by 

’subdivisions into sections of 1 mile square, and mile corners 

were established on the township lines. The sections were 

numbered from 1 to 36, commencing with No. 1 in the southeast corner of the township, and running from south to north 

in each tier to No. 36 in the northwest corner of the township, 

as shown in the following diagram: 

The surveys were made under the direction of the Geographer of the United States. 

The act of Congress approved May 18, 1796, provided for 

the appointment of a surveyor general, and directed the survey of the lands northwest of the Ohio River, and above the 

mouth of the Kentucky River, “in which the titles of the 

Indian tribes have been extinguished.” Under this law one 

half of the townships surveyed were subdivided into sections 

“by running through the same, each way, parallel lines at the 

end of every two miles, and by making a corner on each of said 

lines at the end of every mile,” and it further provided that 

“the sections shall be numbered, respectively, beginning 

with the number one in the northeast section and proceeding 

west and east alternately, through the township, with progressive numbers till the thirty-sixth be completed.” This 

method of numbering sections, as shown by the following 

diagram, is still in use: 

596 
The act of Congress approved May 10, 1800, required the 

“townships west of the Muskingum, which * * * are directed 

to be sold in quarter townships, to be subdivided into half 

sections of three hundred 

-7- 

and twenty acres each, as nearly as may be, by running 

parallel lines through the same from east to west, and from 

south to north, at the distance of one mile from each other, 

and marking corners, at the distance of each half mile, on the 

lines running from east to west, and at the distance of each 

mile on those running from south to north. * * * And the 

interior lines of townships intersected by the Muskingum, 

and of all the townships lying east of that river, which have 

not been heretofore actually subdivided into sections, shall 

also be run and marked. * * * And in all cases where the 

exterior lines of the townships thus to be subdivided into 

sections or half sections shall exceed, or shall not extend, six 

miles, the excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and 

added to or deducted from the western and northern ranges of 

sections or half sections in such townships, according as the 

error may be in running the lines from east to west or from 

south to north.” 

The act of Congress approved February 11, 1805, directs 

the subdivision of the public lands into quarter sections, and 

provides that all the corners marked in the public surveys 

shall be established as the proper corners of sections, or 

subdivisions of sections, which they were intended to designate, and that corners of half and quarter sections not marked 

shall be placed, as nearly as possible, “equidistant from those 

two corners which stand on the same line.” This act further 

provides that “The boundary lines actually run and marked 

* * * shall be established as the proper boundary lines of the 

sections or subdivisions for which they were intended; and 

the length of such lines as returned by * * * the surveyors 

* * * shall be held and considered as the true length thereof, 

and the boundary lines which shall not have been actually 

run and marked as aforesaid shall be ascertained by running 

straight lines from the established corners to the opposite 

corresponding corners; but in those portions of the fractional 

townships, where no such opposite or corresponding corners 

have been or can be fixed, the said boundary line shall be 

ascertained by running from the established corners due 

north and south or east and west lines, as the case may be, to 

the * * * external boundary of such fractional township.” 

The act of Congress approved April 25, 1812, provided 

“That there shall be established in the Department of the 

Treasury an office to be denominated the General Land 

Office, the chief officer of which shall be called the Commissioner of the General Land Office, whose duty it shall be, 

under the direction of the head of the Department, to superintend, execute, and perform all such acts and things touching 

or respecting the public lands of the United States, and other 

lands patented or granted by the United States, as have 

heretofore been directed by law to be done or performed in the 

office of the Secretary of State, of the Secretary and Register 

of the Treasury, and of the Secretary of War, or which shall 

hereafter by law be assigned to the said office.” 

The act of Congress approved April 24,1820, provides for 

the sale of public lands in half quarter sections, and requires 

that “in every case of the division of a quarter section the line 

for the division thereof shall run north and south * * * and 

fractional sections, containing 160 acres and upward, shall, 

in like manner, as nearly as practicable, be subdivided into 

half quarter sections, under such rules and regulations as 

may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury; but 

fractional sections containing less than 160 acres shall not be 

divided.” 

The act of Congress approved May 24,1824, provides “That 

whenever, in the opinion of the President of the United 

States, a departure 

-8- 

from the ordinary mode of surveying land on any river, lake, 

bayou, or water course would promote the public interest, he 

may direct the surveyor general in whose district such land is 

situated, and where the change is intended to be made, under 

such rules and regulations as the President may prescribe, to 

cause the lands thus situated to be surveyed in tracts of two 

acres in width, fronting on any river, bayou, lake, or water 

course, and running back the depth of forty acres.” 

The act of Congress approved May 29, 1830 (secs. 2412, 

2413, R. S.), provides for the fine and imprisonment of any 

person obstructing the survey of the public lands, and for the 

protection of surveyors, in the discharge of their official 

duties, by the United States marshal, with sufficient force, 

whenever necessary. 

The act of Congress approved April 5, 1832, directed the 

subdivision of the public lands into quarter quarters; that in 

every case of the division of a half quarter section the dividing line should run east and west; and that fractional sections 

should be subdivided under rules and regulations prescribed 

by the Secretary of the Treasury. Under the latter provision 

the Secretary directed that fractional sections containing 

less than 160 acres, or the residuary portion of a fractional 

section, after the subdivision into as many quarter quarter 

sections as it is susceptible of, may be subdivided into lots, 

each containing the quantity of a quarter quarter section, as 

nearly as practicable, by so laying down the line of subdivision that they shall be 20 chains wide, which distances are to 

be marked on the plat of subdivision, as are also the areas of 

the quarter quarters and residuary fractions. 

The last two acts above mentioned provided that the corners and contents of half-quarter and quarter-quarter sections should be ascertained, as nearly as possible, in the 

manner and on the principles directed and prescribed in the 

act of Congress approved February 11, 1805. 

597 
The act of Congress approved July 4,1836, provided for the 

reorganization of the General Land Office, and that the executive duties of said office “shall be subject to the supervision and control of the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office under the direction of the President of the United 

States.” The repealing clause is, “That such provisions of the 

act of the twenty-fifth of April, in the year one thousand eight 

hundred and twelve, entitled ‘An act for the establishment of 

a General Land Office in the Department of the Treasury,’ 

and of all acts amendatory thereof, as are inconsistent with 

the provisions of this act, be, and the same are hereby, repealed.” 

From the wording of this act it would appear that the 

control of the General Land Office was removed from the 

Treasury Department, and that the Commissioner reported 

directly to the President; but, as a matter of fact, the Secretary of the Treasuy still had supervisory control, for the act of 

Congress approved March 3,1849, by which the Department 

of the Interior was established, provided, “That the Secretary 

of the Interior shall perform all the duties in relation to the 

General Land Office, of supervision and appeal, now discharged by the Secretary of the Treasury * * *.” By this act 

the General Land Office was transferred to the Department 

of the Interior, where it still remains. 

In 1855 a manual of instructions to surveyors general was 

prepared, under the direction of the Commissioner of the 

General Land Office, by John M. Moore, then principal clerk 

of surveys, and the act of Congress approved May 30, 1862 

(sec. 2399, R. S.), provided “That the printed manual of instructions relating to the public surveys, prepared at the 

General Land Office, and bearing the date February twentysecond, eighteen hundred and fifty-five, the instructions of 

the Commissioner 

-9- 

of the General Land Office, and the special instructions of the 

surveyor general, when not in conflict with said printed 

manual or the instructions of said Commissioner, shall be 

taken and deemed to be a part of every contract for surveying 

the public lands of the United States.” 

The instructions contained in this volume are issued under 

the authority given in the clause in said act providing that 

“The instructions of the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office * * * shall be taken and deemed to be a part of every 

contract for surveying the public lands of the United States.” 

The following comprises so much of the general laws relating to the survey of the public domain as it is deemed necessary to incorporate in this volume, reference being made by 1 

chapter and section to the codification of the Public Land 

Laws, prepared pursuant to acts of Congress approved March 

3, 1879 and June 16, 1880, and by section number to the 

Revised Statutes of the United States. 

(The remainder ofpage 9, all ofpages 10 through 16 and most 

of page 17 are deleted. They contain the pertinent Revised 

Statutes, and forms of contracts.) 

SYSTEM OF RECTANGULAR SURVEYING. 

[See Plates I, 111, and IV.] 

1. Existing law requires that in general the public lands of 

the United States “shall be divided by north and south lines 

run according to the true meridian, and by others crossing 

them at right angles so as to form townships six miles 

square,” and that the corners of the townships thus surveyed 

“must be marked with progressive numbers from the beginning.” 

-18- 

Also, that the townships shall be subdivided into thirty-six 

sections, each of which shall contain six hundred and forty 

acres, as nearly as may be, by a system of two sets of parallel 

lines, one governed by true meridians and the other by parallels of latitude, the latter intersecting the former at right 

angles, at intervals of a mile. 

2. In the execution of the public surveys under existing 

law, it is apparent that the requirements that the lines of 

survey shall conform to true meridians, and that the 

townships shall be 6 miles square, taken together, involve a 

mathematical impossibility due to the converg of the meridians. 

Therefore, to conform the meridional township lines to the 

true meridians produces townships of a trapezoidal form 

which do not contain the precise area of 23,040 acres required 

by law, and which discrepancy increases with the increase in 

the convergency of the meridians, as the surveys attain the 

higher latitudes. 

In view of these facts, and under the provisions of section 2 

of the act of May 18,1796, that sections of a mile square shall 

contain 640 acres, as nearly as may be, and also under those of 

section 3 of the act of May 10, 1800, that “in all cases where 

the exterior lines of the townships, thus to be subdivided into 

sections and half sections, shall exceed, or shall not extend 6 

miles, the excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and 

added to or deducted from the western or northern ranges of 

sections or half sections in such township, according as the 

error may be in running lines from east to west, or from south 

to north; the sections and half sections bounded on the northern and western lines of such townships shall be sold as 

containing only the quantity expressed in the returns and 

plats, respectively, and all others as containing the complete 

legal quantity,” the public lands of the United States shall be 

surveyed under the methods of the system of rectangular 

surveying, which harmonizes the incompatibilities of the 

requirements of law and practice, as follows: 

First. The establishment of a principal meridian conforming to the true meridian, and, at right angles to it, a base line 

conforming to a parallel of latitude. 

Second. The establishment of standard parallels conforming to parallels of latitude, initiated from the principal meridian at intervals of 24 miles and extended east and west of 

the same. 

Third. The establishment of guide meridians conforming 

to true meridians, initiated upon the base line and successive 

standard parallels at intervals of 24 miles, resulting in tracts 

of land 24 miles square, as nearly as may be, which shall be 

598 
subsequently divided into tracts of land 6 miles square by two 

sets of lines, one conforming to true meridians, crossed by 

others conforming to parallels of latitude at intervals of 6 

miles, containing 23,040 acres, as nearly as may be, and 

designated townships. 

Such townships shall be subdivided into thirty-six tracts, 

called sections, each of which shall contain 640 acres, as 

nearly as may be, by two sets of parallel lines, one set parallel 

to a true meridian and the other conforming to parallels of 

latitude, mutually intersecting at intervals of 1 mile and at 

right angles, as nearly as may be. 

Any series of contiguous townships situated north and 

south of each other constitutes a range, while such a series 

situated in an east and west direction constitutes a tier. 

The accompanying diagram (Plate III), and the specimen 

field notes (page 1421, pertaining to the same, will serve to 

illustrate the method of running lines to form tracts of land 

24 miles square, as well as the 

-19- 

method of running out the exterior lines of townships, and 

the order and mode of subdividing townships will be found 

illustrated in the accompanying specimen field notes (page 

172), conforming with the township plat (Plate IV). The 

method here presented is designed to insure as full a compliance with all the requirements, meaning, and intent of the 

surveying laws as practicable. 

The section lines are surveyed from south to north’ and 

from east to west, in order to throw the excessor deficiency in 

measurement on the north and west sides of the township, as 

required by law. In case where a township has been partially 

surveyed, and it is necessary to complete the survey of the 

same, or where the character of the land is such that only the 

north or west portions of the township can be surveyed, this 

rule can not be strictly adhered to, but, in such cases, it will be 

departed from only so far as is absolutely necessary. It will 

also be necessary to depart from this rule where surveys close 

upon State or Territorial boundaries, or upon surveys extending from different meridians. 

3. The tiers of townships will be numbered, to the north or 

south, commencing with No. 1, at the base line; and the 

ranges of the townships, to the east or west, beginning with 

No. 1, at the principal meridian of the system. 

4. The thirty-six sections into which a township is subdivided are numbered, commencing with number one at the 

northeast angle of the township, and proeeding west to number six, and thence proceeding east to number twelve, and so 

on, alternately, to number thirty-six in the southeast angle. 

In all cases of surveys of fractional townships, the sections 

will bear the same numbers they would have if the township 

was full. 

5. Standard parallels shall be established at intervals of 

every 24 miles, north and south of the base line, and guide 

meridians at intervals of every 24 miles, east and west of the 

principal meridian; thus confining the errors resulting from 

convergence of meridians and inaccuracies in measurement 

within comparatively small areas. 

INSTRUMENTS. 

6. The surveys of the public lands of the United States, 

embracing the establishment of base lines, principal meridians, standard parallels, meander lines, and the subdivisions 

of townships, will be made with instruments provided with 

the accessories necessary to determine a direction with reference to the true meridian, independently of the magnetic 

needle. 

Burt’s improved solar compass, or a transit of approved 

construction, with or without solar attachment, will be used 

in all cases. When a transit without solar attachment is 

employed, Polaris observations and the retracements necessary to execute the work in accordance with existing law and 

the requirements of these instructions will be insisted upon. 

7. Deputies using instruments with solar apparatus will 

be required to make observations on the star Polaris at the 

beginning of every survey, and, whenever necessary, to test 

the accuracy of the solar apparatus. 

The observations required to test the adjustments of the 

solar apparatus will be made at the corner where the survey 

begins, or at the 

-20- 

camp of the deputy surveyor nearest said corner; and in all 

cases the deputy willfully state in the field notes the exact 

location of the observing station. 

Deputy surveyors will examine the adjustments of their 

instruments, and take the latitude daily, weather permitting, while runing all lines of the public surveys. They will 

make complete records in their field notes, under proper 

dates, of the making of all observations in compliance with 

these instructions, showing the character and condition of 

the instrument in use, and the precision attained in the 

survey, by comparing the direction of the line run with the 

meridian determined by observation. 

On every survey executed with solar instruments, the deputy will, at least once on each working day, record in his field 

notes the proper reading of the latitude arc; the declination of 

the sun, corrected for refraction, set off on the declination arc; 

and note the correct local mean time of his observation, 

which, for the record, will be taken at least two hours from 

apparent noon. 

8. The construction and adjustments of all surveying instruments used in surveying the public lands of the United 

States will be tested at least once a year, and oftener, if 

necessary, on the true meridian, established under the direction of the surveyor general of the district; and if found 

defective, the instruments shall undergo such repairs or modifications as may be found necessary to secure the closest 

possible approximation to accuracy and uniformity in all 

field work controlled by such instruments. 

A record will be made of such examinations, showing the 

number and character of the instrument, name of the maker, 

the quantity of instrumental error discovered by comparison, 

in either solar or magnetic apparatus, or both, and means 

taken to correct the same. The surveyor general will allow no 

1. See “Method of Subdividing,” p. 53. 

599 

2. The adjustments should be verified daily when the instrument is in use. 
surveys to be made until the instruments to be used therefor 

have been approved by him. 

9. The township and subdivision lines will usually be measured by a two-pole chain of 33 feet in length,3 consisting of 

50 links, each link being seven and ninety-two hundredths 

inches long. On uniform and level ground, however, the fourpole chain may be used. The measurements will, however, 

always be expressed in terms of the four-pole chain of 100 

links. The deputy surveyor shall provide himself with a measure of the standard chain kept at the office of the surveyor 

general, to be used by him as a field standard. The chain in 

use will be compared and adjusted with this field standard 

each working day, and such field standard will be returned to 

the surveyor general’s office for examination when the work 

is completed. 

3eputy surveyors will use eleven tally pins made of steel, 

not exceeding 14 inches in length, weighty enough toward 

the point to make them drop perpendicularly, and having a 

ring at the top, in which will be fixed a piece of red cloth, or 

something else of conspicuous color, to make them readily 

seen when stuck in the ground. 

PROCESS OF CHAINING. 

In measuring lines with a two-pole chain, five chains are 

called a “tally;” and in measuring lines with a four-pole 

chain, ten chains are called a rrtally,” because at that distance 

the last of the ten 

-21- 

tally pins with which the forward chainman sets out will 

have been stuck. He then cries “tally,” which cry is repeated 

by the other chainman, and each registers the distance by 

slipping a thimble, button, or ring of leather, or something of 

the kind, on a belt worn for that purpose, or by some other 

convenient method. The hind chainman then comes up, and 

having counted in the presence of his fellow the tally pins 

which he has taken up, so that both may be assured that none 

of the pins have been lost, he then takes the forward end of 

the chain, and proceeds to set the pins. Thus the chainmen 

alternately change places, each setting the pins that he has 

taken up, so that one is forward in all the odd, and the other in 

all the even tallies. Such procedure, it is believed, tends to 

insure accuracy in measurement, facilitates the recollection 

of the distances to objects on the line, and renders a mistally 

almost impossible. 

LEVELING THE CHAIN AND 

PLUMBING THE PINS. 

1. The length of every surveyed line will be ascertained by 

precise horizontal measurement, as nearly approximating to 

an air line as is possible in practice on the earth’s surface. 

This all-important object can only be attained by a rigid 

adherence to the three following observances: 

First. Ever keeping the chain drawn to its utmost degree of 

tension on even ground. 

Second. On uneven ground, keeping the chain not only 

stretched as aforesaid, but leveled. And when ascending and 

3. See R. S. 2395, sec. 99, par. 6 (page 11). 

descending steep ground, hills or mountains, the chain will 

have to be shortened to one-half or one-fourth its length (and 

sometimes more), in order accurately to obtain the true horizontal measure. 

Third. The careful plumbing of the tally pins, so as to 

attain precisely the spot where they should be stuck. The 

more uneven the surface, the greater the caution needed to 

set the pins. 

MARKING LINES. 

1. All lines on which are to b established the legal corner 

boundaries will be marked after this method, viz: Those trees 

which may be intersected by the line will have two chops or 

notches cut on the sides facing the line, without any other 

marks whatever. These are called “sight trees” or “line trees.” 

A sufficient number of other trees standing within 50 links of 

the line, on either side of it, will be blazed on two sides 

diagonally or quartering toward the line, in order to render 

the line conspicuous, and readily to be traced, the blazes to be 

opposite each other, coinciding in direction with the line 

where the trees stand very near it, and to approach nearer 

each other toward the line, the farther the line passes from 

the blazed trees. Due care will ever be taken to have the lines 

so well marked as to be readily followed, and to cut the blazes 

deep enough to leave recognizable scars as long as the trees 

stand. 

Where trees 2 inches or more in diameter are found, the 

required blazes will not be omitted. 

Bushes on or near the line should be bent at right angles 

therewith, and receive a blow of the ax at about the usual 

height of blazes from the ground sufficient to leave them in a 

bent position, but not to prevent their growth. 

-22- 

2. On trial or random lines, the trees will not be blazed, 

unless occasionally, from indispensable necessity, and then it 

will be done so guardedly as to prevent the possibility of 

confounding the marks of the trial line with the true. But 

bushes and limbs of trees may be lopped, and stakes set on the 

trial or random line, at every ten chains, to enable the surveyor on his return to follow and correct the trial line and 

establish therefrom the true line. To prevent confusion, the 

temporary stakes set on the trial or random line will be 

pulled up when the surveyor returns to establish the true 

line. 

INSUPERABLE OBJECTS ON LINEWITNESS POINTS. 

1. Under circumstances where the survey of a township or 

section line is obstructed by an impassable obstacle, such as a 

pond, swamp, or marsh (not meanderable), the line will be 

prolonged across such obstruction by making the necessary 

right-angle offsets (Plate IV, sec. 22); or, if such proceeding is 

impracticable, a traverse line will be run, or some proper 

trigonometical operation will be employed to locate the line 

on the opposite side of the obstruction; and in case the line, 

either meridional or latitudinal, thus regained, is recovered 

beyond the intervening obstacle, said line will be surveyed 

back to the margin of the obstruction and all the particulars, 

600 
in relation to the field operations, will be fully stated in the 

field notes. 

2. As a guide in alinement and measurement, at each 

point where the line intersects the margin of an obstacle, a 

witness point4 will be established, except when such point is 

less than 20 chains distant from the true point for a legal 

corner which falls in the obstruction, in which case a witness 

corner5 will be established at the intersection. (See Plate IV, 

section 22.) 

3. In a case where all the points of intersection with the 

obstacle to measurement fall more than 20 chains from the 

proper place for a legal corner in the obstruction, and a 

witness corner can be placed on the offset line within 20 

chains of the inaccessible corner point, such “witness corner” 

will be established. (See Plate IV, south boundary of section 

16.) 

ESTABLISHING CORNERS. 

1. To procure the faithful execution of this part of a surveyor’s duty, is a matter of the utmost importance. After true 

coursing and most exact measurements, the establishment of 

corners is the consummation of the field work. Therefore, if 

the corners be not perpetuated in a permanent and workmanlike manner, the principal object of surveying operations will 

not have been attained. 

2. The points at which corners will be established are fully 

stated in the several articles: “Base Lines,” “Principal Meridians,” “Standard Parallels,” etc., following the title “Initial 

Points,’’ page 50. 

3. The best marking tools adapted to the purpose will be 

provided for marking neatly, distinctly, and durably, all the 

letters and figures required to be made at corners, arabic 

figures being used exclusively; and the deputy will always 

have at hand the necessary implements for keeping his 

marking irons in perfect order. 

DESCRIPTIONS OF CORNERS. 

1. The form and language used in the following articles, in 

describing, for each one of the thirteen classes of corners, 

eight specific construc- 

-23- 

tions and markings, with the stated modifications in certain 

cases, will be carefully followed by deputy surveyors in their 

field notes; and their field work will strictly comply with the 

requirements of the descriptions. 

2. When pits and mounds of earth are made accessories to 

corners, the pits will always have a rectangular plan; while 

the mounds will have a conical form, with circular base; and 

in all cases both pits and mounds will have dimensions at 

least as great as those specified in the descriptions. Deputy 

surveyors will strictly adhere to these provisions, and no 

departure from the stated requirements will be permitted, 

either in instructions orpractice in the field. (See Plates V and 

VI) . 

4. See “Witness Points,” page 48. 

5. See “Witness Corners,” page 47. 

6. The direction of the mound, from the corner, will be stated whenever a mound is 

built. See “Miscellaneous,” par. 2, page 48. 

3. Referring to the numbered paragraphs, the corners described in “3” will be preferred to those described in either “1” 

or “2”, when corners are established in loose, sandy soil, and 

good bearing trees are available; under similar conditions, 

the corners described in “5” and “8” will be preferred to those 

described in “4” and “7”, respectively. 

4. The selection of the particular construction to be 

adopted in any case will be left, as a matter of course, to the 

judgment and discretion of the deputy, who will assign the 

greatest weight to the durability of the corner materials and 

permanency of the finished corners. 

5. The following abbreviations and contractions will be 

used in the descriptions of corners, viz: 

A. M. C. 

bdy. 

bdrs. 

bet. 

c. c. cor. cors. 

dist. 

E. 

ft . 

fracl. 

ins. 

diam. 

lks. 

M. C. 

for auxiliary meander 

corner. 

for boundary. 

for boundaries. 

for between. 

for closing corner. 

for corner, corners. 

for distance. 

for east. 

for foot or feet. 

for fractional. 

for inches. 

for diameter. 

for links. 

for meander corner. 

N. for north. 

?h sec. cor. for quarter section corner. 

R. for range. 

Rs. for ranges. 

sec., secs. for section, sections. 

S. M. C. 

s. c. for standard corner. 

sq. for square. 

S. for south. 

T. or Tp. for township. 

Ts. or Tps. for townships. 

W. for west. 

w. c. for witness corner. 

W. P. for witness point. 

for special meander corner. 

For “18 inches long, 7 inches wide, 6 inches thick,” in 

describing a corner stone, write “18 x 7 x 6 ins.,” being 

particular to always preserve the same order of length, 

width, and thickness (or depth), and use a similar form when 

describing pits. 

STANDARD TOWNSHIP CORNERS. 

[See Plates I11 and V.1 

When more than one-half of all the standard township and 

section corners on any 6 miles of a base line or standard 

parallel are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs I 

and 2, if the corners therein described are established, will be 

modified as follows: Strike out “S. C., on N.” After “marked”, 

insert the words: 

“S. C., 13 N. on N., 

22 E. on E., and 

21 E. on W. faces;” 

When under the conditions above specified the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the east pit and marked instead of the stone, and described as 

exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, page 00. 

(See Specimen Field Notes, pages 145 and 149.) 

-24- 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

- 

Set a - stone, x - x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of ( e. g.) Tps. 13 

N., Rs. 21 and 22 E., marked S. C. on N.; with 6 grooves on N., 

E., and W. faces; dug pits 30 x 24 x 12 ins., crosswise on each 

line, E. and W., 4 ft., and N. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raised a 

mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2V2 ft. high, N.6 of cor. 

601 
2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 13 

N., Rs. 21 and 22 E., marked S. C., on N.; with 6 grooves on N., 

E., and W. faces; and raised amound of stone7

, 2 ft. base, 1?h 

ft. high, N. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 13 

N., Rs. 21 and 22 E., marked S. C., on N.; with 6 grooves on N., 

E., and W. faces; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

- lks. dist., marked’ 

T. 13N.,R. 22E.,S.31,B.T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O w., - lks. dist., marked 

T. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 36, B. T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

standard cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 13 N., Rs. 22 and 23 E., marked 

S.C.,T.13N.onN., 

R. 23 E., S. 31 on E., and 

R. 22 E., S. 36 on W. faces; with 6 grooves on N., E., and W. 

faces; dugpits, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 4 ft., and N. of post, 8 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 

5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, N. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a-post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for standard cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 13 N., Rs. 22 and 23 E., marked 

S. C.,T. 13N.onN., 

R. 23 E., S. 31 on E., and 

R. 22 E., S. 36 on W. faces; with 6 grooves on N., E., and W. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. E., 

T. 13 N., R. 23 E., S. 31, B. T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. 

T. 13N.,R. 22E.,S.36,B.T. 

faces, from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

- 

W., 

lks. dist., marked 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 13 

N., Rs. 22 and 23 E.; dug pits, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., crosswise on 

each line, N., E., and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound 

of earth, 5 ft base, 2% ft. high, over deposit. 

-25- 

In E. pit drove a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

7. Mound of stone will consist of not less than four stones, and will be at least 1% ft. 

high, with 2 ft. base. 

8. All bearing trees, except those referring to quarter section corners, will be marked 

with the township, range, and section in which they stand. 

in the ground, marked 

S. C.,T. 13N.onN., 

R. 23 E., S. 31 on E., and 

R. 22 E., S. 36 on W. faces; with 6 grooves on N., E., and W. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, 

S.C.,T.13N.onN., 

R. 23 E., S. 31 on E., and 

R. 22 E., S. 36 on W. sides; with 6 notches on N., E., and W. 

sides; dugpits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, N., E., 

and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth around 

tree. 

faces. 

ins. diam., for standard cor. of (e. g.) 

Tps. 13 N., Rs. 22 and 23 E., I marked 

0. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A-, 

Tps. 13 N. , Rs. 22 and 23 E., I marked 

S.C.,T. 13N.onN., 

R. 23 E., S. 31 on E., and 

R. 22 E., S. 36 on W. sides; with 6 notches on N., E., and W. 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

ins. diam., for standard cor. of (e. g.) 

sides; from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 13 N., R. 23 E.,S. 31, B. T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. 

T. 13N.,R. 22E.,S.36,B.T. 

CLOSING TOWNSHIP CORNERS. 

- W., lks. dist., marked 

[See Plates V and VI.] 

When more than one-half of all the township corners are 

stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and 2, if the 

corners therein described are established, will be modified, as 

follows: Strike out “C. C., on S.;”. After “marked”, insert the 

words 

“C. C., 3 N. on S., 

2 W. on E., and 

3 W. on W. faces.” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the east pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described as 

exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, page 26. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 4 N., 

Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked C. C., on S.; with 6 grooves on S., E., 

and W. faces; dug pits, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., crosswise on each 

line, E. and W., 4 ft., and S. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raised a 

mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, S. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a stone, X x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 4 N., 

Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked C. C., on S.; with 6 grooves on S., E., 

and W. faces; and raised a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 11/2 ft. 

high, S. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

602 
-26- 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a stone, - x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 4 N., 

Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked C. C., on S.; with 6 grooves on S., E., 

and W. faces; from which: 

A-, ins. diam. bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T.4N.,R.2W.,S.6,B.T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.4N.,R.3W.,S.l,B.T. 

sides; dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, S., E., 

and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, around 

tree. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth, 

Set a ~ post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

closing cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 4N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked 

C. C.,T.4N. onS., 

R. 2 W., S. 6 on E., and 

R. 3 W., S. 1 on W. faces; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. 

faces; dugpits, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 4 ft., and S. of post 8 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 

5 ft. base, 2Y2 feet high, S. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for closing cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 4 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked 

C.C.,T.4N.onS., 

R. 2 W., S. 6 on E., and 

R. 3 W., S. 1 on W. faces; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. faces; 

from which 

E.,- 

lks. dist., marked 

, A--ins. diam., bears S. 

T.4N.,R.2W.,S.6,B.T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.4N.,R.3W.,S.l,B.T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of (e. g.) Tps 4 N., 

Rs. 2 and 3 W.; dug pits, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., crosswise on each 

line, S., E., and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of 

earth, 5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In E. pit, drove a stake 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

C.C.,T.4N.onS., 

R. 2 W., S. 6 on E., and 

R. 3 W., S. 1 on W. faces; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. 

faces. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

, AC.C.,T.4N.onS., 

R. 2 W., S. 6 on E., and 

R. 3 W., S. 1 on W. sides; with 6 notches on S., E., and W. 

ins. diam., for closing cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 

4 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., I marked 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, A- ins. diam., for closing cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 

4 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., I marked 

-27- 

C. C.,T.4N. onS., 

R. 2 W., S. 6 on E., and 

R. 3 W., S. 1 on W. sides; with 6 notches on S., E., and W. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

sides; from which 

lks. dist., marked 

T.4N.,R. 2 W.,S. 6,B.T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.4N.,R.3W.,S.l,B.T. 

9. Connecting lines. 

All closing township corners on base lines or standard 

parallels, will be connected, by course and distance, with the 

nearest standard corner thereon; closing corners on all other 

lines, will be connected, in a similar manner, with the nearest 

township, section, or quarter section corner, or mile or halfmile monument, as existing conditions may require. 

10. Relative positions of Closing Corners, Pits, Mounds, 

and Bearing Trees. 

Any line, which by intersection with another surveyed line, 

determines the place for a closing corner, will be called a 

closing line; then in general, the mound and one pit of a 

closing corner will be placed on such “closing line,” N., S., E., 

or W. of the closing corner, as prevailing conditions may 

require; while said mound and pit, with the two bearing trees 

(if used), will always be located on the same side of the line 

closed upon, and on which the other pits will be established, 

as directed in the foregoing descriptions, and illustrated on 

Plate VI. 

11. Positions and dimensions ofpits of Closing Corners on 

irregular boundaries. 

When a closing line intersects an irregular boundary at an 

angle less than 75”, and stone or post closing corners are 

established, the pit on the boundary adjoining the acute 

angle will be omitted, and the pit on the opposite side of the 

closing corner wil have its dimensions increased, as follows: 

For a closing township corner, the enlarged pit will measure 

42 x 36 x 12 ins.; for a closing section corner it will be 30 x 24 x 

12 ins. (See Plate VI, figs. 2 and 3.) 

12. Township or Section interfering Closing Corners. 

When two closing lines, at right angle to each other, intersect an irregular boundary at points less than 8 feet apart, 

and stone or post corners are established, the pits, that under 

ordinary circumstances would be placed on the boundary, 

603 
will be omitted, and the pits on the closing lines will have 

their dimensions increased to 36 x 36 x 12 ins. (See Plate VI, 

fig. 4, at a and b.) 

13. Positions and dimensions of Pits and Mounds of interfering Closing Corners. 

When, under the conditions stated in paragraphs 11 and 

12, the corners “Mound ofEarth, with Deposits and Stake in 

Pit” are established, the pits on the boundary line will be 

omitted when the distance between the closing corners is less 

than 10 feet and greater than 4 feet, and the dimensions of the 

pits on the closing lines will be increased as directed in said 

paragraphs. 

In case the distance between the closing corners is less than 

4 feet, one mound, 5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, will cover the 

deposits of both closing corners. (See Plate VI, fig. 4, at c, d, 

and e.) 

-28- 

CORNERS COMMON TO FOUR TOWNSHIPS. 

[See Plate V.1 

When more than one-half of all the corners of a township are 

stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and 2, if the 

corners therein described are established, will be modified, as 

follows: After “marked”, insert the words 

“3 N. on N. E., 

2 E. on S. E., 

2 N. on S. W., and 

3 E. on N. W. faces;” 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - stone, - x - x - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 

2 and 3 W., marked with 6 notches on each edge; dug pits, 24 x 

24 x 12 ins., on each line, N., E., and W., 4 ft., and S. of stone, 8 

ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, S. 

of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a - stone, x - x - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 

2 and 3 W., marked with 6 notches on each edge, and raised a 

mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 11/2 ft. high, S. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - stone, x - x - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 

2 and 3 W., marked with 6 notches on each edge; from which 

- 

ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

lks. dist., marked 

A -, 

T. 3 N., R. 2 W., S. 31, B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.2 W.,S.6,B.T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.3W.,S.l,B.T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N., R. 3 W., S. 36, B. T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked 

T. 3 N., S. 31 on N E., 

R.2W.,S.6onS.E., 

T. 2 N., S. 1 on S. W., and 

R. 3 W., S. 36 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on each edge; 

dug pits, 24 x 24 x 12 ins., on each line, N., E., and W., 4 ft., 

and S. of post, 8 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. 

base, 2% feet high, S. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a 

T.3N.,SS31onN.E., 

R.2W.,S. 6onS.E., 

T. 2 N., S. 1 on S. W., and 

post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked 

-29- 

R. 3 W., S. 36 on N. W., faces; with 6 notches on each edge; 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N.,R. 2 W., S. 31,B. T. 

, A--ins. diam., bears S. 

A -, 

E., - 

ins. diam., bears S. - a w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.2 W.,S.6,B.T. 

- lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.3W.,S.l,B.T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N., R. 3 W., S. 36, B. T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., 

Rs. 2 and 3 W.; dug pits 24 x 24 x 12 ins., on each line, N., S., 

E., and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. 

base, 2l/2 ft. high, over deposit. 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

In E. pit drove a 

T.3N.,S.31onN.E., 

R.2W.,S.6onS.E., 

T.2N.,S. 1onS. W.,and 

R. 3 W., S. 36 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on each edge. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

, AT.3N.,S.31onN.E., 

R.2W.,S.6onS.E., 

ins. diam., for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 

N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., I marked 

604 
T.2N.,S. 1onS. W.,and 

R. 3 W., S. 36 on N. W. sides; with 6 notches facing each 

cardinal point; dug pits, 24 x18 x 12 ins., on each line, N., S., 

E., and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth 

around tree. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, A-- ins. diam., for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 

T. 3 N., S. 31 on N. E., 

R.2W.,S.6onS.E., 

T. 2 N., S. 1 on S. W., and 

R. 3 W., S. 36 on N. W. sides; with 6 notches facing each 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., I marked 

cardinal point; from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N.,R. 2 W., S. 31,B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., ~ 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.2W.,S.6,B.T. 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 2N., R. 3 W.,S. 1, B.T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T.3N.,R.3W.,S.36,B.T. 

CORNERS COMMON TO TWO TOWNSHIPS ONLY. 

[See Plates V and IX.] 

When more than one-half of all the corners of a township are 

stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and 2, if the 

corners therein described are established, will be modified as 

follows: 

After “marked”, insert the words: 

“2 N. on S. W., and 

7 W. on N. W. faces.” 

-30- 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the south pit and marked instead of the stone, and described as 

exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, below. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mounds of Earth. 

Set a ~ stone, x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., R. 

7 W., on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., marked with 6 notches on 

N., and W. edges; dug pits 30 x 24 x 12 ins., on each line, N. 

and S., 4 ft., and W. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of 

earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, W. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a - stone, x - x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e.‘g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., R. 

7 W., on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., marked with 6 notches on 

N., and W. edges; and raised a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1Yz 

ft. high, W. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 

5 and 6 W., on N. bdy. Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W., marked with 6 notches 

on N. and W. edges; from which 

A , ins. diam., bears N. O E., - lks. 

dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.5.W.,S.6,B.T. 

A , - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 3N., R. 6 W., S. 36,B.T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 5 and 6W., on N. bdy. Tp. 2 N., 

R. 6 W., marked 

T. 2N., R. 5 W., S. 6onN. E.,and 

T. 3 N., R. 6 W., S. 36 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on N. 

and W. edges; dug pits, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., on each line, E. and 

W.,4ft.,andN. ofpost,8ft. dist.;andraisedamoundofearth, 

5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, N. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a-post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

forcor.of(e.g.)Tps.2and3N.,R.7W.,onW.bdy.Tp.3N.,R. 

6 W., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 7 W., S. 1 onS. W., and 

T. 3 N., R. 7 W., S. 36 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on N. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. W., lks. 

and W. edges; from which 

dist., marked 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. w., - T.2N.,R.7 W.,S. l,B.T. 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N., R. 7 W., S. 36, B. T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 N., R. 

7 W., on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W.; dug pits, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., on 

each line, N., E., and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound 

of earth, 5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In S. pit drove a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in 

the ground, marked 

T. 2 N., R. 7 W., S. 1 on S. W., and 

T. 2 N., R. 7 W., S. 36 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on N. 

and W. edges. 

-31- 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

, AT. 2N.,R. 5 W. onN. E., and 

T. 3 N., R. 6 W. on N. W. sides; with 6 notches facing N. and 

W.; dug pits 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, N., E., 

and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, around 

tree. 

ins. diam., for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 

N., Rs. 5 and 6 W., on N. bdy. Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W., I marked 

605 
8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, AT. 2 N., R. 7 W., S. 1 on S. W., and 

T. 3 N., R. 7 W., S. 36 on N. W., sides; with 6 notches facing 

ins. diam., for cor. of (e. g.) Tps. 2 and 3 

N., R. 7 W., on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., I marked 

N. and W.; from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

A -, ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

T.2N.,R.7W.,S.l,B.T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N.,R. 7 W., S. 36, B.T. 

-32- 

CORNERS REFERRING TO ONE TOWNSHIP ONLY. 

[See Plates V and IX.] 

When more than one-half of all corners of a township are 

stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and 2, if the 

corners therein described are established, will be modified, as 

follows: After “marked”, insert the words: 

“2 N., 6 W. on S. W. face.” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the south pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described 

as exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, page 32. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a stone, x - x ~ ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for N. E. cor. of (e. g.) J’p. 2 N., R. 6 

W., marked with 6 notches on S. and W. edges; dug pits, 36 x 

36 x 12 ins., on each line, S. and W. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; and 

raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, S. W. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for N. E. cor. of (e. g.) Tp. 2 N., R. 6 

W., marked with 6 notches on S. and W. edges; and raised a 

mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, S. W. of cor. Pits 

impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Tree. 

Set a stone, X x - ins., 

-ins.inthegroundforN.E.cor.of(e.g.)Tp.2N.,R.6 

W., marked with 6 notches on S. and W. edges; from which 

- 

A -9 ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.6W.,S. 1,B.T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

N. E. cor. of (e. g.) Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W., marked 

T.2N.,R.5W.,S.6onN.E., 

S. 6 on S. E., 

T. 2 N., R. 6 W., S. 1 on S. W., and 

S. 6 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on S. and W. edges; dug 

pits, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., on each line, S. and W. ofpost, 8 ft. dist.; 

and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, S. W. of 

cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Tree. 

Set a 

T. 3 N., R. 6 W., S. 31 on N. E., 

S. 1 on S. E., 

T. 2 N., R. 7 W., S. 1 on S. W., and 

post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for S. W. cor. of (e. g.) Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., marked 

S. 1 on N. W., faces; with 6 notches on N. and E. edges; from 

which 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.3N.,R.6W.,S.31,B.T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked st one (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for s. W. cor. of (e. g.) T. 3 N., R. 6 

W.; dug pits, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., on each line, N. and E. of cor., 5 

ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, 

over deposit. 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

In E. pit drove a 

T.3N.,R.6W.,S.31onN.E., 

S. 1 on S. E., 

T. 2N.,R. 7 W., S. 1 onS. W., and 

S. 1 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on N. and E. edges. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

, AT. 2 N., R. 6 W., S. 31 on N. E., 

S. 1 on S. E., 

T. 2 N., R. 7 W., S 1 on S. W., and 

S. 1 on N. W. sides; with 6 notches facing N. and E.; dug 

pits, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, N. and E. of cor., 

5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, around tree. 

ins. diam., for S. W. cor. of (e. g.) Tp. 3 

N., R. 6 W., I marked 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Tree. 

, AS. 6 on N. E., 

T.3N.,R.5W.S.6onS.E., 

S. 6 on S. W., and 

T. 4 N., R. 6 W., S. 36 on N. W. sides; with 6 notches facing 

N. and W.; from which 

A ins. diam., bears N. W., lks. 

dist., marked 

ins. diam., for S. E. cor. of (e. g.) Tp. 4 

N., R. 6 W., I marked 

T. 2 N., R. 6 W., S. 36, B. T. 

606 
STANDARD SECTION CORNERS. T. 13N., R. 21 E.,S. 34,B. T 

[See Plates I11 and V.1 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - stone, ~ x - x - ins. in the 

ground, for standard cor. of (e. g.) secs. 31 and 32, marked S. 

C., on N.; with 5 grooves on E., and 1 groove on W. faces; dug 

pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on 

-33- 

each line, E. and W., 3 ft., and N. of stone, 7 ft. dist.; and 

raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a - stone, x - x - ins., 

~ ins. in the ground, for stand. cor. of (e. g.) secs. 35 and 

36, marked S. C., on N.; with 1 groove on, E., and 5 grooves on 

W. faces; and raised a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, 

N. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - stone, x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of (e. g.) secs. 33 

and 34, marked S. C., on N.; with 3 grooves on E. and W. faces; 

from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 34, B. T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 33, B. T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

standard cor. of (e. g.) secs. 32 and 33, marked 

S.C.,T.13N.,R.21E.onN., 

S. 33 on E., and 

S. 32 on W. faces; with 4 grooves on E., and 2 grooves on W. 

faces; dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 3 ft., and N. ofpost, 7 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 

4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

S.C.,T.13N.,R.21onN., 

S. 35 on E., and 

S. 34 on W. faces; with two grooves on E., and 4 grooves on 

W. faces; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

- lks. dist., marked 

for standard cor. of (e. g.) secs. 34 and 35, marked 

T. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 35, B. T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of (e. g.) secs. 33 

and 34; dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, N., 

E., and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. 

base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

In E. pit drove a 

S.C.,T. 13N.,R.22E.onN., 

S. 34 on E., and 

S. 33 on W. faces; with 3 grooves on E. and W. faces. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A 

S.C.,T.13N.,R.22E.onN., 

S. 32 on E., and 

S. 31 on W. sides; with 5 notches on E., and 1 notch on W. 

ins. diam., for standard cor. of (e. g.) 

secs. 31 and 32, I marked 

sides; 

-34- 

dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N., E., and W. of Cor., 4 ft. dist.; and 

raised a mound of earth, around tree. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A-, 

S.C.,T. 13N.,R. 22E.onN., 

S. 36 on E., and 

S. 35 on W. sides; with 1 notch on E., and 5 notches on W. 

sides; from which 

- 

A ins. diam., bears N. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 13N.,R. 22E.,S.36,B.T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 13N.,R. 22E.,S.35,B.T. 

CLOSING SECTION CORNERS. 

ins. diam., for standard cor. of (e. g.) 

secs. 35 and 36, I marked 

[See Plates V and VI.] 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

- 

Set a stone, X x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of (e. g.) secs. 1 and 

2, marked C. C., on S.; with 1 groove on E., and 5 grooves on 

W. faces; dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins. crosswise on each line, E. 

and W., 3 ft., and S. of stone, 7 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, S. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of (e. g.) secs. 3 and 

4, marked C. C., on S.; with 3 grooves on E. and W. faces; and 

raised a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, S. of cor. Pits 

impracticable. 

607 
3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a stone, X x - ins. 

-ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of (e. g.) secs. 1 and 

2, marked C. C., on S.; with 1 groove on E., and 5 grooves on 

and W. faces; from which 

lks. dist., marked 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. “E.,- 

T.4N.,R.3W.,S.l,B.T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T.4N.,R.3 W.,S.2,B.T. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

and 

, A2, I marked 

C. C.,T. 4N.,R. 3 W. onS., 

S. 1 on E., and 

S. 2 on W. sides; with 1 notch on E., and 5 notches on W. 

sides; from which 

- 

A -, - ins., diam., bears S. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

ins. diam., for closing cor. (e. g.) secs. 1 

T.4N.,R.3W.,S.l,B.T. 

A -, ins. diam., bears S.-O W., 

-1ks. dist., marked 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. T.4N.,R.3W.,S.2,B.T. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

closing cor. of (e. g.) secs. 1 and 2, marked 

C. C.,T. 4N.,R. 3 W. onS., 

S. 1 on E., and 

S. 2 on W. faces; with 1 groove on E., and 5 grooves on W. 

faces; dugpits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 3 ft., and S. of post, 7 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 

4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, S. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a 

C. C.,T.4N.,R.3 W.onS., 

S. 1 on E., and 

post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for closing cor. of (e. g.) secs. 1 and 2, marked 

-35- 

S. 2 on W. faces; with 1 groove on E., and 5 grooves on W. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - faces; from which 

lks. dist., marked 

T.4N.,R.3 W.,S. l,B.T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T.4N.,R.3W.,S.2,B.T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of (e. g.) secs. 3 and 

4; dug pits, 24 x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, S., E., and 

W. of cor., 4 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 

ft. high, over deposit. 

In E. pit drove a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

C. C., T. 4 N., R. 3 W. on S., 

S. 3. on E., and 

S. 4. on W. faces; with 3 grooves on E. and W. faces. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth 

, AC.C.,T.4N.,R.3W.onS., 

S. 1 on E., and S. 2 on W. sides; with 1 notch on E., and 5 

notches on W. sides; dugpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., S., E., and W. of 

cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth around tree. 

ins. diam., for closing cor. of (e. g.) secs. 

1 and 2, I marked 

9. All closing section corners, or base lines or standard 

parallels, will be connected by course and distant with the 

nearest standard corner thereon. (See paragraphs 5 and 9, 

page 55.) 

CORNERS COMMON TO FOUR SECTIONS. 

[See Plates V and IX.1 

When more than one-half of all the corners in a township are 

stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and corners 

therein described are established for cor. ofsecs. 15,16,21 and 

22, will be modified as follows: after “marked,” insert the 

words 

“4 N. on N.E., and 

3 W. on S.E. face.” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established a stake may be driven in 

the southeast pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described as exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, page 

3 7. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

- 

Set a - stone, - x - x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 14, 15, 22, 

and 23 [Tp. 4 N., R. 3 W.]’, marked with 3 notches on S. 

-36- 

and E. edges; dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., in each sec. 5% ft. 

dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of 

cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 14, 15, 22, 

and 23 [Tp. 4 N., R. 3 w.19, marked with 3 notches on S. and E. 

edges; and raised a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. 

of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

9. When writing these descriptions in the field notes, the angular brackets and the 

enclosed letters and figures will be omitted. 

608 
Set a - stone, - x - x ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 9,10,15, and 

16, marked with 4 notches on S., and 3 notches on E. edges; 

from which 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 2 W., S. 10, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 2 W., S. 15,B. T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. - O w., - lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 2 W., S. 16, B. T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. Po W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N.,R. 2 W., S. 9, B. T. 

4. Post, with Pit and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of (e. g.) secs. 15, 16, 21, and 22, marked 

T.2N.,S. 15onN.E., 

R. 2 W., S. 22 on S. E., 

S. 21 on S. W., and 

S. 16 on N. W. faces with 3 notches on S. and E. edges; dug 

pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., in each sec., 5Y2 ft. dist.; and raised a 

mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a 

T.2N.,S.25onN.E., 

R.2W.,S.36onS.E., 

S. 35 on S. W., and 

S. 26 on N. W. faces; with 1 notch on S. and E. edges; from 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground 

for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 25, 26, 35 and 36, marked 

which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 2 W., S. 25,B. T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 2 W., S. 36, B. T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

___ lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 2 W., S. 35, B. T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. Po W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 2 W., S. 26, B. T. 

6. Mound, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 25,26,35 and 

36; dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., in each sec., 4 ft. dist.; and 

raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

-37- 

In S. E. pit drove a 

in the ground, marked 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

T.2N.,S.25onN.E., 

R.2W.,S.36onS.E., 

S. 35 on S. W., and 

S. 26 on N. W. faces; with 1 notch on S. and E. edges. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

, AT.2N.,S.29onN.E., 

R.2W.,S.32onS.E., 

S. 31 on S. W., and 

S. 30 on N. W. sides; with 1 notch on S., and 5 notches on E. 

sides; dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., in each sec., 5 ft. dist.; and 

raised a mound of earth around tree. 

ins. diam., for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 29,30, 

31, and 32, I marked 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A-, and 8, I marked 

T.2N.,S.5onN.E., 

R.2W.,S.8onS.E., 

S. 7 on S. W., and S. 6 on N. W. sides; with 5 notches on S. 

and E. sides; from which 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

lks. dist., marked 

ins. diam., for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 5,6,7, 

T.2N.,R.2W.,S.5,B.T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.2W.,S.&B.T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.2W.,S.7,B.T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T.2N.,R.2W.,S.6,B.T. 

SECTION CORNERS COMMON TO TWO SECTIONS 

ONLY. 

[See Plates V and VI.] 

When more than one-half of all the corners in a township are 

stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and 2, if the 

corners therein described are established near cor. of secs. 15, 

16, 21, and 22, will be modified, as follows: 

After “marked”, insert the words 

“3 N. on S. W., and 

7 W. on N. W. faces;”. 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the southwest pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described as exemplified in the last clause ofparagraph 6,page 

38. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.)” secs. 25 and 36 

[Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W.],ll marked with 5 notches on N., and 1 notch 

on S. edges; dug pits, 24 x 24 x 12 ins. in each sec., 6 ft. dist.; 

and raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

609 
-38- sides; dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., in each sec., 5 ft. dist.; and 

raised a mound of earth around tree. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a - stone, X x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e.g.)12 secs. 15 and 22 

[Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W.l,I1 marked with 3 

notches on N., and S. edges; and raised a mound of stone, 2 ft. 

base, 1% ft. high, W. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - stone, X x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e.g.)13 secs. 28 and 29, 

marked with 4 notches on E. edge; from which 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N., R. 7 W., S. 28, B. T. 

- 

A ins. diam., bears N. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N., R. 7 W., S. 29, B. T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of (e. g.) 33 and 34,14 marked 

T. 2 N., S. 34 on N. E., and 

R. 6 W., S. 33 on N. W. faces; with three notches on E. and 

W. edges; dug pits, 24 x 24 x 12 ins., in each sec., 6 ft. dist, and 

raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees: 

Set a -post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

T. 3 N., S. 25 on S. W., and 

R. 5 W., S. 24 on N. W. faces; with 4 notches on N., and 2 

notches on S. edges; from which 

- 

A-, 

lks. dist., marked 

for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 24 and 25,15 marked 

ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

T. 3 N., R. 5 W., S. 25, B. T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N., R. 5 W., S. 24, B. T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 13 and 24;16 

dug pits 24 x 24 x 12 ins., in each sec., 4 ft. dist.; and raised a 

mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 

ins. in the ground, marked 

In S. W. pit drove a 

T. 2 N., S. 24 on S. W., and 

R. 6 W., S. 13 on N. W. faces, with 3 notches on N. and S. 

edges. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, 25,17 I marked 

T. 3 N., S. 25 on S. W. and 

R. 6 W., S. 24 on N. W. sides; with 4 notches on N. and S. 

ins. diam., for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 24 and 

-39- 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

27,” 

, AI marked 

T. 3 N., S. 27 on S. W., and 

R. 7 W., S. 22 on N. W. sides; with 4 notches on N., and 2 

notches on S. sides; from which 

- 

A 

lks. dist., marked 

ins. diam., for cor. of (e. g.) secs. 22 and 

ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

T. 3 N., R. 7 W., S. 27, B. T. 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 3 N., R. 7 W., S. 22, B. T. 

SECTION CORNERS REFERRING TO ONE 

SECTION ONLY. 

[See Plates V and IX.] 

When more than one-half of all corners in a township are 

stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and 2, if the 

corners therein described, are established near the place for 

cor. of secs. 15, 16, 21, and 22, will be modified, as follows: 

After “marked”, insert the words: 

“2 N., 5 W. on N. E. face;” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described as 

exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, page 40. 

1. Stone, with Pit and Mound of Earth. 

Set a stone, x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for S. W. cor. of (e. g.) sec. 12 [Tp. 2 

N., R. 5 W.1,l8 marked with 1 notch on E. edge; dug a pit, 36 x 

36 x 12 ins., in the sec., 8 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 

4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. E. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a - stone, - x - x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for S. W. cor. of (e. g.) sec. 12 [Tp. 2 

10. The corner established on the range line and described in paragraph 1, will have 

notches to indicate the distances to the N. E. and S. E. corners ofthe township. See plate 

V, fig. 18; and Plate IX, Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W. 

11. When writing descriptions of corners similar to those described in paragraphs 1 and 

2, the angular brackets and the inclosed letters and figures, will be omitted. 

12. The corner established on a sectional guide meridian and described in paragraph 2, 

will have notches like the corresponding comer on a range line. See Plate IX, Tp. 3 N., R. 

7 w. 

13. See Plate IX, N. bdy., sec. 32, Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W. 

14. See Plate IX, Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W. 

15. Tp. 3 N., R. 5 W. 

16. Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W. 

17. On range line; see Plate IX; Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W. 

18. On sectional guide meridian; see Plate IX, Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W. 

610 
N., R. 5 W.1," marked with 1 notch on E. edge; and raised a 

mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 11/2 ft. high, N. E. of cor. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Tree. 

- 

Set a - stone, x - x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for S. W. cor. of (e. g.) see. 12, 

marked with 1 notch on E. edge; from which 

A ins. diam., bears N. E., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 5 W., S. 12, B. T. 

4. Post, with Pit and Mound of Earth. 

Set a post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

N. W. cor. of (e. g.) sec. 

T. 3 N., S. 9 on N. E. 

R. 5 W., S. 10 on S. E. 

S. 9 on S. W., and 

S. 9 on N. W. faces; with 5 notches on S. and 3 notches on E. 

edges; dug a pit, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., in the see., 8 ft. dist.; and 

raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, S. E. of cor. 

marked 

-40- 

5. Post, with Bearing Tree. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

T.2N.,S. 12onN.E., 

R. 5 W., S. 13 on S. E., 

S. 13 on S. W., and 

S. 13 on N. W. faces; with 1 notch on E. edge; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

for S. W. cor. of (e. g.) see. 12;21 marked 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 2 N., R. 5 W., S. 12, B. T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit and Stake in pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for N. W. cor. of (e. g.) see. 

dug a pit, 36 x 36 x 12 ins. in the see., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a 

mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In the pit drove a - stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

T.3N.,S.9onN.E., 

R.5W.,S. 10onS.E., 

S. 9 on S. W., and 

S. 9 on N. W. faces; with 5 notches on S., and 3 notches on E. 

edges. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A -, - ins. diam., for S. W. cor. of (e. g.) see. 

T.2N.,S. 12onN.E., 

R.5W.,S. 13onS.E., 

S. 13 on S. W., and 

S. 13 on N. W. sides, with 1 notch on E. side; dug a pit, 24 x 

24 x 12 ins., in the see., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth 

around tree. 

12,21 I marked 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A-, 

T.3N.,S.9onN.E., 

R.5W.,S, 10onS.E., 

S. 9 on S. W., and 

S. 9 on N. W., sides; with 5 notches on S., and 3 notches on 

E. sides; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

ins. diam., for N. W. cor. of (e. g.) sec. 10, 

I marked 

T.3N.,R.5W.,S.lO,B.T. 

QUARTER SECTION CORNERS. 

[See Plates V and VI.] 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - stone, - x x - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for l/4 see. cor. [(e. g.) bet. secs. 14 

and 231,22 marked Y4, on N. face; dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. 

and W. of stone, 3 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 3?h ft. 

base, 1% ft. high, N. of cor. 

-41- 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a stone, x - x ~ ins., 

~ ins. in the ground, for l/4 see. cor. [(e. g.) bet. secs. 14 

and 151,22 marked 1/4 on W. face; and raised a mound of stone, 

2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

- 

Set a - stone, x - x - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for 1/2 see. cor. [(e. g.) bet. secs. 16 

and 171," marked ?42, on W. face; from which 

- 

A ins. diam., bears N. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

Y4 S., B. T. 

A 

l/4 S., B. T. 

- 

ins. diam., bears N. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

l/4 sec. cor. [(e. g.) bet. secs. 4 and 91,22 marked l/4 S., on N. face; 

dug pits 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and W. of post, 3 ft. dist.; and 

raised a mound of earth, 3% ft. base, 1% ft. high, N. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

15. Tp. 3 N., R. 5 W. 

19. When writing descriptions of corners similar to those described in paragraphs 1 and 

2, the angular brackets and the included letters and figures will be omitted. See Plate 

IX. 

20. See Plate IX; Tp. 3 N., R. 5 W. 

21. 

22. When writing descriptions of "4 section corners, the angular brackets and the 

letters and figures they inclose, will be omitted. See paragraphs 9,10, and 11, pages 41, 

42. 

See Plate IX; Tp. 2 N., R. 5 W. 

611 
Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for 1/4 sec. cor. [(e. g.) bet. secs. 21 and 221,22 marked 1/4 S., on 

W. face; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., ~ 

lks. dist., marked 

1/4 S., B. T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. 

1/4 S., B. T. 

- W., lks. dist., marked 

6. Mound, with Deposit and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for l/4 sec. cor. [(e. g.) bet. secs. 21 

and 281;22 dug pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and W. of cor., 4 ft. 

dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 3% ft. base, 1Yz ft. high, 

over deposit. 

In E. pit drove a - stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

1/4 S. on N. face. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A -, - ins. diam., for 1/4 sec. cor. [(e. g.) bet. 

secs. 7 and 81,22 I marked l/4 S., on W. side; dug pits, 18 x 18 x 

12 ins., N. and S. of cor., 4 ft. dist.; and raised amound of earth 

around tree. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A, - ins. diam., for 1/4 sec. cor. [(e. g.) bet. 

A -, ~ ins. diam., bears N. - O w., 

1/4 S., B. T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. 

l/4 S., B. T. 

secs. 20 and 291,22 I marked 1/4 S., on N. side; from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

- 

W., 

lks. dist., marked 

9. Pits and Mounds of Quarter Section Corners. 

On meridional lines, the pits will be dug N. and S., and the 

mound will be placed on the west side of the corner; on latitudinal lines, the pits will be located E. and W., and the mound 

will be built on the north side of the corner. See Plate VI. 

-42- 

10. Markings on Quarter Section Corners. 

On meridional lines, the markings will be placed on the 

west side and on latitudinal lines, on the north side of the 

stone, post, or other corner. 

11. Stakes in Pits of Quarter Section Corners. 

On meridional lines the stakes will be driven in the S. pit, 

and on latitudinal lines, in the E. pit. 

STANDARD QUARTER SECTION CORNERS. 

[See Plate V and VI.1 

All standard quarter section corners, on base lines or standard parallels, will have the letters S. C. (for standard corner), precede the marking ?/4” or “1/4 S.”, as the case may be; 

such corners will be established in all other respects like 

other quarter section corners. 

When bearing trees are described for standard quarter 

section corners, each tree will be marked, S. C., 1/4 S., B. T. 

QUARTER SECTION CORNERS COMMON TO TWO 

QUARTERS OF ONE 

SECTION. 

These corners will be similar in all respects to those that 

are common to four quarters of two sections. See notes on 

Plates VII and VIII. 

MEANDER CORNERS. 

[See Plates V and VI.] 

1. Stone, with Pit and Mound of Earth. 

- 

Set a - stone, - x - x - ins. 

ins. in the ground for meander cor. of (e. g.) fracl. 

secs. 26 and 35,23 marked 

M. C. on E. face; with 1 groove on S. face; dug a~it,~~ 36 x 36 

X 12 ins., 8 ft. W. of stone; and raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. 

base, 2 ft. high, W. of CO~.~~ 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a - stone, - x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for meander cor. of (e. g.) fracl. 

secs. 17 and 18,24 marked 

M. C. on S. face; with 5 grooves on E. face; and raised a 

mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, N. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a stone x - x - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for meander cor. of (e. g.) fracl. 

secs. 26 and 35, with 1 groove on S. face;24 marked: 

M. C. on W. face; from which 

- 

A -, ins., diam., bears N. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 15N.,R.20E.,S.26,M.C.B.T. 

A-, ins., diam., bears S. C. - 

lks., dist., marked 

T. 15M.,R.20E.,S.35,M.C.B.T. 

4. Post, with Pit and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

meander cor. of (e. g.) fracl. secs. 19 and 20,24 marked 

M. C. on N., 

22. When writing descriptions of ‘/4 section corners, the angular brackets and the 

letters and figures they inclose, will be omitted. See paragraphs 9,10, and 11, pages 41, 

42. 

23. See page 56, and paragraphs 9 and 10, pages 43, 44. 

24. See Plate IV, and pages 192, 209 and 210. 

612 

-43- 

T. 15 N. on S., 

R. 20 E., S. 20 on E., and 

S. 19 on W. faces; dug a pit, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., 8 ft. S. of post; 

and raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, S. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a-post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

M. C. on N., 

T. 15 N. on S., 

R. 20 E., S. 25 on E., and 

S. 26 on W. faces; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E.,- 

for meander cor. of (e. g.) fracl. secs. 25 and 26,25 marked 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 15N.,R.20E.,S.25,M.C.B.T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 15N.,R.20E.,S.26,M. C.B.T. 

6. Mound with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 12 ins. in the ground, for meander cor. of (e. g.) fracl. 

secs. 25 and 26;25 dug a pit, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., 5 ft. N. of cor.; 

and raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In the pit drove a - stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

M. C. on S., 

T. 15 N. on N., 

R. 20 E., S. 26 on W., and 

S. 25 on E. faces. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A, -

M. C. on W., 

T. 15 N. on E., 

R. 20 E., S. 17 on N., and 

S. 20 on S. sides dug a pit, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., 8 ft. E. of tree; 

and raised a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, E. of cor. 

ins. diam., for meander cor. of (e. g.) 

fracl. secs. 17 and 20,25 I marked 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, AS. M. C. on N., 

T. 15 N. on S., 

R. 20 E., S. 33 on E., and 

S. 33 on W. sides; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E. ~ 

ins. diam., for a special meander cor. of 

(e. g.) fracl. E. and W. halves of sec. 33,26 I marked 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 15N.,R.20E.,S.33,S.M.C.B.T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 15N.,R.20E.,S.33,S.M.C.B.T. 

9. Pits and Mounds of Meander Corners. 

When a pit is dug as an accessory to a meander corner, it 

will be located 8 feet from such corner (except as otherwise 

provided for in paragraph 61, on the side opposite the stream 

or lake meandered; 

-44- 

while the mound will be placed midway between the corner 

and nearest side of the pit. 

10. Markings on Meander Corners. 

On all meander corners, the letters “M. C.” (for meander 

corner) will be cut into the side facing the stream or lake to be 

meandered. On post or tree meander corners, within 

township exteriors, additional marks will be placed, as follows: the township number will be marked on the side opposite “M. C.”; the proper range and section number will be 

placed on the right-hand side (when looking along line toward the stream or lake), and the appropriate section number 

on the opposite side. 

All meander corners on base lines or standard parallels 

will be marked S. C. on the north side or face. 

On principal or guide meridians, and on meridional 

township lines, the letters “M. C.” will be placed as above 

directed; the township number will be marked on the opposite 

side; while the proper range and section numbers will be 

marked on the sides facing the east and west cardinal points. 

On base lines or standard parallels and on latitudinal 

township lines, the township numbers will be marked on the 

sides facing the north and south cardinal points; while the 

range and section numbers will be placed on the side opposite 

the marking “M. C.” 

In all the markings provided for in this paragraph, the 

numbers indicating townships, ranges, and sections, will be 

preceded by the initial letters “T.” “R.” and “S.”, respectively. 

11. Descriptions will be modified in certain cases. 

When a tree is marked for a regular meander corner, the 

descriptions in paragraphs 8 will be modified, as follows: 

strike out “special”; in place of “E. and W. halves of sec. 33,” 

write “secs. - and -,”; and omit the letter “S.”, 

preceding “M. C.”, in the marking on corner and bearing 

trees. 

The descriptions in paragraphs 1 to 7, inclusive, will be 

modified to describe special meander corners, as illustrated 

in paragraph 8, by writing “special” before meander cor. and 

“S.” before “M. C.,” when conditions require the change. 

12. Special Meander Corners and Auxiliary Meander CorRegular meander corners are those established on standard, township, or section lines. See Plate V, for plans of 

meander corners, and the specimen plat, Plate IV, sections 

17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 26, and 35, for locations of the meander 

corners described in Specimen Field Notes, pages 208 to 210. 

The meander corners, on lines of legal subdivisions, other 

ners. 

25. See Plate IV and page 188. 

26. See Plate IV, and page 201. See paragraphs 11 and 12, page 44, and footnote, page 

51. 

614 
than standard, township, or section lines, will be designated 

special meander corners, (e. g.) those located on the Specimen 

Plat, Plate IV, in section 33. 

Meander corners, not on a line belonging to the system of 

rectangular surveying, will be called auxiliary meander corners, (e. g.) the meander corner on Diamond Rock, in section 

18. 

13. Meander Corners on unsafe ground will be witnessed, 

When a Meander Corner falls at a point where prevailing 

conditions would insure its destruction by natural causes, a 

witness corner to such meander corner will be established, as 

provided for in the article “Witness Corners”, page 47. 

1. 

-45- 

CORNERS ON RESERVATION OR OTHER 

BOUNDARIES NOT CONFORMING TO THE 

SYSTEM OF RECTANGULAR SURVEYING. 

[See Plate VI.] 

Stone, with Mound of Earth. 

. 27 Set a - stone, 

17 M. on S., 

N. P. on E., and 

P. L. on W. faces; dug pits, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., E. and W. of 

stone, 4 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2?42 ft. 

high, S. of cor. 

x - x - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for the (e. g.) 17 mile cor., marked 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a - stone, - x - x - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for the (e. g.) 38 mile cor., marked 

38 M. on N. E., 

N. P. on N. W., and 

P. L. on S. E. faces; and raised a mound of stone, 3 ft. base, 2 

. 27 

ft. N. E. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - stone, - x - x - ins., 

 ins. in the ground, for the (e. g.) 35 mile cor., marked 

35 M. on E., 

N. P. on N., and 

8 W on S. faces; from which 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

* 27 

- lks. dist., marked 

N.P.I.R.,35M.B.T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears S. - O E.,29 

lks. dist., marked 

T.6N.,R.8W.,S.g735M.B.T. 

A 29 

- 

-, - ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 6 N., R. 8 W., S. 8, 35 M. B. T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

N. P. I. R., 35 M. B. T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 5 ins. ~q.,~’ with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

the (e. g.) 17 mile cor., marked 

17 M. on S., 

N. P. I. R. on E., and 

P. L. on W. faces; dug pits, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., E. and W. of 

post, 4 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2?42 ft. 

high, S. of cor. 

-46- 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 5 ins. ~q.,~’ 24 ins. in the 

35 M. on E., 

N. P. I. R. on N., and 

T. 6 N., R. 8 W., S. 9, on S.; from which 

A -, 

ground, for the (e. g.) 35 mile cor., marked 

ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

- lks. dist., marked 

N.P.I.R.,35M.B.T. 

A -, ins. diam., bears S. - O E.,29 

- lks. dist., marked 

T, 6 N., R. 8 W., S. 9, 35 M. B. T. 

A ~, ins. diam., bears S. - O w.,29 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 6 N., R. 8 W., S. 8, 35 M. B. T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

N. P. I. R., 35 M. B. T. 

6. Mound, with Deposit and Stake in Pit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for the (e. g.) 33 mile cor.; dugpits, 

36 x 36 x 12 ins., N. E. and S. W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raised a 

mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, over deposit. 

In N. E. pit drove a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 

ins. in the ground, marked 

33 M. on S. E., 

N.P.I.R.onN.E.,and 

T. 6 N., R. 8 W., S. 15 on S. W. faces. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, 

29 M. on E., 

N. P. I. R. on N., and 

T. 5 N., R. 7 W., S. 8 on S. sides; dug pits, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., N. 

ins. diam., for the (e. g.) 29 mile cor., I 

mark 

27. Stones for corners on Indian Reservation or other boundaries will not be less than 

20 ins. long, or less than 6 ins. thick, and will measure at least one cubic foot in volume; 

consequently, a stone 20 x 14% x 6 ins., will be about minimum size, and 3 x 9 x 6 ins., 

represents satisfactory proportions. “N. P.” for “Nez Perces” (Indian Reservation), on 

the east, and “P. L.” for “Public Land” (unsurveyed), on the west, applies to paragraph 1 

only. 

28. The above are minimum dimensions for mounds of stone on reservation boundaries. 

29. The bearing trees, “S. 

supposed to stand on surveyed land, near the line between sections 8 and 9. 

30. The stated dimensions of posts are minimum; if posts are longer than 3 feet, the 

extra length will be placed in the ground; the posts will in no case project more than 12 

ins. above the natural surface of the earth. 

’ E.” and “S. W.” from the comer, are 

615 
and S. of tree, 5 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. 

base, 2% ft. high, E. of cor. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees.29 

, A35 M. on E., 

N. P. I. R. on N., and 

T. 6 N., R. 8 W., S. 9 on S. sides; from which 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

ins. diam., for the (e. g.) 35 mile cor., I 

mark 

- lks. dist., marked 

N. P. I. R., 35 M., B. T. 

A-, - ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 6N., R. 8 W., S. 9, 35 M., B. T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T. 6 N., R. 8 W., S. 8, 35 M., B. T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

N. P. I. R., 35 M., B. T. 

9. Corner Monument of Stone, with Deposit. 

Deposited a marked stone (charred stake, quart of charcoal, or vial with record3’ inclosed), 12 ins. in the ground, for 

the S. W. cor. of 

-47- 

(e. g.) the Nez Perces Indian Reservation; and built a monument of stone, 3 ft. sq. at base, 2 ft. sq. on top, 3 ft. high, over 

deposit; marked 

S. W. cor., N. P. I. R. on N. E.,32 

P. L., -33 M. -33 chs. on S. E., 

P. L., -34 on S. W., and 

P. L. on N. W. faces. 

10. A Post for Corner Monument, with Pits and Mound of 

Earth. 

Set a post, 3 ft. long, 5 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for the N. W. cor. of (e. g.) the Nez Perces Indian Reservation, 

marked 

P. L. on S. E., 

N. W.cor.N.P.I.R.onS.E., 

P. L. -33 M. 33 chs. on S. W., and 

P. L. -34 on N. W. faces; dug pits, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., S. 

and N. E. of post, 8 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. 

base, 2% ft. high, S. E. of cor. 

11. A Stone for Corner Monument, with Pits and Mound of 

Set a - stone, 36 x 10 x 7 ins., 27 ins. in the ground, 

for the N. E. cor. of (e. g.) the Nez Perces Indian Reservation; 

marked 

Earth. 

P. L. on N. E., 

P. L. on S. E., 

N. E. cor., N. P. I. R. on S. W., and 

P. L. on N. W. faces; dug pits 36 x 36 x 12 ins., S. and W. of 

stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raised a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. 

high, S. W. of cor. 

12. Modifications of descriptions. 

When a stone or post is established for a corner monument 

(i. e.) at a cornerofa reservation, and four (4) bearing trees are 

available, the descriptions in paragraph 10 and 11 will be 

modified, as follows: Replace all that refers to pits and mound 

of earth, by correct descriptions of four properly marked 

bearing trees, for each corner. (See paragraphs 3 and 5, pages 

47, 48.) 

The dimensions and arrangement of pits and mounds, described in the last two paragraphs, are similar to those described for “Corners referring to one township only.” (See 

paragraphs 1 and 4, page 31.) 

WITNESS CORNERS.35 

1. Witness Corners will be established in certain cases. 

When the true point for any corner described in these 

instructions falls where prevailing conditions would insure 

its destruction by natural causes, a witness corner will be 

established in a secure position, on a surveyed line ifpossible, 

and within twenty chains of the corner point thus witnessed. 

2. Markings on Witness Corners. 

A witness corner will bear the same marks that would be 

placed upon the corner for which it is a witness, and in 

addition, will have the letters “W. C.” (for witness corner), 

conspicuously displayed above the 

-48- 

regular markings; such witness corners will be established, 

in all other respects, like a regular corner. 

3. Markings on Bearing Trees of Witness Corners. 

When bearing trees are described as accessories to a witness corner, the prescribed markings on each tree will be 

preceded by the letters “W. C.,” distinctly cut into the wood. 

The true bearing and distance of witness corners, from the 

true point for the corner, will always be clearly stated in the 

field notes. 

4. Witness Corners to corner points falling in roads, etc. 

The point for a corner falling on a railroad, street, or wagon 

road, will be perpetuated by a marked stone (charred stake or 

quart of charcoal), deposited 24 inches in the and 

29. The bearing trees, “S. 

supposed to stand on surveyed land, near the line between sections 8 and 9. 

31. The “record” will consist of a brief description of the corner, with the date of its 

construction. 

32. The markings will be cut into large stones, inserted in the middle of the lowest 

course on each side of the monument. 

33. The proper number of miles and chains, from the initial point, will be stated. 

34. The year in which the monument is established will be placed in the blank. 

35. See page 56. 

36. The deposit will not be practicable in the case of railroads; but the witness corners 

will be established on the lines limiting the right of way. See pages 198,209, and Plate 

IV. 

O E.” and “S. W.” from the comer, are 

616 
witnessed by two witness corners, one of which will be established on each limiting line of the highway. 

In case the point for any regular corner falls at the intersection of two or more streets or roads, it will be perpetuated by a 

marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), deposited 

24 inches in the ground, and witnessed by two witness corners 

established on opposite sides of the corner point, and at the 

mutual intersections of the lines limiting the roads or streets, 

as the case may be. 

WITNESS POINTS. 

Witness points will be perpetuated by corners similar to 

those described for quarter section corners, with the marking 

“W. P.” (for witness point), in place of %4,” or V4 s.”, as the 

case may be. 

If bearing trees are available as accessories to witness 

points, each tree will be marked W. P. B. T. (See “Insuperable 

objects on line-Witness Points,” page 22.) 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

1. Corners on Rockin place, or on Boulders.37 

When a corner falls on rock in place, or on a boulder, a cross 

(x), will be made at the exact corner point, and witnessed by 

the proper number of bearing trees, if they are available; in 

the absence of suitable trees, a mound of earth will be raised, 

if size of the boulder or form of the rock in place permits the 

excavation of pits. As a last resort, a mound of stone will be 

built to attract attention to the point, if loose rock can be 

obtained in the vicinity 

2. Location of Mounds. 

When mounds of earth or other material are raised as 

accessories to corners, they will be placed as specified in the 

foregoing Description of Corners, and in every case the direction of the mound from the corner will be carefully stated. The 

use of the indefinite description “alongside” will be discontinued. 

In case the character of the land is such that the mound can 

not be placed as hereinbefore described, the deputy will state 

in his notes, by bearing and distance, exactly where the 

mound is located with reference to the corner, and will give 

his reasons for placing it as described. 

-49- 

3. Mounds of Stone, covered with Earth. 

In a case where pits are practicable and the deputy prefers 

raising a mound of stone, or a mound of stone covered with 

earth,38 he will use the form given for “Stone with mound of 

stone,” when the corner thus described is established; but 

when the corner “Stone with mound of stone covered with 

earth,” is constructed, the description will be modified as 

follows: Strike out the words “Pits impracticable”; in place of 

“mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 11/2 ft. high,” write “mound of 

stone covered with earth, ~ ft. base, - ft. high,” 

inserting in the blank spaces the dimensions of the mound 

given in paragraph 1, following the designation of each class 

of corners, pages 24 to 45. 

4. Bearing Trees. 

Bearing trees marked as accessories to standard corners, 

either township, section, or quarter section, will be selected 

on the north side of base lines or standard parallels, and 

bearing trees referring to the closing corners on said lines, 

will be located on the south side; in general, the bearing trees 

referring to any particular closing corner, together with one 

pit and the mound belonging to such corner, will be located on 

the same side of the line closed upon, and on the side from 

which the surveys have been closed. 

When the requisite number of trees can be found within 

300 links of the corner point, two (2) bearing trees will be 

marked and described for every standard or closing township 

or section corner, or corner common to two townships or 

sections, only; four (4) for every corner common to four 

townships or four sections; one (1) for a corner referring to one 

township or one section, only; two (2) for every quarter section corner or meander corner, and four (4) for each mile or 

half mile corner, or corner monument on a reservation or 

other boundary, not conforming to the system of rectangular 

surveying. 

In case the prescribed number of trees can not be found 

within limits, the deputy will state in his field notes, after 

describing those marked, “no other trees within limits,” and 

add “dug pits X x - ins.,” etc., or 

- 

“raised a mound of stone, ft. base, - ft. high, 

of cor.,” as prevailing conditions may require. 

Bearing trees, being the most important accessories to the 

corners, will have their exact bearings from the true meridian taken with the instrument used in running lines of survey; and the distance from the middle of each bearing tree to 

the middle point of the corner will be carefully measured, and 

recorded in the field notes. 

A plain blaze will be made at the usual or most convenient 

height, on each bearing tree, on the side facing the corner. 

The height of all other markings on the tree will in no case 

exceed the limit of two and one-half feet above the ground. 

5. Stones for corners. 

Stones 18 ins. long, or less, will be set with two-thirds of 

their length in the ground, and those more than 18 ins. long 

will have three-fourths of their length in the ground. 

No stones measuring less than 504 cubic inches, or less 

than 12 ins. in length, will be used for corners. 

-50- 

6. Objects to be noted. 

Particular attention is directed to the “Summary of objects 

and data required to be noted.” See page 58 of these instructions; and the deputy will thoroughly comply with the same 

in his work and field notes. 

37. See pages 146, 157, and 164 

38. The base and height of a “mound of stone, covered with earth,” will be the same as 

prescribed for mound of earth. The dimensions of “mound of stone” on reservation 

boundaries will conform to those prescribed in paragraph 2, page 45, The direction of 

the mound from the corner will be stated. 

617 
7. Lines discontinued at Legal Corners. 

No mountainous lands, or lands not classed as surveyable, 

will be meandered, and all lines approaching such lands will 

be discontinued at the section or quarter-section corner 

nearest the unsurveyed land. 

BASE LINE. 

1. From the initial point the base line will be extended east 

and west on a parallel of latitude, by the use of transit or solar 

instruments, as may be directed by the surveyor general in 

his written special instructions. The transit should be designated for the alinement of all important lines. 

2. The direction of base lines will conform to parallels of 

latitude and will be controlled by true meridians; consequently the correct determination of true meridians by 

observations on Polaris at elongation3’ is a matter of prime 

importance. 

3. When transits are employed, certain reference lines4’ 

having a known position and relation to the required parallel 

of latitude will be prolonged as straight lines, by two back 

and two fore sights at each setting of the instrument, the 

horizontal limb being revolved 180” in azimuth between the 

observations. 

4. Where solar apparatus is used, the deputy will test the 

instrument, whenever practicable, by comparing its indications with a meridian determined by Polaris observation^;^^ 

and in all cases where error is discovered he will make the 

necessary corrections of his line before proceeding with the 

survey.41 All operations will be fully described in the field 

notes. 

5. The proper township, section, and quarter section corners will be established at lawful intervals, and meander 

corners at the intersection of the line with all meanderable 

streams, lakes, or bayous. 

6. In order to detect errors and insure accuracy in 

measurement, two sets of chainmen will be employed; one to 

note distances to intermediate points and to locate topographical features, the other to act as a check. Each will 

measure 40 chains, and the proper corner will be placed 

midway between the ending points of the two measurements. 

The deputy will be present when said corner is thus established, and will record in the body of his field notes the 

distances to the same, according to the measurement by each 

set of hai in men.^' 

To obviate collusion between the sets of chainmen, the 

second set should commence at a point in advance of the 

beginning corner of the first set, the initial difference in 

measurement thus obtained being known only to the deputy. 

8. Marks to be cut. 

All letters and figures on posts, trees, or stones, etc., will be 

cut into the object upon which they are placed. Arabic figures 

and plain letters will be used for all markings. 

9. Orientation of Corners. 

Corners referring to one, two, or four townships or sections, 

not identical with standard or closing corners, will be set with 

their faces directed NE. and SW., and NW. and SE., while all 

other corners will be set with their sides facing the cardinal 

points; except corners on boundaries of reservations and private land claims, which will be set squarely on line. 

10. Size of Posts, Mounds, etc. 

The sizes of wooden posts, mounds, and pits, noted in the 

foregoing descriptions, will be regarded as minimum, and 

their dimensions will be increased whenever practicable. 

11. Corner Materials. 

In establishing corners, durable stones will be used when 

obtainable; then, posts; and lastly, mounds, with stake in pit. 

Wood of a perishable nature will not be used for posts or 

stakes. 

12. Instructions will be examined. 

Deputy surveyors will carefully read, study, and familiarize themselves with all instructions contained in this 

volume, and will instruct their assistants as to their duties 

before commencing work. An extra copy of this Manual may 

be furnished each deputy, for the use of his assistants. 

INITIAL POINTS. 

Initial points from which the lines of the public surveys are 

to be extended will be established whenever necessary, under 

such special instructions as may be prescribed in each case by 

the Commissioner of the General Land Office. The locus of 

such initial points will be selected with great care and due 

consideration for their prominence and easy identification, 

and must be established astronomically. 

quOlThe lines of the public surveys are classified as follows: 

Class 1. Base lines and standard parallels. 

Class 2. Principal and guide meridians. 

Class 3. Township exteriors (or meridional and latitudinal 

Class 4. Subdivision and meander lines. 

township boundaries). 

-51- 

The initial point having been 

public surveys will be extended 

established, the line of the 

therefrom, as follows: 

PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN. 

1. This line shall conform to a true meridian and will be 

extended from the initial point, either north or south, or in 

both directions, as the conditions may require, by the use of 

transit or solar instruments, as may be directed by the surveyor general in his special written instructions. 

2. The methods used for determination of directions, and 

the precautions to be observed to secure accuracy in measurement, are fully stated above under the title “Base Line”, and 

will be complied with in every particular. 

39. See page 105. 

40. For details see pages 120 to 127. 

41. See specimen field notes, page 172. ofthe range line, ifthe same is west ofnorth, but 

subtract when it bears east of north. 

42. See pages 142 to 167. 

618 
3. In addition to the above general instructions, it is required that 

-52 

in all cases where the establishment of a new principal meridian seems to be necessary to the surveyor general, he shall 

submit the matter, together with his reasons therefor, to the 

Commissioner of the General Land Office, and the survey of 

such principal meridian shall not be commenced until written authority, together with such special instructions as he 

may deem necessary, shall have been received from the Commissioner. 

STANDARD PARALLELS. 

1. Standard parallels, which are also called correction 

lines, shall be extended east and west from the principal 

meridian, at intervals of every 24 miles north and south of 

the base line, in the manner prescribed for running said line, 

and all requirements under the title “Base Line” will be 

carefully observed. (See page 51.) 

2. Where standard parallels have been placed at intervals 

of 30 or 36 miles, regardless of existing instructions, and 

where gross irregularities require additional standard lines, 

from which to initiate new, or upon which to close old surveys, an intermediate correction line should be established to 

which a local name may be given, (e. g.) “Cedar Creek Correction Line;” and the same will be run, in all respects, like the 

regular standard parallels. 

GUIDE MERIDIANS. 

1. Guide meridians shall be extended north from the base 

line, or standard parallels, at intervals of every 24 miles east 

and west from the principal meridian, in the manner prescribed for running the principal meridian, and all the provisions for securing accuracy of alinement and measurement 

found, or referred to under the title “Principal Meridian,” 

will apply to the survey of said guide meridians. (See page 

51.) 

2. When existing conditions require that such guide meridians shall be run south from the base or correction lines, 

they will be initiated at properly established closing corners 

on such lines. 

3. Where guide meridians have been improperly placed at 

intervals greatly exceeding the authorized distance of 24 

miles, and standard lines are required to limit errors of old, or 

govern new surveys, a new guide meridian may be run from a 

standard, or properly established closing corner, and a local 

name may be assigned to the same, (e. g.) “Grass Valley 

Guide Meridian”. These additional guide meridians will be 

surveyed in all respects like the regular guide meridians. 

TOWNSHIP EXTERIORS. 

1. Whenever practicable, the township exteriors in a tract 

of land 24 miles square, bounded by standard lines, will be 

surveyed successively through the block, beginning with 

those of the southwestern township. 

2. The meridional boundaries of townships will have precedence in the order of survey and will be run from south to 

north on true meridians, with permanent corners at lawful 

distances; the latitudinal boundaries will be run from east to 

west on random or trial lines, and corrected back on true 

lines. 

The falling of a random, north or south of the township 

corner to be closed upon, will be carefully measured, and, 

with the resulting true return course, will be duly recorded in 

the field notes. 

-53- 

Should it happen, however, that such random intersects 

the meridian of the objective corner, north or south of said 

corner, or falls short of, or overruns the length of the south 

boundary of the township by more than three chains (due 

allowance being made for convergency), said random, and, if 

necessary, all the exterior boundaries of the township, will be 

retraced and remeasured to discover and correct the error. 

When running random lines from east to west, temporary 

corners will be set at intervals of 40.00 chains, and proper 

permanent corners will be established upon the true line, 

corrected back in accordance with these instructions, thereby 

throwing the excess or deficiency against the west boundary 

of the township, as required by law. 

3. Whenever practicable, the exterior boundaries of 

townships belonging to the west range, in a tract or block 24 

miles square, will first be surveyed in succession, through the 

range, from south to north; and in a similar manner, the 

other three ranges will be surveyed in regular sequence. 

4. In cases where impassable objects occur and the foregoing rules can not be complied with, township corners will be 

established as follows: 

In extending the south or north boundaries of a township to 

the west, where the southwest or northwest corners can not be 

established in the regular way by running a north and south 

line, such boundaries will be run west on a true line, allowing 

for convergency on the west half mile; and from the township 

corner established at the end of such boundary, the west 

boundary will be run north or south, as the case may be. In 

extending south or north boundaries of a township to the east, 

where the southeast or northeast corner can not be established in the regular way, the same rule will be observed, 

except that such boundaries will be run east on a true line, 

and the east boundary run north or south, as the case may be. 

5. Allowance for the convergency of meridians will be 

made whenever necessary. 

METHOD OF SUBDIVIDING. 

1. The exterior boundaries of a full township having been 

properly established, the subdivision thereof will be made as 

follows: 

At or near the southeast corner of the township, a true 

meridian will be determined by Polaris or solar observations, 

and the deputy’s instrument will be tested thereon; then from 

said corner the first mile of the east and south boundaries will 

be retraced, if subdivisions and survey of the exteriors have 

been provided for in separate contracts; but, if the survey of 

the exterior and subdivisional lines are included in the same 

contract, the retracements referred to will be omitted. All 

discrepancies resulting from disagreement of bearings or 

measurements will be carefully stated in the field notes. 

619 
2. After testing his instrument on the true meridian thus 

determined, the deputy will commenceat the corner to sections 35 and 36, on the south boundary, and run a line parallel to the range line,43 establishing at 40.00 chains, the quarter section corner between sections 35 and 36, and at 80.00 

chains the corner for sections 25, 26, 35, and 36. 

3. From the last-named corner, a random line will be run 

eastward, without blazing, parallel to the south boundary of 

section 36, to its inter- 

-54- 

section with the east boundary of the township, placing at 

40.00 chains from the point of beginning, a post for temporary 

quarter section corner. If the random line intersects said 

township boundary exactly at the corner for sections 25 and 

36, it will be blazed back and established as the true line, the 

permanent quarter section corner being established thereon, 

midway between the initial and terminal section corners. 

If, however, the random intersects said township boundary 

to the north or south of said corner, the falling44 will be 

carefully measured, and from the data thus obtained, the 

true return course will be ~alculated,~~ and the true line 

blazed and established and the position of the quarter section 

corner determined, as directed above. 

The details of the entire operation will be recorded in the 

field notes. 

4. Having thus established the line between sections 25 

and 36; from the corner for sections 25, 26, 35, and 36, the 

west and north boundaries of sections 25,24,13, and 12, will 

be established as directed for those of section 36; with the 

exception that the random lines of said north boundaries will 

be run parallel to the established south boundaries of the 

sections to which they belong, instead ofthe south boundary of 

section 36; e. g. the random line between sections 24 and 25 

will be run parallel to the established south boundary of 

section 25, etc. 

5. Then, from the last established section corner, i. e. the 

corner for sections 1,2,11, and 12, the line between sections 1 

and 2, will be projected northward, on a random line,parallel 

to the east boundary of the township, setting a post for temporary quarter section corner at 40.00 chains, to its intersection with the north boundary of the township. If the random 

intersects said north boundary exactly at corner for sections 1 

and 2, it will be blazed back and established as the true line, 

the temporary quarter section corner being established permanently in its original position, and the fractional measurement thrown 

-55- 

into that portion of the line between said corner and the north 

boundary of the township. 

If however, said random intersects the north boundary of 

the township, to the east or west of the corner for sections 1 

and 2, the consequent falling will be carefully measured, and 

from the data thus obtained the true return course will be 

~alculated~~ and the true line established, the permanent 

quarter section corner being placed upon the same at 40.00 

chains from the initial corner of the random line, thereby 

throwing the fractional measurement in that portion lying 

TABLE A.-Corrections for Convergency, 

within a Township. 

Correction to be applied to bearing of range 

lines at a distance ofLatitude. 

1 mile. 2 miles. 3 miles. 4 miles. 5 miles. 

~ 

00 , I I I I 

30 to 35 ........... 1 1 2 2 3 

35 to 40 ........... 1 1 2 3 3 

40 to 45 ........... 1 2 2 3 4 

45 to 50 ........... 1 2 3 4 5 

Example.-Latitude, 47. Range line bears N. 0" 2' E.; then 

parallel meridional section lines will be run as follows: 

From the corner for sections35 and 36, N. 0" 1' E. 

34 and 35, north. 

33 and 34, N. 0" 1' W. 

32 and 33, N. 0" 2' W. 

31 and 32, N. 0" 3' W. 

between the quarter section corner and the north boundary of 

the township. 

When the north boundary of a township is a base line or 

standard parallel, the line between sections 1 and 2 will be 

runparallel to the range line as a true line, the quarter section 

corner will be placed at 40.00 chains, and a closing corner will 

be established at the point of intersection with such base or 

standard line; and in such case, the distance from said closing 

corner, to the nearest standard corner on such base or standard line, will be carefully measured and noted as a connection line. 

6. Each successive range of sections progressing to the 

west, until the fifth range is attained, will be surveyed in a 

similar manner; then, from the section corners established on 

the west boundary of said range of sections, random lines will 

be projected to their intersection with the west boundary of 

the township, and the true return lines established as prescribed for the survey of the first or most eastern range of 

sections, with the exception that on the true lines thus established the quarter section corners will be established at 40.00 

chains from the the initial corners of the randoms, the frac43. The meridional section lines will be made parallel to the range line or east boundary of the township, by applying to the bearing of the latter a small correction, dependent on the latitude, taken from the following table, which gives, to the nearest whole 

minute, the convergency of two meridians 6 miles long and from 1 to 5 miles apart; and 

supplies directly the deviation of meridional section lines west of north, when the range 

line is a true meridian. Add the correction to the bearing of the range line, if the same is 

west of north, but subtract when it bears east of north. 

44. See "Prescribed Limits," page 59. 

45. See Table VII, and rules, page 128. Random bearings, determined as directed 

above, are actually the true bearings of fractional true lines and are so used for running 

them. Any deviation from random bearings, derived from the application of the falling 

[Table VII], changes the random bearing by an amount due to unavoidable errors, and 

should give for a final result a bearing as near the true bearing as the field work will 

permit. A true bearing means the angular deviation from the true meridian in contradistinction to the magnetic bearing, or angle made with the magnetic meridian. A true 

line will be understood to refer to the line upon which the comers are established. 

46. See Table VII and rules, page 128 

620 
tional measurements being thereby thrown into those portions of the lines situated between said quarter section corners and the west boundary of the township. 

7. The following general requirements are reiterated for 

emphasis: 

The random of a latitudinal section line will always be run 

parallel to the south boundary of the section to which it belongs, and with the true bearing of said boundary; and when a 

section has no linear south boundary, the random will be run 

parallel to the south boundary of the range of sections in which 

it is situated, and fractional true lines will be run in a similar 

manner.47 

8. The deputy is not required to complete the survey of the 

first range of sections from south to north before commencing 

the survey of the second or any subsequent range of sections, 

but the corner on which any random line closes shall have 

been previously established by running the line which determines its position, except as follows: Where it is impracticable to establish such section corner in the regular manner, 

it will be established by running the latitudinal section line 

as a true line, with a true bearing, determined as above 

directed for random lines, setting the quarter section corner 

at 40.00 chains and the section corner at 80.00 chains.48 

9. Quarter section corners, both upon meridional and latitudinal section lines, will be established at points equidistant 

from the corresponding section corners, except upon the lines 

closing on the north and west boundaries of the township, and 

in those situations the quarter section corners will always be 

established at precisely forty chains to the north or west (as 

the case may be) of the respective section corners from which 

those lines respectively start, by which procedure the 

-56- 

excess or deficiency in the measurements will be thrown, 

according to law, on the extreme tier or range of quarter 

sections, as the case may be. 

10. Where by reason of impassable objects only a portion of 

the south boundary of a township can be established, an 

auxiliary base line (or lines,49 as the case may require) will be 

run through the portion which has no linear south boundary, 

first random, then corrected, connecting properly established 

corresponding section corners (either interior or exterior) 

and as far south as possible, and from such line or lines, the 

section lines will be extended northwardly in the usual manner, and any fraction south of said line will be surveyed in the 

opposite direction from the section corners on the auxiliary 

base thus established. (See Plate I, figs. 3, 4, and 5.) 

11. Where by reason of impassable objects noportion of the 

south boundary of a township can be regularly established, 

the subdivision thereof will proceed from north to south and 

from east to west, thereby throwing all fractional measurements and areas against the west boundary, and the 

meanderable stream or other boundary limiting the 

township on the south. 

If the east boundary is without regular section corners and 

the north boundary has been run eastwardly as a true line, 

with section corners at regular intervals of 80.00 chains, the 

subdivision of the township will be made from west to east, 

and fractional measurements and areas will be thrown 

against the irregular east boundary. 

12. When the proper point for the establishment of a 

township or section corner is inaccessible, and a witness 

corner can be erected upon each of the two lines which 

approach the same, at distances not exceeding twenty chains 

therefrom, said witness corners5 will be properly established, 

and the half miles upon which they stand will be recognized 

as surveyed lines. 

The witness corner will be marked as conspicuously as a 

section corner, and bearing trees will be used wherever possible. 

The deputy will be required to furnish good evidence that 

the section corner is actually inaccessible. 

MEANDERING. 

1. Proceeding down stream, the bank on the left hand is 

termed the left bank and that on the right hand the right 

bank. These terms will be universally used to distinguish the 

two banks of a river or stream. 

2. Navigable rivers, as well as all rivers not embraced in 

the class denominated “navigable,” the right-angle width of 

which is three chains and upwards, will be meandered on 

both banks, at the ordinary mean high water mark, by taking 

the general courses and distances of their sinuosities, and the 

same will be entered in the field book. Rivers not classed as 

navigable will not be meandered above the point where the 

average right-angle width is less than three chains. Shallow 

streams, without any well-defined channel or permanent 

banks, will not be meandered; except tide-water streams, 

whether more or less than three chains wide, which should be 

meandered at ordinary high-water mark, as far as tide-water 

extends. 

At every point where either standard, township, or section 

lines intersect the bank of a navigable stream, or any 

meanderable line, corners will be established at the time of 

running these lines. Such corners 

-57- 

are called meander corners,5o and the deputy will commence 

at one of these corners, follow the bank or boundary line, and 

measure the length of each course from the beginning corner 

to the next “meander corner.” Compass courses, by the needle 

or solar, will be used in meanders. Transit angles are not 

allowed. 

The crossing distance between meander corners on same 

line and the true bearing and distance between corresponding meander corners will be ascertained by triangulation, or 

direct measurement, in order that the river may be protracted with entire accuracy. The particulars will be given in 

the field notes. 

5. See “Witness Corners,” page 47. 

47. See Plate IV, between sections 7 and 18, and 17 and 20. 

48. See Plate IV, between sections 8 and 17 

49. Section comers will be established by correct alinement and measurement of 

meridional sectional lines whenever practicable. 

50. These corners are the regular meander corners, and designated “meander corners;” 

they are distinguished from special and auxiliary meander corners; see paragraphs 11 

and 12, page 44, and pages 42 and 43. 

62 1 
In meandering water courses or lakes, where a distance is 

more than ten chains between successive stations, whole 

chains only should be taken; but if the distance is less than 

ten chains, and it is found convenient to employ chains and 

links, the number of links should be a multiple of ten, thereby 

saving time and labor in testing the closings, both in the field 

and office. 

3. The meanders of all lakes, navigable bayous, and deep 

ponds, of the area of twenty-five acres and upwards, will be 

commenced at a meander corner and continued, as above 

directed for navigable streams; from said corner, the courses 

and distances of the entire margin of the same, and the 

intersections with all meander corners established thereon, 

will be note. 

All streams falling into the river, lake, or bayou will be 

noted, and the width at their mouths stated; also, the position, size, and depth of springs, whether the water be pure or 

mineral; also, the heads and mouths of all bayous; all islands, 

rapids, and bars will be noted, with intersections, to their 

upper and lower ends, to establish their exact situation. The 

elevation of the banks of lakes, bayous, and streams, the 

height of falls and cascades, and the length and fall of rapids 

will be recorded in the field notes. 

To meander a lake or deep pond lying entirely within the 

boundaries of a section, two lines will be run from the two 

nearest corners on different sides of such lake or pond, the 

courses and length of which will be recorded, and if coincident 

with unsurveyed lines of legal subdivisions, that fact will 

also be stated in the field notes, and at each of the points 

where said lines intersect the margin of the pond or lake, a 

special51 meander corner will be established as above 

directed. (See example, page 201.) 

The relative position of these points being thus definitely 

fixed in the section, the meandering will commence at one of 

them and be continued to the other, noting the intersection, 

and thence to the beginning. The proceedings are to be fully 

entered in the field notes. 

4. Meander lines will not be established at the segregation 

line between dry and swamp or overflowed land, but at the 

ordinary high-water mark of the actual margin of the rivers 

or lakes on which such swamp or overflowed lands border. 

5. The precise relative position of an island, in a township 

made fractional by a river or lake in which the island is 

situated, will be determined by triangulation from a special 

and carefully measured base line, initiated upon the surveyed lines, on or near the lake or river bank on the main 

land, so as to connect by course and distance on a direct 

-58- 

line, the meander corner on the mainland with the corresponding point on the island, where the proper meander 

corner will be established. 

6. In making the connection of an island lying entirely 

within a section, with the mainland, a special base will be 

measured from the most convenient meander corner, and 

from such base, the location of an az~xiliary~~ meander corner 

will be determined by triangulation, at which the meanders 

of the island will be initiated. 

7. In the survey of lands bordering on tide water, “meander 

corners” will be established at the points where surveyed 

lines intersect high-water mark, and the meanders will follow the high-water line. 

8. The field notes of meanders will show the dates on 

which the work was performed, as illustrated in the specimen 

notes, page 216. The field notes of meanders will state and 

describe the corner from which the meanders commenced, 

and upon which they closed, and will exhibit the meanders of 

each fractional section separately; following, and composing 

a part of such notes, will be given a description of the land, 

timber, depth of inundation to which the bottom is subject, 

and the banks, current, and bottom of the stream or body of 

water meandered. The utmost care will be taken to pass no 

object of topography, or change therein, without giving a 

particular description thereof in its proper place in the notes 

of the meanders. 

SUMMARY OF OBJECTS AND DATA REQUIRED 

TO BE NOTED. 

1. The precise length of every line run, noting all necessary offsets therefrom, with the reason for making them, and 

method employed. 

2. The kind and diameter of all bearing trees, with the 

course and distance of the same from their respective corners; 

and the precise relative position of witness corners to the true 

corners. 

3. The kind of materials of which corners are constructed. 

4. Trees on line. The name, diameter, and distance on line 

to all trees which it intersects. 

5. Intersections by line of land objects. The distance at 

which the line intersects the boundary lines of every reservation, settler’s claim, improvement, or rancho; prairie, bottom 

land, swamp, marsh, grove, and windfall, with the course of 

the same at all points of intersection; also, the distances at 

which the line begins to ascend, arrives at the top, begins to 

descend, and reaches the foot of all remarkable hills and 

ridges, with their courses, and estimated height in feet, above 

the level land of the surrounding country, or above the bottom lands, ravines, or waters near which they are situated. 

Also, distance to and across large ravines, their depth and 

course. 

6. Intersections by line of water objects. All rivers, creeks, 

and smaller streams of water which the line crosses; the 

distances measured on the true line to the bank first arrived 

at, the course down stream at points of intersection, and their 

widths on line. In cases of navigable streams, their width will 

be ascertained between the meander corners, as set forth 

under the proper head.53 

7. The land’s surface-whether level, rolling, broken, 

hilly, or mountainous. 

8. The soil-whether first, second, third, or fourth rate. 

9. Timber-the several kinds of timber and undergrowth, 

in the order in which they predominate. 

51. A “Special Meander Corner” is one established on a line of legal subdivision, not a 

standard, township, or section line. See pages 201 and 202. 

52. An “auxiliary meander corner” is one not on a line belonging to the system of 

rectangular surveying. See page 212. 

53. See “Meandering,” third clause of paragraph 2, page 57. 

622 
-59- 

10. Bottom lands-to be described as wet or dry, and if 

subject to inundation, state to what depth. 

11. Springs of water-whether fresh, saline, or mineral, 

with the course of the streams flowing from them. 

12. Lakes and ponds-describing their banks and giving 

their height, and also depth of water, and whether it be pure 

or stagnant. 

13. Improvements. Towns and villages; houses or cabins, 

fields, or other improvements with owners’ names; mill sites, 

forges, and factories, mineral monuments, and all corners not 

belonging to the system of rectangular surveying; will be 

located by bearing and distance, or by intersecting bearings 

from given points. 

14. Coal banks or beds; peat or turf grounds; minerals and 

ores; with particular description of the same as to quality and 

extent, and all diggings therefor; also salt springs and licks. 

All reliable information that can be obtained respecting 

these objects, whether they be on the line or not, will appear 

in the general description. 

15. Roads and trails, with their directions, whence and 

whither. 

16. Rapids, cataracts, cascades, or falls of water, with the 

estimated height of their fall in feet. 

17. Precipices, caves, sink holes, ravines, stone quarries, 

ledges of rocks, with the kind of stone they afford. 

18. Natural curiosities, interesting fossils, petrifactions, 

organic remains, etc.; also all ancient works of art, such as 

mounds, fortifications, embankments, ditches, or objects of 

like nature. 

19. The magnetic declination will be incidentally noted at 

all points of the lines being surveyed, where any material 

change in the same indicates the probable presence of iron 

ores; and the position of such points will be perfectly identified in the field notes. 

PRESCRIBED LIMITS FOR CLOSINGS AND 

LENGTHS OF LINES. 

1. If in running a random township exterior, such random 

falls short of or exceeds its proper length by more than three 

chains, or falls more than three chains north or south of its 

objective corner, it will be re-run, and if found correct, so 

much of the remaining boundaries of the township will be 

retraced or re~urveyed,~~ as may be found necessary to locate 

the error. 

2. Every meridional section line, except those terminating 

in the north boundary of the township, shall be eighty chains 

in length.55 

3. The random meridional section lines through the north 

tier of sections shall fall within fifty links east or west of the 

section corners established on the north boundary of the 

township, except when closing on a base line or standard 

parallel. 

4. The actual length of meridional section lines through 

the north tier of sections shall be within one hundred and fifty 

links of their theoretical length. The latter will be determined from the meridional boundaries of the north tier of 

sections. 

5. All random latitudinal section lines shall fall within 

fifty links north or south of their objective section corners. 

In any range of sections, the difference between the true 

bearing of a latitudinal section line and that of the south 

boundary of the range, shall not exceed 21 minutes of arc. 

The latitudinal section lines, except those terminating in 

the west boundary of the township, shall be within fifty links 

of the actual distance established on the south boundary line 

of the township for the width of the range of sections to which 

they belong. 

6. The north boundary and the south boundary of any one 

section, 

-60- 

except in the extreme western range of sections, shall be 

within fifty links of equal length. 

7. The meanders within each fractional section, or between any two successive meander corners, or of an island in 

the interior of a section, should close within a limit to be 

determined by allowing five-eighths of a link for each chain of 

said meander line. Where the meander corners marking the 

ends of a meander line in a fractional section are located on 

standard, township, or section lines, the above limit, increased by one fourth of the regularperimeter of the fractional 

section, expressed in miles, multiplied by 71 links, will be 

allowed.56 

The extreme limit, however, will in no case be permitted to 

exceed one hundred and fifty links. 

FIELD NOTES. 

1. The proper blank books for original field notes will be 

furnished by the surveyor general, and in such books the 

deputy surveyor will make a faithful, distinct, and minute 

record of everything done and observed by himself and his 

assistants, pursuant to instructions, in relation to running, 

measuring, and marking lines, establishing corners, etc., and 

present, as far as possible, full and complete topographical 

sketches of all standard and exterior lines, drawn to the usual 

scale for township exteriors. These “original field notes’’ are 

not necessarily the entries made in the field, in the deputy’s 

pocket notebooks called tablets; but they are to be fully and 

correctly written out in ink, from such tablets, for the permanent record of the work. Tablets should be so fully written as 

to verify the “original field notes” whenever the surveyor 

general requires them for inspection. 

2. A full description of all corners belonging to old surveys, 

from which the lines of new surveys start, or upon which they 

close, will in all cases be furnished the deputy from the 

surveyor general’s office, when authority is given for commencing work; then, if the old corners are found to agree with 

said descriptions, the deputy will describe any one of them in 

this form, “which is a stone firmly set, marked, and witnessed, as described by the surveyor general”; but, should a 

corner not answer the description supplied, the deputy will 

give a full description of such corner and its accessories, 

following the proper approved form given in these instructions. 

54. See “Explanations,” p. 71 to 78. 

55. See exception on p. 76. 

56. See Plate I, figs. 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 

623 
A full description of each corner established under any one 

contract will be given once only; subsequent reference to such 

corner will be made in the form, “heretofore described”, or (e. 

g.) “the corner for sections 2,3,10, and 11,” as the case may 

require. 

In all cases where a corner is reestablished, the original 

field notes will describe fully the manner in which it is done. 

3. The original field notes of the survey of base, standard, 

and meridian lines will describe all corners established 

thereon, how established, the crossings of streams, ravines, 

hills, and mountains; character of soil, timber, minerals, etc.; 

and after the description of each township corner established 

in running such lines, the deputy will note particularly in the 

“general description” the character of townships on each side 

of the lines run. 

4. The original field notes of the survey of exterior boundaries of townships will describe the corners and topography, 

as above required, and the “general description” at the end of 

such notes will describe the townships as fully as possible, 

and also state whether or not they should be subdivided. 

-61- 

5. The original field notes of the subdivisional survey of 

townships will describe the corners and topography as above 

required, and the “general description” at the end of such 

notes will state minutely the character of the land, soil, 

timber, etc., found in such townships. 

The topography will be given on the true line in all cases, 

and will be taken correctly, not estimated or approximated. 

6. With the original field notes of the survey of base lines 

and standard parallels, and principal and guide meridians 

forming a tract 24 miles including those of the 

township exteriors therein, the deputy will submit a diagram 

of the lines surveyed, drawn to a scale of half an inch to one 

mile, upon which will be written the true bearings and 

lengths of all surveyed lines, except the lengths of those which 

are actually 40.00 or 80.00 chains. These diagrams will exhibit all water courses, with the direction of each indicated by 

an arrow head pointing down stream; also, the intersection of 

the lines with all prairies, marshes, swamps, ravines, lakes, 

ponds, mountains, hills, and all other natural or artificial 

topographical features mentioned in the original field notes, 

to the fullest extent possible. 

7. With the special instructions for making subdivisional 

surveys of townships into sections, the deputy will be furnished by the surveyor general with blank township diagrams drawn to a scale of one inch to forty chains, upon which 

the true bearings and lengths of the township and section 

lines, from which the surveys are to be projected, or upon 

which they are to close, will be carefully marked; and on such 

diagrams the deputy who subdivides will make appropriate 

sketches of the various objects of topography as they occur on 

his lines, so as to exhibit not only the points of intersection 

therewith, but also the directions and relative positions of 

such objects between the lines, or within each section, as far 

as practicable, so that every topographical feature may be 

properly completed and connected in the showing. 

8. Triangulations, offsets, or traverses, made to determine 

distances that can not be directly measured, such as those 

over (e. g.) deep streams, lakes, impassable swamps, canons, 

etc., will be made on the random lines,58 when random lines 

are run. All particulars will be fully stated in the field notes. 

The exhibition of every mile of surveying, whether on 

standard, township, or subdivision lines, and the meanders 

in each section, will be complete in itself, and will be separated from other records by a black line drawn across that 

part of the page containing the body of notes. The description 

of the surface, soil, minerals, timber, undergrowth, etc., on 

each mile of line will follow the notes of survey of such line, 

and not be mingled with them. 

Particular care will be taken to record at the end of each 

mile the number of chains of mountainous land, heavily timbered land, or land covered with dense undergrowth. (See 

page 224.) 

The date of each day’s work will immediately follow the 

notes thereof. 

9. Near the end of the original field notes and immediately 

before the “general description”, the deputy surveyor will 

add, in the form shown in specimen field notes (page 177), a 

tabular statement of the latitude and departure of all boundary lines of the township, derived from a traverse table, and 

will give the totals, and the errors in latitude and departure; 

said errors shall in no case exceed three chains, the prescribed 

limit for the falling of the random north boundary of a 

township. If a part or the whole of one or more boundaries is 

made up of meander lines, the northings, southings, eastings, 

and westings of the 

-62 

full section lines, nearest said meanders, will replace the 

missing N., S., E., or W. township lines, as the case may 

require, thereby presenting the errors of said boundaries of a 

closed survey. 

If all the exterior lines have been surveyed by the deputy, 

the bearings and distances for the table will be taken from his 

own notes. In a case where some of the boundaries have been 

surveyed under another contract, the deputy will use the 

bearings and distances supplied by the surveyor general, in 

connection with those of his own lines; and, if errors exceed 

the allowance of three chains, specified in paragraph 1 of the 

“Prescribed Limits”,59 the deputy will determine where the 

error occurs, correct the same before he leaves the field, and 

place the table in his original field notes. 

Besides the ordinary notes taken on line (and which will 

always be written down on the spot, leaving nothing to be 

supplied by memory), the deputy will subjoin, at the conclusion of his book, such further description or information 

touching any matter or thing connected with the township (or 

other) survey which he may be able to afford, and may deem 

useful or necessary to be known-with a general description 

of the township in the aggregate, as respects the face of the 

country, its soil and geological features, timber, minerals, 

waters, etc. 

10. Following the general description of the township will 

be placed “A list of the names of the individuals employed to 

assist in running, measuring, and marking the lines and 

57. See page 52 and Plate 111. 

58. See pages 136 and 188. 

59. See page 59, and retracement article, page 72 

624 
corners described in the foregoing field notes of township No. 

- of the base line of range No. - of the - 

meridian, showing the respective capacities in which they 

acted." 

AFFIDAVITS TO FIELD NOTES. 

The following are the forms of official oaths to be taken by 

deputy surveyors and their assistants. The original oaths 

will be affixed to the original field notes forwarded to the 

surveyor general by the deputy surveyor; the preliminary 

oaths being placed on the page following the index of the first 

book, and the final oaths at the end of the last book of field 

notes of the survey of each class oflines6' to which they refer: 

PRELIMINARY OATHS OF ASSISTANTS. 

We, - and - -, do solemnly 

swear that we will well and faithfully execute the duties of 

chainmen; that we will level the chain upon even and uneven 

ground and plumb the tally pins, either by sticking or dropping the same; that we will report the true distance to all 

notable objects, and the true length of all lines that we assist 

in measuring, to the best of our skill and ability, and in 

accordance with instructions given us, in the survey of the 

- 

- 

-, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, 189-. 

[SEAL.] -~ 

We, - - and -, do solemnly 

swear that we will well and truly perform the duties of 

moundmen in the establishment of corners, according to the 

instructions given us, to the best of our skill and ability, in 

the survey of -. 

- -, Moundman. 

-, Moundman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, lag-. 

[SEAL.] -- 

-63- 

We, - and - -, do solemnly 

swear that we will well and truly perform the duties of axmen, in the establishment of corners and other duties, according to instructions given us, to the best of our skill and 

ability, in the survey of -. 

- -, Axman. 

-, Axman. 

60. See page 50, and par. 13 (a) page 64. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this- day of 

-, 189-. 

[SEAL.] -- 

-. 

4- , do solemnly swear that I will well and 

truly perform the duties of flagman, according to instructions 

given me, to the best of my skill and ability, in the survey of 

-. 

- -, Flagman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, 189-. 

[SEAL.] -- 

FINAL OATHS OF DEPUTY SURVEYORS AND 

THEIR ASSISTANTS. 

List of names. 

A list of the names of the individuals employed by - 

-, United States deputy surveyor, to assist in running, 

measuring, and marking the lines and corners described in 

the foregoing field notes of the survey of - -, 

showing the respective capacities in which they acted. 

- -, Chainman. 

- -, Chainman. 

- -, Chainman. 

~ -, Chainman. 

- 

- 

-) Moundman. 

-, Moundman. 

-, Axman. 

-, Axman. 

-, Flagman. 

FINAL OATHS OF ASSISTANTS. 

We hereby certify that we assisted 9 

United States deputy surveyor, in surveying all those parts 

or portions of the of the - base and - 

meridian, of , which are represented in the 

foregoing field notes as having been surveyed by him and 

under his direction; and that said survey has been in all 

respects, to the best of our knowledge and belief, well and 

faithfully surveyed, and the corner monuments established 

according to the instructions furnished by the United States 

surveyor general for -. 

-) Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

-, Chainman. 

-, Moundman. 

-, Moundman. 

-, Axman. 

-, Axman. 

-, Flagman. 

625 
Subscribed and sworn to before me this - day of 

-, 189-. 

[SEAL.] -~ 

FINAL OATH OF UNITED STATES DEPUTY 

SURVEYOR. 

I, - , United States deputy surveyor, do 

solemnly swear that in pursuance of instructions received 

from - -, United States surveyor general for 

-, bearing date of the - day of-, 189-, 

I have well, faithfully, and truly, in my own proper person, 

and in strict conformity with the instruction furnished by the 

United States surveyor general for -, the Manual of 

Surveying Instructions, and the laws of the United States, 

surveyed all those parts or portions of - 

-64- 

- 

- 

of the - base and - meridian in the 

of -, which are represented in the foregoing 

field notes as having been surveyed by me and under my 

directions; and I do further solemnly swear that all the corners of said survey have been established and perpetuated in 

strict accordance with the Manual of Surveying Instructions, 

and the special written instructions of the United States 

surveyor general for -, and in the specific manner 

described in the field notes, and that the foregoing are the 

true field notes of such survey; and should any fraud be 

detected, I will suffer the penalty of perjury, under the provisions of an act of Congress approved August 8, 1846. 

7 

United States Deputy Surveyor. 

Subscribed by said , U. S. deputy surveyor, 

and sworn to before me this - day of-, 189-. 

[SEAL.] -- 

11. The final oath of the deputy surveyor will be taken be 

fore the U. S. Surveyor General for the State or Territory in 

which the survey is executed, or before any other officer 

authorized by the laws of the United States or by the municipal authorities, to administer land oaths, except notaries 

public. 

It is preferable that both preliminary and final oaths of 

assistants should be taken before some officer duly authorized to administer oaths other than the deputy surveyor. In 

cases, however, where great delay, expense, or inconvenience 

would result from a strict compliance with this rule, the 

deputy surveyor is authorized to administer the necessary 

oaths to his assistants, but in each case where this is done, he 

will submit to the proper surveyor general, a full written 

report of the circumstances which required his stated action. 

12. The deputy will transmit the original field notes and 

the required sketches to the survey or genaral at the earliest 

practicable date after completion of his work in the field. Said 

original field notes will be filed in the office of the surveyor 

general as a part of its permanent records, subject only to the 

direction of the Commissioner of the General Land Office; and 

no changes whatever will be made in said original field notes, 

after they have been filed in the surveyor general's office. 

13. The original field notes, each bearing the written 

approval of the surveyor general, will be substantially bound 

in volumes of suitable size and retained in the surveyor 

general's office. Certified transcripts of said original field 

notes will be prepared at the earliest practicable date, as 

follows: 

(a) The field notes of the survey of base lines and standard 

parallels, of principal and guide meridians, of township exteriors, and of subdivision and meander lines will be written 

in separate books. A complete set of preliminary and final 

oaths will be attached to the field notes of each class of 

No adhesive material of any kind will be used to fasten leaves 

or covers. Cut or mutilated leaves, or slips, will not be inserted. 

(b) The field notes of subdivisions will be written in a 

separate book for each township; the preliminary oaths of the 

assistants employed in making said subdivisions will be prefixed to the first book, and their final oaths will be attached to 

the last book of the series, arranged in the order of dates. 

(c) The first or title page of each book of field notes will 

describe the subject matter of the same, the locus of the 

survey, by whom surveyed, number and date of contract, and 

the dates of commencement and completion of the work. 

-65- 

(d) The second page of each book of field notes will contain 

the names and duties of the assistants employed on the surveys recorded therein; the index will be placed on the same or 

following page. 

(e) Whenever a new assistant is employed, or the duties of 

any one of them changed, such fact will be stated in an 

appropriate entry immediately preceding the notes taken 

under such changed arrangements. 

(0 No abbreviations or contractions of words are allowable, 

except such words as are constantly occurring, and a few 

others, additional to those enumerated on page 23, as follows: 

astron. 

chs. 

decl. 

diff. lat. 

dep. 

h. 

lat. 

L. c. 

corr. 

for astronomical. 

for chains. 

for correction. 

for declination. 

for difference of latitude. 

for departure. 

for hours. 

for latitude. 

for lower culmination. 

1. m. t. 

long. for longitude. 

m. for minutes. 

mag. decl. for magnetic declination. 

red. for reduce or reduction. 

temp. for temporary. 

U. C. for upper culmination. 

w. corr. for watch correction. 

w. t. for watch time. 

for local mean time. 

Proper names will never be abbreviated, however often 

they recur. 

(g) All transcripts of field notes, made out as herein 

directed, will be written on official field-note paper, foolscap 

size (pages 13% x 8Y2 inches), in a bold, legible hand, or 

type-written, and as nearly as possible without erasures or 

interlineations; such transcripts of any series of surveys, 

included in one account forwarded to the General Land 

Ofice, will be securely put up in one package, at the office of 

the surveyor general, prior to transmission. 

61. See classification of lines, page 50 

626 
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ISSUED BY UNITED 

STATES SURVEYORS GENERAL TO UNITED 

STATES DEPUTY SURVEYORS. 

One of the most important duties to be performed by the 

surveyor general is to provide the deputy surveyor with Special Instructions, in connection with the contract, prepared in 

accordance with law, which instructions will not consist of 

directing attention to certain paragraphs in this Manual, 

reiteration of its requirements, and printed directions of a 

general nature; but they will in all cases be specific in character, with all necessary detailed statements setting forth what 

the deputy is to do and how the work is to be performed. 

Before making out special instructions, the surveyor general 

will cause a thorough examination to be made of the field 

notes and plats of older surveys of standard and township 

lines upon which the deputy is to base his work, and give him 

full information-both written and graphic-of the exact condition of adjoining surveys, with all irregularities that may 

be found, carefully and clearly noted; with all necessary 

instructions for his guidance if he finds everything as it 

should be, and, in addition, full advice as far as practicable 

what to do in case the surveys on the ground are not as 

represented in the old notes. 

If the contract includes exterior lines, the surveyor general 

will specify in detail where the deputy is to commence, in 

what order and in what direction he is to run the lines, and 

provide for his use a diagram, drawn to a scale of one inch to 

one mile, giving full and accurate information in regard to 

lengths and bearings of all lines of old surveys, from which he 

is to work, or upon which he is to close. The diagrams will be 

made in triplicate, one copy for the General Land Office, one 

for the deputy, and one to be retained; they may be either 

original drawings, or blue prints or tracings therefrom. In no 

case must the deputy be sent 

-66- 

into the field without full and accurate information in regards 

to all irregularities on the records which will affect the extent 

or accuracy of his survey. 

SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES. 

[See Plates I11 and IV.] 

Specimen field notes Nos. 1,2,3,4, and 5, illustrate, respectively, the method and order to be followed in the survey of 

standard parallels, guide meridians, and township exteriors; 

resurvey of township exteriors; and the subdivision of a 

township into sections and quarter sections. 

The attention of every deputy surveyor is particularly 

directed to these specimens, as indicating not only the 

method by which his work will be conducted, but also the 

form, order, language, etc., in which his field notes will be 

prepared for the office of the surveyor general, and such 

specimens will be deemed a part of these instructions; and 

any departure from their details, in cases where the circumstances are analogous in practice, will be regarded as a violation of his contract and oath. 

DIAGRAM OF TOWNSHIP EXTERIORS. 

[See Plate 111.1 

The title, certificate, and remarks on Plate 111, with the 

specimen field notes Nos. 1, 2, and 3, will fully explain the 

drawing designated “Township Exteriors.” 

In all cases the true bearing and length of each township 

boundary will be clearly stated on the diagram; and, when 

any township boundary entered on the diagram, surveyed 

under the current contract, or a prior contract, departs from 

the true meridian, or proper latitude curve (as the case may 

be), or falls short of or overruns its proper length, by an 

amount in excess of the prescribed limits of three chains (page 

59, paragraph 11, the actual position and extent of said 

township boundary will be graphically exhibited on the diagram, as well as by bearing and length recorded in the field 

notes. 

SPECIMEN TOWNSHIP PLAT. 

[See Plate IV.1 

Plate IV illustrates the subdivision of a town ship into 

sections and quarter sections; the record of said subdivision 

being given in detail in specimen field notes No. 5. 

The subdivision of fractional sections into forty-acre lots 

(as near as may be) will be so laid down on the official 

township plat in broken black lines as to admit of giving to 

each a specific designation by word description, if possible, 

according to its relative position in the fractional section, as 

per examples on Plate IV; or by a number, in all cases where 

the lot can not properly be designated as a quarter quarter. 

Those fractional lots which are not susceptible of being described according to relative local position will be numbered 

in a regular series; those bordering on the north boundary of 

a township to be numbered progressively from east to west, 

and those bordering on the west boundary of a township to be 

numbered progressively from north to south, in each regular 

section. As section 6 borders on both the north and west 

boundaries of the township, the fractional lots in the 

-67- 

same will be numbered as follows: commencing with No. 1 in 

the northeast, thence progressively west to No. 4 in the 

northwest, and south to No. 7 in the southwest corner of the 

section. 

To secure a uniform system for numbering lots of fractional 

sections, including those above specified, imagine the section 

divided by three equidistant parallel latitudinal lines into 

four strips or tiers, 1 numbered from north to south; then, 

beginning with the eastern lot of the north tier, call it No. 1, 

and continue the numbering west through the tier, then east 

in the second, west in the third, and east in the fourth tier. A 

lot extending north and south through two, or part of two 

tiers, will be numbered in the tier containing it s greater 

area. In case any tier is without numbered lots, the numbering will be continued in the next tier to the south. (Plate IV, 

section 18.) 

This method of numbering will apply to any part of a 

section, regardless of the relative situation of a part or parts 

627 
surveyed and lotted under a prior contract; in this case the lot 

numbers will be a continuation of the series already initiated. 

Interior lots will be, as nearly as possible, 20.00 chains long 

by 20.00 chains wide; and the excess or deficiency of measurement will always be thrown against the northern or western 

boundary of the section, or meander line, or irregular boundary, as the case may be. 

When, by reason of irregular surveys or from other causes, 

the length of a township from south to north exceeds the 

lawful length of 480.00 chains, or the width from east to west 

exceeds 480.00 chains minus the proper convergency, to such 

extent as to require two or more tiers of lots along the north 

boundary, or two or more ranges of lots along the west boundary, as the case may be, the entire north or west halves of said 

sections will be properly lotted, and to each lot will be 

assigned its proper number; and in such cases the area of each 

lot will be stated on the plat. 

In case the length or width of the township falls so far short 

of legal dimensions as to eliminate the north or west half of 

any section situated as above specified, that part of the section remaining will be treated in a similar manner. 

In a regular township (Plate IV) the southeast quarter of 

the northwest quarter of section 6 will have its proper area in 

acres (40) inserted in all cases. The half quarter sections in 

north tier and west range of sections will exhibit their proper 

areas in acres (80); while the areas of quarter sections will be 

omitted, except as follows: 

When two lines of legal subdivision of either 160,80, or 40 

acre tracts intersect each other on or so near a meander or 

boundary line that the ordinary inaccuracies of drawing 

would leave the areas of said tracts in doubt, the plats will, for 

the sake of clearness and a full showing of the facts, exhibit 

the proper areas of such quarter, half quarter, and quarter 

quarter sections. See examples, Plate IV, in sections 13, 17, 

25, and 35. 

Plats shall not be trimmed. A margin of three inches for 

binding will be preserved on the left-hand side of each plat. 

Each plat will be certified by the surveyor general, with table 

annexed, according to the form on Plate IV, and will exhibit 

the area of public land, water surface, townsite, private land 

claims, and mineral claims, with the total area of the 

township. 

Each township plat will be prepared in triplicate: one for 

the General Land Office, one for the United States district 

land office, and the third will be retained as the record in the 

office of the surveyor general. 

The plat for the local land ofice will not be forwarded until 

notice is 

-68- 

received by the surveyor general from the Commissioner of 

the General Land Office that the survey represented on said 

plat has been accepted, and that he is authorized to file the 

triplicate plat. 

The plats will be prepared as nearly as possible in accordance with the specimen plat designated “Plate IV.” The use 

of all fluids, except a preparation of India ink of good quality, 

must be avoided by the draughtsman in delineations relating 

to the public surveys. All lines, figures, etc., will be sharply 

defined. All lettering on the plats must be clear and sharp in 

outline and design, and black; ornamentation of any kind is 

prohibited. These requirements are necessary in order that 

everything shown upon original plats may be fairly reproduced in making photolithographic copies of the same. 

All towns, settlements, permanent buildings, private 

claims, reservations, water courses, ditches, lakes, islands, 

mountains, buttes, canons, roads, railroads, telegraph lines, 

canals, etc., will be shown upon the plats and designated by 

proper names where such are known. 

All township plats are to be drawn to a uniform scale of 1 

inch to 40 chains, United States standard, and diagrams of 

exteriors to a scale of 1 inch to 160 chains. 

Surveyors general will require that the specimen plat shall 

be closely followed, in order that uniformity of appearance 

and expression of drawing representing the public land surveys may be attained. 

With the copy of each township plat furnished to a district 

land office, the surveyor general is required by law to furnish 

descriptive notes of the character and quality of the soil and 

timber found on and in the vicinity of each surveyed line, and 

to give a description of each corner. 

Printed blank forms of such notes are furnished by the 

General Land Office. The forms provide eighteen spaces for 

meander corners, which, in most cases, will be sufficient; but 

when the number shall exceed eighteen, the residue will 

have to be inserted on the supplemental blank form. 

A series of meander corners are shown on Plate IV, viz: 

From No. 1 to No. 8, on Yellowstone River; No. 9 to No. 10, on 

Clear Lake; No. 11 to No. 15, on Lids Lake; No. 16 to No. 17, 

on Ivy Island; and No. 18, on Diamond Rock. 

COMPUTATION OF THE AREAS OF LOTS 

ADJOINING THE NORTH AND WEST 

BOUNDARIES OF REGULAR TOWNSHIPS. 

1. In regular townships, the tracts of land in each section 

adjoining the north and west boundaries of such townships, 

in excess of the regularly subdivided 480 acres (except in 

section 6), will, in general, be in the form of trapezoids, 80.00 

chains in length by about 20 chains in width. 

On the plats of such townships, each of said tracts will be 

divided into four lots, by drawing broken lines at intervals of 

20.00 chains, parallel to the ends of the tracts, which will be 

regarded as parallel to each other. 

With the exception of section 6, the south boundaries of 

sections of the north tier, when within prescribed limits, will 

be called 80.00 chains 

When the above-named conditions obtain, the areas of the 

lots in any one tract (exept in section 6) may be determined, 

as follows: 

Divide the difference between the widths of the ends of the 

tract by 4; if 3 remains, increase the hundredth figure of the 

quotient by a unit; in all other cases disregard the fraction; 

call the quotient thus obtained, 

-69- 

“d”; then, taking the end widths of the tract in chains and 

decimals of a chain, the areas of the lots, in acres, will be: 

628 
Of the smallest lot: twice the width of the lesser end, plus 

“d”; 

Of the largest lot: twice the width of the greater end, minus 

“d”; 

Of the smaller middle lot: sum of the widths of the ends, 

minus “d”; 

Of the larger middle lot: sum of the widths of the ends, plus 

“d”. 

A check on the computation may be had by multiplying the 

sum of the widths, of the ends of the tract by 4; the product 

should agree exactly with the total area of the four lots. 

The proper application of the above rules will always give 

areas correct to the nearest hundredth of an acre; and, as the 

use of fractions is entirely avoided, the method is recommended for its simplicity and accuracy. 

Example 1. (See Plate IV, section 31.) 

The 1/4 difference of latitudinal boundaries is 0.033/4 chains; 

consequently, “d” is .04 chains; then, 

18.35 x2 +.04 = 36,74acres,theareaoflotl; 

18.50 x2 - .04 = 36.96 acres, the area oflot 4; 

18.50 + 18.35 - .04 = 36.81 acres, the area oflot 2; 

18.50 + 18.35 + .04 = 36.89 acres, the area oflot 3; 

Check:[18.35 + 18.50 3 x 4 = 147.40 acres, the area ofthe four lots. 

The arithmetical operations are here written in detail, for 

the purpose of illustration; but the practical computer will 

perform all the work mentally. 

2. Section 6. (See Plate I, figs. 6 and 7; and Plate IV.) The 

areas of lots 5,6, and 7 may be obtained by the foregoing rules 

in all cases, except when the township closes on a base line or 

standard parallel; also, the area of lot 4,prouided both meridional boundaries are 80.00 chains in length; when the last 

condition obtains, the areas of lots 1, 2, and 3 will be equal, 

and each will contain 40.00 acres. 

In any case where the west boundary of sec. 6, is 80.00 

chains, and the east boundary either greater or less than 80.00 

chains, the areas of lots 1, 2, 3, and 4 will be computed as 

follows: 

Refer to figures 6 and 7 and determine the difference, “q”, 

between the east boundaries of lots 1 and 4 by the following 

proportion: 

N. bdy. sec. 6. : diff. of meridional bdrs. sec. 6: :60 chs. : q; 

then will E. bdy. lot 4 = E. bdy. lot 1 ? q; in which “q7, will be 

added when the east boundary of sec. 6 is less than 80.00 

chains (fig. 7.); but subtracted when said east boundary is 

greater than 80.00 chains (fig. 6). 

Now take one third of “q”, and add it to the shorter east 

boundary of lots 1 or 4, as conditions may require, and thereby determine the length of one of the meridional boundaries 

of lot 2; to which, again add “one third of q”, and thus obtain 

the length of the opposite side of lot 2. The areas of lots 1,2, 

and 3, in acres, will be found by taking the sum of their 

respective meridional boundaries, expressed in chains and 

decimals of a chain. 

The area of lot 4 may be had by multiplying its mean width 

by its mean length. 

Finally, to test the entire work, multiply the sum of the 

latitudinal boundaries by 4, and to the product add the area 

of the small triangle C A B, if the east boundary is greater 

than 80.00 chains (fig. 6); but subtract the area of said small 

triangle if the east boundary is less than 80.00 chains (fig. 7). 

These operations, correctly performed, 

-70- 

will give the true area of the section, which should agree 

exactly with the total area of its legal subdivisions, obtained 

as directed in the preceding paragraphs. 

Example 2. (See Plate I, figs. 6 and 7, and Plate IV.) 

Compute areas of lots 5, 6, and 7 of sec. 6, as directed in 

paragraph 1, and illustrated by the example; then write: 

chs. chs. chs. chs. chs. 

77.75 : 0.05 : : 60.00 : 0.0386 = q; ?h q= 0.0129 

chs. chs. chs. 

20.0500 - 0.0386 = 20.01,62 the E. bdy. of lot 4; 

20.0114 + 0.0129 = 20.02, the E. bdy. of lot 3; 

20.0243 + 0.0129 = 20.04, the E. bdy. of lot 2. 

Then, for the areas of lots 1, 2, 3, and 4, we have: 

chs. chs. acres. 

40.09, the area of lot 1; 

40.06, the area of lot 2; 

40.03, the area of lot 3; 

20.05 + 20.04.. ........ = 

20.04 + 20.02. ......... = 

20.02 + 20.01.. ........ = 

20.00 20.01 x 17.75 + l7.78 = 35.54, the area of lot 4, 

2 2 

Also L17.78 + 17.871 x 3 = 106.95, the area of lots 5, 6, 

and 7. 

Area of regular subdivisions = 360.00 

Total. ...................... = 622.67, The area of Sec. 6. 

chs. chs. 

77.75 x 0.025 = 0.19, the area of triangle C A B 

Check: c77.87 + 77.751 x 4 = 622.48 

(fig. 6) 

Total. ...................... = 622.67, which agrees with the area 

of section 6, before 

determined. 

3. The area in acres of a tract 40.00 chains long, adjoining 

north or west township boundaries (except in N. W. Y4 sec. 61, 

is equal to the sum of its parallel boundaries (expressed in 

chains and decimals thereof) multiplied by 2; (e. g.) the area 

oflots 6 and 7 (Plate I, fig. 61, is [17.87 + 17.811 x 2 = 71.36 

acres. 

The area in acres of a tract 60.00 chains long, situated as 

above described (excluding lot 4, of sec. 6), may be found by 

multiplying the sum of its parallel boundaries (expressed in 

chains and decimals of a chain) by 3; (e. g.) fig. 6; south 

boundary lot 4 = 17.78 chs.; area of lots 5,6, and 7 is L17.78 + 

17.871 x 3 = 106.95 acres. (See example 2.) 

The area in acres of quarter sections adjoining north and 

west township boundaries (excluding N. W. l/4 sec. 6), may be 

obtained by multiplying the sum of their parallel boundaries 

(taken in chains and decimals of a chain), by 2; (e. g.) the area 

of S. W. 1/4 sec. 6 (fig. 6), is L37.87 + 37.811 x 2 = 151.36 

acres. 

The area in acres of any section along the north and west 

boundaries of regular townships (except sec. 6) may be had by 

multiplying the sum of its parallel boundaries (expresed in 

chains and decimals of a chain) by 4; (e. g.) the area of sec. 1 

(Plate IV) is [80.00 + 79.771 x 4 = 639.08 acres. 

The area in acres of a theoretical township may be obtained 

62. These measures are taken to the nearest hundreth only. 

629 
by multiplying the sum of its latitudinal boundaries (expressed in chains and 

-71- 

decimals of a chain) by 24; (e. g.) the area of the township 

represented by Plate I, fig. 1 is L480.00 + 479.341 x 24 = 

23,024.16 acres. 

EXPLANATIONS OF ARTICLES ON PAGES 72 to 78, 

WITH GENERAL DEFINITIONS OF A 

“RETRACEMENT” AND A “RESURVEY.” 

When new surveys are to be initiated from, or closed upon 

the lines of old surveys, which although reported to have been 

executed correctly, are found to be actually defective in alinement, measurement, or position, it is manifest that the employment of the regular methods prescribed for surveying 

normal township exteriors and subdivisions would result in 

extending the imperfections of the old surveys into the new, 

thereby producing irregular townships bounded by exterior 

lines not in conformity with true meridians or parallels of 

latitude, and containing trapezium-shaped sections which 

may or may not contain 640 acres each, as required by law. 

Therefore, in order to extend such new surveys without 

incorporating therein the defects of prior erroneous work, 

special methods, in harmony as far as practicable with the 

following requirements, should be employed, viz: 

The establishment of township boundaries conformable to 

true meridian and latitude lines. 

The establishment of section boundaries by running two 

sets of parallel lines governed respectively by true meridians 

and parallels of latitude, and intersecting each other approximately at right angles at such intervals as to produce tracts 

of square form containing 640 acres each. 

The reduction to a minimum of the number of fractional 

lots in a township, and consequently of the amount of field 

and office work. 

Such special methods are based upon certain limits of 

allowable error in the alinement, measurement, and position 

of old township boundaries, as prescribed in the following 

article entitled “DEFINITIONS OF DEFECTIVE 

TOWNSHIP BOUNDARIES,” page 72, which will be determined and rectifications made, if necessary, under the provisions of the article entitled “RETRACEMENT OR RESURVEY OF TOWNSHIP LINES AND LINEAR BOUNDARIES 

TANGULAR SYSTEM OF SURVEYING,” page 72, prior to 

the execution of new surveys under the methods prescribed 

by the article entitled “METHODS OF EXECUTING NEW 

SURVEYS, WHEN INITIATED FROM OR CLOSED UPON 

DEFECTIVE OLD SURVEYS,” page 75, and illustrated on 

Plate VII, by figures 1 to 15; on Plate VIII, figures 1 to 7, and 

on Plate IX. 

In order to prevent any misunderstanding relative to the 

modus operandi indicated by the terms “retracement” and 

“resurvey,” the following definitions of the same are here 

presented: 

The retracement of a township boundary, or other line of 

survey, consists in the determination ofthe true bearings and 

distances between the successive corners along the entire 

NOT ESTABLISHED IN CONFORMITY WITH THE REClength of such a line; and the data thus obtained will be 

embodied in the field notes together with detailed particulars 

of the methods employed. 

The resurvey of a township boundary or other line of survey 

consists of a retracement of such a line accompanied by the 

reconstruction of defective original corners and the establishment thereon of all the necessary new corners, and the detailed particulars of the entire operation will be embodied in 

the field notes. 

-72- 

DEFINITIONS OF DEFECTIVE TOWNSHIP 

BOUNDARIES. 

1. Upon retracement thereof, an old township boundary 

may be found to be defective in one or all of three qualifications, viz: alinement, measurement, and position, as follows: 

2. In alinement; when any portion thereof deviates more 

than twenty-one minutes of arc from a true meridian or 

latitude line. 

3. In measurement; in the case of a meridional line, or a 

latitudinal line which is identical with a standard parallel; 

when its length is greater or less than six miles by more than 

three chains; or when the length of any portion thereof between two successive corners, is greater or less than forty 

chains; excepting that portion between the last established 

corner and the limiting line, which may be greater or less 

than forty chains, when such a boundary has been closed 

upon the bank of a meanderable body of water, a military or 

Indian reservation, or State boundary, etc., as the case may 

be. 

4. In measurement; in the case of a latitudinal line not 

identical with a portion of a standard parallel; when its 

length is greater or less than six miles minus the proper 

correction for convergency, by more than three chains; or 

when the length of any portion thereof between two successive corners is greater or less than forty chains; except, when 

such a boundary has been run as a true line to an intersection 

with any line of limitation, that portion thereof, between the 

last established subdivisional corner and the limiting line, 

may be greater or less than forty chains; and also, when it has 

been established in the regular manner, i. e. by random and 

true lines, that portion thereof in which the fractional 

measurement was originally allowed for may be greater or 

less than forty chains. 

5. In position; when the corners originally established on 

such a boundary can not be connected with the corners on the 

opposite regularly established boundary, by lines which do 

not deviate more than twenty-one minutes of arc from true 

meridian or latitude lines. 

6. The limits prescribed in the foregoing paragraphs are to 

be considered only in determining the necessity of resurveying old township boundaries when new surveys are to be 

initiated from or closed upon the same, and will not be construed in any way as establishing limits of allowable error in 

the execution of new surveys. 

630 
RETRACEMENT OR RESURVEY OF TOWNSHIP 

LINES AND LINEAR BOUNDARIES NOT 

ESTABLISHED IN CONFORMITY WITH THE 

RECTANGULAR SYSTEM OF SURVEYING.63 

If in subdividing a township, it is found that any boundary 

thereof is defective in excess of the limits of allowable error 

prescribed in the article entitled “Definitions of Defective 

Township Boundaries,” above, or that the corners originally 

established thereon had been incorrectly marked, or have 

been obliterated, the deputy surveyor will resurvey so much 

of said boundaries as may be necessary, as follows: 

1. When subdivisional lines have not been closed upon 

either side of, or mineral claims tied to, a township boundary, 

it will be corrected (if necessary), in point of alinement, as 

well as measurement, by establishing regular new corners at 

lawful distances (minus the northing or plus the southing of 

the south boundary; or minus the westing orplus the easting of 

the east boundary), from said boundaries respectively (as the 

case may be), upon a right line connecting the proper 

township corners, 

-73- 

provided said line does not deviate more than twenty-one 

minutes of arc from a true meridian or latitude line (as the 

case may be). (See Plate VII, figs. 1, 2, 3.) 

But, if the bearing of said line exceeds the limit prescribed 

above, the new corners will be placed on a line run due north 

or west, from the southeast corner of the township, to intersection with the township or range line (as the case may 

be), where a closing corner will be established, and the old 

township corner properly changed to a corner common to two 

townships. 

The old corners on all township boundaries rectified under 

the provisions of this paragraph will be destroyed. (See Plate 

VII, figs. 4 and 5.) 

2. Where subdivisional lines have been closed upon one 

side of, or mineral claims tied to, a township boundary prior 

to the subdivision of the township on the other side, its alinement will not be changed; all obliterated old corners will be 

reestablished in their original places; new regular corners 

common to two townships, sections, or quarter sections, will 

be established upon it at lawful distances, minus the northing 

or plus the southing of the south boundary; or minus the 

westing or plus the easting of the east boundary, from said 

boundaries respectively (as the case may be), marked with 

reference to the township being subdivided, and the marks on 

the old corners upon such boundary which refer to the new 

work will be effaced. 

Marks on bearing trees will be corrected (if necessary) to 

indicate the township, range, and section in which they 

stand, but the pits and mounds will remain as originally 

established. (See Plate VII, figs. 6 and 7.) 

3. Where subdivisional lines have been closed upon one 

side of, or mineral claims tied to, the northern portion of a 

range line prior to the subdivision of the township on the 

other side (see paragraph 2), while upon the southern portion 

of the same such attachments have not bex made on either 

63. Regarding permission to resurvey, see page 224. 

side (see paragraph l), said southern portion will be resurveyed and proper new corners established thereon, at lawful 

distances from the south boundary, as follows: 

If the bearing of said southern portion does not deviate 

more than twenty-one minutes of arc from a true meridian 

line, it will be rectified under the provisions of the first clause 

of paragraph 1, and the rectifications will be continued on the 

northern portion under the provisions of paragraph 2. (See 

Plate VII, fig. 8.) 

If, however, said bearing exceeds the specified limit, from 

the northern terminal corner of said southern portion, the 

range line will be extended due south on a random to its 

intersection with the south boundary where a corner common 

to two townships will be established, all the necessary 

changes made in the markings on the original corner common to four townships situated in its immediate vicinity, and 

regular new corners placed upon the respective portions of 

the entire range line as specified in the foregoing clause. (See 

Plate VII, fig. 9.) 

Similar cases involving the rectification of the northern 

portion of a range line when the southern portion of the same 

can not be rectified in bearing, will be treated in conformity 

with the rules prescribed in the foregoing clauses, with the 

exception, that where such northern portion deviates more 

than twenty-one minutes of arc from a true meridian line, its 

alinement will be rectified by extending the same from its 

southern terminal corner, due north on a true line to its 

intersection with the north boundary, where a proper closing 

corner will be 

-74- 

established and the necessary corrections applied to the old 

corner common to four townships in its immediate vicinity, so 

as to change it to a corner common to two townships. (See 

Plate VII, figs. 10, 11, and 12.) 

In the treatment of latitudinal township lines the rule 

prescribed in the foregoing clauses will be applied, observing, 

however, that the stated designations north or south will 

correspond in such cases to west or east, respectively. 

4. When subdivisional lines have been closed upon one or 

both sides of, or mineral claims tied to, the northern and 

southern portions of a range line, while the middle portion 

thereof is free from such attachments, said portion will be 

resurveyed and new regular corners will be established 

thereon at intervals of forty chains from its southern terminal corner, upon a right line connecting the original terminal 

corners thereof, the fractional measurement being thrown 

against the northern terminal corner. (See Plate VII, figs. 13, 

14, and 15.) 

In such cases all the original corners, excepting the terminal corners, of the portion of the lines thus resurveyed, will be 

destroyed. 

The rectification of the middle portions of latitudinal 

township lines, on which the conditions specified above 

obtain, will be executed in a similar manner, observing, 

however, that the designations north or south in the foregoing clauses will in such cases correspond to west or east, 

respectively. 

5. Under the foregoing paragraphs, the fact that mineral 

claims have been tied to a defective township boundary as 

63 1 
therein specified, will act as a bar to the rectification of such a 

boundary in alinement, only when the number of claims 

involved is great; while in cases where a few such claims have 

been connected with a few of the corners on such a boundary, 

said boundary will be rectified in alinement and new corners 

placed thereon, care being taken, however, to perpetuate in a 

proper manner such old corners as are found to be connected 

with the claims; and the methods employed to accomplish the 

same, together with the bearings and distances of such old 

corner from the new, will be briefly and accurately recorded 

in the field notes. 

New corners on defective township boundaries must be 

established by an actual survey of such lines, and in no case 

will such corners be established from data acquired in running lines closing upon the same. 

In the retracement or resurvey of base lines, standard 

parallels, principal meridians and guide meridians, two sets 

of chainmen will be employed, while for similar work on 

township lines, not of the character specified above, only one 

set of chainmen is required, and in cases where conditions 

such as specified in paragraph 2 obtain, the bearings and 

distances between successive old corners and the connections 

of all new corners with the nearest old corners will be carefully determined and recorded in the field notes. 

When township or subdivisional lines intersect the boundaries of confirmed private land claims, or any other linear 

boundaries established at variance with the rectangular system of surveying, as much of said boundaries will be retraced 

as may be necessary, temporary stakes being set at intervals 

of ten chains thereon, and also at each angle formed by a 

change in the direction of the same. 

All obliterated boundary corners will be reestablished in 

their original places, and the regular surveys will be closed 

upon the retraced line as prescribed for “closings” in the last 

clause of par. 5, page 55. 

NOTE.-Regarding restoration of lost corners, by private and county surveyors, see 

page 224. 

-75- 

METHODS OF EXECUTING NEW SURVEYS, WHEN 

INITIATED FROM OR CLOSED UPON OLD 

SURVEYS, AND EXPLANATION OF FIGURES ON 

PLATE VII. 

Such methods are illustrated by the several figures on 

Plate VII, the rectification of the lines of old surveys, and the 

establishment of new township exterior and subdivisional 

lines connected with such old lines, being based upon the 

rules prescribed in the article entitled “Retracement or Resurvey of Township Lines,” &c., page 72. 

In considering the several cases, the probable obtaining 

conditions relative to a range line have been adopted in order 

to reduce the number of figures on said plate, and, to curtail 

also as much as practicable, the amount of reiterative verbal 

explanations; it being definitely understood, however, that 

whatever conditions may obtain relative to a latitudinal line 

similar to those illustrated and explained in extenso in the 

cases relative to the range line, the necessary rectifications 

will be made by the application of similar methods, subject, 

however, to the proper modifications due to the difference in 

the direction of the respective lines. 

The character of such modifications, when not obvious, are 

expressed in detail under the various clauses of the several 

paragraphs of the article on retracements referred to above. 

It will also be clearly understood that, in order to avoid 

unnecessary structural complications, the figures on Plate 

VII exhibit only the positions of township and section corners 

after rectification, while in actual practice the quarter section corners will also be properly affected. 

Fig. 1. The east boundary is assumed as irregular in bearing and defective in measurement; the township corners on 

the same, however, being susceptible of connection by a line 

not deviating more than twenty-one minutes of arc from a 

true meridian line. 

It will be rectified under the rules prescribed by clause 1, 

paragraph 1, while from the proper corners the west and 

north boundaries will be established in the regular manner, 

as well as the subdivisions within the exteriors thus rectified 

and established. 

Fig. 2. The east boundary defective in measurement. It will 

be rectified under clause 1, paragraph 1, while the west and 

north boundaries will be established, and the subdivisions 

executed in the regular manner. 

Fig. 3. The east boundary defective in position. Since the 

south boundary deviates from a true east and west line by 

more than twenty-one minutes of arc, said east boundary will 

be rectified under clause 1, paragraph 1; the west and north 

boundaries will be established in the regular manner; and 

the subdivisions will be executed from north to south, and 

from east to west, commencing at the corner to sections 1,2, 

35, and 36, and closing the fractional measurements on the 

south and west boundaries, as such closings are made in 

regular subdivisions on the north and west boundaries. 

Fig. 4. The east boundary defective in alinement. It will be 

rectified under clause 2, paragraph 1; while the west and 

north boundaries will be established, and the subdivisions 

executed, in the regular manner. 

Fig. 5. The east boundary defective in alinement and 

measurement. It will be rectified under clause 2, paragraph 1; 

the west boundary will be rectified in the regular manner, 

while from the corner common to two townships on the rectified east boundary, the north boundary will be run west on 

random and east on true line, permanent corners 

-76- 

common to sections and quarter sections ofthe township to be 

subdivided being established on the same. 

The subdivisions will be executed in the regular manner. 

Fig. 6. The south and east boundaries being defective in 

alinement, measurement, and position, will be rectified under 

clause 1, paragraph 2; the west boundary will be established 

in the regular manner, and the north boundary by east on 

random, and west on true line, throwing the fractional 

measurement against the old east boundary; while the subdivisions will be executed from north to south, and from west to 

east, commencing at the corner to sections 5, 6, 31, and 32, 

and closing the fractional measurements on the old south and 

east boundaries, as such closings are made in regular subdivisions on the north and west boundaries. 

Fig. 7. The north, south, east and west boundaries being 

defective in alinement, measurement, and position. The south 

632 
and east boundaries will be rectified under clause 1, paragraph 2; while the west and north boundaries will be retraced 

for length and bearing, any obliterated old corners being 

reestablished in their original places. 

The subdivisions will be executed as follows: 

From the corners to sections 35 and 36, and 25 and 36, the 

lines between said sections will be extended due north and 

west, respectively, to their mutual intersection, where the 

corner to sections 25, 26, 35 and 36, will be established. 

From said corner, the line between sections 26 and 35,27 

and 34,28 and 33,29 and 32, and 30 and 31 will be projected 

due west on a true line to its intersection with the west 

boundary of the township, where a closing corner will be 

established. 

A line thus established is termed a Sectional Correction 

Line; and when such an auxiliary line, thus projected, intersects its objective limiting line in such proximity to its 

objective corner that the accessories of the two corners would 

interfere, that portion of the auxiliary line situated between 

the last established section corner and the limiting line will 

be changed in alinement to close upon the corner found, thus 

avoiding placing two corners in close proximity. 

From the intial point of the sectional correction line, which, 

in this case, is the corner to sections 25, 26, 35, and 36, the 

line between sections 25 and 26,23 and 24,13 and 14,ll and 

12, and 1 and 2, will be projected north on a true line to its 

intersection with the north boundary, where a closing corner 

will be established. A line thus established is termed a SECTIONAL GUIDE MERIDIAN. 

South of the sectional correction line, and east of the sectional guide meridian, the subdivisions will be closed upon 

the south and east boundaries by random and true lines, 

throwing the fractional measurements against the same, as 

such closings are made in regular surveys on the north and 

west boundaries; while that portion of the township situated 

to the north and west respectively, of said auxiliary lines, will 

be subdivided in the regular manner, the parallelism of the 

latitudinal section lines being referred to the sectional correction line, and that of the meridional section lines to the 

sectional guide meridian. 

Closings on the west and north boundaries will be made by 

random and true lines, when the fallings are less than 50 

links per mile, and by true lines run to closing corners when 

the fallings exceed said limit. 

Fig. 8. The east boundary defective in measurement, the 

northern portion of the same being unchangeable, while the 

southern portion admits of rectification, 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 2, paragraph 2, the 

-77- 

west and north boundaries will be established, and the subdivisions executed, in the regular manner 

Fig. 9. The east boundary defective in alinement and 

measurement, the northern portion thereof being unchangeable, while the southern portion of the same admits of rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 3, paragraph 3, the south boundary, under clause 1, paragraph 2; the 

west boundary will be established in the regular manner; 

while the north boundary will be run east on random, and 

west on true line, throwing the fractional measurement 

against the east boundary. 

The subdivisions will be executed from south to north, and 

from west to east, closing the fractional measurements on the 

north and east boundaries, as such closings are made in 

regular surveys, on the north and west boundaries. 

Fig. 10. The east boundary defective in measurement, the 

southern portion thereof being unchangeable, while the 

northern portion admits of rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 4, paragraph 3; while the west and north boundaries will be established, and the subdivisions executed in the regular manner. 

Fig. 11. The east boundary defective in alinement and 

measurement, the southern portion thereof being unchangeable, while the northern portion admits of rectfication. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 4, paragraph 3; the west boundary will be established in the regular 

manner; the north boundary by east on true line to closing 

corner, the fractional measurement being thrown against the 

old east boundary; while the subdivisions will be executed 

from north to south, and from west to east, the fractional 

measurements being thrown against the old south and east 

boundaries, as such closings are made in regular surveys 

against the north and west boundaries. 

Fig. 12. The east boundary defective in measurement; the 

northern and southern portions thereof being unchangeable, 

while the middle portion admits of rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 1, paragraph 4, the west and north boundaries will be established, 

and the subdivisions executed in the regular manner. 

Fig. 13. The east boundary defective in alinement anc! 

measurement; the northern and southern portions thereof 

being unchangeable; while the middle portion admits of rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 1, paragraph 4; the west boundary will be established in the regular 

manner; the north boundary by east on random and west on 

true line, the fractional measurement being thrown against 

the old east boundary; while the subdivisions will be executed from north to south and from west to east, closing the 

fractional measurements against the old south and east 

boundaries, as such closings are made in regular surveys 

against the north and west boundaries. 

Fig. 14. The east boundary defective in alinement and 

measurement; the northern and southern portions thereof not 

admitting of rectification in any way, since subdivisional 

surveys have been closed upon both sides of the same; while 

the middle portion admits of rectification in measurement. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 1, paragraph 4; the west boundary will be established in the regular 

manner, the township corner at the end of six miles thereon 

being temporarily established. 

-78- 

From said temporary corner, the fractional north boundary 

will be run east on random to the nearest old established 

corner on the same, at which point if the falling of the random 

is within 50 links per mile, said boundary will be corrected 

westward on true line, setting corners common to the sections 

633 
and quarter sections on the north, at regular intervals from 

the initial point of the true line, and throwing the consequent 

fractional measurement in its normal place against the new 

west boundary, while the temporary township corner previously established thereon will be made permanent. 

If, however, the falling defined above exceeds the stated 

limit from the last established corner of the old surveys, the 

fractional north boundary will be projected due west to its 

intersection with the west boundary, at which point the proper township corner will be permanently established, and the 

temporary corner destroyed. 

In establishing the corners on said north boundary under 

the latter procedure, the requirements prescribed in the former relative to the allowance for fractional measurement 

will be strictly observed. 

In subdividing, the methods prescribed under Fig. 6 will be 

applied as far as practicable. The details of the case under 

consideration are clearly exhibited by fig. 14. 

Fig. 15. All of the boundaries are assumed to be defective in 

alinement, measurement, and position; also portions of each 

as being closed upon by subdivisional surveys and consequently unchangeable relative to the old surveys, while other 

portions of the same being free from such attachments, admit 

of rectification. 

This figure is constructed on a larger scale than those 

explained in the preceding paragraphs, in order to illustrate 

in detail the modus operandi to be pursued in rectification, 

under the rules of the article on retracements applicable to 

each of the obtaining conditions, and also in subdividing 

within the rectified exteriors. 

HIATUSES AND OVERLAPS. 

[ Plate VIII. ] 

The several figures on Plate VIII illustrate in detail the 

methods to be employed in connecting the unsurveyed portions of two or more township boundaries, when four of such 

fractional lines, upon being projected towards each other in 

the direction of the cardinal points by lines not deviating 

more than twenty-one minutes of arc from true meridian or 

latitudinal lines, do not form a common intersection. 

Said methods, in addition to the reasons embodied in the 

article entitled “Explanations of Articles,” etc., page 71, are 

based upon the following desiderata, viz: 

1. The adjustment of such township boundaries so as to 

maintain section 36 in a condition theoretically and practically perfect, according to the requirements of the rectangular system of surveying. 

2. That in accomplishing the above, the resultant fractional excess or deficiency (which for brevity of explanation is 

termed “the rectangular fraction”) will be thrown into, or 

taken out of section 6, whenever practicable. 

3. That all incidental fractional measurements developed 

in the establishment of township boundaries or subdivisional 

lines by such methods shall be thrown against the old surveys 

whenever practicable. 

In considering said methods it will be observed that the 

conditions 

-79- 

to be dealt with are either hiatuses or overlaps, the former 

possessing three characteristic features, which are named as 

follows: 

Simple hiatus. See figures 1 and 2. 

Meridional hiatus. See figure 3. 

Latitudinal hiatus. See figure 4; while overlaps are shown 

by figure 5. 

As the application of said methods, when the conditions 

exhibited obtain, gives similar results with but a few exceptions, which will be specifically detailed hereafter, the condition represented by A, figure 3, will be considered and the 

method of connection described as an example, upon the 

following asumptions, viz: 

That, of the boundaries of townships 1 and 2 north, ranges 

3 and 4 west, those portions indicated by broken lines are 

unsurueyed; 

That it is required to connect said portions in order to 

complete the subdivisions in one or more of the townships. 

Beginning at the established terminal corners on the south 

and east boundaries of T. 2 N., R. 4 W., blank lines will be 

projected due east and due south, respectively, with temporary stakes at intervals of ten chains, to an intersection, 

which point will be marked by a temporary stake; 

Then, from the established terminal corners on the west 

and north boundaries of T. 1 N., R. 3 W., true lines will be 

projected due north and due west, respectively, with regular 

corners for two sections and quarter sections, to an intersection, which point will be marked by a temporary stake; 

Then, by proper measurements, the character of the resulting condition will be determined, and by comparison with 

diagrams A, of the figures on Plate VIII, the particular 

method of connection will be obtained and applied. 

Said condition in the case under consideration, it will be 

observed, is a “meridional hiatus”; therefore, from the temporary stake marking the intersection of the extended south 

and east boundaries of T. 2 N., R. 4 W., which wil be replaced 

by a permanent corner (common to two townships) for T. 1 N., 

R. 3 W., and T. 2 N., R. 4 W., the south boundary of the latter 

will be extended due east to its intersection with the west 

boundary of the former, where a corner for (one township 

only) T. 1 N., R. 4 W., will be permanently established; 

Then, from the corner for T. 1 N., R. 3 W., and T. 2 N., R. 4 

W., the south and east boundaries of the latter will be corrected back west and north, respectively, on true lines, establishing regular corners common to two quarter sections and 

sections of said township, to the initial points of the blank 

lines, against which the resulting fractional measurements 

will be thrown, while the stakes temporarily established on 

the blank lines at intervals of ten chains will be destroyed; 

Then, from the stake temporarily marking the intersection 

of the north and west boundaries of T. 1 N., R. 3 W., which 

will be destroyed, the former boundary will be extended due 

west to its intersection with the east boundary of T. 2 N., R. 4 

W., where a proper closing corner will be established, the 

resulting fractional measurement thrown against the same, 

and the distance to the nearest corner on said boundary 

carefully determined and recorded in the field notes. 

Thus section 36 is made full, serving as a perfect base from 

which to initiate the subdivisional work in T. 2 N., R. 4 W.; 

634 
the “rectangular fraction,” which in this case indirectly represents an excess, is incorporated in section 6, which being 

lotted on two sides in its normal con- 

-80- 

dition, absorbs the excess without deranging materially 

those portions of the same usually defined as regular subdivisions; while the unsurveyed portions of the entire group of 

townships are arranged in such a manner as to admit of 

completing the subdivisional work therein on the approved 

rectangular basis. 

Relative to incorporating an excess in, or supplying a deficiency from, section 6, simple hiatuses are noted as exceptions to the general rule; therefore, when such hiatuses are 

square, or longer meridionally (see 1, diagrams A, fig. 11, the 

“rectangular fraction” will be taken out of section 31, and 

incorporated in section 1; but if the length thereof (see 1, diag. 

A. fig. 2) lie in a latitudinal direction, said “rectangular 

fraction” will be taken out of section 1 and incorporated in 

section 31. 

If the surveys contemplated, within a group of four 

townships, consist of the completion of the southeast unsurveyed portion of the north-west township only, the method 

detailed in the foregoing paragraphs will be employed in all 

particulars, with the exception that the extension of the 

north and west boundaries of the southeast township will be 

omitted; but the completion of the unsurveyed portions of any 

of the other three demands of the deputy surveyor the performance of the whole operation, and the complete connection of all the boundaries. 

When, of four township boundaries whose directions tend 

to an approximate common point, two of the same have been 

carried to a mutual intersection, and are closed upon by 

subdivisional and other lines (see paragraph 2, article on 

“Retracements,” etc.,) the unsurveyed portion of the remaining boundaries will be connected with them by the application of these methods, sufficiently modified to preserve intact 

the prior subdivisional surveys. 

FRAGMENTARY SUBDIVISION. 

Plate IX illustrates the general methods to be employed in 

the execution of fragmentary subdivisions withing 

townships, portions of which have been subdivided from fractional township boundaries extended from various directions 

and not connected with each other. 

These conditions obtain to a large extent in mountainous 

regions, where in accordance with the existing provisions, 

relative to the survey of agricultural lands, in the acts of 

Congress making appropriations for public land surveys, 

such surveys are extended along the valley and bottom lands, 

leaving the mountainous areas unsurveyed at the time of the 

execution of the original work; but which, at a later date, in 

view of other considerations are placed under contract for 

survey. 

It is obvious that the number and character of such cases 

would be too great and varied to be considered in detail; 

therefore, when the deputy surveyor meets with a case which 

is not covered exactly by these instructions, or the special 

instructions from the surveyor general, his thorough understanding of the preceding articles on this subject, and of the 

conditions illustrated on Plates VI and VIII, it is expected 

will point out to him the proper method to be employed. 

It is possible, however, that cases may arise so complex in 

their character as to produce a feeling of doubt relative to the 

proper solution of the problem; in which case he will at once 

communicate with this office through the surveyor general, 

submitting information, by letter and diagrams, of the exact 

condition as found by him, and the necessary instructions 

will be forwarded as soon as practicable. 

NOTE.-A quarter section is held to be surveyed only when three of its corners have 

been officially established. 

-81- 

GEOGRAPHICAL POSITIONS OF BASE LINES AND 

PRINCIPAL MERIDIANS GOVERNING THE 

PUBLIC SURVEYS. 

The system of rectangular surveying, authorized by law 

May 20, 1785, was first employed in the survey of United 

States public lands in the State of Ohio. 

The boundary line between the States of Pennsylvania and 

Ohio, known as “Ellicotts line,’’ in longitude 80” 32‘ 20 west 

from Greenwich, is the meridian to which the first surveys 

are referred. The townships east of the Scioto River, in the 

State of Ohio, are numbered from south to north, commencing with No. 1 on the Ohio River, while the ranges are numbered from east to west, beginning with No. 1 on the east 

boundary of the State, except in the tract designated “U. S. 

military land,” in which the townships and ranges are numbered, respectively, from the south and east boundaries of 

said tract. 

During the period of one hundred and nine years since the 

organization of the system of rectangular surveying, numbered and locally named principal meridians and base lines 

have been established, as follows: 

The first principal meridian begins at the junction of the 

Ohio and Big Miami rivers, extends north on the boundary 

line between the States of Ohio and Indiana, and roughly 

approximates to the meridian of longitude 84” 48‘ 50 west 

from Greenwich. The ranges of the public surveys in the 

State of Ohio, west of the Scioto River, are, in part, numbered 

from this meridian. For further information in regard to 

numbering of townships and ranges of the early surveys in 

Ohio, the reader is referred to the State map prepared in the 

General Land Office. 

The second principal meridian coincides with 86” 28’ of 

longitude west from Greenwich, starts from a point two and 

one half miles west of the confluence of the Little Blue and 

Ohio rivers, runs north to the northern boundary of Indiana, 

and, with the base line in latitude 38” 28‘ 20”, governs the 

surveys in Indiana and part of those in Illinois. 

The third principal meridian begins at the mouth of the 

Ohio River and extends north to the northern boundary of the 

State of Illinois, and with the base line in latitude 38” 28’ 20”, 

governs the surveys in the State east of the third principal 

meridian, with the exception of those projected from the 

r?condprincipal meridian, and the surveys on the west, to the 

Illinois River. This meridian is nearly coincident with 89” 10’ 

15” of west longitude from Greenwich. 

63 5 
The fourth principal meridian begins at a point on the right 

bank of the Illinois River, in latitude 40" 00' 30" north, and 

longitude 90" 28' 45" west from Greenwich, and with the base 

line running west from the initial point, governs the surveys 

in Illinois west of the Illinois River and west of that part of the 

third principal meridian which lies north of the river. 

The fourth principal meridian also extends north through 

Wisconsin and northeastern Minnesota, and, with the south 

boundary of Wisconsin as its base line, governs all the surveys in the former and those in the latter State lying east of 

the Mississippi River, and the third guide meridian west (of 

the fifth principal meridian system), north of the river. 

The fifth principal meridian starts from the old mouth of 

the Arkansas River, and with the base line running west 

from the old mouth of the St. Francis River, governs the 

surveys in Arkansas, Missouri, Iowa, North Dakota; those in 

Minnesota, west of the Mississippi River and west of the third 

guide meridian north of the river; and in South Dakota 

-82- 

all east of the Missouri River, and the surveys on the west 

side of the river to a limiting line following the third guide 

meridian (of the sixth principal meridian system), White 

River, and the west and north boundaries of the Lower Brule 

Indian Reservation. This meridian is nearly coincident with 

91" 03' 42" longitude west from Greenwich. 

The sixth principal meridian, which is approximately the 

meridian of 97" 23' west longitude from Greenwich, extends 

from the base line coincident with the north boundary of 

Kansas in latitude 40" north, south through the State to its 

south boundary, in latitude 37" north, and north through 

Nebraska to the Missouri River; and governs the surveys in 

Kansas and Nebraska; the surveys in Wyoming, except those 

referred to the Wind River meridian and base line, which 

intersect in latitude 43" 01' 20" north, and longitude 108" 48' 

40'' west from Greenwich; the surveys in Colorado, except 

those projected from the New Mexico and Ute meridians, the 

latter intersecting its base line in latitude 39" 06' 40'' north 

and longitude 108" 33' 20" west from Greenwich; and the 

surveys in South Dakota extended, or to be extended, over the 

tract embracing the Pine Ridge and Rosebud Indian reservations. 

In addition to the above mentioned numbered principal 

meridians, other principal meridians with local names have 

been established, as follows: 

The Michigan meridian, in longitude 84" 22' 24 west from 

Greenwich, with a base line in latitude 42" 26' 30" north 

(eight miles north of Detroit), governs the surveys in Michigan. 

The Tallahassee meridian, in longitude 84" 16' 42" west 

from Greenwich, runs north and south from the initial point 

on the base line at Tallahassee, in latitude 30" 28' north, and 

governs the surveys in Florida. 

The Saint Stephens meridian, in longitude 88" 02' west 

from Greenwich, begins at the initial point (Ellicott's corner), 

on the base line, in latitude 31" north, extends south to 

Mobile Bay and north to latitude 33" 06' 20", and governs the 

surveys in the southern district of Alabama, and in Pearl 

River district lying east of the river and south of the Choctaw 

base line, in latitude 31" 52' 40" north, in the State of Mississippi. 

The Huntsville meridian begins on the northern boundary 

of Alabama, in latitude 34" 59' north, longitude 86" 34' 45" 

west from Greenwich, extends south to latitude 33" 6' 20" 

north, and governs the surveys in the northern district of 

Alabama. 

The Choctaw meridian begins on the Choctaw base line, 

latitude 31" 54' 40" north, longitude 90" 14' 45'' west from 

Greenwich, runs north to the south boundary of the Chickasaw cession, in latitude 34" 19' 40" north, and governs the 

surveys east and west of the meridian, and north of the base 

line. 

The Chickasaw meridian begins on the north boundary of 

Mississippi in latitude 34" 59' north, longitude 89" 15' west 

from Greenwich, extends south to latitude 33" 48' 45" north, 

and governs the surveys in north Mississippi. 

The Washington meridian begins on the base line in latitude 31" north, longitude 91" 9' 15" west from Greenwich, 

extends north to the Mississippi River, and governs the surveys in the southwestern angle of the State of Mississippi. 

The Saint Helena meridian begins at the initial point of the 

Washington meridian, in latitude 31" north, and longitude 

91" 09' 15" west of Greenwich, extends south to the Mississippi River, and governs the sur- 

-83- 

veys in the Greensburg and southeastern districts of 

Louisiana, east of the Mississippi River. 

The Louisiana meridian, in longitude 92" 24' 15'' west of 

Greenwich, extends from the Gulf of Mexico to the north 

boundary of Louisiana, and, with the base line through the 

initial point, conforming to the parallel of 31" north latitude, 

governs all the surveys in the state west of the Mississippi 

River. 

The New Mexico meridian, in longitude 106" 53' 40" west 

from Greenwich, extends through the Territory, and with the 

base line, in latitude 34" 15' 25" north, governs the surveys in 

New Mexico, except those in the northwest corner of the 

territory, referred to Navajo meridian and base line, which 

have their initial point in latitude 35" 45' north, longitude 

108" 32' 45" west from Greenwich. 

TheSaltLake meridian, in longitude 111" 54' 00" west from 

Greenwich, has its initial point at the corner ofTemple Block, 

in Salt Lake City, Utah, extends north and south through the 

Territory, and, with the base line, through the initial, and 

coincident with the parallel of 40" 46' 04 north latitude, 

governs the surveys in the Territory, except those referred to 

the Uintah meridian and base line projected fron an initial 

point in latitude 40" 26' 20 north, longitude 109" 57' 30" west 

from Greenwich. 

The Boise meridian, longitude 116" 24' 15" west from 

Greenwich, passes through the initial point established 

south 29" 30' west, nineteen miles distant from Boise City, 

extends north and south through the State, and, with the 

base line in latitude 43" 46' north, governs the surveys in the 

State of Idaho. 

The Mount Diablo meridian, California, coincides with the 

meridian of 121" 554' 48" west from Greenwich, intersects the 

base line on the summit of the mountain from which it takes 

636 
its name, in latitude 37" 51' 30" north, and governs the 

surveys in the State of Nevada, and the surveys of all central 

and northern California, except those belonging to the Humboldt meridian system. 

The Humboldt meridian, longitude 124" 8' west from 

Greenwich, intersects the base line on the summit of Mount 

Pierce, in latitude 40" 25' 12" north, and governs the surveys 

in the northwestern corner of California, lying west of the 

Coast range of mountains, and north of township 5 south, of 

the Humboldt meridian system. 

The San Bernardino meridian, California, longitude 116" 

56' 15" west from Greenwich, intersects the base line on 

Mount San Bernardino, latitude 34" 07' 10" north, and governs the surveys in southern California, lying east of the 

meridian, and that part of the surveys situated west of it 

which is south of the eighth standard parallel south, of the 

Mountain Diablo meridian system. 

The Willamette meridian, which is coincident with the 

meridian of 122" 44' 20" west from Greenwich, extends south 

from the base line, in latitude 45" 31' north, to the north 

boundary of California, and north to the international boundary, and governs all the public surveys in the States of Oregon and Washington. 

The Black Hills meridian, longitude 104" 03' west from 

Greenwich, with the base line in latitude 44" north, governs 

the sruveys in the State of South Dakota, north and west of 

White River, and west of the Missouri River (between latitudes 45" 55' 20" and 44" 17' 30"), the north and west boundaries of the Lower Brule Indian Reservation, and the west 

boundary of range 79 west, of the fifth principal meridian 

system. 

The Montana meridian extends north and south from the 

initial 

-84- 

monument on the summit of a limestone hill, eight hundred 

feet high, longitude 111" 38' 50" west from Greenwich, and 

with the base line on the parallel of 45" 46' 48" north latitude, 

governs the surveys in the State of Montana. 

The Gila and Salt River meridian intersects the base line 

on the south side of Gila River, opposite the mouth of Salt 

River, in latitude 33" 22' 40" north, longitude 112" 17' 25" 

west from Greenwich, and governs the surveys the Territory 

of Arizona. 

The Indian meridian, in longitude 97" 14' 30" west from 

Greenwich, extends from Red River to the south boundary of 

Kansas, and with the base line in latitude 34" 30' north, 

governs the surveys in the Indian Territory, and in Oklahoma Territory all surveys east of 100" west longitude from 

Greenwich. 

The Cimarron meridian in longitude 103" west from 

Greenwich, extends from latitude 36" 30' 37" north, and with 

the base line in latitude 36" 30' north, governs the surveys in 

Oklahoma Territory west of 100" west longitude from Greenwich. 

DECLINATION OF THE MAGNETIC NEEDLE 

For the following article, with tables, charts, and their 

explanation, relating to the use of the compass in surveying, 

the Commissioner of the General Land Office is indebted to 

Dr. T. C. Mendenhall, Superintendent of the U. S. Coast and 

Geodetic Survey. It was furnished at the request of the Commissioner. 

The paper, originally written in 1878 by Assistant C. A. 

Schott, chief of the computing division, has been revised and 

enlarged by him in order to present the latest information on 

the subject in possession of the C. and G. Survey, June, 1893. 

It is also accompanied by three charts taken from the C. and 

G. Survey report for 1889 and amended to date; they show the 

distribution of the magnetic declination for the year 1890, 

and in connection with the tables, for any year within their 

range. 

This paper takes the place of the chapter commencing at 

the foot of page 25 and ending in the middle of page 29 of the 

"Manual of Instructions to Surveyors General of the United 

States" printed in 1871, part of which in the course of time 

had become obsolete. The present article will be found of 

great interest and value as an aid in the prosecution of the 

surveys of the public lands. 

AN ACCOUNT OF THE PRESENT GEOGRAPHICAL 

DISTRIBUTION AND OF THE ANNUAL CHANGE 

OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION64 WITHIN THE 

LIMITS OF THE UNITED STATES. 

Introductory remarks.-The magnetic declination at any 

place is the angle contained between two vertical planes, one 

being that of the astronomical or true meridian of the place 

and the other the plane in which the axis of a freely suspended horizontal magnetic needle lies at the time. The former is a fixed plane, the latter is variable, as is shown by the 

regular or irregular, and the greater or less oscillations of a 

needle when delicately suspended; these fluctuations are 

subject to different laws depending on geographical position. 

Since the magnetic 

-85- 

declination is found to vary with respect to place and time, it 

is necessary on the part of the observer to give with his 

statement of the declination the geographical position or the 

latitude and longitude65 of his station (expressed to the 

nearest minute of arc will suffice in general), and to accompany the record by the local time when the observation was 

made; the nearest hour (or quarter of an hour) should be 

stated, also whether sidereal time, mean time, local, or standard time is used. 

The declination is called "west" when the north-seeking 

end of the magnet or needle points to the westward of the true 

meridian, and is called "east" when the same end points to 

the eastward. Roughly speaking, the north end of a needle 

tends approximately towards the geographical north, or, 

rather towards a region which surrounds the magnetic pole, 

situated in the vicinity of King William Land, and supposed 

to be in about latitude 701/2" and longitude 100" W. Here the 

64. Commonly known as the variation of the compass; in scientific treatises on terrestrial magnetism the term magnetic declination is always employed, in order to avoid any 

confusion which would arise when treating of such motions ofthe needle as the diurnal, 

annual, and secular variations. 

65. Reckoned from Greenwich westward to 180". 

637 
horizontal needle has lost its directive force, and the dip 

needle will point vertically up and down; in other words, at 

the pole the magnetic and gravitational forces agree in direction. The magnetic declination presents great extremes in 

value within the limits of the United States; thus for the year 

1893, we have at Eastport, Me., 19" W.; at the north-eastern 

end of Lake Michigan, at the west end of Lake Erie, and in St. 

Helena Sound, S.C., 0" (needle pointing due north); at Galveston, Tex., 7%" E.; at San Diego, Cal., 13%" E.; at Cape Flattery, Wash., 23" E.; at Sitka Alaska, 29" E.; the maximum of 

43Y3" E. is reached at the mouth of Firth River, near where 

the meridional boundary line of 141" strikes the Arctic 

Ocean; at Bering Strait, the declination has diminished to 21" 

E., and at the extreme western point of our territory, at Attu 

Island, it is but 8%" E. The general distribution of the declination (for the given epoch, 1890), is shown by the isogonic 

charts appended to this manual, taken from the Coast and 

Geodetic Survey Report for 1889, Appendix No. 11; they are 

reproduced and amended to bring them up to the present 

state of our knowledge, and appear here transferred to the 

new base map of 1893 (scale ?hoooooo). The third chart referred 

to apears for the first time in the manual, it represents the 

magnetic meridians, i. e. lines which show directly the direction of the needle, this being a tangent to the curve at any 

point in it. These curves, therefore, may be said to represent a 

physical fact, while the isogonic curves are wholly artificial, 

but better adapted for practical application. The meridional 

system converges toward the magnetic pole without any special relation to the geographical pole, whereas in the isogonic 

system all curves must pass through the latter pole as well. It 

is a matter of great importance for surveyors to recognize the 

fact of the local deviations from the general trend of the 

isogonic lines; these local irregularities of the distribution 

are more conspicuous in regions of igneous rocks, but they 

appear also in regions of sedimentary deposits, the intensity 

of the disturbance depending on that of the local cause and its 

depth below the surface. The disturbing local poles or ridges 

are in general of the same polarity as that of the north 

magnetic pole. Disturbed regions may range from a fraction 

of a square mile to hundreds of square miles, but as yet little 

has been done in this inviting field for research. 

In consequence of the secular variation of the declination 

the magnetic charts require to be reconstructed from time to 

time, though for a few years from the date of an isogonic chart 

the declination for any 

-86- 

position can readily be assigned by means of our knowledge of 

the annual change, which is sufficiently constant for a few 

years to produce no appreciable error. The secular variation 

is by far the greatest of the great number of changes in the 

direction of the needle. Thus at Albany, N. Y., the declination 

changed from 12" W. in the year 1650 to nearly 5%" W. about 

the year 1795, and is now again about 103/4" W.; at New York 

the change was similar; at Baltimore, Md., the declination 

changed from nearly 6" W. about 1680 to nearly Y2" W. in 

1802, the present value being near 5" W.; at San Diego, Cal., 

the declination was about 7l/3" E. in 1710, and is now a little 

over 13" E.; at Chamisso Island, Kotzebue Sound, Alaska, the 

declination was 33?h" E. in 1750, but is now only 26%" E. The 

results of the latest investigation of this subject published by 

the Survey are contained in Appendix No. 7, Coast and 

Geodetic Survey Report for 1888. What is known as the 

annual change of the declination is nothing else than the 

effect of the secular variation during one year, and must be 

carefully distinguished from the annual variation, which has 

but a small range and depends on the season of the year. 

The isogonic and magnetic meridian charts.-Referring to 

the two isogonic charts appended to this article, the larger 

comprises the compact area of the United States and the 

smaller one the territory of Alaska. If for any selected epoch 

we connect by curves all positions at which the needle was 

observed to have the same given declination, we trace out an 

isogonic curve for that value of declination. On the charts 

they are laid down for the equal difference of 1, with every 

fifth curve drawn heavier for better distinction, and they 

answer to the epoch January 1,1890. For their construction 

more than 3,200 observed declinations (reduced to epoch) 

were employed, the latest observation only being used at 

stations occupied more than once. The isogonic curve of zero 

declination, also called the agonic line, at which the needle 

points due north and south, is seen to pass from the island of 

Michipicoten to the extreme west end of Lake Erie and close 

to Charleston, S. C., where it leaves the coast and turns 

toward the Bahama Islands. This curve has been conveniently used as a representative line to markout the changes 

which in the course of time the magnetic system in its vicinity undergoes. 

On the Atlantic coast it reached its highest position66 near 

Cape Henry, Va., about the year 1800 and has since been 

moving southward. All localities to the northeast of this line 

have west declination, indicated by a + sign to the index 

number; localities to the westward of it and comprising the 

greater part of the United States have now east declination, 

as marked by a negative index. To take up the declination for 

any given position on this chart, we resort to simple graphical 

interpolation; it is best done by dropping a perpendicular 

(curved) from the position to the nearest isogonic on either 

side of it and measuring the length of the shorter one, also 

that of the two together; the proportion of the distance with 

respect to the whole difference of 60' is readily ascertained. 

The result answers to the year 1890 (January), and by applying the effect of the annual change, as tabulated further 

on, the declination may be had for any time before or after 

that epoch. This annual change is at present manifested by 

the apparent movement of the isogonic lines to the southward 

or downward along the Atlantic coast and to the westward or 

left on the Gulf coast and in the interior to the north of it; on 

the Pacific coast this movement has 

-87- 

either ceased or is very inconspicuous at present. The charts 

show two shaded bands, one crossing the northern part of 

Maine where the direction of the needle has reached a limiting westerly position and is about ready to reverse its secular 

motion; the other band skirts the Pacific coast from Washington to Point Conception, Cal., where it passes out to sea. Here 

66. See Plate No. 25, Appendix No. 7, Coast and Geodetic Survey Report for 1888. 

638 
the needle is about stationary at the easterly limit of its 

grand secular swing. For intermediate points this same condition was reached at corresponding times during the present 

century. 

It will be seen that the irregularities in the local distribution of magnetism can only be brought out and specially 

delineated by a large addition to the observations so far 

ac~umulated.~~ 

The degree of accuracy of the charts depends in the first 

place on that of the original observation, secondly on that of 

the change in the interval between observation and epoch, 

and lastly on the density of observations about the locality or 

the degree of generalization required in the construction of 

the curves. The meridional chart has already been sufficiently explained and the additional dip and intensity curves 

shown on it do not come within the scope of this paper. 

The secular variation of the magnetic declination.-This 

variation, as already pointed out, is a matter of great importance to the surveyor who is frequently called upon to recover 

or re-run old compass lines or to decide between conflicting 

claims as to position of old boundary lines originally traced 

out by compass but lost or obliterated in the course of time. As 

its name implies, this angular motion extends over so long a 

period and is so utterly unknown as to its origin that the 

recognition of its law is a matter of much difficulty and 

uncertainty. To represent it a periodic function is employed; 

but from this it should not be inferred that the motion is 

repeated at stated intervals; on the contrary we are fully 

aware of the complexity of the phenomenon and of the necessity of continually watching year by year the changes 

resulting from observations and correcting or remodeling our 

analytical representations accordingly. It should be fully 

understood that this process is a wholly tentative one and 

that the mathematical inferences due to the form of the 

function are not meant thereby to represent or become a 

physical reality. Thus we are forced to reconstruct our secular change tables at suitable intervals. The period found most 

in accord with observations is about 250 years with variations of about 50 years longer or shorter, at various stations. 

This holds only for the United States. The earlier setting in of 

the secular variation phases in the east and spreading westward over the country has already been referred to; for instance the easternmost position or eastern elongation occurred at places in eastern Maine about the year 1760, this phase 

reached the Hudson River about 1790, the Mississippi River 

about 1820, Salt Lake about 1870, and the west coast, as at 

San Francisco Bay, probably next year or not far from it. 

Whether this phenomenon will be repeated with the present 

incoming opposite phase in northern Maine remains to be 

seen. The results from a discussion of 1,062 observations at 

94 stations are given in the following table of decennial 

values, and after 1850 for 5-year intervals. The average number of observations for each station is 11. 

Table of the secular variation of the magnetic declination at 

stations in the United States, computed by means of periodic 

functions and based 

-88- 

upon all available observations from the earliest to the present time.-The table is subdivided into three groups, viz: 

Group I comprises the stations located east of the Apalachian 

Range, and the Atlantic coast from Maine to Florida, inclusive; Group 11, the stations situated between the Rocky 

Mountains and the Apalachian Range, from Canada to the 

Gulf; Group I11 contains the stations located between the 

Rocky Mountains and the Pacific coast, from California to 

Washington, also those in Alaska. Within each group the 

stations are arranged in the order of their latitudes. 

The tabular values are of various degrees of accuracy, as is 

indicated by the entry, giving either whole degrees, or degrees and tenths, or degrees, tenths, and hundredths-the 

latter relatively the most reliable. The results, dating back to 

the seventeenth century, are in many cases but approximations more or less reliable. West declination is indicated by 

the sign + prefixed, east declination by the sign - prefixed. 

All values for 1900 are mere rough predictions and depend 

upon the precarious supposition of a continuation of the law 

implied by the formulae. 

(The remainder of page 88 and pages 89 through 137 are 

deleted. They contain the following Tables and technical information. 

Pages 88-95; Tables B, C, D; Secular Variation of 

Magnetic Declination. 

Pages 96 and 97; Table E; Latitude and Longitude ofplaces 

of Magnetic Observation. 

Pages 98-101; 

Pages 102 -1 19; 

Pages 120-137; 

Table F; Approximate average Annual 

Change of Magnetic Declination Table G; 

finding mean Declination; and the use of 

these tables. 

Tables H, J, K, I and II; are tables for 

Polaris observations. Instructions are 

given for their use in observing the star to 

determine a true meridian. 

Table III, Aximuths of the Secant; Table 

IV, Azimuths of the Tangent; Table V and 

VI, Offsets from the Tangent to the Parallel; Table VII, Correction of Random 

Lines; Tables VIII and IX, Length of a Degree of Latitude and Degree of Longitude. 

Table X, Convergency of Meridians. I nstructions for use of these table and related 

subject matter is discussed.) 

67. The results of any new and satisfactory observation sent to the Superintendent of 

the Coast and Geodetic Survey will be duly credited in a subsequent publication. 

639 
SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES. 

NO. 1. 

-141- 

[ Third Page. I 

PRELIMINARY OATHS OF ASSISTANTS. 

We, Peter Long, John Short, Eli Marker, and William 

Tally, do solemnly swear that we will well and faithfully 

execute the duties of chainmen; that we will level the chain 

upon even and uneven ground, and plumb the tally pins, 

either by sticking or dropping the same; that we will report 

the true distances to all notable objects, and the true lengths 

of all lines that we assist in measuring, to the best of our skill 

and ability, and in accordance with instructions given us, in 

the survey of the Third Standard Parallel North, through 

Ranges Nos. 21,22,23, and 24 East, ofthe Principal Base and 

Meridian, in the State of Montana. 

PETER LONG, Chainman 

JOHN SHORT, Chainman 

ELI MARKER, Chainman. 

WILLIAM TALLY, Chainman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this second day of August, 1890. 

[SEAL.] WILLIAM MARTIN, 

Notary Public. 

TITLE PAGE. 

[See Plate 11.1 

FIELD NOTES 

OF THE SURVEY OF THE 

THIRD STANDARD PARALLEL NORTH 

THROUGH 

Ranges Nos. 21,22,23, and 24 East 

OF THE 

PRINCIPAL BASE AND MERIDIAN 

IN THE 

STATE OF MONTANA, 

AS SURVEYED BY 

RICHARD ROODS, 

U. S. DEPUTY SURVEYOR, 

UNDER HIS CONTRACT NO. 97, 

DATED JULY 10, 1890. 

Survey commenced August 22,1890. 

Survey completed August 29, 1890. 

-139- 

-140- 

[ Second page. ] 

NAMES AND DUTIES OF ASSISTANTS. 

PETER LONG. ............................. .Chainman. 

JOHN SHORT. ............................. .Chainman. 

ELI MARKER. ............................. .Chainman. 

WILLIAM TALLY .......................... .Chainman. 

LEWIS LINK. .............................. .Chainman. 

HENRY CLAY ............................ .Moundman. 

WILLIAM STONE ......................... .Moundman. 

ADAM DULL ................................. .Axman. 

JAMES BANNER ............................ .Flagman. 

We, Henry Clay and William Stone, do solemnly swear 

that we will well and truly perform the duties of moundmen, 

in the establishment of corners, according to the instructions 

given us, to the best of our skill and ability, in the survey of 

the Third Standard Parallel North, through Ranges Nos. 21, 

22,23, and 24 East, of the Principal Base and Meridian, in the 

State of Montana. 

HENRY CLAY, Moundman 

WILLIAM STONE, Moundman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this second day of August, 1890. 

[SEAL.] WILLIAM MARTIN, 

Notary Public. 

We, George Sharp and Adam Dull, do solemnly swear that 

we will well and truly perform the duties of axmen, in the 

establishment of corners and other duties, according to instructions given us, and to the best of our skill and ability, in 

the survey of the Third Standard Parallel North, through 

Ranges Nos. 21,22,23, and 24 East, ofthe Principal Base and 

Meridian, in the State of Montana. 

GEORGE SHARP, Axman 

ADAM DULL, Axman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this second day of August, 1890. 

[SEAL.] WILLIAM MARTIN, 

Notary Public. 

I, James Banner, do solemnly swear that I will well and 

truly perform the duties of flagman, according to instructions 

given me, to the best of my skill and ability, in the survey of 

the Third Standard Parallel North, through Ranges Nos. 21, 

22,23, and 24 East, of the Principal Base and Meridian, in the 

State of Montana. 

JAMES BANNER, Flagman. 

640 
Subscribed and sworn to before me this second day of August, 1890. 

[SEAL.] WILLIAM MARTIN, 

Notary Public. 

I, Lewis Link, do solemnly swear that I will well and 

faithfully execute the duties of chainman; that I will level the 

chain upon even and uneven ground, and plumb the tally 

pins, either by sticking or dropping the same; that I will 

report the true distances to all notable objects, and the true 

length of all lines that I assist in measuring, to the best of my 

skill and ability, and in accordance with instructions given 

me, in the survey of the Third Standard Parallel North, 

through Ranges Nos. 23 and 24 East, of the Principal Base 

and Meridian, in the State of Montana. 

LEWIS LINK, Chainman. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this twenty-seventh 

day of August, 1890. 

[SEAL.] RICHARD ROODS, 

U. S. Deputy Surveyor. 

-142- 

Third Standard Parallel North, through Range 21 East. 

Chains. 

28.10 

40.00 

Survey commenced August 22,1890, and executed with a W. & 

L. E. Gurley light mountain transit, No. -; the 

horizontal limb having two double verniers placed 

opposite to each other and reading to 30" of arc. 

at Helena, found correct, and was approved by the 

surveyor general for Montana, August 1,1890. 

I begin at the standard corner of townships 13 north, 

ranges 20 and 21 east, which is a sandstone, 8 x 7 x 5 

ins. above ground, firmly set, and marked and witnessed 

as described by the surveyor general. 

At a point 3.39 ft.6' south of said standard corner, in 

latitude45"34'.5 N.,longitude 107"54' W.,69at 

gh. 19.7". p. m., by my watch, which is 2 minutes 

fast of local mean time, I observe Polaris at eastern 

elongation, in accordance with instructions7' in the 

Manual, and mark the line thus determined, by a tack 

driven in a wooden plug set in the ground, five chains 

north ofmy station. 

The instrument was examined, tested on the true meridian 

August 22, 1890. 

August23,1890:At6a.m.,Ilayofftheazimuthof 

Polaris, 1" 49'.6, to the west, and mark the TRUE 

MERIDIAN thus determined, by cutting a mark on a stone 

firmly set in the ground, west of the point established 

last night; the magnetic bearing of said true meridian 

is N. 18" 13' W.; which reduced by the table on page 100 

ofthe Manual, gives the mean magnetic declination, 18" 

09' east. 

standard cor.), I turn off from the true meridian, an 

angle71 of 89" 57' 20".9 toward the east, and run 

At this station (i. e., the point 3.39 ft. S. ofthe 

N. 89" 57' E. on the secant, S. of sec. 31. 

Over gently rolling prairie. 

Indian trail, bears N. 28" E. and S. 28" W. 

Difference between measurements of40.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 4 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 40.02 chs. 

By 2nd set, 39.98 chs.; the mean of which is 

N. 1.53 ft. from the secant, 

Set a limestone, 20 x 8 x 5 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, 

for standard '/4 sec. cor., marked S. C. ?4 on N. face; 

digpitslBxl8~12ins.,E.andW.ofstone,3ft. 

54.10 

71.55 

80.00 

dist.; and raise a mound ofearth, 3% ft. base, 1% 

ft. high, N. ofcor. 

Samuel Somer's house bears N. 65" E. 

Leave prairie, enter Somer's field, bears N. and S. 

Leave field, enter prairie, bears N. and S.; field extends 

Difference between measurement^^^ of 80.00 chs. by two 

N. to Somer's house, and S. about 15 chs. 

sets ofchainmen, is 6 lks.; position ofmiddle point 

By 1st set, 79.97 chs. 

By 2nd set, 80.03 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

forstandardcor. ofsecs31 and32,73markedS. C. on 

N., with 5 grooves on E. and 1 groove on W. faces; dig 

pits 24x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 3 ft., and N. of stone, 7 ft. dist.; and raise a 

mound ofearth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. ofcor. 

Set alimestone, 24x 9 x 6 ins., 18 ins. in the ground, 

Samuel Somer's house bears N. 38" W. 

Land, gently rolling prairie. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

-143- 

Third Standard Parallel North, through Range 21 EastChains. 

3.20 

12.40 

17.50 

19.40 

40.00 

54.00 

74.00 

80.00 

Continued. 

~~ 

N. 89" 58' E. on the secant, through sec. 32. 

Over gently rolling prairie. 

Road from Lake City to Ashland, bears N. 30" W. and S. 

30"E. 

Leave prairie, bears N. 25" W. and S. 25"E.; begin 

descent. 

Pine Creek, 50 lks. wide, 40 ft. below prairie, course S. 

20" E.; clear water 5 ft. deep; rapid current, gravelly 

bottom; bank 10 ft. high. 

20"E.; enter heavy pine timber and begin steep ascent, over 

stony ground, sloping N. W. 

ofchainmen, is 24 lks.; position ofmiddle point 

By 1st set, 39.88 chs. 

By2ndset, 40.12 chs.; the meanofwhich is 

S. 1.19 ft. from the secant, 

Set a granite stone, 14 x 8 x 6 ins., 9 ins. in the 

Topofbluffbank25ft. high, bearsN. 20"W. andS. 

Difference between measurements of40.00 chs., by two sets 

ground, for standard '/4 sec. cor., marked S. C. '/4 on 

N. face; from which 

Apine 16ins.diam., bearsN.37?h0E.,48lks. 

Apine, 14 ins. diam., bearsN. 42"W., 51 lks. 

dist., marked S. C. '14 S. B. T. 

dist., marked S. C. ?4 S. B. T. 

Leave heavy timber, bears N. and S. 

Top ofhigh granite ridge, 320 ft. above Pine Creek, bears 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

N. E. andS. W. 

of chainmen, is 22 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 80.11 chs. 

By 2nd set, 79.89 chs.; the mean of which is 

S. 2.04 ft. from the secant, 

68. Interpolated by simple proportion for the given latitude, from the second column of 

Table 111, page 121. 

69. The latitude and longitude will be given by the surveyor general, in his special 

written instructions. 

70. See directions for making the observation, page 105. 

71. This angle is interpolated by simple proportion, for the given latitude, from the 

column headed "3 miles" in Table IV. But hereafter the exact angle required will be 

changed to the nearest angle that can be set off or read on the instrument used. 

72. The measurements are counted from the beginning of the mile; 40.00 chs. are 

measured from the last "4 sec. cor.; see "Base Line," par. 6, page 51. 

73. At this point, the secant intersects the standard parallel. See Plate 11, figs. 1 and 2. 

64 1 
8.10 

40.00 

76.30 

80.00 

3et a granite stone, 20 x8 x4 ins., 15 ins. in the 

ground, for Standard Cor. ofsecs. 32 and 33, marked S. 

C., on N., with 4 grooves on E. and 2 grooves on W. 

faces; and raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. 

high, N. ofcor. Pits impracticable. 

NOTE.-I erect a signal at this corner for a test sight 

from one of the high points visible to the east. 

Land, mountainous. 

Soil, stony; 4th rate. 

Timber, pine and fir. 

Mountainous or heavily timbered land, 60.60 chs. 

NOTE.-The sky was overcast during the entire night. Polaris 

August 22, 1890. 

not visible. 

August 23, 1890. 

N. 89"59' E. on the secant, through sec. 33. 

Over stony ground on top ofridge. 

Begin descent over rocky ground, sloping S. E. 

Difference between measurements of40.00 chs., by two sets 

ofchainmen, is 18 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 39.91 chs. 

By 2nd set, 40.09 chs.; the mean of which is 

S. 2.55 ft. from secant, 

Set a granite stone, 19 x 8 x 7 ins., 14 ins. in the 

ground, for standard 1/4 sec. cor., marked S. C. Y4 on 

N. face; and raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1Yz 

ft. high, N. ofcor. Pits impracticable. 

This cor. is 40 ft. below top of ridge. 

Enter scattering, stunted cedars, bearing N. and S. 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 16 1 ks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 80.08 chs. 

By 2nd set, 79.92 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

S. 2.72 ft. from the secant, 

Set agranite stone, 19 x8 x 6 ins., 15 ins. in the 

ground, for standard cor. of secs. 33 and 34, marked S. 

C,onN.,with3groovesonE. andW.faces;fromwhich 

Acedar, Gins. diam., bearsN. 22Yz0E., 321ks. 

dist., marked T. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 34, B. T. 

Acedar, 8 ins. diam., bears N. 41'/4"w., 45 lks. 

dist.,markedT. 13 N.,R. 21 E.,S. 33, B.T. 

-144- 

Third Standard Parallel North, through Range 21 EastContinued. 

Chains. 

16.10 

20.00 

20.68 

This cor. is 100 ft. below top ofridge. 

Land, mountainous. 

Soil, rocky; 4thrate. 

Timber, scattering cedars. 

Mountainous land, 80.00chs. 

East, on the secant, through sec. 34. 

Descend eastern slope through scattering cedars. 

Begin very steep descent to Black River Canon, bears N. E. 

Footofdescent,300ft. belowlastcor., bearsN. E.and 

To right bank of Black River, course S. 28" W. 

S. 2.64ft.74fromthesecant, 

Set agranite stone 19 x 8 x 5 ins., 15 ins. in the 

and S. W. 

s. w. 

ground, for meander cor. on S. bdy. sec. 34, marked 

S. C. on N., and 

M. C. on E. faces; dig a pit, 3 ft. sq., 8 ft. W., of 

of stone; and raise a mound of earth, 

4 ft. base, 2 feet high, W. of cor.. 

To find the distance across the river, I set a flagon the 

secant line, on east bank; then measure a base, N. 6.20 

chs., to a point from which the flag bears S. 43" 10' 

26.50 

40.00 

40.40 

80.00 

E.; which gives for the distance, tan. 43" 10' x base, or 

0.938 x 6.20 chs. = 5.82 chs. 

To left bank of Black River, course S. W. Banks, 12 ft. 

high; rapid current over stony bottom; clear water, 

about 5 ft. deep: 

S. 2.64ft.74 from the secant, 

Set a granite stone, 17 x 9 x 7 ins., 12 ins. in the 

ground, for meander cor. on S. bdy. sec. 34, marked 

S. C. onN., and 

M. C. on W. faces; dig a pit, 3 ft. sq., 8 ft. E. of 

stone; and raise a mound of earth, 

4 ft base, 2 ft. high, E. of cor. 

Thence, up steep ascent through scatteringcedars. 

Difference between the measurements of40.00 chs., by the 

two sets ofchainmen, is 20 lks.; position ofmiddle point 

By 1st set, 39.90 chs. 

By2ndset,40,10chs.; themeanofwhichis 

S. 2.55 ft. from the secant: 

A cedar, 7 ins. diam., for standard '/4 sec. cor., I mark 

S. C., ?4 S. on N. side; from which 

A cedar, 4 ins. diam., bears N. 31" E., 20 lks. 

dist., marked S. C., '/4 S., B. T. 

Acedar,6ins.diam.,bearsN.641/40W., 181ks. 

dist.,markedS. C., 1/4S.,B.T. 

Thence up side of ridge, sloping S. W. 

Leave scattering cedars, bearing N. E. and S. W. 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 18 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 80.09 chs. 

By 2nd set, 79.90 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

S. 2.04 ft. from the secant, 

Set agranite stone, 21 x 8 x 5 ins., 16 ins. in the 

ground, for standard cor. of secs. 34 and 35, marked S. 

C.onN., with2grooveson.and4grooveson W. 

faces; and raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1Yz ft. 

high, N. ofcor. Pits impracticable. 

This cor. is on top of a ridge, about 300 ft. above Black 

River. 

Land, mountainous. 

Soil, rocky; 4th rate. 

Timber, scattering cedars. 

Mountainous land, 80.00 chs. 

August 23, 1890. 

NOTE.-Continuous rain since afternoon of August 23; 

observations on Polaris not possible. 

August 25,1890,7 a. m. 

S. 89" 59' E. on the secant, through sec. 35. 

-145- 

Third Standard Parallel North, through Range 21 EastContinued. 

Chains. 

40.00 

50.10 

Descend over rough, stony ground sloping S. 

Difference between measurements of40.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 14 lks.; position ofmiddle point 

By 1st set, 40.07 chs. 

By2nd set, 39.93 chs.; themean ofwhich is 

S. 1.19 ft. from the secant, 

Set a granite stone, 15 x 8 x 5 ins., 10 ins. in the 

ground, for standard '14 sec. cor., marked S. C. '/4 on 

N. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and W. of 

stone, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth 3% ft. 

base, l'/zft. high,N.ofcor. 

This cor. is about 280 ft. below top of ridge. 

Descend abruptly, 90 ft. 

Bottom ofravine, 10 lks. wide, course S. 20" W.; water in 

holes; thence, steep ascent over ground sloping W. 

74. These distances may be found by taking the mean of the offsets at the preceding 

sec., and following '/a sec. cor. 

642 
56.40 

56.58 

68.40 

68.50 

73.50 

80.00 

12.70 

28.30 

38.50 

40.00 

52.20 

68.10 

80.00 

Chains. 

Enter pine timber, bears N. E. and S. W. 

Apine, 16 ins. diam., on line, I mark with 2 notches on 

Leave pine timber, bears N. E. and S. W. 

Alexander Selkirk's house, bears S., 8.40 chs. dist. 

Road, bears N. and S. 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

E. and W. sides. 

ofchainmen, is 16 lks.; position ofmiddle point 

By 1st set, 79.92 chs. 

By 2nd set, 80.08 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

75Set a limestone, 20 x 8 x 6 ins., 15 ins. in the 

ground, for standard cor. of secs. 35 and 36, marked 

S.G.onN.,withlgrooveonE.and5groovesonW.faces; 

digpits, 24x 18 x 12 ins., crosswise on each line, 

E. and W., 3 ft., and N. of stone, 7 ft. dist.; and raise 

a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. of cor. This 

cor. is about 60 ft. above ravine. 

Land, mountainous. 

Soil, stony; 4th rate. 

Timber, pine. 

Mountainous land, 80.00 chs. 

Survey commenced August 29,1890, and executed with a W. & 

L. E. Gurley light mountain transit, No.-, the 

horizontal limb being provided with two opposite 

verniers reading to 30" of arc. 

I begin at the Standard Corner ofTownship 13 North, 

Ranges 24 and 25 East, which I established August 29, 

1890.77 Latitude 45"34'.5 N., longitude 107" 24' W. 

S. 89" 58' E. on the secant, S. ofsec. 36. 

Ascend over ground sloping W. 

Enter heavy oak timber, bears N. and S. 

Topofridge,80ft. abovelastcor., bearsN. andS. 

Leave heavy oak timber, bears N. and S. 

Difference between measurements of40.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen is 141ks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 40.07 chs. 

By 2nd set, 39.93 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

N. 1.53 ft. from the secant, 

Set a limestone, 16x 7 x 5 ins., 11 ins. in the ground, 

for standard '/4 sec. cor., marked S. C. '/4 on N. face; 

digpits, 18~18~12ins.,E.andW.ofstone,3ft. 

dist.; and raise a mound ofearth, 3% ft. base, 1% 

ft. high,N. ofcor. 

Road,bearsN.7O0E.andS.60"W. 

Creek, 20 lks. wide, course S. 50" W.; ascend over ground 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

sloping W., about 90 ft. 

ofchainmen, is 18 Iks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 79.91 chs. 

By second set, 80.09 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

N. 3.39ft. from thesecant, 

Set a granite stone, 20 x 7 x 67 ins., 15 ins. in the 

groundforstandardcor.ofTps. 13N.,Rs. 21 and22 

E., marked76 

S. C., 13 N. on N., 

22E.onE.,and 

21E. on W.faces;with6groovesonN.E.,andW. 

faces; digpits, 30 x 24x 12 ins., crosswise on 

eachline,E. andW.,4ft.;andN. ofstone,8 

ft. dist.; and raise a mound ofearth, 5 ft. 

base,2%ft. high,N. ofcor. 

Land, mountainous. 

(Pages 146 through 160 deleted. They contain field notes and 

final oaths for the survey of the Third Standard Parallel 

North, through Ranges 22,23 and 24 East by Secant, Tangent 

offset and Solar transit methods. The vein and style of notes 

are the same.) 

75. The secant intersects the standard parallel 1 mile from end of secant, and at the 

paint for the corner of secs. 35 and 36. See Plat 11, figs. 1 and 2. 

76. See "STANDARD TOWNSHIP CORNERS," page 23 

SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES. 

No. 2. 

TITLE PAGE. 

(See Plate 111.) 

FIELD NOTES 

OF THE SURVEY OF THE 

SIXTH GUIDE MERIDIAN EAST 

THROUGH 

Townships No. 13 North 

Between Ranges Nos. 24 and 25 East 

OF THE 

PRINCIPAL BASE AND MERIDIAN 

IN THE 

STATE OF MONTANA, 

AS SURVEYED BY 

RICHARD ROODS, 

U. S. DEPUTY SURVEYOR, 

UNDER HIS CONTRACT No. 97, 

DATED JULY 10, 1890. 

Survey commenced August 29,1890. 

Survey completed August 30, 1890. 

-161- 

(Pages 162 and 163 deleted. They contain the sample index 

and the preliminary oaths of assistants.) 

-164- 

77. See footnote, page 154. 

643 
2.60 

7.50 

17.40 

19.00 

22.00 

40.00 

42.60 

47.00 

53.00 

55.20 

55.40 

60.00 

64.00 

80.00 

At this corner, at 8h 54" p. m., by my watch, which is 

3" 49"ast of local mean time, I observe Polaris at 

eastern elongation in accordance with instructions in 

the manual,39 and mark the point in the line thus 

determined by a tack driven in a wooden plug set in the 

ground, 5.00 chs. north ofmy station. 

August 29, 1890. 

~~~ 

August 30: At 6h 30" a. m., I lay off the azimuth of 

Polaris, 1" 49'.5 to the west, and mark the TRUE 

MERIDIAN thus determined by a cross on a stone firmly 

set in the ground, west ofthe point established last 

night. 

The magnetic bearing7'of the true meridian is N. 18" 05' 

W., which reduced by the table on page 100 of the Manual 

gives the mean mag. decl. 18"OZ'E. 

From the standard cor. I run 

North, bet. Secs. 31 and36. 

Descend over ground sloping N. W. 

Creek 10 lks. wide in ravine, 45 ft. below the Tp. cor., 

To edge of table land, bears N. E. and S. W.; thence over 

Bluffbank, bearsN. 58"W. andS. 58"E.; descend 

Bottom of ravine, course S. 58" E.; ascend 50 feet to 

Edge of table land, bears S. 58"E. and N. 58" W.; thence 

Difference between measurements of 40.00 chs., by two sets 

courseN. 32"W. 

level land. 

abruptly 40 ft. 

over level land. 

of chainmen, is 18 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 40.09 chs. 

By 2nd set, 39.91 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

Set a limestone 16 x 7 x 5 ins., 11 ins. in the ground, 

for ?4 sec. cor., marked ?4 on W. face, and raise a 

moundofstone, 2ft. base, l%ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Stream, 6 lks. wide, in ravine 15 ft. deep, course N. 

60" W. 

Enter heavy oak timber, bears E. and W. 

An oak, 30 ins. diam., on line, I mark with 2 notches on 

Creek, 20 lks. wide, 1 ft. deep, course N. 83" W. 

Right bank of creek, begin very steep rocky ascent. 

Top of ridge, 250 ft. above creek, bears N. 80"W. and S. 

Begin descent. 

Difference bet. measurements of80.00 chs., by two 

chainmen, is 22 lks.; position ofmiddle point 

By 1st set, 79.89 chs. 

By2ndset,80.11 chs.; themeanofwhichis 

The point for sec. cor., 150 ft. below top ofridge, falls 

onaflatrockinplace, lOft.E.andW.by6ft.N. 

and S., on which I 

Cut a cross (x) at the exact cor. point, for cor. of secs. 

25,30,31,and36,markedwith5groovesonNand 1 

groove on S. sides; from which 

An oak, 10 ins. diam., bears N. 22"E., 54 lks. 

dist., markedT. 13 N., R. 25 E., S. 30, B. T. 

A dogwood, 5 ins. diam., bears S. 64%" E., 40 

lks. dist., marked T. 13 N., R. 25 E., S. 31, B. T. 

An ash, 13 ins. diam., bears S. 51" W., 37 links 

dist., marked T. 13 N., R. 34 E., S. 36, B. T. 

An oak, 9 ins. in diam., bears N. 34" W., 42 

lks. dist., marked T. 13 N., R. 24 E.,S. 25, B. T. 

E. and W. sides. 

80"E. 

Land, level and mountainous. 

Soil, Gravel and rock; 4th rate. 

Timber, oak. 

Mountainous or heavily-timbered land, 33.00 chs. 

78. See footnote, page 106. 

-165- 

6th Guide Meridian East, through Tps. 13 N., etc.- 

Continued. 

Chains. 

2.00 

3.50 

8.50 

13.00 

17.10 

20.90 

40.00 

80.00 

35.00 

40.00 

40.30 

44.00 

48.50 

55.00 

61.70 

80.00 

North, bet. secs. 25 and 30. 

Descend through heavy oak timber. 

Precipitous descent of 60 ft., down which I can not chain; 

set a flag on line at foot ofprecipice; measure a base 

east 4 chs. to a point, from which the flag bears N. 68" 

W.; which gives for the distance (by traverse table) 

1.50 chs., which, added to 2.00 chs., makes 

To foot ofprecipice, bears E. and W.; thence, descend. 

Leave heavy oak timber, bears E. and W. 

Begin abrupt descent. 

To creek, 10 lks. wide, pure water, course N. 70" W.; 240 

Edge oflevel plain, bears N. 80" W. and S. 80" E. 

Difference bet. measurements of40.00 chs., by two sets of 

chainmen, is 20 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 39.90 chs. 

By2ndset,40,10chs.; themeanofwhichis 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for '/4 sec. cor., marked 

1/4 S., on W. face; dig pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N. and 

S. of post, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 3% 

ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Diff. between measurements of80.00 chs., by two sets of 

chainmen, is 6 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 80.03 chs. 

By 2ndset, 79.97 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. ofsecs. 19,24, 

25, and30, marked 

T.l3N.,S. 190nN.E. 

R. 25 E., S. 30 on S. E. 

S. 25 on S. W., and 

R.24E.,S.24onN. W,faces;with4notcheson 

N. and 2 notches on S. edges; digpits, 18 x 18x 

12 ins., ineachsec., 5?hft. dist.; andraise 

a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

ft. below top ofridge. Ascend 20 ft. to 

Land, mountainous and level. 

Soil, stony and sandy; 4th rate. 

Timber, oak. 

Mountainous or heavily-timbered land, 20.90 chs. 

North, bet. secs. 19 and 24. 

Over descending ground. 

Ravine, 20 ft. wide, 8 ft. deep, course E. 

Difference between measurements of40.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 6 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 39.97 chs. 

By 2ndset, 40.03 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for % sec. cor., marked 

1/4S.,onW,face;digpits, 18~18~12ins.,N.and 

S. ofpost, 3 ft. dist.; andraise amoundofearth, 3?h 

ft. base, lvzft. high, W. ofcor. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

Enter willow brush, bears E. and W. 

Leave willow brush, bears E. and W.; Ford's Creek, 22 lks. 

wide; banks, 3 ft. high; pure water, gentle current; 

course E. 

Ford's Creek, 24 lks. wide, course W. 

Ford's Creek, 26 lks. wide, course N. 70"E. 

Ravine, 15 ft. wide, 6 ft. deep, course E. 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 12 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 80.06 chs. 

By2ndset, 79.94chs.; themeanofwhichis 

Deposit a quart of charcoal, 12 ins. in the ground, for 

cor.ofsecs. 13,18,19,and24;digpits, 18x18~12 

ins., in each sec., 4 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

644 
earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In S. E. pit drive a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 

12 ins. in the ground, marked 

T. 13N.,S. 18onN.E., 

R.25E.,S. 19onS.E., 

S.24onS. W.,and 

R. 24 E., S. 13 on N. W. faces; with 3 notches on 

N. and S. edges. 

-166- 

6th Guide Meridian East, through Tps. 13 N., ete.- 

Continued. 

80.00 

Chains. 

29.00 

34.10 

35.20 

37.50 

40.00 

47.00 

56.50 

63.00 

80.00 

2.00 

7.50 

37.00 

40.00 

71.00 

74.00 

79.50 

Land, nearly all level. 

Soil, sandy loam and clay; 1st stand 4th rate. 

No timber. 

North, bet. secs. 13 and 18. 

Over nearly level plain; gradually ascend. 

Begin ascent to ridge, bears E. and W. 

Top of ridge, 60 ft. above plain, bears E. and W. 

Begin descent from ridge. 

Foot ofdescent; branch, 10 lks. wide in ravine 5 ft. 

deep; course E. ascend. 

Difference between measurements of40.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 16 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 39.92 chs. 

By 2nd set, 40.08 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

Set a granite stone, 15 x 8 x 5 ins., 10 ins. in the 

ground, for ?4 sec. cor., marked ?4 on W. face; and 

raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. 

ofcor. Pits impracticable. 

Begin ascent of ridge, bears E. and W. 

Top of ridge, 400 ft. above plain, bears E. and W. 

Begin descent. 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

ofchainmen, is 22 lks.; position ofmiddle point 

Bylstset,80.11chs. 

By2ndset, 79.89chs.; themeanofwhichis 

Set a granite stone, 15 x 8 x 6 ins., 10 ins. in the 

ground, for cor. ofsecs. 7,12,13, and 18, marked with 

2 notches on N. and 4 notches on S. edges; and raise a 

moundofstone, 2ft. base, l?hft. high, W. ofcor. 

Pits impracticable. 

This cor. stands on a bench, about 350 ft. below top of 

ridge. 

Land, level and mountainous. 

Soil, sandy loam and rocky; 2nd and 4th rate. 

No timber. 

Mountainous land, 11.50 chs. 

North, bet. secs. 7 and 12. 

Over level land. 

Begin ascent, bears E. and W. 

Top of low ridge, 20 ft. above sec. cor., bears E. and W.; 

thence, descend gradually. 

Branch, 6 lks. wide, in ravine, 10 ft. deep, course E. 

Difference between measurements of 40.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 12 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 39.94 chs. 

By 2nd set, 40.06 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with a marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for ?4 sec. cor., marked 

?4 S. on W. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N. and 

S. ofpost, 3 ft. dist.; andraise amoundofearth, 3% 

ft. base, lyzft. high, W.ofcor. 

Thence over plain gradually ascending. 

Begin descent to creek, bears E. and W. 

Foot of descent; creek, 12 lks. wide, course E. Ascend. 

To top of ascent and edge of level plain, bears E. and N. 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

75"w. 

645 

of chainmen, is 14 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 80.07 chs. 

By 2nd set, 79.93 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 11 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 7,12, 

13, and 18, marked 

T. 13N.,S.6onN.E., 

R.25E.,S.7onS.E., 

S. 12 on S. W., and 

R. 24 E., S. 1 on N. W. faces; with 1 notch on N. 

and 5 notches on S. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 

ins.,ineachsec., 5?hft. dist.;andraisea 

mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

-167- 

6th Guide Merdian East, through Tps. 13 N., ete.- 

Conel uded. 

Chains. 

18.00 

40.00 

61.00 

80.00 

Land, nearly level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 2nd rate. 

No timber. 

North, bet. secs. 1 and 6. 

Over level land. 

Branch 4 lks. wide, in ravine 6 ft. deep, course E. 

Difference between measurements of 40.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 6 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 39.97 chs. 

By 2nd set, 40.03 chs; the mean ofwhich is 

Deposit a marked stone, 12 ins. in the ground, for ?4 

sec. cor., digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N. and S. of 

cor.,4ft. dist.; andraiseamoundofearth, 31/2ft. 

base, l?h ft. high, over deposit. 

In S. pit drive a cedar stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 

ins. in the ground, marked 

?4 S. on W. face. 

Creek, 12 lks. wide, course S. 23"E. 

Difference between measurements of 80.00 chs., by two sets 

of chainmen, is 4 lks.; position of middle point 

By 1st set, 80.02 chs. 

By 2nd set, 79.98 chs.; the mean ofwhich is 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. ofTps. 13 and 

14N.,Rs,24and25E.,marked 

T.14N.,S.31onN.E., 

R.25E.,S.6onS.E., 

T. 13 N., S. 1 on S. W., and 

R. 24 E., S. 36 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on 

each edge; digpits, N., E., and W., 4 ft. and S. 

ofpost, 8 ft. dist.; andraise a mound ofearth, 

5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, S. of cor. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with quart of 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

August 30, 1890. 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION. 

Townships 13 N., Ranges 24 and 25 East, are generally 

rolling table-lands, producing an abundant growth of grass, 

and there is some good land along Ford's Creek and its tributaries. About two miles east of the corner of Tps. 13 and 14 N., 

Rs. 24 and 25 E., is a lake some two and half miles long by two 

miles wide, lying in Tps. 13 and 14 N., R. 25 E. 

RICHARD ROODS, 

U. S. Deputy Surveyor. 

AUGUST 30,1890. 

(Page 168 deleted. Contains final oaths.) 
SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES. 

Chains. 

No. 3. 

TITLE PAGE. 

[See Plate 111.1 

Suryey commenced September 8,1890, and executed with a 

Young & Sons light mountain transit, No. -, with 

solar attachment. The horizontal limb is provided with two 

double verniers placed opposite to each other, reading 

to single minutes of arc, which is also the least count 

ofthe vepniers of the latitude and declination arcs. 

at Helena, found correct, and was approved by the 

surveyor general for Montana, September 1,1890. 

I examine the adjustments of the transit, and correct the 

The instrument was examined, tested on the true meridian 

FIELD NOTES 

OF THE SURVEY OF THE 

EAST AND NORTH BOUNDARIES 

OF 

TOWNSHIP NO. 13 NORTH, RANGE NO. 21 EAST 

OF THE 

PRINCIPAL BASE AND MERIDIAN 

IN THE 

STATE OF MONTANA, 

AS SURVEYED BY 

RICHARD ROODS, 

U. S. DEPUTY SURVEYOR, 

UNDER HIS CONTRACT No. 97, 

DATED JULY 10,1890. 

7.00 

Survey commenced September 8,1890. 

Survey completed September 13, 1890. 

10.00 

19.00 

24.50 

31.00 

-169- 

34.00 

(Pages 170 and 171 deleted. They contain the sample index 

and preliminary oaths of assistants.) 39.50 

40.00 

-172- 

43.00 

49.50 

50.00 

level and collimation errors; then, to test the solar 

apparatus by comparing its indications, resulting from 

solar observations made during a. m. and p. m. hours, 

with a true meridian determined by observations on 

Polaris, I proceed as follows: 

September 8: At the standard corner ofTps. 13 N., Rs. 21 

and 22"E., latitude 45" 34'5 N., longitude 107"46' W., 

at 4h 57" p. m., 1. m. t., I set off 45" 35' on the 

lat. arc; 5"29' N. on the decl. arc (these settings 

being the nearest practicable to the true minutes and 

fractions thereofrequired); determine with the solar a 

true meridian; and mark a point thereof on a stone set 

firmly in the ground, 5.00 chs. N. ofthe cor. 

At8h 15".5p.m.,bymywatch,whichis4"23s 

fast ofl. m. t., I observe Polaris at eastern 

elongation, in accordance with Manual of 

 instruction^,^^ and mark a point on the line thus 

determined on aplugdriven in the ground, 5.00 chs. N. 

of my station. 

September 8, 1890. 

September 9: at 6h 30" a. m., 1. m. t., Ilay off the 

azimuth of Polaris, 1"49'.6, to the west and mark the 

TRUE MERIDIAN thus determined, by cutting a small 

groove in the stone set September 8, on which the true meridian falls 0.25 ins. west ofthe mark determined by the solar. 

lat. arc; 5" 15' N., on the decl. arc; and mark apoint 

in the true meridian determined with the solar, by a 

cross on the stone already set 5.00 chs. N. of my 

station; thismarkfalls0.3 ins. westofthe true 

meridian established by the Polaris observation. 

The solar apparatus, by p. m. and a. m. observations, 

defines positions for true meridians, respectively about 

0' 13 east and 0' 16 west of the true meridian 

established by the Polaris observations; therefore, I 

conclude the adjustments ofthe instrument are 

satisfactory 

is N. 18" 10' W.; the angle thus determined, reduced by 

the table, page 100, gives the mean mag. decl. 18" 07'E. 

At 6h 58" a. m., 1. m. t., I set off 45" 35' on the 

The magnetic bearing of the true meridian,79 at 7 a. m., 

I begin at the standard corner ofTps. 13 N., Rs. 21 and 

Thence I run 

North, bet. secs. 31 and 36. 

Descend abruptly over stony ground, sloping N. W. 

Creek, 80 ft. below Tp. cor., 15 lks. wide, clear water, 

Road, bears N. 60" E. and S. 60" W. 

Top ofridge, 200 ft. above creek, bears E. and W. 

Begin descent. 

Foot of descent, 150 ft. below top ofridge, bears E. and 

W. Branch 2 lks. wide, clear water, course E. Thence 

over level land. 

22 E., whichIestablished August 25,1890. 

course S. 75" W.; ascend. 

Begin descent. 

Foot of descent, 30 ft. below bench, bears E. and W.; thence 

thence over level land. 

Set a sandstone, 15 x 8 x 6 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, 

for ?h sec. cor., marked '/4 on W. face; digpits, 18 x 

18 x 12 ins., N. and S. of stone, 3 ft. dist.; and raise 

amoundofearth,3%ft. base, l%ft. high,W.of 

cor. 

Creek 10 lks. wide, pure water, 8 ins. deep, course E. 

Begin ascent. 

Topofridge,bearsN. 7OoE.andN.80"W.,50ft.above 

creek. 

Begin descent. 

79. See footnotes, pages 106 and 142. 

646 
-173- 

East boundary of T. 13 N., R. 21 E.-Continued. 

Chains. 

54.00 

62.50 

73.00 

74.79 

80.00 

9.00 

20.40 

27.50 

39.50 

40.00 

75.00 

80.00 

6.00 

17.00 

22.00 

36.50 

ranch6 lks. wide, in ravine chs. wide, 30 ft. deep, 

course E.; thence, over level land. 

reek 12 lks. wide, 1 ft. deep, pure water, course S. 

60"E. 

nter cedar timber, bears E. and W. 

cedar, 10 ins. diam.,online,Imarkwith2notcheson 

N. and S. sides. 

cedar, 8 ins. diam., for cor. of secs. 25,30,31, and 

36, I mark 

T. 13N.,S.30onN.E., 

R.22E.,S.31onS.E., 

S. 36 on S. W., and 

R. 21 E., S. 25 on N. W. sides; with 5 notches on 

N. and 1 notch on S. sides; from which 

A cedar, 7 ins. diam., bears N. 30%" E., 20 lks. 

dist., markedT. 13 N., R. 22 E., S. 30, B. T. 

A cedar, 6 ins. diam., bears S. 631/4"E., 18 lks. 

dist.,markedT. 13N.,R. 22E., S. 31, B. T. 

A cedar, 9 ins. diam., bears S. 23W W., 21 lks. 

dist., marked T. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 36, B. T. 

A cedar, 8 ins. diam., bears N. 64%" W., 19 lks. 

dist.,markedT. 13N.,R. 21 E.,S.25,B.T. 

and, mountainous and level. 

iil, stony and loam; 2nd and 4th rate. 

imber, cedar. 

ountainous land, 54.00 chs. 

orth, bet. secs. 25 and30. 

ver level land, through cedar timber. 

reek 13 lks. wide, pure water, 1 ft. deep, gentle 

current, course S. 80"E. 

reek 15 lks. wide, pure water, 2 ft. deep, gentle 

current, course S. 70" E. 

Zave cedar timber, begin ascent, bears S. 70"E. and N. 

70" W. 

ip of ascent of 40 ft., enter level plain, bears E. and W. 

?t a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with charred 

stake, 24 ins. in the ground, for % sec. cor., marked 

% S. on W. face; digpits, 18 x 17 x 12 ins., N. and 

S.ofpost,3ft.dist.;andraiseamoundofearth,3% 

ft. base, ll/zft. high, W. ofcor. 

3ptember 9: At this '/4 sec. cor. I set off5" 9' N., on 

the decl. arc; and at llh 57".11. m. t., observe 

the sun on the meridian; the resulting lat. is 45" 36.0' 

which is about 0.2' greater than the proper lat. 

reek 12 lks. wide, pure water, 1 ft. deep, gentle 

current, course S. 80" E. 

?t a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. ofsecs. 19, 

24,25, and 30; marked 

T.13N.,S.19onN.E., 

R.22E.,S.30onS.E., 

S. 25 on S. W., and 

R.21E.,S.24onN. W,faces;with4notcheson 

N. and 2 notches on S. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 x 

12 ins., in each sec. 5% ft. dist.; and raise 

amoundofearth,4ft. base,2ft. high, W.ofcor. 

md, level. 

)il, sandy loam; 2nd rate. 

mber, cedar. 

orth, bet. secs. 19 and 24. 

ver level land. 

ranch 4 lks. wide, course S. 70" E.; ascend. 

ip ofridge, 40 ft. high, bears E. and W. 

?gin descent. 

lot ofdescent, bears E. and W.; thence over level land. 

40.00 

47.50 

64.00 

Set a sandstone, 15 x 8 x 6 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, 

for ?4 sec. cor., marked 1/4 on W. face; digpits, 18 x 

18 x 12 ins., N. and S. ofstone, 3 ft. dist.; and raise 

amoundofearth,3?hft. base, l%ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Creek 15 lks. wide, pure water, low banks, course N. 70" W. 

Creek 16 lks. wide, pure water, low banks, course S. 65"E. 

-174- 

East boundary of T 13 N., R. 21 E.-Concluded. 

Chains. 

80.00 

40.00 

80.00 

40.00 

55.00 

80.00 

32.50 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with charred 

stake, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. ofsecs. 13,18, 

19, and 24, marked 

T. 13N.,S. 18onN.E., 

R.20E.,S.19onS.E., 

S. 24 on S. W., and 

R.21,S. 13onN. W,faces;with3notchesonN. 

and S. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 x12 ins., in 

each sec., 51/2 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

September 9, 1890. 

September 10: At 7h 56.8"a. m., I set off45"37' on 

the lat. arc; 4" 47' N., on the decl. arc; and determine 

a true meridian with the solar, at the cor. ofsecs. 13, 

18,19, and 24. 

Thence I run 

North, bet. secs. 13 and 18. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for '/4 sec. cor., marked 

%S.onW.face;digpits, 18x18x12ins.,N.and 

S. of post, 3 ft. dist; and raise a mound of earth, 3% 

ft. base, l%ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Set a limestone, 20 x 8 x 4 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, 

forcor.ofsecs. 7,12,13,and 18,markedwith2 

notches on N. and 4 notches on S. edges; dig pits, 18 x 

18 x 12 ins., in each sec., 5?hft. dist.; and raise a 

moundofearth,4ft. base,2ft. high, W.ofcor. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

North, bet. secs. 7 and 12. 

Over level land. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for '/4 sec. cor. 

marked'/4S.,onW.face;digpits, 18x 18x 12ins., 

N. and S. ofpost, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth, 3% ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. of cor. 

Creek, 8 lks. wide, in ravine 1 ch. wide, 20 ft. deep, 

courseN. 60"E. 

Set a limestone, 19 x 8 x 6 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, 

for cor. of secs. 1,6,7, and 12, marked with 1 notch 

on N. and 5 notches on S. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 

ins., in each sec., 5% ft. dist.; and raise a mound 

of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; lstrate. 

No timber. 

September 10: At this cor. I set off 4" 44' N. on the 

decl.arc;andat 1lh56"'.8l.m. t.,observethe 

sun on the meridian; the resultingldt. is 45" 39', 

which is about 0'.1 more than the proper lat. 

North, bet. secs. 1 and 6. 

Creek, 15 lks. wide, impure water, sluggish current, low 

muddy banks, course E. 

647 
40.00 

80.00 

Set a locust post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for V4 sec. cor., 

marked % S., on W. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., 

N.andS.ofpost,3ft.dist.;andraiseamoundof 

earth, 3 ?h ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. of cor. 

Set alimestone, 15 x 8 x 7 ins., 10 ins in the ground, 

forcor.ofTps. 13and14N.,Rs.21 and22E.,marked 

with 6 notches on each edge; digpits, 24 x 24 x 12 

ins., on each line, N., E., and W.; 4 ft., and S. of 

stone, 8 ft. dist., and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. 

base,2 Yzft. high, S. ofcor. 

September 10, 1890. 

-175- 

North boundary of T. 13 N., R. 21 E. 

Chains. 

39.25 

79.25 

40.00 

47.00 

80.00 

September 11: At 7h 56.4" a. m., 1. m. t.. I set off 

45" 40' on the lat. arc; 4" 25' N., on the decl. arc; 

and determine a true meridian with the solar, at the 

cor. ofTps. 13 and14N.,Rs. 21 and22E. 

Thence I run 

West on arandom line, along the N. bdy. of Tp 13 N., R. 

21 E., setting temp. ?h sec. and sec. cors. at 

intervals of 40.00 chs.; and, at 479.25 chs., intersect 

the 5th Guide Meridian, 42 lks. N. of the cor. ofTps. 

13 and 14 N., Rs. 20 and 21 E., which is alimestone, 5 

x 8 x 6 ins. above ground, marked and witnessed as 

described by the surveyor general. The falling answers 

to a correction of 0" 03', or 7 lks. S. per mile. 

counting from the N. E. cor. of the Tp.; therefore I run 

N.89"57'E.,bet.secs.6and31. 

Over level land. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for ?A sec. cor., marked 

% S., on N. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and 

W.ofpost,3ft. dist.;andraiseamoundofearth,3% 

ft. base, 1% ft. high, N. of cor. 

for cor. of secs. 5,6,31, and 32, marked with 5 

notches on E. and 1 notch on W. edges; dig pits 18 x 18 

x2ins.,ineachsec.,5?hft.dist.; andraisea 

moundofearth, 4ft. base, 2ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Set a limestone, 20 x 8 x4 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandyloam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

September 11, 1890. 

September 12: At h-"a.m.,l.m.t.;Isetoff 

45"40' on the lat. arc; 4" 02' N., on the decl. arc; 

and determine a true meridian with the solar, at the 

cor.ofsecs.5,6,31,and32. 

Thence I run 

N. 89" 57' E., bet. secs. 5 and 32. 

Set ajuniper post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for '/4 sec. cor., 

marked?AS.,onN.face;digpits, 18xl8x12ins., 

E. and W. ofpost, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth,31/2ftbase, l%R. high,N.ofcor. 

Creek 15 lks. wide, good water, sluggish current, course 

S. E. 

Deposit a quart ofcharcoal, 12 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of secs. 4,5,32, and 33; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 

ins., ineachsec.,4ftdist.; andraiseamoundof 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In S. E. pit drive a cedar stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 

12 ins. in the ground, marked 

T. 14N.,S.33onN.E., 

R.21E.,S.4onS.E., 

T. 13 N., S. 5 on S. W., and 

7.00 

40.00 

55.00 

57.13 

68.00 

S. 32 on N. W. faces; with 4 notches on E. and 2 notches 

on W. edges. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

September 12: At this cor., I set off@ 53' N., on the 

decl. arc; and, at llh 5".1,1. m. t., observe the 

sun on the meridian; the resulting lat. is 45"40', 

which is about 0'.3 greater than the properlat. 

September 12, 1890. 

N.8g057'E.,bet. secs.4and33. 

Branch, 4 lks. wide, course S. 35" W. 

Set alimestone, 15 x 8 x 5 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, 

for '/4 sec. cor. marked '/4 onN. face; digpits, 18x 

18 x 12 ins., E. and W., of stone, 3 ft. dist.; and 

raise a mound of earth, 3% ft. base, l?h ft. high, 

N. ofcor. 

Enter heavy oak timber, bears N. and S. 

An oak, 38 ins. diam., on line, I mark with 2 notches 

Branch, 3 lks. wide, course N. 30" E. 

on E. and W. sides. 

-176 

North boundary of T. 13 N., R. 21 E.-Continued. 

Chains. 

80.00 

28.00 

40.00 

63.00 

80.00 

~~ 

An oak, 14 ins. diam., for cor. of secs. 3,4,33, and 34, 

I mark 

T. 14N.,S.34N.E., 

R.21E.,S.3onS.E., 

T. 13N.,S.4onS. W.,and 

S. 33 on N. W. sides; with 3 notches on E. and W. sides; 

from which 

Anoak, 12insdiam.,bearsN. 13?h0E.,211ks. 

dist., marked T. 14 N., R. 21 E., S. 34 B. T. 

An oak, 14 ins. diam., bears S. 78W E., 25 lks. 

dist., marked T. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 3, B. T. 

An ash, 10 ins. diam., bears S. 63%"w., 34 lks. 

dist., markedT. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 4, B. T. 

A dogwood, 7 ins. diam., bears N. 26" W., 32 lks. 

dist., marked T. 14 N., R. 21 E., S. 33, B. T. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

Timber, oak. 

Heavily timbered land, 25.00 chs. 

September 13:At-h-",1.m. t.,Isetoff45" 

40' on the lat. arc; -O-' N., on the decl. arc; 

and determine a true meridian with the solar, at the cor. of 

secs. 3,4,33, and 34. 

Thence I run 

N. 89"57' E., bet. secs. 3 and34. 

Over level land, through heavy oak timber. 

Branch, 4 lks. wide, course S. 10"E. 

An oak, 18 ins. diam., for '/4 sec. cor., I mark S., 

on N. side; from which 

An oak, 14 ins. diam., bears N. 42"E., 27 lks. 

dist., marked T. 14 N., R. 21 E., S. 34, B. T. 

An ash, 13 ins. diam., bears S. 48%" E., 25 lks. 

dist., marked T. 13 N., R. 21 E., S. 3, B. T. 

Leave heavy oak timber, bears N. and S. 

Set a limestone, 22 x 8 x 7 ins., 17 ins. in the ground, 

for cor. of secs. 2,3,34, and 35, marked with 2 

notches on E. and 4 notches on W. edges; digpits, 18 x 

18~12ins.,ineachsec.,5%ft.dist.;andraisea 

moundofearth,4ft. base, 2ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

Timber, oak. 

Heavily timbered land, 63.00 chs. 

648 
30.00 

40.00 

80.00 

40.00 

N. 89"57' E., bet. secs. 2 and35. 

Over level land. 

South fork ofspring Creek, 22 lks. wide, pure water, 

gentle current, low banks, course N. 38" E. 

Set a locust post, 3 ft. long, 3 in. sq., with marked 

stone,24 ns. in the ground, for Y4 sec. cor., marked 

?4 S. on N. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and 

W.ofpost,3ft.dist.;andraiseamoundofearth,3% 

ft. base, IYzft. high, N. ofcor. 

for cor. ofsecs. 1,2,35, and36, marked with 1 notch 

onE.and5notcheson W.edges;digpits, 18x 18x12 

ins.,ineachsec.,51/2ft.dist.;andraiseamoundof 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

Set alimestone, 15 x 8 x 6 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

September 13: At thiscor., I set offPo-' N., on 

the decl. arc; and atPh -"'l. m. t., observe 

the sun on the meridian; the resultinglat. is 45" 39', 

which is about 0'.7 less than the proper lat. 

N. 89" 57' E., bet. secs. 1 and36. 

Over level land. 

Set alimestone, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., 12 ins. in the ground, 

for ?4 sec. cor., 

-177- 

North boundary of T. 13 N., R. 21 E.-Concluded. 

Chains. 

58.00 

70.00 

80.00 

marked Y4 on N. face; digpits, 18x 18 x 12 ins., E. 

andW. ofstone,3ft,dist.;andraiseamoundof 

earth, 3'/zft. base, l?hft. high,N. ofcor. 

Branch 4 lks. wide, course N. 30"E. 

Same branch, 6 lks. wide, course S. 

Thecor.ofTps. 13and14N.,Rs.21and22E. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

September 13, 1890. 

Boundaries of T. 13 N., R. 21 E. 

Latitudes, departures, and closing errors. 

Line designated. True bearing. Distance. 

N. S. E. W. 

Chs. Chs. Chs. Chs. Chs. 

3rd Standard Parallel N.. .. West.. .......... 480.00 .................................... 480.00 

5th G. Meridian E ......... North.. ......... 480.00 480.00 .................................... 

E. bdy. T. 13 N.. R. 21 E ... South ........... 480.00 ............ 480.00 ........................ 

N. bdy. T. 13 N., R. 21 E ... N. 89" 57' E.. .... 479.25 0.42 ............ 479.25 ............ 

CanvergeneyBO ................................................................. 0.74 ............ 

Totals ............................................... 480.42 480.00 479.99 480.00 

480.00 ........................ 479.99 

Error in lat.. ......................................... 0.42 Error in dep. 0.01 

This township is rough and mountainous in the southern 

part, rolling in the interior, and nearly level in the north and 

east, while prairie land is found in the vicinity of the southwest corner. The township is well watered, and well timbered 

in the interior; and the soil along the south fork of Spring 

80. The convergency will always be entered in the column containing the departure of 

the north boundary. 

Creek and its tributaries is very fertile. The township should 

be subdivided. 

RICHARD ROODS, 

U. S. Deputy Surveyor. 

September 13, 1890. 

(Remainder of page 177 and all of page 178 deleted. They 

contain the final oaths.) 

-179- 

SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES.-NO. 4. 

Resurvey of the E. bdy. of T. 25 N., R. 2 W., 

Willamette Meridian. 

Chains. 

18.00 

40.00 

52.74 

:NOTE.-Field notes of retracements and resurveys will be 

incorporated with the field notes of the subdivisions to 

which they are directly related, and will be covered by 

the preliminary and final oaths of said subdivisional 

fieldnotes. (Seepage 71.) 

[n case the deputy does not know from recent observations 

that his instrument is in adjustment, he will make the 

observations prescribed at the beginning of specimen 

field notes No. 2, or No. 5, as the character ofthe 

instrument employed may require. 

for this resurvey.) 

A transit with solar attachment is the instrument employed 

Preliminary to commencing the subdivision ofthis township, 

I run north on a blank line, on the east boundary of 

sec. 36; at 40.00 chs. I find the */4 sec. cor., N. 80" 

E., 30 lks. dist., and at 80.00 chs., the cor. of secs. 

24,30,31 and 36, east, 58 lks. dist.; therefore, I 

continue my line north, find no part of the E. bdy. in 

alinement, and that many ofthe corners are nearly 

obliterated. At 5 miles 79.83 chs., intersect E. and W. 

line, 42 lks. E. of the cor. of Tps. 25 and 36 N., Rs. 1 

and 2 W., and as these townships have not been 

subdivided, I resurvey the range line between them, as 

follows: 

Theoldstandardcor.ofTps. 25N.,Rs. 1and2W.,isa 

post greatly decayed, and the marks are nearly 

obliterated. I destroy all traces of the old corner and 

reestablish it at the same point, as follows: 

Set a sandstone, 18x 8 x 5 ins., 12 ins. in the ground, 

for standard cor. ofTps. 25 N., Rs. 1 and 2 W. marked 

S. C., on N. face, with 6 grooves on N., E., and W. 

faces; digpits, 30 x 24x 12 ins., crosswise on each 

line, E. and W., 4 ft., and N. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; 

andraise amoundofearth, 5 ft. base, 2Yzft. high, 

N. ofcor. 

Thence I run 

N. 0"3'W., bet. secs. 31 and36. 

Through timber. Ascend. 

Top ofridge, about 40 ft. high, bears E. and W. 

Set a sandstone, 20 x 8 x 4 ins. 15 ins. in the ground, 

for '/4 sec. cor. marked '/4 on W. face; from which 

Apine20ins,diam., bearsN. 20°E.,241ks. 

An oak, 16 ins. diam., bears N. 68Y4 W., 27 lks. 

dist. marked '/4 S. B. T. 

dist., marked ?4 S. B. T. 

From this point, the old ?4 sec. cor., which is a decayed 

stake, with marks almost obliterated, bears N. 80" E., 

33 lks. dist. I destroy this stake and the marks on the 

stump of a beech tree, described as a bearing tree in 

the field notes of the original survey. No trace can be 

found of apoplar, described as a bearing tree. 

An oak, 14 ins. diam., on line, I mark with 2 notches on 

E. and W. sides. Descend. 

649 
57.00 

72.00 

80.00 

Foot of ridge, bears E. and W.; enter rich level land. 

Leave timber, bearsN. E. andS. W. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for corner ofsecs. 25, 

30,31, and36, marked 

T.25N.,S. 30onN.E., 

R.lW.,S.3lonS.E., 

S. 36 on S. W., and 

R. 2 W., S. 25 on N. W. faces; with 5 notches on N. 

and 1 notch on S. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 

ins. ineachsec.,5?hft.dist.;andraisea 

mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

From this cor. the old cor., a decayed post, bears E. 65 

Land, rolling and level. 

Soil, N. and S. parts, rich loam; 1st rate; middle part, 

sandy; 2nd rate. 

Timber, pine and oak. 

lks. I destroy all traces ofthe old cor. 

-180- 

Resurvey of the E. bdy. of T. 25 N., R. 2 W., etc.-Continued. 

Chains. 

40.00 

80.00 

40.00 

50.00 

80.00 

16.50 

40.00 

N.0"3'W.,bet.secs.25and30. 

Over level land. 

Set a locust post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for '/4 sec. cor. 

marked 114 S., on W. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., 

N. and S. of post, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth,3'/2ft. base, l%ft. high, W.ofcor. 

All indications of the old cor. have disappeared. 

Setagranitestone, 15x8x7ins., 10ins.inthe 

ground, for cor. of secs. 19,24,25 and 30, marked with 

4 notches on N. and 2 notches on S. edges; dig pits, 18 x 

18x 12ins.,ineachsec.,5?hft.dit.;andraise 

amoundofearth,4ft. base,2fthigh, W.ofcor. 

From this point, the old sec. cor., a post, bears N. 50" 

E., 41 lks. dist. Idestroy the cor. 

Land, level prairie. 

Soil, rich loam; lstrate. 

No timber. 

N. 0" 3' W., bet. secs. 19 and 24. 

Over level prairie. 

Set an oak post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with charred 

stake, 24 ins. in the ground, for '14 sec. cor., marked 

'/4S.onW.face;digpits,l8~18~12ins.,N.and 

S. of post, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 3?h 

ft. base, l%ft. high, W. ofcor. 

From this point, the old '/4 sec. cor., a decayed post, 

bearsN. 51%"E.,47lks. dist. Idestroy thispost, 

and marks on old bearing trees. 

Elk Creek, 130 lks. wide, shallow at this point, good 

water, gentle current, course N. W. 

Set alimestone, 18x 8 x 5 ins., 12 ins. in the ground, 

for cor. ofsecs. 13,18,19 and 24, marked with3 

notches on N. and S. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., 

in each sec., 5?h ft. dist.; andraise amoundof 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

After diligent search no signs of the old cor. can be 

found. 

Land, level prairie. 

Soil, rich loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

N. 0"3'W., bet. secs. 13 and 18. 

Over prairie land. 

Coon Creek, 60 lks. wide, 2 ft. deep, good water, course W. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., wih quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for '14 sec. cor. 

marked '/4 S. on W. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., 

N. and S. ofpost, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

80.00 

17.50 

earth, 3% ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. of cor. 

traces ofpitsN. 86"E. 46 lks. dist., which1 destroy. 

for cor. of secs. 7,12,13 and 18, marked with 2 

notches on N. and 4 notches on S. edges; dig pits, 18 x 

18x 12ins.,ineachsec.,5?hft.dist.;andraisea 

moundofearth,4ft. base, 2ft. high, W. ofcor. 

The old cor. which was a post, has disappeared, but 

indistinct remains of the pits, nearly in their proper 

places, still remain. The new pits sufficiently 

obliterate the old ones. 

Land, gently rollingprairie. 

Soil, rich loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

April 12,1892: I set off9" 6' N., on the decl. arc; and 

at 12h 0.3" p. m., 1. m. t., observe the sun on the 

meridian; the resulting lat., is 47" 35' N. 

I can find no traces of old cor. post, but find slight 

Set a limestone, 22 x 8 x 4 ins., 17 ins. in the ground, 

N. 0"3'W., bet. secs. 7 and 12. 

Over prairie land. 

Maple Creek, 10 lks. wide; 1 ft. deep, good water, gentle 

current, course S. W. 

-181- 

Resurvey of the E. bdy. of T. 25 N., R. 2 W., etc.-Continued. 

Chains. 

40.00 

80.00 

10.40 

22.00 

40.00 

46.00 

79.83 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with charred 

stake, 24ins. in the ground, for '/4 sec. cor., marked 

%S.onW.face;digpits,18~18~12ins.,N.and 

S.ofpost,3ft.di~t,;andraiseamoundofearth,3~% 

ft. base, l'hft. high, W. ofcor. 

jet a limestone, 20 x 8 x 5 ins., with marked stone, 24 

ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 1,6,7, and 12, 

marked with 1 notch on N. and 5 notches on S. edges; dig 

pits 18 x 18 x 12 ins., in each sec., 5%ft. dist.; 

and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. 

of cor. 

by fire, no signs of pits. 

The old cor. which was a post, has been entirely destroyed 

Land, level prairie. 

Soil, rich loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

April 12,1892: A 4 p. m., 1. m. t., I set off 47" 36' 

on the lat. arc; 

determine a true meridian, at the cor. of secs. 1,6,7, 

and 12 

on the decl. arc; and 

Thence I run 

N. 0" 3' W., bet. secs. 1 and6. 

Over prairie land. 

A spring branch, 3 lks. wide, good water, course S. 70" W. 

Spring ofpure water, 3 ft. diam., 2 ft. deep, bearsE., 

6.00 chs. dist. 

Set a locust post, 3 ft long, 3 ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for '14 sec. cor., 

marked'hS.,onW.face.;digpits, 18xlSx12ins., 

N. and S. ofpost, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth, 31/2ft. base, l?hft. high, W. ofcor. 

After diligent search no old '/4 sec. cor. can be found. 

Small branch, 3 lks. wide, sluggish current, course N. W. 

Entertimber, bearsN. W. andS. E. 

The old cor., of Tps. 25 and 26 N., Rs. 1 and 2 W., which 

is an oak post, burned off at the surface ofthe 

ground. I reestablish the cor. at the same point, as 

follows: Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with 

charred stake and the old post, 24 ins. in the grounds, 

for cor. ofTps. 25 and 26 N., Rs. 1 and 2 W. marked 

T.26N.,S.31onN.E., 

R. 1 W.,S.6onS.E., 

650 
40.00 

79.61 

T. 25 N., S. 1 on S. W., and 

R. 2 W., S. 36 on N. W. faces; with 6 notches on each 

edge; from which 

Acherry, 6 ins. diam., bearsN. 40?h0E., 14 lks. 

dist., marked T. 26 N., R. 1 W., S. 31, B. T. 

A white oak, 5 ins. diam., bears S. 51?h0 E., 24 lks. 

dist., marked T. 25 N., R. 1 W., S. 6, B. T. 

A hickory, 8 ins. diam., bears S. 371/4" W., 30 lks. 

dist., marked T. 25 N., R. 2 W., S. 1, B. T. 

Achestnut,6ins,diam.,bearsN. 5z3/4"w., 131ks. 

dist., marked T. 26 N., R. 2 W., S. 36, B. T. 

Land, level. 

Soil, rich loam, 1st rate. 

Timber, oak, hickory, and chestnut. 

April 12, 1892. 

The field notes ofthe subdivision of this township read 

in part as follows: * * * * * * 1: 

"N. 89"57'W., onarandomlinebet. secs. 7 and 18. 

Set temp. '/4 sec. cor. 

The cor. ofsecs. 7,12,13, and 18 cannot be found. 

I find the '/4 sec. cor. bet. secs. 13 and 18, which is a 

locust post, 1 ft. high, 3 ins. sq., marked and 

witnessed as described by the surveyor general. 

Thence I run 

North, on arandom line bet. secs. 13 and 18 

-182- 

Resurvey of the E. bdy. of T. 25 N., R. 2 W., etc.-Concluded. 

Chains. 

40.00 

79.95 

38.00 

39.971/2 

Set temp. sec. cor. At this point I again make careful 

search for the sec. cor., which is described by the 

surveyor general, as a post, with pits and mound of 

earth W. of cor., but am unable to find any traces of 

post, pits, or mound. Thence, bet. secs. 7 and 12. 

Intersect E. and W. line, 5 lks. E. ofthe ?4 sec. cor. 

bet. secs. 7 and 12, which is a sandstone, 5 x 10 x4 

ins. above ground, marked and witnessed as described by 

the surveyor general. 

Thence I run 

S. O"2' E., on a true line bet. secs. 7 and 12. 

Over rollingland. 

Fence, bears E. and W., enter plowed ground. 

Reestablish the cor. as follows: 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. ofsecs. 7,12, 

13, and 20, marked 

T.25N.S.7onN.E., 

R.2W.S. 18onS.E., 

S. 13 on S. W., and 

R. 3 W., S. 12 on N. W. faces; with 2 notches on N. 

and 4 notches on S. edges; dig pits, 18 x 18 x 12 

ins., ineachsec., 5%ft. dist.;andraisea 

moundofearth, 4ft. base,2ft. high, W. ofcor. 

April 18, 1892." ******* 

SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES. 

NO. 5. 

TITLE PAGE. 

(See Plate IV.) 

FIELD NOTES 

OF THE SURVEY OF THE 

SUBDIVISION AND MEANDER 

LINES 

OF 

TOWNSHIP NO. 15 NORTH, RANGE NO. 20 EAST, 

OF THE 

PRINCIPAL BASE AND MERIDIAN 

IN THE 

STATE OF MONTANA, 

AS SURVEYED BY 

ROBERT ACRES, 

U. S. DEPUTY SURVEYOR, 

UNDER HIS CONTRACT, No. 207, 

DATED MARCH 22, 1893. 

Survey commenced August 4,1893. 

Survey completed August 19, 1893. 

-183- 

(Pages 184 and 185 deleted. They contain the sample index 

and preliminary oaths of assistants.) 

(Pages 186 and 187 were missing from this text.) 

-188- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

Chains. 

32.50 

39.98 

46.50 

76.00 

79.96 

~~~~~ 

Leave heavy timber, bears N. W. and S. E. 

Deposit a quart of charcoal, 12 ins. in the ground, for 

% sec. cor.; dig pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and W. of 

cor., 4ft. dist.; andraise amound ofearth, 3% ft. 

base, 1% ft. high, over deposit. In E. pit drive a 

cedar stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in the 

ground, marked '/4 S. on N. face. 

Enter heavy timber, bears N. and S. 

Leave heavy, enter scattering timber, bears N. 25" E. and 

The cor. ofsecs. 25,26,35, and 36. 

s. 25" w. 

65 1 
25.36 

26.00 

32.12 

40.00 

49.46 

52.60 

53.60 

55.70 

62.80 

80.00 

Land nearly level; mostly subject to overflow 2 to 5 ft. 

Heavily timbered land, 41.50 chs. 

deep. 

N. 0" 1' W., bet. secs. 25 and 26. 

3ver level bottom land, through scattering timber 

Right bank of Yellowstone River. 

Set a locust post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the 

ground, for meander cor. offracl. secs. 25 and 26, 

marked 

M. C. onN., 

T. 15 N. on S., 

R.20E.,S.25onE.,and 

S. 26 on W. faces; from which 

A cottonwood, 12 ins. diam., bears S. 18l/4"E., 16 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 15N.,R. 20E.,S.25,M. C.B.T. 

lks. dist., marked 

T. 15N.,R.20E.,S.26,M.C.B.T. 

A sycamore, 31 ins. diam., bears S. 74%"w., 25 

Enter shallow channel, 1 to 2 ft. deep. 

Across shallow channel, 64 lks. wide, to sand bar parallel 

to river bank; thence on sand bar. 

To right bank of main channel, course E.; point for 

triangulation. 

Point for ?4 sec. cor. falls in river. 

To determine the dist. across, I set a flag on line, on 

left bank; then measure a base, N. 89" 59' E., 20.00 

chs. to a point, from which the flag bears N. 49" 06' 

W,;fromtheflagtheE.endofbasebearsS.49"6'E.; 

therefore, the dist. is tan. 40"55' x base, or 0.867 x 

20.00 = 17.34 chs.;'l making the whole distance from 

meandercor.,0.64 + 6.12 + 17.34 = 24.10chs.,which 

added to 25.36, makes 

To left bank of Yellowstone River; bank, 12 ft. high. 

Deposit a marked stone, 12 ins. in the ground for meander 

cor. offracl. secs. 25 and 26, dig a pit, 36 x 36 x 12 

ins.,5ft.N. ofcor. andraiseamoundofearth, 4ft. 

base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In the pit drive a cedar stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 

ins. in the ground, marked 

M. C. on S., 

T.15N.onN., 

R. 20 E., S. 26 on W., and 

S.25onE.faces. 

none within limits suitable for bearing trees. 

Thence over level bottom land. Some small cottonwoods, 

Leave bottom, begin ascent, bears E. and W. 

Top of ascent and edge of sandy plain, 40 ft. above river, 

Wire fence, bears E. and W. 

Telegraph line, bears E. and W. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked 

bears E. and W. 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 23,24, 

25, and 26, marked 

T. 15N.,S.24onN.E., 

R.20E.,S.25onS.E., 

S.26onS.W.,and 

S. 23 on N. W. faces; with 2 notches on S. and 1 

notch on E. edges; digpits, 18 x 18x 12 ins. in 

each sec. 5?h ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

Land, level. 

-189- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

Chains. Soil, alluvia land sand; 1st and 2nd rate. 

Timber, cottonwood and sycamore. 

40.00 

79.98 

20.00 

39.99 

58.00 

79.98 

21.00 

40.00 

73.50 

78.00 

80.00 

40.00 

80.01 

40.00'/2 

80.01 

August 5: At this cor. I set off 16" 47' N., on the decl. 

arc; and, at Oh 6" p. m., 1. m. t., observe the sun 

on the meridian; the resulting lat. is 45" 47'.0 or 

about 0'.3 greater than the proper lat. 

S.89"56'E.,onarandomlinebet.secs.24and25. 

Set temp. '/4 sec. cor. 

24,25, and 30, which is a sandstone, 5 x 9 x 4 ins. 

above ground, marked and witnessed as described by the 

surveyor general. 

Intersect E. bdy. ofTp. 3 lks. N. ofcor. ofsecs. 19, 

Thence I run 

N. 89"55' W., on a true line bet. secs. 24 and 25. 

Over level land. 

Fletcher's Station bears S. 64" W. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for '/4 sec. cor., marked 

'/4 S. on N. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and 

W. 3 ft. dist.; andraise a moundofearth, 31/2ft. 

base, l'/zft. high, N. ofcor. 

Fletcher's Station bears S. 7"E. 

Short Creek, 3 lks. wide, alkali water, 8 ins. deep, 

The cor. ofsecs. 23,24,25, and26. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy; 3rdrate. 

No timber. 

course S. 20" E. 

N. 0" 1' W., bet. secs. 23 and 24. 

Over level land. 

Enteralkaliflat,bearsN.70"W.andS. 70"E. 

Set a sandstone, 16x 8 x 16 ins., 11 ins. in the ground, 

forl/qsec.cor.,rnarked l/qonW.face;digpits, 18x 

18 x 12 ins., N. and S. of stone, 3 ft. dist., and raise 

amoundofearth, 3%ft. base, 1Yzft. high, W. of 

cor. 

Alkali flat extends about 65.00 chs. E. and35.00 chs. W. 

Leave alkali flat, bears E. and W. 

Alkali creek (dry), course E. 

Set a sandstone, 20x 7 x 5 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, 

for cor. ofsecs. 13,14,23 and24, marked with 3 

notches on S. and 1 notch on E. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 

x12ins.,ineachsec.,5?hft.dist.;andraisea 

mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy and alkali; 4th rate. 

No timber. 

S. 89"55'E.,onarandomline,bet. secs. 13and24. 

Over level land. 

Set temp. ?4 sec. cor. 

Intersect E. bdy. oftheTp. atthecor. ofsecs. 13,18, 

19, and 24, which is a locust post 1 ft. above ground, 4 

ins. sq., marked and witnessed as described by the 

surveyor general. 

Thence I run 

N.89"55'W.,onatruelinebet.secs. 13and24, 

Over sandy alkali land. 

Set ajuniper post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for '/4 sec. cor. marked 

?hS.,onN.face;digpits, 18~18~12ins.,E. and

W. of post, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 

3yzft. base, l'/Zft.high,N.ofcor. 

The cor. of secs. 13,14,23, and24. 

Alkali creek (now dry), runs eastward about 4.00 chs. 

Land, level. 

Soil, alkali sand; 4th rate. 

No timber. 

south ofthisline. 

81. See page 136. 

652 
-190- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

36.60 

Chains. 

40.00 

58.00 

80.00 

40.00 

80.03 

31.49 

67.07 

76.00 

80.03 

11.00 

Intersect W. bdy. ofRancho San Blas at a point from which 

theN. W.cor.oftheranchobearsN. 19Yz0W.,7.4O 

chs. dist. 

N. 0" 1' W., bet. secs. 13 and 14. 

Over level land. 

Set an oak post 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for ?4 sec. cor., 

marked ?4 S. on W. face; dig pits 18 x 18 x 12 ins. N. 

and S. of post, 3 ft. dist., and raise a mound of earth, 

3?hft. base, l?hft. high, W. ofcor. 

Thence gradually ascending. 

Begin steep ascent, sloping S. W.; broken stony ground. 

Set a limestone, 20 x 8 x 6 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, 

forcor.ofsecs. 11,12,13,and14,markedwith4 

notches on S., and 1 notch on E. edges; and raise a 

moundofstone,2ft,base, l%ft.high, W.ofcor. 

Pits impracticable. 

Thiscor. is about 150 ft. above last Y4sec. cor. 

Land, level and mountainous. 

Soil, sandy and rocky; 3rd and 4th rate. 

No timber. 

Mountainous land, 22.00 chs. 

S. 89" 55' E., on arandomline, bet. secs. 12 and 13. 

Point for ?4 sec. cor. falls in Rancho San Blas. 

Intersect E. bdy. ofTp. 7 lks. N. ofthe cor. ofsecs. 7, 

12,13, and 18, which is asandstone 5 x 6 x 6 ins. 

above ground, marked and witnessed as described by the 

surveyor general. 

Thence, I run 

N.89"52'W.,onatruelinebet.secs. 12and13. 

Over level land. 

Intersect E. bdy. of Rancho San Blas, at a point, from 

which the 5 mile post on the rancho bdy. bears S. 33"E. 

7.00 chs. dist. 

Set a limestone, 15 x 8 x 5 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, 

for closingcor. offracl. secs. 12 and 13, marked C. C. 

on E. and S. B., on W. faces; digpits, crosswise on 

each line, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., N. 33 W., 3 ft., and 24 x 

18 x 12 ins., E. ofstone, 7 ft. dist.; and raise a 

moundofearth,4ft. base,2ft. high,E.ofcor. 

Thence, across the rancho on a blank line. 

Intersect W. bdy. of Rancho San Blas at a point, from 

which the 3% mile post on the rancho bdy., bears N. 

19%" W., 12.20 chs. dist. 

ground, for closingcor. offracl. secs. 12 and 13, 

marked S. B. on E., with 4 grooves on S. and C. C. on W. 

faces; and raise a mound of stone 2 ft. base, 1% ft. 

high, W. ofcor. Pits impracticable. 

This cor. is on a granite ridge 220 ft. above closing cor. 

on E; bdy. ofthe rancho. Thence, over rough stony 

ground. 

Set a granite stone, 15 x 7 x6 ins., 10 ins. in the 

Begin descent of rocky slope, bears N. and S. 

Thecor.ofsecs. 11,12,13,and14. 

This cor. is 40 ft. below top ofridge. 

Land, level and mountainous. 

Soil, sandy loam and stony; 3rd and 4th rate. 

No timber 

Across Rancho San Blas, 35.58 chs. ofblank line. 

Mountainous land, 12.96 chs. 

August 5: At 4h 35" p. m., 1. m. t., I set off 45" 

49' on the lat. arc; 16" 45" N., on the decl. arc; and 

determine a true meridian with the solar, at the corner 

ofsecs. 11,12,13, and 14. 

Thence I run 

N. 0" 1' W., bet. secs. 11 and 12. 

Ascend over rough stony ground sloping W. 

Topofascent,bearsaboutN.5O0W.,andS. 50"E. 

Thence over level land. 

Chains. 

40.00 

44.32 

59.50 

80.00 

40.00 

80.04 

7.00 

9.00 

11.50 

13.60 

16.50 

18.07 

40.02 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for closingcor. offracl. 

secs. 11 and 12, marked 

S. B. on E., 

C.C.T.15N.,R.20E.onS.,and 

S. 11 on W. faces; dig pits, crosswise on each 

line, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., N. 19%" W., 3 ft., 

and 24 x 18 x 12 ins., S. ofstone, 7 ft. dist.; 

and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. 

high, S. ofcor. 

Thence, across the rancho on a blank line. 

The point for '/4 sec. cor. falls in the rancho. 

[ntersect N. bdy. of Rancho San Blas at a point from which 

the N. W. cor. ofthe rancho bears S. 73" W., 2.58 chs. 

dist. 

Set ajuniper post 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with a quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of 

fracl. secs. 11 and 12, marked 

C. C.,T. 15N.,R. 20E. onN., 

S. B. on S., and 

S. 11 on W. faces; dig pits, crosswise on each 

line, 30 x 24 x 12 ins., S. 73" W., 3 ft., and 24 

x 18 x 12 ins., N. of stone, 7 ft. dist., and 

raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, 

N. ofcor. 

Leave rancho, enter public land; thence, over rolling 

Branch, 6 lks. wide, course S. E. 

Deposit a marked stone, 12 ins. in the ground, for cor. of 

secs. 1,2,11, and 12, digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., in 

each sec., 4 ft. dist. and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. 

base, 2ft. high, over deposit. In S. E. pit, drive a 

cedar stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in the 

ground, marked 

T.l5N.,S.lonN.E., 

R.20E.,S.12onS.E., 

S. 11 on S. W., and 

S. 2 on N. W. faces; with 5 notches on S. and 1 

ground. 

notch on E. edges. 

Land, mountainous and level. 

Soil stony, clay, and loam; 3rd and 4th rate. 

No timber. 

Across Rancho San Blas, 7.72 chs. ofblank line. 

Mountainous land, 11.00 chs. 

S. 89" 52' E., on arandom line bet. secs. 1 and 12. 

Set temp. 1/4 sec. cor. 

Intersect E. bdy. of Tp.; 7 lks. N. of cor. of secs. 1,6, 

7, and 12 which is ajuniper post, 1 ft. high, 4 ins. 

sq., marked and witnessed as described by the surveyor 

general. 

Thence I run 

N. 89"49' W., on a true line bet. secs. 1 and 12. 

Over rollingland. 

Enteroaktirnber,bearsN.20"E.andS.2OoW. 

Begin ascent ofridge, bears N. 27"E. and S. 27" W. 

Topofridge,50ft. high,bearsN.27"E.andS.27"W. 

Begin descent, bears N. 30" E. and S. 30" W. 

Foot ofdescent, bears N. 33" E. and S. 33" W. 

An oak, 12 ins. diam., on line, I mark with 2 notches on 

Set a cedar post, with charred stake, 24 ins in the 

E. and W. sides. 

ground for Y4 sec. cor., marked ?4 S. on N. face; dig 

pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and W. of post, 3 ft. dist.; 

653 
43.00 

51.50 

59.50 

72.00 

80.04 

andraise amound ofearth, 3% ft. base, 1Yzft. 

high, N. of cor. 

Ravine, 2.00 chs. wide, 18 ft. deep, course S. 20" W 

Ravine, 3.00 chs. wide, 22 ft. deep, course S. 30" W 

Ravine, 3.50 chs. wide, 25 ft. deep, course S. 20"E. 

Leave oak timber, bears N. and S. 

The cor. of secs. 1,2,11 and 12. 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, sandy loam; 3drate. 

Timber, oak. 

-192- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

Chains. 

40.00 

79.77 

30.50 

39.77 

79.77 

40.00 

42.00 

46.00 

50.50 

80.00 

40.00 

48.13 

V.O"l'W.,onarandomlinebet.secs. 1and2. 

Set temp. Y4 sec. cor. 

[ntersect N. bdy. ofTp. at cor. ofsecs. 1,2,35, and 

36, which is a limestone, 6 x 6 x 5 ins., above ground, 

marked and witnessed as described by the surveyor 

general. 

Thence I run 

3.0" 1' E. on a true line bet. secs. 1 and 2. 

Over rolling land. 

Ravine, 3.50 chs. wide, 30ft. deep, course N. 70"E. 

Deposit a marked stone, 12 ins. in the ground, for Y4 

sec. cor.; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins. N. and S. of 

cor., 4 ft. dist.; andraise amound ofearth, 3l/4 ft. 

base, 1Yz ft. high, over deposit. 

In S. pit drive a cedar stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 

ins. in the ground marked Y4 S. on W. face. 

Thecor.ofsecs. 1,2,ll,and12. 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, clay and loam; 3rd and 4th rate. 

No timber. 

Aug. 5, 1893. 

Fromthecor.ofsecs.Z,3,34,and35,onS. bdy.ofthe 

Tp., which is alocust post, 4 ins. sq., 12 ins. high, 

marked and witnessed as described by the surveyor 

general, I run 

N. 0" 2' W., bet. secs., 34 and 35. 

Over local bottom land. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for Y4 sec. cor. marked 

1/4S.,onW.face;digpits,18~18~12ins.,N.and 

S,ofpost,3ft,dist.;andraiseamoundofearth, 

31hft. base, ll/zft. high, W.ofcor. 

Begin ascent of sand hills, bears N. 70 E. and S. 70 W. 

Top of sand ridge, 35 ft. high, bears N. 65" 

E. andS. 65"W., begindescent. 

Foot of descent, bears N. 70" E. and S. 70" W.; thence, 

over sandy plain, gently ascending. 

Set a locust post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. of sec. 26, 

27,34 and 35, marked 

T. 15N.,S.26onN.E., 

R.ZOE.,S.25onS.E., 

S. 34on S. W., and 

S. 27 on N. W. faces; with 1 notch on S. and 2 

notcheson E. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., 

ineachsec., 5yzft.dist., andraise amound 

of earth, 4ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

Land, level. 

Soil, alluvial and sandy; 1st and 4th rate. 

No timber. 

S.89"57'E.,onarandomlinebet. secs.26and35. 

Set temp. Y4 sec. cor. 

To left bank ofYellowstone River, set temp. meander cor. 

To determine the dist. across8', I set a flagon line on 

right bank ofthe river; then measure a base line S. 22" 

66.32 

80.06 

58' E. 15.00 chs. to a point, whence the flag bears N 

41" 47' E. From the flag the S. end of the base bears 

S. 41" 47' W.; therefore the angles taken in order of 

measurement are respectively 66" 59', 64" 48', and 48" 

16'; their sum being 180" 03', or 3' too great. I 

diminish each angle by one-third ofthe excess and 

compute the distance across the river, asfollows: 

sin 64" 47' x base, or 

sin 48" 15' 0.746 

48.13 + 18.19makes 

0.905x15 = 18.19 chs".; also, 

To right bank of river; set temp. meander cor. 

Intersect N. and S. line, 3 lks. S. of cor. of secs. 25, 

N. 89" 58' W., on a true line bet. secs. 26 and 35. 

26,35, and 36; thence I run 

-193- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

Chains. 

13.74 

31.93 

37.50 

40.03 

80.06 

4.50 

40.00 

44.20 

48.50 

57.50 

80.00 

3ver level bottom land, through scattering timber. 

To right bank of Yellowstone River. 

Set alimestone, 19 x 7 x 5 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, 

for meander cor. offracl. secs. 26 and 35, marked M. C. 

on W. face, with 1 groove on S. face; from which 

Asycamore, 19ins.diam., bearsN.49WE.,26 

lks. dist., marked T. 15 N., R. 20 E., S. 26, M. 

C. B. T. 

To left bank of Yellowstone River. 

A sycamore, 13 ins. diam., for meander cor. offracl. 

secs. 26 and 35, I mark 

M. ConE., 

T. 15 N. on W., 

R.ZOE.,S.35onS.,and 

S. 2VonN.sides;digapit,36~36xlZins.,8 

ft. W. oftree, andraiseamoundofearth,4ft. 

base, 2 ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Leave scattering timber, bears N. W. and S. E. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for 1/4 sec. cor. marked 

Y4 S., on N. face; dig pits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and 

W. ofpost, 3 ft. dist ; and raise a mound of earth, 

3Yzft. base, l?hft. high, N. ofcor. 

Thecor. of secs. 26,27,34, and35. 

Land, level. 

Soil, alluvial and sandy; 1st and 3rd rate. 

Timber, sycamore and cottonwood. 

N. 0" 2' W., bet. secs. 26 and 27. 

Over nearly level land. 

Road from Mound City to Lake City, bears N. 65" W. and S. 

60"E. 

Set a locust post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for 1/4 sec. cor. marked 

Y4 S. on W. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., N. and 

S. ofpost, 3 ft. dist.; andraise amoundofearth, 

3%ft.base, l?hft. high, W.ofcor. 

Telegraph line, bears N. 70"E. and S. 70"W. 

Spring branch, 2 lks. wide, course S.E.; flows from a 

springofpure water, 3 ft. diam., 2ft. deep, which 

bears N. 63"W., 4.00 chs. dist. 

60" W. 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 22,523, 

26, and 27, marked 

T.15N.,S.23onN.E., 

R.ZOE.,S.26onS.E., 

S. 27 on S. W., and 

S. 22 on N. W. faces; with 2 notches on S. and E. 

Road from Mound City to Lake City, bears N. 60"E. and S. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked 

82. The triangulation will always be made on the random line when a random line is 

run. See page 61 and Plate 11, fig. 4. 

654 
40.00 

80.01 

40.00% 

53.00 

80.01 

edges;digpits, 18~18~12ins.,ineachsec., 

5?hft.dist.; andraiseamoundofearth,4 

ft. base, 2ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st and 2nd rate. 

No timber. 

S. 89" 58' E., on a random line bet. secs. 23 and 26. 

Set temp. ?4 sec. cor. 

Intersect N. and S. line, 5 lks. N. of cor. of secs. 23, 

24,25, and 26. 

Thence I run 

N. 89" 56' W., on a true line bet. secs. 23 and 26. 

Over level land. 

Deposit a quart ofcharcoal, 12 ins. in the ground, for ?4 

sec. cor.; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., E. and W. of 

cor., 4ft. dist.; andraise a moundofearth, 31/2ft. 

base, 1% ft. high, over deposit. In E. pit drive a 

cedar stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in the 

ground, marked ?4 S., on N. face. 

Road from Mound City to Lake City, bears N. 50" E. and S. 

50 W.;wirefencebearsS,53"E. 

Thecor. ofsecs. 22,23,26, and 27. 

(Pages 194 through 203 deleted. They contain sample field 

notes in the same vein and style.) 

-204- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

Chains. 

34.00 

40.00 

46.00 

47.00 

50.20 

80.00 

40.00 

79.90 

31.40 

39.95 

49.20 

N. O"4' W., bet. secs. 16 and 17. 

Over level land. 

S. E. cor. ofJames Wilkie's field, extends W., 18.00 chs., 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with quart of 

andalongline. 

charcoal, 24 ins. the ground, for ?h sec. cor., marked ?4 

S.,onW.face;digpits18x 18x 12ins.,N.andS.ofpost, 

3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 3% ft. base, 1% 

ft. high, W. ofcor. 

OldMilitaryRoad,bearsN.65"W.andS.65"E. 

Branch, 4 lks. wide, pure water, swift current, course S. 

This branch is the outlet ofthe pond in sec. 16, fed by 

Acequia, 8 lks. wide, course N. 86" W. Thence gradually 

Set a limestone, 21 x 7 x 5 ins., 16 ins. in the ground, for 

40"W. 

numerous fine springs in sec. 9. 

ascending. 

cor. of secs. 8,9,16, and 17, marked with 4 notches on S. 

andE.edges;digpits, 18~18~12ins.,ineachsec.,5% 

ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, 

W. ofcor. 

Land, level and rolling. 

Soil, rich loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

S. 89" 59' E., on arandom line bet. secs. 9 and 16. 

Set temp. ?A sec. cor. 

Intersect N. and S. line 9 lks. N. ofcor. of secs. 9,10,15, and 16. 

Thence I run 

N.89"55'W.,onatruelinebet.secs.9and16. 

Over rolling land. 

Spring branch, 3 lks. wide, course S.; enters pond about 

6.00 chs. S. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked stone, 

24 ins. in the ground, for % sec. cor., marked % s. on N. 

face;digpits, 18x 18~12ins.,E.andW.ofpost,3ft. 

dist.; andraiseamoundofearth,3%ft. base, l%ft. 

high, N. of cor. 

Spring branch, 3 lks. wide, course S.; enterspond about 

8.00chs. S. 

79.90 

38.00 

40.00 

40.60 

66.00 

68.00 

80.00 

The branches crossing this line are fed by numerour large 

Thecor. ofsecs. 8,9,16, and 17. 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, gravelly loam; 2nd rate. 

No timber. 

springs 4.00 to 10.00 chs. N. ofthe line. 

N. 0"4' W., bet. secs. 8 and 9. 

Over rolling land. 

To S. bank of limestone quarry, bears E. and W. To pass the 

quarry, I offset 2.00 chs. E., then, N. 0" 4' W., on the 

offset line. 

offset line to 40.60 chs.; then, W., 2.00 chs., to true line. 

for witness cor. to '/4 sec. cor. marked W. C. Y4 on W. face; 

andraiseamoundofstone,2ft. base, l?hft. high, W. of 

cor. Pits impracticable. 

bears N. 42" E. and S. 42" W. 

The point for '/4 sec. cor. falls in quarry. Continue 

Set a limestone, 15 x 9 x 5 ins., 10 ins., in the ground, 

Middle of single track of the Montana and Manitoba Railroad, 

Telegraph line, bears N. 42"E. and 42" W. 

Set a limestone, 17 x 9 x 5 ins., 12 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of secs. 4,5,8, and 9, marked with 5 notches on S. and 

4notchesonE.edges;digpits, 18x 18x 12ins., ineach 

sec., 5% ft. dist.; and raise a mound ofearth, 4 ft. base, 

2ft. high, W.ofcor. 

59?h0w. 

and4thrate. 

From this cor. the US. mineral monument in sec. 5 bears N. 

Soil, thin and gravelly, with many limestone outcrops; 3rd 

No timber. 

August 14: at 4h 30" p.m. 1. m. t., I set off 45" 49 

on the lat. arc; 14" 6' N. on the decl. arc; and determine 

a true meridian with the solar, at the cor. of secs. 

4,5,8 and 9. 

Thence I run 

S.89"55'E.,onarandomlinebet.secs.4and9. 

-205- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E. - Continued. 

Chains. 

40.00 

79.94 

20.00 

39.50 

39.97 

68.50 

70.20 

79.94 

40.00 

79.96 

Set temp. ?A sec. cor. 

Intersect N. and S. line, 5 lks. S. of cor. of secs. 3,4, 

9, and 10. 

Thence I run 

N.89"57'W.,onatruelinebet.secs.4and9. 

Descend through heavy pine timber. 

Foot of spur, 300 ft. below sec. cor.; leave heavy pine 

Wood road, bears N. 20" E. and 20" W. 

Set a limestone, 18 x 18 x 6 ins., 12 ins. in the ground, 

timber, bears N. and S. 

for ?A sec. cor., marked ?A on N. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 

12ins.,E.andW.ofstone,3ft.dist.;andraiseamoundof 

earth, 3% ft. base, 1% ft. high, N. of cor. 

Middle of single track of the Montana and Manitoba Railroad 

bears N. 38" E. and S. 38" W. 

Telegraph line bears N. 38"E. and S. 38" W. 

The cor. of secs. 4,5,8, and 9. 

Land, mountainous. 

Soil, thin and gravelly; 3rd and 4th rate. 

Timber, Pine. 

Mountainous or heavily timbered land, 20.00 chs. 

~ ~~ 

N. 0" 4' W., on a random line bet. secs. 4 and 5. 

Set temp '/4 sec. cor. 

Intersect N. bdy. of the Tp. 2 lks. W. of cor. of secs. 4, 

Thence I run 

S. 0" 3' E., on a true line bet. secs. 4 and 5. 

5,32, and 33. 

655 
4.00 

10.00 

16.00 

27.00 

32.00 

37.00 

39.96 

50.00 

55.00 

62.00 

74.00 

79.96 

6.50 

Over ridges and ravines; ascend. 

Top of spur, bears E. and W.; descend. 

Ravine 20 ft. deep, course E., ascend. 

Top of spur, 40 ft. above ravine, bears S. 70" E. and N. 

Ravine, 30 ft. deep, course S. 80"E.; ascend. 

Top of spur, bears S. 85"E. and N. 85" W.; descend. 

Ravine, 25 ft. deep, course S. 65" E.; ascend. 

Set alimestone, 15 x 6 x 6 ins. 10 ins. in the ground, for 

70" W.; descend. 

% sec. cor., marked ?4 on W. face; and rasie a mound of 

stone, 2ft. base, l?hft. high, W. ofcor. Pits 

impracticable. 

southeasterly; ascend. 

cor., bears E. and W.; descend. 

This cor. stands on the N. E. slope of a spur descending 

Top of spur, bears E. and W., about 35 ft. above ?4 sec. 

Ravine, 20 ft. deep, course N. 55" E., ascend. 

Top oflow spur, bears E. and W.; descend. 

Footofslope,bearsN.40"E. andS.65"W. 

The cor. of secs. 4,5,8, and 9. 

Land, mountainous. 

Soil, rocky; 4thrate. 

No timber. 

Mountainous land, 74.00 chs. 

August 14, 1893. 

August 15:At7h35"a.m.,1.m.t.,Isetoff45045' 

on the lat. arc; 13" 54' N., on the decl. arc; and determine 

true meridian with the solar, at the cor: of sec. 5,6,31, 

and 32; which is a limestone, 5 x 8 x 6 ins., above ground; 

marked and witnessed as described by the surveyor general. 

Thence I run 

N. 0" 5'W., bet. secs. 31 and 32. 

Over level land. 

Trail, bears E. and W. 

The S. W. cor. of James Parker's Desert Land Claim, which is 

an oak post, 2 ft. high, 6 ins. sq., marked J. p. D. L. C. 3, 

bears N. 491/2" W. 

post, 3 ft. high, 6 ins. diam., marked J. P. D. L. C. 4, bears 

N. 66" E. 

The S. E. cor. of the same claim, which is a round pine 

-206- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E. - Continued. 

Chains. 

40.00 

80.00 

40.00 

79.97 

Set a locust post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for ?4 sec. cor., marked % S. 

onW.face;digpits, 18~18~12ins.,N. andS.ofpost,3 

ft.dist.;andraiseamoundofearth, 3%ft. base, 1% 

ft. high, W. of cor. 

Set a limestone, 20 x 7 x 5 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of secs. 29,30,31, and 32, marked with 1 notch on S. and 

5notchesonE.edges;digpits, 18~18~12ins.,ineach 

sec., 5%ft. dist.;andraiseamoundofearth,4ft. base, 

2ft. high, W. ofcor. 

From this cor. the above described S. W. cor. ofJames 

Parker's Desert Land Claim bears S. 29W W. 

The N. W. cor., which is a post 3 ft. long, 5 ins. sq., 

marked J. P. D. L. C. 2, bears N. 42"W. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sand; 4thrate. 

No timber. 

S. 89"57' E., on arandomlinebet. secs. 29 and32. 

Set temp. 9'4 sec. cor. 

Intersect N. and S. line 7 lks. N. of cor. of secs. 28,29, 

32 and 33. 

Thence I run 

N. 89" 54' W., on a true line bet. secs. 29 and 32. 

.Over level land. 

14.50 

16.50 

28.50 

39.981/2 

79.97 

40.00 

78.35 

38.35 

78.35 

3egin ascent, bears N. and S. 

rop of ascent and edge of sandy plain, bears N. and S. 

\fine spring ofgoodwater, 3 ft. diam:, 1 ft. deep, bears 

rhe N. E. cor. ofJames Parker's Desert Land Claim, a mound 

jet a sandstone, 18 x 6 x 5 ins., 12 ins. in the ground, 

S., 2.5Ochs. dist. 

of stone, without marks, beras N. 2%" E. 

for ?h sec. cor., marked % on N. face; digpits, 18 x 18 x 

12ins.,E.andW.ofstone,3ft.dist.;andraiseamoundof 

earth,3?hbase, l?hft. high,N.ofcor. 

James Parker's Desert Land Claim bears S. 14% E. 

From this '/4 sec. cor. the above described S. E. cor. of 

rhe cor. of secs. 29,30,31, and 32. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sand; 4th rate. 

No timber. 

rhe cor. ofsecs. 25,30,31, and 36, on the W. bdy. ofthe 

N. 89"57'W., onarandomlinebet. secs. 30 and31. 

set temp. ?4 sec. cor. 

[ntersect the W. bdy. of the Tp. at the cor. of secs. 25, 

Tp. being plainly visible, I run for said cor. 

30,31, and 32, which is a mound of earth, with snake and pit, 

marked and witnessed as described by the surveyor general. 

Thence I run 

S.89"57'E.,onatruelinebet.secs.30and31. 

Over level land. 

Set ajuniper post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with charred 

stake, 24 ins. in the ground for % sec. cor., marked 1/4 S., 

onN.face;digpits, 18~18~12ins.,E.andW.ofpost,3 

ft. dist.; andraise amoundofearth, 3%ft. base, 1% 

ft. high, N. of cor. 

From this % sec. cor., the N. W. cor. of James Parker's 

Desert Land Claim bears N. 23" E. 

The cor. ofsecs. 29,30,31, and 32. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sand; 4th rate. 

No timber. 

August 15: At this corner, I set off 13" 50' N., on the 

decl. arc; and at Oh 4" p.m., 1. m. t., observe the sun 

on the meridian; the resultinglat. is 45'46'. 

-207- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E. - Continued. 

Chains. 

40.00 

56.00 

59.00 

76.50 

80.00 

40.00 

79.93 

16.50 

N. 0" 5'W., bet. secs. 29 and 30. 

Over level land. 

Deposit a marked stone, 12 ins. in the ground, for % sec. 

cor.;digpits, 18~18~12ins.;N.andS.ofcor.,4ft 

dist; and raise a mound of earth, 3% ft. base 1% ft. 

high, over deposit. In S. pit drive a cedar stake, 2 ft. 

long, 2 ins. sq., marked ?4 S., on ?A. face. 

From this ?h sec. cor. the N. E. cor. of James Parker's 

Desert Land Claim bears S. 80" E. 

Telegraph line, bears E. and W. 

Road leading to Lake City and Mound City, bears E. and W. 

Begin descent over rocky ground, bears E. and W. 

Set a sandstone, 15 x 8 x 6 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of secs. 19,20,29, and 30, marked with 2 notches on S. 

and 5 notches on E. edges; and raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. 

base, 1% ft. high, W. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

below level of the plain. 

This cor. stands on stony ground sloping N., about 25 ft. 

S. 89" 54' E., on a random line bet. secs. 20 and 29. 

Set temp. '/4 sec. cor. 

Intersect N. and S. line at cor. of secs. 20,21,28, and 29. 

Thence I run 

N. 89" 54' W., on a true line bet. secs. 20 and 29. 

Over level land. 

Telegraph line, bears N. and S. 

656 
21.00 

39.96% 

63.00 

66.00 

79.93 

40.00 

78.21 

38.21 

72.21 

78.21 

2.00 

Road leading to Lake City, bears N. and S. 

Set a cedar post, 3 feet long, 3 ins. sq., with quart of 

charcoal, 24 ins. in the ground, for ?h sec. cor. marked ?4 

S.,onN.face;digpits, 18~18~12ins.,E.andW.ofpost 

3 ft. dist. and raise a mound of earth, 31/2 ft. base, l?h 

ft. high, N. ofcor. 

Begin descent from plain, bears N. and S. 

Foot of descent, 35 ft. below plain, bears N. and S.; thence 

The cor. of secs. 19,20,29 and 30. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sand and stony; 4th rate. 

No timber. 

over broken ground to 

N.89"57'W.,onarandomlinebet. secs. 19and30. 

Over rough stony ground. 

Set Temp. ?4 sec. cor. 

Intersect W. bdy. of the Tp. 3 lks. N. of the cor. of secs. 

19,24,25, and30, whichisajuniperpost, 18ins. above 

ground, 4 ins. sq., marked and witnessed as described by the 

surveyor general. 

Thence I run 

S 89" 58' E., on a true line bet. secs 19 and 30. 

Over level land. 

Set a maple post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with charred 

stake, 24 ins. in the ground, for Y4 sec. cor. marked ?4 S., 

onN.face;digpits, 18x 18~12ins.,E. andW.ofpost,3 

ft. dist.; andraise amound ofearth, 3?hft. base, 1% 

ft. high, N. ofcor. 

Begin ascent, over stony ground. 

The cor. of secs. 19,20,29, and30. 

Land, level. 

Soil, sandy loam; 3rd and 4thrate. 

No timber. 

N. 0" 5' W., bet. secs. 19 and 20. 

Descend over stony ground. 

Foot ofdescent, 10 ft. below sec. cor., and 35 ft. below 

the sandy plain, bears E. and W. Thence gradual descent 

toward Lin's Lake. 

16.40 

20.50 

30.00 

36.50 

40.00 

43.20 

39.20 

40.00 

described on page 203; thence I run 

N. 89" 57' W., on a true lines3, bet. secs. 17 and 20. 

Over gently rolling land, descending toward Lin's Lake. 

Telegraph Line, bears N. and S. 

Road to Lake City, bears N. and S. 

Irrigatingditch, 8 lks. wide, course S. 60" W. Enter field 

cultivated by irrigation; extends N., 5.00 chs., and S. about 

10.00 chs. 

Leave field, enter scattering timber, bears N. 65"E. and S. 

5" W. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., 24 ins. inthe ground, 

for ?h sec. cor., marked ?4 S., on N. face; from which 

A sycamore, 22 ins. diam., bears N. 22" W., 19 lks. 

An ash, 13 ins. diam., bears S. 7O%"w., 28 lks. 

dist., marked ?4 S., B. T. 

dist., marked ?4 S., B. T. 

To bank of Lin's Lake. 

A sycamore, 18 ins. diam., for meander cor. offracl. secs. 17 

and 20, I mark 

M.C. on W., 

T.15N.onE., 

R.20E.,S. 17onN.,and 

S. 20 on S. sides; from which 

An ash, 10 ins. diam., bears N. 403Q E., 20 lks. dist., 

markedT. 15N.,R.20E.,S. 17,M.C.B.T. 

A maple, 9 ins. diam., bears S. 49?h"E., 23 lks. 

dist., marked T. 15 N., R. 20 E., S. 20, M.C. B. T. 

Land, gently rolling. 

Soil, rich loam; 1st rate. 

Timber, ash, maple, and sycamore. 

~~~~~~~~~ ~~ ~ 

From the cor. of secs. 8,9,16, and 17, described on page 204, 

N. 89"57' W., on a true lines3, bet. secs. 8 and 17. 

Over rolling land. 

Telegraph line, bears N. 28" W. and S. 28" E. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with charred stake, 

24 ins. in the ground, for ?4 sec. cor., marked ?4 S., on N. 

face; digpits, 18 x 18x 12 ins., E. and W. ofpost, 3 ft. 

dist.; andraiseamoundofearth,3%ft. base, l%ft. 

high, N. ofcor. 

I run 

-208- 

-209- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E. - Continued. 

Chains. 

32.50 

40.00 

44.50 

Enter scattering timber, bears E. and W. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the 

ground, for YI sec. cor. marked ?4 S., on W. face; from which 

A maple, 22 ins. diam., bears N. 22" W., 19 lks. 

An ash, 13 ins. diam., bears N. 701/2"E., 28 lks. 

dist., marked ?4 S., B. T. 

dist., marked ?4 S., B. T. 

To bank of Lin's Lake. 

Set a cedar post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for meander cor. offracl. secs. 19 and 20, marked 

M.C. onN., 

T. 15 N. on S., 

R. 20 E., 20 on E., and 

S. 19 on W. faces; from which 

A maple, 8 ins. diam., bears S. 22%" E., 21 lks. 

An ash, 12 ins. diam., bears S. 56%" W., 27 lks. 

dist., marked T. 15 N., R. 20 E., S. 20, M.C. B. T. 

dist., marked T. 15 N., R. 20 E., S. 19, M. C. B. T. 

Land, gently rolling. 

Soil, mostly rich loam; 1st rate. 

Timber, maple, ash and oak. 

August 15,1893. 

August 16:At7h4".a.m.,1.m.t.,Isetoff45"48'on 

the lat. arc; 13" 36' N., on the decl. arc; and determine a 

true meridian at the cor. of secs. 16,17,20 and 21, 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

Chains. 

55.00 

60.00 

61.00 

63.50 

80.00 

0.50 

Old Military Road, bears N. W. and S. E. The road 

branches about 2.00 chs. S. E. 

Enter road, leading to Lake City, bears W.; thence, along 

middle of road. 

Middle of single track of the Montana and Manitoba 

Railroad, bears N. 60" E. and S. 60" W. 

Telegraph line, bears N. 60" E. and S. 60" W. 

The point for sec. cor. falls in the road; therefore 

Deposit a marked stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for cor. of 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, sandy loam; 3rd rate. 

No timber. 

From thecor. for secs. 7,8,17 and 18, which falls in 

S. 0" 5' E., bet. secs. 17 and 18. 

Over rolling land; descending towards Lin's Lake. 

Set a lime~tone,'~ 15 x 8 x 7 ins., 10 ins. in the 

secs. 7,8,17 and 18. 

road, I run 

ground, for witness cor. to cor. ofsecs. 7,8,17 and 

18,markedW. C.,onN.E.face;with4notchesonS. 

83. See paragraph 8, page 55 

84. A Witness Corner to a section corner will always have the letters "W. C." conspicuously displayed on the northeast face. 

657 
4.00 

5.20 

20.19 

40.00 

77.90 

17.90 

18.20 

23.70 

27.00 

29.20 

35.00 

Chains. 

39.98 

and5notchesonE,edges;digpits, 18x 18x 12ins., 

N.E.,S.E.,S.W.,andN.W.ofcor.,5Yzft.dist.; 

andraiseamoundofearth, 4ft. base,2ft. high, W. 

ofcor. 

Telegraph line, bears N. 84" E. and S. 84" W. 

Middle of the single track of the Montana and Manitoba 

To bank of Lin's Lake. 

Set a limestone, 15 x 9 x6 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, 

Railroad, bears N. 84" and S. 84" W. 

for meander cor. offracl. secs. 17 and 18, marked M. C. 

on S. face, with 5 grooves on E. face; and raise a mound 

ofstone,2ft,base, l%ft.high,N. ofcor.Pits 

impracticable. 

Limestone outcrops near the lake. 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, rocky; 4thrate. 

No timber. 

August 16: At this meander cor. I set off 13" 31' N. on 

the decl. arc; and at Oh 4"p. m., 1. m. t., observe 

the sun on the meridian; the resultinglat. is 45" 48'. 

Set alimestone, 14 x 8x 6 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, 

for '/4 sec. cor. marked '/4 on N. face; dig pits, 18 x 

18x 12ins.,E.andW.ofstone,3ft.dist.;andraise 

amoundofearth,3?hft. base, l%ft. high,N. of 

cor. 

5 bears N. 37" 30' E. 

From this Y4 sec. cor. the U. S. mineral monument in sec. 

From the cor. ofsecs. 7,8,17 and 18, established this 

N.89"57'W.,onarandomlinebet.secs.7and18. 

Set temp. ?4 sec. cor. 

Intersect W. bdy.oftheTp.,3lks.S.ofthecor.of 

day, I run 

secs. 7,12,13, and 18, which is a limestone, 6x 8 x6 

ins. above ground, marked and witnessed as described by 

the surveyor general. 

Thence I run 

S. 89" 56' E., on a true line bet. secs. 7 and 18. 

Over gently rolling ground. 

Intersect the W. bdy. ofLake City. 

The N. W. cor., which is an oak post, 2 ft. above ground, 

12 ins. sq., marked N. W. cor. L. C., bears N. 0" 5' W., 

40.00 chs. dist. The S. W. cor., which is a limestone, 

8 x 6 x 6 ins., above ground, marked S. W. cor. L. C., 

bears S. 0" 5' E., 29.50 chs. dist. 

Methodist church bears S. 33" E. 

Middle ofWest street, 40 ft wide, bears N. 0" 5' W. and 

Thence along middle of Fourth street, 60 ft. wide. 

Middle ofcedar street, 60 ft. wide, bears N. 0" 5' W. and 

Baptist church bears N., 3.00 chs. dist. 

Middle ofPine street, 60 ft. wide, bears N. 0" 5' W. and 

Middle of Main street, 100 ft. wide, bears N. 0" 5' W. and 

S. 0" 5' E. 

S.0"5'E. 

S. 0" 5' E. Methodist church bears S. 43" W. 

S.0"5'E.CourthousebearsN.4"W.,22.00chs. 

dist. Wharfbears S. o"5' E. 16.50 chs dist. 

Catholic church bears N. 39" E. 

-210- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

~ 

Chains. 

37.90 

40.80 

46.30 

51.80 

Deposit alimestone, 12 x 8 x 6 ins., 24 ins. in the 

ground, for l/4 sec. cor., marked x Y4; from which 

A granite stone, 16 x 8 x 7 ins., set 11 ins. in 

the ground, marked W. C. Y4, on N. face, bears 

N., 45 lks. dist. 

the ground, marked W. C. Y4, on N. face, bears 

S., 45 lks. dist. Pits impracticable. 

Agranite stone 20 x 9 x 6 ins., set 15 ins. in 

No natural bearing objects available. 

Middle of Elm street, 60ft. wide, bears N. 0" 5' W. and 

Middle ofwalnut street, 60 ft. wide, bears N. 0" 5' W., 

S. 0" 5' E. 

and S. 0" 5' E. Railroad station bears S. 14 E., 

6.00 chs. dist. . Middle ofEast street, 40 ft. wide, bears N. 0" 5' W. and 

52.10 

77.90 

0.50 

28.00 

32.00 

40.00 

67.50 

75.50 

80.00 

40.00 

79.96 

12.00 

25.00 

35.00 

S.O05'E. CatholicchurchbearsN. 21"W. 

[ntersect E. bdy. of Lake City. The N. E. cor., which is 

a limestone, 14 x 9 x 7 ins. above ground, marked N. E. 

cor. L. C., bears N. 0" 5' W., 40.00 chs. dist. The S. 

W. cor., which is a limestone, 9 x 6 x 6 ins. above 

ground, S. W. cor. L. C., bears S. 0" 5' E., 7.53 chs. 

dist. 

Thence along the middle of the Mound City road. 

The cor. of secs. 7,8,17, and 18. 

Land, gently rolling. 

Soil, sandy loam; 1st rate. 

No timber. 

August 16,1893. 

August 17: At 7h 4" a. m., 1. m. t., I set off45" 

49' on the lat arc; 13" 17' N., on the decl. arc; and 

determine a true meridian with the solar, at the point 

for cor. ofsecs. 7,8,17 and 18, which falls in the 

road, and is described on page 209. 

Thence I run 

N.O05'W.,bet.secs.7and8. 

Over rolling land. 

Set alimestones5 15 x 8 x 7 ins., 10 ins. in the 

ground, for witness cor. to cor. of secs. 7,8,17 and 

18,markedW. C.,onN,E,face;with4notchesonS. 

and 5 notches on E. edges; digpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., 

N.E.,S.E.,S.W.,andN.W.ofcor.,5Yzft.dist.; 

and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. 

ofcor. 

RoadtoLakeCity,bearsN.75"W.andS. 75"E. 

Old Military Road, bears N. 35" W. and S. 35" E. 

Set a juniper post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked 

stone, 24 ins. in the ground, for 1/4 sec. cor. marked 

%S.,onW.face;digpits, 18~18~12ins.N.and 

S. ofpost, 3t. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 

3%ft. base, IYzft. high, W. ofcor. 

S. E. cor. of cemetery bears W., 5.00 chs. dist. 

N. E. cor. ofcemetery bears W., 5.00 chs. dist. 

Set a limestone, 20 x 8 x 4 ins., 15 ins. in the ground, 

for cor. of secs. 5,6,7, and 8, marked with 5 notches 

on S. and E. edges; dugpits, 18 x 18 x 12 ins., in each 

sec.,5%ft,dist.,andraiseamoundofearth,4ft. 

base, 2 ft. high, W. ofcor. 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, gravelly loam; 2nd and 3rd rate. 

No timber. 

S. 89" 57' E., on arandomline bet. secs. 5 and 8. 

Set temp. ?4 sec. cor. 

Intersect N. and S. line 3 lks. S. ofthe cor. ofsecs. 4, 

5,s and 9. 

Thence I run 

N. 89" 58' W., on a true line bet. secs. 5 and 8. 

Over rolling land. 

Begin ascent bears N. E. and S. W. 

Top ofspur, bears N. and S.; descend. 

Foot ofdescent, bears N. 35" W. and S. 35"E. 

-211- 

85. See page 48 and footnote. 

658 
64.00 

79.96 

40.00 

77.87 

37.87 

51.00 

57.50 

72.00 

71.87 

40.00 

80.05 

40.05 

80.05 

Road, bears N. and S. 

Thecor.ofsecs.5,6,7,and8. 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, gravelly loam; 2nd and 3rdrate. 

No timber. 

5.27 

N. 89"56'W., onarandomline bet. secs. 6and7. 

Set temp. '/4 sec. cor. 

Intersect W. bdy.oftheTp.9lks.S.ofthecor.of 

secs. 1,6,7, and 12, which is alimestone, 6 x 8 x 6 

ins. above ground, marked and witnessed as described by 

the surveyor general. 

Thence I run 

S. 89" 52' E., on a true line bet. secs. 6 and 7. 

Over rolling land. 

Set a limestone, 15 x 8 x 6 ins., 10 ins. in the ground, 

for ?4 sec. cor., marked 

18~18~12ins.,E.andW.ofstone,3ft.dist.;and 

raiseamoundofearth,3?hft. base, l?hft.high, 

N. ofcor. 

on the N. face; digpits, 

OldMilitaryroad, bears N. 30"E. and S. 30"W. 

The N. W. cor. of cemetery, bears S., 5.00 chs. dist. 

The N. E. cor. of cemetery, bears S., 5.00 chs. dist. 

Thecor.ofsecs.5,6,7,and8. 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, gravelly loam; 2nd rate. 

No timber. 

9.38 

N.O05'W.,onarandomlinebet.secs. 5and6. 

Set temp. ?4 sec. cor. 

Intersect N. bdy. oftheTp. 3 lks. E. ofthecor. of 

secs. 5,6,31 and 32, which is a limestone marked and 

witnessed as described by the surveyor-general. 

Thence I run 

S. 0" 6' E., on a true line bet. secs. 5 and 6. 

Over rolling ground. 

Set a limestone, 18 x 8 x 5 ins., 12 ins. in the ground, 

for ?4 sec. cor., marked '/4 on W. face; digpits, 18 x 

18 x 12 ins., N. and S. ofthe stone, 3 ft. dist.; and 

raise a mond ofearth, 3% ft. base, 1% ft. high, 

W. ofcor. 

The cor. of secs. 5,6,7, and 8. 

Land, rolling. 

Soil, gravelly loam; 2nd rate. 

No timber. 

11 a. m., August 17, 1893. 

In order to locate Ivy Island, I proceed as follows: 

I begin at the meander cor. offracl. secs. 17 and 20, at Oh 45"'p. 

m., which being too nearnoon to secure accurate results with 

the solar, I take a back sight on the cor. ofsecs. 16,17,20 and 

21, prolong the direction, N. 89"57' W., bet. secs. 17 and 20, 

and set a flag on line, on the S. E. side of the island. To 

determine the distance to the flag, I layoff a base line, S. 30" 

32' W., 36.00 chs., to a point, at which the angle bet. flag and 

meander cor. measures 68" 01'; from the flag, the base line 

subtends an angle of 52" 31'. The sum of the three angles is 

180" 03'; therefore the corrected angles, taken in the order of 

their measurement, are, respectively, 59" 30', 68" 00', and 52" 

30'; and the distance is 

Sin. 68" X 36 or 0.9272 X 36 = 42,07~.,~,86 

sin. 52" 30' 0.7934 

-212- 

Subdivision of T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

Chains. 

36.80 The point for cor. ofsecs. 17,18,19, and 20 falls in 

thelake; thenceN. 89"57'W. bet. secs. Nand 19. 

86. For other methods of computing the distance, see page 136. 

22.50 

Inplaceoftheflag,I 

Set alimestone, 15 x 8 x6 ins., 10 in. in the ground, 

for meander cor. offracl. secs. 18 and 19, marked M. C. 

onE.face, with3groovesonS.face;digapit,36~ 

36x 12ins.,8ft. W.ofstone,andraiseamoundof 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

Thence I run 

N. 89"57' W., on a true line bet. secs. 18 and 19. 

Over level land. 

Intersect W. shore of island. 

Setalimestone, 18x8x5ins., 12ins,intheground, 

formeandercor. offracl. secs. 18 and 19, markedM. C. 

on W. face; digapit, 36 x36x 12 ins., 8 ft. E. of 

stone, and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. 

high, E. ofcor. 

August 17, 1893. 

To locate a small island called Diamond Rock, in Link 

Lake, sec. 19, I proceed as follows: 

From the meander cor. ofsecs. 19 and 24, on the W. bdy. 

of the township, I set a flag on the south point of the 

island, which bears N. 71"30' E.; then measure a base 

S.48"01fE.,23.14chs., toapoint,fromwhich the 

flag bears N. 8 E.; which gives for the distance to flag 

Sin. 60" 29' X 23.14 or 0.87 X 23.14 = 22,50chs,,the 

sin. 63" 30' 0.89 49 required 

distance. 

In place ofthe flag, I 

Setalimestone, 15x8x6ins., l2ins. in theground, 

for an auxiliarya7 meander cor. in sec. 19, marked A. 

M. C., on S. face; dig a pit, 36 x 36 x 12 ins., 8 ft. 

N. of stone, and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 

ft. high,N. ofcor. 

August 17, 1893. 

Meanders, T. 15 N., R. 20 E. 

Meanders of the right bank of Yellowstone Riuer, up stream. 

I commence at the meander cor. offracl. secs. 25 and 30, 

on the E. bdy. of the Tp., which is a sandstone, 6 x 9 x 

7 ins. above ground, marked and witnessed as described 

by the surveyor general. 

Atthiscor.,August8,Isetoff45"46'onthelat. arc; 

16" 1' N., on the decl. arc; and at 7h 35" a. m., 1. 

m. t., determine a true meridian with the solar. 

Thence I run with meanders in sec. 25. 

Through heavy timber. 

S. 85" W. 13.00 chs. Bank 20 ft. high. 

S. 72" W. 7.10 " Bank 9 ft. high 

S. 64%" W. 13.00 " 

S. 40" W. 5.40 " Low bank 5 ft. high. Head ofcourse, 

leave heavy timber, 

enter dense willow and 

cottonwood undergrowth, bears S. 

Creek, 14 Iks. wide, course N. 

leave dense undergrowth, enter 

heavy timber, bears S. 

S. 80" W. 12.00 " At end of course, lower end of 

sand bar, bears N., 2.00 chs. 

dist. 

leave heavy, enter scattering 

timber, bears S. To the 

meander cor. offracl. secs. 

25 and 26. 

S.77Y4"W. 7.00 " At3.20chs.,mouthofCherry 

N. 76" W. 7.50 " Bank 7 ft. high. At 2.00 chs., 

S.81"W. 19.39 " Bank4ft. high.At5.00chs. 

87. See pages 44 and 58. 

659 
-213- 

Meanders, T. 15 N., R. 20 E.-Continued. 

Meanders of the right bank of Yellowstone River, 

up stream-Continued. 

Land, river bottom. 

Soil, alluvial; lstrate. 

Timber, cottonwood, sycamore, ash, and walnut, 

Heavily timbered land or land covered with dense 

undergrowth, 70.00 chs. 

Thence in sec. 26. 

Through scattering timber. 

S. 81" W. 8.70 chs. Bank 8 ft. high. 

S. 7O3/4"W. 4.90 " At 2.30 chs., upper end ofbar, 

bears N. about 2.00 chs. dist. 

S.443/40W. 3.60 " 

S.21"W. 3.50 " 

S. 5%"W. 4.20 " 

South. 4.30 " 

S. 91/4"E. 3.80 'I 

S. 343/4"E. 5.27 " Tomeandercor. offracl. secs. 

Land, level. 

Soil, alluvial; 1st rate. 

Timber, scattering ash, hickory, walnut, and cottonwood. 

26 and 35. 

Thence in sec. 35. 

August 8: At the meander cor. offracl. secs. 26 and 35, 

I set off 15"57' N., on the decl. arc; and, at Oh 

5"p. m., 1. m. t., observe the sun on the meridian; 

the resulting lat. is 45" 46'. 

Through scattering timber. 

S. 28" E., 8.80 chs. Bank 8 ft. high. 

S. O3/4"E., 7.70 " At 4.30 chs., leave scattering 

timber, enter dense 

cottonwood and willow 

undergrowth, bears N. 60" E. 

S. 6?h" W. 10.00 " Low bank 4ft. high. At end of 

course, road to Mound City, 

bears S. 70" E. Ferry, and 

road to Lake City, bears 

N.- W. 

undergrowth, bears N. 65" E.; 

enter Pat Curran's field, 

bears E. At end of course, 

house bears S. 62"E., 5.00 

chs. dist. 

S. 38" W. 5.50 " Bank 13 ft. high. At 5.10 

chs., leave Pat Curran's 

field, fence bears E. At 

5.30 chs. middle ofroad, 

bears E. 

Alexander's field, bears E., 

0.50 chs. dist. 

S. 31" W. 12.00 " At 5.50 chs. leave dense 

S.43?h0W. 7.70 " At1.50chs.,N.W.cor.of 

s.471/2"w. 6.50 " 

S.37"W. 2.00 " 

S.58"W. 2.10 " 

S. 4z1/4"w. 5.40 " At3.30 chs., wire fence, bears 

S.47"W. 4.80 " 

S.5O"W. 4.90 " 

S.57"W. 9.50 " 

S. 48%" W. 16.68 " To meander cor. offracl. secs. 

2 and 35, on S. bdy. ofthe Tp., which is a limestone 5 

x 8 x 6 ins. above ground, marked and witnessed as 

described by the surveyor general. 

S. E. 

Land, nearly level. 

Soil, alluvial; 1st rate. North of Curran's field subject 

to inundation, 2 to 5 ft. deep. 

Timber, scattering ash, walnut, and cottonwood. 

Dense undergrowth, 18.90 chs. 

August 8, 1893. 

(Pages 214 through 220 deleted. They contain the remainder 

of the meanders in the township, general description and final 

oaths.) 

PRIVATE LAND CLAIM SURVEYS. 

1. Before ordering any survey of a private land claim the 

surveyor general will receive full instructions from this 

office, by which he will be governed in issuing his instructions to the deputy. The instructions to the deputy must be 

entered in full at the commencement of the field notes of such 

survey. 

2. The instruments used in the survey of private land 

claims must be the same as those required for the survey of 

public lands, and must be registered and tested in like manner at the surveyor general's office previous to the deputy's 

commencing work; and the instructions for the survey of 

public lands must, as far as applicable, be strictly observed in 

the survey of private land claims. 

3. The true magnetic variation must be noted at the beginning point of each survey, and wherever the variation of the 

needle is observed to change along the line the same must be 

noted and the reasons therefor stated, if known. 

4. At the end of each mile along a boundary, the character 

of the soil and amount of timber, grass, etc., will be stated; 

and the date of each day's work in the field must be noted at 

the end of the record thereof. 

5. The requirements in the "Summary of objects and data 

required to be noted,'' as set forth in the instructions for the 

survey of public lands, must be observed by the deputy in the 

survey of private land claims. Where practicable, bearings 

must be taken from at least two points on the line to all 

prominent or otherwise notable objects in the vicinity, and 

where only one bearing can be taken the estimated distance 

must be noted. 

6. At the beginning point upon the boundaries of each 

grant survey, a corner must be established of the same character, size, and materials as prescribed for township corners 

upon the lines of the survey of public lands, except that only 

two pits will be dug, one on each side of the corner, on the line. 

Upon the side of such corner facing the claim, the initial 

letters of the name of the grant, and immediately under the 

same the letters "Beg. Cor. 1" (for beginning corner one) must 

be neatly cut or chiseled. 

7. Each of the mile corners or stations of survey must be 

established in the manner prescribed for the establishment of 

section corners upon the lines of public surveys, except that 

they will be marked on the side facing the grant with the 

initials of the grant and the number of the station or mile, as 

the case may be; and only two pits will be dug, one on each 

side of the corner, on the line. 

8. Where mile corners are established, except upon meandered portions of the line, half-mile corners will also be estab660 
lished in the manner prescribed for the establishment of 

quarter-section corners upon the lines of public surveys, except that they will be marked upon the side facing the grant 

with the initials of the grant. 

-221- 

-222- 

9. Such other marks, in addition to those above described, 

will be placed upon the corners as may be required by the 

surveyor general in his special written instructions. 

10. As far as practicable, bearings and distances must be 

taken from each of the corners or stations to two or more 

trees, or prominent natural objects, if any, within a convenient distance, in the same manner as required in the instructions for the survey of public lands, and such trees or objects 

must be marked with the initials of the grant, and underneath same the letters “B. T.” or “B. O.,” as the case may be. 

11. Witness corners will be established, where necessary, 

in the same manner as required in the instructions for the 

survey of public lands. 

12. In all cases where the lines of the grant boundary 

surveys intersect established lines of survey of public lands 

or private land claims, the course and distance from such 

point of intersection to the nearest corner on the line of the 

prior survey must be carefully run, measured, and noted, and 

whenever necessary such corner must be reestablished. 

13. The survey of a private land claim must always be 

connected by a line actually run and measured in the field 

with some corner of the public surveys, if any such have been 

established within a distance not exceeding two miles from 

any point on the boundary lines of the private land claim. 

14. Boundaries or portions of boundaries of previously 

established grant surveys, which also form a portion of the 

boundaries of the claim to be surveyed, will be adopted so far 

as common to both grants, but no payment will be made for 

such common boundaries unless it is necessary to reestablish 

the same. 

15. The field notes must embrace a full, clear, and concise 

statement of the deputy’s reasons for his location and establishment of each boundary. 

16. A general description of each tract must be given at the 

end of the field notes of the survey of same, which description 

must embrace a brief statement of the main features of the 

tract surveyed, character of the land, timber, and other natural growth, kinds of mineral, if any, population of towns and 

settlements, characteristics of mountains, streams, springs, 

etc., and such other data as may be of importance. 

17. The deputy must particularly note all facts relative to 

present inhabitancy of the land and designate all tracts occupied by actual settlers or residents. 

18. The deputy surveyor must return with the field notes a 

topographical map or plat of the survey. As far as practicable 

all objects described in field notes, and the main features of 

the tract surveyed, including towns, streams, mountains, 

roads, etc., must be protracted on such plat as accurately as 

possible. 

19. The field-note books must embrace a list of assistants, 

and preliminary and final oaths, as required in the instructions for the survey of public lands. 

20. The deputy will note all objections to his survey that 

may be brought to his knowledge, and the surveyor general 

will promptly report to the Commissioner of the General 

Land Office all complaints made to him, and send up all 

protests filed in his office, together with a full report thereon. 

21. Official plats of the survey of private land claims will 

not be furnished to any person until the cost of surveying and 

platting the same shall have been paid to the United States. 

APPENDIX RELATIVE TO ACCOUNTS FOR 

SURVEYING AND EXAMINATION. 

U.S. surveyors general and deputy surveyors are required 

to comply strictly with the following instructions: 

All surveying accounts transmitted to the General Land 

Office for adjustment must be in duplicate and in a separate 

letter from that forwarding the plats and field notes of the 

survey. The name of the deputy surveyor, date and number of 

the contract, the amount of the estimated liability, and 

whether said liability is limited or not, should be noted on the 

face of the deputy’s account. 

The amount of the account and the approprition from 

which it is to be paid should be stated both in the letter of 

transmittal and in the account rendered. The deputy’s affidavit that the survey was executed by him, and that it was just 

and correct, should be attached to the account. 

The date of the surveyor general’s approval should appear 

in the certificate thereto, and the destination of the draft or 

drafts, the name of the payee or payees, with the post-office 

address, should be added. 

When the survey is chargeable to “Deposits by individuals 

for surveying the public lands,” it should be so stated, and the 

deposit to which the field work is chargeable should be listed 

by number and date of certificate of deposit, with number of 

township and range for which the deposit is made, and the 

amount of each certificate. 

When the amount of an account is in excess of the liability 

of the contract, a copy of office letter authorizing the excess 

must always accompany the account. 

When stating an expense account for examination in the 

field or office on surveys, the number of the contract under 

which the survey was made, the name of the surveyor, with 

the number of township and range examined, should be inserted in the account, accompanied by a copy of letter of 

authorization, said account and vouchers to be furnished in 

duplicate and to have the affidavit of the examiner as to the 

correctness of the charges and the approval of the surveyor 

general attached. 

When surveys are continued and executed beyond the time 

limited in the contract and the contract has expired, and 

there has been no properly-granted extension of time thereto, 

the compensation of the deputy surveyor for the lines of 

survey executed after the expiration of the contract will be 

reduced, and said lines completed at such rates as the Commissioner of the General Land Office may in his judgment 

determine to be proper, taking into consideration the value of 

the work and the limitations of the appropriation from which 

the account must be paid. 

The field notes of a U. S. deputy surveyor, which are the 

661 
data upon which his surveying account is stated by the surveyor general. and 

-223- 

-224- 

subsequently adjusted by the Commissioner of the General 

Land Office. should describe the surface. soil. etc., at the end 

of each mile or fractional mile of survey. and should state the 

number of chains and links which are “mountainous. .. using always the exact phraseology of the appropriation act 

which establishes the rates for said lines of surveys . By dense undergrowth is meant thick bushes. boughs. or 

other vegetable growth of such height as to obstruct the use of 

the transit. and require cutting away to obtain sights along 

line; also bushes. brush. vines or other vegetation which is of 

such tangled and difficult character as to seriously impede 

the work of chaining the line . Connecting lines. showing closing distances to closing corners. will be paid for at the minimum rate allowed in the 

contract for that class of line which is run to the closing 

corner. unless otherwise specially provided in the contract . The practice of allowing deputies to retrace any and all 

lines which they may deem necessary in connection with 

their work. and compensating them therefor. has been discontinued . If it becomes necessary to retrace any of the exterior lines 

in order to properly close their lines of survey it must be done 

at the deputy’s own expense as a legitimate contingent in 

executing the contract . If it should be found to be absolutely 

necessary to resurvey and retrace any portion of the exterior 

township lines. except such as are clearly provided for in the 

article on pages 72.73. and 74. the deputy should report the 

facts immediately to the surveyor general and await further 

instructions . The facts as reported to him will be promptly 

laid before the Commissioner of the General Land Office. 

specifying the number of miles of retracement required. and. 

is such resurvey is authorized. the deputy will be immediately notified . In no other case will any resurvey be paid for 

which is not specifically authorized by the Commissioner . 

“heavily timbered. .. or covered with “dense undergrowth. .. 

PROCEDURE OF COUNTY AND PRIVATE 

SURVEYORS IN RESTORING LOST AND 

OBLITERATED CORNERS AND SUBDIVIDING 

SECTIONS . The General Land Office assumes no control or direction 

over the acts of local and county surveyors in the reestablishment of extinct corners of original surveys . It follows the 

general rule that disputes. arising from uncertain or 

erroneous location of original corners. are to be settled by the 

proper local authorities or by amicable adjustment; and to aid 

in this result it furnishes a circular pamphlet which is merely 

advisory and explanatory of the principles which should prevail in performing such duties . 

Surveyors who have been United States deputies should 

bear in mind that in their private capacity they must act 

under somewhat different rules of law from those governing 

original surveys. and should carefully distinguish between 

the provisions of the statute which guide a Government deputy and those which apply to retracement of lines once surveyed . The failure to observe this distinction has been prolific 

of erroneous work and injustice to land owners . The circular on “Restoration of lost and obliterated corners. .. dated March 13.1883. and the circular on subdividing 

a section . dated June 2. 1887. are furnished to applicants . 

INDEX . 

A . 

Page . 

Abbreviations allowed in field notes ............... .23. 65 

Accounts for surveys and examinations ............... 223 

Acreage of fractional lots. computation of .......... .6 8.70 

Affidavits of qualification of sureties .............. .16. 17 

Affidavits or final oaths of deputy and 

assistants. forms of ................................. 63 

Alinement. limits of error of. in section and 

township lines ............................. .59. 66. 72 

Alteration of field notes prohibited .................... 64 

Annual change of magnetic declination for each State . . 98 

Annual magnetic variation. table showing ......... .96. 97 

Appointment of deputies by surveyor general ...... .lo. 14 

Approval of surveying contract by Commissioner ....... 12 

Arabic figures to be used in marking at corners ........ 22 

Areas of certain tracts to appear on plats .............. 67 

Areas of lots. how computed ....................... .6 8-70 

Argument. definition given .......................... 112 

Ascertaining true meridian from Polaris. 

by hour angle ................................ .10 9-119 

Assistant. discharge or change of duties of ............. 65 

Assistant. specimen field notes of discharge of ... .149. 200 

Assistants. forms of affidavits of ....................... 63 

Astronomical and civil day. difference 

explained between ........................... .109. 100 

Auxiliary meander corners ................... .44. 58. 212 

Azimuths of Polaris at elongation. tables of ...... .103. 104 

Azimuths of Polaris for any hour. table of ....... .118. 119 

Azimuths of secant to the parallel and offsets 

in feet. table of ................................... 121 

Azimuths of tangent of the parallel. table of .......... 125 

B . 

Base and meridian lines. and correction lines .......... 10 

Base and standard lines surveyed by offsets ...... .12 0.128 

Base lines and principal meridians of 

various States ................................ ..8 1.84 

Base lines, how run .................................. 51 

Bearing trees, location and marking of ......... .24. 49. 50 

Blazing of trees along line ............................ 21 

Bond and contract for surveying. form of .......... .15. 16 

Bond. official. of surveyor general ..................... 10 

Bond to be given by deputy surveyor .................. 11 

Boulder. marked for corner. specimen field notes of .... 157 

Boundaries and contents of lands. law for ascertaining . . 12 

Boundaries of townships considered defective ........... 72 

662 
Boundaries of townships, latitude and 

departure of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 129 

Boundaries of townships, specimen field notes of . .169-182 

Boundary corner monuments, descriptions of. . . . . . . .45-47 

Boundary of rancho, specimen notes of 

line intersecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190, 191 

Bushes to be lopped along line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 

C. 

Cassiopeia, diagram of constellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .lo8 

Cedar and live-oak lands reserved for navy . . . . . . . . . . . .13 

Certificates of deposit by settlers, for surveys. . . . . . . . . . .13 

Chain, standard to be kept by deputy.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 

Chaining, double, specimen field 

notes of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142-158, 164-167 

-225- 

(Pages 226 through 236 deleted. They contain the remainder 

of the Index.) 

[Ed. Note: The 1894 Manual was the first Manual to contain a 

detailed Index.] 

663 

i 

t 


Scale:linch to160chains. 

--. 

FOURTH STMDaD P-LEI 

I Ed 

, I 

I 

El 

It. 2 

W 

R.2 
lJSHIP EXTERIORS. Scale:lmnch to16Ochams. 

___-.- 

9THD-D PARALLEL NORTH. 

Ed I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I I 

Tf6N. 

R.238:. 

. - .. - .. . . . .. .. . - 
t 

L.. ,~ -- ,. .>..'i. .I, ,', 
3. \!; .i7i: 

I 

h 
Fi9.14. 

[-i-? + 

I R4.15. c, 

'J 

1; 

.. 

I, $1, 

~ 

I 

I 

i Fig. 3. 

Stmdard Section * 

WJ Corners. 

I-: \ 

31 , 

.. 

E'ig.22. F'ii 

Corner*s common lo 2 Townships. 
EXPLANATIONS 

, 

E 

PERSPECTWE, 
t 

ll'i(; i . 

i 

. . . .. . . . . 
- - 
I 

, --- 

.. . A 

4 
J 

R4/Y I R 3uv: 

I 

t 

R. 5w. 3 632 
XLIV. 

(This copy of the Circular Pamphlet is taken from an original now in the possession of the National Archives.) 

CIRCULAR 

ON 

RESTORATION 

OF 

LOST OR OBLITERATED CORNERS 

AND 

SUBDIVISION OF SECTIONS. 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

October 16,1896. 

WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 

1896. 

[Revised March 14,1901. Pages, etc., exactly the same 

except signed by Binger Hermann, and has penalty 

statement in front.] 

683 
RESTORATION OF LOST AND OBLITERATED CORNERS. 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D. C., October 16, 1896. 

The increasing number of letters from county and local 

surveyors received at this office making inquiry as to the 

proper method of restoring to their original position lost or 

obliterated corners marking the survey of the public lands of 

the United States, or such as have been willfully or 

accidentally moved from their original position, have rendered the preparation of the following general rules necessary, particularly as in a very large number of cases the 

immediate facts necessary to a thorough and intelligent 

understanding are omitted. Moreover, surveys having been 

made under the authority of different acts of Congress, different results have been obtained, and no special law has 

been enacted by that authority covering and regulating the 

subject of the above-named inquiries. Hence, the general rule 

here given must be considered merely as an expression of the 

opinion of this office on the subject, based, however, upon the 

spirit of the several acts of Congress authorizing the surveys, 

as construed by this office, and by United States court decisions. When cases arise which are not covered by these rules, 

and the advice of this office is desired, the letter of inquiry 

should always contain a description of the particular corner, 

with reference to the township, range, and section of the 

public surveys, to enable this office to consult the record. 

An obliterated corner is one where no visible evidence 

remains of the work of the original surveyor in establishing 

it. Its location may, however, have been preserved beyond all 

question by acts of landowners, and by the memory of those 

who knew and recollect the true situs of the original monument. In such cases it is not a lost corner. 

A lost corner is one whose position can not be determined, 

beyond reasonable doubt, either from original marks or reliable external evidence. 

Surveyors sometimes err in their decision whether a corner 

is to be treated as lost or only obliterated. 

Surveyors who have been United States deputies should 

bear in mind that in their private capacity they must act 

under somewhat different rules of law from those governing 

original surveys, and should carefully distinguish between 

the provisions of the statute which guide a Government deputy and those which apply to retracement of lines once surveyed. The failure to observe this distinction has been prolific 

of erroneous work and injustice to landowners. 

To restore extinct boundaries of the public lands correctly, 

the surveyor must have some knowledge of the manner in 

which townships were subdivided by the several methods 

authorized by Congress. Without this knowledge he may be 

greatly embarrassed in the field, and is liable to make mistakes invalidating his work, and leading 

-4- 

eventually to serious litigation. It is believed that the following synopsis of the several acts of Congress regulating the 

surveys of the public lands will be of service to county surveyors and others, and will help to explain many of the 

difficulties encountered by them in the settlement of such 

questions. 

Compliance with the provisions of Congressional legislation at different periods has resulted in two sets of corners 

being established on township lines at one time; at other 

times three sets of corners have been established on range 

lines; while the system now in operation makes but one set of 

corners on township boundaries, except on standard linesi.e., base and correction lines, and in some exceptional cases. 

The following brief explanation of the modes which have 

been practiced will be of service to all who may be called upon 

to restore obliterated boundaries of the public land surveys: 

Where two sets of corners were established on township 

boundaries, one set was planted at the time the exteriors 

were run, those on the north boundary belonging to the 

sections and quarter sections north of said line, and those on 

the west boundary belonging to the sections and quarter 

sections west of that line. The other set of corners was established when the township was subdivided. This method, as 

stated, resulted in the establishment of two sets of corners on 

all four sides of the townships. 

Where three sets of corners were established on the range 

lines, the subdivisional surveys were made in the above manner, except that the east and west section lines, instead of 

being closed upon the corners previously established on the 

east boundary of the township, were run due east from the 

last interior section corner, and new corners were erected at 

the points of intersection with the range line. 

The method now in practice requires section lines to be 

initiated from the corners on the south boundary of the 

township, and to close on existing corners on the east, north, 

and west boundaries of the township, except when the north 

boundary is a base line or standard parallel. 

But in some cases, for special reasons, an opposite course of 

procedure has been followed, and subdivisional work has 

been begun on the north boundary and has been extended 

southward and eastward or southward and westward. 

In the more recent general instructions, greater care has 

been exercised to secure rectangular subdivisions by fixing a 

strict limitation that no new township exteriors or section 

lines shall depart from a true meridian or east and west line 

more than twenty-one minutes of arc; and that where a random line is found liable to correction beyond this limit, a true 

line on a cardinal course must be run, setting a closing corner 

on the line to which it closes. 

This produces, in new surveys closing to irregular old 

work, a great number of exteriors marked by a double set of 

corners. All retracing surveyors should proceed under these 

new conditions with full knowledge of the field notes and 

exceptional methods of subdivision. 

SYNOPSIS OF ACTS OF CONGRESS. 

The first enactment in regard to the surveying of the public 

lands was an ordinance passed by the Congress of the Confederation May 20,1785, prescribing the mode for the survey of 

the “Western Territory,“ and which provided that said territory should be divided into “townships of six miles square, by 

684 
lines running due north and south, and others crossing them 

at right angles” as near as might be.’ 

-5- 

It further provided that the first line running north and 

south should begin on the Ohio River, at a point due north 

from the western terminus of a line run as the south boundary of the State of Pennsylvania, and the first line running 

east and west should begin at the same point and extend 

through the whole territory. In these initial surveys only the 

exterior lines of the townships were surveyed, but the plats 

were marked by subdivisions into sections 1 mile square, 

numbered from 1 to 36, commencing with No. 1 in the southeast corner of the township, and running from south to north 

in each tier to No. 36 in the northwest corner of the township; 

mile corners were established on the township lines. The 

region embraced by the surveys under this law forms a part of 

the present State of Ohio, and is generally known as “the 

Seven Ranges.” 

The Federal Congress passed a law, approved May 18, 

1796, in regard to surveying the public domain, which applied to “the territory northwest of the River Ohio, and above 

the mouth of the Kentucky River.”2 

Section 2 of said act provided for dividing such lands as had 

not been already surveyed or disposed of “by north and south 

lines run according to the true meridian, and by others crossing them at right angles, so as to form townships of 6 miles 

square,” etc. It also provided that “one-half of said townships, 

taking them alternately, should be subdivided into sections 

containing, as nearly as may be, 640 acres each, by running 

through the same each way parallel lines at the end of every 

two miles; and by marking a corner on each of said lines at the 

end of every mile.” The act also provided that “the sections 

shall be numbered, respectively, beginning with the number 

one in the northeast section, and proceeding west and east 

alternately through the township, with progressive numbers 

till the thirty-sixth be completed.” This method of numbering 

sections is still in use. 

An act amendatory of the foregoing, approved May 10, 

1800, required the “townships west of te Muskingum, which 

are directed to be sold in quarter townships, to be subdivided 

into half sections of 320 acres each, as nearly as may be, by 

running parallel lines through the same from east to west, 

and from south to north, at the distance of one mile from each 

other, and marking corners, at the distance of each half mile 

on the lines running from east to west, and at the distance of 

each mile on those running from south to north. And the 

interior lines of townships intersected by the Muskingum, 

and of all townships lying east of that river, which have not 

been heretofore actually subdivided into sections, shall also 

be run and marked * * *. And in all cases where the exterior 

lines of the townships thus to be subdivided into sections or 

half sections, shall exceed or shall not extend six miles, the 

excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or 

deducted from the western or northern ranges of sections or 

1. Ordinance ofthe Congress ofthe Confederation of May 20,1785. U. S. Land Laws, p. 

349. Edition 1828. 

2. Act of May 18, 1796. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 1, p. 465. Section 2395, U. S. 

Revised Statutes. 

half sections in such townships, according as the error may be 

in running the lines from east to west or from south to north.” 

Said act also provided that the northern and western tiers of 

sections should be sold as containing only the quantity expressed on the plats, and all others as containing the complete legal q~antity.~ 

The act approved June 1, 1796, “regulating the grants of 

land appropriated for military services,” etc., provided for 

dividing the “United States Military Tract,” in the State of 

Ohio, into townships 5 miles square, each to be subdivided 

into quarter townships containing 4,000 acres.4 

-6- 

Section 6 of the act approved March 1,1800, amendatory of 

the foregoing act, enacted that the Secretary of the Treasury 

was authorized to subdivide the quarter townships into lots of 

100 acres, bounded as nearly as practicable by parallel lines 

160 perches in length by 100 perches in width. These subdivisions into lots, however, were made upon the plats in the 

office of the Secretary of the Treasury, and the actual survey 

was only made at a subsequent time when a sufficient number of such lots had been located to warrant the survey. It 

thus happened, in some instances, that when the survey 

came to be made the plat and survey could not be made to 

agree, and that fractional lots on plats were entirely crowded 

out. A knowledge of this fact may explain some of the difficulties met with in the district thus ~ubdivided.~ 

The act of Congress approved February 11, 1805, directs 

the subdivision of the public lands into quarter sections, and 

provid.es that all corners marked in the field shall be established as the proper corners of the sections or quarter sections 

which they were intended to designate, and that corners of 

half and quarter sections not marked shall be placed as nearly as possible “equidistant from those two corners which 

stand on the same line.” This act further provides that “the 

boundary lines actually run and marked” (in the field) “shall 

be established as the proper boundary lines of the sections, or 

subdivisions, for which they were intended, and the length of 

such lines as returned by either of the surveyors aforesaid 

shall be held and considered as the true length thereof. And 

the boundary lines which shall not have been actually run 

and marked as aforesaid shall be ascertained by running 

straight lines from the established corners to the opposite 

corresponding corners, but in those portions of the fractional 

townships where no such opposite or corresponding corners 

have been or can be fixed, the said boundary lines shall be 

ascertained by running from the established corners due 

north and south, or east and west lines, as the case may be, to 

the water course, Indian boundary line, or other external 

boundary of such fractional township.”6 

The act of Congress approved April 24,1820, provides for 

the sale of public lands in half-quarter sections, and requires 

that “in every case of the division of a quarter section the line 

3. Act ofMay 10,1800. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 2, p. 73. Section 2395, U. S. Revised 

Statutes. 

4. Act of June 1, 1796. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 1, p. 490. 

5. Act of March 1, 1800. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol 2., p. 14. 

6. Act of February 11, 1805. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 2, p 313. Section 2396, U. S. 

Revised Statutes. 

685 
for the division thereof shall run north and south,” “and 

fractional sections, containing 160 acres and upwards, shall 

in like manner, as nearly as practicable, be subdivided into 

half quarter sections, under such rules and regulations as 

may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury; but 

fractional sections containing less than 160 acres shall not be 

di~ided.”~ 

The act of Congress approved May 24,1824, provides “that 

whenever, in the opinion of the President of the United 

States, a departure from the ordinary mode of surveying land 

on any river, lake, bayou, or water course would promote the 

public interest, he may direct the surveyor-general in whose 

district such land is situated, and where the change is intended to be made, under such rules and regulations as the 

President may prescribe, to cause the lands thus situated to 

be surveyed in tracts of two acres in width, fronting on any 

river, bayou, lake, or water course, and running back the 

depth of forty acres.”8 

.The act of Congress approved April 5, 1832, directed the 

subdivision of the public lands into quarter-quarter sections; 

that in every case of the division of a half-quarter section the 

dividing line should run east and west, and that fractional 

sections should be subdivided, under rules and regulations 

-7- 

prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury. Under the latter 

provision the Secretary directed that fractional sections containing less than 160 acres, or the residuary portion of a 

fractional section, after the subdivision into as many quarter-quarter sections as it is susceptible of, may be subdivided 

into lots, each containing the quantity of a quarter-quarter 

section as nearly as practicable, by so laying down the line of 

subdivision that they shall be 20 chains wide, which distances are to be marked on the plat of subdivision, as are also 

the areas of the quarter quarters and residuary fraction^.^ 

These two acts last mentioned provided that the corners 

and contents of half-quarter and quarter-quarter sections 

should be ascertained as nearly as possible in the manner and 

on the principles prescribed in the act of Congress approved 

February 11, 1805. 

GENERAL RULES. 

From the foregoing synopsis of Congressional legislation it 

is evident1st. That the boundaries of the public lands established 

and returned by the duly appointed Government surveyors, 

when approved by the surveyors general and accepted by the 

Government, are unchangeable. 

2d. That the original township, section, and quartersection corners established by the Government surveyors 

must stand as the true corners which they were intended to 

represent, whether the corners be in place or not. 

3d. That quarter-quarter corners not established by the 

7. Act of April 24, 1820. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 3, p. 566. Section 2397, U. S. 

Revised Statutes. 

8. Act of May 24, 1824. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 4, p. 34. 

9. Act ofApril 5 1832. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 4, p. 503. Section 2397, U. S. Revised 

Statutes. 

Government surveyors must be placed on the straight lines 

joining the section and quarter-section corners and midway 

between them, except on the last half mile of section lines 

closing on the north and west boundaries of the township, or 

on other lines between fractional sections. 

4th. That all subdivisional lines of a section running between corners established in the original survey of a 

township must be straight lines, running from the proper 

corner in one section line to its opposite corresponding corner 

in the opposite section line. 

5th. That in a fractional section where no opposite corresponding corner has been or can be established, any required 

subdivision line of such section must be run from the proper 

original corner in the boundary line due east and west, or 

north and south, as the case may be, to the water course, 

Indian reservation, or other boundary of such section, with 

due parallelism to section lines. 

From the foregoing it will be plain that extinct corners of 

the Government surveys must be restored to their original 

locations, whenever it is possible to do so; and hence resort 

should always be first had to the marks of the survey in the 

field. The locus of the missing corner should be first identified 

on the ground by the aid of the mound, pits, line trees, bearing trees, etc., described in the field notes of the original 

survey. 

The identification of mounds, pits, and witness trees, or 

other permanent objects noted in the field notes of survey, 

affords the best means of relocating the missing corner in its 

original position. If this can not be done, clear and convincing 

testimony of citizens as to the locality it originally occupied 

should be taken, if such can be obtained. In any event, 

whether the locus of the corner be fixed by the one means or 

the other, such locus should always be tested and confirmed 

by measurements to known corners. No definite rule can be 

laid down as to what shall be sufficient evidence in such 

cases, and much must be left to the skill, fidelity, and good 

judgment of the surveyor in the performance of his work. 

-8- 

EXCEPTIONAL CASES. 

When new measurements are made on a single line to 

determine the position thereon for a restored lost corner (for 

example, a quarter-section corner on line between two original section corners), or when new measurements are made 

between original corners on two lines for the purpose of fixing 

by their intersection the position of a restored missing corner 

(for example, a corner common to four sections or four 

townships), it will almost invariably happen that discrepancies will be developed between the new measurements and 

the original measurements in the field notes. When these 

differences occur the surveyor will in all cases establish the 

missing corner by proportionate measurements on lines conforming to the original field notes and by the method followed 

in the original survey. From this rule there can be no departure, since it is the basis upon which the whole operation 

depends for accuracy and truth. 

In cases where the relocated corner can not be made to 

harmonize with the field notes in all directions, and unexplained error in the first survey is apparent, it sometimes 

686 
becomes the task of the surveyor to place it according to the 

requirements of one line and against the calls of another line. 

For instance, if the line between sections 30 and 31, reported 

78 chains long, would draw the missing corner on range line 1 

chain eastward out of range with the other exterior corners, 

the presumption would be strong that the range line had been 

run straight and the length of the section line wrongly reported, because experience shows that west random lines are 

regarded as less important than range lines and more liable 

to error. 

Again, where a corner on a standard parallel has been 

obliterated, it is proper to assume that it was placed in line 

with other corners, and if an anomalous length of line reported between sections 3 and 4 would throw the closing 

corner into the northern township, a surveyor would properly 

assume that the older survey of the standard line is to control 

the length of the later and minor line. The marks or corners 

found on such a line closing to a standard parallel fix its 

location, but its length should be limited by its actual intersection, at which point the lost closing corner may be 

placed. 

The strict rule of the law that “all corners marked in the 

field shall be established as the corners which they were 

intended to designate,” and the further rule that “the length 

of lines returned by the surveyors shall be held and considered as the true length thereof,” are found insome cases to be 

impossible of fulfillment in all directions at once, and a surveyor is obliged to choose, in his own discretion, which of two 

or more lines must yield, in order to permit the rules to be 

applied at all. 

In a case of an erroneous but existing closing corner, which 

was set some distance out of the true State boundary of 

Missouri and Kansas, it was held by this office that a surveyor subdividing the fractional section should preserve the 

boundary as a straight line, and should not regard said closing corner as the proper corner of the adjacent fractional lots. 

The said corner was considered as fixing the position of the 

line between two fractional sections, but that its length extended to a new corner to be set on the true boundary line. 

The surveyor should therefore preserve such an original corner as evidence of the line; but its erroneous position can not 

be allowed to cause a crook between mile corners of the 

original State boundary. 

It is only in cases where it is manifestly impossible to carry 

out the literal terms of the law, that a surveyor can be justified in making such a decision. 

-9- 

The principle of the preponderance of one line over another 

of less importance has been recognized in the rule for restoring a section corner common to two townships in former 

editions of this circular. The new corner should be placed on 

the township line; and measurements to check its position by 

distances to corners within the townships are useful to confirm it if found to agree well, but should not cause it to be 

placed off the line if found not to agree, if the general condition of the boundary supports the presumption that it was 

properly alined. 

TO RESTORE LOST OR OBLITERATED CORNERS 

1. To restore corners on base lines and standard parallels.-Lost or obliterated standard corners will be restored to 

their original positions on a base line, standard parallel, or 

correction line, by proportionate measurements on the line, 

conforming as nearly as practicable to the original field notes 

and joining the nearest identified original standard corners 

on opposite sides of the missing corner or corners, as the case 

may be. 

(a) The term “standard corners’’ will be understood to designate standard township, section, quarter-section, and 

meander corners; and, in addition, closing corners, a follows: 

Closing corners used in the original survey to determine the 

position of a standard parallel, or established during the 

survey of the same, will, with the standard corners, govern 

the alinement and measurements made to restore lost or 

obliterated standard corners; but no other closing corners 

will control in any manner the restoration of standard corners on a base line or standard parallel. 

(b) A lost or obliterated closing corner from which a standard parallel has been initiated or to which it has been 

directed will be reestablished in its original place by proportionate measurement from the corners used in the original 

survey to determine its position. Measurements from corners 

on the opposite side of the parallel will not control in any 

manner the relocation of said corner. 

(c) A missing closing corner originally established during 

the survey of a standard parallel as a corner from which to 

project surveys south will be restored to its original position 

by considering it a standard corner and treating it accordingly. 

(d) Therefore, paying attention to the preceding explanations, we have for the restoration of one or several corners on 

a standard parallel, and for general application to all other 

surveyed lines, the following proportion: 

As the original field-note distance between the selected 

known corners is to the new measure of said distance, so is the 

original field-note length of any part of the line to the required new measure thereof. 

The sum of the computed lengths of the several parts of a 

line must be equal to the new measure of the whole distance. 

(e) As has been observed, existing original corners can not 

be disturbed; consequently, discrepancies between the new 

and the original field-note measurements of the line joining 

the selected original corners will not in any manner affect 

measurements beyond said corners, but the differences will 

be distributed proportionately to the several intervals 

embraced in the line in question. 

(0 After having checked each new location by measurement to the nearest known corners, new corners will be 

established permanently and new bearings and measurements taken to prominent objects, which should be of as 

permanent a character as possible, and the same recorded for 

future reference. 

-10- 

2. Restoration of township corners common to four 

townships.-Two cases should be clearly recognized: 1st. 

Where the position of the original township corner has been 

687 
made to depend upon measurements on two lines at right 

angles to each other. 2d. Where the original corner has been 

located by measurements on one line only; for example, on a 

guide meridian. 

(a) For restoration of a township corner originally subject 

to the first condition: A line will first be run connecting the 

nearest identified original corners on the meridional 

township lines, north and south of the missing corner, and a 

temporary corner will be placed at the proper proportionate 

distance. This will determine the corner in a north and south 

direction only. 

Next, the nearest original corners on the latitudinal 

township lines will be connected and a point thereon will be 

determined in a similar manner, independent of the temporary corner on the meridional line. Then through the first 

temporary corner run a line east (or west) and through the 

second temporary corner a line north (or south), as relative 

situations may suggest. The intersection of the two lines last 

run will define the position of the restored township corner, 

which may be permanently established. 

(b) The restoration of a lost or obliterated township corner 

established under the second conditions, i.e., by measurements, on a single line, will be effected by proportionate 

measurements on said line, between the nearest identified 

original corners on opposite sides of the missing township 

corner, as before described. 

3. Reestablishment of corners common to two townships.- 

The two nearest known corners on the township line, the 

same not being a base or a correction line, will be connected 

as in case No. 1, by a right line, and the missing corner 

established by proportionate distance as directed in that 

case; the location thus found will be checked upon by 

measurements to nearest known section or quarter-section 

corners north and south, or east and west, of the township 

line, as the case may be. 

4. Reestablishment of closing corners.-Measure from the 

quarter-section, section, or township corner east or west, as 

the case may be, to the next preceding or succeeding corner in 

the order of original establishment, and reestablish the missing closing corner by proportionate measurement. The line 

upon which the closing corner was originally established 

should always be remeasured, in order to check upon the 

correctness of the new location. See pages 8, 12, and 13 for 

details. 

5. Reestablishment of interior section corners.-This class 

of corners should be reestablished in the same manner as 

corners common to four townships. In such cases, when a 

number of corners are missing on all sides of the one sought to 

be reestablished, the entire distance must, of course, be remeasured between the nearest existing recognized corners 

both north and south, and east and west, in accordance with 

the rule laid down, and the new corner reestablished by 

proportionate measurement. The mere measurement in any 

one of the required directions will not suffice, since the direction of the several section lines running northward through a 

township, or running east and west, are only in the most 

exceptional cases true prolongations of the alinement of the 

section lines initiated on the south boundary of the township; 

while the east and west lines running through the township, 

and theoretically supposed to be at right angles with the 

former, are seldom in that condition, and the alinements of 

the closing lines on the east and west boundaries of the 

township, in connection with the interior section lines, are 

even less often in accord. Moreover, the alinement of the 

-11- 

section line itself from corner to corner, in point of fact, also 

very frequently diverges from a right line, although presumed to be such from the record contained in the field notes 

and so designated on the plats, and becomes either a broken 

or a curved line. This fact will be determined, in a timbered 

country, by the blazes which may be found upon trees on 

either side of the line, and although such blazed line will not 

strictly govern as to the absolute direction assumed by such 

line, it will assist very materially in determining its approximate direction, and should never be neglected in retracements for the reestablishment of lost corners of any description. Sight trees described in the field notes, together with 

the recorded distances to same, when fully identified, will, it 

has been held, in one or more States, govern the line itself, 

even when not in a direct or straight line between established 

corners, which line is then necessarily a broken line by passing through said sight trees. Such trees, when in existence 

and properly identified beyond a question of doubt, will very 

materially assist in evidencing the correct relocation of a 

missing corner. It is greatly to be regretted that the earlier 

field notes of survey are so very meager in the notation of the 

topography found on the original line, which might in very 

many instances materially lessen a surveyor’s labors in retracement of lines and reestablishment of the required missing corner. In the absence of such sight trees and other 

evidence regarding the line, as in an open country, or where 

such evidence has been destroyed by time, the elements, or 

the progress of improvement, the line connecting the known 

corners should be run straight from corner to corner 

6. Reestablishment of quarter-section corners on township 

boundares.-Only one set of quarter-section corners are 

actually marked in the field on township lines, and they are 

established at the time when the township exteriors are run. 

When double section corners are found, the quarter-section 

corners are considered generally as standing midway between the corners of their respective sections, and when 

required to be established or reestablished, as the case may 

be, they should be generally so placed; but great care should 

be exercised not to mistake the corners belonging to one 

township for those of another. After determining the proper 

section corners marking the line upon which the missing 

quarter-section corner is to be reestablished, and measuring 

said line, the missing quarter-section corner will be reestablished in accordance with the requirements of the original 

field notes of survey, by proportionate measurement between 

the section corners marking the line. 

Where there are double sets of section corners on township 

and range lines, and the quarter-section corners for sections 

south of the township or east of the range lines are required to 

be established in the field, the said quarter-section corners 

should be so placed as to suit the calculation of areas of the 

quarter sections adjoining the township boundaries as expressed upon the official township plat, adopting proportionate measurements when the present measurement of the 

688 
north and west boundaries of the section differ from the 

original measurements. 

7. Reestablishment of quarter-section corners on closing 

section lines between fractional sections.-This class of corners must be reestablished according to the original 

measurement of 40 chains from the last interior section corner. If the measurements do not agree with the original 

survey, the excess or deficiency must be divided proportionately between the two distances, as expressed in the field 

notes of original survey. The section corner started from and 

the corner closed upon should be connected by a right line, 

unless the retracement should 

-12- 

develop the fact that the section line is either a broken or 

curved line, as is sometimes the case. 

8. Reestablishment of interior quarter-section corners.- 

In some of the older surveys these corners are placed at 

variable distances, in which case the field notes of the original survey must be consulted, and the quarter-section corner 

reestablished at proportionate distances between the corresponding section corners, in accordance therewith. The later 

surveys being more uniform and in stricter accordance with 

law, the missing quarter-section corner must be reestablished equidistant between the section corners marking the 

line, according to the field notes of the original survey. The 

remarks made under section 5, in relation to section lines, 

apply with full force here also; the caution there given not to 

neglect sight trees is equally applicable, since the proper 

reestablishment of the quarter-section corner may in some 

instances very largely depend upon its observance, and avoid 

one of the many sources of litigation. 

9. Where double corners were originally established, one 

of which is standing, to reestablish the other.-It being remembered that the corners established when the exterior 

township lines were run, belong to the sections in the 

townships north and west of those lines, the surveyor must 

first determine beyond a doubt to which sections the existing 

corner belongs. This may be done by testing the courses and 

distances to witness trees or other objects noted in the original field notes of survey, and by remeasuring distances to 

known corners. Having determined to which township the 

existing corner belongs, the missing corner may be reestablished in line north or south of the existing corner, as the case 

may be, at the distance stated in the field notes of the original 

survey, by proportionate measurement, and tested by retracement to the opposite corresponding corner of the section 

to which the missing section corner belongs. These double 

corners being generally not more than a few chains apart, the 

distance between them can be more accurately laid off, and it 

is considered preferable to first establish the missing corner 

as above, and check upon the corresponding interior corner, 

than to reverse the proceeding; since the result obtained is 

every way more accurate and satisfactory. 

10. Where double corners were originally established, and 

both are missing, to reestablish the one established when the 

township line was run.-The surveyor will connect the 

nearest known corners on the township line by a right line, 

being careful to distinguish the section from the closing corners, and reestablish the missing corner at the point indicated by the field notes of the original survey by proportionate measurement. The corner thus restored will be common 

to two sections either north or west of the township boundary, 

and the section north or west, as the case may be, should be 

carefully retraced, thus checking upon the reestablished corner, and testing the accuracy of the result. It can not be too 

much impressed upon the surveyor that any measurements 

to objects on line noted in the original survey are means of 

determining and testing the correctness of the operation. 

11. Where double corners were originally established, and 

both are missing, to reestablish the one established when the 

township was subdivided.-The corner to be reestablished 

being common to two sections south or east of the township 

line, the section line closing on the missing section corner 

should be first retraced to an intersection with the township 

line in the manner previously indicated, and a temporary 

corner established at the point of intersection. The township 

line will of course have been previously carefully retraced in 

accordance with the requirements of 

-13- 

the original field notes of survey, and marked in such a 

manner as to be readily identified when reaching the same 

with the retraced section line. The location of the temporary 

corner planted at the point of intersection will then be carefully tested and verified by remeasurements to objects and 

known corners on the township line, as noted in the original 

field notes of survey, and the necessary corrections made in 

such relocation. A permanent corner will then be erected at 

the corrected location on the township line, properly marked 

and witnessed, and recorded for future requirements. 

12. Where triple corners were originally established on 

range lines, one or two of which have become obliterated, to 

reestablish either of them.-It will be borne in mind that only 

two corners were established as actual corners of sections, 

those established on the range line not corresponding with 

the subdivisional survey east or west of said range line. The 

surveyor will, therefore, first proceed to identify the existing 

corner or corners, as the case may be, and then reestablish 

the missing corner or corners in line north or south, according 

to the distances stated in the original field notes of survey in 

the manner indicated for the reestablishment of double corners, testing the accuracy of the result obtained, as hereinbefore directed in other cases. If, however, the distances between the triple corners are not stated in the original field 

notes of survey, as is frequently the case in the returns of 

older surveys, the range line should be first carefully retraced, and marked in a manner sufficiently clear to admit of 

easy identification upon reaching same during the subsequent proceeding. The section lines closing upon the missing 

corners must then be retraced in accordance with the original 

field notes of survey, in the manner previously indicated and 

directed, and the corners reestablished in the manner 

directed in the case of double corners. The surveyor can not be 

too careful, in the matter of retracement, in following closely 

all the recorded indications of the original line, and nothing, 

however slight, should be neglected to insure the correctness 

of the retracement of the original line; since there is no other 

check upon the accuracy of the reestablishment of the missing corners, unless the entire corresponding section lines are 

689 
remeasured by proportional measurement and the result 

checked by a recalculation of the areas as originally returned, which, at best, is but a very poor check, because the 

areas expressed upon the margin of many plats of the older 

surveys are erroneously stated on the face of the plats, or 

have been carelessly calculated. 

13. Where triple corners were originally established on 

range lines, all of which are missing, to reestablish same.-- 

These corners should be reestablished in accordance with the 

foregoing directions, commencing with the corner originally 

established when the range line was run, establishing the 

same in accordance with previously given directions for restoring section and quarter-section corners; that is to say, by 

remeasuring between the nearest known corners on said 

township line, and reestablishing the same by proportionate 

measurement. The two remaining will then be reestablished 

in conformity with the general rules for reestablishment of 

double corners. 

14. Reestablishment of meander corners.-Before proceeding with the reestablishment of missing meander corners, 

the surveyor should have carefuly rechained at least three of 

the section lines between known corners of the township 

within which the lost corner is to be relocated, in order to 

establish the proportionate measurement to be used. This 

requirement of preliminary remeasurement of section lines 

must in no case be omitted; since it gives the only data upon 

which the fractional 

-14- 

section line can be remeasured proportionately, the corner 

marking the terminus, or the meander corner, being missing, 

which it is intended to reestablish. The missing meander 

corner will be reestablished on the section or township line 

retraced in its original location, by the proportionate 

measurement found by the preceeding operations, from the 

nearest known corner on such township or section line, in 

accordance with the requirements of the original field notes 

of survey. 

Meander corners hold the peculiar position of denoting a 

point on line between landowners, without usually being the 

legal terminus or corner of the lands owned. Leading judicial 

decisions have affirmed that meander lines are not strictly 

boundaries, and do not limit the ownership to the exact areas 

placed on the tracts, but that said title extends to the water, 

which, by the plat, appears to bound the land. 

As such water boundaries are, therefore, subject to change 

by the encroachment or recession of the stream or lake, the 

precise location of old meanders is seldom important, unless 

in States whose laws prescribe that dried lake beds are the 

property of the State. 

Where the United States has disposed of the fractional lots 

adjacent to shores, it claims no marginal lands left by recession or found by reason of erroneous survey. The lines between landowners are therefore regarded as extended beyond 

the original meander line of the shore, but the preservation 

or relocation of the meander corner is important, as evidence 

of the position of the section line. 

The different rules by which division lines should be run 

between private owners of riparian accretions are a matter of 

State legislation, and not subject to a general rule of this 

office. 

15. Fractional section Zincs.-County and local surveyors 

being sometimes called upon to restore fractional section 

lines closing upon Indian, military, or other reservations, 

private grants, etc., such lines should be restored upon the 

same principles as directed in the foregoing pages, and 

checked whenever possible upon such corners or monuments 

as have been placed to mark such boundary lines. 

In some instances corners have been moved from their 

original position, either by accident or design, and county 

surveyors are called upon to restore such corners to their 

original positions, but, owing to the absence of any and all 

means of identification of such location, are unable to make 

the result of their work acceptable to the owners of the lands 

affected by such corner. In such cases the advice of this office 

has invariably been to the effect that the relocation of such 

corner must be made in accordance with the orders of a court 

of competent jurisdiction, the United States having no longer 

any authority to order any changes where the lands affected 

by such corner have been disposed of. 

RECORDS. 

The original evidences of the public-land surveys in the 

following States have been transferred, under the provisions 

of sections 2218,2219, and 2220, United States Revised Statutes, to the State authorities, to whom application should be 

made for such copies of the original plats and field notes as 

may be desired, viz: 

Alabama: Secretary of State, Montgomery. 

Arkansas: Commissioner of State Lands, Little Rock. 

Illinois: Auditor of State, Springfield. 

Indiana: Auditor of State, Indianapolis. 

Iowa: Secretary of State, Des Moines. 

Kansas: Auditor of State and Register of State Lands, 

Topeka. 

-15- 

Michigan: Commissioner of State Land Office, Lansing. 

Mississippi: Commissioner of State Lands, Jackson. 

Missouri: Secretary of State, Jefferson City. 

Nebraska: Commissioner of Public Lands and Buildings, 

Ohio: Auditor of State, Columbus. 

Wisconsin: Commissioners of Public Lands, Madison. 

In other public-land States the original field notes and 

plats are retained in the offices of the United States surveyors general. 

Lincoln. 

SUBDIVISION OF SECTIONS. 

This office being in receipt of many letters making inquiry 

in regard to the proper method of subdividing sections of the 

public lands, the followng general rules have been prepared 

as a reply to such inquiries. The rules for subdivision are 

based upon the laws governing the survey of the public lands. 

When cases arise which are not covered by these rules, and 

the advice of this office in the matter is desired, the letter of 

inquiry should, in every instance, contain a description of the 

particular tract or corner, with reference to township, range, 

and section of the public surveys, to enable the office to 

consult the record; also a diagram showing conditions found: 

690 
1. Subdivision of sections into quarter sections.-Under 

the provisions of the act of Congress approved February 11, 

1805, the course to be pursued in the subdivision of sections 

into quarter sections is to run straight lines from the established quarter-section corners, United States surveys, to the 

opposite corresponding corners. The point of intersection of 

the lines thus run will be the corner common to the several 

quarter sections, or, in other words, the legal center of the 

section. 

(a) Upon the lines closing on the north and west boundaries 

of a township, the quarter-section corners are established by 

the United States deputy surveyors at 40 chains to the north 

or west of the last interior section corners, and the excess or 

deficiency in the measurement is thrown into the half mile 

next to the township or range line, as the case may be. 

(b) Where there are double sets of section corners on 

township and range lines, the quarter corners for the sections 

south of the township lines and east of the range lines are not 

established in the field by the United States deputy surveyors, but in subdividing such sections said quarter corners 

should be so placed as to suit the calculations of the areas of 

the quarter sections adjoining the township boundaries as 

expressed upon the official plat, adopting proportionate 

measurements where the new measurements of the north or 

west boundaries of the section differ from the original 

measurements. 

2. Subdivision of fractional sections.-Where opposite corresponding corners have not been or can not be fixed, the 

subdivision lines should be ascertained by running from the 

established corners due north, south, east, or west lines, as 

the case may be, to the water course, Indian boundary line, or 

other boundary of such fractional section. 

(a) The law presumes the section lines surveyed and 

marked in the field by the United States deputy surveyors to 

be due north and south or east and west lines, but in actual 

experience this is not always the case. Hence, in order to 

carry out the spirit of the law, it will be necessary in running 

the subdivisional lines through fractional sections to adopt 

mean courses where the section lines are not due lines, or to 

run the subdivision line parallel to the east, south, west, or 

north boundary of the section, as conditions may require, 

where there is no opposite section line. 

-16- 

3. Subdivision of quarter sections into quarter quarters.- 

Preliminary to the subdivision of quarter sections, the quarter-quarter corners will be established at points midway between the section and quarter-section corners, and between 

quarter corners and the center of the section, except on the 

last half mile of the lines closing on the north or west boundaries of a township, where they should be placed at 20 chains, 

proportionate measurement, to the north or west of the quarter-section corner. 

(a) The quarter-quarter section corners having been established as directed above, the subdivision lines of the quarter 

section will be run straight between opposite corresponding 

quarter-quarter section corners on the quarter section 

boundaries. The intersection of the lines thus run will determine the place for the corner common to the four quarterquarter sections. 

4. Subdivision of fractional quarter sections.-The subdivision lines of fractional quarter sections will be run from 

properly established quarter-quarter section corners (paragraph 3) due north, south, east, or west, to the lake, water 

course, or reservation which renders such tracts fractional, or 

parallel to the east, south, west, or north boundary of the 

quarter section, as conditions may require. (See paragraph 2 

(a).) 

5. Prop o r t io na t e mea s u re me n t . -B y “prop or t i on a t e 

measurement.” as used in this circular, is meant a measurement having the same ratio to that recorded in the original 

field notes as the length of chain used in the new measurement has to the length of chain used in the original survey, 

assuming that the original and new measurements have 

been correctly made. 

For example: The length of the line from the quartersection corner on the west side of sec. 2, T. 24 N., R. 14 E, 

Wisconsin, to the north line of the township, by the United 

States deputy surveyor’s chain, was reported as 45.40 chains, 

and by the county surveyor’s measure is reported as 42.90 

chains; then the distance which the quarter-quarter section 

corner should be located north of the quarter-section corner 

would be determined as follows: 

As 45.40 chains, the Government measure of the whole 

distance, is to 42.90 chains, the county surveyor’s measure of 

the same distance, so is 20.00 chains, original measurement, 

to 18.90 chains by the county surveyor’s measure, showing 

that by proportionate measurement in this case the quarterquarter section corner should be set at 18.90 chains north of 

the quarter-section corner, instead of 20.00 chains north of 

such corner, as represented on the official plat. In this manner the discrepancies between original and new measurements are equitably distributed. 

S. W. LAMOREUX, 

Commissioner. 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

October 16, 1896. 

Approved: 

DAVID R. FRANCIS, 

Secretary. 

69 1 

XLV. 

(This copy of the 1902 Manual is taken from an original volume now in the possession of the BLM, Oregon State Office, 

Portland.) 

MANUAL 

OF 

SURVEYING INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR THE 

SURVEY OF THE PUBLIC LANDS 

OF THE 

UNITED STATES 

AND 

PRIVATE LAND CLAIMS. 

Prepared in conformity with law under the direction of 

THE COMMISSIONER OF THE GENERAL LAND OFFICE. 

JANUARY 1,1902. 

WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 

1902. 

693 
DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D.C., January 1, 1902. 

GENTLEMEN: 

The following instructions, including full and minute 

directions for the execution of surveys in the field, are issued 

under the authority given me by sections 453,456, and 2398, 

United States Revised Statutes, and must be strictly complied with by yourselves, your office assistants, and deputy 

surveyors. 

All directions in conflict with these instructions are hereby 

abrogated. 

In all official communications, this edition will be known 

and referred to as the Manual of 1902. 

Very respectfully, 

BINGER HERMANN, 

Commissioner. 

To SURVEYORS GENERAL OF THE UNITED STATES. 

-3- 

(Pages 5 through 18 and half of page 19 are deleted. They 

contain the “History of Legislation” and Revised Statutes, 

identical to the 1894 Manual in content.) 

SYSTEM OF RECTANGULAR SURVEYING. 

[See Plates I1 and 111.1 

24. Existing law requires that in general the public lands 

of the United States “shall be divided by north and south 

lines run according to the true meridian, and by others crossing them at right angles so as to form townships six miles 

square,” and that the corners of the townships thus surveyed 

“must be marked with progressive numbers from the beginning.” 

Also, that the townships shall be subdivded into thirty-six 

sections, each of which shall contain six hundred and forty 

acres, as nearly as may be, by a system of two sets of parallel 

lines, one governed by true meridians and the other by parallels of latitude, the latter intersecting the former at right 

angles, at intervals of a mile. 

25. In the execution of the public surveys under existing 

law, it is apparent that the requirements that the lines of 

survey shall conform to true meridians, and that the 

townships shall be 6 miles square, taken together, involve a 

mathematical impossibility due to the convergency of the 

meridians. 

Therefore, to conform the meridional township lines to the 

true meridians produces townships of a trapezoidal form 

which do not contain the precise area of 23,040 acres required 

by law, and which discrepancy increases with the increase in 

the convergency of the meridians, as the surveys attain the 

higher latitudes. 

26. In view of these facts, and under the provisions of 

section 2 of the act of May 18, 1796, that sections of a mile 

square shall contain 640 acres, as nearly as may be, and also 

under those of section 3 of the act of May 10,1800, that “in all 

cases where the exterior lines of the townships, thus to be 

subdivided into sections and half sections, shall exceed, or 

shall not extend 6 miles, the excess or deficiency shall be 

specially noted, and added to or deducted from the western or 

northern ranges of sections or half sections in such township, 

according as the error may be in running lines from east to 

west, or from south 

-20- 

to north; the sections and half sections bounded on the northern and western lines of such townships shall be sold as 

containing only the quantity expressed in the returns and 

plats, respectively, and all others as containing the complete 

legal quantity,” the public lands of the United States shall be 

surveyed under the methods of the system of rectangular 

surveying, which harmonizes the incompatibilities of the 

requirements of law and practice, as follows: 

First. The establishment of a principal meridian conforming to the true meridian, and, at right angles to it, a base line 

conforming to a parallel of latitude. 

Second. The establishment of standard parallels conforming to parallels of latitude, initiated from the principal meridian at intervals of 24 miles and extended east and west of 

the same. 

Third. The establishment of guide meridians conforming 

to true meridians, initiated upon the base line and successive 

standard parallels at intervals of 24 miles, resulting in tracts 

of land 24 miles square, as nearly as may be, which shall be 

subsequently divided into tracts of land 6 miles square by two 

sets of lines, one conforming to true meridians, crossed by 

others conforming to parallels of latitude at interval of 6 

miles, containing 23,040 acres, as nearly as may be, and 

designated townships. 

Such townships shall be subdivided into thirty-six tracts, 

called sections, each of which shall contain 640 acres, as 

nearly as may be, by two sets of parallel lines, one set parallel 

to a true meridian and the other conforming to parallels of 

latitude, mutually intersecting at intervals of 1 mile and at 

right angles, as nearly as may be. 

27. Any series of contiguous townships or sections situated north and south of each other constitutes a RANGE, 

while such a series situated in an east and west direction 

constitutes a TIER. 

The accompanying diagram (Plate 11), and the specimen 

field notes (page 1471, pertaining to the same, will serve to 

illustrate the method of running lines to form tracts of land 

24 miles square, as well as the method of running the exterior 

lines of townships, and the order and mode of subdividing 

townships will be found illustrated in the accompanying 

specimen field notes (page 159), conforming with the 

township plat (Plate 111). The method here presented is designed to insure a full compliance with every practicable 

requirement, meaning, and intent of the surveying laws. 

28. By the terms of the original law and by general practice, section lines were surveyed from south to north and from 

east to west, in order to uniformly place excess or deficiency of 

measurement on the north and west sides of the townships. 

But under modern conditions many cases arise in which a 

departure from this method is necessary. Where the west or 

the north boundary is sufficiently correct as to course, to 

694 
serve as a basis for rectangular subdivision, and the opposite 

line is defective, the section lines should be run by a reversed 

method. 

For convenience the well-surveyed lines on which subdivisions are to be based, will be called governing boundaries of 

the township. The rules provided for thus securing rectangular work are given on pages 55 to 61. 

29. The tiers of townships will be numbered, to the north 

or south, commencing with No. 1, at the base line; and the 

ranges of the townships, to the east or west, beginning with 

No. 1, at the principal meridian of the system. 

-21- 

30. The thirty-six sections in to which a township is subdivided are numbered, commencing with number one at the 

northeast angle of the township, and proceeding west to number six, and thence proceeding east to number twelve, and so 

on, alternately, to number thirty-six in the southeast angle. 

In all cases of surveys of fractional townships, the sections 

will bear the same numbers they would have if the township 

was full; and where doubt arises as to which section numbers 

should be omitted, the proper section numbers will be used on 

the side or sides which are governing boundaries, leaving any 

deficiency to fall on the opposite sides. 

31. Standard parallels (formerly called correction lines) 

shall be established at intervals of 24 miles, north and south 

of the baseline, guide meridians at intervals of 24 miles, east 

and west of the principal meridian; thus confining the errors 

resulting from convergence of meridians and inaccuracies in 

measurement within comparatively small areas. 

INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR ADJUSTMENTS. 

32. The surveys of the public lands of the United States, 

embracing the establishment of base lines, principal meridians, standard parallels, meander lines, and the subdvisions 

of townships, will be made with instruments provided with 

the accessories necessary to determine a direction with reference to the true meridian, independently of the magnetic 

needle. 

33. Burt’s improved solar compass, or a transit of approved 

construction, with or without solar attachment, will be used 

in all cases. When a transit without solar attachment is 

employed, Polaris observations and the retracements necessary to execute the work in accordance with existing law and 

the requirements of these instructions will be insisted upon. 

Observations every clear night will be necessary to secure 

accuracy in the direction of transit reference lines, when 

solar apparatus is not used. The method of connecting surveys with the stellar meridian should distinctly appear in the 

field notes, as evidence that the courses were not derived 

from the magnetic needle. 

34. Deputies using instruments with solar apparatus will 

be required to make observations on the star Polaris at the 

beginning of every survey, and whenever necessary to test 

the accuracy of the solar apparatus. 

Observations required to test the adjustments of the solar 

apparatus will be made at the corner where the survey begins, or at the camp of the deputy surveyor nearest said 

corner; and in all cases the deputy will fully state in the field 

notes the exact location of the observing station. 

35. Deputy surveyors will examine the adjustments of 

their instruments, and take the latitude daily, weather permitting, while running all lines of the public surveys. (For 

directions see page 153.) They will make complete records in 

their field notes, under proper dates, of the making of all 

observations in compliance with these instructions, showing 

the character and condition ofthe instrument in use, and the 

precision attained in the survey, by comparing the direction 

of the line run with the meridian determined by observation. 

36. On every survey executed with solar instruments, the 

deputy will, at least once on each working day, record in his 

field notes the proper reading of the latitude are; the declination of the sun, corrected 

-22- 

for refraction, set off on the declination are; and note the 

correct local mean time of his observation, which, for the 

record, will be taken at least two hours from apparent noon. 

In field inspection of contract surveys, the examiners are 

required to obtain the meridian, both by solar and stellar 

observations, testing their instruments fully before reporting on the courses of the deputy’s lines. Hence no deputy 

should incur risk by omitting any of the safeguards here 

required as essential to accurate work. 

37. The construction and adjustments of all surveying instruments used in surveying the public lands of the United 

States will be tested at least once a year, and oftener, if 

necessary, on the true meridian, established under the direction of the surveyor general of the district; and if found 

defective, the instruments shall undergo such repairs or modifications as may be found necessary to secure the closest 

possible approximation to accuracy and uniformity in all 

field work controlled by such instruments. 

38. The instruments for measuring lines are the chain and 

pins. Each deputy will be provided with a standard steel 

chain or steel tape of approved style, precisely adjusted to the 

standard measures kept by the surveyor general. The deputy’s standard measure will not be used on the field work, but 

be carefully preserved in camp and used for purposes of frequent comparison with his field chains or steel tapes, in order 

that changes due to constant use may be discovered at the 

beginning of each day’s work. All his returns of distance will 

be made in miles, chains, and links, a chain of 100 links being 

equal to 66 feet. Engineers’ chains reading by feet only are 

not to be used in public-land surveys. Distances of height or 

depth may be given in feet or inches. In these details the 

specimen field notes are to be observed. 

39. The simple conditions imperatively demanded for all 

accurate measurements are specified in the chainman’s oath, 

promising that he will level the chain upon even and uneven 

ground, will plumb the pins, either by sticking or dropping 

them, and will report the true distances. These brief rules, 

faithfully observed, will render chaining sufficiently exact to 

stand the test of inspection by strict examiners. 

40. Before chainmen are entrusted with their actual 

duties, they should be exercised for practice and thoroughly 

instructed, under the eye of their employer, by chaining two 

or three times over one or more trial lines of hilly or moun695 
tainous surface, to ascertain the accuracy and uniformity of 

the results. The methods used by competent surveyors to 

obtain true horizontal distance over steep slopes, are too 

important to be disregarded, yet too elementary to be given 

here. When using only a portion of the chain, on steep hillsides, especially in a strong wind, accuracy requires a plumbline or some equivalent means, to mark the vertical. The 

dropping of flag pins not loaded, too often in such cases leads 

to repeated and serious error, which may be avoided by dropping a more suitable object, such as a piece of metal carried in 

the pocket. 

If any other methods of obtaining measuremens up or down 

hills or across ravines be resorted to, except that here authorized, the facts will be stated in the returns, and the distances 

must well sustain the tests of the field examiner. 

-23- 

MARKING LINES BETWEEN CORNERS. 

41. The marking of trees and brush along lines was required by law as positively as the erection of monuments, by 

the act of 1796, which is still in force. The old rules therefor 

are unchanged. 

42. All lines on which are to be established the legal corner 

boundaries will be marked after this method, viz: Those trees 

which may be intersected by the line will have two chops or 

notches cut on the sides facing the line, without any other 

marks whatever. These are called sight trees or line trees. A 

sufficient number of other trees standing within 50 links of 

the line, on either side of it, will be blazed on two sides 

diagonally or quartering toward the line, in order to render 

the line conspicuous, and readily to be traced in either direction, the blazes to be opposite each other, coinciding in direction with the line where the trees stand very near it, and to 

approach nearer each other toward the line, the farther the 

line passes from the blazed trees. In early surveys, an opposite practice prevailed. 

43. Due care will ever be taken to have the lines so well 

marked as to be readily followed, and to cut the blazes deep 

enough to leave recognizable scars as long as the trees stand. 

This can be attained only by blazing through the bark to the 

wood. Trees marked less thoroughly will not be considered 

sufficiently blazed. Where trees two inches or more in diameter occur along a line, the required blazes will not be omitted. 

44. Lines are also to be marked by cutting away enough of 

the undergrowth of bushes or other vegetation to facilitate 

correct sighting of instruments. Where lines cross deep 

wooded valleys, by sighting over the tops, the usual blazing of 

trees in the low ground when accessible will be performed, 

that settlers may find their proper limits of land and timber 

without resurvey. 

45. The practice of blazing a random line to a point some 

distance away from an objective corner, and leaving through 

timber a marked line which is not the true boundary, is 

unlawful, and no such surveys are acceptable. The decisions 

of some State courts make the marked trees valid evidence of 

the place of the legal boundary, even if such line is crooked, 

and has the quarter-section corner far off the blazed line. 

46. On trial or random lines, therefore, the trees will not 

be blazed, unless occasionally, from indispensable necessity, 

and then it will be done so guardedly as to prevent the 

possibility of confounding the marks of the trial line with the 

true. But bushes and limbs of trees may be lopped, and stakes 

set on the trial or random line, at every ten chains, to enable 

the surveyor on his return to follow and correct the trial line 

and establish therefrom the true line. To prevent confusion, 

the temporary stakes set on the trial or random line will be 

removed when the surveyor returns to establish the true line. 

47. The terms of each act making appropriation for compensation of surveys, allow increased pay for lines passing 

through lands “covered with dense undergrowth.” The evident purpose of the increase is to compensate the surveyor for 

the additional labor and delay of cutting away brush and 

trees which obstruct the proper survey of the line, and also of 

blazing the line as required by law. 

By dense undergrowth is meant thick bushes, boughs, or 

other vegetable growth of such height as to obstruct the use of 

the transit and 

-24- 

require cutting away to obtain sights along line; also bushes, 

brush, or vines, that are of such character as to seriously 

impede the work of traversing and chaining the line. 

48. Increased rates for heavy timber or dense undergrowth will not be allowed for lines on which no cutting away 

of brush is done or is necessary, or where blazing of timber is 

generally neglected, if these conditions shall be shown by 

field inspection. 

INSUPERABLE OBJECTS ON LINE-WITNESS 

POINTS. 

49. Under circumstances where the survey of a township 

or section line is obstructed by an impassable obstacle, such 

as a pond, swamp, or marsh (not meanderable), the line will 

be prolonged across such obstruction by making the necessary right-angle offsets (Plate 111, sec. 22); or, if such proceeding be impracticable, a traverse line will be run, or some 

proper trigonometical operation employed to locate the line 

on the opposite side of the obstruction; and in case the line, 

either meridional or latitudinal, thus regained, is recovered 

beyond the intervening obstacle, said line will be surveyed 

back to the margin of the obstruction and all the particulars, 

in relation to the field operations, will be fully stated in the 

field notes. 

50. As a guide in alinement and measurement, at each 

point where the line intersects the margin of an obstacle, a 

witness point will be established, except when such point is 

less than 20 chains distant from the true point for a legal 

corner which falls in the obstruction, in which case a witness 

will be established at the intersection. (See Plate 111, section 

22; also Witness Points and Witness Corners, page 52.) 

51. In a case where all the points of intersection with the 

obstacle to measurement fall more than 20 chains from the 

proper place for a legal corner in the obstruction, and a 

witness corner can be placed on the offset line within 20 

chains of the inaccessible corner point, such witness corner 

will be established. (See Plate 111, south boundary of section 

16.) 

696 
ESTABLISHING CORNERS. 

52. To procure the faithful execution of this part of a surveyor's duty is a matter of the utmost importance. After true 

coursing and most exact measurements, the establishment of 

corners is the consummation of the field work. Therefore, if 

the corners be not perpetuated in a permanent and workmanlike manner, the principal object of surveying operations will 

not have been attained. 

The points at which corners will be established are fully 

stated in the several articles: "Base Lines," "Principal Meridians," "Standard Parallels," etc., following the title "Initial 

Points," page 55. 

53. All marking of letters and figures should be done neatly, distinctly, and durably, using the tools best adapted to the 

purpose, and keeping them in good order. These tools are the 

chisel and hammer for marking stones, and the scribing tool 

or gouge for surfaces of wood. Since the greatest permanency 

requires stone corner monuments, and the perishable nature 

of wood prohibits its use where stones can be found or 

brought, the deputy should be provided with good chisels, to 

enable him to mark neatly and expeditiously, using arabic 

figures for all numbers. 

-25- 

SURVEYING MONUMENTS. 

54. These consist of what is called the corner, and its 

accessories. The corner itself should be durable and firmly 

imbedded. It may consist of an iron monument, rod, or pipe, a 

cross cut on a ledge, or a marked stone; or in case these can 

not be obtained, then a post of durable timber. Where a stone 

corner has to be set upon a ledge of surface rock, it should be 

of large size and supported in a well-built stone mound, with 

its marks well shown; in addition to which, the usual witness 

mound will be separately built. 

55. The accessories are needed to witness and identify the 

corner as a monument of public survey, and may consist of 

the following, mentioned in the order of their value and 

desirability: 

Bearing objects, such as notable cliffs, rocks, boulders, etc., 

marked with a cross, the letters B. 0, and a section number. 

Memorials, buried 12 to 24 inches under the surface at the 

corner, such as glass or stone ware, potsherds, marked stones, 

cast iron, charcoal, or charred stake. 

Pits of proper size and arrangement. 

Mound of stones, at proper position and distance from the 

Bearing trees, blazed and marked as required. 

Stake in pit, with letters and figures necessary. 

Mound of earth, which in many regions is the least durable 

corner. 

and useful of all accessories. 

DESCRIPTIONS OF CORNERS. 

56. The form and language used in the following articles, 

in describing, for each one of the thirteen classes of corners, 

eight specific constructions and markings, with the stated 

modifications in certain cases, will be carefully followed by 

697 

deputy surveyors in their field notes; and their field work will 

strictly comply with the requirements of the descriptions. 

57. When pits and mounds of earth are made accessories to 

corners, the pits will always have a rectangular plan; while 

the mounds will have a conical form, with circular base; and 

in all cases both pits and mounds will have dimensions at 

least as great as those specified in the descriptions. Deputy 

surveyors will strictly adhereto these provisions, and no departure from the stated requirements will be permitted, 

either in instructions or practice in the field. (See Plates IV 

and V.) 

58. Referring to the numbered paragraphs, the corners 

described in "3" will be preferred to those described in either 

"1" or "2", when corners are established in loose, sandy soil, 

and good bearing trees are available; under similar conditions, the corners described in "5" and %" will be preferred to 

those described in "4" and "7", respectively. 

59. The selection of the particular construction to be 

adopted in any class will be left, as a matter of course, to the 

judgment and discretion of the deputy, who will assign the 

greatest weight to the durability of the corner materials and 

permanency of the monuments. 

ABBREVIATIONS ALLOWED IN RETURNS. 

60. Dimensions of stones, posts, and pits should for brevity 

be expressed in a regular manner, in consecutive order of 

length, breadth, 

-26- 

and thickness, as shown in specimens; for instance, "a stone 

23 x 10 x 8 ins." To describe a mound, the material, the 

altitude, and diameter of base will be given, as "mound of 

earth 4 ft. base, 2l/2 ft. high." 

The following contractions are authorized to be used in the 

preparation of field notes, transcripts, inspection reports and 

similar records, and no others should be introduced. The 

arrangement of lines, blanks, spaces, numbers, and the 

general form of the specimen notes should be observed: 

A. for acres. 

a. m. " forenoon. 

A. M. C. " aux. meander corner. 

asc. " ascend. 

astron. " astronomical. 

bdy. " boundary. 

bdrs. " boundaries. 

bet. " between. 

B. 0. " bearing object. 

B. T. " bearing tree. 

C. C. " closing corner. 

chs. " chains. 

cor., cors." corner, corners. 

corr. " correction. 

decl. " declination. 

dep. " departure. 

desc. " descend. 

dia. 'I diameter. 

diff. " difference. 

dist. " distance. 

D. S. " deputy surveyor. 

E. " east. 

elong. " elongation. 

frac. " fractional. 

mag. 

M. C. 

mer. 

mkd. 

N. 

NE . 

NW. 

obs. 

obsn. 

p. m. 

Pol. 

Pr. Mer. 

Pt. of Tr. 

Y4 sec. 

R., Rs. 

red. 

S. 

s. c. 

SE . 

sec., secs. 

S. M. C. 

sq. 

St. Par. 

sw. 

" magnetic. 

" Meander corner. 

" meridian. 

" marked. 

" north. 

" northeast. 

" northwest. 

" observe. 

" observation. 

" afternoon. 

" Polaris. 

" principal meridian. 

" point of triangulation. 

" quarter section. 

" range, ranges. 

" reduce, reduction. 

" south. 

" standard corner. 

" southeast. 

" section, sections. 

" special meander corner. 

" square. 

" standard parallel. 

" southwest. 
ft. 

G. M. 

h., hrs. 

ins. 

lat. 

L. c. 

lks. 

1. m. t. 

long. 

m. 

" foot, feet. 

" guide meridian. 

" hour, hours. 

" inches. 

" latitude. 

" lower culmination. 

" links. 

" local mean time. 

" longitude. 

" minutes. 

T., or Tp. " township. 

Ts., or Tps." townships. 

temp. " temporary. 

U. C. " upper culmination. 

var. " variation. 

W. " west. 

W. C. " witness corner. 

w. corr. " watch correction. 

W. P. " witness point. 

w. t. " watch time. 

AUTHORIZED FORM AND DESCRIPTIONS OF 

CORNERS. 

61. The forms given below will guide the surveyor in the 

choice and erection of monuments and accessories, and the 

same forms will be followed in preparing field notes. In case a 

deputy is compelled to choose another style of corner, he 

should state in his notes the reasons that made it necessary to 

depart from the rules, and should erect a monument of equal 

or greater permanence than the one prescribed. 

62. The punctuation marks heretofore shown in former 

editions, to be used with letters and figures on stones, posts, 

and trees, are now omitted, for the reason that they are 

neither made, nor desired to be made, in the actual field 

work, and hence should not be inserted in the official returns. 

63. The stated dimensions of posts are minimum; if posts 

are longer than 3 feet, the extra length will be placed in the 

ground; the posts will in no case project more than 12 ins. 

above the natural surface of the earth. 

- ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of Tps. 13 N., Rs. 

21 and 22 E., marked S C on N.; with 6 grooves on N., E., and 

W. faces; and raise a mound of stone', 2 ft. base, 1Y2 ft. high, 

N. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a stone, - X - X - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of Tps. 13 N., Rs. 

21 and 22 E., marked S C on N.; with 6 grooves on N., E., and 

W. faces; from which 

- E., lks. dist., marked2 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. 

T 13 N R 22 E S 31 B T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O w., - lks. dist., marked 

T 13 N R 21 E S 36 B T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

standard cor. of Tps. 13 N., Rs. 22 and 23 E., marked 

S C T 13 N on N., 

R 23 E S 31 on E., and 

R 22 E S 36 on W. face; with 6 grooves on N., E., and W. 

faces; digpits, 30 X 24 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 4ft., and N. ofpost, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 

ft. base, 2% ft. high, N. of cor. 

-28- 

-27- 

STANDARD TOWNSHIP CORNERS. 

[See Plates I1 and IV.] 

64. When more than one-half of all the standard township 

and section corners on any 6 miles of a base line or standard 

parallel are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 

and 2, if the corners therein described are established, will be 

modified as follows: Strike out "S C on N." After "marked," 

insert the words: 

"S C 13 N on N., 

22 E on E., and 

21 E on W. face." 

When under the conditions above specified the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the east pit and marked instead of the stone, and described as 

exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, page 28. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

- 

Set a - stone, X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of Tps. 13 N., Rs. 

21 and 22 E., marked S C on N.; with 6 grooves on N., E., and 

W. faces; dig pits, 30 X 24 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. 

and W., 4 ft., and N. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, N. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a - stone, X - X - ins., 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a -post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

S C T 13 N on N., 

R 23 E S 31 on E., and 

R 22 E S 36 on W. face; with 6 grooves on N., E., and W. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. E., 

for standard cor. of Tps. 13 N., Rs. 22 and 23 E., marked 

faces, from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 13 N R 23 E S 31 B T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 13 N R 22 E S 36 B T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 

12 ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of Tps. 13 N., Rs. 22 

and 23 E.; dig pits, 30 X 24 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, 

N., E., and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 

ft. base, 2% ft. high, over deposit. 

In E. pit drive a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in 

the ground, marked 

S C T 13 N on N., 

R 23 E S 31 on E., and 

1. Mound of stone will consist of not less than four stones, and will be at least 1% ft. 

high, with 2 ft. base. 

2. All bearing trees will be marked with the township, range, and section in which they 

stand. 

698 
R 22 E S 36 on W. face; with 6 grooves on N., E., and W. 

faces. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A -, - ins . diam., for standard cor. of Tps. 13 

N., Rs. 22 and 23 E., I mark 

S C T 13 N. on N., 

R 23 E S 31 on E., and 

R 22 E S 36 on W. side, with 6 notches on N., E., and W. 

sides; dig pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, N., E., 

and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth around 

tree. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, AS C T 13 N on N., 

R 23 E S31 on E., and 

R 22 E S 36 on W. side; with 6 notches on N., E., and W. 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

ins. diam., for standard cor. of Tps. 13 

N., Rs. 22 and 23 E., I mark 

sides; from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 13 N R 23 E S 31 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 13 N R 22 E S 36 B T. 

CLOSING TOWNSHIP CORNERS. 

[See Plates IV and V.1 

65. When more than one-half of all the township corners 

are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and2, if the 

corners therein described are established, will be modified, as 

follows: Strike out “C C on S.;”. After “marked”, insert the 

words 

“C C 3 N on S., 

2 W on E., and 

3 W on W. face.” 

-29- 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described inparagraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the east pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described as 

exemplified in the last cause of paragraph 6, below. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

- 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of Tps. 4 N. Rs. 2 

and 3 W., marked C C on S.; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. 

faces; dig pits,30 X 24 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 4 ft., and S. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 

5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, S. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

is. in the ground, for closing cor. of Tps. 4 N., Rs. 2 

and 3 W., marked C C on S.; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. 

faces; and raise a mound of stone. 2 ft. base, 1Yz ft. high, S. of 

cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a stone, X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of Tps. 4 N., Rs. 2 

and 3 W., marked C C on S.; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. 

faces; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T 4 N R 2 W S 6 B T. 

A ins. diam., bears S. W., 

- Iks. dist., marked 

T 4 N R 3 W S 1 B T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the gound, for 

closing cor. of Tps. 4 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked 

C C T 4 N on S., 

R 2 W S 6 on E., and 

R 3 W S 1 on W. face; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. faces; 

digpits, 30 X 24 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and W., 4 

ft., and S. of post 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. 

base, 2% feet high, S. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a 

C C T 4 N on S., 

R 2 W S 6 on E., and 

R 3 W S 1 on W. face; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. faces; 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for closing cor. of Tps. 4 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked 

from which 

lks. dist., marked 

T 4 NR 2 W S 6 B T. 

A ins. diam., bears S. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T4NR3 W S1 BT. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 

12 ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of Tps. 4 N., Rs. 2 and 3 

W.; dig pits, 30 X 24 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, S., E., 

and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 

2Y2 ft. high, over deposit. 

-30- 

In E. pit, drive a 

in the ground, marked 

C C T 4 N on S., 

R 2 W S 6 on E., and 

R3 W S 1 on W. face; with 6 grooves on S., E., and W. faces. 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

, A- ins. diam., for closing cor. of Tps. 4 N., 

Rs. 2 and 3 W., I mark 

699 
C C T 4 N on S., 

R 2 W S 6 on E., and 

R 3 W S 1 on W. side, with 6 notches on S., E., and W. sides; 

dig pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, S., E., and 

W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth around tree. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A -, - ins. diam., for closing cor. of Tps. 4 N., 

Rs. 2 and 3 W., I mark 

C C T 4 N on S., 

R 2 W S 6 on E., and 

R 3 W S 1 on W. side, with 6 notches on S., E., and W. sides; 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

from which 

lks. dist., marked 

T 4 N R2 W S 6 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T4NR3 W S 1BT. 

66. Connecting Lines. 

All closing township corners on base lines or standard 

parallels, will be connected, by course and distance, with the 

nearest standard corner thereon; closing corners on all other 

lines, will be connected, in a similar manner, with the 

nearest township, section, or quarter section corner, or mile 

or half-mile monument, as existing conditons may require. 

67. Relative positions of Closing Corners, Pits, Mounds, 

and Bearing Trees. 

Any line, which by intersection with another surveyed 

line, determines the place for a closing corner, will be called a 

closing line; then in general, the mound and one pit of a 

closing corner will be placed on such “closing line,” N., S., E., 

or W. of the closing corner, as prevailing conditions may 

require; while said mound and pit, with the two bearing trees 

(if used), will always be located on the same side of the line 

closed upon, and on which the other pits will be established, 

as directed in the foregoing descriptions, and illustrated on 

Plate V. 

68. Positions and Dimensions ofpits of Closing Corners on 

irregular boundaries. 

When a closing line intersects an irregular boundary at an 

angle less than 75”, and stone or post closing corners are 

established, the pit on the boundary adjoining the acute 

angle will be omitted, and the pit on the opposite side of the 

closing corner will have its dimensions increased, as follows: 

For a closing township corner, the enlarged pit will measure 

42 X 36 X 12 ins.; for a closing section corner it will be 30 X 24 

X 12 ins. (See Plate V, figs. 2 and 3.) 

69. Township or Section interfering Closing Corners. 

When two closing lines, at right angles to each other, 

intersect an irregular boundary at points less than 8 feet 

apart, and stone or post 

-31- 

corners are established, the pits, that under ordinary circumstances would be placed on the boundary, will be omitted, 

and the pits on the closing lines will have their dimensions 

increased to 36 X 36 X 12 ins. (See Plate V, fig. 4, at a and b.) 

70. Positions and Dimensions of Pits and Mounds of interfering Closing Corners. 

When, under the conditions stated in paragraphs 68 and 

69, the corners “Mound of Earth, with Deposit and Stake in 

Pit” are established, the pits on the boundary line will be 

omitted when the distance between the closing corners is less 

than 10 feet and greater than 4 feet, and the dimensions of 

the pits on the closing lines will be increased as directed in 

said paragraphs. 

In case the distance between the closing corners is less than 

4 feet, one mound, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, will cover the 

deposits ofboth closing corners. (See Plate V,fig. 4, at c, d, and 

e.) 

CORNERS COMMON TO FOUR TOWNSHIPS. 

[See Plate IV.] 

71. When more than one-half of all the corners of a 

township are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 

and 2, if the corners therein described are established, will be 

modified as follows: After “marked”, insert the words 

“3 N on NE., 

2 W on SE., 

2 N on SW., and 

3 W on NW. face;” 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a stone, - X - X - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 2 and 

3 W., marked with 6 notches on each edge; dig pits, 24 X 24 X 

12 ins., on each line, N., E., and W., 4 ft., and S. of stone, 8 ft. 

dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, S. of 

cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a stone, - X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 2 and 

3 W., marked with 6 notches on each edge, and raise a mound 

of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, S. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - stone, X - X - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 2 and 

3 W., marked with 6 notches on each edge, from which 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T3NR2 WS31BT. 

A-, - ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

700 
T 2 N R 2 W S 6 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 3 W S 1 B T. 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 3 W S 36 B T. 

T 3 N S 31 on NE., 

R 2 W S 6 on SE., 

T 2 N S 1 on SW., and 

R 3 W S 36 on NW. side, with 6 notches facing each cardinal 

point; dig pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins., on each line, N., S., E., and 

W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth around tree. 

-33- 

-32- 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked 

T 3 N S 31 on NE., 

R 2 W S 6 on SE., 

T 2 N S 1 on SW., and 

R 3 W S 36 on NW. face, with 6 notches on each edge; dig 

pits, 24 X 24 X 12 ins., on each line, N., E., and W., 4 ft., and S. 

of post, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. 

high, S. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a-post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

T 3 N S 31 on NE., 

R 2 W S 6 on SE., 

T 2 N S 1 on SW., and 

R 3 W S 36 on NW., face., with 6 notches on each edge; from 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W., marked 

which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 2 W S 31 B T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. E.,- 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 6 B T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. - O w., - lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 3 W S 1 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 3 W S 36 B T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 

12 ins. in the ground, for cor. ofTps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 2 and 3 W.; 

dig pits 24 X 24 X 12 ins., on each line, N., S., E., and W. of 

cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5ft. base, 2% ft. 

high, over deposit. 

In E. pit drive a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in 

the ground, marked 

T 3 N S 31 on NE., 

R 2 W S 6 on SE., 

T 2 N S 1 on SW., and 

R 3 W S 36 on NW. face, with 6 notches on each edge. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

, A- ins. diam., for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 

2 and 3 W., I mark 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, AT 3 N S 31 on NE., 

R 2 W S 6 on SE., 

T 2 N S 1 on SW., and 

R 3 W S 36 on NW. side, with 6 notches facing each cardinal 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

ins. diam. , for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., Rs. 

2 and 3 W., I mark 

point; from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 2 W S 31 B T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 6 B T. 

A -, ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 3 W S 1 B T. 

- 

A ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 3 W S 36 B T. 

CORNERS COMMON TO TWO TOWNSHIPS ONLY. 

[See Plates IV and VIII.] 

72. When more than one-half of all the corners of a 

township are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 

and 2, if the corners therein described are established, will be 

modified as follows: 

After “marked”, insert the words: 

“2 N on SW., and 

7 W on NW. face.” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the south pit and marked instead of the stone, and described as 

exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, page 34. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., R. 7 W., 

on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., marked with 6 notches on N. and 

W. edges; dig pits 30 X 24 X 12 ins., on each line, N. and S., 4 

ft., and W. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. 

base, 2Y2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a stone, X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., R. 7 W., 

on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., marked with 6 notches on N. and 

W. edges; and raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 11/2 ft. high, 

W. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

701 
3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

- 

Set a - stone, X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for cor. of Tp. 2 N., R. 5 W., and Tp. 

3 N., R. 6 W., on N. bdy. Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W., marked with 6 

notches on N. and W. edges; from which 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., - lks. 

dist., marked 

T 2 N R 5 W S 6 B T. 

A -, ins. diam., bears 

T 3 N R 6 W S 36 B T. 

- lks. dist., marked 

N. W., 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A 

T 2 N R 7 W S 1 on SW., and 

T 3 N R 7 W S 36 on NW. side, with 6 notches facing N. and 

W.; from which 

- 

A -, 

lks. dist., marked 

ins. diam., for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., R. 

7 W., on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., I mark 

ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

T 2 N R 7 W S 1 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 7 W S 36 B T. 

-34- 

-35- 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of Tp. 2 N., R. 5 W., and Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., on N. bdy. Tp. 2 

N., R. 6 W., marked 

T 2 N R 5 W S 6 on NE., and 

T 3 N R 6 W S 36 on NW. face, with 6 notches on N. and W. 

edges; dig pits 30 X 24 X 12 ins., on each line, E. and W., 4 ft., 

and N. ofpost, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 

2% ft. high, N. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for cor. of Tps. 2 and N., R. 7 W., on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., 

marked 

T 2 N R 7 W S 1 on SW., and 

T 3 N R 7 W S 36 on NW. face, with 6 notches on N. and W. 

edges; from which 

lks. dist., marked 

A -, -ins. diam. bears S. w., ~ 

T 2 N R 7 W S 1 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 7 W S 36 B T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for cor. of Tps. 2 and 3 N., R. 7 W., 

on W. bdy. Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W.: dig pits, 30 X 24 X 12 ins., on each 

line, N. and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 

ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, over deposit. 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

In W. pit drive a 

T 2 N R 7 W S 1 on SW., and 

T 3 N R 7 W S 36 on NW. face, with 6 notches on N. and W. 

edges. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

, AT 4 N R 5 W S 31 on NE., and 

T 3 N R 5 W S 6 on SE. side; with 6 notches facing N. and E.; 

dig pits 24 X 18 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, N. and E. of 

cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth around tree. 

ins. diam., for cor. of Tps. 3 and 4 N., R. 

5 W., on E. bdy. Tp. 4 N., R. 6 W., I mark 

CORNERS REFERRING TO ONE TOWNSHIP ONLY 

[See Plates IV and VIII.] 

73. When more than one-half of all corners of a township 

are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and2, if the 

corners therein described are established, will be modified as 

follows: After “marked” insert the words: 

“2 N 6 W. on SW. face.” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the south pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described 

as exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, page 36. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - stone, - X - X ~ ins., 

~ ins. in the ground, for NE. cor. of Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W., 

marked with 6 notches on S. and W. edges; dig pits, 36 X 36 X 

12 ins., on each line, S. and W. of stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a 

mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, SW. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a stone, - X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for NE. cor. of Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W., 

marked with 6 notches on S. and W. edges; and raise a mound 

of stone, 2 ft. base, 1Y2 ft. high, SW. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Tree. 

- 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground for NE. cor. of Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W., 

marked with 6 notches on S. and W. edges; from which 

W., ~ lks. dist., marked 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. 

T 2 N R 6 W S 1 B T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

NE. cor. of Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W., marked 

T 2 N R 5 W S 6 on NE., 

S 6 on SE., 

T 2 N R 6 W S 1 on SW., and 

S 6 on NW. face, with 6 notches on S. and W. edges; dig pits, 

702 
36 X 36 X 12 ins., on each line, S. and W. ofpost, 8 ft. dist.; and 

raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, SW. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a-post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

T 3 N R 6 W S 31 on NE., 

S 1 on SE., 

T 2 N R 7 W S 1 on SW., and 

S 1 on NW. face, with 6 notches on N. and E. edges; from 

A - , -- ins. diam., bears N. E., 

for SW. cor. of Tp. 3 N., R. 6 W., marked 

which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 6 W S 31 B T. 

-36- 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for SW. cor. of T. 3 N., R. 6 W.; dig 

pits, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., on each line, N. and E. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; 

and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. high, over 

deposit. 

In E. pit drive a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in 

the ground, marked 

T 3 N R 6 W S 31 on NE., 

S 1 on SE., 

T 2 N R 7 W S 1 on SW., and 

S 1 on NW. face, with 6 notches on N. and E. edges. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, 

T 3 N R 6 W S 31 on NE., 

S 1 on SE., 

T 2 N R 7 W S 1 on SW., and 

S 1 on NW side, with 6 notches facing N. and E.; dig pits, 30 

X 24 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, N. and E. of cor., 5 ft. 

dist.; and raise a mound of earth around tree. 

ins. diam., for SW. cor. of Tp. 3 N., R. 6 

W., I mark 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A-, 

S 6 on NE., 

T 3 N R 5 W S 6 on SE., 

S 6 on SW., and 

T 4 N R 6 WS 36 on NW. side, with 6 notches facing N. and 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

ins. diam., for SE. cor. of Tp. 4 N., R. 6 

W., I mark 

W.; from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 4 N R 6 W S 36 B T. 

STANDARD SECTION CORNERS. 

[See Plates I1 and IV.] 

74. 1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a ~ stone, X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of secs. 

31 and 32, marked S C on N.; with 5 grooves on E., and 1 

groove on W. face; dig pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins., crosswise on 

each line, E. and W., 3 ft., and N. of stone, 7 ft. dist.; and raise 

a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a stone, X - X ~ ins., 

~ ins. in the ground, for stand. cor. of secs. 35 and 36, 

marked S C on N.; with 1 groove on E. and 5 grooves on W. 

face; and raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base 1?42 ft. high, N. of 

cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a ~ stone, X X - ins., 

-ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of secs. 33 and 34, 

marked S C on N.; with 3 grooves on E. and W. faces; from 

which 

- 

A ins. diam., bears N. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 13 NR21 E S34BT. 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. ~ O w., - lks. dist., marked 

T 13 N R 21 E S 33 B T. 

-37- 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

standard cor. of secs. 32 and 33, marked 

S C T 13 N R 21 E on N., 

S 33 on E., and 

S 32 on W. face, with 4 grooves on E., and 2 grooves on W. 

face; dig pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 3 ft., and N. of post, 7 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 

4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a 

S C T 13 N R 21 E on N., 

S 35 on E., and 

S 34 on W. face, with two grooves on E., and 4 grooves on W. 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for standard cor. of secs. 34 and 35, marked 

face; from which 

- lks. dist. marked 

T 13 N R 21 E S 35 B T. 

- 

A ins. diam., bears N. - O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 13 N R 21 E S 34 B T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart,of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for standard cor. of secs. 33 and 

34; dig pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, N., E., 

and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 

2 ft. high, over deposit. 

703 
In E. pit drive a ~ stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in 

the ground, marked 

S C T 13 N R 22 E on N., 

S 34 on E., and 

S 33 on W. face; with 3 grooves on E. and W. faces. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, and 32, I mark 

S C T 13 N R 22 E on N., 

S 32 on E., and S 31 on W. side, with 5 notches on E., and 1 

notch on W. side; dig pits, 18 X 18 X 12 ins., N., E., and W. of 

cor., 4 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth around tree. 

ins. diam., for standard cor. of secs. 31 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A -, - ins. diam., for standard cor. of secs. 35 

S C T 13 N R 22 E on N., 

S 36 on E., and 

S 35 on W. side, with 1 notch on E., and 5 notches on W. 

side; from which 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

lks. dist., marked 

and 36, I mark 

T 13 N R 22 E S 36 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 13 N R 22 E S 35 B T. 

-38- 

CLOSING SECTION CORNERS. 

[See Plates IV and V.1 

75. 1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - stone, X ~ X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of secs. 1 and 2, 

marked C C on S.; with 1 groove on E., and 5 grooves on W. 

face; dig pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins. crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 3 ft., and S. of stone, 7 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 

4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, S. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

- 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of secs. 3 and 4, 

marked C C on S.; with 3 grooves on E. and W. faces; and raise 

a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, S. of cor. Pits 

impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a stone, - X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of secs. 1 and 2, 

marked C C on S.; with 1 groove on E., and 5 grooves on W. 

face; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T 4 N R 3 W S 1 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 4 N R 3 W S 2 B T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

closing cor. of secs. 1 and 2, marked 

C C T 4 NR 3 Won S., 

S 1 on E., and 

S 2 on W. face, with 1 groove on E., and 5 grooves on W. 

face; dig pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, E. and 

W., 3 ft., and S. of post, 7 ft. dist.; and raise a mound ofearth, 4 

ft. base, 2 ft. high, S. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a-post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

C C T 4 N R 3 W on S., 

S 1 on E., and 

S 2 on W. face, with 1 groove on E., and 5 grooves on W. 

face; from which 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. E.,- 

lks. dist., marked 

for closing cor. of secs. 1 and 2, marked 

T 4 N R3 W S 1 B T. 

- 

A -, ~ ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 4 N R 3 W S 2 B T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for closing cor. of secs. 3 and 4; dig 

pits, 24 X 18 X 12 ins., crosswise on each line, S., E., and W. of 

cor., 4 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, 

over deposit. 

-39- 

In E. pit drive a- stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in 

the ground, marked 

C C T 4 N R 3 W on S., 

S 3 on E., and 

S 4 on W. face, with 3 grooves on E. and W. faces. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, 

C C T 4 N R 3 W on S., 

S 1 on E., and 

S 2 on W. side, with 1 notch on E., and 5 notches on W. side; 

dig pits, 18 X 18 X 12 ins., S., E., and W. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and 

raise a mound of earth around tree. 

ins. diam., for closing cor. of secs. 1 and 

2, I mark 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A-, 

C C T 4 N R 3 W on S., 

S 1 on E., and 

S 2 on W. side, with 1 notch on E., and 5 notches on W. side; 

ins. diam., for closing cor. secs. 1 and 2, 

I mark 

from which 

704 
A-, -ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T 4 N R 3 W S 1 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 4 NR 3 W S 2 B T. 

9. All closing section corners, on base lines or standard 

parallels, will be connected by course and distance with the 

nearest standard corner thereon. (See section 143.) 

CORNERS COMMON TO FOUR SECTIONS. 

[See Plates IV and V.1 

76. When more than one-half of all the corners in a 

township are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 

and 2, if the corners therein described are established for cor. 

of secs. 15, 16, 21 and 22, will be modified as follows: after 

“marked,” insert the words 

“4 N on NE., and 

3 W on SE. face.” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the southeast pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described as exemplified in the last clause ofparagraph 6, page 

40. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a stone, X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 14,15,22, and 23, 

marked with 3 notches on S. and 2 notches on E. edge; dig 

pits, 18 X 18 X 12 ins., in each sec. 5% ft. dist.; and raise a 

mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

 ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 14,15,22, and 23, 

marked with 3 notches on S. and 2 notches on E. edge; and 

raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. of cor. Pits 

impracticable. 

-40- 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

____ ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 9, 10, 15, and 16, 

marked with 4 notches on S., and 3 notches on E; edge; from 

which 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 10 B T. 

A-, - ins. diam., bears S. “E.,- 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R2 W S 15 B T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 16 B T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. O w., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 9 B T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a ~ post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of secs. 15, 16, 21, and 22, marked 

T 2 N S 15 on NE., 

R 2 W S 22 on SE., 

S 21 on SW., and 

S 16 on NW. face with 3 notches on S. and E. edges; dig pits, 

18 X 18 X 12 ins., in each sec., 5% ft. dist.; and raise a mound 

of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground 

T 2 N S 25 on NE., 

R 2 W S 36 on SE., 

S 35 on SW., and 

S 26 on NW face, with 1 notch on S. and E. edges; from 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

for cor. of secs. 25, 26,35 and 36, marked 

which 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 25 B T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 36 B T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. - O w., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 35 B T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 26 B T. 

6. Mound, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 25,26,35 and 36; 

dig pits, 18 X 18 X 12 ins., in each sec., 4 ft. dist.; and raise a 

mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In SE. pit drive a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

T 2 N S 25 on NE., 

R 2 W S 36 on SE., 

S 35 on SW., and 

S 26 on NW. face, with 1 notch on S. and E. edges. 

-41- 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, and 32, I mark 

T 2 N S 29 on NE., 

R 2 W S 32 on SE., 

S 31 on SW., and 

S 30 on NW. side, with 1 notch on S., and 5 notches on E. 

side; dig pits 18 X 18 X 12 ins., in each sec., 5 ft. dist.; and 

raise a mound of earth around tree. 

ins. diam., for cor. of secs. 29, 30, 31, 

705 
8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, AT 2 N S 5 on NE., 

R 2 W S 8 on SE., 

S 7 on SW., and 

S 6 on NW. side, with 5 notches on S. and E. sides; from 

ins. diam., for cor. of secs 5,6,7, and 8, I 

mark 

which 

lks. dist., marked 

, A- ins. diam. bears N. E., - 

T 2 NR 2 W S 5 B T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E. - 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 8 B T. 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. -OW. ___ 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 NR 2 W S 7 B T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W. 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 2 W S 6 B T. 

SECTION CORNERS COMMON TO TWO SECTIONS 

ONLY. 

[See Plates IV and VIII.] 

77. When more than one-half of all the corners in a 

township are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 

and 2, if the corners therein described are established near cor. 

of secs. 15, 16,21, and 22, will be modified, as follows: 

After “marked”, insert the words 

“3 N on SW., and 

7 W on NW. face.” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the southwest pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described as exemplified in the last clause ofparagraph 6,page 

42. 

1. Stone, with Pits and Mound ofEarth. (Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W.) 

- 

Set a stone, X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground for cor. of secs. 25 and 363 marked 

with 5 notches on N., and 1 notch on S. edge; digs 24 X 24 X 12 

ins., in each sec., 6 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. 

base, 2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. (Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W.) 

Set a - stone, X X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 15 and 22 marked 

with 3 notches on N. and S. edges; and raise a mound of stone, 

2 ft base, 1Y2 ft. high, W. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

-42- 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. (Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W.) 

Set a stone, X X ~ ins., 

3. The corner established on the range line and described in paragraph 1, will have 

notches to indicate the distances to the NE. and SE. corners of the township. See Plate 

IV, fig. 18; and Plate VIII, Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W. 

-ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 28 and 29, marked 

with 4 notches on E. edge; from which 

- 

ins. diam., bears N. ___ O E., 

lks. dist., marked 

A-, 

T 3 NR 7 W S 28 B T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 7 W S 29 B T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound ofEarth. (Tp. 2 N., R. 6 W.) 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

cor. of 33 and 34 marked 

T 2 N S 34 on NE., and 

R 6 W S 33 on NW. face, with three notches on E. and W. 

edges; dig pits 24 X 24 X 12 ins., in each sec., 6 ft. dist., and 

raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, N. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. (Tp. 3 N., R. 5 W.) 

Set a 

T 3 N S 25 on SW., and 

R 5 W S 24 on NW. face, with 4 notches on N., and 2 notches 

A -, 

post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for cor. of secs. 24 and 25, marked 

on S. edge; from which 

- lks. dist., marked 

ins. diam., bears S. ___ O w., 

T 3 N R 5 W S 25 B T. 

- 

A ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 5 W S 24 B T. 

6. Mound ofEarth with Deposit and Stake in Pit. (Tp. 2 N., 

R. 6 W.) 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for cor. of secs. 13 and 24; dig pits 

24 X 24 X 12 ins., in each sec., 4 ft., dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In SW. pit drive a ~ stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

T 2 N S 24 on SW., and 

R 6 W S 13 on NW. face, with 3 notches on N. and S. edges. 

7. Tree Corner with Pits and Mound ofEarth. (Tp. 3 N., R. 

6 W.) 

A ins. diam., for cor. of secs. 24 and 25, I 

mark 

T 3 N S 25 on SW. and 

R 6 W S 24 on NW. side, with 4 notches on N. and 2 notches 

on S. side; dig pits, 18 X 18 X 12 ins., in each sec., 5 ft. dist.; 

and raise a mound of earth around tree. 

8. Tree Corner with Bearing Trees. (Tp. 3 N., R. 7 W.) 

, AT 3 N S 27 on SW., and 

R 7 W S 22 on NW. side, with 4 notches on N., and 2 notches 

A-, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

ins. diam., for cor. of secs. 22 and 27 I 

mark 

on S. side; from which 

706 
- lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 7 W S 27 B T. 

A -, ___ ins. diam., bears N. W., ~ lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 7 W S 22 B T. 

-43- 

SECTION CORNERS REFERRING TO ONE 

SECTION ONLY. 

[See Plates IV and VIII.] 

78. When more than one-half of all corners in a township 

are stone corners, the descriptions in paragraphs 1 and2, if the 

corners therein described, are established near the place for 

cor. of sees. 15, 16, 21, and 22, will be modified, as follows: 

After “marked” insert the words: 

“2 N 5 W on NE. face;” 

When, under the conditions above specified, the corner described in paragraph 1 is established, a stake may be driven in 

the pit, and marked instead of the stone, and described as 

exemplified in the last clause of paragraph 6, below. 

1. Stone, with Pit and Mound ofEarth. (Tp. 2 N., R. 5 W.) 

Set a ~ stone, X - X - ins., 

___ ins. in the ground, for SW. cor. of sec. 12, marked 

with 1 notch on E. edge; dig a pit, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., in the sec., 

8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound ofearth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, NE. 

of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins. in 

the ground, for SW. cor. of sec. 12, marked with one notch on 

E. edge; and raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, 

NE. of cor. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Tree. 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for SW. cor. of sec. 12, marked 

with 1 notch on E. edge; from which 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

T2 NR 5 W S 12 B T. 

4. Post, with Pit and Mound of Earth. (Tp. 3 N., R. 5 W.) 

Set a post, 4 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the gound, for 

NW. cor. of sec. 10; marked 

T 3 N S 9 on NE. 

R 5 W S 10 on SE. 

S 9 on SW., and 

S 9 on NW. face, with 5 notches on S. and 3 notches on E. 

edge; dig a pit, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., in the sec., 8 ft. dist.; and 

raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, SE. of cor. 

Set a-post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

5. Post, with Bearing Tree. (T. 2 N., R. 5 W.) 

707 

for SW. cor. of sec. 12; marked 

T 2 N S 12 on NE., 

R 5 W S 13 on SE., 

S 13 on SW., and 

S 13 on NW. face, with 1 notch on E. edge; from which 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 2 N R 5 W S 12 B T. 

6. Mound of Earth, with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. (Tp. 3 

N., R. 5 W.) 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for NW. cor. of sec. 10; dig a pit, 36 

X 36 X 12 ins. in the sec., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high over deposit. 

-44- 

In the pit drive a 

in the ground, marked 

T 3 N S 9 on NE., 

R 5 W S 10 on SE., 

S 9 on SW., and 

S 9 on NW. face, with 5 notches on S., and 3 notches on E. 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

edge. 

7. Tree Corner, withpit and Mound ofEarth. (Tp. 2 N., R. 5 

A-, ins. diam., for SW. cor. of sec. 12, Imark 

T 2 N S 12 on NE., 

R 5 W S 13 on SE., 

S 13 on SW., and 

S 13 on NW. side, with 1 notch on E. side; dig a pit, 24 X 24 

X 12 ins., in the sec., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth 

around tree. 

W.) 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. (Tp. 3 N., R. 5 W.) 

A-, 

T 3 N S 9 on NE., 

R 5 W S 10 on SE., 

S 9 on SW., and 

S 9 on NW., side, with 5 notches on S., and 3 notches on E. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E., - 

ins. diam., for NW. cor. of sec. 10, I 

mark 

side; from which 

lks. dist., marked 

T 3 N R 5 W S 10 B T. 

QUARTER SECTION CORNERS. 

[See Plates IV and V.1 

79. 1. Stone, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

- 

Set a - stone, X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for Y4 sec. cor. marked 1/4 on N. 

face; dig pits, 18 X 18 X 12 ins., E. and W. of stone, 3 ft. dist.; 

and raise a mound of earth, 3% ft. base, l?h 2 ft. high, N. of 

cor. 
2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

'I 

- 

Set a - stone, - X ~ X - ins. 

ins. in the ground, for 1% sec. cor. marked l/4 on W. 

face; and raise a mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, W. of 

cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

- 

Set a - stone, X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for 1/4 sec. cor. marked Y4 on W. 

face; from which 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

- lks. dist., marked 

1/4 S 16 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

l/4 S 17 B T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

1/4 sec. cor. marked Y4 S 4 on N. face and 9 on S. face; dig pits 18 

X 18 X 12 ins., E. and W. of post, 3 ft. dist.; and raise a mound 

of earth, 3% ft. base, 1% ft. high, N. of cor. 

-45- 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 3 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for 1/4 sec. cor., marked 1/4 S 21 on W. face and 22 on E. face; 

from which 

E., - 

lks. dist., marked 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. 

l/4 S 22 B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

1/4 S 21 B T. 

6. Mound, with Deposit and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for 1/4 sec. cor.; dig pits, 18 X 18 X 

12 ins, E. and W. ofcor., 4 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 

31/z ft. base, 11/2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In E. pit drive a stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. in 

the ground, marked 

1/4 S 21 on N. face and 28 on S. face. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A -, - ins. diam., for l/4 sec. cor. I mark 1/4 S 7 

on W. side and 8 on E. side; dig pits, 18 X 18 X 12 ins., N. and 

S. of cor., 4 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth around tree. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, A- ins. diam., for 1/4 sec. cor. I mark l/4 S 20 

on N. side and 29 on S. side; from which 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

- lks. dist., marked 

1/4 S 20 B T. 

A -, ins. diam., bears S. W., 

- 1/4 S 29 B T. lks. dist., marked 

80. Pits and Mounds of Quarter Section Corners. 

On meridional lines, the pits will be dug N. and S., and the 

mound will be placed on the west side of the corner; on 

latitudinal lines, the pits will be located E. and W., and the 

mound will be built on the north side of the corner. See Plate 

V. 

81. Markings on Quarter Section Corners. 

On meridional lines, the marks will be placed on the west 

side, and on latitudinal lines, on the north side of the stone, 

post, or other corner. 

82. Stakes in Pits of Quarter Section Corners. 

On meridional lines the stakes will be driven in the S. pit, 

and on latitudinal lines, in the E. pit. 

STANDARD QUARTER SECTION CORNERS. 

[See Plates IV and V.1 

83. All standard quarter-section corners, on base lines or 

standard parallels, will have the letters S C (for standard 

corner), precede the marking 1/4 or l/4 S, as the case may be; 

such corners will be established in all other respects like 

other quarter-section corners. 

When bearing trees are described for standard quartersection corners, each tree will be marked, S C 1/4 S B T. 

-46- 

QUARTER SECTION CORNERS COMMON TO TWO 

QUARTERS OF ONLY ONE SECTION. 

84. These corners will be similar in all respects to those 

that are common to four quarters of two sections. See notes on 

Plates VI and VII. 

MEANDER CORNERS. 

[See Plates 111, IV, and V.1 

85. 1. Stone, with Pit and Mound of Earth. 

- 

Set a - stone, X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground for meander cor. of fracl. secs. 26 

and 35, marked 

M C on E. face, with 1 groove on S. face; dig a pit 36 X 36 X 

12 ins., 8 ft. W. of stone; and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 

2 ft. high, W. of cor. 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a - stone, X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for meander cor. of fracl. secs. 17 

and 18, marked 

708 
M C on S. face. with 5 grooves on E. face; and raise a mound 

of stone, 2 ft. base, 1% ft. high, N. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - stone - X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for meander cor. of fracl. secs. 26 

and 35, with 1 groove on S. face, marked 

M C on W. face; from which 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

Iks. dist., marked 

T 15 N R 20 E S 26 M C B T. 

- 

A -, - ins., diam., bears S. E., 

lks., dist., marked 

T 15 N R 20 E S 35 M C B T. 

4. Post, with Pit and Mound of Earth. 

Set a -post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins., sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground for 

meander cor. of fracl. secs. 19 and 20, marked 

M C on N., 

T 15 N on S., 

R 20 E S 20 on E., and 

S 19 on W. face, dig a pit, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., 8 ft. S. of post; 

and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, S. of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 4 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

M C on N., 

T 15 N on S., 

R 20 E S 25 on E., and 

S 26 on W. face; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E.,- 

for meander cor. of fracl. secs. 25 and 26, marked 

lks. dist., marked 

T 15 N R 20 E S 25 M C B T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. 

T 15 N R 20 E S 26 M C B T. 

- 

W., 

lks. dist., marked 

6. Mound with Deposit, and Stake in Pit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal) 

12 ins. in the ground, for meander cor. of fracl. secs. 25 and 26; 

dig a 

-47- 

pit, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., 5 ft. N. of cor.; and raise a mound of 

earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, over deposit. 

stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

In the pit drive a 

M C on S., 

T 15 N on N., 

R 20 E S 26 on W., and 

S 25 on E. face 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, 

M C on W., 

ins. diam., for meander cor. of fracl. 

secs. 17 and 20, I mark 

T 15 N on E., 

R 20 E S 17 on N., and 

S 20 on S. side; dig a pit, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., 8 ft. E. of tree; 

and raise a mound of earth, 4 ft. base, 2 ft. high, E. of cor. 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

, A-- ins. diam., for a special meander cor. of 

fracl. E. and W. halves of sec. 33, I mark 

S M C on N., 

T 15 Non S., 

R 20 E S 33 on E., and 

S 33 on W. side; from which 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. E. ~ 

lks. dist., marked 

T 15 N R 20 E S 33 S M C B T. 

, A- ins. diam., bears S. - W., - 

lks. dist., marked 

T 15 N R 20 E S 33 S M C T. 

86. Pits and Mounds of Meander Corners. 

When a pit is dug as an accessory to a meander corner, it 

will be located on line and 8 feet from such corner (except as 

otherwise provided for in paragraph 6), on the side opposite 

the stream or lake meandered; while the mound will be 

placed midway between the corner and nearest side of the pit. 

87. Markings on Meander Corners. 

On all meander corners, the letters M C (for meander 

corner) will be cut into the side facing the stream or lake to be 

meandered. On post or tree meander corners, within 

township exteriors, additional marks will be placed, as follows: the township number will be marked on the side opposite M C; the proper range and section number will be placed 

on the right-hand side (when looking along line toward the 

stream or lake), and the appropriate section number on the 

opposite side. 

All meander corners on base lines or standard parallels 

will be further marked S C on north side or face. 

On principal or guide meridians, and on meridional 

township lines, the letters M C will be placed as above 

directed; the township number will be marked on the opposite side; while the proper range and section numbers will be 

marked on the sides facing the east and west cardinal points. 

On base lines or standard parallels and on latitudinal 

township lines, the township and section numbers will be 

marked on the sides facing 

-48- 

the north and south cardinal points; while the range numbers 

will be placed on the side opposite the marking M C. 

In all the markings provided for in this paragraph, the 

numbers indicating township, range, and section, will be 

preceded by the initial letters T R and S, respectively. 

88. Descriptions will be modified in certain cases. 

When a tree is marked for a regular meander corner, the 

descriptions in paragraph 8 will be modified, as follows: 

709 
strike out “special”; in place of “E. and W. halves of sec. 33”, 

write “secs. and -,’,; and omit the letter S, 

preceding M C, in the marking on corner and bearing trees. 

The descriptions in paragraphs 1 to 7, inclusive, will be 

modified to describe special meander corners, as illustrated 

in paragraph 8, by writing “special” before meander cor. and 

S before M C when conditions require the change. 

89. Special Meander Corners and Auxiliary Meander CorRegular meander corners are those established on standard, township, or section lines. See Plate IV, for plans of 

meander corners, and the specimen plat, Plate 111, sections 

17,18,19,20,25,26, and 35, for locations of meander corners 

described in Specimen Field Notes, pages 179 and 180. 

The meander corners on lines of legal subdivisions, other 

than standard, township, or section lines, will be designated 

special meander corners, e. g., those located on the Specimen 

Plat, Plate 111, in section 33. 

Meander corners, not on a line belonging to the system of 

rectangular surveying, will be called auxiliary meander corners, e.g., the meander corner on Diamond Rock, in section 

18. 

ners. 

90. Meander Corners on unsafe ground will be witnessed. 

When a Meander Corner falls at a point where prevailing 

conditions would threaten its destruction by natural causes, 

a witness corner to such meander corner will be established, 

as provided for in the article Witness Corners, page 52. 

91. CORNERS ON RESERVATION OR 

OTHER BOUNDARIES 

NOT CONFORMING TO THE RECTANGULAR 

SYSTEM. 

[See Plate V.1 

Stones for corners on Indian Reservation or other boundaries will not be less than 20 ins. long, or less than 6 ins. 

thick, and will measure at least one cubic foot in volume; 

consequently, a stone 20 X 14% X 6 ins., will be about minimum size, and 32 X 9 X 6 ins., represents satisfactory proportions. N. P. for Nez Perces (Indian Reservation), on the east, 

and P. L. for Public Land (unsurveyed), on the west, applies to 

paragraph 1 only. 

1. Stone, with Mound of Earth. 

Set a - stone, - X - X - ins., 

17 M on S., 

N P on E., and 

P L on W. face; dig pits 36 X 36 X 12 ins., E. and W. of stone, 

4 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% ft. high, S. 

of cor. 

- ins. in the ground, for the 17-mile cor., marked 

-49- 

2. Stone, with Mound of Stone. 

Set a stone, X - X - ins., 

- ins. in the ground, for the 38-mile cor., marked 

38 M on NE., 

N P on NW., and 

P L on SE. face, and raise a mound of stone, 3 ft. base, 2 ft. 

high,* N. E. of cor. Pits impracticable. 

3. Stone, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a 

35 M on E., 

N P on N. and 

8 W on S. face; from which 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. E., 

- 

stone, - X - X - ins., 

ins. in the ground, for the 35-mile cor., marked 

- lks. dist., marked 

N P I R 35 M B T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. - O E.,5 

- Iks. dist., marked 

T 6 N R 8 W S 9 35 M B T. 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. 

W.,5- lks. dist., marked 

T 6 N R 8 W S 8 35 M B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

NP I R 35 M B T. 

4. Post, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

Set a - post, 3 ft. long, 5 ins. sq., with marked stone 

(charred stake or quart of charcoal), 24 ins. in the ground, for 

the 17 mile cor., marked 

17 M on S., 

N P I R on E., and 

P L on W. face; dig pits, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., E. and W. of post, 

4 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2l/2 ft. high, S. 

of cor. 

5. Post, with Bearing Trees. 

Set a 

35 M on E., 

N P I R on N., and 

T 6 N R 8 W S 9 on S.; from which 

A -, 

post, 3 ft. long, 5 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for the 35-mile cor., marked 

- 

ins. diam., bears N. - O E., 

lks. dist., marked 

N P I R 35 M B T. 

A-, ins. diam, bears S. E.,- 

A -, ins. diam., bears S.- O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 6 N R 8 W S 9 35 M B T. 

- lks. dist., marked 

T 6 N R 8 W S 8 35 M B T. 

- 

A-, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

N P I R 35 M B T. 

6. Mound, with Deposit and Stake in Pit. 

4. The above are minimum dimensions for mounds of stone on reservation boundaries. 

5. The bearing trees, “S. W.” from the comer, are 

supposed to stand on surveyed land, near the line between sections 8 and 9. 

’ E.” and “S. 

710 
Deposit a marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), 12 ins. in the ground, for the 33-mile cor.; dig pits, 36 X 

36 X 12 ins., NE. and 

-50- 

SW. of cor., 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 

2Y2 ft. high, over deposit. 

In NE. pit drive a - stake, 2 ft. long, 2 ins. sq., 12 ins. 

in the ground, marked 

33 M on SE., 

N P I R on NE., and 

T 6 N R 8 W S 15 on SW. face. 

7. Tree Corner, with Pits and Mound of Earth. 

A-, 29 M on E., 

N P I R on N., and 

T 5 N R 7 W S 8 on S. side; dig pits, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., N. and 

S. of tree, 5 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2% 

ft. high, E. of cor. 

ins. diam., for the 29-mile cor., I mark 

8. Tree Corner, with Bearing Trees. 

A -, - ins. diam., for the 35-mile cor., I mark 

35 M on E., 

N P I R on N., and 

T 6 N R 8 W S 9 on S. side; from which 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears N. O E., 

lks. dist., marked 

NP I R 35 M B T. 

A- ins. diam., bears S. Po E., , lks. dist., marked 

T 6 N R 8 W S 9 35 M B T. 

- 

A -, - ins. diam., bears S. O w., 

lks. dist., marked 

T 6 N R 8 W S 8 35 M B T. 

- 

A -, ins. diam., bears N. W., 

lks. dist., marked 

N P I R 35 M B T. 

9. Corner Monument of Stone, with Deposit. 

Deposit a marked stone (charred stake, quart of charcoal, 

or vial with record6 inclosed), 12 ins. in the ground, for the 

SW. cor. of the Nez Perces Indian Reservation; and build a 

monument of stone, 3 ft. sq. at base, 2 ft sq. on top, 3 ft. high, 

over deposit; marked 

SW cor N P I R on NE.,7 

PL-~M chs on SE., 

P L -’ on SW., and 

P L on NW. face. 

10. A Post for Corner Monument, with Pits and Mound of 

Earth. 

Set a -post, 3 ft. long, 5 ins. sq., 24 ins. in the ground, 

for the NW. cor. of the Nez Perces Indian Reservation, 

marked 

P L on SE., 

NW cor N P I R on SE., 

PL-~M chs on SW., and 

P L -’ on NW. face; dig pits, 36 X 36 X 12 ins., S. and 

NE. of post, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 

2% ft. high, SE. of cor. 

-51- 

11. A Stone for Corner Monument, with Pits and Mound of 

Earth. 

Set a - stone, 36 X 10 X 7 ins., 27 ins. in the ground, 

for the NE. cor. ofthe Nez Perces Indian Reservation, marked 

P L on NE., 

P L on SE., 

NE cor N P I R on SW., and 

P L on NW. face; dig pits 36 X 36 X 12 ins., S. and W. of 

stone, 8 ft. dist.; and raise a mound of earth, 5 ft. base, 2Y2 ft. 

high, SW. of cor. 

92. Modifications of descriptions. 

When a stone or post is established for a corner monument, 

i. e., at a corner of a reservation, and four bearing trees are 

available, the descriptions of paragraphs 10 and 11 will be 

modified, as follows: Replace all that refers to pit and mound 

of earth, by correct descriptions of four properly marked 

bearing trees, for each corner. 

The dimensions and arrangement of pits and mounds, described in the last two paragraphs, are similar to those described for “Corners referring to one township only.” 

93. The following table will be convenient for reference to 

the rules of the above descriptions, so far as they apply to pits 

and mounds. 

TABLE I.-Size, position, and distance of pits and mounds. 

Part 1 .-Requirements as to size and position of pits. 

Kind of corner. 

Standard tp. cor. . . . Closing tp. cor . . . . . Cor. of 4 tps . . . . . . . Cor. of 2 tps . . . . . . . Cor. of 1 tp . . . . . . . . Standard sec. cor . . . Closing sec. cor . . . . Cor. of 4 secs . . . . . . Cor. of 2 secs . . . . . . Cor. of 1 sec . . . . . . . Quarter sec. cor . . . . Meander cor . . . . . . . On res’n line.. . . . . . 

Size at tree 

comer. 

24 x 18 x 12 

24 x 18 x 12 

24 x 18 x 12 

24 x 18 x 12 

30 x 24 x 12 

18 x 18 x 12 

18 x 18 x 12 

18 x 18 x 12 

18 x 18 x 12 

24 x 24 x 12 

18 x 18 x 12 

36 x 36 x 12 

36 x 36 x 12 

Size at 

other corners. 

30 x 24 x 12 

30 x 24 x 12 

24 x 24 x 12 

30 x 24 x 12 

36 x 36 x 12 

24 x 18 x 12 

24 x 18 x 12 

18 x 18 x 12 

24 x 24 x 12 

36 x 36 x 12 

18 x 18 x 12 

36 x 36 x 12 

36 x 36 x 12 

Position from comer. 

Across N., E., and W. lines. 

Across E., W., and S. lines. 

On lines N., E., S., and W. 

On each line. 

Across E., W., and N. lines. 

Across E., W., and S. lines. 

In each sec. NE., etc. 

In both secs. 

In the sec. 

On line each side. 

On line, rear of cor. 

See Manual. 

Do. 

6. The record will consist of a brief description of the corner, with the date of its 

construction. 

7. The markings will be cut into large stones, inserted in the middle ofthe lowest course 

of each side of the monument. 

8. The proper number of miles and chains, from the initial point, will be stated. 

9. The year in which the monument is established will be placed in the blank. 

711 
Part 2.-Distance of pits and requirements as to mounds. 

N. 

S. 

S. 

Various. 

DO. 

N. 

S. 

W. 

W. 

Various. 

~ WiPpit. 

Various. 

WITNESS POINTS. 

Kind of corner. 

Standard tp. cor.. 

Closing tp. COT ... 

Cor. of 4 tps ..... Cor. of 2 tps ..... Cor. of 1 tp ...... 

Standard ~ec. COT. 

Closing ec. COT . . 

Cor.of4Beca .... Car. of2 ~ees .... Cor. of1 BeC ..... Quarter see. COT.. 

Meander cor ..... On rdn line.. ... 

Mounds. I Distance of pits at- I 

Post comer. 

Feet. 

E. and W. 4 feet, N. 8 feet 5 

E. and W. 4 feet, S. 8 feet 5 

N., E., and W. 4 feet, S. 8 fm 5 

E. and W. 4 feet, N. 8 feet 5 

8 feet.. ................. 5 

E. and W. 3 feet. N. 7 feet 5 

E. and W. 3 feet. S. 7 feet 4 

5bfeet ................. 4 

6 feet.. ................. 4 

Sfeet ................... 5 

3 feet.. ................. 4 

8 feet.. ................. 5 

4 feet.. ................. 5 

Mound of 

earth 

corner. 

Tree , 

corner. 

Feet. 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

4 

5 

5 

5 

5 

4 

8 

5 

Size (in feet) 

Stone. Earth. 

2xlh 

2Xlb 

2x142 

2Xlb 

2x192 

2.lb 

2Xlh 

2.lh 

2Xlh 

2x142 

2.lb 

2.lb 

3x2 

5 xzh 5 xzb 5 x2h 

5 xzb 5 x2h 

4 x2 

4 x2 

4 x2 

4 x2 

4 x2 

3b Xlb 4 x2 

5 x2h 

Position 

from 

corner. 

-52- 

WITNESS CORNERS. 

94. Witness Corners will be established in certain cases. 

When the true point for any corner described in these 

instructions falls where prevailing conditions would insure 

its destruction by natural causes, a witness corner will be 

established in a secure position, on a surveyed line if possible, 

and within twenty chains of the corner point thus witnessed. 

95. Markings on Witness Corners. 

A witness corner will bear the same marks that would be 

placed upon the corner for which it is a witness, and in 

addition, will have the letters, W C (for witness corner), 

conspicuously displayed above the regular markings on the 

NE. face when witnessing a township or section corner; such 

witness corners will be established, in all other respects, like 

a regular corner, marking bearing trees with’ the proper 

numbers for the sections in which they stand. 

96. Markings on Bearing Trees of Witness Corners. 

When bearing trees are described as accessories to a witness corner, the prescribed markings on each tree will be 

preceded by the letters W C distinctly cut into the wood. 

The true bearing and distance of witness corners, from the 

true point for the corner, will always be clearly stated in the 

field notes. 

97. Witness Corners to corner points falling in roads, etc. 

The point for a corner falling on a railroad, street, or wagon 

road, will be perpetuated by a marked stone (charred stake or 

quart of charcoal), deposited 24 inches in the ground, and 

witnessed by two witness corners, one of which will be established on each limiting line of the highway. 

In case the point for any regular corner falls at the intersection of two or more streets or roads, it will be perpetuated by a 

marked stone (charred stake or quart of charcoal), deposited 

24 inches in the ground, and witnessed by two witness corners established on opposite sides of the corner point, and at 

the mutual intersections of the lines limiting the roads or 

streets, as the case may be. 

98. Witness points will be perpetuated by corners similar 

to those described for quarter section corners, with the marking W P (for witness point), inplace of Y4, or Y4 s, as the case 

may be. 

If bearing trees are available as accessories to witness 

points, each tree will be marked W P B T. (See “Insuperable 

objects on line-Witness Points,” page 24.) 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

99. Corners on Rock in place, or on Boulders. 

When a corner falls on rock in place, or on a boulder, a cross 

(X), will be made at the exact corner point, and witnessed by 

the proper number of bearing trees, if they are available; in 

the absence of suitable trees, a mound of stones will be raised, 

or of earth if stones are not found and pits are available. 

Owing to the difficulty of identify- 

-53- 

ing the corner coming upon a flat rock in place, when only a 

cross is cut thereon, it is imperative that some adequate 

witness be used and marked. 

100. Location of Mounds. 

When mounds of earth or other material are raised as 

accessories to corners, they will be placed as specified in the 

foregoing Description of Corners, and in every case the direction of the mound from the corner will be carefully stated. 

The use of the indefinite description “alongside” will not be 

approved. 

In case the character of the land is such that the mound can 

not be placed as hereinbefore described, the deputy will state 

in his notes, by bearing and distance, exactly where the 

mound is located with reference to the corner, and will give 

his reasons for placing it as described. 

101. Mounds of Stone, covered with Earth. 

In a case where pits are practicable and the deputy prefers 

raising a mound of stone, or a mound of stone covered with 

earth, he will use the form given for “Stone with mound of 

stone,” omitting “pits impracticable,” when the corner thus 

described is established; but when the corner “Stone, with 

mound of stone covered with earth,” is constructed, the description will be modified as follows: strike out the words 

“Pits impracticable”; in place of “mound of stone, 2 ft. base, 

1Y2 ft. high,’’ write “mound of stone covered with earth, 

- ft. base, - ft. high,” inserting in the blank 

spaces the dimensions of the mound given in paragraph 1, 

following the designation of each class of corners, pages 27 to 

50. Mounds of stone, or of stone covered with earth must 

never be built around the corner stone, but separate. When 

stones are necessary to hold the corner stone upright and 

firm, they should be in addition to the witness mound, and 

not a part of it. 

712 
102. Bearing Trees. 

Bearing trees marked as accessories to standard corners, 

either township, section, or quarter section, will be selected 

on the north side of base lines or standard parallels, and 

bearing trees referring to the closing corners on said lines, 

will be located on the south side; in general, the bearing trees 

referring to any particular closing corner, together with one 

pit and the mound belonging to such corner, will be located on 

the same side of the line closed upon, and on the side from 

which the surveys have been closed. 

When the requisite number of trees can be found within 

300 links of the corner point, two bearing trees will be 

marked and described for every standard or closing township 

or section corner, or corner common to two townships or 

sections, only; four for every corner common to four 

townships or four sections; one for a corner referring to one 

township or one section, only; two for every quarter section 

corner or meander corner, and four for each mile or half mile 

corner, or corner monument on a reservation or other boundary, not conforming to the system of rectangular surveying. 

103. The limit of 300 links will not be held to prohibit the 

use of bearing trees or rocks beyond that distance. Where 

such objects are few but accessible, they are too useful as 

evidences of corners to be disregarded by a faithful deputy, 

even when several chains distant. In the surveys of 50 or 60 

years ago, corners were often witnessed by trees 8 or 10 

chains distant, with great advantage to subsequent retracements. 

-54- 

In case the prescribed number of trees can not be found 

within practicable distance, the deputy will state in his field 

notes, after describing those marked, “no other trees within 

limits,” and add “dig pits X - X - ins. ,” 

etc., or “raise a mound of stone, ~ ft. base, ~ ft. 

high, - of cor.,” as prevailing conditions may require. 

104. Bearing trees, being important accessories to the corners, will have their exact bearings from the true meridian 

taken with the instrument used in running the lines of survey; and the distance from the middle of each bearing tree to 

the middle point of the corner will be carefully measured, and 

recorded in the field notes. 

105. As to the height or position of marks placed on bearing trees, practice differs in various localities. The custom of 

placing these important evidences high enough to insure 

their destruction when some woodman, ignorant or careless 

of the penalty of the law, cuts down the tree, is a direct 

violation of rules. A tree will be so marked that if inadvertently cut down its stump will retain evidence of its importance. Many surveyors have adopted the plan ofplacing all the 

marks at the height of 4 or 5 feet, except the letters B T, which 

are made on another blaze about one foot above the ground. 

The intent is commendable; but as a better rule, applicable to 

trees of every size, the following is now adopted: Place all 

figures and letters on that part of the tree which would 

probably remain as the stump; and make one plain blaze high 

on the same side, to attract notice in case of snow or dense 

undergrowth. 

106. No tree less than 4 inches in diameter should be 

chosen for a witness, if larger ones are convenient; and if none 

over 3 inches are found, pits will be dug to witness the corner. 

107. Stones for corners. 

Stones 18 ins. long, or less, will be set with two-thirds of 

their length in the ground, and those more than 18 ins. long 

will have three-fourths of their length in the ground. 

No stones measuring less than 504 cubic inches, or less 

than 12 ins. in length or three inches in thickness will be used 

for corners. 

108. Lines discontinued at Legal Corners. 

No mountainous lands, or lands not classed as surveyable, 

will be meandered, and all lines approaching such lands will 

be discontinued at the section or quarter-section corner 

nearest the unsurveyed land. 

109. Marks to be cut. 

All letters and figures on posts, trees, or stones, etc., will be 

cut into the object upon which they are placed. Arabic figures 

and plain letters will be used for all markings. 

110. Orientation of Corners. 

Corners referring to one, two, or four townships or sections, 

not identical with standard or closing corners, will be set with 

their faces directed NE. and SW., and NW. and SE., while all 

other corners will be set with their sides facing the cardinal 

points; except corners on boundaries of reservations and private land claims, which will be set squarely on line. 

111. Size of Posts, Mounds, etc. 

The sizes of wooden posts, mounds, and pits, noted in the 

foregoing descriptions, will be regarded as minimum, and 

their dimensions will be increased whenever practicable, 

except as to height of posts out of ground. 

-55- 

112. Corner Materials. 

In establishing corners, the first preference will be given to 

durable stones when obtainable; then, posts; and lastly, 

mounds with stake in pit. 

Wood of a perishable nature will not be used for posts or 

stakes. 

113. Instructions to be studied. 

Deputy surveyors will carefully read, study, and familiarize themselves with all instructions contained in this volume, 

and will instruct their assistants as to their duties before 

commencing work. An extra copy of this Manual may be 

furnished each deputy, for the use of his assistants. 

INITIAL POINTS. 

114. Initial points from which the lines of the public surveys are to be extended will be established whenever necessary, under such special instructions as may be prescribed in 

713 
each case by the Commissioner of the General Land Office. 

The locus of such initial points will be selected with great 

care and due consideration for their prominence and easy 

identification, and must be established astronomically. 

An initial point should have a conspicuous location, visible 

from distant points on lines; it should be perpetuated by an 

indestructible monument, preferably a copper bolt firmly set 

in a rock ledge; and it should be witnessed by rock bearings, 

without relying on anything perishable like wood. 

115. The initial point having been established the lines of 

public-land surveys will be extended therefrom. They are 

classified as follows: 

Class 1. Base lines and standard parallels. 

Class 2. Principal and guide meridians. 

Class 3. Township exteriors (or meridional and latitudinal 

Class 4. Subdivision and meander lines. 

Only the base line and principal meridian can pass through 

township boundaries). 

the initial point. 

BASE LINE. 

116. From the initial point the base line will be extended 

east and west on a true parallel of latitude, by the use of 

transit or solar instruments, as may be directed by the surveyor general in his written special instructions. The transit 

will be used for the alinement of all important lines. 

117. The direction of base lines will conform to parallels of 

latitude and will be controlled by true meridians; consequently the correct determination of true meridians by 

observations on Polaris at elongation is a matter of prime 

importance. 

118. Certain reference lines, called tangents and secants, 

having a known position and relation to the required parallel 

of latitude, will be prolonged as straight lines. Two back and 

two fore sights are taken at each setting of the instrument, 

the horizontal limb being revolved 180” in azimuth between 

the observations, in one method, taking the mean of observations. Another method, called double back and fore sights, is 

still more exact, and therefore preferable. In this process the 

vertical cross-wire is fixed upon two transit points at some 

distance apart, in the rear, and then reversed to set one or two 

new points in 

-56- 

advance. This not only insures a straight line, if the transit is 

leveled, but also detects the least error of collimation. 

119. Where solar apparatus is used in connection with a 

transit, the deputy will test the instrument, whenever practicable, by comparing its indications with a meridian determined by Polaris observations; and in all cases where error is 

discovered he will make the necessary corrections of his line 

before proceeding with the survey. All operations will be 

fully described in the field notes. 

120. The proper township, section, and quarter-section 

corners will be established at lawful intervals, and meander 

corners at the intersection of the line with all meanderable 

streams, lakes, or bayous. 

121. In order to detect errors and insure accuracy in 

measurement, two sets of chainmen will be employed; one to 

note distances to intermediate points and to locate topographical features, the other to act as a check. Each will 

measure 40 chains, and in case the difference is inconsiderable, the proper corner will be placed midway between the 

ending points of the two measurements; but if the discrepancy exceed 8 links on even ground, or 25 links on mountainous 

surface, the true distance will be found by careful re-chaining 

by one party or both. 

122. The deputy will be present when each corner is thus 

established, and will record in the body of his field notes the 

distances to the same, according to the measurement by each 

set of chainmen. 

To obviate collusion between the sets of chainmen, the 

second set should commence at a point in advance of the 

beginning corner of the first set, the initial difference in 

measurement thus obtained being known only to the deputy. 

PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN. 

123. This line shall conform to a true meridian and will be 

extended from the initial point, either north or south, or in 

both directions, as the conditions may require, by the use of 

transit or solar instruments, as may be directed by the surveyor general in his special written instructions. The 

methods used for determination of directions, and the precautions to be observed to secure accuracy in measurement, are 

fully stated above under the title “Base Line,” and will be 

complied with in every particular. 

124. In addition to the above general instructions, it is 

required that in all cases where the establishment of a new 

principal meridian seems to be necessary to the surveyor 

general, he shall submit the matter, together with his 

reasons therefor, to the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office, and the survey of such principal meridian shall not be 

commenced until written authority, together with such special instructions as he may deem necessary, shall have been 

received from the Commissioner. 

STANDARD PARALLELS. 

125. Standard parallels, which are also called correction 

lines, shall be extended east and west from the principal 

meridian, at intervals of 24 miles north and south of the base 

line, in the manner prescribed for running said line, and all 

requirements under the title “Base Line” will be carefully 

observed. (See page. 55.) 

126. Where standard parallels have been placed at intervals of 30 or 36 miles, regardless of existing instructions, and 

where gross irreg- 

-57- 

ularities require additional standard lines, from which to 

initiate new, or upon which to close old surveys, an intermediate correction line should be established to which a 

local name may be given, e. g., “Cedar Creek Correction 

Line;” and the same will be run, in all respects, like the 

regular standard parallels. 

714 
GUIDE MERIDIANS. 

127. Guide meridians shall be extended north from the 

base line, or standard parallels, at interval of 24 miles east 

and west from the principal meridian, in the manner prescribed for running the principal meridian, and all the provisions for securing accuracy of alinement and measurement, 

found or referred to under the titles Base Line and Principal 

Meridian, will apply to the survey of said guide meridians. 

(See page 55.) 

128. When existing conditions require that such guide 

meridians shall be run south from the base or correction 

lines, they will be initiated at properly established corners on 

such lines, marked as closing corners. 

129. Where guide meridians have been improperly placed 

at intervals greatly exceeding the authorized distance of 24 

miles, and standard lines are required to limit errors of old, or 

govern new surveys, a new guide meridian may be run from a 

standard, or properly established closing corner, and a local 

name may be assigned to the same, e. g., “Grass Valley Guide 

Meridian”. These additional guide meridians will be surveyed in all respects like regular guide meridians. 

TOWNSHIP EXTERIORS. 

130. Whenever practicable, the township exteriors in a 

block of land 24 miles square, bounded by standard lines, will 

be surveyed successively through the block, beginning with 

those of the southwestern township. 

131. The meridional boundaries of townships will have 

precedence in the order of survey and will be run from south 

to north on true meridians, with permanent corners at lawful 

distances; the latitudinal boundaries will be run from east to 

west on random or trial lines, and corrected back on true 

lines. 

The falling of a random, north or south of the township 

corner to be closed upon, will be carefully measured, and, 

with the resulting true return course, will be duly recorded in 

the field notes. 

132. Should it happen, however, that such random intersects the meridian of the objective corner, north or south of 

said corner, or falls short of, or overruns the length of the 

south boundary of the township by more than three chains 

(due allowance being made for convergency), said random, 

and, if necessary, all the exterior boundaries of the township, 

will be retraced and remeasured to discover and correct the 

error. 

When running random lines from east to west, temporary 

corners will be set at intervals of 40.00 chains, and proper 

permanent corners will be established upon the true line, 

corrected back in accordance with these instructions, thereby 

throwing the excess or deficiency against the west boundary 

of the township, as required by law. 

133. Whenever practicable, the exterior boundaries of 

townships belonging to the west range, in a tract or block 24 

miles square, will 

-58- 

first be surveyed in succession, through the range, from south 

to north; and in a similar manner, the other three ranges will 

be surveyed in regular sequence. 

134. In cases where impassable obstacles occur and the 

foregoing rules can not be complied with, township corners 

will be established as follows: 

In extending the south or north boundaries of a township to 

the west, where the southwest or northwest corners can not 

be established in the regular way by running a north and 

south line, such boundaries will be run west on a true line, 

allowing for convergency on the west half mile; and from the 

township corner established at the end of such boundary, the 

west boundary will be run north or south, as the case may be. 

In extending south or north boundaries of a township to the 

east, where the southeast or northeast corner can not be 

established in the regular way, the same rule will be 

observed, except that such boundaries will be run east on a 

true line, and the east boundary run north or south, as the 

case may be. Allowance for the convergency of meridians will 

be made whenever necessary. 

METHOD OF SUBDIVIDING. 

135. The exterior boundaries of a full township having 

been properly established so far as possible, the subdivision 

thereof will be made as follows: 

At or near the southeast corner of the township, a true 

meridian will be determined by Polaris or solar observations, 

and the deputy’s instrument will be tested thereon; then from 

said corner the first mile of the east and south boundaries will 

be retraced, if subdivisions and survey of the exteriors have 

been provided for in separate contracts; but, if the survey of 

the exterior and subdivisional lines are included in the same 

contract, the retracements from disagreement of bearings or 

measurements will be carefully stated in the field notes. 

136. The meridional sectional lines will be made parallel 

to the range line or east boundary of the township, by applying to the bearing of the latter a small correction, dependent on the latitude, taken from the following table, which 

gives, to the nearest whole minute, the convergency of two 

meridians 6 miles long and from 1 to 5 miles apart; and 

supplies directly the deviation of meridional section lines 

west of north, when the range line is a true meridian. Add the 

correction to the bearing of the range line, if the same is west 

of north, but subtract when it bears east of north. 

TABLE II.-Corrections for Convergency within a Township. 

Latitude. 

0 0 

30 to 35 .......... 35 to 40 .......... 40 to 45 .......... 45 to 50 .......... 50 to 55 .......... 55 to 60 .......... 60 to 65 .......... 65 to 70 .......... 

Correction to be applied to bearing of range 

lines at a distance of1 mile. 

r 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

5 miles. 

I 

3 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

10 

715 
-59- 

Example.-Latitude, 47". Range line bears N. 0" 2' E.; then 

parallel meridional section lines will be run as follows: 

From the corner for sections35 and 36, N. 0" 1' E. 

34 and 35, north. 

33 and 34, N. 0" 1' W. 

32 and 33, N. 0" 2' W. 

31 and 32, N. 0" 3' W. 

137. After testing his instrument on the true meridian 

thus determined, the deputy will commence at the corner to 

sections 35 and 36, on the south boundary, and run a line 

parallel to the range line, establishing at 40.00 chains, the 

quarter-section corner between sections 35 and 36, and at 

80.00 chains the corner for sections 25, 26, 35, and 36. 

138. From the last-named corner, a random line will be 

run eastward, with out blazing, parallel to the south boundary of section 36, to its intersection with the east boundary of 

the township, placing at 40.00 chains from the point ofbeginning, a post for temporary quarter-section corner. If the random line intersects said township boundary exactly at the 

corner for sections 25 and 36, it will be blazed back and 

established as the true line, the permanent quarter-section 

corner being established thereon, midway between the initial and terminal section corners. 

139. When the objective corner is in sight from the starting corner, or the deputy has evidence of its location to prove 

that a different random course would fall closer to the corner, 

he may use such changed course for his random. A line may 

be run as a "random for distance only," when the course is 

certain. 

140. If the random intersects said township boundary to 

the north or south of said corner, the falling (see "Limits," 

page 66) will be carefully measured, and from the data thus 

obtained, the true return course will be calculated, and the 

true line blazed and established and the position of the quarter-section corner determined, as directed above. 

The details of the entire operation will be recorded in the 

field notes. 

141. Having thus established the line between sections 25 

and 36, from the corner from sections 25,26, 35, and 36, the 

west and north boundaries of sections 25,24,13, and 12, will 

be established as directed for those of section 36; with the 

exception that the random lines of said north boundaries will 

be run parallel to the established south boundaries of the 

sections to which they belong, instead of the south boundary 

of section 36; e. g., the random line between sections 24 and 

25 will be run parallel to the estalished south boundary of 

section 25, etc. 

142. Then, from the last established section corner, i. e., 

the corner of sections 1, 2, 11, and 12, the line between 

sections 1 and 2 will be projected northward, on a random 

line, parallel to the east boundary of the township, setting a 

post for temporary quarter-section corner at 40.00 chains, to 

its intersection with the north boundary of the township. If 

the random intersects said north boundary exactly at corner 

for sections 1 and 2, it will be blazed back and established as 

the true line, the temporary quarter-section corner being 

established permanently in its original position, and the 

fractional measurement thrown into that portion of the line 

between said corner and the north boundary of the township. 

If however, said random intersects the north boundary of 

the town- 

-60- 

ship, to the east or west of the corner for sections 1 and 2, the 

consequent falling will be carefully measured, and from the 

data thus obained the true return course will be calculated'' 

and the true line established, the permanent quarter-section 

corner being placed upon the same at 40.00 chains from the 

initial corner of the random line, thereby throwing the fractional measurement in that portion lying between the quarter-section corner and the north boundary of the township. 

143. When the north boundary of a township is a base line 

or standard parallel, the line between sections 1 and 2 will be 

run parallel to the range line as a true line, the quartersection corner will be placed at 40.00 chains, and a closing 

corner will be established at the point of intersection with 

such base or standard line; and in such case, the distance 

from said closing corner, to the nearest standard corner on 

such base or standard line, will be carefully measured and 

noted as a connection line. 

144. Each successive range of sections progressing to the 

west, until the fifth range is attained, will be surveyed in a 

similar manner; then, from the section corners established on 

the west boundary of said range of sections, random lines will 

be projected to their intersection with the west boundary of 

the township, and the true return lines established as prescribed for the survey of the first or most eastern range of 

sections, with the exception that on the true lines thus established the quarter-section corners will be established at 40.00 

chains from the initial corners of randoms, the fractional 

measurements being thereby thrown into those portions of 

the lines situated between said quarter-section corners and 

the west boundary of the township. 

145. The following general requirements are reiterated for 

emphasis: 

The random of a latitudinal section line will always be run 

parallel to the south boundary of the section to which it belongs, and with the true bearing of said boundary; and when a 

section has no linear south boundary, the random will be run 

parallel to the south boundary of the range of sections in which 

it is situtated, and fractional true lines will be run in a similar 

manner. 

146. The deputy is not required to complete the survey of 

the first range of sections from south to north before commencing the survey of the second or any subsequent range of 

sections, but the corner on which any random line closes shall 

have been previously established by running the line which 

determines its position, except as follows: Where it is impracticable to establish such section corner in the regular manner, it will be established by running the latitudinal section 

line as a true line, with a true bearing, determined as above 

directed for random lines, setting the quarter section corner 

at 40.00 chains and the section corner at 80.00 chains." 

10. See Table XI and rules, pages 118 and 119. 

11. See Plate 111, between sections 7 and 18, 17 and 20 

12. See Plate 111, between sections 8 and 17. 

716 
147. Quarter-section corners, both upon meridional and 

latitudinal section lines, will be established at points equidistant from the corresponding section corners, except upon the 

lines closing on the north and west boundaries of the 

township, and in those situations the quarter-section corners 

will always be established at precisely forty chains to the 

north or west (as the case may be) of the respective section 

corners from which those lines respectively start, by which 

procedure the excess or deficiency in the measurements will 

be thrown, according 

-61- 

to law, on the extreme tier or range of quarter sections, as the 

case may be. 

148. Where by reason of impassable objects only a portion 

of the south boundary of a township can be established, an 

auxiliary base line (or lines, as the case may require) will be 

run through the portion which has no linear south boundary, 

first random, then corrected, connecting properlyestablished corresponding section corners (either interior or 

exterior) and as far south as possible; and from such line or 

lines, the section lines will be extended northwardly in the 

usual manner, and any fraction south of said line will be 

surveyed in the opposite direction from the section corners on 

the auxiliary base thus established. (See Plate 11, figs. 3, 4, 

and 5.) 

149. Where by reason of impassable objects or other 

reasons no part of the south boundary of a township can be 

regularly established, the subdivision thereof will proceed 

from north to south and from east to west, thereby throwing 

all fractional measurements and areas against the west 

boundary, and the meanderable stream or other boundary 

limiting the township on the south. 

If the east boundary is without regular section corners and 

the north boundary has been run eastwardly as a true line, 

with section corners at regular intervals of 80.00 chains, the 

subdivision of the township will be made from west to east, 

and fractional measurements and areas will be thrown 

against the irregular east boundary. 

150. When the proper point for the establishment of a 

township or section corner is inaccessible, and a witness 

corner can be erected upon each of the two lines which 

approach the same, at distances not exceeding twenty chains 

therefrom, said witness corners will be properly established, 

and the half miles upon which they stand will be recognized 

as surveyed lines. 

The witness corner will be marked as conspicuously as a 

section corner, and bearing trees will be used wherever possible. 

The deputy will be required to furnish good evidence that 

the section corner is actually inaccessible. 

151. Where impassable precipices, deep canyons, or lands 

otherwise quite unsurveyable, prevent the extension of regular lines, deputies are not authorized to set meander corners, 

nor to meander the line separating lands that can be 

traversed from those that can not. In place of meandering, 

they are to set witness corners on line, near the intersection 

of section lines with the brink or foot of the impassable cliffs, 

or at the margin of the impracticable marsh, to represent an 

inaccessible regular section or quarter-section corner if within twenty chains. Such quarter sections thus marked may be 

platted as surveyed. 

152. Where a large or desirable tract is found to have its 

accessible section lines too short to justify the erection of such 

witness corners, and to render it regularly surveyed, offset 

lines may be run on lines of legal subdivision, far enough to 

show, by necessary witness corners, the 40-acre tracts that 

would otherwise have been excluded from survey. 

The topographic sketches of mesas and impassable canyon 

regions, returned by deputies, will show as nearly as practicable the location of these features and their margins; and 

where possible the corners on opposite sides of a canyon 

should be connected by triangulation at least once in each 

township. 

-62- 

MEANDERING. 

153. The running of meander lines has always been authorized in the survey of public lands fronting on large 

streams and other bodies of water, but does not appear to 

have been proper in other cases. The mere fact that an irregular or sinuous line must be run, as in case of a reservation 

boundary, does not entitle it to be called a meander line 

except where it closely follows a stream or lake shore. The 

legal riparian rights connected with meandered lines do not 

apply in case of other irregular lines, as the latter are strict 

boundaries. 

154. Lands bounded by waters are to be meandered at 

mean high-water mark. This term has been defined in a State 

decision (47 Iowa, 370) in substance as follows: High water 

mark in the Mississippi River is to be determined from the 

river bed; and that only is river bed which the river occupies 

long enough to wrest it from vegetation. 

In another case (14 Penn. St. 59) a bank is defined as the 

continuous margin where vegetation ceases, and the shore is 

the sandy space between it and low-water mark. 

Numerous decisions in State and U. S. Supreme Courts, 

assert the principle that meander lines are not boundaries 

defining the area of ownership of tracts adjacent to waters. 

The general rule is well set forth (10 Iowa, 549) by saying that 

in a navigable stream, as the Des Moines River in Iowa, 

high-water mark is the boundary line. When by action of the 

water the river bed changes, high-watermark changes and 

ownership of adjoining land changes with it. The location of 

meander lines does not affect the question. 

155. Inasmuch as it is not practicable in public-land surveys to meander in such a way as to follow and reproduce all 

the minute windings of the high-water line, the U. S. Supreme Court has given the principles governing the use and 

purpose of meandering shores, in its decision in a noted case 

(R. R. Co. u. Schurmeier, 7 Wallace, 286-7) as follows: 

Meander lines are run in surveying fractional portions of the 

public lands bordering on navigable rivers, not as boundaries of the 

tract, but for the purpose of defining the sinuosities of the banks of 

the stream, and as the means of ascertaining the quantity of land in 

the fraction subject to sale, which is to be paid for by the purchaser. 

In preparing the official plat from the field notes, the meander line is 

represented as the border line of the stream, and shows to a demonstration that the water-course, and not the meander line as actually 

run on the land, is the boundary. 

717 
In cases where the deputy finds it impossible to carry his 

meander line along mean high-water mark, his notes should 

state the distance therefrom, and the obstacles which justify 

the deviation. 

156. Proceeding down stream, the bank on the left hand is 

termed the left bank and that on the right hand the right 

bank. These terms will be universally used to distinguish the 

two banks of a river or stream. 

157. Navigable rivers, as well as all rivers not embraced in 

the class denominated “navigable,” the right-angle width of 

which is three chains and upwards, will be meandered on 

both banks, at the ordinary mean high-water mark, by taking the general courses and distances of their sinuosities, and 

the same will be entered in the field book. Rivers not classed 

as navigable will not be meandered above the point where the 

average right-angle width is less than three chains, except 

that streams which are less than three chains wide and which 

are so deep, 

-63- 

swift and dangerous as to be impassable through the agricultural season, may be meandered, where good agricultural 

lands along the shores require their separation into fractional lots for the benefit of settlers. But such meander surveys 

shall be subject to rejection if proved unnecessary by field 

inspection. 

158. Shallow streams, without any well-defined channel 

or permanent banks, will not be meandered; except tidewater streams, whether more or less than three chains wide, 

which should be meandered at ordinary high-water mark, as 

far as tide-water extends. 

At every point where either standard, township, or section 

lines intersect the bank of a navigable stream, or any 

meanderable shore, corners will be established at the time of 

running these lines. Such corners are called meander corners, and the deputy will commence at one of these corners, 

follow the bank or boundary line, and take the bearing and 

measure the length of each course, from the beginning corner 

to the next meander corner. 

159. All courses reported are to be compass courses, taken 

or counted from the meridian, and not from a latitudinal line; 

and “transit angles” showing only the amount of deviation 

from the preceding course, are not allowed in field notes of 

meanders. 

160. For convenience of testing by traverse, the courses of 

meander lines should be given by the nearest quarter degree. 

As meandered lines are not strict boundaries, this method 

will give results with approximate accuracy for good closings 

within the limits of a section. Meander lines will be examined 

in the field as well as rectangular lines, before acceptance. 

161. All meanders should be traversed before leaving the 

vicinity, and if misclosure is found, indicating error in 

measurement or in reading courses, the lines must be remeandered. 

162. The crossing distance between meander corners on 

same line, and the true bearing and distance between corresponding meander corners, will be ascertained by triangulation or direct measurement, in order that both shores may be 

protracted. The particulars will be given in the field notes. 

163. For convenience of. platting and computation, the 

deputy is required to use in meanders distances having whole 

chains, or multiples of ten links, with odd links only in closing distances. 

164. The meanders of all lakes, navigable bayous, and 

deep ponds of the area of twenty-five acres and upwards, will 

be commenced at a meander corner and continued, as above 

directed for navigable steams; from said corner, the courses 

and distances of the entire margin of the same, and the 

intersections with all meander corners established thereon, 

will be noted. 

165. All streams falling into the river, lake, or bayou will 

be noted, and the width at their mouths stated; also, the 

position, size, and depth of springs, whether the water be 

pure or mineral; also, the heads and mouths of all bayous; all 

islands, rapids, and bars will be noted, with intersections to 

their upper and lower ends, to establish their exact situation. 

The elevation of the banks of lakes, bayous, and streams, the 

height of falls and cascades, and the length and fall of rapids 

will be recorded in the field notes. 

166. To meander a lake or deep pond lying entirely within 

the boundaries of a section, two line will be run from the two 

nearest corners on different sides of such lake or pond, the 

courses and lengths 

-64- 

of which will be recorded, and if coincident with unsurveyed 

lines of legal subdivisions, that fact will also be stated in the 

field notes, and at each of the points where said lines intersect 

the margin of the pond or lake, a special meander corner will 

be established as above directed. 

A special meander corner is one established on a line of 

legal subdivision, not a standard, township, or section line. 

167. The relative position of these points being thus definitely fixed in the section, the meandering will commence at 

one of them and be continued to the other, noting the intersection, and thence to the beginning. The proceedings are 

to be fully entered in the field notes. 

168. Meander lines will not be established at the segregation line between dry and swamp or overflowed land, but at 

the ordinary high-water mark of the actual margin of the 

rivers or lakes on which such swamp or overflowed lands 

border. 

169. The precise relative position of an island, in a 

township made fractional by a river or lake in which the 

island is situated, will be determined by triangulation from a 

special and carefully measured base line, initiated upon the 

surveyed lines, on or near the lake or river bank on the 

mainland, so as to connect by course and distance on a direct 

line, the meander corner on the mainland with the corresponding point on the island, where the proper meander 

corner will be established. 

170. In making the connection of an island lying entirely 

within a section, with the mainland, a special base will be 

measured from the most convenient meander corner, and 

from such base, the location of an auxiliary meander corner 

(that is, one not on a line belonging to the system of rectangular surveying; see page 48) will be determined by triangulation, at which the meanders of the island will be initiated. 

171. In the survey of lands bordering on tide waters, 

meander corners may be temporarily set at the intersection 

718 
of the surveyed lines with the line of mean high tide, but no 

monument should be placed in a position exposed to the 

beating of waves and the action of ice in severe weather. In all 

such cases, the rule given in section 90 must be observed, by 

establishing a witness corner on line at a secure point near 

the true point for the meander corner. 

172. The field notes of meanders will show the dates on 

which the work was performed, as illustrated in the specimen 

notes, page 186. The field notes of meanders will state and 

describe the corner from which the meanders commenced, 

and upon which they closed, and will exhibit the meanders of 

each fractional section separately; following, and composing 

a part of such notes, will be given a description of the land, 

timber, depth of inundation to which the bottom is subject, 

and the banks, current, and bottom of the stream or body of 

water meandered. The utmost care will be taken to pass no 

object of topography, or change therein, without giving a 

particular description thereof in its proper place in the notes 

of the meanders. 

SUMMARY OF OBJECTS AND DATA 

INTERSECTED BY THE LINE OR IN ITS VICINITY, 

TO BE NOTED. 

173. 1. The precise course and length of every line run, 

noting all necessary offsets therefrom, with the reason for 

making them, and method employed. 

-65- 

2. The kind and diameter of all bearing trees, with the 

course and distance of the same from their respective corners; 

and the precise relative position of witness corners to the true 

corners. 

3. The kind of materials of which corners are constructed. 

4. Trees on line. The name, diameter, and distance on line 

to all trees which it intersects. 

5. Intersections by line of land objects. The distance at 

which the line intersects the boundary lines of every reservation, town site, donation claim, Indian allotment, settler’s 

claim, improvement, or rancho; prairie, bottom lands, 

swamp, marsh, grove, and windfall, with the course of the 

same at all points of intersection; also, the distances at which 

the line begins to ascend, arrives at the top, begins to descend, and reaches the foot of all remarkable hills and ridges, 

with their courses, and estimated height in feet, above the 

level land of the surrounding country, or above the bottom 

lands, ravines, or waters near which they are situated. Also, 

distance to and across large ravines, their depth and course. 

6. Intersections by line of water objects. All rivers, creeks, 

and smaller streams of water which the line crosses; the 

distances measured on the true line to the bank first arrived 

at, the course down stream at points of intersection, and their 

widths on line. In cases of navigable streams, their width will 

be ascertained between the meander corners, as set forth 

under the proper head. 

7. The land’s surface-whether level, rolling, broken, 

hilly, or mountainous. 

8. The soil-whether rocky, stony, sandy, clay, etc., and 

also whether first, second, third, or fourth rate. 

9. Timber-the several kinds of timber and undergrowth, 

in the order in which they predominate. 

10. Bottom lands-to be described as wet or dry, and if 

subject in inundation, state to what depth. 

11. Springs of water-whether fresh, saline, or mineral, 

with the course of the streams flowing from then. 

12. Lakes and ponds-describing their banks and giving 

their height, and whether it be pure and stagnant, deep or 

shallow. 

13. Improvements. Towns and villages; houses or cabins, 

fields, or other improvements with owners’ names; mill sites, 

forges, and factories, U. S. mineral monuments, and all corners not belonging to the system of rectangular surveying; 

will be located by bearing and distance, or by intersecting 

bearings from given points. 

14. Coal banks or beds; peat or turf grounds; minerals and 

ores; with particular description of the same as to quality and 

extent, and all diggings therefor; also salt springs and licks. 

All reliable information that can be obtained respecting 

these objects, whether they be on the line or not, will appear 

in the general description. 

15. Roads and trails, with their directions, whence and 

whither. 

16. Rapids, cataracts, cascades, or falls of water, with the 

estimated height of their fall in feet. 

17. Precipices, caves, sink holes, ravines, remarkable 

crags, stone quarries, ledges of rocks, with the kind of stone 

they afford. 

18. Natural curiosities, interesting fossils, petrifactions, 

organic remains, etc.; also all ancient works of art, such as 

mounds, fortifications, embankments, ditches, or objects of 

like nature. 

-66- 

19. The magnetic declination will be incidentally noted at 

all points of the lines being surveyed, where any material 

change in the same indicates the probable presence of iron 

ores; and the position of such points will be perfectly identified in the field notes. 

PRESCRIBED LIMITS FOR CLOSINGS AND 

LENGTHS OF LINES. 

174. If in running a random township exterior, such random exceeds or falls short of its propr length by more than 

three chains, allowing for convergency, or falls more than 

three chains to the right or left of the objective point (or shows 

a proportionate error for lines of greater or less length than 

six miles), it will be re-run, and if found correctly run, so 

much of the remaining boundaries of the township will be 

retraced, or resurveyed, as may be found necessary to locate 

cause of misclosure. 

175. Every meridional section line, except those which 

terminate upon a fractional side of a township, will be 80 

chains in length, without allowance of 50 links per mile for 

difference or measure, or any other allowance beyond a small 

reasonable discrepancy according to the nature of the surface, to be determined after examination. 

176. The random meridional or latitudinal lines through a 

tier or range of fractional sections shall fall within 50 links of 

719 
the objective corners, and a greater falling will indicate 

negligence or error. 

177. The actual lengths of meridional section lines 

through a fractional north or south tier of sections shall be 

within 150 links of their theoretical length. The latter will be 

determined from the given lengths of meridional boundaries 

on the east and the west range lines. 

178. Each latitudinal section line, except in a fractional 

east or west range of sections, shall be within 50 links of the 

actual distance established on the governing north or south 

boundary of the township for the width of the same range of 

sections. 

179. The north boundary and the south boundary of any 

section, except in a fractional range, shall be within 50 links 

of equal length. 

180. The meanders within each fractional section or between any two successive meander corners, or of an island or 

lake in the interior of a section, should close by traverse 

within a limit to be determined by allowing five-eighths of a 

link for each chain of such meander line. This rule does not 

apply to irregular boundaries of reservations or private 

claims, except as far as the same are natural water boundaries. The total misclosure of meanders will not be permitted 

to exceed 150 links, except in large private land claims, 

which are governed by a different rule and limit. (See section 

153.) 

181. In closing upon accepted surveys, when irregularities 

beyond the allowable limits are developed, either in the 

length or direction of the closing lines, closing corners will be 

set, with quarter-section corners at 40 chains from the last 

interior section corner; 

182. And, in general, when conditions are met which result in a random line being defective, either in length or 

direction, such procedure will be adopted as will secure the 

greatest number of new rectangular legal subdivisions, without disturbing the condition of accepted surveys. 

FIELD NOTES. 

183. The proper blank books for original field notes will be 

furnished by the surveyor general, and in such books the 

deputy surveyor 

-67- 

will make a faithful, distinct, and minute record of everything done and observed by himself and his assistants, pursuant to instructions, in relation to running, measuring, and 

marking lines, establishing corners, etc., and present, as far 

as possible, full and complete topographical sketches of all 

standard and exterior lines, drawn to the usual scale for 

township exteriors. These “original field notes” are not necessarily the entries made in the field, in the deputy’s pocket 

note books called tablets; but they are to be fully and correctly written out in ink, from such tablets, for the permanent 

record of the work. Tablets should be so fully written as to 

verify the original field notes whenever the surveyor general 

requires them for inspection. 

184. A full description of all corners belonging to old surveys, from which the lines of new surveys start, or upon 

which they close, will in all cases be furnished the deputy 

from the surveyor general’s office, when authority is given 

for commencing work; then, if the old corners are found to 

agree with said descriptions, the deputy will describe any one 

of them in this form, “which is a - firmly set, marked 

and witnessed as described by the surveyor general;” but, 

should a corner not answer the description supplied, the 

deputy will give a full description of such corner and its 

accessories, following the proper approved form given in 

these instructions. 

185. A full description of each corner established under 

any one contract will be given once only; subsequent reference to such corner will be made in the form, “heretofore 

described,” or “the corner of sections 2,3, 10, and 11,” as the 

case may require. 

In all cases where a corner is reestablished, the field notes 

will describe fully the manner in which it is done. 

186. The field notes of the survey of base, standard, and 

meridian lines will describe all corners established thereon, 

how established, the crossings of streams, ravines, hills, and 

mountains; character of soil, timber, minerals, etc.; and after 

the description of each township corner established in running such lines, the deputy will note particularly in the 

“general description” the character of townships on each side 

of the lines run. 

187. The field notes of the survey of exterior boundaries of 

townships will describe the corners and topography, as above 

required, and the “general description” at the end of such 

notes will describe the townships as fully as possible, and also 

state whether or not they should be subdivided. 

188. The field notes of the subdivisional survey of 

townships will describe the corners and topography as above 

required, and the “general description” at the end of such 

notes will state minutely the character of the land, soil, 

timber, etc., found in such townships. 

The topography will be given on the true line in all cases, 

and will be taken correctly, not estimated or approximated. 

189. With the field notes of the survey of base lines and 

standard parallels, and principal and guide meridians forming a tract 24 miles square (see page 20 and Plate 111, including those of the township exteriors therein, the deputy will 

submit a diagram of the lines surveyed, drawn to a scale of 

half an inch to one mile, upon which will be written the true 

bearings and lengths of all surveyed lines, except the lengths 

of those which are actually 40.00 or 80.00 chains. These 

diagrams will exhibit all water courses, with the direction of 

each 

-68- 

indicated by an arrow head pointing down stream; also, the 

intersection of the lines with all prairies, marshes, swamps, 

ravines, lakes, ponds, mountains, hills, and all other natural 

or artificial topographical features mentioned in the field 

notes, to the fullest extent possible. 

190. With the special instructions for making subdivisiona1 surveys of townships into sections, the deputy will be 

furnished by the surveyor general with blank township diagrams drawn to a scale of one inch to forty chains, upon which 

the true bearings and lengths of the township and section 

lines, from which the surveys are to be projected, or upon 

which they are to close, will be carefully marked; and on such 

720 
diagrams the deputy who subdivides will make appropriate 

sketches of the various objects of topography as they occur on 

his lines, so as to exhibit not only the points of intersection 

therewith, but also the directions and relative positions of 

such objects between the lines, or within each section, as far 

as practicable, so that every topographical feature may be 

properly completed and connected in the showing. 

191. Triangulations, offsets, or traverses, made to determine distances that can not be directly measured, such as 

those over deep streams, lakes, impassable swamps, canons, 

etc., will be made on the random lines (see pages 24 and 1211, 

when random lines are run. All particulars will be fully 

stated in the field notes. 

192. The exhibition of every mile of surveying, whether on 

standard, township, or subdivision lines, and the meanders 

in each section, will be complete in itself, and will be separated from other records by a black line drawn across that 

part of the page containing the body of notes. The description 

of the surface, soil, minerals, timber, undergrowth, etc., on 

each mile of line will follow the notes of survey of such line, 

and not be mingled with them. 

Particular care will be taken to record at the end of each 

mile the number of chains of mountainous land, heavily 

timbered land, or land covered with dense undergrowth. (See 

section 395.) 

The date of each day’s work will immediately follow the 

notes thereof. 

193. Near the end of the field notes of exteriors and immediately before the “general description,” the deputy surveyor will add, in the form shown in specimen field notes 

(page 1551, a tabular statement of the latitude and departure 

of all boundary lines of the township, derived from a traverse 

table, and will give the totals, and the errors in latitude and 

departure; said errors shall in no case exceed three chains, 

the prescribed limit for the falling of the random north 

boundary of a township. If a part or the whole of one or more 

boundaries is made up of meander lines, the northings, 

southings, eastings, and westings of the full section lines, 

nearest said meanders, will replace the missing N., S., E., or 

W. township lines, as the case may require, thereby presenting the errors of said boundaries of a closed survey. 

194. If all the exterior lines have been surveyed by the 

deputy, the bearings and distances of the table will be taken 

from his own notes. In a case where some of the boundaries 

have been surveyed under another contract, the deputy will 

use the bearings and distances supplied by the surveyor 

general, in connection with those of his own lines; and, if 

errors exceed the allowance of three chains, specified in paragraph 1 of the “Prescribed Limits”, the deputy will determine 

by retracement where the error occurs, correct the same 

before he leaves the field, and place the table in his original 

field notes. 

-69- 

195. Besides the ordinary notes taken on line (and which 

will always be written down on the spot, leaving nothing to be 

supplied by memory), the deputy will subjoin, at the conclusion of his book, such further description of information 

touching any matter or thing connected with the township (or 

other) survey which he may be able to afford, and may deem 

useful or necessary to be known-with a general description 

of the township in the aggregate, as respects the face of the 

country, its soil and geological features, timber, minerals, 

waters, settlements, etc. 

196. Following the general description of the township 

will be placed “A list of the names of the individuals employed to assist in running, measuring, and marking the 

lines and corners described in the foregoing field notes of 

township No. of the base line of range No. - of 

the - meridian, showing the respective capacities in 

which they acted.” 

AFFIDAVITS TO FIELD NOTES. 

197. The forms of official oaths required to be taken by 

deputy surveyors and assistants, and attached to their field 

notes, are exemplified in the specimen field notes, pages 144 

and 145. 

There may be several books of one class of lines covered by 

one set of oaths, which must distinctly specify the work they 

are intended to cover. When the contract comprises several 

books of returns, they, as well as transcripts of the same, are 

to be lettered in proper sequence, A, B, etc., on the title pages. 

Any book not containing the affidavits must show by a final 

note where to find the oaths covering that portion of the 

contract, as “Final affidavits in book D.” 

198. When the work of two deputies is recorded in the 

returns under one contract, each book must show clearly 

what lines were surveyed by each deputy. Wherever one 

deputy’s work ceases and another begins in the same book, 

the name of the former must be inserted at the end of his part 

of the notes. 

199. The final oath of the deputy surveyor will be taken 

before the U. S. survey or general for the State or Territory in 

which the survey is executed, or before any other officer 

authorized by the laws of the United States or by the municipal authorities, to administer land oaths, except notaries 

public. 

It is preferable that both preliminary and final oaths of 

assistants should be taken before some officer duly authorized to administer oaths other than the deputy surveyor. In 

cases, however, where great delay, expense, or inconvenience 

would result from a strict compliance with this rule, the 

deputy surveyor is authorized to admininster the necessary 

oaths to his assistants, but in each case where this is done, he 

will submit to the property surveyor general, a full written 

report of the circumstances which required his stated action. 

200. The deputy will transmit the field notes duly attested 

and the required sketches to the surveyor general at the 

earliest practicable date after completion of his work in the 

field. Said original field notes will be filed in the office of the 

surveyor general as a part of its permanent records, subject 

only to the direction of the Commissioner of the General Land 

Office; and no changes whatever will be made in said original 

field notes, after they have been filed in the surveyor general’s office, without permission of the Commissioner. 

-70- 

The delivery of the field notes and sketches to the surveyor 

general’s office for examination, constitutes the filing of the 

721 
deputy’s returns, which must at that time include his final 

oath. The surveyor general will record the date of such filing. 

(See page 15.) 

201. The field notes, each book bearing the written 

approval of the surveyor general, will be substantially bound 

in volumes of suitable size and retained in the surveyor 

general’s office. Certified transcripts of said field notes will 

be prepared at the earliest practicable date, as follows: 

202. The field notes of the survey of base lines and standard parallels, of principal and guide meridians, of township 

exteriors, and of subdivision and meander lines, will be written in separate books. A complete set of preliminary and final 

oaths will be attached to the field notes of each class of lines. 

(See page 55.) No adhesive material of any kind will be used 

to fasten leaves or covers. Cut or mutiliated leaves, or slips, 

will not be inserted. 

203. The field notes of subdivisions will be written in a 

separate book for each township; the preliminary oaths of the 

assistants employed in making said subdivisions will be prefixed to the first book, and their final oaths will be attached to 

the last book of the series, arranged in the order of dates. 

204. The first or title page of each book of field notes will 

describe the subject matter of the same, the locus of the 

survey, by whom surveyed, number and date of contract, and 

the dates of commencement and completion of the work. 

205. The second page of each book of field notes will contain the names and duties of the assistants employed on the 

surveys recorded therein; the index will be placed on the 

same or following page. 

206. Whenever a new assistant is employed, or the duties 

of any one of them changed, such fact will be stated in an 

appropriate entry immediately preceding the notes taken 

under such changed arrangements. 

207. No abbreviations or contractions of words are allowable, except as enumerated on page 26 or as shown in the 

specimen field notes. 

208. All transcripts of field notes, made out as herein 

directed, will be written on official field-note paper, foolscap 

size (pages 13% X 8% inches), in a bold, legible hand, or 

type-written, preserving the marginal spaces intact for binding, and as nearly as possible without erasures or interlineations; such transcripts of any series of surveys, included in 

one account forwarded to the General Land Office, will be 

securely put up for mailing, at the office of the surveyor 

general, prior to transmission. 

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO DEPUTY 

SURVEYORS. 

209. One of the most important duties to be performed by 

the surveyor general is to provide the deputy surveyor with 

Special Instructions, in connection with the contract, prepared in accordance with law, which instructions will not 

consist of directing attention to certain paragraphs in this 

Manual, reiteration of its requirements, and printed directions of a general nature; but they will in all cases be specific 

in character, with all necessary detailed statements setting 

forth what the deputy is to do and how the work is to be 

performed. Before making out special instructions, the surveyor general will cause 

-71- 

a thorough examination to be made of the field notes and 

plats of older surveys of standard and township lines upon 

which the deputy is to base his work, and give him full 

information-both written and graphic-of the exact condition of adjoining surveys, with all irregularities that may be 

found, carefully and clearly noted; with all necessary instructions for his guidance if he finds everything as it should be, 

and, in addition, full advice as far as practicable what to do in 

case the surveys on the ground are not as represented in the 

old notes. 

210. If the contract includes exterior lines, the surveyor 

general will specify in detail where the deputy is to commence, in what order and in what direction he is to run the 

lines, and provide for his use one or more diagrams, drawn to 

a scale of one inch or one-half inch to one mile, giving full and 

accurate information in regard to lengths and bearings of all 

lines of old surveys, from which he is to work, or upon which 

he is to close. The diagrams will be made in triplicate, one 

copy for the General Land Office, one for the deputy, and one 

to be retained; they may be either original drawings, or blue 

prints or tracings therefrom. In no case must the deputy be 

sent into the field without full and accurate information in 

regard to all irregularities on the records which will affect 

the extent or accuracy of his survey. 

SPECIMEN FIELD NOTES. 

[See Plates I1 and 111.1 

211. Specimen field notes Nos. 1,2,3,4, and 5, illustrate, 

respectively, the method and order to be followed in the 

survey of standard parallels, guide meridians, and township 

exteriors; resurvey of township exteriors; and the subdivision 

of a township into sections and quarter sections. 

The attention of every deputy surveyor is particularly 

directed to these specimens, as indicating not only the 

method by which his work will be conducted, but also the 

form, order, language, etc., in which his field notes will be 

prepared for the office of the surveyor general, and such 

specimens will be deemed a part of these instructions; and 

any departure from their details, in cases where the circumstances are analogous in practice, will be regarded as a 

violation of his contract and oath. 

DIAGRAM OF TOWNSHIP EXTERIORS. 

212. The title, certificate, and remarks on Plate 11, with 

the specimen field notes Nos. 1,2, and 3, will fully explain the 

drawing designated “Township Exteriors.” 

In all cases the course and length of each township boundary will be clearly stated on the diagram of exteriors; and 

when any township boundary entered on the diagram, surveyed under the current contract or a prior one, departs from 

the true meridian or proper latitude curve, or falls short or 

exceeds its proper length, by an amount in excess of the 

prescribed limits of 21’ of arc and three chains to six miles, 

the actual position and extent of such township boundary will 

be graphically exhibited on the diagram, as well as by bearing and length recorded in the field notes. Where exteriors 

722 
are surveyed or resurveyed in connection with subdivision 

work, a separate diagram of such exteriors is required. 

-72- 

SPECIMAN TOWNSHIP PLAT. 

213. Plate I11 illustrates the subdivision of a township into 

sections and quarter sections; the record of said subdivision 

being given in detail in specimen field notes No. 5. 

214. Each township plat will be prepared in triplicate. One 

plat, considered the original, will be retained as the record in 

the office of the surveyor general; the duplicate will be transmitted to the General Land Office; and the triplicate, after 

acceptance and permission given by the Commissioner, will 

be filed in the United States land office of the proper district. 

These plats will not be altered or added to, and any changes 

(beyond correction of clerical errors) authorized by the Commissioner, will be shown upon a supplemental plat or diagram, prepared in triplicate. 

215. The plats will be prepared as nearly as possible in 

accordance with the specimen plat designated, “Plate 111.” 

The use of all fluids, except a preparation of India ink of good 

quality, will be avoided by the draughtsman in dilineations 

relating to the public surveys. All lines, figures, etc., will be 

sharply defined. All lettering on the plats will be clear and 

sharp in outline and design, and black; ornamentation of any 

kind is prohibited. These requirements are necessary in 

order that everything shown upon original plats may be 

fairly reproduced in making photolithographic copies of the 

same. 

Surveyors general will require that the specimen plat shall 

be closely followed, in order that uniformity of appearance 

and expression of drawing representing the public land surveys may be attained. 

All township plats are to be drawn to a uniform scale of 1 

inch to 40 chains, United States standard, and diagrams of 

exteriors to a scale of 1 inch to 160 chains. Size of sheet to be 

19 x 24 inches. 

216. Plats will not be trimmed. A margin of three inches 

for binding will be preserved on the left-hand side of each 

plat. Each plat will be certified by the surveyor general, with 

table annexed, according to the form on Plate 111, and will 

exhibit the area of public land, water surface, townsite, private land claims, and mineral claims, with the total area of 

the township. 

All towns, settlements, permanent buildings, private 

claims, reservations, water courses, ditches, lakes, islands, 

mountains, buttes, caiions, roads, railroads, telegraph lines, 

canals, etc., will be shown upon the plats and designated by 

proper names where such are known. 

The names of natural features will be correctly give according to accepted usage. Surveyors are not authorized to report 

names of their own selection, but will give those in use, or 

leave the lake, stream, or peak unnamed. The “U. S. Geographic Board” is the authority upon these matters. 

217. Topography, such as ridges, valleys, streams, dry 

runs, acequias, trails, plateaus, marshes, etc., will if possible 

be connected across sections. All water ditches or acequias 

will be shown and designated as such, without reference to 

ownership. Timbered areas, large or small, will not be left 

blank like open country. 

218. Dry runs will be shown by broken or dotted lines, and 

actual water courses by continuous lines. Where it is difficult 

for the deputy to decide whether to consider it a water course 

or not, the words “dry run,” “water in holes,” or other explanation may be inserted, as the location of water in a dry 

country is an important feature. The former 

-73- 

practice of representing dry swales by full black lines like 

those for running streams will not be continued. 

219. Where heavy topographical details are to be drawn, 

first insert the figures and letters, and avoid obscuring them 

by subsequent marks. 

Draftsmen should not lose sight of the fact that their work 

is to be reproduced at this office in the form of photolithographic copies for all future applicants; and that imperfect 

characters, weak lines, and diluted india ink are not compatible with good copying by that process. Use dense black ink in 

all instances, and avoid brush shading. 

220. Where a surveyed line between sections is broken 

into two or more portions by intervening corners, the fractional distances will be fully given. Leave no such distance to 

be computed by the reader. This need not, however, apply 

where a connection distance in shown at a closing corner on 

township line. 

221. The table at bottom of plat will be filled out, so as to 

show how and when each exterior line was surveyed, as well 

as the subdivisions, thus: “S. Boundary,” “W. Boundary,” and 

“N. and E. Boundary,” may fill three lines describing work 

under three separate contracts. 

The number of the contract will always be conspicuously 

shown on the plat, and on the title page of transcripts. Its 

frequent omission is a source of annoyance. See table in Plate 

111. 

Lines not actually run, but extended by offsetting around 

impassable obstacles, are to be dotted or broken lines, as 

shown on sections 16, 21, and 22, in the specimen plat. 

222. Township plats will show the complete condition of 

all their exteriors, including all closing and standard corners, 

connecting distances, offsets, and topography. A line common 

to two townships will be drawn with equal completeness for 

both, as far as approved surveys permit. 

A township rendered fractional by an adjacent reservation 

or private land grant, will have the intervening boundary 

properly lettered, and the mile posts and connecting distances shown. The blank area will show its proper designation. 

223. Where a fractional portion of a township is newly 

surveyed, the condition of adjacent areas will be clearly 

shown by words lettered thereon, such as these: “Unsurveyed,” “U. S. National Forest,” “Rancho San Luis,” “Surveyed by James Jones, 1877,” “Lava Bed,” or other explanation. 

On such supplementary plats, areas previously surveyed 

will have the sections and lots drawn in blank, to show the 

contact of old and new work. 

224. The line of demarcation, between areas previously 

counted in total acreage surveyed and the new surveys, will 

723 
be distinctly shown. A light diagonal shading with black ink 

is recommended, to distinguish such a line. 

225. Meanders will not be left without any index whatever 

in field notes and transcripts. They should be traced on the 

index diagram, and properly marked with page numbers. See 

note on page 160. 

226. The use of small circles on plats, at any of the angles 

of sureyed lines, has been prohibited, and will not be permitted. Although distinctive marks of that sort are shown on 

some of the explanatory diagrams of this Manual, yet they 

are not desired in any kind of plats for official record, under 

the general rule forbidding useless ornamentation. 

-74- 

227. The meander corners within any township were 

formerly all numbered consecutively on the plat. The lists of 

meanders, formerly placed in the margin, made such 

numbering useful for convenient reference. These lists not 

being now used, the consecutive numbers are no longer required, 

228. As a general rule, a quarter section is returned as 

surveyed land when three of its regular corners have been 

legally established. The following exceptions are made to this 

rule: 

When no authority had been given for the subdivision of 

that township or part of township, as in the case of the 

extreme quarter sections at the corners. 

Where there is no corner opposite one of the three corners 

to which the protracting line can be connected. 

229. When the land forms part of a fractional section 

where areas can not be accurately computed without the 

survey of other boundaries of the section, as in section 2 when 

it has its north and east but not its west line established. 

When undetermined corners of the sections are in mountainous regions pronounced unsurveyable in the returns, or 

where witness corners have been substituted for true corners 

of the tract, at a distance greater than 10 chains. 

FRACTIONAL LOTS. 

230. The subdivision of fractional sections into lots is performed in the drafting division of the several offices, and not 

by the surveyor. Skill and judgment are required, to produce 

these lots in the most convenient and equitable form for both 

the purchaser and the Government. In addition to former 

rules, the following are now given: 

231. Avoid needlessly small subdivisions. 

Avoid giving to lots a long shore line with small width. 

Therefore apportion the privileges of water front among as 

many lots as regular division lines will permit, and let the 

longer direction extend back from the shore rather than 

along the water. 

232. Instead of making as many full forty-acre tracts as 

possible, leaving small fractions of a few acres along the 

shore or other boundary, attach such marginal strips to the 

forties, making tracts of 45,50, or 55 acres. But when the area 

of a fractional lot would equal or exceed 60 acres, it should be 

divided. No lot should lie partly in two sections. 

233. The subdivision of fractional sections into regular 

lots (as near as may be) will be so laid down on the official 

township plat in broken black lines as to admit of giving to 

each a specific designation by word description, if possible, 

according to its relative position in the fractional section, as 

per examples on Plate 111; or by a number, in all cases where 

the lot can not properly be designated as a quarter quarter. 

Those fractional lots which are not susceptible of being described according to relative local position will be numbered 

in a regular series; those bordering on the closing boundaries 

of a township to be numbered progressively from east to west 

or from north to south, in each regular section. As section 6 

borders on both the north and west boundaries of the 

township, the fractional lots in the same will be numbered as 

follows: commencing with No. 1 in the northeast, thence 

progressively west to No. 4 in the northwest, and south to No. 

7 in the southwest corner of the section. 

-75- 

234. To secure a uniform system for numbering lots of 

fractional sections, including those above specified, imagine 

the section divided by three equidistant parallel latitudinal 

lines into four strips or tiers, numbered from north to south; 

then, beginning with the eastern lot of the north tier, call it 

No. 1, and continue the numbering west through the tier, 

then east in the second, west in the third, and east in the 

fourth tier. A lot extending north and south through two, or 

part of two tiers, will be numbered in the tier containing its 

greater area. In case any tier is without numbered lots, the 

numbering will be continued in the next tier to the south. 

(Plate 111, section 18.) 

This method of numbering will apply to any part of a 

section, regardless of the relative situation of a part or parts 

surveyed and lotted under a prior contract; in this case the lot 

numbers will be a continuation of the series already initiated. 

A section that has been partly surveyed at different times 

should have no duplication of lot numbers. 

235. When, by reason of irregular surveys or from other 

causes, the length of a township from south to north exceeds 

the lawful length of 480.00 chains, or the width from east to 

west exceeds 480.00 chains minus the proper convergency, to 

such extent as to require two or more tiers of lots along the 

north boundary, or two or more ranges of lots along the west 

boundary, as the case may be, the entire north or west portions of said sections beyond the quarter corner will be properly lotted, and to each lot will be assigned its proper number; 

and in such cases the area of each lot will be stated on the 

plat. 

In case the length or width of the township falls so far short 

of legal dimensions as to eliminate the north or west half of 

any section situated as above specified, that part of the section remaining will be treated in a similar manner. 

236. In a regular township (Plate 111) the southeast quarter of the northwest quarter of section 6 will have its proper 

area in acres (40) inserted in all cases. The half quarter 

sections in north tier and west range of sections will exhibit 

their proper areas in acres (80); while the areas of quarter 

sections will be omitted, except as follows: 

237. When two lines of legal subdivision of either 160,80, 

or 40 acre tracts intersect each other on or so near a meander 

or boundary line that the ordinary inaccuracies of drawing 

would leave the areas of said tracts in doubt, the plats will, for 

724 
the sake of clearness and a full showing of the facts, exhibit 

the proper areas of such quarter, half-quarter, and quarterquarter sections. See examples, Plate 111, in sections 13, 17, 

25, and 35. 

TRANSCRIPTS. 

238. Transcripts of field notes should have a proper heading on each page. Instead of the perplexing title, “Exterior 

Boundaries of T. 12 N., R. 4 W.,” specify on each page thus: 

“West Boundary,’’ or “N. Bdy. of T. 12 N., R. 4 W.” 

239. The index diagram of exteriors will show lines drawn 

in their true directions, as on page 152; thus, range lines will 

not be shown horizontally. 

240. Where corrections in the field have been permitted, 

care will be exercised that field notes thereof be added to 

former field notes with proper dates, explanations, and additional oaths. 

-76- 

241. The sheets of each book are to be firmly bound 

together. But eyelets or clasps which prevent separating 

sheets without injury, are not to be used in documents or 

official correspondence. 

A series of books under one contract should be lettered on 

the title page, A, B, etc., in their proper and consecutive order 

of dates; and in subsequent correspondence it will be convenient to refer to each book by its letter. 

242. With the copy of each township plat furnished to a 

district land office, the surveyor general is requirecd by law 

to furnish descriptive notes of the character and quality of the 

soil and timber found on and in the vicinity of each surveyed 

line, and to give a description of each corner. 

Printed blank forms of such notes are furnished by the 

General Land Office. The forms provide eighteen spaces for 

meander corners, which,.in most cases, will be sufficient; but 

when the number shall exceed eighteen, the residue will 

have to be inserted on the supplemental blank form. 

COMPUTATION OF THE AREAS OF LOTS 

ADJOINING THE BOUNDARIES OF TOWNSHIPS. 

243. In regular townships, the tracts of land in each section adjoining the north and west boundaries of such 

townships, in excess of the regularly subdivided 480 acres 

(exceptin section 61, will, in general, be in the form of 

trapezoids, 80.00 chains in length by about 20 chains in 

width. 

On the plats of such townships, each of said tracts will be 

divided into four lots, by drawing broken l.ines at intervals of 

20.00 chains, parallel to the ends of the tracts, which will be 

regarded as parallel to each other. 

With the exception of section 6, the south boundaries of 

sections of the north tier, when within prescribed limits, will 

be called 80.00 chains. 

When the above-named conditions obtain, the areas of the 

lots in any one tract (except in section 6) may be determined, 

as follows: 

Divide the difference between the widths of the ends of the 

tract by 4; if 3 remains, increase the hundredth figure of the 

quotient by a unit; in all other cases disregard the fraction; 

call the quotient thus obtained, “d’; then, taking the end 

widths of the tract in chains and decimals of a chain, the 

areas of the lots, in acres, will be: 

Of the smallest lot: twice the width of the lesser end, plus 

“d”; 

Of the largest lot: twice the width of the greater end, minus 

“d”; 

Of the smaller middle lot: sum of the widths of the ends, 

minus “d”; 

Of the larger middle lot: sum of the widths of the ends, plus 

“8’. 

A check on the computation may be had by multiplying the 

sum of the widths of the ends of the tract by 4; the product 

should agree exactly with the total area of the four lots. 

The proper application of the above rules will always give 

areas correct to the nearest hundredth of an acre; and, as the 

use of fractions is entirely avoided, the method is recommended for its simplicity and accuracy. 

-77- 

Example 1. (See Plate 111, section 31.) 

The l/4 difference of latitudinal boundaries is 0.033/4 chains; 

consequently, “d” is .04 chains; then, 

18.35 x 2 + .04= 36.74 acres, the area of lot 1; 

18.50 x 2 - .04= 36.96 acres, the area of lot 4; 

18.50 + 18.35 - .04 = 36.81 acres, the area of lot 2; 

18.50 + 18.35 + .04 = 36.89 acres, the area of lot 3; 

Check: [ 18.35 + 18.50 ] x 4 = 147.40 acres, the area of the four lots. 

The arithmetical operations are here written in detail, for 

the purpose of illustration; but the practical computer will 

perform all the work mentally. 

244. Section 6. (See Plate 11, figs. 6 and 7; and Plate 111.) 

The areas of lots 5,6, and 7 may be obtained by the foregoing 

rules in all cases, except when the township closes on a base 

line or standard parallel; also, the area of lot 4, provided both 

meridional boundaries are 80.00 chains in length; when the 

last condition obtains, the areas of lots 1, 2, and 3 will be 

equal, and each will contain 40.00 acres. 

In any case where the west boundary of sec. 6, is 80.00 

chains, and the east boundary either greater or less than 

80.00 chains, the areas of lots 1,2,3, and 4 will be computed 

as follows: 

Refer to figures 6 and 7 and determine the difference, “q”, 

between the east boundaries of lots 1 and 4 by the following 

proportion: 

N. bdy. sec. 6.: diff. of meridional bdrs. sec. 6.::60 chs.: q; 

then will E. bdy. lot 4 = E. bdy. lot 1 ? q; in which, “q” will be 

added when the east boundary of sec. 6 is less than 80.00 

chains (fig. 7.); but subtracted when said east boundary is 

greater than 80.00 chains (fig. 6). 

Now take one third of “q,” and add it to the shorter east 

boundary of lots 1 or 4, as conditions may require, and thereby determine the length of one of the meridional boundaries 

of lot 2; to which, again add “one third of q,” and thus obtain 

the length of the opposite side of lot 2. The areas of lots 1,2, 

and 3, in acres, will be found by taking the sum of their 

respective meridional boundaries, expressed in chains and 

decimals of a chain. 

725 
The area of lot 4 may be had by multiplying its mean width 

by its mean length. 

Finally, to test the entire work, multiply the sum of the 

latitudinal boundaries by 4, and to the product add the area of 

the small triangle C A B, if the east boundary is greater than 

80.00 chains (fig. 6); but subtract the area of said small 

triangle if the east boundary is less than 80.00 chains (fig. 7). 

These operations, correctly performed, will give the true area 

of the section, which should agree exactly with the total area 

of its legal subdivisions, obtained as directed in the preceding 

paragraphs . Example 2. (See Plate 11, figs. 6 and 7, and Plate 111.) 

Compute areas of lots 5, 6, and 7 of sec. 6, as directed in 

paragraph 1, and illustrated by the example; then write: 

chs. chs. chs. chs. chs. 

77.75 : 0.05 : : 60.00 : 0.0386 =q; ?’3 q= 0.0129 

chs. chs. chs. 

20.0500 - 0.0386 = 20.01, the E. bdy. of lot 4; 

20.0114 + 0.0129 = 20.02, the E. bdy. of lot 3; 

20.0243 + 0.0129 = 20.04, the E. bdy. of lot 2; 

-78- 

Then, for the areas of lots 1, 2, 3, and 4, we have: 

chs. chs. acres. 

40.09, the area of lot 1; 

40.06, the area of lot 2; 

40.03, the area of lot 3; 

20.05 + 20.04.. ........ = 

20.04 + 20.02 .......... = 

20.02 + 20.01.. ........ = 

20.00 + 20.01 x 17.75+ 17.78 = 35.54, the area of lot 4, 

2 2 

Also [17.78 + 17.871 x 3 = 106.95, the area of lots 5, 6, 

and 7. 

Area of regular subdivisions = 360.00 

Total.. ........................ = 622.67, the area of sec. 6. 

chs. chs. 

77.75 x 0.025 = 0.19, the area of triangle 

Check: L77.87 + 77.751 x 4 = 622.48 

C A B (fig 6). 

Total ..................... = 622.67, which agrees with the 

area of section 6, 

before determined. 

245. The area in acres of a tract 40.00 chains long, adjoining north or west township boundaries (except in NW. Y4 sec. 

6), is equal to the sum of its parallel boundaries (expressed in 

chains and decimals thereof) multiplied by 2; e. g., the area of 

lots 6 and 7 (Plate 11, fig. 61, is L17.87 + 17.811 x 2 = 71.36 

acres. 

The area in acres of a tract 60.00 chains long, situated as 

above described (excluding lot 4, of sec. 61, may be found by 

multiplying the sum of its parallel boundaries (expressed in 

chains and decimals of a chain) by 3; e. g., fig. 6; south 

boundary lot 4=17.78 chs.; area of lots 5, 6, 7 is 

[17.78 + 17.871 X 3 = 106.95 acres. (See example 2.) 

The area in acres of quarter sections adjoining north and west 

township boundaries (excluding NW. Y4 sec. 61, may be 

obtained by multiplying the sum of their parallel boundaries 

(taken in chains and decimals of a chain), by 2; e. g., the area 

of SW. Y4 sec. 6 (fig. 61, is [37.87 +37.811 x 2 = 151.36 acres. 

The area in acres of any section along the north and west 

boundaries of regular townships (except sec. 6) may be had by 

multiplying the sum of its parallel boundaries (expressed in 

chains and decimals of a chain) by 4; e. g., the area of sec. 1 

(Plate 111) is [80.00 + 79.771 x 4 = 639.08 acres. 

Subdivisions closing irregularly to the south or east exterior boundary are to be computed by similar methods. 

EXPLANATIONS OF ARTICLES ON PAGES 80 to 86, 

WITH GENERAL DEFINITIONS OF A 

“RETRACEMENT” AND A “RESURVEY.” 

246. When new surveys are to be initiated or closed upon 

the lines of old surveys, which although reported to have been 

executed correctly, are found to be actually defective in alinement, measurement, or position, it is manifest that the employment of the regular methods prescribed for surveying 

normal township exteriors and subdivisions would result in 

extending the imperfections of the old surveys into the new, 

thereby producing irregular townships bounded by exterior 

lines not in conformity with true meridians or parallels of 

latitude, and containing trapezium-shaped sections which 

may or may not contain 640 acres each, as required by law. 

-79- 

247. Therefore, in order to extend such new surveys without incorporating therein the defects of prior erroneous work, 

special methods, in harmony as far as practicable with the 

following requirements, should be employed, viz: 

The establishment of township boundaries conformable to 

true meridian and latitude lines. 

The establishment of section boundaries by running two 

sets of parallel lines governed respectively by true meridians 

and parallels of latitude, and intersecting each other approximately at right angles at such intervals as to produce tracts 

of square form containing 640 acres each. 

The reduction to a minimum of the number of fractional 

sections in a township, and consequently of the amount of 

field and office work. 

248. Such special methods are based upon certain limits of 

allowable error in the alinement, measurement, and position 

of old township boundaries, as prescribed in the following 

article entitled “Definitions of Defective Township Boundaries,” which will be carefully determined and rectifications 

made, if necessary, under the provisions of the article entitled “Retracement or Resurvey of Township Lines and Linear 

Boundaries not Established in Conformity with the Rectangular System of Surveying,” page 80, prior to the execution of new surveys under the methods prescribed by the 

article entitled “Methods of Executing New Surveys, when 

Initiated or closed upon Defective old Surveys,” page 82, and 

illustrated on Plate VI, by figures 1 to 15; on Plate VII, 

figures 1 to 7, and on Plate VIII. 

249. In order to prevent any misunderstanding relative to 

the modus operandi indicated by the terms “retracement” 

and “resurvey,” the following definitions of the same are here 

presented: 

The retracement of a township boundary, or other line of 

survey, consists in the determination of the true bearings and 

distances between the successive corners along the entire 

length of such a line; and the data thus obtained will be 

726 
embodied in the field notes together with detailed particulars 

of the methods employed. 

The resurvey of a township boundary or other line of survey consists of a retracement of such a line accompanied by 

the reconstruction of defective original corners and the establishment thereon of all the necessary new corners; and the 

detailed particulars of the entire operations will be embodied 

in the field notes. 

DEFINITIONS OF DEFECTIVE TOWNSHIP 

BOUNDARIES. 

250. Upon retracement thereof, an old township boundary 

may be found to be defective in one or all of three qualifications, viz: alinement, measurement, and position, as follows: 

In alinement: when any portion thereof deviates more than 

twenty-one minutes of arc from a true meridian or latitude 

line. 

251. In measurement: when the length of the whole 

boundary or some portion thereof, between two successive 

corners, is proved to be greater or less than the distance 

certified in the preceding survey, at a rate exceeding 25 links 

to the half mile. 

252. In position: when the corners originally established 

on such a boundary can not be connected with the corners on 

the opposite regu- 

-80- 

larly established boundary, by lines which do not deviate 

more than twenty-one minutes of arc from true meridian or 

latitude lines. 

253. The limits prescribed in the foregoing paragraph are 

to be considered only in determining the necessity of resurveying old township boundaries when new surveys are to be 

initiated or closed upon the same, and will not be construed in 

any way as establishing limits of allowable error in the execution of new surveys. 

RETRACEMENT OR RESURVEY OF TOWNSHIP 

LINES AND LINEAR BOUNDARIES NOT 

ESTABLISHED IN CONFORMITY WITH THE 

RECTANGULAR SYSTEM OF SURVEYING. 

254. If in subdividing a township, it is found that any 

boundary thereof is defective in excess of the limits of allowable error prescribed in the article entitled “Definitions of 

Defective Township Boundaries,” above, or that the corners 

originally established thereon had been incorrectly marked, 

or have been obliterated, the deputy surveyor will resurvey 

so much of said boundaries as may be necessary. 

255. Such necessity is often doubtful until proved by retracement. In connecting new surveys with accepted lines, 

when misclosure appears, the presumption is in favor of 

accepted work instead of new lines. A deputy must first 

examine and remeasure his own lines for possible error; and 

if he finds them accurate, and is willing to confide the result 

to a strict inspection thereof, he is to retrace the older work to 

find the cause of the misclosure. Such retracements and resurveys receive special attention in the inspection; and if 

their necessity and accuracy are corroborated by the examiner, and approved by the Commissioner, the deputy will be 

allowed compensation. (See 27 L. D. 79.) 

256. When subdivisional lines have not been closed upon 

either side of, or mineral claims tied to, a township boundary, 

it will be corrected (if necessary), in point of alinement, as 

well as measurement, by establishing regular new corners at 

lawful distances (minus the northing or plus the southing of 

the south boundary; or minus the westing or plus the easting 

of the east boundary), from said boundaries respectively (as 

the case may be), upon a right line connecting the proper 

township corners, provided said line does not deviate more 

than twenty-one minutes of arc from a true meridian or 

latitude line (as the case may be). (See Plate VI, figs. 1,2,3.) 

But, if the bearing of said line exceeds the limit prescribed 

above, the new corners will be placed on a line run due north 

or west, from the southeast corner of the township, to intersection with the township or range line (as the case may 

be), where a closing corner will be established, and the old 

township corner properly changed to a corner common to two 

townships. 

The old corners on all township boundaries rectified under 

the provisions of this paragraph will be destroyed. (See Plate 

VI, figs. 4 and 5.) 

257. Where subdivisional lines have been closed upon one 

side of, or mineral claims tied to, a township boundary prior 

to the subdivision of the township on the other side, its alinement will not be changed; all obliterated old corners will be 

reestablished in their original places; new regular corners 

common to two townships, sections, or quarter sec- 

-81- 

tions, will be established upon it at lawful distances (minus 

the northing or plus the southing of the south boundary; or 

minus the westing or plus the easting of the east boundary), 

from said boundaries respectively (as the case may be), 

marked with reference to the township being subdivided, and 

the marks on the old corners upon such boundary which refer 

to the new work will be effaced. 

Marks on bearing trees will be corrected (if necessary) to 

indicate the township, range, and section in which they 

stand, but the mounds will remain as originally established. 

(See Plate VI, figs 6 and 7.) 

258. Where subdivisional lines have been closed upon one 

side of, or mineral claims tied to, the northern portion of a 

range line prior to the subdivision of the township on the 

other side (see section 2571, while upon the southern portion 

of the same such attachments have not been made on either 

side (see section 2561, said southern portion will be resurveyed and proper new corners established thereon, at lawful 

distances from the south boundary, as follows: 

If the bearing of said southern portion does not deviate 

more than twenty-one minutes of arc from a true meridian 

line, it will be rectified under the provisions of the first clause 

of section 256, and the rectifications will be continued on the 

northern portion under the provisions of section 257. (See 

Plate VI, fig. 8.) 

If, however, said bearing exceeds the specified limit, from 

the northern terminal corner of said southern portion, the 

range line will be extended due south on a random to its 

intersection with the south boundary, where a corner com727 
mon to two townships will be established, all the necessary 

changes made in the markings on the original corner common to four townships situated in its immediate vicinity, and 

regular new corners placed upon the respective portions of 

the entire range line as specified in the foregoing clause. (See 

Plate VI, fig. 9.) 

259. Similar cases involving the rectification of the northern portion of a range line when the southern portion of the 

same can not be rectified in bearing, will be treated in conformity with the rules prescribed in the foregoing clauses, 

with the exception, that where such northern portion deviates more than twenty-one minutes of arc from a true meridian line, its alinement will be rectified by extending the same 

from its southern terminal corner, due north on a true line to 

its intersection with the north boundary, where a proper 

closing corner will be established and the necessary corrections applied to the old corner common to four townships in 

its immediate vicinity, so as to change it to a corner common 

to two townships. (See Plate VI, figs. 10, 11, and 12.) 

In the treatment of latitudinal township lines the rule 

prescribed in the foregoing clauses will be applied, observing, 

however, that the stated designations north or south will 

correspond in such cases to west or east, respectively. 

260. When subdivisional lines have been closed upon one 

or both sides of, or mineral claims tied to, the northern and 

southern portions of a range line, while the middle portion 

thereof is free from such attachments, said portion will be 

resurveyed and new regular corners will be established 

thereon at intervals of forty chains from its southern terminal corner, upon a right he connecting the original terminal 

corners thereof, the fractional measurement being thrown 

against the northern terminal corner. (See Plate VI, figs. 13, 

14, and 15.) 

-82- 

In such cases all the original corners, excepting the terminal corners, of the portion of the lines thus resurveyed, will be 

destroyed. 

The rectification of the middle portions of latitudinal 

township lines, on which the conditions specified above 

obtain, will be executed in a similar manner, observing, 

however, that the designations north or south in the foregoing clauses will in such cases correspond to west or east, 

respectively. 

261. Under the foregoing paragraphs, the fact that mineral claims have been tied to a defective township boundary as 

therein specified, will act as a bar to the rectification of such a 

boundary in alinement, only when the number of claims 

involved is great; while in cases where a few such claims have 

been connected with a few of the corners on such a boundary, 

said boundary will be rectified in alinement and new corners 

placed thereon, care being taken, however, to perpetuate in a 

proper manner such old corners as are found to be connected 

with the claims; and the methods employed to accomplish the 

same, together with the bearings and distances of such old 

corner from the new, will be briefly recorded in the field 

notes. 

262. New corners on defective township boundaries must 

be established by an actual survey of such lines, and in no 

case will such corners be established from data acquired in 

running lines closing upon the same. 

263. In the retracement or resurvey of base lines, standard 

parallels, principal meridians and guide meridians, two sets 

of chainmen will be employed, while for similar work on 

township lines, not of the character specified above, only one 

set of chainmen is required, and in cases where conditions 

such as specified in section 257 obtain, the bearings and 

distances between successive old corners and the connections 

of all new corners with the nearest old corners, will be carefully determined and recorded in the field notes. 

Regarding restoration of lost corners, by private and county surveyors, see page 191. 

264. When township or subdivisional lines intersect the 

boundaries of confirmed private land claims, or any other 

linear boundaries established at variance with the rectangular system of surveying, as much of said boundaries will be 

retraced as may be necessary, temporary stakes being set at 

intervals of ten chains thereon, and also at each angle formed 

by a change in the direction of the same. 

All obliterated boundary corners will be reestablished in 

their original places, and the regular surveys will be closed 

upon the retraced line as prescribed for “closings” in page 60. 

METHODS OF EXECUTING NEW SURVEYS, WHEN 

INITIATED OR CLOSED UPON OLD SURVEYS, 

AND EXPLANATION OF FIGURES ON PLATE VI. 

265. Such methods are illustrated by the several figures 

on Plate VI, the rectification of the lines of old surveys, and 

the establishment of new township exterior and subdivisiona1 lines connected with such old lines, being based upon the 

rules prescribed in the article entitled “Retracement or Resurvey of Township Lines,” etc., page 80. 

In considering the several cases, the probable obtaining 

conditions relative to a range line have been adopted in order 

to reduce the number of figures on said plate, and, to curtail 

also as much as practi- 

-83- 

cable, the amount of reiterative verbal explanation; it being 

definitely understood, however, that whatever conditions 

may obtain relative to a latitudinal line similar to those 

illustrated and explained in extenso in the cases relative to 

the range line, the necessary rectifications will be made by 

the application of similar methods, subject, however, to the 

proper modifications due to the difference in the direction of 

the respective lines. 

The character of such modifications, when not obvious, are 

expressed in detail under the various clauses of the several 

paragraphs of the article on retracements referred to above. 

It will also be clearly understood that, in order to avoid 

unnecessary structural complications, the figures on Plate 

VI exhibit only the positions of township and section corners 

after rectification, while in actual practice the quarter section corners will also be properly affected. 

266. Fig. 1. The east boundary is assumed as irregular in 

bearing and defective in measurement; the township corners 

on the same, however, being susceptible of connection by a 

728 
line not deviating more than twenty-one minutes of arc from 

a true meridian line. 

It will be rectified under the rules prescribed by clause 1, 

section 256, while from the proper corners the west and north 

boundaries will be established in the regular manner, as well 

as the subdivisions within the exteriors thus rectified and 

established. 

267. Fig. 2. The east boundary defective in measurement. 

It will be rectified under clause 1, section 256, while the west 

and north boundaries will be established, and the subdivisions executed in the regular manner. 

268. Fig. 3. The east boundary defective in position. Since 

the south boundary deviates from a true east and west line by 

more than twenty-one minutes of arc, said east boundary will 

be rectified under clause 1, section 256; the west and north 

boundaries will be established in the regular manner; and 

the subdivisions will be executed from north to south, and 

from east to west, commencing at the corner of sections 1, 2, 

35, and 36, and closing the fractional measurements on the 

south and west boundaries, as such closings are made in 

regular subdivisions on the north and west boundaries. 

269. Fig. 4. The east boundary defective in alinement. It 

will be rectified under clause 2, section 256; while the west 

and north boundaries will be established, and the subdivisions executed, in the regular manner. 

270. Fig. 5. The east boundary defective in alinement and 

measurement. It will be rectified under clause 2, section 256; 

the west boundary will be established in the regular manner, 

while from the corner common to two townships on the rectified east boundary, the north boundary will be run west on 

random and east on true line, permanent corners common to 

sections and quarter sections of the township to be subdivided 

being established on the same. 

The subdivisions will be executed in the regular manner. 

271. Fig. 6. The south and east boundaries being defective 

in alinement, measurement, and position, will be rectified 

under clause 1, section 257; the west boundary will be established in the regular manner, and the north boundary by east 

on random, and west on true line, throwing the fractional 

measurement against the old east boundary; 

-84- 

while the subdivisions will be executed from north to south, 

and from west to east, commencing at the corner of sections 5, 

6,31, and 32, and closing the fractional measurements on the 

old south and east boundaries, as such closings are made in 

regular subdivisions on the north and west boundaries. 

272. Fig. 7. The north, south, east, and west boundaries 

being defective in alinement, measurement, and position. 

The south and east boundaries will be rectified under clause 

1, section 257; while the west and north boundaries will be 

retraced for length and bearing, any obliterated old corners 

being reestablished in their original places. 

273. The subdivisions will be executed as follows: 

From the corners of sections 35 and 36, and 25 and 36, the 

lines between said sections will be extended due north and 

west, respectively, to their mutual intersection, where the 

corner of sections 25, 26, 35 and 36, will be established. 

From said corner, the line between sections 26 and 35, 27 

and 34,28 and 33,29 and 32, and 30 and 31 will be projected 

due west on a true line to its intersection with the west 

boundary of the township, where a closing corner will be 

established. A line thus run is termed a 

SECTIONAL CORRECTION LINES; 

and when such an auxiliary line, thus projected, intersects its 

objective limiting line in such proximity to its objective corner that the accessories of the two corners would interfere, 

that portion of the auxiliary line situated between the lastestablished section corner and the limiting line will be 

changed in alinement to close upon the corner found, thus 

avoiding placing two corners in close proximity. 

274. From the initial point of the sectional correction line, 

which, in this case, is the corner of sections 25,26,35, and 36, 

the line between sections 25 and 26,23 and 24,13 and 14,ll 

and 12, and 1 and 2, will be projected north on a true line to its 

intersection with the north boundary, where a closing corner 

will be established. A line thus established is termed a 

SECTIONAL GUIDE MERIDIAN. 

South of the sectional correction line, and east of the sectional guide meridian, the subdivisions will be closed upon 

the south and east boundaries by random and true lines, 

throwing the fractional measurements against the same, as 

such closings are made in regular surveys on the north and 

west boundaries; while that portion of the township situated 

to the north and west respectively, of said auxiliary lines, will 

be subdivided in the regular manner, the parallelism of the 

latitudinal section lines being referred to the sectional correction line, and that of the meridional section lines to the 

sectional guide meridian. 

Closings on the west and north boundaries will be made by 

random and true lines, when the fallings are less than 50 

links per mile, and by true lines run to closing corners when 

the fallings exceed said limit. 

275. Fig. 8. The east boundary defective in measurement, 

the northern portion of the same being unchangeable, while 

the southern portion admits of rectification. 

-85- 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 2, section 

257, the west and north boundaries will be established, and 

the subdivisions executed, in the regular manner. 

276. Fig. 9. The east boundary defective in alinement and 

measurement, the northern portion thereof being unchangeable, while the southern portion of the same admits of rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 3, section 

258, the south boundary, under clause 1, section 257; the west 

boundary will be established in the regular manner; while 

the north boundary will be run east on random, and west on 

true line, throwing the fractional measurement against the 

east boundary. 

The subdivisions will be executed from south to north, and 

from west to east, closing the fractional measurements on the 

north and east boundaries, as such closings are made in 

regular surveys, on the north and west boundaries. 

277. Fig. 10. The east boundary defective in measure729 
ment, the southern portion thereof being unchangeable, 

while the northern portion admits of rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 4, section 

258; while the west and north boundaries will be established, 

and the subdivisions executed in the regular manner. 

278. Fig. 11. The east boundary defective in alinement 

and measurement, the southern portion thereof being unchangeable, while the northern portion admits of rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 1, section 

259; the west boundary will be established in the regular 

manner; the north boundary by east on true line to closing 

corner, the fractional measurement being thrown against the 

old east boundary; while the subdivisions will be executed 

from south to north, and from west to east, the fractional 

measurements being thrown against the old north and east 

boundaries, as such closings are made in regular surveys 

against the north and west boundaries. 

279. Fig. 12. The east boundary defective in measurement; the northern and southern portions thereof being unchangeable, while the middle portion admits of rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 1, section 

260, the west and north boundaries will be established, and 

the subdivisions executed in the regular manner. 

280. Fig. 13. The east boundary defective in alinement 

and measurement; the northern and southern portions thereof being unchangeable; while the middle portion admits of 

rectification. 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 1, section 

260; the west boundary will be established in the regular 

manner; the north boundary by west on random and east on 

true line, the fractional measurement being thrown against 

the old east boundary; while the subdivisions will be executed from south to north and from east to west, closing the 

fractional measurements against the east, north and west 

boundaries. 

281. Fig. 14. The east boundary defective in alinement 

and measurement; the northern and southern portions thereof not admitting of rectification in any way, since subdivisional surveys have been closed upon both sides of the 

same; while the middle portion admits of rectification in 

measurement. 

-86- 

The east boundary will be rectified under clause 1, section 

260; the west boundary will be established in the regular 

manner, the township corner at the end of six miles thereon 

being temporarily established. 

From said temporary corner, the fractional north boundary 

will be run east on random to the nearest old established 

corner on the same, at which point if the falling of the random 

is within 50 links per mile, said boundary will be corrected 

westward on true line, setting corners common to the sections 

and quarter sections on the north, at regular intervals from 

the initial point of the true line, and throwing the consequent 

fractional measurement in its normal place against the new 

west boundary, while the temporary township corner previously established thereon will be made permanent. 

If, however, the falling defined above exceeds the stated 

limit from the last established corner of the old surveys, the 

fractional north boundary will be projected due west to its 

intersection with the west boundary, at which point the proper township corner will be permanently established, and the 

temporary corner destroyed. 

In establishing the corners on said north boundary under 

the latter procedure, the requirements prescribed in the former relative to the allowance for fractional measurement 

will be strictly observed. 

In subdividing, the methods prescribed under Fig. 6 will be 

applied as far as practicable. The details of the case under 

consideration are clearly exhibited by fig. 14. 

282. Fig. 15. All of the boundaries are assumed to be defective in alinement, measurement, and position; also portions 

of each as being closed upon by subdivisional surveys and 

consequently unchangeable relative to the old surveys, while 

other portions of the same being free from such attachments, 

admit of rectification. 

This figure is constructed on a larger scale than those 

explained in the preceding paragraphs, in order to illustrate 

in detail the modus operandi to be pursued in rectification, 

under the rules of the article on retracements applicable to 

each of the obtaining conditions, and also in subdividing 

within the rectified exteriors. 

HIATUSES AND OVERLAPS. 

283. The several figures on Plate VII illustrate in detail 

the methods to be employed in connecting the unsurveyed 

portions of two or more township boundaries, when four of 

such fractional lines, upon being projected toward each other 

in the direction of the cardinal points by lines not deviating 

more than 21 minutes of arc from true meridian or latitudinal lines, do not form a common intersection. 

Said methods, in addition to the reasons embodied in the 

article entitled “Explanations of Articles,” etc., page 78, are 

based upon the following desiderata, viz: 

1. The adjustment of such township boundaries so as to 

maintain section 36 in a condition theoretically and practically perfect, according to the requirements of the rectangular system of surveying. 

2. That in accomplishing the above, the resultant fractional excess or deficiency (which for brevity of explanation is 

termed “the rectangular fraction”) will be thrown into, or 

taken out of section 6, whenever practicable. 

-87- 

3. That all incidental fractional measurements developed 

in the establishment of township boundaries or subdivisional 

lines by such methods shall be thrown against the old surveys 

whenever practicable. 

284. In considering said methods it will be observed that 

the conditions to be dealt with are either hiatuses or overlaps, 

the former possessing three characteristic features, which 

are named as follows: 

Simple hatus. See figures 1 and 2, Plate VII. 

Meridional hiatus. See figure 3. 

Latitudinal hiatus. See figure 4; while overlaps are shown 

by figure 5. 

As the application of said methods, when the conditions 

exhibited obtain, gives similar results with but few excep730 
tions, which will be specifically detailed hereafter, the condition represented by A, figure 3, will be considered and the 

method of connection described as an example, upon the 

following assumptions, viz: 

That, of the boundaries of townships 1 and 2 north, ranges 

3 and 4 west, those portions indicated by broken lines are 

unsurve yed; 

That it is required to connect said portions in order to 

complete the subdivisions in one or more of the townships. 

Beginning at the established terminal corners on the south 

and east boundaries of T. 2 N., R. 4 W., blank lines will be 

projected due east and due south, respectively, with temporary stakes at intervals of ten chains, to an intersection, which 

point will be marked by a temporary stake; 

Then, from the established terminal corners on the west 

and north boundaries of T. 1 N., R. 3 W., true lines will be 

projected due north and due west, respectively, with regular 

corners for two sections and quarter sections, to an intersetion, which point will be marked by a temporary stake; 

Then, by proper measurements, the character of the resulting condition will be determined, and by comparison with 

diagrams A, of the figures on Plate VII, the particular 

method of connection will be obtained and applied. 

285. Said condition in the case under consideration, it will 

be observed, is a meridional hiatus; therefore, from the temporary stake marking the intersection of the extended south 

and east boundaries of T. 2 N., R. 4 W., which will be replaced 

by a permanent corner (common to two townships) for T. 1 N., 

R. 3 W., and T. 2 N., R. 4 W., the south boundary of the latter 

will be extended due east to its intersection with the west 

boundary of the former, where a corner for (one township 

only) T. 1 N., R. 4 W., will be permanently established; 

Then, from the corner for T. 1 N., R. 3 W., and T. 2 N., R. 4 

W., the south and east boundaries of the latter will be corrected back west and north, respectively, on true lines, establishing regular corners common to two quarter sections and 

sections of said township, to the initial points of the blank 

lines, against which the resulting fractional measurements 

will be thrown, while the stakes temporarily established on 

the blank lines at intervals of ten chains will be destroyed; 

Then, from the stake temporarily marking the intersection 

of the north and west boundaries of T. 1 N., R. 3 W., which 

will be destroyed, the former boundary will be extended due 

west to its intersection with the east boundary of T. 2 N., R. 4 

W., where a proper closing corner 

-88- 

will be established, the resulting fractional measurement 

thrown against the same, and the distance to the nearest 

corner on said boundary carefully determined and recorded 

in the field notes. 

Thus section 36 is made full, serving as a perfect base on 

which to initiate the subdivisional work in T. 2 N., R. 4 W.; 

the rectangular fraction, which in this case indirectly represents an excess, is incorporated in section 6, which being 

lotted on two sides in its normal condition, absorbs the excess 

without deranging materially those portions of the same 

usually defined as regular subdivisions; while the unsurveyed portions of the entire group of townships are arranged 

in such a manner as to admit of completing the subdivisional 

work therein on the approved rectangular basis. 

Relative to incorporating an excess in, or supplying a deficiency from, section 6, simple hiatuses are noted as exceptions to the general rule; therefore, when such hiatuses are 

square, or longer meridionally (see 1, diagrams A, fig. 11, the 

rectangular fraction will be taken out of section 31, and 

incorporated in section 1; but if the length thereof (see 1, diag. 

A, fig. 2) lie in a latitudinal direction, said rectangular fraction will be taken out of section 1 and incorporated in section 

31. 

286. If the surveys contemplated, within a group of four 

townships, consist of the completion of the southeast unsurveyed portion of the northwest township only, the method 

detailed in the foregoing paragraphs will be employed in all 

particulars, with the exception that the extension of the 

north and west boundaries of the southeast township will be 

omitted; but the completion of the unsurveyed portions of any 

of the other three demands of the deputy surveyor the performance of the whole operation, and the complete connection of all the boundaries. 

When, of four township boundaries whose directions tend 

to an approximate common point, two of the same have been 

carried to a mutual intersection, and are closed upon by 

subdivisional and other lines (see section 2571, the unsurveyed portion of the remaining boundaries will be connected 

with them by the application of these methods, sufficiently 

modified to preserve intact the prior subdivisional surveys. 

FRAGMENTARY SUBDIVISION. 

287. Plate VIII illustrates the general methods to be employed in the execution of fragmentary subdivisions within 

townships, portions of which have been subdivided from fractional township boundaries extended from various directions 

and not connected with each other. 

These conditions obtain to a large extent in mountainous 

regions, where in accordance with the existing provisions, 

relative to the survey of agricultural lands, in the acts of 

Congress making appropriations for public-land surveys, 

such surveys are extended along the valley and bottom lands, 

leaving the mountainous areas unsurveyed at the time of the 

execution of the original work; but which, at a later date, in 

view of other considerations are placed under contract for 

survey. 

288. It is obvious that the number and character of such 

cases would be too great and varied to be considered in detail; 

therefore, when the deputy surveyor meets with a case which 

is not covered exactly by these instructions, or the special 

instructions from the surveyor general, his thorough understanding of the preceding articles on this subject, and of the 

conditions illustrated on Plates V and VII, it is expected will 

point out to him the proper method to be employed. 

-89- 

It is possible, however, that cases may arise so complex in 

their character as to produce a feeling of doubt relative to the 

proper solution of the problem; in which case he will at once 

communicate with this office through the surveyor general, 

submitting information, by letter and diagrams, of the exact 

731 
condition as found by him, and the necessary instructions 

will be forwarded as soon as practicable. 

GEOGRAPHICAL POSITIONS OF BASE LINES AND 

PRINCIPAL MERIDIANS GOVERNING THE 

PUBLIC SURVEYS. 

289. The system of rectangular surveying, authorized by 

law May 20,1785, was first employed in the survey of United 

States publie lands in the State of Ohio. 

The boundary line between the States of Pennsylvania and 

Ohio, known as “Ellicott’s line,” in longitude 80” 32’ 20” west 

from Greenwich, is the meridian to which the first surveys 

are referred. The townships east of the Scioto River, in the 

State of Ohio, are numbered from south to north, commencing with No. 1 on the Ohio River, while the ranges are 

numbered from east to west, beginning with No. 1 on the east 

boundary of the State, except in the tract designated “U. S. 

military land,’’ in which the townships and ranges are numbered, respectively, from the south and east boundaries of 

said tract. 

290. During the period of one hundred and seventeen 

years since the organization of the system of rectangular 

surveying, numbered and locally-named principal meridians 

and base lines have been established, as shown by the following tabular exhibit. These bases and meridians may all be 

found by examining the large wall map of the United States, 

published by the General Land Office. They are also severally shown upon the various official State maps. 

(Table III, page 90, deleted. The table contains a list of the 

Principal Meridians of the contiguous 48 States.) 

-91- 

DISUSE OF MAGNETIC NEEDLE SURVEYS. 

291. The strict requirement that all lines ofpublic surveys 

must be run by courses derived from the true local meridian, 

independently of the magnetic needle, and subject to close 

tests by field inspection, renders the data and discussion of 

magnetic declinations no longer necessary in the Manual. 

The scientific information heretofore published had apparent 

value to surveyors required to restore ancient lines; but even 

in such work there is often wide opportunity for error, from 

lack of full understanding of the former customs. 

292. While some of the early surveyors were exact and 

faithful men, competent to observe Polaris with the plain 

compass and note the correct local variation, others probably 

obtained the figures for declination by hearsay and from 

distant places; hence implicit reliance can not be placed on 

calculations based on the presumed change of variation. 

An additional reason for considering these matters of 

magnetic declination less important in old surveys, is that 

the rules for restoring lost lines and corners place chief importance upon the finding and identification of material evidence in the field, with less regard to theoretical courses. 

METHODS OF OBTAINING A TRUE MERIDIAN. 

293. The work of every deputy surveyor or examiner depends for its correctness upon his using a correct meridian, 

which can be obtained only by careful observance of the 

following instructions. They include astronomical tables, 

adapted from data heretofore supplied by the Coast and 

Geodetic Survey, and brought down to dates in the twentieth 

century. 

The accuracy with which the meridian may be determined 

depends chiefly upon the instruments at command and upon 

the ability and care of the observer in using them. It rests 

with him to select the proper instrument, the proper method 

and time for observing. The instruments ordinarily in the 

hands of the surveyor are sufficiently described in books on 

surveying or in catalogues of instrument makers. The 

method to be followed will depend greatly upon circumstances. Thus the sun or the pole star may be observed for 

azimuth; local time may be had by the method of equal 

altitudes of the sun, for which the latitude of the place need 

only to be known roughly. Observations of the pole star for 

the true azimuth are generally preferred, since no great 

precision in the local time is required. Tables and explanatory remarks have been inserted to facilitate the use of this 

method, and will serve for the period 1901 to 1910. 

294. The table given in the Manual of 1894 for times of 

elongation and culmination at 24 dates of the year 1893, with 

a system of corrections for other years and dates, is now 

omitted. All the necessary data therein given can now be 

obtained from the upper culmination table on page 101 in the 

form already familiar but revised and extended for the present decade. 

295. For correct and rapid use of these tables, it is indispensable that the surveyor have clear comprehension of the 

outlines of the astronomical facts involved, and the term used 

in dealing with them, such as the following: 

The earth’s annual motion around the sun. 

Its diurnal motion upon its axis. 

-92- 

The apparent opposite motion of Polaris and other circumpolar stars about the north-polar point in the heavens. 

(See figure 1 on page 97.) 

Mean solar time, derived from successive apparent passages of the sun across the local meridian, and averaged or 

equalized for the year to remove irregularities caused by the 

earth’s varying distances from the sun, often shown in almanacs under the head, “sun fast” or “sun slow.” 

Equation of time, as tabulated in the ephemeris. 

Sidereal time, measured by the astronomical day of 23 hrs. 

56.1 min., the interval between two successive passages of a 

fixed star across the local meridian. 

The civil day, beginning at midnight, and its relation to the 

astronomical day which begins at noon. The former counts 

twelve hours twice over, the latter numbers the hours up to 

24, and lasts twelve hours after the civil day of the same date 

is ended. 

The culminations of Polaris. 

The elongations of Polaris. 

The azimuth of Polaris or its apparent distance east or west 

from the polar point, measured by a horizontal angle at the 

place of observation. 

732 
The hour-angle azimuth of Polaris, at those times when it 

is neither at elongation nor culmination. 

The meridian of any locality. Since any line not coinciding 

with the true meridian is not a meridian, the use of the word 

true is superfluous, and generally avoided. 

Reduction of standard time to local mean time by difference of longitude. 

296. These essentials are presumed to have been acquired 

in preparatory studies; therefore it is the purpose of the 

Manual to simplify the work, omit all technicalities requiring a full knowledge of astronomy, and present the method, 

with two new and compact tables adapted to common clock 

time, with such plain directions for use that any person of 

ordinary intelligence can understand and apply them. 

297. As the surveyor should have a perfectly clear idea of 

what is meant by Astronomical Time (used to simplify computations), and the Hour Angle of Polaris, these terms will 

now be explained. 

298. The Civil Day, according to the customs of society, 

commences at midnight and comprises twenty-four hours 

from one midnight to the next following. The hours are 

counted from 12 to 12 from midnight to noon, after which 

they are again reckoned from 12 to 12 from noon to midnight. 

Thus the day is divided into two periods of 12 hours each; the 

first of which is marked a. m., the last p. m. 

299. The Astronomical Day commences at noon on the 

civil day of the same date. It also comprises twenty-four 

hours; but they are reckoned from 0 to 24, and from the noon 

of one day to that of the next following. 

The civil day begins twelve hours before the astronomical 

day; therefore the first period of the civil day answers to the 

last part of the preceding astronomical day, and the last part 

of the civil day corresponds to the first part of the astronomical day. Thus, January 9, 2 o’clock p. m., civil time, is also 

January 9, 2h, astronomical time; and January 9,2 o’clock a. 

m., civil time, is January 8, 14h, astronomical time. 

300. The rule then for the transformation of civil time into 

astronomical time is this: If the civil time is markedp. m., take 

away the 

-93- 

designation p. m., and the astronomical time is had without 

further change; if the civil time is marked a. m., take one from 

the day and add twelve to the hours, remove the initials a. m., 

and the result is the astronomical time wanted. 

The substance of the above rule may be otherwise stated, as 

follows: when the surveyor takes an observation during p. m. 

hours, civil time, he can say; the astronomical time is the 

hours and minutes passed since the noon of this day; and 

when observing in the a. m. hours he can say the astronomical time is the hours and minutes elapsed since the noon of 

yesterday, in either case omitting the designation a. m. or p. 

m., and writing for the day of the month, that civil date on 

which the noon falls, from which the time is reckoned. Finally, the astronomical time may be called the hours and minutes 

elapsed since the noon last past, the astronomical date being 

that of the civil day to which the noon belongs. Thus, April 23, 

4.15 p. m., civil time, is April 23, 4h 15”1, astronomical time, 

and April 23, 4.15 a. m., civil time, is April 22, 16h 15”, 

astronomical time. 

The surveyor should thoroughly master this transformation of the civil time into astronomical time, as it will be the 

first duty he will have to perform after observing Polaris out 

of the meridian. 

The change can be made mentally, no written work being 

required. Table V might be easily altered to give the times by 

the civil count marked a. m. and p. m., but such an arrangement would greatly extend and complicate the rules and 

examples, and correspondingly increase the chances for 

error. 

301. The general use of telescopic instruments makes it 

far easier to determine a meridian, than formerly when the 

open-sight compass was almost the only obtainable instrument. In those days it was required that the deputy ascertain 

for himself by observation what was the true north line, and 

then observe and record the “variation” of his needle from the 

north. Instructions for the process have been an important 

part of the early manuals, and surveyors of integrity faithfully observed them. Similar directions are here given. 

TO DETERMINE A MERIDIAN WITHOUT A 

TELESCOPE. 

302. Attach a plumb line to a support situated as far above 

the ground as practicable, such as the limb of a tree, a piece of 

board nailed or otherwise fastened to a telegraph pole, a 

house, barn, or other building, affording a clear view north 

and south. 

The plumb bob may consist of some weighty material, such 

as a brick, a piece of iron or stone, weighing four to five 

pounds, which will hold the plumb line vertical, fully as well 

as one of finished metal. 

Strongly illuminate the plumb line just below its support 

by a lamp or candle, care being taken to obscure the source of 

light from the view of the observer by a screen. 

For a peep sight, cut a slot about one-sixteenth of an inch 

wide in a thin piece of board, or nail two strips of tin, with 

straight edges, to a square block of wood, so arranged that 

they will stand vertical when the block is placed flat on its 

base upon a smooth horizontal rest, which will be placed at a 

convenient height south of the plumb line and firmly secured 

in an east and west direction, in such a position that, when 

viewed through the peep sight, Polaris will appear about a 

foot below the support of the plumb line. 

The position may be practically determined by trial, the 

night preceding that set for the observation. 

-94- 

About thirty minutes before the time of elongation, as 

obtained from the table, bring the peep sight into the same 

line of sight with the plumb line and Polaris. 

To reach elongation, the star will move off the plumb line to 

the east for eastern elongation, or to the west for western 

elongation, therefore by moving the peep sight in the proper 

direction, east or west, as the case may be, keep the star on 

the plumb line until it appears to remain stationary, thus 

indicating that it has reached its point of elongation. 

The peep sight will now be secured in place by a clamp or 

weight, with its exact position marked on the rest, and all 

further operations will be deferred until the next morning. 

733 
By daylight, place a slender rod at a distance of two or three 

hundred feet from the peep sight, and exactly in range with it 

and the plumb line; carefully measure this distance. 

Take from the table on page 95 the azimuth of Polaris 

corresponding to the latitude of the station and year of 

observation; find the natural tangent of said azimuth and 

multiply it by the distance from the peep sight to the rod; the 

product will express the distance to be laid off from the rod 

exactly at right angles to the direction already determined 

(to the west for eastern elongation or to the east for western 

elongation), to a point, which with the peep sight, will define 

the direction of the meridian with sufficient accuracy for the 

needs of local surveyors. 

TO ESTABLISH A MERIDIAN AT ELONGATION BY 

TELESCOPIC INSTRUMENT. 

303. Set a stone, or drive a wooden peg, firmly in the 

ground, and upon the top thereof make a small distinct mark. 

About thirty minutes before the time of the eastern or 

western elongation of Polaris, obtained from the table, set up 

the transit firmly, with its vertical axis exactly over the 

mark, and carefully level the instrument. 

Illuminate the cross wires by the light from a suitable 

lantern, the rays being directed into the object end of the 

telescope by an assistant; while great care will be taken, by 

perfect leveling, to insure that the line of collimation describe 

a truly vertical plane. 

Place the vertical wire upon the star, which, if it has not 

reached its elongation, will move to the right for eastern, or to 

the left for western elongation. 

While the star moves toward its point of elongation, by 

means of the tangent screw of the vernier plate it will be 

repeatedly covered by the vertical wire, until a point is 

reached where it will appear to remain on ‘the wire for some 

time, then leave it in a direction contrary to its.former motion; thus indicating the time of elongation. 

Then while the star appears to thread the vertical wire, 

depress the telescope to a horizontal position; five chains 

north of the place of observation, set a stone or drive a firm 

peg, upon which by a strongly illuminated pencil or other 

slender object, exactly coincident with the vertical wire, 

mark a point and drive a tack in the line of sight thus 

determined; then, to eliminate possible errors of collimation 

or imperfect verticality of the motion of the telescope, quickly 

revolve the vernier plate 180°, direct the glass at Polaris and 

repeat the observation; if it gives a different result, find and 

mark the middle point between the two results. This middle 

point, with the point marked 

-95- 

by the plumb bob of the transit, will define on the ground the 

trace of the vertical plane through Polaris at its eastern or 

western elongation, as the case may be. 

By daylight, lay off to te east or west, as the case may 

require, the proper azimuth taken from the following table; 

the instrument will then define the meridian, which may be 

permanently marked for future reference. 

The magnetic declination may be obtained from a true 

meridian, as follows: Take the magnetic bearing of the true 

meridian; then the angle expressed by said magnetic bearing 

will be the observed magnetic declination, named like the 

departure if the bearing is taken from the south needle-point, 

but the reverse if from the north. 

(The remainder of page 95 and pages 96 through 128 are 

deleted. They contain instructions and tables for Polaris 

observations, offsets from the secant and tangent to the parallel, etc. All are technical in character.) 

-129- 

FIELD EXAMINATION OF SURVEYS. 

368. To insure the faithful and accurate execution of surveys of Government lands, the Department has found it 

necessary to adopt a uniform rule requiring all work to be 

inspected in the field, before its acceptance will be considered. The details of this process are governed by instructions 

issued by the General Land Office to those serving as examiners of surveys. The rules are subject to such modifications as 

the good of the service may demand. 

369. For several years past, it has been required that 10 

per cent of all lines run by a deputy in each township, must be 

carefully retraced. A full report of all courses, distances, 

topography, and descriptions of corner monuments and 

accessories, upon lines examined, must be returned under 

oath to the Commissioner, for comparison with the returns of 

the deputy. The examiner’s returns must show all distances 

across lands that are mountainous, heavily timbered, or covered with dense undergrowth. 

370. If the examiner finds erroneous or negligent work 

which in his opinion deserves correction or rejection, he has 

been instructed to continue his work by extending the retracement to 20 or 30 per cent of the lines, in order to make 

his evidence conclusive. 

371. Examiners are required to observe the rules of the 

Manual in the technical and professional details, to use instruments of the best construction and adaptation, and to 

exercise special care that their courses and measurements 

are precise and free from all error, that no injustice may be 

done to a deputy. In case a serious error is found, they may 

repeat the chaining or observation, to guard against possible 

mistake on their part. They are required, whenever practicable, to make a closed survey around one or several sections, 

which should close by traverse within limits; also to extend 

the examination into remote and difficult parts, as well as 

those easily accessible. Whatever future regulations may be 

adopted will seek the same purpose of preventing error, 

negligence or fraud. 

[The remainder of this Manual, pages 131 through 203 are 

deleted. They contain Speciman Field Notes and Index, identical in vein and content to the Manual of 1894.1 

734 


















XLVI. 

(This copy of the CircularPamphlet, issued in 1909, is taken from an original now in the possession of the BLM, Oregon State 

Office, Portland.) 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE 

RESTORATION 

OF 

LOST OR OBLITERATED CORNERS 

AND 

SUBDIVISION OF SECTIONS 

Revision of June 1, 1909 

[Reprinted July 1, 19161 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 

1916 

753 
[ Page2 1 

(Blank) 

PENALTIES FOR DESTROYING CORNER 

MONUMENTS. 

To aid in the protection of all evidences of public-land 

surveys, a clause was enacted in chapter 398, 29 United 

States Statutes, page 343, prohibiting the destruction or removal of monuments of any United States survey, and fixing 

penalties for violation. 

This clause was amended by section 57 of the act approved 

March 4,1909, revising and amending the penal laws of the 

United States, to read as follows: 

SEC. 57. Whoever shall willfully destroy, deface, change, or remove to another place any section corner, quarter-section corner, or 

meander post, on any Government line of survey, or shall willfully 

deface, change, or remove any monument or bench mark of any 

government survey, shall be fined not more than two hundred and 

fifty dollars, or imprisoned not more than six months, or both. 

-3- 

[ Page4 1 

(Blank) 

[ Page 5 1 

RESTORATION OF LOST AND OBLITERATED 

CORNERS. 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

GENERAL LAND OFFICE, 

Washington, D. C., June 1,1909. 

1. The increasing number of letters from county and local 

surveyors received at this office making inquiry as to the 

proper method of restoring to their original position lost or 

obliterated corners marking the survey of the public lands of 

the United States, or such as have been willfully or 

accidentally moved from their original position, have rendered the preparation of the following general rules necessary, particularly as in a very large number of cases the 

immediate facts necessary to a thorough and intelligent 

understanding are omitted. Moreover, surveys having been 

made under the authority of different acts of Congress, different results have been obtained, and no special law has 

been enacted by that authority covering and regulating the 

subject of the above-named inquiries. Hence, the general rule 

here given must be considered merely as an expression of the 

opinion of this office on the subject, based, however, upon the 

spirit of the several acts of Congress authorizing the surveys, 

as construed by this ofice, and by United States court decisions. When cases arise which are not covered by these rules, 

and the advice of this office is desired, the letter of inquiry 

should always contain a description of the particular corner, 

with reference to the township, range, and section of the 

public surveys, to enable this office to consult the record. 

2. An obliterated corner is one where no visible evidence 

remains of the work of the original surveyor in establishing 

it. Its location may, however, have been preserved beyond all 

question by acts of landowners, and by the memory of those 

who knew and recollect the true situs of the original monument. In such cases it is not a lost corner. 

A lost corner is one whose position can not be determined, 

beyond reasonable doubt, either from original marks or reliable external evidence. 

Surveyors sometimes err in their decision whether a corner 

is to be treated as lost or only obliterated. 

3. Surveyors who have been United States deputies should 

bear in mind that in their private capacity they must act 

under somewhat different rules of law from those governing 

original surveys, and should carefully distinguish between 

the provisions of the statute which guide a government deputy and those which apply to retracement of lines once surveyed. The failure to observe this distinction has been prolific 

of erroneous work and injustice to landowners. 

4. To restore extinct boundaries of the public lands correctly, the surveyor must have some knowledge of the manner in which townships were subdivided by the several 

methods authorized by Congress. Without this knowledge he 

may be greatly embarrassed in 

-6- 

the field, and is liable to make mistakes invalidating his 

work, and leading eventually to serious litigation. 

5. Various regions of this country were surveyed under 

different sets of instructions issued at periods ranging from 

1785 to the present time. The earliest rules were given to 

deputy surveyors in manuscript or in printed circulars, and 

no copies are available for distribution. 

Regulations more in detail, improving the system for 

greater accuracy and permanency, were issued in book form, 

editions of 1855, 1871, 1890, 1894, and 1902. The supply of 

copies of these is exhausted, except the latest, which is now 

sold at cost to unofficial applicants by the Superintendent of 

Documents. 

6. The chief acts of Congress authorizing and regulating 

public-land surveys are summarized below to enable anyone 

to consult the full record thereof for explanation of difficult 

questions regarding early surveys. 

7. Compliance with the provisions of congressional legislation at different periods has resulted in two sets of corners 

being established on township lines at one time; at other 

times three sets of corners have been established on range 

lines; while the system now in operation makes but one set of 

corners on township boundaries, except on standard linesi. e., base and correction lines, and in some exceptional cases. 

The following brief explanation of the modes which have 

been practiced will be of service to all who may be called upon 

to restore obliterated boundaries of the public-land surveys: 

Where two sets of corners were established on township 

boundaries, one set was planted at the time the exteriors 

were run, those oh the north boundary belonging to the 

sections and quarter sections north of said line, and those on 

the west boundary belonging to the sections and quarter 

754 
sections west of that line. The other set of corners was established when the township was subdivided. This method, as 

stated, resulted in the establishment of two sets of corners on 

all four sides of the townships. 

Where three sets of corners were established on the range 

lines, the subdivisional surveys were made in the above manner, except that the east and west section lines, instead of 

being closed upon the corners previously established on the 

east boundary of the township, were run due east from the 

last interior section corner, and new corners were erected at 

the points of intersection with the range line. 

8. The method now in practice, where regular conditions 

are found, requires section lines to be initiated at the corners 

on the south boundary of the township, and to close on existing corners on the east, north, and west boundaries of the 

township, except that when the north boundary is a base line 

or standard parallel, new corners are set thereon, called 

closing corners. But in some cases, for special reasons, an 

opposite course of procedure has been followed, and subdivisional work has been begun on the north boundary and has 

been extended southward. 

9. For the above reasons it is evident that a subsequent 

surveyor ought not to perform field work without knowing all 

the facts of the original survey, lest there be unsuspected 

duplication of official corners, leading him to use the wrong 

one in his survey. Upon township and range lines it is often 

necessary to procure copies of the plats of surveys on both 

sides, in order to become certain of the necessary 

I 

understanding of the case, as required in section 57 of this 

circular. A great many township plats fail to show the second 

set of corners, established in the survey of an adjoining 

township, subsequent to the plat of the former township. 

10. In the more recent general instructions greater care 

has been exercised to secure rectangular subdivisions by 

fixing a strict limitation that no new township exteriors or 

section lines shall depart from a true meridian or east and 

west line more than twenty-one minutes of arc; and that 

where a random line is found liable to correction beyond this 

limit, a true line on a cardinal course must be run, setting a 

closing corner on the line to which it closes. 

This produces, in new surveys closing to irregular old 

work, a great number of exteriors marked by a double set of 

corners. All retracing surveyors should proceed under these 

new conditions with full knowledge of the field notes and 

exceptional methods of subdivision. 

SYNOPSIS OF ACTS OF CONGRESS. 

11. The first enactment in regard to the surveying of the 

public lands was an ordinance passed by the Congress of the 

Confederation May 20, 1785, prescribing the mode for the 

survey of the “Western Territory,” and which provided that 

said territory should be divided into “townships of six miles 

square, by lines running due north and south, and others 

crossing them at right angles’’ as near as might be.’ 

1. Ordinance of the Congress ofthe Confederation of May 20,1785. U. S. Land Laws, p. 

349, edition 1828. 

It further provided that the first line running north and 

south should begin on the Ohio River at a point due north 

from the western terminus of a line run as the south boundary of the State of Pennsylvania, and the first line running 

east and west should begin at the same point and extend 

through the whole territory. In these initial surveys only the 

exterior lines of the townships were surveyed, but the plats 

were marked by subdivisions into sections 1 mile square, 

numbered from 1 to 36, commencing with No. 1 in the southeast corner of the township, and running from south to north 

in each tier to No. 36 in the northwest corner of the township; 

mile corners were established on the township lines. The 

region embraced by the surveys under this law forms a part of 

the present State of Ohio, and is generally known as “the 

Seven Ranges.” 

12. The Federal Congress passed a law, approved May 18, 

1796, in regard to surveying the public domain, which applied to “the territory northwest of the River Ohio, and above 

the mouth of the Kentucky River.”2 

Section 2 of said act provided for dividing such lands as had 

not been already surveyed or disposed of “by north and south 

lines run according to the true meridian, and by others crossing them at right angles, so as to form townships of six miles 

square,” etc. It also provided that “one-half of said townships, 

taking them alternately, should be subdivided into sections 

containing, as nearly as may be, 640 acres each, by running 

through the same each way parallel lines at the end of every 

two miles; and by marking a corner on each of said lines at the 

end of every mile.” The act also provided that “the sections 

shall be numbered, respectively, beginning with the 

-8- 

number one in the northeast section, and proceeding west 

and east alternately through the township, with progressive 

numbers till the thirty-sixth be completed.” This method of 

numbering sections is still in use. 

13. An act amendatory of the foregoing, approved May 10, 

1800, required the “townships west of the Muskingum, which 

are directed to be sold in quarter townships, to be subdivided 

into half sections of 320 acres each, as nearly as may be, by 

running parallel lines through the same from east to west, 

and from south to north, at the distance of one mile from each 

other, and marking corners, at the distance of each half mile 

on the lines running from east to west, and at the distance of 

each mile on those running from south to north. And the 

interior lines of townships intersected by the Muskingum, 

and of all townships lying east of that river, which have not 

been heretofore actually subdivided into sections, shall also 

be run and marked * * *. And in all cases where the exterior 

lines of the townships thus to be subdivided into sections or 

half sections, shall exceed or shall not extend six miles, the 

excess or deficiency shall be specially noted, and added to or 

deducted from the western or northern ranges of sections or 

half sections in such townships, according as the error may be 

in running the lines from east to west or from south to north.” 

Said act also provided that the northern and western tiers of 

sections should be sold as containing only the quantity ex2. Act of May 18, 179q. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 1, p. 465. Section 2395, U. S. 

Revised Statutes. 

755 
pressed on the plats, and all others as containing the complete legal q~antity.~ 

14. The act approved June 1,1796, “regulating the grants 

of land appropriated for military services,” etc., provided for 

dividing the “United States Military Tract,” in the State of 

Ohio, into townships 5 miles square, each to be subdivided 

into quarter townships containing 4,000 acres.* 

15. Section 6 of the act approved March 1,1800, amendatory of the foregoing act, enacted that the Secretary of the 

Treasury was authorized to subdivide the quarter townships 

into lots of 100 acres, bounded as nearly as practicable by 

parallel lines 160 perches in length by 100 perches in width. 

These subdivisions into lots, however, were made upon the 

plats in the office of the Secretary of the Treasury, and the 

actual survey was only made at a subsequent time when a 

sufficient number of such lots had been located to warrant the 

survey. It thus happened, in some instances, that when the 

survey came to be made the plat and survey could not be 

made to agree, and that fractional lots on plats were entirely 

crowded out. A knowledge of this fact may explain some of the 

difficulties met with in the district thus ~ubdivided.~ 

16. The act of greatest importance to the work of all retracing surveyors is the one approved February 11,1805, which is 

still in force, as reenacted by revision in 1873. It directs the 

subdivision of public lands into quarter-sections, and sets 

forth three principles for ascertaining the boundaries and 

contents of tracts of public land, after survey, in substance as 

follows:6 

17. (a) All corners marked in the surveys returned by the 

surveyor-general shall be established as the proper corners of 

the sections or quarter-sections which they were intended to 

designate, and corners 

-9- 

of half and quarter sections not marked shall be placed as 

nearly as possible “equidistant from those two corners which 

stand on the same line.” 

18. (b) “The boundary lines actually run and marked” (in 

the field) “shall be established as the proper boundary lines of 

the sections, or subdivisions, for which they were intended, 

and the length of such lines as returned by either of the 

surveyors aforesaid shall beheld and considered as the true 

length thereof. And the boundary lines which shall not have 

been actually run and marked as aforesaid shall be ascertained by running straight lines from the established corners 

to the opposite corresponding corners, but in those portions of 

the fractional townships where no such opposite or corresponding corners have been or can be fixed, the said boundary 

lines shall be ascertained by running from the established 

corners due north and south” (see secs. 67 and 79) “or east and 

west lines, as the case may be, to the water course, Indian 

boundary line, or other external boundary of such fractional 

township.” 

3. Act ofMay 10,1800. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 2, p. 73. Section 2395, U. S. Revised 

Statutes. 

4. Act of June 1, 1796. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 1, p. 490. 

5. Act of March 1, 1800. US. Statutes at Large, vol. 2, p. 14. 

6. Act of February 11, 1805. US. Statutes at Large, vol. 2, p. 313. Section 2396, US. 

Revised Statutes. 

19. (c) “Each section, or subdivision of section, the contents whereof shall have been returned by the surveyorgeneral, shall be held and considered as containing the exact 

quantity expressed in such return; and the half-sections and 

quarter-sections, the contents whereof shall not have been 

thus returned, shall be held and considered as containing the 

one-half or the one-fourth part, respectively, of the returned 

contents of the section of which they may make part.” 

20. These three principles were clearly designed for the 

purpose of establishing beyond dispute all lines and monuments of accepted official surveys and of placing a statutory 

limitation against attempts to alter the same, or to set up 

complaints of deficiency of area as a basis for resurvey. 

PENALTIES FOR REMOVAL OF MONUMENTS. 

21. Several of the States have passed laws prescribing 

penalties for the destruction or removal of United States 

survey corners, and the act of Congress quoted on page 2 

relates to such destruction or removal in all the States and 

Territories. Any person having knowledge of a violation of 

the law last mentioned may present legal evidence thereof to 

the United States attorney for the district in which the land 

lies, and request the prosecution of the offender. Should any 

such attorney improperly refuse to take action, the matter 

may be called to the attention of the Department of Justice, 

Washington, D. C. 

22. The act of Congress approved April 24,1820, provides 

for the sale of public lands in half-quarter sections, and requires that “in every case of the division of a quarter section 

the line for the division thereof shall run north and south,” 

“and fractional sections, containing 160 acres and upwards, 

shall in like manner, as nearly as practicable, be subdivided 

into half quarter sections, under such rules and regulations 

as may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury; but 

fractional sections containing less than 160 acres shall not be 

di~ided.”~ 

-10- 

23. The act of Congress approved May 24, 1824, provides 

“that whenever, in the opinion of the President of the United 

States, a departure from the ordinary mode of surveying land 

on any river, lake, bayou, or water course would promote the 

public interest, he may direct the surveyor-general in whose 

district such land is situated, and where the change is intended to be made, under such rules and regulations as the 

President may prescribe, to cause the lands thus situated to 

be surveyed in tracts of two acres in width, fronting on any 

river, bayou, lake, or water course, and running back the 

depth of forty acres.’78 

24. The act of Congress approved April 5, 1832, directed 

the subdivision of the public lands into quarter-quarter sections; that in every case of the division of a half-quarter 

section the dividing line should run east and west, and that 

fractional sections should be subdivided, under regulations 

prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury. Under the latter 

7. Act of April 24,1820. US. Statutes at Large, vol. 3 p. 566. Section 2397, US. Revised 

Statutes. 

8. Act of May 24, 1824. US. Statutes at Large, vol. 4, p. 34. 

756 
provision the Secretary directed that fractional sections containing less than 160 acres, or the residuary portion of a 

fractional section, after the subdivision into as many quarter-quarter sections as it is susceptible of, may be subdivided 

into lots, each containing the quantity of a quarter-quarter 

section as nearly as practicable, by so laying down the line of 

subdivision that they shall be 20 chains wide, which distances are to be marked on the plat of subdivisions, as are also 

the areas of the quarter quarters and residuary fraction^.^ 

These two acts last mentioned provided that the corners 

and contents of half-quarter and quarter-quarter sections 

should be ascertained as nearly as possible in the manner and 

on the principles prescribed in the act of Congress approved 

February 11, 1805. 

GENERAL RULES. 

25. From the foregoing synopsis of congressional legislation it is evidentFirst. That the boundaries of the public lands established 

and returned by the duly appointed government surveyors, 

when approved by the surveyors-general and accepted by the 

Government, are unchangeable. 

Second. That the original township, section, and quartersection corners established by the Government surveyors 

must stand as the true corners which they were intended to 

represent, whether the corners be in the place shown by the 

field-notes or not. 

Third. That quarter-quarter corners not established by the 

government surveyors shall be placed on the straight lines 

joining the section and quarter-section corners and midway 

between them, except on the last half mile of section lines 

closing on the north and west boundaries of the township, or 

on other lines between fractional sections. 

Fourth. That all subdivisional lines of a section running 

between corners established on the original survey of a 

township must be straight lines, running from the proper 

corner in one section line to its opposite corresponding corner 

in the opposite section line. (See secs. 75 to 82.) 

Fifth. That in a fractional section where no opposite corresponding corner has been or can be established, any required 

subdivision line of 

-11- 

such section must be run from the proper original corner in 

the boundary line as nearly due east and west, or north and 

south, as the case may be, to the water course, Indian reservation, or other boundary of such section, as due parallelism to 

section lines will permit, under the modifying rule in sec. 79. 

26. From the foregoing it will be plain that extinct corners 

of the government surveys must be restored to their original 

locations, whenever it is possible to do so; and hence resort 

should always be first had to the marks of the survey in the 

field. The locus of the missing corner should be first identified 

on the ground by the aid of the mound, pits, line trees, bearing trees, etc., described in the field notes of the original 

survey. 

9. Act ofApril 5,1832. U. S. Statutes at Large, vol. 4, p. 503. Section 2397, U. S. Revised 

Statutes. 

27. The identification of mounds, pits, buried memorials, 

witness trees, or other permanent objects noted in the field 

notes of survey, affords the best means of relocating the 

missing corner in its original position. If this can not be done, 

clear and convincing testimony of citizens as to the place it 

originally occupied should be taken, if such can be obtained. 

In any event, whether the locus of the corner be fixed by the 

one means or the other, such locus should always be tested 

and confirmed by measurements to known corners. No definite rule can be laid down as to what shall be sufficient 

evidence in such cases, and much must be left to the skill, 

fidelity, and good judgment of the surveyor in the performance of his work. 

28. Actions or decisions by county surveyors which may 

result in changes of boundaries of tracts of land and involve 

questions of ownership in connection therewith, are subject 

to review by the local courts in proceedings instituted in 

accordance with the local statutes governing such matters. 

EXCEPTIONAL CASES. 

29. When new measurements are made on a single line to 

determine the position thereon for a restored lost corner (for 

example, a quarter-section corner on line between two original section corners), or when new measurements are made 

between original corners on two lines for the purpose of fixing 

by their intersection the position of a restored missing corner 

(for example, a corner common to four sections or four 

townships), it will almost invariably happen that discrepancies will be developed between the new measurements and 

the original measurements in the field notes. When these 

differences occur the surveyor will in all cases establish the 

missing corner by proportionate measurements (see secs. 49, 

83,84, and 85) on lines conforming to the original field notes 

and by the method followed in the original survey. From this 

rule there can be no departure, since it is the basis upon 

which the whole operation depends for accuracy and truth. 

30. In cases where the relocated corner can not be made to 

harmonize with the field notes in all directions, and unexplained discrepancy in the original survey is apparent, it 

sometimes becomes the task of the surveyor to place it according to the requirements of one line and against the calls of 

another line. For instance, if the line between sections 30 and 

31, reported 78 chains long, would draw the missing corner 

on range line 1 chain eastward out of range with the other 

exterior corners, the presumption would be strong that the 

range line had been run straight and the length of the section 

line wrongly 

-12- 

reported, because experience shows that west random lines 

are regarded as less important than range lines and more 

liable to error. 

31. Again, where a corner on a standard parallel has been 

obliterated, it is proper to assume that it was placed in line 

with other corners, and if an anomalous length of line reported between sections 3 and 4 would throw the closing 

corner into the northern township, a surveyor would properly 

assume that the older survey of the standard line is to control 

the length of the later and minor line. The mark or corners 

757 
found on such a line closing to a standard parallel fix its 

location, but its length should be limited by its actual intersection, at which point the lost closing may be placed. 

32. The strict rule of the law that “all corners marked in 

the field shall be established as the corners which they were 

intended to designate,” and the further rule that “the length 

of lines returned by the surveyors shall be held and considered as the true length thereof,” are found in some cases to be 

impossible of fulfillment in all directions at once, and a surveyor is obliged to choose, in his own discretion, which of two 

or more lines must yield, in order to permit the rules to be 

applied at all. 

33. In a case of an erroneous but existing closing corner, 

which was set some distance out of the true state boundary of 

Missouri and Kansas, it was held by this office that a surveyor subdividing the fractional section should preserve the 

boundary as a straight line, and should not regard said closing corner as the proper corner of the adjacent fractional lots. 

The said corner was considered as fixing the position of the 

line between two fractional sections, but that its length extended to a new corner to be set on the true boundary line. 

The surveyor should therefore preserve such an original corner as evidence of the line; but its erroneous position should 

not be allowed to cause a crook between mile corners of the 

original state boundary. It is only in cases where it is manifestly impossible to carry out the literal terms of the law that 

a surveyor can be justified in making such a decision. 

34. The principle of the preponderance of one line over 

another of less importance has been recognized in the rule for 

restoring a section corner common to two townships, in former editions of this circular. The new corner should be placed 

on the township line; and measurements to check its position 

by distances to corners within t,he townships are useful to 

confirm it if found to agree well, but should not cause it to be 

placed off the line if found not to agree, if the general condition of the boundary supports the presumption .that it was 

properly aligned. 

MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 

35. The subject of the “variation,” formerly deemed most 

important in surveys, is mentioned here only to advise 

against its use as a basis for the location of any lost line, 

though it may be a temporary guide in a preliminary search 

for old evidences. Its importance is greatly overrated, from 

lack of knowledge of the actual practice of surveyors, in the 

days when both their instruments and their knowledge were 

more primitive. 

36. The General Land Office prohibits its employees and 

contracting surveyors from depending to any extent on 

courses derived from the needle. It also declines to advise 

other surveyors what variation to use in their own regions, 

for evident reasons, as follows: 

-13- 

The amount of local magnetism can not truly be determined by any process of mere calculation. 

The secular change of declination reported at some distant 

time and place is no safe guide to the fact at any other station 

or period. 

The variation recorded in old work may have been quite 

incorrect, as large contracts were sometimes executed by 

assuming a variation, from hearsay or estimation, and without due verification. 

The needle is not only subject to daily and yearly change, 

but is also liable to defects in the instrument, so that different 

compasses may run different courses. 

37. Another serious cause of distrust is found in the authorized rules followed in early surveys, down to the year 1864, 

under which a vast amount of public land was surveyed with 

a record showing variations which were openly inconsistent, 

and which should here be explained. 

Before 1864, in running random and true section lines, it 

was required to make the record of courses on the ancient 

plan shown by this example: East on a random line between 

sections 1 and 12. Variation 13” 15‘ E. (falling perhaps 42 

links north of objective corner). West on true line between 

sections 1 and 12. Variation 12” 57’ E., etc., thus representing 

the “corrected” course by a nominal change of variation; 

whereas, after the instructions of 1864, the record would 

truly show the change to have been, not in the variation, but 

in the course, thus: N. 89” 42’ W. on a true line, etc. 

Therefore, in a large portion of the early records, the words 

“east” and “west” in such connection were only approximate, 

while by the present system the true course is intended. 

38. Terrestrial magnetism, the cause of “variation,” is a 

fluctuating quantity, subject to unexplained changes. But 

since all qualified surveyors and engineers of this day are 

competent to make the requisite astronomical observations 

to determine true courses, surveying by the needle is not 

recommended. 

MARKS ON MONUMENTS OF SURVEY. 

39. Inquiries are often made to learn the meaning of the 

marks on corner stones. It is not practicable here to give an 

abstract of all the markings used in full compliance with the 

manual; but the following notes will suffice to explain ordinary cases: 

Notches made on the east and south angles of an interior 

section corner indicate how many miles it is from the east and 

south lines of a full township; and by using the plan of a 

township plat, the numbers of the sections about the given 

corner stone will be known. In fractional townships, marks 

show the sections the same as if the boundaries were complete. 

40. Observe that there are cases of irregular subdivision, 

where the stone or post is a corner of two townships or two 

sections only; also that stones may have been sometimes 

overthrown or turned around to a new and improper position. 

41. On township and range lines grooves cut in the stone 

or post on opposite sides show distances to exterior corners of 

the township. Thus, two grooves on the south and four on the 

north indicate a corner of sections 19, 24, 25, and 30. 

-14- 

42. “W C” upon a monument means a witness corner, 

placed not at the true corner point (which may be in water or 

otherwise impracticable), but established elsewhere on safe 

758 
ground at a distance and course shown by the official field 

notes and plats. 

“M C” shows a meander corner, placed either on an exterior 

or section line at any certain distance from a section corner as 

shown by the plat. 

43. “S C” denotes a standard corner-that is, a regular 

corner on a standard parallel-belonging to two sections on 

the north side, with a closing corner (marked C C) somewhere 

east or west of it, belonging to two sections on the south side of 

the parallel. The letters C C are also used in many other 

situations, where a regular line closed upon a boundary of a 

State, a reservation, or a private land claim. 

44. Post corners and bearing trees (B T) have marks that 

are self-explanatory. Two chops or notches on the two opposite sides of a tree indicate that it stood upon the original line 

when surveyed. Such are called “line trees,” and are thus 

distinguished from trees merely blazed near the line. 

Full instructions as to the construction, marking, and differentiation of the 108 kinds of corner monuments are given 

in the Manual of Surveying Instructions. These should be 

consulted, in connection with a correct copy of the original 

field notes, in case of difficulty. 

TO RESTORE LOST OR OBLITERATED CORNERS. 

45. To restore corners on base lines and standard parallels.-Lost or obliterated standard corners will be restored to 

their original positions on a base line, standard parallel, or 

correction line, by proportionate measurements on the line, 

conforming as nearly as practicable to the original field notes 

and joining the nearest identified original standard corners 

on opposite sides of the missing corner or corners, as the case 

may be. 

46. The term “standard corners” will be understood to 

designate standard township, section, quarter section, and 

meander corners; and, in addition, closing corners, in the 

following cases: Closing corners used in the original survey to 

determine the position of a standard parallel, or established 

during the survey of the same, will, with the standard corners, govern the alinement and measurements made to restore lost or obliterated standard corners; but no other closing 

corners will control in any manner the restoration of standard corners on a base line or standard parallel. 

47. A lost or obliterated closing corner from which a standard parallel has been initiated or to which it has been 

directed will be reestablished in its original place by proportionate measurement from the corners used in the original 

survey to determine its position. Measurements from corners 

on the opposite side of the parallel will not control in any 

manner the relocation of said corner. 

48. A missing closing corner originally established during 

the survey of a standard parallel as a corner from which to 

project surveys south will be restored to its original position 

by considering it a standard corner and treating it according49. Therefore, paying attention to the preceding explanations, we have for the restoration of one or several corners on 

a standard parly. 

-15- 

allel, and for general application to all other surveyed lines, 

the following proportion: 

As the original field-note distance between the selected 

known corners is to the new measure of said distance so is the 

original field-note length of any part of the line to the required new measure thereof. 

The sum of the computed lengths of the several parts of a 

line must be equal to the new measure of the whole distance. 

50. As has been observed, existing original corners can not 

be disturbed; consequently discrepancies between the new 

and the original field-note measurements of the line joining 

the selected original corners will not in any manner affect 

measurements beyond said corners, but the differences will 

be distributed proportionately to the several intervals 

embraced in the line in question. 

After having checked each new location by measurement 

to the nearest known corners, new corners will be established 

permanently and new bearings and measurements taken to 

prominent objects, which should be of as permanent a character as possible, and the same recorded for future reference. 

51. Restoration of township corners common to four 

townships.-Two cases should be clearly recognized: First, 

where the position of the original township corner has been 

made to depend upon measurements on two lines at right 

angles to each other. Second, where the original corner has 

been located by measurements on one line only; for example, 

on a guide meridian. 

52. For restoration of a township corner originally subject 

to the first condition: A line will first be run connecting the 

nearest identified original corners on the meridional 

township lines, north and south of the missing corner, and a 

temporary corner will be placed at the proper proportionate 

distance. This will determine the corner in a north and south 

direction only. 

Next, the nearest original corners on the latitudinal 

township lines will be connected and a point thereon will be 

determined in a similar manner, independent of the temporary corner on the meridional line. Then through the first 

temporary corner run a line east (or west) and through the 

second temporary corner a line north (or south), as relative 

situations may suggest. The intersection of the two lines last 

run will define the position of the restored township corner, 

which may be permanently established. 

53. The restoration of a lost or obliterated township corner 

established under the second condition, i. e., by measurements, on a single line, will be effected by proportionate 

measurements on said line, between the nearest identified 

original corners on opposite sides of the missing township 

corner, as before described. 

54. Reestablishment of corners common to two 

townships.-The two nearest known corners on the township 

line, the same not being a base or a correction line, will be 

connected, as shown in sections 45 to 50, by a right line, and 

the missing corner established by proportionate distance as 

directed in that case; the location thus found will be checked 

upon by measurements to nearest known section or quartersection corners north and south, or east and west, of the 

759 
township line as the case may be, to obtain approximate 

though probably not exact verification of original distances. 

-16- 

55. Reestablishment of closing corners.-Measure from 

the quarter-section, section, or township corner east or west, 

as the case may be, to the next preceding or succeeding corner 

in the order of original establishment, and reestablish the 

missing closing corner by proportionate measurement. The 

line upon which the closing corner was originally established 

should always be remeasured, in order to check upon the 

correctness of the new location. (See secs. 29 to 34 and 64 to 66 

for details.) 

56. Reestablishment of interior section corners.-This 

class of corners should be reestablished in the same manner 

as corners common to four townships. In such cases, when a 

number of corners are missing on all sides of the one sought to 

be reestablished, the entire distance must, of course, be remeasured between the nearest existing recognized corners 

both north and south, and east and west, in accordance with 

the rule laid down, and the new corner reestablished by 

proportionate measurement. The mere measurement in any 

one of the required directions will not suffice, since the direction of the several section lines running northward through a 

township, or running east and west, are only in the most 

exceptional cases true prolongations of the alinement of the 

section lines initiated on the south boundary of the township; 

while the east and west lines running through the township, 

and theoretically supposed to be at right angles with the 

former, are seldom in that condition, and the alinements of 

the closing lines on the east and west boundaries of the 

township, in connection with the interior section lines, are 

even less often in accord. Moreover, the alinement of the 

section line itself from corner to corner, in point of fact, also 

very frequently diverges from a right line, although presumed to be such from the record contained in the field notes 

and so designated on the plats, and becomes either a broken 

or a curved line. This fact will be determined, in a timbered 

country, by the blazes which may be found upon trees on 

either side of the line, and although such blazed line will not 

strictly govern as to the absolute direction assumed by such 

line, it will assist very materially in determining its approximate direction, and should never be neglected in retracements for the reestablishment of lost corners of any description. Sight or line trees described in the field notes, together 

with the recorded distances to same, when fully identified, 

will, it has been held in one or more States, govern the line 

itself, even when not in a direct or straight line between 

established corners, which line is then necessarily a .broken 

line by passing through said sight trees. Such trees, when in 

existence and properly identified beyond a question of doubt, 

will very materially assist in evidencing the correct relocation of a missing corner. It is greatly to be regretted that the 

earlier field notes of survey are so very meager in the notation of the topography found on the original line, which might 

in very many instances materially lessen a surveyor's labors 

in retracement of lines and reestablishment of the required 

missing corner. In the absence of such sight trees and other 

evidence regarding the line, as in an open country, or where 

such evidence has been destroyed by time, the elements, or 

the progress of improvement, the line connecting the known 

corners should be run straight from corner to corner. 

57. Reestablishment of quarter-section corners on 

township boundaries.-Only one set of quarter-section corners are actually marked in the field on township lines, and 

they are established at the time when 

-17- 

the township exteriors are run. When double section corners 

are found, the quarter-section corners are considered generally as standing midway between the corners of their respective sections, and when required to be established or reestablished, as the case may be, they should be generally so placed; 

but great care should be exercised not to mistake the corners 

belonging to one township for those of another. After determining the proper section corners marking the line upon 

which the missing quarter-section corner is to be reestablished and measuring said line, the missing quarter-section 

corner will be reestablished in accordance with the requirements of the original field notes of survey, by proportionate 

measurement between the section corners marking the line. 

58. Where there are double sets of section corners on 

township and range lines and the quarter-section corners for 

sections south of the township or east of the range lines are 

required to be established in the field, the said quartersection corners should be so placed as to suit the calculation of 

areas of the quarter sections adjoining the township boundaries as expressed upon the official township plat, adopting 

proportionate measurements when the present measurements of the north and west boundaries of the sections differ 

from the original measurement. 

59. Reestablishment of quarter-section corners on closing 

section lines between fractional sections.-This class of corners must be reestablished proportionately, according to the 

original measurement of 40 chains from the last interior 

section corner. If the whole measurement does not agree with 

the original survey, the excess or deficiency must be divided 

proportionately between the two distances expressed in the 

field notes of original survey. The section corner started from 

and the corner closed upon should be connected by a right 

line, unless the retracement should develop the fact that the 

section line is either a broken or curved line, as is sometimes 

the case. 

60. Reestablishment of interior quarter-section corners.- 

In some of the older surveys these corners are placed at 

variable distances, in which case the field notes of the original survey must be consulted, and the quarter-section corner 

reestablished at proportionate distances between the corresponding section corners, in accordance therewith. The later 

surveys being more uniform and in stricter accordance with 

law, the missing quarter-section corner must be reestablished equidistant between the section corners marking the 

line, according to the field notes of the original survey. The 

remarks made under section 56, in relation to section lines, 

apply with full force here also; the caution there given not to 

neglect sight trees is equally applicable, since the proper 

reestablishment of the quqrter-section corner may in some 

instances very largely depend upon its observance, and avoid 

one of the many sources of litigation. 

760 
61. NOTE.-In some of the southern public-land States it 

was the custom in the early surveys to establish half-mile 

posts at a distance of 40 chains from the point from which the 

section line was initiated, at the same time inserting in the 

field notes at the midway point “l/4 sec. COT.” without indication in the field notes that any other corner than the half-mile 

corner was set. And it is presumed that the l/4 sec cor. was 

merely “called for” at that place. This practice has long been 

discontinued owing to the confusion thereby occasioned. 

-18- 

These half-mile posts have no bearing upon the subdivision 

of the section except where they happen to occupy the midway point on true lines between section corners. In such 

cases, when a subdivision is required of a section surveyed on 

this plan, and no original quarter corners are found, the 

latter should be reestablished at a point on a true line midway between the original section corners. 

62. Where double corners were originally established, one 

of which is standing, to reestablish the other.-It being remembered that the corners established when the exterior 

township lines were run, belong to the sections in the 

townships north and west of those lines, the surveyor must 

first determine beyond a doubt to which sections the existing 

corner belongs. This may be done by testing the courses and 

distances to witness trees or other objects noted in the original field notes of survey, and by remeasuring distances to 

known corners. Having determined to which township the 

existing corner belongs, the missing corner may be reestablished in line from the existing corner, at the distance stated 

in the field notes of the original survey, by proportionate 

measurement, and tested by retracement to the opposite corresponding corner of the section to which the missing section 

corner belongs. These double corners being generally not 

more than a few chains apart, the distance between them can 

be more accurately laid off, and it is considered preferable to 

first establish the missing corner as above, and check upon 

the corresponding interior corner as noted in section 54 

above. 

63. Where double corners were originally established, and 

both are missing, to reestablish the one established when the 

township line was run.-The surveyor will connect the 

nearest known corners on the township line by a right line, 

being careful to distinguish the section from the closing corners, and reestablish the missing corner at the point indicated by the field notes of the original survey by proportionate measurement. The corner thus restored will be common 

to two sections either north or west of the township boundary, 

and the section north or west, as the case may be, should be 

carefully retraced, thus checking upon the reestablished corner, and testing the accuracy of the result. It can not be too 

much impressed upon the surveyor that any measurements 

to objects on line noted in the original survey are means of 

determining and testing the correctness of the operation. 

64. Where double corners were originally established, and 

both are missing, to reestablish the one established when the 

township was subdivided.-The corner to be reestablished 

being common to two sections south or east of the township 

line, the section line closing on the missing section corner 

should be first retraced to an intersection with the township 

line in the manner previously indicated, and a temporary 

corner established at the point of intersection. The township 

line will of course have been previously carefully retraced in 

accordance with the requirements of the original field notes 

of survey, and marked in such a manner as to be readily 

identified when reaching the same with the retraced section 

line. The location of the temporary corner planted at the 

point of intersection will then be carefully tested and verified 

by remeasurements to objects and known corners on the 

township line, as noted in the original field notes of survey, 

and the necessary corrections made in such relocation. 

Should unusual error be found in one of the tested lines, the 

principles in “Exceptional Cases,” sections 29 to 34, must 

-19- 

be considered. A permanent corner will then be erected at the 

corrected location on the township line, properly marked and 

witnessed, and recorded for future requirements. 

65. Where triple corners were originally established on 

range lines, one or two of which have become obliterated, to 

reestablish either of them.-It will be borne in mind that only 

two corners were established as actual corners of sections, 

those established on the range line not corresponding with 

the subdivisional survey east or west of said range line. The 

surveyor will, therefore, first proceed to identify the existing 

corner or corners, as the case may be, and then reestablish 

the missing corner or corners in line north or south, according 

to the distances stated in the original field notes of survey in 

the manner indicated for the reestablishment of double corners, testing the accuracy of the result obtained, as hereinbefore directed in other cases. If, however, the distances between the triple corners are not stated in the original field 

notes of survey, as is frequently the case in the returns of 

older surveys, the range line should be first carefully retraced, and marked in a manner sufficiently clear to admit of 

easy identification upon reaching same during the subsequent proceedings. The section lines closing upon the missing 

corners must then be retraced in accordance with the original 

field notes of survey, in the manner previously indicated and 

directed, and the corners reestablished in the manner 

directed in the case of double corners. The surveyor can not be 

too careful, in the matter of retracement, in following closely 

all the recorded indications of the original line, and nothing, 

however slight, should be neglected to insure the correctness 

of the retracement of thk original line; since there is no other 

check upon the accuracy of the reestablishment of the missing corners, unless the entire corresponding section lines are 

remeasured by proportional measurement and the result 

checked by a recalculation of the areas as originally returned, which, at best, is but a very poor check, because the 

areas expressed upon the margin of many plats of the older 

surveys are erroneously stated on the face of the plats, or 

have been carelessly calculated. 

66. Where triple corners were originally established on 

range lines, all of which are missing, to reestablish same.- 

These corners should be reestablished in accordance with the 

foregoing directions, commencing with the corner originally 

established when the range line was run, establishing the 

same in accordance with previously given directions for restoring section and quarter-section corners; that is to say, by 

761 
remeasuring between the nearest known corners on said 

township line, and reestablishing the same by proportionate 

measurement. The two remaining will then be reestablished 

in conformity with the general rules for reestablishment of 

double corners. 

67. Reestablishment of meander corners.-Before proceeding with the reestablishment of missing meander corners, the surveyor should have carefully rechained at least 

three of the section lines between known corners of the 

township within which the lost corner is to be relocated, in 

order to establish the proportionate measurement to be used. 

It is also necessary, in retracing such original lines, to ascertain the real course used by the first surveyor. For instance, 

where he reported meridional lines as running due north, if 

they are found to have an average course of N. 1" 20' E., the 

latter course should be considered in restoring an extinct 

north line to a meander corner. 

-20- 

68. These requirements of preliminary retracement of section lines must in no case be omitted; since it gives the only 

data upon which the fractional section line can be remeasured proportionately and probable course found, the corner 

marking the terminus, or the meander corner, being missing, 

which it is intended to reestablish. The missing meander 

corner will be reestablished on the section or township line 

retraced in it original location, by the proportionate 

measurement found by the preceding operations, from the 

nearest known corner on such township or section line, in 

accordance with the requirements of the original field notes 

of survey. 

69. Meander corners hold the peculiar position of denoting 

a point on line between landowners, without usually being 

the legal terminus or corner of the lands owned. Leading 

judicial decisions have affirmed that meander lines are not 

strictly boundaries, and do not limit the ownership to the 

exact areas placed on the tracts, but that said title extends to 

the water which, by the plat, appears to bound the land. 

As such water boundaries are, therefore, subject to change 

by the encroachment or recession of the stream or lake, the 

precise location of old meanders is seldom important, unless 

in States whose laws prescribe that dried lake beds are the 

property of the State. 

70. Where the United States has disposed of the fractional 

lots adjacent to shores, it claims no marginal lands left by 

recession or found by reason of erroneous survey. The lines 

between landowners are therefore regarded as extended 

beyond the original meander line of the shore, but the preservation or relocation of the meander corner is important as 

evidence of the position of the section line. The different rules 

by which division lines should be run between private owners 

of riparian accretions are a matter of State legislation, and 

not subject to a general rule of this office. 

71. Fractional section lines.-County and local surveyors 

being sometimes called upon to restore fractional section 

lines closing upon Indian, military, or other reservations, 

private grants, etc., such lines should be restored upon the 

same principles as directed in the foregoing pages, and 

checked whenever possible upon such corners or monuments 

as have been placed to mark such boundary lines. 

In some instances corners have been moved from their 

original position, either by accident or design, and county 

surveyors are called upon to restore such corners to their 

original positions, but, owing to the absence of any and all 

means of identification of such location, are unable to make 

the result of their work acceptable to the owners of the lands 

affected by such corner. In such cases the advice of this office 

has invariably been to the effect that the relocation of such 

corner must be made in accordance with the orders of a court 

of competent jurisdiction, the United States having no longer 

any authority to order any changes where the lands affected 

by such corner have been disposed of. 

RECORDS. 

72. The original evidences of the public-land surveys in 

the following States have been transferred, under the provisions of sections 2218,2219, and 2220, United States Revised 

Statutes, to the state 

-21- 

authorities, to whom application should be made for such 

copies of the original plats and field notes as may be desired, 

viz: 

Alabama: Secretary of State, Montgomery. 

Arkansas: Commissioner of State Lands, Little Rock. 

Florida: Commissioner of Agriculture, Tallahassee. 

Illinois: Auditor of State, Springfield. 

Indiana: Auditor of State, Indianapolis. 

Iowa: Secretary of State, Des Moines. 

Kansas: Auditor of State and Register of State Lands, 

Louisiana: (after June 30, 1909) State officers. 

Michigan: Public Domain Commissioner, Lansing. 

Minnesota: Secretary of State, St. Paul. 

Mississippi: Commissioner of State Lands, Jackson. 

Missouri: Secretary of State, Jefferson City. 

Nebraska: Commissioner of Public Lands and Buildings, 

North Dakota: State Engineer, Bismarck. 

Ohio: Auditor of State, Columbus. 

Wisconsin: Commissioners of Public Lands, Madison. 

In other public-land States the original field notes and 

plats are retained in the offices of the United States surveyors-general. 

Topeka. 

Lincoln. 

SUBDIVISION OF SECTIONS. 

73. This office being in receipt of many letters making 

inquiry in regard to the proper method of subdividing sections of the public lands, the following general rules have 

been prepared as a reply to such inquiries. The rules for 

subdivision are based upon the laws governing the survey of 

the public lands. When cases arise which are not covered by 

these rules, and the advice of this office in the matter is 

desired, the letter of inquiry should, in every instance, contain a description of the particular tract or corner, with reference to township, range, and section of the public surveys, to 

enable the office to consult the record; also a diagram show762 
ing conditions found, giving distances in chains and links and 

not in feet. 

74. Preliminary to subdivision it is most essential to know 

the actual boundaries of the section, as it can not be legally 

subdivided until the section corners and quarter-section corners have either been found, or restored by the preceding 

methods, and the resulting courses and distances determined 

by survey. The practice of entering a section to survey a tract 

from only one or two corners, and those perhaps unreliable, is 

unwarranted, and may result in litigation. 

The order of procedure is: First reestablish the obliterated 

boundary corners; next, fix the lines of quarter sections; then 

form smaller tracts by equitable and proportionate division, 

according to the following rules: 

75. Subdivision of sections into quarter sections.-Under 

the provisions of the act of Congress approved February 11, 

1805, the course to be pursued in the subdivision of sections 

into quarter sections is to run straight lines from the established quarter-section corners, United States surveys, to the 

opposite corresponding corners. The point of intersection of 

the lines thus run will be the corner common to the several 

quarter sections, or, in other words, the legal center of the 

section. 

-22- 

76. Upon the lines closing on the north and west boundaries of a township, the quarter-section corners are established by the United States deputy surveyors at 40 chains to 

the north or west of the last interior section corners, and the 

excess or deficiency in the measurement is thrown into the 

half mile next to the township or range line, as the case may 

be. 

77. Where there are double sets of section corners on 

township and range lines, the quarter corners for the sections 

south of the township lines and east of the range lines are not 

established in the field by the United States deputy surveyors, but in subdividing such sections said quarter corners 

should be so placed as to suit the calculations of the areas of 

the quarter sections adjoining the township boundaries as 

expressed upon the official plat, adopting proportionate 

measurements where the new measurements of the north or 

west boundaries of the section differ from the original 

measurements. 

78. Subdivision of fractional sections.-Where opposite 

corresponding corners have not been or can not be fixed, the 

subdivision lines should be ascertained by running from the 

established corners due north south, east, or west lines, as the 

case may be, to the water course, Indian boundary line, or 

other boundary of such fractional section. 

79. The law presumes the section lines surveyed and 

marked in the field by the United States deputy surveyors to 

be due north and south or east and west lines, but in actual 

experience this is not always the case. Hence, in order to 

carry out the spirit of the law, it will be necessary in running 

the subdivisional lines through fractional sections to adopt 

mean courses, where the section lines are not due lines, or to 

run the subdivision line parallel to the east, south, west, or 

north boundary of the section, as conditions may require, 

where there is no opposite section line. 

80. Subdivision of quarter sections into quarter quarters.-Preliminary to the subdivision of quarter sections, the 

quarter-quarter corners will be established at points midway 

between the section and quarter-section corners, and between quarter corners and the center of the section, except on 

the last half mile of the lines closing on the north or west 

boundaries of a township, where they should be placed at 20 

chains, proportionate measurement, to the north or west of 

the quarter-section corner. 

81. The quarter-quarter section corners having been 

established as directed above, the subdivision lines of the 

quarter section will be run straight between opposite corresponding quarter-quarter section corners on the quartersection boundaries. The intersection of the lines thus run will 

determine the place for the corner common to the four quarter-quarter sections. 

82. Subdivision of fractional quarter sections.-The subdivision lines of fractional quarter sections will be run from 

properly established quarter-quarter section corners, with 

courses governed by the advice in sections 67 and 79, to the 

lake, water course, or reservation which renders such tracts 

fractional, or parallel to the east, south, west, or north boundary of the quarter section, as conditions may require. 

83. By “proportionate measurement” of a part of a line is 

meant a measurement having the same ratio to that recorded 

in the original field notes for that portion as the length of the 

whole line by actual 

-23- 

resurvey bears to its length as given in the record. Differences between former and new measurements may generally 

be expected. They may occur through using a chain of 

erroneous length, or by careless setting of pins, by neglect of 

leveling, or by error in transcribing notes, and these should 

be carefully avoided in retracement as in original surveys. 

Instead of the old practice of “adjusting the chain” to suit the 

former measure, the distance taken by a precise method is 

compared with that of the record, and the shortage or surplus 

is computed by proportion, producing the same result in a 

more reliable manner. 

84. For example: The length of the line from the quartersection corner on the west side of sec. 2, T. 24 N., R. 14 E., 

Wisconsin, to the north line of the township, by the United 

States deputy surveyor’s chain, was reported as 45.40 chains, 

and by the county surveyor’s measure is reported as 42.90 

chains; then the distance which the quarter-quarter section 

corner should be located north of the quarter-section corner 

would be determined as follows: 

85. As 45.40 chains, the government measure of the whole 

distance, is to 42.90 chains, the county surveyor’s measure of 

the same distance, so is 20.00 chains, original measurement, 

to 18.90 chains by the county surveyor’s measure, showing 

that by proportionate measurement in this case the quarterquarter section corner should be set at 18.90 chains north of 

the quarter-section corner, instead of 20.00 chains north of 

such corner, as represented on the official plat. In this manner the discrepancies between original and new measurements are equitably distributed. 

86. A resurvey must be initiated at some well-defined, 

identified, and unquestioned starting point on the original 

surveys. It must terminate at some equally well-known and 

763 
identified point; the intermediate corners being placed along 

that line in proportion as the whole redetermined distance is 

to the whole distance as originally reported. For example, 

should a line originally reported to be 160.00 chains be found 

by resurvey to the 164.00 chain, then the corners, originally 

reported as being placed 40.00 chains apart, will be placed 

41.00 chains apart, and will be so reported by the later surveyor. This it will be seen requires that the whole distance 

between two well-defined corners (or points) be accurately 

known, in order to give the intermediate reestablished corners their proper relative positions, or distance apart. 

FRED DENNETT, 

Commissioner. 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, 

June 1, 1909. 

Approved: 

R. A. BALLINGER, 

Secretary. 

764 
XLVII. 

(The copy of this letter of instructions is taken from a typewritten copy. The location of the original is presently unknown, but 

is most probably in Records Group 49, National Archives.) 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR. 

General Land Office. 

Washington, D.C., August 15,1910. 

765 
To U. S. Surveyors General and 

U. S. Surveyors. 

From the description of land, soil, timber, etc., required by 

the Manual of 1902, to be stated at the end of the field notes of 

each mile of line, “descriptive notes” (section 242) are prepared to be filed in local land offices for the use of the public. 

As ordinarily prepared, these are deemed insufficient for 

intending settlers on the public lands. There are many other 

details not generally reported by surveyors, easily obtainable 

in the course of their work, which, in view of the purpose 

stated, should have attention. 

It is not intened to set aside any considerable space in the 

notes for this purpose; hence, entries should be as concise as 

possible yet specific for each portion of the line surveyed, 

while features common to large portions of the township 

should, to avoid repetition, appear in the “General Description” at the end of the notes. No additional entries are contemplated in the line-notes proper, other than to more fully 

record what the Manual already prescribes, when needed for 

the fuller purpose above stated. 

Topographic features should be considered, as affecting the 

use of the lands, and as exposing to or sheltering from storms 

or unfavorable winds. The position of the lands relative to 

adjacent areas, as being higher or lower, and the “exposure” 

(to the south, east, etc.) as being favorable or otherwise, 

should be noted. When lands are rolling or hilly, the character of the uplands, slopes, and valleys should be observed, for, 

quite often, the uplands and slopes are denuded of good soil 

and the valleys are of small value. Steep slopes are often 

subject to soil denudation. The systems ofnatural drainage in 

several portions of the township should also be stated. 

In addition to noting streams or other sources of water, 

with the character of the latter, the presence in the soil of 

water 

-2- 

available for plant use should be observed, and also what can 

be readily done for lands needing irrigation or drainage. The 

agricultural value of lands depend to no small extent upon 

the relations existing between soils and subsoils, the usual 

excavations at corners will aid in this determination to some 

extent, and exposures on steep banks and in ravines and 

drains should also be examined for this purpose. 

The ordinary record, as “soil, sandy loam, 3rd rate”, should 

be supplemented whenever possible with a more definite 

description. In regions where surveys are contemplated, 

soils, ordinarily speaking, are in general, composed of humus 

or decomposed organic matter, clay and sand of various 

kinds, or of a friable mixture of all these called loam, in 

widely varying proportions; and with the soils may be stones, 

gravel, broken or partly disintegrated rocks and shales, etc. 

As the relative amounts of the constituents determine in a 

large degree a proper use of the land, whatever brief terms 

with usual significations are employed, although not expected to be quantitatively exact, should be sufficiently descriptive in this respect. Texture, depending on the relative 

amounts of grains of various sizes, is of importance as affecting the aeration of soils and plant use of moisture. Color is 

often indicative of constituents. Soils are also popularly described as stiff, friable, strong, weak, rich, poor, dry, wet, 

cold, warm, sharp, fine or soft, etc. If calcareous that fact 

should be stated. 

If farming is done, DRY OR OTHERWISE, along or near 

any line, the vegetable or cereal crop should be noted as to 

kind, condition, yield, etc. In other cases, conclusions should 

be drawn from facts and conditions observed, as to the agricultural uses of the lands, but care should be taken that this 

be done only within the surveyor’s knowledge of the subject. 

A description at the end of the notes of a line surveyed 

prepared in harmony with the above, may, for instance, be 

found as follows: 

S. 30 chs., high gently rolling prairie, E. slope; soil, rich 

dark clay loam, 4 to 8 ins. deep, medium texture, moist, 

on clay subsoil; good growth bunch grass; N. 50 chs. 

broken and hilly; ridges with light, poor, sandy loam, 

washed on slopes, stony; valleys, good brown clay loam 

with some gravel, drains to NE., subsoil clay and decomposing shales. No timber”. 

In the “General Description” the geological formations 

whence come the bases of the soil and subsoil should be noted, 

if known, and what apparent action of the kind is now in 

progress. 

U. S. Surveyors will observe these instructions supplemental to the Manual of 1902, and order their practice 

accordingly. Surveyors General will similarly instruct their 

deputies. 

In the “descriptive notes” to be sent to the local land office, 

surveyors general should state the month and year in which 

the surveys were made, as incident to a proper understanding 

of the information furnished. 

Very respectfully, 

(signed) Fred Dennett, 

Commissioner. 

766 
INDEX 

Acts 

August 3. 1795. 7 Stat . 49 .................. .29. 31. 39 

May 18. 1796. 1 Stat . 464 ... .29. 31. 38. 41. 48. 82. 127 

April 7. 1798. 1 Stat . 549 .......................... 47 

March 2. 1799. 1 Stat . 728 ......................... 38 

March 2. 1799. 1 Stat . 728 ..................... .27. 42 

March 1. 1800. 2 Stat . 14 .......................... 38 

May 7. 1800. 2 Stat . 58 ............................ 38 

May 10. 1800. 2 Stat . 73 ................ .38. 42. 45. 47 

February 18. 1801. 2 Stat . 100 ...................... 42 

May 1. 1802. 2 Stat . 179 ....................... .42. 45 

March 3. 1803. 2 Stat . 210 ................. .45. 47. 48 

March 3. 1803. 2 Stat . 225 ......................... 47 

March 3. 1803. 2 Stat . 236 ......................... 47 

March 23. 1804. 2 Stat . 274 ........................ 45 

March 26. 1804. 2 Stat . 277 ....................... -48 

March 26. 1804. 2 Stat . 283 ............... ..51. 55. 57 

March 27. 1804. 2 Stat . 303 ........................ 54 

January 11. 1805. 2 Stat . 309 ...................... 54 

February 11. 1805. 2 Stat . 313 ............ ..54. 56. 83. 

March 2. 1805. 2 Stat . 324 ......................... 55 

March 3. 1805. 2 Stat . 331 ......................... 55 

March 3. 1805. 2 Stat . 343 ......................... 55 

February 28. 1806. 2 Stat . 352 ...................... 57 

April 21. 1806. 2 Stat . 391-396 ..................... 57 

March 3. 1807. 2 Stat . 445 ......................... 58 

November 17. 1807. 7 Stat . 105 ..................... 65 

February 3. 1809. 2 Stat . 514 ....................... 58 

April 30. 1810. 2 Stat . 590 ......................... 59 

March 3. 1811. 2 Stat . 662 ................ .59. 82. 112 

February 20. 1811. 2 Stat . 641 ...................... 59 

April 25. 1812. 2 Stat . 716 ......................... 59 

May 20. 1812. 2 Stat . 741 .......................... 59 

June 4. 1812. 2 Stat . 743 ........................... 59 

June 13. 1812. 2 Stat . 748 .......................... 59 

February 4. 1815. 3 Stat . 201 ....................... 61 

February 17. 1815. 3 Stat . 211 ...................... 61 

April 16. 1816. 3 Stat . 277 ......................... 72 

April 19. 1816. 3 Stat . 289 ......................... 72 

February 22. 1817. 3 Stat . 346 ...................... 72 

(43 U.S.C. 931) 

June 1. 1796. 1 Stat . 490 ................... .30. 37. 38 

Territories of Ohio and Indiana created 

Amendment to the Act of May 18. 1796 

June 7. 1803. 7 Stat . 74 ............................ 48 

Fort Wayne Treaty 

Territories of Orleans and Louisiana created 

Georgia cession lands to the Territory of Mississippi 

Territory of Michigan created 

94. 95. 99. 117. 119. 126. 133. 136. 137. 150. 160 

(Title 43 of the U.S.C.) 

July 4. 1805. 7 Stat . 87 ............................ 56 

Treaty of Fort Industry 

Illinois Territory created 

Louisiana admitted into the Union 

General Land Office created 

Territory of Missouri created 

Indiana Enabling Act 

April 29. 1816. 3 .Stat. 325 ......................... 72 

March 1. 1817. 3 Stat . 348 ......................... 72 

March 3. 1817. 3 Stat . 371 ......................... 72 

March 3. 1817. 3 Stat . 375 ......................... 72 

April 20. 1818. 3 Stat . 466 ......................... 72 

March 2. 1819. 3 Stat . 489 ......................... 72 

March 2. 1819. 3 Stat . 493 .......................... 72 

March 3. 1819. 3 Stat . 523 ......................... 74 

March 6. 1820. 3 Stat . 545 ......................... 75 

April 24. 1820. 3 Stat . 566 ................. .75. 83. 94 

March 2. 1821. 3 Stat . 612 ......................... 76 

March 30. 1822. 3 Stat . 654 ........................ 74 

May 8. 1822. 3 Stat . 709 ........................... 76 

May 24. 1824. 4 Stat . 34 ...................... ..82. 83 

February 25. 1825. 4 Stat . 85 ....................... 76 

March 2. 1827. 4 Stat . 236 ......................... 83 

May 23. 1828. 4 Stat . 289 .......................... 88 

May 29. 1830. 4 Stat . 417 .......................... 88 

May 29. 1830. 4 Stat . 420 .......................... 88 

March 3. 1831. 4 Stat . 492 ......................... 89 

April 5. 1832. 4 Stat . 503 ................ .90. 126. 137 

June 15. 1832. 4 Stat . 531 .......................... 94 

July 9. 1832. 4 Stat . 564 ........................... 94 

March 2. 1833. 4 Stat . 663 ......................... 94 

June 28. 1834. 4 Stat . 701 .......................... 95 

April 20. 1836. 5 Stat . 10 .......................... 96 

June 15. 1836. 5 Stat . 49 ...................... .96. 97 

June 15. 1836. 5 Stat . 50 .......................... 96 

July 4. 1836. 5 Stat . 107 ........................... 96 

June 12. 1838. 5 Stat . 235 .......................... 97 

June 12. 1838. 5 Stat . 243 .......................... 97 

June 12. 1838. 5 Stat . 244 .......................... 97 

March 3. 1839. 5 Stat . 449 ......................... 98 

June 12. 1840. 5 Stat . 384 .................... .99. 116 

September 4. 1841. 5 Stat . 453 ..................... 99 

May 23. 1844. 5 Stat . 657 ......................... 101 

June 12. 1844. 5 Stat . 662 ......................... 101 

June 17. 1844. 5 Stat . 681 ......................... 101 

March 3. 1845. 5 Stat . 742 ........................ 103 

March 3. 1845. 5 Stat . 752 ........................ 103 

July 11. 1846. 9 Stat . 37 .......................... 110 

August 6. 1846. 9 Stat . 56 ......................... 110 

August 8. 1846. 9 Stat . 79 ......................... 110 

August 10. 1846. 9 Stat . 85 ....................... 110 

Mississippi Enabling Act 

Territory of Alabama created 

Alabama Enabling Act 

Territory of Arkansas created 

Missouri Enabling Act 

(43 U.S.C. 774) 

Office of Commissioner of Indian Affairs created 

Territory of Wisconsin created 

Michigan Enabling Act 

Arkansas admitted into the Union 

Territory of Iowa created 

General Preemption Act 

Abolished the Office of Solicitor of the GLO 

Iowa and Florida Enabling Act 

Wisconsin Enabling Act 

767 
December 28. 1846. 9 Stat . 117 .................... 103 

March 1. 1847. 9 Stat . 146 ........................ 111 

May 29. 1848. 9 Stat . 233 ......................... 110 

June 28. 1848. 9 Stat . 242 ......................... 111 

Wisconsin admitted into the Union 

August 14. 1848. 9 Stat . 323 ...................... 111 

March 2. 1849. 9 Stat . 352 ................... .112, 114 

February 1. 1849. 9 Stat . 759 ...................... 115 

March 3. 1849. 9 Stat . 395 ........................ 112 

March 3. 1849. 9 Stat . 403 ........................ 112 

Territory of Oregon created 

Department of the Interior created 

Territory of Minnesota created 

California admitted to the Union 

Territory of Utah created 

September 9. 1850. 9 Stat . 452 .................... 114 

September 9. 1850. 9 Stat . 453 .................... 114 

September 20. 1850. 9 Stat . 466 ................... 114 

September 27. 1850. 9 Stat . 496 ................... 114 

September 28. 1850. 9 Stat . 515 ................... 114 

September 28. 1850. 9 Stat . 519 ................... 114 

March 3. 1851. 9 Stat . 598 ........................ 115 

July 21. 1852. 10 Stat . 15 ......................... 116 

August 31. 1852. 10 Stat . 76 ...................... 116 

January 22. 1853. 10 Stat . 152 .................... 116 

March 2. 1853. 10 Stat . 172 ....................... 117 

March 3. 1853. 10 Stat . 244 ............. .117. 135. 147 

May 30. 1854. 10 Stat . 277 ........................ 117 

July 17. 1854. 10 Stat . 305 ........................ 118 

July 22. 1854. 10 Stat . 308 ........................ 118 

August 4. 1854. 10 Stat . 575 ...................... 118 

March 3. 1855. 10 Stat . 643 ....................... 119 

March 3. 1857. 11 Stat . 206 ....................... 126 

Legislative. Executive. and Judicial Appropriations 

May 11. 1858. 11 Stat . 285 ........................ 127 

Minnesota admitted into the Union 

May 18. 1858. 11 Stat . 289-290 .................... 127 

May 29. 1858. 11 Stat . 293 ........................ 127 

February 14. 1859. 11 Stat . 383 ................... 127 

March 12. 1860. 12 Stat . 3 ................... .114. 127 

January 29. 1861. 12 Stat . 126 .................... 130 

February 28. 1861. 12 Stat . 172 ................... 130 

March 2. 1861. 12 Stat . 209 ....................... 130 

March 2. 1861. 12 Stat . 239 ....................... 130 

March 14. 1862. 12 Stat . 369 ...................... 132 

May 15. 1862. 12 Stat . 387 ........................ 132 

May 20. 1862. 12 Stat . 392 ........................ 132 

Swamp Lands Act 

March 3. 1851. 9 Stat . 631 ........................ 115 

Amended the Act of June 12.1840. 5 Stat . 384 

Territory of Washington created 

Territories of Nebraska and Kansas created 

Gadsden Purchase to the Territory of New Mexico 

Oregon admitted into the Union 

Swamp Lands Act - Minnesota and Oregon 

Kansas admitted into the Union 

Territory of Colorado created 

Territory of Nevada created 

Dakota Territory created 

Department of Agriculture created 

Homestead Law 

May 30. 1862. 12 Stat . 409 ......... .132. 144. 148. 161 

June 14. 1862. 12 Stat . 427 ....................... 132 

July 1. 1862. 12 Stat . 489 ......................... 132 

February 24. 1863. 12 Stat . 664 ................... 133 

March 3. 1863. 12 Stat . 754 ....................... 133 

March 3. 1863. 12 Stat . 808 ....................... 133 

March 21. 1864. 13 Stat . 30 ....................... 134 

March 21. 1864. 13 Stat . 32 ....................... 134 

Territory of Arizona created 

(43 U.S.C. 711-712) 

Territory of Idaho created 

Nevada Enabling Act 

Colorado Enabling Act 

(25 U.S.C. 176) 

April 8. 1864. 13 Stat . 39 ............... .132. 135. 170 

May 5. 1864. 13 Stat . 63 .......................... 136 

May 26. 1864. 13 Stat . 85 ......................... 135 

July 1. 1864. 13 Stat . 343 ......................... 135 

July 2. 1864. 13 Stat . 344 ......................... 133 

July 2. 1864. 13 Stat . 356 ......................... 136 

July 2. 1864. 13 Stat . 365 ......................... 136 

June 30. 1864. 13 Stat . 325 ....................... 136 

March 2. 1865. 13 Stat . 460 ....................... 137 

Territory of Montana created 

(43 U.S.C. 713-717) 

May 5. 1866. 14 Stat . 43 .......................... 134 

June 29. 1866. 14 Stat . 77 ......................... 139 

July 4. 1866. 14 Stat . 85 .......................... 139 

July 25. 1866. 14 Stat . 239 ........................ 139 

July 25. 1866. 14 Stat . 242 ........................ 139 

July 26. 1866. 14 Stat . 251 .................. .139. 147 

July 28. 1866. 14 Stat . 339 ........................ 140 

July 28. 1866. 14 Stat . 344 ........................ 140 

February 9. 1867. 14 Stat . 391 .................... 140 

February 25. 1867. 14 Stat . 409 ................... 140 

March 1. 1867. 14 Stat . 820 ....................... 140 

March 2. 1867. 14 Stat . 440 and 457 ............... 140 

March 2. 1867. 14 Stat . 541 ....................... 140 

March 2. 1867. 14 Stat . 542 ....................... 140 

July 25. 1868. 15 Stat . 178 ........................ 144 

February 2. 1870. 16 Stat . 64 ...................... 145 

July 9. 1870. 16 Stat . 217 ......................... 147 

July 11. 1870. 16 Stat . 230 ........................ 147 

February 18. 1871. 16 Stat . 416 ............... .28. 148 

February 24. 1871. 16 Stat . 430 ................... 169 

March 3. 1871. 16 Stat . 581 ....................... 148 

March 1. 1872. 17 Stat . 32 ........................ 150 

May 10. 1872. 17 Stat . 91 ......................... 150 

February 18. 1873. 17 Stat . 465 ................... 151 

February 19. 1873. 18 Stat . 16 .................... 152 

(43 U.S.C. 932) 

Nebraska Enabling Act 

Nebraska admitted into the Union 

(43 U.S.C. 718-721) 

Territory of Wyoming created 

May 4. 1870. 16 Stat . 96 .......................... 145 

(43 U.S.C. 766) 

Yellowstone National Park created 

Mining Law 

768 
March 3. 1875. 18 Stat . 366 ....................... 153 

March 3. 1875. 18 Stat . 474 ....................... 134 

July 31. 1876. 19 Stat . 102 .................. .154. 189 

July 31. 1876. 19 Stat . 121 .................. .154. 189 

February 16. 1877. 19 Stat . 231 ................... 155 

March 3. 1877. 19 Stat . 377 ................. .155. 172 

June 3. 1878. 20 Stat . 88 .......................... 156 

June 3. 1878. 20 Stat . 89 .......................... 156 

March 3. 1879. 20 Stat . 352 ....................... 157 

March 3. 1879. 20 Stat . 394 ....................... 159 

February 11. 1880. 21 Stat . 301 ................... 160 

June 16. 1880. 21 Stat . 287 ....................... 160 

March 3. 1883. 22 Stat . 603 ....................... 163 

March 13. 1884. 23 Stat . 4 ........................ 169 

May 17. 1884. 23 Stat . 24 ......................... 169 

July 5. 1884. 23 Stat . 103 ......................... 169 

July 7. 1884. 23 Stat . 194 ................... .162. 169 

February 8. 1887. 24 Stat . 388 .................... 170 

Desert Land Act 

General Allotment Act of 1887 or Dawes Act (25 

U.S.C. 331) 

February 22. 1889. 25 Stat . 676 ................... 171 

March 1. 1889. 25 Stat . 735 ....................... 171 

March 2. 1889. 25 Stat . 854 ....................... 171 

March 2. 1889. 25 Stat . 1004 ...................... 171 

April 10. 1890. 26 Stat . 53 ........................ 172 

May 2. 1890. 26 Stat . 81 .......................... 172 

July 3. 1890. 26 Stat . 215 ......................... 172 

July 10. 1890. 26 Stat . 222 ........................ 172 

July 11. 1890. 26 Stat . 228 ........................ 172 

August 30. 1890. 26 Stat . 391 ..................... 172 

September 25. 1890. 26 Stat . 467 .................. 172 

October 1. 1890. 26 Stat . 650 ...................... 172 

March 3. 1891. 26 Stat . 854 ....................... 172 

March 3. 1891. 26 Stat . 1095 ...................... 172 

March 30. 1891. 26 Stat . 1565 ..................... 172 

July 16. 1894. 28 Stat . 107 ........................ 173 

August 9. 1894. 28 Stat . 275 ...................... 173 

August 15. 1894. 28 Stat . 285 ..................... 173 

March 2. 1895. 28 Stat . 876 ....................... 173 

February 20. 1896. 29 Stat . 11 .................... 184 

June 10. 1896. 29 Stat . 321 ....................... 184 

June 11. 1896. 29 Stat . 413. 435 ................... 184 

February 11. 1897. 29 Stat . 526 ................... 184 

June 4. 1897. 30 Stat . 11. 34-36 ................... 184 

July 24. 1897. 30 Stat . 215 ........................ 185 

April 29. 1898. 30 Stat . 367 ....................... 185 

May 14. 1898. 30 Stat . 409 ........................ 185 

July 7. 1898. 30 Stat . 673 ......................... 184 

March 3. 1899. 30 Stat . 1074 ...................... 185 

June 6. 1900. 31 Stat . 327 ......................... 185 

April 26. 1902. 32 Stat . 120 ................. .185. 189 

June 17. 1902. 32 Stat . 388 ....................... 185 

July 1. 1902. 32 Stat . 728 ......................... 185 

January 10. 1903. 32 Stat . 767 .................... 185 

March 3. 1903. 32 Stat . 1028 ...................... 185 

Territory of Oklahoma created 

Idaho admitted into the Union 

Wyoming admitted into the Union 

Utah Enabling Act 

Arkansas Compromise Act 

April 28. 1904. 33 Stat . 545 ....................... 186 

February 1. 1905. 33 Stat . 628 .................... 185 

April 16. 1906. 34 Stat . 116 ....................... 185 

May 17. 1906. 34 Stat . 267 ........................ 186 

June 11. 1906. 34 Stat . 233 ....................... 186 

Oklahoma. Arizona and New Mexico Enabling Act 

March 2. 1907. 34 Stat . 1232 ...................... 186 

May 27. 1908. 35 Stat . 317 ........................ 186 

March 3. 1909. 35 Stat . 845 ....................... 186 

March 4. 1909. 35 Stat . 945 ....................... 186 

June 20. 1910. 36 Stat . 557 ....................... 186 

June 25. 1910. 36 Stat . 703 ....................... 186 

March 4. 1911. 36 Stat . 1363 ...................... 188 

August 24. 1912. 37 Stat . 512 ..................... 189 

March 12. 1914. 38 Stat . 305 ...................... 189 

July 17. 1914. 38 Stat . 509 ........................ 189 

March 4. 1915. 38 Stat . 1214 ...................... 189 

June 9. 1916. 39 Stat . 218 ......................... 190 

July 8. 1916. 39 Stat . 352 ......................... 190 

August 25. 1916. 39 Stat . 535 ..................... 190 

September 21. 1918. 40 Stat . 965 .................. 190 

July 19. 1919. 41 Stat . 163 ........................ 190 

February 25. 1920. 41 Stat . 437 ................... 190 

May 21. 1920. 41 Stat . 607 & 613 ................. 190 

June 5. 1920. 41 Stat . 1059 ....................... 190 

March 20. 1922. 42 Stat . 465 ...................... 190 

May 24. 1922. 42 Stat . 552 ........................ 190 

June 15. 1922. 42 Stat . 650 ....................... 190 

March 3. 1925. 43 Stat . 1141 ...................... 190 

April 13. 1926. 44 Stat . 243 ....................... 191 

March 3. 1927. 44 Stat . 1365 ...................... 191 

December 28. 1928. 45 Stat . 1069 .................. 191 

becember 16. 1930. 46 Stat . 1029 ................... 82 

May 26. 1934. 48 Stat . 809 ........................ 191 

June 28. 1934. 48 Stat . 1269 ...................... 191 

June 1. 1938. 52 Stat . 609 ......................... 191 

July 16. 1946. 60 Stat . 1100 ....................... 192 

October 23. 1962. 76 Stat . 1157 .................... 186 

(43 U.S.C. 772) 

August 22. 1912. 37 Stat . 342 ..................... 114 

Territory of Alaska created 

National Park Service established 

(43 U.S.C. 773) 

Mineral Leasing Law 

Forest Exchange Act 

Taylor Grazing Act 

Small Tract Act 

Organic Act 

Quebec Act ..................................... 9. 10 

769 
Adams. John ..................................... 11. 45 

Alabama ..................... 56. 81. 83. 89. 94. 100. 111 

Alaska ........................................ 140. 173 

Alexander. M . J ........................... .150. 151. 152 

Arizona .................................. .114. 133. 147 

Arkansas .............................. .67. 96. 110. 114 

Armstrong. J . M ............................... .159. 160 

Articles of Confederation ......................... .lo. 15 

Ashley. William .................................... 145 

Atkins. Barton ..................................... 195 

Bache. Professor A . D .......................... .111. 116 

Bagley. Thomas A ................................... 160 

Ballinger. Richard A ...................... .186. 189. 194 

Barber. Levi ......................................... 42 

Barney. Hiram ........................... .145. 153. 157 

Barrett. Theodore H ....................... .144. 148. 151 

Bashford. Levi ................................ .133. 197 

Bates. Charles H .................................... 172 

“Batture Case” New Orleans vs . United States. 35 U.S. 661 ......................... 97 

Bausman,J.B ...................................... 160 

Beale. Edward F .......................... .135. 199. 215 

Beckwith. Warren .................................. 134 

Bell. Peter W ....................................... 139 

Bennet. Elisha S .................................... 152 

Benson. John A ..................................... 157 

Bent. Silas ........................... ..57. 61. 198. 212 

Best. E . F ........................................... 184 

Bell. John ........................................... 94 

Berkeley. John ........................................ 5 

Bever. John ......................................... 37 

Biggs. Zachius ....................................... 37 

Blake. Thomas H ..................... .loo. 101. 103. 194 

Booth. Caleb H ........................... .112. 205. 223 

Boyd. Robert W ........................... .112. 115. 207 

Bradford. Charles A ........................ 103; 111. 211 

Brewster. Orlando H ........................... .157. 207 

Briggs. Isaac ......... 47. 48. 55-58. 65. 81. 196. 207. 211 

Brittain. M . P ....................................... 153 

Brown. Ethan A ............................. .94-97. 194 

Brown. Joseph C ...................... .67. 100. 203. 212 

Brown. P . M ........................................ 153 

Bryon. J . Gilbert ................................... 160 

Buckingham. Ebenezer ....................... .37. 38. 51 

Burchfiel. R . B ...................................... 184 

Burdett. Samuel S ............................. .152. 194 

Burnett. Ward B .......................... .130. 206. 214 

Burns. G.A ......................................... 173 

Burr. David H ............................ .119. 126. 221 

Burr. Frederick H ................................... 119 

Burt. William A .................... .96. 97. 99. 100. 110 

Butler. Nathan ..................................... 136 

Butler. Robert A ........ .76. 82. 88. 89. 94. 100. 110. 201 

Butterfield. Justin ............................ .116. 194 

et al. 20 LD 28 appeal denied 23 LD 430 

Calhoun. John ....................... .118. 119. 206. 214 

California ....................... .114. 117. 132. 136. 144 

Cankin. H . M ....................................... 137 

Carleton. J . D ....................................... 148 

Carolinas ............................................. 5 

Carter. S . J ......................................... 149 

Carter. Thomas H ............................. .172. 194 

Carteret. George ...................................... 5 

Case. Francis M .......................... .130. 200. 221 

Chaney. Richard 0 ............................ .161. 162 

Chapman. D . M ..................................... 145 

Chapman. Leander .................................. 209 

Chapman. William W .......................... .119. 219 

Charles I1 ............................................ 5 

Clair. Arthur St .............................. .28. 29. 30 

Clark. General William .............. ..82. 198. 203. 212 

Clark. John A ...... .lo. 132. 137. 144. 197. 214. 216. 221 

Clark. Joseph ....................................... 137 

Clark. Meriwether L ...................... .116. 203. 212 

Clarke. George Rogers ............................... 10 

Clements. Courtland C .................... .103. 144. 221 

Cleveland. President Grover ................... .170. 172 

Coffee. John ..................... .72. 81. 89. 94. 95. 196 

Coleman. A . L ...................................... 184 

Collins. Richard D . C ........................... .98. 198 

Collins. Stephen C .................................. 152 

Colorado ......................... .94. 118. 130. 132-134 

Compton. Alonzo E .................................. 190 

Connecticut .................... .2. 5. 8. 9. 10. 18. 34. 47 

Connecticut Land Company .......................... 34 

Continental Congress ............................ .lo. 30 

Conway. Frederick R ...................... .110. 203. 212 

Conway. James S ....................... .90. 94. 112. 198 

Conway. Valentine Y ................. .loo. 101. 110. 201 

Cook. John .......................................... 58 

Cooley. George W ............................. .149. 151 

Coon. W . R ......................................... 100 

Cross. Edward ...................... - .......... .96. 198 

Cross. John ........................................ 133 

Cuddy. William ...................... .132. 134. 203. 212 

Curran. P . T .................................. .162. 163 

Currency Depreciation ............................... 10 

Cutler. Benjamin C ............................ .144. 216 

Cutler. Manasseh ............................... .15. 24 

Corporate Colonies .................................... 8 

Cragin vs . Powell. 128 U.S. 691 ...................... 80 

Croswell. Thomas H ................................. 173 

Dancy. Francis L .............................. .130. 201 

Darling. Ehud N .......................... .145. 148. 151 

Davenport. J . H ..................................... 162 

Davidson. Charles E ........................... .189. 195 

Davies. Charles ...................................... 156 

Davis. George ........ 55. 56. 57. 80. 82. 83. 88. 207. 211 

DeFrance. Charles .............................. ..55. 56 

Delahay. Mark W ......................... .134. 206. 214 

Delaware .................................. .5. 8. 10. 18 

Dennett. Fred ............................ .186. 189. 194 

DeWitt. Simon ........... : ; .......................... 34 

Dinsmore. Silas .............................. .14. 81. 82 

Distin. William L .............................. .185. 195 

Donaldson. Thomas ................... .96. 118. 127. 159 

Dickson. H . W ...................................... 148 

Dinsmore. John ................................ ..56. 58 

Dorr. Frank .................................. .134. 151 

770 
Downing. Alexander ........................... .loo. 211 

Dowse. Edward ...................................... 18 

Drummond. Willis ........................ .147-151. 194 

Dubois. Charles L ............................. .153. 190 

Duke of York ......................................... 5 

Dunbar. Joseph ............................ .88. 207. 211 

Dunklin. Daniel ........................... .96. 203. 212 

Dyer. L . M .......................................... 135 

Earl of Clarendon ..................................... 5 

Edmunds. James M ................... .132-137, 139. 194 

Ellicott. Andrew ............................. .18. 47. 56 

Ellis. Albert G ......................... .97. 98. 205. 223 

Emerson. Charles L ....................... .126. 130. 210 

England ............................ .2. 5. 8. 10. 14. 114 

Entails .......................................... .8. 16 

Ewing. Thomas ..................................... 112 

Faison. Edward L ............................. .144. 173 

Ferry. E . P ......................................... 222 

Ferry. T . W ......................................... 146 

Fitz. Gideon .............. .56-58. 76. 89. 90. 94. 95. 211 

Fluker. Calhoun .............................. .171. 208 

Foote. Henry S .......................... .94. 96. 97. 211 

Fort Industry. Treaty of .............................. 49 

Fort Wayne. Treaty of June 7. 1803 .............. .48. 49 

Freeman. James E .................................. 114 

Frierson. L . M ...................................... 144 

Fulton. David .............................. .98. 99. 198 

Fulton. John A ....................................... 72 

Florida ................. 74-76. 82. 89. 103. 111. 114. 119 

Freeman. Thomas .. ..58. 59. 65. 74. 76. 82. 196. 207. 211 

French Tracts ....................................... 59 

Gallatin. Albert ......... .42. 45. 47. 49. 51. 55-58. 61. 81 

Gardner. Charles K ............................ .118. 219 

Garfield. Selucius ............................. .137. 222 

Garretson. John W .................................. 118 

Garside. George W ............................ .171. 172 

Georgia ................................. .5. 8. 9. 18. 72 

Gibson. Lorenzo ............................... .115. 198 

Giddings. Edward ............................. .137. 222 

Gideon. Josiah ................................ .173. 184 

Gillan. James M .................................... 156 

Gist. G.W .......................................... 100 

Glover. Elias ........................................ 56 

Gooding. William ................................... 219 

Gorges. Ferdenando ................................... 2 

Graham. George ........................ ..80-83. 88. 194 

Groff. Lewis A ................................ .172. 194 

Guy. Asa H ......................................... 149 

Hackbush. Henry C . F ..................... .163. 169. 171 

Haigh. Thomas A ................................... 185 

Hall. Richard S ..................................... 154 

Hamilton. Alexander .................. .11. 28. 29. 44. 59 

Hamilton. William S ................................. 88 

Hardin. J . H ........................................ 152 

Haines. Ezekiel S ............. .97-100. 103. 204. 209. 218 

Hardin vs . Jordan. 140 US . 371 ..................... 153 

Hardin vs . Jordan. ............................ .153. 173 

John P . Hoel. 13 LD 511. 588 ..................... 173 

Harris. William ................................. .72. 74 

Harrison. President Benjamin ....................... 172 

Harrison. J . Scott ................................... 190 

Hathaway. R . C ..................................... 150 

Hayden. Ferdinand V ............................... 140 

Hays. John C ............................. .126. 199. 221 

Haywood. Elijah .................. .83. 88-90. 94-96. 103 

Headrights ........................................... 8 

Henry. Anson G ............................... .137. 222 

Henry. Edgar ....................................... 149 

Hermann. Binger ......................... .184. 185. 194 

Hester. Jay P ....................................... 189 

Higbee. Isaac N ..................................... 133 

Hill. George D ............................ .130. 217. 220 

Hillyer. Munson C ............................. .169. 195 

Hitchcock. Phineas W .......................... .140. 214 

Hobson. W . P ........................................ 144 

Holley. Thomas H ................................... 160 

Holmes. Alexander .......................... ..57. 65. 67 

Hoops. Adam ........................................ 18 

Horne. Charles W ................................... 184 

Horne vs . Smith. 159 U.S. 40 ........................ 184 

Horton. A . C . Jr ..................................... 190 

Hough. Benjamin .................................... 65 

Houghton. Douglass ........................... .101. 102 

Howard. Volrey E ........................... .97. 99. 211 

Howe. Henry S ...................................... 173 

Hudson. Henry ....................................... 5 

Hudspeth. John ...................................... 94 

Humphrey. H . L ..................................... 162 

Huntington. Elisha M ...................... .99. 100. 194 

Hutchins. Thomas .................... .15. 18. 19. 24. 34 

Hutchinson. E . C .................................... 148 

Hawes. J.H. .............................. 133-135. 137 

Hendricks. Thomas A ............ .114. 119. 126. 127. 194 

Hutton. Henry ...................................... 127 

Idaho .............................................. 133 

Iddings. C . W ....................................... 130 

Illinois ...... 55, 61, 98. 101. 103. 110. 114. 116. 117. 134 

Illinois Territory ..................................... 59 

Indiana ................. 37. 55. 74. 83. 98. 103. 110. 112 

Indiana Territory .............. .38. 45. 48. 54. 55. 58. 59 

Ingalls. George P .................................... 140 

Ingalls. Wilfred F ................................... 140 

Iowa ............................... 67. 97. 103. 110. 140 

Ives. Butler ........................................ 130 

Ives. William ....................................... 114 

Jackson. Andrew ..................................... 88 

Jackson. George ..................................... 37 

Jackson. John G ..................................... 37 

Jaeckel. Herman .................................... 190 

James. Edwin ...................................... 145 

Jay. John ........................................... 11 

Johnson. Frank M .................... .184. 188. 190. 192 

Johnson,J.P. ....................................... 118 

Johnston. Robert ..................................... 18 

Jefferson. President Thomas ... .11. 14. 15. 45. 47. 61. 172 

771 
Johnston. William . .loo. 102. 103. 110. 139. 204. 209. 218 

Johnston vs Jones. 66 US . 117 ...................... 132 

Jones. George W .................. .98. 110. 112. 205. 223 

Jordan. Conrad ..................................... 153 

Kansas .......................... 117.119. 130. 153. 154 

Kendrich. E . P ....................................... 83 

Kentucky ............................... .2. 9-11. 27-29 

Kidder. Arthur D .............................. .188. 190 

Killam. G . S ........................................ 146 

King. Samuel D ............................... .115. 199 

Kirkpatrick. George D . D ............................ 190 

Koethe. G . C ........................................ 160 

King George I1 ....................................... 5 

Lafayette. General Marquis de ........................ 82 

Lamoreaux. Silas W ........................... .173. 194 

Land Ordinance of 1785 ......................... .11. 45 

Land South of Tennessee .......... .47. 55. 65. 72. 89. 94 

Landers. George .............................. .146. 147 

Landry. Pierre T .............................. .110. 207 

Langham. Elias T ................... .38. 94. 97. 203. 212 

Lawson. Charles M ................................... 76 

Lee. B.F. .......................................... 160 

Lee. Thomas J .................................. .14. 116 

Lewis. Alfred B ..................................... 185 

Lewis. Warner .................. .114. 116. 205. 220. 223 

Lincoln. Abraham ............................. .103. 126 

Lord Baltimore ....................................... 5 

Loughborough. John ................. .117. 126. 127. 212 

Louisiana ......................... ..51. 82. 89. 103. 114 

Louisiana Purchase ....................... .45. 51. 59. 75 

Ludlow. Benjamin A ....................... .99. 100. 211 

Ludlow. Israel ............. .18. 19. 24. 27. 34. 37. 38. 42 

Lund. S.G .......................................... 189 

Lynch. John ........................................ 207 

Lyon. Lucius ......... 83. 90. 100. 110. 111. 204. 209. 218 

Lytle. William .......... .88. 89. 94. 95. 97. 204. 209. 218 

Madison. President James ............................ 59 

Magruder. C . B ..................................... 163 

Maine ......................................... .2. 8. 34 

Major. Daniel G ..................................... 160 

Manners. Charles A ................................. 118 

Mansfield. Jared ....... .47-49. 56. 88. 203. 204. 209. 218 

Mansfield. John ................................. .49. 61 

Marky. F ...................................... 152. 156 

Marsh. Benjamin F .................................. 140 

Marsh. James ................................. .116. 140 

Martin. Absalom ......................... .18. 19. 24. 37 

Martin. E.C. .................................. 148. 169 

Martin. John ........................................ 19 

Martin. Malachi .................................... 201 

Marston. John B .................................... 161 

Maryland .................................. .5. 8. 10. 18 

Mason-Dixon Line .................................... 5 

Mason. John .......................................... 2 

Massachusetts ..................... 2. 5. 8-10. 18. 24. 34 

Massachusetts Bay Company .......................... 2 

Mathews. John .............................. .24. 37. 38 

McChesney. W ...................................... 149 

McCord. M . S ....................................... 153 

McCoy. M . P ........................................ 184 

McCulloh. William J ...................... .126. 130. 207 

McDaniel. G . G ..................................... 189 

McDonald. John ..................................... 88 

McFarland. Noah C ................... .161-163. 169. 194 

McLean. John ............................... 76. 80. 194 

McLaren. Myron .................................... 144 

McRee. William ........ ..80. 82. 88-90. 94. 198. 203. 212 

194. 203. 204. 209. 218 

Melendy. John ...................................... 151 

Meredith. Soloman (Soleman) .................. .140. 213 

Merrill. T . Gal ...................................... 155 

Meyer. Carl ........................................ 148 

Michigan .......... 54. 65. 82. 95. 96. 102. .103. 110. 155 

Michigan Territory ......................... ..54. 83. 95 

Milburn. William ................... .82. 98. 99. 203. 212 

Milbourne. George ............................ .117. 198 

Miller. James S ..................................... 154 

Milton. William H ............................. .184. 201 

Minnesota .................... .67. 95. 103. 116. 126. 127 

Missinger. J ......................................... 65 

Mississippi ...................................... .47. 72 

Missouri .......................... .75. 95. 101. 103. 134 

Mitchell. Charles H ................................. 153 

Mitchell. Senator ................................... 185 

Mitchell vs . Smale. 140 US . 406 .................... 153 

Montana ...................................... .133. 135 

Montomery. Samuel .................................. 18 

Monroe. President ............................... .72. 74 

Moore. Charles C .............................. .191. 194 

Moore. Enoch ........................................ 65 

Moore. J . Milton ............................... .65. 119 

Moore. John ........ .76. 80. 82. 88. 96. 97. 100. 115. 127 

Morrill. Orrin T ............................... .150. 151 

Morris. William ................................. .18. 19 

Morrow. John M ............................... .115. 160 

Morse. Charles E .............................. .111. 151 

Mullet. John ................................... 102. 115 

Mullet. William ...................................... 98 

. Meigs. Josiah ............. .61. 65. 67. 72. 74. 75. 80. 82. 

Nebraska ........................ .117-119. 127. 130. 140 

Nevada ..................... 114. 130. 132-134. 137. 144 

Newcomb. Francis D ................... .99. 101. 102. 207 

New England ........................... .8. 9. 11. 16. 18 

New Hampshire ...................... .2. 5. 8. 18. 19. 99 

New Jersey ................................ 5. 8. 18. 27 

New Mexico .................... .114. 118. 130. 133. 145 

New Orleans vs . United States ....................... 97 

New York ....................... .5. 8-10. 14. 18. 19. 45 

Niles. Gertrude J ................................... 161 

Niles vs . Cedar Point Club. 85 Fed ................... 161 

Noble. Charles ................................ .115. 209 

North Carolina ................................. .5. 8. 9 

North Dakota .................................... 67. 95 

North. John W ................................ .130. 215 

Northwest Ordinance of 1787 ......................... 15 

Northwest Territory .............................. .2. 15 

“Batture Case. .. 35 U.S. 661 

Rep . 45 (175 U.S. 299) 

772 
Ogelthorpe. George .................................... 5 

Ohio ................. .9-15, 28. 29. 31. 37. 45. 48. 49. 90 

Oklahoma ......................... .72. 94. 135. 148. 172 

Oregon ......................... .114. 115. 117. 118. 127 

Orleans Territory .................. 51. 54-56. 58. 59. 82 

Owings. Tomas ...................................... 58 

Parke. Hervey .................................. 94. 103 

Parker. Alexander ................................... 18 

Parsons. Samuel ............................. .15. 18. 24 

Pease. Seth ........................ .34. 57. 58. 207. 211 

Pelham. William ................. .99-112. 118. 198. 216 

Pennsylvania .................. .2. 5. 8-10. 12. 14. 18. 19 

Pierce. John ......................... .133. 137. 200. 221 

Pierce. William H ................................... 140 

Pinchot. Gifford ..................................... 184 

Piper. James H ................................ .110. 111 

Porter. Andrew ................................ .18. 153 

Porter. Orville T .......................... .172. 173. 195 

Powell. John Wesley ................................ 140 

Preston. John B .......................... .114. 115. 219 

Province of Quebec .................................... 9 

Pumpelty. Raphael .................................. 159 

Putnam. Rufus . .18. 24. 34. 37. 38. 42. 186. 194. 204. 218 

Putnam. William Rufus .............................. 37 

Penn. William ........................................ 5 

Raalte. Rev . Van ................................... 146 

Rands. Ernest P ..................................... 190 

Rankin. James E .................................... 162 

Ransom. Leander ................................... 115 

Rector. Henry M .............................. .127. 198 

Rector. Nelson ....................................... 61 

Rector. William ............ .61. 67. 72. 82. 198. 203. 212 

Reed. Silas ......... .99. 100. 110. 144. 145. 203. 212. 224 

Reeves. Rollin J ..................................... 156 

Reilly. G . W ........................................ 100 

Rhode Island ................................ .2. 5. 8. 10 

Rice. Ambrose ...................................... 161 

Richards. William A ...................... .184. 194. 224 

Rittenhouse. David ................................... 18 

Robbins. Nathaniel ................................. 150 

Robbins. Prospect C .................................. 67 

Robbins. Theodore W ................................ 149 

Roosevelt. President Theodore ....................... 172 

Rousseau. J . A ...................................... 100 

Ralston. John ........................................ 94 

Roberts. Charles ..................................... 45 

Safford. Anson P . K ............................ .140. 215 

Sargent. George B ........................ .115. 205. 223 

Sargent. R.H ....................................... 189 

Sargent. Winthrop ........................... .18. 19. 24 

Scott. Charles ...................................... 156 

Seven Ranges .............. .12. 14. 18. 19. 24. 27-30. 36 

Sherman. C . E ....................................... 28 

Sherman. Isaac ...................................... 18 

Sherman. Roger ..................................... 18 

Shields. James ........................... .103. 11 1. 194 

Shoemaker. C . W .................................... 153 

Simpson. James ................................. .18. 19 

Smart. Rose C ....................................... 90 

Smale. Jabez G ..................................... 153 

Smith. Charles A ................................... 184 

Smith. Charles ...................................... 18 

Smith. Charles F., .................................. 153 

Smith. George 0 .............................. .189. 214 

Smith. Robert T ..................................... 184 

Smith. Samuel A .............................. .127. 194 

Smith. William W ............................. .161. 162 

South Dakota .............................. .67. 95. 130 

Spear. M ........................................... 159 

Sparks. William A . J ................. .159. 170. 171. 194 

Spofford. Frank S ................................... 190 

Sproat. Ebenzer .............................. .18. 19. 24 

Spry. William ................................. .190. 194 

Stambaugh. Samuel C ......................... .126. 221 

Stearns. M . L .................................. .145. 201 

Stewart. Jacob H .............................. .160. 210 

Stilson. N.P ........................................ 153 

Stockslager. Strother M ................... .171. 184. 194 

Stone. William M .............................. .173. 194 

Stumm. Jeremiah ................................... 145 

Sullivan. Boetius H ....................... .172. 217. 220 

Surveyor General ............................ .29. 30. 31 

Sutro. Adolph ...................................... 139 

Sweitzer. N . B ...................................... 190 

South Carolina ............................ .8. 9. 10. 130 

Symmes. John Cleves ............. .18. 27. 29. 42. 45. 48 

Taffe. John ......................................... 148 

Talcott. Captain Andrews ........................... 116 

Tallman. Clay ................................ .189. 194 

Tennessee ................................. .9-11. 54. 58 

Tompson. Allen M ................................... 139 

Thompson. David P ................................. 127 

Thomson. John ...................................... 94 

Thorn. William H ................................... 184 

Thornburg. William B ..................... .139. 140. 215 

Tiffin. Edward ................ .45. 67. 75. 80-83. 88. 89. 

194. 203. 204. 209. 218 

Tilton. James ............................ .118. 169. 222 

Treaty. Fort Wayne. June 7. 1803 .................... 48 

Tifson. James ........................................ 61 

Townsend. Thomas A ..................... .133. 205. 223 

Treaty. Greenville ................ .29-31. 34. 37. 38. 170 

Treaty of Fort Industry .......................... .34. 56 

Treaty of Ghent ..................................... 61 

Treaty with England ................................. 10 

Treaty & Purchase From the Indians ................... 9 

Triste. Hore Browse .................... ..89. 90. 95. 207 

Tupper. Benjamin ............................... .18. 24 

Turner. James P ....................... .88. 89. 207. 211 

Tweeddale. William ................................. 169 

Upson. Lauren ............. .133. 135. 137. 197. 199. 215 

Usher. John ...................................... .2. 134 

Utah ................... .98. 126. 130. 132. 136. 144. 173 

Vermont ............................................. 5 

Vincennes Tract .......................... .45. 48. 51. 55 

Vincent. William ................................... 155 

773 
Virginia .......................... .2. 5. 8-11. 13. 18. 28’ 

Wailes. Levin ....................... .76. 80-82. 207. 211 

Walker. John P ................................ 189. 190 

Waller. Harold H ................................... 192 

Wampler. Joseph ............................... ..82. 83 

Warner. Eli S ................................. .173. 210 

Washington ................................... ..83. 114 

Washington. Henry ........................... .116. 117 

Washington. President George ........................ 34 

Wasson. John .................................. 147. 197 

Wayne. General “Mad Anthony” ................. .28. 31 

Weakley. James W ......................... .95. 111. 196 

Western Lands ................................... .9. 14 

Wipple. Levi ......................................... 42 

White. James L ............................... .160. 161 

Whitecomb. James ..................... .97-99. 103. 194 

William. Erastus S ............................ .172. 217 

Williams. Henry T .......................... .95. 99. 207 

Williams. Micajah T .... .89. 90. 94. 95. 103. 204. 209. 218 

Williams. Roger ....................................... 2 

Williams. Samuel ....................... .76. 80. 89. 110 

Williamson. James A ......... .90. 154-157. 159-161. 194 

Williamson. R . M ............................... .95. 211 

Wilson. James ........................ .99. 100. 205. 223 

Wilson. John .................................. .116. 194 

Wilson. Joseph S .................... .127. 130. 132. 135. 

140. 144. 145. 147. 148. 194 

Wiltse. Henry A ...................... .133. 139. 205. 223 

Wisconsin . .2. 90. 95. 97. 98. 100. 102. 110. 127. 139. 163 

Wolcott. Alexander ................................. 152 

Wolcott. Oliver .............................. .34. 37. 42 

Worrall. A .......................................... 103 

Worthington. Thomas ................................ 38 

Wrightman ......................................... 103 

Wyoming ........................................... 133 

Young. Richard M ........................ .111. 112. 194 

Young. William J .................................... 96 

774